JP7185258B2 - game machine - Google Patents

Description

The present invention relates to a game machine such as a pachinko machine.

2. Description of the Related Art Conventionally, there has been known a gaming machine that performs a lottery when a predetermined condition is satisfied and performs variable display of symbols based on the result of the lottery. When the result of the lottery is displayed as a specific display result indicating that the result is a specific result, the game state is controlled to be advantageous to the player.

In this type of gaming machine, any one of a plurality of set values indicating the probability of the player's advantage or disadvantage in the game, such as the probability that the result of the lottery will be a specific result, is set. A gaming machine is known in which the progress of a game is controlled based on set values (see, for example, paragraph [0063] of Patent Document 1). The above set values can be set by an authorized person such as a hall gaming machine manager.

JP 2011-206588 A (see, for example, paragraph [0063])

By the way, in a gaming machine in which the progress of a game is controlled based on a set set value, the set value is an important factor for both the hall and the player because it is related to the payout of balls. However, for example, there is a possibility that an abnormality may occur in the set value due to power failure or the like.

The present invention has been made in view of such points, and an object thereof is to provide a new gaming machine.

The game machine according to the present invention is
a control means (for example, a main control circuit 100) capable of executing control related to the progress of a game based on a set value related to an advantage for a player and having a storage means capable of storing information;
setting operation means (for example, setting key 328) used for operations related to the setting value;
a specific operation means (for example, a backup clear switch 330) used for an operation to erase information stored in the storage means;
power supply means (e.g., power supply circuit 338) capable of supplying power to the control means when powered on;
Effect control means (for example, sub CPU 201) capable of controlling an image displayed in a predetermined effect area;
with
The control means is
When the specific operation means is turned on and the power is turned on while the setting operation means is being turned on, it is possible to control the setting change state in which the setting value can be changed (for example, the processing of step S3024). can be executed), and when the power is turned on while the specific operation means is turned off while the setting operation means is turned on , it is possible to control the setting confirmation state in which the setting value can be confirmed ( For example, a state control means (for example, the main CPU 101) capable of executing the processing of step S3026;
After the setting value is changed in the setting change state, when the setting operation means is turned off, the setting value determination means (for example, step S2480 of a main CPU 101) that executes processing,
When the power supply is stopped and then the power is turned on, the storage area of the storage means is checked, and if the storage area is normal, the initial value is set in the storage area that requires the initial value, and the effect is performed. Send a power failure recovery command to the control means,
When the power supply is stopped and then the power is turned on, the storage area of the storage means is checked, and if the storage area is not normal, the storage area is cleared and an initial value is required. Set an initial value in the storage area, send an initialization command to the effect control means,
When the power supply is stopped and then the power is turned on, if the specific operation means has been operated, clear processing of the storage area of the storage means is executed, and the initial value is stored in the storage area that requires the initial value. and send an initialization command to the effect control means,
The state control means is
When the power supply is stopped in the setting change state, even if the power is turned on without performing the ON operation of the setting operation means and/or the ON operation of the specific operation means, the setting change state is controlled. or the power can be restored in the setting change state when the power supply is stopped (for example, the process of step S24 can be executed when it is determined as NO in step S21),
The production control means is
setting information storage means (for example, work RAM 203) capable of storing setting change information related to the setting change state and setting confirmation information related to the setting confirmation state;
setting change information related to the setting change state and setting confirmation information related to the setting confirmation state can be simultaneously displayed in the rendering area as history information;
The set value determination means is
The power supply is stopped in the setting change state, and the setting operation means is controlled to the setting change state without ON operation, or the power is restored in the setting change state when the power supply is stopped. when the setting operation means is turned ON and then turned OFF, the set value can be fixed to the changed set value;
With respect to a specific display that can be displayed in the setting change state, a display that is at least partially common to the specific display can be displayed even in the game permitted state after the setting change state is terminated, and the display is The display is terminated when a predetermined condition including the case where the performance control means receives a command relating to performance control from the control means is established in the game permitted state .

According to the gaming machine described above , it is possible to provide a new gaming machine.

According to the present invention, it is possible to provide a new gaming machine.

It is an example of a perspective view showing the appearance of the pachinko gaming machine according to the first embodiment. It is an example of the exploded perspective view which shows the external appearance in the pachinko game machine which concerns on 1st Embodiment. It is an example of the figure which shows the operation button group of the pachinko game machine which concerns on 1st Embodiment. It is a perspective view showing the pachinko game machine according to the first embodiment from the back side. It is an example of a front view showing the appearance of a game board unit in the pachinko game machine according to the first embodiment. It is an example showing an external perspective view of a game board unit in the pachinko game machine according to the first embodiment. It is an example which shows the front exploded perspective view which looked at the game board unit in the pachinko game machine which concerns on 1st Embodiment from diagonally upper right. It is an example of the front view which shows the LED unit containing a 1st and 2nd special design display part. It is an example of a block diagram showing a main control circuit. It is a figure which shows an example of the function flow of the pachinko game machine which concerns on 1st Embodiment. It is a figure which shows an example of the hit random number determination table memorize|stored in the main ROM of the main control circuit. It is a figure which shows an example of the design determination table memorize|stored in the main ROM of the main control circuit. It is a figure which shows an example of the jackpot kind determination table memorize|stored in the main ROM of the main control circuit. It is an example of a front view of the game board unit showing a mode in which a game ball flows down the right side area when the blade member of the normal electric accessory is opened. 10 is an example of a front view of a game board unit showing a mode in which a game ball flows down the right side area when the blade member of the normal electric accessory is closed; FIG. It is an example of a front view of the game board unit showing a state in which a game ball flows down the left side area when the blade member of the normal electric accessory is opened. It is an example of the front view of a back unit. It is an example of the back view of a back unit. It is an example of the perspective view which looked at the back unit from the front diagonally upper right. It is an example of the perspective view which looked at the back unit from the back diagonally upper left. It is an example of the exploded perspective view which looked at the back unit from the front diagonally upper right. It is an example of the exploded perspective view which looked at the back unit from the back diagonally upper left. It is an example of the back perspective view which looked at the attacker unit from the diagonal upper right. It is an example of the front view of an attacker unit. It is an example of the side view of an attacker unit. It is an example of the top view of an attacker unit. It is an example of the exploded perspective view which looked at the attacker unit from the front diagonally upper right. It is an example of the front view which shows the base member of an attacker unit. It is an example of the back view which shows the front side board part 520 of an attacker unit. It is an example of front sectional drawing of an attacker unit. It is an example of the exploded cross-sectional perspective view which looked at the attacker unit from the front diagonally upper right. (a) An example of a plan view showing a large winning opening solenoid, (b) an example of a plan view showing a link arm, and (c) an example of a plan view showing a shutter. (a) An example of a plan view showing the attacker unit when the shutter is at the second position, (b) Similarly, an example of a plan view showing the special electric accessory. (a) An example of a plan view showing the attacker unit when the shutter is in the first position, (b) Similarly, an example of a plan view showing the special electric accessory. It is an example of a plan view showing a special electric accessory according to another example. It is an example of the perspective view which looked at the special electric accessory which concerns on another example from the front diagonally upper right. It is an example of the exploded perspective view which looked at the special electric accessory which concerns on another example from the front diagonally upper right. (a) An example of a plan view showing an accommodation portion, (b) an example of a perspective view of the accommodation portion seen from the front and diagonally upper right, and (c) an example of a rear perspective view of the accommodation portion seen from an oblique upper right. (a) An example of a plan view showing the grand prize opening solenoid, (b) An example of a perspective view of the grand prize opening solenoid viewed from the front and diagonally upper right, (c) A rear perspective view of the grand prize opening solenoid viewed diagonally from the upper right It is an example of a figure. (a) An example of a plan view showing a link arm, and (b) an example of a back perspective view showing the link arm as seen obliquely from the upper right. (a) An example of a plan view showing a regulating member, (b) an example of a perspective view of the regulating member as seen obliquely from the upper right, and (c) an example of a rear perspective view of the regulating member as seen from the upper right. It is an example of a front perspective view showing the assembly structure of the special electric accessory in a state where there is no accommodating portion. It is an example of the front perspective view which showed the assembly|attachment structure of a big prize-winning solenoid, a link arm, and a control member. It is an example of the back perspective view which showed the assembly|attachment structure of a big prize-winning solenoid, a link arm, and a control member. (a) An example of a plan view showing an assembly configuration of a special prize opening solenoid, a link arm, and a regulating member, (b) an example of a view in which illustration of the link arm in (a) is omitted. (a) An example of a plan view showing the assembly structure of the big winning opening solenoid, link arm and regulating member in the closed state, (b) An example of a view omitting the illustration of the link arm in (a). (a) An example of a plan view showing the assembly configuration of the large winning opening solenoid, the link arm, and the regulating member when the driving force transmission portion of the large winning opening solenoid starts to move from the state shown in FIG. 46, (b) It is an example of the figure which abbreviate|omitted illustration of the link arm of (a). (a) An example of a plan view showing the assembly configuration of the large winning opening solenoid, the link arm and the regulating member when the driving force transmission portion of the large winning opening solenoid continues to move from the state illustrated in FIG. 47, (b) It is an example of the figure which abbreviate|omitted illustration of the link arm of (a). (a) An example of a plan view showing the assembly configuration of the large winning opening solenoid, the link arm, and the restricting member when the driving force transmission portion of the large winning opening solenoid 6004 continues to move from the state shown in FIG. 48, (b) ) It is an example of the figure which abbreviate|omitted illustration of the link arm of (a). (a) An example of a schematic plan view showing a locked state by a regulating member. (b) An example of a schematic plan view showing a state in which the locking state is released by the regulating member. It is an example of the exploded perspective view which looked at the normal electric accessories unit from the front diagonally upper right. It is an example of the exploded perspective view which looked at the normal electric accessories unit from the back diagonally upper left. It is an example of a diagram showing a normal electric accessory, a second starter switch, and a housing member. It is an example of a rear view of a normal electric accessory. It is an example of the back view which looked at the normal electric accessories from the upper right diagonally. A mode of the ordinary electric accessory when the blade members are in the closed state (illustrated by a dashed line), and a mode of the ordinary electric accessory when the blade members are in a state of transition from the closed state to the open state (solid line) ) is an example of a rear view showing the . A rear view showing a state of the normal electric accessory when the blade member is in a transition state (indicated by a dashed line) and a state of the normal electric accessory when the blade member is in an open state (indicated by a solid line). is an example. FIG. 4 is a rear view of the blade member and the power transmission mechanism for explaining the function of the flange connecting member, (A) a diagram for explaining that the blade member is prevented from being opened, (B) the blade member being opened. is allowed. It is an example of a front view of the upper front accessory in a normal mode (a mode when it is at the origin position). It is an example of the back view of the upper front accessory in the normal mode. It is an example of the exploded perspective view which looked at the upper front accessory from the front diagonally upper right. It is an example of the exploded perspective view which looked at the upper front accessory from the back diagonally upper left. It is an example of a front view of the upper front accessory at the origin position. It is an example of a front view of the upper front accessory in which the movable decoration is moving downward. FIG. 11 is an example of a front view of the upper front accessory when the movable decoration moves downward to the operation limit position. It is an example of a front view of the upper back accessory in a normal mode (a mode when it is at the origin position). It is an example of the back view of the upper back character in the normal mode. It is an example of the perspective view which looked at the upper back side accessory from the front diagonally upper right. It is an example of the exploded perspective view which looked at the upper back side accessory from the front diagonally upper right. It is an example of the exploded perspective view which looked at the upper back side accessory from the back diagonally upper left. (A) An example of a cross-sectional view taken along the line AA shown in FIG. 67, and (B) an example of an enlarged view of the X portion shown in (A). (A) An example of a cross-sectional view along line BB shown in FIG. 67, and (B) an example of an enlarged view of the Y portion shown in (A). Fig. 10 is a diagram showing an example of the upper back accessory 1100 before the start of operation, that is, in a normal mode (mode at the origin position), where (A) is a front view and (B) is a back view. After the upper back accessory starts to operate, it is a diagram showing an example of the state before the upper left arm and the upper right arm of the pantograph mechanism reach the limit position, (A) is a front view, (B) is a It is a rear view. It is a figure which shows an example of a mode when the upper left arm of a pantograph mechanism and the upper right arm reach a limit position, (A) is a front view, (B) is a rear view. After the upper left arm and upper right arm of the pantograph mechanism operate to the operation limit position, the left motor and the right motor rotate further, and the movable ornament moves downward on the paper surface by the left transmission arm and the right transmission arm ( (A) is a front view, and (B) is a rear view. FIG. 10A is a front view, and FIG. 1B is a rear view showing an example of a mode in which the covering decoration has moved to the operating limit with respect to the movable decoration. FIG. 10 is an example of a front view of the lower accessory in a normal mode (a mode when it is at the origin position). It is an example of a rear view of a lower accessory in a normal mode. It is an example of the perspective view which looked at the lower part accessory from the front diagonally upper right. It is an example of the back perspective view which looked at the lower accessory from diagonally upper left. It is an example of the exploded perspective view which looked at the lower accessory from the diagonally right upper front. It is an example of the exploded perspective view which looked at the lower accessory from the back diagonally upper left. It is a figure which shows an example of the lower accessory in the aspect when it exists in an origin position, (A) is a front view, (B) is a rear view. , and (B) are views showing an example of the lower accessory when operated to an intermediate position, where (A) is a front view and (B) is a rear view. FIG. 10 is a diagram showing an example of the lower accessory in the case of operating to the operation limit, where (A) is a front view and (B) is a rear view. It is an example of the front view of the upper corner accessory. It is an example of the rear view of the upper corner accessory. It is an example of the exploded perspective view which looked at the upper corner accessory from the front diagonally upper right. It is an example of the exploded perspective view which looked at the upper corner accessory from the back diagonally upper left. There is an example of a back view showing when the first movable body and the second movable body are at the origin positions. FIG. 10 is an example of a rear view showing when the first movable body and the second movable body start to operate from the origin position; FIG. 93 is an example of a rear view showing when the first movable body and the second movable body are further operated from the position shown in FIG. 92; It is an example of the back view which shows when a 1st movable body and a 2nd movable body act|operate to the operation|movement limit position. It is an example of the front view of a lower corner accessory. It is an example of the rear view of the lower corner accessory. It is an example of the exploded perspective view which looked at the lower corner accessory from the front diagonally upper right. It is an example of the exploded perspective view which looked at the lower corner accessory from the back diagonally upper left. It is an example of the back view which shows when the 3rd movable body and the 4th movable body exist in an origin position. It is an example of the back view which shows when the 3rd movable body and the 4th movable body start the operation|movement from an origin position. It is an example of the back view which shows when the 3rd movable body and the 4th movable body act|operate to the operation|movement limit position. FIG. 10 is an example of a front view of the back unit 176 showing a mode when all of the first movable body, second movable body, third movable body, and fourth movable body are operated to their operation limit positions; FIG. 10 is an example of a front view of the back unit showing a state in which the first movable body and the second movable body operate to their operation limit positions, and the third movable body and the fourth movable body stand by at the origin position; FIG. 10 is an example of a front view of the back unit showing a state in which the third movable body and the fourth movable body operate to their operation limit positions, and the first movable body and the second movable body stand by at the origin position; It is an example of a front view of a side role item in a normal mode. It is an example of a back view of a side character in a normal mode. It is an example of the front view of the exploded perspective view which looked at the side accessory from the front diagonally upper right. It is an example of the exploded perspective view which looked at the side accessory from the back diagonally upper left. FIG. 10 is an example of a front view of the side accessory in which the movable decorative body is moving toward the front of the display area of the liquid crystal display device. It is an example of a back view of the side accessory in which the movable decoration is moving toward the front of the display area of the liquid crystal display device. FIG. 10 is an example of a front view of the side accessory when the movable decorative body has advanced farthest toward the front of the display area of the liquid crystal display device. It is an example of a back view of the side accessory when the movable decorative body has advanced farthest toward the front of the display area of the liquid crystal display device. FIG. 10 is an example of a back view of the side accessory when the motor for the side accessory is rotated in the same direction from the state in which the movable decorative body has advanced farthest toward the front of the display area of the liquid crystal display device. It is an example of the exploded perspective view which looked at the second middle panel from the front diagonally upper right. It is an example of the exploded perspective view which looked at the second middle panel from the back diagonally upper left. (A) An example of a front view of a second middle panel, (B) an example of a sectional view taken along line CC shown in (A). 6 is an example of a flowchart showing power-on processing by a main CPU; 7 is an example of a flowchart showing system timer interrupt processing by a main CPU; 6 is an example of a flowchart showing switch input detection processing by a main CPU; It is an example of the flowchart which shows the start opening winning detection processing by main CPU. It is an example of a flowchart showing a variation pattern determination process by the main CPU. It is an example of the flowchart which shows the main control main process by main CPU. It is an example of a flow chart showing a special symbol control process by the main CPU. It is an example of a flow chart showing a special symbol storage check process by the main CPU. It is an example of a flow chart showing a special symbol display time management process by the main CPU. It is an example of the flowchart which shows the number-of-time reduction subtraction process by main CPU. It is an example of the flowchart which shows the jackpot end interval processing by main CPU. It is an example of a flowchart showing a variation pattern table setting process by the main CPU. It is an example of a flow chart showing normal symbol control processing by the main CPU. It is an example of the flowchart which shows the main process by sub CPU. It is an example of a flowchart showing command analysis processing by a sub CPU. It is an example of a flowchart showing command transmission processing by a sub CPU. It is an example of the flowchart which shows the message setting process by sub CPU. FIG. 10 is an example of a flowchart showing direct table registration processing by a sub CPU; FIG. It is an example of a flowchart showing message transmission processing by a sub CPU. It is a block diagram which shows an example of the state transition of several game state stages. It is a figure which shows an example of the battle production|presentation displayed on a liquid crystal display device in the secrecy A stage. It is an example of a flowchart showing an example of scenario presetting processing by a sub CPU. FIG. 10 is a diagram showing an example of the correspondence relationship between battle attributes and production maps; It is a figure which shows an example of the production|presentation map used for scenario lottery. It is an example showing, together with the time sequence, provisional change settings for each of the first to fourth holds. It is an example of the flowchart which shows the production|presentation determination process (secret A stage) repeatedly performed for every predetermined time as a subroutine of production|presentation mode determination process. It is an example of a fluctuation pattern table. FIG. 143 is an example of a flowchart showing effect determination processing (secret A stage) continued from FIG. 142 ; FIG. 10 is a diagram showing an example of starting memories held in first to fourth reserves; FIG. 10 is a diagram showing an example of starting memories held in first to fourth reserves; FIG. 145 is an example of a flow chart showing effect determination processing (secret A stage) continuing from FIG. 144 ; FIG. It is a figure which shows an example of the aspect which blocks three provisional fluctuations. FIG. 148 is an example of a flowchart showing effect determination processing (secret A stage) continued from FIG. 147. FIG. This is an example of a temporary change sequence in a state where the first to third reservations are subject to the scenario lottery. This is an example of a temporary change sequence in a state where the first to fourth reservations are subject to the scenario lottery. FIG. 10 is an example of a flow chart showing a modified example when it is determined in step S326 that there is a scenario effect being executed; FIG. It is an example of a flow chart showing a look-ahead effect selection process (high probability stage). It is a figure which shows an example of the pattern at the time of determining the area which performs look-ahead production. It is a figure which shows an example which selects the detail of the prefetch effect|presentation. It is a diagram showing an example when the details of the look-ahead effect is a countdown effect. It is an example of a flowchart showing a background change control process. It is an example of the flowchart which shows a background change continuous frequency|count determination process. FIG. 10 is an example of a table relating to background change control and background change scenarios; FIG. FIG. 7 is a diagram showing a specific example for explaining the flow of background change control processing according to the embodiment; It is an example of a flowchart showing a change scenario determination process It is an example of the flowchart which shows chance up control processing. It is an example of the flowchart which shows a pending|holding change determination process. 6 is an example of a sequence chart showing lighting control of a character lamp; It is an example of a flow chart showing a control process of a character lamp effect. It is an example of the flowchart which shows control of full screen production|presentation. It is an example of a screen diagram showing a screen display. It is a figure which shows an example of the table which shows the probability of a big hit of the pachinko game machine which concerns on 2nd Embodiment. In the pachinko gaming machine according to the second embodiment, it is a diagram showing an example of the selection rate of the main symbol when the result of the jackpot determination of the special symbol is a big hit. In the pachinko gaming machine according to the second embodiment, it is a diagram showing an example of a special symbol variation time determination table stored in the main ROM. In the pachinko gaming machine according to the second embodiment, it is a diagram showing an example of a decorative symbol determination table stored in the program ROM of the sub-control circuit. In the pachinko gaming machine according to the second embodiment, it is a diagram showing another example of the special symbol variation time determination table stored in the main ROM. In the pachinko gaming machine according to the second embodiment, it is a diagram showing a first modification of the selection rate of the main symbol when the result of the jackpot determination of the special symbol is a big hit. In the pachinko gaming machine according to the second embodiment, it is a diagram showing a second modification of the selection rate of the main symbol when the result of the jackpot determination of the special symbol is a big hit. In the pachinko game machine according to the second embodiment, this is a modified example of the decorative symbol determination table stored in the program ROM of the sub-control circuit. In the pachinko gaming machine according to the second embodiment, it is a flowchart showing an example of power-on processing by the main CPU. In the pachinko gaming machine according to the second embodiment, it is a flowchart showing an example of power-on processing. In the pachinko gaming machine according to the second embodiment, it is a flowchart showing an example of a game permission process. 8 is (a) a flowchart showing an example of setting processing, and (b) a flowchart showing another example of setting processing in a pachinko gaming machine according to a second embodiment. In the pachinko gaming machine according to the second embodiment, it is a flow chart showing an example of setting change processing. In the pachinko gaming machine according to the second embodiment, it is a flowchart showing an example of backup clear processing. In the pachinko gaming machine according to the second embodiment, it is a flow chart showing an example of setting confirmation processing. In the pachinko gaming machine according to the second embodiment, it is a flowchart showing an example of game return processing. In the pachinko gaming machine according to the second embodiment, it is a flow chart showing an example of abnormal processing. In the pachinko gaming machine according to the second embodiment, it is a flowchart showing an example of processing when power failure occurs. In the pachinko gaming machine according to the second embodiment, it is a flowchart showing an example of system timer interrupt processing by the main CPU. In the pachinko gaming machine according to the second embodiment, it is a flowchart showing an example of switch input detection processing by the main CPU. In the pachinko gaming machine according to the second embodiment, it is a flow chart showing an example of the start opening winning detection processing by the main CPU. In the pachinko gaming machine according to the second embodiment, it is a flowchart showing an example of setting check processing by the main CPU101. In the pachinko gaming machine according to the second embodiment, it is a flowchart showing an example of main control main processing by the main CPU. In the pachinko gaming machine according to the second embodiment, it is a flowchart showing an example of special symbol control processing by the main CPU. In the pachinko gaming machine according to the second embodiment, it is a flowchart showing an example of special symbol memory check processing by the main CPU. In the pachinko gaming machine according to the second embodiment, it is a flowchart showing an example of special symbol display time management processing by the main CPU. In the pachinko gaming machine according to the second embodiment, it is a flow chart showing an example of time reduction number subtraction processing by the main CPU. In the pachinko gaming machine according to the second embodiment, it is a flowchart showing an example of a jackpot end interval process by the main CPU. In the pachinko gaming machine according to the second embodiment, it is a flowchart showing an example of a variation pattern table setting process by the main CPU. In the pachinko gaming machine according to the second embodiment, it is a flowchart showing an example of normal symbol control processing by the main CPU. In the pachinko gaming machine according to the second embodiment, it is a flowchart showing an example of the main processing by the sub CPU. In the pachinko gaming machine according to the second embodiment, it is a flowchart showing an example of command analysis processing by the sub CPU. In the pachinko gaming machine according to the second embodiment, it is a flowchart showing an example of command transmission processing by the sub CPU. In the pachinko gaming machine according to the second embodiment, it is a flowchart showing an example of message setting processing by the sub CPU. 10 is a flowchart showing an example of direct table registration processing by a sub CPU in the pachinko gaming machine according to the second embodiment. In the pachinko gaming machine according to the second embodiment, it is a flowchart showing an example of message transmission processing by the sub CPU. In the pachinko gaming machine according to the second embodiment, it is a table showing an example of the selection rate of the number of limiters in the pachinko gaming machine of expansion example 1 for each set value. In the pachinko gaming machine according to the second embodiment, in the pachinko gaming machine of the expansion example 4, it is a diagram showing an example of a mode in which a game ball passes through the right gate of continuous operation of the role product. In the pachinko gaming machine according to the second embodiment, in the pachinko gaming machine of the expansion example 4, it is a diagram showing an example of a mode in which a game ball passes through the accessory continuous operation left gate. 10 is a flowchart showing an example of a hole menu task executed by a sub CPU in the pachinko gaming machine according to the second embodiment; In the pachinko gaming machine according to the second embodiment, it is a diagram showing an example when the hole menu screen is displayed in the display area of the liquid crystal display device. In the pachinko gaming machine according to the second embodiment, it is an example of the hole menu screen displayed in the display area of the liquid crystal display device when the hole menu display process is executed. In the pachinko gaming machine according to the second embodiment, it is an example of the hole menu screen displayed in the display area of the liquid crystal display device when the hole menu display process is executed. In the pachinko gaming machine according to the second embodiment, when the hole menu re-display process is executed, it is a diagram showing an example of the hole menu screen displayed in the display area of the liquid crystal display device. In the pachinko gaming machine according to the second embodiment, it is an example of a screen in which the contents of an error are displayed in the display area of the liquid crystal display device, and (a) a screen showing that backup clear processing without setting change processing has been executed. , (b) a screen showing that a startup abnormal winning error has occurred and that backup clear processing without setting change processing has been executed; (c) a screen showing that backup clear processing without setting change processing has been executed; This is the screen after the elapse of the notification period indicating that the backup clear process has been executed in a state where both the start-up abnormal winning error has occurred. In the pachinko gaming machine according to the second embodiment, it is another example of the hole menu task executed by the sub CPU 201, and is a flowchart when the sub CPU 201 executes setting determination processing for determining whether the setting value information is appropriate. . In the pachinko gaming machine according to the second embodiment, it is a flowchart showing an example of hole menu processing executed by the sub CPU. In the pachinko gaming machine according to the second embodiment, it is an example of an error information history screen displayed in the display area of the liquid crystal display device. In the pachinko gaming machine according to the second embodiment, it is a flowchart showing an example of setting change / confirmation history processing executed by the sub CPU. FIG. 59 is an example of setting change/confirmation history processing executed by the sub CPU in the pachinko gaming machine according to the second embodiment, and is a flowchart continued from FIG. 59 . In the pachinko gaming machine according to the second embodiment, it is a diagram showing an example of an initial screen of a setting change/confirmation history screen displayed in the display area of the liquid crystal display device. In the pachinko gaming machine according to the second embodiment, it is a diagram showing an example when "Page" is selected on the setting change/confirmation history screen. In the pachinko gaming machine according to the second embodiment, in the setting change/confirmation history screen, it is a diagram showing an example of a page update screen that allows page updating. In the pachinko gaming machine according to the second embodiment, it is a diagram showing an example when "clear" is selected on the setting change/confirmation history screen. In the pachinko gaming machine according to the second embodiment, in the setting change/confirmation history screen, it is a diagram showing an example of a data clear screen in which each history data is cleared. In the pachinko gaming machine according to the second embodiment, it is another example of the setting change/confirmation history screen displayed in the display area of the liquid crystal display device, and is a diagram showing an example of the initial screen. In the pachinko gaming machine according to the second embodiment, another example of the setting change/confirmation history screen displayed in the display area of the liquid crystal display device, showing an example when "setting display" is selected. be. Fig. 12 shows another example of the setting change/confirmation history screen displayed in the display area of the liquid crystal display device in the pachinko gaming machine according to the second embodiment, showing an example when setting values are newly added and displayed. It is a diagram. In the pachinko gaming machine according to the second embodiment, it is another example of the setting change/confirmation history screen displayed in the display area of the liquid crystal display device, and is a diagram showing an example when "Page" is selected. . In the pachinko gaming machine according to the second embodiment, another example of the setting change/confirmation history screen displayed in the display area of the liquid crystal display device, showing an example of the page update screen on which the page can be updated. is. In the pachinko gaming machine according to the second embodiment, the operation procedure until the setting change/confirmation history screen, which allows confirmation of setting values, is displayed on the hall menu screen displayed in the display area of the liquid crystal display device. It is a flow diagram showing an example. In the pachinko gaming machine according to the second embodiment, it is a flow chart showing an example of maintenance processing executed by the sub CPU. FIG. 10 is a diagram showing an example when the maintenance screen is displayed in the display area of the liquid crystal display device; In the pachinko gaming machine according to the second embodiment, it is an example of a maintenance screen displayed in the display area of the liquid crystal display device. In the pachinko gaming machine according to the second embodiment, it is a diagram showing an example when a guide initial image is displayed in the display area of the liquid crystal display device. In the pachinko gaming machine according to the second embodiment, it is a diagram showing an example when a Unimemo initial image is displayed in the display area of the liquid crystal display device. In the pachinko gaming machine according to the second embodiment, it is a diagram showing an example when a password request screen is displayed in the display area of the liquid crystal display device. In the pachinko gaming machine according to the second embodiment, it is a flow chart showing a first modification of the setting change/confirmation history process executed by the sub CPU. FIG. 11 is a flowchart showing an example of authentication processing in modification 1 of the setting change/confirmation history processing executed by the sub CPU; FIG. In the pachinko gaming machine according to the second embodiment, in the modification 1 of the setting change/confirmation history process executed by the sub CPU, when the setting change/confirmation history process is executed, the password request screen is displayed on the liquid crystal display device. It is a figure which shows the example displayed on a display area. In the pachinko gaming machine according to the second embodiment, this is an example of a password request screen displayed in the display area of the liquid crystal display device in modification 1 of the setting change/confirmation history process executed by the sub CPU. In the pachinko gaming machine according to the second embodiment, the screen displayed in the display area of the liquid crystal display device when the entered password is inappropriate in the modification 1 of the setting change/confirmation history process executed by the sub CPU. It is a figure which shows the example of. In the pachinko gaming machine according to the second embodiment, confirming the setting values on the hall menu screen displayed in the display area of the liquid crystal display device 16 in the modification 1 of the setting change/confirmation history process executed by the sub CPU. is a flow chart showing an example of an operation procedure until a setting change/confirmation history screen is displayed. In the pachinko gaming machine according to the second embodiment, in modification 2 of the setting change/confirmation history process executed by the sub CPU, it is a diagram showing a configuration example of a volume switch that generates a volume password applied to the authentication process. . In the pachinko gaming machine according to the second embodiment, it is a flow chart showing an example of authentication processing in modification 2 of the setting change/confirmation history processing executed by the sub CPU. In the pachinko gaming machine according to the second embodiment, in the modification 2 of the setting change/confirmation history process executed by the sub CPU, when the setting change/confirmation history process is executed, the password request screen is displayed on the liquid crystal display device. It is a figure which shows the example displayed on a display area. In the pachinko gaming machine according to the second embodiment, this is an example of a volume password request display screen displayed in the display area of the liquid crystal display device in modification 2 of the setting change/confirmation history process executed by the sub CPU. In the pachinko gaming machine according to the second embodiment, in the modification 2 of the setting change/confirmation history process executed by the sub CPU, it is a flow diagram showing an example of the setting value confirmation procedure of the setting change/confirmation history information. In the pachinko gaming machine according to the second embodiment, it is a diagram showing a configuration example of a gaming system according to a modification 3 of the setting change/confirmation history process executed by the sub CPU. In the pachinko gaming machine according to the second embodiment, it is a flowchart showing an example of setting change / confirmation history processing in the pachinko gaming machine constituting the gaming system according to the modification 3 In the pachinko gaming machine according to the second embodiment, it is a flowchart showing an example of setting change/confirmation history processing in the mobile wireless communication terminal and the server device of the gaming system according to the modified example 3. In the pachinko gaming machine according to the second embodiment, it is a diagram showing an example of a setting change/confirmation history screen including a two-dimensional code in the pachinko gaming machine of the gaming system according to the modified example 3. In the pachinko gaming machine according to the second embodiment, it is a flow diagram showing an example of the setting value confirmation procedure of the setting change/confirmation history information in the gaming system according to the modified example 3. In the pachinko gaming machine according to the second embodiment, it is a diagram showing an example of a two-dimensional code display screen in the portable wireless communication terminal of the gaming system according to the modified example 3. FIG. In the pachinko gaming machine according to the second embodiment, it is a diagram showing an example of a password input screen in the mobile wireless communication terminal of the gaming system according to the modified example 3. FIG. In the pachinko gaming machine according to the second embodiment, it is a diagram showing an example of a setting change/confirmation history screen in the mobile wireless communication terminal of the gaming system according to the modified example 3. FIG. FIG. 10 is an example of a front view showing the appearance of a game board unit in the first example of the pachinko gaming machine according to the third embodiment. In the first example of the pachinko game machine according to the third embodiment, it is an example of a hit random number determination table stored in the main ROM of the main control circuit. In the first example of the pachinko game machine according to the third embodiment, it is an example of the symbol determination table (first start opening, second start opening) stored in the main ROM of the main control circuit. It is an example of a jackpot type determination table stored in the main ROM of the main control circuit in the first example of the pachinko game machine according to the third embodiment. In the first example of the pachinko gaming machine according to the third embodiment, it is a table stored in the main ROM and is an example of a special symbol variation time determination table for low start. In the first example of the pachinko gaming machine according to the third embodiment, it is a table stored in the main ROM and is an example of a special symbol variation time determination table for high start. In the first example of the pachinko gaming machine according to the third embodiment, it is an example of a flow chart showing a small hit winning performance process executed by the sub CPU. FIG. 10 is an example of a flowchart of index effect processing executed by a sub CPU 201 in the first example of the pachinko gaming machine according to the third embodiment; FIG. FIG. 11 is an example showing a flowchart of forced standby suppression effect processing executed by a sub CPU in the first example of the pachinko gaming machine according to the third embodiment; FIG. 11 is another example of a flow chart of the effect processing at the time of winning a small hit executed by the sub CPU in the first example of the pachinko gaming machine according to the third embodiment. FIG. 11 is an example showing a flowchart of a premium effect control process executed by a sub CPU in the first example of the pachinko gaming machine according to the third embodiment; FIG. In the first example of the pachinko gaming machine according to the third embodiment, it is a table stored in the main ROM and is an example of a special symbol variation time determination table for high start. In the first example of the pachinko game machine according to the third embodiment, the control by the main CPU 101 and the production by the sub CPU 201 in the "high-probability short-time gaming state", "high-probability non-short-time gaming state" or "low-probability short-time gaming state" A time chart showing the relationship with control, (a) when the result of the second special lottery is derived in the order of "losing" → "minor win" → "big win" in a conventional pachinko game machine. An example (b) is an example when the result of the second special lottery is derived in the order of "loss"→"minor win"→"big win" in the pachinko gaming machine of the first embodiment. In the second example of the pachinko game machine according to the third embodiment, the symbol determination table (first start opening, second start opening) stored in the main ROM of the main control circuit, It is an example of a table referred to in "state" and "low-probability short-time gaming state". FIG. 11 is an example of a front view showing the appearance of a game board unit in the third example of the pachinko gaming machine according to the third embodiment. In the third example of the pachinko gaming machine according to the third embodiment, the fluctuation time determination table executed by the main CPU, triggered by the transition from the "high-accuracy short-time gaming state" to the "high-accuracy non-short-time gaming state" 4 is a flowchart showing setting processing; FIG. 11 is an example of a front view showing the appearance of a game board unit in the fourth example of the pachinko gaming machine according to the third embodiment. In the fourth example of the pachinko gaming machine according to the third embodiment, it is an example of a flowchart showing a variable time determination table setting process executed by the main CPU 101 upon completion of the small winning game state. In the modified example of the fourth example of the pachinko gaming machine according to the third embodiment, it is a table stored in the main ROM, showing a special symbol variation time determination table for medium start. FIG. 20 is a flow chart showing a variation time determination table setting process executed by the main CPU in the modification of the fourth example of the pachinko gaming machine according to the third embodiment; FIG. FIG. 20 is an example of a front view showing the appearance of a game board unit in the fifth example of the pachinko gaming machine according to the third embodiment. In the sixth example of the pachinko game machine according to the third embodiment, it is an example of a front view showing the appearance of the game board unit. In the sixth example of the pachinko gaming machine according to the third embodiment, it is a table stored in the main ROM, showing another example of a special symbol fluctuation time determination table for high start. In the sixth example of the pachinko gaming machine according to the third embodiment, it is a diagram showing another example of the special symbol fluctuation time determination table for low start. It is a table stored in the main ROM in the sixth example of the pachinko gaming machine according to the third embodiment, and is an example of a special symbol variation time determination table for high start. In the sixth example of the pachinko gaming machine according to the third embodiment, the variation time is executed by the main CPU when the variation pattern (long variation G) of the first special symbol is determined to have an extremely long variation time. 9 is a flowchart showing decision table setting processing; FIG. 12 is an example of a front view showing the appearance of a game board unit in the seventh example of the pachinko gaming machine according to the third embodiment. FIG. 20 is an example of a front view showing the appearance of a game board unit in the eighth embodiment of the pachinko gaming machine according to the third embodiment and a modification of the eighth embodiment. FIG. 20 is an example of a front view showing the appearance of a game board unit in a modification of the modification of the eighth embodiment of the pachinko gaming machine according to the third embodiment. FIG. 10 is an example of a front view showing the appearance of a game board unit in the first example of the pachinko gaming machine according to the fourth embodiment. In the second example of the pachinko game machine according to the fourth embodiment, it is an example of a front view showing the appearance of the game board unit. In the third example of the pachinko game machine according to the fourth embodiment, it is an example of a front view showing the appearance of the game board unit. In the fourth example of the pachinko game machine according to the fourth embodiment, it is an example of a front view showing the appearance of the game board unit. In the fourth example of the pachinko game machine according to the fourth embodiment, it is an example of the symbol determination table (first start opening, second start opening) stored in the main ROM of the main control circuit. It is an example of a jackpot type determination table stored in the main ROM of the main control circuit in the fourth example of the pachinko gaming machine according to the fourth embodiment.

[1. Pachinko machine according to the first embodiment]
[Configuration of game machine]
First, the appearance of the pachinko game machine 1 will be described with reference to FIGS. 1 to 8. FIG. FIG. 1 is an example of a perspective view showing the appearance of a pachinko game machine according to one embodiment of the present invention. FIG. 2 is an example of an exploded perspective view showing the appearance of a pachinko game machine according to one embodiment of the present invention. FIG. 3 is a diagram schematically showing an example of an operation button group. FIG. 4 is an example of a perspective view showing the pachinko gaming machine according to one embodiment of the present invention from the rear side. FIG. 5 is an example of a front view showing the appearance of the game board unit in the pachinko game machine according to one embodiment of the present invention. FIG. 6 is an example showing an external perspective view of a game board unit in a pachinko game machine according to one embodiment of the present invention. FIG. 7 is an example showing an exploded perspective view of a game board unit in a pachinko game machine according to one embodiment of the present invention, viewed obliquely from the front right upper side. FIG. 8 is an example of a front view showing an LED unit including first and second special symbol display portions. Also, the directions shown in the drawings are the directions when viewed from the front. Therefore, for example, "left" is written in the right direction of the drawing because the drawing is a rear view, so "right" on the drawing becomes "left" when viewed from the front. Similarly, even when "right" is written in the left direction in the drawing, "left" in the drawing becomes "right" in a front view for the same reason.

It should be noted that, in the following description, unless otherwise specified, when the pachinko gaming machine 1 is viewed from the player, the front side is defined as the front side, and the back side is defined as the rear side. Also, when the pachinko game machine 1 is viewed from the player, the left-hand side is defined as the left side, and the right-hand side is defined as the right side, thereby defining the left-right direction. Furthermore, the front side is the side that can be visually recognized when viewed from the player side, and the back side is the side that can be visually recognized when viewed from the opposite side of the player.

As shown in FIGS. 1, 2 and 4 to 7, the pachinko game machine 1 includes a wooden frame 11, a base door 12, a glass door 13, a plate unit 14, a launching device 15, a liquid crystal display device 16, and a game board unit. 17, a dispensing unit 18, and a substrate unit 19.

The wooden frame 11 is a substantially rectangular frame when viewed from the front. The wooden frame 11 is provided with an opening 21 penetrating in the front-rear direction. A base door 12 is fitted into the opening 21 of the wooden frame 11 . The base door 12 supports various members. Specifically, the base door 12 supports the dispensing unit 18 and the board unit 19 on the back side, and the glass door 13, the plate unit 14, the launching device 15, the liquid crystal display device 16 and the game board unit 17 on the front side. support.

The glass door 13 is pivotally attached to the base door 12 so as to be openable and closable. The glass door 13 is provided with an opening 22 and an operation button group 66 . A transparent protective glass 23 is provided in the opening 22 of the glass door 13 . The protective glass 23 is arranged to face a game board unit 17 (to be described later) in the front-rear direction when the glass door 13 is closed with respect to the base door 12 . A speaker 24 and an LED 25 are arranged above the glass door 13 . The speaker 24 performs, for example, voice notification, presentation, error notification, and the like. The LED 25 is, for example, a light-emitting means for effecting a notification with light, effecting, etc., and is not limited to an LED, and may be a lamp, for example, as long as the light-emitting effect can be executed.

As shown in FIG. 3 , the operation button group 66 has a main button 662 and a select button 664 . The select button 664 has an upper select button 664a, a lower select button 664b, a left select button 664c and a right select button 664d. Hereinafter, when the select button 664 is referred to, it means a generic term for the up, down, left, and right select buttons 664a to 664d.

The pachinko gaming machine 1 of this embodiment can be operated using at least one or both of the main button 662 and the select button 664 on a guide menu screen, a hall menu screen, etc., which will be described later. The position where the operation button group 66 is provided is not limited to the glass door 13, and may be provided on the tray unit 14, for example, on the upper tray 26 or the like.

The plate unit 14 is a unit body in which the upper plate 26 and the lower plate 27 are integrated. The tray unit 14 is arranged in the lower front portion of the base door 12 and below the glass door 13 .

The upper tray 26 stores game balls, and the game balls stored in the upper tray 26 are shot from the shooting device 15 toward the game area 20 described later. The upper plate 26 is provided with a payout port 61 and a performance button 62. - 特許庁A game ball to be rented or a game ball to be paid out as a prize ball is paid out from a payout port 61 to an upper tray 26.例文帳に追加The effect button 62 is a so-called "CHANCE button", a "push button", or the like. The effect button 62 may have a predetermined effect function in addition to the operation function operated by the player. The predetermined effect function corresponds to, for example, a function of projecting upward based on the result of a big hit determination of a special symbol, which will be described later.

The lower tray 27 is mainly for storing game balls overflowing from the upper tray 26. - 特許庁A payout port 63 is provided in the lower plate 27 . The game balls overflowing from the upper tray 26 are put out to the lower tray 27 from the payout port 63. - 特許庁

The shooting device 15 is for shooting game balls stored in the upper tray 26 toward the game area 20 . The launcher 15 is located in the lower right front portion of the base door 12 and the lower right portion of the pan unit 14 . The firing device 15 comprises a panel body 31 , a drive (not shown) and a firing handle 32 .

The panel body 31 is integrated with the lower right portion of the dish unit 14 in the launching device 15 . The firing handle 32 is arranged on the surface side of the panel body 31 . The driving device is arranged on the back side of the panel body 31 and is composed of, for example, a firing solenoid (not shown). Thus, in the shooting device 15, when the shooting handle 32 is operated by the player, game balls are shot by the operation of the driving device according to the operation.

Although the details will be described later, the liquid crystal display device 16 displays the result of the special symbol jackpot determination (hereinafter, the special symbol jackpot determination may be simply referred to as "jackpot determination") and various effect images related to the game. It is. The various effect images displayed in the display area of the effect display device 16 include, for example, an effect identification pattern (decorative pattern), an effect image according to the result of the big hit determination, an effect image during the big win, a demonstration effect image, It includes the number of pending variable display (variable display) of special symbols. The liquid crystal display device 16 (more specifically, the display area of the liquid crystal display device 16) is arranged substantially in the center of the game board unit 17 (inner peripheral side of a center rail 1742 described later).

In this embodiment, one liquid crystal display device 16 is provided for displaying the above various effect images. You may make it display.

Further, as shown in FIG. 4, the pachinko gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment includes a main control board 30 having a main control circuit 100 (see FIG. 9 described later) and a sub-control circuit 200 (see FIG. 9 described later). a sub control board 40, a payout/launch control circuit 300 (see FIG. 9 to be described later) for controlling the payout/launch of game balls, a payout/launch control board 50, and a power supply circuit 338 (to be described later) 9), a power switch 35, and a backup clear switch 330 (see FIG. 9, which will be described later).

The pachinko gaming machine 1 of this embodiment is provided with a plurality of set values (in this embodiment, six levels from "1" to "6") that differ in various data related to the pachinko game. The setting "6" is most advantageous to the player, and as the setting value becomes smaller, the advantage to the player decreases step by step.

In the main board case housing the main control board 30, there are set switches 332 operated when changing set values, setting keys 328 operated when changing or confirming set values, and a performance display monitor. 334 and an error notification monitor 336 (both of which are described later in FIG. 9) are accommodated. The performance display monitor 334 displays, for example, performance display data and setting values, which will be described later. The error notification monitor 336 displays, for example, an error code, which will be described later. The reason why the setting switch 332 and the setting key 328 are housed in the main control board case is that the manager of the pachinko game machine 1 (hereinafter referred to as the "game machine manager") takes security into account. ), so that a third party (for example, a player) cannot easily access the setting switch 332 and the setting key 328 . Note that "inside the main board case" means that the setting switches 332 and/or the setting keys 328 cannot be accessed unless the main board case is opened, and that only the locations corresponding to the setting switches 332 and the setting keys 328 of the main board case are switched. Game machine management when the pachinko game machine 1 is rotated from the island facility on which the pachinko game machine 1 is installed to expose the rear surface by using a key managed by a game machine manager. Including those in which the responsible person has access to the setting switch 332 and/or the setting key 328 .

The game board unit 17 is arranged in front of the base door 12 so as to be positioned behind the protective glass 23 . A game area 20 is formed on the front side surface of the game board unit 17, in which the launched game ball can roll and flow.

As shown in FIGS. 5 to 7, the game board unit 17 is arranged substantially in the center of the transparent panel 172 forming the game area 20 in which the launched game ball can roll down and the game area 20. A center unit 174, an ordinary electric accessory unit 400, an attacker unit 500, a passage gate 49, and a back unit 176 are provided. The center unit 174 , the normal electric accessory unit 400 , the attacker unit 500 and the passage gate 49 are provided on the front side of the transparent panel 172 . The back unit 176 decorates the game board unit 17 and is provided behind the transparent panel 172 . The back unit 176 is provided with each accessory such as an upper accessory 1000 (see FIG. 7) arranged above the display area of the liquid crystal display device 16 . Each of these accessories 1000 functions as a performance accessory that can be operated based on the result of the special lottery.

An opening 1722 is formed in the transparent panel 172 at a portion where a display area of the liquid crystal display device 16, which will be described later, is arranged. As shown in FIGS. 5 and 7, a guide rail 26 is provided on the front surface of the transparent panel 172 and a game nail or the like is planted thereon. A game ball shot from a shooting device 15 jumps out from a guide rail 26 toward a game area 20, collides with a game nail or the like, and flows downward in the game area 20 while changing its advancing direction.

The guide rail 26 is composed of two rail-shaped members (hereinafter referred to as "outer rail 26a" and "inner rail 26b"). The game area 20 is partitioned (demarcated) by guide rails 26 . The inner rail 26b is for guiding the shot game ball to the upper part of the game area 20 together with the outer rail 26a. The inner rail 26b is arranged on the left side of the transparent panel 172 inside the outer rail 26a.

The center unit 174 has a center rail 1742 above the opening 1722 of the transparent panel 172 (above the display area of the liquid crystal display device 16), and is formed in an arc shape when viewed from the front. The center rail 1742 is arranged in the upper part of the game area 20, and divides the downflow area of the game ball in the game area 20 into the left and right of the center rail 1742 concerned.

The game balls fired by the shooting device 15 are divided into the left and right sides of the center rail 1742 and flow down the game area 20. The game balls flowing down the game area 20 are planted on the game board unit 17 (specifically, the transparent panel 172). When it collides with a game nail or the like provided, it flows downward while changing its traveling direction. The shot game balls are distributed to the flow-down areas according to the amount of operation of the shooting handle 52.例文帳に追加Specifically, when the operation amount of the shooting handle 52 is small, the shot game ball flows down the left area of the center rail 1742 . On the other hand, when the operation amount of the shooting handle 52 is large, the shot game ball flows down the right area of the center rail 1742 . The hitting method in which the game ball flows down to the left side area of the center rail 1742 is called "left hitting", and the hitting method in which the game ball flows down to the right side area of the center rail 1742 is called "right hitting". It is possible for the player to distinguish between them.

The attacker unit 500 is a unit body in which the first starting port 420, the big prize winning port 540 and the special electric accessory 600 are integrated. The attacker unit 500 is arranged substantially in the lower right part of the game area 20 and below the passage gate 49 .

The big winning opening 540 is a portion that can be opened in the case of a big win game state, which is a game state advantageous to the player. A count switch 541 is provided in the big winning opening 540 (see FIG. 9). When a game ball wins in the special winning opening 540, the count switch 541 detects the game ball that has won the prize. When game balls are detected by the count switch 541, a preset number of game balls are paid out from the payout port 61 to the upper tray 26 (or from the payout port 63 to the lower tray 27).

The special electric accessory 600 includes a shutter 610 that can move back and forth, and a winning opening solenoid 620 (see FIG. 9) that drives the shutter 610 . The special electric accessory 600 is arranged above the big winning opening 540 . The special electric accessory 600 has an open state that enables (or facilitates) entry of game balls into the large winning opening 540 by driving the shutter 610 by the large winning opening solenoid 620, and It is configured to be able to shift (drive) to a closed state that makes it impossible (or difficult) to win a game ball. The opening drive by the special electric accessory 600 (shutter 610) shifts to the big hit game state based on the result of the big hit determination performed when the game ball wins the first start port 420 or the second start port 440 described later. is done if In addition, the result of the big hit determination performed when the game ball wins in the first starting port 420 or the second starting port 440 described later is the special symbol in the first special symbol display unit 73 or the second special symbol display unit 74. is indicated by the stop display mode of

In addition, in this specification, when simply referred to as "special design", it means both the first special design and the second special design. However, in this embodiment, the number of special symbols is two (first special symbol, second special symbol), but the number of special symbols may be one.

The first starting port 420 provides an opportunity for judging a big hit on the condition that the game ball wins (passes), and the result of judging a big hit is displayed on the liquid crystal display device 16 or a first special symbol display section 73 to be described later. It gives A first starting port switch 421 is provided in the first starting port 420 (see FIG. 9). When a game ball enters the first starting port 420 , the winning game ball is detected by the first starting port switch 421 . When a game ball is detected by the first starting port switch 421, a big hit is determined inside the pachinko gaming machine 1 (main CPU 101 shown in FIG. 9), and a preset number of game balls are released from the payout port 61. It is dispensed (discharged) to the upper tray 26 or to the lower tray 27 from the dispensing port 63 . In addition, winning of the game ball to the first starting port 420 is performed by hitting to the left.

The ordinary electric accessory unit 400 is a unit body in which the second starting port 440, the out port 450 and the ordinary electric accessory 460 are integrated. The normal electric accessory unit 400 is arranged substantially in the lower left part of the game area 20 . The second starting port 440 and the out port 450 are arranged adjacent to each other, the second starting port 440 is arranged on the right side in front view, and the out port 450 is arranged on the left side in front view. Conventionally, most of the normal electric accessory units 400 are arranged below the first starting port 420, for example. However, in recent years, there has been a demand for a larger liquid crystal display device 16, making it difficult to arrange it below the first starting port 420. FIG. Therefore, in the pachinko game machine 1 of the present embodiment, the normal electric accessary product unit 400 is arranged substantially in the lower left part of the game area 20 .

The second starting port 440 provides an opportunity for judging a big hit on the condition that the game ball wins (passes), and the result of judging a big hit is displayed on the liquid crystal display device 16 or a second special symbol display section 74 to be described later. It gives A second starting port switch 441 is arranged in the second starting port 440 (see FIG. 9). When a game ball enters the second starting port 440 , the winning game ball is detected by the second starting port switch 441 . When a game ball is detected by the second starting port switch 441, a big hit determination is made inside the pachinko gaming machine 1 (the main CPU 101 shown in FIG. 9), and a preset number of game balls are to the upper tray or from the outlet 63 to the lower tray 27 (discharged). The winning difficulty of the second starting port 440 is determined by the normal electric accessory 460 . In principle, the winning of the game ball to the second starting port 440 is performed by hitting to the right.

The normal electric accessory 460 includes a blade member 4620 that can rotate in the right direction, a starter solenoid 4630 (see, for example, FIG. 9), and a power transmission mechanism (not shown) that transmits the power of the starter solenoid 4630 to the blade member 4620. ). The normal electric accessory 460 can be shifted (driven) between an open state in which the passage of game balls is easy and a closed state in which it is difficult to pass the game balls, by driving the vane member 4620 by the starting solenoid 4630. configured to When the game ball passes above the blade member 4620 while the blade member 4620 is being driven, the game ball enters the second start port 440 or is discharged to the outside of the pachinko game machine 1 from the out port 450. be done. The opening/closing drive by the normal electric accessory 460 (wing member 4620) is performed only for a predetermined period and times when the normal pattern in the normal pattern display section 71 is in a specific stop display mode.

The passage gate 49 provides an opportunity for normal symbol determination on the condition that the game ball wins (passes). The passage gate 49 is arranged on the lower right side of the center unit 174 and on the upper right side of the attacker unit 500 . The pass gate 49 is provided with a pass gate switch 49a (see FIG. 9). When the game ball passes through the passage gate 49, the passing game ball is detected by the passage gate switch 49a. When a game ball is detected by the passage gate switch 49a, normal symbol determination is performed inside the pachinko gaming machine 1 (the main CPU 101 shown in FIG. 2). It should be noted that the passage of the game ball to the passage gate 49 is performed by hitting to the right.

The attacker unit 500 is a unit body in which the first starting port 420, the big prize winning port 540 and the special electric accessory 600 are integrated. The attacker unit 500 is arranged substantially in the lower right portion of the game area 20 . The reason why the attacker unit 500 is arranged in the substantially lower right part of the game area 20 is that the liquid crystal display device 16 has been required to be larger in recent years, and various members such as the attacker unit 500 are arranged in the game area 20. This is because it is necessary to avoid such a large-sized liquid crystal display device 16.

The big winning opening 540 is a portion that can be opened in the case of a big win game state, which is a game state advantageous to the player. A count switch 541 is provided in the big winning opening 540 (see FIG. 9). When a game ball wins in the special winning opening 540, the count switch 541 detects the game ball that has won the prize. When game balls are detected by the count switch 541, a preset number of game balls are paid out (discharged) from the payout port 61 to the upper tray 26 (or from the payout port 63 to the lower tray 27).

The special electric accessory 600 includes a shutter 610 that can move back and forth, and a winning opening solenoid 620 (see FIG. 9) that drives the shutter 610 . The special electric accessory 600 is arranged above the big winning opening 540 . The special electric accessory 600 has an open state that enables (or facilitates) entry of game balls into the large winning opening 540 by driving the shutter 610 by the large winning opening solenoid 620, and It is configured to be able to shift (drive) to a closed state that makes it impossible (or difficult) to win a game ball. The opening drive by the special electric accessory 600 (shutter 610) is performed when the special symbol becomes a specific stop display mode in the first special symbol display section 73 or the second special symbol display section 74, and the state is shifted to the jackpot game state. is performed on

The general winning openings 53 , 54 , 55 are arranged in the lower left part of the game board unit 17 , and the general winning opening 56 is arranged in the lower right part of the game board unit 17 . In addition, general winning opening switches 53a, 54a, 55a, and 56a are arranged in the general winning openings 53, 54, 55, and 56 (see FIG. 9). When game balls enter the general winning openings 53, 54, 55, 56, the winning game balls are detected by the general winning opening switches 53a, 54a, 55a, 56a. When game balls are detected by the general winning opening switches 53a, 54a, 55a, and 56a, a preset number of game balls are paid out from the payout port 61 to the upper tray 26 (or from the payout port 63 to the lower tray 27). (expelled).

In this embodiment, the number of prize balls for the first start opening 420 and the second start opening 440 is 3, the number of prize balls for the general winning openings 53, 54, 55, and 56 is 10, and the number of winning balls for the big winning opening 540 is 3. The number of prize balls is set to 15 respectively. This value (the number of prize balls) can be arbitrarily changed in design.

The out port 57 is arranged at the central lowermost part of the game area 20 (the most downstream position in the flowing direction of the game ball). The out port 57 is finally flowed into when the launched game ball does not win any starting port or winning port.

The LED unit 70 is arranged in the lower right part of the game board unit 17 and outside the guide rail 41 (see FIGS. 5 and 6). The LED unit 70 is a unit body in which various display parts are integrated. Specifically, the LED unit 70 includes, as the various display portions, a normal symbol display portion 71, a normal symbol reservation display portion 72, a first special symbol display portion 73, a second special symbol display portion 74, a first special A design pending display portion 75 and a second special symbol pending display portion 76 are provided.

The normal symbol display section 71 displays the result of determination (normal symbol determination) for the normal symbol game. Here, the normal symbol game refers to a game in which it is determined whether or not the normal electric accessory 460 is driven to be in the open state according to the result of determination (normal symbol determination). The normal symbol display portion 71 includes display LEDs 71a and 71b. The display LEDs 71a and 71b start a variable display in which lighting and extinguishing are repeated alternately when conditions for starting the variable display (variable display) are established. A combination (display pattern) by turning on/off the display LEDs 71a and 71b is displayed as a normal symbol. The display LEDs 71a and 71b perform stop display after a predetermined period of time has elapsed after starting the variable display.

If the result of the determination (normal symbol determination) is hit (hereinafter referred to as "normal hit"), the combination of lighting and extinguishing of the display LEDs 71a and 71b (normal symbol) becomes a specific stop display mode. In this way, when the normal symbol is stopped and displayed in a specific stop display mode, it is determined that the normal electric accessory 460 is in an open state, and the normal electric accessory 460 is driven to open and close in a predetermined pattern, and the second start port. The winning difficulty of the game ball to 440 is changed.

The normal symbol reserved display portion 72 displays the number of execution times of the suspended normal symbol variable display (hereinafter referred to as "the number of suspensions of normal symbol variable display"). The normal symbol reservation display unit 72 includes display LEDs 72a and 72b. The normal symbol pending display unit 72 displays the number of pending variable display of normal symbols by a combination of lighting and extinguishing of the display LEDs 72a and 72b. For example, when the execution of the variable display of normal symbols is suspended for one time, the display LED 72a is turned on and the display LED 72b is turned off. Further, when the execution of the variable display of normal symbols is suspended twice, the display LED 72a lights up and the display LED 72b lights up. Further, when the execution of the variable display of normal symbols is suspended for three times, the display LED 72a blinks and the display LED 72b lights up. Further, when the execution of the variable display of normal symbols is suspended for four times, the display LED 72a blinks and the display LED 72b blinks.

The first special symbol display portion 73 and the second special symbol display portion 74 display the result of determination (big hit determination) for the special symbol game. Here, the special symbol game refers to a game in which transition or maintenance of the game state is determined according to the result of determination (jackpot determination).

The first special symbol display portion 73 has a display LED group 73a consisting of eight LEDs. The display LED group 73a performs a variable display triggered by the winning of the game ball into the first starting hole 420 (start winning), and also displays the result of the big hit determination based on the winning of the game ball. In the display LED group 73a, when the condition for starting the variable display is established, the eight LEDs start the variable display in which the lighting and extinguishing are repeated. In the display LED group 73a, a combination (display pattern) of lighting and extinguishing of eight LEDs is displayed as a special pattern. The display LED group 73a performs stop display after a predetermined period of time has elapsed after starting the variable display.

When the result of the jackpot determination based on the winning of the game ball to the first starting port 420 is a jackpot, the combination of lighting and extinguishing of the eight LEDs of the display LED group 73a (special symbol) becomes a specific stop display mode. . In this way, when the special symbol is stopped and displayed in a specific stop display mode, the transition of the game state is determined, the shutter 610 is driven to open and close in a predetermined pattern, and the game state is such that the game ball can enter the big winning hole 540. Become. In the following description, the special symbol that is variably displayed on the first special symbol display section 73 based on the winning of the game ball to the first starting port 420 is referred to as the first special symbol.

The second special symbol display portion 74 has a display LED group 74a consisting of eight LEDs. The display LED group 74a performs a variable display triggered by the winning of the game ball to the second starting port 440 (starting winning), and also displays the result of the big hit determination based on the winning of the game ball. In the display LED group 74a, when the condition for starting the variable display is satisfied, the eight LEDs start the variable display in which the lighting and extinguishing are repeated. In the display LED group 74a, a combination (display pattern) of lighting and extinguishing of eight LEDs is displayed as a special pattern. The display LED group 74a performs stop display after a predetermined period of time has elapsed after starting the variable display.

When the result of the big hit determination based on the winning of the game ball to the second starting port 440 is a big hit, the combination of lighting and extinguishing of the eight LEDs of the display LED group 74a (special symbol) becomes a specific stop display mode. . In this way, when the special symbol is stopped and displayed in a specific stop display mode, the transition of the game state is determined, the shutter 610 is driven to open and close in a predetermined pattern, and the game state is such that the game ball can enter the big winning hole 540. Become. In the following description, the special symbol that is variably displayed on the second special symbol display section 74 based on the winning of the game ball to the second starting port 440 is referred to as the second special symbol.

Thus, in the display LED groups 73a and 74a of the first special symbol display portion 73 and the second special symbol display portion 74, when the first or second special symbol is stopped and displayed in a specific stop display mode, the normal The transition from the game state (normal game state) to the jackpot game state, which is an advantageous state for the player, is determined. In this embodiment, the big hit determination includes the big hit determination based on the winning of the game ball to the first starting port 420 and the big winning determination based on the winning of the game ball to the second starting port 440 . In other words, when the result of the jackpot determination is a jackpot, the game is shifted to a jackpot game state in which the round game in which the jackpot 540 is opened is executed for a predetermined number of rounds.

The first special symbol reserved display unit 75 and the second special symbol reserved display unit 76 display the number of executions of variable display of reserved special symbols (hereinafter referred to as "number of reserved variable display of special symbols"). to display. The first special symbol reservation display unit 75 includes display LEDs 75a and 75b. The second special symbol reservation display unit 76 includes display LEDs 76a and 76b. The first special symbol pending display unit 75 and the second special symbol pending display unit 76 display the number of variable display pending special symbols by turning on/off the display LEDs 75a/75b and 76a/76b. The display modes of lighting and extinguishing of the display LEDs 75a, 75b and 76a, 76b are the same as those of the display LEDs 72a, 72b of the reserved display portion 72 for normal symbols.

As shown in FIG. 7, the back unit 176 is for decorating the game board unit 17. The upper front accessory 1000 is arranged above the display area of the liquid crystal display device 16, and the upper front accessory 1000 is arranged behind the upper front accessory 1000. An upper back character 1100 arranged above the display area of the liquid crystal display device 16 (see, for example, FIG. 21), a lower character 1200 arranged below the display area of the liquid crystal display device 16, and a liquid crystal display. A corner accessory 1300 (see, for example, FIG. 21) arranged so that movable bodies, which will be described later, are positioned at the four corners of the display area of the device 16, and a corner accessory 1300 arranged on the right side of the display area of the liquid crystal display device 16. It is provided with a side accessory 1400, a middle panel 1500, an attack ball gutter 1600, a main board case 1700, and a rear box 1800 that accommodates the above accessories and is unitized by attaching the main board case 1700. - 特許庁The details of each role product 1000, 1100, 1200, 1300, 1400 provided in the back unit 176 will be described later.

Below, in the pachinko gaming machine 1 configured as described above, an outline of the internal processing by the main CPU 101 when the game ball wins the first starting hole 5442 or the second starting hole 440 will be described.

When the game ball wins the first starting port 5442, the winning game ball is detected by the first starting port switch 5472, and the starting memory for the first special symbol based on the winning of the game ball to the first starting port 5442. is suspended (variation display of the first special symbol is suspended). The suspension of the starting memory for the first special symbol is performed when both the variable display of the first special symbol by the first special symbol display unit 73 and the variable display of the second special symbol by the second special symbol display unit 74 are executed. Canceled on the condition that there is no That is, when the game ball wins in the first starting port 5442 during the variable display of the first special symbol or the second special symbol, the suspension of the start memory is canceled after the special symbol during the variable display is stopped and displayed. Then, when the game ball wins the first starting port 5442 while neither the first special symbol nor the second special symbol is displayed in a variable manner, the suspension of the starting memory is immediately released. When the suspension of the starting memory is released, the variable display of the first special symbol by the first special symbol display section 73 is started.

When the game ball wins the second starting port 440, the winning game ball is detected by the second starting port switch 441, and the variable display of the second special symbol based on the winning of the game ball to the second starting port 440 start memory is suspended (variation display of the second special symbol is suspended). The suspension of the starting memory for the second special symbol is performed when both the variable display of the first special symbol by the first special symbol display unit 73 and the variable display of the second special symbol by the second special symbol display unit 74 are executed. Canceled on the condition that there is no That is, when the game ball wins in the second starting port 440 during the variable display of the first special symbol or the second special symbol, the suspension of the start memory is canceled after the special symbol during the variable display is stopped and displayed. Then, when the game ball wins the second starting port 440 while neither the first special pattern nor the second special pattern is displayed in a variable manner, the suspension of the starting memory is immediately released. When the suspension of the starting memory is released, the variable display of the second special symbol by the second special symbol display section 74 is started.

In addition, in the first special symbol display portion 73 and the second special symbol display portion 74, the special symbols (first and second special symbols) do not change simultaneously. That is, while the special symbols are variably displayed in one of the first special symbol display portion 73 and the second special symbol display portion 74, the special symbols are not variably displayed in the other display portion. . In this embodiment, when both the starting memory for the first special symbol and the starting memory for the second special symbol are suspended, regardless of which starting memory is suspended first, the second special symbol Priority is given to the cancellation of the hold about the start memory of, and the second special symbol display unit 73 performs the variable display of the second special symbol.

Further, an upper limit is set for the number of suspensions of the variable display of the first and second special symbols. In this embodiment, the upper limit of the number of suspensions of the variable display of the first and second special symbols is set to 4 times. Therefore, the maximum number of suspensions of variable display of special symbols is 8 times, which is the sum of the number of suspensions of variable display of special symbols due to the winning of the first start port 5442 and the second start port 440 .

Also, while the first or second special symbols are changing in the first special symbol display portion 73 and the second special symbol display portion 74, except for specific cases, the identification symbols consisting of numbers on the liquid crystal display device 16 fluctuate. Is displayed. In this embodiment, symbols from "1" to "8" are used as the numbers. Further, as for the identification symbols variably displayed on the liquid crystal display device 16, the first or second special symbol being variably displayed in the first special symbol display portion 73 and the second special symbol display portion 74 is stopped and displayed. Is displayed. The identification pattern is also used as identification information for presentation.

In addition, when the first or second special symbols stopped and displayed in the first special symbol display portion 73 and the second special symbol display portion 74 are in a specific stop display mode, the player is informed of the winning. An effect image to cause is displayed on the liquid crystal display device 16. - 特許庁In this embodiment, as will be described later, a plurality of types of hits are provided. Further, the specific stop display mode when the first or second special symbol is stop-displayed is set corresponding to the type of win. In such a configuration, the combination of identification symbols stopped and displayed on the liquid crystal display device 16 is a specific display that can be recognized by the player according to the specific stop display mode of the first or second special symbols. form. Thereby, the player can recognize the type of winning in addition to the winning. It should be noted that some of the types of hits are displayed in a specific display mode that makes it difficult for the player to recognize them, depending on the specific stop display mode of the first or second special symbols. This makes it difficult for the player to recognize the winning and the type of winning.

[Electrical Configuration of Game Machine]
Next, the control circuit of the pachinko game machine 1 will be described with reference to FIG.

As shown in FIG. 9, the pachinko game machine 1 mainly includes a main control circuit 100 for controlling the game, a sub-control circuit 200 for controlling the effect according to the progress of the game, and a payout/launch control circuit 300. , and a power supply circuit 338 .

The main control circuit 100 includes a main CPU 101, a main ROM 102 (read-only memory), a main RAM 103 (readable/writable memory), etc., and is accommodated in a main board case.

The main CPU 101 is connected with a main ROM 102, a main RAM 103, and the like. The main CPU 101 has a function of executing various processes according to programs stored in the main ROM 102 .

The main ROM 102 stores a program for controlling the operation of the pachinko gaming machine 1 by the main CPU 101, various tables, and the like.

The main RAM 103 has a function of storing various flags and variable values as a temporary storage area for the main CPU 101, and can store and hold written information even in a non-energized state. In this embodiment, the main RAM 103 is used as a temporary storage area for the main CPU 101, but the present invention is not limited to this, and any readable/writable storage medium may be used.

The main RAM 103 is provided with a storage area in which information of the special symbol game is stored as starting memory. Specifically, the main RAM 103 has a first special symbol start memory area (0) in which information of the special symbol game corresponding to the changing first special symbol is stored as a start memory, and the upper limit of four first special symbol games. A first special symbol start memory area (1) to a first special symbol start memory area (4) are provided in which information of a special symbol game corresponding to a special symbol is stored as a start memory. Similarly, in the main RAM 103, the second special symbol start memory area (0) in which the information of the special symbol game corresponding to the second special symbol being changed is stored as the start memory, and the upper limit four times of the second special game. A second special symbol start memory area (1) to a second special symbol start memory area (4) are provided in which information of the special symbol game corresponding to the symbol is stored as start memory.

The main control circuit 100 also includes an initial reset circuit 104 that generates a reset signal when power is turned on, an I/O port 105, a command output port 106, a backup capacitor 107, and the like. The initial reset circuit 104 is connected to the main CPU 101 . The I/O port 105 transmits input signals from various devices to the main CPU 101 and transmits output signals from the main CPU 101 to various devices. A command output port 106 transmits a command from the main CPU 101 to the sub-control circuit 200 . The backup capacitor 107 retains various data stored in the main RAM 103 by, for example, rapidly supplying power to the main RAM 103 when power is cut off (power OFF).

Various devices (members) are connected to the main control circuit 100 .

For example, the main control circuit 100 includes a normal symbol display portion 71, a normal symbol pending display portion 72, a first special symbol display portion 73, a second special symbol display portion 74, a first special symbol pending display portion 75, A second special symbol holding display portion 76, a starting solenoid 4630 for driving the vane member 4620 of the normal electric accessory 460, and a large winning solenoid 620 for driving the shutter 610 are connected. The main control circuit 100 can control the operation of these devices (members) by transmitting signals. The main control circuit 100 also includes a calling device (not shown) having a function of calling a hall attendant and a function of displaying the number of jackpots, and a hall computer 700 for controlling pachinko machines in the hall as a whole. An external terminal plate 323 to be used is connected.

The main control circuit 100 also includes a first starting switch 421, a second starting switch 441, a passage gate switch 49a, a count switch 541, general prize winning switches 53a, 54a, 55a, and 56a, a performance display monitor 334, and the like. is connected. When a game ball is detected by these members, the main control circuit 100 is supplied with a predetermined detection signal from the member. Also connected to the main control circuit 100 are a backup clear switch 330 and the like for clearing the backup data at the time of power failure according to the operation of the manager of the game arcade.

Further, a setting key 328 and a setting switch 332 are also connected to the main control circuit 100 . The setting key 328 is a key or similar to a key that serves as a trigger for executing setting change processing and setting confirmation processing, which will be described later. The setting switch 332 can be operated to be pressed, and is used to change the setting value that has been set during the setting change process described later. As described above, the setting key 328 and the setting switch 332 are housed in the main board case so as not to be easily accessible by a third party (for example, a player) other than the manager of the gaming machine.

A payout/launch control circuit 300 is connected to the main control circuit 100 . The payout/shooting control circuit 300 is connected with a payout device 340 for putting out game balls, a launching device 15 for shooting game balls, a card unit 360, and the like. A payout device 340 is provided in the payout unit 18 . A ball lending operation panel 370 is connected to the card unit 360, and a signal corresponding to the player's operation on the ball lending operation panel 370 is supplied.

When the payout/launch control circuit 300 receives a prize ball control command supplied from the main control circuit 100 or a ball rental control signal supplied from the card unit 360, it transmits a predetermined signal to the payout device 340, Control is performed to cause the payout device 340 to pay out game balls. In addition, when the player grips the shooting handle 32 and rotates it clockwise, the payout/shooting control circuit 300 controls the shooting solenoid (not shown) according to the rotation angle (rotation amount). ) to control the shooting of game balls.

Furthermore, the command output port 106 is connected to the sub-control circuit 200 (command input port 208). The sub-control circuit 200 performs display control of the liquid crystal display device 16, control of sound generated from the speaker 24, control of light from the LED 25, and the like in accordance with various commands supplied from the main control circuit 100. FIG.

In the present embodiment, a command is supplied from the main control circuit 100 to the sub-control circuit 200, but a signal cannot be supplied from the sub-control circuit 200 to the main control circuit 100. It may be configured such that a signal can be transmitted from the control circuit 200 to the main control circuit 100 .

The sub-control circuit 200 includes a sub-CPU 201, a program ROM 202, a work RAM 203 functioning as a backup memory, a display control circuit 204, an audio control circuit 205, an LED control circuit 206, a character control circuit 207, a command input port 208, and the like. The sub-control circuit 200 executes an effect according to the progress of the game according to the command from the main control circuit 100 . In addition, the sub-control circuit 200 includes a production button switch 621 that is turned ON/OFF by operating the production button 62, a main button switch 6621 that is turned ON/OFF by operating the main button 662, and select buttons 664a to 664d. Select button switches 6641a to 6641d that are turned ON/OFF by operation are connected. Although select button switches 6641a to 6641d are actually provided corresponding to the select buttons 664a to 664d, respectively, these are collectively indicated as the select button switch 6641 in FIG. 9 for the sake of convenience.

The sub CPU 201 has a function of executing various processes according to programs stored in the program ROM 202 . In particular, the sub CPU 201 controls the sub control circuit 200 according to various commands supplied from the main control circuit 100 .

The program ROM 202 stores programs for controlling the game effects of the pachinko gaming machine 1 by the sub CPU 201, various tables, and the like.

In this embodiment, the main ROM 102 and the program ROM 202 are used as storage means for storing programs, tables, etc. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and a computer-readable storage medium having control means is used. If so, another mode may be used. For example, as the storage means, a hard disk device, a storage medium such as a CD-ROM, a DVD-ROM, and a ROM cartridge may be used. Further, the programs, tables, etc. may be downloaded after the power is turned on and recorded in the work RAM 203 or the like, instead of being recorded in advance. Furthermore, the programs, tables, etc. may be recorded in different storage media.

The work RAM 203 has a function of storing various flags and variable values as a temporary storage area for the sub CPU 201 . In the present embodiment, the work RAM 203 is used as a temporary storage area for the sub CPU 201, but the present invention is not limited to this, and any readable/writable storage medium may be used.

The display control circuit 204 is a circuit for performing display control in the liquid crystal display device 16 . The display control circuit 204 includes an image data processor (hereinafter referred to as VDP), an image data ROM that stores data for generating various image data, a frame buffer that buffers image data, and an image signal that converts image data into an image signal. It includes a D/A converter or the like that converts as

The display control circuit 204 can perform various processes for displaying images on the liquid crystal display device 16 according to data supplied from the sub CPU 201 . The display control circuit 204 temporarily stores image data to be displayed on the liquid crystal display device 16 in the frame buffer according to the image display command supplied from the sub CPU 201 . The image data to be displayed on the liquid crystal display device 16 includes various image data related to the game, such as decorative design image data showing decorative designs, background image data, and performance image data.

Then, the display control circuit 204 supplies the image data stored in the frame buffer to the D/A converter at a predetermined timing. The D/A converter converts the image data into an image signal and supplies the converted image signal to the liquid crystal display device 16 at a predetermined timing. When an image signal is supplied to the liquid crystal display device 16 , an image related to the image signal is displayed on the liquid crystal display device 16 . In this manner, the display control circuit 204 can control the liquid crystal display device 16 to display an image related to the game.

The audio control circuit 205 is a circuit for controlling audio generated from the speaker 24 . The audio control circuit 205 includes a sound source IC that controls audio, an audio data ROM that stores various audio data, an amplifier (hereinafter referred to as AMP) for amplifying audio signals, and the like.

The sound source IC controls sound generated from the speaker 24 . The sound source IC selects one voice data from a plurality of voice data stored in the voice data ROM according to a voice generation command supplied from the sub CPU 201 . Also, the sound source IC reads the selected audio data from the audio data ROM, converts the audio data into a predetermined audio signal, and supplies the converted audio signal to the AMP. The AMP amplifies the audio signal and produces sound from the speaker 24 .

The LED control circuit 206 is a circuit for controlling the LEDs 25 including decorative LEDs and the like. The LED control circuit 206 includes a drive circuit for supplying an LED control signal, a decoration data ROM storing a plurality of types of LED decoration patterns, and the like.

The role control circuit 207 is a circuit for controlling each role. The role item control circuit 207 includes a drive circuit for supplying a drive signal to each role item, a lighting circuit for supplying a lighting control signal, and a role item data ROM in which operation patterns and lighting patterns are stored. etc.

Also, the drive circuit selects one motion pattern from a plurality of motion patterns stored in the role product data ROM according to the role product activation command supplied from the sub CPU 201 . Then, the selected action pattern is read out from the role item data ROM, and the mechanical action of each role item is controlled by supplying a drive signal corresponding to the read action pattern. Also, the lighting circuit selects one lighting pattern from a plurality of lighting patterns stored in the accessory data ROM based on a lighting command supplied from the sub CPU 201 . Then, the selected lighting pattern is read from the role item data ROM, and the lighting operation of each role item is controlled by supplying a lighting control signal corresponding to the read lighting pattern.

A command input port 208 receives commands sent from the main control circuit 100 .

The payout/launch control circuit 300 controls the payout of prize balls and rental balls from the pachinko game machine 1. The payout/launch control circuit 300 includes a payout device 350 for dispensing game balls, a game A shooting device 340 for shooting a ball, a backup clear switch 330 for clearing backup data at the time of power failure according to the operation of the manager of the game arcade, and the like are connected.

The power supply circuit 338 is a power supply circuit that creates a power supply voltage necessary for playing a game in the pachinko game machine 1 to supply the main control circuit 100, the sub-control circuit 200, the payout/fire control circuit 300, and the like. .

The power switch 35 and the like are connected to the power supply circuit 338 . The power switch 35 is turned on when supplying necessary power to the pachinko gaming machine 1 .

Although the setting key 328 and the setting switch 332 are connected to the main control circuit 100 as described above, they may be connected to the power supply circuit 338 instead. Even in this case, it is preferable that the setting switch 332 and the setting key 328 are housed in a predetermined case so that a third party (for example, a player) other than the gaming machine manager cannot easily access the setting switch 332 and the setting key 328 . . Even in such a case, "inside a predetermined case" means that the setting switch 332 and the setting key 328 cannot be accessed unless the case is opened, and the setting switch 332 and the setting key 328 in the case are not accessible. When the pachinko game machine 1 is rotated from the island facility where the pachinko game machine 1 is installed using a key managed by a game machine manager to expose the back surface. , the game machine manager can access the setting switch 332 and/or the setting key 328.

Here, display contents displayed on the performance display monitor 334 will be described. Performance display data is displayed on the performance display monitor 334 under the control of the main CPU 101 . The performance display data is, for example, data indicating the ratio of game balls paid out in a state other than the jackpot game state with respect to a predetermined number (for example, 60000 shots) of game balls, and is also called a base value.

The payout/launch control circuit 300 counts the base values based on the past game history, and stores the counted result in a later-described specific work area among the work areas of the main RAM 103 . Although this specific work area will be described later, it is an area in which data is not cleared even if backup clear processing, which will be described later, is performed. Note that the base values may be aggregated based on the execution of a predetermined operation, or may be constantly aggregated so that the base values are always displayed on the performance display monitor 334. .

The payout/launch control circuit 300 includes total history totaling means for totaling all base values based on all game histories from the initial power-on (first power-on after the pachinko game machine 1 is manufactured) to the present, A set value-by-set history totalizing means for executing set-value-by-set base value totalization based on the past game history for each set value.

For example, when an operation for displaying all base values is performed by a game machine manager or the like, the all history totalizing means executes totalization of all the base values. The main CPU 101 displays all base values aggregated by the all history aggregation means on the performance display monitor 334 . Further, when an operation to display the base values by setting value is performed, the history totalizing means by setting value executes totalization of the base values by setting value. The base value by setting value aggregated by the history aggregation unit by setting value is displayed on the performance display monitor 334 by the main CPU 101 .

The setting-value-by-setting-value history aggregating means can also aggregate only base values for arbitrary setting values in response to a request (operation). In this case, not only the base values for the set setting values, but also the base values for setting values other than the set setting values can be totaled. Therefore, the main CPU 101 can display the base values of other setting values on the performance display monitor 334 without executing the setting change processing described later.

It should be noted that the main CPU 101, for example, in response to an operation by a person in charge of gaming machine management or the like, calculates both the total base value aggregated by the total history aggregation means and the base value by setting value aggregated by the history aggregation means by setting value. can be displayed on the performance display monitor 334 , or only one of them can be selectively displayed on the performance display monitor 334 .

Further, the main CPU 101 may display only the base value of a specific setting value on the performance display monitor 334, or may display the base values of all setting values in a list. Moreover, both the all base values and the base values for each set value may be displayed in a list. When displaying the base values of all setting values in a list, or when displaying both all base values and base values by setting value in a list, use both the performance display monitor 334 and other display means. You may make it display.

The main CPU 101 is provided with an all-history totaling unit and a history totaling unit by setting value. Post-setting-change history totaling means for totalizing post-setting-change base values based on the game history may be provided. In this case, the main CPU 101 can display the setting-changed base values for each setting value on the performance display monitor 334 based on the display operation of the setting-changed base values.

In this way, by displaying all or part of the total base value, the base value by setting value and/or the base value by setting value after setting change on the performance display monitor 334, the pachinko game It is possible to easily check the information based on the past game history in the machine 1 .

In this embodiment, the base value is displayed on the performance display monitor 334, but the total payout number of game balls is paid by entering a special electric role (large winning slot) or a normal electric role. It is also possible to display the ratio of the number of game balls put out (payout by accessories). Moreover, it may be displayed with respect to the total number of shots, and furthermore, it may be displayed with the ratio of the number of game balls paid out by the special electric accessory (large winning slot). They may also be displayed by setting.

Also, an error code, which will be described later, is displayed on the error notification monitor 336 . In addition to the error code, the error notification monitor 336 can also display a setting change code indicating that the setting change process is being performed, a setting confirmation code indicating that the setting confirmation process is being performed, and the like. can. It should be noted that during the setting change, a design (setting change design) that is not usually displayed on the special design display device may be displayed.

Next, with reference to FIG. 10, the functional flow of the pachinko gaming machine according to one embodiment of the present invention will be described. FIG. 10 is a diagram showing the functional flow of the pachinko gaming machine according to one embodiment of the present invention.

As shown in FIG. 10, the pachinko game is a game in which a game ball is shot by a user's operation, and game ball payout control processing is performed when the game ball wins various prizes. The pachinko game includes a special symbol game using special symbols and a normal symbol game using normal symbols.

When the special symbol game results in a "jackpot" or the normal symbol game results in a "normal win", the possibility of winning the game ball increases relatively, and the payout control process of the game ball is performed. becomes easier.

In addition, for various prizes, special symbol start winning, which is one condition for the variable display of special symbols in the special symbol game, and one condition for the variable display of normal symbols in the normal symbol game. Certain normal symbol start prizes are also included.

The outline of the processing flow of the special symbol game and the normal symbol game will be described below. The special symbol game and the normal symbol game are executed by the main CPU 101 as control processing.

(1) When there is a special symbol starting prize in a special symbol game, various random numbers (for example, a random number for judging a big hit or a random number for determining a symbol) are selected from various counters (for example, a counter for judging a big hit or a counter for determining a symbol). ) is extracted (obtained), and each extracted random number value is stored (see the flow of the special symbol start winning process in the special symbol game shown in FIG. 10).

Further, as shown in FIG. 10, in the special symbol control process during the special symbol game, first, it is determined whether or not the condition for starting the variable display of the special symbols is established. In this discrimination process, it is referred to whether or not various data such as random numbers are stored by the special symbol start winning, and if various data such as random numbers are stored as one condition, variable display of special symbols. It is determined that the conditions for starting are satisfied.

Next, when the variable display of the special symbols is started, the big-hit determination random number extracted from the big-hit determination counter is referred to, and the big-hit determination is made as to whether or not to make it a "big-hit". After that, stop symbol determination processing is performed. In this process, the symbol determination random number extracted from the symbol determination counter and the result of the above-described big hit determination are referred to, and the special symbols to be stopped and displayed are determined.

Then, a variation pattern determination process is performed. In this process, a random number is extracted from the variation pattern determination counter, the random number, the result of the above-mentioned big hit determination, and the above-mentioned special symbol to be stopped and displayed are referred to, and the variation pattern of the special symbol (variable display pattern ).

Next, effect pattern determination processing is performed. In this process, a random number is extracted from the effect pattern determination counter, the random number, the result of the above-mentioned big hit determination, the above-mentioned special symbols to be stopped and displayed, and the above-described special symbol variation pattern are referred to, A performance pattern to be executed with the variable display of special symbols is determined.

Then, as a result of the determined big hit determination, the special symbol to be stopped and displayed, the variation pattern of the special symbol, and the performance pattern associated with the variable display of the special symbol are referred to, and the variable display control process of controlling the variable display of the special symbol. , and effect control processing for performing a predetermined effect is executed.

Then, when the variable display control process and the performance display control process are completed, it is determined whether or not a "jackpot" will be achieved. In this determination process, when it is determined that the "big hit" has occurred, a big win game state control process for performing a big win game state is executed. In addition, in the jackpot game state, the possibility of winning various prizes described above increases. On the other hand, if it is determined that the "jackpot" was not achieved, the jackpot game state control process is not executed.

When it is determined that a "jackpot" is not achieved, or when the jackpot game state control process is completed, a game state shift control process for shifting the game state is performed. In this game state transition control process, management of the normal game state different from the jackpot game state is performed.

As the normal game state, for example, in the above-described jackpot determination, a game state in which a "jackpot" is determined with a predetermined probability (hereinafter referred to as a "normal game state"), or a game state in which a "jackpot" is determined. A game state that increases more than the normal game state (hereinafter referred to as "high probability game state") and a game state in which special symbol start winning is easier to obtain as a result of normal hit determination described later (hereinafter referred to as "time saving game state" ) and the like. After that, again, the determination processing of whether or not to start the variable display of the special symbols is performed, and after that, various kinds of processing of the above-described special symbol control processing are repeated.

In addition, in the pachinko machine of this embodiment, when the game ball starts winning during the variable display of special symbols, various data extracted at the time of starting winning (random number for judging big hit, random number for determining symbol, etc.) ) is stored until the condition for starting the variable display of the special symbols is established. Storing various data (for example, random numbers for judging big hits, etc.) until the condition for starting variable display of special symbols is satisfied is called "reservation", and the various data withheld is called starting memory.

That is, when the game ball starts winning during the variable display of the special symbols, the execution of the variable display of the special symbols corresponding to the starting winning is suspended, and is suspended after the completion of the variable display of the special symbols currently being executed. The variable display of the special symbols that are on is started in order. Below, the various data about the reserved special symbol are also referred to as "reserved ball".

In addition, in the pachinko game machine of the present embodiment, as will be described later, two types of special symbol start prizes (first start prize and second start prize) are provided, and a maximum of 4 for each special symbol start prize Execution of variable display of special symbols can be suspended until. That is, in the present embodiment, it is possible to suspend the execution of variable display of special symbols up to a total of eight, including four of the first special symbols and four of the second special symbols.

Incidentally, although not shown in FIG. 10, the pachinko gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment determines whether or not the ball is held on hold (whether or not a "jackpot" is won) based on the above-described information on the held ball. It has a function of performing a predetermined effect based on the determination result, that is, a pre-reading effect function.

(2) When there is a normal symbol start winning prize in the normal symbol game, a random value is extracted from the normal hit determination counter, and the random value is stored (normal symbol start during normal symbol game shown in FIG. 10) Refer to the winning process flow).

Further, as shown in FIG. 10, in the normal symbol control process during the normal symbol game, first, it is determined whether or not the condition for starting the variable display of the normal symbols is established. In this determination process, it is determined whether or not the random number value is stored by the normal symbol start winning prize, and the condition for starting the variable display of the normal symbol is satisfied with the fact that the random number value is stored as one condition. discriminate.

Next, when the variable display of the normal symbols is started, the random number value extracted from the counter for normal hit determination is referred to, and the normal hit determination as to whether or not the "normal hit" is performed. After that, a variation pattern determination process is performed. In this process, the result of normal hit determination is referred to, and the normal pattern variation pattern is determined.

Then, with reference to the result of the determined normal hit determination and the variation pattern of the normal symbols, a variable display control process for controlling the variable display of the normal symbols and an effect control process for performing a predetermined effect are executed. .

When the variable display control process and the effect display control process are completed, it is determined whether or not a "normal win" will be achieved. In this determination process, when it is determined that it will be a "normal hit", a normal winning game control process for performing a normal winning game is executed.

In the normal winning game control process, the possibility of various prizes mentioned above, in particular, the possibility of the special symbol starting prize of the game ball in the special symbol game increases. On the other hand, when it is determined that it does not become a "normal hit", the normal winning game control process is not executed. After that, the process of determining whether or not to start the variable display of normal symbols is performed again, and thereafter, the various processes of the normal symbol control process described above are repeated.

As described above, in the pachinko game, the payout of game balls depends on conditions such as whether or not a "big win" occurs in a special symbol game, the transition state of the game state, and whether or not a "normal win" occurs in a normal symbol game. The ease with which control processing can be performed changes.

In this embodiment, as a method for extracting various random numbers, a soft random number method is used in which random numbers are generated within a predetermined range (width) by executing a program by the main CPU 101 . However, the present invention is not limited to this. For example, when the pachinko game machine includes a random number generator whose random number is updated at a predetermined period, a random number is generated from a counter (so-called ring counter) in the random number generator. A hard random number method for extracting may be employed as the method for extracting the various random values described above.

When the hard random number method is used, it is possible to prevent the same random number from being extracted in the predetermined period by determining the initial value of the random number at a timing different from the predetermined period.

[Liquid crystal display device]
The liquid crystal display device 16 is composed of liquid crystal, and displays various effects in its display area.

Specifically, in the present embodiment, the effect image associated with (corresponding to) the special symbol displayed in the special symbol display portion (first special symbol display portion 73, second special symbol display portion 74) to be described later is displayed in the display area. to be displayed. At this time, for example, when the special symbols are being variably displayed in the special symbol portion (first special symbol display portion 73, second special symbol display portion 74), except for specific cases, for example, 1 to 8 A plurality of performance identification patterns (decorative patterns) consisting of numbers, various characters, etc. are variably displayed in the display area.

When the special symbol is stopped and displayed in the special symbol portion (the first special symbol display portion 73 and the second special symbol display portion 74), a plurality of identification symbols corresponding to the special symbol are also stopped and displayed in the display area. be.

Then, when the special symbol stopped and displayed in the special symbol part (the first special symbol display part 73, the second special symbol display part 74) is in a specific mode (the result of the stop display is "big win"). , an effect image is displayed in the display area for making the player understand that it is a "jackpot".

As an effect for making the player understand that it is a "big hit", for example, first, a plurality of stationary identification symbols are displayed in a specific manner (for example, a manner in which the same identification symbols are arranged in a predetermined direction). ), and after that, an effect such as displaying an image informing of a "big hit" can be given.

Further, in the present embodiment, the display area of the liquid crystal display device 16 displays an effect image related to the display contents of the first special symbol reservation display portion 75 and the second special symbol reservation display portion 76, which will be described later. For example, in the display area, suspension information (for example, the same number of suspension symbols as the number of suspensions) for informing the number of suspensions (starting memory number) of variable display of special symbols is displayed. Further, for example, in the pachinko gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment, the pre-reading effect is performed based on the information of the reserved ball of the special symbol, and the advance notice at this time is also displayed in the display area.

In addition, in the present embodiment, when the normal symbol stopped and displayed in the normal symbol display section 71 described later is in a predetermined mode, an effect image is displayed in the display area of the liquid crystal display device 16 so that the player can grasp the information. A display function may be further provided.

[Special pattern display part]
The special symbol display portions (the first special symbol display portion 73 and the second special symbol display portion 74) are arranged in the lower right portion of the display area of the liquid crystal display device 16. FIG. The special symbol display portion (the first special symbol display portion 73, the second special symbol display portion 74) is a display device that variably displays the special symbols (variable display and stop display) in the special symbol game. In this embodiment, the special symbol display portion (the first special symbol display portion 73 and the second special symbol display portion 74) is configured by a 7-segment display device that displays the special symbol in a pattern consisting of numbers, symbols, and the like.

The present invention is not limited to this, and the special symbol display portion (the first special symbol display portion 73, the second special symbol display portion 74) may be composed of, for example, a plurality of LEDs. In this case, a display pattern configured by turning on/off a plurality of LEDs is represented as a special symbol.

The special symbol display unit (first special symbol display unit 73, second special symbol display unit 74) is triggered by the fact that the game ball has won the first start port 5442 or the second start port 440 (special symbol start prize). , Performs a variable display of special symbols (identification information). Then, the special symbol display units (the first special symbol display unit 73 and the second special symbol display unit 74) perform the variable display of the special symbols for a predetermined time, and then perform the stop display of the special symbols.

Below, the special symbol that is variably displayed when the game ball wins the first starting hole 5442 is referred to as the first special symbol. In addition, the special symbol that is variably displayed when the game ball wins the second starting hole 440 is called a second special symbol.

In the special symbol display portion (first special symbol display portion 73, second special symbol display portion 74), when the stop-displayed first special symbol or second special symbol is in a specific mode ("jackpot" mode) At the time, the game state shifts from a general game state which is not a big win game state to a big win game state which is an advantageous state for the player.

That is, in the special symbol display portion (the first special symbol display portion 73, the second special symbol display portion 74), the first special symbol or the second special symbol is stopped and displayed in a mode of shifting to the jackpot game state, It is a "big hit".

In the jackpot game state, the jackpot 53 is open. Specifically, in this embodiment, the game ball wins the first starting port 5442, the first special symbol is specified in the special symbol display portion (first special symbol display portion 73, second special symbol display portion 74) , the big winning opening 53 is open.

The open state of each big winning opening is maintained until a predetermined number of game balls are won, or until a certain period of time (for example, 30 seconds) elapses. Then, when any one of these conditions is met, the large winning opening that was in an open state is closed.

In the following, a game in which the big winning hole 53 is in a state (open state) in which game balls can easily be received will be referred to as a round game. Between the round games, the big winning opening is closed.

A round game is counted as the number of rounds such as 1 round, 2 rounds, or the like. For example, the first round game is called the first round, and the second round game is called the second round.

In addition, in the special symbol display portion (first special symbol display portion 73, second special symbol display portion 74), if the special symbol that is stopped and displayed is in a mode other than the specific mode ("failure" mode) , The game state does not shift except when the falling lottery is won.

That is, in the special symbol game, the special symbols are variably displayed by the special symbol display units (the first special symbol display unit 73 and the second special symbol display unit 74), and then the special symbols are stopped and displayed, and the game is played according to the result. It is a game in which states are transitioned or maintained.

Further, in the pachinko gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment, when the game ball wins the first starting port 5442 during the variable display of the first special symbol or the second special symbol, the first special symbol corresponding to the winning is variable Display (hold ball) is held.

Then, when the first special symbol or the second special symbol that is currently being variably displayed is stopped and displayed, the variably displayed first special symbol that has been suspended is started. In the present embodiment, the number of variable displays of the first special symbols to be reserved (so-called "reserved number (number of reserved balls)") is defined to be four (pieces) at maximum.

Furthermore, in this embodiment, when the game ball wins the second starting port 440 during the variable display of the first special symbol or the second special symbol, the variable display of the second special symbol corresponding to the winning (holding ball) is withheld.

Then, when the first special symbol or the second special symbol that is currently being variably displayed is stopped and displayed, the variably displayed second special symbol that has been suspended is started. In this embodiment, the number of variable displays of the second special symbol to be reserved (the number of reserved symbols) is defined to be four times (pieces) at maximum. Therefore, in the present embodiment, the total number of reserved variable display of special symbols is eight at maximum.

Further, in the present embodiment, when the reserved ball of the first special symbol and the reserved ball of the second special symbol are mixed, the variable display of one special symbol is preferentially executed over the variable display of the other special symbol. . Specifically, the reserved balls of the second special symbol are preferentially digested over the reserved balls of the first special symbol. In addition, the present invention is not limited to this, and when the first special symbol reserved ball and the second special symbol reserved ball are mixed, the variable display of the special symbols may be executed in the reserved order.

[Normal pattern display unit]
The normal symbol display portion 71 is arranged in the lower right portion of the display area of the liquid crystal display device 16 . In this embodiment, the normal symbol display portion 71 is arranged on the left side of the special symbol display portion (the first special symbol display portion 73 and the second special symbol display portion 74) as viewed from the player side.

The normal symbol display unit 71 is a display device that variably displays (variable display and stop display) normal symbols in the normal symbol game, and the normal symbol display unit 71 is composed of a plurality of LEDs (normal symbol display LEDs). . Then, in the normal symbol display section 71, a display pattern formed by turning on/off each normal symbol display LED is displayed as a normal symbol.

When the game ball passes through the ball passage detector 43, the normal symbol display unit 71 alternately lights and extinguishes the two normal symbol display LEDs to display the variable normal symbols. Then, the normal symbol display unit 71 displays the normal symbols in a stationary manner after performing the variable display of the normal symbols for a predetermined time.

In the normal symbol display portion 71, when the stopped normal symbol is in a predetermined mode ("win" mode), the normal electric accessory 46 changes from the closed state to the open state for a predetermined period. On the other hand, when the stopped and displayed normal symbol is in a mode other than the predetermined mode (a mode of "loss"), the normal electric accessory 46 maintains the closed state.

That is, the normal symbol game is a game in which normal symbols are variably displayed by the normal symbol display unit 71, then the normal symbols are stopped and displayed, and the normal electric accessory 46 operates according to the result.

Incidentally, when the game ball passes through the ball passage detector 43 during the variable display of the normal symbols, the variable display of the normal symbols is suspended. Then, when the normal symbols that are currently being variably displayed are stopped and displayed, the variably displayed normal symbols that have been suspended are started. In the present embodiment, the number of variable display of normal symbols to be reserved (that is, "number of reserved symbols") is defined to be four (pieces) at maximum.

[Normal symbol holding display device]
The normal symbol holding display device 63 is arranged in the lower right portion of the display area of the liquid crystal display device 16 .

The normal design reservation display device 63 is a device that displays the number of reserved variable display of normal symbols, and the normal design reservation display device 63 is provided with a plurality of normal design reservation display LEDs, and the normal design reservation display device 63 , By turning on/off each normal symbol reserved display LED, the number of normally variable display reserved symbols is displayed.

Specifically, the normal design reservation display device 63 displays the normal design reservation display LED according to the reservation number of the variable display of the normal design, and the normal design reservation display LED is normally displayed according to the reservation number of the variable display of the normal design. A maximum of 4 lights are lit.

[First special symbol holding display device]
The first special symbol holding display portion 75 is arranged in the lower right portion of the display area of the liquid crystal display device 16 .

The first special symbol reservation display unit 75 is a device that displays information about variable display of the first special symbol that is being reserved (reserved ball of the first special symbol). In this embodiment, the first special symbol reservation display unit 75 includes a plurality of first special symbol reservation display LEDs.

Specifically, the first special symbol reserved display unit 75 displays the first special symbol reserved display LED according to the number of reserved variable display of the first special symbol, and the first special symbol reserved display LED is the first Up to four lights are lit according to the number of reserved variable display of special symbols.

[Second special symbol holding display device]
The second special symbol holding display portion 76 is arranged in the lower right portion of the display area of the liquid crystal display device 16 .

The second special symbol reservation display unit 76 is a device that displays information about the variable display of the second special symbol that is being reserved (second special symbol reservation ball), and the second special symbol reservation display unit 76 is , and a plurality of second special symbol reserved display LEDs.

Specifically, the second special symbol reservation display unit 76 displays the second special symbol reservation display LED according to the number of reservations of the variable display of the second special symbol, and the second special symbol reservation display LED is the second special symbol reservation display LED. Depending on the number of pending variable display of 2 special symbols, a maximum of 4 lights.

Next, the data configuration and the like of the main control circuit 100 will be described with reference to FIGS. 11 to 13. FIG.

[Random hit judgment table]
FIG. 11 is a diagram showing a winning random number determination table (first start opening, second start opening) stored in the main ROM 102 of the main control circuit 100. As shown in FIG. The hit random number determination table (first start port) is based on the big hit determination random number value acquired when the game ball wins the first start port 5442, "big hit", "small hit", and "losing". It is referred to determine one of the by lottery. The hit random number determination table (second start port) determines by lottery whether "big hit" or "lost" based on the random number value for big hit determination acquired when the game ball wins in the second start port 440. It is referenced when

The random number value for judging a big hit is a random number number for judging the result of a lottery that is triggered by winning a starting prize. More specifically, the big hit determination random number value is a value indicating the lottery result of special symbols (first special symbol and second special symbol). In this embodiment, the random number for big hit determination is selected from 0 to 65535 (65536 types).

In this embodiment, when a game ball wins the first starting hole 5442, one of "big win", "minor win" and "losing" is determined by lottery. Therefore, in the hit random number determination table (at the time of winning the first start opening), the value of the variable probability flag ("0 (= OFF)" or "1 (= ON)") "big hit", "small hit" and the range (width) of the random number value for judging the big hit that determines the winning of each of the "losing" and the judgment value data corresponding to it ("big hit judgment value data", "small hit judgment value data" and "losing judgment value data”) is defined. The variable probability flag is one of the management flags stored in the main RAM 73, and is a flag for managing whether or not the game state is the "high probability game state". When the game state is the "high probability game state", the probability variation flag is "1", and when it is the "low probability game state", the probability variation flag is "0".

In this embodiment, when the first starting port 5442 wins, if the variable probability flag is "0" and the random value for hit determination is any one of "0" to "204", the "jackpot" is won. , "jackpot determination value data" is determined. That is, the winning probability of the "jackpot" (jackpot probability (selection rate)) in this case is 205/65536 (≈1/319).

Also, when the first start port 5442 wins, if the variable probability flag is "0" and the random value for hit determination is one of "205" to "409", "small hit" is won, " Small hit judgment value data" is determined. That is, the winning probability of the "small hit" in this case is 205/65536 (≈1/319).

Furthermore, when the first start port 5442 wins, if the variable probability flag is "0" and the random value for hit determination is neither "0" to "409", "losing" is won and "losing determination value data” is determined.

On the other hand, when the first start port 5442 wins, if the variable probability flag is "1" and the random value for hit determination is any one of "0" to "1637", "big hit" is won, and "big hit" judgment value data” is determined. That is, the "jackpot" winning probability (jackpot probability (selection rate)) in this case is 1638/65536 (≈1/40), which is higher than that when the probability variation flag is "0".

Also, when the first start port 5442 wins, if the variable probability flag is "1" and the random value for hit determination is one of "1638" to "1842", "small hit" is won, " Small hit judgment value data" is determined. That is, the winning probability of the "minor hit" in this case is 205/65536 (≈1/319), which is the same as when the variable probability flag is "0".

Furthermore, when the first start port 5442 wins, if the probability variable flag is "1" and the random value for hit determination is neither "0" to "1842", "losing" is won and "losing determination value data” is determined.

As described above, in this embodiment, when a game ball wins in the first starting hole 5442, the jackpot probability fluctuates depending on whether or not the game state at the time of winning is the "high probability game state". Specifically, when the game state is "high probability game state", the jackpot probability when the game ball wins in the first start hole 5442 is about 8 times when the game state is not "high probability game state". get higher

Similarly, when the second start port 440 wins, if the variable probability flag is "0" and the random value for hit determination is any one of "0" to "204", "big hit" is won, " Big hit judgment value data” is determined. That is, the winning probability of the "jackpot" (jackpot probability (selection rate)) in this case is 205/65536 (≈1/319).

In addition, when the second start port 440 wins, if the variable probability flag is "0" and the random value for hit determination is neither "0" to "204", "losing" is won and "losing determination value data” is determined.

On the other hand, when the second starting port 440 wins, if the variable probability flag is "1" and the random value for hit determination is any one of "0" to "1637", "big hit" is won and "big hit" judgment value data” is determined. That is, the "jackpot" winning probability (jackpot probability (selection rate)) in this case is 1638/65536 (≈1/40), which is higher than that when the probability variation flag is "0".

In addition, when the second start port 440 wins, if the variable probability flag is "1" and the random value for hit determination is neither "0" to "1637", "losing" is won and "losing determination value data” is determined.

As described above, in the present embodiment, when the game ball wins the second starting port 440, the game state at the time of winning is the "high probability game state" without winning the "small hit". The probability of big win varies depending on whether or not, and the probability of big win when the game state is "high-probability game state" is about eight times higher than when it is "low-probability game state".

[Symbol Judgment Table]
FIG. 12 shows a symbol determination table (first start opening, second start opening) stored in the main ROM 102 of the main control circuit 100. As shown in FIG. The symbol determination table (first start port, second start port) is based on the symbol random number value obtained when the game ball wins the first start port 5442 or the second start port 440 and the aforementioned determination value data. are referred to select the "select symbol command at the time of hit" and the "design designation command" for determining the stop symbol. The ``selection pattern command at the time of winning'' is a command for specifying the winning pattern determined according to the type of winning at the time of winning, and the ``designation command'' specifies the pattern to be displayed when the fluctuation of special symbols is stopped. This command is for The symbol random number is extracted from, for example, 0 to 99 (100 types).

According to the symbol determination table (first starting port) of the present embodiment, when the big hit determination value data is obtained and the symbol random number is any one of "0" to "9", 10/100 "z0" is selected as the winning selection symbol command and "zA1" is selected as the symbol designation command with a probability of . In addition, when the big hit determination value data is obtained and the symbol random number is one of "10" to "19", "z1" is selected as the winning selection symbol command with a probability of 10/100. , "zA1" is selected as the symbol designation command. In addition, when the big hit determination value data is obtained and the symbol random number value is one of "20" to "29", "z2" is selected as the winning selection symbol command with a probability of 10/100. , "zA1" is selected as the symbol designation command. In addition, when the big hit determination value data is obtained and the symbol random number value is one of "30" to "39", "z3" is selected as the winning selection symbol command with a probability of 10/100. , "zA1" is selected as the symbol designation command. In addition, when the big hit determination value data is obtained and the symbol random number value is one of "40" to "49", "z4" is selected as the winning selection symbol command with a probability of 10/100. , "zA1" is selected as the symbol designation command. In addition, when the big hit determination value data is obtained and the symbol random number is one of "50" to "95", "z5" is selected as the winning selection symbol command with a probability of 46/100. , "zA1" is selected as the symbol designation command. In addition, when the big hit determination value data is obtained and the symbol random number is "96" or "97", "z6" is selected as the selection symbol command at the time of winning with a probability of 2/100, and the symbol is specified. "zA4" is selected as the command. Further, when the big hit judgment value data is obtained and the symbol random number is "98" or "99", "z7" is selected as the selection symbol command at the time of winning with a probability of 2/100, and the symbol is specified. "zA5" is selected as the command. In addition, when the small hit determination value data is obtained and the symbol random number value is one of "0" to "99", "z8" is selected as the selection symbol command at the time of winning, and as the symbol designation command "zA6" is selected. On the other hand, when the loss judgment value data is obtained and the symbol random number value is one of "0" to "99", the winning selection symbol command is not selected, and "zA7" is used as the symbol designation command. selected.

Further, according to the symbol determination table (second starting port) of the present embodiment, when the big hit determination value data is obtained and the symbol random number value is any one of "0" to "24", 25 With a probability of /100, "z9" is selected as the winning selection symbol command, and "zA8" is selected as the symbol designation command. In addition, when the big hit determination value data is obtained and the symbol random number is one of "25" to "49", "z10" is selected as the winning selection symbol command with a probability of 25/100. , "zA8" is selected as the symbol designation command. In addition, when the big hit determination value data is obtained and the symbol random number is one of "55" to "99", "z11" is selected as the winning selection symbol command with a probability of 50/100. , "zA9" is selected as the symbol designation command. On the other hand, when the loss judgment value data is obtained and the symbol random number value is one of "0" to "99", the winning selection symbol command is not selected, and "zA10" is used as the symbol designation command. selected.

[Jackpot type determination table]
FIG. 13 shows a jackpot type determination table stored in the main ROM 102 of the main control circuit 100. As shown in FIG. In the jackpot type determination table, the number of rounds to be executed in the jackpot game and the game state after the jackpot game ends and the jackpot game state is shifted to the general game state according to the hit selection symbol command related to the jackpot. Whether to turn on and whether to turn on the time saving flag are referred to determine the type of jackpot. In addition, in this embodiment, if a jackpot is won regardless of the type of jackpot, the time saving flag is set to "1". The number of times of time saving at this time is determined to be one of 24 times, 30 times, 36 times, 42 times, 48 times and 100 times, and the determined number of times of time saving is set. The variable probability flag is one of the management flags stored in the main RAM 73, and is a flag for managing whether or not the game state is the "high probability game state". When the game state is the "high probability game state", the probability variation flag is "1", and when it is the "low probability game state", the probability variation flag is "0". Similarly, the time saving flag is one of management flags stored in the main RAM 73, and is a flag for managing whether or not the game state is the "time saving game state". When the game state is the "time-saving game state", the time-saving flag is "1", and when it is the "non-time-saving game state", the time-saving flag is "0". The number of times of time saving is the number of fluctuations of the special symbol game in which the time saving gaming state can be continued. That is, when a special symbol variation (lottery of special symbols) for the number of times of time saving (100 times) is performed without winning a jackpot in the time saving game state, the time saving game state is ended and shifted to a non-time saving game state. A game state in which both the probability variable flag and the time saving flag are "1" is referred to herein as a "high probability time saving game state". In addition, in this embodiment, the high probability game state continues until the next big hit is won. However, when the special symbol variation (lottery of special symbols) is performed for a predetermined number of times without winning the jackpot, the high probability game state may be ended and the low probability game state may be entered.

According to the jackpot type determination table of the present embodiment, when the hit time selection symbol command is "z0", the number of rounds is "8", and the jackpot with probability variable flag off and time saving flag on is determined. When the winning time selection symbol command is "z1", the number of rounds is "8", and a big hit with probability variable flag off and time saving flag on is determined. When the winning time selection symbol command is "z3", the number of rounds is "8", and a big hit with probability variable flag off and time saving flag on is determined. When the winning time selection symbol command is "z4", the number of rounds is "8", and a big hit with probability variable flag off and time saving flag on is determined. When the winning time selection symbol command is "z5", the number of rounds is "8", and the big hit of probability variable flag ON and time saving flag ON is determined. When the winning time selection symbol command is "z6", the number of rounds is "5", and the big hit of probability variable flag ON and time saving flag ON is determined. When the winning time selection symbol command is "z7", the number of rounds is "16", and the big hit of probability variable flag ON and time saving flag ON is determined. When the winning time selection symbol command is "z9", the number of rounds is "5", and a big hit with probability variable flag off and time saving flag on is determined. When the winning time selection symbol command is "z10", the number of rounds is "5", and the big hit of probability variable flag ON and time saving flag ON is determined. When the hit selection symbol command is "z11", the number of rounds is "16", and the big hit of probability variable flag ON and time saving flag ON is determined.

It should be noted that, in the present embodiment, the hit time selection symbol command (that is, the jackpot determination value data) is designed to determine the jackpot of the time-saving flag-on regardless of which, but not necessarily limited to this, the jackpot determination value data A jackpot of time saving flag off may be determined according to.

Further, in the present embodiment, the main CPU 101 determines the number of times of time saving to be one of 24 times, 30 times, 36 times, 42 times, 48 times and 100 times, but it is not necessarily limited to this. The time-saving game state may be controlled to continue until the next big hit is won, or the time-saving game state may be controlled to continue as long as the high-probability game state continues.

In addition, in this embodiment, the main CPU 101 controls so that the high-accuracy gaming state continues until the next big win is won. It may be controlled so that the high-probability game state continues (then it shifts to a low-probability game state), or until the next big win is substantially won in relation to the winning probability of the big win (for example, 10000 It may be controlled so that the high-probability game state continues until the next time), or it may be controlled so that the high-probability game state continues until the next big hit is won.

[Flow of game balls]
Below, the flow of game balls shot toward the game area 20 will be described with reference to FIGS. 14 to 16. FIG. FIG. 14 is an example of a diagram showing a mode in which a game ball flows down the right region when the blade member 4620 of the normal electric accessory 460 is opened. FIG. 15 is an example of a diagram showing a mode in which the game ball flows down the right area when the blade member 4620 of the normal electric accessory 460 is closed. FIG. 16 is an example of a diagram showing a mode in which the game ball flows down the left region when the blade member 4620 of the normal electric accessory 460 is opened.

As described above, the attacker unit 500 is arranged substantially in the lower right part of the game area 20 and below the passage gate 49 . Therefore, in the jackpot game state, so-called right hitting is performed. When the large winning opening 540 is in the open state by the shutter 610, the game ball hit to the right tends to enter the large winning opening 540.例文帳に追加In addition, even if it is not in the jackpot game state, right-handed hitting is performed during the electric sapo.

However, when the player hits to the right, the game ball flowing down the right area loses the sense of anticipation when it does not enter the big winning opening 540, and just waits for it to flow into the out opening 57 as it is. becomes. Therefore, when a game ball hit to the right does not enter the big winning hole 540, the player feels disadvantageous, which causes a decrease in interest. In particular, in recent years, there has been a demand for a larger liquid crystal display device 16, and the current situation is that places where the attacker unit 500 and the like can be arranged within the game area 20 are limited. Therefore, in order to meet the demand for a larger liquid crystal display device 16, the attacker unit 500 must be arranged below the game area 20 as in the pachinko game machine 1 of this embodiment. When the attacker unit 500 is arranged in the lower part of the game area 20, if the game ball hit to the right does not enter the big winning hole 540, it will flow into the out hole 57 as it is.

In this regard, in the pachinko game machine 1 of the present embodiment, the normal electric accessory unit 400 is arranged substantially in the lower left portion of the game area 20 as described above. In addition, the attacker unit 500 is provided with a game ball guiding member 580. - 特許庁This game ball guide member 580, including the guide nail 700, guides a game ball that is hit to the right (flows down the right side area) and does not enter the big winning opening 540 in the game area 20 where the out opening 57 is arranged. It leads to the upstream of the blade member 4620 arranged in the left area beyond the center, and is a member that forms the path of the game ball extended on the extension line of the big winning opening 540 toward the flowing direction of the game ball. is. Here, the "upstream of the blade member 4620" is the area where the game ball can be received into the second start opening 440 if the blade member 4620 is open (hereinafter referred to as "second start opening reception area). This second starting opening receiving area is, for example, the peripheral area of the game ball 223 located above the blade member 4620 in FIG.

In addition, in the game area 20, a game ball guide member is provided as a flow-down path for a game ball that is struck to the right (flows down the right side area) and reaches the exit side of the big winning opening 540 without entering the big winning opening 540. A guide nail 700 forms a flow-down path connecting the exit side of 580 and the out port 57 . Then, the game ball flowing down this flow-down path always passes through the second starting opening receiving area before reaching the out opening 57. - 特許庁

As described above, in the pachinko gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment, since the normal symbol determination shifts to the high probability game state with the end of the jackpot game state as a trigger, the electric sapo state is in the time saving game state, and the blades at a high frequency Member 4620 is released.

As shown in FIG. 14, when the blade member 4620 of the normal electric accessory 460 is open, if the game ball hit to the right (flowing down the right area) does not enter the big winning hole 540, the game The ball is always guided by the game ball guiding member 580 and the guiding nail 700 to the second starting opening receiving area upstream of the vane member 4620 of the ordinary electric accessory 460 .

Of the game balls hit right (flowed down the right area), the game balls that did not win the big winning opening 540 are always guided to the second start opening receiving area upstream of the blade member 4620, so the second If the blade member 4620 of the normal electric accessory 460 is open when the game ball is guided to the starting port receiving area, it is received by the blade member 4620 without flowing into the out port 57, and the second starting port 440 are more likely to win prizes. That is, when the blade member 4620 is closed, the out port 57 is the most downstream position of the game area 20 as described above, but when the blade member 4620 is open, the out port 57 is replaced with the second The starting port 440 is the most downstream position. Thus, the blade member 4620 has the function of changing the most downstream position in the game area 20 .

In this way, even if the game ball hit to the right (flowed down the right area) does not enter the big winning opening 540, the game ball always reaches the second start opening receiving area (upstream of the blade member 4620) Since the player is guided, the expectation of winning the prize at the second starting port 440 continues, and the interest can be enhanced.

In particular, right-handed hitting is performed in the electric sapo state. Therefore, although the big winning opening 540 does not open during the electric sapo, the blade member 4620 changes the most downstream position from the out opening 57 to the second start opening 440, so the game progresses in the electric sapo state. It can be promoted and increase interest.

By the way, as shown in FIG. 15, when the vane member 4620 of the normal electric accessory 460 is closed, the game ball that is hit to the right (flows down the right side area) and does not enter the big winning hole 540 , is always guided upstream of the blade member 4620, but flows into the out port 57 through between the blade member 4620 and the guide nail 700 (that is, the left side of the guide nail 700).

Of the game balls struck to the right (flowed down the right area), the game balls that did not reach the big winning opening 540 ) may be configured to be led to the out port 57 . At this time, among the game balls hit to the right, game balls that did not enter the big winning hole 540 are game balls that reached the big winning hole 540 but did not win, and game balls that did not reach the big winning hole 540. Although there are game balls that did not win, any game ball may be guided upstream of the blade member 4620, or only one of the game balls may be guided upstream of the blade member 4620. .

By the way, as shown in FIG. 16, the left-handed game ball (the game ball that has flowed down the left area) generally wins the first starting hole 5442 or the general winning holes 53, 54, 55, It flows into the out port 57 or the out port 450 . After the game ball is hit to the left, the game ball 224 rolling in the flow path 222 toward the first start port 5442 continues to have a feeling of winning the prize to the first start port 5442, but it goes to the first start port 5442. As for the game ball 2226 that has deviated from the flow path 222 and has not won any of the general winning ports 53, 54, 55, the conventional pachinko machine uses the first starting port (corresponding to the first starting port 5442 of the present embodiment). The expectation of winning a prize will be lost. Also, even if the game ball 224 rolls in the flow path 222 toward the first starting port 5442, if it does not win the first starting port 5442, the expectation of winning is lost at that time. In this embodiment, when the left-handed game ball (game ball flowing down the left region) rolls in the flow path 222 toward the first start port 5442 but does not enter the first start port 5442, and , Even if it does not win any of the general winning openings 53, 54, 55 after deviating from the flow path 222 heading to the first starting opening 5442, these game balls will reach the out opening 57 In between, it necessarily goes through the second starting port receiving area (upstream of the blade member 4620 of the normal electric accessory 460). As described above, the upstream of the blade member 4620, if the blade member 4620 is open, it is the area (second start opening receiving area) where it is possible to receive the game ball to the second start opening 440, so the second When rolling in the flow path 222 toward one starting port 5442 but not winning the first starting port 5442, and when deviating from the flow path 222 toward the first starting port 5442 and further general winning ports 53, 54, 55 Even if the player does not win the prize at the second starting port 440, the expectation of winning the prize at the second starting port 440 continues, and the decline in interest can be suppressed.

In the present embodiment, since the passage gate 49 is arranged in the right region, there is little expectation that the blade member 4620 of the normal electric accessory 460 will be opened when the ball is hit left. However, immediately after the jackpot game state or the time-saving game state ends, the variable display of normal symbols may be suspended. Also, even if the player hits left, a game ball that has vigorously jumped into the game area 20 may flow down the right side area. Therefore, even in the normal game state, the blade member 4620 of the normal electric accessory 460 is rarely opened. In addition, the guide nail 700 prevents not only the game ball that has flowed down in the right side area but also the game ball that has rolled to the side of the guide member 700 due to excess momentum from the game ball that has flowed down in the left side area, and immediately flows into the out port 57. Since it has a suppressing function, if the blade member 4620 is open, there is a possibility of winning the second starting port 440 . Therefore, even if the expectation of winning the first starting port 5442 or the general winning ports 53, 54, 55 for the left-handed game ball is lost, the expectation of winning the second starting port 440 continues. , it is possible to suppress the decline in interest.

In this embodiment, the passage gate 49 is arranged in the right area, but instead of this, the passage gate may be arranged in the left area. In this case, there is a possibility that the frequency with which the blade member 4620 of the normal electric accessory 460 is opened is increased compared to the case where the passage gate 49 is arranged in the right region. Therefore, even if the left-handed game ball loses the expectation of winning the first starting port 5442, it is possible to continue the winning of the second starting port 440 with a higher expectation. .

Among the left-handed game balls (game balls that flowed down in the left region), as game balls that did not reach above the normal electric accessory unit 400 or did not reach the first start port 5442, for example It may be configured so that there is a game ball that has flowed down the flow passage leading to the out port 450 (see, for example, FIGS. 5 and 51) or the out port 57 existing below the normal electric accessory unit 400 . At this time, among the left-handed game balls, the game balls that did not win the first start port 5442 are the game balls that did not reach the upper part of the normal electric accessory unit 400 or the first start port 5442, and the normal Although there are game balls that have reached above the electric accessory unit 400 or near the first start port 5442 but have not won, any game ball may be guided upstream of the blade member 4620, or Only one game ball may be guided upstream of the blade member 4620 .

In addition, when the game ball that rolls in the direction of the big winning hole 540 among the left-handed game balls (the game ball that has flowed down in the left area) rolls the game ball guiding member 580, the game ball moves to the big winning hole 540 The shutter 610 or the rib provided on the game ball guide member 580 is collided with to enter the first starting port 5442 or flow into the out 55 or out port 450.

In addition, in the present embodiment, the game ball that is hit to the right (flows down the right side area) and does not enter the big winning opening 540 is always placed on the left side beyond the center of the game area 20 where the out opening 57 is arranged. It has a game ball guiding member 580 that leads to the second starting port receiving area of the area. However, the game ball guiding member 580 is such a game ball (a game ball that is hit to the right (flows down the right side area) and does not enter the big winning opening 540), a function that necessarily leads to the second start opening receiving area , and may be limited to leading beyond the center of the game area 20 to the left area. For example, the game ball guiding member 580 has the function of guiding such a game ball to the left area, but the game ball guided to the left area is further distributed to a plurality of areas including the second start opening receiving area. It corresponds to what is configured.

In addition, in the present embodiment, the game ball that is hit to the right (flows down the right area) and does not enter the big winning opening 540 is guided to the left area by the game ball guide member 580. The game ball guide member 580 is not necessarily essential, and for example, the game ball that is hit to the right and has not entered the big winning opening 540 may be guided to the left area only by the guide nail.

In addition, in the present embodiment, the game ball guide member is used as a flow path for a game ball that is hit to the right (flows down the right side area) and reaches the exit side of the big winning opening 540 without entering the big winning opening 540. A flow-down path connecting the exit side of 580 and the out port 57 is formed, and the game ball flowing down this flow-down path always passes through the second start port receiving area before reaching the out port 57 It is designed to In this embodiment, since the second starting port 440 is formed in the left area, the game ball flowing down the above flow path is always guided to the left area. However, in view of the idea that the game ball flowing down the path always passes through the second starting hole receiving area before reaching the out hole 57, in such a case, the second starting hole 440 is located in the left side area. Being placed is not essential.

[Construction of back unit]
The configuration of the back unit 176 will be described below with reference to FIGS. 17 to 22. FIG. FIG. 17 is an example of a front view of the rear unit 176. As shown in FIG. FIG. 18 is an example of a rear view of the rear unit 176. As shown in FIG. FIG. 19 is an example of a perspective view of the rear unit 176 as seen obliquely from the upper right front side. FIG. 20 is an example of a perspective view of the rear unit 176 as seen obliquely from the upper left of the rear surface. FIG. 21 is an example of an exploded perspective view of the rear unit 176 viewed obliquely from the upper right front side. FIG. 22 is an example of an exploded perspective view of the rear unit 176 viewed obliquely from the upper left of the rear surface.

As described above, the back unit 176 includes an upper front component 1000, an upper back component 1100, a lower component 1200, a corner component 1300, a side component 1400, a middle panel 1500, and an attack ball gutter 1600. , a main board case 1700 and a rear box 1800 . Note that the corner accessory 1300 includes an upper corner accessory 1320 and a lower corner accessory 1350 .

The rear box 1800 has a box shape, and an opening 1820 is formed substantially in the center. The liquid crystal display device 16 and the like are arranged in this opening 1820 .

The upper rear accessory 1100 (more specifically, a base member 1180 (see FIG. 69, for example) described later) is attached and fixed above the opening 1820 on the front side of the rear box 1800 . Details of the upper back accessory 1100 will be described later.

The lower accessory 1200 (more specifically, a lower accessory fixing base 1220 (see, for example, FIG. 77) described later) is attached and fixed below the opening 1820 on the front side of the rear box 1800 . Details of the lower accessory 1200 will be described later.

The side accessory 1400 (more specifically, a mounting plate 1410 (see, for example, FIG. 107), which will be described later) is attached and fixed to the right side of the opening 1820 on the front side of the rear box 1800 . The details of the side role item 1400 will be described later.

The upper corner accessory 1320 (see, for example, FIG. 88) is placed in front of the upper back accessory movable decorative body 110 so that the first movable body 1330 is positioned at the upper left corner of the liquid crystal display device 16, and the second movable body 1330 is positioned forward. The bodies 1340 are attached and fixed to the rear box 1800 so as to be positioned at the upper right corners of the liquid crystal display device 16, respectively. The lower corner accessory 1350 is located forward of the lower accessory 1200, with the third movable body 1355 positioned at the lower left corner of the liquid crystal display device 16 and the fourth movable body 1357 positioned at the lower right corner of the liquid crystal display device 16. , are attached and fixed to the rear box 1800 so as to be positioned respectively. The first movable body 1330, the second movable body 1340, the third movable body 1355, and the fourth movable body 1357 are arranged at approximately the same position in the front-rear direction. Details of the upper corner accessory 1320 will be described later.

The upper front accessory 1000 (more specifically, a decorative accessory base member 1010 (see, for example, FIG. 61) which will be described later) is attached and fixed to the rear box 1800 so as to be positioned forward of the upper back accessory 1000. be. Details of the upper front accessory 1000 will be described later.

The middle panel 1500 is arranged in an area corresponding to a part of the game area 20 behind the transparent panel 172 , and includes a first middle panel 1520 and a second middle panel 1550 . The first middle panel 1520 is a plate-like member having a picture or pattern on the front surface, and the picture or pattern on the front surface can be seen through the transparent panel 172 . The second middle panel 1550 is a plate-like member having an annular opening window 1552, which will be described later in detail, and is configured such that a predetermined picture appears in the opening window when predetermined conditions are met. Details of the second middle panel 1550 will be described later.

The attack ball gutter 1600 is a gutter-shaped one that receives the game balls that have entered the general winning opening 56 and discharges them to the outside of the pachinko game machine 1 . In the pachinko game machine 1 of the present embodiment, the game balls that have won the big prize opening 540 are combined and discharged to the outside of the pachinko game machine 1 .

The main board case 1700 accommodates a lamp relay board 1710, a main control relay board 1720, and the like.

The back unit 176 further comprises a first ornamental design 1900 and a second ornamental design 1920 . The first decorative design 1900 is attached to the front right side of the upper back accessory 1100 . The second decorative design 1920 is attached to the front left side of the upper back accessory 1100 . The first decorative design 1900 and the second decorative design 1920 are decorated on the front surface, and both of them have a design function without being movable.

[Attacker Unit]
The configuration of the attacker unit 500 will be described in detail below with reference to FIGS. 23 to 34. FIG.

The attacker unit 500 includes a base member 510 , a front side plate portion 520 , a guideway 530 , a big winning opening 540 , a rear side case 550 and a special electric accessory 600 .

A base member 510 shown in FIGS. 23 to 28, 30 and 31 is a base member of the attacker unit 500. As shown in FIG. The base member 510 is formed in an elongated substantially flat plate shape. The base member 510 is arranged with its longitudinal direction oriented in the left-right direction and its plate surface oriented in the front-rear direction. Various members constituting the attacker unit 500 are attached to the base member 510 . A slit 511 is formed in the base member 510 .

The slit 511 is formed through the base member 510 in the front-rear direction. The slit 511 is formed in the upper portion of the base member 510 in a substantially linear shape extending while gently sloping from right to left in a front view. A shutter 610 (more specifically, a guiding portion 611 of the shutter 610 ), which will be described later, is arranged in the slit 511 .

The front side plate portion 520 shown in FIGS. 23 to 27 and 29 is a member arranged at the front end portion of the attacker unit 500. As shown in FIGS. The front side plate portion 520 is formed in substantially the same shape and size as the base member 510 . The front side plate portion 520 is arranged with its plate surface directed in the front-rear direction. The front side plate portion 520 faces the base member 510 in the front-rear direction and is arranged in a state spaced forward from the base member 510 . In this way, between the front side plate portion 520 and the base member 510, a gap (hereinafter referred to as "special electric role space R2") is formed which is large enough for a game ball to enter. The special electric accessory space R2 is formed in substantially the same shape and size as the front side plate portion 520 and the base member 510 when viewed from the front. The front side plate portion 520 is attached to the base member 510 via screws or the like. The front side plate portion 520 is made of a transparent resin material, and the rear side of the front side plate portion 520 is visible to the player.

The guide path 530 shown in FIGS. 23 and 25 to 31 properly guides the moving game ball in a predetermined direction. The guide path 530 is formed by the shutter 610 and a substantially plate-like member (wall portion) erected rearward from the front side plate portion 520 . The taxiway 530 includes a first taxiway 531 , a second taxiway 532 and a third taxiway 533 .

It should be noted that the guideway 530 (more specifically, the first guideway 531) is formed by the shutter 610 as described above. Here, as will be described later, the shutter 610 is configured to be movable back and forth with respect to the base member 510 via the slit 511 . In such a configuration of the shutter 610 , the first guiding path 531 is formed when the shutter 610 advances forward with respect to the base member 510 . Therefore, for the sake of convenience, the following description will be made on the assumption that the shutter 610 is advanced forward with respect to the base member 510 (the first guide path 531 is formed).

The first guideway 531 is arranged in the vicinity of the upper end of the special electric role space R2. The first guideway 531 is formed in a substantially linear shape extending from the right to the left while gently inclining. The length in the left-right direction (longitudinal direction) of the first guide path 531 is slightly shorter than that of the base member 510 . The left end of the first guideway 531 is formed in the vicinity of the left end of the special electric role space R2. The right end of the first guideway 531 is formed near the right end of the special electric role space R2. The first guiding path 531 configured in this way guides the moving game ball from right to left. The first guideway 531 has a deceleration rib 534 .

The deceleration rib 534 serves to reduce the moving speed of the game ball guided (moved) by the first guide path 531 (deceleration means). The deceleration rib 534 is composed of a plurality of rear projections 534 a projecting forward from the base member 510 and a plurality of front projections 534 b projecting rearward from the front plate portion 520 . In this embodiment, six rear projections 534a are provided. Also, five front protrusions 534b are provided. The plurality of rear projections 534a and front projections 534b are arranged along the extending direction (horizontal direction) of the first guideway 531 with appropriate spacing therebetween. The appropriate interval is set to be longer than at least the diameter of the game ball. In addition, the plurality of rear projections 534a and front projections 534b are arranged so as not to overlap in front view (not facing each other in the front-rear direction, but shifted in the left-right direction).

With such a configuration of the first guideway 531, the game ball (moved by the first guideway 531) collides with the rear protrusion 534a and the front protrusion 534b, and moves in a zigzag shape in plan view. (Because smooth movement of the game ball is restricted), the movement speed is reduced.

By reducing the moving speed of the game ball moved along the first guide path 531 in this way, it is possible to create a situation in which a plurality of game balls are moving on the first guide path 531 . Thus, when a plurality of game balls are moving on the first guideway 531, the plurality of game balls are guided to the third guideway 533 only by opening the shutter 610 once. , and can be made to win a prize in the big prize opening 540.例文帳に追加That is, it is possible to quickly digest the rounds in the jackpot game. Also, even if the opening time of the shutter 610 is short, if many game balls stay on the shutter 610, many prizes can be won. In addition, since many game balls can be won at once, winning more than the number of possible wins in one round of the jackpot game (so-called over-winning) is likely to occur.

The second taxiway 532 is arranged immediately to the right of the first taxiway 531 in the special electric role space R2. The second guideway 532 is formed in a substantially linear shape extending from right to left while gently inclining. The inclination angle of the second guideway 532 is formed to be substantially the same as the inclination angle of the first guideway 531 . In this way, the second guideway 532 and the first guideway 531 are configured as one substantially linear guideway that gently slopes from right to left. The second guideway 532 configured in this manner guides the moving game ball from right to left (first guideway 531 side).

The third guideway 533 is arranged substantially in the center of the special electric role space R2 in the vertical direction. The third guideway 533 is formed in a substantially linear shape extending from the right to the left while gently inclining. The third guideway 533 is arranged below the first guideway 531 . The third guideway 533 is formed in substantially the same shape and size as the first guideway 531 when viewed from the front.

Further, as shown in FIG. 31 and the like, a wall connected to the third guideway 533 is arranged between the left end of the third guideway 533 and the left end of the first guideway 531 . A wall connected to the third guideway 533 is arranged between the right end of the third guideway 533 and the right end of the second guideway 532 . Thus, the third guiding path 533 is formed in a concave shape when viewed from the front.

The third guiding path 533 configured in this manner guides the moving game ball from the right to the left (towards the big winning opening 540). The third guiding path 533 has a guide portion 535 .

The guide part 535 is formed at the bottom of the third guideway 533 . The guide portion 535 is a substantially triangular plate-like member in plan view. The guide part 535 is configured to be able to guide the game ball guided (moved) by the third guide path 533 backward.

25, 28, 30 and 31 is formed by penetrating the base member 510 in the front-rear direction. The big winning opening 540 is formed behind the lowest portion of the third guideway 533 (behind the guide portion 535). The big winning opening 540 has a count switch 541 . As shown in FIG. 27 , the count switch 541 is arranged behind and below the big winning opening 540 .

The rear case 550 shown in FIGS. 23, 25 to 27, 31, 33, and 34 includes various members (shutter 610, grand prize opening solenoid 620, link arm 630, etc.) constituting the special electric accessory 600. ). The rear case 550 is formed in a substantially rectangular hollow box shape in a plan view. As shown in FIG. 33, the rear case 550 is partitioned into an upper space and a lower space by a substantially flat mounting portion 551 that is substantially rectangular in plan view. That is, the rear case 550 is formed into a two-story structure by the mounting portion 551, and predetermined members are arranged in the upper space and the lower space, respectively. Specifically, the shutter 610, the link arm 630, and the like are arranged in the upper space. In addition, a large winning opening solenoid 620 and the like are arranged in the lower space. The rear case 550 is attached to the rear side surface of the base member 510 via screws or the like. The inside and outside of the rear case 550 (in front of the base member 510) communicate with each other via a slit 511. As shown in FIG.

[Special electric accessories]
The configuration of the special electric accessory 6000 according to another example will be described in detail below with reference to FIGS. 35 to 50. FIG.

In addition, the special electric accessory 6000 switches between a state (open state) in which it is easy for the game ball to enter the large prize-winning port 540 and a state (closed state) in which it is difficult for the game ball to enter the large-prize winning port 540. However, unless otherwise specified, the arrangement and configuration of various members will be described below assuming that they are in a closed state.

The special electric accessory 6000 comprises a housing portion 6001, a shutter 6002, a winning opening solenoid 6003, a link arm 6004 and a regulating member 6005, as shown in FIGS.

A housing portion 6001 shown in FIGS. 35 to 38 is a member that houses various members (shutter 6002, big winning opening solenoid 6003, link arm 6004, regulation member 6005, etc.) that constitute the special electric accessory 6000. FIG. The housing portion 6001 is formed in a substantially box-like shape with an upper side and a front side opened. The housing portion 6001 is attached to the rear side surface of the base member 510 (see FIG. 23, etc.) via screws or the like. The housing portion 6001 has a communication opening 6011 , a support shaft 6012 , a boss portion 6013 and a guide opening 6014 .

The communication opening 6011 communicates between the upper side and the lower side of the accommodating section 6001 . A communication opening 6011 is formed on the right side of the accommodating portion 6001 . The communication opening 6011 is formed so as to vertically penetrate the accommodating portion 6001 . The communication opening 6011 is formed so as to surround the boss portion 6013 to be described later from the rear to the right in plan view.

The support shaft 6012 rotatably supports a link arm 6004, which will be described later. The support shaft 6012 is formed in a substantially columnar shape with its longitudinal direction oriented vertically. The support shaft 6012 is formed to protrude upward. The support shaft 6012 is formed in the rear right portion of the housing portion 6001 and behind the communication opening 6011 .

The boss portion 6013 rotatably supports a later-described restricting member 6005 . The boss portion 6013 is formed in a substantially cylindrical shape with its longitudinal direction oriented in the vertical direction. Boss portion 6013 is formed to protrude upward. The boss portion 6013 is formed in the vicinity of the center of the accommodating portion 6001 (slightly to the right of the center) in a plan view and in front of the communication opening 6011 to the left. 35 to 37 and other appropriate drawings, the boss portion 6013 is shown in a state in which a screw is attached to support the regulating member 6005. As shown in FIG.

Guidance opening 6014 is for inserting guide shaft 6056 of regulation member 6005, which will be described later. More specifically, it defines the movement (displacement) path of the guide shaft 6056 of the regulating member 6005, as will be described later. The guiding opening 6014 is formed in the vicinity of the center of the accommodating portion 6001 (slightly to the right of the center and to the left of the boss portion 6013) in plan view. The guide opening 6014 is formed so as to pass through the accommodating portion 6001 in the vertical direction. The guide opening 6014 is formed in a substantially L shape in a plan view that is bent in the middle from one longitudinal end to the other longitudinal end. More specifically, the guide opening 6014 comprises a first guide opening 6016 and a second guide opening 6017, as shown in FIG. 38(a).

The first guide opening 6016 is formed to extend substantially linearly in the left-right direction. The first guide opening 6016 is formed rearward in the front-rear direction with respect to the center P of the boss portion 6013 . The length in the left-right direction of the first guide opening 6016 is formed to be substantially the same as the length in the left-right direction of the connection opening 6036 of the big winning opening solenoid 6003, which will be described later.

The second guide opening 6017 is formed to extend arcuately in plan view. More specifically, the second guide opening 6017 is formed so as to overlap a portion of a virtual circle centered on the center P of the boss 6013 (see the dashed-dotted arrow in FIG. 38(a)). Thus, the second guide opening 6017 is formed in the vicinity of the boss portion 6013 so as to extend along the outline of the boss portion 6013 in plan view. The rear end of the second guide opening 6017 is connected with the left end of the first guide opening 6016 . A front end portion of the second guide opening 6017 is formed forward of the center P of the boss portion 6013 in the front-rear direction.

A shutter 6002 shown in FIGS. 35 to 37 is a member (a member for switching between an open state and a closed state) that opens and closes the large winning opening 540 by power from a large winning opening solenoid 6003, which will be described later. The structure of the shutter 6002 is substantially the same as the shutter 610 of the special electric accessory 600 (see FIGS. 31 and 32(c), etc.). The shutter 6002 has an elongated plate portion 6021 , a connecting plate portion 6022 and a connecting shaft 6023 .

The elongated plate portion 6021 is a member that forms the first guiding path 531 (see FIG. 31 and the like). The elongated plate portion 6021 is formed in an elongated substantially flat plate shape. The elongated plate portion 6021 is formed such that its longitudinal direction is oriented in the left-right direction in a plan view, and is slanted to the left in a front view (the upper surface faces the upper left).

The connecting plate portion 6022 is a member that connects the elongated plate portion 6021 and a connecting shaft 6023 to be described later. The connection plate portion 6022 is formed in a substantially rectangular flat plate shape in plan view. The connection plate portion 6022 is formed to extend rearward from the central portion of the elongated plate portion 6021 in the left-right direction.

The connecting shaft 6023 is connected with a link arm 6004 which will be described later. The connecting shaft 6023 is formed in a substantially columnar shape with its longitudinal direction oriented in the vertical direction. The connecting shaft 6023 is formed to protrude upward. The connecting shaft 6023 is formed near the rear end of the connecting plate portion 6022 .

In the shutter 6002 having such a configuration, the elongated plate portion 6021 is inserted into the slit 511 (see FIG. 31, etc.) from behind, and the connection plate portion 6022 is placed on the bottom surface of the housing portion 6001. Housed in 6001. The shutter 6002 is configured to be slidable in the front-rear direction with respect to the housing portion 6001 .

A large winning opening solenoid 6003 shown in FIGS. 36, 37 and 39 is a member for driving the shutter 6002 . The big winning opening solenoid 6003 includes a solenoid housing portion 6031 , a power generation portion 6032 , a plunger 6033 , a power transmission portion 6034 and a spring 6035 .

The solenoid accommodating portion 6031 is a member that accommodates various members that constitute the big winning opening solenoid 6003 . The solenoid housing portion 6031 is formed in a substantially box shape with an open top. The solenoid accommodating portion 6031 is arranged with its longitudinal direction directed in the left-right direction. The solenoid housing portion 6031 is attached to the housing portion 6001 from below.

The power generator 6032 is a member that generates power for the big winning opening solenoid 6003 . The power generator 6032 is composed of a coil, a fixed iron core, and the like (not shown). The power generator 6032 can attract a plunger 6033, which will be described later, in response to energization from a predetermined power supply. The power generating portion 6032 is formed in a substantially cylindrical shape. The power generating portion 6032 is accommodated inside (left portion) of the solenoid accommodating portion 6031 with its longitudinal direction (axial direction) directed in the left-right direction.

The plunger 6033 is a substantially bar-shaped member (movable iron core). The plunger 6033 is arranged with its longitudinal direction (axial direction) directed in the left-right direction. Plunger 6033 is arranged to extend rightward from power generating portion 6032 . The plunger 6033 is configured to reciprocate in the left-right direction with respect to the power generation unit 6032 .

The power transmission section 6034 is a member that transmits the power generated by the big winning opening solenoid 6003 to another member (specifically, the link arm 6004). The power transmission portion 6034 is formed in a substantially rectangular parallelepiped shape. The power transmission portion 6034 is housed inside (right portion) of the solenoid housing portion 6031 and attached to the right end portion of the plunger 6033 . The power transmission part 6034 has a connection opening 6036 and a connection protrusion 6037 .

The connection opening 6036 is to be connected with a link arm 6004 which will be described later. The connection opening 6036 is formed on the right side of the power transmission portion 6034 in plan view. The connection opening 6036 is formed so as to pass through the power transmission portion 6034 in the vertical direction.

The connecting protrusion 6037 is connected with a regulating member 6005 which will be described later. The connecting protrusion 6037 is formed by a pair of plate-like portions formed to protrude upward. The pair of plate-shaped portions are formed so as to be parallel to each other in the left and right directions. With such a configuration, the connecting protrusion 6037 has a gap extending in the front-rear direction between the pair of plate-like portions. The connecting protrusion 6037 is formed at the left rear end of the power transmission part 6034 . In addition, below, the connection protrusion part 6037 shall point out the said gap.

Spring 6035 is a so-called compression coil spring. The spring 6035, through which the plunger 6033 is inserted, is arranged between the power generation portion 6032 and the power transmission portion 6034 in a constantly compressed state. In this way, the spring 6035 always applies a rightward biasing force to the plunger 6033 (power transmission section 6034).

In the big prize winning opening solenoid 6003 having such a configuration, the plunger 6033 moves rightward by the biasing force of the spring 6035 when the power generating section 6032 is not energized. On the other hand, when the power generating portion 6032 is energized, the plunger 6033 moves leftward against the biasing force of the spring 6035 due to the attractive force of the power generating portion 6032 . In this way, in the big winning opening solenoid 6003, by turning on and off the power generation section 6032, the plunger 6033 can reciprocate in the horizontal direction with respect to the power generation section 6032 to generate power.

In addition, in this embodiment, when the plunger 6033 is moving to the right (that is, when the power generation unit 6032 is not energized), the shutter 6002 slides forward to move the game ball. It becomes a state (closed state) in which it is difficult to win a prize to the big prize mouth 540. On the other hand, when the plunger 6033 is moving to the left (that is, when the power generation unit 6032 is energized), the shutter 6002 slides backward to move the game ball to the large winning opening 540. Winning becomes easy (open state).

A link arm 6004 shown in FIGS. 35 to 37 and 40 interlocks (interlocks) the large winning opening solenoid 6003 and the shutter 6002, and transmits power from the large winning opening solenoid 6003 to the shutter 6002. It is a member. The link arm 6004 is formed in a substantially L shape in plan view by a portion (first link extension portion 6041) extending substantially in the left-right direction and a portion (second link extension portion 6042) extending substantially in the front-rear direction. be done. The link arm 6004 has a central tubular portion 6043 , a connecting opening 6044 , a connecting shaft 6045 and a restricting protrusion 6046 .

The central tubular portion 6043 is inserted through the support shaft 6012 of the housing portion 6001 . The center tubular portion 6043 is formed substantially in the center of the link arm 6004 (connection portion between the first link extension portion 6041 and the second link extension portion 6042) in plan view. The central tubular portion 6043 is formed in a substantially cylindrical shape with its longitudinal direction oriented in the vertical direction. When the support shaft 6012 is inserted through the central tubular portion 6043, the link arm 6004 is supported so as to rotate clockwise or counterclockwise around the central tubular portion 6043 in plan view.

The connecting opening 6044 is through which the connecting shaft 6023 of the shutter 6002 is inserted. A connecting opening 6044 is formed at the left (tip) end of the first link extension 6041 . The connecting opening 6044 is formed to penetrate the first link extending portion 6041 in the vertical direction. The connecting opening 6044 is formed in an elongated hole shape extending linearly from the distal end side to the proximal end side (the central cylindrical portion 6043 side). The length of the connection opening 6044 in the lateral direction in plan view is formed to be substantially the same as the outer diameter of the connection shaft 6023 of the shutter 6002 .

The connecting shaft 6045 is connected with the connecting opening 6036 of the big winning opening solenoid 6003 . The connecting shaft 6045 is formed in a substantially columnar shape with its longitudinal direction oriented in the vertical direction. The connecting shaft 6045 is formed to protrude downward. The connecting shaft 6045 is formed at the front (tip) end of the second link extending portion 6042 . The outer diameter of the connecting shaft 6045 is formed to be smaller than the inner diameter (horizontal length) of the connecting opening 6036 of the big winning opening solenoid 6003 .

The restricting protrusion 6046 abuts on a restricting block portion 6054 of the restricting member 6005, which will be described later, in a predetermined case. The restricting protrusion 6046 is formed in a plate shape protruding downward. The restricting protrusion 6046 is formed in the vicinity of the base end of the first link extension 6041 and on the front left side of the central cylindrical portion 6043 in plan view. A rear side surface of the restricting protrusion 6046 is formed to be a flat surface facing rearward.

A regulating member 6005 shown in FIGS. 35 to 37 and 41 is a member for regulating unintentional opening of the shutter 6002 when the shutter 6002 is in the closed state. The regulating member 6005 includes a central tubular portion 6053 , a regulating block portion 6054 , a connecting shaft 6055 and a guiding shaft 6056 .

The central cylindrical portion 6053 is inserted through the boss portion 6013 of the housing portion 6001 . The central tubular portion 6053 is formed substantially in the center of the regulating member 6005 in plan view. The central tubular portion 6053 is formed in a substantially cylindrical shape with its longitudinal direction oriented in the vertical direction. In addition, the central tubular portion 6053 is formed in an elongated hole shape extending in the left-right direction in a plan view.

A plate-like portion (first restricting extension portion 6051 ) extending so as to spread in plan view is formed on the right rear of the central cylindrical portion 6053 . In addition, a plate-like portion (second restricting extension portion 6052) is formed on the left side of the central cylindrical portion 6053 so as to spread out in plan view. In this way, the central tubular portion 6053, the first restricting extension portion 6051, and the second restricting extension portion 6052 are formed in a substantially L-shaped mutual positional relationship in plan view. Note that when the boss portion 6013 is inserted through the central tubular portion 6053, the restricting member 6005 is supported so as to rotate clockwise or counterclockwise around the central tubular portion 6053 in a plan view.

The regulating block portion 6054 abuts on the regulating projection portion 6046 of the link arm 6004 in a predetermined case. The restriction block portion 6054 is a substantially rectangular parallelepiped (block-shaped) portion that protrudes upward. The regulating block portion 6054 is formed substantially in the center of the first regulating extension portion 6051 (that is, right rear of the central cylindrical portion 6053) in plan view. A front side surface of the regulation block portion 6054 is formed to be a flat surface facing forward.

The connecting shaft 6055 is connected to the big winning opening solenoid 6003 . The connecting shaft 6055 is formed in a substantially columnar shape with its longitudinal direction oriented in the vertical direction. The connecting shaft 6055 is formed to protrude downward. The connecting shaft 6055 is formed substantially in the center of the first restricting extension portion 6051 (that is, right rear of the central cylindrical portion 6053) in plan view. Thus, the axial center of the connecting shaft 6055 is formed so as to substantially overlap the axial center of the regulation block portion 6054 in the vertical direction. The outer diameter of the connecting shaft 6055 is formed to be smaller than the width of the connecting protrusion 6037 of the power transmission portion 6034 (that is, the gap of the connecting protrusion 6037).

The guide shaft 6056 is inserted through the guide opening 6014 of the housing portion 6001 . The guide shaft 6056 is formed in a substantially columnar shape with its longitudinal direction oriented vertically. Guide shaft 6056 is formed to protrude downward. The connecting shaft 6055 is formed substantially in the center of the second restricting extension portion 6052 (that is, to the left of the central cylindrical portion 6053) in plan view. The outer diameter of the guide shaft 6056 is formed to be substantially the same as the length of the guide opening 6014 (the first guide opening 6016 and the second guide opening 6017) in the lateral direction in plan view.

Below, using FIGS. 35 to 37 and FIGS. 42 to 46, the assembly structure of the housing portion 6001, the shutter 6002, the winning opening solenoid 6003, the link arm 6004, and the regulating member 6005 in the special electric accessory 6000 will be described. do.

45 and subsequent drawings, the accommodating portion 6001 is indicated by broken lines, but the support shaft 6012, the boss portion 6013, and the guide opening portion 6014 are indicated by solid lines for convenience of explanation. 45 and subsequent drawings, the link arm 6004 is indicated by a broken line, but the restricting protrusion 6046 is indicated by a solid line for convenience of explanation. In addition, in the drawings after FIG. 46, the illustration of the configuration of each member is simplified for convenience of explanation.

First, an outline of the assembly structure of various members (the shutter 6002, the big winning opening solenoid 6003, the link arm 6004 and the regulation member 6005) to the housing portion 6001 will be described.

The shutter 6002 is placed on the bottom surface of the housing portion 6001 . Thus, the shutter 6002 is arranged so as to be slidable in the front-rear direction with respect to the accommodating portion 6001 .

Also, the big winning opening solenoid 6003 is attached to the housing portion 6001 from below. Thus, the upper side and the lower side of the housing portion 6001 (the power transmission portion 6034 of the big winning opening solenoid 6003) are communicated through the communication opening portion 6011.

In addition, the support shaft 6012 of the housing portion 6001 is inserted through the central tubular portion 6043 of the link arm 6004 from below so as to be relatively rotatable. Thus, the link arm 6004 is rotatably supported in the housing portion 6001 about the support shaft 6012 of the housing portion 6001 in a plan view clockwise or counterclockwise.

In addition, the boss portion 6013 of the accommodating portion 6001 is inserted through the central tubular portion 6053 of the restricting member 6005 from below so as to be relatively rotatable. In this way, the restricting member 6005 is supported by the accommodating portion 6001 so as to be rotatable clockwise or counterclockwise in a plan view around the boss portion 6013 of the accommodating portion 6001 .

Next, the details of the assembly structure of various members will be described.

As described above, in a state in which the link arm 6004 is supported by the support shaft 6012 of the housing portion 6001, the connecting shaft 6045 of the link arm 6004 extends downwardly of the housing portion 6001 through the communication opening 6011 of the housing portion 6001. and is protruded. The connecting shaft 6045 of the link arm 6004 is inserted from above into the connecting opening 6036 of the big winning opening solenoid 6003 below the housing portion 6001 . In this way, the link arm 6004 and the big winning opening solenoid 6003 are interlockably connected via the connecting shaft 6045 and the connecting opening 6036 .

Incidentally, as shown in FIG. 46( a ), the connecting shaft 6045 of the link arm 6004 is arranged so as to contact the left edge of the connecting opening 6036 of the big winning opening solenoid 6003 . That is, the connecting shaft 6045 of the link arm 6004 is arranged with a gap in the left-right direction in plan view between the right edge of the connecting opening 6036 of the big winning opening solenoid 6003 and the connecting shaft 6045 of the link arm 6004 .

Further, in a state in which the link arm 6004 is supported by the support shaft 6012 of the housing portion 6001, the connection shaft 6023 of the shutter 6002 is inserted through the connection opening 6044 of the link arm 6004 from below. Thus, the link arm 6004 and the shutter 6002 are interlockably connected via the connecting opening 6044 and the connecting shaft 6023 .

Also, in a state in which the link arm 6004 is supported by the support shaft 6012 of the housing portion 6001 , the regulating protrusion 6046 of the link arm 6004 contacts the regulating block portion 6054 of the regulating member 6005 .

Note that, as shown in FIG. 46(a), the rear side surface of the restricting protrusion 6046 of the link arm 6004 and the front side surface of the restricting block portion 6054 of the restricting member 6005 are planes parallel to each other. surface contact).

46(a) and 46(b), when the link arm 6004 is supported by the support shaft 6012 of the housing portion 6001, the boss portion 6013 of the housing portion 6001 is positioned at the center cylinder of the restricting member 6005. It is positioned to abut the left edge of portion 6053 .

Further, in a state in which the regulating member 6005 is supported by the boss portion 6013 of the accommodating portion 6001, the connecting shaft 6055 of the regulating member 6005 protrudes downward from the accommodating portion 6001 through the communication opening 6011 of the accommodating portion 6001. be done. The connecting shaft 6055 of the regulating member 6005 is inserted from above into the connecting protrusion 6037 (that is, the gap of the connecting protrusion 6037) of the big winning opening solenoid 6003 below the housing portion 6001. Thus, the link arm 6004 and the regulating member 6005 are interlockably connected via the connecting shaft 6055 and the connecting protrusion 6037 .

As shown in FIG. 46(b), the connecting shaft 6055 of the regulating member 6005 is arranged in front of the connecting protrusion 6037 of the big winning opening solenoid 6003 (that is, the gap of the connecting protrusion 6037).

Further, in a state in which the regulating member 6005 is supported by the boss portion 6013 of the housing portion 6001, the guiding shaft 6056 of the regulating member 6005 is inserted through the guiding opening portion 6014 of the housing portion 6001 from above.

As shown in FIG. 46(b), the guide shaft 6056 of the regulating member 6005 is the first guide opening of the first guide opening 6016 and the second guide opening 6017 of the guide opening 6014 of the housing portion 6001. 6016 (more specifically, abutting the right end of the first guide opening 6016).

As described above, in the state where the left side edge of the central tubular portion 6053 of the regulating member 6005 is in contact with the boss portion 6013 of the accommodating portion 6001, the guide shaft 6056 of the regulating member 6005 is aligned with the first guide opening 6016. is in contact with the right end of the

46 and 50, the unintentional opening of the shutter 6002 (in more detail describes in detail the regulation of unintended rotation of the link arm 6004 and unintended movement of the shutter 6002).

In this embodiment, the unintentional opening of the shutter 6002 does not mean opening according to the power generated by the big winning opening solenoid 6003, but an external force applied directly to the shutter 6002 (for example, a game ball hitting the shutter 6002). collision of the shutter 6002, or tampering with the shutter 6002 by an illicit person).

In the following description, the direction of rotation of each member is based on the plan view unless otherwise specified. Further, in the following description, a state in which unintended opening of the shutter 6002 is restricted by the restricting member 6005 and the guiding opening 6014 (locking means) of the accommodating portion 6001 is referred to as a "locked state."

In the special electric accessory 6000 assembled as described above, when an external force (a force that causes the shutter 6002 to slide backward) is applied directly to the shutter 6002, the opening 6044 and the connecting shaft 6023 , a force is transmitted from the shutter 6002 to the link arm 6004 to rotate it clockwise.

Note that, as shown in FIG. 46(a), the restriction protrusion 6046 of the link arm 6004 and the restriction block 6054 of the restriction member 6005 move backward (that is, in the moving direction when the link arm rotates clockwise). abutted. Therefore, when a force that rotates clockwise is transmitted from the shutter 6002 to the link arm 6004 , the link arm 6004 rotates counterclockwise to the restriction member 6005 via the restriction projection 6046 and the restriction block 6054 . A rotating force is transmitted.

Here, as shown in FIG. 46(b), the guide shaft 6056 of the regulating member 6005 is positioned within the first guide opening 6016 (more specifically, the right end of the first guide opening 6016 and abutting). That is, the edge of the first guide opening 6016 (hereinafter referred to as the front edge) is arranged in front of the guide shaft 6056 of the regulating member 6005 (moving direction when the regulating member 6005 rotates counterclockwise). be. Therefore, as shown in FIG. 50(a), even if a counterclockwise rotating force is transmitted from the link arm 6004 to the restricting member 6005, the guide shaft 6056 of the restricting member 6005 is the first one. Since it interferes with the front edge of the guiding opening 6016, the restricting member 6005 cannot rotate.

As described above, since the restricting member 6005 cannot rotate, the link arm 6004 transmitting force to the restricting member 6005 cannot rotate either. Further, since the link arm 6004 cannot rotate, the shutter 6002 transmitting force to the link arm 6004 cannot move either. That is, even when an external force is directly applied to the shutter 6002, the shutter 6002 does not move backward against the external force and can maintain the closed state.

As described above, when the guiding shaft 6056 of the regulating member 6005 is positioned within the first guiding opening 6016, the shutter 6002 is moved as intended by the regulating member 6005 and the guiding opening 6014 (locking means) of the accommodating portion 6001. Unintended opening (more specifically, unintended rotation of the link arm 6004 and unintended movement of the shutter 6002) is restricted (locked state).

When the link arm 6004 transmits a counterclockwise rotating force to the restricting member 6005 in the locked state, the rear side surface of the restricting protrusion 6046 of the link arm 6004 and the restricting block 6054 are separated. The front side surfaces press each other with a relatively strong force. However, the rear side surface of the restricting projection portion 6046 of the link arm 6004 and the front side surface of the restricting block portion 6054 of the restricting member 6005 are in surface contact, not point contact, as described above. can be made

46 to 50, the configuration for opening the shutter 6002 according to the power generated by the big winning opening solenoid 6003 when the shutter 6002 is closed will be described in detail.

As will be described later, when the shutter 6002 is opened according to the power generated by the big winning opening solenoid 6003, unlike the case where the external force is applied directly to the shutter 6002, the regulation member 6005 and the housing portion 6001 The locked state by the guide opening 6014 (locking means) is released.

When the guide shaft 6056 of the regulating member 6005 is positioned within the first guide opening 6016 (when the shutter 6002 is in the closed state), when the shutter 6002 is to be opened, the power generating section 6032 of the big winning opening solenoid 6003 is energized. is done. When the power generating section 6032 is energized, the plunger 6033 starts to move leftward as shown in FIGS. Further, when the plunger 6033 starts to move leftward, the power transmission part 6034 (connecting opening 6036 and connecting projection 6037) fixed to the right end of the plunger 6033 also moves leftward.

When the connecting protrusion 6037 of the power transmission section 6034 moves to the left, the power from the big winning opening solenoid 6003 is transmitted to the regulating member 6005 via the connecting shaft 6055 between the connecting protrusion 6037 and the regulating member 6005. . Specifically, the connecting protrusion 6037 of the power transmission portion 6034 presses the connecting shaft 6055 of the restricting member 6005 leftward. Thus, when power is transmitted from the big winning opening solenoid 6003 , the regulating member 6005 moves to the left with respect to the accommodating portion 6001 .

Specifically, the central tubular portion 6053 of the restricting member 6005 moves to the left with respect to the boss portion 6013 of the housing portion 6001 , and the right edge portion of the central tubular portion 6053 comes into contact with the boss portion 6013 . In addition, the guide shaft 6056 of the regulating member 6005 moves leftward with respect to the first guide opening 6016 of the housing portion 6001, and moves toward the left end of the first guide opening 6016 (the rear end of the second guide opening 6017). part).

In the following description, the movement of the power transmission portion 6034 until the right edge of the central cylindrical portion 6053 of the restricting member 6005 abuts against the boss portion 6013 (the guide shaft 6056 of the restricting member 6005 is moved to the first guide opening of the housing portion 6001). 6016) is referred to as "first movement of the power transmission portion 6034". Also, the movement of the power transmission portion 6034 after the right edge of the central cylindrical portion 6053 of the regulating member 6005 is brought into contact with the boss portion 6013 (the guide shaft 6056 of the regulating member 6005 is moved to the first guide opening 6016 of the accommodating portion 6001). ) is referred to as "second movement of the power transmission portion 6034".

Further, when the connecting opening 6036 of the power transmitting section 6034 moves leftward by the first movement of the power transmitting section 6034, the connecting opening 6036 moves leftward with respect to the connecting shaft 6045 of the link arm 6004. Then, the right edge of the connecting opening 6036 abuts on the connecting shaft 6045 . In addition, in the first movement of the power transmission section 6034, the connection opening 6036 of the power transmission section 6034 does not press the connection shaft 6045 of the link arm 6004 during the movement. That is, in the first movement of the power transmission section 6034, the power from the big winning opening solenoid 6003 is not transmitted to the link arm 6004.

In the first movement of the power transmission portion 6034, the timing at which the guide shaft 6056 of the regulating member 6005 contacts the left end portion of the first guide opening portion 6016 (the rear end portion of the second guide opening portion 6017) The timing at which the right edge of the central tubular portion 6053 of the member 6005 contacts the boss portion 6013 and the timing at which the right edge of the connecting opening 6036 of the power transmission portion 6034 contacts the connecting shaft 6045 of the link arm 6004 are all They are set to be approximately the same.

In addition, in the first movement of the power transmission portion 6034, the guide shaft 6056 of the regulating member 6005 is positioned inside the first guide opening 6016, and forward of the guide shaft 6056 (the regulating member 6005 rotates counterclockwise). The forward edge of the first guide opening 6016 is located in the direction of movement when moving). That is, in the first movement of the power transmission portion 6034, even if a force is transmitted from the link arm 6004 to the regulating member 6005 to rotate it counterclockwise, the guide shaft 6056 of the regulating member 6005 is Since it interferes with the front side edge of the first guide opening 6016, the locked state by the regulation member 6005 and the guide opening 6014 (locking means) of the accommodating portion 6001 is continued.

Further, as described above, in the first movement of the power transmission section 6034, the power from the big winning opening solenoid 6003 is not transmitted to the link arm 6004. In other words, the power from the big winning opening solenoid 6003 is transmitted from the power transmission section 6034 to the regulation member 6005, but is not transmitted to other members (for example, the link arm 6004). In this way, although the restricting member 6005 moves leftward, the link arm 6004 and the shutter 6002 do not rotate (move) in any direction, and maintain the attitude when the shutter 6002 is closed. Become.

In this state, as shown in FIGS. 47 and 48, when the power transmission section 6034 moves further to the left (when the power transmission section 6034 performs the second movement), the connecting protrusion of the power transmission section 6034 Power from the big winning opening solenoid 6003 is transmitted to the regulation member 6005 via the connecting shaft 6055 of the regulation member 6005 and the control member 6037 . Specifically, the connecting protrusion 6037 of the power transmission portion 6034 presses the connecting shaft 6055 of the restricting member 6005 leftward.

Here, when the power transmission portion 6034 performs the second movement, the right edge portion of the central tubular portion 6053 of the regulating member 6005 is in contact with the boss portion 6013 . That is, the central cylindrical portion 6053 of the regulating member 6005 cannot move leftward with respect to the boss portion 6013 of the housing portion 6001 . Therefore, when the connecting projection 6037 presses the connecting shaft 6055 of the restricting member 6005 to the left, the restricting member 6005 tends to rotate counterclockwise about the boss portion 6013 of the accommodating portion 6001 .

Further, when the power transmission portion 6034 performs the second movement, the guide shaft 6056 of the regulating member 6005 contacts the left end portion of the first guide opening portion 6016 (the rear end portion of the second guide opening portion 6017) of the housing portion 6001. are in contact. The second guide opening 6017 is formed so as to partially overlap with a virtual circle centered on the center P of the boss portion 6013 . That is, in front of the guiding shaft 6056 of the restricting member 6005 (moving direction when the restricting member 6005 rotates counterclockwise), an opening is formed along the locus along which the guiding shaft 6056 moves ( There is nothing to interfere when the guide shaft 6056 moves).

In this way, when the connecting protrusion 6037 presses the connecting shaft 6055 of the regulating member 6005 leftward and the regulating member 6005 tries to rotate counterclockwise about the boss portion 6013 of the accommodating portion 6001, as shown in FIG. As shown in (b), the guide shaft 6056 of the regulating member 6005 is guided by the second guide opening 6017 of the housing portion 6001 and moves forward through the second guide opening 6017 . Note that when the restricting member 6005 tries to rotate counterclockwise around the boss portion 6013 of the accommodating portion 6001, the connecting shaft 6055 of the restricting member 6005 moves rearward relative to the power transmission portion 6034. continue.

Note that the restricting member 6005 changes the position of the center of rotation in the horizontal direction between when the power transmission unit 6034 performs the first movement and when the power transmission unit 6034 performs the second movement as described above. ing. Specifically, when the power transmission portion 6034 performs the first movement, the boss portion 6013 of the accommodation portion 6001 that contacts the left edge portion of the central cylindrical portion 6053 of the regulating member 6005 is positioned at the center of rotation. and Further, when the power transmission portion 6034 performs the second movement, the boss portion 6013 of the accommodating portion 6001 that contacts the right side edge portion of the central tubular portion 6053 of the regulating member 6005 is positioned as the center of rotation.

In this way, by varying the position of the center of rotation of the regulating member 6005, the front side of the first guide opening 6016 is moved forward of the guide shaft 6056 (moving direction when the regulating member 6005 rotates counterclockwise). It toggles whether there is an edge or the second guide opening 6017 extends.

Thus, when the power transmission portion 6034 performs the second movement, the locked state of the restricting member 6005 and the guiding opening portion 6014 (locking means) of the accommodating portion 6001 is released, and the guiding shaft 6056 of the restricting member 6005 is accommodated. The second guide opening 6017 of the portion 6001 can be moved forward. That is, the connecting protrusion 6037 of the power transmission portion 6034 presses the connecting shaft 6055 of the regulating member 6005 leftward, thereby rotating the regulating member 6005 counterclockwise about the boss portion 6013 of the accommodating portion 6001. do.

Also, when the power transmission section 6034 performs the second movement, the right edge of the connection opening 6036 of the power transmission section 6034 is in contact with the connection shaft 6045 of the link arm 6004 . That is, power from the big winning opening solenoid 6003 is transmitted to the link arm 6004 via the connection opening 6036 of the power transmission portion 6034 and the connection shaft 6045 of the link arm 6004 . Specifically, the connecting opening 6036 of the power transmission portion 6034 presses the connecting shaft 6045 of the link arm 6004 leftward. Thus, when the connecting opening 6036 of the power transmission portion 6034 pushes the connecting shaft 6045 of the link arm 6004 leftward, the link arm 6004 tries to rotate counterclockwise.

When the power transmission unit 6034 is in the first movement (locked state), when the link arm 6004 tries to rotate counterclockwise, that is, when the link arm 6004 and the restricting protrusion 6046 When a counterclockwise rotating force is transmitted from the link arm 6004 to the regulation member 6005 via the regulation block portion 6054 of the regulation member 6005, the guide shaft 6056 of the regulation member 6005 moves to the first guide opening. The restricting member 6005 could not rotate because it interferes with the front edge of the portion 6016 .

However, when the power transmission portion 6034 performs the second movement, the guide shaft 6056 of the regulating member 6005 can move forward through the second guide opening 6017 of the housing portion 6001 as described above. The restriction block portion 6054 of 6005 is also moved rearward. Note that when the restriction block portion 6054 of the restriction member 6005 moves rearward, it moves away from the restriction projection portion 6046 of the link arm 6004 .

Therefore, when the power transmission portion 6034 performs the second movement, if the link arm 6004 tries to rotate counterclockwise, the restriction projection portion 6046 of the link arm 6004 and the restriction block portion 6054 of the restriction member 6005 do not interfere with That is, the link arm 6004 can rotate counterclockwise.

Further, when the link arm 6004 rotates counterclockwise, the power from the big winning opening solenoid 6003 is transmitted to the shutter 6002 via the connecting opening 6044 of the link arm 6004 and the connecting shaft 6023 of the shutter 6002 . Specifically, the connecting opening 6044 of the link arm 6004 pushes the connecting shaft 6023 of the shutter 6002 rearward. Thus, when the connecting opening 6044 of the link arm 6004 pushes the connecting shaft 6023 of the shutter 6002 backward, the shutter 6002 starts to slide backward.

The second movement of the power transmission portion 6034 ends when the guide shaft 6056 of the regulating member 6005 reaches the front end of the second guide opening 6017 of the housing portion 6001, as shown in FIG. Thus, when the guide shaft 6056 of the regulating member 6005 reaches the front end of the second guide opening 6017 of the housing portion 6001, the shutter 6002 is opened.

As described above, the shutter 6002 is opened from the closed state, but when the shutter 6002 is closed from the open state, the shutter 6002 is opened after de-energization of the big winning opening solenoid 6003. Various members (shutter 6002, big winning opening solenoid 6003, link arm 6004, and regulating member 6005) operate in the reverse order.

Here, conventionally, in a game machine such as a pachinko machine or a pachislot machine, for example, a technique of providing a displacement member that can be displaced between a position where it is easy for a game ball to pass and a position where it is difficult for a game ball to pass with respect to a passage area. is publicly known. For example, as described in JP-A-2008-307103.

In the technique disclosed in Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2008-307103, a door member of a winning device is provided as the displacement member. A solenoid is employed as a drive source for displacing the door member (reciprocating between the open position and the closed position).

Further, in the technique described in Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2008-307103, the locking portion provided on the transmission means of the solenoid and the engaging protrusion provided on the door member come into contact with each other to close the door. The opening of the door member can be restricted (locked) at the position.

However, since a certain degree of accuracy is required in the positional relationship between the locking portion and the engaging protrusion, if the solenoid deteriorates over time or foreign matter enters the solenoid drive path, etc. no longer come into contact with In this way, if the locking portion and the engaging protrusion do not come into complete contact with each other, the door member may rattle at the closing position, or the door member may be slightly opened (unintended displacement may occur). possibility), which was inconvenient.

SUMMARY OF THE INVENTION The present invention has been made in view of the above problems, and is to more reliably restrict unintended displacement of a displacement member when the displacement member is displaced to a position where passage of a game ball is difficult. The purpose is to provide a game machine that can

As described above, the pachinko gaming machine 1 according to the present embodiment includes: a game board 17 having a game area 20 on which game balls roll; and a second starting port 440 provided in the game area 20 through which game balls can pass. (passing area), and a displacement member (shutter 6002 and link arm 6004 ), a large winning opening solenoid 6003 (driving means) for driving the displacement member, and a main control circuit 100 (driving control means) capable of controlling the large winning opening solenoid 6003 (driving means) The displacement member is in a state where displacement is controlled to a position where it is difficult for the game ball to pass, and the main control circuit 100 (drive control means) moves the displacement member to a position where the game ball can easily pass Locking means (regulating member 6005 and guidance opening 6014 of housing portion 6001) that can lock the displacement member at a position where it is difficult for the game ball to pass when control to displace to is not performed, and the big prize The solenoid 6003 (driving means) includes: a power generation section 6032 that generates power; and power transmission capable of transmitting the power generated by the power generation section 6032 to the displacement member by being in contact with at least a part of the displacement member. a regulating member 6005 (regulating portion) that regulates the displacement of the displacement member by coming into contact with at least part of the displacement member; and a displacement path of the regulating portion. The displacement path includes a first guide opening 6016 (first displacement section) and the first guide opening 6016 (first displacement section). The displacement member includes a different second guide opening 6017 (second displacement section), and the displacement member is at least partially in contact with the power transmission unit 6034 and has a position where the game ball can easily pass and a position where the game ball can pass. The regulating member 6005 (regulating portion) is displacement-controlled along the guide opening 6014 (displacement guide portion) as the power transmission portion 6034 is displaced. Means maintains the locked state of the displacement member when the regulating member 6005 (regulating portion) is positioned in the first guide opening 6016 (first displacement section), and the regulating member 6005 (regulating portion) is When located in the second guide opening 6017 (second displacement section), it releases the locked state of the displacement member.

With such a configuration, the locking means (the restricting member 6005 and the guide opening 6014 of the accommodating portion 6001) can be locked only when the guide shaft 6056 of the restricting member 6005 is positioned at the right end of the first guide opening 6016, for example. Instead, the locked state of the displacement member (shutter 6002 and link arm 6004 ) can be maintained while the guide shaft 6056 is positioned within the first guide opening 6016 . That is, even if the positional relationship between the regulating member 6005 and the guide opening 6014 of the accommodation portion 6001 is slightly deviated (for example, even if the power transmission portion 6034 is not arranged in a normal position), the locked state is maintained. can be maintained. Therefore, when the displacement member (shutter 6002 and link arm 6004) is displaced to a position where it is difficult for the game ball to pass, unintended displacement of the displacement member (shutter 6002 and link arm 6004) is more reliably regulated. can do.

Further, in the pachinko game machine 1 according to the present embodiment, the displacement of the regulation member 6005 (regulation portion) includes movement and rotation, and the locking means is such that the regulation member 6005 (regulation portion) When positioned in one guide opening 6016 (first displacement section), the rotation of the regulation member 6005 (regulation portion) is restricted and locked while the movement of the regulation member 6005 (regulation portion) is possible. When the state is maintained and the regulation member 6005 (regulation portion) is positioned in the second guide opening portion 6017 (second displacement section), the position of the rotation center of the regulation member 6005 (regulation portion) is adjusted to the position of the regulation member 6005 (regulation portion). By positioning the member 6005 (regulating portion) in the first guide opening 6016 (first displacement section), the regulating member 6005 (regulating portion) can be rotated to release the locked state. It is something to do.

With such a configuration, the regulation member 6005 (regulation portion), which is one member, can switch between maintenance and release of the locked state by a combination of two operations (movement and rotation). In this way, the number of parts can be reduced as compared with the case where members for performing two operations (movement and rotation) are provided. Especially in the special electric accessory as in the present embodiment, it is useful to have such a configuration because the space for arranging parts is limited.

Further, in the pachinko game machine 1 according to the present embodiment, the displacement member includes a shutter 6002 (game ball guiding portion) for guiding a game ball, and a link arm 6004 (link portion) connected to the game ball guiding portion. , and the power transmission portion 6034 is in contact with the link arm 6004 (link portion).

With such a configuration, the power transmission section 6034 is in contact with the link arm 6004 (link section) instead of the shutter 6002 (game ball guide section), so that the power transmission section 6034 does not come into direct contact with the shutter 6002 (game ball guide section). The shutter 6002 (game ball guiding portion) can be locked.

Although the embodiments of the present invention have been described above, the present invention is not limited to the above configurations, and various modifications are possible within the scope of the invention described in the claims.

For example, in the present embodiment, the special electric accessory 6000 has been described as an example of an object to be locked, but the object to be locked is not limited to this, and may be an ordinary electric accessory or the like. may

Also, when the first movement of the power transmission portion 6034 is completed, the restriction block portion 6054 of the restriction member 6005 moves leftward with respect to the link arm 6004 . In this way, when the regulation block portion 6054 of the regulation member 6005 moves to the left with respect to the link arm 6004, the regulation protrusion portion 6046 of the link arm 6004 and the regulation block portion 6054 of the regulation member 6005 abut against each other. can be released. That is, the restricting protrusion 6046 of the link arm 6004 and the restricting block 6054 of the restricting member 6005 can be arranged so as not to overlap in the front-rear direction.

According to such a configuration, when the power transmission portion 6034 performs the second movement, when the link arm 6004 is about to rotate counterclockwise, the restriction projection portion 6046 of the link arm 6004 and the restriction member 6005 are separated from each other. interference with the restriction block portion 6054 (restriction of rotation of the link arm 6004) can be more reliably prevented.

Further, even when the first movement of the power transmission portion 6034 is completed, the contact state between the restriction projection portion 6046 of the link arm 6004 and the restriction block portion 6054 of the restriction member 6005 is maintained, and the link arm When the 6004 tries to rotate counterclockwise, the restricting protrusion 6046 of the link arm 6004 presses the restricting block 6054 of the restricting member 6005, thereby assisting the rotation of the restricting member 6005. .

Also, the configuration of the guide opening 6014 (the first guide opening 6016 and the second guide opening 6017) is not limited to the configuration of this embodiment. For example, the guidance opening 6014 (displacement guidance section) is closed when the link arm 6004 tries to rotate counterclockwise while the power transmission section 6034 is in the first movement (locked state). In addition, it may be formed in front of the guide shaft 6056 (moving direction when the regulation member 6005 rotates counterclockwise) so as to interfere with the movement of the guide shaft 6056 . From the viewpoint of promoting smooth movement of the guide shaft 6056, the configuration according to the present embodiment formed along the movement path of the guide shaft 6056 is desirable.

[Configuration of ordinary electric accessory unit 400]
The configuration of the normal electric accessory unit 400 will be briefly described with reference to FIGS. 51 and 52. FIG. FIG. 51 is an example of an exploded perspective view of the normal electric accessory unit 400 viewed obliquely from the upper right front. FIG. 52 is an example of an exploded perspective view of the normal electric accessory unit 400 as seen obliquely from the rear left (left in front view).

The normal electric accessory unit 400 is attached and fixed to the lower left of the liquid crystal display device 16 within the game area 20 . The normal electric accessory unit 400 includes general winning ports 53, 54, 55, a second starting port 440, a second starting port switch 441 for detecting winning of game balls to the second starting port 440, and an out port 450. And, a housing member 443 that receives the game ball that has won the second start port 440 and the game ball received in the out port 450 and discharges it outside the pachinko game machine 1, and the front surfaces of the second start port 440 and the out port 450 and a normal electric accessory 460. The second starting port 440 and the out port 450 are formed in the plate-shaped opening forming member 420 . The opening forming member 420 is formed with a hole 442 through which a rotating shaft 4622 of a blade member 4620 (to be described later) passes.

The second starting port 440 and the out port 450 are arranged adjacent to each other, the second starting port 440 is arranged on the right side in front view, and the out port 450 is arranged on the left side in front view.

A wall 4452 that partitions the second starting port 440 and the out port 450 is formed on the rear surface of the front cover 445 . This wall 4452, when the blade member 4620 is opened, the game ball that has passed through the upper part of the blade member 4620 (game ball that wins the second start opening 440) is received in the out port 450, It has a function to prevent the game ball from entering the second starting port 440 when the blade member 4620 is not opened.

The second starting port switch 441 is arranged on the back side of the second starting port 440 so that a game ball that has won the second starting port 440 can be detected.

The housing member 443 is provided with openings 4434 and 4436 at portions corresponding to the second starting port 440 and the out port 450, respectively. A game ball is accommodated in the opening 4434, and a game ball received in the out port 450 is accommodated in the opening 4436. - 特許庁The game balls accommodated in the openings 4434 and 4436 are collected by a game ball circulation facility provided in an island facility (not shown). In addition, the housing member 443 has a hole 4432 through which a rotating shaft 4622 of the blade member 4620 (to be described later) passes.

[Configuration of normal electric accessories 460]
The configuration of the ordinary electric accessory 460 will be described with reference to FIGS. 51 to 55. FIG. FIG. 53 is an example of a diagram showing a normal electric accessory 460, a second starting switch 441, and a housing member 443. FIG. FIG. 54 is an example of a rear view of a normal electric accessory 460. FIG. FIG. 55 is an example of a rear view of the ordinary electric accessory 460 viewed obliquely from the upper right.

The ordinary electric accessory 460 includes a base cover 4610 , a blade member 4620 , a starter solenoid 4630 , and a power transmission mechanism 4640 that transmits power from the starter solenoid 4630 to the blade member 4620 .

The base cover 4610 accommodates the starting solenoid 4630 and the power transmission mechanism 4640 with the accommodation member 443 and is attached to the rear side of the opening forming member 420 . The rear side of the base cover 4610 is attached and fixed to the transparent panel 172 described above. A guide groove 4612 elongated in the left-right direction is formed on the front side of the base cover 4610 . A bearing (not shown) is formed on the front side of the base cover 4610 to rotatably support a pin 4648 to be described later.

The blade member 4620 is provided with a rotating shaft 4622 below the plane of the drawing. The rotating shaft 4622 passes through a hole 442 formed in the opening forming member 420 and a hole 4432 formed in the housing member 443, and is rotatably supported by a bearing 46444 of the blade connecting member 4642, which will be described later. The rotating shaft 4622 has a notched portion that is supported by the bearing 46444 of the blade connecting member 4642, and has a non-circular cross-sectional shape in the axial direction. Further, when the power from the starting port solenoid 4630 is transmitted to the rotary shaft 4622 as a rotational force by the power transmission mechanism 4640, the blade member 4620 rotates about the rotary shaft 4622 as the rotation center. In the present embodiment, blade member 4620 is in a closed state when it is standing, and is in an open state when it rotates rightward about rotating shaft 4622 from the closed state.

The starting port solenoid 4630 includes a plunger 4632 that expands and contracts in the horizontal direction when viewed from the front, and has a flange 4634 at the tip of the plunger 4632 (the tip on the right side when viewed from the front). The plunger 4632 of the starting port solenoid 4630 is normally (non-excited) extending rightward in front view, and when energized, the plunger 4632 moves leftward in front view (retraction direction).

As the plunger 4632 of the starting solenoid 4630 expands and contracts in the left-right direction, the power transmission mechanism 4640 converts the power into rotational force and transmits it to the rotary shaft 4622 of the blade member 4620 . The power transmission mechanism 4640 includes a blade connecting member 4642 connected to the rotating shaft 4622 of the blade member 4620, a flange connecting member 4646 connected to the flange 4634 at the tip of the plunger 4632 of the starting port solenoid 4630, and a blade connecting member 4642. and a link member 4644 provided between the flange connecting member 4646.

The blade connecting member 4642 has a bearing 46444 that supports the rotating shaft 4622 of the blade member 4620 . The bearing 46444 of the blade connecting member 4642 corresponds to the shape of the rotary shaft 4622 to be supported. Therefore, the blade connecting member 4642 rotates together with the rotating shaft 4622 around the rotating shaft 4622 as the center of rotation. In addition, the blade connecting member 4642 has a support shaft 46426 protruding to the rear side. The support shaft 46426 can rotate around a rotation shaft 4622 supported by a bearing 46424 .

The link member 4644 is a V-shaped member when viewed from the front, and a long hole 46442 is formed at the lower end when viewed from the front. A support shaft 46426 of the blade connecting member 4642 is slidably connected to the long hole 46442 . A support shaft 46446 protruding rearward is formed at the upper end of the link member 4644 in front view. An engagement shaft 46448 is formed below the support shaft 46446 so as to protrude toward the rear side. A bearing 46444 that rotatably supports a pin 4648 is formed in the central portion of the link member 4644 (the portion where the angle of the dogleg changes). The link member 4644 is rotatable around a pin 4648 pivotally supported by the bearing 46444 . When the link member 4644 rotates about the pin 4648 supported by the bearing 46444, the support shaft 46446 and the engaging shaft 46448 also rotate about the pin 4648 supported by the bearing 46444.

The flange connecting member 4646 has a flange clamping portion 46462 , a connecting hole 46464 and an engaging groove 46466 . The flange clamping portion 46462 clamps the flange 4634 at the tip of the plunger 4632 of the starting solenoid 4630 , and the flange connecting member 4646 moves in the direction of extension and retraction of the plunger 4632 as the plunger 4632 extends and retracts. A support shaft 46446 of the link member 4644 is connected to the connecting hole 46464 so as to move inside the connecting hole 46464 . The engagement shaft 46448 of the link member 4644 is engaged with the engagement groove 46466 . Here, the engaging shaft 46448 has a teardrop shape with a pointed end in a cross section that traverses the longitudinal direction. The link member 4644 engages with the engagement groove 46466 at this tip. Further, the flange connecting member 4646 has a guide piece 46468 elongated in the left-right direction on the rear side (the side of the base cover 4610). This guide piece 46468 is guided by a guide groove 4612 formed in the base cover 4610 .

[Description of the operation of the ordinary electric accessory 460]
Next, the operation of the ordinary electric accessory 460 will be described with reference to FIGS. 51 to 57. FIG. FIG. 56 shows the state of the normal electric accessory 460 when the blade member 4620 is in the closed state (illustrated by the dashed line), and the normal state when the blade member 4620 is in transition from the closed state to the open state. FIG. 11 is an example of a rear view showing a mode of an electric accessory 460 (indicated by a solid line). FIG. 57 shows the aspect of the normal electric accessory 460 when the blade member 4620 is in transition (illustrated by the dashed line), and the aspect of the ordinary electric accessory 460 when the blade member 4620 is in the open state (solid line). ) is an example of a rear view showing the .

When the starter solenoid 4630 is energized, the plunger 4632 moves in the contraction direction (leftward in front view (rightward in FIGS. 56 and 57)). As the plunger 4632 moves in the retraction direction, the flange 4634 (see FIGS. 51 and 52) moves in the retraction direction. When the flange 4634 moves in the contracting direction, the flange connecting member 4646 that clamps the flange 4634 between the flange clamping portions 46462 moves in the contracting direction. When the flange connecting member 4646 moves in the contracting direction, the engaging shaft 46448 of the link member 4644 engaged with the engaging groove 46466 of the flange connecting member 4646 is disengaged. When the engagement shaft 46448 of the link member 4644 engaged with the engagement groove 46466 of the flange connection member 4646 is disengaged, the link member 4644 rotates about the pin 4648 pivotally supported in the pin insertion hole 46444. It rotates counterclockwise (clockwise in FIGS. 56 and 57) when viewed. At this time, the link member 4644 can move downward inside the connecting hole 46464 of the flange connecting member 4646 . When the link member 4644 rotates counterclockwise in front view around the pin 4648 pivotally supported in the pin insertion hole 46444, the support shaft 46426 slidably connected in the long hole 46442 of the blade connecting member 4644 rotates. The blade connecting member 4642 rotates clockwise around the rotating shaft 4622, and the blade member 4620 operates toward the open state.

When the vane member 4620 moves from the open state to the closed state, the starter solenoid 4630 is de-energized so that the plunger 4632 moves in the extending direction, which is the opposite movement from the operation from the closed state to the open state. done by In order to smoothly engage the engagement shaft 46448 with the engagement groove 46466 during operation of the blade member 4620 from the open state to the closed state, the portion of the engagement groove 46466 that contacts the engagement shaft 46448 is obliquely downward right (diagonally downward left in FIGS. 56 and 57) when viewed from the front.

[Explanation of the function of the ordinary electric accessory 460]
Next, referring to FIG. 58, functions of the normal electric accessory 460 will be described. FIG. 58 is a rear view of the blade member 4620 and the power transmission mechanism 4640 for explaining the function of the flange connecting member 4646, and (A) is a diagram for explaining that the blade member 4620 is blocked from opening. and (B) are diagrams for explaining that the blade member 4620 is allowed to open. 58(A) and (B) omit illustration of the starting solenoid 4630. As shown in FIG.

When the blade member 4620 is in the closed state (when the plunger 4632 of the starting solenoid 4630 (both see FIG. 56, for example) is de-energized), the engagement shaft 46448 of the link member 4644 engages with the engagement groove 46466. Therefore, the link member 4644 cannot rotate (rotate around the pin 4648 pivotally supported in the pin insertion hole 46444) (see FIG. 58(a)). Therefore, unless the plunger 4632 moves in the retraction direction (unless the starter solenoid 4630 is energized except for special circumstances such as failure), the blade member 4620 cannot be opened even if it is attempted to open. Therefore, even if a force is applied from the outside to illegally open the blade member 4620, this can be prevented.

On the other hand, when the starter solenoid 4630 is energized, the plunger 4632 moves in the retraction direction as described above, disengages the engagement shaft 46448 from the engagement groove 46466, and opens the blade member 4620 (see FIG. 58(b)).

In this manner, the link member 4644 forming the engaging shaft 46448, the flange connecting member 4646 forming the engaging groove 46466, and the starting solenoid 4630 prevent the blade member 4620 from being illegally opened. It functions as unauthorized opening prevention means.

[Configuration of upper front accessory 1000]
The configuration of the upper front accessory 1000 will be described with reference to FIGS. 59 to 62. FIG. FIG. 59 is an example of a front view of the upper front accessory 1000 in the normal mode (the mode when it is at the origin position). FIG. 60 is an example of a back view of the upper front accessory 1000 in the normal mode. FIG. 61 is an example of an exploded perspective view of the upper front accessory 1000 viewed obliquely from the front right. FIG. 62 is an example of an exploded perspective view of the upper front accessory 1000 viewed obliquely from the rear left (left in front view).

The upper front accessory 1000 has a base plate 1010 to which various members constituting the upper front accessory 1000 are attached, a decoration plate 1030 attached and fixed to the front side of the base plate 1010, and an operation on the base plate 1010. A movable decoration 1040 configured, a driving motor 1050 as a driving source for operating the movable decoration 1040, a plurality of gears 1060 capable of transmitting the power of the driving motor 1050 to the movable decoration 1040, A force transmission member 1020 that transmits the power from the drive motor 1050 to the movable decoration 1040 via these gears 1060, and a coil spring 1070 as an example of an elastic member that biases the movable decoration 1040 toward the origin position. , and a photosensor 1080 (see FIG. 62) for detecting the position of the movable decorative body 1040 . The gear 1060 and the force transmission member 1020 function as a force transmission mechanism that transmits the power of the drive motor 1050 to the movable decoration 1040.

The base plate 1010 is a plate-like member attached and fixed to the upper part of the rear box 1800 of the back unit 176 so as to be positioned forward of the upper back accessory 1100 . A first support shaft 1011 , a second support shaft 1012 , a third support shaft 1013 and a fourth support shaft 1014 are formed on the front side of the base plate 1010 to be connected to various members of the force transmission member 1020 . The base plate 1010 also has a notch 1016 formed at a position where a bearing 10226 of a first transmission member 1022 described later is positioned when the movable decoration 1040 is at the origin position, and a cutout portion 1016 formed so that the movable decoration 1040 is positioned at the origin position. A notch portion 1017 is formed at a position corresponding to a later-described coil spring support shaft 1042 (lower side end portion of the coil spring 1070) formed on the back side of the movable decorative body 1040 when it is in the state. In this specification, the cutout portion 1016 and the cutout portion 1017 are referred to as a rear-side first cutout portion 1016 and a rear-side second cutout portion 1017, respectively. Further, the base plate 1010 has a bearing 1054 that supports a hollow boss 10662 formed in the center of the first gear 1062, which will be described later, and a hole 1015 corresponding to the movable range of the boss 10672 of the fourth gear 1067, which will be described later. , and a hole 1018 corresponding to the movable range of a position detection piece 10682 of a position detection gear 1068, which will be described later.

The decorative plate 1030 is decorated on the front side (not shown). The decorative plate 1030 is formed at a portion (on the front side corresponding to the rear-side first notch portion 1016) where the bearing 10226 of the first transmission member 1022, which will be described later, is positioned when the movable decorative body 1040 is at the origin position. and a cutout portion 1038 formed at a portion where the lower end portion of the coil spring 1070 is positioned (a position on the front side corresponding to the second rear cutout portion 1017). In this specification, the cutout portion 1036 and the cutout portion 1038 are referred to as a front-side first cutout portion 1036 and a front-side second cutout portion 1038, respectively.

The movable decorative body 1040 includes a coil spring support shaft 1042 connected to the lower end of the coil spring 1070, a first transmission member side support shaft 1044 supported by a bearing 10226 of the first transmission member 1022, which will be described later. A second transmission member side support shaft 1046 that is pivotally supported by the bearing 10264 of the second transmission member 1026 is formed.

The drive motor 1050 is attached and fixed to the base plate 1010 via a motor attachment member 1054 . Drive motor 1050 is a motor with a speed reducer, and the rotational speed of drive motor 1050 is reduced to output power from motor output shaft 1052 .

Gear 1060 includes a first gear 1062 , a second gear 1064 , a third gear 1066 , a fourth gear 1067 and a position detection gear 1068 . Among these gears, the first gear 1062, the second gear 1064, the third gear 1066, and the fourth gear 1067 have the function of transmitting the power output from the motor output shaft 1052 to the force transmission member 1020. Detector gear 1068 has no such function.

A hollow shaft 10622 is formed in the center of the first gear 1062 . A motor output shaft 1052 is press-fitted into this hollow shaft 10622 . Accordingly, when the drive motor 1050 rotates, the first gear 1062 rotates around the center of the first gear 1062 (motor output shaft 1052).

The fourth gear 1067 is formed with a boss 10672 on the front side at a predetermined distance from the center 10674 in the radial direction. A position detection piece 10682 is formed on the front side of the position detection gear 1068 at a predetermined distance from the center 10684 in the radial direction. The position detection gear 1068 has substantially the same diameter as the fourth gear 1067 . Therefore, the position detection gear 1068 rotates by the same rotation angle in the opposite direction in synchronization with the rotation of the fourth gear 1067 . In this way, the position of the movable decoration 1040 can be detected. In this embodiment, the position detection of the movable decorative body 1040 detects whether or not it is at the origin position.

The force transmission member 1020 includes a first transmission member 1022 to which power from the drive motor 1050 is transmitted via a gear 1060, a rack 1024 to which the power transmitted to the first transmission member 1022 is transmitted, and a first transmission member and a second transmission member 1026 to which power from 1022 is transmitted via rack 1024 .

The first transmission member 1022 is a fan-shaped plate-like member, and has a bearing 10222 formed at the center in the radial direction. This bearing 10222 pivotally supports the first support shaft 1011 formed on the base plate 1010 . Of the two radial sides 1022a and 1022b, the first transmission member 1022 extends from the radially outer side to the inner side (that is, the center of the first transmission member 1022 (bearing 10222)) along the left side 1022a when viewed from the front. A long hole 10224 is formed in the facing direction. A boss 10672 of a fourth gear 1067 passing through the hole 1015 is connected to the elongated hole 10224 so as to be movable inside the elongated hole 10224 . Of the two radial sides 1022a and 1022b of the first transmission member 1022, a bearing 10226 is formed at the radially outer end along the right side 1022b in front view. This bearing 10226 supports a support shaft 1044 formed on the movable decoration 1040 . The side 1022b of the first transmission member 1022 is substantially horizontal when the movable decoration 1040 is at the origin position. The first transmission member 1022 also includes a gear 10228 that is coaxial with the first support shaft 1011 (bearing 10222 ) and rotates in synchronization with the rotation of the first transmission member 1022 .

The second transmission member 1026 is a rod-shaped member that is substantially horizontal when the movable decoration 1040 is at the origin position, and has a bearing 10262 at the left end in front view and a bearing 10262 at the right end in front view. A bearing 10264 is formed. Bearing 10262 pivotally supports fourth support shaft 1014 of base plate 1010 . The bearing 10264 pivotally supports the support shaft 1046 of the movable decoration 1040 . The second transmission member 1026 also includes a gear 10266 coaxial with the fourth support shaft 1014 (bearing 10262). This gear 10266 has substantially the same diameter as the gear 10228 provided on the first transmission member 1022 .

A rack 1024 that transmits power from the first transmission member 1022 to the second transmission member 1026 is provided between the first transmission member 1022 and the second transmission member 1026 . The rack 1024 is a rod-shaped member provided substantially horizontally, and has a gear 10244 on the right side (first transmission member 1022 side) in front view, and a gear 10248 on the left side (second transmission member 1026 side) in front view. is formed. The gear 10244 meshes with the gear 10228, and converts the rotational power of the gear 10228 into a substantially horizontal direction. The gear 10248 further converts the power converted in the substantially horizontal direction by the gear 10244 into the rotational direction and transmits it to the second transmission member 1026 . The rack 1024 has a substantially horizontally elongated hole 10242 formed on the right side (gear 10244 side) when viewed from the front, and a substantially horizontally elongated hole 10246 formed on the left side (gear 10248 side) when viewed from the front. A second support shaft 1012 formed on the base plate 1010 is connected to the elongated hole 10242 , and a third support shaft 1013 formed on the base plate 1010 is connected to the elongated hole 10246 .

The coil spring 1070 biases the movable decoration 1040 toward the origin position. The coil spring 1070 has an upper end attached and fixed to the back surface of the base plate 1010 and a lower end attached and fixed to a coil spring support shaft 1042 formed on the back surface of the movable decorative body 1040 . When the movable decorative body 1040 is at the origin position, the lower end of the coil spring 1070 is located in the front-side second notch 1038 and the back-side second notch 1017 .

Photosensor 1080 is provided so as to be positioned in photosensor arrangement region 1019 formed on base plate 1010 . The photosensor 1080 detects the position of the movable decoration 1040 by detecting the position detection piece 10682 provided on the position detection gear 1068 . In this embodiment, the photosensor 1080 is provided so that the position detection piece 10682 can be detected when the movable decorative body 1040 is at the origin position.

[Description of the operation of the upper front accessory 1000]
Next, the operation of the upper front accessory 1000 will be described with reference to FIGS. 61 to 65. FIG. FIG. 63 is an example of a front view showing the upper front accessory 1000 at the origin position. FIG. 64 is an example of a front view showing the upper front accessory 1000 with the movable decoration 1040 moving downward. FIG. 65 is an example of a front view showing the upper front accessory 1000 when the movable decoration 1040 has moved downward to the operation limit position. In addition, in FIGS. 63 to 65, the constituent members of the force transmission member 1020 are indicated by dashed lines so that the movement of each member can be understood.

When the movable decorative body 1040 is at the origin position, the drive motor 1050 rotates, and when the motor output shaft 1052 rotates counterclockwise when viewed from the front, the first gear 1062 rotates counterclockwise when viewed from the front. do. When the first gear 1062 rotates counterclockwise when viewed from the front, the second gear 1064 meshing with the teeth of the first gear 1062 rotates clockwise when viewed from the front. When the second gear 1064 rotates clockwise when viewed from the front, the third gear 1066 meshing with the teeth of the second gear 1064 rotates counterclockwise when viewed from the front. When the third gear 1066 rotates counterclockwise when viewed from the front, the fourth gear 1067 meshing with the third gear 1066 rotates clockwise about the center 10674 of the fourth gear 1067 when viewed from the front. When the fourth gear 1067 rotates clockwise about the center 10674 as viewed from the front, the boss 10672 also rotates about the center 10674 in the circumferential direction and moves clockwise along the inside of the hole 1015 . Since the boss 10672 is movably connected within the elongated hole 10224, when the boss 10672 rotates clockwise around the center 10674 as viewed from the front, the first transmission member 1022 (that is, the gear 10228) moves toward the first support shaft. It rotates clockwise with 1011 (bearing 10222) as the center of rotation when viewed from the front. When the first transmission member 1022 rotates clockwise around the first support shaft 1011 as the center of rotation when viewed from the front, the support shaft 1044 supported by the bearing 10226 rotates clockwise around the first support shaft 1011 as the center of rotation when viewed from the front. move to

Further, when the gear 10228 rotates clockwise about the first support shaft 1011 when viewed from the front, the power of the gear 10228 is transmitted to the gear 10244, and the rack 1024 moves substantially horizontally to the right when viewed from the front. Here, the second support shaft 1012 connected to the elongated hole 10242 and the third support shaft 1013 connected to the elongated hole 10246 function as guides for moving the rack 1024 substantially horizontally. When the rack 1024 moves substantially horizontally to the right in front view, this power is transmitted to the gear 10266, and the gear 10266 rotates clockwise around the fourth support shaft 1014 (bearing 10262) in front view. When the gear 10266 rotates clockwise about the fourth support shaft 1014 in front view, the second transmission member 1026 rotates clockwise about the fourth support shaft 1014 (bearing 10262) in front view. When the second transmission member 1026 rotates clockwise about the fourth support shaft 1014 as the center of rotation when viewed from the front, the support shaft 1046 supported by the bearing 10264 rotates clockwise about the fourth support shaft 1014 as the center of rotation when viewed from the front. move to

Here, the gear 10228 and the gear 10266 have the same diameter, and the distance from the first support shaft 1011 (bearing 10222) to the support shaft 1044 (bearing 10226) and the distance from the fourth support shaft 1014 (bearing 10262) to the support shaft The distance to 1046 (bearing 10264) is the same. Therefore, when the motor output shaft 1052 rotates counterclockwise when viewed from the front, the support shafts 1044 and 1046 are synchronously rotated around the first support shaft 1011 and the fourth support shaft 1014, respectively, as viewed from the front. operate around. As a result, the movable decorative body 1040 moves downward (that is, toward the front of the display area of the liquid crystal display device 16) while drawing an arc clockwise in a front view while maintaining a substantially horizontal state.

When the third gear 1066 rotates counterclockwise when viewed from the front, the position detection gear 1068 meshing with the third gear 1066 also rotates clockwise about the center 10684 of the position detection gear 1068 when viewed from the front. Rotate. The position detection gear 1068 does not mesh with the fourth gear 1067 , but the fourth gear 1067 and the position detection gear 1068 have the same diameter and both mesh with the third gear 1066 . Therefore, the rotation angle of the fourth gear 1067 and the rotation angle of the position detection gear 1068 are the same. The rotation angle of the gear 1067 and thus the position of the movable decoration 1040 can be detected.

When the driving motor 1050 rotates and the motor output shaft 1052 rotates clockwise when viewed from the front, the movable decoration body 1040 maintains a substantially horizontal state and arcs counterclockwise when viewed from the front by the reverse movement of the above-described movement. It operates upward while drawing

In this manner, the movable decoration 1040 can operate between the origin position and the operation limit position. Here, the movement of the movable decorative body 1040 from the origin position toward the front of the display area of the liquid crystal display device 16 (movable body presentation) is performed when the game ball wins the first start opening 5442 or the second start opening 440. It is based on the result of the hit check performed on the On the other hand, the movement from the front of the display area of the liquid crystal display device 16 toward the origin position is performed when the movable object effect based on the result of the current hit determination is completed, and is performed based on the result of the hit determination after the next time. It will prepare for the movable body production to be performed.

[Configuration of upper back accessory 1100]
The configuration of the upper back accessory 1100 will be described with reference to FIGS. 66 to 72. FIG. FIG. 66 is an example of a front view of the upper back accessory 1100 in the normal mode (the mode when it is at the origin position). FIG. 67 is an example of a back view of the upper back accessory 1100 in the normal mode. FIG. 68 is an example of a perspective view of the upper back accessory 1100 seen obliquely from the front right. FIG. 69 is an example of an exploded perspective view of the upper back accessory 1100 viewed obliquely from the front right. FIG. 70 is an example of an exploded perspective view of the upper back accessory 1100 viewed obliquely from the rear left (left in front view). 71, (A) is an example of a sectional view taken along the line AA shown in FIG. 67, and (B) is an example of an enlarged view of the X portion shown in (A). 72, (A) is an example of a cross-sectional view taken along line BB shown in FIG. 67, and (B) is an example of an enlarged view of the Y portion shown in (A).

A line AA shown in FIG. 67 is a vertical line passing through the center of a bearing 11724 (described later) formed in an extended portion 11741 (described later) of the upper left arm 1172, and is shown in FIG. Line BB is a line that vertically traverses the longitudinal portion of upper left arm 1172 .

The upper back accessory 1100 is made of a substantially flat plate made of metal, and has a shape of a substantially picture frame without a lower side, and has a base member 1180 on which various members are attached, and a left drive mechanism having a left motor 1151 and the like. 1150, a right driving mechanism 1160 having a right motor 1161, etc., a decorative cover 1130 covering the left motor 1151, etc. from the front so that the player cannot see it, and a right motor 1161, etc. A movable decorative body 1110 that can move up and down by a decorative cover 1140, a left driving mechanism 1150 and a right driving mechanism 1160, and a pair of left and right covering decorative bodies 1120 that are pivotally supported by the movable decorative body 1110 and movable. A pantograph mechanism 1170, one end of which is connected to the base member 1180 and the other end of which is connected to the covering decoration 1120, operates (contracts in a substantially diamond shape) in accordance with the vertical movement of the movable decoration 1110, and the pantograph mechanism 1170. A regulating member 1190, which is a member that regulates the operation and is attached to the approximate center of the base member 1180, and a static decoration 1196 that is a member with decoration on the front surface and is fixedly attached to the base member 1180. Prepare.

The base member 1180 includes a central plate portion 1182 extending in the horizontal direction, a left vertical plate portion 1184 extending downward from the left end of the central plate portion 1182, and a right vertical plate portion extending downward from the right end of the central plate portion 1182. 1186.

A static decoration 1196 is attached to the front surface of the central plate portion 1182 as a decoration that is decorated on the front surface and does not operate. A horizontally long rectangular center plate 1188 is provided upward at the upper end of the center plate portion 1182 . A front surface of the center plate 1188 has a pair of left support shaft 11882 and right support shaft 11884 projecting forward.

A restricting member 1190 is attached to the front surface of the center plate 1188 below the left spindle 11882 and the right spindle 11884 to restrict the pantograph mechanism 1170 from operating above a certain level. The regulating member 1190 is a trapezoidal plate member and has a left contact surface 1192 inclined downward to the left and a right contact surface 1194 inclined downward to the right.

The left vertical plate portion 1184 is configured to allow attachment of a left motor attachment member 1152 to which the left motor 1151 is attached. A hole 11842 is formed in the left vertical plate portion 1184 at a portion corresponding to the output shaft of the left motor 1151 when the left motor mounting member 1152 is mounted. A left driven gear mounting shaft 11844 and a left transmission arm mounting shaft 11848 are formed on the front surface of the left vertical plate portion 1184 . A substantially C-shaped hole 11846 is formed around the left driven gear mounting shaft 11844 when viewed from the front. This hole 11846 is formed corresponding to the trajectory along which the support shaft 11562 formed in the driven gear 1156 moves when the driven gear 1156 (to be described later) rotates.

The right vertical plate portion 1186 is configured to allow attachment of a right motor attachment member 1162 to which the right motor 1161 is attached. A hole 11862 is formed in the right vertical plate portion 1186 at a portion corresponding to the output shaft of the right motor 1161 when the right motor mounting member 1162 is attached. A right driven gear mounting shaft 11864 and a right transmission arm mounting shaft 11868 are formed on the front surface of the right vertical plate portion 1186 . A substantially C-shaped hole 11866 is formed around the right driven gear mounting shaft 11864 when viewed from the front. This hole 11866 is formed corresponding to the trajectory along which the support shaft 11662 formed in the driven gear 1166 moves when the driven gear 1166 (to be described later) rotates.

The left drive mechanism 1150 has a left motor 1151 , a left motor mounting member 1152 to which the left motor 1151 is mounted, a drive gear 1157 , a driven gear 1156 , a left arm member 1155 and a left transmission arm 1154 . Of these, the left arm member 1155 , the driven gear 1156 and the drive gear 1157 function as left drive transmission members that transmit power from the left motor 1151 to the left transmission arm 1154 . The installation area of the left drive transmission member in the vertical direction (operating direction of the movable decoration 1110) is provided outside the display area of the liquid crystal display device 16 in a front view. It is smaller than the operating range. A hollow shaft 11544 formed at one (right) end of the left transmission drive arm 1154 is pivotally supported by the left transmission arm mounting shaft 11848 in the area where the left drive transmission member is installed.

The left motor 1151 is a motor capable of forward and reverse rotation. Left motor 1151 is attached to left motor mounting member 1152 . The left motor mounting member 1152 to which the left motor 1151 is mounted is attached to the left vertical plate portion 1184 so that the output shaft of the left motor 1151 is coaxial with the driving gear 1157 and passes through the hole 11842 formed in the left vertical plate portion 1184. can be attached to Therefore, when the left motor 1151 rotates, the drive gear 1157 rotates coaxially with the output shaft of the left motor 1151 .

Driven gear 1156 meshes with drive gear 1157 . Driven gear 1156 rotates in a direction opposite to the direction of rotation when drive gear 1157 rotates. The driven gear 1156 is a gear with a larger diameter than the driving gear 1157 . As a result, the rotational force of the left motor 1151 transmitted from the drive gear 1157 is amplified. The driven gear 1156 also has a bearing 11564 in the center and a support shaft 11562 at a predetermined distance from the center on the front surface. A bearing 11564 is rotatably supported on the left driven gear mounting shaft 11844 so that the driven gear 1156 can rotate around the left driven gear mounting shaft 11844 .

The left arm member 1155 is a substantially inverted C-shaped member when viewed from the front (substantially C-shaped when viewed from the rear), and has a left arm bearing 11552 at one end (the end on the upper side of the paper surface) and the other end. A left arm support shaft 11554 is provided at the end (the end on the lower side of the paper surface). The left arm bearing 11552 is rotatably supported by the support shaft 11562 of the driven gear 1156 .

The left transmission arm 1154 is a member that transmits the rotational force of the left motor 1151 to the movable decoration 1110 via the drive gear 1157 , the driven gear 1156 and the left arm member 1155 . The left transmission arm 1154 has a hollow shaft 11544 protruding forward at one (left) end and an elongated hole 11542 at the other (center side) end. A boss 1112 (a boss formed on the rear surface of the movable decoration 1110 ), which will be described later, is slidably connected to the long hole 11542 to support the movable decoration 1110 . The left transmission arm 1154 also has a left arm bearing 11548 rotatably supported by the left arm support shaft 11554 of the left arm member 1155 . The hollow shaft 11544 rotates around the left transmission arm mounting shaft 11848 in the area where the left drive transmission member is installed, so that the left transmission arm 1154 can rotate (circularly move) around the left transmission arm mounting shaft 11848. Possibly pivoted. A coil spring 1153 as an example of an elastic member that urges the left transmission arm 1154 counterclockwise (leftward rotation direction) is externally inserted on the hollow shaft 11544 .

Right drive mechanism 1160 has right motor 1161 , right motor mounting member 1162 to which right motor 1161 is mounted, drive gear 1167 , driven gear 1166 , right arm member 1165 and right transmission arm 1164 . Of these, the right arm member 1165 , the driven gear 1166 and the drive gear 1167 function as right drive transmission members that transmit power from the right motor 1161 to the right transmission arm 1164 . The installation area of the right drive transmission member in the vertical direction (the direction in which the movable decoration 1110 operates) is provided outside the display area of the liquid crystal display device 16 when viewed from the front. It is smaller than the operating range. A hollow shaft 11644 formed at one (right) end of the right transmission drive arm 1164 is pivotally supported by the right transmission arm mounting shaft 11868 in the area where the right drive transmission member is installed.

The right motor 1161 is a motor capable of forward and reverse rotation. Right motor 1161 is attached to right motor mounting member 1162 . A right motor mounting member 1162 to which the right motor 1161 is mounted is attached to the right vertical plate portion 1186 so that the output shaft of the right motor 1161 is coaxial with the drive gear 1167 and passes through a hole 11862 formed in the right vertical plate portion 1186. It is attached. Therefore, when the right motor 1161 rotates, the driving gear 1167 rotates coaxially with the output shaft of the right motor 1161 .

Driven gear 1166 meshes with drive gear 1167 . Driven gear 1166 rotates in a direction opposite to the direction of rotation when drive gear 1167 rotates. The driven gear 1166 is a gear with a larger diameter than the driving gear 1167 . As a result, the torque of the right motor 1161 transmitted from the driving gear 1167 is amplified. The driven gear 1166 also has a bearing 11664 in the center and a support shaft 11662 at a predetermined distance from the center on the front surface. A bearing 11664 is rotatably supported on the right driven gear mounting shaft 11864 so that the driven gear 1166 can rotate around the right driven gear mounting shaft 11864 .

The right arm member 1165 is a substantially C-shaped member when viewed from the front (substantially anti-C-shaped when viewed from the rear), and has a right arm bearing 11652 at one end (the end on the upper side of the paper surface) and the other end. A right arm support shaft 11654 is provided at the part (the end on the lower side of the paper surface). Right arm bearing 11652 is rotatably supported on support shaft 11662 of driven gear 1166 .

The right transmission arm 1164 is a member that transmits the rotational force of the right motor 1161 to the movable decoration 1110 via the drive gear 1167 , the driven gear 1166 and the right arm member 1165 . The right transmission arm 1164 has a hollow shaft 11644 protruding forward at one (right) end and an elongated hole 11642 at the other (center side) end. A boss 1114 (a boss formed on the rear surface of the movable decoration 1110 ), which will be described later, is slidably connected to the long hole 11642 to support the movable decoration 1110 . The right transmission arm 1164 also has a right arm bearing 11648 rotatably supported on the right arm support shaft 11654 of the right arm member 1165 . A hollow shaft 11644 rotates around the right transmission arm mounting shaft 11868 in the area where the right drive transmission member is installed so that the right transmission arm 1164 can rotate (circularly move) around the right transmission arm mounting shaft 11868. Possibly pivoted. In addition, a coil spring 1163 as an example of an elastic member that biases the right transmission arm 1164 clockwise (right rotation direction) is fitted around the hollow shaft 11644 .

In this way, the left transmission arm 1154 and the right transmission arm 1164 support the movable decorative body 1110 from both the left and right sides, and transmit power from the left motor 1154 and the right motor 1161 to the left drive transmission member and the right drive transmission member described above. is transmitted through

Pantograph mechanism 1170 has upper left arm 1172 , lower left arm 1174 , upper right arm 1176 and lower right arm 1178 . The pantograph mechanism 1170 has four arms, an upper left arm 1172, a lower left arm 1174, an upper right arm 1176, and a lower right arm 1178, forming a substantially rhombus-shaped side, and deforming the shape of the substantially rhombus (upper left arm 1172). and the lower left arm 1174 (the angle formed by the upper right arm 1176 and the lower right arm 1178). The upper left arm 1172 and the upper right arm 1176 are made of colorless and transparent resin. The left lower arm 1174 and the right lower arm 1178 are made of black resin.

As for the above-mentioned "substantially diamond shape", of the four arms of the upper left arm 1172, the lower left arm 1174, the upper right arm 1176, and the lower right arm 1178, for example, two sets of arms facing each other are parallel (for example, the upper left The lower arm 1172 and the lower right arm 1178 are parallel, the lower left arm 1174 and the upper right arm 1176 are parallel), and the four arms 1172, 1174, 1176, 1178 are of the same length. Shapes and squares are also envisioned. Also, among the four arms 1172, 1174, 1176, and 1178, for example, two sets of arms facing each other have the same length (for example, the upper left arm 1172 and the lower right arm 1178 have the same length, the lower left arm 1174 and the upper right arm have the same length). The arms 1176 may or may not have the same length, and furthermore, for example, one set of two pairs of arms facing each other may have the same length and the other set of arms may have the same length. may have different lengths. That is, the lengths of the four arms 1172, 1174, 1176, and 1178 are not limited to specific lengths, and various variations can be adopted. In addition, considering that each arm, that is, the accessory (movable decorative body 1110 and covered decorative body 1120) operates, it is not always necessary for the arms facing each other to be parallel, and the accessory (movable decorative body 1110 and covered decorative body 1120) does not need to be parallel. It may be a form in which the facing arms change from a non-parallel state to a parallel state in accordance with the driving of , or a form in which the parallel state changes to the non-parallel state. In addition, regarding the above-mentioned "opposed arms are parallel", considering the structure in which the accessories (movable decorative body 1110 and covered decorative body 1120) are driven, it may be difficult to obtain perfect parallelism. Therefore, if the tilt directions of the opposing arms are in the same direction, they are considered to be parallel (substantially parallel). Also, even if each of the four arms 1172, 1174, 1176, 1178 has a different length, the accessories (movable decoration 1110 and covering decoration 1120) can be moved (for example, from the origin position to the operation limit position). ), the length of the four arms 1172, 1174, 1176, 1178 can be varied.

The left upper arm 1172 has a predetermined thickness in the front-rear direction and is in the shape of a horizontally long flat plate along an imaginary plane substantially perpendicular to the front-rear direction. It has a bearing 11724 in the part. Bearing 11722 is rotatably supported by left support shaft 11882 .

The left lower arm 1174 has a predetermined thickness in the front-rear direction and is in the shape of a horizontally long flat plate along an imaginary plane substantially perpendicular to the front-rear direction. An extended portion 11741 extending upward (upper left arm 1172 side) is formed. The thickness of the extended portion 11741 in the front-rear direction is thinner than the thickness of the longitudinal portion of the upper left upper arm 1172 in the front-rear direction. A support shaft 11742 extending in the front-rear direction is formed in the extended portion 11741 at a position above the upper end 11743 of the longitudinal portion of the left lower arm 1174 . A hollow shaft 11744 is formed in the front-rear direction at the central end of the upper left arm 1172 .

The left upper arm 1172 and the left lower arm 1174 are connected to each other by rotatably supporting the bearing 11724 on the support shaft 11742 . The upper left arm 1172 and the lower left arm 1174 are in the origin position (the position where both the upper left arm 1172 and the lower left arm 1174 are in a horizontal state, for example, the embodiment shown in FIG. 67), the connection portion ( Except for the bearing 11724 and the support shaft 11742), they are arranged substantially parallel to each other without overlapping in the front-rear direction. At this time, the longitudinal portions of the upper left arm 1172 and the lower left arm 1174 (the portions excluding the bearing 11724 and the support shaft 11742) are arranged substantially on the same plane when viewed from the side. This makes it possible to reduce the thickness of the pantograph mechanism 1170 in the front-rear direction. Also, the hollow shaft 11744 passes through the elongated hole 11104 of the movable decoration 1110 and is supported by the guide shaft 11224 . The vertical direction at the origin position is the width direction of the upper left arm 1172 and the lower left arm 1174 .

The upper right arm 1176 has a predetermined thickness in the front-rear direction and is in the shape of a horizontally long flat plate along a virtual plane substantially perpendicular to the front-rear direction. It has a bearing 11764 in the part. Bearing 11762 is rotatably supported on right support shaft 11884 .

The lower right arm 1178 has a predetermined thickness in the front-rear direction and is in the shape of a horizontally long flat plate along an imaginary plane substantially perpendicular to the front-rear direction. An extended portion 11781 is formed that extends upward (toward the right lower arm 1178 side). The thickness of the extended portion 11781 in the front-rear direction is smaller than the thickness of the longitudinal portion of the upper right arm 1176 in the front-rear direction. A support shaft 11782 extending in the front-rear direction is formed in the extending portion 11781 at a position above the upper end 11783 of the longitudinal portion of the lower right lower arm 1178 . A hollow shaft 11784 is formed in the front-rear direction at the central end of the lower right lower arm 1178 .

Upper right arm 1176 and lower right arm 1178 are connected to each other by rotatably supporting bearing 11764 on support shaft 11782 . The upper right arm 1176 and the lower right arm 1178 are connected to each other (bearing 11764 and a support shaft 11782), they are arranged substantially parallel to each other without overlapping in the front-rear direction. At this time, the longitudinal portions of the upper right arm 1176 and the lower right arm 1178 (the portions excluding the bearing 11764 and the support shaft 11782) are arranged substantially on the same plane when viewed from the side. This makes it possible to reduce the thickness of the pantograph mechanism 1170 in the front-rear direction. In this embodiment, the thickness of the pantograph mechanism 1170 in the front-rear direction is within the thickness range of the left motor 1151 and the right motor 1161 . Also, the hollow shaft 11784 passes through the elongated hole 11108 of the movable decoration 1110 and is supported by the guide shaft 11244 . The vertical direction at the origin position is the width direction of the upper right arm 1176 and the lower right arm 1178 .

In the above description, the upper left arm 1172 and the lower left arm 1174 are arranged so that the longitudinal portions of the respective arms 1172 and 1174 are substantially on the same plane when viewed from the side. A detailed positional relationship in the front-rear direction between 1172 and left lower arm 1174 will be described.

The left upper arm 1172 has a frontmost position F1 in the longitudinal direction (thickness direction) of the longitudinal portion, and a rearmost position B1 in the longitudinal direction of the longitudinal portion (see FIGS. 71(B) and 72(B)). reference). The left lower arm 1174 has a frontmost position F2 in the longitudinal direction (thickness direction) and a rearmost position B2 in the longitudinal direction (see FIGS. 71(B) and 72(B)). ). Here, the frontmost position F1 of the longitudinal portion of the upper left arm 1172 in the front-rear direction is positioned rearward of the frontmost position F2 of the longitudinal portion of the left lower arm 1174 in the front-rear direction. The rearmost surface position B1 in the front-rear direction of the left lower arm 1174 is located on the rear side of the rearmost surface position B2 in the front-rear direction of the longitudinal portion of the left lower arm 1174 . However, the rearmost position B2 of the longitudinal portion of the left lower arm 1174 in the longitudinal direction is rearward of the frontmost position F1 of the longitudinal portion of the left upper arm 1172 in the longitudinal direction and the rearmost position of the longitudinal portion of the left upper arm 1172 in the longitudinal direction. It is located in front of the surface position B1 (between the frontmost position F1 in the longitudinal direction of the upper left arm 1172 and the rearmost position B1 in the longitudinal direction of the upper left arm 1172). In other words, the upper left arm 1172 and the lower left arm 1174 are such that when a cross section perpendicular to the longitudinal portion of each arm 1172, 1174 is viewed, the thickness of each arm 1172, 1174 extends in the vertical direction (the width direction of each arm). ) (a positional relationship in which the longitudinal portions of the arms 1172 and 1174 are arranged substantially on the same plane when viewed from the side).

In this embodiment, the longitudinal portion of the upper left arm 1172 and the longitudinal portion of the lower left arm 1174 are arranged substantially on the same plane when viewed from the side. A left upper arm 1172 is configured to be positioned slightly rearward. Alternatively, however, the upper left arm 1172 may be positioned slightly forward of the lower left arm 1174 . That is, in the present embodiment, the frontmost position F1 of the longitudinal portion of the upper left arm 1172 in the longitudinal direction is located rearward of the frontmost position F2 of the longitudinal portion of the left lower arm 1174 in the longitudinal direction. The rearmost surface position B1 of the longitudinal portion of 1172 in the front-rear direction is located rearward of the rearmost surface position B2 of the longitudinal portion of the left lower arm 1174 in the front-rear direction, and the rearmost surface of the longitudinal portion of the left lower arm 1174 in the front-rear direction. The position B2 is located behind the foremost position F1 in the longitudinal direction of the upper left upper arm 1172 and in front of the rearmost position B1 in the longitudinal direction of the upper left arm 1172. Alternatively, the frontmost position of the longitudinal portion of the left lower arm 1174 in the front-rear direction is located rearward of the frontmost position of the longitudinal portion of the left upper arm 1172 in the front-rear direction. The position of the rearmost surface in the longitudinal direction of the upper right upper arm 1176 is positioned rearwardly of the position of the rearmost surface in the longitudinal direction of the longitudinal portion of the upper left upper arm 1176 , and the rearwardmost surface position of the longitudinal portion of the upper left upper arm 1172 in the longitudinal direction is the lower left arm 1174 . Rearward of the frontmost position of the longitudinal portion in the longitudinal direction and forward of the rearwardmost position of the longitudinal portion of the left lower arm 1174 (the rearwardmost position of the longitudinal portion of the left upper arm 1172 in the longitudinal direction is the left lower arm). 1174 and the rearmost position of the longitudinal portion of the left lower arm 1174 in the longitudinal direction).

Further, in the present embodiment, the rearmost position B2 of the longitudinal portion of the left lower arm 1174 in the front-rear direction is behind the frontmost position F1 of the longitudinal portion of the left upper arm 1172 in the front-rear direction and the longitudinal direction of the upper left arm 1172 . (Between the frontmost position F1 of the longitudinal portion of the upper left arm 1172 and the rearmost position B1 of the longitudinal portion of the upper left arm 1172) is doing. However, instead of this, the total thickness of the upper left arm 1172 and the lower left arm 1174 (of the upper left upper arm 1172 and the lower left arm 1174, from the position of the most forward arm to the position of the most rearward arm) (thickness) can be reduced, the rearmost surface position of the longitudinal portion of the left lower arm 1174 in the longitudinal direction and the rearwardmost surface position of the longitudinal portion of the upper left arm 1172 in the longitudinal direction may be substantially flush with each other. Alternatively, the forefront position of the longitudinal portion of the left lower arm 1174 in the longitudinal direction and the forefront position of the longitudinal portion of the upper left arm 1172 in the longitudinal direction may be substantially flush with each other. Furthermore, the rearmost surface position of the longitudinal portion of the left lower arm 1174 in the longitudinal direction and the rearmost surface position of the longitudinal portion of the upper left upper arm 1172 in the longitudinal direction are substantially flush with each other, and the longitudinal portion of the left lower arm 1174 The foremost position in the front-rear direction and the foremost position in the front-rear direction of the longitudinal portion of the upper left arm 1172 are substantially flush (that is, the upper left arm 1172 and the lower left arm 1174 are substantially on the same plane). You can

Note that the positional relationship in the longitudinal direction between the upper right arm 1176 and the lower right arm 1178 is the same as the positional relationship in the longitudinal direction between the lower left arm 1174 and the upper right arm 1176, and thus description thereof is omitted.

In this way, the longitudinal portion of the upper left arm 1172 and the longitudinal portion of the lower left arm 1174 (the longitudinal portion of the upper right arm 1176 and the longitudinal portion of the lower right arm 1178) are arranged in the vertical direction (the width direction of each arm). , the total thickness of the upper left arm 1172 and the lower left arm 1174 (the longitudinal direction of the longitudinal portion of the lower right arm 1178 from the foremost position to the rearmost position in the longitudinal direction of the longitudinal portion of the upper right arm 1176) can be reduced, and the area occupied by the pantograph mechanism 1170 in the longitudinal direction can be reduced. When the pachinko machine is installed in a pachinko hall, the length in the front-rear direction is restricted. Objects can be arranged, and it is possible to execute a dynamic movable performance using a plurality of accessories that overlap in the front-rear direction.

In the contracted state of the pantograph mechanism 1170, the extended portion 11741 extends upward to a position exceeding the upper end 11743 of the left lower arm 1174. Therefore, at the origin position, the upper left arm 1172 and the lower left arm 1174 are separated from each other. It becomes a substantially horizontal state. Similarly, since the extended portion 11781 extends upward beyond the upper end 11783 of the lower right arm 1178, the upper right arm 1176 and the lower right arm 1178 are substantially horizontal at the origin position. Further, the movable range of the upper left arm 1172 and the lower left arm 1174 (the upper right arm 1176 and the lower right arm 1178) can be increased by the extent that the extension portion 11741 (extension portion 11781) is formed. Become. Moreover, since each of the arms 1172, 1174, 1176, 1178 can be made thicker, the strength of each of the arms 1172, 1174, 1176, 1178 can be increased and stability during operation can be improved. Furthermore, by increasing the strength of each of the arms 1172, 1174, 1176 and 1178, it is possible to increase the size of the movable accessory that operates in accordance with the operation of each of these arms 1172, 1174, 1176 and 1178. It becomes possible, and it becomes possible to execute a more dynamic movable effect.

By setting the positional relationship between the upper left arm 1172 and the lower left arm 1174 (the positional relationship between the upper right arm 1176 and the lower right arm 1178) as described above, a plurality of accessories overlapping in the front-rear direction can be formed. It is possible to perform a dynamic movable performance using a movable accessory and a dynamic movable performance by increasing the size of the movable accessory, and it is possible to further enhance the game interest by the movable performance.

The movable decorative body 1110 is decorated on its front surface and has openings 1101 and 1105 formed at substantially symmetrical positions. Lenses 1103 and 1107 are fitted in these openings 1101 and 1105, respectively. The movable decoration 1110 can slide up and down together with the covering decoration 1120 by the left driving mechanism 1150 and the right driving mechanism 1160 . The movable ornament 1110 has a hole 11102 , a slot 11104 , a hole 11106 and slot 11108 , and a boss 1112 and boss 1114 . The holes 11102 and 11106 are holes provided at positions substantially symmetrical to each other. The elongated hole 11104 and the hole 11106 are provided at substantially symmetrical positions, and are elongated elongated holes. The bosses 1112 and 1114 are provided on the back side of the movable decorative body 1110 at positions substantially symmetrical to each other. In addition, the movable decorative body 1110 has an LED board 1116 on which a large number of LEDs are arranged behind the lenses 1103 and 1107, so that it can emit light as the game progresses. When the LEDs arranged on the LED board 1116 emit light, the light is displayed through the lenses 1103 and 1107 .

The covering decoration 1120 has a covering decoration 1122 arranged on the left side of the movable decoration 1110 and a covering decoration 1124 arranged on the right side of the movable decoration 1110 . The covering decoration 1122 has a support shaft 11222 and a guide shaft 11224 . The covering decorative body 1124 has a support shaft 11242 and a guide shaft 11244 .

The cover decoration 1122 has a support shaft 11222 rotatably supported in the hole 11102 of the movable decoration 1110 and a guide shaft 11224 slidably inserted through the elongated hole 11104 of the movable decoration 1110 . The cover ornament 1122 is also connected to the pantograph mechanism 1170 (more specifically, it is rotatably supported by the bearing 11744 at the central end of the left lower arm 1174). As a result, the covering decoration 1122 covers the front surface (lens 1103) of the movable decoration 1110 and is arranged movably with respect to the movable decoration 1110 with the support shaft 11222 as the center of rotation.

The cover decoration 1124 has a support shaft 11242 rotatably supported in the hole 11106 of the movable decoration 1110 and a guide shaft 11244 slidably inserted through the elongated hole 11108 of the movable decoration 1110 . The cover ornament 1124 is also connected to the pantograph mechanism 1170 (more specifically, it is rotatably supported by the bearing 11784 at the central end of the lower right arm 1178). As a result, the covering decoration 1124 covers the front surface (lens 1107) of the movable decoration 1110 and is arranged movably with respect to the movable decoration 1110 with the support shaft 11242 as the center of rotation.

The covering decorative body 1122 and the covering decorative body 1124 are arranged so as to be substantially bilaterally symmetrical to each other.

[Description of the operation of the upper back accessory 1100]
Next, the operation of the upper back accessory 1100 will be described with reference to FIGS. 73 to 77. FIG. 73A and 73B are diagrams showing an example of the upper back accessory 1100 before the start of operation, that is, in a normal mode (a mode at the origin position), where (A) is a front view and (B) is a rear view. FIG. 74 is a diagram showing an example of a state after the upper back accessory 1100 starts operating and before the upper left arm 1172 and the upper right arm 1176 of the pantograph mechanism 1170 reach their limit positions, (A). is a front view, and (B) is a rear view. 75A and 75B are diagrams showing an example of a mode when the upper left arm 1172 and the upper right arm 1176 of the pantograph mechanism 1170 reach their limit positions, where (A) is a front view and (B) is a rear view. . In FIG. 76, after the upper left arm 1172 and upper right arm 1176 of the pantograph mechanism 1170 are operated to the operation limit position, the left motor 1151 and right motor 1161 are further rotated, and the left transmission arm 1154 and right transmission arm 1164 move the decoration. When the body 1110 is actuated downward in the paper surface (when the covering decorative body 1120 starts to operate with respect to the movable decorative body 1110), (A) is a front view, (B) is a diagram showing an example of a mode. ) is the rear view. 77A and 77B are diagrams showing an example of a mode in which the covering decoration body 1120 has moved to the operation limit with respect to the movable decoration body 1110, where (A) is a front view and (B) is a rear view.

As shown in FIG. 73, when the upper back accessory 1100 is at the origin position, the pantograph mechanism 1170 is in a closed state (the longitudinal portions of the arms 1172, 1174, 1176, and 1178 are all substantially horizontal). be. Here, the members (the lower left arm 1174 and the lower right arm 1178) that can be hidden by the movable decorative body 1110 when the movable decorative body 1110 is actuated downward in the paper surface are the back surface of the movable decorative body 1110. The members that are difficult to hide with the movable decorative body 1110 (the upper left arm 1172 and the upper right arm 1176) are made of colorless and transparent members. As a result, the images displayed in the display area of the liquid crystal display device 16 by the arms 1172, 1174, 1176, and 1178 are less likely to be obstructed, and the player is less likely to notice this.

As the movable decorative body 1110 moves downward in the plane of the drawing, the longitudinal portions of the arms 1172, 1174, 1176 change their postures in the vertical direction, and the upper arms 1172, 1176 and the lower arms 1174, 1178 move vertically. The angle formed by is increasing. When the movable decoration 1110 is actuated downward in the plane of the paper, the directions in which the longitudinal portions of the lower left arm 1174 and the lower right arm 1178 face are vertical, but until the movable decoration 1110 exceeds a certain operating range, Left lower arm 1174 and lower right arm 1178 remain positioned on the back side of movable ornament 1110 .

When the left motor 1151 rotates counterclockwise in front view, the drive gear 1157 also rotates counterclockwise. As drive gear 1157 rotates counterclockwise, driven gear 1156 rotates clockwise. When the support shaft 11562 is at the origin position (when the movable decoration 1110 and the covering decoration 1120 are at the origin position), it is positioned above the plane of the paper, and when the driven gear 1156 rotates clockwise, the bearing 11564 (left It circulates clockwise around the driven gear mounting shaft 11844). When the support shaft 11562 rotates clockwise around the bearing 11564 (the left driven gear mounting shaft 11844), the left arm member 1155 is pushed downward to the left. When the left arm member 1155 is pushed downward to the left, a clockwise pressing force around the hollow shaft 11544 (the left transmission arm mounting shaft 11848) acts on the left transmission arm 1154 . When a clockwise pressing force about the left transmission arm mounting shaft 11848 acts on the left transmission arm 1154, the left transmission arm 1154 rotates clockwise about the left transmission arm mounting shaft 11848 as a fulcrum. When the left transmission arm 1154 rotates clockwise, the boss 1112 slidably connected to the slot 11542 moves within the slot 11542 and moves the movable ornament 1110 downward.

When the right motor 1161 rotates clockwise in a front view, the drive gear 1167 also rotates clockwise. As drive gear 1167 rotates clockwise, driven gear 1166 rotates counterclockwise. When the support shaft 11662 is at the origin position (when the movable decoration 1110 and the covering decoration 1120 are at the origin position), it is positioned above the paper surface, and when the driven gear 1166 rotates counterclockwise, the bearing 11664 ( It circulates counterclockwise around the right transmission arm mounting shaft 11868). When the support shaft 11662 rotates counterclockwise around the bearing 11664 (right driven gear mounting shaft 11864), the right arm member 1165 is pushed downward to the right. When the right arm member 1165 is pushed downward to the right, a counterclockwise pressing force around the hollow shaft 11644 (right transmission arm attachment shaft 11868) acts on the right transmission arm 1164. As shown in FIG. When a counterclockwise pressing force around the right transmission arm mounting shaft 11868 acts on the right transmission arm 1164, the right transmission arm 1164 rotates counterclockwise with the right transmission arm mounting shaft 11868 as a fulcrum. . When the right transmission arm 1164 rotates counterclockwise, the boss 1114 slidably connected to the slot 11642 moves within the slot 11642 and moves the movable ornament 1110 downward.

When the movable decoration 1110 moves downward, the covering decorations 1122 and 1124 also move downward along with the movement of the movable decoration 1110 . Since the guide shafts 11224, 11244 of the covering decorations 1122, 1124 are slidably inserted into the elongated holes 11104, 11108 of the movable decoration 1110, when the movable decoration 1110 moves downward, gravity This is because the covering decorations 1122 and 1124 are also moved downward by the action.

When the left motor 1151 rotates counterclockwise when viewed from the front and the right motor 1161 rotates clockwise when viewed from the front in synchronism with this, the movable decorative body 1110 and the covered decorative body 1120 maintain a substantially horizontal state on the paper surface. It works downwards.

When the left motor 1151 rotates counterclockwise in a front view to move the movable decorative body 1110 and the covered decorative body 1120 downward in the paper plane, the lower central hollow shaft 1744 connected to the covered decorative body 1122 moves downward in the paper plane. pushed down towards As a result, the left lower arm 1174 rotates clockwise around the support shaft 11742, and the upper left arm 1172 rotates counterclockwise around the bearing 11722 (central left support shaft 11882). When the right motor 1161 rotates clockwise in a front view to move the movable decoration 1110 and the covering decoration 1120 downward in the paper surface, the hollow shaft 11784 connected to the covering decoration 1124 is pushed downward in the paper surface. be done. As a result, the lower right arm 1178 rotates counterclockwise about the support shaft 11782, and the upper right arm 1176 rotates clockwise about the bearing 11762 (central right support shaft 11884). Thus, the pantograph mechanism 1170 operates.

By the way, when the upper left arm 1172 rotates counterclockwise about the bearing 11722 (central left support shaft 11882 ), it will come into contact with the left contact surface 1192 of the regulating member 1190 eventually. Also, when the right upper arm 1176 rotates clockwise about the bearing 11762 (central right support shaft 11884 ), it will come into contact with the right contact surface 1194 of the regulating member 1190 eventually. The position of the upper left arm 1172 when in contact with the left contact surface 1192 is the operating limit position directed downward in the paper plane, and the position of the upper right arm 1176 when in contact with the right contact surface 1194 is the position in the paper plane. This is the operating limit position directed downward.

When the left motor 1151 rotates counterclockwise when viewed from the front after the left upper arm 1172 has moved to the operation limit position, the movable decoration 1110 moves further downward in the plane of the drawing, and the hollow shaft 11744 moves toward the long hole 11104. Move from the lower end position to the upper end position. Along with this, the covering decoration 1122 rotates clockwise with the support shaft 11222 as a fulcrum. Further, when the right motor 1161 rotates clockwise in a front view after the upper right arm 1176 has moved to the operation limit position, the movable ornamental body 1110 moves further downward in the plane of the drawing, and the hollow shaft 11784 moves toward the elongated hole 11108. moves from the lower end position to the upper end position. Along with this, the covering decorative body 1124 rotates counterclockwise with the support shaft 11242 as a fulcrum. In this way, the covering decoration 1122 and the covering decoration 1124 together with the movable decoration 1110 move downward in the paper from the origin position, and the upper left arm 1172 and the upper right arm 1176 move downward in the paper. When the movable decoration 1110 is moved to the limit position and the movable decoration 1110 moves downward in the drawing, the covering decoration 1120 is moved relative to the movable decoration 1110 . When the covering decoration 1120 operates relative to the movable decoration 1110, the lenses 1103 and 1107 fitted in the openings 1101 and 1105 are exposed and can be visually recognized by the player. The amount of exposure of lenses 1103 and 1107 increases as the relative working range of covering decoration 1120 with respect to movable decoration 1110 increases.

Thus, the upper back accessory 1100 is vertically movable between the origin position (see FIG. 73) and the lower end position (see FIG. 75). Specifically, the movable decoration 1110 is movable between the origin position and the lower end position, and the covering decoration 1120 is moved between the origin position and the operation limit positions of the upper left arm 1172 and the upper right arm 1176. can be moved. After the movable decoration 1110 and the covering decoration 1120 have moved to the lower end position, the operation limit position is that the covering decoration 1120 reaches the limit with respect to the movable decoration 1110 while the movable decoration 1110 is at the lower end position. This is the activated position. That is, the vertical position of the movable decorative body 1110 is the same at the lower end position and the operation limit position. When the movable decorative body 1110 and the covered decorative body 1120 are at the origin position, they stand by at a position that does not hinder the visual recognition of the image displayed in the display area of the liquid crystal display device 16 . On the other hand, when the upper back accessory 1100 (more specifically, the movable decorative body 1110 and the covered decorative body 1120) is at the lower end position, the liquid crystal display device 16 is displayed even when the covered decorative body 1120 is at the operation limit position. Located in front of the display area. That is, when the upper back accessory 1100 at the origin position moves toward the lower end position, the upper back accessory 1100 (movable decorative body 1110 and covered decorative body 1120) moves from the origin position to the display area of the liquid crystal display device 16. to the front. Advancement of the upper back role 1100 forward from the origin position to the display area of the liquid crystal display device 16 is the progress of the game (for example, winning (passing) of the game ball to the first start port 762 or the second start port 752 ) is executed according to the result of the hit determination executed under the condition of ).

It should be noted that when the upper rear accessory 1100 advances toward the front of the display area of the liquid crystal display device 16, the upper right arm 1176 and the upper left arm 1172 are exposed at positions visible to the player. Since the upper left arm 1172 is made of transparent resin, it does not hinder the visual recognition of the effect image displayed in the display area of the liquid crystal display device 16 . Moreover, since the upper back accessory 1100 (more specifically, the movable decorative body 1110 and the covering decorative body 1120) moves up and down by the pantograph mechanism, the fulcrum between the upper right arm 1176 and the lower right arm 1178, and the upper left arm 1172 and the lower left The fulcrums with the lower arm 1174 are all on the sides of the display area of the liquid crystal display device 16, which is less likely to hinder the player's visual recognition (the player tends to focus on the central portion). 1150 and the right drive mechanism 1160 can be provided compactly in a range smaller than the vertical movable range of the upper back accessory 1100 . Although the lower left arm 1174 and the lower right arm 1178 are made of black resin, even if the upper rear accessory 1100 advances toward the front of the display area of the liquid crystal display device 16, the lower left arm 1174 and the lower right arm 1174 and the lower right arm 1178 are Since the arm 1178 moves so as to be hidden behind the movable decorative body 1110, the left lower arm 1174 and the lower right arm 1178 are difficult to come into view of the player. In addition, by reducing the thickness of the pantograph mechanism 1170 in the front-rear direction, it is possible to reduce the overall thickness of the upper back accessory 1100 (in this embodiment, the thickness is about the same as the width of the left motor 1151 and the right motor 1161). ing).

In addition, when the movable decoration 1110 starts to operate, the movable decoration 1110 and the covering decoration 1120 both start to operate from the origin position, and the covering decoration 1120 (covering decoration) with respect to the movable decoration 1110 starts halfway. 1122 and the covering ornament 1124) will begin to operate relative to each other. That is, when the movable decoration 1110 starts to operate, the covering decoration 1120 does not operate on the movable decoration 1110, so the covering decoration 1120 does not operate from the beginning when the movable decoration 1110 starts to operate. Since it is difficult to predict the final form, the movable decoration 1110 will perform an operation that exceeds the player's expectations from the middle, making it possible to increase interest.

In this embodiment, when the movable decorative body 1110 starts to operate, the covering decorative body 1120 (the covering decorative body 1122 and the covering decorative body 1124) does not operate with respect to the movable decorative body 1110 at the beginning, and the movable decoration body 1110 is movable from the middle. The covering decoration 1120 is configured to start operating relative to the decoration 1110, but is not limited to this, and the covering decoration 1120 operates regardless of the position of the movable decoration 1110. may be

By the way, after the upper left arm 1172 and the upper right arm 1176 contact the left contact surface 1192 and the right contact surface 1194 respectively (after reaching the operation limit position), the left motor 1151 and the right motor 1161 further rotate. Even if this is done, the postures of the upper left arm 1172 and the upper right arm 1176 (the directions in which the longitudinal portions of the upper left arm 1172 and the upper right arm 1176 face) do not change. On the other hand, regarding the left lower arm 1174 and the right lower arm 1178, even after the upper left arm 1172 and the right upper arm 1176 contact the left contact surface 1192 and the right contact surface 1194, respectively, the left lower arm 1174 and the lower right arm 1174 do not move. The longitudinal portion of each arm 1178 changes its posture in the vertical direction. When the longitudinal portions of the lower left arm 1174 and the lower right arm 1178 change their postures in the vertical direction, the lower left arm 1174 and the lower right arm 1178 eventually become exposed from the back side of the movable decorative body 1110. .

Therefore, in the present embodiment, before the lower left arm 1174 and the lower right arm 1178 are exposed from the back side of the movable decorative body 1110, the covering decorative body 1120 (the covering decorative body 1122) is attached to the movable decorative body 1110. and covering decorative body 1124) are operated relatively. That is, when the movable decoration 1110 is moved downward in the plane of the drawing, the longitudinal portions of the lower left arm 1174 and the lower right arm 1178 change their postures in the vertical direction. And the lower right arm 1178 appears in a position where it can be visually recognized in a front view. The arm 1178 is positioned on the rear side of the covering decorative body 1120 . When the covered decorative body 1120 operates relative to the movable decorative body 1110, the role object area (area where the movable decorative body 1110 and the covered decorative body 1120 are combined) that can be visually recognized in the front view becomes large. By doing so, the left lower arm 1174 and the lower right arm 1178 are prevented from being exposed in a way that is natural and comfortable for the player.

In addition, in this embodiment, as described above, after the upper back accessory 1100 at the origin position starts to operate toward the lower end position, the upper left arm 1172 and the upper right arm 1176 each move to the left contact surface. 1192 and the right contact surface 1194, while continuing to operate the movable decoration 1110 toward the lower end position, the covering decoration 1120 (the covering decoration 1122 and the covering decoration Body 1124) is actuated upward. Here, the operation of the covering decoration 1122 with respect to the movable decoration 1100 is performed by one operation control such as rotating the left motor 1151 counterclockwise when viewed from the front. Similarly, the movement of the covering decoration 1124 with respect to the movable decoration 1100 is performed by one operation control such as rotating the right motor 1161 clockwise when viewed from the front. That is, for both the covered decorative body 1122 and the covered decorative body 1124, the corresponding motors (the left motor 1151 for the covered decorative body 1122 and the right motor 1161 for the covered decorative body 1124) are rotated in a specific direction. With one simple motion control, it is possible to operate the movable decoration 1100 independently of the operation of the movable decoration 1100 while continuing to operate the movable decoration 1100 . Moreover, since only one motor is rotated for each of the covering decoration 1122 and the covering decoration 1124, the structure is simple and space-saving, and the movable decoration 1100 can be operated while the movable decoration 1100 continues to operate. can be operated independently of the operation of In particular, in recent years, increasing the size of movable accessories and arranging a plurality of movable accessories has become mainstream, so the contribution to space saving is a great effect.

By the way, conventionally, when the accessory is operated in a substantially straight line in the vertical direction, drive mechanisms are provided on both sides of the accessory, and the drive mechanism performs the linear motion in the vertical direction. When driving mechanisms are provided on both sides of the accessory, it is necessary to provide the driving mechanism over at least the operating range of the accessory in the vertical direction, and installation of such a driving mechanism requires a large area. If the accessory can be operated by arcuate motion, space can be saved, but in this case, the accessory is also operated by arcuate motion. In this regard, in the present embodiment, the left transmission arm 1154 rotates clockwise around the left transmission arm mounting shaft 11848, and the boss 1112 slidably connected to the long hole 11542 moves inside the long hole 11542. while moving the movable decoration 1110 downward. In synchronism with this, the right transmission arm 1164 rotates counterclockwise around the right transmission arm mounting shaft 11868, and the boss 1114 slidably connected to the long hole 11642 moves inside the long hole 11642. while moving the movable decoration 1110 downward. That is, according to the present embodiment, while each of the left transmission arm 1154 and the right transmission arm 1164 is moved in an arc with one end as a fulcrum, the attitude of the movable decoration 1110 is maintained substantially horizontally. It is possible to move the movable decorative body 1110 substantially linearly in the vertical direction over an operation range larger than the installation area of the drive mechanism. Moreover, since the left transmission arm 1154 and the right transmission arm 1164 move in an arc, the installation area in the vertical direction of the drive mechanism (the left drive mechanism 1150 and the right drive mechanism 1160) for driving the movable decoration 1110 is set to the movable decoration 1110. can be made smaller than the operating range of , and can greatly contribute to space saving.

In addition, in the present embodiment, similar decorations are provided on the front surfaces of the movable decoration 1110, the covering decoration 1120, the decoration cover 1130, the decoration cover 1140, the left transmission arm 1154, the right transmission arm 1164, and the static decoration 1196. is applied. The same type of decoration means, for example, decoration that evokes the same idea, and if decorations that can be recognized as having the same color, pattern, and shape are applied, they can evoke the same idea. In the present embodiment, on the front surfaces of the members 1110, 1120, 1130, 1140, 1154, 1164, and 1196, there are formed the same accessory (upper back accessory 1100) having the same color in appearance. It is decorated with recognizable decorations. In addition, since the upper back accessory 1100 is a character shape related to the concept of the game machine, the members 1110, 1120, 1130, 1140, 1154, 1164, and 1196 having the same type of decoration applied to the front face are used to form the same character. A character form is formed.

In a conventional game machine such as a pachinko machine, in particular, a support member that supports a movable member (corresponding to the movable decorative body 1110 of the present embodiment) and a driving member that drives the movable member (the left transmission of the present embodiment) arm 1154 and right transmission arm 1164) may be visible when viewed from the front when the movable accessory advances to the front side of the liquid crystal display device. In this regard, in the present embodiment, unlike such a conventional game machine, the left transmission arm 1154 and the right transmission arm 1164 are intentionally made visible in a front view, and other members (movable ornaments 1110 , covering decorative body 1120, decorative covers 1130, 1140 and static decorative body 1196) are members constituting the same accessory (upper back accessory 1100). Moreover, the left transmission arm 1154 and the right transmission arm 1164 are assimilated with the other members (eg , (A) of FIGS. 73 to 77). More specifically, the left transfer arm 1154 is decorated with a decoration that provides continuity between the movable decorative body 1110 and the decorative cover 1130, and the right transfer arm 1164 is provided with the movable decorative body 1110 and the decorative cover. It is decorated to give continuity between 1140. Moreover, the left transmission arm 1154, the right transmission arm 1164, and the front surfaces of the other members are decorated in the same manner to form one character shape. In this way, while the left transmission arm 1154 and the right transmission arm 1164 are intentionally visible from the front, the transmission arm 1154 and the right transmission arm 1164 are connected to the movable decoration 1110 to support the movable decoration 1110. This makes it difficult for the player to grasp that it is a member that does. Furthermore, while the movable decoration 1110 has an eye-like shape, the left transmission arm 1154 and the right transmission arm 1164 have shapes that give the image of the outer corner of the eye from the left and right ends of the movable decoration 1110. . Therefore, it is even more difficult for the player to understand that the transmission arm 1154 and the right transmission arm 1164 are members for driving the movable decoration 1110 .

[Configuration of Lower Accessory 1200]
The configuration of the lower accessory 1200 will be described with reference to FIGS. 78 to 83. FIG. FIG. 78 is an example of a front view of the lower accessory 1200 in the normal mode (the mode when it is at the origin position). FIG. 79 is an example of a rear view of the lower accessory 1200 in the normal mode. FIG. 80 is an example of a perspective view of the lower accessory 1200 viewed obliquely from the upper front right. FIG. 81 is an example of a rear perspective view of the lower accessory 1200 viewed obliquely from the upper left. FIG. 82 is an example of an exploded perspective view of the lower accessory 1200 viewed obliquely from the upper right front. FIG. 83 is an example of an exploded perspective view of the lower accessory 1200 viewed obliquely from the rear left (left in front view).

The lower accessory 1200 includes a lower accessory fixing base 1220 to which various members constituting the lower accessory 1200 are attached, a lower accessory movable decorative body 1210 configured to be operable with respect to the lower accessory fixing base 1220, A left guide 1260 member and a right guide 1270 member that guide the vertical movement of the lower accessory movable decoration 1210 on both the left and right sides, and an auxiliary force that acts upward on the lower accessory movable decoration 1210 that moves up and down. A lower accessory driving motor 1230 as a drive source for operating the lower accessory movable decorative body 1210 with respect to the arm 1280 and the lower accessory fixing base 1220, and the power of the lower accessory driving motor 1230 is used to move the lower accessory. A gear 1240 for transmission to the decorative body 1210 and a rear cover 1250 made of transparent resin arranged behind the gear 1240 are provided. Although the rear cover 1250 is made of transparent resin, various members such as the gear 1240 are not shown in FIGS. The lower accessory fixing base 1220 and the lower accessory drive motor 1230 described above function as an operating mechanism for moving the lower accessory movable decorative body 1210 up and down.

The lower accessory fixing base 1220 is a horizontally long rectangular plate-like member. The lower accessory fixing base 1220 is attached and fixed to the rear box 1800 of the back unit 176 described above. A lower accessory drive motor 1230 is attached to approximately the center of the lower part of the lower accessory fixing base 1220 on the front side. A support shaft 12202 that pivotally supports the auxiliary arm 1280 is formed toward the front on the left side of the front surface of the lower accessory fixing base 1220 . A pair of left and right support shafts 12203 and 12205 are formed rearward on the back side of the lower accessory fixing base 1220 . The lower accessory fixing base 1220 has a pair of semicircular holes 12204 and 12206 that are substantially symmetrical to the lower accessory drive motor 1230 and bulge outward above the lower accessory drive motor 1230. formed. The hole 12204 is formed so as to draw an arc around the support shaft 12203 . The hole 12206 is formed so as to draw an arc around the spindle 12205 . A photosensor 12208 for detecting the position of the lower accessory movable decoration 1210 is arranged on the front side of the lower accessory fixing base 1220 and on the right side of the lower accessory drive motor 1230 . In this embodiment, the photosensor 12208 detects whether or not the lower accessory movable decorative body 1210 is at the origin position.

The lower accessory movable decorative body 1210 is a horizontally elongated decorative member. It is attached to the front side of the lower accessory fixing base 1220 so as to be vertically operable with respect to the lower accessory fixing base 1220 . The lower accessory movable decorative body 1210 includes a lower accessory movable base 12102 made of transparent resin that can move vertically with respect to the lower accessory fixed base 1220, and a lower accessory fixed base 1220 that is decorated on the front surface. and a lower accessory decorative cover 12104 that covers the front surface of the lower accessory movable base 12102 and moves up and down. The lower accessory decorative cover 12104 is configured to allow light from the rear to pass forward.

A pair of long holes 12106 and 12108 are formed on both left and right sides of the lower accessory movable base 12102 . These elongated holes 12106 and 12108 are transversely long elongated holes. A boss 12110 that engages with the auxiliary arm 1280 is formed on the lower accessory movable base 12102 toward the front on the right side of the long hole 12106 .

In addition, the lower accessory movable base 12102 has an LED board on which an LED (not shown) is arranged as a light source on the front side. When the LED arranged on this LED board emits light, it emits light forward through the lower accessory decorative cover 12104 . As a result, for example, it is possible to perform a light emitting effect in accordance with the vertical movement of the lower accessory movable decorative body 1210 .

The left guide member 1260 is a vertically long plate-like member, and is attached to the left side of the lower accessory fixing base 1220 at attachment portions 12604 and 12606 . The left guide member 1260 is attached to the left side of the lower accessory fixing base 1220 so as to sandwich the lower accessory movable base 12102 with the lower accessory fixing base 1220 . The groove formed between the left guide member 1260 and the lower accessory fixing base 1220 functions as a guide groove when the lower accessory movable base 12102 moves up and down with respect to the lower accessory fixing base 1220. .

The right guide member 1270 is a vertically long plate-like member and is attached to the right side of the lower accessory fixing base 1220 at the attachment portions 12704 and 12706 . The right guide member 1270 is attached to the right side of the lower accessory fixing base 1220 so as to sandwich the lower accessory movable base 12102 with the lower accessory fixing base 1220 . A groove formed between the right guide member 1270 and the lower accessory fixing base 1220 functions as a guide groove when the lower accessory movable base 12102 moves up and down with respect to the lower accessory fixing base 1220. .

The auxiliary arm 1280 is a rod-shaped member provided on the front left side of the lower accessory decorative cover 12104 . The auxiliary arm 1280 has a bearing 12804 pivotally supported by the support shaft 12202 of the lower accessory fixing base 1220 at its left end. The auxiliary arm 1280 has an elongated hole 12802 formed at its right end to engage with a boss 12110 formed on the lower accessory movable base 12102 .

An auxiliary coil spring 1290 is provided as an example of an elastic member between the support shaft 12202 formed on the lower accessory fixing base 1220 and the bearing 12804 formed on the auxiliary arm 1280 . Auxiliary coil spring 1290 urges auxiliary arm 1280 counterclockwise (to the left) with bearing 12804 (support shaft 12202) as the center of rotation. The counterclockwise biasing force of the auxiliary coil spring 1290 assists the upward movement of the lower accessory movable decorative body 1210 with respect to the lower accessory fixing base 1220 .

The lower accessory drive motor 1230 is a stepping motor, and its rotation is controlled by a pulse signal from the accessory control circuit 207 .

A gear 1240 is provided behind the lower accessory fixing base 1220 . The gear 1240 includes a driving gear 12402 coaxially provided with the lower accessory driving motor 1230, a left driven gear 12404 and a right driven gear 12406.

The left driven gear 12404 and the right driven gear 12406 have the same diameter, and are horizontally rotated so that the height direction position of the rotation center of the left driven gear 12404 and the height direction position of the rotation center of the right driven gear 12406 are the same. arranged side by side. Also, the left driven gear 12404 and the right driven gear 12406 rotate synchronously in opposite directions.

The left driven gear 12404 has a bearing 12404a in its center. The bearing 12404a rotatably supports the support shaft 12203. As shown in FIG. The teeth of left driven gear 12404 mesh with the teeth of drive gear 12402 . The right driven gear 12406 has a bearing 12406a in its center. The bearing 12406a rotatably supports the support shaft 12205. As shown in FIG. The teeth of right driven gear 12406 mesh with the teeth of left driven gear 12404 and do not mesh with the teeth of drive gear 12402 . That is, the rotational force of the lower accessory driving motor 1230 is transmitted to the left driven gear 12404 through the drive gear 12402, and the rotational force transmitted to the left driven gear 12404 is further transmitted to the right driven gear 12406. In this manner, the driving gear 12402 and the right driven gear 12406 rotate synchronously.

The left driven gear 12404 has a boss 12405 formed on the front surface at a predetermined distance from the center of the left driven gear 12404 in the radial direction. Similarly, a boss 12407 is formed on the front surface of the right driven gear 12406 at a predetermined distance from the center of the right driven gear 12406 in the radial direction. Note that the distance from the center of left driven gear 12404 to boss 12405 is the same as the distance from the center of right driven gear 12406 to boss 12407 .

In addition, "the left driven gear 12404 and the right driven gear 12406 have the same diameter", "the center height position of the left driven gear 12404 and the center height position of the right driven gear 12406 are the same", and "the left driven gear 12404 and the right driven gear 12406 The distance from the center of the gear 12404 to the boss 12405 and the distance from the center of the right driven gear 12406 to the boss 12407 are the same. However, when transmitting the power of the lower accessory driving motor 1230 to the lower accessory movable decoration 1210, the lower accessory movable decoration 1210 is stabilized while maintaining the same posture in appearance (balanced in the left and right direction). In order to be able to move up and down, it is sufficient that the colleague is transmitted to the left and right of the lower accessory movable decorative body 1210 substantially evenly.

The boss 12405 passes through a hole 12204 formed in the lower accessory fixing base 1220 and is slidably connected to an elongated hole 12106 formed in the lower accessory movable base 12102 . Here, hole 12204 is formed corresponding to the locus along which boss 12405 revolves around support shaft 12203 when left driven gear 12404 rotates clockwise.

The boss 12407 passes through a hole 12206 formed in the lower accessory fixing base 1220 and is slidably connected to an elongated hole 12108 formed in the lower accessory movable base 12102 . Here, the hole 12206 is formed so as to correspond to the trajectory of the boss 12407 rotating around the support shaft 12205 when the right driven gear 12406 rotates counterclockwise.

Bosses 12405 and 12407 are normally located at the lowest position (the position shown in FIG. 84).

Holes 12204 and 12206 also have the function of defining the movement ranges of bosses 12405 and 12407 (that is, the rotation ranges of left driven gear 12404 and right driven gear 12406), respectively.

When the uppermost position of the bosses 12405 and 12407 when the left driven gear 12404 and the right driven gear 12406 rotate is defined as the uppermost position, the hole 12204 and the hole 12206 are positioned at least at the lowermost position and the uppermost position. and the bosses 12405 and 12407 must be formed so as to be able to move between them. In this embodiment, the hole 12404 is formed clockwise from the lowest position (see FIG. 84) to a position beyond the highest position. Also, the hole 12206 is formed counterclockwise from the lowest position (see FIG. 84) to a position beyond the highest position.

Here, of the two positions where the vertical line LL passing through the center OL of the left driven gear 12404 and the hole 12204 intersect, the upper position is the uppermost position of the boss 12405 and the lower position is the lowermost position of the boss 12405 . Further, of the two positions where the hole 12206 intersects with the vertical line LR passing through the center OR of the right driven gear 12406, the upper position is the highest position of the boss 12407, and the lower position is the lowest position of the boss 12407 (either (see also Figure 86). However, in FIG. 86, both boss 12405 and boss 12407 have moved slightly beyond the topmost position.

It should be noted that the “position slightly exceeding the uppermost position” of the boss 12405 is the right side of the vertical line LL passing through the center OL of the left driven gear 12404 in a front view (right side in FIG. 86A, FIG. 86A). (B)), which is a position where a substantially uppermost position can be maintained. In addition, the “position beyond the uppermost position” of the boss 12407 is the left side of the vertical line LR passing through the center OR of the right driven gear 12406 (the left side in FIG. 86A, the left side in FIG. 86B ) to the right). However, it is preferable that the extent of the "over position" is so small that it is difficult to recognize that the lower accessory movable decorative body 1210 has descended when the lower accessory movable decorative body 1210 moves upward. This is because if the bosses 12405 and 12407 greatly exceed the uppermost position, the lower accessory movable decorative body 1210 will descend to a position lower than the uppermost position.

[Description of the operation of the lower accessory 1200]
Next, the operation of the lower accessory 1200 will be described with reference to FIGS. 84 to 86. FIG. 84A and 84B are diagrams showing an example of the lower accessory 1200 before the start of operation, that is, in the normal mode (the mode at the origin position), where (A) is a front view and (B) is a rear view. FIG. 85 is a diagram showing an example of the lower accessory 1200 when operated to the intermediate position, where (A) is a front view and (B) is a rear view. 86A and 86B are diagrams showing an example of the lower accessory 1200 when it operates to the operation limit, where (A) is a front view and (B) is a rear view. In addition, in FIG. 86, the boss 12407 and the long hole 12108 are illustrated so that the aspect thereof can be grasped.

The lower accessory movable decoration 1210 is vertically movable between the origin position (see FIG. 84) and the operation limit position (see FIG. 86). When the lower accessory movable decorative body 1210 is at the origin position, it is hidden behind the center unit 74, making it difficult for the player to visually recognize it. On the other hand, when the lower accessory movable decorative body 1210 is at the operation limit position, it is positioned in front of the display area of the liquid crystal display device 16 . That is, when the lower accessory movable decorative body 1210 at the origin position moves toward the operation limit position, the lower accessory movable decorative body 1210 is directed forward from the rear of the center unit 74 to the display area of the liquid crystal display device 16. will advance. The advancement of the lower accessory movable decorative body 1210 forward from the rear of the center unit 74 to the display area of the liquid crystal display device 16 is the progress of the game (for example, the game to the first start port 762 or the second start port 752 It is executed according to the result of the hit judgment executed on the condition that the ball wins (passes).

When the lower accessory drive motor 1230 rotates counterclockwise, the left driven gear 12404 rotates clockwise and the right driven gear 12406 rotates counterclockwise. When the left driven gear 12404 rotates clockwise, the boss 12405 located at the bottom in the normal state rotates clockwise while drawing an arc with a radius of the straight line distance RL from the center 12404a of the left driven gear 12404 to the boss 12405. rotate to When the right driven gear 12406 rotates counterclockwise, the boss 12407 located at the lowest position in the normal state is reversed while drawing an arc whose radius is the linear distance RR from the center 12406a of the right driven gear 12406 to the boss 12407. Rotate clockwise. That is, the lower accessory movable decorative body 1210 rises toward the operation limit position.

While the lower accessory movable decoration 1210 moves from the origin position (see FIG. 84) to the intermediate position (see FIG. 85), the boss 12405 moves leftward ( 84(B) and 85(B), the lower accessory movable base 12102 is pushed up while moving to the right. The boss 12407 moves rightward (to the left in FIGS. 84(B) and 85(B)) in the elongated hole 12108 formed in the lower accessory movable base 12102 while moving the lower accessory movable base 12102 upward. push up. At this time, the holes 12204 and 12206 function as guide grooves that guide the operation of the bosses 12405 and 12407, respectively, and as described above, the operation ranges of the bosses 12405 and 12407 (the left driven gear 12404 and the right driven gear 12406 rotation range).

Also, while the lower accessory movable decoration 1210 operates from the intermediate position (see FIG. 85) to the operation limit position (see FIG. 86), the boss 12405 moves through the long hole 12106 formed in the lower accessory movable base 12102. While moving to the right (to the left in FIGS. 85(B) and 86(B)), the lower accessory movable base 12102 is pushed upward, and the boss 12407 moves into the elongated hole 12108 formed in the lower accessory movable base 12102. While moving leftward (rightward in FIGS. 85(B) and 86(B)), the lower accessory movable base 12102 is pushed upward. In addition, since the auxiliary coil spring 1290 applies a counterclockwise biasing force to the auxiliary arm 1280 with the bearing 12804 as a fulcrum, the auxiliary coil spring 1290 pushes the lower accessory movable decorative body 1210 upward. Supported.

As the lower accessory drive motor 1230 rotates clockwise, the left driven gear 12404 rotates counterclockwise and the right driven gear 12406 rotates clockwise. When the left driven gear 12404 rotates counterclockwise, the boss 12405 rotates counterclockwise while drawing an arc whose radius is the linear distance RL from the center 12404a of the left driven gear 12404 to the boss 12405. When the right driven gear 12406 rotates counterclockwise, the boss 12407 rotates clockwise while drawing an arc whose radius is the linear distance RR from the center 12406a of the right driven gear 12406 to the boss 12407 . That is, the lower accessory movable decorative body 1210 descends toward the origin position.

While the lower accessory movable decoration 1210 operates from the operation limit position (see FIG. 86) to the intermediate position (see FIG. 85), the boss 12405 moves leftward in the long hole 12106 formed in the lower accessory movable base 12102. While moving to the right in FIGS. 85(B) and 86(B), the lower accessory movable base 12102 is pushed downward, and the boss 12407 moves through the long hole 12108 formed in the lower accessory movable base 12102. While moving rightward (leftward in FIGS. 85(B) and 86(B)), the lower accessory movable base 12102 is pushed downward. In addition, while the lower accessory movable decoration 1210 is moving from the intermediate position (see FIG. 85) to the origin position (see FIG. 84), the boss 12405 moves inside the elongated hole 12106 formed in the lower accessory movable base 12102 to the right. While moving in the direction (leftward in FIGS. 84(B) and 85(B)), the lower role object movable base 12102 is pushed downward, and the boss 12407 is inserted into the elongated hole 12108 formed in the lower role object movable base 12102. leftward (rightward in FIGS. 84(B) and 85(B)), the lower accessory movable base 12102 is pushed downward.

As described above, the height direction position of the center of rotation of the left driven gear 12404 and the height direction position of the center of rotation of the right driven gear 12406 are the same. diameter is the same. Also, the linear distance RL from the center 12404a of the left driven gear 12404 to the boss 12405 and the linear distance RR from the center 12406a of the right driven gear 12406 to the boss 12407 are the same distance (length). Therefore, when the lower accessory drive motor 1230 rotates, the height direction position of the boss 12405 and the height direction position of the right driven gear 12406 become the same. Here, since the LED board is mounted on the lower accessory movable base 12102, the lower accessory movable decorative body 1210 to be raised has a considerable weight. Moreover, the lower accessory movable decorative body 1210 is an accessory elongated in the left-right direction. When raising such a role object, there is a possibility that power will be transmitted biased to either the left or right side. However, according to the configuration of the present embodiment, even if the object to be raised is somewhat heavy or the accessory is long in the left-right direction, the rotational force (power) of one lower accessory drive motor 1230 alone can lift the object. While maintaining the posture at the origin position (see FIG. 84), the lower accessory movable decorative body 1210 is stably (balanced in the left and right direction) without transmitting power to either the left or right side. It becomes possible to operate in the vertical direction.

By the way, when operating the lower accessory movable decoration 1210 from the origin position to the operation limit position, the accessory control circuit 207 is required to operate the lower accessory drive motor 1230 from the origin position to the operation limit position. A pulse signal is output so that the motor rotates more than the maximum number of rotations (to rotate beyond the operating limit position). The lower accessory movable decorative body 1210, which is activated by the rotation of the lower accessory drive motor 1230, physically moves as the boss 12405 collides with the end of the hole 12204 and the boss 12407 collides with the end of the hole 12206. be stopped. In this way, the lower accessory movable decorative body 1210 can be quickly operated from the origin position to the operation limit position.

Here, the hole 12204 is formed up to the central side of the vertical line LL passing through the center OL of the left driven gear 12404 (the right side of the vertical line LL in FIG. 86A). Similarly, the hole 12206 is formed up to the central side of the vertical line LR passing through the center OR of the right driven gear 12406 (the left side of the vertical line LR in FIG. 86A). Therefore, when the lower accessory movable decorative body 1210 moves to the operation limit position, the boss 12405 moves to a position slightly exceeding the top end position and the boss 12407 moves to a position slightly exceeding the top end position. That is, the boss 12405 is located on the central side of the vertical line LL passing through the center OL of the left driven gear 12404 (the right side of the vertical line LL in FIG. 86A), and the center of the right driven gear 12406 is positioned. The boss 12407 is located on the center side of the line of the vertical ship LR passing through OR (on the left side of the vertical line LL in FIG. 86A).

When the boss 12405 moves to a position slightly exceeding the topmost position and the boss 12407 moves to a position slightly exceeding the topmost position, a downward force (for example, gravity) is applied to the lower accessory movable decoration body 1210. , the holes 12204 and 12206 restrict the rotation of the left driven gear 12404 and the right driven gear 12406 . Therefore, left driven gear 12404 and right driven gear 12406 cannot rotate in either direction, and left driven gear 12404 and right driven gear 12406 are locked from rotation at this position.

In this way, when the lower accessory movable decorative body 1210 moves to the operation limit position, the lower accessory movable decorative body 1210 does not descend due to gravity. Even if a strong force is applied, it does not descend, and is held at the operation limit position unless the lower accessory drive motor 1230 rotates in the direction (clockwise) toward the origin position. As a result, the lower accessory movable decorative body 1210 is locked in a series of operations for moving the lower accessory movable decorative body 1210 upward with a simple configuration without newly providing a member as a lock mechanism, It is possible to maintain the lower accessory movable decorative body 1210 above.

The boss 12405 must be on the left side of the vertical line LL passing through the center OL of the left driven gear 12404 (if the boss 12407 is on the right side of the vertical line LR passing through the center OR of the right driven gear 12406). , downward movement of the lower accessory movable decoration 1210 is locked. Therefore, when the boss 12405 is on the vertical line LL passing through the center OL of the left driven gear 12404 (when the boss 12407 is on the vertical line LR passing through the center OR of the right driven gear 12406), The movement of the lower accessory movable decorative body 1210 is locked. When the boss 12405 is on the vertical line LL passing through the center OL of the left driven gear 12404 (when the boss 12407 is on the vertical line LR passing through the center OR of the right driven gear 12406), the lower accessory movable decoration The gravity of the body 1210 acts in the vertical direction, and the component force of the applied gravity acts in the direction of rotation of the left driven gear 12404 (right driven gear 12406). This is because the driven gear 12406 does not act in the horizontal right direction when viewed from the front.

In this embodiment, when boss 12405 moves to a position slightly exceeding the uppermost position and boss 12407 moves to a position slightly exceeding the uppermost position, left driven gear 12404 and right driven gear 12406 The rotation is restricted because it is desired to hold the lower accessory movable decorative body 1210 (more specifically, the lower accessory movable base 12102) at the uppermost position, and the target accessory to be raised ( The moving range of the bosses 12405 and 12407 can be appropriately changed according to the position to hold the lower accessory movable decorative body 1210 of the present embodiment. For example, the rotation range of the left driven gear 12404 is further rotated by 90 degrees to the right side of the vertical line LL (right side in FIG. 86(A), left side in FIG. 86(B)). , the rotation range of the right driven gear 12406 is further rotated by 90 degrees to the left side of the vertical line LR (the left side in FIG. 86(A) and the right side in FIG. 86(B)). The lower accessory movable decoration 1210 can be held at an intermediate position between the upper end position and the lowermost end position.

In addition, in the present embodiment, by rotating the left driven gear 12404 and the right driven gear 12406, the bosses 12405 and 12407 are rotated to rotate the lower accessory movable decorative body 1210 (more specifically, the lower accessory movable base 12102). ) is moved up and down, but the aspect of vertically moving the lower accessory movable decorative body 1210 is not necessarily limited to this. The bosses 12405 and 12407 correspond to the form) may move in an arc to move the lower accessory movable decoration 1210 up and down. Therefore, instead of using gears (corresponding to the left driven gear 12404 and the right driven gear 12406 of the present embodiment) for moving the force applying member, for example, the above-mentioned A rotating member or the like having a force acting member formed thereon may be used.

Further, the above-mentioned force acting members (corresponding to the bosses 12405 and 12407 of the present embodiment) can be moved along an arc of a perfect circle by using a gear, but they are not necessarily moved along an arc of a perfect circle. It is not necessary, and may be moved along an arc of an ellipse. That is, when the moving direction of the force acting member becomes the horizontal direction, the symmetrical accessory in the moving direction (horizontal direction) of the force acting member (lower accessory movable decorative body 1210 of this embodiment (more specifically, lower accessory movable The component force of the load on the base 12102) becomes 0, and the force applying member does not move due to the load of the target accessory (corresponding to the lower accessory movable decorative body 1210 in this embodiment). Therefore, as long as the drive source of the force acting member (corresponding to the lower role product driving motor 1230 of the present embodiment) is not driven in the direction in which the target role product descends, a simple configuration can be obtained without newly providing a member as a lock mechanism. Then, the target role product can be locked upward in a series of operations for moving the target role product upward.

Further, in the present embodiment, the rotation of the left driven gear 12404 and the right driven gear 12406 (the movement of the boss 12405 and the boss 12407) is stopped by stopping the drive of the lower accessory drive motor 1230, 12204 and 12206 are physically stopped. For example, if the target accessory (corresponding to the lower accessory movable decorative body 1210 of the present embodiment) is stopped above by controlling the motor (corresponding to the lower accessory driving motor 1230 of this embodiment), the stop There is no choice but to decelerate the rotation of the motor near the desired upper position, and there is a risk that the rising speed of the target accessory near the upper position will decrease. In this respect, as in the present embodiment, unless the rotation of the motor is decelerated by physically restricting the movement of the force acting members (corresponding to the bosses 12405 and 12407 of the present embodiment), the target role can be moved. , high-speed movement can be achieved with a simple configuration without stalling in the vicinity of the upper position to be stopped. Moreover, since the left driven gear 12404 and the right driven gear 12406 are arranged side by side as a pair, even if the symmetrical object has a horizontally elongated shape that is long in the horizontal direction, the stability in the horizontal direction can be maintained. Can lift objects.

Further, in this embodiment, the left driven gear 12404 and the right driven gear 12406 rotate synchronously in directions opposite to each other. That is, the bosses 12405 and 12407 move synchronously in opposite directions. As a result, even if an external force (such as vibration) is applied in either the left or right direction to the lower accessory movable decorative body 1210 (more specifically, the lower accessory movable base 12102), the lower accessory driving motor As long as 1230 is not driven, the lower accessory movable decorative body 1210 (more specifically, the lower accessory movable base 12102) can be locked near the top end position. This is because the lower accessory movable decorative body 1210 does not descend unless the bosses 12405 and 12407 move in opposite directions.

[Corner Accessory 1300]
Corner feature 1300 comprises upper corner feature 1320 and lower corner feature 1350 as described above. Here, the upper corner component 1320 will be described first, then the lower corner component 1350 will be described, and then the mode when the corner component 1300 operates to the operation limit position will be described.

[Configuration of upper corner accessory 1320]
The configuration of the upper corner accessory 1320 will be described with reference to FIGS. 87 to 90. FIG. FIG. 87 is an example of a front view of the upper corner accessory 1320. FIG. FIG. 88 is an example of a rear view of the upper corner accessory 1320. FIG. FIG. 89 is an example of an exploded perspective view of the upper corner accessory 1320 viewed obliquely from the front right. FIG. 90 is an example of an exploded perspective view of the upper corner accessory 1320 viewed obliquely from the rear left (left in front view).

The upper corner accessory 1320 includes a fixed plate 1322 to which various members constituting the upper corner accessory 1320 are attached, a first movable body 1330 and a second movable body 1340 that are operable with respect to the fixed plate 1322, A motor 1332 as a drive source for operating the first movable body 1330 and the second movable body 1340, and a power transmission mechanism 1333 as a mechanism for transmitting the power of the motor 1332 to the first movable body 1330 and the second movable body 1340. and a photosensor 1345 for confirming the origin positions of the first movable body 1330 and the second movable body 1340 .

The fixing plate 1322 is a horizontally elongated plate-like member attached and fixed to the upper part of the rear box 1800 of the back unit 176 described above on the back side of the upper front role 1000 and the front side of the upper back role 1100 . Support shafts 13222 , 13224 and 13226 are formed on the front side of the fixed plate 1322 . A hole 13225 is formed between the support shafts 13222 and 13224 in the horizontal direction and above the support shafts 13222 and 13224 . A hole 13229 is formed around the support shaft 13226 in substantially the upper half of the periphery of the support shaft 13226 .

The first movable body 1330 includes a decorative portion 13302 decorated with characters and the like, and an arm portion 13304 integrally formed with the decorative portion 13302 . A bearing 13306 that rotatably supports the support shaft 13222 is formed at the proximal end of the arm 13304 . A support shaft 13308 is formed on the upper right side of the bearing 13306 when viewed from the front. First movable body 1330 is rotatable around bearing 13306 (support shaft 13222). A long linear slope 13307 is formed on the back surface of the first movable body 1330 along the moving direction of the first movable body 1330 . This slope 13307 has a chevron shape that rises from both sides toward the center in the longitudinal direction.

The second movable body 1340 includes a decorative portion 13402 decorated with characters and the like, and an arm portion 13404 integrally formed with the decorative portion 13402 . A bearing 13406 that rotatably supports the support shaft 13228 is formed at the proximal end of the arm 13404 . A support shaft 13408 is formed on the upper left side of the bearing 13406 when viewed from the front. Second movable body 1340 is rotatable around bearing 13406 (support shaft 13228). A long linear slope 13407 is formed on the back surface of the second movable body 1340 along the moving direction of the second movable body 1340 . This slope 13407 has a mountain shape that rises from both longitudinal sides toward the center.

The motor 1332 is attached and fixed to the fixing plate 1322 via the motor attachment member 1331 . Also, the power of the motor 1332 is output from the motor output shaft 13322 .

The power transmission mechanism 1333 includes a first gear 1334 , a second gear 1335 , a third gear 1336 , a first transmission arm 1337 and a second transmission arm 1338 . The first gear 1334 and the second gear 1335 are in mesh, and the second gear 1335 and the third gear 1336 are in mesh. Power from a motor 1332 is transmitted to the first movable body 1330 via gears 1334 and 1335 . Power from a motor 1332 is transmitted to the second movable body 1340 via respective gears 1334-1336.

A hollow shaft 13342 is formed in the center of the first gear 1334 . The hollow shaft 13342 is supported by the motor output shaft 13322 so as to be coaxial with the motor output shaft 13322 and rotate therewith. A hollow shaft 13342 pivoted on the motor output shaft 13322 is located in the hole 13225 .

A hollow shaft 13352 is formed in the center of the second gear 1335 . The hollow shaft 13352 is rotatably supported by the support shaft 13224 . A boss 13354 is formed on the front side of the second gear 1335 at a portion radially outwardly spaced from the center by a predetermined distance.

A hollow shaft 13362 is formed in the center of the third gear 1336 . The hollow shaft 13362 is rotatably supported by the support shaft 13226 . A boss 13364 is formed on the front side of the third gear 1336 at a portion radially outwardly spaced from the center by a predetermined distance. A boss 13366 is formed on the rear side of the third gear 1336 at a position radially outwardly spaced from the center by a predetermined distance. This boss 13366 moves within the hole 13229 when the third gear 1336 rotates. Bosses 13364 and 13366 are formed on surfaces opposite to each other and substantially diagonally with respect to the center of third gear 1336 . The third gear 1336 has a detection piece 13368 that can be detected by the photosensor 1345 formed on the front surface.

The first transmission arm 1337 has a C-shaped curved portion 13370 and a rod portion 13371 . A bearing 13372 is formed at the end on the rod-like portion 13371 side. Bearing 13372 is rotatably supported on support shaft 13308 . A bearing 13374 is formed at the end on the curved portion 13370 side. Bearing 13374 is rotatably supported on boss 13354 .

The second transmission arm 1338 has a C-shaped curved portion 13380 and a bar portion 13381 . A bearing 13382 is formed at the end on the rod-like portion 13381 side. Bearing 13382 is rotatably supported on support shaft 13408 . A bearing 13384 is formed at the end on the curved portion 13380 side. Bearing 13384 is rotatably supported on boss 13364 .

The photosensor 1345 detects the positions of the first movable body 1330 and the second movable body 1340. In this embodiment, the first movable body 1330 and the second movable body 1340 are at the origin position (see FIG. 91 described later). ) so that the detection piece 13368 can be detected.

[Description of the operation of the upper corner accessory 1320]
Next, the operation of the upper corner accessory 1320 will be described with reference to FIGS. 89 to 94. FIG. FIG. 91 is an example of a rear view showing when the first movable body 1330 and the second movable body 1340 are at the origin position. FIG. 92 is an example of a rear view showing when the first movable body 1330 and the second movable body 1340 start operating from the origin position. FIG. 93 is an example of a rear view showing when the first movable body 1330 and the second movable body 1340 are further actuated from the position shown in FIG. 92 . FIG. 94 is an example of a rear view showing when the first movable body 1330 and the second movable body 1340 are operated to the operation limit positions.

When the first movable body 1330 and the second movable body 1340 are at the original positions, the first movable body 1330 is positioned at the upper left corner of the liquid crystal display device 16, and the second movable body 1340 is positioned at the upper right corner of the liquid crystal display device 16. located in At the origin position, the first movable body 1330 and the second movable body 1340 are arranged behind the upper front accessory 1000 (see, for example, FIG. 21), so they are difficult to see when viewed from the front.

When the first movable body 1330 and the second movable body 1340 are at the origin position (see FIG. 91), the motor 1332 rotates and the motor output shaft 13322 rotates counterclockwise in front view (clockwise in FIGS. 91 to 94). , the first gear 1334 rotates counterclockwise when viewed from the front. When the first gear 1334 rotates counterclockwise when viewed from the front, the second gear 1335 rotates clockwise when viewed from the front. When the second gear 1335 rotates clockwise when viewed from the front, the third gear 1336 rotates counterclockwise when viewed from the front.

When the second gear 1335 rotates clockwise around the support shaft 13224 (hollow shaft 13352) when viewed from the front, the boss 13354 (see FIG. 89) rotates clockwise around the hollow shaft 13352 (support shaft 13224) when viewed from the front. circulate to When the boss 13354 rotates around the hollow shaft 13352 clockwise when viewed from the front, the bearing 13374 supported by the boss 13354 also rotates clockwise around the support shaft 13224 when viewed from the front. As a result, the bearing 13372 of the first transmission arm 1337 moves leftward (rightward in FIGS. 91 to 94) when viewed from the front. Since the bearing 13372 of the first transmission arm 1337 is rotatably supported by the support shaft 13308 of the first movable body 1330, when the bearing 13372 moves leftward in a front view, the support shaft 13308 moves to the fixed plate 1322. The support shaft 13222 (bearing 13306) thus formed is the center of rotation and rotates counterclockwise when viewed from the front. That is, the first movable body 1330 rotates counterclockwise in a front view with the support shaft 13222 as the center of rotation. forward).

Further, when the second gear 1335 rotates clockwise around the support shaft 13224 (hollow shaft 13352) as the center of rotation in a front view, the third gear 1336 rotates counterclockwise in a front view around the hollow shaft 13362 (the support shaft 13226) as the center of rotation. rotate around. When the third gear 1336 rotates about the support shaft 13226 counterclockwise when viewed from the front, the boss 13364 (see FIG. 89) rotates about the hollow shaft 13362 counterclockwise when viewed from the front. When the boss 13364 rotates counterclockwise around the hollow shaft 13362 when viewed from the front, the bearing 13382 of the second transmission arm 1338 moves rightward (leftward in FIGS. 91 to 94) when viewed from the front. Since the bearing 13382 of the second transmission arm 1338 is rotatably fitted around the support shaft 13408 of the second movable body 1340, when the bearing 13382 moves rightward in front view, the support shaft 13408 moves toward the fixed plate 1322. When viewed from the front, it rotates clockwise around the formed support shaft 13228 (bearing 13406) as the center of rotation. That is, the second movable body 1340 moves toward the lower left (front of the display area of the liquid crystal display device 16) from the origin position with the support shaft 13228 as the center of rotation.

In this way, the first movable body 1330 and the second movable body 1340 can be synchronously operated by rotating one motor 1332 .

Also, the first movable body 1330 and the second movable body 1340 move from the origin position, which is difficult to visually recognize in a front view, in a direction in which the first movable body 1330 and the second movable body 1340 approach each other. That is, the first movable body 1330 and the second movable body 1340 appear to move from the outside to the inside of the field of view in a front view so as to sandwich them.

When the motor 1332 rotates and the motor output shaft 13322 rotates clockwise in a front view, the first movable body 1330 and the second movable body 1340 move in the direction of returning to the origin position by the movement opposite to the movement described above. do.

By the way, when the first movable body 1330 moved to the display area of the liquid crystal display device 16 returns to the origin position, the first movable body 1330 interferes with the fixed plate 1322, and the first movable body 1330 smoothly returns to the origin position. There is a possibility that it will not be possible to return. Therefore, in this embodiment, the slope 13307 formed on the back surface of the first movable body 1330 slides on the flat surface of the fixed plate 1322, thereby allowing the first movable body 1330 to smoothly return to the origin position. ing. Similarly, for the second movable body 1340, the slope 13407 formed on the back surface of the second movable body 1340 slides on the flat surface of the fixed plate 1322, thereby smoothly moving the second movable body 1340 to the origin position. recovery is possible.

[Configuration of lower corner accessory 1350]
The configuration of the lower corner accessory 1350 will be described with reference to FIGS. 95 to 98. FIG. FIG. 95 is an example of a front view of the lower corner accessory 1350. FIG. FIG. 96 is an example of a rear view of the lower corner accessory 1350. FIG. FIG. 97 is an exploded perspective view of the lower corner accessory 1350 viewed obliquely from the upper right front side. FIG. 98 is an example of an exploded perspective view of the lower corner accessory 1350 viewed obliquely from the back left.

The lower corner accessory 1350 includes a fixed plate 1352 to which various members constituting the lower corner accessory 1350 are attached, a third movable body 1355 and a fourth movable body 1357 configured to be operable with respect to the fixed plate 1352, A motor 1354 as a driving source for operating the third movable body 1355 and the fourth movable body 1357, and a power transmission mechanism 1360 as a mechanism for transmitting the power of the motor 1354 to the third movable body 1355 and the fourth movable body 1357. and a photosensor 1375 for confirming the positions of the third movable body 1355 and the fourth movable body 1357 .

The fixing plate 1352 is a laterally elongated plate-like member fixedly attached to the lower part of the rear box 1800 on the rear side of the middle panel 1500 and the front side of the lower accessory 1200 . Support shafts 13522 , 13523 , 13524 , 13525 , 13526 , 13527 , 13528 , and 13529 are formed on the front side of the fixed plate 1352 . A hole 13530 is formed around the support shaft 13527 in substantially the lower half of the periphery of the support shaft 13527 .

The third movable body 1355 includes a decorative portion 13552 decorated with characters and the like, and an arm portion 13554 integrally formed with the decorative portion 13552 . An arm cover 13559 is provided on the back of the arm 13554 . A hole 135592 is formed in the center side end of the arm cover 13559 . A bearing 13556 that supports the support shaft 13524 is formed at the proximal end of the arm 13554 . A support shaft 13558 is formed on the lower right side of the bearing 13556 when viewed from the front. The third movable body 1355 is rotatable around a support shaft 13524 on which a bearing 13556 is supported. A coil spring 1395 is provided between the bearing 13556 of the arm portion 13554 and the hole 135592 of the arm cover 13559 . The coil spring 1395 urges clockwise around the support shaft 13524 as the center of rotation. As a result, a clockwise biasing force around the pivot 13524 acts on the third movable body 1355 . Furthermore, a long linear slope 13557 is formed on the back surface of the third movable body 1355 along the moving direction of the third movable body 1355 . This slope 13557 has a chevron shape that rises from both sides toward the center in the longitudinal direction.

The fourth movable body 1357 includes a decorative portion 13572 decorated with characters and the like, and an arm portion 13574 integrated with the decorative portion 13572 . An arm cover 13579 is provided on the rear surface of the arm portion 13574 . A hole 135792 is formed in the center side end of the arm cover 13579 . A bearing 13576 that supports the support shaft 13529 is formed at the proximal end of the arm 13574 . A support shaft 13578 is formed on the lower left side of the bearing 13576 when viewed from the front. The fourth movable body 1357 is rotatable around a support shaft 13529 on which a bearing 13576 is supported. A coil spring 1396 is provided between the bearing 13576 of the arm portion 13574 and the hole 135792 of the arm cover 13579 . This coil spring 1396 urges counterclockwise around the support shaft 13529 as the center of rotation. As a result, a counterclockwise biasing force around the support shaft 13529 acts on the fourth movable body 1357 . Further, a long linear slope 13577 is formed on the back surface of the fourth movable body 1357 along the moving direction of the fourth movable body 1357 . This slope 13577 has a chevron shape that rises from both sides toward the center in the longitudinal direction.

Motor 1354 is fixedly attached to fixed plate 1352 via motor mounting member 1356 . The power of motor 1354 is output from motor output shaft 13542 .

The power transmission mechanism 1360 includes a first gear 1361, a second gear 1362, a third gear 1363, a fourth gear 1364, a fifth gear 1365, a sixth gear 1366, a seventh gear 1367, and each gear. a third transmission arm 1370 for transmitting power from all or part of 1361, 1362, 1363, 1364, 1365, 1366, 1367 to a third movable body 1355; , 1367 to the fourth movable body 1357.

A hollow shaft 13612 is formed in the center of the first gear 1361 . The motor output shaft 13542 is press-fitted into the hollow shaft 13612 so as to be coaxial with the motor output shaft 13542 and rotate together.

Power from the motor 1354 is transmitted to the first gear 1361, second gear 1362, third gear 1363, fourth gear 1364, fifth gear 1365, sixth gear 1366, and seventh gear 1367 in this order. The sixth gear 1366 has a hollow shaft 13662 formed at its center, and a boss 13664 formed at a portion radially outwardly spaced from the center by a predetermined distance. Further, the sixth gear 1366 has a detection piece 13666 that can be detected by the photosensor 1375 formed on the front surface at a predetermined distance radially outward from the center. The seventh gear 1367 has a hollow shaft 13672 that rotatably supports the support shaft 13528, and a boss 13674 that is radially outwardly spaced from the center by a predetermined distance.

The third transmission arm 1370 has a C-shaped curved portion 13702 and a bar portion 13704 . A bearing 13706 is formed at the end on the rod-like portion 13704 side. The bearing 13706 rotatably supports the support shaft 13558 of the third movable body 1355 . A bearing 13708 is formed at the end on the curved portion 13702 side. Bearing 13708 rotatably supports boss 13664 of sixth gear 1366 .

The fourth transmission arm 1372 has a C-shaped curved portion 13722 and a bar portion 13724 . A bearing 13726 is formed at the end on the rod-like portion 13724 side. Bearing 13726 rotatably supports support shaft 13578 . A bearing 13728 is formed at the end on the curved portion 13722 side. Bearing 13728 rotatably supports boss 13674 .

The photosensor 1375 detects the positions of the third movable body 1355 and the fourth movable body 1357. In this embodiment, the third movable body 1355 and the fourth movable body 1357 are at the origin position (see FIG. 99 described later). ) so that the detection piece 13666 can be detected.

[Explanation of operation of lower corner accessory 1350]
Next, the operation of the lower corner accessory 1350 will be described with reference to FIGS. 97 to 101. FIG. FIG. 99 is an example of a back view showing when the third movable body 1355 and the fourth movable body 1357 are at the origin position. FIG. 100 is an example of a rear view showing when the third movable body 1355 and the fourth movable body 1357 start operating from the origin position. FIG. 101 is an example of a rear view showing when the third movable body 1355 and the fourth movable body 1357 are operated to the operation limit positions.

When the third movable body 1355 and the fourth movable body 1357 are at the origin position, the third movable body 1355 is positioned at the lower left corner of the display area of the liquid crystal display device 16, and the fourth movable body 1357 is positioned at the lower left corner of the liquid crystal display device 16. It is located in the lower right corner of the display area. At the origin position, the third movable body 1355 and the fourth movable body 1357 are arranged behind the first middle panel 1520 and the second middle panel 1550, so they are difficult to see when viewed from the front.

When the third movable body 1355 and the fourth movable body 1357 are at the origin position (see FIG. 99), the motor 1354 rotates and the motor output shaft 13542 rotates clockwise in front view (counterclockwise in FIGS. 99 to 101). , the first gear 1361 rotates clockwise when viewed from the front. When the first gear 1361 rotates clockwise when viewed from the front, the second gear 1362 rotates counterclockwise when viewed from the front. When the second gear 1362 rotates counterclockwise when viewed from the front, the third gear 1363 rotates clockwise when viewed from the front. When the third gear 1363 rotates clockwise when viewed from the front, the fourth gear 1364 rotates counterclockwise when viewed from the front. When the fourth gear 1364 rotates counterclockwise when viewed from the front, the fifth gear 1365 rotates clockwise when viewed from the front. When the fifth gear 1365 rotates clockwise when viewed from the front, the sixth gear 1366 rotates counterclockwise when viewed from the front. When the sixth gear 1366 rotates counterclockwise when viewed from the front, the seventh gear 1367 rotates clockwise when viewed from the front.

When the sixth gear 1366 rotates counterclockwise (clockwise in FIGS. 99 to 101) about the support shaft 13527 (hollow shaft 13662) as the rotation center, the boss 13664 (see FIG. 97) rotates about the hollow shaft 13662. As viewed from the front, it rotates counterclockwise. When the boss 13664 turns around the hollow shaft 13662 counterclockwise when viewed from the front, the bearing 13706 of the third transmission arm 1370 moves leftward (rightward in FIGS. 99 to 101) when viewed from the front. Since the bearing 13706 of the third transmission arm 1370 rotatably supports the support shaft 13558 of the third movable body 1355, when the bearing 13706 moves leftward in front view, the support shaft 13558 is formed on the fixed plate 1352. The support shaft 13524 (bearing 13556) is rotated clockwise when viewed from the front. That is, the third movable body 1355 rotates clockwise about the support shaft 13524 when viewed from the front, and as a result, the third movable body 1355 moves upward from the origin position.

In addition, when the sixth gear 1366 rotates counterclockwise in a front view around the support shaft 13527 (hollow shaft 13662) as a rotation center, the seventh gear 1367 rotates clockwise around the support shaft 13528 (hollow shaft 13672) in a front view. rotate around. When the seventh gear 1367 rotates around the support shaft 13528 clockwise when viewed from the front, the boss 13674 (see FIG. 97) rotates around the hollow shaft 13672 clockwise when viewed from the front. When the boss 13672 rotates clockwise around the hollow shaft 13672 when viewed from the front, the bearing 13726 of the fourth transmission arm 1372 moves rightward (leftward in FIGS. 99 to 101) when viewed from the front. Since the bearing 13726 of the fourth transmission arm 1372 rotatably supports the support shaft 13578 of the fourth movable body 1357, when the bearing 13726 moves rightward in a front view, the support shaft 13578 moves toward the fixed plate 1352. When viewed from the front, it rotates counterclockwise around the formed support shaft 13529 (bearing 13576) as the center of rotation. That is, the fourth movable body 1357 moves upward from the origin position with the support shaft 13529 as the center of rotation.

In this manner, rotation of one motor 1354 can synchronously operate the third movable body 1355 and the fourth movable body 1357 .

Also, the third movable body 1355 and the fourth movable body 1357 move from the origin position, which is difficult to visually recognize in a front view, in a direction in which the third movable body 1355 and the fourth movable body 1357 approach each other. That is, the third movable body 1355 and the fourth movable body 1357 appear to move from the outside to the inside of the field of view in a front view so as to sandwich them.

When the motor 1354 rotates and the motor output shaft 1354 rotates counterclockwise when viewed from the front, the third movable body 1355 and the fourth movable body 1357 move in the direction of returning to the origin position by the movement opposite to the movement described above. Operate.

By the way, when the third movable body 1355 moved to the display area of the liquid crystal display device 16 returns to the origin position, the third movable body 1355 interferes with the fixing plate 1352, and the third movable body 1355 smoothly returns to the origin position. There is a possibility that it will not be possible to return. Therefore, in this embodiment, the slope 13557 formed on the back surface of the third movable body 1355 slides on the flat portion of the fixed plate 1352, thereby enabling the third movable body 1355 to smoothly return to the origin position. ing. Similarly, for the fourth movable body 1357, the slope 13577 formed on the back surface of the fourth movable body 1357 slides on the flat portion of the fixed plate 1352, thereby smoothly moving the fourth movable body 13570 to the origin position. recovery is possible.

[Aspect when the corner accessory 1300 operates to the operation limit position]
Next, with reference to FIGS. 102 to 104, a mode when the corner accessory 1300 operates to the operation limit position will be described. FIG. 102 shows the back unit when all of the first movable body 1330, the second movable body 1340, the third movable body 1355 and the fourth movable body 1357 of the corner accessory 1300 are operated to the operation limit position. 176 is an example of a front view. FIG. 103 shows the case where the first movable body 1330 and the second movable body 1340 of the corner accessory 1300 are operating to the operation limit position, and the third movable body 1355 and the fourth movable body 1357 are waiting at the origin position. is an example of a front view of the back unit 176 showing the aspect of . FIG. 104 shows the case where the third movable body 1355 and the fourth movable body 1357 of the corner accessory 1300 are operating to the operation limit position, and the first movable body 1330 and the second movable body 1340 are waiting at the origin position. is an example of a front view of the back unit 176 showing the aspect of . However, in FIGS. 102 to 104, for convenience of explanation, illustration of the upper front accessory 1000, the lower accessory 1200, the middle panel 1500 and the attacker ball gutter 1600 is omitted.

Although not shown, each of the first movable body 1330, the second movable body 1340, the third movable body 1355, and the fourth movable body 1357 has one character (for example, kanji, hiragana, katakana, alphabet). ) is attached.

As shown in FIG. 102, when the first movable body 1330, the second movable body 1340, the third movable body 1355, and the fourth movable body 1357 operate to their operation limit positions, the liquid crystal display device 16 (see, for example, FIG. 5) In the front, one design (for example, an idiom) is formed by letters attached to each movable body 1330, 1340, 1355, 1357.

Further, as shown in FIG. 103, when the first movable body 1330 and the second movable body 1340 are operated to the operation limit position and the third movable body 1355 and the fourth movable body 1357 are waiting at the origin position, In front of the liquid crystal display device 16 (see, for example, FIG. 5), characters attached to the first movable body 1330 and the second movable body 1340 form one design (eg, an idiom).

Further, as shown in FIG. 104, when the third movable body 1355 and the fourth movable body 1357 are operated to the operation limit position and the first movable body 1330 and the second movable body 1340 are waiting at the origin position, In front of the liquid crystal display device 16 (see, for example, FIG. 5), characters attached to the third movable body 1355 and the fourth movable body 1357 form one design (eg, an idiom).

In this way, for example, the motor 1332 (for example, see FIG. 89) and the motor 1354 (for example, see FIG. 98) are driven by the accessory control circuit 207 (both of which are shown in FIG. 9) of the sub CPU 201. By controlling according to the result of , all the characters of the first movable body 1330, the second movable body 1340, the third movable body 1355, and the fourth movable body 1357 are combined into one design (hereinafter referred to as "first design" ), or part (two) characters of the upper corner accessory 1320 (first movable body 1330 and second movable body 1340) form one design (hereinafter referred to as "second design") or form one design (hereinafter referred to as "third design") with some (two) characters of the lower corner accessory 1350 (third movable body 1355 and fourth movable body 1357) It is possible to As a result, it is possible to change the visual impression given to the player by the movable effects caused by the operation of the accessory with only a limited number of accessories.

Further, the design formed by two or more movable bodies among the first movable body 1330, the second movable body 1340, the third movable body 1355 and the fourth movable body 1357 is information related to the progress of the game (for example, It is also possible to make the player recognize it as information suggesting the execution of a specific reach with a high degree of expectation. For example, when a specific ready-to-win effect that makes the player expect a big hit is executed as a result of the big hit determination by the start winning to the first start port 5442 or the second start port 440, the specific In front of the display area of the liquid crystal display device 16, two or more movable bodies (first movable body 1330, second movable body 1340, third movable body 1355 and fourth movable body 1355) Any two or more movable bodies among the movable bodies 1357) may be represented by a design (for example, an idiom) that can be recognized when they are arranged close to each other.

In this embodiment, the first movable body 1330 and the second movable body 1340 move from the origin position, which is difficult to see in a front view, in a direction in which the first movable body 1330 and the second movable body 1340 approach each other. That is, the first movable body 1330 and the second movable body 1340 appear to move so as to sandwich from the upper outer side of the visual field toward the lower inner side in a front view.

Also, the third movable body 1355 and the fourth movable body 1357 move from the origin position, which is difficult to visually recognize in a front view, in a direction in which the third movable body 1355 and the fourth movable body 1357 approach each other. In other words, the third movable body 1355 and the fourth movable body 1357 appear to move so as to sandwich from the upper outer side of the visual field toward the lower inner side in a front view.

Here, characters are applied to the front faces of the first movable body 1330, the second movable body 1340, the third movable body 1355 and the fourth movable body 1357, respectively. Each single character applied to each of 1357 does not make any sense, and information related to the progress of the game is not presented to the player.

In addition, the first movable body 1330, the second movable body 1340, the third movable body 1355, and the fourth movable body 1357 are all arranged at positions that are difficult to visually recognize at the origin position, and are respectively located on the upper left in the front view and in the front. They are arranged at the upper right, lower left, and lower right positions when viewed from the front, which are separated from each other. Therefore, two or more movable bodies out of the first movable body 1330, the second movable body 1340, the third movable body 1355, and the fourth movable body 1357 are directed from the outside to the inside of the player's visual field in a front view. In the process of the operation, it is difficult for the player to immediately recognize the design (for example, an idiom) formed by the letters attached to the two or more movable bodies that operate, and the liquid crystal display It is only perceptible when stopped in close proximity in front of the display area of the device 16 .

In this way, two or more movable bodies among the first movable body 1330, the second movable body 1340, the third movable body 1355, and the fourth movable body 1357 move inward from the outside of the field of view in a front view. By doing so, the player's gaze can be moved from the depth (performance image shown in the display area of the liquid crystal display device 16) to the front (movable characters advanced to the front of the liquid crystal display device 16). Thus, conventionally, information relating to the progress of a game, for example, has been presented to the player by, for example, effect images displayed on the liquid crystal display device. Two or more of the first movable body 1330, the second movable body 1340, the third movable body 1355, and the fourth movable body 1357 that have advanced to the front of the display area of the liquid crystal display device 16 can be displayed without relying on the produced image. Only with the movable body, it is possible to show the player information relating to the progress of the game. As a result, not only can the rhythm of the performance be changed, but also the performance that has an impact on the player can be performed, and the loss of interest can be suppressed.

In the present embodiment, when the first movable body 1330, the second movable body 1340, the third movable body 1355, and the fourth movable body 1357 operate to their operation limit positions, the liquid crystal display device 16 (see, for example, FIG. 5) In the front, it is preferable that one design is formed by the characters attached to all the movable bodies 1330, 1340, 1355, 1357, but it is not necessarily limited to this. There is no problem even if one design is formed only by characters. For example, among the first movable body 1330, the second movable body 1340, the third movable body 1355, and the fourth movable body 1357, only the letters attached to the first movable body 1330 and the third movable body 1355 form one design. In this case, the second movable body 1340 and the fourth movable body 1357 (characters may not be attached) do not form a design and simply exist as separate movable bodies.

Also, in the present embodiment, each of the first movable body 1330, the second movable body 1340, the third movable body 1355, and the fourth movable body 1357 is labeled with a letter, but this is not necessarily the case. Two or more letters may be attached to all or some of the movable bodies.

In addition, in the present embodiment, characters are attached to each of the first movable body 1330, the second movable body 1340, the third movable body 1355, and the fourth movable body 1357. Anything that forms a design or forms a meaningful shape (for example, something that evokes a particular idea) in front of the display device 16 (see, for example, FIG. 5) may be used.

Further, in this embodiment, when the first movable body 1330, the second movable body 1340, the third movable body 1355, and the fourth movable body 1357 are positioned in front of the liquid crystal display device 16 (see FIG. 5, for example) , and other movable bodies, but not limited to this, all or part of the movable bodies may be combined to form one design.

In addition, in this embodiment, the first movable body 1330 and the second movable body 1340 are synchronously operated by the rotation of one motor 1332 (see, for example, FIG. 89), and the third movable body is operated by the rotation of one motor 1354. Although the movable body 1355 and the fourth movable body 1357 are configured to operate synchronously, the present invention is not limited to this. Each body 1357 may be configured to operate alone.

[Structure of Side Accessory 1400]
The configuration of the side role item 1400 will be described with reference to FIGS. 105 to 108. FIG. FIG. 105 is an example of a front view of the side accessory 1400 in the normal mode (the mode when it is at the origin position). FIG. 106 is an example of a rear view of the side accessory 1400 in the normal mode. FIG. 107 is an example of a front view of an exploded perspective view of the side accessory 1400 viewed obliquely from the upper right front. FIG. 108 is an example of an exploded perspective view of the side accessory 1400 viewed diagonally from the rear left (left in front view). In FIG. 106, various members such as the link member 1420 are shown through the mounting plate 1410 so as to be easily visible, but they are actually opaque members.

The side accessory 1400 includes a mounting plate 1410 to which various members constituting the side accessory 1400 are attached, a movable decorative body 1450 configured to be operable with respect to the mounting plate 1410, and a movable decorative body 1450. A side accessory motor 1440 as a drive source, a movable piece 1430 and an L-shaped link member 1420 as a mechanism for transmitting the power of the side accessory motor 1440 to the movable decoration 1450, and the positions of the movable decoration 1450 and a photosensor 1464 for confirming.

The mounting plate 1410 is a vertically long plate-like member that is mounted and fixed to the right side of the rear box 1800 of the rear unit 176 described above. A link support shaft 1412 that pivotally supports the link member 1420 is formed on the upper portion of the front side of the mounting plate 1410 . At the bottom of the mounting plate 1410, a movable decoration support shaft 1414 for supporting the movable decoration 1450 is formed.

The movable decorative body 1450 is composed of a vertically elongated handle-shaped main body portion 1452 decorated on the front surface, and a single movable body configured to be operable together with the main body portion 1452 and also independently operable with respect to the main body portion 1452. 1454. A main body portion 1452 of the movable decoration 1450 has a movable decoration bearing 1458 that supports the movable decoration support shaft 1414 in the lower portion of the main body portion 1452 . The movable decoration 1450 is supported by the movable decoration bearing 1458 on the movable decoration spindle 1414, and is rotatable around the movable decoration spindle 1414 (movable decoration bearing 1458). The movable decoration 1450 has an origin confirmation movable piece 1456 at the lower end. Further, the movable decorative body 1450 has a movable decorative boss 1455 projecting rearward on the right side in front view.

The side accessory motor 1440 is attached and fixed to the attachment plate 1410 via a motor attachment member 1444 . The side accessory motor 1440 is a motor with a speed reducer, and the rotation speed of the side accessory motor 1440 is reduced to output power from the motor output shaft 1442 .

The movable piece 1430 has a gear bearing 1432 connected to the side accessory motor 1440 by supporting the motor output shaft 1442 and a link member boss 1434 connected to the link member 1420 . The movable piece 1430 rotates around the gear bearing 1432 (motor output shaft 1442) when the side accessory motor 1440 rotates.

The link member 1420 includes a link bearing 1422 that supports the link support shaft 1412 of the mounting plate 1410, a first link 1421 that is long in the lateral direction, and a second link 1425 that is substantially perpendicular to the first link 1421 and long downward. and The link member 1420 is rotatable around a link support shaft 1412 supported by a link bearing 1422 . The first link 1421 is formed with a movable piece long hole 1424 to which the link member boss 1434 of the movable piece 1430 is slidably connected. The link member boss 1434 is slidable along the elongated hole direction of the movable piece elongated hole 1424 when the link member 1420 rotates around the link bearing 1422 . The second link 1425 is formed with a movable decoration long hole 1426 to which the movable decoration boss 1455 of the movable decoration 1450 is slidably connected. The movable ornamental boss 1455 is slidable along the elongated hole direction of the movable ornamental elongated hole 1426 when the link member 1420 rotates around the link bearing 1422 .

The photosensor 1464 is fixedly attached to the lower portion of the mounting plate 1410 via the photosensor mounting member 1460 . A photosensor 1464 detects the position of the movable decoration 1450 . As described above, in the present embodiment, the movable decoration 1450 has the origin confirmation movable piece 1456 at the lower end thereof, and the photo sensor 1464 detects the origin confirmation movable piece 1456 when the movable decoration 1450 is at the origin position. A piece 1456 can be detected. That is, the photosensor 1464 detects whether or not the movable decoration 1450 is at the origin position.

[Description of the operation of the side role item 1400]
Next, the operation of the side role item 1400 will be described with reference to FIGS. 105, 106 and 109 to 113. FIG. FIG. 109 is an example of a front view showing the side accessory 1400 in which the movable decorative body 1450 is moving toward the front of the display area of the liquid crystal display device 16. FIG. FIG. 110 is an example of a rear view showing the side accessory 1400 while the movable decoration 1450 is moving toward the front of the display area of the liquid crystal display device 16. FIG. FIG. 111 is an example of a front view showing the side accessory 1400 when the movable decorative body 1450 has advanced farthest forward of the display area of the liquid crystal display device 16 . FIG. 112 is an example of a rear view showing the side accessory 1400 when the movable decorative body 1450 has advanced farthest toward the front of the display area of the liquid crystal display device 16. FIG. FIG. 113 is a rear view showing the side accessory 1400 when the side accessory motor 1440 is further rotated in the same direction from the state in which the movable decorative body 1450 has advanced farthest toward the front of the display area of the liquid crystal display device 16. is an example. Hereinafter, in this specification, the position when the movable decorative body 1450 is most advanced toward the front of the display area of the liquid crystal display device 16 is referred to as "most advanced position".

The degree of inclination of the link member 1420 when the movable decoration 1450 is at the origin position is approximately 1 o'clock in rear view (see FIG. 106), and the inclination of the link member 1420 when the movable decoration 1450 is at the most advanced position. The degree of inclination is approximately 4:30 (see FIG. 112) when viewed from the back. In the present embodiment, the speed reduction ratio of the side accessory motor 1440 is such that the motor output shaft 1442 moves from approximately 1 o'clock to approximately 4:30 when the side accessory motor 1440 rotates once (movable decoration 1450 moves from the origin position to the most advanced position), but the speed reduction ratio is not limited to this.

At the most advanced position shown in FIG. 112, the movable decorative boss 1455 has not moved to the end of the long hole 1426 for movable decorative body. This is because the direction of rotation about the movable ornament support shaft 1414 (movable ornament 1450) is different from the longitudinal direction of the elongated hole 1426 for the movable ornament. This is because the movement of the movable decorative boss 1455 is regulated by the side surface (surface in the longitudinal direction).

When the movable decorative body 1450 is at the origin position (the position where the degree of inclination of the link member 1420 is approximately 1 o'clock in rear view), the side accessory motor 1440 rotates, and the motor output shaft 1442 rotates counterclockwise in front view. When rotating (counterclockwise in FIGS. 105, 109 and 111, and clockwise in FIGS. 106, 110, 112 and 113), the movable piece 1430 rotates about the motor output shaft 1442 (gear bearing 1432). Rotate counterclockwise when viewed from the front. When the movable piece 1430 rotates about the gear bearing 1432 in a counterclockwise direction in a front view, the link member boss 1434 slides in the movable piece elongated hole 1424, and the link bearing 1422 ( A force that rotates clockwise (clockwise in FIG. 109 and counterclockwise in FIG. 110) when viewed from the front about the link support shaft 1412) acts. When the link member 1420 rotates clockwise around the link bearing 1422 as viewed from the front, a force pushing the movable decorative body 1450 toward the front of the display area of the liquid crystal display device 16 is generated via the movable decorative boss 1455 . works. When the degree of inclination of the link member 1420 reaches approximately 4:30 in rear view (see FIG. 112) and the rotation of the side accessory motor 1440 stops, the movable decoration 1450 stops at the most advanced position.

The side accessory motor 1440 further rotates from the state where the degree of inclination of the link member 1420 is approximately 4:30 in rear view (see FIG. 112), and the motor output shaft 1442 rotates counterclockwise in front view (FIGS. 105 and 109). and counterclockwise in FIGS. 111 and clockwise in FIGS. rotate to When the movable piece 1430 rotates about the gear bearing 1432 in a counterclockwise direction in a front view, the link member boss 1434 slides in the movable piece elongated hole 1424, and the link bearing 1422 ( A force that rotates clockwise (clockwise in FIG. 109 and counterclockwise in FIG. 110) when viewed from the front about the link support shaft 1412) acts. When the link member 1420 rotates clockwise around the link bearing 1422 as viewed from the front, a force is applied to the movable decorative body 1450 via the movable decorative boss 1455 to return the movable decorative body 1450 to the original position. do. When the degree of inclination of the link member 1420 reaches approximately 1 o'clock in rear view (see FIG. 106) and the rotation of the side accessory motor 1440 stops, the movable decorative body 1450 stops at the origin position.

In this way, the movable decorative body can be moved by simply rotating the side accessory motor 1440 in the same direction (in the present embodiment, counterclockwise when viewed from the front) without rotating the side accessory motor 1440 forward or reverse. 1450 can be reciprocated between the origin position and the most advanced position. When the link member 1420 moves from approximately 1 o'clock in rear view (see FIG. 106) to approximately 4:30 in rear view (see FIG. 112), the movable decorative body 1450 moves from the origin position to the most advanced position. On the other hand, when the link member 1420 moves from approximately 4:30 in the rear view to approximately 1:00 in the rear view, the movable decorative body 1450 moves from the most advanced position to the origin position. That is, the movement of the movable decorative body 1450 from the origin position to the most advanced position can be achieved by simply moving the link member 1420 from approximately 1 o'clock in the rear view to approximately 4:30 in the rear view. Movement of the movable ornament 1450 to the position requires that the link member 1420 move from approximately 4:30 to 1:00 in rear view.

Therefore, not only when the rotation speed of the side accessory motor 1440 (motor output shaft 1442) is constant, but also as long as the rotation speed of the side accessory motor 1440 does not fluctuate greatly, the distance from the origin position to the most advanced position The movement of the movable decoration 1450 is relatively quick, and the movement of the movable decoration 1450 from the most advanced position to the origin position is relatively slow. Here, the movement of the movable decorative body 1450 from the origin position toward the most advanced position (movable body effect) is the hit determination performed when the game ball wins the first start port 5442 or the second start port 440. Although it is performed based on the results, it is required that the movement of the movable decoration 1450 be performed quickly. On the other hand, the movement of the movable decoration 1450 from the most advanced position to the origin position does not require rapid movement compared to the movement from the origin position to the most advanced position. Therefore, it is possible to reciprocate the movable decoration 1450 between the origin position and the most advanced position only by rotating the side accessory motor 1440 in one direction (same direction). The rotation angle of the side accessory motor 1440 required for the movable decoration 1450 to move from the origin position to the most advanced position is the rotation of the side accessory motor 1440 required for the movable decoration 1450 to move from the most advanced position to the origin position. By making it smaller than the angle, the movement of the movable decoration 1450 from the origin position to the most advanced position is greater than the movement from the most advanced position to the origin position without changing the rotation speed of the side accessory motor 1440. It is possible to move quickly.

The independent movable body 1454 moves from the origin position to the most advanced position together with the movable decorative body 1450 when the movable decorative body 1450 moves from the origin position to the most advanced position. By making the 1454 operate in conjunction with the main body part 1452, the action rendering of the side accessory 1400 can be made more dynamic. However, instead of or in addition to this, when the movable decorative body 1450 is waiting at the origin position, the most advanced position, or between the origin position and the re-advanced position, the independently movable body 1454 is attached to the main body part 1452. You can make it work.

[Configuration of Second Middle Panel 1550]
The configuration of the second middle panel 1550 will be described with reference to FIGS. 114 to 116. FIG. FIG. 114 is an example of an exploded perspective view of the second middle panel 1550 viewed obliquely from the upper right front. FIG. 115 is an example of an exploded perspective view of the second middle panel 1550 viewed obliquely from the rear left (left in front view). FIG. 116 is (A) an example of a front view of the second middle panel 1550, and (B) an example of a cross-sectional view taken along line CC shown in (A).

The second middle panel 1550 includes a panel mounting case 1556 to which various members constituting the second middle panel 1550 are attached, an LED board 1560 on which LEDs 1562 and 1564 are arranged, a light guide lens 1570, a black sheet 1580, and an inner A lens 1583 , a decorative sheet 1584 , a half mirror 1585 , a window frame 1586 having the opening window 1552 described above, and a panel cover 1590 are provided.

The panel mounting case 1556 is a case-like member fixedly mounted to the lower right portion of the rear box 1800 of the rear unit 176 described above.

The LED board 1560 is a plate-like member having a planar region 1563 and an annular projection 1561 having a shape corresponding to the opening window 1552 described above. On the LED substrate 1560 , a plurality of (five in this embodiment) LEDs 1562 are annularly arranged radially inside an annular protrusion 1561 , and a plurality of LEDs 1564 are arranged in a planar region 1563 . The LED 1562 is provided so as to emit light radially outward. The LED 1564 is provided so as to emit light forward when viewed from the front.

Light guiding lens 1570 is provided to accommodate LED substrate 1560 between panel mounting case 1556 and panel mounting case 1556 . The light guide lens 1570 has a function of dispersing the light emitted forward from the LEDs 1564 arranged on the LED substrate 1560 and emitting light in a plane. A hole having a shape corresponding to the opening window 1552 is formed in the light guide lens 1570 .

Black sheet 1580 is attached to the back surface of panel cover 1590 . The black sheet 1580 has a black front side and watermarks such as characters on the back side. The watermark is not visible from the front in normal times (when the LEDs 1562 and 1564 are not emitting light), but appears to float on the panel cover 1590 when a predetermined condition is met and the LEDs 1562 and 1564 emit light. Black sheet 1580 is formed with a hole having a shape corresponding to opening window 1552 .

The half mirror 1585 , decorative sheet 1584 and inner lens 1583 are stacked in this order from the front and arranged to face the opening window 1552 . At this time, the inner lens 1583 is arranged in such a manner that the LED 1562 is accommodated radially inward (positioned radially outward of the LED 1562).

The inner lens 1583 has a flange 15832 (see FIG. 116(B)) protruding toward the rear side in a front view along the outer periphery. Part of the light emitted radially outward from the LED 1562 is absorbed by the inner lens 1583 , and the light not absorbed passes through the inner lens 1583 . Also, the inner lens 1583 is partitioned into five fan-shaped regions 15831, 15833, 15835, 13837, and 13839 (see FIG. 115). Further, each of these five regions 15831, 15833, 15835, 13837, and 13839 has a plurality of cutouts formed in a direction substantially orthogonal to the radial direction. In addition, since the boundaries of the five regions 15831, 15833, 15835, 13837, and 13839 are inclined so that the height decreases from the periphery toward the center of the circle, the light incident on the inner lens 1583 is It flows along the notch formed in the inner lens 1583 and gathers toward the radial center of the inner lens 1583 . When light is incident on the inner lens 1583, the intensity of the light is stronger at the outer peripheral portion than at the center portion in the radial direction. It is possible to achieve more uniform surface emission.

The decorative sheet 1584 is a light-transmissive sheet on which a picture of a character or the like is drawn. The character drawn on the decoration sheet 1584 cannot be seen from the front by the half mirror 1585 normally (when the LED 1562 is not emitting light), but when a predetermined condition is satisfied and the LED 1562 emits light, the character drawn on the decoration sheet 1584 can be seen in the area inside the opening window 1552. appear to float. In this way, when the LED 1562 emits light, a character appears in the area within the window frame 1552, so the LED 1562 is also referred to as a character lamp in this specification.

The window rim 1586 is bright plated and configured to reflect light. In addition, the above-described opening window 1552 is formed in the window frame 1586, and the outer peripheral portion is decorated so as to maintain a beautiful appearance.

The panel cover 1590 is a transparent plate-like member, and as described above, the black sheet 1580 is attached to the rear side. Also, the panel cover 1590 is formed with a hole corresponding to the opening window 1552 .

The light emitted from the LED 1562 is emitted radially outward. Part of the light is incident on the flange 15832 (see FIG. 116) of the inner lens 1583, part of the incident light is absorbed in the inner lens 1583, and the other light is transmitted through the inner lens 1583 and passes through the inner lens 1583. Light is emitted toward the outside of the direction. The light transmitted through the inner lens 1583 and emitted radially outward is reflected by the radially inner surface 15862 (see FIG. 116) of the outer peripheral edge of the window rim 1586 . The light reflected by the radially inner surface 15862 of the outer peripheral edge of the window rim 1586 is incident on the inner lens 1583 after changing the traveling direction of the light to the radially inner direction. In this way, the light emitted from the LED 1562 is prevented from leaking to the outside as much as possible and is absorbed by the inner lens 1583 as much as possible. In addition, since the light including the part of the light described above is incident on the inner lens 1583 from the outer peripheral portion of the inner lens 1583, the light can be dispersed along the surface of the inner lens 1583, and the surface can be uniformly distributed. It is possible to emit light.

Various processes executed by the main CPU 101 of the pachinko gaming machine 1 are shown in FIGS. 117 to 135 below.

[Processing when power is turned on]
FIG. 117 shows an example of power-on processing by the main CPU 101 . When the pachinko gaming machine 1 is powered on, the main CPU 101 sets an initial value to the stack pointer (step S11), as shown in FIG.

Next, the main CPU 101 determines whether or not the power interruption detection signal is ON (step S12). The power failure detection signal is turned ON, for example, when the voltage drops to a predetermined level. When the power cutoff detection signal is ON, the main CPU 101 determines that the power cutoff detection state, and repeats the process of S12 until the power cutoff detection signal is turned OFF. When the power interruption detection signal is OFF, the main CPU 101 determines that the power interruption detection state, and proceeds to the process of step S13.

In step S13, the main CPU 101 permits access to the RWM (main RAM 103).

Next, the main CPU 101 performs sub-control reception reception wait processing for waiting until the sub-control circuit 200 can receive a signal (step S14).

Next, the main CPU 101 performs initialization processing for various devices incorporated in the CPU (step S15).

Next, the main CPU 101 determines whether or not the backup clear signal is ON (step S16). The backup clear signal is a signal for instructing clearing of the backup contents of the main RAM 103 provided in the main CPU 101 constituting the main control circuit 70 and the RAM (not shown) constituting the payout/launch control circuit 300. . When the backup clear signal is ON, the main CPU 101 proceeds to the process of step S23. When the backup clear signal is OFF, the main CPU 101 proceeds to the process of step S17.

In step S17, the main CPU 101 determines whether or not the power interruption detection flag is set to ON. The power outage detection flag is a flag indicating that power outage processing has been executed in response to the occurrence of a power outage. When the power interruption detection flag is set to ON, the main CPU 101 proceeds to the process of step S18. When the power interruption detection flag is set to OFF, the main CPU 101 proceeds to the process of step S23.

In step S18, the main CPU 101 performs a work area damage check on the main RAM 103 using, for example, a checksum.

Next, the main CPU 101 determines whether or not the work area is normal (step S19). If the work area is normal, the main CPU 101 proceeds to the process of step S20. If the work area is not normal, the main CPU 101 proceeds to the process of step S23.

In step S20, the main CPU 101 initializes work areas that require initial values when power is restored.

Next, the main CPU 101 sets notification of a high-probability gaming state (probability variable gaming state) at the time of power failure recovery (step S21).

Next, the main CPU 101 performs a process of transmitting a power failure recovery command (power failure recovery command) to the sub-control circuit 200 (step S22). After completing this process, the main CPU 101 ends the power-on process.

In step S<b>23 , the main CPU 101 performs processing to clear the work area of the main RAM 103 .

Next, the main CPU 101 initializes a work area that requires an initial value when initializing the RWM (main RAM 103) (step S24).

Next, the main CPU 101 performs a process of transmitting a command for RWM initialization (initialization command) to the sub-control circuit 200 (step S25).

[System timer interrupt processing]
FIG. 118 shows an example of system timer interrupt processing by the main CPU 101 . System timer interrupt processing is executed, for example, every 2 ms. As shown in the figure, the main CPU 101 saves the values of each register to the stack area of the main RAM 103 (step S31).

Next, the main CPU 101 performs random number update processing for updating various random numbers (step S32).

Next, the main CPU 101 executes switch input detection processing for detecting input signals from various switches (step S33). The switch input detection process will be described later with reference to FIG.

Next, the main CPU 101 performs timer update processing for updating the values of various timers (step S34).

Next, the main CPU 101 performs command output processing for outputting (transmitting) various commands to the sub-control circuit 200 (step S35).

Next, the main CPU 101 performs game information output processing for outputting (transmitting) various game information to the sub-control circuit 200 (step S36). The game information is information related to games processed in the main control circuit 70, the sub-control circuit 200, the payout/launch control circuit 300, etc., and is transmitted to the sub-control circuit 200, the payout/launch control circuit 300, and the hall computer. .

Next, the main CPU 101 performs processing for restoring the saved values of each register (step S37). After completing this process, the main CPU 101 ends the system timer interrupt process.

[Switch input detection processing]
FIG. 119 shows an example of switch input detection processing by the main CPU 101 . The switch input detection process is called as a subroutine during execution of the system timer interrupt process previously described. As shown in the figure, the main CPU 101 executes start-up winning detection processing (step S41). The start opening winning detection process will be described later with reference to FIG. 120 .

Next, the main CPU 101 performs general winning hole passage detection processing (step S42). In the general winning opening detection process, for example, payout information indicating the number of payouts, etc., is set when a prize is won to the general winning openings 53, 54, and 55. FIG.

Next, the main CPU 101 performs a special winning opening passage detection process (step S43). In the special winning opening detection process, for example, payout information indicating the number of payouts and the like is set when a prize is won to the special winning opening 540 .

Next, the main CPU 101 performs ball passage detector passage detection processing (step S44). In the ball passage detector passage detection process, the lottery result (random value) of the normal symbol game is obtained according to the passage detection of the game ball by the ball passage detector 43 . After completing this process, the main CPU 101 ends the system timer interrupt process.

[Starting gate winning detection process]
FIG. 120 shows an example of the start opening winning detection process by the main CPU 101 . The starting opening winning detection process is called as a subroutine during execution of the switch input detection process described above. As shown in the figure, first, the main CPU 101 determines whether or not a game ball is detected by the first starting port switch 5472 (step S51). When the game ball is detected by the first starting port switch 5472, the main CPU 101 proceeds to the process of step S52. When the game ball is not detected by the first starting port switch 5472, the main CPU 101 proceeds to the process of step S59.

In step S52, the main CPU 101 performs a process of setting payout information according to the winning of the first starting slot.

Next, the main CPU 101 determines whether or not the number of reserved first start winning prizes (the number of reserved first special symbols) is less than four (step S53). If the pending number is less than 4, the main CPU 101 proceeds to the process of step S54. When the number of reserved items is 4, the main CPU 101 proceeds to the process of step S59.

In step S54, the main CPU 101 performs a process of adding 1 to the number of pending prizes for the first start opening prize.

Next, the main CPU 101 acquires a hit determination random number value and a symbol random number value, and performs a process of storing these random number values in the main RAM 103 (step S55).

Next, the main CPU 101 performs a first special stop symbol determination process (step S56). In the first special stop symbol determination process, the winning random number determination table (first start gate), the symbol determination table (first start gate), and the jackpot type determination table are referred to based on the hit determination random number value and the symbol random value. , determines a symbol designation command, a winning selection symbol command, etc. related to the first special symbol to be stopped and displayed.

Next, the main CPU 101 executes variation pattern determination processing (step S57). In the variation pattern determination process, the variation pattern relating to the first special symbol is determined by referring to the game state transition table and the variation pattern selection table based on the symbol designation command, the determination value data, the game state and the table pattern. The variation pattern determination process will be described later with reference to FIG.

Next, the main CPU 101 performs a process of setting a reserved number increase command for the first start opening winning prize (step S58). The reserved number increase command of the first start opening winning prize is a command indicating that the reserved number of the first special symbol is increased by 1, and is sent to the sub-control circuit 200 along with the command indicating the variation pattern determined in the process of step S57. and is sent.

Next, the main CPU 101 determines whether or not a game ball has been detected by the second starting port switch 441 (step S59). When the game ball is detected by the second starting port switch 441, the main CPU 101 proceeds to the process of step S60. When the game ball is not detected by the second starting opening switch 441, the main CPU 101 terminates the starting opening winning detection process.

In step S60, the main CPU 101 performs a process of setting payout information according to the winning of the second start opening.

Next, the main CPU 101 determines whether or not the number of reserved second start winning prizes (the number of reserved second special symbols) is less than four (step S61). If the pending number is less than 4, the main CPU 101 proceeds to the process of step S62. When the reserved number is four, the main CPU 101 terminates the start opening winning detection process.

In step S62, the main CPU 101 performs a process of adding 1 to the number of pending prizes for the second starting opening.

Next, the main CPU 101 acquires a hit determination random number value and a symbol random number value, and performs a process of storing these random number values in the main RAM 103 (step S63).

Next, the main CPU 101 performs second special stop symbol determination processing (step S64). As in the first special stop symbol determination process, the second special stop symbol determination process is based on the hit determination random number value and the symbol random number value. Start port), with reference to the jackpot type determination table, determine the symbol designation command related to the second special symbol to be stopped and displayed, the selection symbol command at the time of winning, and the like.

Next, the main CPU 101 executes variation pattern determination processing (step S65). This variation pattern determination process also refers to the game state transition table and the variation pattern selection table based on the symbol designation command, the judgment value data, the game state and the table pattern, and determines the variation pattern related to the second special symbol. The variation pattern determination process will be described later with reference to FIG.

Next, the main CPU 101 performs a process of setting a reserved number increase command for the second starting opening winning prize (step S66). The command to increase the reserved number of the second start opening winning prize is a command indicating that the reserved number of the second special symbol is increased by 1, and is sent to the sub-control circuit 200 along with the command indicating the variation pattern determined in the process of step S65. and sent. After completing this process, the main CPU 101 ends the start opening winning detection process.

[Variation pattern determination process]
FIG. 121 shows an example of variation pattern determination processing by the main CPU 101 . The variation pattern determination process is called as a subroutine during execution of the above-described start-up winning detection process. As shown in the figure, the main CPU 101 refers to a game state transition table and a variation pattern selection table based on a table pattern, a hit determination random number value, and a symbol random number value, which will be described later, and selects a variation pattern type. (step S71).

Next, the main CPU 101 performs a process of selecting first half and second half variation patterns from among the selected variation pattern types based on a predetermined lottery probability (step S72). After completing this process, the main CPU 101 ends the variation pattern determination process.

In addition, since the variable display time of the identification pattern is stored in association with the variation pattern, the variation pattern determined in the above-described variation pattern determination process is substantially information that can represent the variation time. becomes.

[Main control main processing]
FIG. 122 shows an example of main control main processing by the main CPU 101 . When the pachinko gaming machine 1 is powered on, the main CPU 101 performs initial setting processing (step S81), as shown in FIG. In this process, the main CPU 101 performs the above-described power-on process and the like.

Next, the main CPU 101 performs initial value random number update processing (step S82). In this process, the main CPU 101 performs a process of updating the initial value random number counter.

Next, the main CPU 101 performs special symbol control processing (step S83). The special symbol control process will be described later with reference to FIG.

Next, the main CPU 101 performs normal symbol control processing (step S84). The normal symbol control process will be described later with reference to FIG.

Next, the main CPU 101 performs pattern display unit control processing (step S85). In this process, the main CPU 101 displays the special symbol display section (first special symbol display section 73, A process of storing a control signal for driving the second special symbol display portion 74) and the normal symbol display portion 71 in the main RAM 103 is performed. As a result, the main CPU 101 transmits a control signal to the special symbol display section (the first special symbol display section 73, the second special symbol display section 74) and the normal symbol display section 71, and the special symbol display section (the first special symbol display section 74). The symbol display unit 73, the second special symbol display unit 74) and the normal symbol display unit 71 perform variable display and stop display for special symbols and normal symbols based on the received control signal.

Next, the main CPU 101 performs game information data generation processing (step S86). In this process, the main CPU 101 generates a game state command relating to game information data to be transmitted to the sub-control circuit 200, the payout/launch control circuit 300, and the hall computer, and stores it in the main RAM 103. FIG.

Next, the main CPU 101 performs storage/game state data generation processing (step S87). In this process, the main CPU 101 generates memory/game state data to be transmitted to the sub-control circuit 200 based on the value of the variable probability flag and the value of the time saving flag, and stores the memory/game state data in the main RAM 103 . After completing this process, the main CPU 101 proceeds to the process of step S82.

[Special symbol control process]
FIG. 123 shows an example of special symbol control processing by the main CPU 101. FIG. The special symbol control process is called as a subroutine during execution of the main control main process described above. Numerical values (“00” to “08”) written in parentheses to the left of each process shown in the figure indicate the value of the control state flag. This control state flag is stored in a predetermined storage area within the main RAM 103 . The main CPU 101 advances the special symbol game by executing processing according to the numerical value of the control state flag.

As shown in FIG. 123, the main CPU 101 loads the control state flag (step S91). In this process, the main CPU 101 reads the value of the control state flag stored in the main RAM 103 . The main CPU 101 determines whether or not to execute each process of steps S92 to S100, which will be described later, based on the value of the read control state flag. This control state flag indicates the state of the special symbol game, and enables execution of any one of steps S92 to S100. Further, the main CPU 101 executes each process at a predetermined timing determined according to the waiting time set for each process of steps S92 to S100. It should be noted that, before reaching this predetermined timing, each process is not executed, and processes related to other subroutines are executed. Of course, the above-described system timer interrupt processing (see FIG. 118) is also executed at predetermined intervals.

Next, the main CPU 101 performs special symbol storage check processing (step S92). In this process, the main CPU 101 checks the pending number of variable display of special symbols when the control state flag is a value ("00") indicating special symbol storage check processing, and when the pending number is not "0". (When there is a reserved ball), the hit determination result, the determination result of the special symbol, the determination result of the variation pattern of the special symbol, etc. obtained in the start winning prize detection process are acquired. Also, in this process, the main CPU 101 sets the control state flag to a value ("01") indicating a special symbol variable display time management process (step S93) described later, and changes the variation pattern acquired in this process. A variable display time of the corresponding special pattern is set in the waiting time timer. That is, after the variable display time of the special symbol corresponding to the variation pattern determined in the starting opening winning detection process has passed, the special symbol variable display time management process, which will be described later, is set to be executed. On the other hand, when the number of reserved balls is "0" (when there are no reserved balls), the main CPU 101 performs demonstration display processing for displaying a demonstration screen. This special symbol storage check process will be described in detail with reference to FIG.

Next, the main CPU 101 performs special symbol variable display time management processing (step S93). In this process, the main CPU 101 sets the control state flag to a value (“01”) indicating the special symbol variable display time management process, and when the variable display time of the special symbol has passed, the control state flag is set to a special symbol, which will be described later. A value ("02") indicating the symbol display time management process (step S94) is set, and the waiting time after confirmation is set in the waiting time timer. That is, after the post-confirmation waiting time set in the process of step S93 has passed, the special symbol display time management process, which will be described later, is set to be executed.

Next, the main CPU 101 performs special symbol display time management processing (step S94). In this process, the main CPU 101 determines whether the hit determination is made when the control state flag is a value ("02") indicating the special symbol display time management process and the waiting time after confirmation set in the process of step S93 has passed. It is determined whether the result is a "big win" or a "minor win". Then, if the result of the hit determination is "big hit" or "small hit", the main CPU 101 sets the control state flag to a value ("03") indicating a big hit start interval management process (step S95) described later. , the time corresponding to the jackpot start interval is set in the waiting time timer. That is, after the time corresponding to the jackpot start interval set in the process of step S94 has passed, the jackpot start interval management process, which will be described later, is set to be executed. On the other hand, if the result of the hit determination is neither a "big win" nor a "minor win", the main CPU 101 sets the control state flag to a value ("08") indicating a special symbol game ending process (step S100), which will be described later. That is, in this case, the special symbol game ending process, which will be described later, is set to be executed. This special symbol display time management process will be described later with reference to FIG.

Next, the main CPU 101 performs jackpot start interval management processing (step S95). In this process, the main CPU 101 determines that the control state flag is a value ("03") indicating the jackpot start interval management process, and when the time corresponding to the jackpot start interval set in the process of step S94 has passed, the main CPU 101 In order to open the prize winning opening 540, the variables located in the main RAM 103 are updated based on the data read from the main ROM 102. FIG. Also, in this process, the main CPU 101 sets the control state flag to a value (“04)” indicating the processing during the opening of the large winning prize gate (step S96) described later, and also sets the upper limit time for opening the large winning prize gate 540 (for example, 30 seconds) is set in the timer for opening the big winning opening. That is, by this process, a setting is made so that the later-described process during the opening of the big winning opening is executed.

Next, the main CPU 101 performs processing during the opening of the big winning opening (step S96). In this process, first, when the control state flag is a value (“04”) indicating the processing during the opening of the large winning opening, the main CPU 101 sets the condition that the large winning opening winning counter is equal to or greater than a predetermined number, It is determined whether or not one of the conditions that the upper limit time has elapsed (the timer for the opening time of the big winning opening is "0") has been satisfied (predetermined closing condition has been established). If one of the conditions is satisfied, the main CPU 101 updates the variables located in the main RAM 103 in order to close the big winning opening 540 . Then, the main CPU 101 sets a control state flag to a value (“05”) indicating a process for monitoring remaining balls in the big winning opening (step S97), and sets a waiting time timer to monitor remaining balls in the big winning opening. do. That is, according to this process, after the time for monitoring the remaining balls in the big winning hole set in step S97 has elapsed, the process for monitoring remaining balls in the big winning hole, which will be described later, is set to be executed. It should be noted that an inter-round display command is transmitted to the sub-control circuit 200 immediately before the end of the processing during the opening of the big winning opening.

Next, the main CPU 101 carries out a process for monitoring remaining balls in the big winning opening (step S97). In this process, the main CPU 101 sets the control state flag to the value ("05") indicating the remaining ball in the big winning opening monitoring process, and when the monitoring time for remaining balls in the big winning opening has passed, the main CPU 101 sets the number of times counter for opening the big winning opening. It is determined whether or not the condition that the value is greater than or equal to the maximum value of the number of openings of the big winning opening (final round) is satisfied. When determining that the above conditions are not satisfied, the main CPU 101 sets a value (“06”) indicating the waiting time management process for reopening the big winning opening to the control state flag. Also, the main CPU 101 sets a waiting time timer to a time corresponding to the interval between rounds. That is, by this process, after the time corresponding to the interval between rounds has passed, the wait time management process before reopening the big winning opening, which will be described later, is set to be executed. On the other hand, in step S97, when it is determined that the above conditions are satisfied, the main CPU 101 sets a value ("07") indicating the jackpot end interval processing to the control state flag, and sets the time corresponding to the jackpot end interval (jackpot end interval time) in the wait timer. That is, after the time corresponding to the jackpot end interval set in this process has passed, the jackpot end interval process described later is set to be executed.

Next, when the main CPU 101 determines that the value of the large winning opening opening number counter is not equal to or greater than the maximum value of the large winning opening opening number, the main CPU 101 performs waiting time management processing before reopening the large winning opening (step S98). In this process, the main CPU 101 opens the big winning gate when the control state flag has a value (“06”) indicating the wait time management process before reopening the big winning gate and the time corresponding to the interval between rounds has passed. The memory is updated so that the value of the number counter is incremented by "1". In addition, the main CPU 101 sets a control state flag to a value (“04”) indicating the processing during the opening of the big winning opening. Then, the main CPU 101 sets the opening upper limit time (for example, 30 seconds) to the big winning opening opening time timer. That is, in this process, the above-described process during opening of the big winning opening (step S96) is set to be executed again. It should be noted that, immediately before the end of the waiting time management process before re-opening of the big winning opening, a display command during opening of the big winning opening is transmitted to the sub-control circuit 200 .

Further, when the main CPU 101 determines that the value of the big winning opening opening number counter is equal to or greater than the maximum value of the number of times of opening the big winning opening, the main CPU 101 performs a jackpot ending interval process (step S99). In this process, the main CPU 101 determines that the control state flag has a value (“07”) indicating the jackpot end interval processing, and the value indicating the special symbol game end processing (“ 08”) is set in the control state flag. That is, by this process, it is set so that the special symbol game ending process, which will be described later, is executed after the process of step S99. In addition, when the above-mentioned winning time selection symbol command is one of "z5", "z6", "z7", "z10" and "z11", the main CPU 101 shifts the game state to the variable probability game state. When the above-described hit selection symbol command is any one of "z0", "z1", "z2", "z3", "z4" and "z9", the game state is changed to Perform control to make it non-probability variable gaming state. When the lottery result of the special symbol is a small win (when the random number for judging a big hit is "small hit judgment value data"), the main CPU 101 performs control to maintain the gaming state.

Next, the main CPU 101 performs special symbol game end processing when the big win game state or the small win game state ends, or when "losing" is won (step S100). In this process, when the control state flag is a value ("08") indicating the end processing of the special symbol game, the main CPU 101 updates the memory so as to decrease the data indicating the pending number (start memory information) by "1". do. Further, the main CPU 101 updates the special symbol storage area in order to variably display the next special symbol. Furthermore, the main CPU 101 sets a value (“00”) indicating special symbol storage check processing to the control state flag. That is, by this process, after the process of step S100, the special symbol storage check process (step S92) described above is set to be executed. After finishing this special symbol game end process, the main CPU 101 ends the special symbol control process.

As described above, in the pachinko gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment, the special symbol game is advanced by sequentially setting various values to the control state flags. Specifically, when the game state is neither the big win game state nor the small win game state, and the result of the hit determination is "loss", the main CPU 101 sets the control state flag to "00", "01", " 02” and then “08”. As a result, the main CPU 101 performs the special symbol storage check process (step S92), the special symbol variable display time management process (step S93), the special symbol display time management process (step S94), and the special symbol game end process (step S100). ) are executed in this order at a predetermined timing.

In addition, when the game state is neither the big win game state nor the small win game state, and the result of the hit determination is "big win" or "small win", the main CPU 101 sets the control state flag to "00" or "01". , "02", and "03". As a result, the main CPU 101 performs the special symbol storage check process (step S92), the special symbol variable display time management process (step S93), the special symbol display time management process (step S94), and the jackpot start interval management process (step S95). ) is executed in this order at a predetermined timing, and the transition control to the big winning game state or the small winning game state is executed.

Furthermore, the main CPU 101 sets the control state flags to "04", "05" and "06" in this order when the transition control to the big win game state or the small win game state is executed. As a result, the main CPU 101 performs the processing during the opening of the big winning prize (Step S96), the process of monitoring the remaining balls in the big winning prize (Step S57), and the waiting time management processing before reopening the big winning prize (Step S98) in this order. A big winning game or a small winning game is executed at a predetermined timing.

It should be noted that, when conditions for ending the jackpot game state are established during the jackpot game state, the main CPU 101 sets the control state flags in order of "04", "05", "07" and "08". As a result, the main CPU 101 performs the above-described processing during opening of the big winning opening (step S96), monitoring processing for remaining balls in the big winning opening (step S97), jackpot ending interval processing (step S99), and special symbol game ending processing (step S100). are executed in this order at a predetermined timing, and the jackpot game state is terminated.

As described above, in the special symbol control process, the process flow is branched according to the status. Also, the normal symbol control process (see FIG. 129 described later) of step S84 during the main control main process shown in FIG. 122 also branches the process flow according to the status, like the special symbol control process.

The processing program of this embodiment is programmed so that when the processing is branched according to the status, pure return processing from the small module to the parent module is possible with a call instruction. As a result, in this embodiment, the program capacity can be reduced compared to the case where a jump table is arranged for executing the above process.

[Special symbol memory check process]
FIG. 124 shows an example of special symbol storage check processing by the main CPU 101. FIG. The special symbol storage check process is called as a subroutine during execution of the special symbol control process described above. As shown in the figure, first, the main CPU 101 reads a control state flag from a predetermined storage area in the main RAM 103 by load processing (step S111).

Next, the main CPU 101 determines whether or not the read control state flag is a value (“00”) indicating special symbol storage check processing (step S112). When determining that the control state flag is not "00", the main CPU 101 terminates the special symbol storage check process. On the other hand, when determining that the control state flag is "00", the main CPU 101 proceeds to the process of step S113.

In step S113, the main CPU 101 determines whether or not the pending number (second start memory number) of the second start opening prize (variable display of the second special symbol) is "0". When it is determined that the number of reserved second start opening winning prizes is not "0", the main CPU 101 proceeds to the process of step S114. When it is determined that the number of reserved second start opening winning prizes is "0", the main CPU 101 proceeds to the process of step S119.

In step S114, the main CPU 101 subtracts "1" from the value of the second start memory number corresponding to the pending number of second start opening prizes. In this embodiment, the main CPU 101 determines whether or not data is stored in the second special symbol start storage area (0) to the second special symbol start storage area (4) provided in the main RAM 103, It is determined whether or not there is a start memory of the special symbol game corresponding to the variable display of the second special symbol being variably displayed or held. In the second special symbol start memory area (0), data (information) of the special symbol game corresponding to the variable display of the second special symbol being variably displayed is stored as start memory information. Then, in the second special symbol start storage area (1) to the second special symbol start storage area (4), a special symbol game corresponding to the variable display (reserved ball) of the second special symbol for four times held. is stored as start-up memory information. In addition, the start storage information of each second special symbol start storage area includes data indicating, for example, the hit determination random number value and the symbol random number value obtained when the second start port 440 is won, and the determined variation pattern. be

Next, the main CPU 101 performs special symbol storage transfer processing based on the second starting opening winning (step S115). In this process, the main CPU 101 shifts the data in the second special symbol start storage areas (1) to (4) to the second special symbol start storage areas (0) to (3) respectively. At this time, the main CPU 101 also transmits a pending subtraction command to the sub-control circuit 200 . After that, the main CPU 101 proceeds to the process of step S116.

In step S116, the main CPU 101 performs a process of setting a control state flag to a value ("01") indicating a special symbol variable display time management process. At this time, the main CPU 101 also transmits a special symbol effect start command to the sub-control circuit 200 .

Next, the main CPU 101 performs big hit/small hit determination processing (step S117). In this process, the main CPU 101 selects the random value for judging a big hit that is extracted at the time of winning the starting opening and is previously set in the first special symbol start storage area (0) or the second special symbol start storage area (0). Based on this, the determination value data is acquired by referring to the winning determination table (see FIG. 9) corresponding to the type of winning start opening. Based on the acquired determination value data, the main CPU 101 determines (hit determination) which of the "big win", "minor win" and "losing" is won.

Next, the main CPU 101 sets the variable display time corresponding to the determined variation pattern of the special symbols in the waiting time timer (step S118). After completing this process, the main CPU 101 ends the special symbol storage check process.

In step S119, the main CPU 101 determines whether or not the number of pending first start wins (variable display of first special symbol) (second start memory number) is "0". When it is determined that the number of pending first start opening winning prizes is not "0", the main CPU 101 proceeds to the process of step S120. When it is determined that the number of pending first start opening prizes is "0", the main CPU 101 proceeds to the process of step S122.

In step S120, the main CPU 101 subtracts "1" from the value of the first start memory number corresponding to the pending number of first start opening winning prizes. In this embodiment, the main CPU 101 determines whether or not data is stored in the first special symbol start storage area (0) to the first special symbol start storage area (4) provided in the main RAM 103, It is determined whether or not there is a start memory of the special symbol game corresponding to the variable display of the first special symbol being variably displayed or held. In the first special symbol start memory area (0), data (information) of the special symbol game corresponding to the variable display of the first special symbol being variably displayed is stored as start memory information. Then, in the first special symbol start storage area (1) to the first special symbol start storage area (4), a special symbol game corresponding to the variable display (reserved ball) of the first special symbol for four reserved times. is stored as start-up memory information. In addition, the start storage information of each first special symbol start storage area includes data indicating, for example, the winning determination random number value and the symbol random number value obtained when the first start port 5442 is won, and the determined variation pattern. be

Next, a special symbol storage transfer process is performed based on the first start opening winning (step S121). In this process, the main CPU 101 shifts the data in the first special symbol start storage areas (1) to (4) to the first special symbol start storage areas (0) to (3) respectively. At this time, the main CPU 101 also transmits a pending subtraction command to the sub-control circuit 200 . After that, the main CPU 101 proceeds to the process of step S116.

In step S122, the main CPU 101 performs demonstration display processing for displaying a demonstration screen. In this process, the main CPU 101 transmits a demonstration display command to the sub-control circuit 200 . After completing this process, the main CPU 101 ends the special symbol storage check process.

[Special symbol display time management process]
FIG. 125 shows an example of special symbol display time management processing by the main CPU 101. As shown in FIG. The special symbol display time management process is called as a subroutine during execution of the special symbol control process described above. As shown in the figure, the main CPU 101 determines whether or not the control state flag is a value ("02") indicating special symbol display time management processing (step S131). When determining that the control state flag is not the value (“02”) indicating the special symbol display time management process, the main CPU 101 terminates the special symbol display time management process. On the other hand, when determining that the control state flag is the value ("02") indicating the special symbol display time management process, the main CPU 101 proceeds to the process of step S132.

In step S132, the main CPU 101 determines whether or not the value (waiting time) of the waiting time timer is "0". In this process, the main CPU 101 determines whether or not the waiting time (variable display start waiting time) set in the waiting time timer after the variable display has been determined has expired. When determining that the value of the waiting time timer is not "0", the main CPU 101 terminates the special symbol display time management process. On the other hand, when determining that the value of the waiting time timer is "0", the main CPU 101 proceeds to the process of step S133.

At step S133, the main CPU 101 determines whether or not the special symbol game is a "jackpot". When determining that the special symbol game is a "jackpot", the main CPU 101 proceeds to the process of step S142. On the other hand, when determining that the special symbol game is not a "big hit", the main CPU 101 proceeds to the process of step S134.

In step S134, the main CPU 101 further determines whether or not the special symbol game is a "minor win". When determining that the special symbol game is a "small hit", the main CPU 101 proceeds to the process of step S137. On the other hand, when it is determined that the special symbol game is not a "minor hit", that is, when the special symbol game is a "loss", the main CPU 101 proceeds to the process of step S135.

In step S<b>135 , the main CPU 101 performs time reduction number subtraction processing. This time reduction number subtraction process will be described later with reference to FIG. 126 .

Next, the main CPU 101 performs a process of setting a control state flag to a value ("08") indicating a special symbol game end process (step S136). After completing this process, the main CPU 101 ends the special symbol display time management process.

In step S137, the main CPU 101 performs a process of setting a small win flag indicating a small win. After completing this process, the main CPU 101 proceeds to the process of step S138.

In step S138, the main CPU 101 performs a process of setting a control state flag to a value ("03") indicating the jackpot start interval management process.

Next, the main CPU 101 performs a process of setting a waiting time timer to a jackpot start interval time (for example, 5000 ms) corresponding to the special symbol (first special symbol or second special symbol) (step S139).

Next, the main CPU 101 performs a process of setting a big win start command or a small win start command corresponding to the special symbol in the main RAM 103 (step S140). Thereby, a big hit start command or a small hit start command is transmitted to the sub-control circuit 200 .

Next, the main CPU 101 refers to the jackpot type determination table (see FIG. 13), and sets in the main RAM 103 the upper limit of the number of rounds (upper limit of the number of openings of the big winning opening) corresponding to the special symbol (type of symbol designation command). Then, a round number display LED pattern flag is set (step S141). The number-of-rounds display LED pattern flag is a flag indicating whether to display the number of remaining rounds in a predetermined pattern. After completing this process, the main CPU 101 ends the special symbol display time management process.

In step S142, the main CPU 101 performs a process of setting a jackpot flag indicating a jackpot. After completing this process, the main CPU 101 proceeds to the process of step S143.

In step S143, the main CPU 101 performs a process of clearing the time saving number counter, the time saving flag and the probability variation flag. After completing this process, the main CPU 101 proceeds to the process of step S138.

[Time saving number of times subtraction processing]
FIG. 126 shows an example of time reduction number subtraction processing by the main CPU 101 . The time reduction number subtraction process is called as a subroutine during execution of the special symbol display time management process described above or the jackpot end interval process described later. As shown in the figure, the main CPU 101 determines whether or not the value of the time saving number counter is 0 (step S151). The time-saving number counter counts until the set number of time-saving times (in this embodiment, 24 times, 30 times, 36 times, 42 times, 48 times, and 100 times) reaches 0. Subtraction is a counter. When the value of the time saving number counter is 0, the main CPU 101 proceeds to the process of step S154. When the value of the time saving number counter is not 0, the main CPU 101 ends the time saving number subtraction process.

In step S152, the main CPU 101 performs a process of subtracting 1 from the value of the time saving number counter.

Next, the main CPU 101 again determines whether or not the value of the time saving counter is 0 (step S153). When the value of the time saving number counter is 0, the main CPU 101 proceeds to the process of step S154. When the value of the time saving number counter is not 0, the main CPU 101 ends the time saving number subtraction process.

In step S154, the main CPU 101 performs a process of setting "0" as a time saving flag. After completing this process, the main CPU 101 ends the time reduction number subtraction process.

[Jackpot end interval processing]
FIG. 127 shows an example of the jackpot end interval processing by the main CPU101. The jackpot end interval process is called as a subroutine during execution of the special symbol control process described above. As shown in the figure, the main CPU 101 determines whether or not the control state flag is a value ("07") indicating the jackpot end interval processing (step S161). When determining that the control state flag is not the value (“07”) indicating the jackpot end interval processing (step S161: NO), the main CPU 101 ends the jackpot end interval processing. On the other hand, when determining that the control state flag is the value ("07") indicating the jackpot end interval process, the main CPU 101 proceeds to the process of step S162.

In step S162, the main CPU 101 determines whether or not the value of the waiting time timer is "0". In this process, the main CPU 101 determines whether or not the jackpot end interval time set in the waiting time timer has expired. When determining that the value of the waiting time timer is not "0", the main CPU 101 terminates the jackpot end interval processing. On the other hand, when determining that the value of the waiting time timer is "0", the main CPU 101 proceeds to the process of step S163.

In step S163, the main CPU 101 clears the number-of-times-for-large-winning-awards-opens display LED pattern flag. The number of times of winning opening display LED pattern flag is used as a management flag indicating whether or not the number of rounds at the time of a big hit is displayed by the light emission pattern of the LED.

Next, the main CPU 101 clears the round number distribution flag (step S164). This round number distribution flag is one of the management flags stored in the main RAM 103, and is used to indicate whether or not the big winning opening 540 is to be periodically opened and closed a predetermined number of times even during one round. flag. When the big winning opening 540 is opened and closed periodically even during one round, the round number distribution flag becomes "1". At this time, the main CPU 101 also transmits a special symbol per end display command to the sub-control circuit 200 .

Next, the main CPU 101 performs a process of setting a control state flag to a value (“08”) indicating special symbol game end processing (step S165).

Next, the main CPU 101 determines whether or not the special symbol game is a "jackpot" (step S166). When determining that the special symbol game is a "jackpot", the main CPU 101 proceeds to the process of step S167. On the other hand, when determining that the special symbol game is not a "big hit", the main CPU 101 proceeds to the process of step S174.

In step S<b>167 , the main CPU 101 performs processing for setting a big hit flag in a predetermined area of the main RAM 34 .

Next, the main CPU 101 determines whether or not it is a variable probability big hit (step S168). In the case of a variable probability jackpot, the main CPU 101 proceeds to the process of step S169. If it is not a variable probability big hit, the main CPU 101 proceeds to the process of step S171.

In step S169, the main CPU 101 performs a process of setting "1" as a variable probability flag.

Next, the main CPU 101 performs a process of setting "1" as a time saving flag (step S171).

Next, the main CPU 101 performs a process of setting a predetermined number of times of time saving (in this embodiment, 100 times as an example) to the time saving number counter (step S172).

Next, the main CPU 101 executes a variation pattern table setting process (step S173). The variation pattern table setting process will be described later with reference to FIG. After completing this process, the main CPU 101 ends the jackpot end interval process.

In step S174, the main CPU 101 performs a process of clearing the value of the small hit flag.

Next, the main CPU 101 executes the above-described time reduction number subtraction process (step S175). After completing this process, the main CPU 101 ends the jackpot end interval process.

[Variation pattern table setting process]
FIG. 128 shows an example of variation pattern table setting processing by the main CPU 101 . The variation pattern table setting process is called as a subroutine during the execution of the above-described power-on process or the jackpot end interval process. As shown in the figure, the main CPU 101 determines whether or not the power is turned on (step S181). When the power is turned on, the main CPU 101 proceeds to the process of step S182. If the power is not turned on, the main CPU 101 proceeds to the process of step S183.

In step S182, the main CPU 101 performs a process of setting table pattern 1 as a table pattern when referring to the game state transition table.

Next, the main CPU 101 determines whether or not the value of the variable probability flag is "1" (step S183). When the value of the variable probability flag is "1", the main CPU 101 proceeds to the process of step S184. When the value of the variable probability flag is "0", the main CPU 101 proceeds to the process of step S185.

In step S184, the main CPU 101 performs a process of setting table pattern 2 as a table pattern when referring to the game state transition table. After completing this process, the main CPU 101 ends the variation pattern table setting process.

In step S185, the main CPU 101 performs a process of setting table pattern 3 as a table pattern when referring to the game state transition table. After completing this process, the main CPU 101 ends the variation pattern table setting process.

[Normal symbol control process]
FIG. 129 shows an example of normal symbol control processing by the main CPU 101. FIG. The normal symbol control process is called as a subroutine during execution of the main control main process described above. In addition, the numerical values (“00” to “04”) written in parentheses on the left side of each process in the flowchart shown in FIG. stored in a predetermined storage area in the The main CPU 101 advances the normal symbol game by executing each process corresponding to the numerical value of the normal symbol control state flag.

As shown in FIG. 129, the main CPU 101 performs a process of loading the normal symbol control state flag (step S191). In this process, the main CPU 101 reads the normal symbol control state flag stored in the main RAM 103 . The main CPU 101 determines whether or not to execute various processes of steps S192 to S196, which will be described later, based on the value of the read normal symbol control state flag. This normal symbol control state flag indicates the state of the game of the normal symbol game, and enables execution of any one of steps S162 to S166. Further, the main CPU 101 executes each process at a predetermined timing determined according to the waiting time set for each process of steps S162 to S166. Before reaching this predetermined timing, other subroutine processing is executed without executing each processing. Of course, the above-described system timer interrupt processing (see FIG. 118) is also executed at predetermined intervals.

Next, the main CPU 101 performs normal symbol memory check processing (step S192). In this process, when the normal symbol control state flag is a value ("00") indicating the normal symbol storage check process, the main CPU 101 checks the number of variable display of normal symbols and the number of suspension is "0". If it is not, a process such as hit determination is performed. Also, in this process, the main CPU 101 sets the normal symbol control state flag to a value ("01") indicating a normal symbol variable display time monitoring process (step S193), which will be described later, and sets the variable time determined in this process. to the wait timer. That is, by the process of step S192, after the determined normal symbol variation time has passed, the normal symbol variation time monitoring process, which will be described later, is set to be executed.

Next, the main CPU 101 performs normal symbol variable display time monitoring processing (step S193). In this process, the main CPU 101 sets the normal symbol control state flag to the normal symbol control state flag when the value ("01") indicating the normal symbol fluctuation time monitoring process has passed, and the normal symbol control state flag is set to the normal symbol control state flag. A value (“02”) indicating normal symbol display time monitoring processing (step S194) is set, and a waiting time (for example, 0.5 seconds) after determination is set in the waiting time timer. That is, by the process of step S193, after the set waiting time has elapsed, the normal symbol display time monitoring process, which will be described later, is set to be executed.

Next, the main CPU 101 performs normal symbol display time monitoring processing (step S194). In this process, the main CPU 101 determines that the normal symbol control state flag is a value ("02") indicating the normal symbol display time monitoring process, and when the waiting time after confirmation set in the process of step S193 has passed, the winning It is determined whether or not the result of determination is "hit". Then, if the result of the hit determination is "hit", the main CPU 101 performs the normal electric auditors product opening setting process, and sets the normal symbol control state flag to a value ( "03"). That is, by this process, setting is made so that the normal electric accessary product release process, which will be described later, is executed. On the other hand, if the result of the hit determination is not "hit", the main CPU 101 sets the normal symbol control state flag to a value ("04") indicating normal symbol game end processing (step S196), which will be described later. That is, in this case, it is set so that the normal symbol game ending process, which will be described later, is executed.

Next, the main CPU 101 performs normal electric accessory release processing when it is determined that the result of the win determination is "win" in step S194 (step S195). In this process, when the normal symbol control state flag is a value (“03”) indicating the normal electric accessory opening process, the main CPU 101 determines that a predetermined number of prizes have been won while the normal electric accessory 460 is being opened. It is determined whether one of the conditions and the condition that the opening upper limit time of the normal electric accessory 460 has passed (the normal electric function opening time timer is "0") is satisfied. When one of the above conditions is satisfied, the main CPU 101 updates the variables located in the main RAM 103 in order to close the vane member 4620 of the normal electric accessory 460 (see, for example, FIG. 5). Then, the main CPU 101 sets the normal symbol control state flag to a value (“04”) indicating normal symbol game end processing (step S196), which will be described later. That is, by this process, the normal symbol game end process, which will be described later, is set to be executed.

Next, the main CPU 101 performs normal symbol game end processing (step S196). In this process, when the normal symbol control state flag is a value ("04") indicating the normal symbol game end process, the main CPU 101 reduces the data indicating the pending number of variable display of normal symbols by "1". memory update. In addition, the main CPU 101 updates the normal symbol storage area in order to perform the variable fluctuation display of the next normal symbol. Further, the main CPU 101 sets the normal symbol control state flag to a value (“00”) indicating normal symbol storage check processing. That is, after the process of step S196, the above-described normal symbol memory check process (step S192) is set to be executed. After completing this process, the main CPU 101 ends the normal symbol control process.

[Sub-control circuit main processing]
On the other hand, the sub CPU 201 executes the sub control circuit main process. This sub-control circuit main processing will be described with reference to FIG. Note that this sub-control circuit main process is a process that is started when the power is turned on.

As shown in FIG. 130, the sub CPU 201 performs initialization processing such as RAM access permission, work area initialization, hardware initialization, device initialization, application initialization, backup recovery initialization, etc. (step S201).

Next, the sub CPU 201 performs processing to clear the counter value of the watchdog timer (step S202). The watchdog timer is set to a reset time (for example, 2000 ms) when activated, and power-off processing is executed when the service pulse is not written (during timeout).

Next, the sub CPU 201 executes operation means input processing (step S203).

Next, the sub CPU 201 executes command analysis processing (step S204). The command analysis processing will be described later with reference to FIG.

Next, the sub CPU 201 executes effect mode determination processing (step S205). The effect mode determination process includes scenario presetting process, effect determination process (secret A stage 2002), prefetch effect selection process (high probability stage 2004), background change control process (high probability stage 2004), background change continuous possible number of times, which will be described later. Judgment processing (high probability stage 2004), variation scenario determination processing (high probability stage 2004), chance up control processing (high probability stage 2004), pending change determination processing (high probability stage 2004), character lamp effect control processing, full screen It is composed of subroutines such as effect control processing. These processes will be described later with reference to FIGS. 136 to 167. FIG.

Next, the sub CPU 201 executes command transmission processing (step S206). The command transmission process will be described later with reference to FIG.

Next, the display control circuit 204 executes drawing control processing (step S207). In this process, the display control circuit 204 performs drawing control for displaying an image on the liquid crystal display device 16 based on the message (effect specifying information) transmitted from the sub CPU 201 .

Next, the audio control circuit 205 executes audio control processing (step S208). In this process, the audio control circuit 205 performs audio control for causing the speaker 24 to output audio based on the message (effect specifying information) transmitted from the sub CPU 201 .

Next, the LED control circuit 206 executes lamp control processing (step S209). In this process, the LED control circuit 206 performs light emission control for lighting or blinking the lamp 25 based on the message (effect specifying information) transmitted from the sub CPU 201 .

Next, the role product control circuit 207 executes a role product control process (step S210). In this process, the role product control circuit 207 performs drive control for operating the performance drive motor that operates the movable role product unit based on the message (performance designation information) transmitted from the sub CPU 201 . In such a sub-control circuit main process, after the initialization process of step S201 is finished, the processes of steps S202 to S210 are repeatedly executed.

[Command analysis processing]
FIG. 131 shows an example of command analysis processing by the sub CPU 201 . The command analysis process is called as a subroutine during execution of the sub-control circuit main process described above. As shown in the figure, after receiving from the main control circuit 70 (main CPU 101), the sub CPU 201 analyzes the command stored in the reception buffer of the work RAM 203 (step S241).

Next, the sub CPU 201 checks the consistency of the received command (step S242). Consistency check is performed to verify that the target data exists upon command reception and that the data has no errors or omissions.

Next, the sub CPU 201 performs sub lottery processing (step S243). In this process, when the received command is a variation pattern designation command, the sub CPU 201 selects an effect pattern by lottery based on the variation pattern designation command. After completing this process, the sub CPU 201 ends the command analysis process. In the sub-lottery process, all items related to the effect including the effect pattern may be selected by lottery, or only the type of effect (presence or absence of dialogue notice, presence or absence of SU notice, etc.) may be selected as the effect pattern. The effect contents (type of effect, type of cut-in, etc.) selected by lottery and executed in the effect may be selected as effect information in another subroutine process. In the present embodiment, an effect pattern indicating the type of effect is selected in the sub lottery process, and thereafter, the effect contents to be executed based on the effect pattern are selected as effect information by the effect mode determination process described later. ing.

[Command transmission processing]
FIG. 132 shows an example of command transmission processing by the sub CPU 201 . The command transmission process is called as a subroutine during execution of the sub-control circuit main process described above. As shown in the figure, the sub CPU 201 executes a message setting process when transmitting a control command (message) to each of the control circuits 204 to 207 (step S251). In this process, the sub CPU 201 generates a message (effect designation information) based on the effect information obtained in the effect mode determination process, and temporarily stores the message in the direct buffer of the work RAM 203 . This message setting process will be described later with reference to FIG.

Next, the sub CPU 201 executes direct table registration processing (step S252). In this process, the sub CPU 201 sets a direct table corresponding to the message and effect information stored in the direct buffer in a predetermined area of the work RAM 203 . This direct table registration processing will be described later with reference to FIG.

Next, the sub CPU 201 executes message transmission processing (step S253). In this process, the sub CPU 201 reads out the message stored in the direct buffer at a predetermined timing based on the direct table, and performs a process of transmitting the message to predetermined control circuits 204-207. After completing this process, the sub CPU 201 ends the command transmission process. This message transmission processing will be described later with reference to FIG.

[Message setting process]
FIG. 133 shows an example of message setting processing by the sub CPU 201. FIG. The message setting process is called as a subroutine during execution of the above-described command transmission process. As shown in the figure, the sub CPU 201 sets devices (control circuits 204 to 207) to be transmitted based on the effect information (step S261).

Next, the sub CPU 201 performs processing for setting presence/absence of system operation (step S262).

Next, the sub CPU 201 sets stage information and each effect information (step S263).

Next, the sub CPU 201 sets the notice pattern (step S264). As a result, the direct buffer stores a message indicating the destination device (control circuits 204 to 207), the presence or absence of system operation, stage information, various performance information, and notice patterns. After completing this process, the sub CPU 201 ends the message setting process.

[Direct table registration process]
FIG. 134 shows an example of direct table registration processing by the sub CPU 201 . The direct table registration process is called as a subroutine during execution of the above-described command transmission process. As shown in the figure, the sub CPU 201 performs processing for registering a single table (step S271).

Next, the sub CPU 201 performs a process of registering a master table based on the effect information determined in the effect mode determination process (step S272).

Next, the sub CPU 201 performs processing for registering a slave table to be used in the master table (step S273).

Next, the sub CPU 201 performs a process of registering the direct table corresponding to the message set in the direct buffer as a slave table (step S274). After completing this process, the sub CPU 201 ends the direct table registration process.

[Message sending process]
135 shows an example of message transmission processing by the sub CPU 201. FIG. The message transmission process is called as a subroutine during execution of the command transmission process described above. As shown in the figure, if a message is registered in the direct buffer corresponding to the direct table, the sub CPU 201 sends the message to each device (control circuits 204 to 207) according to the "destination device" set in the message. is transmitted (step S281).

After completing the message transmission, the sub CPU 201 performs a process of discarding unnecessary direct tables (step S282). After completing this process, the sub CPU 201 ends the message transmission process.

[Production mode determination processing by sub CPU 201]
Next, details of the effect mode determination processing (step S205) of the sub CPU 201 will be described. A production mode is formed with characteristics for each of the plurality of production stages.

[Production stage]
First, referring to FIG. 136, state transitions of a plurality of production stages will be described. FIG. 136 is a block diagram showing an example of state transitions of a plurality of game state stages.

In the normal stage 2000, the winning probability of the hit determination (hereinafter referred to as "big hit determination") performed as a process of the main CPU 101 when the game ball wins the first start port 5442 or the second start port 440 is relatively It is a low low probability state and a state without electric support (that is, a normal game state). If the presentation state is the normal stage 2000, the player can grasp that the game state is the normal game state (low probability state).

A high-probability stage 2004 is a high-probability gaming state in which the winning probability of the jackpot determination is relatively high, and is a state with an electric support. If the presentation state is the high-probability stage 2004, the player can grasp that the game state is the high-probability game state.

The concealed A stage 2002 and the concealed B stage 2006 are both high-probability gaming states in which the probability of winning the jackpot judgment is relatively high, and a state with an electric support, or a winning probability of the jackpot judgment is relatively low. It is a low probability state and a state with an electric sapo. In the secrecy A stage 2002 and the secrecy B stage 2006, the player cannot or grasps whether the game state is the high-probability game state or the low-probability state by looking at the display effect performed on the liquid crystal display device 16. Have difficulty. However, in the pachinko gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment, regarding the secrecy A stage 2002, it is disclosed whether it is in a high-probability gaming state or a low-probability state, depending on the final result of the battle production described later. . In addition, the character subtraction effect, which will be described later, performed during the battle effect is an intermediate effect toward the final result of the battle effect. It can make the player happy and sad.

In the normal stage 2000 (low-probability gaming state, no time reduction), when the 8R jackpot (jackpot where the jackpot 540 opens and closes for 8 rounds) is drawn, after the jackpot game ends, the gaming state stage is a hidden A stage 2002 (high There is a specified number of electrical sapo in the probability game state, or there is a specified number of electrical sapo in the low probability game state). In addition, "with power supply" is a state in which the time saving game is executed, and "without power supply" is a state in which the time saving game is not executed.

In the secret A stage 2002, when the result of the jackpot determination is a 5R jackpot, or when the prescribed number of time-saving games are completed in the high-probability game state, the production stage transitions to the high-probability stage 2004.例文帳に追加On the other hand, in the secrecy A stage 2002, when the predetermined number of time-saving games are consumed in the low-probability gaming state, the normal stage 2000 is entered. In the normal stage 2000 , if the result of the jackpot determination is a 5R jackpot or a 15R jackpot, the production stage transitions to a high accuracy stage 2004 .

In the high-probability stage 2004 , if the result of the jackpot determination is the 8R jackpot, the effect stage transitions to the secret A stage 2002 . In the secret A stage 2002 , if the result of the jackpot determination is a 5R jackpot, the effect stage transitions to the secret B stage 2006 . In the concealment B stage 2006, if the result of the jackpot determination is the 8R jackpot, the production stage transitions to the concealment A stage 2002. - 特許庁In the secrecy B stage 2006, if the result of the jackpot determination is a 15R jackpot, the effect stage transitions to a high probability stage 2004. - 特許庁In the high-probability stage 2004 , if the result of the jackpot determination is a 5R jackpot, the effect stage transitions to the secret B stage 2006 . In the secrecy B stage 2006, when the specified times of time saving are consumed, the production stage transitions to the normal stage 2000. - 特許庁

Incidentally, the number of rounds of the big hit described above is an example. In the above description, the transition to the game state of the secret A stage 2002 is made when the result of the jackpot determination is the 8R jackpot, but the game state is not limited to this. , the sub CPU 201 may perform a promotion effect during the big win game, and make the transition to the high probability stage 2004 after the big win ends.

The secrecy A stage 2002 may have a higher expectation of a high probability gaming state than the secrecy B stage 2006, for example. Each of these concealment stages implements a unique production form. For example, in the concealment A stage 2002, a battle production is executed in which a plurality of characters are divided into friends and foes and play a knock-out battle.

FIG. 137 is a diagram showing an example of a battle effect displayed on the liquid crystal display device 16 in the secrecy A stage 2002. FIG. In FIG. 137, the ally character CA1 is displayed on the left side of the screen, and the enemy character CA2 is displayed on the right side of the screen. Also, the type of allied characters currently fighting and the number of allied characters (remaining number) are displayed on the upper left side of the screen, and the type of enemy characters currently fighting and the number of enemy characters are displayed on the upper right side of the screen. (remaining number of people) is displayed. In addition, although not shown in FIG. 137, other information such as variable display information of the identification pattern and information on the number of starting memories held, for example, may be appropriately displayed.

The above-mentioned battle effect is an effect that serves as an indicator of whether the high probability game state or the low probability game state is likely in the secrecy A stage 2002, and if certain requirements are satisfied, Whether it is a high-probability game state or a low-probability game state is determined. For example, when the enemy group is annihilated, the high-probability game state is determined, and when the ally group is annihilated, the low-probability game state is determined. Therefore, the effect of the process until one of the enemy and ally groups is annihilated is an index effect indicating which of the high-probability game state and the low-probability game state is more likely. For example, when a subtraction effect is performed in which the number of people in the enemy group is reduced, the player can be given a sense of expectation that there is a high possibility of being in a high probability game state, and a subtraction effect is performed in which the number of people in the ally group is decreased. This can give the player the impression that the possibility of being in a high probability state is low (the possibility of being in a low probability gaming state is high). In the secrecy A stage 2002, such a rough scenario of the battle production is determined in advance before the secrecy A stage 2002 starts, and in the secrecy A stage 2002, the previously determined scenario is changed, corrected, etc. The performance is going on. The scenario effect selection process (secret A stage 2002) will be described below.

Further, for example, in the secrecy B stage 2006, a battle effect is executed in which the main character of the allied characters fights one-on-one with the enemy character. When the result of the big hit determination process is a big hit, an effect is executed in which the main character wins in the battle effect. In the battle production in the secret B stage 2006, for example, a) a production zone in which an enemy character can be defeated without fail if the main character attacks, and b) whichever of the main character and the enemy character performs a preemptive attack. c) a production zone in which an enemy character makes a preemptive attack are prepared. Also, in this secrecy B stage 2006, whether or not the game is in the high-probability game state is notified by the operation of the movable decorative body 1040 of the upper front accessory 1000. FIG. For example, in the final variable display (the final variable display in the time-saving gaming state (special symbol game) or the last variable display (special symbol game) in which whether or not the high probability gaming state is confidential), the upper front role If the movable decoration 1040 of the object 1000 falls (moves) toward the operation limit position, it is in a high probability game state, and if the movable decoration 1040 does not fall, it is in a low probability game state. However, in the final variable display, a fall premonitory effect may be performed to make the user expect that the movable decorative body 1040 will fall. Also, when the result of the big hit determination process is a big hit, in addition to the falling of the movable decorative body 1040, the first movable body 1330, the second movable body 1340, the third movable body 1355 and the fourth movable body 1357 all operate. By operating to the limit position (for example, see FIG. 102), it is notified that the result of the big hit determination process is a big hit.

Further, in the secrecy B stage 2006, transitions between the above-described production zones (a) to (c) are performed at any time according to the number of executions of the variable display (special symbol game). For example, after the jackpot game state is over, the number of executions of the special symbol game stays in the above-mentioned a) production zone between 1 and 10 times, and stays in the above-mentioned production zone between 11 and 90 times. During the 91st to 99th times, the player stays in the effect zone of c), and in the 100th special symbol game, an effect indicating that it is the final game in the secret B stage 2006 is performed. Needless to say, the effect in the secrecy B stage 2006 is not limited to the above.

In the present embodiment, the index effect can indicate which of the high-probability gaming state and the low-probability gaming state is more likely in the secret A stage 2002. However, the present invention is not limited to this. It can also be adopted for other effects that indicate the degree of highness. For example, the above index effect can be used in the following effects, but the following effects are merely examples, and it goes without saying that other effects can be used.
・When the high-probability gaming state is disclosed but the duration of the high-probability gaming state is kept secret, an effect indicating the length of the duration (expecting that the duration is long) production showing degree).
・When it is disclosed that it is a time-saving gaming state, but the duration of the time-saving gaming state is kept secret, an effect that indicates the length of the duration (the degree of expectation that the duration is long) production shown).
An effect indicating the degree of expectation that a performance section is set for one or a plurality of start memories and that the start memories included in the performance sections include a reach variation performance or a big hit.

The degree of expectation (reliability) for a predetermined internal state (that is, an advantageous state) such as a big hit or a high probability game state of each announcement effect is a "big hit" or a "high probability game state" when each announcement effect is executed. ”, the probability that each notice effect will be executed to become a “big hit” or “high probability game state”, and the probability that each notice effect will be executed to become “miss” or “low probability game state”. It is a numerical value divided by the sum with the probability of becoming an internal state (that is, a disadvantageous state) of . However, since the "expectation level" can include a case where the expectation level is 100% and a case where the expectation level is 0%, strictly speaking, there are cases where the above division does not hold (for example, the production is executed Since it can include the case where the game state or winning or losing is definitely notified when it is done, it is not suitable to divide 1 by 0. that would be the case).

[Scenario presentation selection processing (secret A stage)]
The sub CPU 201 performs a process of subtracting the character who lost in the battle between the friend and foe from the number of participating characters, and erases the defeated character from the screen. A more specific description will be given of the mode of presentation related to the secrecy A stage 2002. FIG.

The processing for the effect form includes a step of determining the scenario effect in advance before the concealment A stage 2002 starts (specifically, during execution of the jackpot game), and when the concealment A stage 2002 starts, the variation pattern is changed. and a step of changing, correcting, etc. the scenario in accordance with the performance selected based on the above. The “scenario” is the development of when the character is subtracted during the progress of the game (the number of time reductions) in the secrecy A stage 2002 . Since the "scenario" includes correspondence between the number of times of time saving and character subtraction, it may be rephrased as a "production map". When the secrecy A stage 2002 starts, the sub CPU 201 advances character subtraction processing by executing the determined scenario.

The sub CPU 201 predetermines the team composition and the scenario, since the performance of the secrecy A stage 2002 is a team competition. The sub CPU 201 sets the scenario according to the combination of the attribute of the competing team, the degree of expectation of the high-probability game, and the number of times of time saving. FIG. 138 is an example of a flowchart showing scenario presetting processing. The sub CPU 201 repeatedly executes this flowchart at a predetermined timing as a subroutine of the effect mode determination process (step S205). When the sub CPU 201 determines that the result of the jackpot determination process is an 8R jackpot, it executes the scenario presetting process of FIG. According to FIG. 136, it can be seen that the transition from a stage other than the concealment A stage 2002 to the concealment A stage 2002 is triggered by the result of the jackpot determination process being an 8R jackpot.

In this embodiment, the sub CPU 201 executes the scenario pre-setting process of FIG. The scenario pre-setting process of FIG. 138 may be executed when the jackpot other than 8R is won.

The sub CPU 201 draws lots for parameters suggesting the degree of expectation of the high probability game in the secrecy A stage 2002 (step S300). This parameter includes, for example, four stages A to D, with A having the lowest probability variation expectation. B has a medium degree of probability variation expectation, and C has a large degree of probability variation expectation. D corresponds to confirmation of a high-probability game. The sub CPU 201 records the determined parameters in a predetermined storage area of the work RAM (not shown in FIG. 9).

Next, the sub CPU 201 draws a lottery for each character's order of appearance in the secrecy A stage 2002, that is, the order of participation in the battle (step S302). The order of appearance of the character ROMs selected by lottery is also recorded in the work RAM 203 . It should be noted that when the information on the order of appearance is lost from the work RAM due to a power failure, the sub CPU 201 sets a one-on-one battle effect between specific characters. At this time, the "specific character" to be confronted one-on-one may be set to be a character to finally face off one-on-one when the normal performance is executed without power interruption. For example, the mode of the battle production selected by lottery is the battle production between the friendly group of "the main character's character + α" and the enemy group of "the main character's rival character + β". When the information is lost due to a power failure, the sub CPU 201 does not perform the production of the confrontation between the main character and the main character's rival character without performing the production of the main character's confrontation with the main character's rival character. It can be controlled so that a confrontation with a character is set.

Next, the sub CPU 201 draws a lottery for a combination of numbers of friendly characters and enemy characters (2×2, 6×5, etc.) (step S304). Further, the sub CPU 201 selects the above-described production map 2102 by lottery based on the attributes of the team on the side and the team on the enemy side. The attribute of the team may be determined by the variable probability parameter and the combination, or may be determined by the variable probability parameter, the combination and the number of times of time saving. The sub CPU 201 refers to the conversion table based on the attribute, determines the pattern value, and determines the effect map 2102 based on the pattern value.

FIG. 139 shows an example of the correspondence relationship between the battle attribute 2100 and the effect map 2102. As shown in FIG. The sub CPU 201 determines a pattern value (in the example of FIG. 139, the pattern value is 4) based on the battle attribute 2100, and assigns an effect map 2102 to the battle attribute 2100 using the pattern value as a key. Multiple pattern values may be assigned to the battle attribute 2100 . The sub CPU 201 determines the pattern value corresponding to the battle attribute 2100 by referring to the table. In determining the pattern value, the sub CPU 201 increases the pattern value corresponding to the battle attribute 2100 by including the number of time reductions in addition to the expectation parameter and combination, thereby creating a production map that can be assigned to the battle attribute 2100. 2102 can be colorful.

As shown in FIG. 139, the effect map 2102 consists of a set of a plurality of small maps 2110, the small map 2110, in the secrecy A stage 2002, a predetermined number (for example, 6) of time saving times as one unit, the range of Based on the number of friend or foe characters to be subtracted within the variable display (for example, the number of characters in the range of 1 to 3 for each friend or foe), and information on which variable display number of the variable display number is to be subtracted. Configured. "Friend-1" indicates that the friend character is subtracted by "1". "Friend-0" indicates that the friend character is not subtracted. "Enemy -1" indicates that the enemy character is subtracted by "1". "Enemy side -0" indicates that the enemy side character is not subtracted. The number of small maps 2110 combined with the effect map 2102 varies depending on the prescribed number of times (time saving number of times).

FIG. 140 is a diagram showing an example of an effect map 2102 used for scenario lottery. In this embodiment, the effect map 2102 consists of a plurality of parts, for example, a combination of a first half map and a second half map. A first half map and a second half map are selected (steps S306 and S308), and the entire effect map 2102 is formed by combining them. As a result, the sub CPU 201 can form a scenario in which the number of characters corresponding to the combination of players is evenly subtracted throughout the time-saving gaming state. In this specification, an effect in which the number of characters is subtracted is referred to as a "subtraction effect".

When the sub CPU 201 completes (or selects) the overall production map, among the small maps 2110 included in the overall production map, at least one character is subtracted for the small map 2110, which character ( Based on the lottery table, it is determined whether the subtraction process (subtraction effect) of the friend character or the enemy character is to be performed (step S310). The sub CPU 201 combines the number of times the subtraction process is performed and the character information with the effect map 2102, and records the effect map 2102 in the work RAM. The sub CPU 201 may switch the lottery table for the small map 2110 according to the content of the overall effect map. The map is recorded in work RAM.

A mode in which the variable probability parameter, the number of times of time saving, and the combination of the number of people are combined is as shown in FIG. 140, for example. The range of this aspect is defined as a table for each category of low, medium, high, and fixed expectations for the high probability game in the secrecy A stage. FIG. 140 shows an example in which the first half map and the second half map are applied to this aspect.

If there is no pattern in the table that combines the variable probability parameter (step S300) and the combination of the number of people (step S302), the sub CPU 201 determines that, for example, the variable probability parameter is "D" and the combination of the number of people is in the fixed category. In cases other than the specified mode (2×2, etc.), any one of A to C, which is a variable probability parameter other than D, may be determined by re-lottery. In addition, the sub CPU 201 may give priority to the variable probability parameter and change the combination of the number of players by a re-lottery.

The sub CPU 201 stores these characters in the production map 2102 so that either the specific character A that appears last on the ally team or the specific character B that appears last on the enemy team decreases at the end of the number of time reductions. can be configured not to include the subtraction processing information for For example, if the combination of numbers is 6×4 (6 allies, 4 enemies), it can be reduced to 5 allies and 3 enemies. The sub CPU 201 causes characters to appear at the start of the secrecy A stage 2002 according to the combination of the number of people, but it is also possible to prevent the combination of the number of people from matching the number of displayed characters. For example, if the enemy team has a number of characters including a specific character, the specific character will appear in the final variable display without participating in the battle. In addition, the effect map 2102 can be configured not to include the specific character as a target of subtraction processing.

When the sub CPU 201 ends the process of selecting the small map 2110 (step S310), the sub CPU 201 determines the BGM in the game of the secrecy A stage 2002 (step S312). Depending on which BGM is selected, the degree of expectation for the high-probability game state in the secrecy A stage 2002 is suggested. With the above, the scenario pre-setting process by the sub CPU 201 ends.

Next, processing for determining the effect in the secrecy A stage 2002 will be described. In the secret A stage 2002, subtraction of the friend or foe character determined before the start of the secret A stage 2002 (specifically, during execution of the big win game) is performed in accordance with the aspect of the performance determined for each time saving game. By adjusting and reinforcing the processing scenario, the scenario can be diversified according to the game result in the secrecy A stage 2002 . In the originally determined scenario, the character subtraction process is executed evenly over the entire number of time reductions, and the sub CPU 201 performs the process of determining the presentation mode in the concealment A stage 2002 evenly. By adjusting the scenario within a range that does not impair the story of the character subtraction processing that is executed without being executed, the player can enjoy the versatility of scenario development while maintaining the general framework of the story determined before the start of the secrecy A stage 2002. can be made aware of

Furthermore, in the secrecy A stage 2002, the sub CPU 201 displays the pending information (starting memory information), and while not displaying the number of times of working hours information on the liquid crystal display device, straddles the digestion of a plurality of pending starting memories. By executing the scenario in the second stage, it is possible to make the player pay attention to how a series of scenarios are continuously developed during the period of the secrecy A stage 2002 without the player being conscious of the pending information and the number of times of time saving. can.

In this specification, the suspended starting memory may be simply referred to as "suspended". In addition, the process of displaying a variable identification pattern for the suspended starting memory is referred to as suspension digestion. Furthermore, up to four starting memories based on winnings to the first starting port 5442 and starting memories based on winnings to the second starting port 440 can be reserved. Called Hold, 2nd Hold, 3rd Hold and 4th Hold, hold digestion is performed in this order.

In the secrecy A stage 2002, in order to diversify the scenario production according to the mode of production that is determined for each time reduction, provisional fluctuations ( A variable display corresponding to one starting memory) is converted into one or a plurality of blocks, and an effect can be set for each block. For the sake of convenience, this change is hereinafter referred to as "provisional change" in the sense that it is different from the variable display of suspension.

Figure 141 is an example showing the provisional variation setting for each hold of the first hold to the fourth hold, together with the time sequence, and assuming that four holds are recorded, the sub CPU 201 is a variable display at the time of hold digestion Set the number of temporary changes to match the time. For example, if the variable display time is 3.5 seconds, the number of temporary fluctuations: 1, if the variable display time is 7.5 seconds, the number of temporary fluctuations: 2, and if the variable display time is 11.5 seconds, the number of temporary fluctuations : Set 3. In this embodiment, the selection ratio of the variable display time of 3.5 seconds, the variable display time of 7.5 seconds, and the variable display time of 11.5 seconds is 1:1:1, but this selection ratio may be changed as appropriate. You can

According to FIG. 141, when the variable display time of the first suspension is 3.5 seconds, the temporary fluctuation is set to 4.0 seconds, which is the sum of 3.5 seconds and the interval period (0.5 seconds), When the second pending variable display time is 7.5 seconds, the first provisional change is 4.0 seconds, the second provisional change is 3.5 seconds, and the interval period (0.5 seconds) is added If it is set to 4.0 seconds and the third pending variable display time is 11.5 seconds, then the first and second provisional changes are each 4.0 seconds and the third provisional change is 3.5 seconds. and the interval period (0.5 seconds) are set to 4.0 seconds, and the variable display time of the fourth suspension is 3.5 seconds. 5 seconds) is set to 4.0 seconds. The reason why the interval period is included in the provisional fluctuation is that this period is used for processing of effects. FIG. 141 shows that the provisional variation number is determined according to the variable display time (variation pattern), but this is an example, and the sub CPU 201 selects an arbitrary provisional variation number for the variation pattern. You can also Furthermore, the sub CPU 201 can set the variation time of one provisional variation to a predetermined value, and can set the variation time of the provisional variation not to include the interval period. From the viewpoint of making the player aware that it is not the effect of , it is preferable to include the interval time in the variation time of the provisional variation.

Next, the processing for determining the effect in the secrecy A stage 2002 will be specifically described with reference to the flow chart of FIG. FIG. 142 is an example of a flow chart showing an effect determination process (secret A stage 2002) that is repeatedly executed at predetermined time intervals as a subroutine of the effect mode determination process (step S205). The sub CPU 201 refers to the effect stage flag and checks whether or not it is the secrecy A stage 2002 (step S320). Here, if it is not the secrecy A stage 2002, the effect determination process is terminated, and if it is the secrecy A stage 2002, it is determined whether or not the game ball has entered the second start hole 440 (step S322). When the sub CPU 201 determines in step S322 that there is no game ball entering the second starting hole 440, it ends the effect determination process. A provisional variation number is determined, selected, or set based on the variation pattern as a result of analysis of the command of the main control board (step S324). Although the provisional variation number is uniquely determined by the variation pattern (for example, see FIG. 143), it is not limited to this, and may be determined as an arbitrary provisional variation number as described above. Note that FIG. 143 is an example of a variation pattern table. In this example, this variation pattern table is stored in the program ROM 202 mounted on the sub-control circuit 200, and the sub-CPU 201 refers to the variation pattern table according to the variable display time command transmitted from the main CPU 101. The variation pattern is determined, but not limited to this, for example, the variation pattern table is stored in the main ROM mounted on the main control circuit 100, the main CPU determines the variation pattern table, and the sub control circuit 200 It is also possible to send a command to .

After selecting the provisional variable number, the sub CPU 201 determines whether or not there is a scenario effect being executed (step S326). The sub CPU 201 performs scenario lottery within the range of the number of reservations. Scenario lottery refers to determining by lottery which position within the range of the number of reservations the character subtraction process is to be performed at. For example, if it is assumed that there are four reserved starting memories, the sub CPU 201 draws a lottery to determine which one of the first to fourth reservations should be used for the character subtraction process. However, in the scenario lottery, in addition to the lottery to determine where the character subtraction process is to be performed within the range of the number of reservations, the character subtraction process is not performed, but the battle effect between the enemy character and the ally character (a battle effect that results in a draw). It may include a lottery as to which position to perform.

The sub CPU 201 refers to the performance map 2102 at the time of the lottery to check whether or not the character subtraction is recorded in the small map 2110 covering the number of time reductions of the first to fourth reservations, and the character subtraction is performed. If it is determined that it is recorded, character subtraction processing is performed within the range of the number of reservations, and if it is determined that character subtraction is not recorded, character subtraction processing is not performed. The sub CPU 201 determines that there is a scenario effect being executed in step S326 until the variable display of the first to fourth reservations targeted for the scenario lottery ends. When the variable display of the first to fourth suspensions targeted for the scenario presentation is completed, the sub CPU 201 determines in step S326 that there is no scenario presentation being executed, and thereafter, the first to fourth suspensions are displayed. It is determined whether or not the start memory is reserved in any of them (step S328).

When the sub CPU 201 determines in step S328 that any one of the first to fourth reservations is reserved for the starting memory, it performs a scenario lottery for the reserved starting memory. As one means for adjusting the character subtraction processing position in accordance with the performance pattern determined in step 1, it is determined whether or not there is a start memory in which the reach variation performance is recorded in the pending start memory. (step S330). When the sub CPU 201 determines in step S330 that there is a starting memory in which the reach variation effect is recorded, it determines up to the starting memory in which the reach variation effect is recorded as a scenario lottery target (step S332). For example, even if the starting memory is reserved in all of the first reservation to the fourth reservation, when the starting memory in which the reach fluctuation effect is recorded is reserved in the third reservation, the sub CPU 201 is the first The starting memories of the reserve to the third reserve are determined to be objects of the scenario lottery (step S332), and the starting memories of the fourth reserve are not subjected to the scenario lottery. Furthermore, for example, when the starting memory in which the reach variation effect is recorded is held in a plurality such as the second hold and the fourth hold, the hold is canceled first (the variable display is performed first). The starting memories up to the hold (starting memories of the first and second reservations) are determined to be subject to the scenario lottery (step S332), and the starting memories reserved to the third and fourth reservations are not subject to the scenario lottery. On the other hand, when it is determined in step S330 that there is no starting memory in which the reach variation effect is recorded, the sub CPU 201 determines all of the reserved starting memories as scenario lottery targets (step S334). If it is determined in step S330 that there is no start memory in which the reach variation effect is recorded in the pending start memories, control is performed such that the character subtraction effect and the reach change effect do not overlap. Since it is unnecessary, the control load is smaller than when it is determined in step S330 that there is a starting memory in which the reach variation effect is recorded in the reserved starting memory. ,

The sub CPU 201 performs the processing from step S328 onwards as a scenario lottery, when the scenario effect being executed is completed, the starting memory reserved in the first to fourth reservations (for entering the second starting port 440) The starting memory that has been withheld based on this) is targeted. In other words, when there is a scenario effect being executed, the next scenario lottery is not performed, but when the scenario effect being executed ends, one or more of the first to fourth reserves are started at that time. Since the scenario lottery is conducted with memory as the target, in the secrecy A stage 2002, as long as the starting memory is reserved in any one of the first to fourth reservations, the scenario presentation will be repeatedly executed without interruption. . As a result, it is possible to make the player unconscious of the performance in the starting memory unit and to make the player interested in the scenario performance, thereby making it possible to maintain the player's sense of expectation for a relatively long period of time. Become.

In this example, the sub CPU 201 does not perform the next scenario lottery when there is a scenario effect being executed. If at least one starting memory is reserved in the reserve to the fourth reserve, scenario lottery may be conducted.

The reason why the sub CPU 201 targets the start memory up to the hold including the reach fluctuation effect for the scenario lottery and does not set the start memory for the hold after the reach change effect as the object of the lottery is that after the reach change effect is lost, the character This is because even if the subtraction process is performed, the player's interest in the result of the battle between the characters will decrease. In this way, the sub CPU 201 can adjust the subtraction processing position of the character based on the presentation of the secrecy A stage 2002 .

It should be noted that the sub CPU 201 determines whether or not the game ball has entered the second starting port 440 in step S322, and if it determines that the game ball has entered the second starting port 440, the processing from step S324 onwards is performed. Although it is running, when it is determined that there is a game ball entered into the first start port 5442 instead of the second start port 440, one held based on the enter ball into the first start port 5442 Scenario lottery is conducted with only one starting memory. In this case, a plurality of provisional fluctuations may or may not be set for one start memory that is held based on the ball entering the first start port 5442 . Then, if it is determined in the scenario presetting process that the subtraction effect is performed in the variable display of the start memory withheld based on the entry to the first start port 5442, to the first start port 5442 A subtraction effect may be performed in the variable display of the start memory withheld based on the entry of the ball. However, the variable display of one starting memory (or provisional change set for the one starting memory) held based on the entry into the first starting port 5442, and the following of the one starting memory The subtraction performance is not performed across the provisional fluctuation set for the start memory withheld based on the entry into the second start port 440 that is digested after the second start. Further, when the starting memory is suspended based on the entry of the ball into the first starting port 5442, the sub CPU 201 performs the scenario lottery only when the result of the big win determination process is a big win, and when it is not a big win. For example, control may be performed so that the identification pattern is only variably displayed at the end of the screen of the first special pattern display section 73 or the liquid crystal display device 16 without selecting the effect.

The sub CPU 201 processes the suspension of the scenario lottery range as an effect adjustment target, such as determining the character subtraction processing position for each suspension range that is the target of the scenario lottery. Therefore, the sub CPU 201 checks the degree of expectation of the effect in the final suspension of the scenario lottery range, for example, the intensity of the effect (step S336), and reflects the result in the effect of the suspension belonging to the scenario being executed. good. For example, when the sub CPU 201 discriminates the heat of the performance for the final suspension of the scenario lottery range, it may apply a read-ahead performance or continuous advance notice performance corresponding to the heat of the performance to the performance of the suspension of the scenario lottery target.

After the above processing, the sub CPU 201 performs processing for allocating effects such as character subtraction processing effects to provisional fluctuations for the pending effects of scenario lottery targets. Therefore, the sub CPU 201 refers to the effect map 2102 in order to determine the temporary variation number necessary for character subtraction processing, and sets the scenario to the start memory of the lottery target (for example, the first to fourth reservations are reserved). start memory), it is determined whether or not there is a start memory for which subtraction processing is to be performed (step S338).

When the sub CPU 201 determines in step S338 that there is a starting memory for execution of the subtraction process within the scope of the scenario lottery, the sub CPU 201 counts the characters to be subjected to the subtraction process (step S340). Next, when the number of characters to be subtracted for both sides and enemies is 2 or more (step S342: Y), the sub CPU 201 records the order of subtraction processing for characters of 2 or more (step S344). Note that the order of the characters who are friends or foes may be determined in the effect map 2102, or may be determined by lottery.

Next, the sub CPU 201 determines whether or not there is an overlap between the reach variation effect and the subtraction process effect in the scenario lottery target hold as a result of the determination of the scenario lottery target (steps S332 and S334). It is determined by referring to the effect map 2102 (step S346). Based on this result, the sub CPU 201 can determine the number of provisional fluctuations that can be used for reach precursor fluctuations, or perform effect adjustment processing such as adjusting the position of provisional fluctuations where subtraction processing is performed.

FIGS. 145 and 146 are diagrams showing an example of starting memory held in the first to fourth reserves. FIG. 145 shows that the starting memory is reserved in all of the first to fourth reservations, and neither the subtraction process nor the reach variation effect is executed in the first and fourth reservations, and the enemy character is subtracted in the second reservation. It indicates that the process (the process of subtracting 1 from the number of enemy characters) is performed, and that the reach variation effect is performed in the third hold. FIG. 146 shows that the starting memory is reserved in all of the first to fourth reservations, and neither the subtraction process nor the ready-to-win effect is executed in the first, second, and fourth reservations. This indicates that the character subtraction process (the process of subtracting 1 from the number of enemy characters) and the reach variation effect are performed in duplicate. When the sub CPU 201 determines in step S346 that there is overlap between the reach variation effect and the subtraction process effect, it sets an overlap flag in the work RAM area (step S348).

When the sub CPU 201 confirms that the duplication flag is set, and if the character to be subtracted is an enemy character, the sub CPU 201 allows overlapping execution of the reach variation effect and the subtraction process. Executed in a variable performance. On the other hand, although the sub CPU 201 has confirmed that the overlap flag is set, if the character to be subtracted is an ally character, performing an effect in which the ally character is defeated in the reach variation effect is not expected for the reach change effect. In order to unnecessarily reduce the degree of reach variation, overlapping execution of the reach variation performance and the subtraction processing is not permitted, and the performance of the subtraction processing is not performed in the reach variation performance. At this time, it does not prevent the subtraction processing effect of the friendly character from being executed in the temporary change just before the reach change effect, but the defeated friendly character will be revived and reach the compensation effect such as adding an attack. It is sufficient to perform it in a variable performance. Alternatively, the sub CPU 201 may allocate the subtraction processing of the teammate character to a provisional variation that is a predetermined number away from the reach variation effect within the range of the pending scenario lottery target. In addition, when the character to be subtracted is an ally character, instead of disallowing overlapping execution of the reach fluctuation effect and the subtraction process, overlapping execution of the reach fluctuation effect and the subtraction process is allowed, but the reach If the variation effect and the subtraction process overlap, the subtraction process may be reallocated to another provisional variation.

In order to allocate the ready-to-win portent effect to the temporary fluctuation, the sub CPU 201 includes a hold (for example, the third hold in FIG. For example, it can be used as a ready-to-win portent effect that can be assigned to temporary fluctuations of FIG. 146 (first hold and second hold) (step S350). This is because the performance of the subtraction processing of the enemy character is executed with the reach variation performance. That is, the sub CPU 201 can use [(total number of pending temporary fluctuations for scenario lottery) - (number of subtraction processes - 1)] as a temporary fluctuation number that can be applied to the ready-to-win portent effect. The sub CPU 201 executes step S352, which will be described later, without executing step S350 when the character to be subtracted is a teammate character.

When the sub CPU 201 determines in step S346 that the reach variation effect and the subtraction process effect do not overlap, the sub CPU 201 proceeds to step S352 without setting the overlap flag. The sub-CPU 201 subtracts the provisional variation number to which the effect of the subtraction process of the character (not limited to friend or foe) is assigned from the total provisional variation number determined for the suspension subject to the scenario lottery. (Residual provisional fluctuation) can be used for reach sign production. Here, the sub CPU 201 performs the ready-to-win portent effect only when it is determined that the remaining provisional variation number is 0 or more, and determines not to perform the ready-to-win portent effect when the remaining provisional variation number is 0. The control processing can be made smooth, and the effect of expecting the reach fluctuation effect can be expected by this reach sign effect. When the number of remaining provisional fluctuations is 1, it may be determined not to perform the predictive reach, or it may be determined whether or not the predictive reach may be executed with one time as the upper limit.

The starting memory reserved within the scope of the scenario lottery target does not include the starting memory in which the reach variation effect is recorded, and the starting memory next to the starting memory to be consumed last among the scenario lottery targets is In the case of the ready-to-win variation effect, although the next starting memory is not subject to the scenario lottery, the sub CPU 201 performs the ready-to-reach portent effect to the provisional variation set for the starting memory to be consumed last among the scenario lottery targets. , and the reach variation effect may be performed in the variable display of the starting memory stored in the next hold.

In addition, the sub CPU 201 determines the number of executions of the ready-to-win portent effect, and subtracts the determined number of executions of the ready-to-win portent effect from the total provisional variation number determined for the hold to be the scenario lottery. The variation may be used for effecting character subtraction processing.

Next, referring to FIG. 147, the sub CPU 201 selects a ready-to-win sign effect depending on whether or not the duplication flag is set. Specifically, in step S354, the sub CPU 201 checks whether or not the duplicate flag is set, and if it determines that the duplicate flag is set, determines the ready-to-win portent effect as the specific effect (step S356), and sets the enemy character. To make a player have a feeling of expectation that is defeated in a reach fluctuation performance. Here, the specific performance is a performance that can give the player a high sense of expectation. On the other hand, if it is determined in step S354 that the duplication flag is not set, the ready-to-win portent effect is determined to be an effect that gives the player a smaller sense of expectation than the specific effect (step S358). The sub CPU 201 may select the ready-to-win portent effect from a plurality of effects set in the table. When the ready-to-win portent effect is performed a plurality of times within the scope of the scenario effect target, the sub CPU 201 changes the table so that the same effect does not continue. However, the specific effect may be continued.

Next, the sub CPU 201 selects a provisional variation number to be used for a reach sign from the provisional variation numbers counted in step S350 or step S352 (step S360). For example, the sub CPU 201 may select the provisional variation number by changing the table because the required provisional variation number differs depending on the content of the ready-to-win portent effect. The sub CPU 201 selects the provisional fluctuations to be used for the ready-to-win portent effect from the provisional fluctuations with the slowest execution order among the pending temporary fluctuations for the scenario lottery. Thereby, the ready-to-win portent effect can be arranged at a position close to the ready-to-reach variable effect. When "0 variation" is selected, the sub CPU 201 does not perform the ready-to-win portent effect without allocating the ready-to-win portent effect to the provisional variation. This concept of "0 change" includes both 0 tentative change and when no starting memory is reserved in any of the first through fourth reservations. That is, when the 0 provisional variation is selected, and when the starting memory is not suspended in any of the first to fourth suspensions, the sub CPU 201 assigns the ready-to-win sign effect to the provisional variation. Therefore, the reach sign production will not be performed. In addition, when there is no ready-to-reach change effect in the start memory for the scenario lottery, the ready-to-win portent effect is a fake ready-to-reach portent effect. When the starting memory is not suspended in any of the first suspension to the fourth suspension, the fake ready-to-win sign effect is not performed.

By the way, as described above, if the starting memory in which the reach variation effect is recorded is not reserved in any of the first to fourth reservations, the sub CPU 201 stores all of the reserved starting memories in the scenario lottery. I'm trying to decide on the target. However, since the secrecy A stage 2002 is in the time-saving game state, when the scenario lottery target is determined, the starting memory is often reserved for all of the first to fourth reservations. Therefore, when the player understands that the scenario effect this time is for the four starting memories, at that time, there is a possibility that the reach variation effect is not included in the scope of the scenario effect this time. There is a risk that the player will perceive that the price is high, making it difficult to maintain the expectation. Therefore, when determining the target of the scenario lottery, if there is no starting memory in which the reach fluctuation effect is recorded in any of the first to fourth reservations, the number of starting memories to be the target of the scenario lottery will be different each time. For example, by randomly determining by lottery, it becomes difficult to perceive that the reach variation effect is not included in the target range of the scenario effect this time. In particular, there is a possibility that it will be extremely unpleasant if the false reach prediction effect is performed even though the player has sensed that there is a high possibility that the reach fluctuation effect is not included in the target range of the scenario effect this time. . However, by making it difficult to detect that the reach fluctuation effect is not included in the target range of the scenario production this time, the gossip premonitory production of reach will keep the player's expectations and perform an effective production. be able to.

Next, the sub CPU 201 determines whether or not the provisional variation number used for the ready-to-win portent effect is greater than 0 (step S362). Blocks the provisional variation numbers used for , and selects a block pattern for allocating a ready-to-win portent effect (step S364). Next, the sub CPU 201 assigns the ready-to-win portent effect to blocks to which the ready-to-win portent effect can be assigned among the selected block patterns (step S366). For example, if the number of provisional fluctuations that can be used for the ready-to-win portent is 3, and 2 provisional fluctuations are required for the ready-to-reach portent effect, the sub CPU 201 blocks the three provisional changes, and (1) 1 block + 1 block +1 block pattern and (2) 1 block + 2 block pattern. The sub CPU 201 can select the pattern (2) and assign the ready-to-win portent effect to two blocks. FIG. 148 shows an aspect of blocking three provisional fluctuations in this way.

Next, referring to FIG. 149, when the sub CPU 201 determines in step S368 that the effect of the subtraction process is to be performed, the sub CPU 201 determines in which temporary change block the effect of the subtraction process is to be performed, for example, by random lottery (step S370). Next, the sub CPU 201 determines, by lottery or the like, the provisional variation to which the effect of the subtraction process is assigned, among the provisional variations of the pending scenario lottery target, to which the ready-to-win portent effect is not assigned (step S372). If there is an order of subtraction processing for a plurality of characters (step S342), provisional variation of the subtraction processing effect is determined so as to follow this order. It is as follows when it demonstrates using an example.

For example, by determining the scenario lottery target (steps S332 and S334), a starting memory in which the subtraction process for the teammate character is recorded and a starting memory in which the subtraction process for the enemy character is recorded within the range of the scenario lottery target. are reserved in this order. Then, in step S370, it is assumed that the sub CPU 201 determines the enemy character's subtraction process to be a relatively long medium attack effect, and the ally character's subtraction process to be a relatively short attack effect. At this time, the sub CPU 201 assigns the medium attack effect to two provisional variations, assigns the weak attack effect to one provisional variation, and assigns these provisional variations so that the former provisional variation is digested before the latter provisional variation. The position of variation can be determined. In this way, the sub CPU 201 assigns a subtraction effect to one or a plurality of provisional fluctuations, for example, according to the effect content of the subtraction process.

Here, an example of allocating the rendering of one subtraction process to the temporary fluctuation will be described with reference to FIG. 150 . FIG. 150 is an example of a temporary change sequence in a state where the first to third reservations are subject to the scenario lottery. Since the variation time is 3.5 seconds for the starting memory stored in the first reservation, the provisional variation number is set to 1 (#1). Since the variable display time for the starting memory stored in the second reservation is 11.5 seconds, the provisional variable numbers are set to three (#2 to #4). Regarding the starting memory stored in the third hold, the variable display time is the time of "11.5 seconds + reach variation effect", so the number of provisional variations set is three (#5 to #7). As for the starting memories stored in the third reserve, the reach variation effect is performed when the variable display is performed, so the scenario lottery targets are the starting memories reserved in the first to third reserves. . In addition, in the example of FIG. 149, the subtraction processing number in the effect map 2102 determined before the start of the secrecy A stage 2002 (specifically, during execution of the jackpot game) is the starting memory in which the number is reserved in the first reserve. 1 time (weak attack production), 0 in the starting memory held in the 2nd hold, 2 times in the starting memory held in the 3rd hold (1 time in the order of medium attack production, weak attack production, total 2 times) are shown.

In the example shown in FIG. 150, since the starting memories reserved for the first to third reservations are the target of the scenario lottery, the sub CPU 201 selects these in the order of light attack effect, medium attack effect, and light attack effect. To re-determine the timing to execute the production. In the example shown in FIG. 150, the light attack effect recorded in the starting memory reserved in the first reserve is assigned to the provisional variation #2, and the medium attack effect recorded in the starting memory reserved in the second reserve is assigned. are assigned to the blocked #4 provisional variation and #5 provisional variation, and the light attack performance recorded in the starting memory reserved in the third suspension is assigned to the #6 provisional variation. In this way, regardless of the reserved starting memory unit, the character's subtraction effect is the provisional change set for one starting memory and the starting memory digested next to the one starting memory. It may straddle the set provisional fluctuation. As a result, it is possible to determine the mode of presentation regardless of the result of one game (lottery result). In addition, since it is possible to execute a display performance that does not make the player aware of the variable display in units of start memory, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to grasp the number of times the time is shortened. Moreover, in the secrecy A stage 2002, as an indication of the degree of expectation of the high-probability gaming state, an effect mode to be performed during execution of provisional fluctuations divided into predetermined units (blocked) is determined. Therefore, the player's consciousness can be directed toward the subtraction effect rather than the remaining number of times of time saving, and it is possible to further suppress the decrease in interest.

In the example shown in FIG. 150, all the three subtraction effects recorded in the starting memory reserved in the first to third reservations are performed in one of the temporary fluctuations (#1 to #7). However, the sub CPU 201 is not limited to this, and the sub CPU 201 may control the last subtraction effect to be executed in the reach fluctuation.

Next, the sub CPU 201 determines an effect for the provisional variation to which no effect is assigned (step S374). FIG. 151 is an example of a temporary variation sequence in a state where the first to fourth reservations (see FIG. 141, for example) are subject to the scenario lottery. Production of subtraction processing is assigned to provisional fluctuations #2 and #4, a ready-to-win sign production is assigned to provisional fluctuation #7, and provisional fluctuations #1, #3, #5, and #6 to which production is not assigned are, for example, , a one-shot effect that gives a weaker impression to the player than the subtraction processing effect and the ready-to-win portent effect can be arranged. The contents of the effects arranged in the temporary fluctuations #1, #3, #5, and #6 and the temporary fluctuations to which the effects are assigned may be determined by lottery. The one-shot effect is arranged on the provisional fluctuation side with a smaller number than the ready-to-win portent effect. By allocating effects to all temporary fluctuations in the sequence, the execution position of the subtraction process is determined. Depending on the content of the performance, the provisional variable number to be assigned changes. The sub CPU 201 generates effect designation information including sequence information in which effects are assigned to all temporary fluctuations.

Next, the sub CPU 201 determines whether or not there is a reach variation effect in the hold of the scenario lottery object (step S376), and determines the reach change effect when there is a reach change effect in the hold of the scenario lottery object (step S378). Then, the effect determination process is terminated. The sub CPU 201 can select the ready-to-win effect by referring to the result of the subtraction process, for example. You can select a reach production in which characters who survive the battle appear.

Furthermore, the sub CPU 201 refers to the counter for the starting memory in which the reach variation effect is recorded, calculates the combination of the remaining number of ally characters and the ally character, Based on the remaining number of time reduction), it is possible to set whether or not to execute the reach performance and the mode of the reach variation performance. For example, if the remaining number of people is less than 2×2 and the suspension is other than the final rotation of the specified short-time rotation number, even if the big hit determination result is a big hit, a special form of reach (SP reach) is executed. Instead, for example, in a battle production, the boss of the enemy group may be defeated to execute the jackpot game state. On the other hand, the sub CPU 201 may execute a dedicated SP ready-to-win effect when the combination of the remaining number of people is 1×1 and the hold is the final variable display of the prescribed number of short working hours.

In addition, when the target range of the scenario production includes the starting memory where the last variable display is performed in the secret A stage 2002 (for example, when the number of times of time saving is 48 times, the 48th time variable display in the time saving game state is performed), if the reach variation effect or the jackpot effect is not performed in the final variable display of the time-saving game state, the character is set so that the victory or defeat of the battle effect is settled in the final variable display. A subtraction performance may be performed. In this case, the concealment A stage 2002 does not have the impression that the secret A stage 2002 has ended because the time-saving gaming state has reached the specified number of times (whether or not the high-probability gaming state has been disclosed). The impression can be given to the player that stage 2002 has ended.

The sub CPU 201 performs the process of determining the holding range of the target of the scenario lottery (Fig. 142: S332, S334). The time-saving frequency|count by which the subtraction process in 2102 is performed can be moved in the range of +/-3 according to the variation pattern of the secrecy A stage 2002. FIG. For example, when it is determined to perform the subtraction process when the time saving rotation is 8 in the calculation map, the subtraction process can move within the range of 5 to 11 time saving times. Specifically, when the starting memory with the number of times of saving time of 8 is reserved in the fourth reservation, it can be moved within the range of the number of times of saving time from 5 to 8, and the starting memory with the number of times of saving time of 8 is reserved in the first reservation. Time can move within the range of 8 to 11 times of time reduction. Therefore, the sub CPU 201 fluidly changes the execution timing of the subtraction process in accordance with the development of the game in the secrecy A stage 2002, thereby increasing the variation of the effect and performing the subtraction process of the character accompanying the battle between the teams of characters. can be executed with certainty.

In the above-described embodiment, when determining in step S326 that there is a scenario effect being executed, the sub CPU 201 does not draw a new scenario effect until the scenario effect created by lottery ends. Therefore, in order to diversify the scenario effect being executed, for example, the sub CPU 201 pre-reads the suspension within the range of the scenario effect being executed, and applies this to the effect to be executed during the variable display of the pending digestion. may apply. For example, if the reach variation effect is recorded in the start memory of the scenario effect object being executed, the sub CPU 201 performs a prefetch lottery for the start memory up to the reach change effect. If there is no reach variation effect, a suggestion effect suggesting the existence of a specific variation pattern (reach change effect) is applied to the effect being executed. It should be noted that the sub CPU 201 does not perform the suggestion effect when there is no suspension.

Further, the sub CPU 201 does not pre-read the start memory reserved at the time of start winning and applies it to the read-ahead effect at the time of winning, but applies it to the effect executed during the fluctuation of pending consumption. good. For example, when the start memory is suspended in the fourth suspension due to the starting prize during the execution of the scenario effects for the first suspension to the third suspension, the sub CPU 201 prefetches the fourth suspension performance, The look-ahead effect of the 4th reserve can be superimposed on the effect of the 2nd reserve and/or the 3rd reserve.

In the secrecy A stage 2002, since the hold is not shown on the liquid crystal screen, the look-ahead effect is not performed at the time of the start-up winning, but the look-ahead effect of the hold set at the time of the start-up winning is performed from the time of the start-up winning to the display of the effect. Since it is not possible to spend a lot of time, an effect with few processing branches must be, for example, a simple processing such as changing the reserved color. On the other hand, the sub CPU 201 uses part or all of the data of the first to third reservations of the prefetching effects (for example, the data of the scenario effect) to perform the prefetching effect of the starting memory reserved in the fourth reserve. If possible, the control load can be reduced, and as a result, the form of the look-ahead performance of the starting memory reserved in the fourth reserve can be diversified compared to the monotonous one that is merely a matter of changing the reserved color. can be realized as

Note that FIG. 152 is an example of a flow chart showing a modification when it is determined in step S326 (see FIG. 142) that there is a scenario effect being executed. As shown in the flowchart of FIG. 152, when the sub CPU 201 determines that there is a scenario effect being executed in step S326, it determines whether or not the game ball has won the second start hole 440 (step S400), When it is determined that the ball has won the second starting port 440, it is determined whether or not there is a reach variation effect in the starting memory of the scenario object being executed (step S402). When the sub CPU 201 determines in step S402 that there is a start memory in which the reach variation effect is recorded in the target range of the scenario effect being executed, the sub CPU 201 prefetches the start memory in which the winning is later than the start memory in which the reach change effect is recorded. A look-ahead effect is selected as an object of (step S404). When the sub CPU 201 determines in step S402 that there is no starting memory in which the reach variation effect is recorded in the target range of the scenario effect being executed, it determines whether or not the look-ahead effect is already being executed (step S406). If the pre-reading effect is already being executed, the already-executed pre-reading effect is continued (step S408), and if the pre-reading effect is not being executed, it is held within the target range of the scenario effect being executed. A look-ahead effect is selected for all starting memories (step S410).

In this way, in the pachinko gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment, unlike conventional pachinko machines in which an effect is performed for each starting memory, the execution number of temporary fluctuations is one or more times for each held starting memory. is determined, even though the variable display is for one starting memory, it looks as if the variable display is being performed for a plurality of starting memories. Moreover, the tentative variations determined for each starting memory are blocked into predetermined units using a plurality of tentative variations regardless of the unit of starting memory. Then, an effect mode to be performed during the provisional variation, which is divided into blocks in this predetermined unit, is determined. Also, as described above, a part of the plurality of provisional changes determined for one starting memory and a plurality of determined for other starting memories whose variable display is performed next to the one starting memory It is also possible that an effect mode that straddles part of the provisional fluctuation is determined. As a result, it is possible to determine the mode of presentation regardless of the result of one game. In addition, it is possible to execute a display performance that does not make the player aware of the variable display in units of start memory, and it is possible to suppress the decrease in interest. In this way, since the performance mode is determined without being bound by the unit of the starting memory, it is also possible to determine the performance mode across a plurality of starting memories. In addition, it is possible to execute a display effect that does not make the player aware of the variable display in units of starting memory, and to provide a novel game that makes it difficult for the player to be aware of the game result for each starting memory.

In addition, in a gaming machine that is controlled to a specific game state (time-saving game state or high-probability game state) that is advantageous to the player separately from the big-hit game state, if the period during which the specific game state is controlled is lengthened, the big-hit determination is made. The probability of winning in the process must be lowered, and there is a risk that interest will decrease. On the other hand, if the period during which the specific game state is controlled is shortened, the player may feel disadvantageous, and in any case, there is a possibility that the interest in the game may decrease. In this respect, according to the pachinko gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment, one or more temporary fluctuations are set for each start memory, so while suppressing the number of times of time saving, it is difficult for the player to grasp such suppression In addition, since the probability of winning in the jackpot determination can be set to an appropriate level, it is possible to reduce the sense of disadvantage that may be given to the player, and consequently to suppress the decline in interest.

In addition, as in the pachinko gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment, by setting one or a plurality of temporary fluctuations for each starting memory, the period of the secrecy A stage 2002, that is, the end timing of the time-saving gaming state can be grasped by the player. can make it harder to be That is, the number of times of time saving is predetermined at the time of winning, for example, and in the conventional pachinko machine, even if it is kept secret whether the game state after the big win game state is a high probability game state or not, winning is not possible. It has been disclosed whether or not the game is in a high-probability game state when a certain number of times of time saving is consumed. However, by making it difficult for the player to grasp the period of the secrecy A stage 2002 as in the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment, it becomes difficult to grasp the number of time reductions that have been completed, and it is possible to maintain the sense of expectation. Become. In addition, during the secrecy A stage 2002, the character subtraction effect is performed as an index indicating the degree of expectation of the high-probability gaming state, so that the player's attention is increased more than the number of time-saving times when it is difficult to grasp the end timing. Rather, it is possible to direct the character toward the subtraction effect, and it is possible to suppress the decrease in interest.

In addition, in the pachinko gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment, by setting one or a plurality of temporary fluctuations for each starting memory, in addition to making it difficult to grasp the end timing of the concealment A stage 2002, the concealment A stage 2002 , a character subtraction performance that can be used as an indicator of whether or not the game is in a high-probability game state is performed. In the scenario of this subtraction effect, when the enemy group is wiped out in the scenario effect including the final time of the number of time reduction, the high probability game state is confirmed, and when the ally group is wiped out, the low probability game state is confirmed. The outline is decided before it becomes. Therefore, unlike the conventional pachinko game machine 1, it is not an effect that whether or not it is in a high probability game state when a certain number of times of time reduction is consumed, but a high probability when the victory or defeat of the battle effect is decided. It is possible to execute an effect such as disclosing whether or not the player is in the game state.

Next, the change effect of BGM will be described. In the pachinko gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment, when the jackpot game state ends and then enters the secrecy A stage 2002, the timing at which the secrecy A stage 2002 ends (for example, the specified number of times (for example, 48 times) is shortened. At the end of the game), the final result of the above-described battle effect reveals whether the state is a high-probability game state or a low-probability state. When the disclosed result is the high-probability game state, then the high-probability stage 2004 is entered (when the disclosed result is the low-probability game state, the normal stage 2000 is entered thereafter).

The sub CPU 201 performs the BGM change lottery during the jackpot game state in which the variable probability flag is turned on, and during the secrecy A stage 2002 when the secrecy game state is the high probability game state. In other words, when a big win with a probability variable flag turned on is won, the BGM change lottery is performed twice from the start of the big win game state to the transition to the high probability stage 2004 via the secret A stage 2002. Become. However, when winning the BGM change lottery performed in the jackpot game state, the sub CPU 201 does not perform the BGM change lottery in the secret A stage 2002 thereafter.

When the BGM change lottery is won, the sub CPU 201 outputs from the loudspeaker 24 through the voice control circuit 205 a high-precision confirmed BGM that confirms the high-probability gaming state. Therefore, when moving from concealment A stage 2002 to high accuracy stage 2004, high accuracy confirmation BGM is not always output, and even when moving from concealment A stage 2002 to high accuracy stage 2004, it was part High-precision and fixed BGM is not output.

Although the sub CPU 201 controls so that the high-precision confirmed BGM is output in response to winning the BGM change lottery, the effect image displayed on the liquid crystal display device 16 in response to winning the BGM change lottery. does not change Therefore, even if the high-precision and final BGM is output, the flow of effect images displayed on the liquid crystal display device 16 remains unchanged.

When winning the BGM change lottery, the sub CPU 201 also determines the timing of outputting the high-precision confirmed BGM (that is, the timing of changing from the normal BGM to the high-accuracy confirmed BGM). The timing for outputting the high certainty fixed BGM is, for example, during the jackpot game state or during the secrecy A stage 2002 .

As a result of winning the BGM change lottery performed in the jackpot game state, when outputting the high-precision confirmed BGM during the jackpot game state, the sub CPU 201 also moves to the secrecy A stage 2002 after the jackpot game state ends. , continue to control so that the high-precision and definitive BGM is output. However, as for the effect image displayed on the liquid crystal display device 16, the sub CPU 201 controls such that the effect image normally displayed in the secrecy A stage 2002 is displayed.

As a result of winning the BGM change lottery performed in the jackpot game state, when outputting high-precision confirmed BGM during the concealment A stage 2002, the sub CPU 201 determines at which timing of the concealment A stage 2002 output is performed. Predetermine in. The output timing of the high-precision fixed BGM is first determined by a fixed number of times of shortening of time, and a random lottery is further conducted within the range of the determined number of times of shortening of time. In detail, for example, when the number of times of time saving is 48 times, 1 to 6 times, 7 to 12 times, 13 to 18 times, 19 to 24 times, 25 to 30 times, 31 to 36 times, 37 to 42 times, 43 Pre-determine to one of each group of ~48 repetitions. Next, it is determined in advance at which timing of the determined groups the high-precision definite BGM is to be output. For example, when a group of 13 to 18 times is determined, the sub CPU 201 predetermines the timing of outputting the high-certainty-definite BGM within the range of 13 to 18 times. For example, when it is determined to be 16 times, the sub CPU 201 outputs high-precision confirmation BGM in the 16th time-saving variable display.

It should be noted that, when the starting memory is suspended in the secrecy A stage 2002, the sub CPU 201 sets a provisional change for each starting memory as described above. The sub CPU 201 also determines in which provisional variation the output of the high-precision finalized BGM is to be output in the same manner as the character subtraction effect. For example, when the timing of outputting the high-precision confirmed BGM is predetermined for the 16th time saving, the sub CPU 201 all or part of the provisional variation set for the starting memory held for the 16th time is used to output highly accurate and definitive BGM. At this time, the high-precision confirmed BGM is similar to the medium attack effect as the character's subtraction effect, the provisional change set for one starting memory, and the starting memory digested next to the one starting memory. It may be executed across the provisional fluctuation set for it. In this way, the high-precision and fixed BGM can be executed regardless of the variable display in the starting memory unit, so that the player can be made even less conscious of the variable display in the starting memory unit. .

[Look-ahead effect selection processing (high accuracy stage)]
Next, the look-ahead effect selection processing in the highly accurate stage 2004 will be described with reference to FIGS. 153 to 156. FIG. FIG. 153 is an example of a flow chart showing the look-ahead effect selection process (high accuracy stage 2004).

First, the sub CPU 201 determines whether or not the current rendering state is the high-probability stage 2004 (step S500 in FIG. 153). When it is determined that the current effect state is the high-accuracy stage 2004 (YES in step S500), the sub CPU 201 determines whether or not there has been a starting prize (winning to the first starting port 5442 or the second starting port 440). It is determined (step S502). When it is determined that there has been a starting prize (YES in step S502), the sub CPU 201 draws a lottery for which type of effect to perform for the reserved starting memory (step S504). The effects include, for example, a ready-to-win effect displayed on the liquid crystal display device 16, a lamp effect, a so-called movable effect of a character, a pseudo-lotus effect, a change in a pending image, and a look-ahead effect, which will be described later.

At step S506, it is determined whether or not the effect selected in the lottery at step S504 is the look-ahead effect (step S506 in FIG. 153). The look-ahead effect in the present embodiment is a mode in which a related effect is performed across the starting memory reserved during the high-accuracy stage 2004 and the starting memory (including a plurality of starting memories) won before the starting memory. is. Details of the look-ahead effect will be described later. When it is determined that the look-ahead effect is to be performed (YES in step S506), a look-ahead effect section determination process is performed (step S508). Here, "it is determined that the prefetch effect is to be performed" means that the lottery for the prefetch effect is won.

Here, the look-ahead effect section determination process will be described with reference to FIG. 154 . FIG. 154 is a diagram showing an example of a pattern when determining a section for performing a look-ahead effect. Here, the upper frame in FIG. 154(A) indicates the reservation frame, and the numbers 1 to 4 within the reservation frame indicate the first reservation to the fourth reservation. A lower frame positioned below the reservation frame indicates the production type frame, and describes what kind of production is scheduled to be performed in each reservation. In this embodiment, the fourth suspension is the winning during the high probability stage 2004 (YES in step S502 in FIG. 153), and the suspension determined to perform the look-ahead effect (YES in step S506 in FIG. 153) be. Then, in the first reservation, it is decided to perform black effect (Fig. 154(A)). The ink effect is, for example, an effect that makes the entire screen black in an instant as if ink is spilled on the screen of the liquid crystal display device 16, or a “opportunity” or “chance” that is superimposed on the spilled ink. ” is written with a brush.

Since the look-ahead effect section determination process is performed by lottery for all the stored starting memories, as long as the starting memories are reserved in the first to fourth reservations in the present embodiment, all these starting Can be done in memory. However, in the present embodiment, since it has already been determined that the black effect will be performed in the first suspension, in this case, the corresponding section is not included in the target section determined in the look-ahead effect section determination process. may be In addition, regarding the starting memory that is held next to the starting memory where it is determined that the black effect will be performed (corresponding to the second holding in FIG. 154(B)), the target section determined in the look-ahead effect section determination process not included in This is because the black effect that is performed in the variable display for the start memory stored as the first reserve is a effect that may make the player expect expectations by itself, so it is stored as the first reserve. It is preferable to clearly separate the black effect performed in the variable display about the starting memory and the look-ahead effect related to the starting memory of the 4th reservation (the look-ahead effect performed in the 3rd and 4th reservations). It is from. That is, the black effect is performed in the first suspension, and no particular effect is performed in the second suspension, so that the look-ahead effect related to the fourth suspension (the effect performed in the third suspension and the fourth suspension) is performed. It can have the effect of increasing the sense of anticipation and interest.

In addition, assuming that the pre-reading effect related to the fourth suspension is performed including the black effect performed in the first suspension, that is, the pre-reading effect is performed in the section from the first suspension to the fourth suspension, the player will have a plurality of While it is possible to have a sense of anticipation by performing the effects in succession, whether these series of effects are performed in succession of different categories, or related effects are performed continuously as a look-ahead effect. There is a demerit that it is difficult to determine whether it is being read, and there is a possibility that the result will be less interesting as a look-ahead effect.

Next, as shown in FIG. 154(C), when it is determined that the section for which the look-ahead effect is to be performed is the third hold and the fourth hold (step S508 in FIG. 153), the production scenario to be performed in these holds is set. (Step S510 in FIG. 154). For the production scenario, a large lottery is conducted for each reservation, and the production scenario is set only for the reservation that wins the lottery. In the present embodiment, for example, when the lottery of the broad division is won for the third reservation (see the third reservation in FIG. 154 (D)), the production scenario is set for the third reservation, and the fourth reservation is the third reservation. An effect based on the scenario determined in the 3 suspension will be performed.

The production scenario includes a production in which the development of the prefetch affects the development of the suspension (corresponding to the fourth suspension in this embodiment) and a production in which the development of the prefetch does not affect the development of the suspension. The fact that the development of the prefetch affects the development of the suspension means that an effect similar to the prefetch effect is also performed in the suspension, and corresponds to, for example, the black effect described above. An effect that does not affect the development of a prefetched game corresponds to, for example, an effect that is performed only during suspension, such as a movable effect of a character. A scenario lottery is performed for the suspension before the suspension (corresponding to the third suspension in the present embodiment) for the effects that affect the development due to the development of the look-ahead. On the other hand, a scenario lottery including the suspension (corresponding to the fourth suspension in the present embodiment) is performed for an effect that does not affect the development due to the development of the prefetch.

When the effect scenario is set for the holding that has won the lottery in the broad category (step S510 in FIG. 153), details of the prefetch effect are selected (step S512). An example of selecting the details of the look-ahead effect will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 155 is a diagram showing an example of selecting details of the look-ahead effect. Figure 155 (A), in the high probability stage 2004 start winning the fourth reservation (YES in step S500 in Figure 153 and YES in S502), it is determined to perform the look-ahead effect (YES in step S506 in Figure 153) , the look-ahead effect section, and the effect scenario are determined.

To elaborate on the determination of the look-ahead effect section and the effect scenario, the section in which the look-ahead effect is performed is selected by lottery for all the stored start memories. to the fourth hold (step S508 in FIG. 153). There are at least two types of production scenarios for the prefetch production. Depending on the development, there is an effect that does not affect the development in question. As an effect that influences the development of the relevant reservation by the development of the look-ahead, a lottery is drawn for the reservations (first to third reservations) other than the relevant reservation. Here, the holding is selected by lottery as a variable effect. As a result, in the present embodiment, it is determined that the black effect is performed in the second suspension and the third suspension. A lottery will be drawn for effects that do not affect the development of the look-ahead, including the suspension (first suspension to fourth suspension). As a result, in the present embodiment, it is determined that the accessory movement is performed from the first reservation to the fourth reservation.

In this case, when the starting memory reserved for the first to fourth reservations is digested, the black effect is performed while the character is continuously moving, and the black color effect is performed even though the character is finished. The player encounters a situation in which the is movable. Then, it is difficult for the player to judge whether these series of effects are individual effects or related effects. Therefore, as shown in FIG. 155(B), when it is determined that the black effect like the third suspension is not performed in the suspension (corresponding to the fourth suspension in the present embodiment), the fourth suspension , cancels (rewrites to "none") an effect that does not affect the development (in this embodiment, the character object is movable) due to the development of the look-ahead.

<Countdown production>
It is determined whether or not the details of the prefetch effect selected in step S512 of FIG. 153 are the countdown effect (step S514). A countdown effect in this embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 156 is a diagram showing an example of the case where the details of the look-ahead effect are the countdown effect. In FIG. 156(A), the fourth reservation is won during the high probability stage 2004 (YES in step S500 in FIG. 153 and YES in step S502), and it is decided to perform a look-ahead effect (YES in step S506 in FIG. 153). ), the look-ahead effect section, and the effect scenario are determined.

To elaborate on the determination of the look-ahead effect section and the effect scenario, the section in which the look-ahead effect is performed is selected by lottery for all the stored start memories. to the fourth hold (step S508 in FIG. 153). There are at least two types of production scenarios for the prefetch production. Depending on the development, there is an effect that does not affect the development in question. It has been determined that a countdown effect will be performed in the first to third holds as an effect that affects the development of the hold due to the development of the look-ahead. Here, the holding is selected by lottery as a variable effect. A lottery will be drawn for effects that do not affect the development of the look-ahead, including the suspension (first suspension to fourth suspension). As a result, in the present embodiment, it is determined that the accessory movement is performed from the first reservation to the fourth reservation.

In this case, when the first suspension to the fourth suspension are completed, the countdown effect is performed while the character is continuously moved, and in the fourth suspension, the countdown effect is not performed. The player will encounter a situation in which it is movable. When the countdown is set to 0 (zero), the jackpot is confirmed (winning in the main CPU 101), the pattern in which the countdown does not become 0 is a loss confirmation, so in that case another effect (this embodiment When the character movement in the fourth reservation is performed, it is not only difficult for the player to judge whether these series of effects were individual effects or related effects, but also other effects (In the present embodiment, the movable accessory) may be perceived as meaningless by the player.

Therefore, when it is determined that the effect selected in step S514 of FIG. 153 is the countdown effect (YES in step S514), it is determined whether the result of the selected countdown effect is false (step S516). . When it is determined that the result of the selected countdown effect is false (YES in step S516), it is determined whether or not another effect scenario has been decided up to the suspension (step S518). If it is determined that another effect scenario has been decided up to the suspension (YES in step S518), the other effect scenario in the suspension is canceled (step S520).

That is, as shown in FIG. 156(B), when it is determined that the countdown effect performed over the first to third suspensions is not performed in the variation (corresponding to the fourth suspension in the present embodiment) , cancels (rewrites to "none") the effect (movable character in this embodiment) that does not affect the development due to the development of the look-ahead in the fourth suspension.

<Background change control processing>
In the gaming machine of the present embodiment, during the game on the normal stage 2000, a look-ahead effect of the suspended starting memory is performed, accompanied by a change in the background image displayed on the liquid crystal display device 16. FIG. The look-ahead effect of the suspended starting memory with background change refers to the starting memory (the suspension) suspended by the starting prize (winning the first starting port 5442 or the second starting port 440), and the background change as the effect. If it is determined by lottery that the background change of the suspension is performed, the performance based on the background change scenario of the suspension is performed across the starting memory suspended before the suspension, and the background change of the suspension is given continuity. is. Variations of the look-ahead effect include not only an image notice, but also a lamp notice, a character notice, and the like. Background change control processing will be described with reference to FIGS. 157 to 160. FIG.

FIG. 157 is an example of a flowchart showing background change control processing. FIG. 158 is an example of a flow chart showing the number of possible consecutive background changes determination process. FIG. 159 is an example of a table relating to background change control and background change scenarios. FIG. 160 is a diagram showing a specific example for explaining the flow of background change control processing according to the present embodiment.

First, the sub CPU 201 determines whether or not the start memory (retained) that has been withheld due to the start prize (won at the first start port 5442 or the second start port 440) has won the background change lottery (Fig. 157 step S530). If it is determined that the suspension has won the background change lottery (YES in step S530), the background change consecutive possible number of times determination processing is performed until the background change of the suspension is performed based on the starting memory suspended before the suspension. It is determined how many variations the performance can be performed over (step S532). The background change consecutive possible number of times determination process will be described later with reference to FIG. 158 .

When the sub CPU 201 determines the number of times the background change can continue in the possible number of consecutive background changes determination processing, the sub CPU 201 performs a background change scenario lottery for the suspension (step S534). The background change scenario lottery is selected from the background change scenario table of FIG. 159(A). When a predetermined background change scenario is selected from the background change scenario table of FIG. , information related to variable effects such as "normal failure" and "reach failure" are rewritten to the background transition table based on the background change scenario (step S536 in FIG. 157). Examples of background change scenarios are described below.

158, the background change continuous count determination process in the background change control process of FIG. 157 will be described. When the sub CPU 201 determines in step S530 in the background change control process that the start memory (the hold) that has been put on hold due to the start prize wins the background change lottery (YES in step S530 of FIG. 157), the background change of FIG. In the process of determining the number of consecutive times possible, the number of times that continuous effects can be performed until the background change of the suspension is determined (step S540 in FIG. 158). The number of consecutive possible times refers to the number of starting memories in the section that is not won separately in the background change lottery due to loss variation, going back from the background change object hold (the hold).

A case where the winning start memory (retained) is 4 (fourth retained) will be described with reference to FIG. 160 . In FIG. 160 (A), when the suspension wins, the start memory is suspended from the first suspension to the third suspension, and the production contents of "normal loss" are set for the first suspension to the third suspension respectively. It is in a state of being That is, the pending number is "4". 158, the sub CPU 201 determines whether or not the continuous effect related to the pending background change is possible for the three starting memories, excluding the pending starting memory, out of the four starting memories. determine whether

The sub CPU 201 decrements (subtracts) the pending number in step S542 of FIG. 158, resulting in 4-1=3. That is, it is determined whether or not the 3rd hold can be continued among the 1st to 3rd holds. In step S544, the sub CPU 201 determines whether or not the pending number is not 0 (step S544 in FIG. 158). As described above, since the pending number 3 is not zero (YES in step S544), the sub CPU 201 next determines whether or not the third pending clears the continuation possible condition (step S546). The continuance possible condition is a condition described in the continuance possible condition table of FIG. 159(B).

The continuation possible condition in FIG. (none) or normal", "3" not won the pending change lottery, that is, the pending display displayed on the liquid crystal display device 16 is displayed in a manner different from the default display mode due to the pending change lottery It is not being won in the "4" look-ahead effect lottery, that is, it is not the target of another look-ahead effect. The sub CPU 201 determines that continuation is possible only when all of the above conditions "1" to "4" are satisfied.

Here, since the third hold in FIG. 160(A) is “usually lost”, it satisfies all of the continuation possible conditions (1) to (4). Therefore, the third suspension is a starting suspension in which a look-ahead effect is possible. Then, in step S548 of FIG. 158, the number of consecutive possible times is incremented (added) (step S548 of FIG. 158). That is, the number of possible consecutive times is 0+1=1. The process of incrementing the number of possible continuations is repeated until the pending number becomes zero or the continuation possible condition cannot be cleared.

In the present embodiment, when the number of reservations is decremented, 3-1=2 (step S542 in FIG. 158), and it is determined whether or not the second reservation can be continued. Since the pending number 2 is not zero (YES in step S544), it is then determined whether or not the second pending clears the continuation possible condition (step S546). The second hold in FIG. 160(A) is a “normal loss” and thus satisfies all of the continuation possible conditions (1) to (4). That is, since the second hold can also be read-ahead effect, the possible number of consecutive games is incremented in step S548 of FIG.

Furthermore, when the pending number is decremented, 2-1=1 (step S542 in FIG. 158), and it is determined whether or not the first pending can be continued. Since the pending number 1 is not zero (YES in step S544), it is then determined whether or not the first pending has cleared the continuation possible condition (step S546). The first hold in FIG. 160(A) is “normal loss” and thus satisfies all of the continuation possible conditions (1) to (4). In other words, since the first hold is also capable of pre-reading effects, the number of possible consecutive games is incremented in step S548 of FIG. Next, when the pending number is decremented, 1-1=0 (step S544 in FIG. 158), and the pending number becomes 0 (NO in step S544). It is determined that there is

If it is determined in the background change continuous count determination process that the continuous count is 3 (step S532 in FIG. 157), a background change scenario is selected based on the background change scenario table in FIG. 159(A). Since the number of times of possible continuation indicates the number of times of possible prefetching, in the present embodiment, in FIG. 3, No. 7 to No. 9, No. 13 to No. 15, No. 19 to No. 21.

For example, background change scenario No. When 3 is selected, the background change scenario type is "normal", and the background change scenarios before 3 changes, before 2 changes, and before 1 change are all "normal". Also, for example, background change scenario No. 20 is selected, the background change scenario type is "normal", and the background change scenarios before 3 changes, before 2 changes, and before 1 change are "normal", "evening", and "evening" in that order. It's becoming It is expected that the background will change from the normal system to the evening background by the time the suspension (fourth suspension) changes, and some kind of story presentation will be performed continuously.

In addition, for example, background change scenario No. When 9 is selected, the background change scenario type is "Japanese style", and the background change scenarios before 3 changes, before 2 changes, and before 1 change are all "Japanese style mansion". This can be used as an effect with more expectation than "normal" in the background change scenario type. Also, for example, the background change scenario No. 13 to No. When 15 is selected, the background change scenario type is "Invasion", which can be used as an effect with a higher sense of expectation than the above-mentioned "Japanese style" state. Especially for the background change scenario type "Invasion", since the background change scenario has an effect of "Enemy Invasion", it may suggest a transition to some special mode (zone).

The example of FIG. 160(B) will be described. In FIG. 160 (B), when the suspension is won, the start memory is suspended from the first suspension to the third suspension, and the second suspension to the third suspension are each set with the production contents of "normal loss". However, it can be seen that the first suspension is set to "change the background", that is, the background change scenario is set. In this case, the pending number is "4", and in the background change continuous possible number determination process of FIG. is possible.

In step S542 of FIG. 158, when the pending number is decremented, 4-1=3, and it is determined whether or not the third pending can be continued. As described above, since the pending number 3 is not zero (YES in step S544), it is determined whether or not the third pending clears the continuous possible condition (step S546). The third hold in FIG. 160(B) is “normal loss”, and thus satisfies all of the continuation possible conditions (1) to (4). Therefore, since the third hold can be read-ahead effect, the possible number of continuous games is incremented in step S548 of FIG. 158 (step S548 of FIG. 158). That is, the number of possible consecutive times is 0+1=1. The same applies to the second hold, so the number of possible consecutive times is 1+1=2.

Then, when the pending number is decremented in step S542 of FIG. 158, 2−1=1, and it is determined whether or not the first pending can be continued. As described above, since the pending number 1 is not zero (YES in step S544), it is determined whether or not the first pending condition satisfies the continuation possible condition (step S546). Since the first suspension in FIG. 160(B) is “background change”, among the continuity possible conditions (1) to (4), in the background change scenario in FIG. 159(A) in (2), “(none ) or “normal system” is not satisfied.

Then, since it is determined in step S546 of FIG. 158 that the continuance condition is not satisfied (NO in step S546 of FIG. 158), it is determined that the number of continuations possible is 2 in the background change continuation count determination process. be done.

<Change scenario decision processing>
Variation scenario determination processing performed by the suspended starting memories (for example, the first to fourth suspensions) at the start of variation will be described with reference to FIG. In the gaming machine of the present embodiment, the starting memory withheld due to the starting prize (winning at the first starting port 5442 or the second starting port 440) is a background performance change effect related to the starting memory withheld after the suspension. Alternatively, the look-ahead effect can rewrite the effect information different from that at the time of winning. Therefore, according to the conditions given at the start of fluctuation, a predetermined effect is selected.

FIG. 161 is an example of a flowchart showing change scenario determination processing. In the fluctuation scenario determination process, it is determined whether or not it is the fluctuation start time when the fluctuation starts when the starting prize or the suspended starting memory is consumed by the fluctuation (step S550 in FIG. 161). If it is determined that it is time to start changing (YES in step S550), it is determined whether or not the background displayed on the liquid crystal display device 16 is normal (step S552). The normal system includes, for example, effects different from effects that affect the player's interest in some way, such as attacks and assaults, which will be described later.

If it is determined that the background displayed on the liquid crystal display device 16 is of the normal type (YES in step S552), it is determined whether or not it is an exception in the normal type (step S554). For example, among the effects determined by the background change scenario lottery in the above-described background change control process, if it is determined that the change is "1" and the effect of rushing into a Japanese-style mansion, "2 ” If it is determined that the change is a production that enters into the enemy attack production, ” 3 ” The change corresponds to the next change after the final evening background.

If it is determined to be an exception (YES in step S554), an effect corresponding to the exception condition is executed in normal background exception processing (step S556). For example, if it is determined that the change is to rush into a Japanese-style mansion, then a Japanese-style background scenario lottery is executed, and "2" is the change to rush into an enemy attack effect. If that has been decided, set the production related to the enemy attack in the normal background scenario lottery. be done. On the other hand, if it is determined not to be an exception (NO in step S554), a normal background scenario lottery is conducted (step S558).

If it is determined that the background displayed on the liquid crystal display device 16 is not normal (NO in step S552), it is determined whether or not the background is evening (step S560). If it is determined that the background is evening (YES in step S560), an evening background scenario lottery is conducted (step S562). On the other hand, if it is determined that the background is not evening (NO in step S560), it is determined whether the background is Japanese style (step S564). If it is determined that the background is Japanese style (YES in step S564), a Japanese-style background scenario lottery is conducted (step S566).

On the other hand, if it is determined that the background is not Japanese (NO in step S564), it is determined whether or not the background is an invasion (step S568). If it is determined that the background is an invasion (YES in step S568), a scenario lottery for the background of an invasion is performed (step S570). On the other hand, if it is determined that the background is not an attack (NO in step S570), an attack background scenario lottery is conducted (step S572). The degree of expectation for the production performed as a result of these scenario lotteries is higher in the order of normal background, evening background, exception to normal background, Japanese style, attack, and assault.

<Chance up control processing>
In the gaming machine according to the present embodiment, regardless of whether it is the normal stage 2000 or the high-precision stage 2004, as a variable effect that develops into super reach, a chance-up to generate a effect related to the first generated effect is generated. Control processing is possible. The chance-up control process will be described with reference to FIG. 162 . FIG. 162 is an example of a flowchart showing chance-up control processing.

First, the sub CPU 201 determines whether or not the effect displayed during the current variation is the effect during variation (step S580 in FIG. 162). When it is determined that the effect currently being displayed during variation is the effect during variation (YES in step S580), it is determined whether or not to execute chance up (step S582). If it is determined that chance up will be executed (YES in step S582), it is determined whether or not chance up has already been performed in the variation. That is, it is determined whether or not the chance up flag is not 1 (step S584).

If it is determined in step S584 that the chance up flag is not 1 (YES in step S584), a chance up introduction effect is set (step S586). This means that the chance up flag is not 1, which means that the chance up effect has not yet been performed in the variation. Therefore, the normal production that can lead to the introduction of the chance-up production is selected. When the chance-up introduction effect is set in step S586 (step S586), the chance-up flag is set to 1 (step S588).

On the other hand, when it is determined that the chance up flag is 1 at step S584 (NO at step S584), a chance up effect related to the previously executed effect is set (step S600). For example, if the effect executed last time, that is, the effect executed based on the chance-up introduction effect was a conversation effect in which the character A appears, the character A appears again as the chance-up effect, and the previous conversation is performed. There are productions such as a conversation that has developed while being related to , and a production that develops into a super reach with the appearance of a character B related to the character A. In this way, it is possible to increase expectations for the super ready-to-win performance by controlling the performance to be generated later so as to relate to or develop the performance to be generated first.

When the chance-up flag is set to 1 in step S588 (step S588) or the chance-up effect related to the effect executed last time is set in step S600 (step S600), it is determined whether or not the variation ends (step S590). . If it is determined that the fluctuation has ended (YES in step S590), the character lamp flag is set to 0 (step S592). On the other hand, if it is determined that the variation has not ended (NO in step S590), the chance up control process ends.

<Pending change decision processing>
In the gaming machine according to the present embodiment, when the starting memory is suspended due to the starting winning (winning to the first starting port 5442 or the second starting port 440), the player can visually recognize that the suspension has been made. Display (or notify) in a manner. As a mode of display, for example, the number is displayed on a part of the liquid crystal display device 16 . Also, the display (design) of the withheld starting memory can change if certain conditions are met. A pending change is to change the pending image. The pending change determination process will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 163 is an example of a flowchart showing pending change determination processing.

First, the sub CPU 201 determines whether or not there is a reserved winning (step S610 in FIG. 163). Whether or not there is a suspended winning does not mean whether or not there is a starting winning (winning to the first starting port 5442 or the second starting port 440), but the fact that the starting memory is suspended and the suspension is made as described above. Indicates that it is in a state where it can be displayed in a manner that can be visually recognized by a person. If it is determined to be a pending prize (YES in step S610), a pending change scenario lottery is performed (step S612).

In the hold change scenario lottery in step S612, a lottery is drawn for a scenario regarding hold change. Specifically, the scenario regarding the change of hold is how many times the confrontation is to be made under the condition that the display of the hold is changed only when Party A wins due to the confrontation between Force A and Force B (the number of battles n determination), whether to perform pending changes, and so on. The form of the confrontation includes, for example, a ninjutsu confrontation. In this embodiment, the maximum number of battles is eight. When a predetermined scenario is determined in the pending change scenario lottery of step S612 (step S612), it is determined which character is to be selected from the first party (step S614). Depending on the character selected here, there may be a character that always results in the victory of A (determination of pending change).

Next, in step S616, a lottery is drawn for a second character and a scenario that will face A. Here, in the present embodiment, only one character of the A force is selected in the A character lottery in step S614. In addition, the story and cut-in scenario when appearing will also be determined by the Confrontation B Character Scenario Lottery. Depending on the character selected here, there may be a character that always results in the victory of A (determination of pending change).

Next, in step S618, a confrontation process is performed (step S618). If A wins (YES in step S6620), the pending image is changed by pending change processing. For example, the image of the starting memory that was displayed as a red shuriken image is changed to a yellow shuriken image, or the image that was displayed as a shuriken image is changed to a ninja book (scroll). Any display that is different from the current display may be used. When one battle ends, 1 is subtracted from the number of battles n in step S624 (step S624). If it is determined that the number of times of confrontation after subtraction in step S624 is not 0 (NO in step S626), the confrontation is performed again. This process is repeated until the number of confrontations reaches zero.

When the number of confrontations decremented in step S626 becomes 0 (YES in step S626), development effect processing is performed in step S628 (step S628). In the development production processing, there is a production that develops into super reach after the end of the confrontation between the first power and the second power.

On the other hand, in step S620, if A does not win in the confrontation between A and B (NO in step S620), it is determined whether or not the match is a draw (step S630). If it is determined to be a draw (YES in step S630), 1 is subtracted from the number of matches n in step S624 (step S624). If it is determined that the number of confrontations decremented in step S626 is not 0 (NO in step S626), the confrontation is performed again. This process is repeated until the number of confrontations reaches zero.

When the development effect process ends in step S628 or when it is determined that the game is not tied in step S630 (NO in step S630), the pending change determination process ends. In addition, pseudo-continuation may be used in the performance regarding the confrontation between the A force and the B force in the hold change.

[Character Lamp]
In this embodiment, when the character lamp (LED 1562 ) emits light, a picture of a character or the like appears inside the opening window 1552 . Note that the character lamp (LED 1562) will be simply referred to as a character lamp hereinafter.

While the sub CPU 201 selects an effect in which the character lamp lights up at the start of the variable display of the identification pattern, it may draw a lottery as to whether or not the character lamp lights up in the effect lottery when the effect button 62 shown in FIG. 1 is pressed. .

Then, the timing of lighting the character lamp selected at the start of the variable display of the identification pattern and the timing of lighting the character lamp selected by lottery when the production button 62 is pressed exist, so that the variable display is performed once. It is conceivable that there are timings during which the character lamp lights up multiple times. For this reason, the earliest timing is adopted for lighting the character lamp, and the sub CPU 201 controls so that once the character lamp is lit, it will not be lit again.

FIGS. 164A to 164C are examples of sequence charts showing character lamp lighting control. In FIGS. 164(A) to (C), during the period from the start of the variable display of the identification pattern to the end of the variable display, as a performance, the first performance lottery is executed at the start of the variable display, and as a result, the first half of the conversation notice is executed, a second effect lottery is executed on the way, and as a result, a special reach (hereinafter referred to as "SP reach") is executed in the latter half.

The example shown in FIG. 164(A) assumes that the lamp lighting timing is selected twice during one variable display. In the illustrated example, there is a period during which the character ramp effect can be executed in the first half of the conversation advance notice, and there is also a period during which the character lamp effect can be executed in the latter half of the SP reach.

The example shown in FIG. 164(B) represents the case where the production button 62 is pressed. In the illustrated example, the sub CPU 201 executes the character lamp effect upon pressing the effect button 62 in the first half of the conversation advance notice, and does not execute the character lamp effect in the second half of the SP reach.

The example shown in FIG. 164(C) represents the case where the production button 62 is not pressed. In the illustrated example, the effect button 62 is not pressed in the first half of the conversation notice, while the sub CPU 201 executes the character lamp effect in the latter half of the SP reach.

If it is determined that the character lamp is lit when the effect button 62 is pressed at the start of the variable display, if the effect button 62 is not pressed at the time of the button effect, it is identified without the character lamp lighting timing after that. Although it is conceivable that the variable display of the pattern ends, the lottery for lighting the character lamp drawn at the start of the variable display and the lighting lottery for the character lamp when the performance button 62 is pressed can be executed separately. Therefore, it is possible to prepare various lighting timings of the character lamp.

FIG. 165 is an example of a flowchart showing control processing for character lamp effects. First, the sub CPU 201 determines whether or not the effect is during variable display (step S801). If the effect is medium, it is determined whether or not it is within the execution period of the character lamp effect (step S802).

The sub CPU 201 discriminates whether or not the variable display is finished when the character lamp effect is not executable (step S807). It is determined whether or not there is (step S803).

If the character lamp flag is 1 (character lamp effect has been executed), the sub CPU 201 determines whether or not the variable display has ended (step S807). Execution), it is determined whether or not the conditions for executing the character lamp presentation are satisfied (step S804). The condition for executing the character lamp effect is, for example, pressing of the effect button 62 or elapse of a predetermined variable display time.

The sub CPU 201 determines whether or not the variable display is finished when the conditions for executing the character lamp effect are not satisfied (step S807), and when the conditions for executing the character lamp effect are satisfied, the sub CPU 201 executes the character lamp effect. (step S805).

Next, the sub CPU 201 sets the character lamp flag to 1 (step S806). Next, the sub CPU 201 determines whether or not the variable display is finished (step S807). If the sub CPU 201 determines that the variable display has not ended, it ends the process, and if it determines that the variable display has ended, it sets the character lamp flag to 0 (step S808).

The above contents are described as an embodiment by taking variable display as an example, but the execution of the character ramp effect is controlled during the look-ahead effect or the look-ahead effect and the effect during the variable display as one period. You can make it work.

As described above, in the present embodiment, as shown in FIG. 164(B), when the effect button 62 is operated, for example, a conversation notice capable of executing a character lamp effect (execution of the first effect) is set as a specific notification mode. means) and SP reach (second effect executing means) capable of executing a character lamp effect when variable display of the identification pattern reaches a predetermined time during the same variable display. Furthermore, as shown in FIG. 164(C), in the conversation notice, if the production button 62 is not operated, the character lamp production is not executed, while in the SP reach, as shown in FIG. 164(C), when the character lamp effect is executed in the conversation advance notice, the character lamp effect is not executed, and as shown in FIG. perform the performance.

Moreover, it can be rephrased as follows. That is, the pachinko gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment can execute a character lamp effect as a predetermined effect, and performs a lottery to execute the character lamp effect under the first condition (for example, triggered by pressing the effect button 62). A first lottery that can be performed and a second lottery that can be performed under a second condition different from the first lottery (e.g., elapsed time) can each be viable. When each of the above becomes executable, the first condition may become unsatisfied depending on the game situation. When the first condition is established, the character lamp effect can be executed under the establishment of the first condition, and the establishment of the second condition is invalidated. Only when the second condition is satisfied, a predetermined effect can be executed, for example, at an execution timing different from that when the first condition is satisfied.

Moreover, it can be rephrased as follows. That is, the pachinko gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment can execute a character lamp effect as a predetermined effect, and executes the character lamp effect as a first condition, for example, when the button in FIG. 164(A) is pressed. A first lottery that allows a lottery and a second lottery that allows a lottery to be executed at the time shown in FIG. sell. When each of the above becomes executable, the character lamp effect is executed when the second condition is established, while the first condition is a condition that becomes unsatisfied or invalid depending on the game situation. For example, as shown in FIG. 164(B), when the first condition is established, the character lamp effect can be executed under the establishment of the first condition, and when the second condition is established. shall be invalidated (or discarded).

[Full screen preview]
FIG. 166 is an example of a flow chart showing control of the full-screen rendering, and FIGS. 167(A) to (C) are screen diagrams showing an example of screen display. In this embodiment, the sub CPU 201 outputs a message (effect specifying information) to the voice control circuit 205 when it receives a command to execute a full-screen effect in the normal effect state shown in FIG. 167(A). By doing so, the sound control circuit 205 is controlled to set the sound volume of the specific channel (the channel in which the sound of the pattern is reproduced) to zero.

The audio control circuit 205 controls so that the pattern sound is not output during the full-screen presentation, but the error screen after power failure recovery (that is, the full-screen error screen indicating that the variable display is in progress) ) is displayed, control is performed to output the symbol sound.

However, in this example, the full-screen error screen is the error screen after power is restored, but the full-screen error screen does not necessarily have to be the error screen after power is restored. message screens, warning screens when fraud is committed, etc., information screens related to gaming machines that are not related to the judgment of big hits, etc. .

The voice control circuit 205 has four channels (execution system) of sound sources for controlling voices such as notification sounds, pattern sounds, sound effects, and BGM. , for example, four channels (execution system) can reproduce these respectively. In this embodiment, a channel number is assigned to each channel. For example, channel number 1 is a notification sound, channel number 2 is a pattern sound, channel number 3 is a sound effect, and channel number 4 is BGM. be.

166. First, the sub CPU 201 determines whether or not the full-screen effect is being executed (step S901), and ends the process if the full-screen effect is not being performed. On the other hand, in the case of the full-screen effect, the sub CPU 201 determines whether or not there is power failure recovery as shown in FIG. 167(B) (step S902).

If it is not power failure recovery, the sub CPU 201 sets full-screen presentation (step S903). Next, the sub CPU 201 transmits to the voice control circuit 205 a message designating channel number 2, which is the symbol sound channel, and instructs the voice control circuit 205 to set the volume of the symbol sound channel to 0. (step S904).

On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 167(C), in the case of recovery from power failure, the sub CPU 201 sets a screen during recovery from power failure (step S905). This is because the effect is not memorized at the time of restoration from power failure, and therefore the screen during restoration from power failure is simply displayed.

Next, the sub CPU 201 transmits a message to the voice control circuit 205, and causes the voice control circuit 205 that receives the message to output the sound volume of the symbol channel for channel number 2 of the symbol sound (step S906). This may be changed to a louder sound than the symbol stop sound in the normal presentation.

In the above-described processing, when the full-screen presentation is performed as a presentation, the sound of the pattern is not emitted. However, if power failure occurs after that, the full-screen presentation command is sent again when the power is restored. In such a case, by controlling the volume of the pattern sound channel (channel number: 2) so that it can be output, the power failure recovery screen is covered and the liquid crystal display device 16 is displayed. Even when the displayed identification pattern cannot be seen, it is possible to grasp that the identification pattern has stopped by the design stop sound.

In other words, during the display effect, the effect tone color can be output according to the system by a plurality of channels, and the channel (for example, channel number 2) can be output according to the change in the display effect mode. , 3, 4 pattern sound channels, effect sound channels, BGM channels) are changed, while the pattern system channel (for example, the pattern channel of channel number 2) is fixed. , the output sound from the channel of the symbol system is muted according to the mode of symbol display.

According to the configuration as described above, it is possible to increase the player's interest in the performance and to reduce unnecessary processing for the performance, so that the processing can be performed smoothly.

In addition, from a different perspective of the above embodiment, a plurality of channels, for example, channel numbers 1, 2, 3, and 4, for example, informational sound channels, pattern sound channels, effect sound channels, and BGM channels. Shared channels that can output timbres according to the system, and can change the timbre output from the channel according to the change of the display performance mode, for example, channels with channel numbers 2, 3, and 4, effects It has a sound channel, a BGM channel, and warning system and pattern system channels, for example, channel numbers 1 and 2 for notification sounds and pattern sound channels. On the other hand, when a specific display effect, for example, the full screen display shown in FIG. It can also be said that

In the above-described embodiment, the channel number of the symbol sound channel is fixed at 2 (hereinafter also referred to as "fixed channel system"), but the present invention is not limited to this. Based on a message (effect designation information) from the CPU 201, for example, an unused unused channel among four channels (execution system) may be dynamically allocated to reproduce each sound.

In this case, the sub CPU 201 stores a specific channel number representing a specific channel that reproduces the pattern sound, and for example, when executing a full-screen effect, the sub CPU 201 instructs the sound control circuit 205 to select the specific channel number. A message specifying a number is transmitted, and the voice control circuit 205 receiving this is made to set the sound volume of the pattern sound channel to zero. Even in this way, the same effects as those of the fixed channel system can be obtained.

[2. Pachinko machine according to the second embodiment]
Although the pachinko gaming machine 1 according to the first embodiment of the present invention has been described above, for example, it may be a pachinko gaming machine having a setting function. The principle of a pachinko gaming machine having this setting function will be explained below as a pachinko gaming machine according to the second embodiment. Incidentally, the external configuration of the pachinko gaming machine according to the second embodiment is the same as the external configuration of the pachinko gaming machine according to the first embodiment. Further, description of the configuration common to the pachinko gaming machine 1 according to the first embodiment described above will be omitted.

First, the basic specifications of the pachinko gaming machine according to the second embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 168 to 171. FIG. FIG. 168 is a diagram showing an example of a table showing the probability of a big hit in a pachinko gaming machine according to the second embodiment, and FIG. FIG. 170 is a diagram showing an example of the selection rate (jackpot type determination table) of (referred to as "symbol"), and FIG. be. FIG. 171 is a diagram showing an example of a decorative design determination table stored in program ROM 202 of sub-control circuit 200. As shown in FIG. In the following description, the terms of main CPU 101 and main RAM 103, which are not shown in FIGS. 168 to 171, are used, but these are shown in FIG.

Before explaining the probability of a big win shown in FIG. 168, first, the big win in a pachinko game machine will be briefly explained.

When the main CPU 101 detects that a game ball has entered the first starting port 420 (see, for example, FIG. 5), it extracts a jackpot determination random number from the jackpot determination counter and stores it in the main RAM 103 . With reference to a 1 special symbol big hit random number determination table (not shown), a big hit determination (hereinafter referred to as "first special symbol big hit determination") is performed for the extracted big hit determination random number. It should be noted that the extraction of the jackpot determination random number of the first special symbol is performed even when the jackpot game state is controlled.

Similarly, when the main CPU 101 detects that a game ball has entered the second starting port 440 (see, for example, FIG. 5), it extracts a random number for judging the second special symbol from the counter for judging a big hit, and stores it in the main RAM 103. A second special symbol big-hit random number determination table (not shown) is referenced, and a big-hit determination for the extracted big-hit determination random number (hereinafter referred to as "second special symbol big-hit determination") is performed. It should be noted that the extraction of the jackpot determination random number of the second special symbol is performed even when the jackpot game state is controlled.

When the jackpot determination of the first special symbol is performed, it is determined to be either "big hit" or "losing". In addition, when the second special symbol jackpot determination is performed, it is determined to be either a "big hit" or a "loss" in the same manner as the first special symbol jackpot determination. In the first special symbol jackpot random number determination table and the second special symbol jackpot random number determination table stored in the main RAM 103, the value of the probability variation flag (“0 (=off)” or “1 (=on)”) ), the relationship between the range (width) of the random number for judging a big hit determined as a "big hit" or "losing" and the corresponding judging value data ("big hit judging value data" and "losing judging value data") is stipulated.

In this second embodiment, the total random number is 65536 for both the first special symbol and the second special symbol. That is, the random number for judging a big hit is generated within a range (width) of 0-65535. This range is set as a fixed value. The jackpot probability is determined by the number of jackpot determination value data for the range of jackpot determination random numbers. It should be noted that the range (width) of the random number for judging a big hit can be changed as appropriate.

The variable probability flag is one of the management flags stored in the main RAM 103, and is a flag for managing whether or not the game state is the "high probability game state". When the gaming state is the "high probability gaming state", the probability variation flag is "1", and when it is the "low probability gaming state", the probability variation flag is "0".

The time saving flag is one of the management flags stored in the main RAM 103, and is a flag for managing whether or not the game state is the "time saving game state". When the game state is "time saving game state", the time saving flag becomes "1", and when it is "non-time saving game state", the time saving flag becomes "0". In addition, in the time saving game state, the number of times of time saving is also managed by the main CPU 101, and the number of times of time saving is subtracted by 1 each time the special symbol changes once.

In addition, in the time saving game state in which the time saving flag is set to ON, the probability that it is determined as a normal hit in the normal hit determination (normal hit probability) is increased as compared with the non-time saving game state. Therefore, in the time-saving game state, compared with the non-time-saving game state, the frequency that the normal electric accessory 46 changes from the closed state to the open state, that is, the winning frequency of the game ball to the second start port 440 is increased. However, in the time-saving gaming state, instead of increasing the normal winning probability compared to the non-time-saving gaming state, for example, by increasing the execution frequency of the normal winning lottery (normally shortening the fluctuation time of the symbol), the normal electric role The frequency of the object 46 changing from the closed state to the open state may be increased, or the normal electric accessory 46 may be made easier to win by changing the opening state of the normal electric accessory 46 . Also, two or three of the above three modes may be combined.

In the pachinko game machine according to the second embodiment, the normal game state in which both the probability variation flag and the time reduction flag are OFF, the probability variation flag ON and the time reduction flag ON, and the probability variation flag OFF and the time reduction flag ON It is configured to be controlled by the main CPU 101 to one of the time-saving game states.

When the main CPU 101 detects the winning of the game ball into the first starting port 420 (see, for example, FIG. 5) and extracts the jackpot determination random number of the first special symbol, the extracted first special symbol jackpot determination random number is extracted. The numerical value is retained as start memory until the variable display of the first special symbol is started. Then, when the variable display of the first special symbol is started, the big hit determination of the first special symbol is performed to determine whether it is a big hit or a loss.

When the main CPU 101 detects the winning of the game ball into the second starting port 440 (see, for example, FIG. 5) and extracts the second special symbol jackpot determination random number, the extracted second special symbol jackpot determination random number is extracted. The numerical value is retained as start memory until the variable display of the second special symbol is started. Then, when the variable display of the second special symbol is started, the big hit determination of the second special symbol is performed to determine whether it is a big hit or a loss.

[Jackpot probability]
As shown in FIG. 168, in the big-hit determination of the first special symbol, the big-hit probability differs according to the set value. When the jackpot probability is relatively low low probability gaming state (probability variation flag OFF), the jackpot probability for each setting value is about 1/300 at setting 1, about 1/290 at setting 2, and about 1/290 at setting 3. Setting 4 is about 1/270, setting 5 is about 1/260, and setting 6 is about 1/250. Also, when the jackpot probability is relatively high high probability gaming state (probability variation flag ON), the jackpot probability for each setting value is about 1/30 at setting 1, about 1/29 at setting 2, setting 3 setting 4 is about 1/28, setting 4 is about 1/27, setting 5 is about 1/26, and setting 6 is about 1/25.

That is, as described above, in the second embodiment, since the range (width) of the jackpot determination random number is set as a fixed value in the range of 0 to 65535, the number of jackpot determination value data in the first special symbol is set. By changing according to the value, the big hit probability is varied according to the set value. For example, in the low-probability gaming state in the first special symbol, the number of jackpot determination value data is 218 in setting 1 and 226 in setting 2 for the range of random numbers for jackpot determination which is a fixed value (0 to 65535). 234 at setting 3, 243 at setting 4, 252 at setting 5, and 262 at setting 6, so that the probability of a big hit is varied according to the set value. In addition, the number of big hit determination value data in the high probability game state is 21 in setting 1, 22 in setting 2, 23 in setting 3, 24 in setting 4, 25 in setting 5, and 26 in setting 6. It has become.

Also in the big hit determination of the second special symbol, the big hit probability is different according to the set value. When the jackpot probability is relatively low low probability gaming state (probability variation flag OFF), the jackpot probability for each set value is 1/300 at setting 1, 1/290 at setting 2, and 280 at setting 3. 1, setting 4 is 1/270, setting 5 is 1/260, and setting 6 is 1/250. Also, when the jackpot probability is relatively high high probability gaming state (probability variation flag ON), the jackpot probability for each setting value is 1/30 with setting 1, 1/29 with setting 2, and 28 with setting 3. Setting 4 is 1/27, setting 5 is 1/26, and setting 6 is 1/25.

That is, the big-hit probability of the second special symbol is also changed according to the set value by changing the number of the big-hit determination value data according to the set value. For example, in the low-probability gaming state in the second special symbol, the number of jackpot determination value data is 218 in setting 1 and 226 in setting 2 for the range of random numbers for jackpot determination which is a fixed value (0 to 65535). 234 at setting 3, 243 at setting 4, 252 at setting 5, and 262 at setting 6, so that the probability of a big hit is varied according to the set value. Also, regarding the number of jackpot determination value data in the high probability game state, 21 in setting 1, 22 in setting 2, 23 in setting 3, 24 in setting 4, 25 in setting 5, and 26 in setting 6. It is individual.

Incidentally, the jackpot determination of the first special symbol and the jackpot determination of the second special symbol have the same jackpot probability determined according to the setting. That is, if the set values are the same, the big-hit probability in the big-hit determination of the first special symbol and the big-hit probability in the big-hit determination of the second special symbol are the same. For example, if the setting is 3, the jackpot probability in the jackpot determination of the first special symbol is 1/280 in the low probability game state (1/28 in the high probability game state), and this jackpot probability is the second special symbol. (1/280 in the low probability game state, 1/28 in the high probability game state).

In the second embodiment, the set values are set in six stages from setting 1 to setting 6, but the number of stages does not necessarily have to be six, and any number of stages can be set.

In addition, in the second embodiment, different set values have different jackpot probabilities, but the present invention is not limited to this, and a plurality of set values may have a common jackpot probability. For example, setting 1 and setting 2 have a common jackpot probability (first probability), setting 3 and setting 4 have a common jackpot probability (second probability higher than the first probability), setting 5 and A common jackpot probability (a third probability higher than the second probability) may be set for setting 6.

Further, in the second embodiment, the range (width) of the big hit determination random numbers generated by the main CPU 101 is set as a fixed value in the range of 0 to 65535, and the range of the big hit determination random numbers which is a fixed value On the other hand, by changing the number of big-hit judgment value data according to the set value, the big-hit probability is made different for each set value. The number of determination value data may be common to all settings, and the range (width) of the random number for judging a big hit as a total random number may be changed according to the set value, thereby making the probability of a big win different according to the set value. For example, the number of jackpot judgment value data is 218 common to all settings, and the range (width) of the random number for jackpot judgment is set to 0 to 65535 in setting 1 (jackpot probability is about 1/300), and in setting 2 0 to 63219 range (jackpot probability is 1/290), setting 3 is 0 to 61039 (jackpot probability is 1/280), setting 4 is 0 to 58859 (jackpot probability is 1/270) , Setting 5 ranges from 0 to 56679 (jackpot probability is 1/260), Setting 6 ranges from 0 to 54499 (jackpot probability is 1/250). By generating a random number, the probability of a big hit can be changed according to the set value. Moreover, according to this method, by changing the denominator (the range of the jackpot judgment random number), which has more digits than the numerator (the number of jackpot judgment value data), the jackpot probability is changed. It is possible to finely set the big hit probability for each set value as compared with the method of changing the number of the big hit determination value data according to the set value by setting the range to a fixed value.

In the above, the number of big hit judgment value data is common to all settings, and the range (width) of the big hit judgment random number as the total random number is changed according to the set value, but the number of big hit judgment value data is all set Commonality is not always essential. For example, in setting 1, the number of jackpot determination value data is 218, the range (width) of the random number for jackpot determination is set to the range of 0 to 65535 (jackpot probability is about 1/300), and in setting 2, the jackpot determination value data number of 219, the range (width) of the random number for judging a big hit is in the range of 0 to 63509 (probability of a big hit is about 1/290), and in setting 3, the number of data for judging a big hit is 220, the random number for judging a big hit The range (width) is set to the range of 0 to 61599 (the jackpot probability is about 1/280), and in setting 4, the number of jackpot judgment value data is 221, and the range (width) of the random number for jackpot judgment is set to the range of 0 to 59669. (The jackpot probability is about 1/270), and in setting 5, the number of jackpot determination value data is 222, and the range (width) of the jackpot determination random number is in the range of 0 to 57719 (the jackpot probability is about 1/260). In setting 6, the number of jackpot judgment value data is 223, and the range (width) of the jackpot judgment random number is in the range of 0 to 55749 (jackpot probability is about 1/250). Even if both the range (width) of the random number for judging a big hit is changed according to the setting value, the range of the random number for judging a big hit is a fixed value, and the number of data for judging a big hit is changed according to the set value. In comparison, it is possible to finely set the jackpot probability for each set value.

When the range (width) of the random number for judging a big hit as the total random number is changed according to the setting value, the main CPU 101 determines that in the setting check process (see FIG. 188) of steps S3072 and S3082, which will be described later. , In addition to or instead of determining whether the set value data is within the range of "0" to "5", for example, the range (width) of the jackpot determination random number as the total random number is set to the set value It may be checked whether or not it is within the range according to the number of hits, and/or whether or not the number of big hit determination value data is the number specified in the set value. Then, if it is determined that the check is not normal (for example, the range (width) of the jackpot determination random number as the total random number and/or the number of jackpot determination value data is outside the range according to the set value) (step described later (corresponding to NO in S3721), the main CPU 101 turns off the game permission flag (step S3722 described later), making it impossible to proceed with the game.

[Jackpot distribution]
Next, with reference to FIG. 169, the jackpot distribution when the result of the jackpot determination of the special symbols is a jackpot, that is, the selection rate of the stop symbols (main symbols) of the special symbols will be described. In the example shown in FIG. 169, the distribution of main symbols is common to all settings. The contents of the table shown in FIG. 169 are stored in the main ROM 102. FIG.

As shown in FIG. 169, when the result of the jackpot determination of the first special symbol is a big hit, the main CPU 101 converts the main symbol to a special figure 1-1 (distribution probability) based on the extracted symbol determination random number. 25.0%), special figure 1-2 (distribution probability 25.0%), special figure 1-3 (distribution probability 25.0%), and special figure 1-4 (distribution probability 25.0% ). Special figure 1-1 is a big hit with 4 rounds, probability variation flag OFF, and 100 times of time saving. Special figure 1-2 has 4 rounds, probability variable flag ON, and time saving continues until the next big hit game state is executed (time saving flag is set to OFF when the next big hit game state is started) It's a big hit. Special figure 1-3 is a big hit with 10 rounds, probability variation flag OFF, and 100 times of time saving. Special figure 1-4 is a big hit with 10 rounds, probability variation flag ON, and time saving continues until the next big hit game state is executed. When the result of the first special symbol jackpot determination is a big hit, the main CPU 101 variably displays the first special symbol over a variation time determined with reference to FIG. Execute control to stop with .

In addition, in this second embodiment, when the result of the jackpot determination of the special symbol is a jackpot, if a predetermined condition is established (in this second embodiment, like special figures 1-2 and 1-4 It is a so-called ``variable probability loop machine'' in which a high probability game state continues until the next big win game state is started after the big win game state is ended. In such a probability variable loop machine, when the result of the jackpot determination of the special symbols in the high probability game state is a jackpot and a predetermined condition is satisfied, the next jackpot game state is started again after the jackpot game state is finished. The high probability game state continues until it is done. Then, if the result of the jackpot determination of the special symbol in the high probability gaming state is a jackpot and the predetermined condition is not satisfied (in this second embodiment, like the special figure 1-1 and the special figure 1-3 If it is a jackpot that does not turn the variable probability flag ON), after the jackpot game state ends, it is controlled to the low probability game state without being controlled to the high probability game state.

When the result of the second special symbol jackpot determination is a big hit, the main CPU 101 selects the main symbol as a special figure 2-1 (distribution probability 50.0%) or a special figure based on the extracted symbol determination random number. 2-2 (distribution probability 50.0%) is determined. Special figure 2-1 is a big hit with 10 rounds, probability variation flag OFF, and 100 times of time saving. Special Figure 2-2 is a big hit with 10 rounds, probability variation flag ON, and time saving continues until the next big hit game state is executed. When the result of the second special symbol jackpot determination is a big hit, the main CPU 101 variably displays the second special symbol over a variation time determined with reference to FIG. Execute the control to stop with .

It should be noted that when the result of the special symbol jackpot determination is a loss, the main CPU 101 determines a losing symbol and executes control to stop the special symbol at the determined losing symbol.

Moreover, the number of rounds is the number of rounds of the round game executed in the jackpot game state. Also, if the probability variation flag is ON, the game state after the jackpot gaming state is completed is controlled to a high probability gaming state (the probability variation flag is set to ON), and if the probability variation flag is OFF, the jackpot gaming state. is controlled to a low-probability gaming state (a gaming state in which the variable probability flag is set to OFF). In the following, 4 rounds, variable probability flag OFF, 100 times of time saving jackpot (for example, special figure 1-1 jackpot) is called “4R normal jackpot”, 4 rounds, variable probability flag ON, next big hit game A jackpot that continues to save time until it is executed (for example, a special figure 1-2 jackpot) is called a “4R probability variable jackpot”, and the number of rounds is 10, the probability variable flag is OFF, and the number of times of time reduction is 100 times (for example, special figure 1- 3, special figure 2-1 jackpot) is called “10R normal jackpot”, the number of rounds is 10, the variable probability flag is ON, and the time saving continues until the next jackpot game is executed (for example, special figure 1-4, Special figure 2-2 jackpot) is called “10R probability variable jackpot”.

In addition, in the second embodiment, when the result of the big hit determination is a big hit, the time saving flag is always set to ON, but it is not necessarily limited to this, and based on the extracted symbol determination random number It may be determined whether the time saving flag is set to ON or OFF according to the main symbol determined by .

[Variation time for special symbols]
Next, with reference to FIG. 170, the flow until the fluctuation time of the special symbol is determined will be described. Since the special symbol variation time corresponds to the special symbol variation pattern, the main CPU 101 simultaneously determines the special symbol variation time and the special symbol variation pattern. In addition, the variation pattern of the special symbol also corresponds to the effect content (for example, the variation pattern of the decorative symbol) displayed on the liquid crystal display device 16 (see FIG. 5, for example) by the sub-control circuit 200 (sub-CPU 201). The pachinko gaming machine of the second embodiment is configured such that the variation pattern of the determined special symbol (that is, the variation time and the contents of the effect) can vary according to the set values. The contents of the table shown in FIG. 170 are stored in the main ROM 102. FIG. In addition, there are also cases where the execution probability of the ready-to-win effect is changed according to the reserved number of special symbols, and the fluctuation time in the normal fluctuation is shortened as the number of reserved special symbols increases, but these are omitted in FIG. .

As shown in FIG. 170, the main CPU 101 determines the fluctuation time of the first special symbol based on the result of the big hit determination of the first special symbol, and the second special symbol based on the result of the big hit determination of the second special symbol. Determines the fluctuation time of the design.

As shown in FIG. 170, in this second embodiment, a table common to the first special symbol and the second special symbol is used to determine the fluctuation time of the special symbol. However, instead of this, the variation time of the special symbol may be determined using different tables for the first special symbol and the second special symbol.

In addition, the special symbol fluctuation time determination table includes the result of the special symbol jackpot determination, the game state, the reach determination random number range, the main symbol when the special symbol jackpot determination result is a big hit, and the effect selection. It defines the relationship between the random number range, the variation pattern (variable display pattern), the variation pattern specification command, the variation time, and the effect content. However, when determining the fluctuation time of the special symbol, the probability variable time-saving gaming state and the time-saving gaming state are not identified. In addition, different random number ranges are set according to set values for the reach determination random number range and the effect selection random number range when determining the fluctuation time of the special symbol.

The reach determination random number range is a random number used for determining whether or not to execute the reach effect for each set value when the result of the special symbol jackpot determination is a loss. The main CPU 101 extracts the reach determination random number from the reach determination counter when the game ball wins the first start port 420 or the second start port 440 (both see FIG. 5, for example), and extracts the extracted reach determination. The random number for use is stored in the main RAM 103 . As described above, the main CPU 101 performs a big hit determination using a big hit determination random value when starting variable display of special symbols. Whether or not to execute the ready-to-win effect is determined using the ready-to-win determination random number. In the second embodiment, the reach determination random number extracted from the reach determination counter is set within a range of 0 to 249, but this range can be changed as appropriate.

For example, if the result of the jackpot determination of the special symbol in the normal game state (probability variation flag OFF and time saving flag OFF) is a loss, the reach determination random number range that is determined to execute the reach effect is 0 in setting 1 and 2 to 25, settings 3 and 4 specify 0 to 26, and settings 5 and 6 specify 0 to 27. In addition, if the result of the special symbol jackpot determination in the probability variable time-saving gaming state (the probability variable flag ON and the time-saving flag ON) is a loss, the reach determination random number range that is determined to execute the reach performance is set 1. 2 is defined to be 0 to 10, settings 3 and 4 are defined to be 0 to 11, and settings 5 and 6 are defined to be 0 to 12.

Thus, when the result of the jackpot determination of the special symbol in the pachinko gaming machine according to the second embodiment is a loss, the ready-to-win effect is more likely to be executed with settings 3 and 4 than with settings 1 and 2, and further, Settings 5 and 6 are easier to execute than settings 3 and 4. That is, the execution frequency of the ready-to-win effect differs according to the set value, and the higher the set value, the higher the execution frequency of the ready-to-win effect.

In the second embodiment, when determining whether or not to execute the ready-to-win effect, the random number range for ready-to-win determination is common between setting 1 and setting 2, is common between setting 3 and setting 4, and is common between setting 5 and setting 5. and Setting 6 are common, but not limited to this, and may be different for all settings.

Also, the determination of whether or not to execute the ready-to-win effect described above is for the case where the result of the special symbol jackpot determination is a loss. decides to execute the ready-to-win effect regardless of the value of the ready-to-win determination random number extracted from the ready-to-win determination counter.

The effect selection random number range is a random number used to determine the variation time of the special symbols for each set value. The main CPU 101 extracts a random number for effect selection from the effect selection counter when a game ball wins in the first start port 420 or the second start port 440 (see FIG. 5 for both), and selects the extracted effect. The random number for use is stored in the main RAM 103 . The main CPU 101 stores random numbers for effect selection stored in the main RAM 103 according to the gaming state and the result of determination of whether or not to execute the ready-to-win effect (only when the result of the jackpot determination of the special symbol is a loss). Use to determine the fluctuation time of the special design. In the second embodiment, the effect selection random number extracted from the effect selection counter is set within a range of 0 to 99, but this range can be changed as appropriate. When the result of the special symbol jackpot determination is a jackpot, the main CPU 101 determines the special symbol variation time using the random number for effect selection stored in the main RAM 103 according to the game state.

Specifically, when it is determined that the result of the special symbol jackpot determination in the normal game state (probability variable flag OFF and time saving flag OFF) is a loss and it is determined to execute the reach effect, the fluctuation time of the special symbol is It is determined as follows. That is, the random number range for effect selection, which is determined to be 20,000 msec (normal reach during normal), is specified to be 0 to 57 in settings 1 and 2, and 0 to 58 in settings 3 and 4. It is defined as 0 to 59 in settings 5 and 6. In addition, the random number range for effect selection, which is determined by the special symbol fluctuation time of 30000 msec (normal medium super reach A), is specified in 58 to 89 in settings 1 and 2, and 59 to 89 in settings 3 and 4. It is stipulated, and it is stipulated from 60 to 89 in settings 5 and 6. Furthermore, the random number range for effect selection, which is determined to be 40000 msec (normal middle super reach B), is defined as 90-99 for setting 1-6 in common.

In addition, when it is determined that the result of the special symbol jackpot determination in the normal game state (probability variation flag OFF and time saving flag OFF) is a loss and that the reach effect is not executed, the special symbol fluctuation time is as follows. is determined by That is, the random number range for effect selection, which is determined to be 10000 msec (normal fluctuation A) for the special symbol fluctuation time, is defined to be 0 to 51 in settings 1 and 2, and is defined to be 0 to 50 in settings 3 and 4. It is defined as 0 to 49 in settings 5 and 6. In addition, the random number range for effect selection, which is determined to be 5000 msec (normal fluctuation B) for the special symbol fluctuation time, is defined to be 52 to 99 in settings 1 and 2, and 51 to 99 in settings 3 and 4. It is defined as 50 to 99 in settings 5 and 6.

In addition, the result of the special symbol jackpot determination in the probability variable time-saving gaming state (variable probability flag ON and time-saving flag ON) or the normal time-saving gaming state (variable probability flag OFF and time-saving flag ON) is a loss and the reach effect is executed. The fluctuation time of the special symbol when determined is determined as follows. That is, the random number range for effect selection, which is determined to be 25000 msec (normal reach during time saving), is specified to be 0 to 57 in settings 1 and 2, and 0 to 58 in settings 3 and 4. It is defined as 0 to 59 in settings 5 and 6. In addition, the random number range for effect selection, which is determined by the special symbol fluctuation time of 35000 msec (super reach A during time saving), is specified in 58 to 89 in settings 1 and 2, and 59 to 89 in settings 3 and 4. It is stipulated, and it is stipulated from 60 to 89 in settings 5 and 6. Furthermore, the random number range for selection of the effect determined by the special symbol fluctuation time of 45000 msec (super reach B during time saving) is defined to be 90 to 99 for settings 1 to 6 in common.

In addition, the result of the special symbol jackpot determination in the probability variable time-saving gaming state (variable probability flag ON and time-saving flag ON) or the normal time-saving gaming state (variable probability flag OFF and time-saving flag ON) is a loss and the reach effect is not executed. The fluctuation time of the special symbol when determined is determined as follows. That is, the random number range for effect selection, which is determined to be 4000 msec (shortened variation A), is specified as 0 to 51 in setting 1 and 2, and is specified in 0 to 50 in setting 3 and 4. It is defined as 0 to 49 in settings 5 and 6. In addition, the random number range for the effect selection, which is determined to be 2000 msec (shortened fluctuation B), is specified as 52 to 99 in setting 1 and 2, and is specified in 51 to 99 in setting 3 and 4. It is defined as 50 to 99 in settings 5 and 6.

In addition, since the main symbol is determined when the result of the special symbol jackpot determination is a big hit, when the result of the special symbol jackpot determination is a loss, the special symbol fluctuation time is determined. not involved.

The fluctuation time of the special symbols when the result of the jackpot determination of the special symbols in the normal game state (the probability variation flag is OFF and the time reduction flag is OFF) is a big hit, is common to all the main symbols, and is determined as follows. That is, the random number range for effect selection, which is determined to be 20000 msec (normal reach during normal), is specified to be 0 to 1 in settings 1 and 2, and 0 to 2 in settings 3 and 4. It is defined as 0 to 3 in settings 5 and 6. In addition, the random number range for effect selection, which is determined by the special symbol fluctuation time of 30000 msec (normal medium super reach A), is specified from 2 to 49 for settings 1 and 2, and from 3 to 49 for settings 3 and 4. It is stipulated, and it is stipulated from 4 to 49 in settings 5 and 6. Furthermore, the random number range for effect selection, which is determined to be 40000 msec (normal middle super reach B), is defined as 90-99 for setting 1-6 in common.

In addition, when the result of the special symbol jackpot determination in the probability variable time-saving gaming state (variable probability flag ON and time-saving flag ON) or the normal time-saving gaming state (variable probability flag OFF and time-saving flag ON) is a big hit, the fluctuation time of the special symbol is Common to all main symbols, it is determined as follows. That is, the random number range for effect selection, which is determined to be 25000 msec (normal reach during time saving), is specified to be 0 to 1 in settings 1 and 2, and 0 to 2 in settings 3 and 4. It is defined as 0 to 3 in settings 5 and 6. In addition, the random number range for effect selection, which is determined by the special symbol fluctuation time of 35000 msec (super reach A during time saving), is specified from 2 to 49 for settings 1 and 2, and from 3 to 49 for settings 3 and 4. It is stipulated, and it is stipulated from 4 to 49 in settings 5 and 6. Furthermore, the random number range for selection of the effect determined by the special symbol fluctuation time of 45000 msec (super reach B during time saving) is defined to be 50 to 99 for setting 1 to 6 in common.

Thus, in the pachinko gaming machine according to the second embodiment, as long as the game state, the result of the special symbol jackpot determination, and the determination result of whether or not to execute the ready-to-win effect are the same, the special symbol is more likely to be determined to have a shorter variation time with settings 3 and 4 than with settings 1 and 2, and more easily with settings 5 and 6 than with settings 3 and 4. there is Therefore, the higher the set value, the shorter the average of the special symbol variation time, and the greater the number of variations of the special symbol per unit time (that is, the number of lotteries). As a result, the degree of expectation that the number of executions of the jackpot game state will increase when viewed in unit time is high, and the probability that the jackpot game state will be executed within the unit time is also high. An advantageous game can be executed.

In the second embodiment, when determining the fluctuation time of the special symbol, the random number range for selection of the effect is common to the setting 1 and the setting 2, is common to the setting 3 and the setting 4, and is common to the setting 5 and the setting 6. However, it is not limited to this, and all setting values may be different.

In addition, when the result of the jackpot judgment of the special symbol is a big hit, the fluctuation time of the special symbol is determined in common for all the main symbols, but it is not limited to this, and the special symbol depends on the main symbol. may be configured to have different fluctuation times.

The variation pattern is data representing variation time and effect content. For example, the variation pattern “02H” represents normal middle super reach B with a variation time of 40000 msec.

The variation pattern designation command is transmitted from the main control circuit 100 to the sub-control circuit 200 as data representing the variation time and effect content. For example, if the variation pattern determined by the main CPU 101 is “05H”, a variation pattern designation command of “83H05H” is transmitted from the main control circuit 100 to the sub-control circuit 200 . At this time, a symbol designation command specifying the main symbol determined by the main control circuit 100 (main CPU 101 ) is also transmitted to the sub-control circuit 200 .

[Decorative pattern stop pattern]
Next, with reference to FIG. 171, an example of a decorative symbol stop symbol when the main symbol is determined with the selection rate shown in FIG. . The contents of the table shown in FIG. 171 are stored in the program ROM 202 of the sub-control circuit 200. FIG.

When the sub-control circuit 200 (sub-CPU 201) receives the symbol designation command transmitted from the main control circuit 100, regardless of the setting value, the sub-control circuit 200 (sub-CPU 201) stops the decorative symbols based on the main symbol specified by the symbol designation command. decide. For example, when the main symbol specified by the symbol designation command sent from the main control circuit 100 is the special symbol 1-2, the sub CPU 201 determines that all the decorative symbols are the same specified symbol (for example, "7" symbol). Since the distribution probability of each aspect is 0%, all the decorative patterns (three decorative patterns in this second embodiment) are the same even number patterns (distribution probability 30.0%), or all decorative symbols are the same odd-numbered symbols (distribution probability 70.0%). In the second embodiment, the specific pattern is the "7" pattern, but it is not limited to this, and other patterns (for example, "V" pattern) are specified if the player can recognize that the jackpot has a high degree of profit. It may be used as a pattern.

Incidentally, as described above, the main symbol shown in FIG. 171 is determined when the result of the special symbol jackpot determination is a jackpot. Therefore, the sub CPU 201 determines the stop pattern of the decorative symbols by referring to FIG. A pattern other than the pattern shown in 1 is determined as a decorative pattern stop pattern. Designs other than the design shown in FIG. 171 correspond to, for example, designs in which at least one of all the decorative designs is different from other decorative designs.

Thus, according to FIG. 171, when the result of the special symbol jackpot determination is a jackpot, the aspect when all the decorative symbols are stopped is either the first special symbol or the second special symbol. whether the game state after the jackpot game state is over is a jackpot controlled to a high probability game state, whether the number of rounds of the round game executed in the jackpot game state is 10R or not. or

That is, when the main symbol determined with reference to FIG. 169 is a special figure 1-1, a special figure 1-3 or a special figure 2-1 (4R normal jackpot or 10R normal jackpot where the probability variation flag is not set ON), Regardless of the setting value, the game always stops in a mode (hereinafter referred to as "first mode") in which all the decorative symbols are the same even-numbered symbols.

Also, when the main design is a special figure 1-2 (4R probability variation jackpot), regardless of the setting value, the first mode or all the decorative designs are the same odd number design (other than the specific design "7" design (Odd number of symbols)) (hereinafter referred to as "second mode").

Also, when the main design is a special figure 1-4 (10R probability variation jackpot), regardless of the setting value, all the decorative designs are the same odd number design, or all the decorative designs are the same specific design. It stops in a certain mode (hereinafter referred to as "specific mode").

Furthermore, when the main symbol is a special figure 2-2 (10R probability variation big hit), regardless of the setting value, it stops in a specific mode. Both the special figure 1-4 and the special figure 2-2 are 10R probability variable big hits, but the special figure 1-4 is a big hit based on the winning of the game ball to the first start port 420, so the big hit in the normal game state likely to be elected. Moreover, since the special figure 2-2 is a jackpot based on the winning of the game ball to the second starting port 440, there is a high possibility that the jackpot has been won in the high-probability game state or the time-saving game state.

In this way, when it stops in a specific mode, the 10R probability variable jackpot with the highest degree of profit for the player is confirmed, and when it stops in a mode where all the decorative symbols are the same odd number symbols, the probability variable jackpot (4R probability variable jackpot or 10R The probability variation jackpot) is confirmed. On the other hand, when the game is stopped in the first mode, although it is determined that the 10R high probability variable big hit is not the highest profit degree for the player, the possibility of the 4R high probability variable big win remains.

In addition, when the result of the judgment of the big hit of the special symbol is a big hit, the player may be informed of which big hit the particular big hit is when all the decorative symbols are stopped, or the big hit game may be played. The notification may be made while the state is being executed, or the notification may be made when the big win game state ends. In addition, although it is not adopted in the pachinko gaming machine according to the second embodiment, the game state after the jackpot game state is ended is a jackpot controlled to a high probability game state. It is also possible to control to a so-called "latent probability variable state" that does not clearly indicate to the player that the state is controlled.

[Another example of the basic specifications of the pachinko machine according to the second embodiment]

Although the basic specifications of the pachinko gaming machine according to the second embodiment are as described above, they are not limited to the above specifications and can be changed as appropriate. An example in which the basic specifications are appropriately modified will be described below. However, the following description is an example, and needless to say, the present invention is not limited to this.
[Modified example of fluctuation time of special symbols]
Next, with reference to FIG. 172, a modification of the special symbol variation time (that is, the special symbol variation pattern) will be described. FIG. 172 is a diagram showing another example of the special symbol variation time determination table stored in the main ROM 102. As shown in FIG. In addition, as described above, depending on the number of reserved special symbols, the execution probability of the ready-to-win effect is changed, and as the number of reserved special symbols increases, the fluctuation time in the normal fluctuation is shortened. are omitted.

In addition, the main CPU of the pachinko gaming machine according to the modification of the special symbol variation special symbol explained with reference to FIG. A counting means (not shown) is provided. This lottery number counting means is reset, for example, at the start of the big win game state, and starts counting the number of variations of the special symbols when the big win game state ends.

As shown in FIG. 172, in another example, when the result of the special symbol jackpot determination in the normal game state (probability variation flag OFF and time saving flag OFF) is a loss, the determination of whether or not to execute the reach effect is It is performed according to both the number of times of variation of the special symbols counted from the point of time when the jackpot game state is finished and the set value.

Specifically, when the number of fluctuations of the special symbol starting from a specific time (for example, when the jackpot game state ends) is 0 to 1000 times, the reach determination random number range is determined to execute the reach effect. is defined to be 0 to 25 for settings 1 and 2, 0 to 26 for settings 3 and 4, and 0 to 27 for settings 5 and 6. These are the same as in FIG.

On the other hand, when the number of fluctuations of the special symbols starting from the time when the jackpot game state ends is 1001 times or more, the ready-to-win determination random number range for determining the execution of the ready-to-win effect is 0 to 10 in setting 1 and 2. Settings 3 and 4 are defined as 0 to 5, and settings 5 and 6 are defined as 0 to 1. That is, if the result of the special symbol jackpot judgment is a loss, the probability of executing the reach effect is twice as high as the setting 3.4 compared to the setting 3.4, and the setting 3.4 is higher than the setting 5.6. The execution probability of the ready-to-win effect is as high as 5 times (the execution probability of the ready-to-reach effect is as high as 10 in setting 1 and 2 compared to setting 5 and 6).

In this way, when the number of variations of the special symbols starting from the point of time when the big win game state ends is 1001 times or more, when the number of times of variations of the special symbols starting from the point of time when the big win game state ends is 0 to 1000 times. , the execution probability of the ready-to-win effect is significantly different depending on the setting.

In addition, when it is determined that the result of the jackpot determination of the special symbol in the normal game state (probability variation flag OFF and time saving flag OFF) is a loss and the reach effect is executed, the fluctuation time of the special symbol is also changed to the jackpot game. The setting difference is remarkable between the case where the number of fluctuations of the special symbol is 0 to 1000 times and the case where it is 1001 times or more starting from the time when the state ends.

Specifically, when the number of fluctuations of special symbols starting from the time when the jackpot game state is completed is 0 to 1000 times, the fluctuation time of special symbols is 20000 msec (normal reach during normal). Random number range for effect selection. is defined to be 0 to 57 for settings 1 and 2, 0 to 58 for settings 3 and 4, and 0 to 59 for settings 5 and 6. In addition, the random number range for effect selection, which is determined by the special symbol fluctuation time of 30000 msec (normal medium super reach A), is specified in 58 to 89 in settings 1 and 2, and 59 to 89 in settings 3 and 4. It is stipulated, and it is stipulated from 60 to 89 in settings 5 and 6. Furthermore, the random number range for effect selection, which is determined to be 40000 msec (normal middle super reach B), is defined as 90-99 for setting 1-6 in common. These are the same as in FIG.

On the other hand, when the number of fluctuations of the special symbols is 1001 times or more starting from the time when the jackpot game state ends, the random number range for effect selection, which is determined to be 20000 msec (normal reach during normal), is set to 1. -4 are not defined, and settings 5 and 6 are defined as 0-99. In addition, the random number range for effect selection, which is determined by the special symbol fluctuation time of 30000 msec (normal medium super reach A), is defined as 0 to 89 in settings 1 to 4, and is not defined in settings 5 and 6. . Furthermore, the random number range for effect selection, which is determined by the special symbol fluctuation time 40000 msec (normal medium super reach B), is stipulated in settings 1 to 4 common to 90 to 99, and in settings 5 and 6. do not have. Therefore, in a so-called addictive situation where the number of variations of the special symbol is 1001 times or more starting from the time when the jackpot game state ends, the ready-to-win performance to be executed suggests the set value to the player. becomes possible.

In addition, when the result of the jackpot determination of the special symbol in the normal game state (probability variation flag OFF and time reduction flag OFF) is a loss and it is determined to execute the reach effect, the starting point is the time when the jackpot game state ends. When the number of variations of the special symbols to be executed is 1001 times or more, the higher the set value, the lower the execution probability of the ready-to-win effect. Also, even if the ready-to-win effect is executed, the higher the set value is, the higher the probability of executing the ready-to-win effect with the shorter fluctuation time of the special symbols.

In this way, when the number of fluctuations of the special symbols starting from the end of the jackpot game state is 1001 or more, the higher the set value, the shorter the average of the fluctuation time of the special symbols per one time. The number of fluctuations of special symbols per hour (that is, the number of lotteries) is further increased. As a result, the degree of expectation that the number of executions of the jackpot game will increase in unit time is further increased, and the probability that the jackpot game is executed within the unit time is further increased.

In addition, when the number of variations of the special symbol starting from the end of the big win game state is less than 1000 times, it is extremely difficult to guess the set value from the execution frequency of the ready-to-win effect, but the big win game state. When the number of fluctuations of the special symbols starting from the end of 1001 times or more, the execution frequency of the reach effect will differ significantly depending on the set value, so when you get hooked, you can guess the set value. There may be room for improvement. As a result, when the player is hooked, the setting value set for the player can be changed without giving a direct loss to the hole (for example, without giving a game ball to the player). Giving the player a chance to guess makes it possible to give the player amusement. Moreover, although the player thinks that the player wants the ready-to-win effect under normal circumstances, in the second embodiment, the lower the execution frequency of the ready-to-win effect when the so-called big hook is performed, the higher the set value is. Since the player can have expectations, even if the execution frequency of the ready-to-win performance is low, it is possible to reduce the desire to continue the game.

It should be noted that, in the second embodiment, the starting point for counting the number of fluctuations in the special symbol is the point in time when the jackpot game state ends, but the present invention is not limited to this. An arbitrary point of time can be set as a starting point, such as when the high-probability game state ends in a pachinko machine called ST machine where the state ends, or when the time-saving game state ends.

In addition, in the second embodiment, when the number of fluctuations of special symbols starting from a specific point of time is 1001 times or more, the execution probability of the ready-to-win effect and the fluctuation time of the special symbols differ remarkably according to the set values. It does not necessarily have to be 1001 times or more. For example, the number of times is not limited to a specific number as long as the player feels that it is addictive.

In addition, in the second embodiment, when the number of fluctuations of special symbols starting from a specific point of time is equal to or greater than the specified number of times, the execution probability of the ready-to-win effect and the fluctuation time of the special symbols differ significantly according to the set values. Remarkably different according to the set value is not necessarily limited to the execution probability of reach production and the fluctuation time of the special symbol. For example, the main CPU 101 sets a predetermined waiting time (hereinafter referred to as "opening time") from when it is determined that the result of the special symbol jackpot lottery is a jackpot to when the jackpot game state is actually controlled. ing. Also, the main CPU 101 provides a predetermined waiting time (hereinafter referred to as "ending time") from the end of the jackpot game state to the start of the variable display of the special symbols. The sub CPU 201 (display control circuit 204) displays the opening effect on the liquid crystal display device 16 during the opening time, and displays the ending effect on the liquid crystal display device 16 during the ending time. In the opening performance, for example, a performance indicating that the special lottery result was a big hit, a performance to celebrate that the special lottery result was a big hit, and a game method in the big win game state (for example, hitting right). Instructional performances and the like are performed. In the ending production, the production showing the amount of prize balls paid out in the jackpot game state, the production showing the number of times the jackpot game state was continued (the number of consecutive games), and the game state after the jackpot game state ended is a high probability game. Effect indicating that the game is controlled by the state, Effect of teaching the game method in the game state after the jackpot game state is over (for example, returning to left-handed hitting, etc.), Effect of displaying the logo of the pachinko machine manufacturer, etc. is done.

Specifically, all or at least one of the opening time, the interval time, and the ending time is shortened as the set value increases, so that the higher the set value, the longer the time required for the jackpot game state. can be shortened. As a result, it is possible to increase the average number of special symbol variations per unit time (that is, the number of lotteries), and the higher the set value, the more advantageous the game can be executed for the player.

In addition, for example, in a pachinko machine where the higher the set value is, the higher the expected ball output value is (for example, the higher the set value is, the higher the probability of winning the jackpot is), a large amount of prize balls are paid out in a short time compared to the low set value. Considering the possibility, all or at least one of the opening time, the interval time, and the ending time may be configured to be longer as the set value is higher. In this case, all or at least one of the opening time, the interval time, and the ending time becomes longer as the set value with the higher expected ball output value increases, so that the fun of the game is ensured by the high set value. While doing so, it is possible to suppress the number of prize balls paid out per unit time.

It should be noted that the main CPU 101 does not allow a game ball to enter the starting port (first starting port 420, second starting port 440) even when the opening time, ending time and jackpot game state are controlled. When detected, various random numbers are extracted, and setting check processing (see FIG. 188) in steps S3074 and S3082, which will be described later, is executed. And, when it is determined that the set value data is outside the range of "0" to "5" in this setting check process (NO in step S3721 to be described later), even if it is controlled to the jackpot game state , the main CPU 101 turns off the game permission flag (step S3722, which will be described later), making it impossible to progress the game.

[Modified example of jackpot distribution and stop design of decorative design]
Next, referring to FIGS. 173 to 175, a first modified example and a second modified example of jackpot allocation (selection rate of main symbols) when the result of jackpot determination of special symbols is a jackpot, and these The stop symbols of the decorative symbols in the first modified example and the second modified example will be described. In the first modified example and the second modified example, the selection rate of the main symbol differs according to the set value. FIG. 173 is a diagram showing a first modification of the main symbol selection rate (jackpot type determination table) when the result of the special symbol jackpot determination is a big hit, and FIG. FIG. 12 is a diagram showing a second modification of the selection rate of main symbols (jackpot type determination table) when the result is a jackpot. Also, FIG. 175 is a modification of the decorative design determination table stored in the program ROM 202 of the sub-control circuit 200, and is commonly used in the first modification and the second modification.

[First modification]
First, the first modification will be described with reference to FIGS. 173 and 175. FIG. 173 are stored in the main ROM 102, and the contents of the table shown in FIG. 175 are stored in the program ROM 202 of the sub-control circuit 200. FIG.

As shown in FIG. 173, in the first modification, when the result of the special symbol jackpot determination is a big hit, the main CPU 101 adjusts the main symbol according to the set value based on the extracted symbol determination random number. With probability, special figure 1-1, special figure 1-2, special figure 1-3, special figure 1-4, special figure 1-5, special figure 1-6, special figure 1-7, and special figure 1 Decide on one of -8. However, in this first modification, special figure 1-1 and special figure 1-3 are "4R normal jackpot", special figure 1-2 and special figure 1-4 are "4R probability variable big hit", special figure 1 -5, special figure 1-7, special figure 2-1 and special figure 2-3 are "10R normal jackpot", special figure 1-6, special figure 1-8, special figure 2-2 and special figure 2- 4 is "10R probability variable big hit".

Specifically, the main CPU 101 sets the main symbol to special figure 1-1 (distribution probability 12.5%), special figure 1-2 (distribution probability 12.5%), with common probability in setting 1 to setting 4. %), special figure 1-3 (distribution probability 12.5%), special figure 1-4 (distribution probability 12.5%), special figure 1-5 (distribution probability 12.5%), special figure 1-6 (distribution probability 12.5%), special figure 1-7 (distribution probability 12.5%), and special figure 1-8 (distribution probability 12.5%), either decide. On the other hand, in setting 5, the main pattern is special figure 1-1 (distribution probability 10.0%), special figure 1-2 (distribution probability 10.0%), special figure 1-3 (distribution probability Division probability 15.0%), Special figure 1-4 (Distribution probability 15.0%), Special figure 1-5 (Distribution probability 10.0%), Special figure 1-6 (Distribution probability 10.0 %), Special Figure 1-7 (distribution probability 15.0%), and Special Figure 1-8 (distribution probability 15.0%). Also, in setting 6, the main pattern is special figure 1-1 (distribution probability 5.0%), special figure 1-2 (distribution probability 5.0%), special figure 1-3 (distribution probability 20 .0%), special figure 1-4 (distribution probability 20.0%), special figure 1-5 (distribution probability 5.0%), special figure 1-6 (distribution probability 5.0%), Toku-zu 1-7 (distribution probability 20.0%) and Toku-zu 1-8 (distribution probability 20.0%), to determine either.

That is, special figures 1-2 and special figures 1-4 (both 4R probability variable jackpots), which have a common jackpot type, have a high set value ( For example, in settings 5 and 6), the selection rate of special figures 1-4 (15.0 %, 20.0% at setting 6) is higher (common to settings 1 to 4).

Similarly, special figures 1-6 and special figures 1-8 (both 10R probability variable jackpots), which have a common jackpot type, have a high set value, although the combined probability of both is 25.0% regardless of the setting (For example, settings 5 and 6), the selection rate of special figures 1-8 (15. 0% and 20.0% at setting 6) is higher (common to settings 1 to 4).

Furthermore, for special figures 2-2 and special figures 2-4 (both 10R probability variable jackpots), which have a common jackpot type, the combined probability of both is 50.0% regardless of the setting, but the high setting value (For example, setting 5 and 6), the selection rate of special figure 2-4 (30. 0%, 40.0% at setting 6) is higher.

By the way, if the result of the special symbol jackpot determination is a jackpot, the sub CPU 201, as shown in FIG. , Special Figure 2-1, Special Figure 2-3 (4R normal jackpot or 10R normal jackpot where the probability variation flag is not set ON), regardless of the setting value, always, for example, the decorative pattern displayed on the liquid crystal display device 16 is controlled to stop in the first mode.

On the other hand, when the special figure 1-2 (4R probability variable jackpot), the sub CPU 201, regardless of the setting value, the first mode (selection rate 50.0%), or the second mode (selection rate 50.0% ) to stop. Also, when the main symbol is the special figure 1-4 (4R probability variable jackpot), the sub CPU 201, regardless of the set value, either the first mode (selection rate 25.0%) or the second mode (selection rate 75%) .0%). Here, at a high setting value (eg setting 5 6), the selection rate of special figure 1-4 than the selection rate of special figure 1-2 (10.0% at setting 5, 5.0% at setting 6) (15.0% at setting 5, 20.0% at setting 6) is higher. Therefore, even though the special figure 1-2 and special figure 1-4 have the same jackpot type (both 4R probability variable jackpots), the high setting value is compared to the low setting value (for example, setting 1 to 4) As a result, the probability that the decorative symbols stop in the second mode (a mode in which the player expects a higher degree of expectation than in the first mode) increases.

Similarly, when the special figure 1-6 (10R probability variable jackpot), the sub CPU201 always controls to stop in the second mode regardless of the set value. Also, when the main symbol is the special figure 1-8 (10R probability variable jackpot), the sub CPU 201, regardless of the setting value, either the second mode (selection rate 50.0%) or the specific mode (selection rate 50.0%). 0%). Here, as described above, at a high setting value (for example, setting 5/6), the selection rate of special figure 1-6 (10.0% at setting 5, 5.0% at setting 6) Special figure 1- The selection rate of 8 (15.0% at setting 5, 20.0% at setting 6) is higher. Therefore, even though the special figure 1-6 and the special figure 1-8 have the same jackpot type (both 10R probability variable jackpot), the high setting value is compared to the low setting value (for example, setting 1 to 4) Therefore, the probability that the decorative symbols will stop in a specific mode (a mode with the highest degree of expectation for the player) is increased.

Furthermore, similarly, when the special figure 2-2 (10R probability variable jackpot), the sub CPU 201, regardless of the set value, the second mode (selection rate 50.0%) or the specific mode (selection rate 50.0%) control to stop at Also, when the main symbol is a special figure 2-4 (10R probability variable jackpot), the sub CPU 201 always controls to stop in a specific mode regardless of the set value. Here, as described above, at a high setting value (for example, setting 5/6), the selection rate of special figure 2-2 (20.0% at setting 5, 10.0% at setting 6) Special figure 2- The selection rate of 4 (30.0% with setting 5 and 40.0% with setting 6) is higher. Therefore, even though the special figure 2-2 and special figure 2-4 have the same jackpot type (both 10R probability variable jackpots), the high setting value is compared to the low setting value (for example, setting 1 to 4) As a result, the probability that the decorative pattern will stop in a specific manner increases.

In this way, when the result of the judgment of the jackpot of the special symbols is a jackpot, even if the jackpot types are the same, it is possible to make the stopping mode of the decorative symbols different according to the set value. Become. In particular, when the set value is high (for example, setting 5 or 6), when the result of the special symbol jackpot determination is a jackpot, the synthesis probability of being determined as a specific jackpot type (for example, 10R probability variable jackpot) is the same. Also, it is possible to stop the decorative symbols in a mode (eg, a specific mode) that has a relatively high degree of expectation for the player with a high probability compared to the case of low setting values (eg, settings 1 to 4). Become.

[Second modification]
Next, the second modification will be described with reference to FIGS. 174 and 175. FIG. The contents of the table shown in FIG. 174 are stored in the main ROM 102. FIG.

In the first modification, whether or not the variable probability flag is set to ON is determined according to the main symbol determined when the result of the jackpot determination of the special symbol is a big hit. On the other hand, in the second modification, it is not immediately determined whether or not the variable probability flag is set to ON according to the main symbol determined when the result of the jackpot determination of the special symbol is a big hit. do not have. Specifically, in the second modification, unlike the first modification, a variable probability attacker (not shown) is provided inside, for example, the big winning opening 540 (see FIG. 5, for example). Then, for example, when the game ball is detected to enter the probability variable attacker while being controlled to the jackpot game state, the game state after the jackpot game state ends is controlled to the high probability game state, and the probability variable attacker is controlled. When the big win game state ends without detecting the entry of the game ball, the game state after the big win game state ends is controlled to the low probability game state. Thus, the pachinko game machine controlled to a high probability game state based on the entry of the game ball into the variable probability attacker is also a so-called "variable probability loop machine".

As shown in FIG. 174, in the second modification, the easiness of the game ball entering the variable probability attacker differs depending on the main symbol determined when the result of the jackpot determination of the special symbol is a big hit. ing. For example, in the special figure 1-1, the entry of the game ball to the variable attacker is controlled to the jackpot game state in a difficult manner, and in the special figure 1-2, the game ball enters the probability variable attacker in a jackpot game state in an easy manner. controlled by In this second embodiment, the number of times of time saving when the jackpot is hit in the "mode in which it is difficult for the game ball to enter the probability variable attacker" is 100 times, and the "mode in which the game ball is easy to enter into the probability variable attacker". In the case of a big win at , the time saving continues until the next big win game is executed.

In this second embodiment, the "mode in which it is difficult for the game ball to enter the variable probability attacker" is almost equal to the possibility that the game ball enters the variable probability attacker while being controlled to the big hit game state (almost It is controlled to a low probability game state with a probability close to 100%). In addition, "a mode in which the game ball is easy to enter into the variable probability attacker", as long as the game ball is shot toward the placement part of the variable probability attacker (for example, the big winning opening 540 (see, for example, FIG. 5)), the game state is a big hit. It is a mode in which the game ball almost enters the probability variable attacker while being controlled (controlled to a high probability game state with a probability close to 100%). Therefore, in this second modification, the jackpot in "a mode in which it is difficult for the game ball to enter the probability variable attacker" is called a "normal jackpot", and a "mode in which the game ball enters the probability variable attacker is easy". A big hit is called a "variable big hit."

However, if it is "a mode in which the game ball enters the variable attacker easily", it is controlled to a high probability game state with a probability close to 100%, and if it is "a mode in which it is difficult for the game ball to enter the variable attacker". Instead of being controlled to a low probability gaming state with a probability close to 100%, when it is "a mode in which it is easy for the game ball to enter the variable attacker", "it is difficult for the game ball to enter the variable attacker" It may be a mode controlled to a high probability game state with a relatively higher probability than the mode ".

As a method of creating a difficult mode and an easy mode for the game ball to enter the variable probability attacker, for example, the variable probability attacker is not provided in addition to the large winning opening 540 (see, for example, FIG. 5) equipped with the variable probability attacker inside. It is conceivable to provide other big prize openings (not shown). And, a mode in which it is easy for the game ball to enter the variable attacker (for example, special figure 1-2, special figure 1-4, special figure 1-6, special figure 1-8, special figure 2-2, special figure 2 -4) When it is, it controls to the big hit game state that opens the big winning mouth 540, and it is difficult for the game ball to enter the variable attacker (for example, special figure 1-1, special figure 1-3, special figure 1 -5, special figure 1-7, special figure 2-1, special figure 2-3), by controlling to a big win game state in which the other big winning openings are opened without opening the big winning opening 540, It is possible to create a mode in which it is difficult for the game ball to enter the variable probability attacker and a mode in which it is easy. It should be noted that, as long as it is possible to create a mode in which it is difficult for the game ball to enter the variable probability attacker and a mode in which it is easy, it is not limited to the above mode.

In addition, as described above, when a large winning opening 540 having a variable probability attacker inside and another large winning opening (not shown) not equipped with a variable probability attacker are provided, a large winning prize opened in the jackpot game state The mouth may have a setting difference. For example, at a low setting value such as setting 1, a big win game state in which other big winning openings are opened is more likely to be selected than the big winning opening 540, and at a high setting value such as setting 6, the other big winning openings are more likely to be selected. It is possible to make it easier to select the big winning game state in which the big winning opening 540 is opened as the set value is higher, such that the big winning gaming state in which the big winning opening 540 is opened is likely to be selected.

As shown in FIG. 174, in such a second modification, when the result of the special symbol jackpot determination is a jackpot, the main CPU 101 converts the main symbol to the set value based on the extracted symbol determination random number. With a probability according to the special figure 1-1, special figure 1-2, special figure 1-3, special figure 1-4, special figure 1-5, special figure 1-6, special figure 1-7, and, Determine one of the special figures 1-8. However, in this second modification, special figure 1-1 and special figure 1-3 are "4R normal jackpot", special figure 1-2 and special figure 1-4 are "4R probability variable big hit", special figure 1 -5, special figure 1-7, special figure 2-1 and special figure 2-3 are "10R normal jackpot", special figure 1-6, special figure 1-7, special figure 2-2 and special figure 2- 4 is "10R probability variable big hit".

Specifically, the main CPU 101 sets the main symbol to special figure 1-1 (distribution probability 12.5%), special figure 1-2 (distribution probability 12.5%), with common probability in setting 1 to setting 4. %), special figure 1-3 (distribution probability 12.5%), special figure 1-4 (distribution probability 12.5%), special figure 1-5 (distribution probability 12.5%), special figure 1-6 (distribution probability 12.5%), special figure 1-7 (distribution probability 12.5%), and special figure 1-8 (distribution probability 12.5%), either decide. On the other hand, in setting 5, the main pattern is special figure 1-1 (distribution probability 10.0%), special figure 1-2 (distribution probability 10.0%), special figure 1-3 (distribution probability Division probability 15.0%), Special figure 1-4 (Distribution probability 15.0%), Special figure 1-5 (Distribution probability 10.0%), Special figure 1-6 (Distribution probability 10.0 %), Special Figure 1-7 (distribution probability 15.0%), and Special Figure 1-8 (distribution probability 15.0%). Also, in setting 6, the main pattern is special figure 1-1 (distribution probability 5.0%), special figure 1-2 (distribution probability 5.0%), special figure 1-3 (distribution probability 20 .0%), special figure 1-4 (distribution probability 20.0%), special figure 1-5 (distribution probability 5.0%), special figure 1-6 (distribution probability 5.0%), Toku-zu 1-7 (distribution probability 20.0%) and Toku-zu 1-8 (distribution probability 20.0%), to determine either.

That is, special figures 1-2 and special figures 1-4 (both 4R probability variable jackpots), which have a common jackpot type, have a high set value ( For example, in settings 5 and 6), the selection rate of special figures 1-4 (15.0 %, 20.0% at setting 6) is higher (common to settings 1 to 4).

Similarly, special figures 1-6 and special figures 1-8 (both 10R probability variable jackpots), which have a common jackpot type, have a high set value, although the combined probability of both is 25.0% regardless of the setting (For example, settings 5 and 6), the selection rate of special figures 1-8 (15. 0% and 20.0% at setting 6) is higher (common to settings 1 to 4).

Furthermore, for special figures 2-2 and special figures 2-4 (both 10R probability variable jackpots), which have a common jackpot type, the combined probability of both is 50.0% regardless of the setting, but the high setting value (For example, setting 5 and 6), the selection rate of special figure 2-4 (30. 0%, 40.0% at setting 6) is higher.

By the way, if the result of the special symbol jackpot determination is a jackpot, the sub CPU 201, as shown in FIG. , Special Figure 2-1, Special Figure 2-3 (4R normal jackpot or 10R normal jackpot where the probability variation flag is not set ON), regardless of the setting value, always, for example, the decorative pattern displayed on the liquid crystal display device 16 is controlled to stop in the first mode.

On the other hand, when it is a special figure 1-2 (4R probability variable jackpot), the sub CPU 201, regardless of the setting value, the first mode (selection rate 50.0%), or the second mode (selection rate 50.0% ) to stop. Also, when the main symbol is the special figure 1-4 (4R probability variable jackpot), the sub CPU 201, regardless of the setting value, either the first mode (selection rate 25.0%) or the second mode (selection rate 75 .0%). Here, at a high setting value (eg setting 5 6), the selection rate of special figure 1-4 than the selection rate of special figure 1-2 (10.0% at setting 5, 5.0% at setting 6) (15.0% at setting 5, 20.0% at setting 6) is higher. Therefore, even though the special figure 1-2 and special figure 1-4 have the same jackpot type (4R probability variable jackpot), the high setting value is compared to the low setting value (for example, setting 1 to 4) Therefore, the probability that the decorative symbols stop in the second mode (a mode in which the player expects a higher degree of expectation than in the first mode) increases.

Similarly, when the special figure 1-6 (10R probability variable jackpot), the sub CPU201 always controls to stop in the second mode regardless of the set value. Also, when the main symbol is the special figure 1-8 (10R probability variable jackpot), the sub CPU 201, regardless of the set value, either the second mode (selection rate 50.0%) or the specific mode (selection rate 50.0%). 0%). Here, as described above, at a high setting value (eg setting 5 6), the selection rate of special figure 1-6 (10.0% at setting 5, 5.0% at setting 6) Special figure 1- The selection rate of 8 (15.0% at setting 5, 20.0% at setting 6) is higher. Therefore, even though the special figure 1-6 and the special figure 1-8 have the same jackpot type (both 10R probability variable jackpot), the high setting value is compared to the low setting value (for example, setting 1 to 4) Therefore, the probability that the decorative symbols will stop in a specific mode (a mode with the highest degree of expectation for the player) is increased.

Furthermore, similarly, when the special figure 2-2 (10R probability variable jackpot), the sub CPU 201, regardless of the set value, the second mode (selection rate 50.0%) or the specific mode (selection rate 50.0%) control to stop at Also, when the main symbol is a special figure 2-4 (10R probability variable jackpot), the sub CPU 201 always controls to stop in a specific mode regardless of the set value. Here, as described above, at a high setting value (for example, setting 5/6), the selection rate of special figure 2-2 (20.0% at setting 5, 10.0% at setting 6) Special figure 2- The selection rate of 4 (30.0% with setting 5 and 40.0% with setting 6) is higher. Therefore, even though the special figure 2-2 and special figure 2-4 have the same jackpot type (both 10R probability variable jackpots), the high setting value is compared to the low setting value (for example, setting 1 to 4) As a result, the probability that the decorative pattern will stop in a specific manner increases.

Thus, in the second modification, as in the first modification, when the result of the jackpot determination of the special symbols is a jackpot, even if the jackpot types are the same, the decoration is made according to the set value. It is possible to make it possible to change the stop mode of the symbols. Especially when the setting value is high (for example, setting 5 or 6), even if the combination probability of being determined to be a specific jackpot type (for example, 10R probability variable jackpot) is the same when the result of the jackpot determination of the special symbol is a jackpot. Also, it is possible to stop the decorative symbols in a mode (eg, a specific mode) that has a relatively high degree of expectation for the player with a high probability compared to the case of low setting values (eg, settings 1 to 4). Become.

In both the first and second modifications described above, by varying the selection rate of the main symbol according to the set value, the stop symbol of the decorative symbol can be changed according to the set value. is doing. That is, the sub CPU 201 does not control the stationary symbols of the decorative symbols according to the set value, but controls the stationary symbols of the decorative symbols according to the main symbols. The stop pattern of can be different. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the control by the sub CPU 201 may be configured such that the stop design of the decorative design can be changed according to the set value.

According to the first modification and the second modification described above, providing a difference in the selection rate of special symbols according to the set value, that is, the number of rounds, the probability variable rush rate, and the time saving rush rate. It becomes possible.

[Processing by main control circuit]
Next, various processes executed by the main CPU 101 of the pachinko gaming machine will be described with reference to FIGS. 176 to 197. FIG. However, in the following description (description of processing in the main CPU 101), the terms power switch 35, setting switch 332, setting key 328, performance display monitor 334, error notification monitor 336, external terminal board 323, and hall computer 700 are used. are shown in FIG.

[Power-on processing]
FIG. 176 is a flowchart showing an example of power-on processing by the main CPU 101. FIG. For example, when a hall official turns on the power switch 35, the power of the pachinko game machine is turned on. When the power of the pachinko gaming machine is turned on, as shown in the figure, the main CPU 101 performs power-on processing (step S3010), setting processing related to set values (step S3020), and game return processing (step S3030). ) are executed in order. Each of these processes will be described below. Although not shown, the main CPU 101 constantly checks whether the voltage has dropped to a predetermined level. A process when a power failure occurs, which will be described later, is performed.

[Processing when power is turned on]
FIG. 177 is a flowchart illustrating an example of power-on processing. When the power of the pachinko game machine is turned on, the main CPU 101 sets an initial value to the stack pointer as shown in the figure (step S3011).

Next, the main CPU 101 permits access to the RWM (main RAM 103) (step S3012), and then performs sub-control reception reception wait processing to wait until the sub-control circuit 200 can receive a signal (step S3013). After that, the main CPU 101 performs initialization processing for various devices incorporated in the CPU (step S3014).

Next, the main CPU 101 activates switches related to setting values (step S3015). The switches related to setting values are switches used when performing the setting processing in step S3020. Equivalent to. Then, the main CPU 101 activates the switches related to the setting (step S3015), performs read processing of each switch (step S3016), and then performs game permission processing (step S3017).

FIG. 178 is a flowchart showing an example of game permission processing. In the game permission process of step S3017 (see FIG. 177), management of a game permission flag for permitting execution of a game is performed. The game permission flag is a flag indicating whether or not to permit the execution of a game, and is set to OFF when the game cannot be executed, for example, when the work area of the RWM (main RAM 103) is not normal. . The game permission processing (step S3017) will be described below.

The main CPU 101 first determines whether or not the power failure situation identification flag is ON (step S31710). The power failure status identification flag is a flag that identifies the status of the previous power failure occurrence. That is, for example, if a power failure occurs during a setting change process, which will be described later, there is a high possibility that the power failure occurred before the setting change process was properly completed. Can not do it. Therefore, when the power is turned on, the situation at the time of the previous power failure can be identified. In the second embodiment, for example, when a power failure occurs during a normal game or during setting confirmation processing, which will be described later, the power failure situation identification flag is set to ON until the power failure. On the other hand, when a power failure occurs during setting change processing, which will be described later, the power failure status identification flag is set to OFF until the power failure. Also, when a power failure occurs during an abnormal state in steps S3722 to S3727, which will be described later, the status identification flag at power failure is set to OFF. In the initial state in which the power has not been turned on yet, or when the data in the main RAM 103 has disappeared because the power has not been turned on for a long period of time, the power failure status identification flag is OFF. The above-mentioned "during normal game" means a game during which neither the setting change process nor the setting confirmation process is performed, and does not mean a normal game state in which both the variable probability flag and the time saving flag are OFF. (same as below).

In step S31710, if the power failure situation identification flag is ON (YES in step S31710), the main CPU 101 proceeds to step S31720. is turned OFF (step S31750), and then the process moves to step S31720.

In step S 31720 , the main CPU 101 checks the work area of the main RAM 103 . This work area check also includes checking whether the set value data is within a specified range (within the range of "0" to "5" in the second embodiment).

The work areas of the main RAM 103 are divided into a general work area where data is cleared when backup clear processing (described later) is performed, and a work area where data is held without being cleared even when backup clear processing (described later) is performed. It is divided into a specific work area. In this specific work area, for example, performance display data, set value data, and the like are stored. This is data indicating a set value. In the second embodiment, set value data of "0" to "5" correspond to set values "1" to "6" in six steps, respectively. That is, for example, if the set value is "4", the set value data stored in the main RAM 103 is "3".

In step S31730, main CPU 101 determines whether or not the working area of main RAM 103 is normal. If there is, the game permission flag is turned OFF (step S31760), and then the process moves to step S31740. For example, when the set value data is not within a specified range (within the range of "0" to "5" in this second embodiment), the main CPU 101 determines that the working area of the main RAM 103 is not normal.

At step S31740, the main CPU 101 determines whether or not the game permission flag is ON. In this step S31740, if power failure occurs during a normal game or during setting confirmation processing to be described later (YES in step S31710), and if the working area of the main RAM 103 is normal (YES in step S31730), the game permission flag is turned ON. is determined to be On the other hand, when a power failure occurs during setting change processing or in an abnormal state (NO in step S31710), and when the work area of main RAM 103 is not normal (NO in step S31730), the game permission flag is OFF. is determined. Then, if the game permission flag is ON (YES in step S31740), the game permission process is terminated. When the game permission flag is OFF (NO in step S31740), the process moves to step S31770.

It should be noted that in this specification, the power outage that occurs during the normal game, the power outage that occurs during the setting confirmation process, and the power outage that occurs during the setting change process are referred to as normal power outages, and steps S3722 to S3727, which will be described later. Abnormal power outage is defined as a power outage that occurs in

In step S31770, the main CPU 101 determines whether the power has been turned on with the setting key 328 turned ON (the power switch 35 has been turned ON), that is, whether the setting key switch signal is ON. If the setting key switch signal is ON (YES at step S31770), the process proceeds to step S31780, and if the setting key switch signal is OFF (NO at step S31770), the process proceeds to step S31810.

In step S31780, main CPU 101 determines whether or not backup clear switch 330 has been pressed, that is, whether or not the backup clear signal is ON (YES in step S31780). If the backup clear signal is OFF, the process moves to step S31810.

In step S31790, main CPU 101 sets the game permission flag to ON, and proceeds to step S31800.

In this way, the main CPU 101 keeps the setting key switch signal ON ( If it is YES in step S31770) and the backup clear signal is ON (YES in step S31780), the game permission flag is set to ON in step S31790. That is, when both the power-on operation and the pressing operation of the backup clear switch 330 are performed while the setting key 328 is ON, the game permission flag is turned ON even if the game permission flag is OFF. However, if at least one of the setting key switch signal and the backup clear signal is OFF, the game permission flag will not be set from OFF to ON.

In step S31800, main CPU 101 sets the backup clear flag to ON, and terminates the game permission process. The backup clear flag is a flag indicating whether or not backup clear processing, which will be described later, needs to be performed. The backup clear flag is set to OFF.

In step S31810, main CPU 101 sets notification so that error notification monitor 336 displays an error code indicating that execution of a game is not permitted (game permission flag is OFF). After performing the process of step S31810, the main CPU 101 ends the game permission process. In this way, by displaying the error code on the error notification monitor 336, the hall staff can check the error code displayed on the error notification monitor 336, and find out that the game cannot be executed (the game permission flag is OFF). ) can be grasped. In the second embodiment, when the game permission flag is OFF, the game is played only when both the power-on operation and the backup clear switch 330 are pressed while the setting key switch 328 is ON. It is possible to set the permission flag to ON. That is, when the game permission flag is OFF, the game permission flag is not turned ON unless power supply is temporarily stopped by performing a power-off operation and setting change processing, which will be described later, is executed. It should be noted that, in the above, when the processing of step S31810 is performed, the game permission processing is terminated, but instead of this, after performing the processing of step S31810, the process returns to step S31740, and the condition for turning the game permission flag ON is established (until YES is determined in step S31780 in FIG. 178), the processing of steps S31740 to S31810 may be looped.

[Setting process]
FIG. 179(a) is a flow chart showing an example of setting processing in step S3020 (see FIG. 176), and FIG. 179(b) is a flow chart showing another example of setting processing in step S3020. 179(a) and 179(b) differ only in the processing when it is determined that the game permission flag is OFF in step S3021 (NO in step S3021), and other processing (step S3022 to S3028) are common to both. Setting processing will be described below.

As shown in FIG. 179(a), the main CPU 101 first determines whether or not the game permission flag is ON in step S3021. If the game permission flag is ON (YES in step S3021), the main CPU 101 proceeds to step S3022. The setting process ends without executing any of step S3026).

When the setting key switch signal is ON (YES in step S3022) and the backup clear signal is ON (YES in step S3023), the main CPU 101 performs setting change processing (step S3024), and sets the setting key switch signal ON (YES in step S3022). ) and the backup clear signal is OFF (NO in step S3023), setting confirmation processing (step S3026) is performed. Therefore, when the power is turned on with the setting key 328 turned ON, if the backup clear signal is ON, the setting change process (step S3024) is executed, and if the backup clear signal is OFF, the setting confirmation process (step S3024) is executed. S3026) is executed.

When the setting key switch signal is OFF (NO in step S3022) and the backup clear signal is ON (YES in step S3027), the main CPU 101 sets the backup clear flag to ON (step S3028), and performs setting change processing (step S3028). S3024) and setting confirmation processing (step S3026) are not executed, and the setting processing ends. If the setting key switch signal is OFF (NO in step S3022) and the backup clear signal is OFF (NO in step S3027), the main CPU 101 ends the setting process (setting change) without executing the process in step S3028. processing (step S3024) and setting confirmation processing (step S3026) are also not executed).

That is, if the previous power outage was a normal power outage that occurred during a normal game or during setting confirmation processing, which will be described later, and if the working area of the main RAM 103 is normal, it is determined YES in step S3021. At this time, the main CPU 101 performs setting change processing (step S3024) and setting confirmation processing (step S3026) according to the operation state of the setting key 328 and the operation state of the backup clear switch 330 when the power is turned on. Alternatively, backup clear flag processing (step S3028) is executed. When the power is turned on without operating the setting key 328 or the backup clear switch 330, setting change processing (step S3024), setting confirmation processing (step S3026) and backup clear flag processing (step S3028) are performed. Without executing any of the above, the game return process (step S3030) is executed, and after the game return process (step S3030) is executed, the game can be executed.

On the other hand, if the previous power failure was an abnormal power failure, or even if the previous power failure was a normal power failure, if the power failure occurred during the setting change process, NO is determined in step S3021. . At this time, the main CPU 101 performs setting change processing (step S3024) and setting confirmation processing (step S3026) regardless of the operation state of the setting key 328 or the operation state of pressing the backup clear switch 330 when the power is turned on. and backup clear flag ON (step S3028), and the setting process is terminated. Therefore, if a power failure occurs during the setting change process or the previous power failure was an abnormal power failure, the setting key switch signal ON (YES in step S31770) and the backup clear signal ON (YES in step S31780). (that is, both the power-on operation and the pressing operation of the backup clear switch 330 are performed while the setting key 328 is turned ON to control the setting change state), and the setting value is confirmed. Only in this case, the setting change process (step S3024) is executed and the process proceeds to the game return process of step S3030, and after this game return process (step S3030) is executed, the game can be executed. Therefore, if neither the setting key 328 nor the backup clear switch 330 is operated, or even if only one of them is operated, the setting change process (step S3024) and the setting confirmation process (step S3026) are performed. ) and the backup clear flag process (step S3028) are not executed, and the game return process (step S3030) is performed. However, in this game return process (step S3030), an abnormality process (see step S3038 in FIG. 183 to be described later) is executed, and the game cannot be executed, resulting in a game stop state.

As described above, in the example of the setting process shown in the flowchart of FIG. 179(a), if a power failure occurs during the setting change process or if the previous power failure was an abnormal power failure, the power is turned on. Any of the setting change processing (step S3024), the setting confirmation processing (step S3026), and the backup clear flag ON (step S3028) is performed regardless of the operation state of the setting key 328 or the operation state of pressing the backup clear switch 330. The setting process ends without executing However, the present invention is not limited to this, and as in another example of the setting process shown in the flowchart of FIG. , the main CPU 101 forcibly executes the setting change process (step S3024) regardless of the operating status of the setting key 328 or the pressing operation of the backup clear switch 330 when the power is turned on. You may do so. If a power failure occurs during the setting change process or the previous power failure was an abnormal one, the operation status of the setting key 328 and the operation status of pressing the backup clear switch 330 when the power is turned on. By forcibly executing the setting change process (step S3024) regardless of whether or not the setting key 328 or the backup clear switch 330 has been operated, the power is turned on again. It is possible to reduce the annoyance of forcing a decision.

In the flowchart shown in FIG. 179(a), if NO is determined in step S3021, the setting process is performed without determining either the operation status of the setting key 328 or the pressing operation status of the backup clear switch 330. finished. Similarly, in the flowchart shown in FIG. 179(b) as well, if NO is determined in step S3021, setting is performed without determining either the operating status of the setting key 328 or the pressing operation status of the backup clear switch 330. Change processing (step S3024) is being executed. However, instead of these, the operation status of the setting key 328 and/or the operation status of the pressing operation of the backup clear switch 330 are discriminated, and the setting process is terminated or the setting change process (step S3024) is performed regardless of the determination result. may be executed.

[Setting change processing]
FIG. 180 is a flowchart illustrating an example of setting change processing. The setting change process in step S3024 (see FIG. 179) is a process for changing the setting value that has been set, but it is also possible to end the setting change process with the same setting value as the setting value that has been set. . Further, as described above, when the game permission flag is OFF, the game permission flag is not turned ON unless the setting change process is executed after the electric power is turned off to temporarily stop the power supply.

The main CPU 101 first determines in step S32410 whether or not the game permission flag is ON. If the game permission flag is OFF (NO in step S32410), the main CPU 101 terminates the process without executing the setting change process. Even if the game permission flag is OFF when the power is turned on, the game permission flag is set to ON in step S31790 (see FIG. 178) when the setting key switch signal is ON and the backup clear signal is ON. Therefore, the setting change process is executed.

When the game permission flag is ON (YES in step S32410), main CPU 101 proceeds to step S32420 and executes backup clear processing. This backup clear processing will be described later.

After executing the backup clear process in step S32420, the main CPU 101 moves to step S32430, stores the set value data stored in the main RAM 103 in the register, and moves to step S32440. Note that the backup clear process may be executed at any timing between the start of the setting change process and the end of the setting change process.

In step S32440, main CPU 101 sets the output of the setting change security signal. This setting change security signal is transmitted to hall computer 700 via external terminal board 323 described above. Note that the setting change security signal is output for a certain period of time or longer (for example, 50 msec or longer) within the output period of the same signal.

In step S 32450 , main CPU 101 makes notification settings so that the set value information is displayed on performance display monitor 334 . The set value data stored in the register is converted into a set value and displayed on the performance display monitor 334 . For example, when the set value data stored in the register is "3", the performance display monitor 334 displays the set value "4" corresponding to the set value data "3". However, if the set value data stored in the register and the set value correspond to each other, it is not always necessary to display numbers on the performance display monitor. For example, if the set value data "0" to "5" are associated with "A" to "F" respectively, and the set value data stored in the register is, for example, "3", the corresponding "D" may be displayed on the performance display monitor 334 . In this step 2450, the set value data stored in the register is converted to the set value and displayed on the performance display monitor 334. The default value (for example, "1") may be displayed. Also, when the pachinko gaming machine is powered on for the first time, the main CPU 101 displays a predetermined initial value (for example, “1”) or a value that is not normally displayed (for example, “8”) on the performance display monitor 334 . may be controlled so that it is displayed in When displaying values that are not normally displayed on the performance display monitor 334, the main CPU 101 does not set valid setting values and turns off the game permission flag unless it is determined in step S32510 that the setting switch 332 has been pressed. can be

In step S 32460 , main CPU 101 sets notification so that error notification monitor 336 displays a setting change code indicating that the setting is being changed. As a result, by checking the display of the error notification monitor 336, the hall staff can understand that the setting change process is in progress.

In step S32470, main CPU 101 determines whether or not the setting key switch signal is OFF. If the setting key switch signal is not OFF (NO in step S32470), the process proceeds to step S32510.

In step S32510, main CPU 101 determines whether or not setting switch 332 has been pressed. After updating the data, the process returns to step S32440. On the other hand, if setting switch 332 is not pressed (NO in step S32510), the process returns to step S32440. That is, in the setting change process, steps S32510, S32520, and steps S32440 to S32470 are looped unless it is determined that the setting key switch signal is ON (unless YES in step S32470). The processing of steps S32440 to S32470 is repeated).

When setting switch 332 is pressed (determined as YES in step S32510), main CPU 101 makes notification settings so that updated setting value information is displayed on performance display monitor 334 in subsequent step S32450. .

In addition, unless the main CPU 101 determines that the setting key switch signal is OFF (YES in step S32470), the main CPU 101 changes the set value data stored in the register from "0" to "5" each time the setting switch 332 is pressed. (if the set value data is "5" and the setting switch 332 is pressed, it returns to "0"). As a result, the display on the performance display monitor 334 is also cyclically displayed each time the setting switch 332 is pressed. However, each time the setting switch 332 is pressed, the set value data stored in the register may be cyclically decreased from "5" to "0". You may enable it to perform both reduction|decrease.

In step S32470, when main CPU 101 determines that the setting key switch signal is OFF (YES in step S32470), the process proceeds to step S32480. After moving to step S32480, main CPU 101 terminates the loop of steps S32510, S32520, and steps S32440 to S32470.

In step S 32480 , main CPU 101 stores the set value data stored in the register in main RAM 103 . When the process of step S32480 is executed, the set value is determined. That is, in the setting change process, the setting value is determined based on the execution of the operation to turn off the setting key switch signal (determination of YES in step S32470), and the operation to turn off the setting key switch signal. If only the setting switch 332 is pressed without executing The setting value data stored in the main RAM 103 is not updated.

After the setting key switch signal is determined to be OFF in step S32470 (YES in step S32470), even if the setting key 328 is pushed back again, the operation is not detected (the setting key switch signal is detected to be ON). is not performed), and the set value cannot be changed unless the power is turned off (the power switch 35 is turned off). At that time (when the setting key switch signal is determined to be OFF in step S32470 (YES in step S32470) and then the setting key 328 is again operated to return), the main CPU 101 changes the setting stored in the register. The value data may be displayed on the performance display monitor 334 so that setting confirmation can be performed (setting confirmation processing is performed). At that time (when the setting confirmation process is performed), the main CPU 101 may turn off the game permission flag until the setting key switch signal is turned off.

By the way, when a power failure occurred during the setting change process or when the previous power failure was an abnormal power failure, the operation status of the setting keys 328 and the backup When the setting change process (see FIG. 180) is forcibly executed regardless of the operation status of the pressing operation of the clear switch 330 (the state of the setting key switch signal and the backup clear signal) (see FIG. 179(b)) , the setting change process is executed even if the setting key 328 is not turned ON (while the setting key switch signal remains OFF). In this way, when the setting change process (step S3024) is executed without turning ON the setting key 328, the setting key switch signal may remain OFF. Instead of immediately determining that the switch signal is OFF (YES in step S32470), it is determined that the setting key switch signal is OFF when the setting key 328 is once turned ON and then turned OFF. Move to S32480 (confirm the set value). In this case, the main CPU 101 may determine YES in step S32480 by detecting that the setting key switch signal has turned ON and further that the setting key switch signal has turned OFF. Alternatively, YES may be determined in step S32480 by detecting that the setting key switch signal has changed from ON to OFF without detecting that the setting key switch signal has turned ON. In the above, if a power failure occurs during the setting change process or the previous power failure was an abnormal power failure, the setting key switch signal and the backup clear signal state at the time of recovery from the power failure will be forcibly reset. Although it has been described that the setting change process is executed, the present invention is not limited to this. For example, the main CPU 101 may forcibly change the state to the setting change state regardless of the state of the setting key switch signal or the backup clear signal at the time of power failure recovery. In addition, regardless of the state of the setting key switch signal and the backup clear signal at the time of power failure recovery, the power failure recovery is performed in the setting change state when the power failure occurred (that is, the state is maintained at the time of the power failure, and the When the power is restored, regardless of the state of the setting key switch signal and the backup clear signal when the power is restored, the process of returning to the held state may be executed.

In step S32490, main CPU 101 sets notification so that the performance display data is displayed on performance display monitor 334. In step S32500, main CPU 101 sets notification so that the initialization code is displayed on error notification monitor 336, and changes the setting. End the process.

When the setting key switch signal is determined to be OFF in step S32470 (YES in step S32470), the command indicating that the setting key switch signal has been turned OFF, that is, the command indicating that the setting change process has ended An initialization command is transmitted to the sub CPU 201 .

When the setting change process of step S3024 (see FIG. 179) ends, the setting process of step S3020 (see FIG. 176) ends, and the process proceeds to the game return process of step S3030 (see FIG. 176).

It should be noted that, after the setting change processing of step S3024 (see FIG. 179) is executed, if the execution of the game becomes possible through the game return processing described later, during a certain period after the game is started, or information suggesting that the setting change process may have been executed at a predetermined timing after the start of, information suggesting that the setting value may have been changed to a higher value by the setting change process; Information that suggests that the setting value may have been changed to a lower setting value by the setting change process, or that the setting value has been changed by more than one level due to the setting change process (for example, the setting value has been changed by two or more levels, such as from setting 6 to setting 4). (b) Information related to the setting change process, such as information suggesting that there is a possibility, may be displayed on the liquid crystal display device 16 or the like. For example, the variation pattern of effects and decoration patterns performed on the liquid crystal display device 16 or the like can be different between when the setting change process is executed and when it is not executed, or the setting change process can be set to a higher setting value. Make it possible to differentiate between when the setting value is changed and when it is changed to the low setting value, and when the setting value is changed by multiple steps or more by setting change processing and when it is not changed by multiple steps or more. can be

Further, the period during which the setting change security signal is output and the period during which the setting change code is displayed on the error notification monitor 336 are from the start of the setting change process to the end process of the setting change process. It's becoming However, these periods do not need to match perfectly.

The setting change process described above is a process that is executed regardless of whether the game permission flag is internally ON or OFF. In addition, a command is transmitted to the sub-control circuit 200 at a predetermined timing, such as when the setting change process in step S3024 is started and when the setting switch is pressed in step S32510, and when the process of step S32480 is executed. Thus, the liquid crystal display device 16, the speaker 24, the LED 25, etc. may be configured to notify that the setting is being changed, that the setting value has been changed, or that the setting change has been completed. .

[Backup clear processing]
FIG. 181 is a flowchart showing an example of backup clear processing in step S32420 (see FIG. 180). This backup clear processing is processing for clearing information stored in the work area of the main RAM 103 . However, in this backup clear processing, as described above, the information stored in the general work area is cleared, but the information stored in the specific work area is not cleared in principle.

First, in step S32421, the main CPU 101 determines whether or not the backup clear flag is OFF. When the backup clear flag is OFF (YES in step S32421), main CPU 101 terminates the process without executing the backup clear process, and when the backup clear flag is ON (NO in step S32421), step S32422. move to

In step S32422, the main CPU 101 clears the working area of the RWM (main RAM 103). However, if the previous power interruption occurred during the setting change process, there is a possibility that all or part of the backup clear process was executed during the setting change process in which the previous power interruption occurred. Therefore, when the previous power interruption occurred during the setting change process, the work area of the main RAM 103 is cleared together with the backup clear process executed during the setting change process in which the previous power interruption occurred. In this backup clearing process, only a partial clearing may be performed.

Note that in the process of step S32422, as described above, the performance display data and set value data stored in the specific work area are not cleared in principle. However, when it is determined that the set value data stored in the RWM (main RAM 103) is abnormal (for example, the set value data is out of the specified range), the set value data is also cleared. be. Further, when it is determined that the performance display data stored in the RWM (main RAM 103) is abnormal, the performance display data is also cleared. When the set value data is abnormal, the set value data is also cleared. In that case, the game permission flag is turned OFF, and the game is permitted unless the setting change processing (for example, see FIG. 180) is performed. The flag may not be turned ON.

In step S32423, the main CPU 101 sets notification so that information indicating that the backup clear process has been executed (information indicating that the work area of the main RAM 103 has been cleared) is displayed. After that, in step S32424, the main CPU 101 sets the backup clear flag to OFF, and terminates the backup clear process. The notification setting (information indicating that the backup clear process has been executed) is transmitted as a command to, for example, the sub-control circuit 200, and the display control circuit 204 (see FIG. 9) notifies that the backup clear process has been executed. The image shown is displayed on the liquid crystal display device 16, for example.

When the backup clear process is executed along with the setting change process (for example, see FIG. 180), the main CPU 101 causes the setting value information to be displayed on the performance display monitor 334 in step S32450 of the setting change process. Set notification. Similarly, even when the backup clear process is executed without the setting change process, the setting value information may be set to be displayed on the performance display monitor 334 .

[Setting confirmation process]
FIG. 182 is a flowchart illustrating an example of setting confirmation processing. The setting confirmation process in step S3026 (see FIG. 179) is a process for confirming the setting values that have been set. The setting values that have been set are stored in the main RAM 103 .

The main CPU 101 first determines in step S32610 whether or not the game permission flag is ON. If the game permission flag is OFF (NO in step S32610), the main CPU 101 ends the process without executing the setting confirmation process.

If the game permission flag is ON (YES in step S32610), the main CPU 101 proceeds to step S32620 and sets the output of the setting confirmation security signal. This setting confirmation security signal is transmitted to hall computer 700 via external terminal board 323 described above. Note that the setting confirmation security signal is output for a certain period of time or longer (for example, 50 msec or longer) within the output period of the same signal.

In step S 32630 , main CPU 101 sets notification so that the set value information is displayed on performance display monitor 334 . The set value information displayed on the performance display monitor 334 is information indicating set set value data. For example, when the set value data stored in the main RAM 103 is "3", the performance display monitor 334 displays "4" corresponding to the set value data "3" as information indicating the set value.

In step S 32640 , main CPU 101 sets notification so that error notification monitor 336 displays a setting confirmation code indicating that the setting is being confirmed. As a result, by checking the display on the error notification monitor 336, the hall staff can understand that the setting confirmation process is in progress.

In step S32650, main CPU 101 determines whether or not the setting key switch signal is OFF. If the setting key switch signal is not OFF (NO in step S32650), the process returns to step S32620. That is, in the setting confirmation process, unless it is determined that the setting key switch signal is ON (unless YES in step S32650), the processes of steps S32620 to S32650 are looped (the processes of steps S32620 to S32650 are repeated). It will happen.

In step S32650, when main CPU 101 determines that the setting key switch signal is OFF (YES in step S32650), the process proceeds to step S32660. After moving to step S32660, the main CPU 101 ends the processing of steps S32620 to S32650.

When the setting key switch signal is determined to be OFF (YES in step S32650) in step S32650, a power failure recovery command is transmitted to the sub CPU 201 as a command indicating that the setting confirmation process has ended in step S37, which will be described later. It will be done.

In step S32660, main CPU 101 sets notification so that performance display data is displayed on performance display monitor 334. In step S32670, main CPU 101 sets non-notification so that error notification monitor 336 does not display any information. exit.

When the setting confirmation process of step S3026 (see FIG. 179) ends, the setting process of step S3020 (see FIG. 176) ends, and the process proceeds to the game return process of step S3030 (see FIG. 176).

[Game return processing]
FIG. 183 is a flowchart showing an example of game return processing. In the setting process of step S3030 (see FIG. 176), on the premise that the game permission flag is ON, the process of returning to the state where the game can be executed is performed. The game return processing will be described below.

First, in step S3031, the main CPU 101 determines whether or not the game permission flag is ON. If the game permission flag is OFF (NO in step S3031), the main CPU 101 executes the abnormality processing in step S3038. This abnormal processing will be described later.

If the game permission flag is ON (YES in step S3031), the main CPU 101 proceeds to step S3032 and performs processing for activating all switches.

In step S3033, the main CPU 101 determines whether or not the backup clear signal is OFF. If the backup clear signal is OFF (YES in step S3033), main CPU 101 proceeds to step S3034.

In step S3034, the main CPU 101 determines whether or not the power failure situation identification flag is ON. If the power failure status identification flag is ON (YES in step S3034), main CPU 101 proceeds to step S3035. As described above, the power failure status identification flag is set to ON when a power failure occurs during a normal game (during a game in which neither the setting change process nor the setting confirmation process is performed) or during the setting confirmation process. If power failure occurs during change processing, it is set to OFF. Therefore, when the previous power failure occurred during the normal game or during the setting confirmation process, the process of step S3035 is performed.

In step S3035, the main CPU 101 performs initial setting of work areas that require initial values when power is restored.

Next, in step S3036, the main CPU 101 performs notification setting indicating that the game state is the high-probability game state when the game state at the time of power failure recovery is the high-probability game state.

Next, in step S<b>3037 , the main CPU 101 performs a process of transmitting a power failure recovery command (power failure recovery command) to the sub-control circuit 200 . This command also contains setting information about the setting that is being set. When this process ends, the main CPU 101 ends the game return process of step S3030 (see FIG. 176), and a series of power-on processes ends. As a result, the game can be executed. The power failure recovery command functions as a command indicating that power failure recovery is in progress or as a command indicating that the setting confirmation process has ended.

In step S3033, when main CPU 101 determines that the backup clear signal is ON (NO in step S3033), the process proceeds to backup clear processing in step S3039. This backup clearing process is the same as the backup clearing process of step S32420 shown in FIG. 180 (backup clearing process shown in FIG. 181), so description thereof will be omitted.

When the backup clear processing in step S3039 ends, the main CPU 101 proceeds to step S3040 and initializes the work area that requires initial values when initializing the RWM (main RAM 103).

Next, in step S<b>3041 , the main CPU 101 performs processing for transmitting a command (initialization command) for RWM initialization to the sub-control circuit 200 . When this process ends, the main CPU 101 ends the game return process of step S3030 (see FIG. 176), and a series of power-on processes ends. As a result, the game can be executed. The above initialization command is used as a command indicating that the setting change processing has ended (backup clear processing has also been executed), or as a command indicating that the backup clear processing without setting change processing has been executed. Function.

The output period of the setting confirmation security signal and the period during which the setting confirmation code is displayed on the error annunciation monitor 336 are from the start of the setting confirmation process to the end process of the setting confirmation process. It's becoming However, these periods do not need to match perfectly.

[Error processing]
FIG. 184 is a flow chart showing an example of abnormal processing. The abnormal process of step S3038 (see FIG. 183) is executed when it is determined that the game permission flag is OFF (NO in step S3031) in the process of step S3031 (see FIG. 183), as described above. processing.

First, in step S3381, the main CPU 101 performs a process of transmitting to the sub-control circuit 200 an abnormal command indicating that the game permission flag is OFF, that is, the game cannot be executed. When the sub CPU 201 receives the abnormal command, it determines that the backup is defective, and can display information indicating that the pachinko game machine is not normal on the liquid crystal display device 16 under the control of the sub CPU 201 (display control circuit 204).

Note that the main CPU 101 does not necessarily have to transmit an abnormal command. For example, the sub CPU 201 determines that the backup is defective when a normal command from the main CPU 101 cannot be received for a predetermined time (for example, 30 seconds) after power supply to the sub control circuit 200 (see FIG. 9) is started. You may make it

In step S3382, the main CPU 101 sets the output of the abnormal security signal. This abnormal security signal is transmitted to hall computer 700 via external terminal board 323 described above.

In step S3383, the main CPU 101 sets the error notification monitor 336 to display an error code indicating that execution of the game is not permitted (the game permission flag is OFF). As a result, by checking the display of the error notification monitor 336, the hall staff can understand that the game cannot be executed (the game permission flag is OFF).

In step S3384, the main CPU 101 determines whether or not the power interruption detection signal is ON. The power failure detection signal is a signal that turns ON when the voltage drops to a predetermined level. When the main CPU 101 determines that the power failure detection signal is ON (YES in step S3384), the process proceeds to step S3385, and the power failure processing is executed. On the other hand, if the power interruption detection signal is OFF (NO in step S3384), main CPU 101 loops steps S3382 to S3384 (repeating the processing of steps S3382 to S3384).

[Processing when power failure occurs]
FIG. 185 is a flowchart illustrating an example of processing when power failure occurs. As described above, the main CPU 101 constantly checks whether the voltage has dropped to a predetermined level, and when the voltage drops to the predetermined level, it performs power failure processing.

The main CPU 101 first sets interrupt prohibition so that interrupt processing is not executed (step S33851). Then, a checksum is calculated in the work area of the main RAM 103, and the calculation result and various game data are stored (saved) in the backup area of the main RAM 103 (step S33852). This checksum is used to check whether or not the contents of the main RAM 103 before the power failure are properly retained when power is restored. In this way, it is possible to retain various game data stored in the main RAM 103 even when the power supply is stopped.

Next, the main CPU 101 sets a power failure status identification flag in a backup flag provided in a predetermined area of the main RAM 103 (step S33853). That is, as described above, the main CPU 101, if a power failure occurs during a normal game (during a game in which neither the setting change process nor the setting confirmation process is performed) or during the setting confirmation process, identifies the power failure situation. A flag is set to ON, and if it occurs during setting change processing, it is set to OFF.

After finishing the processing of steps S33851 to S33853, the main CPU 101 proceeds to step S33854, prohibits access to the RWM (main RAM 103), enters an infinite loop, and prepares for the stoppage of power supply.

When the game permission flag is OFF in this way, as described above, the power supply is temporarily stopped by performing the power-off operation, and the game permission flag is not turned ON unless the setting change processing described later is executed. It's becoming

By the way, in this process, if the power supply voltage becomes unstable due to a short-term power failure or the like (hereinafter referred to as "momentary power failure") and the power failure processing is started, the infinite loop cannot be recovered. may disappear. In order to avoid such an adverse effect, the main CPU 101 of this embodiment is provided with a watchdog timer (not shown), and is configured to be reset if the watchdog timer is not updated for a predetermined time. The watchdog timer is updated periodically while processing is being performed normally, but is no longer updated when the power failure occurrence processing is entered. As a result, even if the power failure occurrence process is entered due to a momentary power failure and the infinite loop of FIG. 185 is entered, the reset is applied after a predetermined period of time has passed, and the main CPU 101 is activated in the same process as when the power is turned on.

Note that a rewritable non-volatile memory (EEPROM or the like) may be provided instead of the backup area of the RWM (main RAM 103). In this case, there is an advantage that a constant power supply is not required for backing up data.

Alternatively, the entire area of the RWM (main RAM 103) may be used as a backup area in which data is backed up by constant power supply. In this case, there is no need to save the data stored in the main RAM 103 to another area when the power is turned off. Moreover, since it is not necessary to read the saved data to the processing area even when the power is restored, the load required for these processes can be reduced.

[Flow of power-on processing seen from the operator side]
The control flow of power-on processing by the main CPU 101 has been described above.

[Flow of setting change process]
First, a setting change process, that is, a flow for changing set values will be described. In order to change the set value, it is first necessary to turn off the power (turn off the power switch 35). Then, in a state in which the power is not turned on, the setting key 328 is turned on, and both the backup clear switch 330 is pressed and the power switch 35 is turned on.

When the power switch 35 is turned on, the operations of all switches are disabled, and only the operations related to setting (for example, operation of the setting key 328 and operation of the setting switch 332) are enabled to change the settings. Processing is started, and it becomes a state in which it is possible to change the settings.

When the setting change process is started, a setting change in-progress code is displayed on the error notification monitor 336 to indicate that the setting change process is in progress. Further, the display of the performance display monitor 334 is switched from the off state to the information indicating the set value after the power switch 35 is turned on.

In the setting change process, the backup clear process, that is, the initialization process of the main RAM 103 (clear the work area of the main RAM 103, notify the clear of the work area of the main RAM 103, initialize the work area of the main RAM 103, command when initializing the RWM transmission) is executed, a voice indicating that the backup clear process has been executed is output from the speaker 24 . As will be described later, the execution of the backup clear processing is not displayed, but instead of or in addition to the voice output from the speaker 24, the liquid crystal display device 16 displays the execution of the backup clear processing. You may make it display in an area|region.

In the setting change process, each time the setting switch 332 is pressed, the information indicating the setting value displayed on the performance display monitor 334 is cyclically displayed. That is, the information indicating the setting value increases by 1 each time the setting switch 332 is pressed when the setting value is "1" to "5". When is pressed, it returns to "1" and is displayed.

When the setting key 328 is turned off during the setting change process, the setting change state is ended and the setting value displayed on the performance display monitor 334 is set. Further, the display of the error notification monitor 336 is changed from the code during setting change to the initialization code, the performance display (base value) is displayed on the performance display monitor 334, and the operation of all switches is enabled.

In this way, during the setting change process, only operations related to setting (for example, operation of the setting key 328 and operation of the setting switch 332) among all switches are enabled, and all other switches remain disabled. . When the setting key 328 is turned off, all switches are activated.

[Setting confirmation process flow]
Next, a setting confirmation process, that is, a flow for confirming set values will be described. The setting confirmation process is a process that is internally executed under the condition that the game permission flag is ON, and is not executed when the game permission flag is internally OFF.

In order to confirm the setting value that has been set, the setting key 328 is turned ON while the power is not turned on, and the backup clear clear switch 330 is operated under the condition that the game permission flag is ON internally. The ON operation of the power switch 35 is performed without pressing the .

When the power switch 35 is turned on, the operation of all switches is disabled, and only the operation of the setting key 328 is enabled among all switches, setting confirmation processing is started, and the set setting can be confirmed. becomes.

When the setting confirmation process is started, a setting confirmation code indicating that the setting confirmation process is in progress is displayed on the error notification monitor 336 . Further, the display of the performance display monitor 334 is switched from the off state to the information indicating the set value after the power switch 35 is turned on.

During the setting confirmation process, even if the setting switch 332 is pressed, the information indicating the setting value displayed on the performance display monitor 334 does not change.

When the setting key 328 is turned off during the setting confirmation process, the setting confirmation state is ended, the display of the error notification monitor 336 is changed from the setting confirmation code to non-display, and the performance display (base value) is displayed on the performance display monitor 334. is displayed and the operation of all switches is enabled.

Thus, during the setting confirmation process, only the setting key 328 among all switches is enabled, and all other switches remain disabled. Therefore, the setting switch 332 also remains disabled. When the setting key 328 is turned off, all switches are activated. It should be noted that, as described above, regardless of the operation of the power switch 35, the setting confirmation process may be a process that can be executed during the normal game.

[Flow in abnormal processing]

As described above, when the game permission flag is internally OFF, the setting change process can be executed, but the setting confirmation process cannot be executed. Therefore, when the game permission flag is internally OFF, an operation for executing the setting change process (turning ON the setting key 328 and pressing the backup clear clear switch 330 while the power is off) and turning on the power switch 35), performing an operation for executing the setting confirmation process, performing a backup process (details will be described later) without the setting change process, or simply When the operation of simply turning on the power is performed, the abnormal processing is executed. Below, the flow of the abnormal processing will be described.

After the power switch 35 is turned on, all switch operations are disabled, and only the setting-related operations (for example, setting key 328 operation and setting switch 332 operation) are enabled (internal (actually, abnormal processing is started). The reason why the operation related to the setting is validated is that the game permission flag can be turned ON by executing the setting change process.

When the abnormality processing is started, an error code indicating that the game cannot be executed is displayed on the error notification monitor 336.例文帳に追加Thereby, the operator can confirm that the game cannot be executed. Further, information indicating an error is displayed on the performance display monitor 334 .

Furthermore, when the abnormal processing is started, operations related to settings are also invalidated. That is, the operation of all switches is invalidated. Therefore, when the abnormal processing is started, it will not respond to any operation, and the pachinko game will be in a state where the game can be executed unless the power switch 35 is turned off and the above setting change processing is performed. Machine cannot be restored. It should be noted that the operation of all switches is disabled, which means that each device controlled by the sub-control circuit 200 is completely stopped and the game cannot be played at all, and some devices controlled by the sub-control circuit 200 (for example LEDs 25) include those that are in a controllable state.

[System timer interrupt processing]
186 is a flowchart showing system timer interrupt processing by the main CPU 101. FIG. System timer interrupt processing is executed, for example, every 2 ms. As shown in the figure, the main CPU 101 saves the values of each register to the stack area of the main RAM 103 (step S3051).

Next, the main CPU 101 performs random number update processing for updating various random numbers (step S3052).

Next, the main CPU 101 executes switch input detection processing for detecting input signals from various switches (step S3053. The switch input detection processing will be described later with reference to FIG. 187).

Next, the main CPU 101 performs timer update processing for updating the values of various timers (step S3054).

Next, the main CPU 101 performs command output processing for outputting (transmitting) various commands to the sub-control circuit 200 (step S3055).

Next, the main CPU 101 performs game information output processing for outputting (transmitting) various game information to the sub-control circuit 200 (step S3056). The game information is information related to games processed in the main control circuit 100, the sub-control circuit 200, the payout/launch control circuit 300, etc., and is transmitted to the sub-control circuit 200, the payout/launch control circuit 300, and the hall computer 700. be.

Next, the main CPU 101 performs processing for restoring the saved values of each register (step S3057). After completing this process, the main CPU 101 ends the system timer interrupt process.

[Switch input detection processing]
187 is a flowchart showing switch input detection processing by the main CPU 101. FIG. The switch input detection process is called as a subroutine during execution of the system timer interrupt process previously described. As shown in the figure, the main CPU 101 executes start-up winning detection processing (step S3061). The start opening winning detection processing will be described later with reference to FIG. 188 .

Next, the main CPU 101 performs general winning hole passage detection processing (step S3062). In the general prize winning opening detection process, for example, payout information indicating the number of payouts and the like is set when a prize is won to the general winning openings 53, 54, 55, and 56.

Next, the main CPU 101 performs a special winning opening detection process (step S3063). In the special winning opening detection process, for example, payout information indicating the number of payouts and the like is set when a prize is won to the special winning opening 540 .

Next, the main CPU 101 performs ball passage detector passage detection processing (step S3064). In the ball passage detector passage detection process, the normal symbol game lottery result ( random value). After completing this process, the main CPU 101 ends the switch input detection process.

[Starting gate winning detection process]
FIG. 188 is a flow chart showing the start opening winning detection process by the main CPU 101 . The starting opening winning detection process is called as a subroutine during execution of the switch input detection process described above. As shown in the figure, first, the main CPU 101 determines whether or not a game ball is detected by the first starting port switch 421 (step S3071). When the game ball is detected by the first starting port switch 421 (YES in step S3071), the main CPU 101 proceeds to the process of step S3052. When the game ball is not detected by the first starting port switch 421 (NO in step S3071), the main CPU 101 proceeds to the process of step S3081.

In step S3072, the main CPU 101 performs setting check processing. This setting check processing will be described later.

In step S3073, the main CPU 101 extracts various random numbers such as a jackpot determination random number and a symbol determination random number for the first special symbol, and performs processing for setting payout information according to the first start opening winning.

Next, the main CPU 101 determines whether or not the number of reserved first start winning prizes (the number of reserved first special symbols) is less than four (step S3074). If the pending number is less than 4 (YES in step S3074), the main CPU 101 proceeds to the process of step S3075. When the reserved number is 4 (NO in step S3074), the main CPU 101 discards various random numbers extracted based on the winning of the game ball to the first start port 420, and proceeds to the process of step S3080.

In step S3075, the main CPU 101 performs a process of adding 1 to the number of pending first starting opening winning prizes.

Next, the main CPU 101 stores various random numbers extracted based on the winning of the game ball into the first starting port 420 in the main RAM 103 until the first special symbol variation start condition (start condition) is satisfied. It does (step S3076). As a result, the variable display of the first special symbol for the extracted random number is suspended until the start condition is satisfied.

Next, the main CPU 101 performs first special stop symbol determination processing (step S3077). In the first special stop symbol determination process, the jackpot random number determination table for the first special symbol, the symbol determination table, and the jackpot type determination are based on the jackpot determination random number value and the symbol determination random number value extracted for the first special symbol. By referring to the table, a symbol specifying command relating to the main symbol (the first special symbol to be stopped and displayed), a winning selection symbol command, etc. are determined.

Next, main CPU 101 executes variation pattern determination processing (step S3078). The variation pattern determination process is called as a subroutine during execution of the above-described start-up winning detection process. In addition, the main CPU 101 refers to the special symbol variation time determination table of FIG. 170 (or FIG. 172), and selects a variation pattern based on the result of the jackpot determination, the ready-to-win determination random number value, and the effect selection random number value. , perform the process of determining.

Incidentally, as shown in FIGS. 170 and 172, since the fluctuation display time of the decorative pattern is associated with the fluctuation pattern and stored, the fluctuation corresponding to the fluctuation pattern determined in the fluctuation pattern determination process The pattern specifying command is substantially information capable of representing variable time.

Next, the main CPU 101 performs a process of setting a reserved number increase command for the first start winning prize (step S3079). The reserved number increase command of the first start opening winning prize is a command indicating that the reserved number of the first special symbol is increased by 1, and is sent to the sub-control circuit 200 along with the command indicating the variation pattern determined in the process of step S3078. and is sent.

In step S3080, the main CPU 101 performs a process of setting a reserved number overflow command for the first start opening winning prize, and proceeds to step S3081. The reserved number overflow command of the first starting opening winning is a command indicating that the first starting opening winning has occurred when the number of reserved first special symbols is the upper limit (for example, 4), to the sub control circuit 200 and is sent.

As is clear from FIG. 188, the reason why the reserved number overflow command for the first starting opening winning prize is transmitted to the sub-control circuit 200 is that the set value data is determined to be normal in the setting check processing of step S3072, which will be described later. It is assumed that

At step S3081, the main CPU 101 determines whether or not a game ball is detected by the second starting port switch 441 (step S3081). When the game ball is detected by the second starting port switch 441 (YES in step S3081), the main CPU 101 proceeds to the process of step S3082. When the game ball is not detected by the second starting opening switch 441 (NO in step S3081), the main CPU 101 ends the starting opening winning detection process.

In step S3082, the main CPU 101 performs setting check processing. This setting check processing will be described later, but it is the same processing as in step S3072.

In step S3083, the main CPU 101 extracts various random numbers such as a jackpot determination random number and a symbol determination random number for the second special symbol, and performs processing for setting payout information according to the second starting opening winning.

Next, the main CPU 101 determines whether or not the number of reserved second start winning prizes (the number of reserved second special symbols) is less than four (step S3084). If the pending number is less than 4 (YES in step S3084), the main CPU 101 proceeds to the process of step S3085. When the reserved number is 4 (NO in step S3084), the main CPU 101 discards various random numbers extracted based on the winning of the game ball to the second starting hole 440, and ends the starting hole winning detection process.

In step S3085, the main CPU 101 performs a process of adding 1 to the number of pending prizes for the second start opening.

Next, the main CPU 101 performs a process of storing various random numbers extracted based on the winning of the game ball into the second start port 440 in the main RAM 103 until the second special symbol variation start condition (start condition) is established. It does (step S3086). As a result, the variable display of the second special symbol for the extracted random number is suspended until the start condition is satisfied.

Next, the main CPU 101 performs second special stop symbol determination processing (step S3087). In the second special stop symbol determination process, similarly to the first special stop symbol determination process, the second special symbol is determined based on the extracted jackpot determination random number value and the symbol determination random number value extracted for the second special symbol. A big hit random number determination table, a pattern determination table and a big win kind determination table for the game machine are referred to, and a pattern designation command related to a main pattern (a second special pattern scheduled to be stopped and displayed), a selection pattern command at the time of a big win, etc. are determined.

Next, the main CPU 101 executes variation pattern determination processing (step S3088). Similar to step S3078, this variation pattern determination process is called as a subroutine during execution of the above-described start opening winning detection process, and the main CPU 101 refers to the special symbol variation time determination table of FIG. 170 (or FIG. 172). Then, a process of selecting a variation pattern is performed based on the result of big hit determination, the random number value for reach determination and the random number value for effect selection.

Next, the main CPU 101 performs a process of setting a reserved number increase command for the second start winning prize (step S3089). The command to increase the reserved number of the second starting opening winning prize is a command indicating that the reserved number of the second special symbol is to be increased by 1, and is sent to the sub-control circuit 200 along with the command indicating the variation pattern determined in the process of step S3088. and is sent. After completing this process, the main CPU 101 ends the start opening winning detection process.

Incidentally, when the game ball winning to the first starting port 420 and the game ball winning to the second starting port 440 are detected at the same time, either the setting check processing of step S3072 or the setting check processing of step S3082 is performed. Only one of them may be performed.

Also, in this second embodiment, when the game ball is detected by the second starting opening switch 441 (YES in step S3081), the number of pending second starting opening winning prizes is four (NO in step S3084). Even if the main CPU 101 does not transmit the overflow command for the number of pending game balls for the second starting hole winning to the sub-control circuit 200, it discards various random numbers extracted based on the winning of the game balls to the second starting hole 440. , the start opening winning detection process is terminated. This is because it is in the non-time-saving gaming state that the setting value suggestion effect, which will be described later, can be effectively performed.

[Setting check process]
FIG. 189 is a flow chart showing an example of setting check processing by the main CPU 101. This setting check processing is the same processing in steps S3072 and S3082 (see FIG. 188 for both). The setting check process is a process of checking whether or not the set values are normal. In this setting check process, for example, the same process as the RWM (main RAM 103) work area check executed in step S31720 (see FIG. 178) may be performed. Emphasis is placed on checking whether the values are normal or not.

As shown in the figure, the main CPU 101 first checks in step S3721 whether or not the set value data stored in the main RAM 103 is appropriate (for example, within a specified range). As described above, in the second embodiment, since "0" to "5" are stored in the main RAM 103 as setting value data corresponding to the setting values "1" to "6", the setting value data is within the range of "0" to "5". If the set value data is within the range of "0" to "5" (YES in step S3721), the setting check process ends. If the set value data is outside the range of "0" to "5" (NO in step S3721), the process moves to step S3722.

In step S3722, the main CPU 101 sets the game permission flag to OFF, and proceeds to step S3723.

In step S3723, the main CPU 101 determines whether or not the special symbol is being variably displayed. If the main CPU 101 determines that the special symbols are being variably displayed (YES in step S3723), it proceeds to step S3724, and if it determines that the special symbols are not being variably displayed (NO in step S3723), it proceeds to step S3725.

In step S3724, the main CPU 101 prohibits stopping the special symbol during variable display. That is, even if the special symbol variation time determined in step S3078 or step S3088 (both refer to FIG. 188) with reference to the special symbol variation time determination table shown in FIG. 170 (or FIG. 172) has elapsed, The variable display of the special symbols is continued, and the special symbols are not stopped and displayed. After that, the process moves to step S3726.

For example, when a game ball wins in the starting ports 5442 and 440 while the special symbols are being variably displayed by the main CPU 101, a step is performed during the variably displaying the special symbols (before the variably displaying the special symbols ends). The setting check process of S3072 (or step S3082) may be executed. When the main CPU 101 determines that it is not normal in this setting check process (NO in step S3721), even if the special symbols are being variably displayed (the result of the jackpot judgment of the special symbols being variably displayed is not displayed). ), the game permission flag is turned OFF, and the abnormality processing is executed. In this case, since the game cannot be executed unless the power is once turned off and the setting change process is executed, the result of the jackpot determination of the special symbol during the variable display is cleared in the backup clear process, including the pending data. The Rukoto.

In step S3726, the main CPU 101 prohibits shooting of game balls. That is, it is controlled so that power is not supplied from the payout/emission control circuit 300 (see FIG. 9) to the ejection solenoid (not shown). Therefore, even if the player grips the shooting handle 32 and rotates it in the clockwise direction, the game ball is not shot and the game cannot be played.

When the main CPU 101 prohibits the shooting of game balls in step S3726, the process proceeds to the abnormality processing in step S3727.

In step S3725, the main CPU 101 prohibits the variable display of the special symbol so that the next new variable display is not started. For example, even if the variable display of the special symbols is suspended when the special symbols are not being variably displayed, or even if the variable display of the special symbols is stopped and waiting for the start of the next variable display, the variable display of the special symbols is started. not. After completing the process of step S3725, the main CPU 101 proceeds to step S3726.

In the abnormality processing of step S3727, the main CPU 101 performs the same processing as the abnormality processing of step S3038 (see FIG. 183). That is, the processing of steps S3381 to S3384 shown in FIG. 184 is performed until the power interruption detection signal ON is detected. Steps S33851 to S33854 shown in 185 are performed.

Thus, in the pachinko game machine according to the second embodiment, setting check processing is performed when a game ball enters the first start port 420 and when a game ball enters the second start port 440, and the main RAM 103 If the set value data stored in is not normal, execution of the game is prohibited. Therefore, even if the game is being played, if the set value data is not normal, the game cannot be continued. Game cannot be executed. As a result, it is possible to prevent the game from being continued in a state where the settings are not normal, for example.

Further, when the main CPU 101 determines in step S3721 that the set value data is not appropriate, even if the variable display of the special symbols has not yet been started and is on hold, the power is once turned off and then turned on again as described above. Since the game cannot be executed unless the setting change processing is performed by inserting the game, all the various data (for example, a random number for judging a big hit) stored in the main RAM 103 are cleared. That is, regardless of whether the reserved various data is based on the winning of the game ball to the first start port 420 or the winning of the game ball to the second start port 440, all cleared. As a result, it is possible to prevent the various data related to the suspension from being processed based on the setting values that are not normal, and it is possible to enhance the security.

Also, as described above, the same setting check processing is performed in steps S3072 and S3082 (see FIG. 188 for both). Therefore, when it is determined that the set value data is not normal (NO in step S3721) in the setting check process (step S3072) performed when the game ball wins the first starting port 420, in step S3724, the main CPU 101 prohibits stopping the second special symbol during variable display not only when the special symbol under variable display is the first special symbol but also when it is the second special symbol. Similarly, when it is determined that the set value data is not normal (NO in step S3721) in the setting check process (step S3082) performed when the game ball wins in the second starting port 440, also in step S3724, The main CPU 101 prohibits the stop of the first special symbol during variable display not only when the special symbol under variable display is the second special symbol but also when it is the first special symbol.

Also, similarly, when it is determined that the set value data is not normal in the setting check process (step S3072) performed when the game ball wins the first starting port 420 (NO in step S3721), in step S3725 , the main CPU 101 prohibits the variable display of the second special symbol not only when the special symbol whose variable display is suspended is the first special symbol but also when it is the second special symbol. Similarly, when it is determined that the set value data is not normal (NO in step S3721) in the setting check process (step S3082) performed when the game ball wins in the second starting port 440, in step S3725, The main CPU 101 prohibits variable display of the first special symbol not only when the special symbol whose variable display is suspended is the second special symbol but also when it is the first special symbol.

In addition, in the second embodiment, setting check processing is performed when the power is turned on (see step S31730 in FIG. 178) and when a game ball enters the first start port 420 and the second start port 440. Not limited to this, for example, during setting confirmation processing (see step S3024 in FIG. 179), during setting change processing (see step S3026 in FIG. 179), during execution of backup clear processing (see FIG. 181), fluctuation display of special symbols is started, when special symbols stop changing, when passage is detected by the passage gate switch 49a (see FIG. 9), when normal patterns start changing, when normal patterns stop changing, etc. You may make it process. It should be noted that the predetermined timings described above are just examples. In addition, the setting check process may be performed not only at a specific timing, but also at a plurality of timings (for example, all or part of the above timings). Even in such a case, it is possible to prevent the game from being continued in a state where the settings are not normal, for example.

In addition, in the second embodiment, when it is determined that the set value data is not normal in the setting check process, the game permission flag is immediately turned OFF regardless of whether or not the game is in the jackpot game state to proceed with the game. However, it is not limited to this, and the timing at which it is determined that the set value data is not normal in the setting check process and the timing at which the execution of the game is disabled may be shifted. As a result, it is possible to reduce the player's feeling of loss that may occur due to the fact that the variable display is not performed even though the game ball has entered the first start hole 420 or the second start hole 440 . However, since it is not preferable to perform various determination processes (for example, jackpot determination processing) in a state where the set value data is not normal, various determination processes are not performed, and after performing a variable display of special symbols over a predetermined period of time, the It is preferable to stop the special symbol when it fails.

In addition, although not shown in FIG. 189, when the game permission flag is set to OFF in step S3722, it is preferable to prohibit the normal symbol from stopping if the normal symbol is displayed in a variable manner. . Further, when the normal symbols are not displayed in a variable manner, it is preferable to prohibit the variable display of the normal symbols.

[Main control main processing]
190 is a flowchart showing main control main processing by the main CPU 101. FIG. When the pachinko gaming machine is powered on, the main CPU 101 performs initial setting processing (step S3091), as shown in FIG. In this process, the main CPU 101 performs the above-described power-on process and the like.

Next, the main CPU 101 performs initial value random number update processing (step S3092). In this process, the main CPU 101 performs a process of updating the initial value random number counter.

Next, the main CPU 101 performs special symbol control processing (step S3093). The special symbol control process will be described later with reference to FIG.

Next, the main CPU 101 performs normal symbol control processing (step S3094). The normal symbol control process will be described later with reference to FIG.

Next, the main CPU 101 performs pattern display unit control processing (step S3095). In this process, the main CPU 101 displays the special symbol display section (first special symbol display section 73, A process of storing a control signal for driving the second special symbol display portion 74) and the normal symbol display portion 71 in the main RAM 103 is performed. As a result, the main CPU 101 transmits control signals to the special symbol display portion (the first special symbol display portion 73, the second special symbol display portion 74) and the normal symbol display portion 71, and the special symbol display portion (the first special symbol display portion). The display unit 73, the second special symbol display unit 74) and the normal symbol display unit 71 perform variable display and stop display for special symbols and normal symbols based on the received control signal.

Next, the main CPU 101 performs game information data generation processing (step S3096). In this process, the main CPU 101 generates a game state command related to game information data to be transmitted to the sub-control circuit 200 , payout/launch control circuit 300 and hall computer 700 , and stores it in the main RAM 103 .

Next, the main CPU 101 performs storage/game state data generation processing (step S3097). In this process, the main CPU 101 generates memory/game state data to be transmitted to the sub-control circuit 200 based on the value of the variable probability flag and the value of the time saving flag, and stores the memory/game state data in the main RAM 103 . After completing this process, the main CPU 101 returns to the process of step S3092.

[Special symbol control process]
FIG. 191 is a flowchart showing special symbol control processing by the main CPU 101. FIG. The special symbol control process is called as a subroutine during execution of the main control main process described above. Numerical values (“00” to “08”) written in parentheses to the left of each process shown in the figure indicate the value of the control state flag. This control state flag is stored in a predetermined storage area within the main RAM 103 . The main CPU 101 advances the special symbol game by executing processing according to the numerical value of the control state flag.

As shown in FIG. 191, the main CPU 101 loads the control state flag (step S3101). In this process, the main CPU 101 reads the value of the control state flag stored in the main RAM 103 . The main CPU 101 determines whether or not to execute each process of steps S3102 to S110, which will be described later, based on the value of the read control state flag. This control state flag indicates the state of the special symbol game, and enables execution of any one of steps S3102 to S110. Further, the main CPU 101 executes each process at a predetermined timing determined according to the waiting time set for each process of steps S3102 to S110. It should be noted that, before reaching this predetermined timing, each process is not executed, and processes related to other subroutines are executed. Of course, the aforementioned system timer interrupt processing (see FIG. 186) is also executed at predetermined intervals.

Next, the main CPU 101 performs special symbol storage check processing (step S3102). In this process, the main CPU 101 checks the reserved number of variable display of special symbols when the control state flag is a value ("00") indicating special symbol storage check processing, and when the reserved number is not "0". (When there is a reserved ball), the result of the big hit determination obtained in the starting winning prize detection process, the determination result of the main symbol, the determination result of the variation pattern of the special symbol, etc. are acquired. Also, in this process, the main CPU 101 sets the control state flag to a value ("01") indicating a special symbol variable display time management process (step S3093), which will be described later. The variable display time of the corresponding special pattern is set in the waiting time timer. That is, after the variation display time of the special symbol corresponding to the variation pattern determined in the starting opening winning detection process has passed, the special symbol variation time management process, which will be described later, is set to be executed. On the other hand, when the number of reserved balls is "0" (when there are no reserved balls), the main CPU 101 performs demonstration display processing for displaying a demonstration screen. This special symbol storage check process will be described in detail with reference to FIG.

Next, the main CPU 101 performs special symbol variation time management processing (step S3103). In this process, the main CPU 101 sets the control state flag to a value ("01") indicating special symbol variation time management processing, and when the special symbol variation display time has elapsed, the control state flag is set to a special symbol, which will be described later. A value (“02”) indicating the display time management process (step S3104) is set, and the waiting time after confirmation is set in the waiting time timer. That is, after the post-confirmation waiting time set in the process of step S3103 has passed, the special symbol display time management process, which will be described later, is set to be executed.

Next, the main CPU 101 performs special symbol display time management processing (step S3104). In this process, the main CPU 101 determines whether the control status flag is a value ("02") indicating the special symbol display time management process, and when the waiting time after confirmation set in the process of step S3103 has passed. It is determined whether or not the result is a "jackpot". Then, when the result of the jackpot determination is "jackpot", the main CPU 101 sets the control state flag to a value ("03") indicating the jackpot start interval management process (step S3105) described later, and sets the jackpot start interval to Set the corresponding time in the wait timer. That is, after the time corresponding to the jackpot start interval set in the process of step S3104 has passed, the jackpot start interval management process described later is set to be executed. On the other hand, if the result of the big hit determination is not "big hit", the main CPU 101 sets the control state flag to a value ("08") indicating a special symbol game ending process (step S3110), which will be described later. That is, in this case, the special symbol game ending process, which will be described later, is set to be executed. This special symbol display time management process will be described later with reference to FIG.

Next, the main CPU 101 performs jackpot start interval management processing (step S3105). In this process, the main CPU 101 determines that the control state flag is a value ("03") indicating the jackpot start interval management process, and when the time corresponding to the jackpot start interval set in the process of step S3104 has passed, the main CPU 101 In order to open the prize winning opening 540, the variables located in the main RAM 103 are updated based on the data read from the main ROM 102. FIG. Also, in this process, the main CPU 101 sets the control state flag to a value (“04)” indicating the processing during opening of the large winning opening (step S3106) described later, and also sets the upper limit opening time of the large winning opening 540 (for example, 30 seconds) is set in the timer for opening the big winning opening. That is, by this process, a setting is made so that the later-described process during the opening of the big winning opening is executed.

Next, the main CPU 101 performs processing during the opening of the big winning opening (step S3106). In this process, first, when the control state flag is a value (“04”) indicating the processing during the opening of the large winning opening, the main CPU 101 sets the condition that the large winning opening winning counter is equal to or greater than a predetermined number, It is determined whether or not one of the conditions that the upper limit time has elapsed (the timer for the opening time of the big winning opening is "0") has been satisfied (predetermined closing condition has been established). If one of the conditions is satisfied, the main CPU 101 updates the variables located in the main RAM 103 in order to close the big winning opening 540 . Then, the main CPU 101 sets a control state flag to a value (“05”) indicating a process for monitoring remaining balls in the big winning opening (step S3107), and sets a waiting time timer to monitor remaining balls in the big winning opening. do. That is, according to this process, after the time for monitoring the remaining balls in the big winning hole set in step S3107 has elapsed, the process for monitoring remaining balls in the big winning hole is set to be performed later. It should be noted that an inter-round display command is transmitted to the sub-control circuit 200 immediately before the end of the processing during the opening of the big winning opening.

Next, the main CPU 101 carries out a process of monitoring remaining balls in the big winning opening (step S3107). In this process, the main CPU 101 sets the control state flag to the value ("05") indicating the remaining ball in the big winning opening monitoring process, and when the monitoring time for remaining balls in the big winning opening has passed, the main CPU 101 sets the number of times counter for opening the big winning opening. It is determined whether or not the condition that the value is greater than or equal to the maximum value of the number of openings of the big winning opening (final round) is satisfied. When determining that the above conditions are not satisfied, the main CPU 101 sets a value (“06”) indicating the waiting time management process for reopening the big winning opening to the control state flag. Also, the main CPU 101 sets a waiting time timer to a time corresponding to the interval between rounds. That is, by this process, after the time corresponding to the interval between rounds has passed, the wait time management process before reopening the big winning opening, which will be described later, is set to be executed. On the other hand, in step S3107, when it is determined that the above conditions are satisfied, the main CPU 101 sets a value ("07") indicating the jackpot end interval processing to the control state flag, and sets the time corresponding to the jackpot end interval (jackpot end interval time) in the wait timer. That is, after the time corresponding to the jackpot end interval set in this process has passed, the jackpot end interval process described later is set to be executed.

Next, when the main CPU 101 determines that the value of the large winning opening opening number counter is not equal to or greater than the maximum value of the large winning opening opening number, the main CPU 101 performs waiting time management processing before reopening the large winning opening (step S3108). In this process, the main CPU 101 opens the big winning gate when the control state flag has a value (“06”) indicating the wait time management process before reopening the big winning gate and the time corresponding to the interval between rounds has passed. The memory is updated so that the value of the number counter is incremented by "1". In addition, the main CPU 101 sets a control state flag to a value (“04”) indicating the processing during the opening of the big winning opening. Then, the main CPU 101 sets the opening upper limit time (for example, 30 seconds) to the big winning opening opening time timer. That is, in this process, the above-described process during opening of the big winning opening (step S3106) is set to be executed again. It should be noted that, immediately before the end of the waiting time management process before re-opening of the big winning opening, a display command during opening of the big winning opening is transmitted to the sub-control circuit 200 .

Further, when the main CPU 101 determines that the value of the big winning opening opening number counter is equal to or greater than the maximum value of the number of opening the big winning opening, the main CPU 101 performs a big winning ending interval process (step S3109). In this process, the main CPU 101 determines that the control state flag has a value (“07”) indicating the jackpot end interval processing, and the value indicating the special symbol game end processing (“ 08”) is set in the control state flag. That is, by this process, the special symbol game ending process, which will be described later, is set to be executed after the process of step S3109. In addition, when the main symbol described above is one of the special figure 1-2, special figure 1-8 and special figure 2-2, the main CPU 101 performs control to shift the game state to a high probability game state. , If the above-mentioned main symbol is one of special figure 1-1, special figure 1-3 and special figure 2-1, control the game state to a low probability game state (probability variation flag OFF) conduct.

Next, the main CPU 101 performs a special symbol game ending process when the big win game state ends or when the result of the big win determination is "lost" (step S3110). In this process, when the control state flag is a value ("08") indicating the end processing of the special symbol game, the main CPU 101 updates the memory so as to decrease the data indicating the pending number (start memory information) by "1". do. In addition, the main CPU 101 updates the special symbol storage area in order to display the next special symbol in a variable manner. Furthermore, the main CPU 101 sets a value (“00”) indicating special symbol storage check processing to the control state flag. That is, by this process, after the process of step S3110, the special symbol storage check process (step S3102) described above is set to be executed. After finishing this special symbol game end process, the main CPU 101 ends the special symbol control process.

As described above, in the pachinko gaming machine according to the second embodiment, the special symbol game is advanced by sequentially setting various values to the control state flags. Specifically, when the game state is not the jackpot game state and the result of the jackpot determination is "loss", the main CPU 101 sets the control state flag to "00", "01", "02", or "08". set in order. As a result, the main CPU 101 performs the special symbol storage check process (step S3102), the special symbol variation time management process (step S3103), the special symbol display time management process (step S3104), and the special symbol game end process (step S3110). are executed in this order at a predetermined timing.

Further, when the game state is not the jackpot game state and the result of the jackpot determination is "jackpot", the main CPU 101 sets the control state flags in order of "00", "01", "02", and "03". do. As a result, the main CPU 101 performs the above-described special symbol storage check process (step S3102), special symbol variation time management process (step S3103), special symbol display time management process (step S3104) and jackpot start interval management process (step S3105). are executed in this order at a predetermined timing, and the transition control to the jackpot game state is executed.

Furthermore, the main CPU 101 sets the control state flags in the order of "04", "05" and "06" when the transition control to the jackpot game state is executed. As a result, the main CPU 101 performs the above-described processing during opening of the big winning prize (step S3106), the process of monitoring the remaining balls in the big winning prize (step S3107), and the waiting time management processing before reopening the big winning prize (step S3108) in this order. It is executed at a predetermined timing, and a big win game state is executed.

It should be noted that, when conditions for ending the jackpot game state are established during the jackpot game state, the main CPU 101 sets the control state flags in order of "04", "05", "07" and "08". As a result, the main CPU 101 performs the above-described processing during the opening of the big winning opening (step S3106), monitoring processing for remaining balls in the big winning opening (step S3107), jackpot ending interval processing (step S3109) and special symbol game ending processing (step S3110). are executed in this order at a predetermined timing, and the jackpot game state is terminated.

As described above, in the special symbol control process, the process flow is branched according to the status. Also, the normal symbol control processing (see FIG. 197 described later) of step S3094 during the main control main processing shown in FIG. 190 also branches the processing flow according to the status, like the special symbol control processing.

The processing program of the second embodiment is programmed so as to enable pure return processing from the small module to the parent module with a call instruction when the processing is branched according to the status. As a result, in the second embodiment, the program capacity can be reduced as compared with the case where a jump table is arranged for executing the above process.

[Special symbol memory check process]
FIG. 192 is a flow chart showing special symbol storage check processing by the main CPU 101. FIG. The special symbol storage check process is called as a subroutine during execution of the special symbol control process described above. As shown in the figure, first, the main CPU 101 reads a control state flag from a predetermined storage area in the main RAM 103 by load processing (step S3111).

Next, the main CPU 101 determines whether or not the read control state flag is a value (“00”) indicating special symbol storage check processing (step S3112). When determining that the control state flag is not "00" (NO in step S3112), the main CPU 101 terminates the special symbol storage check process. On the other hand, when determining that the control state flag is "00" (YES in step S3112), the main CPU 101 proceeds to the process of step S3113.

In step S3113, the main CPU 101 determines whether or not the pending number (second start memory number) of the second start winning prize (variation display of the second special symbol) is "0". When the main CPU 101 determines that the number of pending second starting opening prizes is "0" (YES in step S3113), the process proceeds to step S3114, and if the number of pending second starting opening prizes is not "0". If so (NO in step S3113), the process proceeds to step S3121.

In step S3114, the main CPU 101 determines whether or not the pending number (first start memory number) of the first start winning prize (variation display of the first special symbol) is "0". When the main CPU 101 determines that the number of pending first starting opening prizes is not "0" (NO in step S3114), the process proceeds to step S3115, and determines that the number of pending first starting opening prizes is "0". If so (YES in step S3114), the process proceeds to step S3120.

In step S3115, the main CPU 101 subtracts "1" from the value of the first start memory number corresponding to the pending number of first start opening winning prizes. In this second embodiment, the main CPU 101 determines whether or not data is stored in the first special symbol start storage area (0) to the first special symbol start storage area (4) provided in the main RAM 103. Then, it is determined whether or not there is a start memory of the special symbol game corresponding to the variable display of the first special symbol which is being displayed or is being held. In the first special symbol start memory area (0), data (information) of the special symbol game corresponding to the variable display of the first special symbol during the variable display is stored as start memory information. Then, in the first special symbol start storage area (1) to the first special symbol start storage area (4), a special symbol game corresponding to four reserved first special symbol fluctuation displays (reserved balls). is stored as start-up memory information. It should be noted that the starting memory information of each first special symbol starting memory area includes data indicating, for example, a random number value for judging a big hit, a random number value for determining a symbol extracted at the time of winning of the first starting port 420, and a determined variation pattern. is included.

Next, in step S3116, the main CPU 101 performs special symbol storage transfer processing based on the winning of the first start opening. In this process, the main CPU 101 shifts the data in the first special symbol start storage areas (1) to (4) to the first special symbol start storage areas (0) to (3) respectively. At this time, the main CPU 101 also transmits a pending subtraction command to the sub-control circuit 200 . After that, the main CPU 101 shifts to the process of step S3117.

In step S3117, the main CPU 101 performs a process of setting a control state flag to a value ("01") indicating a special symbol variation time management process. At this time, the main CPU 101 also transmits a special symbol effect start command to the sub-control circuit 200 .

In step S3118, the main CPU 101 performs big hit determination processing. In this process, the main CPU 101 selects the random value for judging a big hit that is extracted at the time of winning the starting opening and is previously set in the first special symbol start storage area (0) or the second special symbol start storage area (0). Based on this, a big hit determination table (not shown) corresponding to the type of winning start opening is referenced to obtain determination value data. Then, the main CPU 101 determines whether it is a "big win" or a "losing" based on the acquired determination value data (big win determination).

Next, in step S3119, the main CPU 101 sets the variation display time corresponding to the variation pattern of the special symbols determined in the variation pattern determination processing of step S3078 or step S3088 (see FIG. 188 for both) to the waiting time timer. . After completing this process, the main CPU 101 ends the special symbol storage check process.

In step S3120, main CPU 101 performs demonstration display processing for displaying a demonstration screen. In this process, the main CPU 101 transmits a demonstration display command to the sub-control circuit 200 . After completing this process, the main CPU 101 ends the special symbol storage check process.

Further, in step S3121, the main CPU 101 subtracts "1" from the value of the second start memory number corresponding to the pending number of second start opening winning prizes. In this second embodiment, the main CPU 101 determines whether or not data is stored in the second special symbol start storage area (0) to the second special symbol start storage area (4) provided in the main RAM 103. Then, it is determined whether or not there is a start memory of the special symbol game corresponding to the variable display of the second special symbol during variable display or pending. In the second special symbol start memory area (0), the data (information) of the special symbol game corresponding to the variable display of the second special symbol during the variable display is stored as the start memory information. Then, in the second special symbol start storage area (1) to the second special symbol start storage area (4), a special symbol game corresponding to the second special symbol fluctuation display (reserved ball) for four times held. is stored as start-up memory information. In addition, the starting memory information of each second special symbol starting memory area includes, for example, a random number value for judging a big hit, a random number value for determining a symbol extracted at the time of winning of the second starting port 440, data indicating a determined variation pattern, etc. is included.

Next, the main CPU 101 performs special symbol storage transfer processing based on the second starting opening winning (step S3122). In this process, the main CPU 101 shifts the data in the second special symbol start storage areas (1) to (4) to the second special symbol start storage areas (0) to (3) respectively. At this time, the main CPU 101 also transmits a pending subtraction command to the sub-control circuit 200 . After that, the main CPU 101 shifts to the processing of step S3117, executes the processing of steps S3118 and S3119, and ends the special symbol storage check processing.

[Special symbol display time management process]
193 is a flowchart showing special symbol display time management processing by the main CPU 101. FIG. The special symbol display time management process is called as a subroutine during execution of the special symbol control process described above. As shown in the figure, the main CPU 101 determines whether or not the control state flag is a value ("02") indicating special symbol display time management processing (step S3131). When determining that the control state flag is not the value (“02”) indicating the special symbol display time management process (NO in step S3131), the main CPU 101 terminates the special symbol display time management process. On the other hand, when determining that the control state flag is the value ("02") indicating the special symbol display time management process (YES in step S3131), the main CPU 101 proceeds to the process of step S3132.

In step S3132, the main CPU 101 determines whether or not the value (waiting time) of the waiting time timer is "0". In this process, the main CPU 101 determines whether or not the waiting time (variation display start waiting time) set in the waiting time timer after the determination of the variable display has expired. When determining that the value of the waiting time timer is not "0" (NO in step S3132), the main CPU 101 terminates the special symbol display time management process. On the other hand, when determining that the value of the waiting time timer is "0" (YES in step S3132), the main CPU 101 proceeds to the process of step S3133.

At step S3133, the main CPU 101 determines whether or not the special symbol game is a "jackpot". When determining that the special symbol game is a "big hit" (YES in step S3133), the main CPU 101 proceeds to the process of step S3134. On the other hand, when it is determined that the special symbol game is not a "big hit" (NO in step S3133), main CPU 101 proceeds to the process of step S3140.

In step S3134, the main CPU 101 performs a process of setting a jackpot flag indicating a jackpot. After completing this process, the main CPU 101 proceeds to the process of step S3135.

In step S3135, the main CPU 101 performs a process of clearing the time saving number counter, the time saving flag and the probability variation flag. After completing this process, the main CPU 101 proceeds to the process of step S3136.

In step S3136, the main CPU 101 performs a process of setting a control state flag to a value ("03") indicating a jackpot start interval management process.

Next, the main CPU 101 performs a process of setting a waiting time timer to a jackpot start interval time (for example, 5000 ms) corresponding to the special symbol (first special symbol or second special symbol) (step S3137).

Next, the main CPU 101 performs a process of setting a jackpot start command corresponding to the special symbol in the main RAM 103 (step S3138). As a result, a jackpot start command is transmitted to the sub-control circuit 200 .

Next, the main CPU 101 refers to the jackpot type determination table (see FIG. 169, FIG. 173 or FIG. 174), and determines the upper limit of the number of rounds (the upper limit of the number of openings of the big winning opening) corresponding to the special symbol (type of symbol designation command). ) is set in the main RAM 103, and the round number display LED pattern flag is set (step S3139). The number-of-rounds display LED pattern flag is a flag indicating whether to display the number of remaining rounds in a predetermined pattern. After completing this process, the main CPU 101 ends the special symbol display time management process.

In step S3140, the main CPU 101 performs time reduction number subtraction processing. This time reduction number subtraction process will be described later with reference to FIG. 194 .

Next, the main CPU 101 performs a process of setting a control state flag to a value (“08”) indicating special symbol game end processing (step S3141). After completing this process, the main CPU 101 ends the special symbol display time management process.

[Time saving number of times subtraction processing]
FIG. 194 is a flow chart showing the time reduction number subtraction process by the main CPU 101 . The time reduction number subtraction process is called as a subroutine during execution of the special symbol display time management process described above or the jackpot end interval process described later. As shown in the figure, the main CPU 101 determines whether or not the value of the time saving number counter is 0 (step S3151). The time saving frequency counter is a subtraction counter that counts until the set time saving frequency becomes zero. When the value of the time saving number counter is 0 (YES in step S3151), the main CPU 101 proceeds to the process of step S3154. If the value of the time saving frequency counter is not 0 (NO in step S3151), the main CPU 101 ends the time saving frequency subtraction process. Although the details will be described later, in the second embodiment, the number of times the time saving counter is set is 100 times or 10000 times.

In step S3152, the main CPU 101 performs a process of subtracting 1 from the value of the time saving number counter.

Next, the main CPU 101 again determines whether or not the value of the time saving number counter is 0 (step S3153). When the value of the time saving number counter is 0 (YES in step S3153), the main CPU 101 proceeds to the process of step S3154. If the value of the time saving counter is not 0 (NO in step S3153), the main CPU 101 ends the time saving number subtraction process.

In step S3154, the main CPU 101 performs a process of setting "0" as a time saving flag. After completing this process, the main CPU 101 ends the time reduction number subtraction process.

[Jackpot end interval processing]
FIG. 195 is a flow chart showing the jackpot end interval processing by the main CPU101. The jackpot end interval process is called as a subroutine during execution of the special symbol control process described above. As shown in the figure, the main CPU 101 determines whether or not the control state flag is a value ("07") indicating the jackpot end interval processing (step S3161). When determining that the control state flag is not the value (“07”) indicating the big-hit end interval process (NO in step S3161), the main CPU 101 ends the big-hit end interval process. On the other hand, when it is determined that the control state flag is the value ("07") indicating the jackpot end interval process (YES in step S3161), the main CPU 101 proceeds to the process of step S3162.

In step S3162, the main CPU 101 determines whether or not the value of the waiting time timer is "0". In this process, the main CPU 101 determines whether or not the jackpot end interval time set in the waiting time timer has expired. When determining that the value of the waiting time timer is not "0" (NO in step S3162), the main CPU 101 terminates the jackpot ending interval process. On the other hand, when determining that the value of the waiting time timer is "0" (YES in step S3162), the main CPU 101 proceeds to the process of step S3163.

In step S3163, the main CPU 101 clears the large winning opening open count LED pattern flag. The number of times of winning opening display LED pattern flag is used as a management flag indicating whether or not the number of rounds at the time of a big hit is displayed by the light emission pattern of the LED.

Next, the main CPU 101 clears the round number distribution flag (step S3164). This round number distribution flag is one of the management flags stored in the main RAM 103, and is used to indicate whether or not the big winning opening 540 is to be periodically opened and closed a predetermined number of times even during one round. flag. When the big winning opening 540 is opened and closed periodically even during one round, the round number distribution flag becomes "1". At this time, the main CPU 101 also transmits a special symbol jackpot end display command to the sub-control circuit 200 .

Next, the main CPU 101 performs a process of setting a control state flag to a value (“08”) indicating special symbol game end processing (step S3165).

Next, the main CPU 101 determines whether or not the special symbol game is a "jackpot" (step S3166). When determining that the special symbol game is a "jackpot" (YES in step S3166), the main CPU 101 proceeds to the process of step S3167. On the other hand, when it is determined that the special symbol game is not a "big hit" (NO in step S3166), the main CPU 101 proceeds to the process of step S3174.

In step S<b>3167 , the main CPU 101 performs processing for setting a big hit flag to ON in a predetermined area of the main RAM 34 .

Next, the main CPU 101 determines whether or not it is a variable probability big hit (step S3168). If it is a variable probability big hit (YES in step S3168), the main CPU 101 proceeds to the process of step S3169. If it is not a variable probability big hit (NO in step S3168), the main CPU 101 proceeds to the process of step S3171.

In step S3169, the main CPU 101 performs a process of setting "1" as a variable probability flag.

Next, the main CPU 101 performs a process of setting "1" as a time saving flag (step S3171).

Next, the main CPU 101 performs a process of setting a prescribed number of times of time saving in the time saving number counter (step S3172). In this second embodiment, with reference to the jackpot type determination table (Fig. 169, Fig. 173 or Fig. 174), the number of times of time saving 100 jackpots (for example, special figure 1-1, special figure 1-3, special figure 2 -1 etc.), set 100 times to the time saving number counter, and the time saving continues until the next big hit game state is executed (for example, special figure 1-2, special figure 1-8, special figure 2 -2, etc.), set 10000 times to the time saving counter. However, the time-reduction number counter set when the time-reduction continues until the next big-hit game state is executed is not limited to 10000 times, and even if the game continues from the opening to the closing of the hall. Any number of times that cannot occur in reality is acceptable. In this way, by setting the number of times that cannot actually occur even if the game is continued from the opening of the hall to the closing of the hall, the time reduction is substantially continued until the next big win game state is executed. It will be done. Furthermore, when the jackpot is 100 times of time saving times, counter processing is performed (100 times is set in the time saving times counter), and when the big wins continue time saving until the next big win game state is executed, flag processing is performed. (The time saving game state is continued as long as the time saving flag is ON).

Next, the main CPU 101 executes variation pattern table setting processing (step S3173). The variation pattern table setting process will be described later with reference to FIG. After completing this process, the main CPU 101 ends the jackpot end interval process.

In step S3174, the main CPU 101 performs a process of clearing the big-hit flag, that is, a process of turning off the big-hit flag set to ON in a predetermined area of the main RAM .

In step S3175, the main CPU 101 executes the above-described time reduction number subtraction process (step S3175). After completing this process, the main CPU 101 ends the jackpot end interval process.

[Variation pattern table setting process]
FIG. 196 is a flow chart showing variation pattern table setting processing by the main CPU 101 . The variation pattern table setting process is called as a subroutine during the execution of the above-described power-on process or the jackpot end interval process. As shown in the figure, the main CPU 101 determines whether or not the power is turned on (step S3181). If the power is on (YES in step S3181), the main CPU 101 proceeds to the process of step S3182. If the power is not turned on (NO in step S3181), the main CPU 101 proceeds to the process of step S3183.

In step S3182, the main CPU 101 performs processing of setting table pattern 1 as a table pattern when referring to the special symbol variation time determination table shown in FIG. 170 (or FIG. 172). Table pattern 1 corresponds to a table pattern when both the variable probability flag and the time saving flag are ON (both the big hit and the losing) in the special symbol variation time determination table shown in FIG. 170 (or FIG. 172). .

Next, the main CPU 101 determines whether or not the time saving flag is ON (step S3183). If the time saving flag is ON (YES in step S3183), main CPU 101 proceeds to the process of step S3184. When the time saving flag is OFF (NO in step S3183), the main CPU 101 proceeds to the process of step S3185.

In step S3184, the main CPU 101 performs a process of setting the table pattern 2 as a table pattern when referring to the special symbol variation time determination table shown in FIG. 170 (or FIG. 172). After completing this process, the main CPU 101 ends the variation pattern table setting process. Table pattern 2 corresponds to the table pattern when the time saving flag is OFF (both big hit and loss) in the special symbol variation time determination table shown in FIG. 170 (or FIG. 172).

In step S3185, the main CPU 101 performs processing of setting table pattern 3 as a table pattern when referring to the special symbol variation time determination table shown in FIG. 170 (or FIG. 172). After completing this process, the main CPU 101 ends the variation pattern table setting process. Table pattern 3 corresponds to the table pattern when the time saving flag is ON (both big hit and loss) in the special symbol fluctuation time determination table shown in FIG. 170 (or FIG. 172).

[Normal symbol control process]
FIG. 197 is a flowchart showing normal symbol control processing by the main CPU 101. FIG. The normal symbol control process is called as a subroutine during execution of the main control main process described above. In addition, the numerical value (“00” to “04”) written in parentheses on the right side of each process in the flowchart shown in FIG. stored in a predetermined storage area in the The main CPU 101 advances the normal symbol game by executing each process corresponding to the numerical value of the normal symbol control state flag.

As shown in FIG. 197, the main CPU 101 performs a process of loading the normal symbol control state flag (step S3191). In this process, the main CPU 101 reads the normal symbol control state flag stored in the main RAM 103 . The main CPU 101 determines whether or not to execute various processes of steps S3192 to S196, which will be described later, based on the value of the read normal symbol control state flag. This normal symbol control state flag normally indicates the state of the game of the symbol game, and enables execution of any one of steps S3162 to S166. Further, the main CPU 101 executes each process at a predetermined timing determined according to the waiting time set for each process of steps S3162 to S166. Before reaching this predetermined timing, other subroutine processing is executed without executing each processing. Of course, the aforementioned system timer interrupt processing (see FIG. 186) is also executed at predetermined intervals.

Next, the main CPU 101 performs normal symbol memory check processing (step S3192). In this process, when the normal symbol control state flag is a value ("00") indicating normal symbol storage check processing, the main CPU 101 checks the number of suspensions of variable display of normal symbols, and the number of suspensions is "0". When it is not, a process such as big hit determination is performed. Also, in this process, the main CPU 101 sets the normal symbol control state flag to a value ("01") indicating the normal symbol fluctuation time monitoring process (step S3193) described later, and sets the fluctuation time determined in this process. Set a wait timer. That is, by the process of step S3192, after the determined normal symbol variation time has passed, the normal symbol variation time monitoring process, which will be described later, is set to be executed.

Next, the main CPU 101 performs normal symbol fluctuation time monitoring processing (step S3193). In this process, the main CPU 101 sets the normal symbol control state flag to the normal symbol control state flag when the value ("01") indicating the normal symbol fluctuation time monitoring process has passed, and the normal symbol control state flag is set to the normal symbol control state flag. A value ("02") indicating normal symbol display time monitoring processing (step S3194) is set, and a waiting time (for example, 0.5 seconds) after confirmation is set in the waiting time timer. That is, by the processing of step S3193, after the set waiting time has elapsed, the normal symbol display time monitoring processing described later is set to be executed.

Next, the main CPU 101 performs normal symbol display time monitoring processing (step S3194). In this process, the main CPU 101 determines that the normal symbol control state flag is a value ("02") indicating the normal symbol display time monitoring process, and when the waiting time after confirmation set in the process of step S3193 has passed, the main CPU 101 hits the jackpot. It is determined whether or not the determination result is a "big hit". Then, if the result of the big hit determination is "big hit", the main CPU 101 performs the normal electric role product opening setting process, and sets the normal symbol control state flag to a value ( "03"). That is, by this process, setting is made so that the normal electric accessary product release process, which will be described later, is executed. On the other hand, if the result of the big hit determination is not "big hit", the main CPU 101 sets the normal symbol control state flag to a value ("04") indicating normal symbol game end processing (step S3195), which will be described later. That is, in this case, it is set so that the normal symbol game ending process, which will be described later, is executed.

Next, the main CPU 101 performs normal electric accessory release processing when the result of the big hit determination is determined to be a "big hit" in step S3194 (step S3195). In this process, when the normal symbol control state flag is a value (“03”) indicating the normal electric accessory opening process, the main CPU 101 determines that a predetermined number of prizes have been won while the normal electric accessory 460 is being opened. It is determined whether one of the conditions and the condition that the opening upper limit time of the normal electric accessory 460 has passed (the normal electric function opening time timer is "0") is satisfied. When one of the above conditions is satisfied, the main CPU 101 updates the variables located in the main RAM 103 in order to close the vane member 4620 of the normal electric accessory 460 (see, for example, FIG. 5). Then, the main CPU 101 sets the normal symbol control state flag to a value (“04”) indicating normal symbol game end processing (step S3196), which will be described later. That is, by this process, the normal symbol game end process, which will be described later, is set to be executed.

Next, the main CPU 101 performs normal symbol game end processing (step S3196). In this process, when the normal symbol control state flag is a value ("04") indicating the normal symbol game end process, the main CPU 101 reduces the data indicating the pending number of variable display of normal symbols by "1". memory update. In addition, the main CPU 101 updates the normal symbol storage area in order to display the next normal symbol in a variable manner. Further, the main CPU 101 sets the normal symbol control state flag to a value (“00”) indicating normal symbol storage check processing. That is, after the process of step S3196, the above-described normal symbol memory check process (step S3192) is set to be executed. After completing this process, the main CPU 101 ends the normal symbol control process.

[Sub-control circuit main processing]
On the other hand, the sub CPU 201 executes the sub control circuit main process. This sub-control circuit main processing will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 198 is a flowchart showing an example of main processing by the sub CPU 201. FIG. Note that this sub-control circuit main process is a process that is started when the power is turned on.

As shown in FIG. 198, the sub CPU 201 performs initialization processing such as RAM access permission, work area initialization, hardware initialization, device initialization, application initialization, backup recovery initialization, etc. (step S3201).

Next, the sub CPU 201 performs processing to clear the counter value of the watchdog timer (step S3202). The watchdog timer is set to a reset time (for example, 2000 ms) when activated, and power-off processing is executed when the service pulse is not written (during timeout).

Next, the sub CPU 201 executes operation means input processing (step S3203).

Next, the sub CPU 201 executes command analysis processing (step S3204). The command analysis processing will be described later with reference to FIG.

Next, the sub CPU 201 executes effect mode determination processing (step S3205). The rendering mode determination process is a process of determining the rendering mode to be displayed on the liquid crystal display device 16 based on various commands transmitted from the main control circuit 100 .

The effect mode determined in the effect mode determination process (step S3205) includes a setting suggesting effect suggesting the set value. A first example and a second example will be given to explain this setting suggestion effect.

(first example)
A first example of the setting suggestion effect is performed on the condition that the winning of the game ball to the first starting port 420 (see, for example, FIG. 5) exceeds the upper limit of the reservation. For example, the sub CPU 201 counts the first starting winning opening overflow point, and when the reserved number overflow command for the first starting winning opening is transmitted from the main control circuit 100, 1 is added to the first starting winning opening overflow point. do. Then, when the first starting prize winning opening overflow point reaches a predetermined point (for example, 50 points), the main CPU 101 determines to execute the setting suggestion effect in the effect mode determination process. In a non-time-saving game state such as a normal game state where the time-saving flag is OFF, it is not easy for game balls to enter the first start-up opening 420, so when the first start-up winning opening overflows, the player's disappointment is immeasurable. . Therefore, it is possible to suppress the disappointment of the player without giving a direct loss to the hole by performing the setting suggestion effect on the condition that the first start winning opening overflow occurs in the non-time saving game state. It becomes possible. Also, some players stop shooting game balls when the number of game balls entering the first starting port 420 reaches the upper limit of the hold. In this regard, it is also possible to promote the game by performing the setting suggestion effect on the condition that the winning prize of the game ball at the first starting port 420 exceeds the upper limit of the reservation.

In the first example of the setting suggestion effect, the setting suggestion effect is performed when the first start winning opening overflow point reaches a predetermined point. The setting suggestion effect may be performed when the reserved number overflow command is transmitted from the main control circuit 100. - 特許庁In this case, the execution frequency of the setting-suggestion effect increases, so it is preferable that the setting-suggestion effect is difficult to guess, for example, if the setting-suggestion effect is performed only once. For example, it is difficult to guess the setting from only the information obtained from one setting suggesting effect, but it is possible to guess the setting by collecting multiple pieces of information obtained from multiple setting suggesting effects. It is conceivable to

In addition, as described above, the reason why the pending number overflow command for the first start opening winning prize is transmitted to the sub-control circuit 200 is that the set value data is determined to be normal in the setting check process of step S3072. be. Therefore, when it is not determined that the set value data is normal in the setting check process, even if the winning of the game ball to the first start port 420 (see, for example, FIG. 5) exceeds the upper limit of the reservation. , the sub CPU 201 does not add to the first start winning opening overflow point. Therefore, when the winning of the game ball to the first starting opening 420 (see, for example, FIG. 5) exceeds the upper limit of the reservation, the first starting winning opening overflow point reaches a predetermined point (for example, a predetermined point 50 points and 49 points), when the winning of the game ball to the first start port 420 (see, for example, FIG. 5) exceeds the upper limit of the reservation, the setting check process of step S3072 (FIG. 188 ), the main CPU 101 turns off the game permission flag (step S3722 to be described later) without performing the setting suggestion effect by the sub CPU 201, and it becomes impossible to proceed with the game. .

In addition, in the first example of the setting suggestion effect, even if the winning of the game ball to the second starting port 440 (see, for example, FIG. 5) exceeds the upper limit of the reservation, the setting suggestion effect is not performed ( FIG. 188), on the condition that the winning of the game ball to the second start port 440 exceeds the upper limit of the reservation, the same as when the winning of the game ball to the first start port 420 exceeds the upper limit of the reservation, set A suggestion performance may be performed.

(Second example)
A second example of the setting suggestion effect is performed when a game ball wins a prize in a specific winning hole during execution of the ready-to-win effect. For example, at the start of the ready-to-win effect, the sub CPU 201 selects a specific winning opening among the first starting opening 420, the second starting opening 440, and the general winning openings 53, 54, and 55 (see FIG. 5, for example). Randomly determined by lottery. When the main control circuit 100 transmits a winning command for the game ball to the determined specific winning hole during execution of the ready-to-win effect, execution of the setting suggesting effect is determined. For example, among players, there are players who stop shooting game balls when a ready-to-win effect with a long fluctuation time is executed. Therefore, during execution of the ready-to-win effect, by executing the setting suggestion effect based on the detection of winning of the game ball to a specific winning hole, it is possible to prompt the shooting of the game ball even during the ready-to-win effect. . Also, in the ready-to-win effect, it may be immediately known that the expectation level is low when the ready-to-win effect is started. In such a case, the player may not be interested in the next variable display until the ready-to-win effect ends. In this respect, during the ready-to-win effect, by executing the setting suggestion effect based on the winning detection of the game ball to the specific winning hole, it is possible to suppress the decrease in interest. Moreover, if the setting value can be set by the game machine manager, the player may become suspicious that the setting value of the pachinko machine on which he or she plays is low. According to the example of (1), it is possible to reduce such a fear and to suppress the decline in interest.

In addition, when the above-mentioned specific winning opening is randomly determined by lottery, for example, from among the first starting opening 420, the second starting opening 440, and the general winning openings 53, 54, and 55 (see FIG. 5, for example), It is preferable to keep secret without disclosing which one is a specific prize winning slot. As a result, the player finds interest in deciding which winning slot should be aimed at.

Further, in the second example of the setting suggestion effect, the specific winning opening is the first starting opening 420, the second starting opening 440, and the general winning openings 53, 54, 55 (all of which are shown in FIG. 5, for example). Among them, for example, it is determined randomly by lottery, but it is not necessarily limited to randomly determining a specific winning opening, and a fixed winning opening may be used as a specific winning opening.

In both the first example and the second example of the setting suggestion effect, the sub CPU 201 determines that the setting suggestion effect is to be executed, but the main CPU 101 may make the determination.

It should be noted that, during execution of the ready-to-win effect, if the game ball has won a specific winning opening, if the specific winning opening is the starting opening, the setting check process of step S3072 or step S3082 (both see FIG. 188) is performed. will be The setting suggestion effect in this case is performed only when the above setting check process determines that the setting is normal (YES in step S3721). When the main CPU 101 determines that it is not normal in the setting check process (NO in step S3721), not only does the setting suggesting effect not occur, but also the special symbols that are displayed in a variable manner are prohibited from being stopped by the process of step S734. do. Further, the sub CPU 201 also continues the variable performance of the decorative symbols even during the variable performance of the decorative symbols accompanied by the ready-to-win performance. However, the sub CPU 201 may stop the sound effect output by the sound control circuit 205, or may reduce the output volume.

Next, the sub CPU 201 executes command transmission processing (step S3206). The command transmission process will be described later with reference to FIG.

Next, the display control circuit 204 executes drawing control processing (step S3207). In this process, the display control circuit 204 performs drawing control for displaying an image on the liquid crystal display device 16 based on the message (effect specifying information) transmitted from the sub CPU 201 .

Next, the audio control circuit 205 executes audio control processing (step S3208). In this process, the audio control circuit 205 performs audio control for causing the speaker 24 to output audio based on the message (effect specifying information) transmitted from the sub CPU 201 .

Next, the LED control circuit 206 executes control processing for the light emission mode of the LED 25 (step S3209). In this process, the LED control circuit 206 performs light emission control for lighting or blinking the LED 25 based on the message (effect specifying information) transmitted from the sub CPU 201 .

Next, the role product control circuit 207 executes a role product control process (step S3210). In this process, the role product control circuit 207 performs drive control for operating the performance drive motor that operates the movable role product unit based on the message (performance designation information) transmitted from the sub CPU 201 . In such a sub-control circuit main process, after the initialization process of step S3201 is finished, the processes of steps S3202 to S210 are repeatedly executed.

[Command analysis processing]
199 is a flowchart showing command analysis processing by the sub CPU 201. FIG. The command analysis process is called as a subroutine during execution of the sub-control circuit main process described above. As shown in the figure, after receiving from the main control circuit 100 (main CPU 101), the sub CPU 201 analyzes the command stored in the reception buffer of the work RAM 203 (step S3241).

Next, the sub CPU 201 checks the consistency of the received command (step S3242). Consistency check is performed to verify that the target data exists upon command reception and that the data has no errors or omissions.

Next, the sub CPU 201 performs sub lottery processing (step S3243). In this process, when the received command is a variation pattern designation command, the sub CPU 201 selects an effect pattern by lottery based on the variation pattern designation command. After completing this process, the sub CPU 201 ends the command analysis process. In the sub-lottery process, all items related to the effect including the effect pattern may be selected by lottery, or only the type of effect (presence or absence of dialogue notice, presence or absence of SU notice, etc.) may be selected as the effect pattern. The effect contents (type of effect, type of cut-in, etc.) selected by lottery and executed in the effect may be selected as effect information in another subroutine process. In the second embodiment, an effect pattern indicating the type of effect is selected in the sub lottery process, and then the content of the effect to be executed based on the effect pattern is selected as effect information by the effect mode determination process described later. It has become.

By the way, in the pachinko gaming machine according to the second embodiment, setting check processing is performed in steps S3072 and S3082 (see FIG. 188) during game execution. 5” (NO in step S3721 of FIG. 189), the processing of steps S3722 to S3726 is executed, and then the abnormal processing of step S3727 is executed. However, if, for example, the main control board 30 is illegally replaced, there is a high possibility that the setting check process of step S3072 or step S3082 will not be executed. Also, when an illegal signal is input and the set value is changed, there is a possibility that the set value data is within the range of "0" to "5". Therefore, in the pachinko machine according to the second embodiment, if the setting check process is not executed in step S3072 or step S3082, or if there is a possibility that the setting value has been changed illegally, the setting value data is set to "0". ” to “5” (for example, when YES is determined in step S3721), the sub CPU 201 executes setting determination processing for determining whether the setting value information is appropriate. This setting determination processing will be described below without illustration.

First, the main CPU 101 starts the variable display of the special symbols at a specific timing (for example, when the game ball enters the first start port 420 and the second start port 440 and the variable display of the special symbols is suspended). ), a command indicating the set value information stored in the main RAM 103 is transmitted. After receiving this command, the sub CPU 201 determines whether the set value information indicated by the command received this time (hereinafter referred to as "current set value") is appropriate. This propriety determination is, for example, a process of determining whether or not the set value information (hereinafter referred to as "previous set value") indicated by the previously received command matches the current set value.

Then, the sub CPU 201 determines that the setting value is normal if the previous setting value and the current setting value match, and that the setting value is abnormal if the previous setting value and the current setting value do not match. I judge.

Further, when the received setting value information is abnormal, the sub CPU 201 executes a setting value abnormality processing. For example, in the display area of the liquid crystal display device 16, an image notifying that the setting value is abnormal is displayed. This is a process of outputting a notification sound.

It should be noted that the determination of suitability of the setting value information described above is not limited to the determination of whether or not the previous setting value and the current setting value match. Alternatively, part of the set value information received a plurality of times (for example, the set value indicated by the command received two times before and the current set value) match each other. You may make it determine whether it exists. However, when the sub CPU 201 receives a command (for example, a setting change start command or an initialization command) indicating that the setting change process (see step S3024 in FIG. 179) has been executed, the current setting value is stored in the work RAM 203. However, it is not determined whether or not the past set values including the previous set values match the current set values.

Also, the above-described setting determination process (determination of suitability of set value information) is preferably performed not only during execution of a game, but also when the power is turned on after power failure, unless the setting change process is executed. . The setting determination process that is executed when the power is turned on after the power is turned off will be described later with reference to FIG. 213 .

The setting determination process executed by the sub CPU 201 described above may be executed during the command analysis process (step S3204), or may be executed after exiting the subroutine of the command analysis process.

[Command transmission processing]
FIG. 200 is a flow chart showing command transmission processing by the sub CPU 201 . The command transmission process is called as a subroutine during execution of the sub-control circuit main process described above. As shown in the figure, the sub CPU 201 executes a message setting process when transmitting a control command (message) to each of the control circuits 204 to 207 (step S3251). In this process, the sub CPU 201 generates a message (effect designation information) based on the effect information obtained in the effect mode determination process, and temporarily stores the message in the direct buffer of the work RAM 203 . This message setting process will be described later with reference to FIG.

Next, the sub CPU 201 executes direct table registration processing (step S3252). In this process, the sub CPU 201 sets a direct table corresponding to the message and effect information stored in the direct buffer in a predetermined area of the work RAM 203 . This direct table registration processing will be described later with reference to FIG.

Next, the sub CPU 201 executes message transmission processing (step S3253). In this process, the sub CPU 201 reads out the message stored in the direct buffer at a predetermined timing based on the direct table, and performs a process of transmitting the message to predetermined control circuits 204-207. After completing this process, the sub CPU 201 ends the command transmission process. This message transmission processing will be described later with reference to FIG.

[Message setting process]
FIG. 201 is a flow chart showing message setting processing by the sub CPU 201 . The message setting process is called as a subroutine during execution of the above-described command transmission process. As shown in the figure, the sub CPU 201 sets devices (control circuits 204 to 207) to be transmitted based on the performance information (step S3261).

Next, the sub CPU 201 performs processing for setting presence/absence of system operation (step S3262).

Next, the sub CPU 201 sets stage information and each effect information (step S3263).

Next, the sub CPU 201 sets the notice pattern (step S3264). As a result, the direct buffer stores a message indicating the destination device (control circuits 204 to 207), the presence or absence of system operation, stage information, various performance information, and notice patterns. After completing this process, the sub CPU 201 ends the message setting process.

[Direct table registration process]
FIG. 202 is a flowchart showing direct table registration processing by the sub CPU 201 . The direct table registration process is called as a subroutine during execution of the above-described command transmission process. As shown in the figure, the sub CPU 201 performs processing for registering a single table (step S3271).

Next, the sub CPU 201 performs a process of registering a master table based on the effect information determined in the effect mode determination process (step S3272).

Next, the sub CPU 201 performs processing for registering a slave table to be used in the master table (step S3273).

Next, the sub CPU 201 performs processing for registering the direct table corresponding to the message set in the direct buffer as a slave table (step S3274). After completing this process, the sub CPU 201 ends the direct table registration process.

[Message sending process]
203 is a flowchart showing message transmission processing by the sub CPU 201. FIG. The message transmission process is called as a subroutine during execution of the command transmission process described above. As shown in the figure, if a message is registered in the direct buffer corresponding to the direct table, the sub CPU 201 sends the message to each device (control circuits 204 to 207) according to the "destination device" set in the message. is transmitted (step S3281).

After completing the message transmission, the sub CPU 201 performs a process of discarding unnecessary direct tables (step S3282). After completing this process, the sub CPU 201 ends the message transmission process.

[Expandability of Gaming Machine According to Second Embodiment]
As described above, in the pachinko gaming machine according to the second embodiment, according to the setting value that has been set, jackpot probability, reach probability, special symbol fluctuation time, main symbol selection rate (number of rounds, probability variable entry rate, However, it is not necessary to change all of them according to the set value, and one or more of them may be changed according to the set value.

Further, in the pachinko gaming machine according to the second embodiment, in the normal symbol display unit 71, when the normal symbols stopped and displayed are in a predetermined mode ("normal hit" mode), the normal electric accessory 46 is displayed. The closed state is changed to the open state only for a predetermined period. Therefore, the player may be notified of the timing when the normal electric accessory 46 changes from the closed state to the open state and the timing when the open state changes to the closed state (that is, the game ball launch timing). In this case, the frequency of notifying the timing of launching the game ball may be changed according to the set value (the higher the set value, the higher the frequency of notifying the timing of launching).

Further, in the pachinko gaming machine according to the second embodiment, when backup clear processing (for example, step S3039) is performed, the data stored in the general work area of the work areas of the main RAM 103 is cleared. This backup clear processing is always performed when the setting change processing (step S3024) is executed. is cleared. However, instead of this, the clear address range of the main RAM 103 where the data is cleared is changed by the backup clear processing performed when the setting change processing is executed and the backup clear processing performed without executing the setting change processing. You may make it different. For example, after the jackpot game state is over, the high probability game state is set until a predetermined number of games are executed (until the special symbol is displayed by changing the predetermined number of times), and the low probability game state is set after the execution of the predetermined number of games is finished. In a pachinko gaming machine that shifts to a probability gaming state (a pachinko gaming machine called a so-called "ST machine"), when being controlled to a high probability gaming state (before execution of a predetermined number of games is completed), setting change processing When the backup clear processing is performed without accompanying, the probability variation flag is set to OFF, and when the backup clear processing is performed with the execution of the setting change processing, the probability variation flag is continued to be set ON (remaining high probability game state (retains the memory of the number of games). Furthermore, when the backup clear processing is performed along with the execution of the setting change processing, when the same setting value as the previous time is set, the ON setting of the probability variation flag is continued, and when the setting value different from the previous time is set may set the probability variation flag to OFF.

In addition, in the pachinko gaming machine according to the second embodiment, in each round game in the jackpot game state, the big winning hole 540 is opened when the count of game balls that have won the big winning hole 540 reaches 10 balls. When either condition is satisfied when the time of the state reaches 30 sec, the closed state is entered. Therefore, in each round game in the jackpot game state, the conditions for changing the big winning port 540 from the open state to the closed state may be changed according to the set value. For example, a plurality of conditions are prepared for the large winning port 540 to change from an open state to a closed state (for example, a plurality of different expected values for the number of game balls that can be entered into the large winning port 540 during one round). Conditions may be prepared) and the conditions may be changed according to the set value so that the higher the set value, the higher the expected value is likely to be selected. As a specific example, the open time of the large winning opening 540 in the round game is determined by lottery according to the set value, so that the higher the set value, the longer the opening time of the large winning opening 540. be done. In addition, by changing the count of the game balls that change the state of the large prize winning port 540 from the open state to the closed state in the round game according to the set value, the higher the set value, the more likely the number of game balls to enter the large prize winning port 540. It is also conceivable to make

In addition, in the pachinko gaming machine according to the second embodiment, when the stopped and displayed normal symbols are in the normal win mode, the normal electric accessory 46 changes from the closed state to the open state for a predetermined period. By varying the time (open time) during which the electric accessory 46 is in the open state according to the set value, the higher the set value, the longer the open time of the normal electric accessory 46.

Further, in the pachinko gaming machine according to the second embodiment, when it is a big hit with the variable probability flag ON as in special figures 1-2 and 1-4, after the big hit game state ends, the next big hit game The high probability game state continues until it is executed, but it is not necessarily limited to this, and at a specific timing (for example, when the game ball enters the first start port 420 and the second start port 440, the variable display of the special symbol When the variable display of special symbols is started), a transition lottery may be executed to determine whether or not to shift from the high-probability game state to the low-probability game state. In this case, by changing the probability of transition from the high-probability game state to the low-probability game state according to the set value, the higher the set value, the higher the probability of continuing the high-probability game state (from the high-probability game state to the low-probability game state lower the probability of transition to). In addition, in the pachinko game machine according to the second embodiment, setting check processing (step S3072, step S3082) is performed when a game ball enters the first starting port 420 and the second starting port 440, for example. When it is determined that it is not normal in the check process (NO in step S3721), the result of the transition lottery is also cleared in the backup clear process (step S32420) by executing the setting change process (step S3024) (probability variation flag is also OFF ).

As described above, in this second embodiment, according to the set value, jackpot probability, reach probability, special symbol fluctuation time, main symbol selection rate (number of rounds, probability variable rush rate, short rush rate) Although a pachinko game machine in which . Another extension example in which the configuration is partially changed will be described below. It should be noted that the configuration that is not specifically mentioned in the following description of the other expansion examples is the same as the configuration of the second embodiment, but below, except for the step numbers, each member such as the main CPU will be indicated by a reference numeral. not attached.

[Extension example 1]
In the pachinko game machine of expansion example 1, when the result of the jackpot determination of the special symbol is a jackpot and a predetermined condition is established, the high probability game is played until the next jackpot game state is started after the jackpot game state is finished. A so-called "variable probability loop machine" in which the state continues will be described as an example. In this expansion example 1, an upper limit is set for the number of times the jackpot game state and the high-probability game state are repeatedly executed (hereinafter referred to as "loop count"), and when the loop count reaches the upper limit, the jackpot game state ends. The later game state is controlled to a low-probability game state, and the upper limit of the number of loops (hereinafter referred to as the "limiter number") can be changed according to the set value (such a game machine has a "limiter (also called machine). This will be described with reference to FIG. It should be noted that FIG. 204 is a table showing an example of the selectivity of the number of limiters in the pachinko game machine of the expansion example 1 for each set value.

A main CPU of the pachinko game machine according to the expansion example 1 includes a loop number checking means for checking the number of loops when the result of the jackpot determination of the special symbol is a big hit, and a limiter number for performing limiter number lottery when the number of loops is 0. Lottery means, loop number counting means for incrementing the number of loops when the number of loops is within a specified range (within the range of 1 to 4 in this example), and the number of loops being a specified value (in this example, the limiter upper limit is 5). Then, it comprises game state control means for controlling the game state after the jackpot game state ends to a low probability state, and loop number reset means for resetting the number of loops when the number of loops reaches a specified value. The limiter number lottery may be performed at any timing of the start of the big win game state, during the big win game state, or at the end of the big win game state when it is determined that the result of the big win determination is a big win.

As shown in FIG. 204, in setting 1, the limiter count is determined to be once with a probability of 25%, twice with a probability of 30%, and three times with a probability of 25%. There is a 15% chance that it will be decided 4 times, and a 5% chance that it will be decided 5 times. In setting 2, the limiter count is determined to be once with a probability of 25%, twice with a probability of 25%, three times with a probability of 25%, and four times with a probability of 20%. , with a 5% chance of being determined 5 times. In setting 3, the limiter count is determined to be once with a probability of 15%, twice with a probability of 25%, three times with a probability of 25%, and four times with a probability of 20%. , with a 15% chance of being determined 5 times. In setting 4, the limiter count is determined to be once with a probability of 15%, twice with a probability of 20%, three times with a probability of 25%, and four times with a probability of 25%. , with a 15% chance of being determined 5 times. In setting 5, the limiter count is set to 1 time with a probability of 5%, 2 times with a probability of 20%, 3 times with a probability of 25%, and 4 times with a 25% probability. , and 5 times with a probability of 25%. In setting 6, the number of limiter times is set to 1 time with a probability of 5%, 2 times with a probability of 10%, 3 times with a probability of 25%, and 4 times with a 30% probability. , and 5 times with a probability of 25%. In other words, the higher the set value, the higher the degree of expectation determined by the limiter count.

In this way, the degree of expectation for the number of limiters is varied according to the set value, and the higher the set value, the more times the big win game state and the high probability game state can be repeated. It is possible to vary the amount of prize balls awarded to the player in the opportunity until the game is controlled to the low-probability game state when winning once. Moreover, although the expected value for the limiter count is varied according to the set value, the limiter count is determined by lottery, so it is possible to prevent the set value from being guessed by the player based on the limiter count. It's becoming

In the expansion example 1, the number of limiter times is determined by lottery according to the setting value, but the lottery is not necessarily required. The number of limiter times may be uniquely determined according to the set value, such as 3 times for settings 1 and 2, 4 times for settings 3 and 4, and 5 times for settings 5 and 6.

In addition, the above-mentioned limiter number of times may be determined separately for each of the first special symbol and the second special symbol, or may be determined together for both the first special symbol and the second special symbol. good.

For example, when the above-mentioned limiter number of times is determined separately for each of the first special symbol and the second special symbol, if the result of the jackpot determination of the first special symbol is a big hit, the first limiter number of times for the first special symbol is determined, and when it is controlled to a big hit game state based on the result of the big hit determination of the first special symbol during the loop, the number of loops for the first special symbol is incremented. However, when it is controlled to the jackpot game state based on the result of the jackpot determination of the second special symbol during the loop, the second limiter count for the second special symbol is not incremented for the loop count for the first special symbol. to decide. In this case, when one of the first limiter number of times and the second limiter number of times reaches the limiter number of times, the loop may be ended (controlled to a low probability game state), or the first limiter number of times and the second limiter The loop may be terminated when both the number of times and the number of times reach the limiter number of times.

Also, for example, when the above-mentioned limiter number of times is determined together for both the first special symbol and the second special symbol, the result of the big hit determination regardless of whether it is the first special symbol or the second special symbol is a big hit, the limiter number of times is determined, and during the loop, regardless of whether it is the first special symbol or the second special symbol, when it is controlled to the big win game state based on the result of the big win determination, the loop Increment the count. Then, when the loop count reaches the limiter count, the loop is terminated.

Furthermore, the pachinko gaming machine of the expansion example 1 described above is a so-called probability variable loop machine, but it is not necessarily a probability variable loop machine. You can also "ST machine" means that the game state after the end of the jackpot game state is always controlled to a high probability game state based on a predetermined lottery result, and the high probability game state is controlled a predetermined number of times (hereinafter referred to as "ST number") ) is continued until the variable display of the special symbols is performed, and when the variable display of the special symbols is performed for the predetermined number of times, the high probability game state is ended and the low probability game state is controlled. Even with such an "ST machine", it is possible to vary the degree of expectation for the number of limiters according to the set value. In other words, the higher the setting value, the more times the big win game state and the high probability game state are repeated, so that the one chance (the opportunity to control to the low probability game state when the big win is won once) ), it is possible to vary the amount of prize balls given to the player according to the set value.

In addition, in the so-called "ST machine", it is possible to set the "ST number" to a predetermined number (for example, 70 times), but it is also possible to change the ST number according to the set value. . For example, the main CPU of the "ST machine" can determine the number of STs by lottery so that the expected value of the number of STs determined according to the set value is different. As a specific example, the expected value of the number of STs determined by lottery is 60 times with setting 1, 63 times with setting 2, 66 times with setting 3, 69 times with setting 4, 72 times with setting 5, and 6 times with setting 6. By setting it to 75 times, the higher the set value, the higher the expected value of the number of STs. However, it is not essential to determine the number of STs by lottery, and the number of STs may be uniquely determined according to a set value. In addition, when the number of times of ST is made to differ according to a setting value, it is preferable to make the number of times of time saving common with all the setting values. For example, when the number of STs or the expected value of the number of STs is 60 times with setting 1, 63 times with setting 2, 66 times with setting 3, 69 times with setting 4, 72 times with setting 5, and 75 times with setting 6 , it is conceivable to set the number of times of time saving to 60 times, for example, in common to all settings. Then, the sub CPU performs, for example, the liquid crystal display device 16 to perform an effect that allows the user to understand that the game is in a high-probability game state until the number of ST reaches a certain number of games (for example, 60 games), and when the number of ST reaches the certain number of games. Regardless of whether the player is in the high-probability gaming state or not, it is preferable to use, for example, a liquid crystal display device to produce an effect that makes it difficult to grasp that the player is in the high-probability gaming state. As a result, it is possible to change the number of STs and the expected value of the number of STs according to the set value while keeping the set value from being noticed by the player.

Also, in the pachinko game machine of expansion example 1, for example, setting check processing (steps S3072 and S3082) is performed when a game ball enters the first start hole/second start hole. And, when it is determined that it is not normal in this setting check process (NO in step S3721), even during the loop (that is, when the big hit game state and the high probability game state are repeatedly executed), Without the number of loops reaching the limiter number, the number of loops is also cleared in the backup clear process (step S32420) by executing the setting change process (step S3024) (the variable probability flag is also set to OFF).

[Extension example 2-1]
The pachinko game machine of expansion example 2 has a specific area in which a specific opening is provided. This specific area is partitioned from the game ball flow-down area by, for example, accessories, and it is usually difficult (or impossible) for game balls to enter the specific area. In addition to the big hit, a small hit is also prepared as a result of the big hit determination of the special symbol.

Specifically, the main CPU judges a big win of a special symbol with a big win probability determined according to a set value, and judges a small win when the result of the big win judgment is a loss. Then, a small winning game is executed when the result of the hit/loss determination of the small winning is a small winning. That is, the big win is a win accompanied by the operation of the conditional device, but the small win is not a win accompanied by the operation of the conditional device.

Further, in this expansion example 2, for example, in a normal game state such as a non-time saving game state in which the time saving flag is set to OFF, the first special symbol game based on the winning of the game ball to the first start port, and the second Among the second special symbol games based on the winning of the game ball into the starting port, the first special symbol game is mainly played. On the other hand, for example, in a probability variable time-saving gaming state such as a time-saving gaming state in which the time-saving flag is set to ON, the second special symbol game is mainly performed among the first special symbol game and the second special symbol game. In addition, in the second special symbol game, when the result of the big win determination is a loss, a small win is won with a predetermined probability. Incidentally, when the result of the big hit determination in the first special symbol game is a loss, even if a small hit is determined, it does not have to be performed.

Further, when the result of the big hit determination for the special symbols performed based on the entry (acceptance) of the game ball into the starting port is a small hit, the main CPU operates a predetermined movable piece to close the specific area. A small winning game execution means for executing a small winning game to open mode from the beginning, and a payout / launch control circuit based on the fact that the game ball has entered the specific area that has become an open mode due to the execution of the small winning game A payout means for paying out a predetermined number (for example, 10) of game balls as prize balls is provided.

Further, in this expansion example 2, the number of times of time saving is set to, for example, 5 times, and a specific opening is provided in the specific area. Then, for example, in the time-saving game state of five times, as a result of the normal hit and the game ball entering the starting port, when the small hit occurs, a predetermined movable piece is activated and the specific area is opened. At this time, when it is detected that the game ball that has entered the specific area has further entered the specific opening, the main CPU executes a big win game. In addition, when normal winning is not achieved in the time-saving game state five times, the main CPU ends the time-saving game state and controls to a non-time-saving game state. In addition, in the time-saving gaming state, the game is played with a right-handed shot that shoots the game ball toward the right-hand side area of the game area, and in the non-time-saving gaming state, a left-handed shot that shoots the game ball toward the left side area of the game area. A game is played.

In such a pachinko gaming machine, in this expansion example 2, the second special symbol game is mainly performed by varying the small hit probability in at least the second special symbol game according to the set value, for example, a time-saving gaming state , it is possible to vary the frequency of opening the specific area, and thus the number of balls released, according to the set value.

For example, the probability of a small hit is 1/9 at setting 1, 1/8 at setting 2, 1/7 at setting 3, 1/6 at setting 4, 1/5 at setting 5, and 6 to 1/4. In this case, the higher the set value, the longer the fluctuation time of the normal symbol is, or the higher the setting of the normal electric accessory, the more difficult it is for the game ball to enter the starting opening. It becomes easy for a game ball to enter the starting port. As a result, the higher the set value is, the higher the frequency of winning of the game balls to the specific area becomes.

In addition, in this extended example 2, in the time-saving gaming state, the probability variation flag may be set to ON, but it is not necessary to necessarily set the probability variation flag to ON.

Also, when a game ball wins in the first start hole or the second start hole while the main CPU is performing the variable display of the special symbol, the setting check process of step S3072 or step S3082 is executed also in this case. . When the main CPU determines that it is not normal in this setting check process (NO in step S3721), it turns OFF the game permission flag even if the result of the big hit determination with respect to the special symbol being changed is a small hit, Execute abnormal processing. Therefore, even if the result of the big hit determination for the special symbol being changed is a small win, the main CPU executes the small win game based on the small win when it is determined that the setting check processing is not normal. The game permission flag is turned OFF, and abnormal processing is executed. Therefore, the game permission flag is not set to ON unless various data are cleared in the backup clear process, including the fact that the result of the big hit determination for the special symbol being displayed in a variable display is a small hit.

[Extension example 2-2]
The pachinko game machine of the expansion example 2-2 has a first starting port and a second starting port. The main CPU judges a jackpot with the first special symbol (hereinafter referred to as "first special lottery") based on the winning of the game ball to the first start port, and determines the winning of the game ball to the second start port. Based on the second special symbol big hit determination (hereinafter referred to as "second special lottery") is performed.

In addition, the main CPU selects a first gaming state (for example, a variable probability flag and a normal game state in which both the time saving flag is set to OFF), and a second game state in which the lottery of the second special symbol (hereinafter referred to as "second special lottery") is mainly performed (for example, the variable probability flag is ON and an advantageous game state in which the time saving flag is set to OFF). In this pachinko game machine, when a big win is won with a specific pattern in the first game state, the game is controlled to the second game state after the big win game is finished.

In addition, a normal figure gate is provided in the right side area of the game area, and when the game ball passes through the normal gate, a normal lottery is performed. When the result of this normal lottery is a specific result (for example, a normal win), the main CPU releases a predetermined movable member (for example, an electric tulip), thereby facilitating the entry of the game ball into the second starting hole. be done. Therefore, when the game is played by shooting the game ball toward the right side area of the game area, compared to the case where the game ball is shot toward the left side area of the game area and the game is played, the second start opening The winning frequency of game balls to is increased.

In the first special lottery, the main CPU performs a jackpot determination of the first special symbol with a jackpot probability determined according to a set value, and when the result of the jackpot determination is a jackpot, a predetermined jackpot is opened in a plurality of rounds. A first jackpot game executing means for executing a jackpot game opened over a number is provided.

In addition, in the second special lottery, the main CPU performs a jackpot determination of the second special symbol with a jackpot probability determined according to the set value, and when the result of the jackpot determination is a jackpot, a predetermined jackpot is opened. A second jackpot game executing means for executing a jackpot game opened over a plurality of rounds is provided. Further, in the second special lottery, when the result of the big hit determination of the second special symbol is a loss, the main CPU performs a small win determination, and when the result of the small win determination is a small win. A small winning game executing means for executing a small winning game is also provided.

It should be noted that the jackpot probability in the first special lottery and the jackpot probability in the second special lottery are common. The jackpot probability in the first game state in which the variable probability flag is set to OFF is, for example, 1/300 at setting 1, 1/290 at setting 2, 1/280 at setting 3, and 1/270 at setting 4. , setting 5 is 1/260, and setting 6 is 1/250. In addition, the jackpot probability in the second game state in which the variable probability flag is set to ON is, for example, 1/30 at setting 1, 1/29 at setting 2, 1/28 at setting 3, and 27 minutes at setting 4. , setting 5 is 1/26, and setting 6 is 1/25.

The main CPU includes first jackpot game executing means for executing a jackpot game in which a predetermined jackpot is opened over a plurality of rounds when the result of the first special drawing is a jackpot, and the result of the second special drawing is the result. A second big win game execution means for executing a big win game in which a predetermined big win opening is opened over a plurality of rounds when a big win is made. Even if the big winning opening opened when the result of the first special lottery is a big win and the big winning opening opened when the result of the second special lottery is a big win are common big winning openings Alternatively, it may be a different prize winning slot.

Also, the small hit probability in the first special lottery is 0 (common in setting 1 to setting 6) regardless of whether the variable probability flag is ON or OFF. In addition, the small hit probability in the second special lottery is, for example, 1/9 with setting 1, 1/8 with setting 2, and 1/7 with setting 3, regardless of whether the variable probability flag is ON or OFF. , 1/6 at setting 4, and 1/6 at setting 5. Thus, although the small-hit probability in the second special lottery differs according to the set value, it is higher than the small-hit probability in the first special lottery regardless of the set value.

Further, the main CPU has a small winning game executing means for executing a small winning game when the result of the second special lottery is a small winning. The small winning game is a game in which the same big winning opening as the big winning opening opened when the result of the second special lottery is a big winning is opened. When a game ball wins in this big winning hole, the payout/shooting control circuit operates the payout device and controls so that a predetermined number of game balls are paid out as a prize. However, in the small winning game, since the number of game balls that can be entered into the big winning opening is smaller than in the big winning game, the degree of advantage for the player is lower in the small winning game than in the big winning game.

Also, as described above, the small hit probability in the first special lottery is zero. That is, the main CPU performs a small-hit determination with a small-hit probability of 0 when the result of the big-hit determination for the first special symbol is a loss. However, instead of this, when the result of the big hit determination of the first special symbol is a loss, the main CPU may not perform the small win determination itself.

Incidentally, the big win is a win accompanied by the operation of the conditional device, but the small win is not a win accompanied by the operation of the conditional device.

In addition, the main CPU includes first special symbol variation display control means for performing a variable display of the first special symbol based on the winning of the game ball to the first start opening, and the first special symbol variation display control means based on the winning of the game ball to the second start opening. and second special symbol variation display control means for performing variation display of the second special symbol. The first special symbol variation display control means variably displays the first special symbol for a predetermined time, and then stops the first special symbol so that the result of the first special lottery is displayed. Further, the second special symbol variation display control means variably displays the second special symbol for a predetermined time, and then stops the second special symbol so that the result of the second special lottery is displayed.

The variable display of the first special symbol by the first special symbol variable display control means and the variable display of the second special symbol by the second special symbol variable display control means can be performed at the same timing. That is, when the game ball wins the second starting port while the first special symbol is being variably displayed based on the winning of the game ball to the first starting port, the first special symbol is being variably displayed. Also, the variable display of the second special symbol is started. When the game ball wins in the first starting port while the second special symbol is being variably displayed based on the winning of the game ball in the second starting port, even if the second special symbol is variably displayed. The variable display of the first special symbol is started.

Further, the average time of the variation time of the first special symbol executed by the first special symbol variation display control means is substantially the same when the probability variation flag is ON and when it is OFF, but the second special symbol The average time of the variation time of the second special symbols executed by the variation display control means is significantly different between when the probability variation flag is ON and when it is OFF. For example, the average time of the variation time of the first special symbol is 10 sec in the first game state and 10 sec in the second game state, while the average time of the variation time of the second special symbol is 1000 sec in the first game state. It is 1 sec in the second game state. The special lottery (first special lottery, second special lottery) is performed when the variable display of the special symbols (first special symbol, second special symbol) is started, but the result of the special lottery is displayed. is when the variable display of the special symbol stops. Therefore, when a game ball wins in the second starting hole in the first game state, although the second special lottery has already been performed, it takes a considerable amount of time until the result of the second special lottery is displayed. becomes.

Thus, in the first game state in which the variable probability flag is set to OFF, even if the game ball is launched toward the right side area of the game area and the game ball wins the second start hole, the second special symbol It takes time to stop the fluctuation display of . Moreover, since the second special symbol is variably displayed in one of a plurality of patterns with different variation times, if the second special symbol stops in a manner indicating a small hit Even if the big winning opening opens for a predetermined time (for example, 1.8 seconds), it is difficult to grasp the timing of confirming that the second special symbol is a small hit. Therefore, it is also difficult to perform so-called aiming, such as winning the game ball into the big winning opening aiming at the timing when it is confirmed that the second special symbol is a small winning. Furthermore, in the first game state, when the game ball is shot toward, for example, the right side area of the game area, for example, a warning sound is output from the speaker under the control of the sub CPU. Therefore, in the first game state, a game is played by shooting game balls toward, for example, the left side area of the game area. On the other hand, in the second game state, by allowing the game ball to pass through the normal pattern gate, not only is it easier to win the game ball into the second start port through the ordinary lottery, but also the fluctuation time of the second special pattern is increased. Since it is as short as 1 sec, and in the second special lottery, the probability of winning a small hit is higher than 1/10 regardless of the set value, so there is a game in which a game ball is shot toward, for example, the right side area of the game area. done.

The average time of the fluctuation time of the second special symbol in the first game state (eg, 1000 sec) is, for example, 50 times or more of the average time of the fluctuation time of the first special symbol in the first game state (eg, 10 sec) is preferred, but at least 10 times or more is preferred.

The sub CPU is a decorative symbol variation display control means for controlling the variation display of the decorative symbols to be displayed on, for example, a liquid crystal display device in synchronism with the variation display of the special symbols (first special symbol, second special symbol). Prepare. However, in the first game state, the decorative symbol variation display control means does not perform the variable display of the decorative symbols synchronized with the second special symbol in a conspicuous manner even if the game ball wins the second start hole. When a game ball wins a prize in one starting hole, the variable display of decorative patterns synchronized with a first special pattern is conspicuously displayed.

To elaborate on the example of the above-mentioned "conspicuous aspect", the liquid crystal display device has, for example, a left pattern (first pattern), a middle pattern (second pattern) and a right pattern (third pattern) at substantially the center of the display area. It is possible to display the result of the special lottery by changing the display. In addition, in a small area, for example, one corner of the four corners of the display area, a fourth pattern (for example, ○ or △) that can be displayed variably (for example, blinking) in synchronization with each of the first special pattern and the second special pattern shape) can be displayed. Since the proportion of the display area occupied by the first to third patterns is extremely large compared to the proportion of the display area occupied by the fourth pattern, the player's gaze is more focused on the first to third patterns than on the fourth pattern. It will turn. Then, for example, in the first game state, when the game ball wins the second starting hole, the sub CPU does not variably display the first to third symbols, and variably displays only the fourth symbol. When a game ball wins in the 1 start hole, the first to third symbols are variably displayed, and the fourth symbol is also variably displayed. Thus, in the first game state, even if the game ball wins in the second starting hole, the variable display of the decorative pattern synchronized with the second special pattern is not conspicuously displayed, and the game ball enters the first starting hole. It is possible to realize that the variable display of the decorative pattern to be synchronized with the first special pattern is conspicuously displayed when the is won.

According to the pachinko game machine of the expansion example 2-2 described above, in the first game state, even if the game ball wins the second start hole, the result of the second special lottery is hardly displayed, but the second game state Then, not only is it easier to win the game ball into the second starting port, but the average time of the fluctuation time of the second special symbol is as short as 1 sec. Moreover, in the second game state, when the game ball enters the second starting hole, the probability that the result of the second special lottery is a small win (1/9 to 1/4 depending on the setting) is a big win. Since it is higher than the probability of becoming (1/30 to 1/25 depending on the setting), the opening of the big winning mouth by the small winning game is performed with high frequency, without setting the time saving flag (that is, normal lottery It is possible to increase the chances of paying out game balls as a prize without increasing the execution frequency of the game. Moreover, since the probability that the result of the second special lottery results in a small win differs according to the set setting, balls are put out according to the set value even in a state where the big win game is not executed. can be made different.

Also, when a game ball wins in the first start hole or the second start hole while the main CPU is performing the variable display of the special symbol, the setting check process of step S3072 or step S3082 is executed also in this case. . Therefore, the main CPU performs the setting check process of step S3072 or step S3082 even when a game ball wins in the first starting hole during the variable display of the second special symbol in the second game state, for example. Then, when the main CPU determines that the setting check process is not normal (NO in step S3721), it turns off the game permission flag and executes the abnormality process. That is, in the second game state, even if the result of the big hit determination for the second special symbol that is being changed is a small hit, when the setting check process determines that it is not normal, the main CPU A game permission flag is turned off without executing a small winning game based on a winning, and an abnormality processing is executed. Therefore, even if the result of the big hit determination with respect to the second special symbol being displayed in the second game state is a small hit, the information indicating the second game state and the information indicating the small hit are included. The game permission flag is not set to ON unless the various data are cleared in the backup clear process.

[Extension example 3]
The pachinko gaming machine of the expansion example 3 is a pachinko gaming machine with two routes for being controlled to the jackpot gaming state, and therefore has a specific area in which a specific opening is provided. This specific area is partitioned from the game ball flow-down area by, for example, accessories, and it is usually difficult (or impossible) for game balls to enter the specific area. In addition to the big hit, a small hit is also prepared as a result of the big hit determination of the special symbol.

Specifically, the main CPU judges a big win of a special symbol with a big win probability determined according to a set value, and judges a small win when the result of the big win judgment is a loss. Then, a small winning game is executed when the result of the hit/loss determination of the small winning is a small winning. That is, the big win is a win accompanied by the operation of the conditional device, but the small win is not a win accompanied by the operation of the conditional device.

Further, in this expansion example 3, for example, in a normal game state such as a non-time saving game state in which the time saving flag is set to OFF, the first special symbol game based on the winning of the game ball to the first start port, and the second Among the second special symbol games based on the winning of the game ball into the starting port, the first special symbol game is mainly played. On the other hand, for example, in a probability variable time-saving gaming state such as a time-saving gaming state in which the time-saving flag is set to ON, the second special symbol game is mainly performed among the first special symbol game and the second special symbol game. In addition, in the second special symbol game, when the result of the big win determination is a loss, a small win is won with a predetermined probability. Incidentally, when the result of the big hit determination in the first special symbol game is a loss, even if a small hit is determined, it does not have to be performed.

Further, the main CPU operates a predetermined movable piece when the result of the jackpot determination for the special symbol performed based on the entry (acceptance) of the game ball into the starting port is a small hit, and the inside of the specific area is activated. A small winning game executing means for executing a small winning game allowing entry of a game ball into is provided. A game ball enters the specific area by operating a predetermined movable piece in this way, and when it is detected that the game ball that has entered the specific area enters (accepts) the specific opening, the main The CPU controls to a jackpot game state. That is, the main CPU performs a first jackpot game in which a round game of opening the jackpot is performed over a plurality of rounds when the result of the jackpot determination process performed based on the winning of the game ball into the start hole is a jackpot. A first jackpot game control means for controlling a state and a round game for operating the predetermined movable piece based on the entry of the game ball into the specific hole when the small win game is executed over a plurality of rounds. A second big win game control means for controlling to a second big win game state to be performed.

In such a pachinko game machine, in this expansion example 3, the ease of winning a game ball into the starting hole (for example, the execution frequency of a small winning game or the opening pattern of a normal electric accessory) is set as a set value. It varies according to Also in this expansion example 3, the main CPU detects that the game ball passes through a gate through which the game ball can pass when the player hits to the right. Sometimes, control the normal electric accessory from the closed state to the open state. When the normal electric accessary is in an open state, winning of game balls into the starting port is facilitated. As a method of varying the execution frequency of the small hit game according to the set value, for example, the probability of the normal hit in the normal design determination is varied according to the set value, or the fluctuation time of the normal design is different according to the set value. It can be realized by setting

As a method of varying the likelihood of a game ball winning a prize to a starting hole according to a set value, a method of varying the probability of a normal hit in normal symbol determination according to a set value will be described as an example.

For example, the probability of a normal hit is 1/60 at setting 1, 1/50 at setting 2, 1/40 at setting 3, 1/30 at setting 4, 1/20 at setting 5, setting 6 1/10. In this case, the higher the set value, the longer the variation time of the normal symbol is, or the higher the setting of the normal electric accessory, the more difficult it is for the game ball to enter the starting opening. It becomes easy for a game ball to enter the starting port. As a result, the higher the set value, the higher the frequency of execution of the small winning game, and the more opportunities to be controlled to the big winning game state by the second big winning game control means. In this way, it is possible to provide a difference in the ball delivery speed according to the set value.

Also in this expansion example 3, when a game ball wins in the first starting hole or the second starting hole while the special symbols are being variably displayed by the in-CPU 101, the setting check process of step S3072 or step S3082 is executed. executed. When the main CPU 101 determines that this setting check process is not normal (NO in step S3721), it turns OFF the game permission flag even if the result of the big hit determination with respect to the special symbols displayed in a variable display is a small hit. Execute abnormal processing. Therefore, even if the result of the big hit determination with respect to the special symbols displayed in a variable display is a small win, when it is determined that the setting check process is not normal, the main CPU 101 executes the small win game based on the small win. The game permission flag is turned OFF, and abnormal processing is executed. Therefore, the game permission flag is not set to ON unless various data are cleared in the backup clear process, including the fact that the result of the big hit determination for the special symbol being displayed in a variable display is a small hit.

[Extension example 4]
In the pachinko game machine of expansion example 4, even if the result of the jackpot determination of the special symbols is a big hit, the result of the jackpot determination of the special symbols is not immediately controlled to the jackpot game state just because of that, but the result of the jackpot determination of the special symbols is a big hit. The condition device is activated based on the condition device, and the accessory continuous activation device is activated based on the game ball passing (or entering) a predetermined area on the premise that the condition device is activated. Description will be made below with reference to FIGS. 205 and 206. FIG. FIG. 205 is a diagram showing an example of a mode in which a game ball passes through the consecutively operated right gate, and FIG. 206 is a diagram showing an example of a manner in which a game ball passes through the continuously operated left gate.

As shown in FIGS. 205 and 206, the pachinko game machine of this expansion example 4 is provided with a character continuous operation left gate 3100 and a character continuous operation right gate 3110 in the game area. In addition, a sorting device 3120 capable of allocating the game balls flowing down the game area to either the left gate 3100 or the right gate 3110 continuously operating the role product continuously operates the role product continuous operating gate 3100/ It is arranged above 3110 .

The accessory continuous operation left gate 3100 and the accessory continuous operation right gate 3110 are respectively provided with a left gate sensor and a right gate sensor (both not shown) capable of detecting passage of a game ball. The left gate sensor and the right gate sensor are normally disabled in detection of passage of game balls, and are enabled based on the operation of the condition device. In addition, after the left gate sensor and the right gate sensor are activated based on the operation of the conditional device, either the character product continuous operation left gate 3100 or the character product continuous operation right gate 3110 is detected by the game ball. Disabled based on detecting passing.

When the left gate sensor detects the passage of the game ball to the accessory continuous operation left gate 3100, the main CPU controls, for example, an 8R jackpot game state in which a round game of 8 rounds is executed. In addition, when the right gate sensor detects the passage of the game ball to the right gate 3110 of continuous operation of the accessory, the main CPU enters the 2R jackpot game state (selection rate 50%) in which 2 rounds of round games are executed, and 16 rounds. 16R big win game state (selection rate 50%) in which the round game is executed is determined by lottery, and the big win game state determined by the lottery is controlled.

It should be noted that when the left gate sensor detects the passage of the game ball to the left gate 3100 of continuous operation of the role and when the right gate sensor detects the passage of the game ball to the continuous operation of the right gate 3110 of the role, a big hit is achieved. The expected value of the amount of prize balls paid out in the game state is the same.

In addition, the game ball that has passed through the accessory continuous operation left gate 3100 or the accessory continuous operation right gate 3110 flows down the game area as it is, but instead is discharged out of the pachinko game machine from the out port. It may be configured as follows.

The sorting device 3120 sorts the game balls that have reached above the sorting device 3120 by regular operation to either the left gate 3100 or the right gate 3110 continuously operating the role product. In the first posture in which the sorting device 3120 tilts to the left, the game balls easily pass through the right gate 3110 (see FIG. 205). It is easy to pass through the object continuous operation left gate 3100 (see FIG. 206).

In this expansion example 4, the easiness of passage of the game ball is differentiated between the accessory continuous operation left gate 3100 and the accessory continuous operation right gate 3110 according to the set value. For example, the operation of the sorting device 3120 is an operation that repeats 0.5 seconds in the first posture and 1.5 seconds in the second posture in setting 1, and 0.7 seconds in the first posture and 1.3 seconds in the second posture in setting 2. For setting 3, repeat the first posture for 0.9 seconds and the second posture for 1.1 seconds. For setting 4, repeat the first posture for 1.1 seconds and the second posture for 0.9 seconds. At setting 5, repeat the first posture for 1.3 seconds and the second posture for 0.7 seconds, and at setting 6, repeat the first posture for 1.5 seconds and the second posture for 0.5 seconds. Thus, it is possible to change the aspect of the big win game state according to the set value.

In addition, in this expansion example 4, when the left gate sensor detects the passage of the game ball to the consecutive action left gate 3100 and the right gate sensor detects the passage of the game ball to the consecutive action right gate 3110. The expected value of the amount of prize balls to be paid out in the jackpot game state is the same between when and when. In other words, although it is possible to change the mode of the big win game state according to the set value, there is no difference in the amount of prize balls paid out in the big win game state according to the set value, but the left gate sensor is not limited to this. Detects the passage of the game ball to the left gate 3100 of continuous operation of the role product, and when the right gate sensor detects the passage of the game ball to the continuous operation right gate 3110 of the role product, the game ball is paid out in the jackpot game state. The expected value of the amount of prize balls may be varied. For example, when the left gate sensor detects the passage of the game ball to the accessory continuous operation left gate 3100, either the 2R jackpot game state (selection rate 70%) or the 16R jackpot game state (selection rate 30%) is determined by the lottery performed with the above selection rate, and when the right gate sensor detects the passage of the game ball to the right gate 3110 of continuous operation of the role product, the 2R jackpot game state (selection rate 30%) or 16R jackpot game state (70% selection rate) to be executed may be determined by a lottery performed with the above selection rate. In this case, the amount of prize balls put out in the jackpot game state can be varied according to the set value, and the higher the set value, the more game balls are put out as the prize balls and the expected value of the jackpot game state is high. It is possible to increase the possibility of

In addition, in this expansion example 4, when the game ball passes through one of the two gates (the left gate 3100 for the consecutive action of the character and the right gate 3110 for the consecutive action of the character) under the condition that the conditional device is activated, the continuous action of the character is performed. The device is configured to operate and be controlled to a jackpot game state. However, even if the conditional device is activated based on the fact that the result of the jackpot judgment of the special symbol performed based on the winning of the game ball into the starting port is a jackpot, the game ball will not pass through either of the above two gates. A game ball may enter the starting hole before passing through. In this case, the main CPU 101 performs setting check processing (for example, 188) is executed, and it may be determined that the setting check process is not normal (for example, NO in step S3721 of FIG. 189). In this case, even if the condition device is to operate, the main CPU 101 turns off the game permission flag (step S3722 to be described later), making it impossible to proceed with the game.

In addition, in this expansion example 4, below the sorting device 3120, there are two gates (continuous operation A left gate 3100 and a right gate 3110) are provided, but the gates provided below the sorting device 3120 are not necessarily limited to the continuous action gates. Also good. That is, in this case, the distribution device 3120, by a regular operation, the game ball that has reached the upper part of the distribution device 3120, the starting opening that triggers the jackpot determination of special symbols, and the general winning prize that does not trigger the jackpot determination Distribute to one of mouth and mouth. Then, the operation of the sorting device 3120 is, for example, an operation that repeats 0.5 seconds in the first posture and 1.5 seconds in the second posture in setting 1, and 0.7 seconds in the first posture and 1.5 seconds in the second posture in setting 2. Setting 3 repeats 0.9 seconds in the first posture and 1.1 seconds in the second posture.Setting 4 repeats 1.1 seconds in the first posture and 0.9 seconds in the second posture. , setting 5 to repeat the first posture for 1.3 seconds and the second posture for 0.7 seconds, and setting 6 for repeating the first posture for 1.5 seconds and the second posture for 0.5 seconds. By doing so, it is possible to vary the winning rate to the starting opening according to the set value. Moreover, according to such a pachinko game machine, although it is possible to vary the winning rate to the starting hole according to the set value, the timing of the player's shooting of the game ball can be changed regardless of the set value. It is possible to make it interesting that it is possible to aim for a prize at the starting gate.

[Extension example 5]
The pachinko game machine of expansion example 5 does not change the data relating to the basic specifications of the pachinko game machine according to the set values, but allows the game characteristics of the pachinko game machine to be changed according to the set values. . In addition, in this expansion example 5, the setting value can be set to any one of the five stages of setting 1 to setting 5, but the number of stages does not necessarily have to be five. can be set arbitrarily.

Specifically, when the setting value is set to 1, the main CPU performs a jackpot determination with a special symbol with a probability of, for example, 1/99. Control to a jackpot game state. That is, when the set value is set to 1, the probability of winning a big win is relatively high, less than 1/100, but the amount of prize balls paid out in one big win game state is relatively small. It becomes possible to execute a game with game nature.

Also, when the setting value is set to setting 2, the main CPU performs a jackpot determination with a special symbol with a probability of, for example, 1/300. Approximately 1500 pieces) is controlled to a big hit game state. In other words, when the setting value is set to setting 2, the probability of a big win is 1/300, and the amount of prize balls paid out in one big win game state is about 1,500. can be executed. In this gaming machine, the main CPU controls the game state after the jackpot game state is finished to the high-probability game state, and when a predetermined period elapses, the high-probability game state is finished and the game state is changed to the low-probability game state. Control. That is, when the setting value is set to setting 2, it becomes possible to execute a game with a game characteristic called ST machine.

Also, when the setting value is set to setting 3, the main CPU performs a jackpot determination with a probability special symbol of, for example, 1/300. Approximately 1500 pieces) is controlled to a big hit game state. In other words, when the setting value is set to setting 2, the probability of a big win is 1/300, and the amount of prize balls paid out in one big win game state is about 1,500. can be executed. In this gaming machine, when the result of the jackpot determination is a jackpot, the main CPU determines whether or not to set the variable probability flag to ON using, for example, a pattern random number, and when the variable probability flag is set to ON, the big win game is played. The game state after the state is finished is controlled to a high probability game state until the next big winning game state is executed. That is, when the setting value is set to setting 3, it becomes possible to execute a game with a game characteristic called a variable probability loop machine.

Also, when the setting value is set to 4, the main CPU performs a jackpot determination with a special symbol with a probability of, for example, 1/300. Approximately 1500 pieces) is controlled to a big hit game state. In other words, when the setting value is set to setting 2, the probability of a big win is 1/300, and the amount of prize balls paid out in one big win game state is about 1,500. can be executed. In this gaming machine, when the result of the jackpot determination is a jackpot, the main CPU determines whether or not to set the variable probability flag to ON using, for example, a pattern random number, and when the variable probability flag is set to ON, the big win game is played. The game state after the state is finished is controlled to a high probability game state until the next big winning game state is executed. However, an upper limit is set for the number of times the jackpot game state and the high-probability game state are repeatedly executed (the above-mentioned "loop count"), and when the loop count reaches this upper limit, the main CPU will stop the jackpot game state. The game state is controlled to a low probability game state. That is, when the setting value is set to setting 4, it becomes possible to execute a game with a game feature called a limiter machine. In addition, in the above game characteristics, if the game state after the end of the big win game state is the high probability game state, the high probability game state continues until the next big win game state is executed. , Not limited to this, it may be a so-called ST machine in which the high probability game state after the end of the big hit game state is ended when a predetermined period passes and is controlled to a low probability game state.

Also, when the setting value is set to 5, the main CPU performs a jackpot determination with a special symbol with a probability of, for example, 1/300. Approximately 1500 pieces) is controlled to a big hit game state. In other words, when the setting value is set to setting 2, the probability of a big win is 1/300, and the amount of prize balls paid out in one big win game state is about 1,500. can be executed. In this gaming machine, when the big win game state ends, the main CPU always or with a certain probability sets the variable probability flag to ON, and when the variable probability flag is set to ON, the game state after the big win game state ends. , control to a high probability game state. In addition, in the high-probability gaming state, the main CPU performs a game state transition lottery when judging a big hit with a special symbol, and when it is determined to shift the game state in the game state transition lottery, it sets the variable probability flag to OFF. , to execute control to shift from the high probability game state to the low probability game state. That is, when the setting value is set to the setting 5, it becomes possible to execute a game with a game property in which a lottery for transition to the low probability game state is performed in the high probability game state.

As described above, in the pachinko machine of the expansion example 5, it is possible to change the game characteristics of the pachinko machine, not the specs such as the jackpot probability, for example, according to the set value, so that the pachinko game can be played with a variety of game characteristics. It is possible to run the game with one machine.

In the above description, setting 1 allows execution of a game with a so-called sweet digital game, setting 2 allows execution of a game with a so-called ST machine, and setting 3 allows execution of a game with a so-called ST machine. It is possible to execute a game with a game property called a variable probability loop machine, with setting 4 it is possible to execute a game with a game property called a limiter machine, and with setting 5, it is possible to execute a game with a game property called a limiter machine. It is possible to execute a game with a game property in which a lottery for transition to the probability game state is performed, but it is not essential to enable all of these game properties to be executed according to the set value. However, it is preferable to be able to switch between a so-called ST machine game and a so-called variable probability loop machine game according to the set value. The game property called the so-called ST machine and the game property called the so-called variable loop machine are common in that they may be controlled to a high probability game state after the jackpot game state ends, but the high probability game state is It greatly differs depending on whether it continues until the next big hit game state or ends in the middle. In this way, by making it possible to switch and execute two seemingly similar but substantially different game features, the pachinko machine can be used by the person in charge of managing the game machine, etc. It is possible to provide a pachinko game machine capable of enhancing interest while playing.

[Other expansion examples]
The pachinko gaming machine according to the second embodiment can apply the present invention to all gaming machines in which games are played using game media and benefits are awarded based on the results of the games. That is, a game is played by shooting or inserting game media by the physical action of the player, and not only is the game media paid out based on the result of the game, but also the main control circuit 100 itself A game medium owned by a player may be electromagnetically managed, and a game played by circulating enclosed game balls or a game played without medals may be performed. Further, the game media owned by the player may be electromagnetically managed by a game media management device that is mounted (connected) to the main control circuit 100 and that manages the game media.

When managed by a game media management device connected to the main control circuit 100, the game media management device has ROM and RWM (or RAM) and is provided in the gaming machine. It is connected to the media handling device and a two-way communication function via a predetermined interface, and provides the necessary game media for the operation of lending game media (that is, when the player performs the operation of inserting the game media). action), or when a winning combination related to the payout of game media is won (the winning combination is established), the payout action of the game media (that is, the payout of the game media to the player is performed, and the necessary game media are acquired). or to electromagnetically record a game medium to be used for a game. In addition, the game medium management device not only manages the actual number of game media, but also, for example, based on the management result of the number of game media, the owned game medium management device displays the number of owned game media on the front of the pachinko machine. A medium number display device (not shown) may be provided, and the number of game media displayed on this owned game medium number display device may be managed. In other words, the game media management device may record and display the total number of game media that a player can use for games by an electromagnetic method.

Further, in this case, the game medium management device has the capability of allowing the player to freely transmit a signal indicating the number of recorded game media to an external game medium handling device. In addition to being directly operated by a player, it has the performance that the number of recorded game media cannot be reduced, and an external connection terminal plate (not shown) is provided between it and an external game media handling device. In some cases, it is desirable that the player has the ability to transmit a signal indicating the number of recorded game media only through the external connection terminal board.

In addition to the above, the game machine is provided with lending operation means, return (settlement) operation means, and an external connection terminal board that can be operated by the player. (e.g. IC card) insertion slot, non-contact communication antenna for depositing electronic money etc. from a mobile terminal, other operating means such as lending operation means, return operation means, etc., external connection terminal board on the side of the game media handling device may be provided (neither is shown).

As a game flow at that time, for example, the player deposits valuable value into the game medium handling device by any method, and subtracts a predetermined number of valuable value based on the operation of one of the lending operation means. Then, the game media corresponding to the subtracted value are increased from the game media handling device to the game media management device. Then, the player plays the game, and repeats the above operation when the game medium is required. After that, a predetermined number of game media are acquired as a result of the game, and when the game is finished, the number of game media is transmitted from the game medium management device to the game medium handling device by operating one of the return operation means, and the game is played. The medium handling device ejects the recording medium recording the number of game media. The game medium management device clears the number of game media stored by itself when transmitting the number of game media. The player takes the ejected recording medium to a prize counter or the like to exchange for prizes, or moves the game machine to play a game based on the game medium recorded on another machine.

In the above example, all game media are sent to the game medium handling device, but only the number of game media desired by the player is sent from the gaming machine or the game medium handling device, and the game media possessed by the player are sent. It is good also as dividing and processing. Moreover, it is not limited to ejecting the recording medium, and cash or cash equivalents may be ejected, or may be stored in a portable terminal or the like. Further, the game medium handling device may be configured so that the member recording medium of the game parlor can be inserted, and the member recording medium is stored so that the game can be played again at a later date.

Further, in the game machine or the game medium handling device, by operating a predetermined operation means (not shown), it is possible to execute a lock operation to lock the game medium or valuable value data communication to the game medium handling device or the game medium management device. good too. In this case, information that only the player can know, such as a one-time password, may be set, or the player may be recorded by imaging means provided in the game medium handling device.

In the above description, the game media management device is applied to a pachinko game machine, but the game media management device can also be applied to a pachislot machine, a slot machine using game balls, or an enclosed game machine. It can also be provided so that the game media of the player can be managed.

Thus, by providing the above-described game medium management device, the number of parts inside the game machine can be reduced compared to the case where the game medium is physically provided for the game, and the cost and manufacturing cost of the game machine can be reduced. Not only can the power consumption be reduced, but also the player can be prevented from directly contacting the game medium, the game environment can be improved, the noise can be reduced, and the power consumption of the game machine can be reduced by reducing the number of parts. It will also happen. In addition, it is possible to prevent fraudulent actions through game media or through the slot for inserting or paying out game media. That is, it is possible to provide a gaming machine capable of improving various environments surrounding the gaming machine.

In addition, an enclosed type game machine configured so that the game medium can be played without being discharged to the outside, and a communication cable for transmitting data regarding increase or decrease in the game medium accompanying consumption, lending, and payout of the game medium to the game machine. When the present invention is applied to a game system having a game medium management device connected to enable transmission and reception by optical signals via a game system, the game system may be configured as follows.

The outline of the enclosed game machine will be described below. In the enclosed type game machine, the shooting device is positioned above the game area and shoots game balls as game media from above to the game area. When the player operates the handle, the ball feed solenoid is driven by the payout control circuit, and the ball feed pestle pushes the game ball in the waiting state toward the launch pad. As a result, the game ball moves to the launch pad. Also, a subtraction sensor is provided on the route from the standby position to the launch pad, and detects a game ball moving to the launch pad. When a game ball is detected by the subtraction sensor, 1 is subtracted from the number of possessed balls. In this way, since game balls as game media are shot from above into the game area, so-called return balls (foul balls) can be avoided in enclosed type game machines. The game ball discharged from the game area after rolling in the game area is polished by the ball polishing device. The game ball polished by the ball polishing device is conveyed upward by the lifting device and guided to the shooting device. Game balls are not discharged to the outside of the enclosed type game machine, and a fixed number (for example, 50) of game balls circulate through a series of paths in the game machine.

Since game balls are not ejected to the outside of the game machine, enclosed type game machines are not provided with an upper tray or a lower tray for temporarily holding game balls. Since the game balls are not discharged to the outside in the closed-type game machine, the game balls are not actually in the hands of the player, and the number of game balls does not actually increase or decrease as the game is played. In an enclosed type game machine, a player starts a game after obtaining a ball by lending it from a game medium management device. Here, obtaining a ball means that a player obtains a game medium in terms of data management. As game balls are shot from the shooting device, the balls in the player's possession are consumed, and the number of balls in the player's possession decreases. In addition, when the game balls pass through the respective prize winning openings provided in the game area, the number of payouts according to the conditions set according to the winning openings is performed, and the number of possessed balls is increased. Furthermore, the number of balls in possession is increased by lending out from the game medium management device. It should be noted that "consumption, lending, and payout of game media" indicates consumption, lending, and payout of held balls. Also, "increase or decrease in game media" means that the number of balls held increases or decreases due to consumption, lending, or payout. Also, "data on increase/decrease in game media associated with consumption, lending, and payout of game media" is data on decrease in possessed balls due to shooting game balls and increase in possessed balls due to lending and payout.

The enclosed type game machine has a payout control circuit and a touch panel type liquid crystal display device. The payout control circuit is connected to various sensors for detecting the passage of game balls through the winning openings. The payout control circuit manages the number of balls held. For example, when a game ball passes through each winning hole, the number of game balls to be paid out is added to the number of balls. Also, when a game ball is shot, the number of possessed balls is subtracted. The payout control circuit transmits data regarding the number of balls held by the player to the game medium management device. The liquid crystal display device is positioned above the gaming machine and receives requests for conversion of game values managed by the game medium management device to possession balls (ball lending) and counting (return) of possession balls. Then, these requests are transmitted to the payout control circuit via the game medium management device, and the payout control circuit instructs the game medium management device to transmit data regarding the current number of balls in possession. Here, the "game value" includes money/banknotes, prepaid media, tokens, electronic money, tickets, and the like, which can be converted into holding balls by the game media management device. Note that in the second embodiment, the game media management device is a so-called CR unit, and is configured to accept bills, prepaid media, and the like. In addition, the counted number of balls in hand can be used for prize exchanges and the like in a game arcade where the game system is installed.

In addition, the enclosed game machine has a backup power supply. As a result, even when the power is turned off at night or the like, the data immediately before the power is turned off can be retained. In addition, this backup power supply may be used to continue detection of opening of the door frame by the door opening sensor, for example. As a result, it is possible to prevent fraudulent acts at night. In this case, information such as the number of times the door frame has been opened may be stored. Furthermore, information such as the number of times the door frame has been opened may be output to a liquid crystal display device or the like of the game machine when the power is turned on.

The game medium management device has a game machine connection board. The game medium management device is configured to transmit and receive data (transmission signal) to and from the game machine via the game machine connection board. The transmitted and received data includes the unique ID of the CPU provided in the main control circuit, the unique ID of the CPU provided in the payout control circuit, the gaming machine manufacturer code stored in the gaming machine, the security chip manufacturer code, the game This is information such as the model code of the machine. Then, when one of the game machine and the game medium management device is the transmission source and the other is the transmission destination, when the transmission source transmits the transmission signal, the transmission destination that receives the transmission signal is the same signal as the transmission signal. is transmitted to the transmission source, and the transmission source compares the transmission signal and the confirmation signal to determine whether they are the same.

In this manner, the transmission source compares the confirmation signal transmitted from the transmission destination with the transmission signal and determines whether or not they are the same. You can check that the message has been sent to the sender. As a result, it is possible to suppress cheating such as falsification of transmission/reception signals between the game machine and the game medium management device.

Further, in the gaming system, the transmission source has a modulation section for modulating a signal, the signal modulated by the modulation section is transmitted as the transmission signal, and the transmission destination transmits the signal modulated by the modulation section. It is also possible to have a demodulator for demodulation.

As a result, even if the transmission/reception signal between the game machine and the game media management device is read, it is difficult to decipher the signal. Unauthorized acts such as falsification can be suppressed.

Further, in the gaming system, when the transmission signal is received from the transmission source, the transmission destination transmits an acknowledgment signal, which is a signal indicating that the transmission signal has been received, separately from the confirmation signal. It may be sent to the sender.

As a result, by comparing the transmission signal and the confirmation signal, it is possible not only to confirm that the normal signal has been transmitted and received, but also to confirm that the normal signal has been transmitted and received based on the approval signal. Therefore, it is possible to further strengthen the suppression of fraudulent acts.

[Hall Menu Task]
First, the whole menu task will be described with reference to FIGS. 207 to 210. FIG. A hall menu task is a task that controls the hall menu. The hole menu task is performed by the sub CPU 201 at a predetermined cycle, every 33 msec in this second embodiment.

FIG. 207 is a flow chart showing an example of the whole menu task executed by the sub CPU 201. As shown in FIG.

As shown in FIG. 207, the sub CPU 201 first determines whether setting change processing or setting confirmation processing is in progress (step S3301). Specifically, the sub CPU 201 determines whether or not it has received a setting operation command (setting change start command, setting confirmation start command) transmitted from the main CPU 101 when power is turned on.

When sub CPU 201 determines that setting change processing or setting confirmation processing is being performed, that is, determines that a setting operation command has been received (YES in step S3301), it executes hole menu display processing in step S3302. This hole menu display process (step S3302) is a process for displaying a hole menu screen, which will be described later, in the display area of the liquid crystal display device 16 by the display control circuit 204. FIG. The hole menu screen is also displayed in the display area of the liquid crystal display device 16 when the process of step S3310, which will be described later, is executed. There are some differences from the menu screen, which will be described later.

The image (screen) displayed in the display area of the liquid crystal display device 16 when the hole menu display process of step S3302 is executed will be described with reference to FIGS. 208 to 210. FIG. FIG. 208 shows an example of the hole menu screen displayed in the display area of the liquid crystal display device 16 when the hole menu display process of step S3302 is executed. 209 and 210 are diagrams showing an example of the hole menu screen displayed in the display area of the liquid crystal display device 16 when the hole menu display process of step S3302 is executed.

As shown in FIGS. 208 to 210, when the hole menu display process (step S3302) is executed, the hole menu screen is displayed in the display area of the liquid crystal display device 16. FIG. As shown in FIGS. 209 and 210, the hall menu screen includes a hall menu item display area 31610 on the left side of the screen, an operation explanation area 31620 substantially in the center of the left-right direction at the bottom of the screen, and a preview located substantially in the center of the screen. and a display area 31630 .

In the hole menu item display area 31610, each item of the hole menu is displayed. In FIGS. 208 to 210, only time setting, prize ball information, setting history/setting confirmation history, error information history, monitoring history, and warning display setting are shown as hole menu items for convenience. In addition, items such as notification setting, power saving setting (power saving mode), maintenance, accessory operation confirmation, liquid crystal brightness setting, liquid crystal confirmation, and volume control setting may be displayed. However, since step S3302 is processing during setting change processing or setting confirmation processing, it is not possible to end the display of the hole menu screen and return to the game screen. Therefore, there is no item for exiting the hole menu among the items in the hole menu.

An operation explanation area 31620 displays images corresponding to the operation button group 66 (see FIG. 3), that is, images corresponding to the main button 662 and the up, down, left, and right select buttons 664a to 664d. Note that, on the hole menu screen, the activated operation buttons and the deactivated operation buttons among the operation button group 66 are displayed so as to be distinguished from each other. For example, in FIGS. 208 to 210, activated operation buttons are displayed in white (main button 662 and up/down select buttons 664a and 664b are activated), and deactivated operation buttons are displayed in white. It is displayed in black (the left and right select buttons 664c and 664d are disabled).

By operating the activated select buttons (upper and lower select buttons 664a and 664b), the operator can select one of a plurality of hall menu items. In FIGS. 208 and 209, the hole menu item surrounded by a solid line is the selected hole menu item. For example, FIG. 208 indicates that the "time setting" surrounded by a solid line is selected. In addition, FIG. 210 indicates that "setting change/confirmation history" surrounded by a solid line is selected.

In the pachinko gaming machine according to the second embodiment, the sub CPU 201 highlights the selected item. However, the display is not necessarily limited to the highlight display as long as the selected item can be easily grasped by the operator. Note that the screen where the time setting item is selected (see FIGS. 208 and 209) is the initial screen of the hall menu screen.

Preview display area 31630 displays a preview screen for the item selected from the plurality of hall menu items. For example, when the item "time setting" is selected, a preview of the time setting screen is displayed (see FIGS. 208 and 209), and when the item "setting change/confirmation history" is selected, the setting A preview of the change/confirmation history screen is displayed (see FIG. 210). However, it is preferable that the setting values are not displayed on the preview screen of the setting change/confirmation history screen. It should be noted that operations cannot be performed within the above preview screen. For example, when the time setting screen is previewed, it is not possible to set the time on the previewed time setting screen, and the time setting displayed as a hall menu item is selected and determined. You can set the time on the time setting screen displayed by .

Further, the sub-CPU 201 displays, in the display area of the liquid crystal display device 16, together with the hall menu screen, so as not to hinder the operation on the hall menu screen, for example, in a very small area in the lower right corner, "setting is being changed" or "setting confirmation". It displays characters such as At the same time, the sub CPU 201 controls so that a voice such as "setting is being changed" or "setting is being checked" is output from the speaker 24 via the voice control circuit 205 (see FIG. 9). Furthermore, the sub CPU 201 executes control to light all the LEDs 25 (see, for example, FIG. 1) in white through the LED control circuit 206 (see FIG. 9). In this way, the operator can grasp whether the setting is being changed or the setting is being checked without interfering with the operation on the hall menu screen.

Next, returning to FIG. 207, the sub CPU 201 executes the whole menu process in step S303. The details of this hole menu processing (step S3303) will be described later.

After executing the hole menu processing (step S3303), the sub CPU 201 determines whether or not the setting change processing or the setting confirmation processing has ended. It is determined whether or not a command (recovery command from power failure) indicating that the process has ended has been received from the main CPU 101 (step S3304). If the sub CPU 201 has received neither the initialization command nor the power failure recovery command (NO in step S3304), the sub CPU 201 continues executing the hole menu processing in step S3303.

Further, when transmitting an initialization command, the main CPU 101 also transmits changed setting value information to the sub CPU 201 at the same timing as the command.

Note that the setting value information after change does not necessarily have to be transmitted at the same timing as the initialization command, and may be transmitted at a different timing as long as it can be associated with the setting change process.

Further, when transmitting the power failure recovery command, the main CPU 101 does not need to transmit the setting value information to the sub CPU 201 because the setting values have not been changed. can be

When sub CPU 201 completes the setting change process or setting confirmation process in step S3304, that is, receives an initialization command or power failure recovery command from main CPU 101 (YES in step S3304), the number of histories stored in work RAM 203 is It is determined whether or not the number is greater than or equal to a predetermined number N (step S3305). It is desired to record history while leaving as much history data as possible by appropriately determining whether to overwrite data or write data in an empty area according to the number of histories stored in the work RAM 203. This is intended to prevent the occurrence of a situation in which recording is not possible at times. The predetermined number N can be appropriately set according to the capacity that can be stored in the work RAM 203, but is set to 500, for example, in the second embodiment.

If the history number of history information stored in the work RAM 203 is equal to or greater than the predetermined number N (YES in step S3305), the process moves to step S3306 to execute overwriting of history information (step S3306). In the overwriting process of history information in step S3306, among the histories stored in the work RAM 203, the histories stored first (oldest history information) are overwritten in order.

In the overwriting process of history information in step S3306, the history information already stored in work RAM 203 is overwritten with new history information, thereby erasing the history information stored in work RAM 203 as a result. However, it is not limited to this. For example, when an initialization command or a power failure recovery command is received, if storing new history information in the work RAM 203 may exceed a predetermined upper limit, at least part of the history information stored in the work RAM 203 may be erased and the history information may be stored. Even if the initialization command or the power failure recovery command is not received, at least one of the setting history information stored in the work RAM 203 is stored when there is a risk that the upper limit will be exceeded if the work RAM 203 stores more history information. You may make it erase a part.

If the number of histories stored in work RAM 203 is less than the predetermined number N (NO in step S3305), sub CPU 201 advances to step S3307 to perform history information recording processing (step S3307) is executed.

In this specification, the history information overwrite processing in step S3306 and the history information recording processing in step S3307 may be collectively referred to as history recording processing.

Note that the history information includes time information measured by the RTC 209 when an initialization command or power failure recovery command is received from the main CPU 101, operation type information (information indicating that setting change processing has been executed or setting confirmation). information to the effect that the process has been executed), and information such as set value information. Specifically, when the initialization command is received, the time information when the initialization command is received, the information indicating that the setting change process has been executed, and the setting value information after the setting change transmitted from the main CPU 101 is history information. Also, when the power failure recovery command is received, the time information when the power failure recovery command is received, the information indicating that the setting confirmation process has been executed, and the current setting value information sent from the main CPU 101 are associated. The attached information is history information. It is not essential to include the current set value information sent from the main CPU 101 in the history information when the power failure recovery command is received. It is preferable to include the current setting information in the history information. In addition, the browsing history is also included in the above history information, and if the setting change/confirmation history is browsed in the hall menu processing (step S3303), the browsing history is overwritten as history information in step S3306, Alternatively, in step S3307, the browsing history is recorded as history information in an empty area of work RAM 203. FIG.

In a normal state, when the power is turned on, the main CPU 101 immediately transmits some command (for example, power failure recovery command, setting operation command, etc.) after the sub CPU 201 is activated. When the sub CPU 201 does not receive a command from the main CPU 101 even after a predetermined period of time (for example, 30 seconds) has elapsed since its activation, the sub CPU 201 determines that there is an abnormality, and the sub control circuit 200 side stops the game. The display output, audio output and LED 25 when the game is stopped on the sub-control circuit 200 side will be described later.

Moreover, the time information, which is one piece of history information to be stored in the work RAM 203, preferably stores not only date and time information, but also information up to the hour and minute, or information up to the hour, minute and second.

After executing the process of step S3306 or step S3307, the sub CPU 201 proceeds to step S3308.

The sub CPU 201 determines in step S3308 whether or not the setting has been changed, that is, whether or not the initialization command has been received in step S3304 (step S3308). Note that when the setting operation command received in step S3301 is the setting change start command, the power failure restoration command is not received in step S3304, and when the setting operation command received in step S3301 is the setting check start command never receives an initialization command in step S3304. In addition, in the processing of step S3308, it is sufficient if the sub CPU 201 can determine that the setting has been changed. It may be determined that the setting change process has been performed when the value information is received.

When the sub CPU 201 determines that the setting has been changed (YES in step S3308), the sub CPU 201 performs setting change initialization processing (step S3309), and proceeds to step S3310.

In step S3310, sub CPU 201 executes hole menu re-display processing. At this time, the re-displayed hole menu screen is different from the hole menu screen displayed during setting change or setting confirmation (the hole menu screen displayed in step S3302). This is a screen displayed in a state where execution is possible (or during game return processing in step S3030). For example, as shown in FIG. be done. FIG. 211 is a diagram showing an example of the hole menu screen displayed in the display area of the liquid crystal display device 16 when the hole menu redisplay process of step S3310 is executed.

That is, in the hall menu screen displayed during setting change or setting confirmation (the hall menu screen displayed in step S3302), the display of the hall menu screen cannot be ended at will of the operator, but the setting change processing is performed. The hole menu screen (the hole menu screen displayed in step S3310) redisplayed after the end of the operation is configured so that the display of the hole menu screen can be terminated at will by the operator. Note that the hall menu screen displayed in step S3302 (for example, see FIG. 209) and the hall menu screen displayed in step S3310 (see FIG. 211) can be operated by selecting and determining one of the items. Such functional aspects (for example, functional aspects such as being able to view a setting change/confirmation history screen) are common.

Further, when the sub CPU 201 determines in step S3308 that the setting has been changed (YES in step S3308), in the hall menu re-display processing in step S3310, the hall menu screen is displayed in the display area of the liquid crystal display device 16 along with the hall menu screen. , for example, in a very small area at the bottom right, characters such as "The setting has been changed" are displayed so as not to hinder the operation on the hall menu screen. Similarly, when the screen of the selected hall menu item (for example, the setting change/confirmation history screen) is displayed, so as not to interfere with the operation on the screen, for example, "The setting has been changed" displayed. At the same time, the sub CPU 201 controls the voice control circuit 205 (see FIG. 9) to output a voice such as "The settings have been changed. The RAM has been initialized." This makes it possible for the operator to know that the settings have been changed (and that the backup clear process has been executed) without interfering with operations on the hall menu screen or the screen of the selected hall menu item. becomes. Furthermore, the sub CPU 201 executes control to light all the LEDs 25 (see FIG. 1, for example) in red via the LED control circuit 206 (see FIG. 9).

On the other hand, when it is determined in step S3308 that the setting has been confirmed (NO in step S3308), that is, when the command received in step S3304 is the power failure recovery command indicating the end of the setting confirmation process, the sub CPU 201 proceeds to step S3309. - The game screen return processing of step S3315 is executed without executing the processing of step S3314. Therefore, when the setting confirmation process ends, the hall menu redisplay process (step S3310) is not executed. In addition, the characters indicating that the setting confirmation is completed are not displayed in the display area of the liquid crystal display device 16 . Furthermore, no sound is output to indicate that the setting confirmation has been completed. However, the sub CPU 201 executes control to turn on all the LEDs 25 (see, for example, FIG. 1) in red via the LED control circuit 206 (see FIG. 9).

By the way, when the process of step S3302 is executed and when the process of step S3310 is executed, the whole menu screen is displayed in the display area of the liquid crystal display device 16, but the process of step S3302 is not executed. When the setting is being checked or changed, the game cannot be played, whereas when the process of step S3310 is executed, the game can be played. However, as described above, depending on whether the process of step S3302 or the process of step S3310 is performed, the mode of character display in the display area of the liquid crystal display device 16 (not displayed when setting confirmation is completed) ), the mode of the sound output from the speaker 24, and the light emission mode of the LED 25 are greatly different. Therefore, even if the hall menu screen or the screen of the selected hall menu item is displayed in the display area of the liquid crystal display device 16, the operation on the screen of the hall menu screen or the selected hall menu item (for example, a hall menu item to easily grasp whether the pachinko machine is in a state in which it is possible to execute a game or not, without interfering with the operation of selecting , the operation for updating the page, etc., from the appearance. It is possible.

After executing the process of step S3310, the sub CPU 201 moves to step S3311 and executes the whole menu process. The hole menu processing in step S3311 is basically the same processing as in step S3303, but differs in processing when YES in step S33072 in FIG. 217, which will be described later.

In step S3312, sub CPU 201 determines whether or not "end hole menu" is selected on the redisplayed hole menu screen. When determining that "end hole menu" is selected (YES in step S3312), the sub CPU 201 performs game screen return display processing (step S3315). In this game screen return display process, the sub CPU 201 displays an effect image to be displayed in the display area of the liquid crystal display device 16 when a game is played, and displays a display of a pachinko game machine (e.g., the shooting handle 32) that has not been operated for a predetermined period of time. Displays the initial image displayed when After executing the game screen return processing in step S3315, the sub CPU 201 proceeds to step S3316.

On the other hand, if it is determined in step S3312 that "end hall menu" has not been selected (NO in step S3312), the sub CPU 201 determines whether a predetermined time (for example, 30 seconds) has elapsed (step S3313). ). Although not shown in FIG. 207, when the setting change process or setting confirmation process is completed (YES in step S3304), when the hall menu redisplay process (step S3310) is executed, the hall menu process (step S3311) is executed. The timing is started based on the operator performing some operation, such as when any hall menu item is selected in step S3313. If the operator does not perform any operation for a predetermined time or longer, the sub CPU 201 determines YES in step S3313.

When the sub CPU 201 determines that a predetermined period of time (for example, 30 seconds) has elapsed without any operation (YES in step S3313), it ends the display of the re-displayed hole menu screen, and executes game screen return display processing in step S3315. Run.

In addition, if the predetermined time (for example, 30 seconds) has not passed with no operation (NO in step S3313), the sub CPU 201 determines whether or not it has received a command to generate the effect control object (step S3314). . The command to generate the production control object is a command that can be received when the game is executed, for example, a symbol variation start command, a symbol variation confirmation (variation stop) command, a big win game execution start command, a big win game A command indicating the number of rounds in , a round interval command in a big win game, a command to end a big win game, an initialization command, a power failure return command, and the like. When the sub CPU 201 determines in step S3314 that it has received one of the commands for generating these effect control objects, it terminates the display of the re-displayed hole menu screen, and returns to the game screen in step S3315. Execute the process. As a result, the game screen corresponding to the progress of the game by the main CPU 101 is displayed in the display area of the liquid crystal display device 16. It is possible to prevent the progress of the game from being hindered, such as being displayed. On the other hand, if it is determined that the command for generating the effect control object has not been received (NO in step S3314), the process returns to step S3311.

After executing the game screen return display processing (step S3315), the sub CPU 201 proceeds to step S3316 and executes hall menu display prohibition processing. This hall menu display prohibition process is a process for prohibiting the hall menu screen from being displayed again in the display area of the liquid crystal display device 16 . That is, when the hall menu display prohibition process (step S3316) is executed, the hall menu screen is not displayed even if the setting key 328 is turned ON again, and the power is turned OFF to execute the setting change process or the setting confirmation process. The hole menu display process (step S3302) cannot be executed unless

Thus, the hole menu screen is basically a screen displayed in the display area of the liquid crystal display device 16 during execution of setting change processing or setting confirmation processing. However, when the setting change process is executed, even if this setting change process is completed, for example, the operator himself/herself must not select the item "Exit hall menu" on the hall menu screen (NO in step S3312). Under certain conditions such as that the operation time has not passed for a predetermined time (NO in step S3313) and that the command to generate the effect control object has not been received (NO in step S3314), the processing of steps S3311 to S3314 is repeatedly executed. and the hole menu screen is continuously displayed. Therefore, if the operator performs some operation on the hall menu screen or the screen of the selected hall menu item (for example, setting change/confirmation history screen), the display of the hall menu screen or the screen of the selected hall menu item will not be performed. It will continue to be displayed without ending. Thereby, even if the setting change process or the setting confirmation process is completed, it is possible to give the operator time to operate the home menu screen or the screen of the selected hall menu item. Moreover, even if the operator forgets to select "end hole menu", if there is no operation for a predetermined time (for example, 30 seconds), the display of the hole menu screen or the screen of the selected hole menu item is ended and the game is played. Since the screen return process (step S3315) is executed, an unauthorized person (for example, a hall attendant or a player who is not a gaming machine administrator) can easily view confidential information such as setting change history, setting confirmation history, and browsing history. security can be ensured.

In the second embodiment, when it is determined in step S3314 that a command for generating an effect control object has been received, game screen return processing (step S3315) and hall menu display prohibition processing (step S3316) are performed. However, it is not necessarily limited to this. A game screen return process (step S3315) and a hall menu display prohibition process (step S3316) may be performed.

Here, a notification mode when an error occurs, including backup clear processing that does not involve setting change processing, will be described with reference to FIG. 212 . FIG. 212 shows an example of a screen in which the contents of an error are displayed in the display area of the liquid crystal display device 16. (a) A screen showing that the backup clear process without setting change process has been executed; A screen showing that an abnormal prize winning error has occurred and that backup clear processing without setting change processing has been executed, (c) that backup clear processing without setting change processing has been executed and startup abnormal prize winning error FIG. 10 is a diagram showing a screen after a notification period (for example, 30 seconds) indicating that the backup clear process has been executed has passed while both are occurring.

As shown in FIG. 212, when a plurality of errors occur, the sub CPU 201 displays all the error contents in the display area of the liquid crystal display device 16, and also displays the error contents in the order of highest priority to the voice control circuit 205 ( 9) to output sound from the speaker 24, and control the light emission of the LED 25 through the LED control circuit 206 (see FIG. 9).

When backup clear processing without setting change processing is executed and no other error has occurred, the sub CPU 201 clears the display area of the liquid crystal display device 16 as shown in FIG. 212(a). In addition to controlling to display characters such as "RAM has been cleared" in the display, control is performed so that voice such as "RAM has been cleared" is output from the speaker 24, and an LED control circuit 206 (FIG. 9 (see FIG. 1, for example) to light the LEDs 25 (see, for example, FIG. 1) in red. Note that the characters such as "RAM has been cleared" are displayed using an area larger than the above-described minimal area (see FIG. 211) in which the characters such as "Settings have been changed" are displayed.

That is, in the second embodiment, when the setting change process is performed, the backup clear process is always executed (see FIG. 180). , "The setting has been changed" is displayed in the display area of the liquid crystal display device 16, but the fact that the backup clear processing has been executed is not displayed, and the message "The setting has been changed. The RAM has been initialized." It is only output from the speaker 24 as a voice such as "It has been converted". On the other hand, when the backup clear process is executed without the setting change process, the sub CPU 201 uses an area larger than the minimum area (see FIG. 211) in the display area of the liquid crystal display device 16. Control is performed so that characters such as "RAM has been cleared" are displayed, and voice such as "RAM has been cleared" is output from the speaker 24 (see FIG. 212(a)). Here, the main purpose of the backup clear processing that accompanies the setting change processing is to change the set value (not the backup clear processing), whereas the main purpose of the backup clear processing that does not involve the setting change processing is the backup clear processing. It is considered to be Therefore, when the backup clear processing accompanied by the setting change processing is executed, the fact that the backup clear processing has been executed is discreetly notified in a mode that does not hinder the operation of the hall menu screen to be redisplayed. On the other hand, when the backup clear processing without the setting change processing is executed, the execution of the backup clear processing is notified in a more conspicuous manner than when the backup clear processing with the setting change processing is executed. By doing so, it is possible to prevent the backup clear processing from being illegally executed.

After the backup clear process is executed, if another error such as a startup abnormal winning error has occurred, it means that a startup abnormal winning error has occurred as shown in FIG. 212(b). , and that the backup clear process has been executed are displayed as characters in the display area of the liquid crystal display device 16 . At this time, since the execution of the backup clear process has a higher priority than the startup error winning error, the characters indicating that the backup clear process has been executed are displayed at the top regardless of the order of occurrence. . In addition, a sound is output from the speaker 24 notifying that the backup clear process having a higher priority has been executed, and the LED 25 emits light to indicate that the backup clear process has been executed.

In addition, in a state in which both the execution of the backup clear process and the startup abnormal winning error have occurred, when the notification period (for example, 30 seconds) of the execution of the backup clear process has passed, the backup clear process is performed. is deleted from the display area of the liquid crystal display device 16, and if no other error has occurred, only the characters indicating the startup abnormal winning error are displayed in the display area of the liquid crystal display device 16. be. In addition, the sound output from the speaker 24 changes from the sound announcing that the backup clear process has been executed to the sound announcing the occurrence of the start opening abnormal prize winning error. It changes from a mode indicating that the process has been executed to a mode indicating that a start-up abnormal winning error has occurred. In this way, it is possible to easily grasp the content of the error that has occurred.

In the above description, when it is determined that the setting change process or the setting confirmation process is in progress, that is, when it is determined that the setting operation command is received (YES in step S3301), the hall menu display process (step S3302) is executed. has been described, but it is preferable to execute it also when backup clear processing without setting change processing is executed. Backup clear processing without setting change processing is performed when both the pressing operation of the backup clear switch 330 and the ON operation of the power switch 35 are performed without turning ON the setting key 328 while the power is not turned on. is executed (see FIG. 179). When the backup clear process is executed, the main CPU 101 transmits the initialization command to the sub CPU 201. Therefore, the sub CPU 201 that receives the initialization command without receiving the setting operation command performs the backup clear process without the setting change process. has been executed, and the whole menu display process (step S3302) and the whole menu process (step S3303) can be executed.

[Another example of a hall menu task]
By the way, the main CPU 101 of the pachinko gaming machine according to the second embodiment determines whether or not the work area of the main RAM 103 is normal in the game permission process (step S17) of the power-on process (see FIG. 177). (See step S31730 in FIG. 178). For example, when the set value data is not within the specified range (within the range of "0" to "5" in this second embodiment), the working area of the main RAM 103 is not normal. (NO in step S31730), the game permission flag is turned OFF (see step S31760), and the game cannot be executed. However, if, for example, the main control board 30 is illegally replaced, there is a high possibility that the work area check processing of the RAM 103 (step S31720) will not be executed. Also, when an illegal signal is input and the set value is changed, there is a possibility that the set value data is within the range of "0" to "5". Therefore, as in the above-described setting determination processing that is executed during execution of the game, if the work area check processing is not executed in step S31720, or if there is a possibility that the setting value has been illegally changed, the setting value Assuming that the data is within the range of "0" to "5" (for example, if YES is determined in step S31730), the sub CPU 201 determines whether the setting value information is appropriate (steps 317 and 317). The process of step S3318) may be executed. The hole menu task in this case is shown in FIG. FIG. 213 is another example of the hole menu task executed by the sub CPU 201, and is a flow chart when the sub CPU 201 executes setting determination processing for determining whether setting value information is appropriate. Other examples of Whole Menu tasks are described below. However, the description of the processing common to FIG. 207 will be omitted, and only the setting determination processing will be described.

First, even when the main CPU 101 transmits a power failure recovery command indicating that the setting confirmation process is completed, the main CPU 101 uses the setting value information stored in the main RAM 103 as the current setting value used for the progress of the game. It transmits to sub CPU201.

On the other hand, the sub CPU 201 that has received the power failure recovery command determines that the setting has not been changed (NO in step S3308), and proceeds to step S3317. In this step S3317, the sub CPU 201 executes set value check processing. This set value check process (step S3317) includes current set value information (set value information stored in work RAM 203 transmitted from main CPU 101 before power failure) and set value information transmitted from main CPU 101 ( This is a process of confirming the set value information transmitted from the main CPU 101 after the power failure. Note that when it is determined in step S3308 that the setting has not been changed (NO in step S3308), the processing of steps S3309 to S3314 is not executed.

After confirming the current set value information and the set value information transmitted from the main CPU 101 in the set value check process (step S3317), the sub CPU 201 performs set value suitability determination processing, that is, determines whether the set value is appropriate. (step S3318). At this time, if the current set value information and the set value information transmitted from the main CPU 101 match, it is determined to be appropriate (YES in step S3318), and the process proceeds to step S3315. The processing after step S3315 is as described above.

On the other hand, if the current set value information and the set value information transmitted from the main CPU 101 do not match, it is determined to be inappropriate (NO in step S3318), and the sub CPU 201 proceeds to step S3319. Execute the process.

The set value abnormality processing is processing for displaying an image informing that the set value is abnormal in the display area of the liquid crystal display device 16 . In this setting value abnormality processing (step S3319), in place of or in addition to the processing of displaying an image informing that the setting value is abnormal, a sound is output to notify that the setting value is abnormal. You may make it perform a process.

In this way, when the command transmitted from the main CPU 101 is the power failure recovery command indicating the end of the setting confirmation process, the sub CPU 201 executes the setting determination process (the process of steps 317 and S3318), is not appropriate (NO in step S3318), by executing the set value abnormality processing (step S3319), it is possible to notify the gaming machine manager that the set value is not appropriate.

Note that the above-described setting determination processing (steps S3317 and S3318) is executed when the setting confirmation processing is completed. When the backup processing without the power supply is executed (when the power is not turned on, the backup clear switch 330 is pressed and the power switch 35 is turned on without turning on the setting key 328), or when the power supply is simply turned on. It is preferable to run it even if the Unless the setting change process is executed, the sub CPU 201 determines whether or not the setting value information received before the power failure matches the setting value information received after the power failure. This is because it is possible to determine

[Hall menu processing]
Next, referring to FIG. 214, the hole menu processing (step S3303) in the hole menu task (see FIGS. 207 and 213) will be described. FIG. 214 is a flowchart showing an example of hole menu processing executed by the sub CPU 201. As shown in FIG.

First, the sub CPU 201 operates a hall menu for selecting a hall menu item for checking various information and settings and changing various settings based on the operation of the select button 664 and/or the main button 662 by the operator. Selection processing is performed (step S33001). In addition, in the hole menu selection process of FIG. 214, the hole menu items include time setting, prize ball information, setting history/setting confirmation history, error information history, monitoring history, warning display setting, notification setting, power saving mode, maintenance, The case of checking the operation of the character object, setting the brightness of the liquid crystal, and setting the sound volume will be described, but the hall menu items are not limited to these as described above.

Next, the sub CPU 201 determines whether or not the hall menu selected in step S33001 is "time setting" (step S33001). If it is determined in step S33002 that the selected hall menu is "time setting" (YES in step S33002), the sub CPU 201 performs time setting processing (step S33003). In this time setting process, the sub CPU 201 displays a time setting screen (not shown) in the display area of the liquid crystal display device 16 so that the operator can confirm and change the set time.

When the sub CPU 201 determines that the hole menu selected in step S33001 is not "time setting" (NO in step S33002), it determines whether or not the hole menu selected in step S33001 is "ball information". (Step S33004). When the sub CPU 201 determines that the selected hole menu is "ball prize information" (YES in step S33004), it performs prize ball information processing (step S33005). In this prize ball information processing, the sub CPU 201 displays a prize ball information screen (not shown) in the display area of the liquid crystal display device 16 so that the operator can confirm the prize ball information. The prize ball information includes, for example, information on the number of prize balls paid out today, difference information between the number of prize balls paid out today and the number of game balls launched, and the number of prize balls paid out for each day in the past several days. information, difference information (daily) between the number of prize balls paid out in the past several days and the number of prize balls shot.

When the sub CPU 201 determines that the hole menu selected in step S33001 is not "ball information" (NO in step S33004), it determines whether the hole menu selected in step S33001 is "setting change/confirmation history". It discriminates (step S33006). If the sub CPU 201 determines that the selected hall menu is "setting change/confirmation history" (YES in step S33006), it performs setting change/confirmation history processing (step S33007). In this setting change/confirmation history process, the sub CPU 201 displays a later-described setting change/confirmation history screen (for example, see FIG. 218 described later) in the display area of the liquid crystal display device 16, so that the operator can confirm the setting. It is possible to check the history, change history and browsing history.

Further, when the sub CPU 201 detects that the main button 662 has been operated while the select button 664 has been operated and "setting change/confirmation history" has been selected, the sub CPU 201 displays the settings in the display area of the liquid crystal display device 16. A change/confirmation history screen (see, for example, FIG. 218 described later) is displayed, and the operator can display the change history of settings (setting values), the confirmation history of settings (setting values), the browsing history, and the confirmed settings (setting values). And it is possible to confirm the setting (set value) after change. Details of the setting change/confirmation history process will be described later with reference to FIGS. 216 and 217. FIG.

When the sub CPU 201 determines that the hole menu selected in step S33001 is not "setting change/confirmation history" (NO in step S33006), it determines whether the hole menu selected in step S33001 is "error information history". It discriminates (step S33008). If the sub CPU 201 determines that the selected hole menu is "error information history" (YES in step S33008), it performs error information history processing (step S33009). In this error information history process, the sub CPU 201 displays an error information history screen (see, for example, FIG. 215) in the display area of the liquid crystal display device 16 so that the operator can check and change the error information history. do.

The error history displayed in the error information history process is, for example, information stored in the work RAM 203 as an error history when the sub CPU 201 determines that the backup is defective. As described above, the sub CPU 201 may determine that the backup is defective when it receives an abnormal command from the main CPU 101, or when the sub control circuit 200 (see FIG. ) has failed to receive a normal command from the main CPU 101 for a predetermined time (for example, 30 seconds) after power supply to the main CPU 101 is started.

As shown in FIG. 215, an error information history table is arranged substantially in the center of the error information history screen. The error information history table has an error content column that displays error codes, an occurrence date and time column that displays the date and time when the error code was recorded, and a release date and time column that displays the date and time when the error was released. An operation method for the error information history screen is displayed in the lower left part of the error information history screen. For example, it is indicated that the cursor (not shown) can be moved up, down, left, or right by operating the select buttons 664a to 664d (see FIG. 3), and the selection can be made by operating the main button 662. It is shown that it is possible.

If the sub CPU 201 determines that the hall menu selected in step S33001 is not "error information history" (NO in step S33008), it determines whether or not the hall menu selected in step S33001 is "monitoring history" ( step S33010). When determining that the selected hole menu is "monitoring history" (YES in step S33010), the sub CPU 201 performs monitoring history processing (step S33011). In this monitoring history processing, the sub CPU 201 displays a monitoring history processing screen (not shown) in the display area of the liquid crystal display device 16 so that the operator can check the monitoring history.

When sub CPU 201 determines that the hall menu selected in step S33001 is not "monitoring history" (NO in step S33010), sub CPU 201 determines whether or not the hall menu selected in step S33001 is "warning display setting" ( step S33012). When determining that the selected hole menu is "warning display setting" (YES in step S33012), the sub CPU 201 performs warning display setting processing (step S33013). In this warning display setting process, the sub CPU 201 displays a warning display setting screen (not shown) in the display area of the liquid crystal display device 16 to allow the operator to confirm and change the warning display settings.

If the sub CPU 201 determines that the hole menu selected in step S33001 is not "warning display setting" (NO in step S33012), it determines whether the hole menu selected in step S33001 is "notification setting" ( step S33014). When determining that the selected hole menu is "notification setting" (YES in step S33014), the sub CPU 201 performs notification setting processing (step S33015). In this notification setting process, the sub CPU 201 displays a notification setting screen (not shown) in the display area of the liquid crystal display device 16 to allow the operator to confirm and change notification settings.

If the sub CPU 201 determines that the hall menu selected in step S33001 is not "notification setting" (NO in step S33014), it determines whether the hall menu selected in step S33001 is "power saving mode" ( step S33016). When determining that the selected hole menu is the "power saving mode" (YES in step S33016), the sub CPU 201 performs power saving mode processing (step S33017). In this power saving mode process, the sub CPU 201 displays a power saving mode screen (not shown) in the display area of the liquid crystal display device 16, enabling the operator to confirm and change the settings of the power saving mode. .

When the sub CPU 201 determines that the hall menu selected in step S33001 is not the "power saving mode" (NO in step S33016), it determines whether the hall menu selected in step S33001 is "maintenance" (step S33018). When determining that the selected hole menu is "maintenance" (YES in step S33018), the sub CPU 201 performs maintenance processing (step S33019). Details of the maintenance process will be described later with reference to FIG.

If the sub CPU 201 determines that the hole menu selected in step S33001 is not "maintenance" (NO in step S33018), the sub CPU 201 determines whether the hole menu selected in step S33001 is "accessor action check" ( step S33020). When determining that the selected hole menu is "confirmation of role product action" (YES in step S33020), the sub CPU 201 performs a role product action confirmation process (step S33021). In this role product action confirmation process, the sub CPU 201 displays a role product action confirmation screen (not shown) in the display area of the liquid crystal display device 16 to enable the operator to check the action of the role product.

When the sub CPU 201 determines that the hole menu selected in step S33001 is not "confirmation of role item operation" (NO in step S33020), it determines whether or not the hole menu selected in step S33001 is "liquid crystal brightness setting". (step S33022). If it is determined that the selected hole menu is "LCD brightness setting" (YES in step S33022), the sub CPU 201 performs LCD brightness setting processing (step S33023). In this liquid crystal brightness setting process, the sub CPU 201 displays a liquid crystal brightness setting screen (not shown) in the display area of the liquid crystal display device 16 so that the operator can check and change the brightness setting of the liquid crystal display device 16. and

When the sub CPU 201 determines that the hall menu selected in step S33001 is not "LCD brightness setting" (NO in step S33022), it determines whether the hall menu selected in step S33001 is "volume adjustment setting". (Step S33024). When determining that the selected hall menu is "volume adjustment setting" (YES in step S33024), the sub CPU 201 performs volume adjustment setting processing (step S33025). In this volume adjustment setting process, the sub CPU 201 displays a volume adjustment setting screen (not shown) on the liquid crystal display device 16 so that the operator can confirm and change the volume setting of the sound output from the speaker 24. and

After the processing of steps S33003, S33005, S33007, S33009, S33011, S33013, S33015, S33017, S33019, S33021, S33023, and S33025, and after the processing of steps S33021, S33023, and S33025, and when the hall menu selected in S33001 If the sub CPU 201 determines that it is not "adjustment setting" (NO in step S33024), the sub CPU 201 ends the whole menu process and returns the process to step S3304 of the whole menu task (see FIG. 207).

[Aspects of various devices when changing/confirming settings]
The aspects of the various devices (liquid crystal display device 16, speaker 24, LED 25, main RAM 103, performance display monitor 334) when changing settings and confirming settings are as described above, but are summarized below for ease of understanding. explain.

First, when changing settings, the order in which various operations are executed will be described. In the power-off state before power-on, the power switch 35 is off. At this time, the liquid crystal display device 16, the speaker 24, the LED 25 and the performance display monitor 334 are turned off. In order to start the setting change process, it is necessary to turn on the setting key 328 before turning on the power. 24, LED 25 and performance display monitor 334 remain off.

Next, when both the backup clear switch 330 and the power switch 35 are turned on while the setting key 328 is turned on, the main CPU 101 controls the setting change state and transmits a setting operation command (setting change start command). . The sub CPU 201 determines that it has been controlled to the setting change state (the setting change state has started) based on the reception of the setting operation command (setting change start command) transmitted from the main CPU 101 . When controlled to the setting change state, the game cannot be executed, and the sub CPU 201 causes the display control circuit 204 to display the hall menu screen in the display area of the liquid crystal display device 16, and also displays characters such as "setting is being changed". display. At the same time, the sub CPU 201 causes the voice control circuit 205 to output a voice such as "Settings are being changed" from the speaker 24, and the LED control circuit 206 causes the LEDs 25 to light up in white. Main CPU 101 also transmits a setting change security signal to hall computer 700 via external terminal board 323 . Furthermore, the main CPU 101 executes backup clear processing for clearing the work area of the main RAM 103 . Note that the set values are displayed on the performance display monitor 334 by the main CPU 101 .

Next, when the setting switch 332 is operated in the setting change state, the setting value is updated. However, at this stage, the set values have not yet been finalized. The updated setting values are displayed on the performance display monitor 334 . In addition, in the display area of the liquid crystal display device 16, the hall menu screen is displayed, and the characters such as "The setting is being changed" are continuously displayed. At the same time, the speaker 24 continues to output a voice such as "The settings are being changed", and the LEDs 25 are continuously lit in white. In the second embodiment, even if the setting value is updated, it is only stored in the register and not stored in the main RAM 103 until it is determined. The value may be stored in the work area of main RAM 103 . Further, in the second embodiment, the setting value is updated by operating the setting switch 332, but the setting value is updated by operating other operation means (for example, the backup clear switch 330). may be made.

Next, when the setting key 328 is turned off, the main CPU 101 terminates the setting change state and transmits an initialization command. The sub CPU 201 determines that the setting change state has ended based on the reception of the initialization command transmitted from the main CPU 101 . When the setting change state ends, a game can be played. However, even if the setting change state ends, as long as the execution of the game is not started (for example, unless a command to generate the effect control object is received), the sub CPU 201 will continue to operate the display control circuit for at least a predetermined period (for example, 30 seconds). 204 displays the hall menu screen or the screen of the selected hall menu item (for example, setting change/confirmation history screen) in the display area of the liquid crystal display device 16, and also displays characters such as "The setting has been changed" on the liquid crystal display. It is displayed on the display area of the display device 16 . However, it is not displayed that the backup clear processing has been executed. At the same time, the sub CPU 201 causes the voice control circuit 205 to output a voice such as "The settings have been changed. The RAM has been initialized" from the speaker 24 for at least a predetermined period (for example, 30 seconds). The control circuit 206 lights all the LEDs 25 in red. Such display in the display area of the liquid crystal display device 16, output from the speaker 24, and full red lighting of the LEDs 25 continue as long as some operation is performed on the hall menu screen or the screen of the selected hall menu item. , the non-operation period continues for a predetermined period, or the game ends when execution of the game is started. Note that the base value is displayed on the performance display monitor 334 by the main CPU 101 . By the way, in the above description, the fact that the backup clear processing has been executed is not displayed. You may make it

In this way, even if the setting change state ends, the character display such as "The setting has been changed", the voice output such as "The setting has been changed. The RAM has been initialized." By keeping the light on for at least a predetermined period of time (for example, 30 seconds), it is possible to prevent unauthorized third parties from tampering with, for example, viewing setting change/confirmation history screens. Become. Moreover, since at least the light emission mode of the LED 25 is clearly different between during the setting change state and when the setting change state ends, it is possible to easily grasp whether or not the game is ready to be played.

The above is the aspect of various devices (the liquid crystal display device 16, the speaker 24, the LED 25, the main RAM 103, the performance display monitor 334) when changing the settings.

Next, when confirming settings, various operations will be described in the order in which they are executed. In the power-off state before power-on, the power switch 35 is off. At this time, the liquid crystal display device 16, the speaker 24, the LED 25 and the performance display monitor 334 are turned off. In order to start the setting confirmation process, it is necessary to turn on the setting key 328 before turning on the power. 24, LED 25 and performance display monitor 334 remain off.

Next, when the power switch 35 is turned on while the setting key 328 is turned on (the backup clear switch 330 is not turned on), the main CPU 101 controls the setting confirmation state and issues a setting operation command (setting confirmation start command). to send. The sub CPU 201 determines that it has been controlled to the setting confirmation state (the setting confirmation state has started) based on the reception of the setting operation command (setting confirmation start command) transmitted from the main CPU 101 . When the game is controlled to the setting confirmation state, the game cannot be executed, and the sub CPU 201 causes the display control circuit 204 to display the hall menu screen in the display area of the liquid crystal display device 16, and at the same time, it says, "Settings are being confirmed." Display characters. At the same time, the sub CPU 201 causes the voice control circuit 205 to output a voice such as "Settings are being checked" from the speaker 24, and the LED control circuit 206 causes the LEDs 25 to light up in white. Main CPU 101 also transmits a setting confirmation security signal to hall computer 700 via external terminal board 323 . Note that the set values are displayed on the performance display monitor 334 by the main CPU 101 .

Next, when the setting key 328 is turned off, the main CPU 101 terminates the setting confirmation state and transmits a power failure recovery command. The sub CPU 201 determines that the setting confirmation state has ended based on the reception of the power failure restoration command transmitted from the main CPU 101 . When the setting confirmation state ends, the game becomes ready to be played. Further, the sub CPU 201 executes a game screen return display process (step S3316) based on receiving the power failure return command transmitted from the main CPU 101 . At this time, the sub CPU 201 does not display characters indicating that the setting confirmation has been completed, and does not output a voice indicating that the setting confirmation has been completed. However, the sub CPU 201 lights the LED 25 in red for a predetermined period of time (for example, 30 seconds), and stops the LED 25 from lighting in red when the game starts. A base value is displayed on the performance display monitor 334 by the main CPU 101 .

In this way, even if the setting confirmation state ends, by keeping the LEDs 25 all lit in red for at least a predetermined period of time (for example, 30 seconds), an unauthorized person, such as viewing a setting change/confirmation history screen, etc., can It is possible to suppress what is done by a third party who does not have Moreover, since at least the light emission mode of the LED 25 is clearly different between during the setting change state and when the setting change state ends, it is possible to easily grasp whether or not the game is ready to be played.

As described above, the sub CPU 201 determines that the game is in a stopped state when no command is received from the main CPU 101 even after a predetermined time (for example, 30 seconds) has elapsed since the game was activated. When the sub CPU 201 determines that the game is in the stopped state, the display control circuit 204 and the voice control circuit 205 output the message "Determine the setting value" and the voice output. 1) is defined as all-white blinking. This state is again controlled to the setting change state by the main CPU 101 and continues until the sub CPU 201 receives an initialization command based on the termination of this setting change state.

The above is the aspect of various devices (the liquid crystal display device 16, the speaker 24, the LED 25, the main RAM 103, the performance display monitor 334) at the time of setting confirmation.

[Setting change/confirmation history processing]
Next, the setting change/confirmation history process (step S33007) in the hall menu process (see step S3303 in FIG. 207) will be described. In the setting change/confirmation history process, the setting change/confirmation history information (described later) is displayed in the display area of the liquid crystal display device 16, including the setting change history of setting values, the confirmation history of setting values, and the browsing history of setting changes and confirmations. Generic term for "setting change history information" and "setting confirmation history information"). Before explaining the setting change/confirmation history processing, setting change, setting confirmation, and browsing will be explained first.

In the second embodiment, the setting change operation can be performed in the setting change process as described above. This setting change process is started by turning on the setting key 328, pressing the backup clear switch 330, and turning on the power switch 35 while the power is off. As described above, when the setting change process is started, the setting values are displayed on the performance display monitor 334 . By pressing the setting switch 332, for example, the setting value displayed on the performance display monitor 334 is increased or decreased within the range of "1" to "6", and when the desired setting value is reached, the setting key switch signal is output. When the switch is turned OFF, one of the plurality of setting values to be used for the progress of the game is determined, and the setting change processing ends.

In order to be able to display the setting change history, as described above, after executing the setting change process, the main CPU 101 sends an initialization command indicating that the setting change process has ended, and setting value information after change, Send to the sub CPU 201 .

On the other hand, when the sub CPU 201 receives an initialization command indicating that the setting change process has been completed, the sub CPU 201 receives operation type information (information indicating that the setting change process has been executed), setting value information indicating the setting value after the setting change, Then, the date and time data currently clocked by the RTC 209, that is, the date and time data when the initialization command was received, is stored in the work RAM 203 as setting change history information. The setting change history information stored at this time corresponds to, for example, the information displayed in the "No. 3" and "No. 4" columns in the setting change/confirmation history screen displayed in FIG. 218 to be described later. do.

Further, in the second embodiment, when confirming the setting values, the main CPU 101 needs to execute the setting confirmation process as described above. This setting confirmation process is executed by turning on the setting key 328 while the power is off. As described above, when the setting confirmation process is started, the setting values are displayed on the performance display monitor 334 . When the setting key switch signal is turned off, the setting confirmation process ends. As described above, the setting confirmation process may be executed again when the setting key switch signal is turned off after being operated to turn off the setting key switch signal. As I did.

In addition, in order to display the history of setting confirmation, as described above, after executing the setting confirmation process, the main CPU 101 transmits a power failure recovery command to the sub CPU 201 as a command indicating that the setting confirmation process has ended. do. At this time, although the setting values have not been changed, the setting value information is also transmitted from the main CPU 101 to the sub CPU 201 in order to execute the above-described setting determination processing (the processing of steps S3317 and S3318, see FIG. 213). preferably.

On the other hand, when the sub CPU 201 receives the power failure recovery command indicating that the setting confirmation process has been completed, the sub CPU 201 receives the operation type information (information indicating that the setting confirmation process has been executed) and the date and time data currently clocked by the RTC 209. That is, the work RAM 203 stores the date and time data when the power failure recovery command is received as the setting confirmation history information. The setting confirmation history information stored at this time corresponds to, for example, the information shown in the "No. 1" column in the setting change/confirmation history screen displayed in FIG. 218 to be described later. As shown in the column of "No. 1" in the setting change/confirmation history screen displayed in FIG. may also be displayed together.

It should be noted that the work RAM 203 of the pachinko game machine according to the second embodiment constitutes a memory holding storage area capable of storing and holding written information even in a non-energized state. Therefore, even if the pachinko machine is turned off by the operator or is cut off due to a power outage, for example, the setting change/confirmation history information stored in the work RAM 203 is retained.

In the second embodiment, browsing means that the main button 662 is pressed while "setting change/confirmation history" is highlighted on the hall menu screen (see FIGS. 209 and 210), and the work is displayed. This means that a setting change/confirmation history screen (for example, see FIG. 218 described later) showing setting change/confirmation history information stored in the RAM 203 is displayed.

In order to display the browsing history (browsing history), the sub CPU 201 executes the following process. That is, when the setting change process or the setting confirmation process is in progress (YES in step S3301), the sub CPU 201 displays the hall menu screen in the display area of the liquid crystal display device 16 (step S3301). Then, when "setting change/confirmation history" is selected and determined in the hall menu processing (step S3303) (YES in step S33006), sub CPU 201 highlights "setting change/confirmation history" (see FIG. 210). ). When the main button 662 is pressed in this state, the sub CPU 201 reads the setting change/confirmation history information stored in the work RAM 203, and displays the setting change/confirmation history screen (for example, see FIG. 218 described later) on the liquid crystal display. In addition to displaying in the display area of the display device 16, operation type information indicating that browsing has been performed (information indicating that browsing has been performed) and date and time data currently clocked by the RTC 209, that is, when browsing ( (when the main button 662 is pressed) is stored in the work RAM 203 in association with the data. This is the processing when the browsing history is recorded in the above-described history recording processing (steps S3306 and S3307). That is, the browsing history is recorded in work RAM 203 when the setting change/confirmation history screen is displayed in the display area of liquid crystal display device 16 during both setting change processing and setting confirmation processing. When the sub CPU 201 stores the browsing history in the work RAM 203 , for example, the browsing history is integrated with the already stored setting change/confirmation history information and stored in the work RAM 203 . The browsing history stored at this time corresponds to, for example, the information displayed in the "No. 2" and "No. 5" columns in the setting change/confirmation history screen displayed in FIG.

Here, the history record processing in steps S3306 and S3307 can be summarized as follows. First, when "setting change/confirmation history" is selected and determined in hall menu processing (step S3303) (YES in step S33006), and the command received in step S3304 is an initialization command indicating the end of setting change processing. , the sub CPU 201 keeps track of both the setting change history and the browsing history. Also, "setting change/confirmation history" is selected and determined in the hall menu processing (step S3303) (YES in step S33006), and the command received in step S3304 is the power failure recovery command indicating the end of the setting confirmation processing. When, the sub CPU 201 performs both the setting confirmation history and the browsing history. Further, when "setting change/confirmation history" is not selected and determined in the hole menu processing (step S3303) (NO in step S33006) and the command received in step S3304 is an initialization command, the sub CPU 201 Of the setting change history and the browsing history, the browsing history is not performed, and only the setting change history is performed. Furthermore, when "setting change/confirmation history" is not selected and determined in the hall menu processing (step S3303) (NO in step S33006) and the command received in step S3304 is the power failure recovery command, the sub CPU 201 , only the setting confirmation history is performed without performing the browsing history of the setting confirmation history and the browsing history. Therefore, in the history recording process in steps S3306 and S3307, regardless of whether the command received in step S3304 is the initialization command or the power failure recovery command, in the hall menu process (step S3303), the "setting change/confirmation When "history" is selected and determined (YES in step S33006), browsing recording is performed.

In addition to the setting change processing or setting confirmation processing, when the backup clear processing without the setting change processing is executed as described above, the whole menu display processing (step S3302) or the whole menu processing (step S3302) is executed. In the case of executing step S3303), by making the above browsing record, it becomes possible to monitor illegality of the game store clerk. That is, in order to perform setting change processing or setting confirmation processing, a dedicated key (a key having a notch only corresponding to the setting key 328 and managed by a gaming machine manager) is required. For example, a general store clerk who does not have a key cannot browse, but for backup clear processing that does not involve setting change processing, a general game store clerk or an unauthorized player who does not have a dedicated key can browse by performing backup processing. It becomes possible to Therefore, by allowing the sub CPU 201 to perform browsing recording even when backup clear processing without setting change processing is executed, security cameras (usually installed in the store) corresponding to that time can be used. It is possible to identify the person who browsed by comparing with the video such as.

Note that in the history recording process in steps S3306 and S3307, regardless of whether the command received in step S3304 is an initialization command indicating the end of the setting change process or a power failure recovery command indicating the end of the setting confirmation process. As described above, when "setting change/confirmation history" is selected and determined in the hall menu process (step S3303) (YES in step S33006), browsing is recorded, but this is not necessarily the case. For example, when "setting change/confirmation history" is selected and determined in the hall menu processing (step S3303) (YES in step S33006), and the command received in step S3304 is the power failure recovery command, Both the setting confirmation history and the browsing history are performed, but "setting change/confirmation history" is selected and determined (YES in step S33006) in the hall menu processing (step S3303), and the command received in step S3304 is initialized. If it is a command, only the setting change history may be recorded, and the browsing history may not be recorded. As a result, it is possible to minimize the number of times the browsing history is recorded, and it is possible to prevent an unnecessary increase in the browsing history, which makes it difficult to detect fraud. To explain this, when fraud involving setting changes is committed, it is possible to detect the possibility of fraud based on the setting change history that is not remembered by the person in charge of gaming machine management. As for the associated fraud, it is difficult to perceive that there is a possibility of fraud only from the confirmation history of settings. Therefore, when the setting is changed, the browsing history is not recorded regardless of whether it was browsed, and when the setting is confirmed, the browsing history is recorded if it was browsed (at least the setting value information was browsed). It is designed to be recorded. This is because a person who commits fraud is more likely to browse after confirming the settings rather than after changing the settings. In other words, if there is no browsing history and only setting confirmation history in the same time period, the possibility of fraud is low, but if both setting confirmation history and browsing history are high, there is a possibility of fraud. . Regardless of whether the command received in step S3304 is an initialization command or a power failure recovery command, if "setting change/confirmation history" is selected and determined in hall menu processing (step S3303) (step YES in S33006), both the setting change history or the setting confirmation history and the browsing history are recorded, and when the setting change/confirmation history screen is displayed in the display area of the liquid crystal display device 16, the setting confirmation process is executed. When the operation type information indicates that the operation type information has been executed, the browsing history may also be displayed, and when the operation type information indicates that the setting change process has been executed, the browsing history may not be displayed.

In addition, the history record processing in steps S3306 and S3307 is performed multiple times from the start of the hole menu display processing in step S3302 to the execution of the game screen return display processing in step S3315. However, the browsing record is executed only once in step S3306 or step S3307, which is executed when the setting change process or the setting confirmation process ends. For example, when "setting change/confirmation history" is selected and determined (YES in step S3046) on the hall menu screen (see, for example, FIG. 210), the setting change/confirmation history screen (see, for example, FIG. 218) is displayed. However, when "return" is selected and determined on this setting change/confirmation history screen, the screen returns to the hall menu screen again. When "setting change/confirmation history" is selected and determined on the hall menu screen, the setting change/confirmation history screen is displayed again. In this way, even if the setting change/confirmation history screen is viewed multiple times during steps S3302 to S3315, the viewing record is one.

The reason why it is preferable to limit the browsing record performed between steps S3302 to S3315 to one time is as follows. That is, for example, a person who changes settings, checks settings, or browses for fraudulent purposes may intentionally increase the number of browsing records to increase the number of histories, thereby making it difficult to detect fraud. Therefore, even if such an action is performed, even if setting changes, setting confirmations, or viewings are performed multiple times between steps S3301 and S3312, these histories are recorded only once, and the power source is turned on. is turned off once and the history is not recorded unless it is turned on again, it is possible to prevent these histories from increasing unnecessarily.

Further, in the pachinko gaming machine according to the second embodiment, the hall menu redisplay process (step S3310) is executed after the setting change process is completed, and the hall menu redisplay process is not executed after the setting confirmation process is completed. The game screen return processing (step S3315) is executed. If the specification is such that the menu screen is displayed, the hole menu screen can be displayed again after returning to the game screen. In this case, each time the "setting change/confirmation history" is selected and determined on the re-displayed hall menu screen or the ON/OFF operation of the setting key 328 is repeatedly executed, the viewing is performed. Even if there is, it is preferable to make the browsing record once.

In addition to the main button 662 and the select button 664, the pachinko machine has operating means such as a power switch 35, a firing handle 32, a volume switch 108, a setting switch 332, a setting key 328, a backup clear switch 330, and the like. there is Of these, the main button 662, the select button 664 and the firing handle 32 are operation units that can be operated by the player. is an operation unit that cannot be operated by a player and can be operated only by a specific person such as a gaming machine administrator.

In addition, in the second embodiment, the display of the setting change/confirmation history screen (for example, see FIG. 218) that allows the setting value to be confirmed is stored as the browsing history, but the setting value is not displayed. The display of the setting change/confirmation history screen (for example, see FIG. 223 described later) may be stored as a viewing history.

Next, referring to FIGS. 216, 217 and 218 to 222, setting change/confirmation history processing executed by sub CPU 201, and liquid crystal display device 16 when the setting change/confirmation history processing is executed. The description will be made while comparing it with the setting change/confirmation history screen displayed in the display area.

216 is a flowchart showing an example of setting change/confirmation history processing executed by the sub CPU 201. FIG. FIG. 217 is an example of the setting change/confirmation history process executed by the sub CPU 201 and is a flowchart continued from FIG. FIG. 218 is a diagram showing an example of the initial screen of the setting change/confirmation history screen displayed in the display area of the liquid crystal display device 16 (screen when shifting to the setting change/confirmation history screen). FIG. 219 is a diagram showing an example when "Page" is selected on the setting change/confirmation history screen. FIG. 220 is a diagram showing an example of a page update screen on which page update can be performed on the setting change/confirmation history screen. FIG. 221 is a diagram showing an example when "clear" is selected on the setting change/confirmation history screen. FIG. 222 is a diagram showing an example of a data clear screen in which each history data is cleared in the setting change/confirmation history screen.

When "setting change/confirmation history" is selected in the hole menu processing (see FIG. 214) (YES in step S33006 of FIG. 214), the sub CPU 201 performs setting change/confirmation history screen display processing (step S33051). At this time, the initial screen (see FIG. 218) of the setting change/confirmation history screen is displayed in the display area of the liquid crystal display device 16 . "Return" is highlighted on the initial screen of the setting change/confirmation history screen.

The setting change/confirmation history screen displayed in the display area of the liquid crystal display device 16 (see, for example, FIG. 218) includes a setting change/confirmation history display area 31640, an operation explanation area 31650, a first selection area 31660a, and a second selection region 31660b. FIG. 218 shows an example in which "Page" is displayed in the first selection area 31660a and "Clear" and "Back" are displayed in the second selection area 31660b.

For example, as shown in FIG. 218, in setting change/confirmation history display area 31640, time information, operation type information, and setting value information are displayed in a list in association with each other. The date and time column displays the date and time when the settings were changed, checked, and browsed. The operation type column displays the operation type (setting change, setting confirmation, viewing). In the setting value column, the setting value after the change is displayed when the setting is changed, and the setting value at that time is displayed when the setting is confirmed. In the operation type column, "change" is simply displayed for setting change, and "confirmation" is simply displayed for setting confirmation.

Thus, in the pachinko gaming machine according to the second embodiment, time information and operation type information (setting change, setting confirmation, viewing) are displayed in association with each other on the initial screen of the setting change/confirmation history screen. be. Further, when the operation type is setting change, the setting value after setting is displayed, and when the operation type is setting confirmation, the setting value at that time is displayed in association with the date and time and the operation type.

After executing the setting change/confirmation history screen display process (step S33051), the sub CPU 201 executes the timekeeping process (step S33052). This timing processing is processing for starting the timing of the timer built in the sub CPU 201 . Here, the timing of the timer is started after the setting change/confirmation history screen display processing (step S33051) is executed (the initial screen of the setting change/confirmation history screen (FIG. 218) is displayed in the display area of the liquid crystal display device 16. 209) is displayed), and when no processing is performed within a predetermined time (eg, 30 seconds), the hall menu screen (eg, see FIG. 209) is displayed.

The sub CPU 201 determines in step S33053 whether or not the select button 664 has been operated. If the select button 664 is not operated (NO in step S33053), the process moves to step S33071 to be described later, and it is determined whether or not "return" is selected on the initial screen (see FIG. 218) of the setting change/confirmation history screen. On the initial screen of the setting change/confirmation history screen, "Back" is highlighted (selected) as described above, so if the main button 662 is pressed without operating the select button 664, "Back" is determined. be done.

When sub CPU 201 determines that select button 664 has been operated (YES in step S33053), it highlights the selected item (step S33054). For example, when the upper select button 664a is operated on the initial screen (see FIG. 218) of the setting change/confirmation history screen in which "Back" is highlighted, the highlight display moves from "Back" to "Page" (see FIG. 218). See Figure 219).

After highlighting the selected item (step S33054), the sub CPU 201 executes timekeeping processing (step S33055). This timing processing is processing for clearing the timing of the timer started in step S33052 and restarting the timing of the timer incorporated in the sub CPU 201 . The reason why the timer is cleared and restarted is that no processing is performed within a predetermined time (for example, 30 seconds) after the item selected on the setting change/confirmation history screen is highlighted (step S33054). This is so that the hole menu screen (see, for example, FIG. 209) is displayed when it is not performed.

The sub CPU 201 determines in step S33056 whether or not "Page" is selected. When the operator presses the main button 662 with "Page" selected (highlighted) on the setting change/confirmation history screen displayed in the display area of the liquid crystal display device 16, the sub CPU 201 displays " Page” is determined.

When the sub CPU 201 determines that "Page" is determined (YES in step S33056), the sub CPU 201 executes page update screen display processing (step S33057). When the page update screen display process is executed, the page update screen (see FIG. 220) in the setting change/confirmation history screen is displayed in the display area of the liquid crystal display device 16 . On the page update screen of the setting change/confirmation history screen, images imitating left and right select buttons 664c and 664d and "next page" and "previous page" are displayed to the left and right of the "Page" notation. As a result, the operator understands that the setting change/confirmation history screen is updated to the previous page by operating the left select button 664c, and that the setting change/confirmation history screen is updated to the next page by operating the lower select button 664d. can do. When the left select button 664c is operated while the first page of the setting change/confirmation history screen is displayed, the last page is displayed, and when the right select button 664d is operated while the last page is displayed, the first page is displayed. Convenience can be enhanced by cyclically displaying the eyes.

On the other hand, if "Page" is not determined (NO in step S33056), the sub CPU 201 proceeds to step S33065, which will be described later, and determines whether or not "clear" is determined on the setting change/confirmation history screen.

After executing the page update screen display process (step S3057), the sub CPU 201 executes timekeeping process (step S33058). This timing processing is processing for clearing the timing of the timer started in step S33055 and restarting the timing of the timer incorporated in the sub CPU 201 . The time measurement of the timer is cleared and time measurement is restarted after the page update screen display process (step S33057) is executed (after the page update screen (see FIG. 220) in the setting change/confirmation history screen is displayed. ), and when no processing is performed within a predetermined time (eg, 30 seconds), the hall menu screen (see, eg, FIG. 209) is displayed.

The sub CPU 201 determines in step S33059 whether or not a page update operation has been performed. If a page update operation has not been performed (NO in step S33059), the process proceeds to step S33062, which will be described later.

When sub CPU 201 determines that a page update operation has been performed (YES in step S33059), it executes page update processing (step S33060). When the left and right select buttons 664c and 664d are operated on the page update screen (see FIG. 220) in the setting change/confirmation history screen displayed in the display area of the liquid crystal display device 16, the sub CPU 201 determines that page update processing has been performed. Then, the setting change/confirmation history screen displayed in the display area of the liquid crystal display device 16 is updated to the setting change/confirmation history screen of the next page or the previous page and displayed. The setting change/confirmation history screen when updated to the setting change/confirmation history screen of the next page or the previous page is omitted from the illustration.

In the second embodiment, the sub CPU 201 operates the left and right select buttons 664c and 664d on the page update screen (see FIG. 220) in the setting change/confirmation history screen displayed in the display area of the liquid crystal display device 16. and page update processing are performed, but the operation for performing page update processing is not limited to this. For example, by operating the upper and lower select buttons 664a and 664b, any one of "No. 1" to "No. 5" in the setting change/confirmation history screen can be selected, and the lower select button 664b is operated, In addition, page update processing may be performed when it is determined that the line is the last line. The same applies to page update processing in a modified example of setting change/confirmation history processing, which will be described later.

After executing the page update process (step S3060), the sub CPU 201 executes timekeeping process (step S33061). This timing processing is processing for clearing the timing of the timer started in step S33058 and restarting the timing of the timer incorporated in the sub CPU 201 . The time measurement of the timer is cleared and time measurement is restarted after the page update process (step S33060) is executed (after the setting change/confirmation history screen of the next page or the previous page is displayed) and after a predetermined time ( This is so that the hall menu screen (see, for example, FIG. 209) is displayed when no processing is performed within, for example, 30 seconds.

After executing the timing process in step S33061, the sub CPU 201 returns to step S33059 and determines whether or not a page update operation has been performed.

The sub CPU 201 determines in step S33062 whether or not the select button 664 has been operated. If the select button 664 is not operated (NO in step S33062), the process proceeds to step S33072, which will be described later. In this case, the process moves to step S33072 instead of step S33071 because "return" is highlighted (selected) on the page update screen of the setting change/confirmation history screen like the initial screen of the setting change/confirmation history screen. because it does not exist.

When sub CPU 201 determines that select button 664 has been operated (YES in step S33062), it highlights the selected item (step S33063). For example, when the lower select button 664b is operated on the setting change/confirmation history screen (see FIG. 220), the highlight display moves from "Page" to "Clear" (see FIG. 221).

After highlighting the selected item (step S33063), the sub CPU 201 executes timekeeping processing (step S33064). This timing processing is processing for clearing the timing of the timer started in step S33061 and restarting the timing of the timer incorporated in the sub CPU 201 . The reason why the timer is cleared and restarted is that no processing is performed within a predetermined time (for example, 30 seconds) after the selected item is highlighted on the setting change/confirmation history screen. This is so that the hall menu screen (see, for example, FIG. 209) is sometimes displayed.

After executing the timing process in step S33064, the sub CPU 201 proceeds to step S33065 and determines whether or not "clear" is determined. When the operator presses the main button 662 with "clear" selected (highlighted) on the setting change/confirmation history screen displayed in the display area of the liquid crystal display device 16, the sub CPU 201 displays " It is determined that "clear" is determined.

When sub CPU 201 determines that "clear" is determined (YES in step S33065), sub CPU 201 executes setting change/confirmation history data clear processing (step S33066). This setting change/confirmation history data clearing process is a process for erasing all the data of the setting change history, the setting confirmation history, and the browsing history stored in the work RAM 203 . When the setting change/confirmation history data clearing process is executed, all history data displayed in the setting change/confirmation history display area 31640 in the display area of the liquid crystal display device 16 are erased (see FIG. 222). When the setting change/confirmation history data clear process in step S33065 is executed, the item "return" is highlighted.

In the setting change/confirmation history data clearing process (step S33066), all the data of the setting change history, setting confirmation history, and viewing history stored in the work RAM 203 are erased. is not limited to erasing the data, and only a part of the data may be erased. As a form of erasing a part of data, for example, No. 221 in FIG. 1 to No. 5, erasing time (date and time) information, operation type information, and setting value information corresponding to a specific number out of 5; erasing setting change/confirmation history screen page by page; , setting confirmation, viewing), erasing date and time (time) information, operation type information, and setting value information corresponding to a specific operation type, and erasing time (date and time) information, operation type information, and setting value information A mode of erasing only specific information (for example, setting value information) can be considered.

Also, the setting change/confirmation history data clearing process (step S33066) is preferably executed only by those who satisfy a specific condition. For example, when "clear" is selected (highlighted) on the setting change/confirmation history screen, the input of a password, for example, may be the condition for enabling pressing of the main button 662. FIG. In this case, if the operator presses the main button 662 without entering a password, a screen requesting a password is displayed, and the setting change/confirmation history data clear process is executed only when the correct password is entered. can be made Thus, it is possible to prevent erroneous clearing of setting change history, setting confirmation history, and viewing history data. Also, for example, a person who performs setting change processing or browsing for the purpose of fraud may erase the data of setting change history, setting confirmation history, and viewing history in order to hide his/her own fraud. Therefore, by enabling only specific persons, such as those who know the password, to execute the setting change/confirmation history data clear process, it is possible to suppress setting change processing and viewing for unauthorized purposes. It becomes possible.

After executing the setting change/confirmation history data clearing process (step S33066), the sub CPU 201 executes a timing process (step S33067). This timing processing is processing for clearing the timing of the timer started in step S33064 and restarting the timing of the timer incorporated in the sub CPU 201 . The timing is cleared and restarted after the setting change/confirmation history data clear processing (step S33066) is executed (each history data displayed in the setting change/confirmation history display area 31640 is cleared). This is because the hole menu screen (see, for example, FIG. 209) is displayed when no processing is performed within a predetermined time (for example, 30 seconds) after all data has been erased.

Sub CPU 201 determines in step S33068 whether or not select button 664 has been operated. If select button 664 is not operated (NO in step S33068), the process proceeds to step S33072, which will be described later. In this case, the reason why the process proceeds to step S33071 instead of step S33072 is that "return" is highlighted (selected) on the data clear screen in which each history data is cleared unless the select button 664 is operated. . Therefore, if the specification is such that "return" is not highlighted on the data clear screen on which each history data is cleared, the process proceeds to step S33072.

When sub CPU 201 determines that select button 664 has been operated (YES in step S33068), it highlights the selected item (step S33069).

After highlighting the selected item (step S33069), the sub CPU 201 executes timekeeping processing (step S33070). This timing processing is processing for clearing the timing of the timer started in step S33067 and restarting the timing of the timer incorporated in the sub CPU 201 . The reason why the timer is cleared and restarted is that no processing is performed within a predetermined time (for example, 30 seconds) after the item selected on the setting change/confirmation history screen is highlighted (step S33069). This is so that the hole menu screen (see, for example, FIG. 209) is displayed when it is not performed.

The sub CPU 201 determines in step S33071 whether or not "return" is determined. When the operator presses the main button 662 with "Return" selected (highlighted) on the setting change/confirmation history screen displayed in the display area of the liquid crystal display device 16, the sub CPU 201 displays " It is determined that "return" is determined.

When sub CPU 201 determines that "return" is determined (YES in step S33071), sub CPU 201 executes hall menu screen display processing (step S33073), and ends setting change/confirmation history processing. This hall menu screen display process is a process of displaying the initial screen of the hall menu screen (see FIG. 209) in the display area of the liquid crystal display device 16 instead of the setting change/confirmation history screen.

If "return" is not determined in step S33071 (NO in step S33071), the sub CPU 201 determines whether or not a predetermined time has passed (step S33072).

When the sub CPU 201 determines that the predetermined time has elapsed in step S33072 (YES in step S33072), the process proceeds to step S33073, ends the setting change/confirmation history screen displayed in the display area of the liquid crystal display device 16, and displays the hall menu. The initial screen (see FIG. 209) of the screen is displayed. That is, even if the operator does not select and decide the item "Return" intentionally, if the non-operation period continues for a predetermined period, the display of the setting change/confirmation history screen ends and the initial screen of the hall menu screen is displayed. The Rukoto.

On the other hand, if the predetermined time has not elapsed in step S33072 (NO in step S33072), the sub CPU 201 returns to step S33053 and continues the processes after step S33053.

In this manner, on the setting change/confirmation history screen displayed on the liquid crystal display device 16 during setting change or setting confirmation, the setting change/confirmation history screen ends when a predetermined time elapses without any operation being performed. and the hall menu screen is displayed. However, on the hole menu screen, the sub CPU 201 controls so that the display of the hole menu screen is continued even if there is no operation, as long as the setting is being changed or the setting is being checked. In this case, the hole menu screen does not display an item for ending the hole menu.

When it is determined in step S33072 that the predetermined time has passed (YES in step S33072), the processing to proceed to step S33073 is the whole menu processing (that is, setting changing or During setting confirmation), a different process is executed (not shown) in the whole menu process (that is, after setting change or setting confirmation is completed) in step S3311 (see FIGS. 207 and 213). Specifically, when a predetermined time has passed without any operation in setting change/confirmation history processing (step S33007) in the whole menu processing of step S3311 (a predetermined time has passed in step S33072 of the whole menu processing of step S3311 (step S33072). 207 and 213), the sub CPU 201 moves to step S3315 (see FIGS. 207 and 213), terminates the display of the setting change/confirmation history screen, and performs game screen return display processing (step S3315) and hall Menu display prohibition processing (step S3316) is executed. That is, on the setting change/confirmation history screen during setting change or setting confirmation, if no operation continues for a predetermined period of time, the screen simply returns to the hall menu screen (the setting change/confirmation history screen can be viewed again). However, on the setting change/confirmation history screen displayed via the hall menu screen redisplayed after the setting change process is completed, the setting change/confirmation history screen will be viewed again if no operation continues for a predetermined period of time. be unable to do so.

Further, when it is determined in step S33072 that the predetermined time has not elapsed (NO in step S33072), the process of returning to step S33053 is also performed in the whole menu process (that is, setting During change or confirmation of setting), a different process is executed (not shown) in the whole menu process of step S3311 (see FIGS. 207 and 213) (that is, after change of setting or confirmation of setting is completed). Specifically, even if the non-operation period has not reached the predetermined period (NO in step S33072) in the setting change/confirmation history process (step S33007) in the hole menu process of step S3311, for example, an effect control object is generated. When a predetermined termination condition such as when it is determined that a command has been received is satisfied, game screen return processing (step S3315) and hall menu display prohibition processing (step S3316) are executed. That is, on the setting change/confirmation history screen during setting change or setting confirmation, if no operation continues for a predetermined period of time, the screen simply returns to the hall menu screen (the setting change/confirmation history screen can be viewed again). However, on the setting change/confirmation history screen displayed via the hall menu screen redisplayed after the setting change process is completed, the setting change/confirmation history will The screen cannot be viewed. In other words, on the setting change/confirmation history screen displayed via the hall menu screen redisplayed after the setting change process is completed, the non-operation period does not continue over the predetermined period, and the above predetermined end condition is satisfied. is not established, the processing of steps S33053 to S33072 is repeatedly executed.

In this way, when the setting change process is executed, even if the setting change process is completed, the operator is allowed to browse the confidential information such as the history of setting changes and setting confirmations, and the operator can view the confidential information for a predetermined time ( For example, if there is no operation for 30 seconds), the display of the setting change/confirmation history screen ends and the game screen return processing (step S3315) and hall menu prohibition processing (step S3316) are executed. (For example, a hall attendant or a player who is not the manager of the gaming machine) cannot easily view confidential information such as setting change history, setting confirmation history, and viewing history, so that security can be ensured.

Further, in the pachinko gaming machine according to the second embodiment, for example, on the setting change/confirmation history screen shown in FIG. A list screen is displayed showing all of the value information. That is, the first information (for example, No. 3 in FIG. 218) displaying the time information and setting value information when the setting is changed and the time information and setting value information when the setting is confirmed are displayed. 218), and third information (eg, No. 4 in FIG. 218) displaying time information and set value information when browsed. 2, No. 5) are displayed in a list. However, an operator (for example, a gaming machine administrator) may want to narrow down the target to specific operation type information and display it. Therefore, a screen displaying a list of time information, operation type information, and setting value information (see, for example, FIG. 218), and the first information, the second information, and the third information. Of these, it is preferable to configure so that the screen narrowed down to specific information can be selectively displayed in the display area of the liquid crystal display device 16 according to the intention of the operator. This makes it possible to improve convenience for the operator. In particular, the above-mentioned first information is highly convenient in terms of business because it is possible not only to detect fraud, but also to know information such as how many days the business has been operated with the set value. Since it is sufficient that the above narrowing screen can be displayed by narrowing down the target to specific operation type information, information unrelated to the operation type (for example, current time information, etc.) may be displayed.

[Another example of display screen displayed in setting change/confirmation history process]
Next, another example of the display screen displayed in the display area of the liquid crystal display device 16 in the setting change/confirmation history process will be described with reference to FIGS. 223 to 227. FIG. However, since the setting change/confirmation history processing executed by the sub CPU 201 is the same as that shown in FIGS. A description of the setting change/confirmation history process executed by the CPU 201 is omitted.

FIG. 223 is another example of the setting change/confirmation history screen displayed in the display area of the liquid crystal display device 16, showing an example of the initial screen. FIG. 224 is another example of the setting change/confirmation history screen displayed in the display area of the liquid crystal display device 16, showing an example when "setting display" is selected. FIG. 225 is another example of the setting change/confirmation history screen displayed in the display area of the liquid crystal display device 16, showing an example when setting values are newly displayed. FIG. 226 is another example of the setting change/confirmation history screen displayed in the display area of the liquid crystal display device 16, showing an example when "Page" is selected. FIG. 227 is another example of the setting change/confirmation history screen displayed in the display area of the liquid crystal display device 16, showing an example of a page update screen on which page updating can be performed.

For example, as shown in FIG. 223, the setting change/confirmation history screen has a setting change/confirmation history display area 31670, an operation explanation area 31680, a first selection area 31690a, and a second selection area 31690b.

In the initial screen of the setting change/confirmation history screen shown in FIG. 223, time information and operation type information are displayed in setting change/confirmation history display area 31670, but setting value information is not displayed. That is, the setting change/confirmation history screen shown in FIG. 223 is a screen that displays only the time information and the operation type information among the time information, the operation type information, and the set value information. In addition, the date and time column where the time information is displayed displays the date and time when the setting was changed, setting confirmation, and viewing was performed, and the operation type column where the operation type information is displayed shows the operation type (setting change, Check settings, browse) is displayed.

In the initial screen of the setting change/confirmation history screen, the second selection area 31690b also displays "setting display" in addition to "clear" and "return". Note that "Return" is selected (highlighted) on the initial screen of the setting change/confirmation history. Also in this other example, the item to be highlighted can be selected by operating the select button 664 .

When the select button 664 is operated to select "setting display", the "setting display" is highlighted (see FIG. 224). Then, when the sub CPU 201 detects that the main button 662 has been pressed while "setting display" is selected (highlighted), the time information and the operation type information are displayed, but the setting value information is displayed. Instead of the initial screen of the setting change/confirmation history screen that is not displayed, a setting change/confirmation history screen (list screen) displaying a list of time information, operation type information, and setting value information is displayed (see FIG. 225). ). In this way, in this other example, even though the setting value is not displayed on the initial screen of the setting change/confirmation history screen, by selecting and confirming the "setting display", it is possible to associate the date and time and the operation type. The setting values are newly displayed in a list. Note that when a setting change/confirmation history screen displaying time information, operation type information, and setting value information is displayed instead of the initial screen of the setting change/confirmation history screen, as shown in FIG. Back” is highlighted.

On the setting change/confirmation history screen (see FIG. 225) on which time information, operation type information, and setting value information are displayed, when selecting "Page" by operating the select button 664, "Page" is highlighted. (see Figure 226). When the sub CPU 201 detects that the main button 662 has been pressed while "Page" is selected (highlighted), the sub CPU 201 executes page update processing. When this page update process is executed, the page update screen (see FIG. 227) in the setting change/confirmation history screen is displayed in the display area of the liquid crystal display device 16 . This page update screen can be updated to the next page or the previous page by operating the left and right select buttons 664c and 664d.

Also, when "Page" is selected and the main button 662 is pressed on the initial screen (see FIG. 223) of the setting change/confirmation history screen where the time information and operation type information are displayed but the setting value information is not displayed, Also, page update processing is executed by the sub CPU 201 . However, when this page update process is executed, although the time information and operation type information are displayed in the display area of the liquid crystal display device 16, the page update screen in the setting change/confirmation history screen in which the setting value information is not displayed. is displayed. On this page update screen, by operating the left and right select buttons 664c and 664d, it is possible to update to the next page or the previous page of the setting change/confirmation history screen in which setting values are not displayed. However, on the setting change/confirmation history screen on which the time information and the operation type information are displayed but the setting value information is not displayed, the page update process may not be executed.

In another example, only the time information and the operation type information among the time information, the operation type information, and the set value information are displayed on the screen, for example, as shown in FIG. 223. The screen in FIG. 223 can display either one or two of time information, operation type information, and setting value information. Any screen that displays only information may be used.

In addition, the setting change/confirmation history screen, which displays a list of time information, operation type information, and setting value information, can be viewed only by those who meet specific conditions (for example, those who have entered the correct password). It is possible to do so, which will be discussed later.

FIG. 228 shows a setting change/confirmation history screen on which setting values can be checked in the hole menu screen displayed in the display area of the liquid crystal display device 16 of the pachinko gaming machine according to one embodiment of the present invention. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the operation procedure to. As shown in FIG. 228, in the pachinko gaming machine according to the second embodiment, as the first procedure for viewing the setting change/confirmation history information, when the setting change process or the setting confirmation process is executed, the hall menu display the screen. As described above, the setting change process can be executed by turning on the setting key 328, pressing the backup clear switch 330, and turning on the power switch 35 while the power is off. Also, the setting confirmation process can be executed by turning ON the setting key 328 while the power is off. The setting key 328 can turn on the setting key switch signal by turning it in one direction, and turns off the setting key switch signal by turning it in the opposite direction (returning to its original position). It is configured so that

In addition, in the pachinko gaming machine according to the second embodiment, the ON operation of the setting key 328 is an operation that is performed regardless of whether the setting change process or the setting confirmation process is executed. The operation may be performed when executing at least one of the setting change process and the setting confirmation process. The same applies to any modified examples described later.

As a second procedure, the pachinko game machine selects and determines "setting change/confirmation history" in the hall menu screen (see, for example, FIG. 210), thereby displaying the "setting change/confirmation history". is highlighted, and only the date and time data and the operation type (the corresponding operation type among setting change, confirmation, and viewing) are displayed. (See FIG. 210) is displayed (setting values are not displayed).

As a third procedure, the pachinko gaming machine presses the main button 662 while "setting change/confirmation history" is highlighted on the hall menu screen (see FIG. 210) displayed in the second procedure. By doing so, the setting change/confirmation history screen (see FIG. 218) is displayed in the display area of the liquid crystal display device 16 . On this setting change/confirmation history screen, date and time data, operation types (corresponding operation types among setting change, confirmation, and viewing), and setting values are associated with each other.

Therefore, a person who can use and operate the setting key 328 (a person who has authority) can change the settings on the setting change/confirmation history screen (see FIG. 218) displayed through the first to third procedures. By viewing the confirmation history, it is possible to confirm at a glance each history of setting change of the setting value that defines the payout rate, confirmation of the setting change, viewing of the setting change and confirmation, and the corresponding setting value. . It should be noted that the authorized person is a person who is given the authority to change the setting, confirm the setting change, etc., and means the manager of the hall or the like. Hereinafter, the "authorized person" may also be referred to as an "administrative authority."

As described above, the pachinko gaming machine constituting the gaming machine according to the present invention includes the liquid crystal display device 16 that displays various images, the operation button group 66 such as the main button 662 and the select button 664, and controls related to the game. and a sub CPU 201 that is a display control unit that controls the display of the liquid crystal display device 16. The control unit changes or confirms setting values (for example, settings 1 to 6). The display control unit includes a setting switch 332 which is setting means for enabling and data transmission means for transmitting various data to the sub CPU 201. The display control unit includes reception means for receiving various data from the data transmission means, The main CPU 101 is provided with a work RAM 203 that functions as a backup memory capable of storing and holding written information even if the data is written, and an RTC 209 that measures the date and time. to the sub CPU 201, and if the data received by the data receiving means is for setting change or setting confirmation, the sub CPU 201 stores the setting change or setting confirmation, the setting value, and the date and time data from the RTC 209 in the work RAM 203. A setting display function is provided for storing the setting change or setting confirmation and date and time data stored in the main RAM 203 as confirmation history information, and displaying the setting change or setting confirmation and date and time data on the liquid crystal display device 16. It is configured to display the set values stored in the work RAM 203 when the main button 662 is operated in the state.

With this configuration, setting changes or setting confirmations, setting values, and date/time data from the RTC 209 are stored in the work RAM 203 as setting change/confirmation history information. When 662 is operated, the set values stored in the work RAM 203 can be displayed. Therefore, when "setting change/confirmation history" in the hall menu is selected, each history of setting values can be checked, and it is possible to determine whether or not unauthorized setting changes or setting confirmations have been made. become.

Further, the pachinko machine according to the second embodiment acquires the date and time data when the setting value is received from the RTC 209, and stores the setting value, the date and time data, and the information representing the setting change in association with each other. good.

With this configuration, the changed setting value, the changed date and time data, and the information representing the setting change are stored in association with each other, so that an authorized person can specify the date and time when the setting value was changed. This makes it possible to identify fraudulent actions such as changing set values.

In addition, the pachinko machine according to the second embodiment acquires the date and time when the information indicating that the setting value has been confirmed is received from the RTC 209, and stores the date and time data and the information indicating the setting confirmation in association with each other. good too.

With this configuration, the date and time data when the setting value is confirmed and the information indicating the setting confirmation are stored in association with each other, so that an authorized person can specify the date and time when the setting value is confirmed, and the setting can be performed. It becomes possible to identify the fraud when the fraud such as checking the value is performed.

Further, in the pachinko machine according to the second embodiment, when the setting change or setting confirmation, the set value, and the date and time data among the setting change/confirmation history information of the work RAM 203 are displayed, the displayed date and time Data may be stored in the work RAM 203 as a viewing history, and the viewing history may be displayed on the liquid crystal display device 16 .

With this configuration, when the setting change or setting confirmation, the setting value, and the date/time data among the setting change/confirmation history information are displayed, the displayed date/time data is stored in the work RAM 203 as the browsing history, and the browsing history is displayed. History can be displayed. Therefore, in the state where "setting change/confirmation history" in the hall menu where setting values are not displayed is selected, in addition to setting change or setting confirmation, setting value and date/time data display in setting change/confirmation history information, viewing Since the history can be displayed, it is possible to determine whether or not the viewing history of setting change or setting confirmation has been viewed for illegal purposes such as cheating.

With the above configuration, in this embodiment, it is possible to save and display setting change/confirmation history information in which setting changes or setting confirmations, setting values, and date/time data are associated with each other. To provide a pachinko game machine capable of confirming and determining whether or not unauthorized setting change or setting confirmation has been performed.

Further, the pachinko gaming machine constituting the gaming machine according to the present invention includes the liquid crystal display device 16 that displays various images, operation units such as the main button 662 and the select button 664, and a control unit that performs control related to games. A main CPU 101 and a sub CPU 201 that is a display control unit that controls the display of the liquid crystal display device 11, and the control unit is a setting means that enables change or confirmation of setting values (for example, settings 1 to 6) and data transmission means for transmitting various data to the sub CPU 201. The display control unit includes reception means for receiving various data from the data transmission means and writing even in a non-energized state. The main CPU 101 transmits setting changes or setting confirmations and setting values to the sub CPU 201 by data transmission means, and the sub CPU 201 If the data received by the data receiving means is for setting change or setting confirmation, the work RAM 203 stores the setting change or setting confirmation, the setting value, and the date and time data from the RTC 209 as setting change/confirmation history information. has a setting display function for displaying the setting change/confirmation history information stored in the work RAM 203 on the liquid crystal display device 16, and when the setting change/confirmation history information stored in the work RAM 203 is displayed on the liquid crystal display device 16, date and time data is stored in the work RAM 203 as a viewing history, and the viewing history is displayed on the liquid crystal display device 16 .

With this configuration, when the setting change/confirmation history information of the work RAM 203 is displayed, the displayed date and time data is stored in the work RAM 203 as the viewing history, and the viewing history is displayed in the display area of the liquid crystal display device 16. can be done. Therefore, not only can it be determined whether or not an unnatural operation has been performed, but it can also be determined whether or not it is an opportunity to investigate fraudulent activity.

In addition, the pachinko machine according to the second embodiment acquires the date and time data when the setting change/confirmation history information was displayed on the liquid crystal display device 16 from the RTC 209, and associates the date and time data with the information representing the viewing history. It may be configured to store the

With this configuration, the date and time data and the information representing the browsing history are stored in association with each other, so that the date and time when the information related to the setting value was browsed can be specified, and the illegality such as changing the setting value can be prevented. It becomes possible to identify the fraud if it has been done.

Further, in the pachinko machine according to the second embodiment, when the setting change or setting confirmation, the set value, and the date and time data among the setting change/confirmation history information of the work RAM 203 are displayed, the displayed date and time Data may be stored in the work RAM 203 as a viewing history, and the viewing history may be displayed on the liquid crystal display device 16 .

With this configuration, when the setting change or setting confirmation, the set value, and the date/time data among the setting change/confirmation history information are displayed, the displayed date/time data is stored in the work RAM 203 as the browsing history, and the liquid crystal display is displayed. The viewing history can be displayed on the display device 16 . Therefore, in the state where "setting change/confirmation history" in the hall menu where setting values are not displayed is selected, in addition to setting change or setting confirmation, setting value and date/time data display in setting change/confirmation history information, viewing Since the history can be displayed, it is possible to determine whether or not the viewing history of setting change or setting confirmation has been viewed for illegal purposes such as cheating.

With the above-described configuration, in the present embodiment, it is possible to store and display browsing history information in which setting change confirmation/browsing history information is associated with date and time data. To provide a pachinko game machine capable of judging whether or not a fraudulent act has been committed, as well as judging whether or not it is an opportunity to investigate a fraudulent act.

[Maintenance processing]
Next, referring to FIGS. 229 to 231, maintenance processing executed by sub CPU 201 (step S33019) and a maintenance screen displayed in the display area of liquid crystal display device 16 when the maintenance processing is executed are shown. I will explain with a comparison. 229 is a flowchart showing an example of maintenance processing executed by the sub CPU 201. FIG. FIG. 230 is a diagram showing an example when the maintenance screen is displayed in the display area of the liquid crystal display device 16. As shown in FIG. FIG. 231 is an example of a maintenance screen displayed in the display area of the liquid crystal display device 16. FIG.

In the maintenance process, the sub CPU 201 displays a maintenance screen (see FIGS. 230 and 231) in the display area of the liquid crystal display device 16. FIG. In this maintenance process, devices connected to the sub CPU 201 (for example, various sensors, various activated accessories, etc.), such as the effect button switch 621 and the upper accessory 1000, are targeted for maintenance processing. An operator can be made to confirm whether these devices operate normally.

As shown in FIGS. 230 and 231, the sub CPU 201 displays an operating state display table of various devices (various sensors, various accessories, etc.) approximately in the center of the maintenance screen (see FIGS. 230 and 231). This operating state display table includes, for example, a name column displaying the names of 28 various devices, and a number column displaying serial numbers (1 to 28) given to the various devices displayed in the name column. and an operation state column indicating the operation state of each device. "OFF" display in the operation state column indicates that there is no input from various devices. When there is an input from each device, the display of the operation status column is changed from "OFF" display to "ON" display. For example, when the effect button 1 is operated while the maintenance screen is being displayed, the sub CPU 201 changes the display of the operation state column of the effect button 1 from "OFF" display to "ON" display. Note that the "ON" display is displayed in red. The above "input from each device" is based on detection of an input port or the like by the sub CPU 201 . In addition, each production accessory has at least a sensor that detects that it is in the normal position (standby position), and when the sensor that detects the normal position is ON, the display is turned off, and the sensor that detects the normal position is turned off. If it is OFF, that is, if the performance accessory moves, the display is turned ON.

Further, the sub CPU 201 displays an operation method for the maintenance screen below the maintenance screen. Specifically, when the main button 662, the upper select button 664a, and the lower select button 664b are pressed simultaneously, the initial screen (see FIG. 209) of the hall menu screen is displayed (redisplayed). Further below, images corresponding to the main button 662 and select button 664 are displayed. In FIG. 231, the images corresponding to all select buttons 664a to 624d are displayed in white to indicate that they are valid.

In the maintenance process (see FIG. 229), the sub CPU 201 first acquires sub device input information (step S33081). The sub-device input information is detection results of the operation states of various devices assigned serial numbers 21 to 28 in the operation state display table shown in FIG. The sub-device input information includes sub-input state information indicating whether each device is in the ON state with an input or in the OFF state with no input.

Next, the sub CPU 201 performs sub-input state information editing processing for reading sub-input state information in the acquired sub-device input information (step S33082).

Next, the sub CPU 201 performs maintenance screen display processing for displaying the maintenance screen (see FIGS. 230 and 231) in the display area of the liquid crystal display device 16 based on the sub-input state information read in step S33082 (step S33083). ). In this process, the maintenance screen is displayed and updated (eg, changed from "OFF" display to "ON" display).

Next, the sub CPU 201 determines whether or not the main button 662, the upper select button 664a and the lower select button 664b have been operated simultaneously (step S33084). If it is determined that the main button 662, the upper select button 664a, and the lower select button 664b have been operated simultaneously (YES in step S33084), the sub CPU 201 terminates the maintenance processing and hall menu processing (see FIG. 214), and continues processing. The process returns to step S3304 of the hole menu task (see FIG. 207).

On the other hand, when determining that the main button 662, the upper select button 664a and the lower select button 664b are not operated at the same time (NO in step S33084), the sub CPU 201 returns the process to step S33081.

By the way, some recent pachinko machines and pachislot machines have multiple functions in one device. For example, in the pachinko game machine according to the second embodiment, the effect button 62 has a function as an operation button and a function as a effect button. The function of the production button corresponds to, for example, a function of protruding and moving upward based on the special symbol lottery result. Then, when the “effect button 1” of the serial number 21 shown in FIG. Further, when the "effect button 2" of the serial number 22 shown in FIG. 231 is selected and determined, the sub CPU 201 causes the effect button 62 to protrude upward and perform maintenance on the effect function. If the result of the maintenance operation is a normal determination, the sub CPU 201 executes maintenance screen display processing (step S33083), and executes maintenance screen display processing (changes display from "OFF" to "ON"). Note that the effect button 62 projecting upward when the "main button 2" is selected is, for example, when the normal determination is made, the select button 664 is operated to select an item with another serial number shown in FIG. When the main button 662, the upper select button 664a, and the lower select button 664b are pressed at the same time to end the maintenance mode, the sub CPU 201 controls to return to the normal state (the state before projecting upward). be.

In recent years, some pachinko and pachislot machines are equipped with a plurality of performance accessories with different driving means. Maintenance may be performed, a plurality of production accessories with different drive means may be operated at different timings to perform maintenance, or maintenance may be performed by operating them individually. For example, in a gaming machine provided with performance accessories 1 to 3 with different driving means, for example, when the serial number 14 shown in FIG. The object 1 and the performance accessory 2 are operated at the same time to perform maintenance. Also, for example, when the serial number 17 "directing accessory 1→2" shown in FIG. perform maintenance; Furthermore, for example, when the serial number 11 "performance accessory 1" shown in FIG. In addition, for example, if production 1 and production 3 are activated simultaneously, they interfere with each other and become inoperable. (the operation of the main button 662 is not validated). In FIG. 231, the serial number 15, "Production Accessory 1+3", is shaded as an unselectable item. However, for example, if production 1 and production 3 are operated at the same time, they interfere with each other and become inoperable, but if they are operated at different timings (for example, first the production accessory 1 is operated, and then If it does not interfere with the case of operating the performance accessory 3), for example, it is preferable to select and determine the serial number 18 “Production accessory 1→3” shown in FIG. 231 . In this way, it is possible to operate multiple production accessories, to operate them at different timings, or to operate them independently. By disabling the operation, it becomes possible to improve maintainability while avoiding troubles.

Although not shown in FIG. 231, a game ball or medal payout sensor, a payout collateral ball sensor, a lending button (also referred to as a ball lending button), a CR card return button, a pachislot checkout button, and enclosed In a pachinko game machine that enables a game by circulating game balls, it is preferable to subject the game ball firing detection sensor and the like to maintenance. Further, in the pachinko gaming machine according to the second embodiment, the devices (various sensors, various accessories, etc.) connected to the sub CPU 201 have been described as being subject to maintenance processing, but the devices connected to the main CPU 101 are not limited to this. A device (for example, the power switch 35, the first starter switch 421, the second starter switch 441, etc.) may be subject to maintenance processing. Furthermore, in the CR machine, based on the operation of the lending button or the return button of the CR card, a simulated It is also possible to perform signal communication, detect the normal state of this signal communication, and execute display processing of the maintenance screen (change from "OFF" display to "ON" display) if the signal communication is normal.

[Mobile terminal linkage function]
Next, with reference to FIGS. 232 to 234, the portable terminal cooperation function of the pachinko game machine will be described as an example.

The mobile terminal linkage function of the pachinko gaming machine is a function of linking the pachinko gaming machine and the mobile terminal. By using the mobile terminal linkage function of the pachinko machine, detailed information on the game played by the player can be recorded, and by satisfying predetermined conditions, the function can be customized so as not to affect the game result of the pachinko machine. can do.

As the predetermined condition, for example, the result of the big hit determination of the special symbol is determined to be a small hit without the operation of the condition device, or the execution of a specific effect can be mentioned. In addition, customizing functions that do not affect the game results of the pachinko game machine include, for example, changing the music output during a jackpot game or a high-probability game state to a special tune, For example, changing the costume of the character displayed in the .

When using the portable terminal cooperation function, first, a guide menu screen (guide initial image) is displayed in the display area of the liquid crystal display device 16 . For example, when the main button 662 is pressed while the decorative symbols displayed in the display area of the liquid crystal display device 16 are not displayed in a variable manner, the initial guide image is displayed in the display region of the liquid crystal display device 16 .

FIG. 232 is a diagram showing an example when the guide initial image is displayed in the display area of the liquid crystal display device 16. As shown in FIG. The guide initial image includes the characters "Unimemo (registered trademark)", the characters "Choose your favorite menu", and the guide menu.

As shown in FIG. 232, the items of the guide menu include "start Unimemo", "jackpot design/number of rounds", "machine model site", and "return to game". In the guide initial image, "start Unimemo" is highlighted. A highlighted item among the items of these guide menus can be selected by operating the up/down select buttons 664a and 664b. Also, when the main button 662 is operated, the highlighted item is determined. In FIG. 232, each of a plurality of items is surrounded by a solid-line frame, and the highlighted "start Unimemo" is surrounded by a thicker solid-line frame.

When "start Unimemo" is selected from the guide menu, a Unimemo initial image is displayed in the display area of the liquid crystal display device 16. FIG. Further, when the "big hit pattern/number of rounds" is selected, the big win pattern/number of rounds is displayed in the display area of the liquid crystal display device 16 (not shown). When "model site" is selected, a model site registration code is displayed in the display area of the liquid crystal display device 16 (not shown).

When "return to game" is selected, the display of the initial guide image displayed in the display area of the liquid crystal display device 16 ends (the display of the guide menu also ends). In the display area of the liquid crystal display device 16, an effect image displayed when a game is played, the shooting handle 32 not being operated for a predetermined period of time, and any of the first start port 420 and the second start port 440 are displayed. Also, a demo video that is displayed when no prize is won for a predetermined period of time is displayed. Also, even if a predetermined period of time has passed without selecting any item of the guide menu, the display area of the liquid crystal display device 16 will display the effect image displayed when the game is played and the above-described demonstration image. Is displayed.

FIG. 233 is a diagram showing an example when the Unimemo initial image is displayed in the display area of the liquid crystal display device 16. As shown in FIG. The Unimemo initial image displays the characters "Unimemo", the characters "Let's customize your favorite character", and the Unimemo menu. Items of the Unimemo menu include "password input", "record", "record and end", "member registration", "return to game", and "return". In the Unimemo initial image, "password input" is highlighted. A highlighted item among the items of the plurality of Unimemo menus can be selected by operating select buttons 664a to 664d. Also, when the main button 662 is operated, the highlighted item is determined. In FIG. 233, each of the plurality of items is surrounded by a solid-line frame, and the highlighted “PASSWORD INPUT” is surrounded by a thicker solid-line frame.

Then, when "password input" is selected and determined, a password request screen is displayed in the display area of the liquid crystal display device 16 (see FIG. 234).

FIG. 234 is a diagram showing an example when a password request screen is displayed in the display area of the liquid crystal display device 16. FIG. The password display image includes characters "Please enter password" and a password entry menu.

A plurality of password input menu items are displayed in the password input menu. The items of the password input menu are "determine", "delete", numbers "0" to "9", alphabets "A" to "F", "return to game", and "return". including. In the password display image, the highlighted item can be selected from "0" to "9" and "A" to "F" by operating the select buttons 664a to 664d, and by operating the main button 662 , is determined by the highlighted number or alphabet. The determined number or alphabet is displayed in the password display image. When "determine" in the password input menu is selected and determined, a plurality of characters displayed in the password display image are determined as the password to be input. When "delete" in the password input menu is selected, the last input character is deleted from the password display image one by one.

When "return to game" in the password input menu is selected, the display area of the liquid crystal display device 16 displays an effect image to be displayed when the game is played, and the shooting handle 32 has not been operated for a predetermined period of time. A demonstration image that is displayed when neither the first starting gate 420 nor the second starting gate 440 wins for a predetermined period of time is displayed. Further, when "return" in the password input menu is selected, a Unimemo initial image is displayed in the display area of the liquid crystal display device 16. FIG.

[Modified example of setting change/confirmation history processing]
Modifications 1 to 3 of the setting change/confirmation history process will be described below.
[Modified example 1 of setting change/confirmation history process]
First, modification 1 of the setting change/confirmation history process will be described with reference to FIGS. 235 to 240. FIG.

The setting change/confirmation history process in Modification 1 is substantially the same as the setting change/confirmation history process described above with reference to FIGS. . Differences from the setting change/confirmation history process described above will be described in detail below with reference to FIGS. 216 and 217 . In the setting change/confirmation history process described above with reference to FIGS. 216 and 217, when no process is performed within a predetermined time (for example, 30 seconds), the hall menu screen (for example, see FIG. 209) is displayed. It has been explained that the timing process (see step S33052 in FIG. 216, etc.) is performed in order to display . 216 and 217, the timekeeping process is performed in the same manner as the setting change/confirmation history process described above with reference to FIGS. Although the hall menu screen may be displayed at 10:00 a.m., the description of the clocking process will be omitted in the following description.

FIG. 235 is a flowchart showing Modification 1 of the setting change/confirmation history process executed by the sub CPU 201 . This setting change/confirmation history process is performed when "setting change/confirmation history" is selected (highlighted) from the hall menu screen (see FIGS. 209 and 210) being displayed in step S33006 of FIG. is started under the condition that the main button 662 is pressed at .

When the setting change/confirmation history process is started, the sub CPU 201 performs an authentication process for authenticating administrator authority (step S33100). This authentication processing will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 236 is a flowchart showing an example of authentication processing in Modification 1 of the setting change/confirmation history processing executed by the sub CPU 201 .

As shown in FIG. 236, in the authentication process, the sub CPU 201 first requests a password in the display area of the liquid crystal display device 16 where the hall menu screen is displayed, as shown in FIGS. A password request screen is further displayed (step S33101). FIG. 237 shows that in modification 1 of the setting change/confirmation history process executed by the sub CPU 201, the password request screen is displayed in the display area of the liquid crystal display device 16 when the setting change/confirmation history process is executed. FIG. 4 is a diagram showing an example; FIG. 238 is an example of a password request screen displayed in the display area of the liquid crystal display device 16 in Modification 1 of the setting change/confirmation history process executed by the sub CPU 201 .

Note that in the first modification, when the setting change/confirmation history process is started (the main button 662 is pressed while "setting change/confirmation history" is selected (highlighted) on the hall menu screen). 237 and 238, the password request screen is displayed while the hall menu screen is being displayed, but this is not necessarily the case. For example, when the setting change/confirmation history is started, the setting change/confirmation history screen displays only the time information and the operation type information among the time information, the operation type information, and the setting value information (the setting values are not displayed). , and the password request screen may be displayed while the setting change/confirmation history screen is displayed. Only the screen may be displayed.

When the password is entered, the sub CPU 201 executes password entry processing (step S33102), and proceeds to step S33103.

The sub CPU 201 determines in step S33103 whether or not the entered password is correct, and if the entered password is correct (YES in step S33103), the authentication process ends. On the other hand, when determining that the entered password is not proper (NO in step S33103), the sub CPU 201 executes authentication NG display processing (step S33104). When the authentication NG display process is executed, the screen shown in FIG. 239 is displayed in the display area of the liquid crystal display device 16, for example. Here, FIG. 239 shows an example of a screen displayed in the display area of the liquid crystal display device 16 when the entered password is inappropriate in the modification 1 of the setting change/confirmation history process executed by the sub CPU 201. FIG. 4 is a diagram showing;

When the sub CPU 201 executes the authentication process in step S33100, and determines that the authentication result is correct, that is, the password is correct (YES in step S33103), the sub CPU 201 determines that the authentication is OK (YES in step S33110). Move to S33120. On the other hand, when determining that the password is not correct (NO in step S33103), the sub CPU 201 determines that authentication is not OK (NO in step S33110), and ends the setting change/confirmation history process.

For example, when the main button 662 is pressed after a password is entered on the password request screen, the sub CPU 201 determines whether the entered password is appropriate. If the entered password is inappropriate or if the main button 662 is pressed without entering a password, the authentication NG process of step S33103 described above is executed. Only when a correct password is entered and, for example, the main button 662 is pressed, a setting change/confirmation history screen displaying time information, operation type information, and setting value information is displayed. can be done. As a result, it is possible to prevent the history information of the setting values from being browsed for fraudulent purposes.

In step S33120, the sub CPU 201 performs setting change/confirmation history screen display processing. At this time, the display area of the liquid crystal display device 16 displays a setting change/confirmation history screen (for example, see FIG. 218) showing the date/time data, the operation type, and the set value in association with each other.

After the setting change/confirmation history screen display process in step S33120, the sub CPU 201 determines whether or not a page update operation has been performed (step S33130). If it is determined that a page update operation has been performed (YES in step S33130), page update processing is executed (step S33140), and then the process moves to step S33130. On the other hand, if a page update operation has not been performed (NO in step S33130), the process moves to step S33150.

The sub CPU 201 determines in step S33150 whether or not "clear" is determined. The operator presses the main button 662 while "clear" is selected (highlighted) on the setting change/confirmation history screen (see, for example, FIG. 221) displayed in the display area of the liquid crystal display device 16. Then, the sub CPU 201 determines that "clear" is determined.

When sub CPU 201 determines that "clear" is determined (YES in step S33150), sub CPU 201 executes setting change/confirmation history data clear processing (step S33160), and proceeds to step S33180. The setting change/confirmation history data clearing process is a process for erasing the data of the setting change history, the setting confirmation history, and the viewing history stored in the work RAM 203 . When the setting change/confirmation history data clearing process is executed, all the history data displayed in the display area of the liquid crystal display device 16 are erased (see FIG. 222, for example). On the other hand, if "clear" is not determined (NO in step S33150), the process moves to step S33170.

Sub CPU 201 determines in step S33170 whether or not "return" is determined. The operator presses the main button 662 while "return" is selected (highlighted) on the setting change/confirmation history screen (see, for example, FIG. 218) displayed in the display area of the liquid crystal display device 16. Then, the sub CPU 201 determines that "return" is determined.

When sub CPU 201 determines that "return" is determined (YES in step S33170), sub CPU 201 executes hall menu screen display processing (step S33180), and ends the setting change/confirmation history processing. On the other hand, if "return" is not determined (NO in step S33170), the process moves to step S33130, and the processes after step S33130 are continued.

FIG. 240 shows a setting change/confirmation screen on which setting values can be confirmed on the hall menu screen displayed in the display area of the liquid crystal display device 16 in Modification 1 of the setting change/confirmation history process executed by the sub CPU 201 . FIG. 10 is a flow diagram showing an example of an operation procedure until a history screen is displayed; As shown in FIG. 240, the pachinko gaming machine according to the second embodiment, as the first procedure for viewing the setting change/confirmation history information, when the setting change process or the setting confirmation process is executed, the hall menu display the screen. As described above, the setting change process can be executed by turning on the setting key 328, pressing the backup clear switch 330, and turning on the power switch 35 while the power is off. Also, the setting confirmation process can be executed by turning ON the setting key 328 while the power is off. The setting key 328 can turn on the setting key switch signal by turning it in one direction, and turns off the setting key switch signal by turning it in the opposite direction (returning to its original position). It is configured so that

As a second procedure, the pachinko game machine selects and determines "setting change/confirmation history" in the hall menu screen (see, for example, FIG. 210), thereby displaying the "setting change/confirmation history". is highlighted, and only the date and time data and the operation type (the corresponding operation type among setting change, confirmation, and viewing) are displayed. (See FIG. 210) is displayed (setting values are not displayed).

As a third procedure, the pachinko gaming machine requests the input of a password (see FIGS. 237 and 238), and determines whether the entered password is appropriate.

As a fourth procedure, if the password entered in the third procedure is correct, the pachinko machine sets the setting value information, more specifically, the date and time data and the operation type (setting change, confirmation, viewing) A setting change/confirmation history screen (for example, see FIG. 225) in which setting values are associated with operation types to be performed is displayed in the display area of the liquid crystal display device 16 .

Therefore, a person who can use and operate the setting key 328 (a person who has authority) can change the settings on the setting change/confirmation history screen (see FIG. 218) displayed through the first to fourth procedures. By viewing the confirmation history, it is possible to confirm at a glance each history of setting change of the setting value that defines the payout rate, confirmation of the setting change, viewing of the setting change and confirmation, and the corresponding setting value. . It should be noted that the authorized person is a person who is given the authority to change the setting, confirm the setting change, etc., and means the manager of the hall or the like. Hereinafter, the "authorized person" may also be referred to as an "administrative authority."

As described above, the pachinko gaming machine constituting the gaming machine according to the present invention includes the liquid crystal display device 16 that displays various images, the operation button group 66 such as the main button 662 and the select button 664, and controls related to the game. and a sub CPU 201 that is a display control unit that controls the display of the liquid crystal display device 16. The control unit changes or confirms setting values (for example, settings 1 to 6). The display control unit includes a setting switch 332 which is setting means for enabling and data transmission means for transmitting various data to the sub CPU 201. The display control unit includes reception means for receiving various data from the data transmission means, The main CPU 101 is provided with a work RAM 203 that functions as a backup memory capable of storing and holding written information even if the data is written, and an RTC 209 that measures the date and time. to the sub CPU 201, and if the data received by the data receiving means is for setting change or setting confirmation, the sub CPU 201 stores the setting change or setting confirmation, the setting value, and the date and time data from the RTC 209 in the work RAM 203. A setting display function is provided for storing the setting change or setting confirmation and date and time data stored in the main RAM 203 as confirmation history information, and displaying the setting change or setting confirmation and date and time data on the liquid crystal display device 16. It is configured to display the set values stored in the work RAM 203 when the main button 662 is operated in the state.

With this configuration, setting changes or setting confirmations, setting values, and date/time data from the RTC 209 are stored in the work RAM 203 as setting change/confirmation history information. When 662 is operated, the set values stored in the work RAM 203 can be displayed. Therefore, when "setting change/confirmation history" in the hall menu is selected, each history of setting values can be checked, and it is possible to determine whether or not unauthorized setting changes or setting confirmations have been made. become.

Further, the pachinko machine according to the second embodiment acquires the date and time data when the setting value is received from the RTC 209, and stores the setting value, the date and time data, and the information representing the setting change in association with each other. good.

With this configuration, the changed setting value, the changed date and time data, and the information representing the setting change are stored in association with each other, so that an authorized person can specify the date and time when the setting value was changed. This makes it possible to identify fraudulent actions such as changing set values.

In addition, the pachinko machine according to the second embodiment acquires the date and time when the information indicating that the setting value has been confirmed is received from the RTC 209, and stores the date and time data and the information indicating the setting confirmation in association with each other. good too.

With this configuration, the date and time data when the setting value is confirmed and the information indicating the setting confirmation are stored in association with each other, so that an authorized person can specify the date and time when the setting value is confirmed, and the setting can be performed. It becomes possible to identify the fraud when the fraud such as checking the value is performed.

Further, in the pachinko machine according to the second embodiment, when the setting change or setting confirmation, the set value, and the date and time data among the setting change/confirmation history information of the work RAM 203 are displayed, the displayed date and time Data may be stored in the work RAM 203 as a viewing history, and the viewing history may be displayed on the liquid crystal display device 16 .

With this configuration, when the setting change or setting confirmation, the setting value, and the date/time data among the setting change/confirmation history information are displayed, the displayed date/time data is stored in the work RAM 203 as the browsing history, and the browsing history is displayed. History can be displayed. Therefore, in the state where "setting change/confirmation history" in the hall menu where setting values are not displayed is selected, in addition to setting change or setting confirmation, setting value and date/time data display in setting change/confirmation history information, viewing Since the history can be displayed, it is possible to determine whether or not the viewing history of setting change or setting confirmation has been viewed for illegal purposes such as cheating.

With the above configuration, in this embodiment, it is possible to save and display setting change/confirmation history information in which setting changes or setting confirmations, setting values, and date/time data are associated with each other. To provide a pachinko game machine capable of confirming and determining whether or not unauthorized setting change or setting confirmation has been performed.

Further, the pachinko gaming machine constituting the gaming machine according to the present invention includes the liquid crystal display device 16 that displays various images, operation units such as the main button 662 and the select button 664, and a control unit that performs control related to games. A main CPU 101 and a sub CPU 201 that is a display control unit that controls the display of the liquid crystal display device 11, and the control unit is a setting means that enables change or confirmation of setting values (for example, settings 1 to 6) and data transmission means for transmitting various data to the sub CPU 201. The display control unit includes reception means for receiving various data from the data transmission means and writing even in a non-energized state. The main CPU 101 transmits setting changes or setting confirmations and setting values to the sub CPU 201 by data transmission means, and the sub CPU 201 If the data received by the data receiving means is for setting change or setting confirmation, the work RAM 203 stores the setting change or setting confirmation, the setting value, and the date and time data from the RTC 209 as setting change/confirmation history information. has a setting display function for displaying the setting change/confirmation history information stored in the work RAM 203 on the liquid crystal display device 16, and when the setting change/confirmation history information stored in the work RAM 203 is displayed on the liquid crystal display device 16, date and time data is stored in the work RAM 203 as a viewing history, and the viewing history is displayed on the liquid crystal display device 16 .

With this configuration, when the setting change/confirmation history information of the work RAM 203 is displayed, the displayed date and time data is stored in the work RAM 203 as the viewing history, and the viewing history is displayed in the display area of the liquid crystal display device 16. can be done. Therefore, not only can it be determined whether or not an unnatural operation has been performed, but it can also be determined whether or not it is an opportunity to investigate fraudulent activity.

In addition, the pachinko machine according to the second embodiment acquires the date and time data when the setting change/confirmation history information was displayed on the liquid crystal display device 16 from the RTC 209, and associates the date and time data with the information representing the browsing history. It may be configured to store the

With this configuration, the date and time data and the information representing the browsing history are stored in association with each other, so that the date and time when the information related to the setting value was browsed can be specified, and the illegality such as changing the setting value can be prevented. It becomes possible to identify the fraud if it has been done.

Further, in the pachinko machine according to the second embodiment, when the setting change or setting confirmation, the set value, and the date and time data among the setting change/confirmation history information of the work RAM 203 are displayed, the displayed date and time Data may be stored in the work RAM 203 as a viewing history, and the viewing history may be displayed on the liquid crystal display device 16 .

With this configuration, when the setting change or setting confirmation, the set value, and the date/time data among the setting change/confirmation history information are displayed, the displayed date/time data is stored in the work RAM 203 as the browsing history, and the liquid crystal display is displayed. The viewing history can be displayed on the display device 16 . Therefore, in the state where "setting change/confirmation history" in the hall menu where setting values are not displayed is selected, in addition to setting change or setting confirmation, setting value and date/time data display in setting change/confirmation history information, viewing Since the history can be displayed, it is possible to determine whether or not the viewing history of setting change or setting confirmation has been viewed for illegal purposes such as cheating.

With the above-described configuration, in the present embodiment, it is possible to store and display browsing history information in which setting change confirmation/browsing history information is associated with date and time data. To provide a pachinko game machine capable of judging whether or not a fraudulent act has been committed, as well as judging whether or not it is an opportunity to investigate a fraudulent act.

[Modification 2 of setting change/confirmation history processing]
Next, modification 2 of the setting change/confirmation history process will be described with reference to FIGS. 241 to 245. FIG.

The configuration of the setting change/confirmation history processing in Modification 2 of this setting change/confirmation history processing is substantially the same as that of Modification 1 except that the configuration of the authentication function is different. In the following, the differences from Modification 1 will be described in detail.

The pachinko game machine according to Modified Example 2 of the setting change/confirmation history process is provided with, for example, a slide switch as volume adjustment means for adjusting the volume of the speaker 24, and a plurality of volume positions (volume positions), for example, volume "high". , ``middle'', and ``small'', and a plurality of volume positions in a predetermined order of operation. I'm trying to authenticate as a user with administrator privileges when the order matches. The volume adjusting means for adjusting the volume of the speaker 24 is not limited to the slide switch. For example, the volume may be adjusted by turning a jog dial, and the volume may be determined by pressing the jog dial.

Thus, the pachinko gaming machine according to Modification 2 of the setting change/confirmation history process has an authentication processing function of performing authentication based on the volume password corresponding to the order of changing the volume position. In this modified example 2, for example, a control program to which the authentication processing function is added is stored in the audio control circuit 204, and the sub CPU 201 executes authentication processing based on the volume password according to the control program.

FIG. 241 is a diagram showing a configuration example of the volume switch 108 that generates the volume password applied to the authentication process (see FIG. 242) in the modification 2 of the setting change/confirmation history process executed by the sub CPU 201. As shown in FIG. The volume switch 108 is arranged, for example, in the circuit board of the sub-control circuit 200, and can be slid to set an initial set value. For example, the volume switch 108 can be set to one of three volume positions 603a, 603b, 603c (hereinafter also referred to as volume positions 1, 2, 3) corresponding to "low", "medium", and "high" volumes. In addition to the switching operation, the plurality of volume positions 1, 2 and 3 are sequentially switched in a predetermined order of operation. Specifically, when setting the initial setting value, the setting can be performed by sliding the volume switch 108 in the order of “large” → “medium” → “small” → “medium”. That is, the sub CPU 201 constitutes a position detection section for detecting volume positions 1, 2 and 3 of the volume switch 108 .

On the other hand, when setting a user having administrator authority (administrator authority), according to a predetermined administrator setting procedure, the volume switch 108 is set in a different order from the initial setting, and a predetermined authentication operation is performed via a plurality of volume positions. A pattern is operated, and the positions of the plurality of volumes and the order of operation are stored in memory. Then, when administrator authority is required for viewing the change history of the setting values, etc., the volume switch 108 is operated in a predetermined authentication operation pattern to enable viewing of the change history of the setting values.

As the authentication operation pattern, for example, an operation pattern representing a position change from volume position 2 (volume "medium") to volume position 1 (volume "low") in FIG. 241, or from volume position 2 to volume position 3 ( It is possible to store in advance an operation pattern or the like representing a position change to volume "loud").

As a result, the sub CPU 201 recognizes an operation pattern from the volume position information indicating each volume position of the volume switch 108, and determines whether or not the operation pattern matches a preset authentication operation pattern. It is possible to determine whether or not

As described above, in the modification 2 of the setting change/confirmation history process, the volume switch 108 functions as an operation unit for inputting the volume password corresponding to the operation pattern of the volume position. The volume switch 108 in the modification 2 of this setting change/confirmation history process is an operation unit that cannot be operated by the player, like the setting switch 332, the setting key 328, the power switch 35, and the backup clear switch 330. On the other hand, for example, the main button 662, the select button 664, the shooting handle 32, etc. are operation units that can be operated by the player.

FIG. 242 is a flow chart showing an example of authentication processing in modification 2 of the setting change/confirmation history processing executed by the sub CPU 201 . In this authentication process, "setting change/confirmation history" is selected (YES in step S33006) from the displayed hall menu (see FIG. 209) in step S33006 of FIG. History" is highlighted (see FIG. 210) and the main button 662 is pressed.

When this authentication process is started, the sub CPU 201 performs volume password request display processing (step S33201) for displaying a screen prompting the user to enter a volume password in the display area of the liquid crystal display device 16 where the hall menu screen is displayed. Run.

FIG. 243 shows a password request screen displayed in the display area of the liquid crystal display device 16 when the setting change/confirmation history process is executed in the modification 2 of the setting change/confirmation history process executed by the sub CPU 201 . FIG. 4 is a diagram showing an example; FIG. 244 is an example of a volume password request display screen displayed in the display area of the liquid crystal display device 16 in Modification 2 of the setting change/confirmation history process executed by the sub CPU 201 . As shown in FIGS. 243 and 244, in the volume password request display processing of step S33201 in FIG. The setting value will be displayed after you enter the password." is displayed along with the setting change/confirmation history information.

In Modification 2, when the setting change/confirmation history process is started (when "setting change/confirmation history" is selected (highlighted) on the hall menu screen, the main button 662 is pressed). ), for example, as shown in FIGS. 243 and 244, the volume password request screen is displayed while the hall menu screen is being displayed, but this is not necessarily the case. For example, when the setting change/confirmation history is started, the setting change/confirmation history screen displays only the time information and the operation type information among the time information, the operation type information, and the setting value information (the setting values are not displayed). , and the volume password request screen may be displayed while this setting change/confirmation history screen is displayed. Only the password request screen may be displayed.

After displaying the volume password request display screen, the sub CPU 201 continuously executes operation pattern acquisition processing for monitoring the change order of the volume position information of the volume switch 108, that is, the operation pattern (step S33202).

When the volume position information is input while monitoring the input of the volume position information, the sub CPU 201 extracts an operation pattern corresponding to the volume position information from the volume position information and compares it with a preset authentication operation pattern. Then, it is determined whether or not the correct operation has been performed based on whether or not they match (step S33203). Here, if it is determined that a correct operation has been performed (YES in step S33203), the sub CPU 201 executes the processes from step S33120 onward in FIG.

On the other hand, if it is determined that the correct operation has not been performed (NO in step S33203), the sub CPU 201 performs authentication NG display processing to display that the authentication is NG in the display area of the liquid crystal display device 16. It does (step S33204). As a result, the sub CPU 201 terminates the authentication process and proceeds to the process of step S33110 in FIG. In the authentication NG display process, a message such as "The volume password is incorrect. Please start over." is displayed in the display area of the liquid crystal display device 16.

Note that FIG. 241 shows an example in which the volume switch 108 having three volume positions is used as the operation switch according to the present invention, but the present invention is not limited to this. It may be a switch that can take a position. In this case, the sub CPU 201 is provided with a position detection function capable of detecting each volume position of the operation switch, the position information (volume position information) detected by this position detection function is acquired, and the acquired order and the work RAM 203 are stored in advance. The configuration may be such that the setting change/confirmation history information stored in the work RAM 203 is displayed on the condition that the operation order matches the stored predetermined operation order.

FIG. 245 is a flow chart showing an example of the setting value confirmation procedure of the setting change/confirmation history information in the modified example 2 of the setting change/confirmation history process executed by the sub CPU 201 . As shown in FIG. 245, in the modification 2 of the setting change/confirmation history process, as the first procedure for confirming the set value of the setting change/confirmation history information, a hall is generated when the setting change process or the setting confirmation process is executed. Display the menu screen. As described above, the setting change process can be executed by turning on the setting key 328, pressing the backup clear switch 330, and turning on the power switch 35 while the power is off. Also, the setting confirmation process can be executed by turning ON the setting key 328 while the power is off. The setting key 328 can turn on the setting key switch signal by turning it in one direction, and turns off the setting key switch signal by turning it in the opposite direction (returning to the original position). It is configured so that

As a second procedure, the pachinko game machine selects and determines "setting change/confirmation history" in the hall menu screen (see, for example, FIG. 210), thereby displaying the "setting change/confirmation history". is highlighted, and only the date and time data and the operation type (the corresponding operation type among setting change, confirmation, and viewing) are displayed. (See FIG. 210) is displayed (setting values are not displayed).

As a third procedure, the pachinko gaming machine requests input of a volume password (see FIGS. 243 and 244), captures the input volume password, and determines whether the captured volume password is appropriate. The appropriateness of the volume password is determined by comparing the captured volume password with the authentication operation pattern (authentication password). to decide.

As a fourth procedure, if the volume password entered in the third procedure is correct, the pachinko machine sends set value information, more specifically date and time data, and an operation type (setting change, confirmation, viewing). A setting change/confirmation history screen (for example, see FIG. 225) in which the corresponding operation type) and setting values are associated is displayed in the display area of the liquid crystal display device 16 .

As described above, the pachinko gaming machine that constitutes the gaming machine according to the present invention includes the liquid crystal display device 16 that displays various images, the main button 662 and the select button 664 that are operation units that receive at least the player's operation, A non-game operation unit that is not operated by the player, a main CPU 101 that is a control unit that controls the game, and a sub CPU 201 that is a display control unit that controls the display of the liquid crystal display device 16. The control unit includes a setting switch 332 that enables setting values (for example, settings 1 to 6) to be changed or confirmed, and data transmission means for transmitting various data to the display control unit. The main CPU 101 includes a receiving means for receiving various data from the transmitting means, a work RAM 203 capable of storing and holding written information even in a non-energized state, and an RTC 209 for keeping date and time. When the data received by the data receiving means is for setting change or setting confirmation, the sub CPU 201 stores the setting change, setting confirmation, or setting in the work RAM 203 . It has a setting display function that stores the value and the date and time data from the RTC 209 as setting change/confirmation history information and displays the setting change/confirmation history information stored in the work RAM 203 on the liquid crystal display device 16. It has a configuration for displaying the setting change/confirmation history information stored in the work RAM 203 on condition that the operation is performed in the order of .

With this configuration, the setting change/confirmation history information stored in the work RAM 203 can be displayed on condition that the non-game operation units are operated in a predetermined order. Therefore, only a person who has the authority to know the predetermined operation order can store and display the setting change/confirmation history information, so that it is possible to judge whether or not an unnatural operation related to the setting values has been performed. or whether it is an opportunity to investigate fraud.

Further, when the setting change/confirmation history information of the work RAM 203 is displayed, the pachinko gaming machine according to the second embodiment stores the displayed date and time data in the work RAM 203 as a browsing history, and displays it in the liquid crystal display device 16. It may be configured to display the browsing history.

With this configuration, when the setting change/confirmation history information of the work RAM 203 is displayed, the displayed date and time data can be stored in the work RAM 203 as the viewing history, and the viewing history can be displayed on the liquid crystal display device 16.例文帳に追加Therefore, not only can it be determined whether or not an unnatural operation has been performed, but it can also be determined whether or not it is an opportunity to investigate fraudulent activity.

Further, in the pachinko game machine according to the second embodiment, the non-game operation unit may be configured to be an operation switch for adjusting the sound volume, for example, the volume switch 108 .

With this configuration, authentication can be performed in an operation order known only to an authorized person, so that the cost can be reduced without adding an operation switch for identifying an authorized person. This order of operation is indicated when the pachinko game machine is delivered to the hall, and only authorized persons use it when changing or confirming the settings.

Further, in the pachinko game machine according to the second embodiment, the operation switch is a switch that can take at least three or more arbitrary positions, and the sub CPU 201 can detect each volume position of the operation switch. The setting display function acquires the volume position information detected by the position detection function, and the condition is that the order of the acquired volume position information matches a predetermined operation order stored in advance. Alternatively, the setting change/confirmation history information stored in the work RAM 203 may be displayed.

With this configuration, an operation order of three or more arbitrary volume positions is stored in advance as a predetermined operation order, and an authorized person is identified by letting the authorized person know the operation order in advance. Authentication can be performed in an operational order known only to an authorized person without adding an operation switch.

With the above-described configuration, in this embodiment, only authorized persons can save and display the setting change/confirmation history information. Alternatively, it is possible to provide a pachinko game machine capable of judging whether or not it is an opportunity to investigate fraudulent activity.

As described above, the pachinko gaming machine according to the second embodiment authenticates by operating the volume switch 108 so that only the person who has the authority regarding the setting value in the hall can display the setting change/confirmation history information. Although the configuration has been described, when displaying the setting change/confirmation history information like the pachinko game machine according to the modification 3 of the setting change/confirmation history process described below, it is input from the input unit in the pachinko game machine. It may be configured to authenticate using a password that

[Modified example 3 of setting change/confirmation history process]
Next, modification 3 of the setting change/confirmation history process will be described with reference to FIGS. 246 to 253. FIG.

FIG. 246 is a diagram showing a configuration example of a game system 3210 according to Modification 3 of the setting change/confirmation history process executed by the sub CPU 201. As shown in FIG. This gaming system 3210 comprises a pachinko gaming machine A, a mobile wireless communication terminal 3220 and a server device 3240 arranged on a network 3230 . In the gaming system 3210, the pachinko gaming machine A, the mobile wireless communication terminal 3220, and the server device 3240 cooperate to perform authentication processing related to confirmation of setting change/confirmation history information, as will be described later.

In the gaming system 3210, the pachinko gaming machine A has, in addition to the functions of the pachinko gaming machine described above, a function of generating a two-dimensional code including setting change/confirmation history information and a URL (Uniform Resource Locator), the two-dimensional code is displayed in the display area of the liquid crystal display device 16A (see FIG. 249). The setting change/confirmation history information included in the two-dimensional code is, for example, information content displayed on the setting change/confirmation history screen shown in FIG. 218, and includes setting values. The sub CPU in the pachinko game machine A constitutes generating means for generating the two-dimensional code according to the present invention.

The mobile wireless communication terminal 3220 is a mobile communication terminal such as a smart phone, and includes a control section 3221, a display operation section 3222, a camera section (not shown), and the like. The display/operation unit 3222 has the functions of a display unit and an operation unit, and is configured by a touch panel or the like. The camera section is a functional section that reads (pictures) the two-dimensional code 3161a and the like (see FIG. 249) displayed in the display area of the liquid crystal display device 16A of the pachinko game machine A. The display/operation unit 3222 and the camera unit respectively constitute the operation display unit and imaging means of the present invention.

The control unit 3221 has a CPU, a storage device (flash memory, microSD memory card, etc.), a RAM, a communication circuit, etc., and the CPU controls various operations according to a control program stored in the storage device or RAM, for example. I do. In the present embodiment, the control unit 3221 analyzes the imaged two-dimensional code, extracts setting change/confirmation history information and URLs, and includes a password input screen (see below) for inputting a password to the display operation unit 3222. 252), and an authentication result acquisition unit that transmits the input password entered on the password input screen to the server device 3240 based on the above URL and acquires the authentication result notified from the server device 3240. and a history information display control unit for displaying setting change/confirmation history information in a manner including setting values on the display operation unit 3222 when the acquired authentication result is correct. The extraction unit, display control unit, authentication result acquisition unit, and history information display control unit are functions that can be realized by a CPU that operates according to a dedicated application that is pre-installed in the storage device or the like. The extraction unit, the input screen display control unit, the authentication result acquisition unit, and the history information display control unit, which are the components of the control unit 3221 according to this embodiment, are respectively the extraction means, the input screen display control means, and the authentication result It constitutes acquisition means and history information display control means.

The server device 3240 is implemented by a computer and has a function of managing the dedicated site for the authentication service identified by the above URL. is checked to determine whether the password is correct, and an authentication service function for notifying the mobile wireless communication terminal 3220 of the authentication result. The server device 3240 constitutes authentication means in the present invention.

FIG. 247 is a flowchart showing an example of setting change/confirmation history processing in the pachinko game machine A that constitutes the gaming system 3210 according to Modification 3. As shown in FIG. This setting change/confirmation history processing is performed by selecting "setting change/confirmation history processing" from a plurality of hall menu items displayed on the hall menu screen (see, for example, FIG. 208) displayed in the display area of the liquid crystal display device 16A of the pachinko machine A.・Confirmation history” is selected and determined, and the main button 662 is pressed in a state where “setting change/confirmation history” is highlighted on the hall menu screen (see, for example, FIG. 210).

In the setting change/confirmation history process described above with reference to FIGS. 216 and 217, when no process is performed within a predetermined time (for example, 30 seconds), the hall menu screen (for example, see FIG. 209) is displayed. It has been explained that the timing process (see step S33052 in FIG. 216, etc.) is performed in order to display . 216 and 217, the timing processing is performed in the same manner as the setting change/confirmation history processing described above with reference to FIGS. Although the hall menu screen may be displayed in the third modification, the description of the timing process is omitted.

When this setting change/confirmation history process is started, the sub CPU reads the setting change/confirmation history information from the work RAM, and generates a two-dimensional code containing the setting change/confirmation history information and the URL of the dedicated site for the authentication service. 3161a (see FIG. 249) is generated (step S33301). Next, the sub CPU 201 performs two-dimensional code display processing for displaying the setting change/confirmation history information read in step S33301 and the generated two-dimensional code 3161a in the display area of the liquid crystal display device 16A in the manner shown in FIG. 249, for example. Execute (step S33302).

After executing the two-dimensional code display process in step S33302, the sub CPU 201 is in a receivable state in which it is possible to receive a data clear request, cursor movement (page break) request, and process return request based on the operation of the main button 662 and the select button 664. transition to A main button 662 is a button for making a processing return request. The select button 664 is a button for requesting cursor movement (page break). Also, by operating the main button 662 and the select button 664 together, a data clear request can be issued.

After transitioning to the receivable state, the sub CPU 201 performs the processing of steps S33303 to S3305. In FIG. 247, the processing of steps S33056 to S33064 shown in FIG. 216 is omitted. are added.

In FIG. 247, after the two-dimensional code display process in step S33302, the sub CPU 201 determines whether or not "clear" is determined in step S33303. When the operator presses the main button 662 while "clear" is selected (highlighted) on the setting change/confirmation history screen (see, for example, FIG. 249) displayed in the display area of the liquid crystal display device 16, , the sub CPU 201 determines that "clear" is determined.

When sub CPU 201 determines that "clear" is determined (YES in step S33303), sub CPU 201 executes setting change/confirmation history data clear processing (step S33304), and proceeds to step S33306. The setting change/confirmation history data clearing process is a process for erasing the data of the setting change history, the setting confirmation history, and the viewing history stored in the work RAM 203 . When the setting change/confirmation history data clearing process is executed, all history data displayed in the setting change/confirmation history display area of the display area of the liquid crystal display device 16 are erased (see FIG. 222). On the other hand, if "clear" is not determined (NO in step S33303), the process moves to step S33305.

Sub CPU 201 determines in step S33305 whether or not "return" is determined. The operator presses the main button 662 while "Return" is selected (highlighted) on the setting change/confirmation history screen (see, for example, FIG. 249) displayed in the display area of the liquid crystal display device 16. Then, the sub CPU 201 determines that "return" is determined.

When sub CPU 201 determines that "return" is determined (YES in step S33305), it executes hall menu screen display processing (step S33306), and ends the setting change/confirmation history processing. On the other hand, if "return" is not determined (NO in step S33305), the process moves to step S33303, and the processes after step S33303 are continued.

As described above, in this embodiment, when the sub CPU 201 determines that "clear" is determined (YES in step S33303), the setting change/confirmation history information displayed together with the two-dimensional code 3161a (see FIG. 249) is displayed. You may make it clear. In this case, pachinko machine A displays the two-dimensional code 3161a, but has not obtained the authentication result. It is possible.

FIG. 248 is a flowchart showing an example of setting change/confirmation history processing in portable wireless communication terminal 3220 and server device 3240 of gaming system 3210 according to modification 3. FIG. This process is started under the condition that the two-dimensional code 3161a displayed in the display area of the liquid crystal display device 16A of the pachinko game machine A is photographed by the mobile wireless communication terminal 3220. FIG.

When the two-dimensional code 3161a is photographed by the mobile wireless communication terminal 3220, the control unit 3221 reads the image data obtained by the photographing, and based on the image data, displays the two-dimensional code 3161a on the display operation unit 3222 in the manner shown in FIG. Two-dimensional code reading display processing for displaying the dimension code 3222a is performed (step S33401).

Subsequently, in the mobile wireless communication terminal 3220, the control unit 3221 analyzes the read two-dimensional code, extracts the setting change/confirmation history information and the URL contained therein, and temporarily stores them in a predetermined storage area in the RAM, for example. 2D code acquisition processing is executed (step S33402). Next, the control unit 3221 accesses the dedicated site of the authentication service based on the above URL, displays the password input screen (see FIG. 252), and executes password input display processing for accepting the password (step S33403).

After executing the password input display process in step S33403, the control unit 3221 of the mobile wireless communication terminal 3220 cooperates with the server device 3240 to perform the password authentication process through the following steps S33404 and S33405.

In the password authentication process, the control unit 3221 of the mobile wireless communication terminal 3220 first monitors whether a password has been entered in the password display field 3222c (see FIG. 252) (step S33404). process to accept the input of the password of If a password is entered here (YES in step S33404), control unit 3221 transmits the entered password to server device 3240. FIG.

The server device 3240 compares the password sent from the mobile wireless communication terminal 3220 with the registered password registered in advance, and determines whether the authentication is OK or not based on whether the passwords match. The server device 3240 notifies the mobile wireless communication terminal 3220 of the determination result. Thus, in this embodiment, only the authentication is performed by the server device 3240 . In other words, the server device 3240 returns only the authentication result to the mobile wireless communication terminal 3220. FIG.

On the other hand, after transmitting the input password accepted in step S33404, the control unit 3221 of the mobile wireless communication terminal 3220 waits for the notification of the authentication result from the server device 3240, and the notified authentication result indicates whether the authentication is OK or the authentication is NG. It is determined whether the password is correct or not (step S33405).

Here, if it is determined that the password is not correct (NO in step S33405), the control unit 3221 performs authentication NG display processing for displaying a message or the like indicating that the password is authentication NG on the display operation unit 3222 ( Step S33410), and then the process ends. In the authentication NG display processing, a message such as "The password is incorrect. Please try again from the beginning." is displayed in the message column 3222d.

On the other hand, if it is determined that the password is correct (YES in step S33405), the control unit 3221 sets the setting change/confirmation history information temporarily held in step S33402 to be displayed on the display operation unit 3222. Change/confirmation history display processing is performed (step S33406). In this setting change/confirmation history display process, the control unit 3221 embeds (arranges) display information in which the setting change/confirmation history information held in step S33402 is embedded (arranged) according to a preset display format. Based on this display information, the setting change/confirmation history information is displayed on the display operation section 3222 (see FIG. 253).

FIG. 249 is a diagram showing an example of a setting change/confirmation history screen including a two-dimensional code in pachinko game machine A of game system 3210 according to Modification 3. As shown in FIG.

As shown in FIG. 249, in the pachinko game machine A, the sub CPU 201 displays setting change/confirmation history information in the display area of the liquid crystal display device 16A of the pachinko game machine A in the two-dimensional code display process (step S33302) of FIG. , and the two-dimensional code 3161a. The two-dimensional code 3161a displayed on the setting change/confirmation history screen 116g is, as described above, the setting change/confirmation history information currently displayed in the display area of the front liquid crystal display device 16A and the URL of the dedicated site for the authentication service. contains.

When displaying the two-dimensional code 3161a in the two-dimensional code display process (see FIG. 247) in step S33302, the sub CPU 201 displays, for example, "* two-dimensional code on the mobile terminal" in the display area of the front liquid crystal display device 16A. Please read and access the authentication service.", or a message prompting the transition to the authentication service may be displayed.

FIG. 250 is a flow diagram showing an example of the setting value confirmation procedure of the setting change/confirmation history information in the gaming system 3210 according to Modification 3. As shown in FIG. This set value confirmation procedure will be described at the end of this embodiment for convenience.

FIG. 251 is a diagram showing an example of a two-dimensional code display screen in portable wireless communication terminal 3220 of gaming system 3210 according to Modification 3. As shown in FIG. The mobile wireless communication terminal 3220 displays a two-dimensional code 3222a as shown in FIG.

FIG. 252 is a diagram showing an example of a password input screen in portable wireless communication terminal 3220 of gaming system 3210 according to Modification 3. As shown in FIG. In the password input display process (see FIG. 248) of step S33403, mobile wireless communication terminal 3220 accesses the URL and displays the password input screen shown in FIG.

As shown in FIG. 252, the password input screen includes a numeric keypad 3222b having keys of "0" to "9" and "*" and "#", and a password display field 3222c for displaying the password entered by the numeric keypad 3222b. Then, a message column 3222d is displayed. In the message field 3222d, for example, a message prompting the user to enter the password is displayed, such as "*Please enter the password. The setting value will be displayed after the password is entered." In the portable wireless communication terminal 3220, the password converted into hidden characters "*" can be displayed in the password display field 3222c where the password is entered by operating the numeric keypad 222b on the password entry screen shown in FIG.

FIG. 253 is a diagram showing an example of the setting change/confirmation history screen 222g in the mobile radio communication terminal 3220 of the gaming system 3210 according to Modification 3. As shown in FIG. As shown in FIG. 253, the setting change/confirmation history screen 222g displays the setting change/confirmation history information temporarily stored in S1102 in a manner similar to the setting change/confirmation history screen shown in FIG. displayed in the format. That is, in FIG. 253, in the setting change/confirmation history information, setting values are displayed corresponding to the setting change/confirmation date and time.

In the mobile wireless communication terminal 3220, the dedicated application installed in advance performs the above-described display format, the above-described display format of the setting change/confirmation history screen 222g shown in FIG. Support. As a result, the control unit 3221 can operate the enter button and the select button displayed on the display operation unit 3222 together with the setting change/confirmation history information during the setting change/confirmation history processing in FIG. 248 and after the setting change/confirmation history processing. The page update request based on can be accepted.

After transitioning to the acceptable state, the control unit 3221 of the mobile wireless communication terminal 3220 determines whether or not a page update operation has been performed (step S33407). If it is determined that the select button has been operated and the last line has been reached, it is determined that a page update operation has been performed (YES in step S33407), and the page is updated. Processing is executed (step S33408). Here, as long as it is determined that the select button has been operated and the page update operation has been performed (that is, as long as it is determined that the select button has been operated and the last line has been reached), the page that continues scrolling Update processing is performed (step S33408).

If the control unit 222 determines that the page update operation has been stopped (NO in step S33407), that is, if it determines that the operation of the select button has been stopped and the decision button has not been pressed, the process moves to step S33409. If it is determined in step S33409 that "return" is selected (YES in step S33071), control unit 222 executes hall menu screen display processing (step S33410), and ends the setting change/confirmation history processing. On the other hand, if it is determined that "return" is not determined (NO in step S33409), control unit 222 returns to step S340.

In the gaming system 3210 according to the second embodiment, the pachinko gaming machine A side converts the setting change/confirmation history information as so-called raw data into a two-dimensional code and displays it in the display area of the front liquid crystal display device 16A. (See steps S33301 and S33302 in FIG. 247.) On the portable wireless communication terminal 3220 side, the two-dimensional code displayed in the display area of the front liquid crystal display device 16A of the pachinko game machine A is photographed, and setting change/confirmation history information is obtained. Processing to return to raw data is performed (see steps S33401 and S33402 in FIG. 248).

On the other hand, many recent mobile communication terminals are equipped with a function of reading and analyzing two-dimensional codes as standard equipment.

Regarding this point, in the gaming system 3210 according to the second embodiment, a dedicated application is installed in the mobile wireless communication terminal 3220, and this dedicated application enables display in a display format equivalent to that of the pachinko machine A. .

In other words, even if the setting change/confirmation history information can be viewed as raw data on a mobile communication terminal that does not have a dedicated application installed, it cannot be viewed in a display format equivalent to that on the pachinko machine A side. Therefore, it is difficult to recognize the setting change/confirmation history information.

Therefore, in the second embodiment, by installing and using a dedicated application in the mobile wireless communication terminal 3220, only authorized persons can view the setting change/confirmation history information with setting values, which is sufficiently confidential. can ensure the integrity of the

As described above, in the second embodiment, when the two-dimensional code is read, all the data obtained therefrom are taken into the mobile wireless communication terminal 3220. is displayed. Therefore, unless there is a dedicated application having the display format, even if the barcode is read by a general-purpose barcode reader, it is impossible to make the character string read by the two-dimensional code understand what kind of display it is. A certain level of confidentiality can be secured. The application is distributed when the pachinko game machine A is delivered, and can be obtained only by authorized persons.

In the second embodiment, the authentication result of password authentication is received from the server device 3240, and whether or not the password is correct is determined based on whether the notified authentication result is authentication OK or authentication NG. First, the portable wireless communication terminal 3220 may receive the password from the server device 3240, determine whether the entered password matches the password received from the server device 3240, and determine whether the entered password is correct. Also, if you want to further ensure confidentiality, the pachinko machine A side encrypts the setting change/confirmation history information, generates a two-dimensional code, displays it, and installs it in a dedicated application installed on the mobile wireless communication terminal 3220. may be configured to add a decryption function of the setting change/confirmation history information corresponding to the above encryption.

Next, the setting value confirmation procedure of the setting change/confirmation history information in the gaming system 3210 according to the second embodiment will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG.

As shown in FIG. 250, as the first procedure for confirming the setting value of the setting change/confirmation history information in the gaming system 3210 according to the second embodiment, the pachinko game machine A performs setting change processing or setting confirmation processing. Display the hall menu screen when executed. As described above, the setting change process can be executed by turning on the setting key 328, pressing the backup clear switch 330, and turning on the power switch 35 while the power is off. Also, the setting confirmation process can be executed by turning ON the setting key 328 while the power is off. The setting key 328 can turn on the setting key switch signal by turning it in one direction, and turns off the setting key switch signal by turning it in the opposite direction (returning to its original position). It is configured so that

As a second procedure, the pachinko machine A selects and determines "setting change/confirmation history" in the hall menu screen (see, for example, FIG. 210), thereby displaying "setting change/confirmation history". is highlighted, and only the date and time data and operation type (the corresponding operation type among setting change, confirmation, and viewing) are displayed. Display the screen (see FIG. 210) (setting values are not displayed).

As a third procedure, the pachinko machine A performs the main operation in a state where "setting change/confirmation history" is selected (highlighted) on the preview screen of the setting change/confirmation history screen (see FIG. 210). When the button 662 is pressed, a two-dimensional code including the setting change/confirmation history information held in the work RAM 203 and the URL is generated, and the two-dimensional code is displayed together with the setting change/confirmation history information (see FIG. 249). ).

As a fourth procedure, the mobile wireless communication terminal 3220 takes a picture of the two-dimensional code displayed on the pachinko game machine A (see FIG. 251). After photographing the two-dimensional code, the mobile wireless communication terminal 3220 extracts the setting change/confirmation history information and the URL included in the two-dimensional code.

As a fifth procedure, the portable wireless communication terminal 3220 accesses the dedicated site for the authentication service based on the URL extracted in the third procedure, and enters the password from the password input screen (see FIG. 252) provided by this dedicated site. input.

This password is, for example, a password disclosed in an instruction manual or the like by the manufacturer of the gaming system 3210 and registered in association with the gaming system 3210 or each pachinko gaming machine A or the like. At the dedicated site, the server device 3240 accepts the input password from the mobile wireless communication terminal 3220 and compares it with the registered password to perform password authentication. Here, the server device 3240 notifies the mobile wireless communication terminal 3220 to that effect when the authentication is OK.

As a sixth procedure, the mobile wireless communication terminal 3220 displays the setting change/confirmation history information extracted in the fourth procedure on the screen in a predetermined display format (FIG. 253) when the authentication is OK in the fifth procedure. reference) is displayed on the display operation unit 3222 with the content including the setting value. As a result, the administrator who has entered the password can confirm this setting change/confirmation history information together with the setting values on the screen displayed on the display/operation unit 3222 of the mobile wireless communication terminal 3220 .

As described above, the pachinko gaming machine A according to the second embodiment includes the liquid crystal display device 16A that displays various images, the main button 662 and the select button 664 that are operation units for receiving various operations, and controls related to the game. and a sub CPU 201 that is a display control unit that controls the display of the liquid crystal display device 16A. A setting switch 332 that enables the Equipped with a work RAM 203 capable of storing and retaining written information, and an RTC 209 that measures the date and time. When the data received by the data receiving means is for setting change or setting confirmation, the work RAM 203 stores the setting change or setting confirmation, the setting value, and the date and time data from the RTC 209 as setting change/confirmation history information. A setting display function is provided for displaying setting change/confirmation history information stored in the RAM 203 in the display area of the liquid crystal display device 16A. It has a configuration in which setting change/confirmation history information is displayed by a two-dimensional code when a certain main button 662 is operated.

With this configuration, setting change or setting confirmation, setting values, and date/time data from the date/time means are stored in the work RAM 203 as setting change/confirmation history information. , the setting change/confirmation history information stored in the work RAM 203 can be displayed in a two-dimensional code when the main button 662 is operated. Therefore, if the portable wireless communication terminal 3220 reads the two-dimensional code and permits the display after password authentication, only the authorized person who knows the predetermined password can save and display the setting change/confirmation history information. Therefore, not only can it be determined whether or not an unnatural operation related to the set value has been performed, but also whether or not it is an opportunity to investigate fraudulent behavior can be determined.

Further, in the pachinko game machine A according to the second embodiment, when the setting change/confirmation history information of the work RAM 203 is displayed by the setting display function, the sub CPU 201 uses the displayed date and time data as the browsing history and , and the browsing history may be displayed in the display area of the liquid crystal display device 16A.

With this configuration, when the setting change/confirmation history information of the work RAM 203 is displayed, the displayed date and time data is stored in the work RAM 203 as the viewing history, and the viewing history is displayed in the display area of the liquid crystal display device 16A. can be done. Therefore, not only can it be determined whether or not an unnatural operation has been performed, but it can also be determined whether or not it is an opportunity to investigate fraudulent activity.

In addition, the pachinko game machine A according to the second embodiment uses the mobile wireless communication terminal 3220 to read the two-dimensional code displayed by the display control function, based on the information from the predetermined server device 3240. The communication terminal 3220 may be configured to display the setting change/confirmation history information.

With this configuration, when the two-dimensional code displayed by the display control function is read by the mobile wireless communication terminal 220, information from the predetermined server device 3240, for example, a predetermined password and the mobile wireless communication terminal 3220 The setting change/confirmation history information can be displayed on the mobile wireless communication terminal 3220 on condition that the password matches the password entered in . Therefore, since authentication can be performed with a password known only to an authorized person, an input means for identifying an authorized person is not added to the pachinko game machine A side, and costs can be reduced. This password is shown when the pachinko game machine A is delivered to the hall, and is used only by those who have the authority to change or confirm the settings.

In addition, the gaming system 3210 according to the second embodiment includes the pachinko gaming machine A described above and a server device 3240 that is connected to the network 3230 and manages a site for authentication. The server device 3240 further has a generation function of generating a two-dimensional code of the setting change/confirmation history information stored in the work RAM 203 and the URL of the site. The mobile wireless communication terminal 3220 has an authentication service device that compares and authenticates and notifies the mobile wireless communication terminal 3220 of the authentication result. A camera unit that captures an image of the two-dimensional code displayed on the , an extraction unit that analyzes the imaged two-dimensional code and extracts setting change/confirmation history information and a URL, and an input that displays a password input screen for entering a password A screen display control unit, an authentication result acquisition unit that transmits the password entered on the password input screen to the server device 3240 based on the URL and acquires the authentication result notified from the server device 3240, and when the acquired authentication result is correct. , and a history information display control unit that displays setting change/confirmation history information on the display operation unit 3222 .

With this configuration, in the gaming system according to the second embodiment, the two-dimensional code displayed by the display control function of the pachinko game machine A is read by the mobile wireless communication terminal 3220, and after authentication by the server device 3240, the mobile wireless communication terminal 3220 can display setting change/confirmation history information. Therefore, only an authorized person who knows the predetermined password can save and display the setting change confirmation information, so that it is possible not only to determine whether or not an unnatural operation related to the setting value has been performed, but also to prevent unauthorized access. It becomes possible to judge whether it is an opportunity to investigate the act.

With the above-described configuration, in the second embodiment, only an authorized person can save and display setting change/confirmation history information, so that it is possible to determine whether or not an unnatural operation related to setting values has been performed. Moreover, it is possible to provide the pachinko game machine A and the game system 3210 that can determine whether or not it is an opportunity to investigate fraudulent activity.

The game machines according to the respective embodiments of the present invention have been described above, including their functions and effects. However, it goes without saying that the present invention is not limited to the embodiments described herein, and includes various embodiments without departing from the gist of the invention described in the claims.

[Example of application to Pachislot]
For example, the invention according to the second embodiment can also be applied to pachislot. When the invention according to the second embodiment is applied to a pachislot machine, the procedures for executing the setting change process and the setting confirmation process are different from those of the pachinko machine.

In the pachislot machine, if the setting key is turned from OFF to ON while the power is OFF, the process shifts to setting change processing, and the setting value can be changed. Then, when the operation of the start lever is detected, or when it is detected that the setting key is changed from ON to OFF, the setting change is confirmed.

In order to be able to display the history of setting changes, the main CPU of the pachislot machine inputs a signal generated from the setting switch by the operation of the setting key after the above-described setting changes have been made, and then detects that the start lever has been operated. When receiving the signal indicating that the setting has been changed, it transmits data indicating that the setting has been changed and a command indicating the current setting value to the sub CPU. The main CPU of the pachislot machine constitutes a control unit that controls the progress of the game. The main CPU also constitutes data transmission means for transmitting various data to the display control section.

On the other hand, when the data received from the main CPU is an initialization command indicating that the setting has been changed, the sub CPU receives the operation type information (information indicating the setting change) indicating that the setting has been changed, and the RTC The date and time data currently being clocked by , that is, the date and time data at which the initialization command was received is stored in the work RAM 203 as setting change confirmation history information. The pachislot sub CPU constitutes a display control section that controls display on the display section. Further, the sub CPU constitutes receiving means for receiving various data from the data transmitting means.

In pachislot, confirming the setting value means operating the setting key (rotating it to the right) and displaying the current setting value on the 7-segment display based on the signal generated from the setting key-shaped switch. . As described above, the pachi-slot machine 1 shifts to the setting confirmation process under the condition that the setting key is operated from OFF to ON while the power is ON, and the setting value is displayed on the 7-segment display. The pachislot setting switch constitutes setting means for changing or confirming setting values together with the main CPU.

In order to be able to display the history of confirmation of the set values, the main CPU confirms the set values by the operation described above, and when a signal generated from the setting switch by the operation of the setting key is input, the set values are confirmed. and a setting confirmation command, which is the current setting value, to the sub CPU.

On the other hand, when the data received from the main CPU is a setting confirmation command indicating that the setting value has been confirmed, the sub CPU receives operation type information (information indicating setting confirmation) indicating confirmation of the setting value, and The date and time data currently clocked by the RTC, that is, the date and time data when the setting confirmation command indicating that the setting value was confirmed is stored as setting change confirmation history information in the work RAM 203 functioning as a backup memory. The work RAM 203 can store and retain written information even in a non-energized state.

The sub CPU that has received the setting change start command or setting confirmation command determines that the setting key has been turned on from off. Then, when the sub CPU determines that the setting key is turned on from off, it performs a whole menu display process for displaying a whole menu screen on the main screen of the liquid crystal display device of the pachislot machine. The hole menu screen displayed for pachislot is replaced with the "prize ball information" displayed on the hole menu screen (for example, see FIG. 209) displayed on the liquid crystal display device 16 of the pachinko gaming machine according to the second embodiment. Although there are some differences in details such as the display of "total medal information", it is basically the same screen as the hall menu screen displayed on the liquid crystal display device 16 of the pachinko game machine according to the second embodiment. be.

In pachislot, browsing means operating the setting key (turning it to the right) and selecting (highlighting) "setting change/confirmation history" in the hall menu screen displayed on the main screen of the liquid crystal display device. Setting change confirmation history information stored in the work RAM 203 is displayed as, for example, a setting change/confirmation history screen on condition that the main button is pressed while the main button is being pressed.

The pachislot sub CPU executes processing similar to the processing executed by the sub CPU 201 of the pachinko gaming machine according to the second embodiment, such as hole menu processing, setting change/confirmation history processing, maintenance processing, and authentication processing. be able to. Further, when the embodiment of the pachinko machine is applied to a pachislot machine, the hall menu screen, setting change/confirmation history screen, error information history screen, guide menu screen, password request screen, input The screen displayed when the entered password is inappropriate, the screen displayed on the mobile wireless communication terminal, and the like are displayed on the main screen of the pachislot liquid crystal display device and on the mobile wireless communication terminal.

Incidentally, in pachislot, when "bonus winning" is determined by a bonus lottery, one of "SBB", "BB" and "RB" is determined by a bonus distribution lottery. However, in the gaming machine of the present invention, either "SBB or BB" or "RB" is determined by a bonus allocation lottery, and either "SBB" or "BB" is determined at the end of the sign game. may

In pachislot, the "BB precursor flag" is turned on when the "SBB" or "BB" precursor game is being played. That is, the "SBB" and "BB" precursor games are managed by the "BB precursor flag". However, the gaming machine of the present invention may have a configuration in which a precursor flag for "SBB" and a precursor flag for "BB" are provided. In this case, the effect of the precursor game corresponding to "SBB" and the effect of the precursor game corresponding to "BB" may be different.

Also, in pachislot, the first ART ("SBB", "BB", "RB") and the second ART finish on the condition that they have completed the number of games they stayed in, but the first ART And the second ART may be configured to end on condition that navigation (notification of auxiliary display information) has been performed a predetermined number of times.

In addition, in pachislot, the number of staying games of "SBB" in the first ART may be fixed to, for example, "100", or, as with "BB", the number of games may be added to the number of staying games during "SBB". It may be configured to be added (added).

Further, in pachislot, the number of games in which effects of additional additions A, B, and C that may occur in BR may be performed may be fixed to, for example, "2". That is, when the effects of the additional additions A, B, and C are determined, the additional addition game number counter may be set to "2". However, the number of games in which the effects of the additional additions A, B, and C are performed may be variable. For example, the value to be set in the additional game count counter may be changed according to the type of additional game effect (additional game A, B, or C).

In pachislot, the number of games that the second ART stays in may be determined as a fixed number of games, such as "50", or alternatively, the predetermined number of games may be set as one set (for example, , 1 set "50" games), and the number of games of the second ART may be set by a plurality of sets determined by lottery. For example, the number of staying games of the second ART may be set from one set of "50" games to two sets, that is, a total of "100" games. Also, in this case, a predetermined period may be provided between sets during which the stop order is not notified and the value of the ART game number counter is not decremented for each game. Further, a lottery for the number of additional games may be performed for each game played during this predetermined period. Then, before the predetermined period ends (when the predetermined period is terminated when the number of games reaches the predetermined number of games, before the predetermined number of games is reached), a stop order other than forward pressing If a stop operation (irregular push) is performed at , the predetermined period is forcibly terminated, and the value of the ART game number counter is subtracted by "1" for each game from the game following the game in which the irregular push was performed. You may

In addition, in the case of pachislot, the rotating accessory unit 122 having the rotating accessory 123 rotated by driving the stepping motor has been described as an example of the accessory provided in the pachinko game machine. However, the pachinko game machine is not limited to this, and may be provided with an accessory that moves in the left-right direction, the up-down direction, or the front-rear direction by driving a stepping motor, a solenoid, or the like.

[3. Pachinko machine according to the third embodiment]
[Extension example of game characteristics using small winning game, etc.]
The pachinko gaming machine 1 according to the first embodiment and the pachinko gaming machine according to the second embodiment of the present invention have been described above. Also good. That is, both the pachinko gaming machine 1 according to the first embodiment and the pachinko gaming machine according to the second embodiment basically have a game property that increases the number of balls to be paid out in the jackpot game state, but in addition to this Alternatively, in a specific game state, the frequency of execution of small winning games may be increased to increase the number of output balls. A pachinko game machine according to a third embodiment that increases the number of balls to be output by increasing the execution frequency of small winning games in a specific game state will be described below.

The pachinko game machine according to the third embodiment includes a board configuration of the game board unit 17 (see, for example, FIGS. 5 to 7 and FIGS. 14 to 17), and a block diagram showing the main control circuit (see, for example, FIG. 9). , a winning random number determination table stored in the main ROM 102 of the main control circuit 100 (see, for example, FIG. 11), a symbol determination table stored in the main ROM 102 of the main control circuit 100 (see, for example, FIG. 12), and The jackpot type determination table (see, for example, FIG. 13) stored in the main ROM 102 of the main control circuit 100 has a partially different configuration from the pachinko game machine according to the first embodiment described above, but points that are not particularly mentioned are substantially the same as the pachinko gaming machine 1 according to the first embodiment described above. Also, the pachinko gaming machine according to the third embodiment may have a setting function, like the pachinko machine according to the second embodiment.

Since the pachinko game machine according to the third embodiment can adopt various variations of embodiments, the description will be made separately for the first to eighth embodiments. However, regarding the first example of the pachinko gaming machine according to the third embodiment, the explanation will focus on the configuration different from that of the pachinko gaming machine according to the first embodiment described above. It has the same configuration as the pachinko gaming machine 1 according to the form. Therefore, description of the configuration common to the pachinko gaming machine 1 according to the first embodiment described above will be omitted.

In this specification, the first example of the pachinko game machine according to the third embodiment is referred to as the first example pachinko game machine of the third embodiment (the second to eighth examples are also referred to as the same).

In addition, each pachinko machine of the second to eighth embodiments will be described with emphasis on the configuration different from the pachinko machine of the first embodiment, and unless otherwise specified, the pachinko machine of the first embodiment It has the same configuration. Therefore, the description of the configuration common to the pachinko gaming machine according to the first embodiment will be omitted.

Further, in explaining the pachinko machines of the first to eighth embodiments, the same members as those of the pachinko gaming machine 1 according to the first embodiment are denoted by the same reference numerals even if the arrangement positions are different. is doing. For example, the pachinko gaming machine 1 according to the first embodiment has a large winning opening 540 (see, for example, FIG. 5), and the large winning opening 540 provided in the pachinko gaming machine of the first embodiment (see, for example, FIG. 254 to be described later) are placed in different positions, but since they are all large winning openings, they are given the same reference numerals.

[Pachinko machine of the first embodiment]
FIG. 254 is an example of a front view showing the appearance of the game board unit in the pachinko game machine of the first embodiment.

(Appearance configuration)
The pachinko gaming machine of the first embodiment includes an attacker unit 5000 instead of the attacker unit 500 of the pachinko gaming machine 1 according to the first embodiment. This attacker unit 5000 includes a first starting port 5442, a small winning prize opening 5400, a small winning shutter 6100 that can move back and forth with respect to the transparent panel 172, and a small winning winning opening that drives the small winning shutter 6100. While it has a solenoid (not shown), it does not have the big winning port 540 and the special electric accessory 600 . As shown in FIG. 254, the big prize opening 540 and the special electric accessory 600 are located above and to the right of the liquid crystal display device 16 in the game area 20 and upstream of both the attacker unit 5000 and the passage gate 49. is provided. Incidentally, the number of prize balls to be paid out when the game balls enter the small winning prize opening 5400 is, for example, 15 balls.

As with the pachinko gaming machine 1 according to the first embodiment, the special electric accessory 600 enables (or facilitates) winning of game balls into the large winning opening 540 by driving the shutter 610 with the large winning opening solenoid. ) and a closed mode in which it is impossible (or difficult) to enter a game ball into the big winning hole 540 (drive).

A game ball hit to the right collides with the cushioning member 950 to weaken the force of the game ball. Then, the game ball whose momentum is weakened by colliding with the cushioning member 950 falls above the shutter 610 .

In addition, the first starting port 5442, the small winning prize port 5400, the small winning shutter 6100, and the small winning prize port solenoid (not shown) do not necessarily need to be unitized, and each is separate. Alternatively, only some of these (for example, the small winning opening 5400, the small winning shutter 6100, and the small winning opening solenoid may be unitized.

Further, the pachinko game machine of the first embodiment is configured such that all or most of the game balls pass through the passage gate 49 when the game balls are shot (right-handed) toward the right side area. The passage gate 49, like the pachinko gaming machine 1 according to the above-described first embodiment, gives an opportunity for normal symbol determination on the condition that the game ball passes, and in the time-saving gaming state, to the second start port 440 It becomes an electric support state in which winning of game balls is facilitated. On the other hand, in the pachinko game machine of the first embodiment, unlike the pachinko game machine 1 according to the first embodiment described above, even in a non-time-saving game state that is not an electric support state, it is not as much as the time-saving game state. However, the right-handed game ball is relatively configured to enter the second starting hole 440 (at least, the left-handed game ball that shoots the game ball toward the left side area is the first starting opening). It is much easier than winning the mouth 5442). However, even if a game ball enters the second starting port 440, the number of prize balls to be paid out is one.

In addition, in the pachinko game machine 1 according to the above-described first embodiment, the normal electric accessory unit 400 is arranged at the lower left side of the liquid crystal display device 16 in the game area 20 (for example, see FIG. 5). In the pachinko game machine of the embodiment, the normal electric accessory unit 400 is arranged between the big winning prize opening 540 and the small winning winning prize opening 5400 (that is, between the shutter 610 and the small winning shutter 6100). . This normal electric accessory unit 400 is a unit body in which the second start port 440, the out port 450 and the normal electric accessory 460 are integrated in the same manner as the pachinko game machine 1 according to the first embodiment described above. They do not necessarily have to be unitized, and they may be separate bodies, or only some of them (for example, the second starting port 440 and the normal electric accessory 460 may be unitized.

The normal electric accessory 460 replaces the blade member 4620 of the pachinko game machine 1 according to the first embodiment described above, and is made to be movable forward and backward with respect to the transparent panel 172, so that the game ball to the second start port 440 Or, it has a movable shutter 4650 that can change the winning mode of the game ball to the second starting port 440 between impossible mode and possible mode. In addition, the ordinary electric accessory 460 includes a starter solenoid (not shown) and a power transmission mechanism (not shown) that transmits the power of the starter solenoid to the movable shutter 4650 .

In addition, similarly to the pachinko gaming machine 1 according to the above-described first embodiment, the winning of the game ball to the first start port 5442 is performed by hitting to the left, and the winning of the game ball to the second start port 440 is in principle It is done by hitting right.

(hit judgment table)
FIG. 255 is an example of a winning random number determination table stored in the main ROM 102 of the main control circuit 100 of the pachinko game machine of the first embodiment.

In the pachinko gaming machine of the first embodiment, as shown in FIG. 255, unlike the pachinko gaming machine 1 according to the above-described first embodiment, the main CPU 101 controls when a game ball wins the first start port 5442. The result of the big hit judgment using the random number value for big hit judgment acquired in 1 is not decided as a "small hit", but is decided as a "big hit" or "losing" (see FIG. 255(a)). In addition, in the big hit determination using the big hit determination random number value acquired when the game ball wins the second starting port 440, the main CPU 101 determines the results of the big hit determination as "big hit", "small hit" and " "Loss" (see FIG. 255(b)).

More specifically, the main CPU 101 subtracts the number of big-hit judgment value data from the acquired random number for judging a big hit in the big-hit judgment using the random number value for judging a big hit acquired when the game ball wins in the first starting hole 5442. Then, when borrowing (becomes negative) occurs, it is determined as a "big hit", and when borrowing does not occur, it is determined as a loss. In addition, in the big hit determination using the big hit determination random number value acquired when the game ball wins in the second starting port 440, the main CPU 101 first determines the number of big hit determination value data from the acquired big hit determination random number value. If there is a borrowing, it is judged as a "big hit", and if there is no borrowing, the number of small hit judgment value data is subtracted, and if a borrowing occurs, it is judged as a "small hit". If there is no borrowing, it is determined that the item is lost. For example, in the high-probability gaming state (variable probability flag ON), if the random number value for judging a big hit obtained when the game ball enters the second starting port 440 is 13200, then "13200 (random number for judging a big hit) -1311 (Big hit judgment value data number) = 11889 ≠ Borrowing”, so the result of the big hit judgment is not judged to be a “big hit”, and “11889 (difference between the acquired random number for judging a big hit and the number of big hit judgment value data) -13107 (small hit determination value data number) = -1218 = borrowing", and the result of big hit determination is determined as "small hit". In addition, if the result of the jackpot judgment is not judged to be a "jackpot", the difference between the obtained random number for judging a big hit and the number of data Using the numerical value (13200 in the above), "13200 (obtained random number for judging the big hit) - 14418 (the sum of the number of big hit judgment value data and the number of small hit judgment value data) = -1218 = borrowing", the big hit The determination result may be determined to be a "minor hit".

In addition, in Figures 255 (a) and (b), the value of the big hit determination data is 0-204 when the probability variation flag is 0, and 0-1310 when the probability variation flag is 1. Especially in Figure 255 (b), the probability variation flag Depending on the value, the value of the small hit determination value data is 205-13311, 1311-14417 and the number of data does not change, but the data value fluctuates. However, not limited to this, as another example of how to hold data, the small hit determination data is set to 0-13106 regardless of the value of the probability variation flag, and the value of the big hit determination data is 13107-13311 when the probability variation flag is 0, 13107-13311, probability variation flag 1 By setting 13107 to 14417 at the time of , the random number value that becomes a small hit does not change depending on the state, and it is possible to reduce the types of constant data in the program.

In addition, in the pachinko game machine of the first embodiment, in the big hit determination by the main CPU 101 using the big hit determination random number acquired when the game ball wins the first start hole 5442, it is determined as a "small hit". However, it is not essential to set the probability of being determined as a "small hit" to 0%. For example, in the jackpot determination using the jackpot determination random number obtained when the game ball wins the first start port 5442, the main CPU 101 has a very low probability compared to the second special lottery (for example, in the normal game state If the probability is within a range in which the number of output balls cannot be increased in the game), it may be determined as a "small hit".

(symbol judgment table)
FIG. 256 shows an example of the symbol determination table (first starting opening, second starting opening) stored in the main ROM 102 of the main control circuit 100 of the pachinko game machine of the first embodiment. First, regarding the symbol determination table (first start port), the major difference between FIG. 256 and FIG. The number of hit selection symbol commands that are selected in the case of winning is large. Also, with regard to the symbol determination table (second starting port), the major difference between FIG. 256 and FIG. The number of hit selection symbol commands that are selected in the case of winning is large.

(Jackpot type determination table)
FIG. 257 is an example of a jackpot type determination table stored in the main ROM 102 of the main control circuit 100 in the pachinko game machine of the first embodiment. 13, the main CPU 101 determines the number of rounds to be executed in the jackpot game, the number of rounds to be executed in the jackpot game, the number of rounds to be executed from the jackpot game state to the general game state when the jackpot game ends, and the number of rounds to be executed in the jackpot game, according to the winning selection symbol command related to the jackpot, as in FIG. 13 . (A game state that is not a jackpot game state, the same shall apply hereinafter.) In order to determine the type of jackpot, such as whether to turn on the variable probability flag and whether to turn on the time saving flag in the game state after shifting to is a table. Fig. 257 differs greatly from Fig. 13 in that the main CPU 101 does not necessarily determine the number of times of time saving to be "100" even when the variable probability flag is set to "1", and 24 times, 30 times, 36 times. , 42 times, 48 times and 100 times may be determined to be any specified number of times, and even if the variable probability flag is set to "0", the number of times of time saving is determined to be "100" There is one point.

In addition, in the pachinko gaming machine of the first embodiment, including the pachinko gaming machine 1 according to the first embodiment, when both the variable probability flag and the time saving flag are set to "1", the main CPU 101 moves from the jackpot gaming state. The game state after shifting to the normal game state is controlled to a ``probable variable time-reduction game state'' which is a high-probability game state and a time-reduction game state. In this case, the high probability game state is until the next big hit is won (by the main CPU 101 using the big hit determination random value obtained when the game ball wins the first start port 5442 or the second start port 440 (Until it is determined as a "big hit" in the big hit determination), the time saving game state ends when the determined specified number of time saving games are digested. Therefore, when the big win game state is shifted to the high-probability time-saving game state, and the next big win is not won before the prescribed number of time-saving games are digested, the main CPU 101 determines that the prescribed number of time-saving games have been digested. The later game state is controlled to a ``high-probability non-time-saving game state'' which is a high-probability game state and a non-time-saving game state. In addition, in this specification, the low-probability game state and time-saving game state are referred to as "low-probability time-saving game state". In addition, "time-saving game" is a variable display of special symbols, and the number of times of time-saving is digested regardless of whether the variable display of the first special symbol or the variable display of the second special symbol is performed. .

(Variation time of special design)
Next, see FIGS. 258 and 259 for the variation time of the first special symbol or second special symbol performed in the first special symbol display portion 73 or the second special symbol display portion 74 (both see FIG. 8). and explain. The variation time of the special symbol is not explained in detail in the pachinko gaming machine 1 according to the above-described first embodiment, but it is an important matter in the pachinko gaming machine of the first embodiment.

FIG. 258 is a table stored in the main ROM 102 in the pachinko game machine of the first embodiment, and is an example of a special symbol variable time (variable display time) determination table for low start. FIG. 259 is a table stored in the main ROM 102 in the pachinko game machine of the first embodiment, and is an example of a special symbol variable time (variable display time) determination table for high start. The expected value of the number of execution times of variable display of special symbols per unit time is higher than when determining the fluctuation time of special symbols with reference to the special symbol fluctuation time determination table for low start. When the fluctuation time of the special symbol is determined with reference to the fluctuation time determination table, it is larger.

The main CPU 101 determines the variation time of the special symbol by referring to the special symbol variation time determination table for low start shown in FIG. ”). In addition, in the "high-probability short-time gaming state", "high-probability non-short-time gaming state" or "low-probability short-time gaming state", with reference to the special symbol fluctuation time determination table for high start shown in FIG. Determines the fluctuation time of the design.

In addition, the "Nth time" shown in the column of the number of fluctuations of the special symbol for high start shown in FIG. Sometimes, it is a variable display of a special symbol that may be the last in the "high-probability short-time gaming state" or "low-probability short-time gaming state". In other words, it is a variable display of the special symbol of the time reduction number that may be determined. For example, in the pachinko game machine of the first embodiment, as described above, the number of times of time reduction is determined to be one of 24 times, 30 times, 36 times, 42 times, 48 times and 100 times, so the 24th special Symbol variation display, special symbol variation display for the 30th time, special symbol variation display for the 36th time, special symbol variation display for the 42nd time, special symbol variation display for the 48th time, and special symbol variation display for the 100th time. , the N-th special symbol is displayed in a variable manner. Then, the variable display of the special symbols other than the N-th time is "other than the N-th time".

When the main CPU 101 determines the variation time of the first special symbol or/and the second special symbol, it transmits a variation pattern command corresponding to the determined variation time to the sub CPU 201, and the variation corresponding to the determined variation time. The first special symbol or/and the second special symbol is variably displayed over time, and the first special symbol or/and the second special symbol being variably displayed based on the symbol designation command determined with reference to FIG. Execute control to stop As a result, the big hit determination (hereinafter referred to as "first special lottery") made based on the winning of the game ball to the first start port 5442 or / and based on the winning of the game ball to the second start port 440 The result of the big hit determination (hereinafter referred to as "second special lottery") performed by the lottery is derived. The control of the variable display and stop of the first special symbol and/or the second special symbol performed by the main CPU 101 corresponds to the processing of step S85 (see FIG. 122) of the pachinko gaming machine 1 according to the first embodiment.

In this specification, when the result of the special lottery is displayed on the first special symbol display portion 73 or the second special symbol display portion 74 by the main CPU 101, it is referred to as "derivation". The display of the result of the special lottery is called "display".

The sub CPU 201 that has received the variation pattern command transmitted from the main CPU 101 determines whether the received variation pattern command is the first special symbol variation pattern command or the second special symbol variation pattern command. When the game state at the start of the special symbol variation (when the variation pattern command is received) is the "normal game state", the sub CPU 201 determines that the received variation pattern command is the first special symbol variation pattern command. If there is, control is performed via the display control circuit 204 so that the effect content determined based on the received variation pattern command is displayed on the liquid crystal display device 16, and the received variation pattern command is the variation pattern of the second special symbol. If it is a command, the control (control for displaying on the liquid crystal display device 16 the effect content determined based on the received variation pattern command) is not executed. Also, when the game state at the start of the fluctuation of the special symbol (when receiving the fluctuation pattern command) is "high probability short working hours gaming state", "high certainty short working hours gaming state" or "low certainty short working hours gaming state", sub If the received variation pattern command is the variation pattern command of the second special symbol, the CPU 201 controls the display control circuit 204 so that the effect content determined based on the received variation pattern command is displayed on the liquid crystal display device 16. If the received variation pattern command is the first special symbol variation pattern command, the control (control to display the effect content determined based on the received variation pattern command on the liquid crystal display device 16) don't run

In addition, although the "normal game state" and "high-probability short-time game state" have been described in the pachinko gaming machine 1 according to the above-described first embodiment, here again, the "normal game state" and the "high-probability Time-saving gaming state”, “high-probability non-time-saving gaming state” and “low-probability short-time gaming state” will be described. In the "normal game state", the probability that the special symbol variable display is performed and the symbol combination of "big hit" is derived (probability that the result of the special lottery is "big hit") is relatively low, and the electronic It is a game state without support. In the “high-probability short-time gaming state”, the probability that the special symbols will be displayed and the “big hit” pattern combination will be derived (probability that the special lottery result will be a “big hit”) is relatively high, and the electric support It is a game state that becomes a state. The "high-probability non-time-saving gaming state" is a gaming state in which the variable display of special symbols is performed and the probability of deriving a "jackpot" symbol combination is relatively high and there is no electric support. The "low-probability short-time gaming state" is a gaming state in which the variable display of special symbols is performed and the probability of deriving a "jackpot" symbol combination is relatively low, but the electric support state. When it is in the "high-probability short-time gaming state" and "low-probable short-time gaming state" that are in the electric support state, the main CPU 101 is sent from the command output port 106 to the hall computer (both see FIG. 9) via the external terminal plate 320 , the time-saving signal is output as an external output signal. Thereby, the hall computer can manage whether or not each pachinko gaming machine 1 is in the time-saving mode (during electric power support). In addition, for example, a data display machine connected directly or indirectly to the pachinko machine is arranged above the pachinko machine, and this data display machine also displays the fact that working hours are being reduced. is possible.

The first characteristic item of the special symbol variation time in the pachinko gaming machine of the first embodiment is that when the game state at the start of the special symbol variation is the "normal game state", the first special symbol The average time of the variation time of the second special symbol is much longer than the average time of the variation time. Also, when the game state at the start of the fluctuation of the special symbol is "high probability short working hours game state", "high probability non-short working hours gaming state" or "low probability short working hours gaming state", the average of the fluctuation time of the first special symbol The point is that the average time of the variation time of the second special symbol is much shorter than the time. Such a characteristic point is particularly brought out by the fluctuation time when the result of the second special lottery is "minor win" or "losing".

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 258, in the "normal game state" in which both the variable probability flag and the time saving flag are off, the result of the second special lottery was "small hit" or "losing". At this time, the main CPU 101 performs the variable display of the second special symbol (long variation A, long variation B or long variation C) for a very long time such as 580000 msec to 600000 msec.

In addition, in the pachinko gaming machine of the first embodiment, in the "normal game state", as a pattern of the variation display of the second special symbol when the result of the second special lottery is "minor win" or "losing" , Only three patterns of long fluctuation A to long fluctuation C with different fluctuation times are prepared, but from the viewpoint of preventing the act of firing the game ball with right hitting only at the timing when the small winning prize opening 5400 is in the open mode For example, it is preferable to prepare more patterns (eg, 10 patterns) in the range of 500000 msec to 600000 msec.

On the other hand, the game state at the start of the fluctuation of the special symbol is the "high probability non-time-saving gaming state" with the probability variation flag ON and the time saving flag OFF, the "high probability non-time-saving gaming state" with the probability variation flag ON and the time saving flag ON, or the probability variation flag When the result of the second special lottery is "small win" or "losing" in the case of "low-probability short-time gaming state" with OFF and short-time flag ON, under certain conditions, the main CPU 101 The variable display of the second special symbol is performed for an extremely short time (super speed variation).

In addition, "normal game state", "high probability short working hours gaming state", "high probability short working hours gaming state" and "low probability short working hours gaming state" are all general gaming states.

In addition, the second characteristic item of the special symbol variation time in the pachinko game machine of the first embodiment is that the determination of the special symbol variation is determined by referring to the special symbol variation time table for high start. In the high-probability non-time-saving gaming state, the high-probability short-time gaming state, or the low-probability short-time gaming state, as shown in FIG. High-start normal reach, high-start super reach A, and high-start super reach B) are performed. Such a ready-to-win effect is displayed on the liquid crystal display device 16 by the sub CPU 201 that has received the command transmitted from the main CPU 101, using a plurality of identification symbols that are variably displayed.

(Variation display control of first special symbol and second special symbol)
By the way, as described above, in the pachinko gaming machine 1 according to the first embodiment, when both the starting memory for the first special symbol and the starting memory for the second special symbol are suspended, which starting memory is first Regardless of whether it is held in the second special design, priority is given to canceling the suspension of the start memory for the second special design (satisfaction of the start condition of the second special design), and the second special design display unit 73 changes the second special design. The display is performed (while the second special symbol is being variably displayed, the first special symbol is not variably displayed).

In the pachinko game machine of the first embodiment, the conditions for starting the first special symbol are that the starting memory for the first special symbol is reserved even if the second special symbol is being displayed in a variable display; It is established on the condition that the special symbols are not variably displayed, and that it is in a general game state (a game state that is neither a big win game state nor a small win game state). In addition, the condition for starting the second special symbol is that even if the first special symbol is being variably displayed, the starting memory for the second special symbol is suspended and the variability display of the second special symbol is performed. And, it is established on the condition that it is in a general game state (a game state that is neither a big hit game state nor a small hit game state). Therefore, in the pachinko gaming machine of the first embodiment, even if the main CPU 101 performs variable display of any one of the first special symbol and the second special symbol, the other special symbol is started. When the condition is established, the variable display of the other special symbol is started, and in this case, the variable display of the first special symbol and the variable display of the second special symbol are performed in parallel.

In this way, when the variable display of the first special symbol and the variable display of the second special symbol are performed in parallel, the main CPU 101 determines a symbol combination in which both the first special symbol and the second special symbol are jackpot symbols. Do processing so that it does not stop at

More specifically, when the main CPU 101 is performing both the variable display of the first special symbol and the variable display of the second special symbol, if one special symbol stops with a symbol combination indicating a jackpot symbol, the other special symbol is displayed. The special symbols are forcibly stopped with a symbol combination showing a loss regardless of the result of the special lottery. When one of the special symbols stops at a symbol combination indicating a big hit symbol, the state is shifted from the general game state to the big win game state as described above. None of the conditions are satisfied, and the main CPU 101 does not perform any new variable display of the first special symbol or new variable display of the second special symbol.

Further, when the main CPU 101 performs both the variable display of the first special symbol and the variable display of the second special symbol, if one of the special symbols stops at a symbol combination indicating a small winning symbol, the general game is executed. Based on the transition from the state to the small winning game state (stopping at the combination of symbols showing the small winning pattern), the timing of the fluctuation time of the other special symbol is interrupted, and the transition from the small winning game state to the general game state ( Based on the end of the small winning game), the process of restarting the timing of the fluctuation time of the other special symbol is performed. When one of the special symbols stops at a symbol combination indicating a small winning pattern, the normal game state shifts to the small winning game state as described above. None of the symbol start conditions are satisfied, and the main CPU 101 does not newly perform either the first special symbol variable display or the second special symbol variable display. However, when both the variable display of the first special symbol and the variable display of the second special symbol are being performed, if one of the special symbols stops at a symbol combination indicating a small winning symbol, the main CPU 101 is during the variable display. For the other special symbol, the variable display of the LED group 73a or the LED group 74a (see FIG. 8 for both) is apparently performed in the same manner as during the variable display, but the timing of the variable time is interrupted as described above.

In addition, the small winning game state is a waiting period (opening interval period) until the execution of the small winning game is started, a small winning game execution period of less than 1800 msec, and a waiting period after the small winning game is executed. (Ending Interval Period) is about 5000 msec.

Further, in the pachinko gaming machine of the first embodiment, when the main CPU 101 performs both the variable display of the first special symbol and the variable display of the second special symbol, one of the special symbols is a symbol indicating a big hit symbol. When the combination is stopped, control is performed to forcibly stop the other special symbol with a symbol combination indicating a loss, and when one special symbol stops with a symbol combination indicating a small hit symbol, the other special symbol is stopped. Interrupting the timing of the fluctuation time of the other special symbol based on the transition from the small winning game state to the general game state (end of the small winning game). can't For example, when both the variable display of the first special symbol and the variable display of the second special symbol are performed, if one special symbol stops at a symbol combination indicating a big hit symbol, the variation time of the other special symbol interrupting the clocking, and based on the transition from the jackpot game state to the general game state (end of the jackpot game), the process of restarting the clocking of the fluctuation time of the other special pattern is performed, and one special pattern is a small hit pattern. When the game is stopped at the indicated symbol combination, the other special symbol may be forcibly stopped at the symbol combination indicating the failure. Also, when both the variable display of the first special symbol and the variable display of the second special symbol are performed, one of the special symbols stops at either the symbol combination indicating the big winning symbol or the symbol combination indicating the small winning symbol. Even in such a case, the timing of the variation time of the other special symbol is interrupted, and the timing of the variation time of the other special symbol is resumed based on the transition from the big win game state or the small win game state to the general game state. You may make it process. Further, when both the variable display of the first special symbol and the variable display of the second special symbol are performed, either the symbol combination indicating the big winning symbol or the symbol combination indicating the small winning symbol is selected as one of the special symbols. Even if it is stopped, control may be performed to forcibly stop the other special symbol with a symbol combination indicating a failure.

Further, the main CPU 101 determines that the result of either one of the first special lottery and the second special lottery is a "big win", and during the variable display of the special symbols based on the "big win", even if the other Even if the starting condition of the special pattern is satisfied, the other special lottery is executed as a non-winning process that does not result in a "big hit". In this non-winning process, even if the random number value for judging a big hit is obtained based on the winning of the game ball to the first start hole 5442 or the second start hole 440, the judgment value for the big hit decision in the hit random number decision table (see FIG. 255) Since the data is excluded (replaced by the loss determination value data) and the determination is made, the result of the other special lottery is "small win" or "loss". For example, in the high-probability gaming state, if the random number for judging the big hit obtained based on the winning of the game ball to the second starting port 440 is "650", according to the random number judging table (see FIG. 255) , which should be a "jackpot", is determined to be a "losing". However, the non-winning process is not limited to such a mode, the result of the jackpot determination using the jackpot determination random number obtained based on the winning of the game ball to the first start port 5442 or the second start port 440 Even if it is a "big hit", the processing may be such that the "big hit" is cleared to make it "losing".

Further, as in the pachinko gaming machine 1 according to the first embodiment, when the variable display of the second special symbol is given priority over the variable display of the first special symbol, the first special lottery and the second special lottery Both cannot be elected at the same time. For example, as shown in the special symbol storage check process of FIG. 124, when the main CPU 101 performs a special lottery based on the winning in the second starting port 440, the first starting port 5442 is selected in the same interrupt processing. This is because no special lottery will be held based on the winning prize.

However, when the variable display of the first special symbol and the variable display of the second special symbol are performed in parallel as in the pachinko gaming machine of the first embodiment, the main CPU 101 determines that the game state is the "normal game state". , "high-probability short-time gaming state", "high-probability non-short-time gaming state" and "low-probability short-time gaming state", both the starting condition of the first special symbol and the starting condition of the second special symbol is established, both the second special lottery and the first special lottery are performed in this order within the same interrupt process. Thus, regardless of the gaming state, the control load on the main CPU 101 can be reduced by enabling both the second special lottery and the first special lottery to be performed in a predetermined order within the same interrupt process. While reducing, it is possible to perform the variable display of the first special symbol and the variable display of the second special symbol in parallel.

By the way, since it is rare that both the starting condition of the first special symbol and the starting condition of the second special symbol are satisfied at the same time, usually, within the same interrupt process, the first special lottery and the second special lottery Only one of them (the special lottery for which the starting condition is satisfied) is performed by the main CPU 101 . Also, when neither the starting condition for the first special symbol nor the second special symbol is established, the main CPU 101 does not perform either the first special lottery or the second special lottery. However, for example, both the variable display of the first special symbol and the variable display of the second special symbol are stopped in the jackpot game state (that is, the variable display of the first special symbol and the variable display of the second special symbol are stopped. The timing of the fluctuation time is not interrupted for any of them), and if both the start memory of the first special symbol and the start memory of the second special symbol are suspended at the time when the big win game state is completed, the big win game After the state ends, both the starting condition for the first special symbol and the starting condition for the second special symbol can be met at the same time. In this case, the results of both the first special lottery and the second special lottery performed in the same interrupt process may result in a "big hit" at the same time. In particular, when the jackpot game state ends and shifts to the "high-probability short-time gaming state" or "high-probability non-short-time gaming state", the probability that the result of the first special lottery and the second special lottery will be "big hit". is relatively high, it is possible that both the first special lottery and the second special lottery performed in the same interrupt processing result in a "jackpot" at the same time. In addition, although the possibility of establishment is extremely rare than the above example, for example, there is no hold in both the start memory of the first special symbol and the start memory of the second special symbol, and the first start port 5442 and the second start port 440 When the game ball enters at the same time, or after both the starting memory of the first special symbol and the starting memory of the second special symbol are suspended and the first special symbol and the second special symbol are derived at the same time Also, the results of both the first special lottery and the second special lottery performed in the same interrupt process may result in a "jackpot" at the same time.

Therefore, when both the starting condition for the first special symbol and the starting condition for the second special symbol are satisfied at the same time, the main CPU 101 first performs the second special lottery regardless of the gaming state, as described above. After that, the first special lottery is processed, and when the result of the second special lottery is "big win", the big win flag is set, and in the first special lottery performed after that, the big win flag is set. We are trying to judge whether or not At this time, if the jackpot flag is set, the main CPU 101 performs the same interrupt processing by executing the first special drawing as the above-described non-winning processing so that the result of the first special drawing does not turn out to be a "jackpot." To prevent the result of both the first special lottery and the second special lottery performed inside from becoming a "big hit" at the same time. However, instead of this, when the big win flag is set because the result of the second special lottery performed earlier in the same interrupt processing is "big win", the first special lottery itself is not executed and the big win is won. If the flag is not raised, the first special lottery may be executed. However, when the result of the second special lottery carried out earlier in the same interrupt process is a "minor win", the other first special lottery is carried out normally instead of the non-winning process. Therefore, it is possible to prevent a "big win" with a relatively high profit degree from being canceled by a "minor win" with a relatively low profit degree.

In this way, even if the variable display of the first special symbol and the variable display of the second special symbol are carried out in parallel, both the first special symbol and the second special symbol are symbol combinations indicating the jackpot symbol. We are trying not to cause such things as stopping.

It should be noted that the fact that the results of both the first special lottery and the second special lottery performed within the same interrupt process become a "jackpot" at the same time means that after the jackpot game state ends, the "high-probability short-time game state" or There is a relatively high possibility that it will occur when moving to the "high-quality non-time-saving gaming state". Therefore, in the "high-accuracy short-time gaming state" or "high-accuracy non-short-time gaming state", the pachinko machine of the first embodiment in which the game is played by mainly winning the second start port 440 rather than the first start port 5442, It is preferable to perform the second special lottery and the first special lottery in this order within the same interrupt process. However, without being limited to this, the first special lottery and the second special lottery may be performed in this order within the same interrupt process.

(Game flow)
In the "normal game state" in which both the variable probability flag and the time saving flag are off, when the game ball shot toward the game area 20 by the player operating the shooting handle 32 wins the first start port 5442 , normal fluctuations (normal fluctuation A, normal fluctuation B) such as 5000 msec or 10000 msec are performed unless reach effects (normal reach for low start, super reach A for low start, super reach B for low start) are performed. On the other hand, when the game ball shot toward the game area 20 by the player operating the shooting handle 32 in the "normal game state" wins the second start hole 440, as described above, the second special lottery As long as the result is not "big hit", the fluctuation display of the second special symbol (long fluctuation A, long fluctuation B or long fluctuation C) is performed for a very long time such as 580000 msec to 600000 msec (see FIG. 258). In the second special lottery, unlike the first special lottery, the ``small win'' is won with a relatively high probability of about 1/5, but the variable display of the second special pattern is performed for such an extremely long time. Therefore, in the "normal game state", a general player plays the game with a left-handed shot that can win the first start port 5442 rather than a right-handed shot that can win the second start port 440. It will be done.

In the "normal game state", when the game ball launched toward the game area 20 wins the first start hole 5442, the main CPU 101 conducts the first special lottery. This first special lottery results in a "big hit" with a probability of about 1/319, and otherwise results in a "loss". Then, when the result of the first special lottery is "big hit", the main CPU 101 activates the condition device and activates the accessory continuous actuating device. The condition device operates on the condition that the result of the special lottery is a "big win" and does not operate when the result of the special lottery is a "minor win" or "losing". The accessory continuous operation device operates on the condition that the condition device has operated. The main CPU 101 executes control to shift from the general game state to the jackpot game state based on the activation of the accessory continuous actuating device.

After shifting to the jackpot game state, the main CPU 101 executes a jackpot game that is advantageous to the player. As described in the pachinko gaming machine 1 according to the first embodiment, this jackpot game is a game in which a round game in which the big winning opening 540 is in an open mode is executed over a plurality of rounds. When a game ball enters the big winning hole 540 in the open mode, the prize ball is paid out as described in the pachinko gaming machine 1 according to the above-described first embodiment. As described above, the number of rounds of the round game executed in the jackpot game is determined by the control of the main CPU 101 based on the jackpot type determination table of FIG. be.

When the result of the first special lottery is "big win", the main CPU 101, based on the kind of big win determined with reference to FIGS. Determine the game state. For example, when the hit selection symbol command is "z7", when the execution of the big win game is completed, the main CPU 101 executes control to shift from the big win game state to the "high-accuracy time-saving game state".

In the "high-probability short-time gaming state", "high-probability short-time gaming state" and "low-probability short-time gaming state", when the game ball wins the second start port 440, the main CPU 101 determines that the result of the second special lottery Unless it is a "jackpot", a super-fast variation with a variation time of 1000 msec is performed. Also, in the second special lottery, a "small hit" is won with a relatively high probability of about 1/5. Therefore, a general player can win the first start port 5442 in the "high-accuracy short-time gaming state", "high-accuracy short-time gaming state" and "low-accurate short-time gaming state". Rather than hitting, the game is played with right-handed hitting that can win at the second starting port 440. - 特許庁

Here, for each of the general game state "normal game state", "high-probability short-time game state", "high-probability non-short-time game state" and "low-probability short-time game state", special symbols for each game state The expected value of the value obtained by dividing the number of prize balls paid out by the number of game balls fired while the (expected number of balls)/(number of balls shot per unit time)]) will be described. Of the parameters that affect the "expected value of the number of prize balls per unit time", the "number of balls per unit time" is 100 balls per minute. Another parameter, "expected number of prize balls for number of shot balls per unit time" will be described later.

In addition, in the case of the enclosed type gaming machine described above, since the game balls as game media are not discharged to the outside and can be played, when a prize is won, prize balls are paid out as game media. data (referred to as “prize ball data” in this specification) is provided. For example, when the player wins a winning slot with 15 prize balls, 15 is given as the prize ball data corresponding to the 15 prize balls in the case of an enclosed game machine.

First, in the "normal game state", the expected value of the number of prize balls for the number of shot balls is much higher than any of the "high probability short-time game state", "high-probability non-short-time game state" and "low-probability short-time game state". It is a matter of course for those skilled in the art that the expected value of the number of prize balls to the number of balls shot per unit time is far below 1 without explanation.

Next, in the “high-probability short-time gaming state” and “low-probability short-time gaming state”, it becomes the electric support state as described above, and the winning of the game ball to the second start port 440 is easier than in the “normal gaming state”. become. In addition, in the second special lottery which is frequently executed based on the winning of the game to the second starting port 440, as described above, the "minor win" is won with a probability of about 1/5. Therefore, the main CPU 101 controls the small-hit game state in which the small-hit winning port 5400 is opened at an extremely high frequency compared to the "normal game state". However, since all or most of the game balls hit to the right pass through the passage gate 49, the second starting port 440 is almost open. Therefore, all or most of the game balls hit to the right will win the second start port 440, and the game balls reaching the small winning prize port 5400 arranged downstream of the second start port 440 are somewhat Although there are spilled balls, there are almost none. Moreover, even if a game ball enters the second starting port 440, the number of prize balls is one. Therefore, in the "high-probability short-time gaming state" and "low-probability short-time gaming state", the expected value of the number of prize balls with respect to the number of shot balls does not exceed 1 (less than 1) even if the ball is hit to the right. However, since the winning to the second starting port 440 is facilitated, the expected value of the number of prize balls with respect to the number of shot balls does not greatly fall below 1 as in the "normal game state".

Next, in the "high-probability non-time-saving gaming state", the expected value of the number of prize balls with respect to the number of shot balls can exceed 1. This is a) Although it is not as high as the “high-probability short-time gaming state” or “low-probability short-time gaming state”, the game ball hit to the right is relatively configured to win the second start port 440. b) Unless the result of the second special lottery is a "big hit", the second special symbol will be displayed (variably displayed) with a super-speed fluctuation with a fluctuation time of 1000 msec, c) In the second special lottery, about Winning a "small win" with a relatively high probability of 1/5, d) when a small win game is executed, the game ball that did not win the second start hole 440 wins the small win prize hole 5400. e) the number of prize balls paid out when a game ball wins in the small winning prize opening 5400 is relatively large (for example, 15 balls).

In this specification, it is assumed that the expected value of the number of prize balls for the number of balls fired per unit time exceeds 1 in the "high-quality non-time-saving gaming state", but it is not necessarily limited to this, and the unit The expected value of the number of prize balls with respect to the number of shot balls per time should be the highest when it is controlled to the "high-accuracy non-time-saving game state" in the general game state.

It should be obvious to those skilled in the art that the expected value of the number of prize balls for the number of balls shot per unit time greatly exceeds 1 in the jackpot game state.

In addition, in the pachinko gaming machine of the first embodiment, the expected value of the number of prize balls for the number of shot balls per unit time in the general gaming state exceeds 1 when the "high accuracy non-time-saving gaming state". In the "high-probability time-saving game state", the expected value of the number of prize balls to the number of shot balls per unit time is set to be less than one. However, it is not limited to this, as a "high-probability short-time gaming state", the probability that the special symbols are displayed fluctuating and the symbol combination of "big hit" is derived (probability that the result of the special lottery will be a "big hit") It is relatively high and electric sapo state, and the expected value of the number of prize balls per unit time is less than 1 "First high-probability short-time gaming state", and the variable display of special symbols is performed " A prize for the number of shot balls per unit time by having a relatively high probability of deriving a pattern combination of "big win", without an electric sapo, and shortening the variation time of the second special pattern as compared to the "normal game state". A "second high-probability short-time gaming state" in which the expected value of the number of balls exceeds 1 may be provided. In this case, it is not necessary to provide the "high-probability short-time gaming state".

As described above, the main CPU 101 outputs the time-saving medium signal to the hall computer as an external output signal, but when the transition from the "high-accuracy short-time gaming state" to the "high-accuracy non-time-saving gaming state" occurs, the time-saving medium signal must be turned from ON to OFF. Therefore, if the expected value of the number of prize balls for the number of balls fired per unit time exceeds 1 when the time saving signal is OFF, even if it is a "normal game state" from the hall computer side. Regardless of whether the expected value of the number of prize balls for the number of balls fired per unit time exceeds 1 (in this case, fraud is suspected), or because it is a "high accuracy non-time-saving gaming state", the balls fired per unit time It cannot be determined whether the expected value of the number of prize balls for the number exceeds one. However, when "first high-probability short-time gaming state" and "second high-probability short-time gaming state" are provided as "high-probability short-time gaming state", "first high-probability short-time gaming state" to "second 2 high-probability time-saving gaming state”, the main CPU 101 does not need to turn off the time-saving medium signal. Therefore, from the hall computer side, even if the expected value of the number of prize balls for the number of shot balls per unit time exceeds 1, if the time-saving medium signal is ON, the "second high-accuracy time-saving game state ” can be grasped. Also, if the specification is such that the "first high-probability short-time gaming state" and the "second high-probability short-time gaming state" are mixed and continuously occur, both signals are ON, On the data display side described above as well, it is possible to notify that there is a series of consecutive wins. As a result, it is possible to improve the convenience for the player in the data display machine as compared with the case of the "high-probability non-time-saving gaming state".

Of the parameters that affect the "expected number of prize balls for the number of balls fired per unit time", the "expected number of prize balls per unit time" The expected winning value per time and the number of winning balls paid out when winning the winning opening are important factors.

The expected winning value per unit time to the winning opening from which the prize balls are paid out is 100 balls/minute if the winning opening receives all the shot game balls. However, for example, if it is a winning opening that can win after passing through the variable display of special symbols, such as the small winning winning opening 5400, the time required for the variable display of special symbols, the winning probability of "small winning", and The time in which the small hit winning opening 5400 is in an open state (a state in which a prize can be won) affects the expected prize value per unit time.

In the pachinko game machine of the first embodiment, the time required for the variable display of the special symbols is as described above with reference to FIGS. less than (eg 1700 msec).

In addition, in the pachinko game machine of the first embodiment, the number of prize balls paid out when winning the winning opening is three balls for the first start opening 5442 (same as the pachinko game machine 1 according to the first embodiment), The number of two starting holes 440 is one (three balls in the pachinko gaming machine 1 according to the first embodiment), and the number of small winning prizes 5400 is 15 (the pachinko gaming machine 1 according to the first embodiment has a small winning prize opening 5400). not provided), and the general winning holes 53, 54, 55, 56 (for example, see FIG. 14) are ten balls (same as the pachinko game machine 1 according to the first embodiment).

Returning to the flow of the game, in the "high-accuracy time-saving game state" after the jackpot game is completed, if the time-saving game is digested without deriving the combination of special symbols indicating the "jackpot" (determined time-saving game When the variable display of the special symbol of the number of times is performed), the main CPU 101 executes control to shift from the "high-probability short-time gaming state" to the "high-probability short-time gaming state". For example, when the winning selection symbol command is "z7", the number of times of time saving is 30 times, so when 30 times of time saving games are completed, the main CPU 101 executes control to shift to "high accuracy time saving game state". do.

Here, as shown in FIG. 257, the number of times of time saving is selected from a plurality of times of time saving such as 24 times, 30 times, 36 times, 42 times, 48 times and 100 times under the control of the main CPU 101. It is determined. However, in the pachinko game machine of the first embodiment, the determined number of time-saving games can be kept secret without being disclosed by either the main CPU 101 or the sub-CPU 201 until the number of time-saving games is completed. . Therefore, the player changes from a "high-precision short-time gaming state" in which the expected value of the number of prize balls to the number of fired balls is less than 1 to a "high-probability short-time gaming state" in which the expected value of the number of prize balls to the number of fired balls exceeds 1. ”, it is difficult to grasp at what timing the main CPU 101 performs transition control until the transition to the “high-accuracy non-time-saving gaming state” occurs. In addition, although an example of moving from the "high-probability short-time gaming state" to the "high-probability short-time gaming state" was described, the above-mentioned "first high-probability short-time gaming state" and "second high-probability short-time gaming state" is applied, and it is natural that it may be the number of times to execute the electric support instead of the number of times of time saving described above. In this case, even if the electric sapo ends, it is possible to obtain the same effects as those described above without changing the time saving state.

In this way, when the game state after the end of the jackpot game is the "high-probability short-time gaming state", from the player's point of view, the shorter the number of time-savings determined, the faster the "high-probability non-playing state". Since the game shifts to the time-saving game state, interest is heightened.

By the way, in the pachinko machine of the first embodiment, as shown in FIG. 257, the result of the first special lottery is "jackpot", and the selection symbol command at the time of winning is one of "z0" to "z11". In either case, the main CPU 101 controls the game state after the jackpot game ends to the "high-probability short-time game state" or "low-probability short-time game state".

In the "high-probability short-time gaming state", "high-probability non-short-time gaming state" or "low-probability short-time gaming state", when the variation display of the first special symbol is performed and the combination of the jackpot symbols is derived (that is, the first When the result of the special lottery is a "jackpot"), as shown in FIG. 259, the main CPU 101 determines the variation time to be one of "05H" to "07H" based on the symbol determination random number. do. Similarly, in the "high-probability short-time gaming state", "high-probability non-short-time gaming state" or "low-probability short-time gaming state", when the second special symbol is displayed in a variable manner and the combination of the jackpot symbols is derived ( That is, when the result of the second special lottery is a "big hit"), as shown in FIG. decide whether The main CPU 101 transmits a variation pattern command corresponding to the variation time thus determined to the sub CPU 201 . When the sub CPU 201 receives the variation pattern command transmitted from the main CPU 101, the reach effect (normal reach for high start, super reach A for high start or super reach B for high start) is performed based on the received variation pattern command. It is controlled to be displayed on the liquid crystal display device 16 .

In addition, in the above-mentioned "high-probability short-time gaming state", "high-probability short-time gaming state" or "low-probability short-time gaming state", the variable display of the special symbols is performed and the combination of the big hit symbols is not derived, and the small winning symbols Even when a combination of or a losing pattern is derived (that is, when the result of the special lottery is "small hit" or "losing"), when the number of times the special pattern changes is the Nth time, the Nth time When the variable display of the special symbols is performed, the sub CPU 201 controls the liquid crystal display device 16 to display the same ready-to-win effect as the ready-to-win effect performed when the result of the special lottery is "big hit", After performing the ready-to-win effect, an image indicating a "minor hit" or "losing" is displayed. However, as described above, the "Nth time" shown in the column of the number of variations of the special symbols in FIG. In the "high-probability non-time-saving gaming state", the column "other than the N-th time" is always referred to.

In this way, in the game state after the jackpot game is finished, in the "high-probability short-time game state" or "low-probability short-time game state", during the N-th special symbol fluctuation display, the liquid crystal display device 16 by the sub CPU 201 After the ready-to-win effect is displayed, when the image showing the big win is displayed, the game state shifts to the big win game state, and even if the image showing the big win is not displayed, there is a possibility that the game state shifts to the ``high-accuracy non-work-time-saving game state''. It is possible to perform a so-called fanning effect. Regarding the reach effect in the Nth time, even if the win is lost, for example, if a confrontation reach is executed in which a friendly character and an enemy character confront each other, and the current game state is a "low-probability short-time game state". In the event, the final defeat effect is executed, and if the current game state is a "high-probability short-time game state", the final win effect is executed, and the game state to be started by the player is " It is desirable to notify whether it is a "normal game state" or a "high-accuracy non-time-saving game state". In this case, the "high-accuracy non-time-saving gaming state" is the most advantageous gaming state (the most advantageous gaming state among general gaming states) in which the player can continue to play until the next jackpot while increasing the game medium, and the following Since the big win is guaranteed, the same effect as the other big win may be executed. Even if the big win is not won, even if the performance as if the big win is won is executed, the degree of advantage is higher than that of the mere big win, so that the player does not feel uncomfortable. Needless to say, it is a matter of course that a dedicated effect different from the big hit effect may be used. Furthermore, in the fluctuation time determination table, the fluctuation pattern may be different between the last N-th time and the N-th time other than the last time. For example, in the N-th time (such as the 24th time when 48 times are determined) other than the last, the current game state is "low-probability short-time gaming state" or "high-probability short-time gaming state" Since it is confirmed that the gaming state will continue, a variation pattern for displaying "draw" as a result of the effect is selected, and at the last Nth time (48th time when 48th time is determined, etc.) The final effect differs depending on whether the current game state is "low-probability short-time gaming state" or "high-probability short-time gaming state" ("win" or "defeat"), so display it A variation pattern for is selected.

Since the execution of the ready-to-win performance displayed on the liquid crystal display device 16 is usually determined by lottery, there is no guarantee that the ready-to-win performance is always executed in the "high-probability short-time playing state" or "low-probable short-time playing state." However, according to the pachinko gaming machine of the first embodiment, in the N-th special symbol variation display in the "high-probability short-time gaming state" or "low-probability short-time gaming state" after the jackpot game is completed, the sub CPU 201 Since control is performed so that the ready-to-win effect is always displayed on the liquid crystal display device 16, it is possible to suppress the deterioration of interest. In addition, when the reach performance is executed in the "high-probability short-time gaming state" or "low-probability short-time gaming state", the possibility that the reach performance was performed based on the result of the special lottery being "big hit" It has a function indicating that there is, and a function indicating that it is a variable display of a special symbol that may be the last in the "high-probability short-time gaming state" or "low-probable short-time gaming state". In this way, the interest in the game can be enhanced.

In addition, in the pachinko machine of the first embodiment, as shown in FIG. 257, when the winning selection symbol command is any one of "z0" to "z5" and "z12", the main CPU 101 , When the jackpot game is completed, the jackpot game state is shifted to the "low-probability short-time game state". Therefore, in addition to the number of times of time saving, at least the sub CPU 201 does not disclose whether the game state after the jackpot game is controlled to either the "high probability time saving game state" or the "low probability time saving game state". (For example, it cannot be grasped from the effect image displayed on the liquid crystal display device 16), so that the transition destination after the time-saving game is digested is a "high-quality non-time-saving game state" or a "normal It is also difficult for the player to grasp whether it is in the "game state". If the transition destination when the time-saving game is digested is "high probability non-time-saving gaming state", it is preferable for the player to have less time-saving times, but when the time-saving game is digested, the transition destination is "normal game state”, it is preferable for the player to have a large number of times of time saving. Therefore, not only the number of time reductions but also the destination of the game state after the jackpot game is completed can be made difficult to grasp, so that the player can be given an unprecedented interest.

In addition, as a lottery result of the first special lottery, the main CPU 101 can execute a jackpot game (hereinafter referred to as a "2R jackpot game" in this paragraph) in a manner that is difficult for the player to grasp, and such a 2R jackpot game can be played. , the sub CPU 201 may execute a specific effect suggesting that the 2R jackpot game has been won. In this case, when the number of variations of the special symbols is the N-th time, when the variation display of the special symbols is performed for the N-th time, the sub CPU 201 performs when the result of the special lottery is the 2R jackpot game. A liquid crystal display device 16 is controlled to display a performance that is the same as the specific performance or is difficult to grasp from the outside, and after the performance is performed, an image indicating ``small hit'' or ``losing'' is displayed. may

By the way, in the "high-probability short-time gaming state" and "low-probability short-time gaming state", as described above, even though the small hit winning opening 5400 is in an open mode with an extremely high frequency, the right-handed game ball Since all or most of them win the second starting hole 440 (the number of prize balls when winning the second starting hole 440 is 1 ball), it is almost impossible for the game ball hit to the right to win the small hit winning hole 5400 None. However, when it is controlled to the small winning game state, it takes about 5000 msec for the opening interval period, the execution period of the small winning game, and the ending interval period. That is, in the "high-probability short-time gaming state" and "low-probability short-time gaming state", although the winning of the game ball can hardly be expected, it will be controlled to the small hit game state at a high frequency, and each time, the game It can make people feel uncomfortable.

Therefore, in the pachinko game machine of the first embodiment, when it is controlled to a small winning game state in the "high probability short working hours game state" and "low probability short working hours game state", in this small winning game state, to the small winning game state A ceiling suggesting effect suggesting the number of remaining time reductions is executed so that the player's awareness of being controlled is reduced. This ceiling suggestion effect will be described with reference to FIG.

FIG. 260 is an example of a flow chart showing effect processing at the time of winning a small hit executed by the sub CPU 201 in the pachinko gaming machine of the first embodiment. As explained in the pachinko gaming machine 1 according to the first embodiment, the sub CPU 201 executes the effect mode determination process (see step S205 in FIG. 130). As explained in the pachinko gaming machine 1 according to the first embodiment, the effect mode determination process includes the scenario pre-setting process (see FIG. 138), the effect determination process (see FIGS. 142, 144, 147 and 149). , look-ahead effect selection processing (see FIG. 153), background change control processing (see FIG. 157), background change continuous number of times determination processing (see FIG. 158), fluctuation scenario determination processing (see FIG. 161), chance up control processing (see FIG. 162), pending change determination processing (see FIG. 163), character lamp effect control processing (see FIG. 165), full screen effect control processing (see FIG. 166), and other subroutines. In the gaming machine, the effect processing at the time of winning a small hit also constitutes the above subroutine processing.

Referring to FIG. 260, sub CPU 201 determines the current game state when the result of the special lottery is "small hit", and determines the current game state when the current game state is "normal game state" (YES in step S1001). ), the effect indicating that the result of the special lottery is a "small win" is not particularly performed, and the effect processing at the time of winning a small win is ended. In addition, when the current game state is the "high-probability non-time-saving game state" (YES in step S1002), a small hit winning performance (step S1003) indicating that the result of the special lottery is a "small hit" is executed. Above, the effect processing at the time of winning a small hit is terminated. Also, when the current gaming state is neither "normal gaming state" nor "high-probability short-time gaming state", that is, when it is "high-probability short-time gaming state" or "low-probability short-time gaming state", "small It is determined whether or not the variable display of the special symbols performed based on "hit" is the N-th variable display of the special symbols described above (step S1004). In the "high-probability short-time gaming state" and "low-probable short-time gaming state", when the number of variations of the special symbol is other than the N-th time (NO in step S1004), the sub CPU 201 performs a ceiling suggestion effect (step S1005). This ceiling suggestion production is a production which suggests the remaining number of times of shortening of working hours. On the other hand, in the "high-probability short-time gaming state" and "low-probable short-time gaming state", when the number of times the special symbol changes is the N-th time (YES in step S1004), the sub CPU 201 performs a ceiling suggestion effect (step S1005). Without doing so, the effect processing at the time of winning a small hit is ended. By the way, in the "high-probability short-time gaming state" and "low-probability short-time gaming state", when the number of times of variation of the special symbol is other than the Nth time, the main CPU 101 determines the variation time to be "19H", and corresponds to this. The variation pattern command "83H19H" is transmitted to the sub CPU 201, and the variation display of the second special symbol is performed for 1000 msec to derive that the result of the second special lottery is "small hit". Therefore, the sub-CPU 201, which receives the variation pattern command transmitted from the main CPU 101, executes the above-described ceiling indication effect after displaying a super-fast variation effect of 1000 msec on the liquid crystal display device 16. FIG. That is, the sub CPU 201 executes the above-described ceiling suggestive effect during the small hit game state of 5000 msec.

As a result, even if the game ball is controlled to a small win game state in which the winning of the game ball is hardly expected, it is possible to reduce the unpleasant feeling that may be given to the player each time.

In addition, in the "high-probability short-time gaming state" and "low-probability short-time gaming state", when the number of fluctuations in the special symbol is the N-th time, when the fluctuation display of this N-th special symbol is completed, "high-probability short-time gaming state may shift. Then, when the variation display of this N-th special symbol is performed and it is derived that the result of the special lottery is a "small hit", a small win game is performed under the "high probability non-time-saving game state". may be executed. In addition, when the N-th special symbol variable display is completed, even if it does not shift to the "high probability non-time-saving gaming state", when the N-th special symbol variable display is performed, reach Since the performance (normal reach for high start, super reach A for high start or super reach B for high start) is displayed on the liquid crystal display device 16, the player's awareness of being controlled to the small winning game state is reduced. It is thought that Therefore, in the ``high-probability short-time playing state'' and the ``low-probable short-working-time game state'', when the number of variations of the special symbol is the N-th time, the ceiling suggesting performance suggesting the remaining number of times of short-time is not executed. However, it is not always necessary to do this, regardless of whether the number of fluctuations of special symbols in the "high-probability time-saving game state" and "low-probability time-saving game state" is the Nth time, suggesting the remaining time-saving times A ceiling suggesting effect may be executed.

In addition, the remaining number of times of time saving can be calculated by the difference between the number of times of time saving determined based on the selection symbol command (see FIG. 257) and the number of times of time saving games that have been digested, but the remaining number of times of time saving The calculation may be performed by the main CPU 101 and a command may be transmitted to the sub CPU 201 , or may be performed by the sub CPU 201 .

In addition, in the pachinko game machine of the first embodiment, even when it is controlled in any of the "high-probability short-time game state" and "low-probability short-time game state", when it is controlled to the small winning game state, In this small winning game state, a ceiling suggestion effect that suggests the number of remaining time reductions is executed, but not limited to this, either one of the "high probability time reduction game state" and "low probability time reduction game state". You may make it perform only in.

In addition, the production that suggests the remaining number of times of time saving may be a fixed production that determines the number of times of remaining time saving, for example, "Possibility that the number of times of remaining time saving is 10 times is 80%". , It may be a production that shows the possibility.

By the way, in the pachinko machine of the first embodiment, the probability of winning the "small hit" in the second special lottery is about one-fifth, so the "high-probability short-time gaming state" or / and "low-probable short-time game state”, the player may feel annoyed if an effect suggesting the number of remaining time reductions is performed each time the game is controlled to the small winning game state.

Therefore, when it is controlled to the small winning game state, the main CPU 101 or the sub CPU 201 performs a lottery for winning, for example, 1/3, and only when this lottery is won, an effect that suggests the number of remaining time reductions is performed. It may be performed by the sub CPU 201 . In addition, if you consume the number of time-saving games in the "low-probability short-time gaming state", it will shift to the disadvantageous "normal game state", so the ceiling is suggested by the "high-probability short-time gaming state" and the "low-probability short-time gaming state". You may change the execution probability of production|presentation. For example, if it is a "high-probability short-working-time game state", it is 1/5 of the time when a small winning game is executed, and if it is a "low-probability short-working-time game state", it is executed at 1/20 of the time when a small winning game is executed. In that case, the probability that the ceiling suggestion effect occurs in the "high-probability short-time gaming state" is four times that of the "low-probability short-time gaming state". For example, if the transition rate is 50% each, the expectation of staying in the "high-probability short-time gaming state" when the ceiling suggestion production occurs is 80%, and the ceiling suggestion production occurs, even if the number of times of time-saving has been consumed. Regardless, the frequency of shifting to the "normal game state" can be reduced, and it is possible to enjoy the game with interest in the occurrence of the ceiling suggestive effect. Also, since it is not ``occurrence of ceiling suggestion effect = ``high probability short-time game state'' confirmed, a big hit occurred without transitioning to ``high-probability non-short-time game state'' during ``high-probability short-time game state''. It is also possible to achieve the effect of not giving a sense of loss.

In addition, the winning probability of the above production lottery is the number of times of time saving determined based on the selection symbol command (see FIG. 257) (hereinafter simply referred to as "number of times of time saving" in this paragraph.). You may do so. For example, if the number of times of time saving is 24 times, the production that suggests the number of times of time saving is executed with a probability of 1/5, and if the number of times of time saving is 30 times, it is executed with a probability of 1/6. If it is 36 times, it will be executed with a probability of 1/7, if the number of time reductions is 42 times, it will be executed with a probability of 1/8, and if the number of time reductions is 48 times, it will be executed with a probability of 1/9. , If the number of times of time saving is 100 times, it may be executed with a probability of 1/10. In this way, by changing the execution frequency of the production that suggests the number of remaining time reductions according to the number of time reductions, the reliability of the suggested number of remaining time reductions can be calculated from the execution frequency of the production that suggests the number of remaining time reductions. It is possible to provide the player with the pleasure of guessing, and to further reduce the player's awareness of being controlled to the small winning game state.

Also, when the time-saving game of the number of time-saving games determined in the "high-accuracy time-saving gaming state" is digested, when it is made to shift to the "high-accuracy non-time-saving gaming state", especially when the number of time-saving times is different each time, at what timing The player may become skeptical because he does not know whether the game will be shifted to the first advantageous game state, and his interest may decrease. Therefore, the main CPU 101 transmits a command indicating the determined number of times of reduced working hours to the sub CPU 201 when controlling to the "highly accurate reduced working hours gaming state". It is preferable to display on the liquid crystal display device 16 the timing of shifting from to the "high-probability non-time-saving gaming state". The display of the timing to shift from the "high-probability short-time gaming state" to the "high-probability short-time gaming state" may display the number of times of time-saving determined, but in the pachinko machine according to the third embodiment , The standard of the timing to shift from the "high-probability short-time gaming state" to the "high-probability short-time gaming state" is displayed as an index. That is, although the number of times of shortening of working hours may be displayed as it is, there are also cases where a certain amount of reference is displayed instead of the number of times of shortening of working hours. Below, with reference to Drawing 261, index production processing which shows a standard of timing which shifts from "high probability short working hours game state" to "high probability non-short working hours gaming state" is explained.

FIG. 261 is an example of a flowchart of index effect processing executed by the sub CPU 201 .

Referring to FIG. 261, the sub CPU 201 first determines whether or not the jackpot game state has ended, that is, whether or not it has received a jackpot game state end command from the main CPU 101 (step S2001). If it is determined that the jackpot game state has not ended (NO in step S2001), the sub CPU 201 proceeds to step S2008, which will be described later.

When it is determined that the jackpot gaming state has ended (YES in step S2001), the sub CPU 201 determines whether or not the game state of the shift destination is the "high probability short working hours gaming state", that is, the "high certainty short working hours gaming state" from the main CPU 101 is received (step S2002).

On the other hand, if the game state to be shifted to is not the "high probability time-saving game state" (NO in step S2002), the sub CPU 201 determines whether the index flag is on (step S2015), and the index flag is on. If so (YES in step S2015), the index flag is turned off (step S2016), and the index effect processing ends. Also, if the index flag is not ON (NO in step S2015), the index effect processing is terminated before performing the processing of step S2016.

Note that the index flag is a flag that is turned on when a special symbol is displayed in a variable manner and a "jackpot" is derived. The reason why such an index flag is provided is that when the "jackpot" is derived, it is controlled to the jackpot game state, but when this jackpot game state ends and it is controlled to the "high probability short-time game state" again. , This is so that the continuation starts from the indicator that was displayed when the "jackpot" was derived in the previous "high-probability short-time gaming state", but a method of processing using such an indicator flag is an example and is not limited to this.

If the game state of the transition destination is the "high-probability time-saving game state" (YES in step S2002), the sub CPU 201 determines whether or not a command indicating the number of times of time-saving has been received (step S2003). When the command indicating the number of times of time saving is received (YES in step S2003), the sub CPU 201 determines whether or not the index flag is on (step S2004).

If the index flag is ON (YES in step S2004), the index stored in the main RAM 103, that is, the index that was displayed when the "jackpot" was derived in the previous "high-probability short-time gaming state". is displayed (step S2005), and the index flag is turned off (step S2006). If the index flag is turned off, the process moves to step S2008.

On the other hand, if the index flag is not on (NO in step S2004), an initial index is displayed (step S2007), and the process moves to step S2008. The initial index may display the determined number of times of time saving, but here, instead of the determined number of times of time saving itself, the number of times determined by lottery is displayed as a measure of the number of times of time saving decided. It should be noted that the initial index may uniformly display a predetermined number of times (for example, 100 times) instead of the number of times determined by lottery.

The sub CPU 201 determines in step S2008 whether or not a specific condition has been established (step S2008). The specific condition may be, for example, that the player is given a mission (for example, a mission such as "Generate reach twice within 3 minutes"), and the specific condition is established when the mission is cleared. However, a specific condition may be established when a predetermined number of game balls win a prize in the general winning hole, or the condition can be determined arbitrarily.

When the sub CPU 201 determines that the specific condition is satisfied (YES in step S2008), it subtracts a predetermined number from the current index and updates and displays the index (step S2009). Here, the number to be subtracted may be 1, or if it is difficult to satisfy the specific condition, the number to be subtracted is changed according to the difficulty of establishing the specific condition, such as subtracting 3, for example. You may do so. After performing the process of step S2009, the sub CPU 201 moves to step S2010. If the specific condition is not satisfied (NO in step S2008), the process also proceeds to step S2010. However, if the specific condition is not satisfied in step S2008, a process of adding an index may be performed. For example, an index may be added when a mission given to a player is not achieved.

However, in the process of step S2009, it is necessary to change the mode of the index to be displayed according to the number of remaining time reductions. For example, an indicator that is far from the remaining number of times of time saving should not be displayed, such as displaying 20 times even though the number of times of time saving is 80 times. Therefore, the sub CPU 201 controls to display a value close to the remaining number of times of time saving. Furthermore, in the process of step S2009, the sub CPU 201 controls the index to become 0 when the determined number of time-saving games are completed.

In step S2010, the sub CPU 201 determines whether or not variable display of special symbols has been performed, that is, whether or not a variation pattern designation command transmitted from the main CPU 101 has been received (step S2010).

When the sub CPU 201 determines that the variable display of the special symbol is performed (YES in step S2010), it subtracts 1 from the current index and updates and displays the index (step S2011). After finishing the process of step S2011, the sub CPU 201 proceeds to step S2012. On the other hand, when it is determined that the variable display of the special symbol is not performed (NO in step S2010), the process also proceeds to step S2012.

It should be noted that, in the process of step S2011, although the determined number of times of reduced working hours has not been digested, by subtracting 1 from the current index, from the "highly-probable reduced working-hours gaming state" to the "high-accurate non-reduced working-hours gaming state" It is not possible to display "0", which indicates transition to It is necessary for the player to understand that the number of remaining time reductions is approaching 0 by subtracting 1 from the current indicator and updating the display each time the variable display of the special symbol is performed. , it is necessary to perform the processing of step S2009 so as not to display 0 even though the number of remaining time reductions is not 0.

In step S2012, the sub CPU 201 determines whether or not the special symbols are variably displayed to derive a "jackpot", that is, whether or not a jackpot command is received from the main CPU 101 (step S2012).

When the variable display of the special symbol is performed and the "jackpot" is derived, that is, when the sub CPU 201 determines that the "jackpot" is derived based on the command transmitted from the main CPU 101 (YES in step S2012), the sub The CPU 201 stores the currently displayed index in a predetermined storage area of the main RAM (step S2013). After that, the sub CPU 201 turns on the index flag (step S2014) and ends the index effect processing. On the other hand, if the "big hit" is not derived (NO in step S2012), the index effect processing is terminated without performing the processing of steps S2013 and S2014.

In this way, every time the variable display is performed, the indicator is subtracted so that the remaining number of times of the time saving approaches 0 and the update display is performed, so that the "high-accuracy non-time-saving gaming state" is changed to the "high-accuracy non-time-saving gaming state". It is possible to suggest the timing of transition to the player, and to suppress the decrease in interest.

In addition, the sub CPU 201 not only subtracts and displays the index when the variable display is performed, but also can display the addition and subtraction of the index when the specific condition is satisfied, so that the "high-accuracy time-saving gaming state" can be displayed. It is possible to enhance the game interest until the transition to the "high-quality non-time-saving game state".

In addition, in the ``high probability time-saving gaming state'', a ``jackpot'' is derived before the determined time-saving game is digested, and the big-hit gaming state based on this ``jackpot'' ends and the ``high probability time-saving gaming state'' game state”, the main CPU 101 does not execute the control to shift to the “high-accuracy non-time-saving gaming state” unless the determined number of time-saving games is completed, but the sub CPU 201 Display an index when a "jackpot" is derived in a "probable time-saving game state". Therefore, it is possible for the player to see the state of the index change from the continuation of the index displayed in the previous "high-probability short-time gaming state". As a result, if the number of time-saving games determined internally is not digested, it will not shift to the "high-accuracy non-time-saving gaming state", but in appearance, the time-saving determined in the previous "high-accuracy short-time gaming state" When the ``jackpot'' is derived without the number of times of time-saving games being digested, it can be shown as if it continues from the time-saving games digested last time, and it is not shifted to a ``high-accuracy non-time-saving game state''. It is possible to reduce the feeling of loss that may arise as a result.

By the way, in the pachinko game machine of the first embodiment, similarly to the pachinko game machine 1 according to the first embodiment, the starting memory based on the winning to the first starting port 5442 and the starting based on the winning to the second starting port 440 A maximum of four memories can be reserved for each memory. In the pachinko gaming machine of the first embodiment, as described above, when the game state at the start of the fluctuation of the special symbols is the "normal game state", The variation time of the second special symbol is remarkably different in the case of "state", "high-probability non-time-saving gaming state" or "low-probability short-time gaming state".

Therefore, in the "normal game state", if the start memory based on the winning to the second start port 440 is withheld, unless the result of the second special lottery executed for this start memory is "big hit", the The result of the second special lottery will be derived after the second special symbols are variably displayed for an extremely long period of time such as 600000 msec.

As described above, since a general player hits to the left in the "normal game state", the possibility of the game ball winning the second start hole 440 is low. However, when the game state shifts from the "low probability time-saving game state" to the "normal game state", when the game state shifts to the "normal game state", four starting memories of the second special symbol are reserved. can occur. Then, if the "jackpot" is not included in these four reservations, the fluctuation display of the second special symbols for all four will end after about 40 minutes. Even if the starting memory (the starting memory of the fourth second special symbol) is a "big hit", it will be about 31 minutes later).

Then, for example, the game state shifts from the "low-probability short-time game state" to the "normal game state" in a state in which four starting memories of the second special symbol are reserved, and the first to third symbols are reserved. When the starting memory is "losing" and the fourth reserved starting memory is "big hit", the "jackpot" is derived from the first reserved starting memory. About 30 minutes or more after the start of the variable display of the second special symbol may occur. It is undesirable to keep players waiting for such a long period of time.

By the way, in the pachinko gaming machine of the first embodiment, as in the pachinko gaming machine 1 according to the first embodiment, the main CPU 101 performs a look-ahead function of determining the result of the special lottery based on the information of the reserved starting memory. I have. Therefore, in the pachinko gaming machine of the first embodiment, in the "normal game state", the main CPU 101 suspends the start memory of the second special symbol when a specific condition is satisfied. Determining whether or not "big hit" or/and "minor hit" is included in the starting memory of the second special symbol (hereinafter referred to as "second special symbol look-ahead determination"), and this second special symbol A command is sent to the sub CPU 201 for the result of pre-read determination of the pattern. The sub CPU 201 that has received the result of the prefetch determination of the second special symbol, based on the result of the prefetch determination of the second special symbol transmitted from the main CPU 101, in order to prevent the player from waiting for a long time, It is configured to perform standby compulsion suppression performance processing capable of executing a standby compulsion suppression performance indicating whether or not a ``jackpot'' is included in the start memory of the second special symbol that is on hold. The forced standby suppression effect processing will be described below.

FIG. 262 is an example showing a flow chart of forced standby suppression effect processing executed by the sub CPU 201 in the pachinko gaming machine of the first embodiment. This forced standby suppression effect processing also constitutes a subroutine process of the effect mode determination process.

Referring to FIG. 262, sub CPU 201 determines whether or not the result of prefetch determination of the second special symbol transmitted from main CPU 101 is received (step S1011). When the sub CPU 201 receives the result of the prefetch determination of the second special symbol (YES in step S1011), it determines whether or not the current game state is the "normal game state" (step S1012). If the current game state is a "normal game state" (YES in step S1012), it is determined whether or not a specific condition has been established (step S1013). If the specific condition is established (YES in step S1013), it is determined whether or not "jackpot" is included in the start memory of the second special symbol that is being held (step S1015). Here, if "big win" or "minor win" is included in the start memory of the second special symbols that are on hold (YES in step S1015), a forced standby suppression effect is executed (step S1016). This forced standby restraint effect is a effect indicating that a "big win" or a "minor win" is included in the start memory of the second special symbol that is on hold, and is displayed on the liquid crystal display device 16. - 特許庁It may be performed as an effect, it may be performed as an audio effect output from the speaker 24, or both a display effect and an audio effect may be performed. In this way, by making it so that the forced waiting suppression effect is performed based on the establishment of the specific condition, the player can avoid waiting for a long time, for example, 30 minutes or more after the start of the variable display of the second special symbol. It is possible to eliminate the situation of being forced to

It should be noted that, in the above description, in the "normal gaming state", the forced standby suppression effect is performed when a specific condition is established. , 54, 55, etc., it is preferable from the viewpoint of promotion of the game to set conditions that can be established by hitting left. Even if the condition for performing the above-mentioned standby forced suppression effect is established based on, for example, that one left-handed game ball wins any of the general winning openings 53, 54, 55 Alternatively, for example, it may be established based on that a plurality of left-handed game balls win any one of the general winning openings 53, 54, 55. Furthermore, in addition to winning one of the general winning openings 53, 54, 55, weighting conditions (for example, left-handed game balls winning all the general winning openings 53, 54, 55, etc.) The forced standby suppression effect may be performed based on the establishment.

In addition, the above-mentioned standby forced suppression effect is a effect indicating that a "big win" or a "minor win" is included in the start memory of the second special symbol that is on hold, but the "big win" is included. The effect may be one in which it is possible to distinguish whether the game includes a "small win" or not.

By the way, the forced waiting suppression effect described above is a effect indicating that a "jackpot" is included in the starting memory of the second special symbol that is being withheld by the look-ahead function of the main CPU 101 . That is, the start memory of the second special symbol read ahead as "big hit" (hereinafter referred to as "specific second start memory") is performed at a stage where the variable display of the second special symbol is not yet started. . Therefore, the result of the first special lottery is "big hit" even though the sub CPU 201 has performed the forced standby suppression effect indicating that "big hit" is included in the starting memory of the second special symbol. , the "jackpot" for a specific second starting memory may be canceled. For example, if the result of the first special lottery is a "big hit", a specific number of This is the case where the variable display of the second special symbol for the 2 start memory is started.

Therefore, after the forced standby suppression effect is performed for the specific second start memory, the ready-to-win effect is executed by the sub CPU 201 based on the fact that the result of the first lottery is a "jackpot", and this ready-to-win effect is being executed. When the variable display of the second special symbol for the specific second start memory is started at 10:00, the sub CPU 201 performs the following effects. First, the ready-to-win effect being executed is temporarily stopped and displayed in a manner indicating a failure. After the ready-to-win performance being executed is temporarily stopped and displayed in a failure mode, performance is performed as if a new symbol variation was started by the establishment of the starting condition. At this time, the sub-CPU 201 provides an effect suggesting that the result of the first special lottery was a loss so that it is difficult to perceive that the effect is for the same starting memory, such as a re-variation effect or a pseudo-continuous effect. It is preferable to also Also, at the same time, in performing an effect as if a new pattern variation has started, the sub CPU 201 preferably performs an effect as if the second special symbol variation display for a specific second start memory is started. . In this case, it is preferable to perform a ready-to-win effect different from the above-described ready-to-win effect. For example, if the ready-to-win effect before the temporary stop is the super ready-to-win effect A, the ready-to-win effect to be performed after the temporary stop may be the super ready-to-win effect B or the normal ready-to-win effect which is completely different from the super ready-to-win effect A. This reduces the disappointment that may be given to the player due to the cancellation of the "big win" in spite of the execution of the forced standby suppression performance indicating that the specific second start memory is the "big win". It becomes possible to

The ready-to-win effect for the first special symbol being executed is displayed on the liquid crystal display device 16 instead of performing the effect as if a new symbol variation has started after the temporary stop display is performed in a manner indicating a failure. The sub CPU 201 may perform an effect as if the effect image to be played is switched from the ready-to-win effect for the first special symbol to the ready-to-win effect for the second special symbol. That is, in fact, although the ready-to-win production for the first special symbol continues internally, the appearance is as if the image has switched to the ready-to-win production for the second special symbol. It is possible to reduce the disappointment that may be given to the player due to the cancellation of the "jackpot" for the specific second starting memory.

By the way, in the pachinko game machine of the first embodiment, when it is controlled to the "normal game state", the sub CPU 201 displays an effect image mainly based on the result of the first special lottery on the liquid crystal display device 16. be. The effect image based on the result of the second special lottery is not displayed on the liquid crystal display device 16 when it is controlled to the "normal game state", or even if it is displayed, it is not noticed by the player (for example, , a mode in which it is only displayed small in the corner of the liquid crystal display device 16). On the other hand, when it is controlled to the "high-probability short-time gaming state", "high-probability non-short-time gaming state" or "low-probable short-time gaming state", the liquid crystal display device 16 is mainly based on the result of the second special lottery. The effect image is displayed by the sub CPU 201, and the effect image based on the result of the first special lottery is not displayed on the liquid crystal display device 16, or even if it is displayed, it is displayed in such a manner that the player cannot perceive it. be.

Therefore, even if the result of the second special lottery is a special result, it is extremely difficult for the player to perceive it when the "normal game state" is being controlled. Therefore, in the "normal game state", when the result of the second special lottery is "jackpot", the sub CPU 201 allows the visual recognition of the effect image based on the result of the first special lottery displayed on the liquid crystal display device 16. In a mode that does not interfere, a suggestion performance is performed to suggest that the result of the second special lottery is a ``jackpot'' in a mode that the player can grasp. The “mode that does not hinder the visual recognition of the effect image based on the result of the first special lottery displayed on the liquid crystal display device 16” means, for example, that a display device other than the liquid crystal display device 16 is used to display or emit light. The player is notified that the result of the second special lottery is a "big win" by causing the LED to emit light in a specific manner (for example, emitting rainbow light).

However, even if the result of the second special lottery is originally a "big win", when the result of the first special lottery is a "big win", the "big win" in the second starting memory may be canceled. . For example, when the variable display of the second special symbol is started, the variable display of the first special symbol is performed, and the variable display of the first special symbol is the variable display based on the "big hit". At this time, in the second special lottery for the second start memory from which the "jackpot" should have been derived, the main CPU 101 performs non-winning processing, or even if the "jackpot" is won, the "jackpot" ” is extinguished. Therefore, even though the result of the second special lottery was originally a "jackpot", if this "jackpot" is canceled, a suggestive effect should have been performed, but this In such a case, the sub CPU 201 performs a process of not executing the suggestive effect so that the suggestive effect is not always performed. As a result, it is possible to prevent the ``big win'' from being negated despite the fact that the suggestion performance indicating that the result of the second special lottery is the ``big win'' is performed. In addition, it is possible to execute a jackpot game based on the fact that the result of the first special lottery is a "jackpot" without the player noticing that the result of the second special lottery was originally a "jackpot". becomes.

In addition, the above-mentioned standby forced suppression effect is performed only when the "big hit" is included in the start memory of the second special symbol that is on hold (it is performed when only the "small hit" is included). It may be performed only when a "small win" is included (not performed when only a "big win" is included).

In addition, it is not always necessary to execute the above-mentioned standby forced suppression effect by the control by the sub CPU 201, for example, changing the lighting mode of the second special symbol holding display section 76 (see FIG. 8) controlled by the main CPU 101, etc. may be executed by

By the way, in the "normal game state", when the standby forced suppression effect indicating that the "small hit" is included in the start memory of the second special symbol that is suspended is performed, the second special symbol is performed for a long time of about 10 minutes each time, it is difficult for the player to grasp at what timing the small-hit shutter 6100 operates and the small-hit winning opening 5400 opens. is. Therefore, even though it is clear that the "small win" is included in the reserved start memory of the second special symbol, when the small win game is executed, the small win winning port 5400 A situation may occur in which a game ball cannot win a prize, and interest may decrease.

Therefore, in the "normal game state", when the "small win" is included in the start memory of the second special symbol that is suspended, the sub CPU 201 detects that the "small win" is included. When performing the standby forced suppression effect shown, it is preferable to always perform a timing suggestion effect that suggests the timing at which the small hit shutter 6100 operates (the timing at which the small win prize opening 5400 opens). In this case, the sub CPU 201 performs the effect processing at the time of winning a small hit of FIG. 263 instead of the effect processing at the time of winning a small win of FIG. FIG. 263 is another example of a flow chart of effect processing at the time of winning a small hit executed by the sub CPU 201 in the pachinko gaming machine of the first embodiment. 263, the sub-CPU 201 determines whether or not the forced standby suppression effect (see step S1016 in FIG. 262) has been performed when the "normal game state" (YES in step S1002). It is determined (step S1006), and if the waiting forced suppression effect is performed (YES in step S1006), the timing suggestion effect (step S1007) is executed. but otherwise the same.

In the pachinko gaming machine of the first embodiment, since the winning probability of the "minor win" in the second special lottery is relatively high at about 1/5, the second special symbols that are withheld in the "normal game state" It is often possible that the starting memory of a player contains multiple "minor wins". Therefore, by performing the timing suggestive effect in step S1007, it is possible to increase the interest in the game. In particular, when the game state shifts from the "low-probability short-time game state" to the "normal game state" in a state where the four starting memories of the second special symbols are reserved, the reserved four second special When all of the starting memories of the symbols are "small hits", the amusement of the game can be greatly enhanced.

It should be noted that the timing-suggesting effect in step S1007 is always performed when a forced standby effect indicating that a "small win" is included is performed (when determined as YES in step S1006). , but not limited to this, for example, when a forced standby performance indicating that a ``small hit'' is included is performed, a timing suggestion performance may be performed only when a specific condition is established. For example, in the "normal game state", when "small win" is included in the start memory of the second special symbol that is being held, the sub CPU 201 performs a lottery for execution of the timing suggestive effect, and executes this execution. The timing suggestion performance may be performed only when the lottery is won. When the execution lottery for the timing suggestive effect is performed in this manner, an effect may be performed to make the player expect whether or not the player will win the lottery for the execution of the timing suggestive effect.

Further, the above-mentioned timing suggestive effect is performed at the timing when the small hit shutter 6100 is activated, but it is not limited to this as long as the effect is such that the small hit winning opening 5400 can be won. For example, considering the time until the shot game ball reaches the small winning prize opening 5400, the sub CPU 201 suggests the timing of shooting the game ball before the timing of operating the small winning shutter 6100. You may make it perform the production which carries out.

By the way, the sub CPU 201 performs the standby compelling effect (step S1016) indicating that a "small hit" is included in the start memory of the second special symbol that is withheld, when it is withheld. Since the suggestive effect (step S1007) is performed after the second special symbol is changed and displayed, there is a time difference between the timing of the forced standby effect and the timing of the timing suggestive effect. Therefore, using this time difference, the sub CPU 201 sets a specific condition (for example, general The timing suggestion effect (step S1007) may be performed only when the winning openings 53, 54, 55, etc.) are established. As a result, it is possible not only to give the player a sense of tension during the period from when the forced standby effect indicating that the "small win" is included is performed until the small win game is executed, but also It is possible to increase interest by mini-games that try to establish the.

Also, as described above, the main CPU 101 of the pachinko game machine of the first embodiment has a look-ahead function for judging the result of the special lottery based on the information of the reserved starting memory. Therefore, in the pachinko gaming machine of the first embodiment, the look-ahead function of the main CPU 101 is used, and the sub CPU 201 executes a plurality of games (for example, a small winning game and a big winning game) executed as a result of a plurality of special lotteries. It is configured to perform a premium effect control process capable of executing a premium effect as if it were one game. The premium effect control processing will be described below.

FIG. 264 is an example showing a flowchart of the premium effect control process executed by the sub CPU 201 in the pachinko gaming machine of the first embodiment. This premium effect control process also constitutes a subroutine process of the effect mode determination process.

In addition, when the sub CPU 201 executes this premium effect control process, the main CPU 101 is the result of the second special lottery in the "high-probability short-time gaming state", "high-probability non-short-time gaming state" and "low-probability short-time gaming state". 265 is referred to instead of the high start special symbol variation time determination table shown in FIG. FIG. 265 is a table stored in the main ROM 102 in the pachinko gaming machine of the first embodiment, and is an example of a special symbol variation time determination table for high start. The variable time determination table in FIG. 265 is a table referred to in "high probability short working hours gaming state", "high probability non-short working hours gaming state" and "low probability short working hours gaming state", and the result of the second special lottery When it is a "small hit", it is determined with a probability of 50% to the variation pattern (16H, 17H, 18H) in which reach production (normal reach for high start, super reach A for high start, super reach B for high start) is performed. , is determined with a probability of 50% to the variation pattern (19H) in which super-fast variation is performed.

Referring to FIG. 264, sub CPU 201 determines whether or not the current game state is not the "normal game state" (step S1021). When the sub CPU 201 determines that it is not a "normal gaming state", that is, it is one of the "high-probability short-time gaming state", "high-probability non-short-time gaming state" and "low-probability short-time gaming state" ( YES in step S1021), it is determined whether or not the variable display of the special symbol to be performed from now on is the variable display of the second special symbol (step S1022). When the current gaming state is the "normal gaming state" (NO in step S1021), the sub CPU 201 terminates the premium effect control process. The reason why the premium effect control process is not performed when the current game state is the "normal game state" is that in the "normal game state", the variable display of the second special symbol is performed for about 10 minutes. This is because there is little practical benefit from performing a premium effect as if the game (for example, a small winning game and a big winning game) were one game.

Next, when the variable display of the special symbol to be performed from now on is the variable display of the second special symbol (YES in step S1022), the sub CPU 201 determines that the variable display of the second special symbol is a "small win". (ie, whether or not the result of the second special lottery is a "small hit") is determined (step S1023). If the variable display of the special symbols to be performed from now on is not the variable display of the second special symbols (NO in step S1022), the sub CPU 201 ends the premium effect control process. The reason why the premium effect control processing is not performed unless the variable display of the special symbol to be performed from now on is the variable display of the second special symbol is the "high probability short working hours gaming state", "high probability non-short working hours gaming state" or "low probability short working hours game state". In the "game state", the performance mainly displayed on the liquid crystal display device 16 is based on the result of the second special lottery, and even if the special symbols of the first special lottery are displayed in a variable manner, the player will not be aware of it. This is because it is done in a manner that does not allow

Next, when the variation display of the second special symbol to be performed from now on is the variation display for deriving the "small hit" (YES in step S1023), the sub CPU 201 performs reach effects (normal reach for high start, normal reach for high start, Based on the command transmitted from the main CPU 101, it is determined whether or not there is a variation pattern (13H, 14H, 15H) in which super reach A and super reach B for high start are performed (step S1024). If it is not the variation pattern (13H, 14H, 15H) in which the ready-to-win effect is performed (NO in step S1024), the sub CPU 201 ends the premium effect control process.

When it is a variation pattern (13H, 14H, 15H) in which a ready-to-win effect is performed (YES in step S1024), the sub CPU 201 starts the second special symbol in addition to the start memory of the second special symbol to be variably displayed from now on. It is determined whether or not storage is suspended (step S1025).

When the sub CPU 201 determines that the start memory of the second special symbol to be variably displayed and the start memory of the second special symbol to be variably displayed is suspended (YES in step S1025), the second special symbol to be variably displayed from now on is stored. With respect to the start memory of the second special symbol held next to the start memory of the symbol, it is determined whether or not it is a ``big hit'' based on the result of pre-read determination of the second special symbol transmitted from the main CPU 101. - 特許庁(Step S1026). If the start memory of the second special symbol to be variably displayed and the start memory of the second special symbol are not reserved (NO in step S1025), the sub CPU 201 ends the premium effect control process.

When the sub CPU 201 determines that the result of the pre-reading determination for the start memory of the second special symbol held next to the start memory of the second special symbol to be variably displayed is "big win" (YES in step S1026). ), and the premium effect flag is set to ON (step S1027). That is, when the results of the second special lottery continue in the order of "minor win"→"big win", the premium effect flag is set to ON. In addition, if the result of the look-ahead determination for the starting memory of the second special symbol that is held next to the starting memory of the second special symbol that is to be variably displayed is not "big hit" (NO in step S1026), the second Since the results of the special lottery are not consecutive in the order of "small win"→"big win", the sub CPU 201 terminates the premium effect control process.

Then, when the variable display of the second special symbol is to be performed from now on, the sub CPU 201 executes the premium effect processing (step S1028), and terminates the premium effect control processing. This premium production process is a production that shows the small winning game state and the next big winning game state of this small winning game state as if they were one advantageous game state (that is, more than the normal big winning game It is a process of executing a production that looks as if it is a big hit game in which a round game is performed.

When this premium effect processing is executed, it is possible to pay out prize balls obtained by adding the prize balls obtainable in the small winning game state and the prize balls obtainable in the big winning game state. A larger amount of prize balls can be paid out than the prize balls that can be acquired, so that the interest in the game can be enhanced.

When the sub CPU 201 determines that the variation display of the second special symbol to be performed from now on is not the variation display for deriving the "small hit" (NO in step S1023), is the variation display for deriving the "big hit"? It is determined whether or not (step S1029).

When the sub CPU 201 determines that the variation display of the second special symbols to be performed from now on is not the variation display for deriving the "jackpot" (NO in step S1029), the sub CPU 201 performs a losing effect (step S1032), and performs a premium effect control process. finish.

On the other hand, when it is determined that the variable display of the second special symbols to be performed from now on is a variable display that leads to a "jackpot" (YES in step S1029), the sub CPU 201 determines whether or not the premium effect flag is on. Determine (step S1030). In the processing of this step S1030, the result of the second special lottery between the fluctuation display of the previous second special symbol and the fluctuation display of the second special symbol to be performed from now on is "small win" → "big win". This is a process for determining whether or not they are continuous in the order of .

When the sub CPU 201 determines that the premium effect flag is not ON (NO in step S1030), the second It is determined that the results of the special lottery are not continuous in the order of "small win"→"big win", normal big win performance is executed (step S1031), and the premium performance control processing is terminated.

On the other hand, if it is determined that the premium effect flag is on (YES in step S1030), the sub CPU 201 proceeds to step S1028, executes a premium effect process clearly different from the jackpot effect in step S1031, Terminate the production control process. In this premium effect processing (step S1028), the sub CPU 201 performs an effect that is connected in series with the effect performed in the variable display of the second special symbol one before. is different.

In this way, in the "high-probability short-time gaming state", "high-probability non-short-time gaming state" or "low-probability short-time gaming state", as a result of the second special symbol variation display, the "jackpot" is derived alone. When it is (when "small hit" is not derived in the fluctuation display of the second special symbol one before), a big hit effect is performed. On the other hand, in the "high-probability short-time gaming state", "high-probability non-short-time gaming state" or "low-probability short-time gaming state", the results of the second special lottery continue in the order of "small hit" → "big hit". Sometimes, the variable display of the second special symbols from which the ``small hit'' is derived and the variable display of the second special symbols from which the ``big win'' is derived are executed as if they were one game. By doing so, it is possible to make it appear as if a game with a higher degree of profit than a normal jackpot game has been executed.

Although not shown in FIG. 264, after the sub CPU 201 finishes the premium effect (after the main CPU 101 finishes the big win game state), the sub CPU 201 turns off the premium effect flag.

Next, the control by the main CPU 101 such as the variation control of the second special symbol and the control to the jackpot game state in the "high-probability short-time gaming state", "high-probability non-short-time gaming state" or "low-probability short-time gaming state" 266, the relationship between the control of the sub CPU 201 such as the control of the variation effects of the decorative symbols displayed on the liquid crystal display device 16 will be described. In addition, FIG. 266 is a time chart showing the relationship between the control by the main CPU 101 and the effect control by the sub CPU 201 in the "high-probability short-time gaming state", "high-probability non-short-time gaming state" or "low-probability short-time gaming state". (a) In a conventional pachinko gaming machine, an example when the result of the second special lottery is derived in the order of "losing" → "minor win" → "big win", (b) First embodiment This is an example of the pachinko game machine in which the result of the second special lottery is derived in the order of "loss"→"minor win"→"big win".

As shown in FIG. 266(a), in the conventional pachinko gaming machine, when the result of the second special lottery is derived as "losing" under the control of the main CPU, the sub CPU 201 controls accordingly. For example, an effect image indicating "failure" is displayed on the liquid crystal display device. Similarly, when the result of the second special lottery is derived as a "minor win" under the control of the main CPU, the effect image indicating the "minor win" is displayed under the control of the sub CPU 201 correspondingly. In addition, when the result of the second special lottery is derived as "big win" by the control of the main CPU, the effect image indicating "big win" is displayed by the control of the sub CPU 201 correspondingly. Then, when the result of the second special lottery is derived as "big win", the main CPU controls to the big win game state. In this jackpot game state, a round game is executed over a plurality of rounds. Further, when the main CPU 101 controls the small winning game state, the sub CPU 201 displays a small winning effect on the liquid crystal display device 16, and when the main CPU 101 controls the big winning game state, the sub CPU 201 displays the small winning effect on the liquid crystal display device 16. displays a big hit effect on the liquid crystal display device 16. - 特許庁Thus, in the conventional pachinko game machine, the control by the main CPU and the control by the sub CPU 201 corresponded one-to-one.

On the other hand, in the pachinko game machine of the first embodiment, control by the main CPU 101 and the sub CPU 201 is executed in the mode shown in FIG. 266(b), for example. Specifically, when the result of the second special lottery is derived as "losing" by the control of the main CPU, in response to this, the sub CPU 201 controls, for example, the liquid crystal display device to display "losing". An image is displayed.

However, when the result of the second special lottery is derived as a "minor win" by the control of the main CPU, the starting memory of the second special symbol from which the "big win" is derived by the look-ahead function of the main CPU 101 is reserved. Based on this assumption, the sub CPU 201 controls, for example, a liquid crystal display device to display an effect image indicating a "premium win". The effect image indicating this "premium win" is, for example, that more rounds are executed than the number of rounds (for example, 15 rounds) of the round game executed in one big win game state (that is, one big win This is an effect image showing that there is a possibility that the number of prize balls to be paid out is larger than the expected value of the number of prize balls to be paid out in the gaming state.

Also, when the main CPU 101 is controlling to the small winning game state, the sub CPU 201 performs a pseudo-round effect as if a round game were being executed. This pseudo-round effect is the same as or very similar to the effect performed during the round game of the actual jackpot game.

By the way, when the premium effect is executed, the second special symbols are variably displayed between the small win game state and the big win game state, so if this time is long, the player may feel unnatural. There is a problem that there is no Therefore, it is important how the sub-CPU 201 performs the effect between the small winning game state and the big winning game state, that is, while the second special symbols are displayed in a variable manner.

Therefore, in the pachinko gaming machine of the first embodiment, while the main CPU 101 is performing the variable display of the second special symbol, the sub CPU 201 is operated as if it is during the interval between the round games. A pseudo-interval production is performed. This pseudo-interval effect is the same as or very similar to the effect actually performed during the interval between the round games. As a specific example of this pseudo-interval effect, for example, when the sub CPU 201 performs the "premium winning display", the big win derived after that (predicted big win) is, for example, In spite of the fact that the game is a jackpot with a variable probability flag turned on in a game state), it is produced as if it is a normal big win (a big win with a variable probability flag not turned on in a game state after the big win game state is finished). On the premise of this, in the pseudo-interval performance, a performance indicating whether or not the normal jackpot is promoted to the probability variable jackpot corresponds. By performing such a promotion performance, the player's consciousness can be attracted to the performance, and even if the variable display of the second special symbol by the main CPU 101 is slightly longer than the interval time, the player may feel uncomfortable. can be reduced.

Then, after the main CPU 101 controls the game to the jackpot game state, the sub CPU 201 carries out a normal round effect. However, in this round effect, even if the round game being executed by the main CPU 101 is actually the round game of the first round, the sub CPU 201 does not explicitly indicate that it is the round game of the first round. It is preferable to

In this way, if the results of the second special lottery in the "high-probability short-time gaming state", "high-probability non-short-time gaming state" or "low-probability short-time gaming state" continue in the order of "small hit" → "big hit" In addition, by performing a series of performances as if the small winning game state and the big winning game state are controlled to one premium big winning game state, the number of round games is larger than that normally performed in one big winning game state. It is possible to give the player a feeling as if he/she has won a jackpot game state in which a round game of (1) is performed, thereby increasing the interest in the game.

In addition, as a method for solving the unnaturalness that can occur between the small winning game state and the big winning game state (during the display of the second special symbol variation), in addition to the pseudo interval production described above, For example, the following method can be considered.

For example, the opening effect indicating that a "big win" has been won is usually performed after the result of the special lottery is derived to be a "big win". A sub-CPU 201 performs an opening performance indicating that a "jackpot" has been won at a stage where the jackpot game state has not yet started across the time when the second special symbol is being displayed and the time when the variable display of the second special symbol is being performed. can be That is, the ready-to-win effect is not performed during the variable display of the second special symbol based on the "big hit". Even with such a technique, it is possible to reduce the unnaturalness that can occur between the small winning game state and the big winning game state.

In addition, as a method for solving the above problems, when the result of the second special lottery in the "high-probability short-time gaming state", "high-probability non-short-time gaming state" or "low-probability short-time gaming state" is "jackpot" The variable time of is always reach production (normal reach for high start, super reach A for high start or super reach B for high start) instead of the aspect (see FIG. 259), for example, reach with a probability of 50% A variation pattern (13H, 14H, 15H) in which production (normal reach for high start, super reach A for high start, super reach B for high start) is performed, and a variation pattern in which super speed variation is performed with a probability of 50% ( 19H). Then, when the result of the second special lottery is "big win" and the main CPU 101 determines the super-speed fluctuation, by executing the above-mentioned premium effect, the game state between the small win game state and the big win game state is changed. It is possible to reduce unnaturalness that may occur.

In the above description, in the second special lottery, the case where the "small win" and the "big win" continue has been explained, but it is desirable to reduce the unnaturalness that can occur between the small win game state and the big win game state. If possible, it is not necessarily limited to this, and in the second special lottery, there may be a "loss" between the "small win" and the "big win". In this case, compared with the case where the "small win" and the "big win" are consecutive, there is a high possibility that the time between the small win game state and the big win game state will be longer, but the small win game state and the big win game state are more likely to occur. Between the small win game state and the big win game state, the above-described pseudo interval performance is performed between the states, and the fluctuation display when the result of the second special lottery is "big win" is performed with super-speed fluctuation. It is possible to reduce the unnaturalness that can occur in While the main CPU 101 is performing the variable display of the second special symbols for the "loss" between the "small win" and the "big win", the sub CPU 201 preferably does not display an image showing the loss. .

Also, in the above description, a series of effects were described as if the small winning game state and the big winning game state were controlled to be one premium big winning game state. The display on the display device 16 is not denied. That is, usually, the liquid crystal display device 16 displays effects for the player to see, such as variable effects of decorative patterns and effects by characters, and, apart from these, special patterns displayed in correspondence with the variable display of special patterns. A liquid crystal display device 16 displays an effect such as corresponding symbols that the player does not notice. A series of effects as if the above-mentioned small winning game state and big winning game state are controlled to one premium big winning game state are effects to be shown to the player, so apart from such effects Even if the effect of the symbol corresponding to the special symbol to be displayed is displayed on the liquid crystal display device 16, there is no problem because it is an effect that the operator does not notice.

By the way, when the above-mentioned premium effect control processing is executed, when the main CPU 101 controls the game state to the small winning game state, the sub CPU 101 starts the premium effect, but the main CPU 101 predicts the "big win". There is a possibility that the variable display of the first special pattern is performed and the ``big hit'' is derived before the ``big hit'' about the starting memory of the second special pattern prefetched and determined to exist. In this case, the "jackpot" of the start memory of the second special symbol read in advance by the read-ahead function of the main CPU 101 is canceled, leading to a "losing", which may disappoint the player. In addition, the display control of the premier effect that has already started becomes complicated, and there is a risk that the control load on the sub CPU 201 will increase. Therefore, when starting the premium effect, the sub CPU 201 stores the first start memory (the first start memory stored in step S55 (see FIG. 120)) based on the command transmitted from the main CPU 101. It is determined whether or not the starting memory determined that the "jackpot" can be derived by the look-ahead function of the main CPU 101 is included in the above. The sub CPU 201 executes the premium performance when the stored first starting memory does not include the starting memory determined to lead to the ``jackpot''. This makes it possible to reduce the disappointment and display control load that may be imposed on the player.

In the above description, an example is described in which the result of the second special lottery is to derive the "small hit" first rather than the "big hit". , the sub CPU 201 can perform the following effects.

First, the look-ahead function by the main CPU 101 stores " It is determined whether or not "small win" is included. This determination is made by the sub CPU 201 based on the command transmitted from the main CPU 101 . Here, when it is determined that a "small win" is included in the stored second start memory, after the big win game state is completed, a variable display of the second special symbol is performed and " Small hit" is derived.

Therefore, the sub CPU 201 performs a round-up effect suggesting that the number of rounds has increased in a pseudo manner before the jackpot game state ends. That is, although the number of execution rounds of the round game executed in the big winning game state does not change, a round-up performance is performed to make it look as if the number of rounds has increased by executing the small winning game. For example, when the number of rounds of the jackpot game is 15 rounds, if it is determined by the look-ahead function of the main CPU 101 that the stored second start memory is a "minor win", the sub CPU 201, for example, “Plus 1 round” is displayed on the liquid crystal display device 16 .

However, the above-mentioned round-up performance is performed when it is controlled to the "high-probability short-time gaming state", "high-probability non-short-time gaming state" or "low-probability short-time gaming state" after the end of the jackpot game state. This is because, when controlled to these gaming states, the variable display time of the second special symbol is determined by referring to the special symbol variable time determination table for high start. That is, when the "normal game state" is controlled after the end of the jackpot game state, the variation display time of the second special symbol is determined by referring to the special symbol variation time determination table for low start. Therefore, it takes a long time to derive the "minor hit".

Such a round-up performance may be performed when the second starting memory in which the starting condition is established first among the stored second starting memories is determined to be a "minor win". , Even if the second starting memory in which the start condition is satisfied first after the big win game state ends is "losing", if the stored second starting memory includes "small win", the round-up is performed. A performance may be performed. Even if the second start memory in which the start condition is established first after the jackpot game state ends is "losing", "high probability short-time game state", "high-probability non-short-time game state" or "low-probability short time game state" ”, as described above, the fluctuation display time of the second special symbol can be determined to be a super-speed fluctuation with reference to the special symbol fluctuation time determination table for high start, so the impact on the round-up effect is It is thought that there are few.

Further, as a result of pre-reading the stored second start memory, if the "minor win" continues, the sub CPU 201 may display "plus 2 rounds" on the liquid crystal display device 16, or display "plus 1 round". "Round" may be displayed on the liquid crystal display device 16, and "Plus 1 round" may be displayed on the liquid crystal display device 16 after one small winning game is played. In the pachinko game machine of the first embodiment, a maximum of 5 hit judgment results, which is the sum of the 4 holding upper limit numbers of the second start memory and 1 that is currently fluctuating, can be read in advance, and at least one of them is a jackpot. , and when the other four are small wins, the display of "plus 4 rounds" can be executed at maximum. Also, if there are 2 or more jackpots out of the 5, it is possible to further increase the value of "plus round". For example, if all of the five pending second starting memories are 16R jackpots, a maximum of 80R can be displayed.

By the way, the sub CPU 201 performs an ending effect indicating the end of the big win game state at the end of the big win game state. However, when the roundup performance is performed, it is preferable that the ending performance is not performed at the end of the big win game state, and the ending performance is performed after the small winning game targeted for the roundup performance is completed. In this way, by performing the ending effect after the small winning game targeted for the roundup effect ends, it is possible to increase the credibility of the roundup effect.

[Pachinko machine of the second embodiment]
Next, the pachinko game machine of the second embodiment will be explained. In the pachinko gaming machine of the second embodiment, as in the pachinko gaming machine of the first embodiment, the main CPU 101 determines the type of jackpot. As explained in the pachinko game machine of the first embodiment, the type of jackpot means the number of rounds executed in the jackpot game, the jackpot game state after the jackpot game ends, and the general game state (game state that is not the jackpot game state, hereinafter The same.) It is whether or not to turn on the probability variation flag and whether or not to turn on the time saving flag in the game state after shifting to, and these are determined according to the hit time selection symbol command related to the big hit . As described in the pachinko gaming machine 1 according to the first embodiment, this winning time selection symbol command is the judgment value data and the symbol acquired when the game ball wins the first start port 5442 or the second start port 440 It is determined based on random numbers (see FIG. 256 for both).

In the pachinko gaming machine of the first embodiment described above, when determining the selection symbol command at the time of winning, the main CPU 101 has a "normal game state", a "high probability short-time game state", a "high-probability non-time-saving game state" and In any gaming state of the "low-probability short-working-time gaming state", determination is made with reference to the symbol determination table (first start opening, second start opening) in FIG. 256 .

On the other hand, in the pachinko gaming machine of the second embodiment, when determining the selection symbol command at the time of winning, the main CPU 101 does not , Although it is the same in that it is determined by referring to the symbol determination table (first start port, second start port) of FIG. ” is determined by referring to the symbol determination table (first start port, second start port) in FIG. 267 instead of the symbol determination table (first start port, second start port) in FIG. different.

Figure 267 is a pattern determination table (first start opening, second start opening) stored in the main ROM 102 of the main control circuit 100 in the pachinko game machine of the second embodiment, ” and “low-probability short-time gaming state” is an example of a table referred to.

As shown in the symbol determination table (first start port) of FIG. 267, the main CPU 101 of the pachinko game machine of the second embodiment is in the electric support state "high-probability short-time gaming state" and "low-probability short-time gaming state" ”, when the judgment value data obtained based on the winning of the game ball to the first starting port 5442 is “big hit judgment value data” (the first executed based on the winning to the first starting port 5442 When the result of the special lottery is "big hit"), the selection symbol command at the time of winning is determined to be "z14" with 100% probability. When the winning selection symbol command is determined to be "z14", as can be seen by referring to the big hit type determination table in FIG. be done.

That is, in the "high-probability short-time gaming state" and "low-probability short-time gaming state" that are in the electric support state, the jackpot game state is achieved by hitting left that allows the game ball to enter the first start port 5442. The game state after the end is always controlled to the "high-probability non-time-saving game state" in which the expected value of the number of prize balls to the number of shot balls per unit time exceeds 1.例文帳に追加However, in the "high-probability short-time gaming state" and "low-probability short-time gaming state", it is possible to receive the benefits of the electric sapo when hitting the right side, and even if you hit the left side, you can receive the benefits of the electric sapo. can't

Therefore, when it is controlled to the "high-probability short-time gaming state" or "low-probability short-time gaming state" that is the electric sapo state, the game played by the player hitting left can receive the benefits of the electric sapo. Although there is a disadvantage that it can not be done, when the result of the first special lottery is "jackpot", it is always controlled to "high probability non-time-saving game state" after the jackpot game state is finished. It is a thrilling game with high risk and high return compared to the game played by

Further, as shown in the symbol determination table (second start port) of FIG. In the "game state", when the determination value data obtained based on the winning of the game ball to the second start port 440 is "big hit determination value data" (executed based on the winning to the second start port 440 When the result of the first special lottery is "big win"), the selection symbol command at the time of winning is determined to be one of "z15" to "z21". That is, as can be seen by referring to Figures 256 and 257, the game state after the jackpot game is completed is controlled to "high probability short working hours game state" with a probability of 80%, 20% probability "low certainty short working hours game state is controlled. In the "high-probability short-time gaming state", when the time-saving game of the determined number of times is digested without the variable display of the special symbols being performed and the "jackpot" being derived, it is controlled to the "high-probability non-time-saving gaming state". However, after the jackpot game state is finished, it is not immediately controlled to the "high-probability non-time-saving game state".

That is, in the "high-probability short-time gaming state" and "low-probable short-time gaming state" that are in the electric support state, the jackpot game state is achieved by hitting to the right that allows the game ball to enter the second start port 440. The game state after the end is not immediately controlled to a ``high-probability non-time-saving game state'' in which the expected value of the number of prize balls for the number of shot balls per unit time exceeds 1, and is similar to a general probability variable loop game. Become.

Therefore, when it is controlled to the "high-probability short-time gaming state" or "low-probability short-time gaming state" that is the electric support state, the game performed by the player hitting right is performed after the jackpot game state is completed. Although it is not immediately controlled to a "high-precision non-time-saving game state", it can receive the benefits of the electric sapo, and it becomes a stable game with low risk and low return compared to the game played left-handed.

As described above, according to the pachinko gaming machine of the second embodiment, it is possible to determine which game is to be executed, either the thrilling game with relatively high risk and high return or the stable game with relatively low risk and low return. can be given to the player depending on the shooting mode (right-handed or left-handed) of the game ball. However, it is preferable that the expected value of the number of prize balls with respect to the final number of shot balls is the same for right-handed and left-handed shots.

In addition, a pachinko machine having a setting function like the pachinko machine according to the second embodiment, that is, one of a plurality of set values (for example, 6 levels) with different probabilities of "jackpot" in the special lottery In a gaming machine in which a special lottery is executed based on a value, when the probability of a "big win" is a low setting value with a relatively low probability, or when the probability of a "big win" is a high setting value with a relatively high probability. As compared with , the expected value of the variable display of special symbols to derive a "jackpot" is low. Although it is preferable to make the expected value of the number of prize balls with respect to the final number of shot balls be the same for right-handed and left-handed shots, it is expected that a "big hit" will be derived in this way. When the value is a low set value, the expected value of the number of prize balls that the player can obtain in the "high-probability non-time-saving gaming state" is greater than when the value is a high set value. Therefore, when the setting value is low, it is better to hit the left when it is controlled to the "high-probability short-time gaming state" or "low-probability short-time gaming state" that is in the electric sapo state compared to the case of hitting the right. , the expected value of the number of prize balls for the number of balls fired per unit time is high. On the other hand, when it is a high setting value, it is better to hit the right when it is controlled to the "high-probability short-time game state" or "low-probability short-time game state" that is in the electric sapo state compared to the case of hitting left. , the expected value of the number of prize balls for the number of balls fired per unit time is high. In this case, simply giving the player the right to choose which game to play, either a thrilling game with a relatively high risk and high return or a stable game with a relatively low risk and low return. Instead, it is possible to provide a new game feature such that the expected value of the number of prize balls for the number of shot balls per unit time differs depending on the set value when hitting the ball to the right and when hitting the ball to the left. Furthermore, if the set value can be estimated, it is possible to provide a more interesting game together with the above.

As explained in the pachinko gaming machine of the second embodiment, the configuration of a gaming machine in which a game is played based on one of a plurality of set values is briefly described as follows. That is, in this type of gaming machine, the main CPU 101 is provided with a non-volatile storage means for storing a plurality of set values with different probabilities of variably displaying special symbols and deriving a "jackpot". Further, the main CPU 101 executes a special lottery based on one of a plurality of set values stored in the storage means, performs variable display of special symbols, and derives the result of the special lottery. A variation control means is provided. The above one setting value is used to start/stop the supply of power from the power supply circuit to operation means called setting keys that can be operated by the gaming machine manager, and to the main control circuit 100 and the sub-control circuit 200. , the backup clear switch 330, and the setting operation means for changing the set value. Specifically, it is necessary to perform a power-off operation first. Then, in a state in which the power is not turned on, when an operation means called a setting key is turned ON, and both the backup clear switch 330 is pressed and the power switch is turned ON, the main CPU 101 can change the setting value. control to a simple setting change state. In the setting change state, the main CPU 101 cyclically displays the information indicating the setting value on the predetermined display monitor each time the setting operation means is pressed. When an operation means called a setting key is turned off in the setting change state, the main CPU 101 ends the setting change state and sets a setting value displayed on a predetermined display monitor as one setting value. A game is executed by the main CPU 101 based on one set value set in this manner.

[Pachinko machine of the third embodiment]
Next, the pachinko game machine of the third embodiment will be explained. The pachinko game machine of the third embodiment has a board configuration of the game board unit 17 (see FIG. 268) that is partially different from the pachinko game machine of the first embodiment (see FIG. 254). In addition, the change timing of the special symbol variation time (variable display time) determination table is also different from that of the pachinko machine of the first embodiment.

FIG. 268 is an example of a front view showing the appearance of the game board unit in the pachinko game machine of the third embodiment.

As shown in FIG. 268, unlike the pachinko game machine of the first embodiment, the pachinko machine of the third embodiment has a passage gate 49 in the left area (there is no passage gate 49 in the right area). . In addition, on the downstream side of the passage gate 49, in addition to the conventionally provided first starting port 5442, there is another first starting port in which left-handed game balls can win. In order to distinguish between the two, for the sake of convenience, the other first starting port is referred to as the first starting port 54421, but when the game ball wins in the first starting port 5442 and when the game ball wins in the first starting port 54421 The control by the main CPU 101 is almost the same between when and when.

In addition, by making it possible to advance and retreat in the front-rear direction with respect to the transparent panel 172, the ease of winning the game ball to the first start port 54421 is changed, or the winning of the game ball to the first start port 54421 is impossible. It has a movable member 54422 that can be changed in and possible ways.

The movable member 54422 is configured to be able to move forward and backward with respect to the transparent panel 172, and when the normal symbol in the normal symbol display portion 71 becomes a specific stop display mode (hit), it operates in the forward direction. It is configured to guide the game ball on 54422 to the first starting port 54421 (backward). In this way, the movable member 54422 changes the first starting port 54421 from a mode in which it is impossible or difficult to win a game ball to a mode in which it is possible or easy. The main CPU 101 actuates the movable member 54422 forward in the electric support state to facilitate the winning of the game ball into the first starting port 54421 .

In the pachinko game machine of this third embodiment, the passage gate 49, the first starting port 5442, and the first starting port 54421 are configured so that left-handed game balls can pass or win.

Further, similarly to the pachinko game machine of the first embodiment (see FIG. 254), the big winning opening 540 and the special electric accessory 600 are arranged in the upper right part of the liquid crystal display device 16 in the game area 20. By driving the shutter 610 by the winning opening solenoid, an opening mode that enables (or facilitates) entry of game balls into the large winning opening 540 and an opening mode in which entry of game balls into the large winning opening 540 is disabled (or It is configured to be able to shift (drive) to a closed mode that makes it difficult to close).

A second starting port 4401 is arranged at the lower right side of the liquid crystal display device 16, that is, at the downstream side of the big prize winning port 540 and the special electric accessory 600. As shown in FIG. About 1 out of 5 game balls that are hit to the right and do not enter the big winning hole 540 enter the second starting hole 4401.例文帳に追加

Further downstream of the second starting opening 4401, a small winning shutter 6100 that can move forward and backward with respect to the small winning prize opening 5400 and the transparent panel 172 is arranged. The small winning shutter 6100 can be driven by a small winning opening solenoid (not shown). When the small winning shutter 6100 operates forward with respect to the transparent panel 172, the small winning prize opening 5400 is closed, and when the small winning shutter 6100 operates backward with respect to the transparent panel 172, the small winning prize opening 5400 is closed. It becomes an open mode. If the small hit winning opening 5400 is open mode, most of the game balls that did not win the second start opening 4401 win the small hitting winning opening 5400.例文帳に追加

Thus, in the pachinko game machine of the third embodiment, the big winning opening 540, the second starting opening 4401 and the small winning winning opening 5400 are configured so that a right-handed game ball can pass through or win.

Further, in the pachinko gaming machine of the third embodiment, the main CPU 101, similarly to the pachinko gaming machine of the first embodiment, sets the general gaming state, which is not the jackpot gaming state, as the "normal gaming state", the "high-accuracy short-time game state”, “high probability non-time-saving game state” and “low-probability time-saving game state”. Specifically, the main CPU 101 changes the game state after the jackpot game state to the "high-probability short-time gaming state" or "low-probability short-time gaming state" based on the winning selection symbol command (see FIG. 257). to control. Then, as in the pachinko gaming machine of the first embodiment, in the "high-probability time-saving gaming state", when the time-saving is consumed without deriving the special symbol combination indicating the "jackpot", the main CPU 101 Control is executed to shift from "high-probability short-time gaming state" to "high-probability non-time-saving gaming state".

Here, FIG. 269 shows that in the pachinko gaming machine of the third embodiment, the variable time determination executed by the main CPU 101 is triggered by the transition from the “high-probability short-time gaming state” to the “high-probability short-time gaming state”. 10 is a flowchart showing table setting processing; This fluctuation time determination table setting process is another example of the flowchart showing the fluctuation pattern setting process of step S173 (see FIG. 127) executed in the pachinko gaming machine 1 according to the first embodiment.

With reference to FIG. 269, the fluctuation time determination table setting process executed triggered by the shift from the "high probability short working hours gaming state" to the "high probability non-short working hours gaming state" will be described. The main CPU 101 first determines whether or not the gaming state has changed (step S1811). If the gaming state has not transitioned (NO in step S1811), the main CPU 101 ends the variable time determination table setting process without changing the variable time determination table referred to when determining the variable time of the special symbols. . When determining that the game state has shifted (YES in step S1811), the main CPU 101 determines whether or not the game state to be shifted to is a "high-accuracy non-work-time-saving game state" (step S1812). When the game state to be shifted to is the "high-accuracy non-work-time-saving game state" (YES in step S1812), the main CPU 101 refers to the variable time determination table shown in FIG. It is set in the variable time determination table for the special symbol for high start (step S1813), and the variable time determination table setting process is terminated. On the other hand, when the game state of the transition destination is not the "high-accuracy non-time-saving game state" (NO in step S1812), the main CPU 101 refers to the variable time determination table for determining the variable time of the special symbol, as shown in FIG. It is set in the variable time determination table for the special symbol for low start shown (step S1814), and the variable time determination table setting process is terminated.

In this way, in the "normal game state", a combination of special symbols indicating "big win" is derived and shifted to the big win game state, and this big win game state ends and the "high-probability short-time game state" or "low-probability" 258, the main CPU 101 refers to the special symbol variation time determination table for low start shown in FIG. Determine the variation time of Then, when the time saving is consumed without deriving the special symbol combination indicating the "big hit" in the "high-probability short-time gaming state", the main CPU 101 changes the gaming state from the "high-probability short-time gaming state" to the "high-probability While executing the control to shift to the non-time-saving gaming state, the variable time determination table of special symbols to be referred to is changed from the variable time determination table of special symbols for low start shown in FIG. 258 to the high start shown in FIG. Execute the control to change to the special symbol fluctuation time determination table for.

(Game flow)
Next, the game flow in the pachinko game machine of the third embodiment will be explained. The main CPU 101 controls the game state to any one of the “normal game state”, “high-probability short-time game state”, “high-probability non-short-time game state” and “low-probability short-time game state”, but “low-probability Time saving game state" is not an essential game state. In these game states, a general player plays the game by hitting left. In game states other than "high probability non-time-saving gaming state", that is, "normal gaming state", "high-probability short-time gaming state" and "low-probability short-time gaming state", even if you hit right, the result of the second special lottery Unless it is a "jackpot", the fluctuation display of the second special symbol based on the winning of the game ball to the second starting port 4401 is performed for a long time such as about 10 minutes (long fluctuation A to C), and the player only loses. be.

In the "normal game state" in which the game is played to the left, when the variable display of the first special symbols is performed and the "jackpot" symbol combination is derived, the main CPU 101 selects the time of winning as shown in FIG. Based on the pattern command, the number of times of time saving is determined from a plurality of times of time saving such as 24 times, 30 times, 36 times, 42 times, 48 times and 100 times. Further, when the variable display of the first special symbol or the variable display of the second special symbol is performed and the symbol combination of "big win" is derived, the main CPU 101 controls to the big win game state. In this jackpot game state, it is possible for a game ball to enter the jackpot 540, so a general player plays the game by hitting to the right.

When the jackpot game state ends, the main CPU 101 executes control to shift the game state to a "high-accuracy time-saving game state" unless the symbol designation command is "zA5" selected with an extremely low probability. When the game state shifts to the "high-probability short-time game state", the general player will play the game by returning from right-handed to left-handed. In this "high-probability short-time gaming state", as described above, the main CPU101, based on the winning of the game ball to the first start port 5442 and / and the second start port 4401, the low start shown in FIG. A special symbol variation time determination table is referenced to determine a special symbol variation time. In addition, when the symbol designation command is "zA5", the main CPU 101 changes the game state after the jackpot game state to the "high-probability short-time gaming state" without shifting to the "high-probability short-time gaming state". Control.

In the "high-probability short-time gaming state", when the determined number of time-saving games are consumed without deriving a combination of special symbols indicating "big hit", the main CPU 101 changes the gaming state to "high-probability short-time gaming". state” to the “high-probability non-time-saving game state”, and as described above, the variable time determination table referred to when determining the variable time of the special symbol is changed to the special symbol for low start shown in FIG. 259 to a special symbol variation time determination table for high start shown in FIG.

In this way, in the "normal game state", "high-probability short-time game state" or "low-probability short-time game state", the fluctuation display of the first special symbol is mainly performed, and even if the player hits right, the second Since the variable display of the 2 special symbols is performed for a long time such as about 10 minutes, the frequency of opening the small winning prize opening 5400 so that the game ball to the small winning prize opening 5400 wins a prize is relatively small.

On the other hand, in the "high probability non-time-saving gaming state", when the game ball wins the second start port 4401, most of the fluctuation display of the second special symbol is not only super-fast, but also about one-fifth A game ball can enter a small winning prize hole 5400 with probability, and the expected value of the number of prize balls exceeds 1 with respect to the number of shot balls per unit time.

In addition, in the pachinko game machine of the third embodiment, the number of times of time saving determined based on the selection pattern command at the time of winning is produced by both the main CPU 101 and the sub CPU 201 until the time saving game of the number of times of time saving is completed. kept confidential without being disclosed to the public. In addition to the number of times of time saving, for example, as described with reference to FIG. It is preferable that the player cannot or cannot grasp whether the game state is the game state or the low-probability state even by looking at the display effect performed by the sub CPU 201 on the liquid crystal display device 16 . Then, the player moves from the "high-accuracy short-time gaming state" in which the expected value of the number of prize balls to the number of fired balls is less than 1, to the "high-accuracy non-time-saving game state" in which the expected value of the number of prize balls to the number of fired balls exceeds 1. It is configured so that it is impossible or difficult to grasp at what timing the main CPU 101 is controlled to shift to the "state" until the state is shifted to the "high-accuracy non-time-saving gaming state". Then, in the "high-probability time-saving game state", when the time-saving game is digested without deriving a combination of special symbols indicating "big hit", the sub CPU 201 reaches the ceiling (time-saving is digested). is displayed on the liquid crystal display device 16. This makes it possible to enhance the amusement of the game.

In addition, in the pachinko game machine of the third embodiment described above, at an extremely low probability (when the symbol designation command is "zA5"), the game state after the jackpot game state is completed is "high probability non-time-saving game state". However, it is not limited to this, and the game state after the jackpot game state is finished may be always controlled to the "high-probability short-time game state".

In addition, in the pachinko game machine of the third embodiment described above, when controlled to the jackpot game state based on the winning of the game ball to the first start port 5442, 54421, and the game ball to the second start port 4401 In any case when the jackpot game state is controlled based on the winning, the game state after the jackpot game state ends is controlled to be almost "a high probability short-time game state", but not limited to this, for example, When the jackpot game state is controlled based on the winning of the game balls to the first start ports 5442 and 54421, the control is made to the ``high probability non-time-saving game state'' with a probability of 10%, and the second start port 4401. When it is controlled to the jackpot game state based on the winning of the game ball, it may be controlled to the "high probability non-time-saving game state" with a probability of 50%. In this way, when it is controlled to the big hit game state based on the winning of the game ball to the second start port 4401, it is controlled to the big hit game state based on the winning of the game ball to the first start ports 5442 and 54421. By controlling the "high probability non-time-saving game state" with a higher probability than when Not only does the expected value of the number of prize balls exceed 1 in a specific state (high-probability non-time-saving game state), but also the probability of looping such a specific state is increased, thereby realizing a highly entertaining game. becomes possible.

In addition, in the pachinko game machine of the fourth embodiment and the first modification of the pachinko game machine of the fourth embodiment, the first start port 54421 is provided separately from the first start port 5442, and the movable member 54422 is replaced by the transparent panel 172. By making it possible to advance and retreat in the front and back direction with respect to, the ease of winning of the game ball to the first start port 54421 is changed, but it is not limited to this. For example, a so-called electric chew such as the blade member 4620 is provided above the first starting port 5442, and in the electric sapo state, the so-called electric chew is operated to facilitate the winning of the first starting port 5442. can be In this case, regardless of whether it is in the electric sapo state, the special symbol variation time is determined by referring to the special symbol variation time determination table for high start. It suffices if game balls can be won to some extent in the second start opening so that the expected value of the number of prize balls exceeds one. In addition, when determining the variation time of the special symbol with reference to the special symbol variation time determination table for low start, the variation display of the second special symbol is extremely long time (long variation A, long variation B or long variation C ), the expected value of the number of prize balls with respect to the number of shot balls per unit time does not exceed 1 even if game balls can be won to some extent in the second start hole.

[Pachinko machine of the fourth embodiment]
Next, the pachinko game machine of the fourth embodiment will be explained. The pachinko game machine of the fourth embodiment has a board configuration of the game board unit 17 (see FIG. 270) that is partially different from the pachinko game machine of the first embodiment (see FIG. 254). In addition, the change timing of the special symbol variation time (variable display time) determination table is also different from that of the pachinko machine of the first embodiment.

FIG. 270 is an example of a front view showing the appearance of the game board unit in the pachinko game machine of the fourth embodiment.

As shown in FIG. 270, unlike the pachinko game machine of the first embodiment, the pachinko machine of the fourth embodiment has a passage gate 49 in the left area (there is no passage gate 49 in the right area). . In addition, on the downstream side of the passage gate 49, there is a second starting port 4401, and by making the transparent panel 172 movable forward and backward, the easiness of winning of the game ball to the second starting port 4401 can be changed. Alternatively, it is provided with a movable member 4651 that can change between a mode in which the winning of game balls to the second starting port 4401 is impossible and a mode in which it is possible. Furthermore, on the downstream side of the second starting port 4401, there is a small winning prize opening 5400, a small winning shutter 6100 that can move forward and backward with respect to the transparent panel 172, and a small winning winning that drives the small winning shutter 6100. A port solenoid (not shown) is provided.

The movable member 4651 is configured to be able to move forward and backward with respect to the transparent panel 172, and when the normal symbol in the normal symbol display portion 71 becomes a specific stop display mode (hit), it operates forward and this movable member It is configured to guide the game ball on 4651 to the second starting port 4401 (backward). In this way, the movable member 4651 changes the second starting port 4401 from a mode in which it is difficult to win a game ball to a mode in which it is easy. The main CPU 101 actuates the movable member 4651 forward in the power support state to facilitate the winning of the game ball into the second starting port 4401 . In addition, when the winning of the game ball to the second starting port 4401 is not facilitated (when the winning of the game ball is in a difficult mode), the winning of the game ball to the second starting port 4401 is the first start It is about the same as the winning of the game ball to the opening 5442, or the winning of the game ball is slightly more difficult than the first starting opening 5442.

Thus, in the pachinko game machine of the fourth embodiment, the passage gate 49, the first starting port 5442, the second starting port 4401, and the small winning prize port 5400 are all passed or It is configured to be able to win prizes. Also, the big winning hole 540 is configured so that a right-handed game ball can win a prize.

In the pachinko gaming machine of the fourth embodiment, the main CPU 101 displays the special symbol variation time determination table, which is referred to when determining the special symbol variation time, as shown in FIG. Control is executed to change from the special symbol variation time determination table for low start shown in FIG. 259 to the special symbol variation time determination table for high start shown in FIG. Processing by the main CPU 101 at this time will be described with reference to FIG.

FIG. 271 is an example of a flow chart showing the variable time determination table setting process executed by the main CPU 101 upon completion of the small winning game state in the pachinko gaming machine of the fourth embodiment.

With reference to FIG. 271, the variation time determination table setting process which is executed when the small winning game state ends will be described. The main CPU 101 first determines whether or not the small winning game state has shifted (step S1821). If the small winning game state is not executed or if the small winning game state is being executed (NO in step S1821), the main CPU 101 changes the variable time determination table referred to when determining the variable time of the special symbol. Without doing so, the fluctuation time determination table setting process is terminated. When determining that the small winning game state has ended (YES in step S1821), the main CPU 101 sets the variable time determination table, that is, the variable time determination table currently used for reference, as shown in FIG. It is determined whether or not it is a special symbol variation time determination table for low start (step S1822). If the set variable time determination table is the special symbol variable time determination table for low start (YES in step S1822), the main CPU 101 refers to the variable time determination table when determining the special symbol variable time. is set in the variable time determination table for special symbols for high start shown in FIG. 259 (step S1823), and the variable time determination table setting process is terminated. On the other hand, if the set variable time determination table is not the special symbol variable time determination table for low start shown in FIG. 258 (NO in step S1822), the main CPU 101 determines the special symbol variable time. The variable time determination table setting process is ended without changing the variable time determination table to be referred to. In step S1822, if the set variable time determination table is not the low start special symbol variable time determination table shown in FIG. It is a variable time determination table for special symbols for start.

Therefore, while the special symbol variation time is determined by referring to the special symbol variation time determination table for low start, even if the game ball wins the second start port 4401, the result of the second special lottery Unless it is a "big hit", the variation display of the second special symbol (long variations A to C) is performed for a very long time, so the variation display of the first special symbol is mainly performed. Therefore, the frequency in which the small-hit winning opening 5400 becomes an open mode so that the game ball to the small-hitting winning opening 5400 wins a prize is relatively small.

On the other hand, with the end of the small winning game state as a trigger, after the change to the special symbol fluctuation time determination table for high start shown in FIG. When a prize is won, most of the fluctuation display of the second special symbol is changed at a super speed, and the game ball can enter the small winning prize opening 5400 with a probability of about 1/5, and the ball fired per unit time. A specific state where the expected value of the number of prize balls for the number exceeds one.

In the above description, the state in which the expected value of the number of prize balls for the number of balls fired per unit time exceeds 1 is defined as a specific state, but the expected value of the number of prize balls does not exceed 1 but is extremely close to 1 ( For example, the state of 0.99) may be set as the second specific state. In that case, it is desirable that the expected value is higher than the expected value (for example, 0.90) when hitting left during the time saving state (during the electric sapo). During the time-saving state of left-handed hitting, a small hit is triggered to shift to the second specific state, start right-handed hitting, and then shift to a more advantageous specific state by digesting the number of time-saving times, raising the expected value in three stages. It is possible to do It should be noted that this modified example in which the variation pattern changes due to a small hit is not limited to the fourth embodiment, and can be applied to other embodiments as long as it is applicable.

Further, in the modified example of the pachinko gaming machine of the fourth embodiment, as described above, the special symbols for high start are determined from the special symbol fluctuation time determination table for low start (see FIG. 258) triggered by the end of the small winning game state. Since it is changed to the symbol variation time determination table (see FIG. 259), when the special symbol variation time is determined by referring to the special symbol variation time determination table for low start (in this modification, the player It is desirable to be able to win a "small hit" when hitting left. For example, in the first special lottery with a probability that the expected value of the number of prize balls for the number of balls fired per unit time in the "normal game state" does not exceed the range (for example, 55% to 60%) A game ball is placed in the second start port 4401 at a frequency that does not exceed the range of the expected value of the number of prize balls for the number of balls fired per unit time in the "normal game state" when winning or hitting left. You should try to win a prize.

In this way, the main CPU 101 sets the variable time determination table, which is referred to when determining the variable time of the special symbols, based on the completion of the small winning game state, the special symbols for low start shown in FIG. By changing the variable time determination table to the variable time determination table of special symbols for high start shown in FIG. It is possible to suppress the decline in the interest in the game that may occur when the player cannot win the prize.

It should be noted that the main CPU 101 changes the variable time determination table referred to when determining the variable time of the special symbol to the special symbol variable time determination table for high start from the special symbol variable time determination table for low start triggered by the end of the small winning gaming state. After changing to the symbol fluctuation time determination table, a high The variable time of the special symbol is determined by referring to the variable time determination table of the special symbol for start. The main CPU 101 may change to the special symbol variation time determination table for low start based on the lapse of the period, or may change the variation time determination table for the special symbol for low start based on the lapse of the period. It may be determined whether to change to the determination table or continue to refer to the variable time determination table of special symbols for high start.

By the way, in the above, when the small winning game state ends while the special symbol variation time determination table for low start is set, the table is always changed to the special symbol variation time determination table for high start. but not limited to this. For example, when the small hit game state ends while the special symbol fluctuation time determination table for low start is set, the main CPU 101 determines a predetermined condition (for example, whether or not the main CPU 101 changes the table and winning this lottery, or setting a plurality of small winning patterns, changing the table if the small winning pattern is 1 and not changing the table if the small winning pattern is 2, etc.) is determined, and if a predetermined condition is not established, the variable time determination table for special symbols for low start is continued to be referred to, and based on the establishment of the predetermined condition, the variable time determination table for special symbols for high start is determined. may be changed to

[Modification of the pachinko machine of the fourth embodiment]
Next, a modification of the pachinko game machine of the fourth embodiment will be described. The appearance configuration of this modification of the pachinko gaming machine of the fourth embodiment is the same as that of the pachinko gaming machine of the fourth embodiment (FIG. 270). That is, the passage gate 49, the first starting port 5442, the second starting port 4401, and the small hit winning port 5400 are all configured so that left-handed game balls can pass or win. Also, the big winning hole 540 is configured so that a right-handed game ball can win a prize.

In this modified example of the pachinko gaming machine of the fourth embodiment, the main CPU 101 determines the fluctuation time of the special symbols, in principle, in the "normal game state", the fluctuation of the special symbols for low start shown in FIG. Perform with reference to the time determination table, in the "high-probability short working hours gaming state", "high-probability non-short working hours gaming state" or "low-probability short working hours gaming state" variable time determination table of special symbols for high start shown in FIG. However, only for a predetermined period after the backup is cleared, reference is made to the special symbol variation time determination table for middle start shown in FIG.

FIG. 272 is a table stored in the main ROM 102 in the modification of the pachinko gaming machine of the fourth embodiment, showing a special symbol variation time (variable display time) determination table for middle start. The table shown in FIG. 272 shows the fluctuation display of the second special symbol when the result of the second special lottery is "small win" or "losing", and the fluctuation of the special symbol for low start shown in FIG. Shorter than the time (58000msec~60000msec) specified in the time determination table, and longer than the time (1000msec) specified in the special symbol fluctuation time determination table for high start shown in FIG. It is a thing.

FIG. 273 is a flow chart showing the variable time determination table setting process executed by the main CPU 101 in the modification of the pachinko gaming machine of the fourth embodiment.

With reference to FIG. 273, the variation time determination table setting process in the modification of the pachinko gaming machine of the fourth embodiment will be described.

The main CPU 101 first determines whether the backup clear switch 330 has been operated and the backup has been cleared (step S1824). If the backup is cleared (YES in step S1824), main CPU 101 changes the fluctuation time determination table shown in FIG. It is set in the variable time determination table for the special symbol for start (step S1825). On the other hand, if the backup has not been cleared (NO in step S1824), the main CPU 101 moves to step S1826. Next, the main CPU 101 determines whether or not the jackpot gaming state has ended (step S1826). If the jackpot gaming state has not ended (NO in step S1826), the main CPU 101 ends the variable time determination table setting process. The main CPU 101 determines NO in step S1826 even when the jackpot game state has not yet been controlled. When the jackpot game state ends (YES in step S1826), the main CPU 101 determines whether or not to shift to the "normal game state" (step S1827). When the transition destination of the game state after the end of the jackpot game state is the "normal game state" (YES in step S1827), the main CPU 101, based on the transition to the "normal game state", the special symbol. The variable time determination table referred to when determining the variable time is set to the variable time determination table for the special symbol for low start shown in FIG. 258 (step S1828), and the variable time determination table setting process is terminated. On the other hand, the transition destination of the game state after the end of the jackpot game state is not "normal game state", that is, the transition destination is "high probability short-time gaming state", "high-probability non-short-time gaming state" or "low-probability short-time gaming state” (NO in step S1827), the main CPU 101, based on the transition to the “high-probability short-time gaming state”, “high-probability non-short-time gaming state” or “low-probability short-time gaming state”, the special symbols The variable time determination table referred to when determining the variable time is set to the variable time determination table for the special symbol for high start shown in FIG. 259 (step S1829), and the variable time determination table setting process is terminated.

Thus, in the modification of the pachinko gaming machine of the fourth embodiment, when the backup clear is performed, the main CPU 101 changes the special symbol fluctuation time determination table to be referred to to the middle start special symbols shown in FIG. Execute control to change to the fluctuation time determination table.

Then, when the special symbol variation time determination table to be referred to is changed to the special symbol variation time determination table for middle start shown in FIG. The time is determined by referring to the special symbol variation time determination table for middle start shown in FIG. That is, when the special symbol variation time determination table is changed to the special symbol variation time determination table for middle start shown in FIG. is not changed. That is, once changed to the special symbol variation time determination table for medium start shown in FIG. 272, this table is not changed unless the special symbol is displayed in a variable manner to derive a "jackpot".

In the above description, when the table is changed to the special symbol variation time determination table for medium start, the table is not changed until the jackpot game state ends. When the variable display of the special symbols is performed a predetermined number of times (for example, 50 times), the reference to the special symbol variation time determination table for middle start is ended, and the variation time of the special symbol for low start shown in FIG. 258 is determined. A table may be referenced. In this case, for example, a predetermined period after the opening of the hall (until the variable display of the second special symbol is performed a predetermined number of times (eg, 50 times)) is made advantageous to the player according to the will of the gaming machine manager. becomes possible.

Although not shown in FIG. 273, when the backup clear is performed (step S1824), the main CPU 101 selects from the special symbol fluctuation time determination table for low start shown in FIG. Although the processing for changing to the special symbol variation time determination table for start is performed, the variation time determination table for special symbols for medium start illustrated in FIG. 272 is determined from the special symbol variation time determination table for high start illustrated in FIG. The process of changing the table may be omitted.

In this way, the main CPU 101 sets the variable time determination table, which is referred to when determining the variable time of the special symbol, to the variable time of the special symbol for medium start shown in FIG. 272 based on the backup clear being performed. By changing to the determination table, it becomes possible to adjust the expected value of the number of prize balls with respect to the number of shot balls per unit time at the discretion of the gaming machine manager, for example, when the hall is opened.

In addition, in the modification of the pachinko gaming machine of the fourth embodiment, similarly to the pachinko gaming machine according to the second embodiment, among the set values of a plurality of (for example, 6 stages) different probabilities of "jackpot" in the special lottery, The gaming machine may be one in which a special lottery is executed based on one of the set values. Then, only when one setting value is a specific setting value (for example, setting value 6), for example, when the sub CPU 201 executes a specific effect that makes it possible to guess one setting value, It becomes possible to provide a more interesting game property.

As described above, in the case of a gaming machine in which a special lottery is executed based on one of a plurality of set values with different "jackpot" probabilities in a special lottery, one set value is specified. Not only the effect that can be guessed that the setting value is, for example, one setting value is an odd number (for example, setting values 1, 3, 5) or an even number (for example, setting values 2, 4, 6) You may perform the production|presentation which can guess whether. For example, in the modified example of the pachinko game machine of the fourth embodiment, when the result of the second special lottery is "losing", it is determined by referring to the special symbol variation time determination table for medium start in FIG. The average of the variable display time of the second special symbol is uniform with 60000 msec regardless of one set value. Instead of this, the average of the variable display time of the second special symbol stores a table of, for example, 60,000 msec and a table of 610,000 msec in the main ROM, and the main CPU 101 sets one set value to an odd number (e.g. set values 1, 3 , 5), the average of the variable display time of the second special symbol refers to a table of, for example, 60000 msec, and when one setting value is an even number (for example, setting values 2, 4, 6), The variable display time of the second special symbol may be determined by referring to a table in which the average of the variable display time of the two special symbols is, for example, 61000 msec. As a result, the player can guess one set value based on the variable display time of the second special symbol, and can further increase the interest in the game.

[Pachinko machine of the fifth embodiment]
Next, the pachinko game machine of the fifth embodiment will be explained. The pachinko gaming machine of the fifth embodiment has a board configuration of the game board unit 17 (see FIG. 274) that is partially different from the pachinko gaming machine of the first embodiment (see FIG. 254). Further, the pachinko machine of the fifth embodiment also differs from the pachinko machine of the first embodiment in the probability that the variable display of the second special symbol is performed and the "minor win" is derived.

FIG. 274 is an example of a front view showing the appearance of the game board unit in the pachinko game machine of the fifth embodiment.

As shown in FIG. 274, in the pachinko gaming machine of the fifth embodiment, the big winning opening 540 and the special electric accessory 600 are located in the game area 20, similar to the pachinko gaming machine of the first embodiment (see FIG. 254). It is arranged on the upper right side of the liquid crystal display device 16 inside, and by driving the shutter 610 by the big winning opening solenoid, it is possible (or easy) to win the game ball to the big winning opening 540. , and a closing mode that makes it impossible (or difficult) for a game ball to enter the big winning hole 540 (drive). In the pachinko game machine of the fifth embodiment, all or most of the game balls hit to the right enter the big winning hole 540 when the big winning hole 540 is in the open mode.

In addition, the normal electric accessory unit 400 is arranged on the downstream side of the big prize winning opening 540 and on the lower right side of the liquid crystal display device 16 . The normal electric accessory unit 400 is a unit body in which the second starting port 440 and the normal electric accessory 460 are integrated, but they do not necessarily have to be unitized, and may be separate bodies.

As in the pachinko game machine of the first embodiment, the normal electric accessory 460 changes the ease with which a game ball enters the second starting port 440 by moving forward and backward with respect to the transparent panel 172. Alternatively, it is provided with a movable shutter 4650 that can be changed between a state in which the game ball cannot enter the second starting port 440 and a state in which it is possible. In addition, the normal electric accessory 460 includes a starter solenoid 4630 (see, for example, FIGS. 53 and 54) and a power transmission mechanism (not shown) that transmits the power of the starter solenoid 4630 to the movable shutter 4650 .

In the pachinko game machine of the fifth embodiment, when the opening mode is such that winning to the second starting hole 440 is facilitated, the number of game balls that do not enter the big winning hole 540 among the game balls hit to the right is All or most of them are configured to enter the second starting port 440 .

In addition, a receiving member 3000 is formed on the upper right side of the normal electric accessory 460 to temporarily receive a game ball that has not won the big winning hole 540 among the game balls hit to the right. This receiving member 3000 has a function of stopping or weakening the momentum of the game ball flowing down and dropping the game ball to the upstream side (right side) of the movable shutter 4650 .

The movable shutter 4650 is a plate-like member on which a game ball can roll in the horizontal direction, and as described above, is configured to move forward and backward with respect to the transparent panel 172 . When the movable shutter 4650 advances forward with respect to the transparent panel 172, the second start opening 440 is in the open state, and when the movable shutter 4650 retreats backward with respect to the transparent panel 172, the second start opening 440 is opened. The starting port 440 is closed.

When the movable shutter 4650 advances forward with respect to the transparent panel 172, the game ball dropped from the receiving member 3000 can be received on the upstream side (right side). The game ball is configured to roll on the upper surface of the movable shutter 4650 toward the downstream side (left side).

The second starting port 440 is arranged on the most downstream side of the movable shutter 4650, and the upper surface of the movable shutter 4650 is opened so as to receive a game ball rolling from the upstream side to the downstream side. . However, when the movable shutter 4650 retreats backward in a state where there is a game ball that is rolling on the upper surface of the movable shutter 4650 but has not yet reached the second starting port 440, the upper surface of the movable shutter 4650 is rolled. The moving game ball falls to the second starting port 440 without winning.

Below the normal electric accessory unit 400, a flow-down path forming section 5500 that forms a flow-down path for game balls that have not won the second start port 440 is arranged. This flow-down path forming portion 5500 includes a first flow-down path 5501 through which game balls that have fallen from the receiving member 3000 flow down when the movable shutter 4650 is retracted in the rearward direction, and a A second flow path 5502 along which the game ball rolling on the upper surface of the movable shutter 4650 flows is formed.

In addition, the flow-down path forming unit 5500 is necessarily configured so that all game balls rolling on the upper surface of the movable shutter 4650 flow down the second flow-down path 5502 when the movable shutter 4650 is retracted in the rear direction. For example, the game ball on the most upstream side of the movable shutter 4650 (the game ball that has just fallen from the receiving member 3000) is configured to flow down the first flow path 5501. may

A small winning unit 5300 is arranged below the flow path forming section 5500 . The small winning unit 5300 includes a small winning winning opening 5400, a plate-shaped small winning shutter 6100 that can move back and forth with respect to the transparent panel 172, and a small winning winning opening solenoid ( not shown). When the small-hit shutter 6100 operates and the small-hit winning opening 5400 is in the open state, the game ball that has flowed down the first flow path 5501 (among the game balls hit to the right, the game that reached the small-hit unit 5300 All or most of the balls) are configured to win in the small winning prize opening 5400.例文帳に追加

In addition, in the pachinko game machine of the first embodiment, the first starting port 5442, the small winning prize opening 5400, the small winning shutter 6100 that can move forward and backward with respect to the transparent panel 172, and the small winning shutter 6100 are provided. Although the attacker unit 5000 is constituted by the driven small winning prize opening solenoid, the first start opening 5442 is separate in the small winning unit 5300 of the pachinko game machine of the fifth embodiment.

A passage gate 49 is arranged on the downstream side of the small winning prize opening 5400 . The passage gate 49, like the pachinko game machine of the first embodiment, provides an opportunity for normal symbol determination on the condition that the game ball passes, and in the time saving state, the game ball to the second start port 440 wins. becomes an electric support state in which is facilitated. All or most of the game balls that flowed down the first flow path 5501 but could not win the small hit prize opening 5400 because the small hit prize opening 5400 was closed, and the game balls that flowed down the second flow path 5502 It is configured to pass through a pass gate 49 .

Between the big prize winning opening 540 and the second starting opening 440, there is formed a downflow path 2500 through which the game ball can flow down. It is configured to require a certain amount of time or more for the game balls that have not won the prize winning opening 540 to flow down the first flow path 5501 and reach the small winning unit 5300.例文帳に追加This fixed period of time or more is at least a time longer than the sum of the interval time when the jackpot game ends and the variation time of the second special symbol that starts to fluctuate first after the jackpot game state ends. is preferably The reason for this will be described later.

Further, in the pachinko gaming machine of the first embodiment, the probability that the variable display of the second special symbol is performed and the "minor hit" is derived was about 1/5, but the pachinko game of the fifth embodiment In the machine, when the variable display of the second special symbol is performed, if the "big win" is not derived, the "minor win" is always derived. In other words, the probability that the result of the second special lottery is "losing" is 0, and all other than "big win" are "minor wins". In addition, when the variable display of the second special symbol is performed, it is not limited to the fact that the "small hit" is always derived, but with an extremely low probability compared to when the "small hit" is derived A "failure" may be derived.

(Game flow)
First, in the "normal game state", a general player hits left. When the left-handed game ball wins the first starting hole 5442, the main CPU 101 performs the variable display of the first special symbol. When the variable display of the first special symbol is performed and the "jackpot" is derived, the main CPU 101 executes control to shift from the "normal game state" to the jackpot game state.

In addition, the pachinko game machine of the fifth embodiment is configured as a game machine that can be controlled to a "normal game state" which is not an electric support state or a "time-saving state" which is an electric support state. In this "time-saving state", the probability of deriving a "jackpot" when variable display of special symbols is performed may be higher or lower than in the "normal game state".

In the jackpot game state, a general player plays the game with the right hand. Further, after the jackpot game state ends, the main CPU 101 executes control to shift to the "normal game state" or the "time saving state". When the main CPU 101 executes control to shift to the "normal game state", a general player plays the game by returning to left-handed hitting, but the main CPU 101 executes control to shift to the "time-saving state". and play with the right hand.

In the jackpot game state, all or most of the right-handed game balls enter the big winning hole 540, so it is difficult to pass the game ball through the passage gate 49 or enter the second starting hole 440.例文帳に追加is. Therefore, it is difficult to withhold the starting memory of the second special symbol in the jackpot game state. On the other hand, when the game is not in the jackpot game state, if the right-handed game is played, unless the right-handed game ball wins the small winning prize opening 5400, the starting memory of the second special symbol can be withheld. there is However, in the "normal game state", the starting memory of the second special symbol is not withheld because the general player plays the game with the left hand.

Therefore, when the "normal game state" transitions to the jackpot game state and the jackpot game state ends, there is a possibility that the start memory of the second special symbol is not reserved at the time the jackpot game state ends. high. On the other hand, when the "time-saving state" shifts to the jackpot game state and the jackpot game state ends, the start memory of the second special symbols is reserved up to the upper limit of four when the jackpot game state ends. Probability is high.

When the jackpot game state is completed and the control to shift to the "time saving state" is executed, and when the start memory of the second special symbol is not suspended at that time, the game ball hit to the right first flows down the flow-down path 2500. - 特許庁After flowing down and once received by the receiving member 3000, it flows down the first flowing path 5501 without rolling on the upper surface of the movable shutter 4650, and does not enter the small winning prize opening 5400, and the passage gate 49 pass through. When the game ball passes through the passage gate 49, the main CPU 101 performs normal symbol determination. When the normal symbol determination is performed, the main CPU 101 displays the variable normal symbols for a very short period of time, and derives the result of the normal symbol determination to the normal symbol display section 71 (see FIG. 8). The result of the normal symbol determination is 100% or close to 100% probability, so when the game ball passes through the passage gate 49, the movable shutter 4650 moves forward with respect to the transparent panel 172 with almost 100% probability. , and the second starting port 440 is in an open mode.

When the second starting port 440 is in the open state, the game ball that has flowed down the flow path 2500 is once received by the receiving member 3000, and then falls to the upstream side of the movable shutter 4650, and the upper surface of this movable shutter 4650 It rolls from the upstream side toward the downstream side and then enters the second starting port 440 .

When a game ball wins in the second starting port 440, the main CPU 101 conducts a second special lottery, and derives the result of the second special lottery after performing a variable display of the second special symbol. In the "short game state", the main CPU 101 performs the variation display of the second special symbol with a super-speed variation with a variation time of 1000 msec. In the pachinko gaming machine of the fifth embodiment, unlike the pachinko gaming machine of the first embodiment, when the variable display of the second special symbol is performed, the main CPU 101 always " Derive a small hit. That is, the main CPU 101 conducts the second special lottery so that when the result of the second special lottery is not a "big win", the result is always a "minor win". However, it is not limited to the mode in which a "minor win" is always derived when a "big win" is not derived, and the probability of deriving a "minor win" when a "big win" is not derived It is also possible to derive "failure" very rarely with a probability much lower than that.

When the variable display of the second special symbol is performed and a "small hit" is derived, the movable shutter 4650 advances forward with respect to the transparent panel 172, and the second starting port 440 becomes an open mode. However, as described above, when the second starting port 440 is in the open mode, all or most of the game balls dropped from the receiving member 3000 fall on the upper surface of the movable shutter 4650, and the game balls to the first flow-down path 5501 entry is obstructed, and the game ball does not reach the small winning prize opening 5400.例文帳に追加

Also, the game ball that has fallen on the upper surface of the movable shutter 4650 enters the second starting port 440 or flows down the second flow path 5502 and passes through the passage gate 49 . When the game ball passes through the passage gate 49, the movable shutter 4650 advances forward with respect to the transparent panel 172 again with a probability of almost 100%, and the second starting port 440 is opened. Then, all or most of the game balls that have fallen from the receiving member 3000 fall on the upper surface of the movable shutter 4650 again, preventing the game balls from entering the first flow-down path 5501 and falling on the upper surface of the movable shutter 4650. The game ball enters the second starting port 440 or flows down the second flow path 5502 and passes through the passage gate 49 . Therefore, when the game is played in the "time-saving state", the main CPU 101 can hold the start winning of the second special symbol up to the upper limit.

As described above, in the pachinko game machine of the fifth embodiment, when a game ball enters the second start hole 440, a "minor hit" is almost always derived when a "big hit" is not derived. In the "time saving state", the small winning prize opening 5400 is almost fully open. However, in this "time saving state", all or most of the game balls hit to the right pass through the second start port 440 or pass through the passage gate 49, so the game balls to the small winning prize port 5400 Winning will be blocked. A game ball that has passed through the passage gate 49 is discharged from the outlet 57 to the outside of the machine.

At the timing when the movable shutter 4650 retreats in the backward direction with respect to the transparent panel 172, the game ball falling from the receiving member 3000 may flow down the first flow path 5501 and enter the small winning prize opening 5400. , the expected value of the number of prize balls for the number of shot balls per unit time does not exceed 1.

When the first special symbol or the second special symbol is variably displayed and a "jackpot" is derived in a state in which the starting prize of the second special symbol is withheld, for example, to the upper limit by the main CPU 101, the main CPU 101 enters a big win gaming state. transition to Since neither the starting condition of the first special symbol nor the starting condition of the second special symbol is satisfied in the big win game state, the start memory of the second special symbol withheld to the upper limit is maintained until the big win game state ends. do.

In the jackpot game state, all or most of the game balls hit to the right enter the jackpot 540 as described above. Even if there is a game ball that does not enter the big winning opening 540 among the game balls hit to the right in the jackpot game state, the main CPU 101 determines the normal symbol regardless of whether or not the jackpot game state is reached. , and since the variable display of the normal symbols is performed for a very short time, the starting memory of the normal symbols is almost never suspended when the jackpot game state ends.

Therefore, when the start memory of the second special symbol is reserved when the big win game state ends, the start condition of the second special symbol is satisfied when the big win game state ends, and the main CPU 101 enters the small win game state. (The small hit shutter 6100 is operated to control the small hit winning opening 5400 in an open mode). At this time, as described above, since the start memory of the normal symbol is not reserved, the movable shutter 4650 is retracted backward with respect to the transparent panel 172, and the game ball dropped from the receiving member 3000 is the first flow down. It flows down the path 5501, and it becomes possible to win a prize to the small winning prize opening 5400, and the expected value of the number of prize balls exceeds 1 with respect to the number of balls shot per unit time temporarily. This specific state is maintained for the number of times the starting memory of the second special symbol is stored. However, in this specific state, all or most of the game balls hit to the right flow down the first flow-down path 5501 and enter the small winning prize opening 5400, so it is difficult for the game balls to reach the passage gate 49. As a result, the second starting port 440 is not in the open state, so that the starting memory of the second special symbol is not newly reserved, and the reserved starting memory is only digested. Then, when the suspension of the starting memory of the second special symbol is completely consumed, the specific state ends.

When the specific state ends, the main CPU 101 no longer controls the small winning game state, and the passage of the game ball to the passage gate 49 becomes possible. When the game ball passes through the passage gate 49, as described above, the movable shutter 4650 advances forward with respect to the transparent panel 172 with a probability of almost 100%, and the second starting port 440 opens. Then, all or most of the game balls dropped from the receiving member 3000 again fall on the upper surface of the movable shutter 4650, the entry of the game balls into the first flow-down path 5501 is hindered, and the game balls enter the small winning prize opening 5400. becomes difficult.

In addition, in the pachinko gaming machine of the fifth embodiment, when the variable display of the second special symbol is performed, a "minor win" is derived unless it is a "big win". , the main CPU 101 displays the variation of the second special symbols by one of the long variations A to C (see, for example, FIG. 258), so there is no advantage in playing the game with the right hand.

In this way, the expected value of the number of prize balls with respect to the number of shot balls per unit time is set to exceed 1 for a limited period such as the specific state after the end of the big win game state, so that the player can win in the big win game state. In addition to the prize balls that can be obtained, it is possible to obtain prize balls even in a specific state, so that it is possible to enhance the interest in the game. In particular, if the number of prize balls that can be acquired in one small winning game state is, for example, 100 balls, and the starting memory of the second special symbols is reserved up to the upper limit of four when the big winning game state ends, About 400 prize balls can be obtained, and the player's desire to play can be greatly aroused. At this time, similarly to the first embodiment, by displaying the four small wins as a series of performances with the previous big win, it is possible to notify that more prize balls than the prize balls originally obtainable can be obtained. good. This special state is difficult to occur in the "normal game state", and is likely to occur in the "high-probability short-time game state" or "low-probability short-time game state", which is the electric support state. It is possible to give a great expectation to a big win that can occur in the "low-probability short-time gaming state". Moreover, you may give a jackpot classification which continues a specific state as "probability variable non-time-saving state" until the next jackpot as well as four times after a jackpot like the other Example.

In addition, in the ``time-saving state'', when the suspension of the normal pattern is interrupted, the period during which the movable shutter 4650 is closed increases, and the number of prizes won in the small prize winning opening 5400 increases unlike the designer's intention. things can happen. In that case, it is desirable to open and close the movable shutter 4650 so as not to interrupt the holding of the normal symbol. For example, it is desirable to define the opening pattern so that the total opening time is 6000 msec, repeating 1000 msec opening, 50 msec closing, 1000 msec opening, and 50 msec closing in one winning of normal symbols. At this time, the closing time of 50 msec is enough to prevent the game ball rolling on the movable shutter 4650 from being caught in the next opening. It is desirable that the time be such that it does not flow into 5501 . By doing so, game balls pass through the passage gate 49 via the second flow path 5502 at a rate of one ball to several balls. It is possible to suppress the inflow of game balls.

In addition, the above specific state can be realized in the "time saving state" which is the electric support state after the jackpot game state is finished, but it is not necessarily realized only in the "time saving state" which is the electric support state. That is, the "time-saving state", which is the electric support state, is a state in which winning of the game ball to the second start port 440 is facilitated compared to the "normal game state", but the "normal game state" If the winning of the game ball to the second starting port 440 is not facilitated, it is not in the electric support state. Therefore, even in the "normal game state", the result of the normal symbol determination performed based on the passing of the right-handed game ball through the passage gate 49 is 100% or close to 100%. The number of prize balls put out based on the winning to the second starting port 440 is set to 1 ball, and the fluctuation time of the second special pattern is set to long fluctuation in the ``normal game state'', and after the big win game state is finished. By setting the game state to super-fast fluctuation, it is possible to realize a specific state without changing the game state after the jackpot game state to a 'time-saving state', which is an electric support state.

[Pachinko machine of the sixth embodiment]
Next, the pachinko game machine of the sixth embodiment will be explained. The pachinko game machine of the sixth embodiment has a board configuration of the game board unit 17 (see FIG. 275) that is partially different from the pachinko game machine of the first embodiment (see FIG. 254). In addition, in the pachinko game machine of the sixth embodiment, the game state after the jackpot game state is finished is controlled to the "normal game state" which is not the electric sapo state or the "high-accuracy short-time game state" which is the electric sapo state. . In addition, in the pachinko gaming machine of the sixth embodiment, the variation time (variable display time) determination table of the special symbols referred to in the "high probability short-time gaming state" and "high-probability non-shortening gaming state" is also the first implementation It is different from the example pachinko machine.

FIG. 275 is an example of a front view showing the appearance of the game board unit in the pachinko game machine of the sixth embodiment.

As shown in FIG. 275, in the pachinko gaming machine of the sixth embodiment, the big winning opening 540 and the special electric accessory 600 are located in the game area 20, similar to the pachinko gaming machine of the first embodiment (see FIG. 254). It is arranged on the upper right side of the liquid crystal display device 16 inside, and by driving the shutter 610 by the big winning opening solenoid, it is possible (or easy) to win the game ball to the big winning opening 540. , and a closing mode that makes it impossible (or difficult) for a game ball to enter the big winning hole 540 (drive). In the pachinko game machine of the sixth embodiment, all or most of the game balls hit to the right enter the big winning hole 540 when the big winning hole 540 is in the open mode.

Further, a passage gate 49 is arranged on the downstream side of the big winning opening 540 and on the right side of the liquid crystal display device 16 . The passage gate 49 provides an opportunity for normal symbol determination on the condition that a game ball passes through.

In addition, the pachinko game machine of the sixth embodiment is equipped with a first starter opening capable of winning a right-handed game ball on the downstream side of the passage gate 49 in addition to the conventionally provided first starter opening 5442. there is In order to distinguish between the two, for the sake of convenience, the first starting hole arranged on the right side of the liquid crystal display device 16 is referred to as the first starting hole 5443. The control by the main CPU 101 is almost the same as when the game ball has won the mouth 5443 .

Above the first starting port 5443, a movable member 4652 is provided which can be changed between a mode (closed mode) and a possible mode (open mode) in which the winning of game balls to the first starting port 5443 is impossible. ing. The main CPU 101 operates the movable member 4652 at a higher frequency than in the "normal game state" based on the fact that the result of the normal symbol determination is winning in the "high-accuracy time-saving game state", thereby providing the first start port. Winning to 5443 is facilitated.

A second starting port 440 is arranged on the lower left side of the first starting port 5443 . When a game ball wins in the second starting port 440, the main CPU 101 performs a variable display of the second special symbol, but as in the pachinko gaming machine of the first embodiment, the probability of deriving a "minor win" is about 5 minutes. is one of

Below the first starting opening 5443, a small winning shutter 6100 that can move forward and backward with respect to the small winning opening 5400 and the transparent panel 172 is arranged. The small winning shutter 6100 can be driven by a small winning opening solenoid (not shown). When the small winning shutter 6100 operates forward with respect to the transparent panel 172, the small winning prize opening 5400 is closed, and when the small winning shutter 6100 operates backward with respect to the transparent panel 172, the small winning prize opening 5400 is closed. It becomes an open mode. When the result of the second special lottery is a "minor win", the main CPU 101 performs a variable display of the second special symbol to derive the result of a "minor win". When the result of "small win" is derived, the main CPU 101 controls the small win game state to operate the small win shutter 6100 so that the small win winning opening 5400 is opened.

An out port 5444 is arranged on the upper right side of the first start port 5443 to discharge the game ball to the outside of the machine without winning.

In addition, the game ball hit to the right flows down any of the flow-down path 5450 toward the first start port 5443, the flow-down path 5451 toward the second start-up port 440, and the flow-down route 5452 toward the out port 5444. It is configured, for example, by an obstacle nail to run down the path. Among these three flow-down routes, the flow-down route 5450 toward the first start port 5443 has the highest flow-down rate of the game ball, followed by the flow-down route 5451 toward the second start-up port 440, and the flow-down rate of the game ball is the highest. A flow-down path 5452 toward the out port 5444 has a lower temperature.

The game balls flowing down the flow path 5450 toward the first starting port 5443 are configured so that all or most of the game balls enter the first starting port 5443 when the first starting port 5443 is in an open mode. . Therefore, when the first starting port 5443 is in the open mode, even if the small winning prize port 5400 is in the open state, the game ball flowing down the flow path 5450 toward the first starting port 5443 is a small winning prize port 5400 is difficult to win.

On the other hand, when the winning of the game ball to the first start port 544 is impossible mode, the game ball flowing down the flow path 5450 toward the first start port 5443 is guided to the right side than the first start port 5443 He reaches the small winning prize opening 5400. - 特許庁At this time, if the small winning prize opening 5400 is in the open state, the game ball enters the small winning prize opening 5400, and the main CPU 101 sends the game ball to the small winning prize opening 5400 via the payout/launch control circuit 300. Prize balls are paid out based on the winning of . A game ball that reaches the small winning prize opening 5400 but does not win the small winning prize opening 5400 further flows downstream and is eventually discharged from the out port 57 to the outside of the machine. Therefore, in the "high-probability short-time gaming state" in which the winning to the first start port 5443 is easier than in the "normal gaming state", even if the small-hit winning port 5400 is in the open mode, the small It is difficult for the game ball to win the winning prize port 5400, but in the "high probability non-time-saving gaming state" in which the frequency of winning to the first start port 544 is low compared to the "high-accuracy short-time gaming state", the "high-accuracy short-time gaming state" , a large amount of game balls will flow down toward the small winning prize opening 5400, and these large amount of game balls will win the small winning prize opening 5400 if the small winning prize opening 5400 is in an open mode. It can be done.

(Game flow)
Next, the game flow in the pachinko game machine of the sixth embodiment will be described. The main CPU 101 controls the game state to any one of the “normal game state”, the “high-probability time-saving game state”, and the “high-probability non-time-saving game state”. However, in addition to this, although not essential, it may be controlled to the "low-probability short-time gaming state".

In the "normal game state", when the game ball launched toward the game area 20 wins the first start hole 5442, the main CPU 101 conducts the first special lottery. If the result of this first special lottery is "big win", the main CPU 101 executes control to shift to a big win gaming state. In this "normal game state", the main CPU 101 refers to the special symbol variation time determination table for low start shown in FIG. determine the time.

When the big win game state ends, the main CPU 101 determines the kind of big win according to the winning selection symbol command related to the big win, and determines the kind of big win according to the determined kind of big win, as in the pachinko game machine of the first embodiment. Then, the game state after the jackpot game state is completed is controlled to shift to the "normal game state" or the "high-probability short-time game state".

The main CPU 101 is controlled after the "high-probability short-time gaming state" and the "high-probability short-time gaming state" after the time-saving game is digested in this "high-probability short-time gaming state", the pachinko game of the first embodiment. Unlike the machine, the special symbol variation time determination table of FIG. 276 is referred to determine the special symbol variation time.

FIG. 276 is a table stored in the main ROM 102 in the pachinko gaming machine of the sixth embodiment, which is another example of the special symbol fluctuation time (variable display time) determination table for high start (another example of FIG. 259). ). The variable time determination table for special symbols for high start shown in FIG. 276 differs from the variable time determination table for special symbols for high start shown in FIG. The point is that the fluctuation display of the first special symbol can be performed for a very long time such as 300000 msec (long fluctuation F) to 600000 msec (long fluctuation D). Incidentally, when the result of the second special lottery is "losing", the variable display of the second special symbol is performed in a very short time such as 1000 msec, for example.

As explained in the pachinko game machine of the first embodiment, the result of either the first special lottery or the second special lottery is a "big hit", and the variation of special symbols based on the "big win". During display, even if the starting condition of the other special symbol is established, the other special lottery is executed as a non-winning process that does not result in a "big hit". Therefore, when the result of the first special lottery is "big win", during the variable display of the first special symbol based on this "big win", even if the condition for starting the second special symbol is satisfied, the main CPU 101 The second special lottery is executed as non-winning processing that does not result in a "big hit".

However, even if the main CPU 101 executes non-winning processing that does not result in a "big win" in the second special lottery, the probability of winning a "minor winning" is about 1/5 in this non-winning processing. In the "high-precision time-saving game state", all or most of the game balls that flow down the flow path 5450 toward the first start port 5443 enter the first start port 5443, so it is difficult to win the small winning prize port 5400 is. However, when the “high-accuracy short-time gaming state” transitions to the “high-accuracy non-short-time gaming state”, the electric sapo state ceases to exist. The frequency of winning the small winning prize opening 5400 without winning the prize 5443 increases, and the expected value of the number of prize balls with respect to the number of shot balls per unit time increases.

That is, when the result of the first special lottery is "jackpot" in the "high-probability time-saving game state", the fluctuation display of the first special symbol is performed for a very long time such as 600000 msec (long fluctuation D). The time-saving game is digested by performing the variable display of the second special symbol in an extremely short time such as 1000 msec (super-speed variation) for a period (until the result indicating that it is a "jackpot" is derived), When the determined number of time-saving games are completed, the main CPU 101 executes control to shift from the "high-probability short-time gaming state" to the "high-probability non-time-saving gaming state". The result of the second special lottery does not become a "big win" until the variable display of the first special symbol is completed and the result of the "big win" is derived, and during this period, for example, 1000 msec (super-speed fluctuation). The variable display of the second special pattern is performed in an extremely short time, and by winning a "small hit" with a high probability of about 1/5, you can win as many prize balls as you want, and the number of balls fired per unit time. A specific state where the expected value of the number of prize balls exceeds 1 is reached. In this way, it is possible to increase the interest in the game by realizing a game property that creates a specific state in which prize balls can be obtained as much as possible. It should be noted that it is preferable that the gauge configuration is such that, when the player hits to the right, the suspension of the second starting memory is always the upper limit (for example, 4).

It should be noted that the number of times of time saving may always be a fixed number of times (for example, 100 times). However, if the number of times of time saving in the "high-probability time-saving gaming state" is changed each time the variable display of the special symbols is performed and the "jackpot" is derived, it is possible to enhance the interest. For example, by making the number of times of time saving in the "high-probability short-time gaming state" different each time a "jackpot" is derived, the result of the first special lottery in the "high-probability short-time gaming state" becomes a "jackpot" ( Variation display of the first special symbol becomes long variation) The following interest arises in relation to the timing. That is, the timing when the result of the first special lottery becomes a "jackpot" (the fluctuation display of the first special symbol becomes a long fluctuation) in the "high-probability short-time gaming state" is not necessarily the best. For example, when the number of times of time saving is 100 times, if the fluctuation display of the first special symbol becomes long fluctuation at an early timing, the period of the specific state may be shortened, and in some cases, the specific state may not occur. There is also a possibility that the variable display of 1 special symbol will be stopped and the game will be controlled to a big hit game state. In addition, when the number of times of time saving is relatively short (for example, 24 times), if the fluctuation display of the first special symbol becomes long fluctuation at an early timing, the benefits of the specific state can be received for a longer time. . In this way, since it is possible to increase the interest in the game by making the number of time saving times different each time the "jackpot" is derived, the determined number of time saving times is suggested or specified by control by the sub CPU 201, for example may be performed.

However, even if the number of times of working hours is not disclosed by the control of either the main CPU 101 or the sub CPU 201 at least until the transition to the "high-quality non-time-saving gaming state" ” to a “high-quality, non-work-time-saving gaming state,” increasing the enjoyment of the game from a different perspective than when performing a production that suggests or clearly indicates the determined number of times of time-saving. becomes possible.

In addition, in the pachinko gaming machine of the sixth embodiment, as shown in FIG. 276, the result of the first special lottery in the "high-accuracy short-time gaming state" or "high-accuracy non-short-time gaming state" was "jackpot" At this time, the main CPU 101 determines the variation time of the first special symbol to be any one of the long variation D to the long variation F by lottery. Since the long fluctuation D to long fluctuation F have different fluctuation times, the long fluctuation D with the longest fluctuation time is most advantageous to the player, and the long fluctuation F with the shortest fluctuation time is most disadvantageous to the player. . In this way, by determining one of a plurality of different variation times for the variation time of the first special symbol, the interest in the game can be further enhanced. Moreover, if neither the main CPU 101 nor the sub CPU 201 disclose which of the long fluctuations D to F has been determined, the player does not know the end timing of the specific state. can be further increased.

Further, in FIG. 276, when the result of the first special lottery is a "jackpot", the main CPU 101 is configured to determine one of the long fluctuations D to F. , the variable time (for example, 10000 msec) with a low profit degree for the player may be determined.

Further, in the above, after the jackpot game state is completed, it is configured to be controlled to the "high probability non-time-saving game state" through the "high-probability short-time gaming state", but not necessarily limited to this, the jackpot game After the state is finished, the game may be immediately controlled to the "high-probability non-work-time-saving game state". In particular, after the jackpot game state is over, the normal jackpot controlled to the "high-accuracy non-time-saving game state" through the "high-accuracy short-time game state", and the "high-accuracy short-time game state" after the jackpot game state is completed. A premium jackpot controlled to a ``high-accuracy non-time-saving game state'' is prepared without going through, and in a special lottery executed by a main CPU 101, the premium jackpot is won with a predetermined probability according to a selection pattern command at the time of winning. It may be configured as

Further, in the above, when the result of the first special lottery is "big hit", the fluctuation time of the first special symbol is determined to be any one of the long fluctuation D to long fluctuation F. However, it is not necessary to make the fluctuation time of the first special symbol long for all the "jackpots". may be determined as long fluctuation D to long fluctuation F.

Also, in the above, when the result of the first special lottery is "jackpot" in the "high probability non-time-saving gaming state" as well as the "high probability short-time gaming state", the main CPU 101 determines the fluctuation time of the first special symbol. is configured to determine one of the long fluctuation D to long fluctuation F, but instead of this, in the "high probability non-time-saving gaming state", a variable time determination table different from FIG. 276 is provided, " When the result of the first special lottery is a "big hit" in the "high-probability non-time-saving game state", a variation time (for example, 1000 msec) with a low degree of profit for the player may be determined with a high probability. That is, when the result of the first special lottery is "jackpot" in the "high-probability time-saving game state", the time-saving game is digested by performing the variation time of the second special symbol with super-speed variation, and the time-saving game is digested. While the expected value of the number of prize balls for the number of shot balls per unit time is increased in the later ``high accuracy non-time-saving gaming state'', the result of the first special lottery in the ``high-accuracy non-time-saving gaming state'' is ``jackpot''. When there is, the variation time of the first special symbol may be changed to a super-speed variation such as 1000 msec to immediately shift to the jackpot game state. In this case, when the result of the first special lottery is a "jackpot" in the "high-probability time-saving game state" in which the number of executable times is predetermined, it is more advantageous to the player than in other states. It is possible to give a premium hit, and the player's " It is possible to increase the expectation for "big hit".

It should be noted that not only the pachinko gaming machine of the sixth embodiment, but common to all of the first to eighth embodiments of the pachinko gaming machine according to the third embodiment, as described above, the main CPU 101 performs both the second special lottery and the first special lottery in a predetermined order within the same interrupt process, so that the control load of the main CPU 101 is reduced, and the first special symbol is displayed in a variable manner and the second special lottery is performed. It has a configuration that can be performed in parallel with the variable display of special symbols.

By the way, as described above, it is rare that both the second special lottery and the first special lottery are performed in a predetermined order within the same interrupt process. However, in order to prevent the results of both the first special lottery and the second special lottery performed in the same interrupt process from becoming a "jackpot" at the same time, the main CPU 101 controls either one (the special lottery was performed first). If the result of the special lottery of one) is a "big hit", the other special lottery is executed as non-winning processing, so that the first special lottery and the second special lottery performed within the same interrupt processing It is designed to prevent both results from simultaneously becoming a "jackpot". However, as described above, in the same interrupt process, when the result of one of the special lotteries (the one to which the special lottery was performed earlier) is a "small win", the other special lottery is processed as a non-winning process. Since the special lottery is performed as usual instead, it is possible to prevent the "big win" with a relatively high degree of profit from being canceled by the "minor win" with a relatively low degree of profit.

In such a gaming machine, the expected value of the number of prize balls for the number of shot balls per unit time is controlled to a "high probability non-time-saving game state" exceeding 1, and the result of the first special lottery is a "jackpot". and that the variable display of the first special symbol is performed for a very long time such as 600000 msec (long variation D in FIG. 276), when both conditions are satisfied, the variable display of the first special symbol is performed. Since the result of the second lottery will not be a "big hit" while the game is being played, a new game is guaranteed in which the expected value of the number of prize balls exceeds 1 with respect to the number of balls shot per unit time. can provide sexuality.

In particular, when the result of the first special lottery is "big hit", the main CPU 101 determines the variable display of the first special symbol to be, for example, one of long variations D to F (see FIG. 276) with different variation times. By doing so, the time during which the specific state is guaranteed is different, and it is possible to increase the interest in the game. In particular, when the long variation D with the longest variation time is determined, the sub-CPU 201 may perform a special effect to excite the player. In addition, if neither the main CPU 101 nor the sub CPU 201 disclose which of the long fluctuations D to F has been determined by the main CPU 101, the player cannot grasp how long the specific state continues. , in this case also, interest can be enhanced.

In this way, when the result of the first special lottery is "big hit", the expected value of the number of prize balls for the number of shot balls per unit time is increased while the variable display of the first special symbol is being performed. In gaming machines with more than one specific state, it is preferable to perform the special lotteries in the order of the first special lottery and the second special lottery within the same interrupt process. This is because when the first special lottery is performed first and the result is a "jackpot", the second special lottery is treated as a non-winning process, resulting in a specific state. However, this is not an essential requirement, and the special lotteries may be performed in the order of the second special lottery and the first special lottery.

[Modification of the pachinko machine of the sixth embodiment]
Next, a modification of the pachinko game machine of the sixth embodiment will be described. In the pachinko game machine of the sixth embodiment, in addition to the conventional first starter opening 5442, a first starter opening is also provided on the right side of the liquid crystal display device 16. The modified example differs in configuration in that the first starting port 5442 is not provided. That is, in the pachinko game machine of the sixth embodiment, the game is played with the left hand in the "normal game state", and the game is played with the right hand in the "high-accuracy short-time game state" or "high-accuracy non-short-time game state". However, in the modified example of the pachinko game machine of the sixth embodiment, the game is played right-handed in any of the "normal game state", "high-accuracy short-time game state" and "high-accuracy non-short-time game state". It is a configuration that performs

It should be noted that, as in the pachinko game machine of the sixth embodiment, also in the modified example of the pachinko game machine of the sixth embodiment, the game ball that has flowed down the flow path 5450 toward the first start port 5443 is the first start port When 5443 is in the open mode, all or most of the game balls are configured to enter the first starting port 5443. Therefore, when the first starting port 5443 is in the open mode, even if the small winning prize port 5400 is in the open state, the game ball flowing down the flow path 5450 toward the first starting port 5443 is a small winning prize port 5400 is difficult to win. In addition, when the winning of the game ball to the first start port 544 is impossible, the game ball flowing down the flow path 5450 toward the first start port 5443 is guided to the right side of the first start port 5443. He reaches the small winning prize opening 5400. - 特許庁At this time, if the small winning prize opening 5400 is in the open mode, the game ball enters the small winning prize opening 5400, and the main CPU 101 sends the game ball to the small winning prize opening 5400 via the payout/launch control circuit 300. Prize balls are paid out based on the winning of . A game ball that reaches the small winning prize opening 5400 but does not win the small winning prize opening 5400 further flows downstream and is eventually discharged from the out port 57 to the outside of the machine.

In the modified example of the pachinko gaming machine of the sixth embodiment, the main CPU 101 determines the variation time of the special symbol, in the "normal game state", the "high-accuracy short-time gaming state", and the "high-accuracy non-short-time gaming state". ”, unless a specific condition to be described later is satisfied, the special symbol variation time determination table in FIG. 277 is referred to for determination.

FIG. 277 is a table stored in the main ROM 102 in the pachinko gaming machine of the sixth embodiment, which is another example of the special symbol fluctuation time (variable display time) determination table for low start (another example of FIG. 258). ). The difference between the table shown in FIG. 277 and the table shown in FIG. 258 is that when the result of the first special lottery is "jackpot", the fluctuation display of the first special symbol is, for example, 300000 msec (long fluctuation G). The point is that the variable display can be performed over an extremely long period of time.

(Game flow)
Next, the game flow in the modified example of the pachinko game machine of the sixth embodiment will be described. As described above, the main CPU 101 controls the game state to any one of the “normal game state”, the “high-probability short-time game state”, and the “high-probability non-short-time game state”. However, in addition to this, although it is not essential, the game may be controlled to the "low-probability short-time gaming state" in which the game is played right-handed.

In the "normal game state", the "high-accuracy short-time gaming state" and the "high-accuracy non-short-time gaming state", when the game ball launched toward the game area 20 wins the first start port 5443, the main CPU 101 One special lottery is conducted, and based on the result of this first lottery, the fluctuation time of the first special symbol is determined by referring to the special symbol fluctuation time determination table for low start shown in FIG.

In the "high-probability short-time game state" which is the electric sapo state, all or most of the game balls that flow down the flow-down path 5450 toward the first start port 5443 win the first start port 5443. Therefore, it is difficult to win the small winning prize opening 5400 . However, when the “high-accuracy short-time gaming state” transitions to the “high-accuracy non-short-time gaming state”, the electric sapo state ceases to exist. It is possible to reach the vicinity of the small winning prize opening 5400 without winning 5443. However, in the modified example of the pachinko gaming machine of the sixth embodiment, as described above, when determining the special symbol variation time, the main CPU 101 sets the special symbol variation time shown in FIG. Refer to the decision table and decide. That is, unless the result of the second special lottery is "big hit", the fluctuation display of the second special symbol is performed for a very long time of 580000 msec to 600000 msec only by leaving the electric support state. There is no or almost no open mode.

Therefore, in the modified example of the pachinko gaming machine of the sixth embodiment, the main CPU 101 determines, as the above-described specific condition, that the variation pattern (long variation G) of the first special symbol has an extremely long variation time. 277 is changed to the special symbol variation time determination table for high start illustrated in FIG. This special symbol variation time determination table for high start in FIG. 278 is different from the special symbol variation time determination table for low start in FIG. The point is that when it is "losing", the variation display of the second special symbol can be performed only for an extremely short time such as 1000 msec (super-speed variation).

FIG. 279 shows a variation executed by the main CPU 101 in the variation of the pachinko game machine of the sixth embodiment, triggered by the variation pattern (long variation G) having a very long variation time of the first special symbol. 9 is a flowchart showing a time determination table setting process;

With reference to FIG. 279, the variation time determination table setting process executed when the variation pattern (long variation G) in which the variation time of the first special symbol is extremely long is determined as a trigger will be described. The main CPU 101 first determines whether or not the first special lottery has been executed (step S1831). If the first special lottery has not been executed (NO in step S1831), the main CPU 101 executes the variable time determination table setting process without changing the variable time determination table referred to when determining the variable time of the special symbols. finish. When determining that the first special lottery has been executed (YES in step S1831), the main CPU 101 determines whether or not the long variation G is determined as the variation pattern of the first special symbol (step S1832). If the variation pattern of the first special symbol is not determined to be the long variation G (NO in step S1832), the main CPU 101 does not change the variation time determination table referred to when determining the variation time of the special symbol. End the variable time determination table setting process. When the variation pattern of the first special symbol is determined to be the long variation G (YES in step S1832), the main CPU 101 determines the set variation time determination table, that is, the variation time determination table currently used for reference. , it is determined whether or not it is the variable time determination table for special symbols for low start shown in FIG. 277 (step S1833). If the set variable time determination table is the special symbol variable time determination table for low start (YES in step S1833), the main CPU 101 refers to the variable time determination table when determining the special symbol variable time. is set in the variable time determination table for special symbols for high start shown in FIG. 278 (step S1834), and the variable time determination table setting process is terminated. On the other hand, if the set variable time determination table is not the special symbol variable time determination table for low start shown in FIG. 277 (NO in step S1833), the main CPU 101 determines the special symbol variable time. The variable time determination table setting process is ended without changing the variable time determination table to be referred to. In step S1833, if the set variable time determination table is not the low start special symbol variable time determination table shown in FIG. It is a variable time determination table for special symbols for start.

Therefore, while the special symbol variation time is determined by referring to the special symbol variation time determination table for low start shown in FIG. Unless the result of the special lottery is "big hit", the variable display of the second special symbol (long variations A to C) is performed for an extremely long time, so the variable display of the first special symbol is mainly performed. Therefore, the frequency in which the small-hit winning opening 5400 becomes an open mode so that the game ball to the small-hitting winning opening 5400 wins a prize is relatively small.

On the other hand, with the fact that the variation pattern (long variation G) having a very long variation time of the first special symbol was determined, the variation time determination table for the special symbol for high start shown in FIG. 278 was changed. Afterwards, when the right-handed game ball wins the second starting hole 4401, most of the fluctuation display of the second special symbol is not only changed at super speed, but also a small winning prize hole 5400 with a probability of about 1/5. A game ball can win a prize, and the expected value of the number of prize balls exceeds 1 with respect to the number of shot balls per unit time.

In this way, the main CPU 101 uses the variation time determination table to refer to when determining the variation time of the special symbols based on the variation pattern (long variation G) having an extremely long variation time of the first special symbol. 277 is changed to the special symbol variation time determination table for high start shown in FIG. 278, the variation time of the first special symbol is While continuing, the second special symbol is not variably displayed to derive a "jackpot". Therefore, the prize balls that can be obtained in the above-mentioned specific state and the prize balls that can be obtained in the subsequent jackpot game state can be a premium jackpot in which a large amount of prize balls are paid out to the player, thereby increasing the interest in the game. becomes possible.

Further, when such a premium jackpot is determined, the sub CPU 201 sets the above specific state before deriving that the result of the first special lottery is a "jackpot" (before being controlled to the jackpot gaming state). , and the jackpot game state are successively executed, for example, by executing a premium performance indicating that the premium jackpot is a jackpot on the liquid crystal display device 16 via the display control circuit 204, the interest in the game can be enhanced.

As a lottery result of the first special lottery, the main CPU 101 can execute a big-hit game (hereinafter referred to as a "2R big-hit game" in this paragraph) in a manner that is difficult for the player to grasp, and such a 2R big-hit game can be played. When the second special symbol is displayed in a variable manner with a long variation G when the game is won, and when the 2R big hit game is completed and the game state is controlled to a "high-accuracy non-time-saving game state", the game state is specified. State, 2R jackpot game, specific state in order. Therefore, in such a case, it is possible to make the player think that the specific state has been continuously executed. Incidentally, the 2R jackpot game is, for example, a jackpot game in which only two rounds of a round game in which the jackpot 540 is opened for about 18000 msec are executed. However, as long as it can be executed in a manner that is difficult for the player to understand, it is possible to replace the above-described 2R big win game with another big win game.

In addition, the main CPU 101 selects a special symbol for a high start from the special symbol variation time determination table for a low start on the occasion that a variation pattern (long variation G) in which the variation time of the first special symbol is extremely long is determined. After changing to the variable time determination table, until a predetermined period (for example, a period until the variable display of the special symbol is executed a predetermined number of times or a period until the jackpot game is completed) has passed. The special symbol variation time determination table is referred to to determine the special symbol variation time. The main CPU 101 may change to the special symbol variation time determination table for low start based on the lapse of the period, or may change the variation time determination table for the special symbol for low start based on the lapse of the period. It may be determined whether to change to the determination table or continue to refer to the variable time determination table of special symbols for high start.

By the way, in the above, when the special symbol variation time determination table for low start is set, the variation pattern (long variation G) of the first special symbol with an extremely long variation time is determined as a trigger, The table is always changed to the variable time determination table for special symbols for high start, but it is not limited to this. For example, when the fluctuation time determination table for special symbols for low start is set and the fluctuation time of the first special symbol is determined to be extremely long (long fluctuation G), the main CPU 101 determines a predetermined It is determined whether or not a condition (for example, the main CPU 101 performs a change lottery to determine whether or not to change the table, and wins the change lottery, etc.) is established. It is also possible to continue referring to the special symbol variation time determination table in (1) and change to the special symbol variation time determination table for high start based on the establishment of a predetermined condition. Further, instead of the change lottery, a long variation G-1 that changes the variation time determination table and a long variation G-2 that does not change the variation time determination table may be provided, each having a selection rate of 50%.

In addition, in the modified example of the pachinko game machine of the sixth embodiment, in any of the "normal game state", "high-accuracy short-time game state" and "high-accuracy non-short-time game state", the game is played with the right hand. However, instead of this, the game may be played left-handed in any of the “normal game state”, “high-accuracy short-time game state” and “high-accuracy non-short-time game state”. In this case, the left-handed game ball can win both the first start opening and the second start opening (in the sense that one game ball wins both the first start opening and the second start opening However, when the first special symbol is variably displayed based on the fact that the result of the first special lottery is a "jackpot", the variability display of the second special symbol is easily changed at super speed, so that " Even in the "normal game state", it is possible to make a specific state in which the expected value of the number of prize balls exceeds 1 with respect to the number of shot balls per unit time before shifting to the jackpot game state.

[Pachinko machine of the seventh embodiment]
Next, the pachinko game machine of the seventh embodiment will be explained. The pachinko game machine of the seventh embodiment has a board configuration of the game board unit 17 (see FIG. 280) that is partially different from the pachinko game machine of the first embodiment (see FIG. 254). In addition, in the pachinko game machine of the seventh embodiment, the game state after the jackpot game state is finished is controlled to the "normal game state" which is not the electric sapo state or the "high-accuracy short-time game state" which is the electric sapo state. . When a fixed number of times (for example, 100 times) of time-saving games are consumed without leading a "jackpot" in this "high-probability short-time game state", the game shifts to a "high-probability non-time-saving game state" that is not an electric support state. Thus, unlike the pachinko game machine of the first embodiment in that the number of times of time saving is constant, one of the number of times of time saving is determined from among a plurality of times of time saving like the pachinko game machine of the first embodiment. It may be In addition, in the pachinko gaming machine of the seventh embodiment, the fluctuation time (variable display time) determination table of the special symbols in the "high-probability short-time gaming state" and "high-probability non-shortening gaming state" is also the pachinko of the first embodiment. It is different from the variable time (variable display time) determination table (see FIG. 259) of special symbols for high start of the gaming machine.

FIG. 280 is an example of a front view showing the appearance of the game board unit in the pachinko game machine of the seventh embodiment.

As shown in FIG. 280, in the pachinko gaming machine of the seventh embodiment, the big winning opening 540 and the special electric accessory 600 are located in the game area 20, similar to the pachinko gaming machine of the first embodiment (see FIG. 254). It is arranged on the upper right side of the liquid crystal display device 16 inside, and by driving the shutter 610 by the big winning opening solenoid, it is possible (or easy) to win the game ball to the big winning opening 540. , and a closing mode that makes it impossible (or difficult) for a game ball to enter the big winning hole 540 (drive). In the pachinko game machine of the seventh embodiment, when the big winning hole 540 is in the open state, all or most of the game balls hit to the right enter the big winning hole 540.例文帳に追加

A passage gate 49 is arranged on the right side of the liquid crystal display device 16 . This passage gate 49 is configured so that most of the game balls that have not won the big prize opening 540 out of the game balls hit to the right can pass through. In addition, the passage gate 49 gives an opportunity for normal symbol determination on the condition that the game ball passes through.

In addition, the pachinko game machine of the seventh embodiment, like the pachinko game machine of the sixth embodiment, in addition to the conventionally provided first start port 5442, also downstream of the passage gate 49, a right-handed game Equipped with a first starting opening in which a ball can win a prize. Let this first starting port be the first starting port 5443, like the pachinko game machine of the sixth embodiment. Also, as in the pachinko game machine of the sixth embodiment, the control by the main CPU 101 is the same when the game ball enters the first start port 5442 and when the game ball enters the first start port 5443. .

Above the first starting port 5443, a movable member 4653 is provided that always operates in a constant cycle under the control of the main CPU101. The movable member 4653 can be opened and closed many times according to many opening patterns, for example, "3000 msec closed→100 msec open→10000 msec open→200 msec open→7000 msec closed→300 open→10000 msec closed→700 msec closed→300 msec open". By setting the operation to one cycle, it is difficult to know the opening timing even though it always operates at a constant cycle.

All or most of the game balls that have passed through the passage gate 49 enter the first starting port 5443 when the movable member 4653 is opened. On the other hand, if the movable member 4653 is closed, the game ball struck to the right flows downstream from the first starting port 5443 without entering the first starting port 5443.

A second starting port 440 is arranged downstream of the first starting port 5443 . When a game ball wins in the second starting port 440, the main CPU 101 performs a variable display of the second special symbol, but the probability of deriving a "minor win" is about 5 minutes, as in the pachinko gaming machine of the first embodiment. is one of

Above the second starting port 440, a second starting port shutter 4654 that can move back and forth with respect to the transparent panel 172 is arranged. The second starter shutter 4654 can be driven by a second starter solenoid (not shown). When the second starting port shutter 4654 operates forward with respect to the transparent panel 172, the second starting port 440 is closed, and when the second starting port shutter 4654 operates backward with respect to the transparent panel 172, the second starting port 440 is closed. The starting port 440 is in an open mode. In the "high-accuracy time-saving gaming state", the main CPU 101 sets the shutter 4654 for the second starting port to the "normal state" so that the second starting port 440 is in the open state based on the result of the normal symbol determination. It is operated at a higher frequency than "game state" to facilitate the winning of a prize to the second start port 440.例文帳に追加

On the downstream side of the second starting opening 440, a small winning shutter 6100 that can move forward and backward with respect to the small winning prize opening 5400 and the transparent panel 172 is arranged. The small-hit shutter 6100 can be driven by a small-hit winning opening solenoid (not shown). When the small winning shutter 6100 operates forward with respect to the transparent panel 172, the small winning prize opening 5400 is closed, and when the small winning shutter 6100 operates backward with respect to the transparent panel 172, the small winning prize opening 5400 is closed. It becomes an open mode.

In addition, when the second starting port 440 is in the open state, all or most of the game balls hit to the right win the second starting port 440, and when the second starting port 440 is in the closed state, hit to the right It is configured so that the game ball hit reaches a small hit shutter 6100.例文帳に追加

Further, when the small winning prize opening 5400 is in the open state, all or most of the game balls reaching the small winning shutter 6100 win the small winning prize opening 5400, and the small winning prize opening 5400 is in the closed state. is configured to be discharged from the out port 57 to the outside of the machine.

(Game flow)
Next, the game flow in the pachinko game machine of the seventh embodiment will be described. The main CPU 101 controls the game state to be one of the “normal game state”, the “high-probability time-saving game state”, and the “high-probability non-time-saving game state”. However, in addition to this, although not essential, it may be controlled to the "low-probability short-time gaming state".

In the "normal game state", when the game ball launched toward the game area 20 wins the first start hole 5442, the main CPU 101 conducts the first special lottery. If the result of this first special lottery is "big win", the main CPU 101 executes control to shift to a big win gaming state. In this "normal game state", the main CPU 101 refers to the special symbol variation time determination table for low start shown in FIG. determine the time.

When the big win game state ends, the main CPU 101 determines the kind of big win according to the winning selection symbol command related to the big win, and determines the kind of big win according to the determined kind of big win, as in the pachinko game machine of the first embodiment. Then, the game state after the jackpot game state is completed is controlled to shift to the "normal game state" or the "high-probability short-time game state".

The main CPU 101 is controlled after the "high-probability short-time gaming state" and the "high-probability short-time gaming state" after the time-saving game is digested in this "high-probability short-time gaming state", the pachinko game of the first embodiment Unlike machines, when the result of the first special lottery is "big hit", the variable display of the first special symbol is displayed for an extremely long time such as 300000 msec (long fluctuation F) to 600000 msec (long fluctuation D). The variation time of the special symbol is determined by referring to the special symbol variation time determination table from which the "big hit" can be derived after the game is played. This point is the same as the pachinko game machine of the sixth embodiment. Also, when the result of the second special lottery is "losing", the variation display of the second special symbol is performed in a very short time such as 1000 msec, which is the same as the pachinko machine of the sixth embodiment. is.

In the pachinko game machine of the seventh embodiment, similarly to the pachinko game machine of the first embodiment and the pachinko game machine of the sixth embodiment, when the result of the first special lottery is "big win", this "big win" , the main CPU 101 executes the second special lottery as non-winning processing that does not result in a ``jackpot'' even if the condition for starting the second special symbol is met.

However, as in the pachinko gaming machine of the sixth embodiment, even if the main CPU 101 executes non-winning processing that does not result in a "jackpot" in the second special lottery, this non-winning processing has a probability of about 1/5. to win a "small hit". In the "high-probability short-time gaming state", all or most of the game balls that did not win the first start port 5443 win the second start port 440 (the number of prize balls when winning the second start port 440 1 ball), it is difficult to win a small prize winning opening 5400. However, when the “high-accuracy short-time gaming state” shifts to the “high-accuracy non-short-time gaming state”, the electric sapo state disappears, so the game ball that did not win the first start port 5443 wins the second start port 440 The frequency of winning the small winning prize opening 5400 increases, and the expected value of the number of prize balls with respect to the number of shot balls per unit time increases.

That is, as with the pachinko machine of the sixth embodiment, when the result of the first special lottery is "jackpot" in the "high probability time-saving game state", for example, over a very long time such as 600000 msec (long fluctuation D) While the variation display of the first special symbol is performed (until the result of "big hit" is derived), the variation display of the second special symbol is performed in an extremely short time such as 1000 msec (super speed variation). The time-saving game is consumed by being played, but when the time-saving game of the determined number of time-saving games is consumed, the main CPU 101 controls to shift from the "high-accuracy non-time-saving gaming state" to the "high-accuracy non-time-saving gaming state". to run. The result of the second special lottery does not become a "big win" until the variable display of the first special symbol is completed and the result of the "big win" is derived, and during this period, for example, 1000 msec (super-speed fluctuation). The variable display of the second special pattern is performed in an extremely short time, and by winning a "small hit" with a high probability of about 1/5, you can win as many prize balls as you want, and the number of balls fired per unit time. A specific state where the expected value of the number of prize balls exceeds 1 is reached. In this way, it is possible to increase the interest in the game by realizing a game property that creates a specific state in which prize balls can be obtained as much as possible. It should be noted that, when the player hits to the right, the suspension of the second starting memory is always the upper limit (for example, 4).

Note that the number of times of time saving may always be a fixed number of times (for example, 100 times). However, if the number of times of time saving in the "high-probability time-saving game state" is changed each time a variable display of special symbols is performed and a "jackpot" is derived, it will be more interesting as in the pachinko game machine of the sixth embodiment. can be increased. For example, by making the number of time reductions in the "high-probability time-saving gaming state" different each time a "jackpot" is derived, the result of the first special lottery becomes a "jackpot" (the fluctuation display of the first special symbol is The following interest arises due to the relationship with the timing (which becomes a long fluctuation). That is, it is not the case that the timing when the result of the first special lottery becomes a "big hit" (the fluctuation display of the first special symbol becomes a long fluctuation) is earlier. For example, when the number of times of time saving is 100 times, if the fluctuation display of the first special symbol becomes long fluctuation at an early timing, the period of the specific state may be shortened, and in some cases, the specific state may not occur. There is also a possibility that the variable display of 1 special symbol will be stopped and the game will be controlled to a big hit game state. In addition, when the number of times of time saving is relatively short (for example, 24 times), if the fluctuation display of the first special symbol becomes long fluctuation at an early timing, the benefits of the specific state can be received for a longer time. . In this way, by making the number of time saving times different each time a "jackpot" is derived, it is possible to increase the interest in the game, so the determined number of time saving times is suggested or specified, for example, by control by the sub CPU 201 You may perform.

However, even if the number of times of time saving is not disclosed by the control of either the main CPU 101 or the sub CPU 201, as in the pachinko gaming machine of the sixth embodiment, at any timing the player will be in the "high accuracy time saving game state". Since it is difficult to grasp whether to shift from to "high probability non-time-saving gaming state", increase the interest in games from a different point of view than when performing an effect that suggests or clearly indicates the determined number of times of time-saving becomes possible.

Incidentally, as in the pachinko machine of the sixth embodiment, when the result of the first special lottery is "jackpot" as shown in FIG. It is decided by lottery at which fluctuation time from long fluctuation D to long fluctuation F. In this way, by determining one of a plurality of different variation times for the variation time of the first special symbol, the interest in the game can be further enhanced. Moreover, as in the pachinko game machine of the sixth embodiment, if neither the main CPU 101 nor the sub CPU 201 disclose which of the long fluctuations D to F has been determined, the player can Since the end timing of the specific state is not known, it is possible to further increase the interest in the game.

In addition, in FIG. 276, when the result of the first special lottery is a "jackpot", the main CPU 101 is configured to determine one of long fluctuation D to long fluctuation F. As described in the example of the pachinko game machine, it may be determined with a predetermined probability that the degree of profit for the player is low during the fluctuation time (for example, 10000 msec).

In addition, in the above, after the jackpot gaming state is completed, it is configured to be controlled to the "high-probability non-time-saving gaming state" through the "high-probability short-time gaming state", but not necessarily limited to this, the sixth As described in the pachinko game machine of the embodiment, after the jackpot game state is finished, the game may be immediately controlled to the "high probability non-time-saving game state". In particular, after the jackpot game state is over, the normal jackpot controlled to the "high-accuracy non-time-saving game state" through the "high-accuracy short-time game state", and the "high-accuracy short-time game state" after the jackpot game state is completed. A premium jackpot controlled to a ``high-accuracy non-time-saving game state'' is prepared without going through, and in a special lottery executed by a main CPU 101, the premium jackpot is won with a predetermined probability according to a selection pattern command at the time of winning. It may be configured as

Further, in the above, when the result of the first special lottery is "big hit", the fluctuation time of the first special symbol is determined to be any one of the long fluctuation D to long fluctuation F. However, it is not always necessary to make the fluctuation time of the first special symbol long for all "jackpots". The variation time of the first special symbol may be determined to be the variation time of long variation D to long variation F only when it is a "big hit".

[Pachinko machine of the eighth embodiment]
Next, the pachinko game machine of the eighth embodiment will be explained. The pachinko game machine of the eighth embodiment has a board configuration of the game board unit 17 (see FIG. 281) that is partially different from the pachinko game machine of the first embodiment (see FIG. 254). In addition, in the pachinko game machine of the eighth embodiment, the game state after the jackpot game state is finished is controlled to the "normal game state" which is not the electric sapo state or the "high accuracy non-time-saving game state" which is the electric sapo state. be. In addition, although it may be controlled to the "high-probability short-time gaming state" or "low-probable short-time gaming state", it is not essential in the pachinko game machine of the eighth embodiment. Also, like the pachinko game machine of the first embodiment, one of the number of times of time saving is determined from among a plurality of times of time saving, and when the time saving game of the number of times determined in the "high accuracy time saving game state" is digested It may be controlled to the "high-probability non-time-saving gaming state". The external configuration of the pachinko game machine of the eighth embodiment will be described below with reference to FIG.

FIG. 281 is an example of a front view showing the appearance of the game board unit in the pachinko game machine of the eighth embodiment.

As shown in FIG. 281, the pachinko gaming machine of the eighth embodiment has a large winning opening 540 and a special electric accessory 600 in the game area 20, similarly to the pachinko gaming machine of the first embodiment (see FIG. 254). It is arranged on the upper right side of the liquid crystal display device 16 inside, and by driving the shutter 610 by the big winning opening solenoid, it is possible (or easy) to win the game ball to the big winning opening 540. , and a closing mode that makes it impossible (or difficult) for a game ball to enter the big winning hole 540 (drive). The pachinko game machine of the eighth embodiment is configured so that all or most of the game balls hit to the right enter the big winning hole 540 when the big winning hole 540 is in the open mode.

Also, on the right side of the liquid crystal display device 16, a role device 3500 is arranged on the downstream side of the big winning hole 540, and a right-handed game ball can enter into the role device 3500. there is However, it is not limited to this, and the accessory device 3500 may be arranged so that a left-handed game ball can enter.

The accessory device 3500 has an entrance 3502 into which a game ball can be taken in, and a rolling surface 3530 on which a game ball entering from the entrance 3502 can roll. The played game ball is temporarily retained inside the accessory device 3500 by rolling on the rolling surface 3530 .

Approximately in the center of the rolling surface 3530, there is provided an interference member 3520 that always rotates and changes the movement of the game ball when the game ball rolling on the rolling surface 3530 comes into contact with the game ball. The game ball only rolls around this interference member 3520 if it only rolls on the rolling surface 3530, but if it interferes with the interference member 3520, it is flipped away. This knocked game ball can be received in the first receiving port 3540 or the second receiving port 3550 . The game ball once taken into the accessory device 3500 rolls on the rolling surface 3530 until it is received in the first receiving port 3540 or the second receiving port 3550, and thus stays inside the accessory device 3500. The time will be different each time. Further, the first receiving port 3540 and the second receiving port 3550 are not limited to openings through which game balls can be received, but may be areas through which game balls can pass.

A movable member 3510 that can move back and forth with respect to the transparent panel 172 is provided above the inlet 3502 , and this movable member 3510 is always used to guide game balls into the accessory device 3500 . It is positioned forwardly with respect to the transparent panel 172 so as to block entry. Only when a specific condition, which will be described later, is satisfied, the movable member 3510 moves backward to open the entry port 3502, and only one game ball can be taken into the accessory device 3500. ing. Although not shown in FIG. 281, when a plurality of game balls enter the inlet 3502 when the movable member 3510 is actuated, only one game ball is taken into the accessory device 3500, Other game balls are discharged out of the machine. Also, if no game ball is shot, the main CPU 101 keeps the entrance 3502 open until one game ball is taken into the accessory device 3500 .

The above-described big prize winning port 540 provided above the accessory device 3500 wins a game ball when the variable display of the first special symbol is performed and the "big win" is derived and controlled to the big win game state. , and is hereinafter referred to as the first big winning hole 540 in the description of the pachinko game machine of the eighth embodiment. This first big winning port 540 has an opening mode that enables (or facilitates) winning of a game ball by driving a shutter 610 by a first big winning port solenoid (not shown), and a winning mode of a game ball. It is configured to be able to move (drive) to a closing mode that makes it impossible (or difficult) to move to.

Below the accessory device 3500, a passage gate 49 that triggers normal symbol determination is arranged. When the game ball passes through this passage gate 49, the main CPU 101 performs normal symbol determination. If the result of the normal symbol determination is a hit, the main CPU 101 opens the blade member 4620 for about 5900 msec, for example, and then closes it. While the blade member 4620 is in the open state, winning of the game ball to the second starting port 440 is facilitated. It should be noted that the second starting port 440 is configured so that a prize can be won when hitting to the right, as in the pachinko gaming machine 1 (see FIG. 5) according to the first embodiment.

On the downstream side of the passage gate 49, when the game ball is controlled to the big win game state on the condition that the variable display of the second special symbol is performed and the "big win" is derived, the winning of the game ball is possible. A second prize winning opening 5403 is provided. This second big winning port 5403 has an opening mode that enables (or facilitates) winning of a game ball by driving a shutter 6103 by a second big winning port solenoid (not shown), and a winning mode of a game ball. It is configured to be able to move (drive) to a closing mode that makes it impossible (or difficult) to move to.

A small prize winning opening 5400 is provided downstream of the second big winning opening 5403 . This small winning prize opening 5400 has an opening mode that enables (or facilitates) winning of a game ball by driving a small winning shutter 6100 by a small winning winning opening solenoid (not shown), and It is configured to be able to shift (drive) between a closed mode that makes it impossible (or difficult) to win a prize.

If the game ball hit to the right does not win any of the first big winning hole 540, the accessory device 3500, the second big winning hole 5403, the small winning winning hole 5400 and the second starting hole 440, the out hole 57 is ejected from the aircraft.

The point that the pachinko game machine of the eighth embodiment differs greatly from the pachinko game machines of the first to seventh embodiments is the process until it is controlled to the jackpot game state. The process until the pachinko game machine of the eighth embodiment is controlled to the jackpot game state will be described.

First, in the "normal game state", the main CPU 101 refers to the special symbol variation time determination table for low start shown in FIG. 258 to determine the special symbol variation time. Therefore, since there is no merit of winning the game ball in the second starting port 440, the game is played by left-handed hitting that can win the game ball in the first starting port 5442.例文帳に追加When the left-handed game ball wins the first starting hole 5442, the main CPU 101 executes the first special lottery. Then, the variable display of the first special symbol is performed, and the result of the first special lottery is derived. In this "normal game state", the main CPU 101 refers to the special symbol variation time determination table for low start shown in FIG. 258 to determine the special symbol variation time. At this time, when a "jackpot" is derived as a result of the first special lottery, the main CPU 101 drives the shutter 610 to shift the first big winning port 540 between an open mode and a closed mode. Control to a special game state that takes place over rounds. In this way, when a game ball enters the first starting port 5442, the process until it is controlled to the jackpot game state does not differ greatly from the pachinko gaming machines of the first to sixth embodiments.

Next, when the jackpot game state ends and is controlled to the "high-probability non-work-time-saving game state", the main CPU 101 uses the end of the jackpot game state as a trigger to determine the special symbol fluctuation time. The symbol variation time determination table is changed to the high start special symbol variation time determination table shown in FIG. Then, in the “high-probability non-time-saving gaming state”, the main CPU 101 refers to the special symbol variation time determination table for high start shown in FIG. 259 to determine the special symbol variation time. In addition, as in the pachinko game machine of the first embodiment, in the second special lottery performed based on the winning of the game ball into the second start port 440, the probability of winning a "small hit" is about 1/5. However, in the first special lottery performed based on the winning of the game ball to the first start port 5442, the "small win" is not won or even if it is won, the probability is extremely low compared to the second special lottery. Only Therefore, in this "high-probability non-work-time-saving game state", the game is played by hitting to the right. When the right-handed game ball wins the second starting hole 440, the main CPU 101 executes the second special lottery. Then, the variable display of the second special symbol is performed, and the result of the second special lottery is derived. In this "high-probability non-time-saving game state", the expected value of the number of prize balls to the number of shot balls per unit time exceeds 1 as in the pachinko game machine of the first embodiment. Therefore, when the jackpot game state ends and the sub CPU 201 is controlled to the "high probability non-time-saving game state", the sub CPU 201 is controlled to a specific state advantageous to the player different from the jackpot game state. , to display on the liquid crystal display device 16 a delight image that delights the player.

Even if the variable display of the second special symbol is performed based on the winning of the game ball to the second starting port 440 and the "jackpot" is derived, the main CPU 101 does not immediately control to the jackpot game state, First, the condition device is only operated as the first condition which is one of the conditions for controlling to the jackpot gaming state. After activating the condition device, the main CPU 101 refers to the special symbol fluctuation time determination table for high start shown in FIG. Since the variation time of the 2 special symbols is determined and the variation display of the second special symbol is performed based on this, the small winning game is executed with high frequency, and the winning frequency of the game balls to the small winning winning opening 5400 is increased. . When a game ball wins in the small winning prize opening 5400, for example, 15 prize balls are paid out, and the expected value of the number of prize balls with respect to the number of shot balls per unit time exceeds one.

In addition, in the above, when the condition device is activated by the fact that the "jackpot" is derived based on the winning of the game ball to the second start port 440, based on the winning of the game ball to the second start port 440 Small hit games are executed at a high frequency so that prize balls can be obtained, but when the condition device is operated based on the winning of the game ball to the second start port 440, the operation of the condition device Based on this, it is common that the variable display of the second special symbol is not performed based on the winning of the game ball to the second starting port 440 until the big hit game state is completed. Therefore, instead of the above, when the condition device is activated by deriving a "jackpot" based on the winning of the game ball to the second start port 440, for example, based on the passage of the game ball to the passage gate 49 Winning opening (second starting opening 440 in this embodiment) facilitated by opening and closing drive by normal electric accessory 460 (wing member 4620) by increasing the probability that the result of normal symbol determination performed is determined to be a hit It is also possible to increase the frequency of winning of game balls into the game ball to increase the expected value of the number of prize balls with respect to the number of shot balls per unit time. In this case, when a game ball enters the winning opening facilitated by the opening/closing drive of the normal electric accessory 460 (wing member 4620), it is necessary to pay out at least two or more game balls as prize balls. In addition, the main CPU 101 allows a relatively long time before the conditional device is activated so that the expected value of the number of prize balls for the number of shot balls per unit time is not increased when the conditional device is not activated. It is preferable to change the fluctuation time of the normal design to a relatively short time based on the fact that the condition device is operated.

When the conditional device is activated, the main CPU 101 activates the movable member 3510 to take only one game ball into the accessory device 3500 . Then, when the game ball taken into the interior of the accessory device 3500 is received by the first receiving port 3540 or the second receiving port 3550, the main CPU 101 sets the second condition, which is a further condition for controlling the jackpot game state. As, to operate the role continuous operation device. On the premise that the condition device is operating, the main CPU 101 drives the shutter 610 when the accessory continuous actuating device is operated, and shifts the second prize winning port 5403 between the open mode and the closed mode. is controlled to a special game state in which is performed over multiple rounds. In this way, when a game ball enters the second starting port 440, the process until the game state is controlled to the jackpot game state is greatly different from the pachinko game machines of the first to seventh embodiments.

In addition, when the game ball taken into the accessory device 3500 is received in the first receiving port 3540 and when it is received in the second receiving port 3550, for example, the round game executed in the jackpot game state It is preferable to provide a difference in the degree of advantage, such as providing a difference in the number of rounds. However, it is not always necessary to provide a plurality of reception ports, such as the first reception port 3540 and the second reception port 3550, which function as conditions for operating the accessory continuous device. The main CPU 101 may operate the accessory continuous actuating device when the game ball is received.

In addition, in the above, the main CPU 101 drives the shutter 610 to open and close the first big winning opening 540 in the jackpot game state controlled based on the winning of the game ball into the first starting opening 5442. , and in the jackpot game state controlled based on the winning of the game ball to the second starting port 440, the shutter 6103 is driven to open and close the second big winning port 5403. A round game is performed using a different big winning opening, such as performing a round game to be transferred. However, not limited to this, the jackpot game state controlled based on the winning of the game ball to the first start port 5442, the jackpot game state controlled based on the winning of the game ball to the second start port 440 Then, a round game may be played using the same big winning slot.

Also, when the variable display of the first special symbol is performed and a "jackpot" is derived, the game ball is taken into the accessory device 3500 and received in the first receiving port 3540 or the second receiving port 3550. This is because the main CPU 101 operates the condition device and the accessory continuous actuating device with the result of the first special lottery being derived. .

By the way, the game ball taken into the accessory device 3500 is temporarily retained inside the accessory device 3500 until it is received in the first receiving port 3540 or the second receiving port 3550 as described above. . As a result, it is possible to create a time difference between the generation of the conditional device and the activation of the accessory continuous actuating device. That is, even though the variable display of the second special symbol is performed and the "jackpot" is derived, the control to the jackpot game state is not performed until the accessory continuous actuating device is activated. The specific state in which the expected value of the number of prize balls exceeds 1 is extended. Therefore, in the pachinko gaming machine of the eighth embodiment, when the variable display of the second special symbol is performed and the "jackpot" is derived, the sub CPU 201, as an effect indicating that the specific state is extended, A delight image that delights the player is displayed on the liquid crystal display device 16.例文帳に追加In addition, since the above-mentioned specific state is limited to a period in which it is not known how long it will last after the conditional device is activated, the sub CPU 201 prevents the game balls from being accepted into the first receiving port 3540 or the second receiving port 3550. A cheering performance for cheering the player is displayed on a liquid crystal display device 16.例文帳に追加

In this way, when the second starting port 440 is won, not only the operation of the condition device (the establishment of the first condition) that the second special symbol is displayed and the "jackpot" is derived, but also the condition On the premise that the device has been operated, a prize for the number of shot balls per unit time is provided by controlling to the jackpot game state when the accessory continuous operating device is operated (the second condition is established) with a time lag. It is possible to extend the specific state in which the expected value of the number of balls exceeds 1, and to increase the interest in the game.

Moreover, since the time from the activation of the conditional device as the first condition to the activation of the accessory continuous actuating device as the second condition varies each time, the number of prize balls per unit time is reduced. It becomes difficult for the player to predict how long the specific state in which the expected value exceeds 1 will continue, and it is possible to further increase the interest in the game.

In the pachinko game machine of the eighth embodiment, the operation of the condition device and the operation of the accessory continuation device are the first condition and the second condition for being controlled to the jackpot game state, but this is not the only condition. Instead, for example, in a so-called type 1 type 2 compound machine, type 1 winning and type 2 winning may be used as the first condition and the second condition for being controlled to the jackpot gaming state. For example, in a so-called 1-kind 2-kind multifunction machine, the same accessory device 3500 as the accessory device 3500 described for the pachinko game machine of the eighth embodiment is provided. The main CPU 101 refers to the special symbol variation time determination table for low start shown in, for example, FIG. determine the time. Then, when the variable display of the special symbols is performed and a "hit" is derived and one kind of hit is achieved, the main CPU 101 operates the movable member 3510 so as to take only one game ball into the accessory device 3500. Let In addition, on the premise that the special symbols will be varied even after winning one type, the main CPU 101 refers to the special symbol variation time determination table for high start shown in FIG. Determine the variation time of On the other hand, one game ball taken inside the accessory device 3500 rolls on the rolling surface 3530 and is repelled when it comes into contact with the interference member 3520 . When the game ball flipped by the interference member 3520 is received, for example, in the first receiving port 3540, it becomes a double hit, and the main CPU 101 controls a big win game state. In such a so-called 1-type 2-type compound machine, it is not possible to have the concept of extending a specific state in which the expected value of the number of prize balls for the number of balls fired per unit time exceeds 1. The seed winning can be set as a first condition and a second condition for being controlled to the jackpot game state, and after the first condition as the first condition, the second condition as the second condition. To increase interest in a game by making it difficult for a player to predict how long the specific state in which the expected value of the number of prize balls to the number of shot balls per unit time exceeds 1 will continue because the time until winning is different each time. becomes possible.

[Modification of the pachinko machine of the eighth embodiment]
Next, a modification of the pachinko game machine of the eighth embodiment will be described. The modification of the pachinko gaming machine of the eighth embodiment differs greatly from the pachinko gaming machine of the eighth embodiment in that the special symbol variation time determination table referred to when determining the special symbol variation time is, for example, This is an opportunity to change from the special symbol variation time determination table for low start shown in FIG. 258 to the special symbol variation time determination table for high start shown in FIG. 259, for example. In the pachinko gaming machine of the eighth embodiment, the main CPU 101 changes the special symbol variation time determination table referred to when determining the special symbol variation time upon completion of the jackpot game state. In the modification of the pachinko game machine of the embodiment, the conditions are changed with the operation of the condition device as a trigger.

In addition, the main CPU 101 changes the special symbol variation time determination table, which is referred to when determining the special symbol variation time, based on the operation of the condition device, for example, the low start special symbol shown in FIG. For example, when changing from the variable time determination table to the variable time determination table of special symbols for high start shown in FIG. It is possible to create a time difference between when the character product continuous operation device is activated.

Also, in this modification of the pachinko game machine of the eighth embodiment, the big winning hole may be either the first big winning hole 540 or the second big winning hole 5403 shown in FIG. Similarly, only one of the shutter 610 and the shutter 6103 may be used as the shutter. Therefore, in the modified example of the pachinko game machine of the eighth embodiment, the second big winning hole 5403 and the shutter 6103 are not provided, and the first big winning hole 540 and the shutter 610 are provided. Therefore, since it is not necessary to distinguish the first big winning hole 540 from other big winning holes, it is simply referred to as the big winning hole 540 in this modified example of the pachinko game machine of the eighth embodiment.

Specifically, first, in the “normal game state”, the main CPU 101 refers to the special symbol variation time determination table for low start shown in FIG. A game is played by hitting. When the left-handed game ball wins the first starting hole 5442, the main CPU 101 executes the first special lottery. Then, when the variable display of the first special symbol is performed and the "jackpot" is derived as a result of the first special lottery, the main CPU 101 immediately controls the jackpot game state as in the pachinko game machine of the eighth embodiment. Instead, first, the condition device is operated as the first condition for controlling to the jackpot gaming state.

In addition, when the condition device is activated, the main CPU 101 changes the special symbol variation time determination table, which is referred to when determining the special symbol variation time, to the special symbol variation time table for high start shown in FIG. Change to time determination table. Here, in the second special lottery performed based on the winning of the game ball to the second start port 440, the probability of winning the "small hit" is about 1/5, and the game ball to the first start port 5442 is won. In the first special lottery conducted based on the winning of the above, the "small win" is not won or even if it is won, the probability of winning is extremely low compared to the second special lottery, so after the condition device is activated is played by hitting to the right. When a game is played by hitting to the right, the expected value of the number of prize balls to the number of shot balls per unit time exceeds 1, resulting in a specific state.

Further, after activating the conditional device, the main CPU 101 also refers to the variable time determination table for special symbols for high start shown in FIG. to determine the variation time of the second special symbol, and to perform the variation display of the second special symbol based on this, the small winning game is executed at a high frequency, and the winning frequency of the game ball to the small winning winning opening 5400 Increased. When a game ball wins in the small winning prize opening 5400, for example, 15 prize balls are paid out, and the expected value of the number of prize balls with respect to the number of shot balls per unit time exceeds one.

It should be noted that in the modified example of the pachinko game machine of the eighth embodiment, as in the pachinko game machine of the eighth embodiment, for example, the winning opening facilitated by opening and closing drive by the normal electric accessory 460 (wing member 4620) By increasing the winning frequency of game balls into (in this embodiment, the second starting port 440), the expected value of the number of prize balls with respect to the number of shot balls per unit time may be increased.

Also, the accessory device 3500 is configured so that a right-handed game ball can enter, as in the pachinko game machine of the eighth embodiment. A sphere may be arranged so as to be able to enter.

After the conditional device is activated, the main CPU 101 activates the movable member 3510 in the same manner as when the second special symbol is displayed in the pachinko game machine of the eighth embodiment and the "jackpot" is derived. Then, only one game ball is taken into the accessory device 3500.例文帳に追加Then, when the game ball taken into the interior of the accessory device 3500 is received by the first receiving port 3540 or the second receiving port 3550, the main CPU 101 sets the second condition, which is a further condition for controlling the jackpot game state. As, to operate the role continuous operation device. On the premise that the conditional device is operating, the main CPU 101 drives the shutter 610 when the accessory continuous operating device is operated, and makes a plurality of round games in which the big winning port 540 is shifted between an open mode and a closed mode. Control to a special game state that takes place over rounds. Thus, in the modified example of the pachinko game machine of the eighth embodiment, even when the game ball has entered the first starting port 5442, the first condition for controlling the jackpot game state is the condition On the premise that the device is activated and the conditional device is activated, it is possible to generate a time difference and activate the accessory continuous activation device, which is the second condition. In this case, the main CPU 101 does not stop measuring the variation time of the second special symbol only when the conditional device is activated, but measures the variation time of the second special symbol based on the activation of the accessory continuous actuating device. Execute stop control.

Therefore, after the condition device is activated, it is possible to create a specific state in which the expected value of the number of prize balls for the number of shot balls per unit time exceeds 1 for a limited period of time for which it is not known how long the game will continue, thereby increasing the amusement of the game. becomes possible.

In addition, when it is controlled to the "high probability non-time-saving game state" after the jackpot game state is completed, the number of prize balls for the number of shot balls per unit time is the same as the pachinko game machine of the eighth embodiment. A specific state in which the expected value exceeds 1 can be set, and a time difference can be generated between the activation of the conditional device and the activation of the continuous actuating device.

[Modified example of the modified example of the pachinko game machine of the eighth embodiment]
The modified example of the pachinko game machine of the eighth embodiment can be further modified as follows. In the modification of the modification of the pachinko game machine of the eighth embodiment, the board configuration of the game board unit 17 is replaced with the board configuration shown in FIG. 282, for example, in place of the board configuration shown in FIG. The appearance configuration of a modification of the modification of the pachinko game machine of the eighth embodiment will be described below with reference to FIG.

FIG. 282 is an example of a front view showing the appearance of the game board unit in the modification of the modification of the pachinko game machine of the eighth embodiment.

The board configuration shown in FIG. 282 is a combination of the board configuration shown in FIG. 275 and the board configuration shown in FIG. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 282 , the big prize opening 540 and the special electric accessory 600 are arranged on the upper right side of the liquid crystal display device 16 within the game area 20 . The large winning opening 540 has an opening mode that enables (or facilitates) the winning of game balls by driving the shutter 610 by a large winning opening solenoid (not shown), and the opening of the game ball to the large winning opening 540. It is configured to be able to shift (drive) between a closed mode that makes it impossible (or difficult) to win a prize. When the big winning hole 540 is in the open mode, all or most of the game balls hit to the right win the big winning hole 540.例文帳に追加

On the right side of the liquid crystal display device 16 and downstream of the big winning opening 540, there is the same role as the pachinko game machine of the eighth embodiment and the accessory device 3500 described in the modification of the eighth embodiment of the pachinko game machine. A physical device 3500 is placed.

A passage gate 49 is arranged on the downstream side of the big prize winning opening 540 and on the right side of the accessory device 3500 . The passage gate 49 provides an opportunity for normal symbol determination on the condition that a game ball passes through.

In addition, like the pachinko game machine of the eighth embodiment and the modified example of the pachinko game machine of the eighth embodiment (see FIG. 281), in addition to the first start port 5442 conventionally provided, on the downstream side of the passage gate 49 , a first starting port 5443 (the number of winning balls when winning the first starting port 5443 is, for example, one ball) in which a game ball hit to the right can win, and the winning of the game ball to this first starting port 5443. A movable member 4652 that can change the ease, and a second starting port 440 arranged on the lower left side of the first starting port 5443 (the number of prize balls when winning the second starting port 440 is, for example, 1 ball) It has The main CPU 101 moves the movable member 4652 at a higher frequency than in the "normal game state" based on the fact that the result of normal symbol determination is a hit in the "high-probability short-time gaming state" and "low-probability short-time gaming state." It is operated so that the winning to the first starting port 5443 is facilitated. When a game ball wins in the second starting port 440, the main CPU 101 performs a variable display of the second special symbol. The probability that the "big win" is not derived is the probability that the "minor win" is derived entirely or mostly, but the probability that the "minor win" is derived is not limited to this.

Also, unlike FIG. 281, similarly to FIG. A small-hit shutter 6100 that can move back and forth with respect to the panel 172 is arranged. The small-hit shutter 6100 can be driven by a small-hit winning opening solenoid (not shown). When the small winning shutter 6100 operates forward with respect to the transparent panel 172, the small winning prize opening 5400 is closed, and when the small winning shutter 6100 operates backward with respect to the transparent panel 172, the small winning prize opening 5400 is closed. It becomes an open mode. If the result of the second special lottery is a "minor win", the main CPU 101 performs a variable display of the second special symbol to derive the result of a "minor win". When the result of "small win" is derived, the main CPU 101 controls the small win shutter 6100 to operate the small win shutter 6100 so that the small win winning opening 5400 is opened.

On the upper right side of the first starting port 5443, similarly to FIG. 254, an out port 5444 for discharging game balls to the outside of the machine is arranged, but it is not necessarily an essential configuration.

281, among the game balls that are hit to the right, the game balls that do not enter the large winning opening 540 and do not enter the accessory device 3500 flow down the flow path 5450 toward the first starting opening 5443. , a flow-down route 5451 toward the second starting port 440 and a flow-down route 5452 toward the out port 5444, for example, an obstacle nail. Among these three flow-down routes, the flow-down route 5450 toward the first start port 5443 has the highest flow-down rate of the game ball, followed by the flow-down route 5451 toward the second start-up port 440, and the flow rate of the game ball is the highest. Downflow path 5452 toward out port 5444 has a lower rate.

281, when the first starting port 5443 is in the open state, all or most of the game balls flowing down the flowing path 5450 toward the first starting port 5443 go to the first starting port 5443 configured to win. Therefore, when the first starting port 5443 is in the open mode, even if the small winning prize port 5400 is in the open state, the game ball flowing down the flow path 5450 toward the first starting port 5443 is a small winning prize port 5400 is difficult to win. On the other hand, when the winning of the game ball to the first start port 544 is impossible mode, the game ball flowing down the flow path 5450 toward the first start port 5443 is guided to the right side than the first start port 5443 He reaches the small winning prize opening 5400. - 特許庁At this time, if the small winning prize opening 5400 is in the open state, the game ball enters the small winning prize opening 5400, and the main CPU 101 sends the game ball to the small winning prize opening 5400 via the payout/launch control circuit 300. Prize balls are paid out based on the winning of . A game ball that reaches the small winning prize opening 5400 but does not win the small winning prize opening 5400 further flows downstream and is eventually discharged from the out port 57 to the outside of the machine.

In addition, the main CPU 101 refers to the special symbol variation time determination table for low start shown in FIG. The variation time of the special symbol is determined, and the variation display of the first special symbol is performed based on the winning of the game ball into the first starting port 5442 in which the left-handed game ball can win, and the fact that it is a "jackpot" is displayed. When the result is derived, only the conditional device out of the conditional device and the accessory continuous actuating device is operated. The main CPU 101 changes to the variable time determination table for special symbols for high start shown in FIG. 259, for example, when the conditional device is activated. In this way, in the "normal game state", even if the conditional device is generated based on the winning of the game ball to the first start port 5442, from the occurrence of the conditional device to the activation of the accessory continuous operation device It is possible to create a time difference between Then, during the period from when the condition device is generated based on the winning of the game ball to the first start port 5442 until the role product continuous operation device is activated, the second special symbol changes in the state where the condition device is activated. Even if the display is performed, the result of "big win" is not derived, and the main CPU 101 controls the small win game state at a high frequency based on the winning of the game ball to the second start port 440. As a result, prize balls can be obtained as much as you want by allowing game balls to enter the small winning prize opening 5400. - 特許庁In this way, during the period from the occurrence of the conditional device to the actuation of the accessory continuous actuating device, the result of ``big win'' is not derived, and prize balls can be obtained as much as possible in the small win game state. is guaranteed, and the expected value of the number of prize balls for the number of shot balls per unit time exceeds 1.

In addition, in the "normal game state", the main CPU 101 determines the special symbol variation time by referring to, for example, a low start special symbol variation time determination table shown in FIG. For example, when it is controlled to the "high-probability short-time gaming state", when the big-hit gaming state ends, for example, the special symbol fluctuation time determination table for high start shown in FIG. 259 is changed. good too. In this case, the main CPU 101, in the "high-probability short-time gaming state" after the end of the big-hit gaming state, based on the winning of the game ball to the first start opening 5443 in which the game ball hit to the right can win When the special symbols are displayed in a variable display and the result of "jackpot" is derived, only the conditional device out of the conditional device and the role product continuous operation device is operated, so that the conditional device is generated and then the role is played. It is possible to create a time difference until the object continuous actuator operates. Then, in the "high-probability short-time gaming state", when the determined number of time-saving games is completed, the main CPU 101 performs control to shift the gaming state to the "high-probability non-time-saving gaming state". In this "high-accuracy non-time-saving gaming state", it becomes a non-electric support state in which it is impossible or difficult to win a game ball to the first start port 544, so the flow path 5450 toward the first start port 5443 was flowed down. The game ball reaches the small winning prize opening 5400. - 特許庁That is, in the "high-accuracy time-saving game state", the variable display of the second special symbol was performed in the state where the condition device was operating from the time the condition device was generated until the accessory continuous operation device was activated. However, the result that it is a "big hit" is not derived, and when it is controlled to a small hit game state based on the winning of the game ball to the second start port 440, the game is played to the small hit winning port 5400 It is possible to make the ball win a prize, and the prize ball can be obtained as much as you want. In this way, even if it is controlled to the "high-precision time-saving gaming state" after the jackpot gaming state ends, the "high-precision On the condition that it has been shifted to "non-time-saving gaming state", the result of "big hit" is not derived, and the state of unlimited winning of prize balls by the small winning game state is guaranteed, and the ball fired per unit time A specific state in which the expected value of the number of winning balls for the number exceeds one can be set.

In addition, in both the modification of the pachinko game machine of the eighth embodiment and the modification of the modification of the pachinko game machine of the eighth embodiment, the condition device is set based on the winning of the game ball to the first start port 5442 Therefore, on the premise that the conditional device is operating, even if the player hits to the left, the character object continuous operation device can be operated. A continuous operating gate 3560 is preferably provided. In this case, the main CPU 101 executes control to activate the accessory continuous activation device based on the fact that the game ball has passed through the accessory continuous activation gate 3560 on the premise that the conditional device is activated. Thus, by providing the accessory continuous operation gate 3560 through which the game ball can pass when the game ball is shot in a shooting mode different from that of the accessory device 3500, for example, only the condition device is activated just before the closing time of the hall. By intentionally letting the game ball pass through the role product continuous operation gate 3560 without entering the role product device 3500 when operating, it is possible to shift to the jackpot game state quickly.

[4. Pachinko machine according to the fourth embodiment]
[Examples of expansion of game characteristics by arranging various members in the game area, etc.]
As described above, the pachinko game machine 1 according to the first embodiment and the pachinko game machine according to the third embodiment of the present invention have been described. Therefore, the game may be expanded as follows. The pachinko game machine according to the fourth embodiment will be described below.

In addition, the pachinko game machine according to the fourth embodiment has a configuration not mentioned in the following description (for example, various members arranged in the game area of the pachinko game machine (especially the left side area), control by the main CPU 101 and control by the sub CPU 201 etc.) is the same as the pachinko gaming machine 1 (see FIG. 5) according to the first embodiment. However, it may have the same basic configuration as the pachinko gaming machine (see FIG. 254) according to the third embodiment. Also, the pachinko gaming machine according to the fourth embodiment may have a setting function, like the pachinko machine according to the second embodiment.

In addition, since the pachinko game machine according to the fourth embodiment can adopt various variations of embodiments, the description will be divided into the first to fourth embodiments.

It should be noted that the members constituting the pachinko gaming machine according to the fourth embodiment include those that are also provided in the pachinko machines according to the first to third embodiments (for example, a large winning opening, etc.). In the pachinko machines according to the fourth embodiment, for the sake of convenience, some are given the same reference numerals and others are given different reference numerals.

In this specification, the first example of the pachinko gaming machine according to the fourth embodiment is referred to as the pachinko gaming machine of the first example of the fourth embodiment (the second to fourth examples are also the same). On the other hand, the first example of the pachinko game machine according to the third embodiment is simply referred to as the first example pachinko game machine (the same applies to the second to seventh examples). That is, an example in which "of the fourth embodiment" is described before the example means an example of the pachinko game machine according to the fourth embodiment, and "of the fourth embodiment" is before the example. An example without is an example of the pachinko game machine according to the third embodiment.

[Pachinko machine of the first example of the fourth embodiment]
FIG. 283 is an example of a front view showing the appearance of the game board unit in the pachinko game machine of the first example of the fourth embodiment. As shown in FIG. 283, in the pachinko game machine according to the first example of the fourth embodiment, a special game member 4000 is arranged on the lower right side of the liquid crystal display device 16. As shown in FIG. This special game member 4000 is composed of a large prize winning port 5401, a special electric accessory 6010, a general prize winning port 560, and a flow-down path forming member 590 that forms a flow-down path of a game ball struck right. In the special game member 4000 shown in FIG. 283, the various members constituting this special game member 4000 are not unitized, but may be unitized.

As with the pachinko game machine 1 according to the first embodiment and the pachinko game machine according to the third embodiment, the special electric accessory 6010 is driven by a large winning opening solenoid (not shown) to drive the shutter 6020. Shift (drive) to an open mode that makes it possible (or easy) for the game ball to enter the big winning opening 5401 and a closed mode that makes it impossible (or difficult) for the game ball to enter the big winning opening 5401. configured as possible.

A receiving member 3001 is formed on the upper right side of the shutter 6020 to temporarily receive a game ball hit to the right. This receiving member 3001 has a function of stopping or weakening the momentum of the game ball flowing down and dropping the game ball to the upstream side (right side) of the shutter 6020 .

The shutter 6020 is a plate-like member on which a game ball can roll in the left-right direction, and is configured to move back and forth with respect to the transparent panel 172 . When the shutter 6020 advances forward with respect to the transparent panel 172, the large prize winning opening 5401 is open, and when the shutter 6020 retreats backward with respect to the transparent panel 172, the large winning opening 5401 opens. It becomes a closed mode. When a game ball wins in the big winning hole 5401 , the main CPU 101 pays out, for example, 15 prize balls via the payout/launch control circuit 300 .

When the shutter 6020 advances in the forward direction with respect to the transparent panel 172, it is possible to receive, on the upstream side (right side), a game ball that has been struck to the right and dropped from the receiving member 3000. A game ball received on the side rolls on the upper surface of the movable shutter 6020 toward the downstream side (left side).

The big winning opening 5401 is arranged on the most downstream side of the shutter 6020, and the upper surface of the shutter 6020 is opened so as to receive a game ball rolling from the upstream side to the downstream side. However, when the shutter 6020 retreats backward in a state in which there is a game ball that is rolling on the upper surface of the shutter 6020 but has not yet reached the big winning opening 5401, the upper surface of the shutter 6020 is rolling. The game ball falls into the big prize winning opening 5401 without winning.

Below the special electric accessory 6010, more specifically below the shutter 6020, a flow-down path forming member 590 that forms a flow-down path for game balls that do not win the big prize opening 5401 is arranged. This flow-down path forming member 590 includes a first flow-down path 5901 through which game balls that have fallen from the receiving member 3001 flow down when the shutter 6020 is retracted in the rear direction, and a shutter when the shutter 6020 is retracted in the rear direction. It is configured to form a second flow-down path 5902 along which game balls rolling on the upper surface of 6020 flow down.

In addition, the flow-down path forming member 590 may be configured so that the game ball rolling on the upper surface of the shutter 6020 flows down the second flow-down path 5902 when the shutter 6020 is retracted in the rear direction. It is not necessary that all the game balls rolling on the upper surface of the shutter 6020 when the shutter 6020 is retracted backward flow down the second flow path 5902 . Therefore, of the game balls rolling on the upper surface of the shutter 6020, some game balls on the upstream side (for example, the game balls that have just fallen from the receiving member 3001) pass through the first flow-down path 5901 It may be configured to flow down.

The game ball that has flowed down the first flow-down path 5901 is discharged out of the machine from the out port 57 without winning in any of the winning ports.

A general prize winning port 560 is arranged on the downstream side of the second flow path 5902, and all or most of the game balls flowing down the second flow path 5902 are configured to win the general prize winning port 560. When game balls enter the general prize winning port 560, the main CPU 101 pays out, for example, four prize balls via the payout/launch control circuit 300. FIG.

Further, the pachinko gaming machine of the first example of the fourth embodiment has a first special symbol or a second special symbol, like the pachinko gaming machine 1 according to the first embodiment and the pachinko gaming machine according to the third embodiment. is performed and a "big win" is derived, the main CPU 101 controls to a big win game state that is advantageous to the player.

In the jackpot game state, the main CPU 101 executes a round game in which the big win opening 5401 is opened in a predetermined manner over a plurality of rounds. A round game of one round is a game in which the big winning opening 5401 is opened for a predetermined period (for example, 30000 msec) or is opened until a predetermined number (for example, 9 balls) of game balls wins the big winning opening 5401 . That is, the big winning opening 5401 repeats opening and closing for each round.

Therefore, each time the shutter 6020 retracts backward after one round of the round game is completed, the game ball rolling on the upper surface of the shutter 6020 flows down the second flow path 5902 and enters the general winning opening 560. do. For example, if a round game of 15 rounds is executed in the jackpot game state, the number of times the shutter 6020 retracts backward is 15 times in one jackpot game state. When the shutter 6020 retracts backward, if the average number of game balls rolling on the upper surface of the shutter 6020 is, for example, 3 balls, about 45 game balls are generally won in one big win game state. There will be a chance of winning at mouth 560 . Then, assuming that the number of prize balls is four when one game ball enters the general prize winning opening 560, there is a possibility that about 180 prize balls will be paid out.

In this way, by arranging the special game member 4000 in the game area 20 as described above (only by devising the arrangement positions of various structural members), a payout is made by a big win game (winning a prize to the big prize winning port 5401). In addition to the number of prize balls, the prize balls are paid out based on the winning to the general prize winning opening 560, so it is possible to increase the interest in the game.

It should be noted that the mode of opening the big winning opening 5401 (that is, the mode of operation of the shutter 6020) in the round game is not necessarily limited to performing the opening and closing operation once per round as long as there is regularity, and multiple times per round. It may be one that performs an opening/closing operation. For example, it is conceivable that one round of the game consists of three repetitions of opening for 10000 msec. Thus, in a round game of one round, if the opening and closing operation of the big winning opening 5401 (operation mode of the shutter 6020) is executed multiple times, there is a possibility that a larger amount of game balls will be paid out, and the game It is possible to further increase interest.

[Pachinko machine of the second example of the fourth embodiment]
FIG. 284 is an example of a front view showing the appearance of the game board unit in the pachinko game machine of the second example of the fourth embodiment. As shown in FIG. 284, the pachinko game machine according to the second example of the fourth embodiment has a special game member 4100 arranged in the area on the right side of the liquid crystal display device 16 . This special game member 4100 includes a plate-shaped movable member 5602 that can change the large winning opening 5401, the special electric accessory 6010, the general winning opening 560, and the general winning opening 560 between an open mode and a closed mode. It consists of a starting port 440, a passage gate 49, a small winning prize port 5400, a small winning shutter 6100, and a small winning prize opening solenoid (not shown) for driving the small winning shutter 6100. In the special game member 4100 shown in FIG. 284, various members constituting the special game member 4100 are not unitized, but may be unitized.

The special electric accessory 6010 is arranged on the upper right side of the liquid crystal display device 16, and like the pachinko gaming machine 1 according to the first embodiment and the pachinko gaming machine according to the third embodiment, the big winning opening solenoid (Fig. (not shown) drives the shutter 6020 to enable (or facilitate) entry of game balls into the large winning opening 5401, and disable (or It is configured to be able to shift (drive) to a closing mode that makes it difficult to close).

A game ball hit to the right collides with the cushioning member 950, thereby weakening the momentum of the game ball. Then, the game ball whose momentum is weakened by colliding with the buffer member 950 falls to the upstream side (right side) of the shutter 6020 .

The shutter 6020 is a plate-like member on which a game ball can roll in the left-right direction, and is configured to move back and forth with respect to the transparent panel 172 . When the shutter 6020 advances forward with respect to the transparent panel 172, the large prize winning opening 5401 is open, and when the shutter 6020 retreats backward with respect to the transparent panel 172, the large winning opening 5401 opens. It becomes a closed mode.

When the shutter 6020 advances in the forward direction with respect to the transparent panel 172, it is possible to receive the game ball that has been hit to the right and weakened by the cushioning member 950 on the upstream side (right side). The game ball received on the upstream side is configured to roll toward the upper surface of the shutter 6020 toward the downstream side (left side).

The big winning opening 5401 is arranged on the most downstream side of the shutter 6020, and the upper surface of the shutter 6020 is opened so as to receive a game ball rolling from the upstream side to the downstream side. However, when the shutter 6020 retreats backward in a state in which there is a game ball that is rolling on the upper surface of the shutter 6020 but has not yet reached the big winning opening 5401, the upper surface of the shutter 6020 is rolling. The game ball falls into the big prize winning opening 5401 without winning.

Below the special electric accessory 6010, more specifically below the shutter 6020, a flow-down path forming member 591 that forms a flow-down path for game balls that have not won the big prize opening 5401 is arranged. This flow-down path forming member 591 includes a first flow-down path 5903 through which a right-handed game ball flows down when the shutter 6020 is retracted in the rear direction, and an upper surface of the shutter 6020 when the shutter 6020 is retracted in the rear direction. It is configured to form a second flow-down path 5904 along which the game ball rolling down flows down. The first flow-down path 5903 and the second flow-down path 5904 are partitioned by a partition wall 594 so that game balls cannot come and go.

In addition, the flow-down path forming member 591 may be configured so that the game ball rolling on the upper surface of the shutter 6020 flows down the second flow-down path 5904 when the shutter 6020 is retracted in the rear direction. It is not necessary that all the game balls rolling on the upper surface of the shutter 6020 when the shutter 6020 is retracted backward flow down the second flow path 5904 . Therefore, of the game balls rolling on the upper surface of the shutter 6020, some of the game balls on the upstream side may be configured to flow down the first flow path 5903.

A general winning opening 560, a second starting opening 440, and a small winning opening 5400 are arranged in this order from the upstream side to the downstream side in the first flow path 5903. Incidentally, the small winning prize opening 5400 is not an essential configuration in the pachinko game machine of the first example of the fourth embodiment.

The general winning port 560 can be displaced between a closed mode closed by a movable member 5602 to prevent game balls from winning, and an open mode in which game balls can win by operating the movable member 5602. there is When the general winning opening 560 is in the open mode, all or most of the game balls that have flowed down the first flow path 5903 without winning the general winning opening 560 can win.

Above the second starting port 440, among the game balls hit to the right, there are game balls that do not win the big winning port 540 and flow down the first flow path 5903 and also do not win the general winning port 560. A receiving member 3002 for receiving once is formed. This receiving member 3002 has a function of stopping or weakening the momentum of the game ball flowing down and dropping the game ball above the second starting port 440 .

A guide nail that guides the game ball to the second start port 440 is planted above the second start port 440, and the game ball dropped from the receiving member 3002 above the second start port 440 Guided by the nail, it is configured to enter the second starting port 440 with a probability of about three-fourths. By setting the number of prize balls to be one when winning a game ball to the second starting port 440, the degree of expectation is less than 1 even if the ball is hit to the right in a normal game state.

The small winning prize opening 5400 is configured to be displaceable between a closed mode and an open mode by a small winning shutter 6100 that can move back and forth with respect to the transparent panel 172 . That is, when the small winning shutter 6100 advances forward with respect to the transparent panel 172, the small winning prize opening 5400 is closed, and when the small winning shutter 6100 retreats backward with respect to the transparent panel 172, the small winning prize opening. 5400 is in the open mode. In addition, game balls that have fallen from the receiving member 3002 above the second starting port 440 but have not entered the second starting port 440 flow down to the upstream side (right side) of the small hit shutter 6100 .

Although the right-handed game ball flowed down the first flow-down path 5903 without winning the big winning opening 5401, it did not win any of the general winning opening 560, the second starting opening 440 and the small winning winning opening 5400. The game ball is discharged from the out port 57 to the outside of the machine.

A passing gate 49 that triggers normal symbol determination is arranged in the second flow path 5904. When the game ball passes through this passing gate 49, the main CPU 101 performs normal symbol determination. In this normal pattern determination, it is determined to be a hit with a probability of 100% or very close to 100%. If the normal symbol determination result is a hit, the main CPU 101 opens the movable member 5602 for about 5900 msec, for example, and then closes it. While the movable member 5602 is in the open mode, winning of game balls into the general winning opening 560 is facilitated. When a game ball wins in the general winning hole 560, the main CPU 101 pays out 15 prize balls, for example, via the payout/launch control circuit 300. FIG. However, the general winning hole 560 only serves as an opportunity to pay out prize balls even if a game ball wins, and does not serve as an opportunity to start variable display of special symbols (an opportunity to execute a special lottery), for example.

Further, the pachinko game machine of the second example of the fourth embodiment includes the pachinko game machine 1 of the first embodiment, the pachinko game machine of the third embodiment, and the pachinko game of the first example of the fourth embodiment. As with the machine, when the variable display of the first special symbol or the second special symbol is performed and a "big win" is derived, the main CPU 101 controls the game to a big win game state that is advantageous to the player.

In the jackpot game state, the main CPU 101 executes a round game in which the big prize opening 5401 is opened in a predetermined manner over a plurality of rounds. A round game of one round is a game in which the big winning opening 5401 is opened for a predetermined period (for example, 30000 msec), or the big winning opening 5401 is opened until a predetermined number (for example, 9 balls) of game balls wins. That is, the big winning opening 5401 repeats opening and closing for each round.

In addition, in the jackpot game state in which the round game is executed over a plurality of rounds, an interval period is provided between the round games, and during this interval period, the shutter 6020 moves backward with respect to the transparent panel 172. , and the big winning opening 5401 is closed.

When the round game of one round ends and the shutter 6020 retreats backward, the game ball rolling on the upper surface of the shutter 6020 flows down the second flow path 5904 . The game ball that has flowed down this second flow path 5904 passes through the passage gate 49, and the main CPU 101 performs a variable display of normal symbols for a very short period of time. Derives a hit with a probability close to %. When a hit is derived as a result of normal symbol determination, the main CPU 101 opens the movable member 5602 for about 5900 msec so that the game ball can enter the general winning hole 560, and about 5900 msec elapses. Then, it is set as a closed mode.

In the pachinko game machine of the second example of the fourth embodiment, the main CPU 101 moves the movable member 5602 so that the general winning opening 560 is in the open state during the interval period between the round games. activate. That is, at least while the general winning opening 560 is in the open mode (about 5900 msec) due to the operation of the movable member 5602, the big winning opening 5401 is in the closed mode, so that the game ball hit to the right is the first flow down path 5903 , and all or most of them enter the general prize winning port 560, and in addition to the number of prize balls paid out by the jackpot game (winning to the big winning port 5401), the prize balls based on the winning to the general winning port 560 is paid out, it is possible to increase the interest in the game. In addition, although 5900 ms is set as the opening end condition of the movable member 5602, in addition to this condition, it may be closed immediately when a predetermined number (for example, 10 balls) of prizes are awarded to the general winning school 560 in one opening. good. In that case, the interval period may be set to be shorter than 5900 ms because there is a higher possibility of winning the predetermined number of prizes before 5900 ms has elapsed if the shooting continues. Alternatively, up to four normal symbols can be reserved, the interval period is set to 5900 ms, and after winning a predetermined number of prizes, the movable member 5602 is opened again by winning the normal symbols, and it is possible to further win a prize.

In this way, only by devising the arrangement positions of various structural members arranged in the game area 20, in addition to the number of prize balls paid out by the big hit game (winning to the big winning opening 5401), the number of winning balls to the general winning opening 560 It is possible to pay out prize balls based on winnings.

For example, assuming that an average of about 7 game balls enter the general winning hole 560 in one interval period, the number of winning balls when one game ball wins the general winning hole 560 is 15 balls as described above. If so, there is a possibility that about 105 prize balls will be paid out during one interval period. Assuming that the number of rounds of the round game executed in the jackpot game state is, for example, 15 rounds, about 1575 prize balls are paid out in addition to the number of prize balls paid out by the jackpot game (winning a prize in the jackpot game opening 5401). will be

It is preferable that the main CPU 101 does not withhold the start memory of the normal symbol based on the passage of the game ball through the passage gate 49, but there is no problem even if the start memory of the normal symbol is withheld.

[Pachinko machine of the third example of the fourth embodiment]
FIG. 285 is an example of a front view showing the appearance of the game board unit in the pachinko game machine of the third example of the fourth embodiment. The pachinko machine of the third example of the fourth embodiment is a so-called 1-type 2-type multifunction machine, and not only when the variable display of the special symbols is performed and the "jackpot" is derived, The main CPU 101 also controls the jackpot game state when a game ball enters a specific area opened by the establishment of a predetermined condition and is received in a specific opening called a V-attacker. .

As shown in FIG. 285, in the pachinko game machine according to the third example of the fourth embodiment, a special game member 4200 is arranged in the area on the right side of the liquid crystal display device 16 . This special game member 4200 changes the passage gate 49, the big winning opening 5402, the special electric accessory 6015, the specific opening 777, the non-specific opening 778, the general winning opening 560, and the general winning opening 560 between an open mode and a closed mode. It is composed of a plate-shaped movable member 5602, a second starting port 440, and the like. In the special game member 4200 shown in FIG. 285, various members constituting the special game member 4200 are not unitized, but may be unitized.

A passing gate 49 that triggers normal symbol determination is arranged in the upper right part of the liquid crystal display device 16. When the game ball passes through this passing gate 49, the main CPU 101 extracts a normal symbol random number and generates a normal symbol. make a judgment. In this normal pattern determination, it is determined to be a hit with a probability of 100% or very close to 100%. In addition, the main CPU 101 determines a normal symbol variation pattern based on the extracted normal symbol random number. Then, the variation display of the normal symbols is performed according to the determined variation pattern, and the result of the normal symbol determination is derived.

A large winning opening 5402 and a special electric accessory 6015 are arranged on the downstream side of the passage gate 49 . The special electric accessory 6015 is similar to the pachinko gaming machine 1 according to the first embodiment, the pachinko gaming machine according to the third embodiment, and the pachinko gaming machines of the first and second examples of the fourth embodiment. By driving the shutter 6030 by a large winning opening solenoid (not shown), an opening mode that enables (or facilitates) entry of the game ball to the large winning opening 5402, and a game ball to the large winning opening 5402 It is configured to be able to shift (drive) between a closed mode that makes it impossible (or difficult) to win a prize.

A specific opening 777 and a non-specific opening 778 are arranged on the downstream side of the shutter 6030, more specifically on the downstream side of the big winning opening 5402. FIG. The main CPU 101 operates the opening/closing member 5603 when the variable display of the special symbol is performed and the “minor win” is derived (when the result of the special lottery is the “minor win”), and the specific opening 777 or the non- Entry of a game ball into a specific port 778 is enabled.

However, when the opening/closing member 5603 operates so that the game ball can be accepted into the specific opening 777 or the non-specific opening 778, the non-specific opening 778 hardly accepts the game ball, and 100% or extremely 100%. A game ball enters the specific port 777 with a probability close to 100%. The specific opening 777 is an opening that triggers the occurrence of a big win game state when a game ball enters, and the non-specific opening 778 is an opening that does not trigger the occurrence of a big win game state even if a game ball enters. Further, the specific opening 777 and the non-specific opening 778 are not limited to openings that can accept game balls, and may be areas through which game balls can pass.

When the game ball enters the specific opening 777, the main CPU 101 controls the big win game state. On the other hand, even if the game ball is received in the non-specific opening 778, it does not trigger the control to the big hit game state.

A general prize winning opening 560 is arranged downstream of the specific opening 777 , the non-specific opening 778 and the opening/closing member 5603 . This general prize winning port 560 is closed by a movable member 5602 . Then, when the result of the normal symbol determination is a hit, the main CPU 101 opens the movable member 5602 to facilitate the winning of the game ball into the general winning opening 560 . The main CPU 101 puts the movable member 5602 into the closed mode after a certain period of time has passed. When a game ball wins in the general winning hole 560, the main CPU 101 pays out, for example, one prize ball via the payout/launch control circuit 300. FIG. This general prize-winning port 560 only serves as an opportunity to pay out one prize ball even if a game ball wins, and for example, it does not serve as an opportunity to start variable display of special symbols (execution of a special lottery). do not have.

A second starting opening 440 is arranged downstream of the general winning opening 560 . However, when the movable member 5602 is in the open mode, all or most of the game balls that are hit to the right and reach the movable member 5602 enter the general winning opening 560, so the game ball to the second start opening 440 Winning is difficult. On the other hand, when the movable member 5602 is in the closed mode, the game ball hit to the right and reaches the movable member 5602 is guided to above the second starting port 440 without winning the general winning port 560 . However, even if the game ball hit to the right reaches the vicinity of the movable member 5602, not all the game balls that reach the movable member 5602 fall on the movable member 5602, and escape from the right side of the movable member 5602, There is also a game ball that is discharged out of the machine from the out port 57 without winning in any of the winning ports.

In addition, in the pachinko game machine of the third example of the fourth embodiment, the main CPU 101 performs normal symbol determination so as to determine winning with a probability of 100% or very close to 100%, and the variable display time of normal symbols. is short, the movable member 5602 is almost fully open. Therefore, all or most of the game balls hit to the right and reaching the movable member 5602 enter the general winning opening 560 and almost never reach the second starting opening 440 .

(Game flow)
Next, the game flow will be described. When the player hits to the right while not being controlled to the jackpot game state, the game ball first passes through the passage gate 49.例文帳に追加The main CPU 101 performs variable display of the normal symbols based on the passage of the game ball through the passage gate 49, and derives the result of the normal symbol determination.

When the result of the normal symbol determination is derived, the normal hit occurs with a probability of 100% or very close to 100%, and the movable member 5602 becomes an open state. Normally, even if the movable member 5602 is in a closed state at the time when the game ball falls on the upstream side of the movable member 5602, the game ball passes through the movable member 5602 because the fluctuation display time of normal symbols is short. Until (between until the game ball dropped on the upstream side of the movable member 5602 rolls toward the downstream side and passes through the movable member 5602), the movable member 5602 becomes an open mode and the second start port 440 Since the winning of the game ball to the second start port 440 is inhibited, the possibility of the game ball winning the second start port 440 is extremely low. In other words, it can be said that the movable member 5602 is almost fully open.

By the way, when a game ball passes through the passage gate 49, the main CPU 101 variably displays the normal symbols based on this. Ending interval time. The main CPU 101 activates the movable member 5602 based on the fact that the variable display of the normal symbols is performed and the win is derived (the end of the variable display of the normal symbols after the ending interval time has passed), and the opening mode is set. , after a predetermined period of time has elapsed, the closed mode is set. Therefore, for example, the opening interval time and the ending interval time are set longer, and the fluctuation display time of the normal pattern is set to the time required for the game ball to pass through the opening and closing member 5602 (the game that fell on the upstream side of the movable member 5602 When the ball rolls toward the downstream side and passes through the movable member 5602), there is a possibility that the game ball that has passed through the movable member 5602 will win the second start port 440. occur.

When a game ball wins in the second starting port 440, the main CPU 101 conducts a second special lottery, and derives the result of the second special lottery after performing a variable display of the second special symbol. In the pachinko game machine of the third example of the fourth embodiment, the probability that the second special symbol is displayed in a variable manner to derive a "big win" is, for example, 1/319, and a "minor win" is derived. The probability of winning is, for example, 318/319, and there is no “losing”. However, it may be set to be "losing" with an extremely low probability (for example, 1/319).

When the variable display of the second special symbol is performed and the “small win” is derived, the main CPU 101 operates the movable member 5602 . When the movable member 5602 is in the open mode, the game ball enters the specific opening 777 with a probability of 100% or very close to 100% as described above, and the game ball almost never enters the non-specific opening 778 .

When the game ball enters the specific hole 777, the main CPU 101 controls the big hit game state and executes the round game over a plurality of rounds.

In addition, as described above, not all the game balls that are hit to the right and reach the vicinity of the movable member 5602 go to the movable member 5602, and there are game balls that go to the out port 57. Also, since the movable member 5602 is in a substantially fully open state, the game ball enters the general winning opening 560 without winning the second starting opening 440 . However, even if a game ball wins in the general winning hole 560, the number of prize balls is one. Therefore, even if the player always hits to the right, the expected value of the number of prize balls to the number of shot balls per unit time does not exceed 1 in normal times when the player is not in the jackpot game state.

By the way, as described above, for example, if the fluctuation time of the normal symbol is set longer by setting the opening interval time and the ending interval time, there is a possibility that the game ball that has passed through the movable member 5602 will win the second start port 440. .

Therefore, in the pachinko game machine of the third example of the fourth embodiment, as the fluctuation patterns of the normal symbols, the first pattern in which the fluctuation time of the normal symbols is relatively short and the second pattern in which the fluctuation time of the normal symbols is relatively long 2 patterns are available. In addition, the variation pattern of normal symbols is stored, for example, in the main ROM 102 (see FIG. 9). The first pattern above is a time shorter than the time required for the game ball to pass through the opening/closing member 5602, and the second pattern above is the time required for the game ball to pass through the opening/closing member 5602. is too long. Then, the main CPU 101 extracts a normal symbol random number based on, for example, passing through the passage gate 49, determines a normal symbol variation pattern using the extracted normal symbol random number, and determines the determined normal symbol random number. The variable display of the normal design is performed in the variable pattern. Therefore, if the determined normal symbol variation pattern is the first pattern, there is almost no possibility that the game ball will win the second starting port 440, and if the determined normal symbol variation pattern is the second pattern, There is a possibility that the game ball will win the second starting port 440 .

The main CPU 101 determines the variation pattern of the normal symbols to be the first pattern with a probability of 299/300, for example, and the second pattern with a probability of 1/300. When the variation pattern of the normal symbol is determined to be the second pattern and the game ball wins in the second starting port 440, the variation display of the second special symbol is performed, and as described above, the probability of "big hit" is 1/319. is derived, and even if a "big win" is not derived, a "minor win" is derived with a probability of 318/319. When the “minor hit” is derived, the main CPU 101 executes control to operate the opening/closing member 5603 so that the game ball can enter the specific opening 777 or the non-specific opening 778 . When the opening/closing member 5603 is actuated, the game ball enters the specific opening 777 with a probability of 100% or very close to 100%, so the main CPU 101 controls the jackpot game state.

As described above, according to the pachinko game machine of the third example of the fourth embodiment, it is possible to provide a game machine with unprecedented novel game characteristics.

In addition, many variation patterns may be prepared for the variation pattern of normal symbols. However, most of the fluctuation patterns are preferably shorter than the time required for the game ball to pass through the opening/closing member 5602 . If a large number of variation patterns with a time longer than the time required for the game ball to pass through the opening/closing member 5602 are prepared, the frequency of winning of the game ball to the second starting port 440 becomes high, and the frequency of the jackpot game state is high. This is because it may end up being executed with

In addition, if the probability that the variation pattern of normal symbols is determined to be the second pattern is too low, there is almost no game ball passing through the opening/closing member 5603, and there is a possibility that the interest may decrease. Therefore, in the variable display of the second special symbol performed based on the winning rate of the game ball passing through the opening and closing member 5602 to the second starting port 440 and the winning of the game ball to the second starting port 440, "small hit" is derived, and at least one of the probability that the game ball enters the specific port 777 when the opening and closing member 5603 is operated based on the fact that the "small hit" is derived in the variation display of the second special symbol By appropriately changing one or more, it is possible to increase the probability that the second pattern is determined. Then, not only the pleasure of whether the game ball simply passes through the opening and closing member 5603, but also whether the game ball passing through the opening and closing member 5603 wins the second start port 440, the game ball in the second start port 440 It is possible to entertain players in multiple stages, such as whether or not a 'small win' is derived when a prize is won, and whether or not a game ball enters a specific hole 777 when a 'small win' is derived. Become.

[Pachinko machine of the fourth example of the fourth embodiment]
FIG. 286 is an example of a front view showing the appearance of the game board unit in the pachinko game machine of the fourth example of the fourth embodiment.

As shown in FIG. 286, the pachinko game machine according to the fourth example of the fourth embodiment has a first start port on the right side of the liquid crystal display device 16 in addition to the first start port 5442 provided conventionally. ing. In order to distinguish between the two, for the sake of convenience, the first starting hole arranged on the right side of the liquid crystal display device 16 is referred to as the first starting hole 5443. The control by the main CPU 101 is almost the same as when the game ball has won the mouth 5443 . However, when the game ball enters the first start port 5442, the number of prize balls is four, whereas when the game ball enters the first start port 5443, the number of prize balls is one.

A special game member 4300 is arranged in the area on the right side of the liquid crystal display device 16 . This special game member 4300 is composed of the big prize opening 540, the special electric accessory 600, the passage gate 49, the above-described first start opening 5443, the second start opening 440, the normal electric accessory 6300, and the like.

The big prize opening 540 and the special electric accessory 600 are arranged on the upper right side of the liquid crystal display device 16 in the game area 20 .

The special electric accessory 600 has an opening mode that enables (or facilitates) the winning of game balls to the big winning opening 540 by driving the shutter 610 by a big winning opening solenoid (not shown), and a big winning opening mode. It is configured to be displaceable (drivable) in a closed mode that makes it impossible (or difficult) for a game ball to enter the mouth 540 . It is configured such that all or most of the game balls hit to the right enter the big winning hole 540 when it is in an open mode in which the winning of the game balls into the big winning hole 540 is facilitated. It should be noted that this big winning opening 540 has a variable probability attacker (not shown) inside, for example, when the entry of the game ball to the variable probability attacker is detected while being controlled in the jackpot gaming state, the main The CPU 101 controls the game state after the end of the big hit game state to the "high probability short time game state" or "high probability non-short time game state", and the big hit without detecting the entry of the game ball to the probability variable attacker. When the game state is finished, the game state after the big win game state is finished is controlled to be the ``normal game state'' or the ``low probability short working time game state''.

On the downstream side of the big winning opening 540 and the special electric accessory 600, there is arranged a passage gate 49 that triggers normal symbol determination. When the game ball passes through the passage gate 49, the main CPU 101 extracts a normal symbol random number and performs a normal symbol determination.

In addition, in the normal pattern determination, in the "normal game state" or "high-accuracy non-time-saving game state" that is not in the electric sapo state, it is not more advantageous when hitting the right than when hitting the left. Although it is determined to be a hit only with a relatively low probability, it is determined to be a hit with a probability of 100% or very close to 100% in the ``high-probability short-time game state'' or ``low-probability short-time game state'' that is the electric support state.

On the downstream side of the passage gate 49 and on the lower right side of the liquid crystal display device 16, the first starting port 5443 and the ordinary electric accessory 6300 are arranged. The ordinary electric accessory 6300 includes a plate-shaped shutter 6310 , a solenoid (not shown), and a power transmission mechanism (not shown) that transmits the power of the solenoid to the shutter 6310 .

In the pachinko game machine of the fourth example of the fourth embodiment, when it is in the open mode in which winning to the first start hole 5443 is facilitated, out of the game balls hit to the right, it wins the big winning hole 540 All or most of the game balls that have become are configured to enter the first starting port 5443 .

In addition, a receiving member 3000 is formed on the upper right side of the ordinary electric accessory 6300 to temporarily receive a game ball that does not win the big winning hole 540 among the game balls hit to the right. This receiving member 3000 has a function of stopping or weakening the momentum of the game ball flowing down and dropping the game ball to the upstream side (right side) of the shutter 6310 .

The shutter 6310 is a plate-like member on which a game ball can roll in the horizontal direction, and as described above, is configured to move forward and backward with respect to the transparent panel 172 . When the shutter 6310 is positioned forward with respect to the transparent panel 172, the first starting port 5443 is closed, and when the shutter 6310 is positioned rearward with respect to the transparent panel 172, the first starting port. 5443 is in the open mode. When the variable display of the normal symbols is performed and the win is derived, the main CPU 101 operates the shutter 6310 to open the first starting port 5443 from the closed mode.

When the shutter 6310 advances forward with respect to the transparent panel 172, it is possible to receive the game ball dropped from the receiving member 3000 on the upstream side (right side). The game ball is configured to roll on the upper surface of the shutter 6310 toward the downstream side (left side).

A second starting port 440 is arranged downstream of the first starting port 5443 and the shutter 6310 . However, when the first starting port 5443 is in the open state by the shutter 6310, all or most of the game balls that are hit to the right and reach the shutter 6310 win the first starting port 5443, so the second starting port 440 It is difficult to win a prize for a game ball to. On the other hand, when the first starting port 5443 is closed mode by the shutter 6310, the game ball hit to the right and reached the shutter 6310 does not enter the first starting port 5443, and is above the second starting port 440. led to. However, even if the game ball hit to the right reaches the vicinity of the shutter 6310 (the game ball falls from the receiving member 3000), not all of the game ball is guided to the shutter 6310, and escapes from the right side of the shutter 6310. There is also a game ball that is ejected out of the machine from the out port 57 without winning in any of the winning ports. Also, there is a game ball that is discharged out of the machine from the out port 57 without winning in any of the winning ports including the second start port 440 even if guided to above the second start port 440 .

In addition, in the pachinko game machine of the fourth example of the fourth embodiment, the main CPU 101 normally determines the symbol at 100% or The shutter 6310 is almost fully open because the winning is determined with a probability very close to 100%, and the fluctuation display time of the normal symbols is short. Therefore, in the "high-probability short-time gaming state" or "low-probability short-time gaming state", all or most of the game balls that are hit to the right and reach the shutter 6310 win the first start port 5443, up to the second start port 440 hardly ever reached. When a game ball enters the first starting port 5443, the main CPU 101 pays out the prize ball via the payout/launch control circuit 300, but the number of prize balls at this time is one. In addition, since there is also a game ball that exits from the right side of the shutter 6310 and heads for the out port 57, in the "high-probability short-time game state" and "low-probability short-time game state", the number of shot balls per unit time is awarded by hitting to the right. The expected value of the number of balls does not exceed 1. In the "normal game state" or the "high-accuracy non-time-saving game state" that is not in the electric support state, the main CPU 101 normally controls the pattern so that the right-handed hit is not more advantageous than the left-handed hit. Judgment is made so as to judge a hit only with a relatively low probability.

On the other hand, if you move from the "high-probability short-time gaming state" to the "high-probability short-time gaming state" or shift from the "low-probability short-time gaming state" to the "normal game state", the electric sapo state will disappear, so in the normal design judgment A hit is determined only with a relatively low probability, and the shutter 6310, which was almost fully open, closes. Then, the winning of the game ball to the first starting port 5443 is inhibited, and the winning of the game ball to the second starting port 440 becomes possible.

In the pachinko gaming machine of the fourth example of the fourth embodiment, the main CPU 101 refers to the special symbol fluctuation time determination table for low start shown in FIG. , to determine the fluctuation time of the special symbol. In addition, the main CPU 101, in the "high-probability short-time gaming state", "high-probability non-short-time gaming state", or "low-probability short-time gaming state", for example, the variable time determination table for the special symbol for high start shown in FIG. Refer to it to determine the fluctuation time of the special design. Therefore, the general player, in the "normal game state" to play in the left-handed, "high-probability short-time gaming state", "high-probability non-short-time gaming state" and "low-probability short-time gaming state" either In the game state, the game is played with the right hand. In the "normal game state", the game ball hardly enters the first starting port 5443 because the shutter 6310 is closed even if the game ball hits to the right, and the game ball enters the second starting port 440 This is because, unless the result of the second special lottery is a "big hit", the variable display of the second special symbol is performed for a long period of about 10 minutes (long variations A to C), and the player only loses.

By the way, when the result of the first special lottery or the second special lottery is "jackpot", the main CPU 101, based on the jackpot type (hit time selection symbol command) determined with reference to FIGS. 287 and 288, The number of rounds of the round game to be executed in the jackpot game state, the game state after the jackpot game ends, etc. are determined.

FIG. 287 is an example of the symbol determination table (first start opening, second start opening) stored in the main ROM 102 of the main control circuit 100 in the pachinko game machine of the fourth example of the fourth embodiment. Also, FIG. 288 is an example of a jackpot type determination table stored in the main ROM 102 of the main control circuit 100 in the pachinko game machine of the fourth example of the fourth embodiment. 13 and 257, the main CPU 101 determines the number of rounds to be executed in the jackpot game, the number of rounds to be executed in the jackpot game, and the jackpot game state after the jackpot game ends, in response to the winning selection symbol command related to the jackpot. To determine the type of jackpot, such as whether to turn on the variable probability flag and whether to turn on the time saving flag in the game state after shifting to the general game state (game state that is not the jackpot game state, hereinafter the same) is a table that refers to Further, similarly to FIG. 257, the number of times of time reduction is also configured to be determined to any specified number of times among 24 times, 30 times, 36 times, 42 times, 48 times and 100 times.

Figures 287 and 288 differ from Figures 12, 13, 256 and 257 in the method of determining whether to turn on the variable probability flag. That is, in the pachinko game machine of the fourth embodiment of the fourth embodiment, even if the result of the special lottery is "jackpot", the probability variation flag is turned on based on the result of the special lottery (selected symbol command at the time of winning) Instead of determining whether or not, as described above, it is determined whether or not the entry of the game ball to the probability variable attacker is detected in the jackpot gaming state.

As shown in the jackpot type determination table in FIG. 288, when the result of the jackpot determination of the special symbol is "jackpot", the ease of entry of the game ball into the probability variable attacker increases in accordance with the winning selection symbol command. different. For example, if the winning time selection symbol command is "z3", the main CPU 101 controls the jackpot game state in a manner in which it is difficult for the game ball to enter the variable probability attacker, and if the winning time selection symbol command is "z10". For example, it is controlled to a jackpot game state in a mode in which the entry of the game ball to the variable probability attacker is easy.

In the pachinko game machine of the fourth example of the fourth embodiment, the "mode in which the game ball is difficult to enter the variable probability attacker" is that the game ball enters the variable probability attacker while being controlled to the jackpot game state. This is an aspect that is almost impossible. In addition, "a mode in which the game ball can easily enter the variable attacker" is a state in which the game ball almost enters the variable attacker while being controlled in the jackpot game state (a high probability game state with a probability close to 100%). controlled).

The easiness of entry of the game ball into the variable probability attacker can be changed, for example, by the operation mode of the movable piece provided inside the big winning opening 540 . That is, if the hit selection symbol command is, for example, "z3", the main CPU 101 operates the movable piece so that it becomes difficult for the game ball to enter the variable probability attacker in the jackpot game state. On the other hand, if the hit selection symbol command is, for example, "z10", the main CPU 101 operates the movable piece in the jackpot game state so that the game ball can easily enter the variable probability attacker.

It should be noted that the method of creating a mode in which it is difficult for the game ball to enter the variable probability attacker and a mode in which it is easy is not limited to this. For example, apart from the big winning opening 540 having a variable probability attacker inside, it is possible to provide another big winning opening (not shown) that does not have a variable probability attacker. Then, when the entry of the game ball to the variable probability attacker is easy (for example, the selection pattern command at the time of winning is "z10"), control is performed to the big winning game state in which the big winning opening 540 is opened, and the game to the variable probability attacker is controlled. When it is difficult for the ball to enter (for example, the selection pattern command at the time of winning is "z3", for example), the big winning opening 540 is not opened, and the other big winning openings are opened. It is possible to create a mode in which it is difficult for the game ball to enter the variable probability attacker and a mode in which it is easy. It should be noted that, as long as it is possible to create a mode in which it is difficult for the game ball to enter the variable probability attacker and a mode in which it is easy, it is not limited to the above mode.

Also, in the pachinko game machine of the fourth example of the fourth embodiment, as can be seen by referring to FIGS. The probability of being controlled to a big hit game state in a mode in which it is easy to enter (hit time selection symbol command is "z6" to "z11", "z13") is 50%. On the other hand, when the result of the second special lottery is "big hit", the big hit game is played in a mode in which the game ball can easily enter the probability variable attacker (the symbol command selected at the time of winning is "z20" to "z25", "z27"). The probability of being controlled by the state is 80%.

Therefore, when the jackpot game state ends and shifts to the "high-probability short-time game state" or "low-probability short-time game state", it is difficult or impossible to win the game ball to the second start port 440 in these game states. Therefore, when the variable display of the special symbols is performed in these game states and the "jackpot" is derived, the main CPU 101 has a probability of 50% to change the game state after the jackpot game state ends. The game state in which the flag is turned on ("high probability short-time gaming state", "high-probability non-shortening gaming state") will be controlled.

Then, when the time-saving game of the determined number of time-saving games is digested without deriving the "jackpot" as a result of the special lottery in the "high-probability short-time gaming state", the main CPU 101 changes from the "high-probability short-time gaming state" to " Execute the control to shift to the high certainty non-time-saving gaming state. In this "high probability non-time-saving gaming state", when the variable display of the special symbols is performed and the "jackpot" is derived, the main CPU 101 has a probability of 80% to change the gaming state after the jackpot gaming state ends. , It will be controlled to the game state (“high probability short-time gaming state”, “high-probability non-shortening gaming state”) in which the probability variation flag is turned on.

Thus, in the pachinko game machine of the fourth example of the fourth embodiment, the game state in which the variable probability flag is turned on when the result of the special lottery is "big win" without changing the shooting mode of the game ball It is possible to provide new game characteristics such as being able to change the probability (hereinafter referred to as “probability variable probability”) to be controlled (“high-probability short-time gaming state”, “high-probability non-short-time gaming state”) becomes.

In addition, in the pachinko gaming machine of the fourth embodiment of the fourth embodiment, when the jackpot game state is shifted to the "high-probability short-time gaming state", the timing at which the probability variation probability changes (from the "high-probability short-time gaming state" to the "high Since the number of time reductions until shifting to "definite non-time reduction game state" is different each time, the game interest can be enhanced.

In addition, by not disclosing the determined number of times of time saving by neither the main CPU 101 nor the sub CPU 201, it becomes difficult for the player to grasp the timing when the probability variation probability changes, further increasing the interest in the game. be able to.

Furthermore, when the jackpot game state ends and shifts to the "high-probability short-time gaming state" or "low-probability short-time gaming state", whether it is a "high-probability short-time gaming state" or a "low-probability short-time gaming state" is disclosed by neither the main CPU 101 nor the sub CPU 201, it is possible to provide a more interesting game. That is, when it is "high-probability short-time gaming state", it is more advantageous for the player to shift to "high-probability non-short-time gaming state" at an early stage (probability variation probability is increased). On the other hand, when it is in the "low-probability short-time gaming state", it is more advantageous for the player to be controlled to the "low-probability short-time gaming state" as long as possible. Therefore, depending on whether the current gaming state is a “high-probability short-time gaming state” or a “low-probability short-time gaming state”, it is better to end the time-saving game earlier or later. can be increased.

Further, in the pachinko gaming machine of the fourth example of the fourth embodiment, when the result of the special lottery is "jackpot", the number of times of time saving may be 0 (the symbol command selected at the time of winning is "z12"). , "z13", [z26], "z27"). In this case, even if the number of times of time saving is the same 0, after the jackpot game state is completed, it is immediately controlled to the "high probability non-time saving game state" or the "normal game state". can provide great gameplay. In addition, in the pachinko game machine of the fourth example of the fourth embodiment, in either the first special lottery or the second special lottery, immediately after the jackpot game state ends, the "high probability non-time-saving game state" (the probability that the selected symbol command at the time of winning is selected as "z13" or "z27") and the probability that it is immediately controlled to the "normal game state" (the selected symbol command at the time of winning is "z12" or The probability of being selected as "z26") is the same, but is not limited to this, and the first special lottery and the second special lottery immediately change the probability of being controlled to the "high probability non-time-saving gaming state" can be

In addition, although it can be said in common to all the above-described embodiments, examples and modifications, when a game ball is shot in a specific mode (for example, right-handed hitting), the game ball can win a prize at a high frequency. Regarding the winning opening (for example, the second starting opening 440 in FIG. 284), regardless of whether it is a winning opening where the electric sapo functions or a winning opening where the electric sapo does not function, when the game ball wins, the main It is preferable that the number of prize balls paid out by the CPU 101 (payout/emission control circuit 300) is one. As a result, for example, even if the player shoots game balls in a specific manner in the "normal game state", the expected value of the number of prize balls for the number of shot balls per unit time does not exceed 1. You can make it impossible.

[Other expansion examples, etc.]
Each embodiment, each example, and each modification described above are examples, and each configuration shown in each embodiment, each example, and each modification may be replaced with another embodiment, another example, and another modification. It goes without saying that it is possible to partially replace or combine in That is, each component described in each embodiment, each example, and each modification can be arbitrarily combined with each other.

As explained above, according to the pachinko game machine of the present embodiment, the following game machines can be provided.

[Appendix 1]
Conventionally, in a game machine such as a pachinko machine, when a game ball is received in a starting hole, execution of a symbol variation game is suspended, and the suspended symbol variation game is executed to display a symbol combination indicating a big win. , gaming machines in which jackpot games are executed are known.

In this type of game machine, when the pattern variation game is being played, the first button effect as a big win notice suggesting the possibility of a big win and the possibility that the suspended pattern variation game will be a big win. (See, for example, paragraphs 0067 and 0075 of JP-A-2015-192817).

In recent years, there is a tendency to increase the types of effects to increase the effect of effects, as in the gaming machine described in Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2015-192817, for example.

However, although increasing the number of types of effects enhances the effect of the effects, it is required that such effects be processed in a short period of time in terms of the progress of the game. In particular, it takes longer than a predetermined amount of time to process large amounts of data, such as video data. It is

SUMMARY OF THE INVENTION The present invention has been made in view of such a point, and an object thereof is to provide a gaming machine capable of smoothly performing processing while suppressing a decline in interest.

(1) The gaming machine of Supplementary Note 1 includes display means (for example, the liquid crystal display device 16) that performs variable display of an identification pattern based on the establishment of a fixed condition, and information about the variable display that has not yet been performed. Reserving means (for example, step S54, step S55, etc.) capable of storing up to a predetermined number (for example, four) of (for example, a random number value for judging a big hit, a random number value for determining a symbol, etc.) as starting memory; When the variable display is performed for one starting memory stored by, the performance time until the variable display for the next starting memory of the one starting memory is performed is used to perform the variable performance and the stop performance of the identification symbol. Display control means (for example, step S205 etc.) for controlling so that the Design effect execution number determining means (for example, step S324) capable of determining the number of executions of temporary fluctuation), and specific starting memories (reach or big hit) among one or more starting memories stored by the holding means is included, an effect mode determination means (for example, step S372, etc.) capable of determining the effect mode for the starting memory until the variable display of the specific starting memory is performed, The effect mode determining means divides the symbol effect of the number of executions determined by the symbol effect execution number determining means for the starting memory until the variable display of the specific starting memory is performed into predetermined units, Specific effect determining means (for example, step S372, etc.).

According to the game machine of (1) above, when a specific starting memory is included in one or a plurality of starting memories stored by the holding means, until the specific starting memory is displayed variably. (i.e., the starting memory in which the variable display has not yet been performed) can be determined before the variable display is started. processing can be performed. Moreover, since the execution number of one or a plurality of symbol effects is determined for each start memory stored by the holding means, even though the display is variable for one start memory, it may appear that there are multiple starts. It looks as if a variable display for memory is being performed, and can enhance the presentation effect. Further, the number of executions of the determined pattern performance is divided into predetermined units, and a performance mode to be performed during the execution of the pattern performance divided into the predetermined units is determined. It is possible to perform smooth processing.

In addition, if the starting memory stored by the holding means includes a specific starting memory in which variable display is performed in a specific manner (for example, reach fluctuation), even if variable display is performed in a specific manner In spite of this, when the result of the hit-lose determination is a failure, even if a production mode with a relatively high degree of expectation is performed (for example, character subtraction processing is performed) after that, the performance mode will not be performed. The player's interest is reduced. Therefore, according to the gaming machine of (1) above, when a plurality of specific starting memories are included in the plurality of starting memories stored by the holding means, the starting memory is the first among the plurality of specific starting memories. A performance mode is determined for the starting memory up to the earliest specified starting memory variably displayed, and the performance mode is not determined for the starting memory variably displayed after the earliest specific starting memory. As a result, it is possible to suppress the decline in interest.

In addition, the "variable display of the identification pattern" here means a series of displays from the start of the variable display of the identification pattern to the stop display for one starting memory, and in one starting memory. On the other hand, the number of times of variable display is one even if the identification pattern variation effect and the stop effect are repeatedly performed a plurality of times.

In addition, the "stop effect" of the identification pattern means the stop effect (for example, temporary stop) of the identification pattern that is performed in the middle of one variable display and the stop of the identification pattern that is performed when one variable display is completed. This is intended to include both effects (for example, main stop).

Further, "When the variable display is performed for one starting memory, the variable performance and the stop performance of the identification pattern are performed using the performance time until the variable display for the next starting memory of the one starting memory is performed. "is performed" means not only the time during which the variable display is performed for one starting memory, but also includes all or part of the time required for the interval until the variable display for the next starting memory is performed. Therefore, the ``symbol effect in which the identification symbol fluctuation effect and the stop effect are performed'' is until the identification symbol stop effect is performed if it is in the middle of the variable display, and if it is the end of the variable display, the above interval is also It is intended to include

(2) In the gaming machine described in (1) above, further comprising suspension effect control means (for example, step S205, etc.) for controlling so that an image relating to starting memory stored in the suspension means is displayed on the display means. The holding effect control means controls not to display the image related to the starting memory stored in the holding means at least when the effect mode determined by the specific effect determining means is displayed. and

According to the game machine of (2) above, since the image related to the starting memory stored in the holding means is not displayed on the display means, it is possible to make the player unaware of the variable display in the starting memory unit. As a result, it becomes possible to determine the mode of presentation without being bound by the result of one game, and the presentation effect can be enhanced.

(3) In the gaming machine described in (1) or (2) above, the performance mode determining means includes the specific starting memory in one or more starting memories stored by the holding means. When there is no starting memory, the performance mode is determined for all the starting memories stored by the holding means, and the performance mode for the starting memory last stored among the starting memories stored by the holding means is set to the starting memory. suggesting effect determination means (for example, step S358, etc.) for determining a effect mode suggesting that the identification symbol variation effect is performed in a specific mode, even though is not the specific starting memory, The suggesting performance determining means is configured not to determine a performance mode suggesting that the identification symbol variation performance is to be performed in the specific mode when the starting memory is not stored by the holding means. characterized by

According to the gaming machine of (3) above, when the specific starting memory is not included in the one or more starting memories stored by the holding means, there is no need to re-determine the effect mode. Although it is unlikely that the above burden will increase, it is considered difficult to maintain the player's sense of expectation for the display effects. Therefore, it is suggested that the effect mode for the last stored start memory among the start memories stored by the holding means is not a specific start memory, but the identification pattern variation effect is performed in a specific mode. By determining the effect mode, it is possible to maintain the player's sense of expectation for the display effect. Moreover, when the start memory is not stored by the holding means, the performance mode suggesting that the variation performance of the identification pattern is performed in a specific mode is not decided, so that the control load does not increase.

According to the gaming machine of Supplementary Note 1, it is possible to smoothly perform processing while suppressing a decline in interest.

[Appendix 2]
Conventionally, in a game machine such as a pachinko machine, when a game ball is received in a starting hole, execution of a symbol variation game is suspended, and the suspended symbol variation game is executed to display a symbol combination indicating a big win. , gaming machines in which jackpot games are executed are known.

In this type of game machine, when the pattern variation game is being played, the first button effect as a big win notice suggesting the possibility of a big win and the possibility that the suspended pattern variation game will be a big win. (See, for example, paragraphs 0067 and 0075 of JP-A-2015-192817).

In recent years, there is a tendency to increase the types of effects to increase the effect of effects, as in the gaming machine described in Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2015-192817, for example.

However, although increasing the number of types of effects enhances the effect of the effects, it is required that such effects be processed in a short period of time in terms of the progress of the game. In particular, it takes longer than a predetermined amount of time to process large amounts of data, such as video data. It is

SUMMARY OF THE INVENTION The present invention has been made in view of such a point, and an object thereof is to provide a gaming machine capable of smoothly performing processing while suppressing a decline in interest.

(1) The gaming machine of Supplementary Note 2 includes display means (for example, the liquid crystal display device 16) that performs variable display of identification patterns based on the establishment of a predetermined condition, and information about the variable display that has not yet been performed. Reserving means (for example, step S54, step S55, etc.) capable of storing up to a predetermined number (for example, four) of (for example, a random number value for judging a big hit, a random number value for determining a symbol, etc.) as starting memory; When the variable display is performed for one starting memory stored by, the performance time until the variable display for the next starting memory of the one starting memory is performed is used to perform the variable performance and the stop performance of the identification symbol. A display control means (for example, sub CPU 201) that controls to perform and a pattern effect (for example, temporary variation) execution number determination means (for example, step S324, etc.), and effect mode determination capable of determining the effect mode for one or more starting memories stored by the holding means means (for example, step S372, etc.), wherein the effect mode determining means performs the symbol effect of the number of executions determined by the symbol effect execution number determining means for the start memory stored by the holding means; Specific effect determination means (for example, , step S370, etc.), and when the specific starting memory is not included in one or a plurality of starting memories stored by the holding means, an effect is given to all the starting memories stored by the holding means. A mode is determined, and a performance mode for the last stored starting memory among the starting memories stored by the holding means is set in the specific mode even though the starting memory is not the specific starting memory. It has a suggestive effect determination means (for example, step S358, etc.) that determines a performance mode (for example, a false reach sign effect) that suggests that a variable effect of the identification symbol will be performed, and the suggestive effect determination means It is characterized in that when the starting memory is not stored by the holding means, the performance mode suggesting that the variation performance of the identification pattern is performed in the specific mode is not determined.

According to the gaming machine of (1) above, since the effect mode for one or more start memories stored by the holding means can be determined before the variable display is started, the data capacity is large. Even if this is the case, it is possible to perform smooth processing. Moreover, since the execution number of one or a plurality of symbol effects is determined for each start memory stored by the holding means, even though the display is variable for one start memory, it may appear that there are multiple starts. It looks as if a variable display for memory is being performed, and can enhance the presentation effect. Further, the number of executions of the determined pattern performance is divided into predetermined units, and a performance mode to be performed during the execution of the pattern performance divided into the predetermined units is determined. It is possible to perform smooth processing.

Further, when the starting memory stored by the holding means does not include a specific starting memory in which variable display is performed in a specific manner (for example, reach fluctuation), the player's expectation for the display performance is maintained. can become difficult. Therefore, in this case, the rendering mode is determined for all the starting memories stored by the holding means, and the rendering mode for the starting memory last stored among the starting memories stored by the holding means is set to the starting memory. The player's expectation for the display performance is maintained by determining the performance mode suggesting that the identification pattern variation performance is performed in a specific mode even though the memory is not a specific starting memory. ing.

In addition, the "variable display of the identification pattern" here means a series of displays from the start of the variable display of the identification pattern to the stop display for one starting memory, and in one starting memory. On the other hand, the number of times of variable display is one even if the identification pattern variation effect and the stop effect are repeatedly performed a plurality of times.

In addition, the "stop effect" of the identification pattern means the stop effect (for example, temporary stop) of the identification pattern that is performed in the middle of one variable display and the stop of the identification pattern that is performed when one variable display is completed. This is intended to include both effects (for example, main stop).

Further, "When the variable display is performed for one starting memory, the variable performance and the stop performance of the identification pattern are performed using the performance time until the variable display for the next starting memory of the one starting memory is performed. "is performed" means not only the time during which the variable display is performed for one starting memory, but also includes all or part of the time required for the interval until the variable display for the next starting memory is performed. Therefore, the ``symbol effect in which the identification symbol fluctuation effect and the stop effect are performed'' is until the identification symbol stop effect is performed if it is in the middle of the variable display, and if it is the end of the variable display, the above interval is also It is intended to include

(2) In the gaming machine described in (1) above, the starting port (for example, the second starting port 440) in which a game ball can win, and the identification pattern based on the winning of the game ball to the starting port. A variation pattern determining means (for example, the main CPU 101) for determining a variation pattern when the variable display is performed is further provided, and the holding means (for example, the main CPU 101) determines that the game ball has won the starting hole. The starting memory can be reserved based on the starting memory stored in the holding means, and the symbol effect execution number determining means (for example, sub CPU 201) stores the starting memory stored in the holding means when a game ball wins the starting hole. is determined based on the variation pattern determined by the variation pattern determining means.

According to the gaming machine of (2) above, the execution number of symbol effects determined for the starting memory stored in the holding means is determined based on the variation pattern. More specifically, if the variation pattern has a relatively long variation time, the number of symbol performances executed increases, and if the variation pattern has a relatively short variation time, the number of symbol performances performed decreases. Therefore, the variation in the time required for one symbol performance is reduced, and it becomes difficult for the player to grasp that one or a plurality of symbol performances are being executed for one starting memory. In addition, since the number of executions of the symbol effect determined for the starting memory stored in the holding means is determined based on the variation pattern, the number of symbol effects for each starting memory is not increased without increasing the load on the government. The number of runs can be easily determined.

(3) In the gaming machine described in (1) or (2) above, a holding effect control means (for example, step S205) that controls so that an image related to starting memory stored in the holding means is displayed on the display means. etc.), wherein at least when the performance mode determined by the specific performance determination means is being displayed, the suspension effect control means controls so that the image related to the start memory stored in the suspension means is not displayed. characterized by

According to the game machine of (3) above, since the image related to the starting memory stored in the holding means is not displayed on the display means, it is possible to make the player unaware of the variable display in units of starting memory. As a result, it becomes possible to determine the mode of presentation without being bound by the result of one game, and the presentation effect can be enhanced.

According to the gaming machine of Supplementary Note 2, it is possible to smoothly perform processing while suppressing a decline in interest.

[Appendix 3]
Conventionally, in a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine, when a game ball is received in a starting hole, execution of a symbol variation game is suspended, and the suspended symbol variation game is executed to display a symbol combination indicating a big win. , gaming machines in which jackpot games are executed are known.

In this type of game machine, when the pattern variation game is being played, the first button effect as a big win notice suggesting the possibility of a big win and the possibility that the suspended pattern variation game will be a big win. (See, for example, paragraphs 0067 and 0075 of JP-A-2015-192817).

In recent years, there is a tendency to increase the types of effects to increase the effect of effects, as in the gaming machine described in Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2015-192817, for example.

However, although increasing the number of types of effects enhances the effect of the effects, it is required that such effects be processed in a short period of time in terms of the progress of the game. In particular, it takes longer than a predetermined amount of time to process large amounts of data, such as video data. It is

SUMMARY OF THE INVENTION The present invention has been made in view of such a point, and an object thereof is to provide a gaming machine capable of smoothly performing processing while enhancing the performance effect.

(1) The gaming machine of Supplementary Note 3 includes a starting port (for example, the second starting port 440) provided in the game area, and display means for performing variable display of the identification pattern based on the acceptance of the game ball into the starting port. (for example, the liquid crystal display device 16) and information about the variable display that has not yet been performed (for example, a random number value for judging a big hit, a random number value for determining a symbol, etc.) are stored in a predetermined number (for example, four) as starting memory. When the holding means (for example, step S54, step S55, etc.) capable of storing up to and including the starting memory stored by the holding means is performed, the first effect mode is determined. , a first performance mode determination means for setting performance data related to the determined first performance mode, and a start memory stored by the holding means when the game ball is received in the start opening. a second effect mode determining means for determining two effect modes and setting effect data for the determined second effect mode, wherein the second effect mode determining means is determined by the first effect mode determining means; The second effect mode is determined by using the determined effect data related to the first effect mode.

According to the gaming machine of (1) above, the second effect mode in which the effect mode is determined for the starting memory stored by the retaining means when the game ball is received in the starting port is stored by the retaining means. Although there is no time to display immediately when the identification pattern is displayed, the first performance mode is determined for the start memory stored by the holding means when the variable display of the identification pattern is performed. Since the performance data is used for determination, smooth processing can be performed even if the data volume is large.

(2) In the gaming machine described in (1) above, execution of a symbol effect (for example, temporary variation) in which a variation effect and a stop effect of the identification symbol are performed for the starting memory stored by the holding means. A symbol effect execution number determination means (for example, step S324) capable of determining the number is further provided, and the first effect mode determination means determines the symbol effect execution number determination means for the starting memory stored by the holding means. The pattern performance of the number of executions determined by is divided into predetermined units, and the performance mode to be performed during execution of the pattern performance divided into the predetermined units is determined regardless of the unit of the start memory. It is characterized by

According to the gaming machine of (2) above, since the number of executions of one or more symbol effects is determined for the starting memory stored by the holding means, even though it is a variable display for one starting memory From the outside, it looks as if variable displays are performed for a plurality of starting memories, and the presentation effect can be enhanced. In addition, since the number of executions of the determined pattern performance is divided into predetermined units and the performance mode to be performed during the execution of the pattern performance divided into the predetermined units is determined, it is possible to further enhance the performance effect. becomes.

According to the gaming machine of Supplementary Note 3, it is possible to perform the processing smoothly while enhancing the performance effect.

[Appendix 4]
Conventionally, in a game machine such as a pachinko machine, when a game ball is received in a starting hole, execution of a symbol variation game is suspended, and the suspended symbol variation game is executed to display a symbol combination indicating a big win. , gaming machines in which jackpot games are executed are known.

In this type of game machine, when the pattern variation game is being played, the first button effect as a big win notice suggesting the possibility of a big win and the possibility that the suspended pattern variation game will be a big win. (See, for example, paragraphs 0067 and 0075 of JP-A-2015-192817).

In recent years, there is a tendency to increase the types of effects to increase the effect of effects, as in the gaming machine described in Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2015-192817, for example.

However, although increasing the number of types of effects enhances the effect of the effects, it is required that such effects be processed in a short period of time in terms of the progress of the game. In particular, it takes longer than a predetermined amount of time to process large amounts of data, such as video data. It is

SUMMARY OF THE INVENTION The present invention has been made in view of such a point, and an object thereof is to provide a gaming machine capable of smoothly performing processing while suppressing a decline in interest.

(1) The gaming machine of Supplementary Note 4 includes lottery means (for example, step S117, etc.) that performs hit/lose determination (for example, big hit determination) based on the establishment of a predetermined condition, and variable identification symbols based on the result of the hit/lose determination. A predetermined number of display means (for example, the liquid crystal display device 16) where display is performed and information on the variable display that has not yet been performed (for example, random numbers for judging big hits, random numbers for determining symbols, etc.) are stored as starting memory. (for example, four) can be stored (for example, step S54, step S55, etc.), and when the variable display is performed for one starting memory stored by the holding means, the one starting memory is displayed. Display control means (for example, step S205, etc.) for controlling so that the identification symbol variation effect and stop effect are performed using the effect time until the variable display of the next start memory is performed; A special game state executing means (for example, step S96, etc.) capable of executing a special game (for example, a jackpot game state) advantageous to the player based on the fact that the result is a specific result; Advantageous state control means capable of controlling a later game state to an advantageous game state (for example, a time-saving game state or a high-probability game state) more advantageous to the player than a normal game state over different periods each time, and the display means. effect control means (for example, step S205, etc.) for controlling the display effect to be displayed in the game state, and the effect control means controls the number of executions of the index effect (character subtraction effect) having a predetermined degree of expectation for the game state. and at least information related to the game state of the advantageous game state (for example, information as to whether or not the game state is a high probability game state). And the period controlled to the advantageous game state (for example, the number of times of time reduction), and the effect pre-determining means (for example, scenario preset processing (FIG. 138)) that determines before being controlled to the advantageous game state a specific effect determining means (for example, step S370, etc.) for determining an effect mode for one or a plurality of starting memories stored by the holding means in the advantageous gaming state, wherein the specific effect determining means The means determines the index performance determined by the performance pre-determining means when one or more start memories stored by the holding means include an index activation memory for executing the index performance. Any of the one or more start memories instead of the execution timing It is characterized by having an effect re-determining means (for example, step S358, etc.) for determining execution in the variable display related to the starting memory.

According to the gaming machine of (1) above, although the index effect having a predetermined degree of expectation for the game state is executed in the variable display in the advantageous game state, the execution timing of the index effect is set in the advantageous game state. Determined before being controlled. Therefore, even if the data volume is large, it is possible to perform smooth processing because there is time to spare before the index effect is performed. However, before the advantageous game state is controlled, the starting memory related to the index performance is not yet suspended, so depending on the situation when the variable display is performed, the decision may be made before the advantageous game state is controlled. It is not always possible to perform the index effect at the determined execution timing. Therefore, in order to avoid such a situation, when the index start memory is included in the one or more start memories stored by the holding means, the execution timing of the index effect is set in the one or more start memories. It is re-determined to execute in the variable display related to any starting memory. As a result, even if the data volume is large, the index rendering can be performed through smooth processing.

(2) In the gaming machine described in (1) above, the execution timing of the index effect determined by the effect predetermining means is set to the M-th variable display in the game state after the special game is executed. When it is time to perform, and the predetermined number that can be stored as start memory by the holding means is N, the effect re-determining means replaces the execution timing of the index effect determined by the effect pre-determining means. Then, in the game state after the special game is executed, in the variable display at any timing within the range of [M-(predetermined number N-1)] to [M+(predetermined number N-1)] This is for deciding to perform the index effect.

According to the gaming machine of (2) above, the execution timing of the index performance determined by the performance re-determining means is determined without greatly deviating from the execution timing of the index performance determined before being controlled to the advantageous game state. be able to.

(3) In the gaming machine described in (1) or (2) above, one or more starting memories stored by the holding means include a specific starting memory in which the variable display is performed in a specific manner. Further provided is specific start determination means (for example, step S330) for determining whether or not the performance redetermining means stores the specific start memory in one or a plurality of start memories stored by the holding means. is included, it is determined that any one of the variable displays of the starting memory until the variable display related to the specific starting memory is performed is performed.

According to the gaming machine of (3) above, even if the specific starting memory in which the variable display is performed in a specific manner (for example, reach fluctuation) is included in the starting memory stored by the holding means, in terms of control, The index performance can be performed by smooth processing without excessively increasing the burden on the operator. That is, if the specific start memory is included in the start memory stored by the holding means, it will be necessary to re-determine the mode of presentation, which may increase the burden on control. In this respect, according to the game machine of (3) above, when the specific starting memory is included in the starting memory stored by the holding means, the starting memory until the variable display of the specific starting memory is performed. Since the mode of presentation for is determined, the burden on control can be reduced as much as possible.

According to the gaming machine of Supplementary Note 4, it is possible to smoothly perform processing while suppressing a decline in interest.

[Appendix 5]
Conventionally, in a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine, when a game ball is received in a starting hole, execution of a symbol variation game is suspended, and the suspended symbol variation game is executed to display a symbol combination indicating a big win. , gaming machines in which jackpot games are executed are known.

In this type of game machine, when the pattern variation game is being played, the first button effect as a big win notice suggesting the possibility of a big win and the possibility that the suspended pattern variation game will be a big win. (See, for example, paragraphs 0067 and 0075 of JP-A-2015-192817).

In recent years, there is a tendency to increase the types of effects to increase the effect of effects, as in the gaming machine described in Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2015-192817, for example.

However, although increasing the number of types of effects enhances the effect of the effects, it is required that such effects be processed in a short period of time in terms of the progress of the game. In particular, it takes longer than a predetermined amount of time to process large amounts of data, such as video data. It is

The present invention has been made in view of such a point, and its object is to suppress the deterioration of interest. To provide a game machine capable of smoothly performing processing.

(1) The gaming machine of Supplementary Note 5 includes lottery means (e.g., step S117, etc.) that performs hit/lose determination (e.g., big hit determination) based on the establishment of a predetermined condition, and variable identification symbols based on the result of the hit/lose determination. A predetermined number of display means (for example, the liquid crystal display device 16) where display is performed and information on the variable display that has not yet been performed (for example, random numbers for judging big hits, random numbers for determining symbols, etc.) are stored as starting memory. When the holding means (for example, step S54, step S55, etc.) capable of storing up to the next starting memory of the one starting memory stored by the holding means is displayed, the next starting memory of the one starting memory is displayed. Display control means (for example, step S205, etc.) for controlling so that a variable effect and a stop effect of the identification symbol are performed using the effect time until the variable display is performed; A special game state execution means capable of executing a special game (for example, a big win game state) advantageous to the player based on a certain fact, and a game state after the special game is executed are made more playable than a normal game state. Advantageous state control means that can control advantageous game states (for example, time-saving game state or high-probability game state) over different periods each time, and index effects (character subtraction effects) having a predetermined degree of expectation for game states ) and the execution timing of which variable display in the advantageous game state is to be executed, at least information related to the game state of the advantageous game state (for example, whether it is a high-probability game state or not). Effect pre-determining means (e.g., scenario presetting process (Fig. 138)), and the execution number of symbol effects that can determine the execution number of symbol effects (for example, temporary fluctuation) in which the variation effect and the stop effect of the identification symbol are performed with respect to the starting memory stored by the holding means. Determining means (for example, step S324, etc.); and effect mode determining means (for example, step S372, etc.) capable of determining the effect mode for one or more starting memories stored by the holding means in the advantageous gaming state ), wherein the effect mode determining means determines whether or not an index start memory for executing the index effect is included in one or a plurality of start memories stored by the reserve means. The index effect execution determination means (for example, step S338, etc.) and the holding means When the indicator performance execution determination means determines that the index performance execution memory is included in one or a plurality of the performance memory stored in the memory, instead of the execution timing determined by the performance pre-determination means, Then, the symbol performances of the number of executions determined by the symbol performance execution number determination means are divided into predetermined units, and a performance for determining in which symbol performance divided into the predetermined units the index performance is to be executed. redetermining means (for example, step S358, etc.);

According to the gaming machine of (1) above, although the index effect having a predetermined degree of expectation for the game state is executed in the game state after the special game state is executed, the execution timing of the index effect is , is determined before being controlled to an advantageous playing state. Therefore, even if the data volume is large, it is possible to perform smooth processing because there is time to spare before the index effect is performed. However, before the advantageous game state is controlled, the starting memory related to the index performance is not yet suspended, so depending on the situation when the variable display is performed, the decision may be made before the advantageous game state is controlled. It is not always possible to perform the index effect at the determined execution timing. Therefore, in order to avoid such a situation, when the index start memory is included in the one or more start memories stored by the holding means, the execution timing of the index effect is set in the one or more start memories. It is re-determined to execute in the variable display related to any starting memory. As a result, even if the data volume is large, the index rendering can be performed through smooth processing.

Moreover, since the execution number of one or a plurality of symbol effects is determined for the starting memory stored by the holding means, even though the display is variable for one starting memory, it appears to be a plurality of starting memories. It looks as if a variable display for is being performed, and it is possible to enhance the production effect. Further, since the number of executions of the determined pattern performance is divided into predetermined units and the index performance is executed in any one of the pattern performances divided into the predetermined units, the performance effect can be further enhanced.

(2) In the gaming machine described in (1) above, the index performance execution determination means determines that one or more start memories stored by the holding means include an index start memory for executing the index performance. Although it is determined whether or not it is included, when there are a plurality of starting memories stored by the holding means, it is determined in which one of the plurality of starting memories the index performance is executed. It is characterized in that it is configured so as not to

According to the gaming machine of (2) above, when there are a plurality of starting memories stored by the holding means, although it is determined whether or not the index starting memory is included, any one of the plurality of starting memories is determined. Since it is not judged whether or not the index performance is executed in the starting memory, the performance effect can be enhanced without increasing the control load. The reason why it is not determined in which starting memory among the plurality of starting memories the index performance is executed is that even if the plurality of starting memories includes the index starting memory, the performance pre-determining means determines. This is because the execution timing is re-determined.

(3) In the gaming machine described in (2) above, the effect mode determination means stores a specific start mode in which the variable display is performed in a specific mode in one or more start memories stored by the holding means. When a memory (reach or big hit) is included, it is characterized in that it is configured to determine the performance mode for the starting memory until the variable display of the specific starting memory is performed. .

According to the gaming machine of (3) above, even if the starting memory stored by the holding means includes a specific starting memory in which variable display is performed in a specific manner (for example, reach fluctuation), interest can be suppressed. That is, if the starting memory stored by the holding means includes a specific starting memory in which variable display is performed in a specific manner (for example, reach fluctuation), even if variable display is performed in a specific manner, In spite of this, when the result of the hit-lose determination is a failure, even if a production mode with a relatively high degree of expectation is performed (for example, character subtraction processing is performed) after that, the performance mode will not be performed. The player's interest is reduced. In this regard, according to the gaming machine of (3) above, when a specific starting memory (reach or jackpot) is included in one or a plurality of starting memories stored by the holding means, the specific starting memory Decreased interest because the performance mode for the starting memory is determined until the variable display of is performed, and the performance mode is not determined for the starting memory that is variably displayed after the specific starting memory can be suppressed.

According to the gaming machine of Supplementary Note 5, it is possible to smoothly perform processing while suppressing a decline in interest.

[Appendix 6]
Conventionally, in a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine, when a game ball is received in a starting hole, execution of a symbol variation game is suspended, and the suspended symbol variation game is executed to display a symbol combination indicating a big win. , gaming machines in which jackpot games are executed are known.

In this type of game machine, when the pattern variation game is being played, the first button effect as a big win notice suggesting the possibility of a big win and the possibility that the suspended pattern variation game will be a big win. (See, for example, paragraphs 0067 and 0075 of JP-A-2015-192817).

In recent years, there is a tendency to increase the types of effects to increase the effect of effects, as in the gaming machine described in Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2015-192817, for example.

However, although increasing the number of types of effects enhances the effect of the effects, it is required that such effects be processed in a short period of time in terms of the progress of the game. In particular, it takes longer than a predetermined amount of time to process large amounts of data, such as video data. It is

SUMMARY OF THE INVENTION The present invention has been made in view of such a point, and an object thereof is to provide a gaming machine capable of smoothly performing processing while suppressing a decline in interest.

(1) The gaming machine of Supplementary Note 6 includes lottery means (for example, step S117, etc.) that performs hit/lose determination (for example, big hit determination) based on the establishment of a predetermined condition, and variable identification symbols based on the result of the hit/lose determination. A predetermined number of display means (for example, the liquid crystal display device 16) where display is performed and information on the variable display that has not yet been performed (for example, random numbers for judging big hits, random numbers for determining symbols, etc.) are stored as starting memory. When the holding means (for example, step S54, step S55, etc.) capable of storing up to the next starting memory of the one starting memory stored by the holding means is displayed, the next starting memory of the one starting memory is displayed. Display control means (for example, step S205, etc.) for controlling so that a variable effect and a stop effect of the identification symbol are performed using the effect time until the variable display is performed; A special game state execution means (for example, step S96, etc.) capable of executing a special game (for example, a big win game state) that is advantageous to the player based on something, and a game state after the special game is executed, It has an advantageous state control means capable of controlling an advantageous game state (for example, a time-saving game state or a high-probability game state) that is more advantageous to the player than the normal game state over different periods each time, and has a predetermined degree of expectation for the game state. The number of executions of the index effect (character subtraction effect) and the timing of executing the index effect in which variable display in the advantageous game state are determined by at least information related to the game state of the advantageous game state (for example, high Information on whether it is a probability game state) and the period controlled to the advantageous game state (for example, the number of times of time reduction), the effect pre-determining means that determines before being controlled to the advantageous game state (for example , scenario presetting process (FIG. 138)), and the execution number of symbol effects (for example, provisional variation) in which the identification symbol variation effect and stop effect are performed with respect to the starting memory stored by the holding means. Determinable symbol effect execution number determination means (for example, step S324 etc.) and effect mode determination capable of determining the effect mode for one or more starting memories stored by the holding means in the advantageous game state means (for example, step S372), wherein the index effect includes a first index effect having a relatively high degree of expectation (for example, a subtraction effect of the enemy character) and A second indicator performance with a relatively low degree of expectation (for example, a subtraction performance of an ally character) and the effect pre-determining means determines the execution timing of each of the first index effect and the second index effect, and the effect mode determining means is the suspending means. include a first index start memory for executing the first index performance and/or a second index start memory for executing the second index performance, among the one or more starting memories stored by index effect execution determination means (for example, step S338) for determining whether or not the first index activation memory and/or the second index activation memory are stored in one or a plurality of start memories stored by the holding means; is included, instead of the execution timing determined by the performance pre-determining means, the number of executions determined by the symbol performance execution number determining means Effect re-determining means (for example, step S358, etc.).

According to the gaming machine of (1) above, as index effects having a predetermined degree of expectation for the game state, a first index effect having a relatively high degree of expectation and an expectation relatively lower than the first index effect are provided. A second index effect having degrees is prepared. Although the first index effect and the second index effect are both executed in the variable display in the advantageous game state, the execution timing of the first index effect and/or the second index effect is different from the advantageous game state. is determined before being controlled by Therefore, even if the data volume is large, there is enough time before the first index effect and/or the second index effect is performed, so smooth processing can be performed. However, before the advantageous game state is controlled, the starting memory for the first index effect and/or the second index effect has not yet been suspended. It is not always possible to perform the first index effect and/or the second index effect at the execution timing determined before being controlled to the game state. Therefore, in order to avoid such a situation, when the index start memory is included in the one or more start memories stored by the holding means, the execution timing of the first index effect and/or the second index effect is set. , one or a plurality of starting memories. As a result, even if the data volume is large, the index rendering can be performed through smooth processing. It is preferable that the re-determination of the execution timing of the first index effect and/or the second index effect is performed in such a manner that the execution order of the first index effect and/or the second index effect determined by the effect pre-determining means is maintained. .

Moreover, since the execution number of one or a plurality of symbol effects is determined for the starting memory stored by the holding means, even though the display is variable for one starting memory, it appears to be a plurality of starting memories. It looks as if a variable display for is being performed, and it is possible to enhance the production effect. Further, since the determined execution number of symbol effects is divided into predetermined units and the first index effect and/or the second index effect is executed in one of the symbol effects divided into the predetermined units, further effects are performed. It is possible to enhance the effect.

(2) In the gaming machine described in (1) above, the index effect execution determination means stores the first index start memory and/or the first index effect execution memory in one or a plurality of start memories stored by the reserve means. Although it is determined whether or not the 2-index starting memory is included, when there are a plurality of starting memories stored by the holding means, in which one of the plurality of starting memories the first index effect or and/and is configured not to determine whether or not the second index effect is to be executed, and the first index start memory and the second index start memory are stored in one or a plurality of start memories stored by the holding means. The execution order of the first index effect and the second index effect is determined when both of the memory is included.

According to the gaming machine of (2) above, when there are a plurality of starting memories stored by the holding means, it is determined whether or not the first index starting memory and/or the second index starting memory are included. However, since it is not determined in which of the plurality of starting memories the first index performance and/or the second index performance is executed, the performance effect is enhanced without increasing the control load. be able to. The reason why it is not determined in which of the plurality of starting memories the first index effect and/or the second index effect is executed is that the first index memory and/or the second index effect is not determined in the plurality of starting memories. This is because the execution timing determined by the effect predetermining means is re-determined even if the memory is included. However, when both the first index start memory and the second index start memory are included in one or more start memories stored by the holding means, the execution order of the first index effect and the second index effect I try to make judgments about This is because the execution order of the first index effect and the second index effect determined by the effect pre-determining means is maintained when the execution timings of the first index effect and the second index effect are re-determined. is.

(3) In the gaming machine described in (1) or (2) above, the performance mode determining means may select a specific starting memory (reach or jackpot) among one or more starting memories stored by the holding means. is included, the performance mode for the starting memory is determined until the variable display for the specific starting memory is performed.

According to the gaming machine of (3) above, even if the starting memory stored by the holding means includes a specific starting memory in which variable display is performed in a specific manner (for example, reach fluctuation), interest can be suppressed. That is, if the starting memory stored by the holding means includes a specific starting memory in which variable display is performed in a specific manner (for example, reach fluctuation), even if variable display is performed in a specific manner, In spite of this, when the result of the hit-lose determination is a failure, even if a production mode with a relatively high degree of expectation is performed (for example, character subtraction processing is performed) after that, the performance mode will not be performed. The player's interest is reduced. In this regard, according to the gaming machine of (3) above, when a specific starting memory (reach or jackpot) is included in one or a plurality of starting memories stored by the holding means, the specific starting memory Decreased interest because the performance mode for the starting memory is determined until the variable display of is performed, and the performance mode is not determined for the starting memory that is variably displayed after the specific starting memory can be suppressed.

According to the gaming machine of Supplementary Note 6, it is possible to smoothly perform processing while suppressing a decline in interest.

[Appendix 7]
Conventionally, in a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine, when a game ball is received in a starting hole, execution of a symbol variation game is suspended, and the suspended symbol variation game is executed to display a symbol combination indicating a big win. , gaming machines in which jackpot games are executed are known.

In this type of game machine, when the pattern variation game is being played, the first button effect as a big win notice suggesting the possibility of a big win and the possibility that the suspended pattern variation game will be a big win. (See, for example, paragraphs 0067 and 0075 of JP-A-2015-192817).

In recent years, there is a tendency to increase the types of effects to increase the effect of effects, as in the gaming machine described in Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2015-192817, for example.

However, although increasing the number of types of effects enhances the effect of the effects, it is required that such effects be processed in a short period of time in terms of the progress of the game. In particular, it takes longer than a predetermined amount of time to process large amounts of data, such as video data. It is

SUMMARY OF THE INVENTION The present invention has been made in view of such a point, and an object thereof is to provide a gaming machine capable of smoothly performing processing while suppressing a decline in interest.

(1) The gaming machine of Supplementary Note 7 includes lottery means (for example, step S117, etc.) that performs hit/lose determination (for example, big hit determination) based on the establishment of a predetermined condition, and variable identification symbols based on the result of the hit/lose determination. A predetermined number of display means (for example, the liquid crystal display device 16) where display is performed and information on the variable display that has not yet been performed (for example, random numbers for judging big hits, random numbers for determining symbols, etc.) are stored as starting memory. (for example, four) can be stored (for example, step S54, step S55, etc.), and when the variable display is performed for one starting memory stored by the holding means, the one starting memory is displayed. Display control means (for example, step S205, etc.) for controlling so that the identification symbol variation effect and stop effect are performed using the effect time until the variable display of the next start memory is performed; A special game state executing means (for example, step S96, etc.) capable of executing a special game (for example, a jackpot game state) advantageous to the player based on the fact that the result is a specific result; Advantageous state control means (for example, step S171, etc.) capable of controlling the later game state to an advantageous game state (for example, a time-saving game state or a high-probability game state) that is more advantageous to the player than the normal game state; Symbol effect execution number determination means (for example, step S324 etc.), and an effect mode determining means (for example, step S372 etc.) capable of determining the effect mode for one or more start memories stored by the holding means in the advantageous gaming state, The performance mode determination means divides the symbol performance of the number of executions determined by the symbol performance execution number determination means into predetermined units, and the symbol performance divided into the predetermined units regardless of the unit of the start memory. Specific effect determination means (for example, sub CPU 201) that determines the effect mode to be performed during execution of , Timing determination means (for example, scenario Pre-setting processing (FIG. 138, step S370, etc.) and one or more starting memories stored by the holding means include a specific starting memory in which a specific effect (for example, reach variation) is executed and The execution timing of the specific effect and the execution timing of the index effect When there is no overlap, the specific effect is executed out of the total number of executions of the symbol effect (for example, provisional variation) determined for each of the one or more starting memories stored by the holding means. By subtracting the execution number of the symbol performance in which the index performance is performed from the execution number of the symbol performance up to, prior to the specific performance, it is possible to execute a suggestive performance (prediction of reach) suggesting that the specific performance will be performed. It is characterized by having suggestive effect execution determination means (for example, step S358, etc.) for determining the number of symbol effects.

According to the gaming machine of (1) above, since the effect mode for one or more start memories stored by the holding means can be determined before the variable display is started, the data capacity is large. Even if this is the case, it is possible to perform smooth processing. Moreover, since the execution number of one or a plurality of symbol effects is determined for each start memory stored by the holding means, even though the display is variable for one start memory, it may appear that there are multiple starts. It looks as if a variable display for memory is being performed, and can enhance the presentation effect. Further, the number of executions of the determined pattern performance is divided into predetermined units, and a performance mode to be performed during the execution of the pattern performance divided into the predetermined units is determined. It is possible to perform smooth processing.

Further, although the specific starting memory is included in one or a plurality of starting memories stored by the holding means, the execution timing of the specific performance relating to the specific starting memory and the execution timing of the index performance do not overlap. In this case, the number of executed symbol effects is subtracted from the total number of executed symbol effects until the specific effect is executed, and the number of symbol effects capable of executing suggestive effects (prediction of reach) is determined. Therefore, it is possible to determine the execution timing of any of the specific effect, the index effect, and the suggestive effect before the variable display is started, so that smooth processing can be performed. Moreover, since the index effect and the suggestive effect can be executed at suitable timing, the effect of the effect can be enhanced.

In addition, the "variable display of the identification pattern" here means a series of displays from the start of the variable display of the identification pattern to the stop display for one starting memory, and in one starting memory. On the other hand, the number of times of variable display is one even if the identification pattern variation effect and the stop effect are repeatedly performed a plurality of times.

In addition, the "stop effect" of the identification pattern means the stop effect (for example, temporary stop) of the identification pattern that is performed in the middle of one variable display and the stop of the identification pattern that is performed when one variable display is completed. This is intended to include both effects (for example, main stop).

Further, "When the variable display is performed for one starting memory, the variable performance and the stop performance of the identification pattern are performed using the performance time until the variable display for the next starting memory of the one starting memory is performed. "is performed" means not only the time during which the variable display is performed for one starting memory, but also includes all or part of the time required for the interval until the variable display for the next starting memory is performed. Therefore, the ``symbol effect in which the identification symbol fluctuation effect and the stop effect are performed'' is until the identification symbol stop effect is performed if it is in the middle of the variable display, and if it is the end of the variable display, the above interval is also It is intended to include

(2) In the gaming machine described in (1) above, the suggestive effect execution determining means may include the specific starting memory in one or more starting memories stored by the holding means, When the execution timing and the execution timing of the index performance overlap, execution of the symbol performance (for example, provisional variation) determined for each of the one or a plurality of starting memories stored by the holding means. The number obtained by subtracting 1 from the execution number of the symbol performance in which the index performance is performed is subtracted from the total number of numbers, and the number of symbol performances capable of executing the suggestive performance (prediction of ready-to-win) performed prior to the specific performance is determined. It is characterized by

According to the gaming machine of (2) above, when the execution timing of the specific effect and the execution timing of the index effect overlap, the index effect is executed while the specific effect is being executed. Since the specific performance and the index performance are overlapped from the flow of the suggestive performance, the performance effect can be enhanced.

(3) The gaming machine according to (1) or (2) above, further comprising holding effect control means for controlling so that the image related to the starting memory stored in the holding means is displayed on the display means, The suspension performance control means is characterized in that, at least when the performance mode determined by the specific performance determination means is displayed, the image related to the starting memory stored in the suspension means is controlled so as not to be displayed.

According to the game machine of (3) above, since the image related to the starting memory stored in the holding means is not displayed on the display means, it is possible to make the player unaware of the variable display in units of starting memory. As a result, it becomes possible to determine the mode of presentation without being bound by the result of one game, and the presentation effect can be enhanced.

According to the gaming machine of Supplementary Note 7, it is possible to smoothly perform processing while suppressing a decline in interest.

[Appendix 8]
Conventionally, in a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine, when a game ball is received in a starting hole, execution of a symbol variation game is suspended, and the suspended symbol variation game is executed to display a symbol combination indicating a big win. , gaming machines in which jackpot games are executed are known.

In this type of game machine, when the pattern variation game is being played, the first button effect as a big win notice suggesting the possibility of a big win and the possibility that the suspended pattern variation game will be a big win. (See, for example, paragraphs 0067 and 0075 of JP-A-2015-192817).

In recent years, there is a tendency to increase the types of effects to increase the effect of effects, as in the gaming machine described in Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2015-192817, for example.

However, although increasing the number of types of effects enhances the effect of the effects, it is required that such effects be processed in a short period of time in terms of the progress of the game. In particular, it takes longer than a predetermined amount of time to process large amounts of data, such as video data. It is

SUMMARY OF THE INVENTION The present invention has been made in view of such a point, and an object thereof is to provide a gaming machine capable of smoothly performing processing while suppressing a decline in interest.

(1) The gaming machine of Supplementary Note 8 includes display means (for example, the liquid crystal display device 16) that performs variable display of an identification pattern based on the establishment of a predetermined condition, and information about the variable display that has not yet been performed. Reserving means (for example, step S54, step S55, etc.) capable of storing up to a predetermined number (for example, four) of (for example, a random number for judging a big hit, a random number for determining a symbol, etc.) as a starting memory, and the display means a special game executing means (for example, step S96) capable of executing a special game advantageous to the player when a specific result is displayed in , and an effect executed in the gaming state after the special game is executed , a first index effect having a relatively high degree of expectation (for example, a subtraction effect for an enemy character) and a second index effect having a relatively lower degree of expectation than the first index effect (for example, a subtraction effect for an ally character). an index effect timing determining means (for example, scenario pre-setting processing (FIG. 138), step S370, etc.) for determining execution timings of the first index effect and the second index effect, respectively; determining whether or not a specific effect (for example, ready-to-win effect) in which the variable display is performed in a specific manner and the first index effect and/or the second index effect are performed in the same variable display. Duplicate determination means (for example, step S346, etc.), and production mode determination means (for example, step S372, etc.) capable of determining a production mode for one or more starting memories stored by the holding means, When it is determined that the specific effect and the first index effect are performed in the same variable display, the effect mode determination means determines that the first index effect is performed in the variable display in which the specific effect is performed. and when it is determined that the specific effect and the second index effect are performed in the same variable display, the variable display in which the specific effect is performed The game machine is characterized by having a second effect mode determining means for determining not to perform the second index effect.

According to the gaming machine of (1) above, as index effects having a predetermined degree of expectation for the game state, a first index effect having a relatively high degree of expectation and an expectation relatively lower than the first index effect are provided. A second index effect having degrees is prepared. Also, it is determined whether or not the first index effect and/or the second index effect is executed when a specific effect (for example, ready-to-win effect) is being performed. Here, when the index effect executed when the specific effect is performed is the first index effect, the specific effect and the first index effect are performed in the same variable display. On the other hand, when the index effect executed when the specific effect is performed is the second index effect, the specific effect and the second index effect are not performed in the same variable display. That is, if the first index effect is performed during execution of the variable display performed in a specific manner, both effects can give the player a relatively high sense of expectation. An index presentation is performed. On the other hand, even if the second index effect is performed during the execution of the variable display performed in a specific manner, it is difficult for the player to have expectations for the variable display. In particular, even if the variable display develops into a variable display with a higher degree of expectation, it is still difficult for the player to have a sense of anticipation. Therefore, the specific effect and the second index effect are not performed in the same variable display. In this way, the presentation effect is enhanced appropriately.

In addition, the "variable display of the identification pattern" here means a series of displays from the start of the variable display of the identification pattern to the stop display for one starting memory, and in one starting memory. On the other hand, the number of times of variable display is one even if the identification pattern variation effect and the stop effect are repeatedly performed a plurality of times. It should be noted that the "stop effect" of the identification pattern is the stop effect of the identification pattern that is performed in the middle of one variable display (for example, temporary stop) and the stop of the identification pattern that is performed when one variable display is completed. This is intended to include both effects (for example, main stop).

(2) In the gaming machine described in (1) above, execution of a symbol effect (for example, temporary variation) in which a variation effect and a stop effect of the identification symbol are performed for the starting memory stored by the holding means. A symbol performance execution number determination means (for example, step S324) capable of determining the number, and the symbol performance of the number of executions determined by the symbol performance execution number determination means are divided into predetermined units, and the unit of the start memory is divided into predetermined units. irrespective of the specific effect determination means (for example, sub CPU 201) that determines the effect mode to be performed during execution of the symbol effect divided into the predetermined units, and the effect mode determination means determines the specific It is characterized by having suggestive effect execution determining means (for example, step S358, etc.) for determining the number of symbol effects capable of executing suggestive effect (prediction of ready-to-win) suggesting that the specific effect is performed prior to effect.

According to the gaming machine of (2) above, since the suggestive effect (ready-to-win sign) that suggests that the specific effect will be performed is executed prior to the specific effect, the effect of the game can be further enhanced.

(3) The gaming machine according to (1) or (2) above, further comprising holding effect control means for controlling so that the image related to the starting memory stored in the holding means is displayed on the display means, The suspension performance control means is characterized in that, at least when the performance mode determined by the specific performance determination means is displayed, the image related to the starting memory stored in the suspension means is controlled so as not to be displayed.

According to the game machine of (3) above, since the image related to the starting memory stored in the holding means is not displayed on the display means, it is possible to make the player unaware of the variable display in units of starting memory. As a result, it becomes possible to determine the mode of presentation without being bound by the result of one game, and the presentation effect can be enhanced.

According to the gaming machine of Supplementary Note 8, it is possible to smoothly perform processing while suppressing a decline in interest.

[Appendix 9]
Conventionally, in a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine, when a game ball is received in a starting hole, execution of a symbol variation game is suspended, and the suspended symbol variation game is executed to display a symbol combination indicating a big win. , gaming machines in which jackpot games are executed are known.

In this type of game machine, when the pattern variation game is being played, the first button effect as a big win notice suggesting the possibility of a big win and the possibility that the suspended pattern variation game will be a big win. (See, for example, paragraphs 0067 and 0075 of JP-A-2015-192817).

In recent years, there is a tendency to increase the types of effects to increase the effect of effects, as in the gaming machine described in Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2015-192817, for example.

However, although increasing the number of types of effects can enhance the effects of effects, the amount of data such as video data is large. I don't like it.

The present invention has been made in view of such a point, and an object thereof is to provide a gaming machine capable of effectively performing an effect.

(1) The gaming machine of Supplementary Note 9 includes lottery means (for example, step S117, etc.) that performs hit/lose determination (for example, big hit determination) based on the establishment of a predetermined condition, and an identification symbol based on the result of the hit/lose determination. Display means (e.g., liquid crystal display device 16) in which the variable display is performed, and information on the variable display that has not yet been performed (e.g., random numbers for judging big hits, random numbers for determining symbols, etc.) are used as starting memories. With respect to the holding means (for example, step S54, step S55, etc.) capable of storing up to a predetermined number (for example, four), and the starting memory stored by the holding means prior to the specific starting memory, the specific starting memory is stored. Determining whether or not to execute a first effect (for example, a black effect) having a predetermined degree of expectation for the result of hit/loss determination for the starting memory, and also for the specific starting memory A first effect execution determining means (for example, step S205 etc.) for determining whether or not to execute, and a different effect from the first effect, which is stored by the holding means. A second performance (for example, a movable character performance) having a predetermined degree of expectation with respect to the result of win/lose judgment for the specific starting memory stored last is stored in all the starting memories stored by the holding means. a second effect execution determining means (for example, step S205) for determining whether or not to execute the first effect for the specific starting memory; and a second effect non-execution determining means for changing so as not to execute the second effect for the specific starting memory when it is determined to execute for the specific starting memory. and

According to the gaming machine of (1) above, even if it is determined to execute the second effect for the specific start memory, it is determined not to execute the first effect for the specific start memory. Since the second performance is changed so as not to be executed for a specific starting memory when the player is playing, there is no need to perform meaningless performance, and not only is the decrease in interest suppressed, but also the performance is effectively performed. becomes possible. That is, even if it is determined to execute the second effect for the specific starting memory, if it is determined not to execute the first effect for the specific starting memory, the specific starting memory will not be executed. Expectations are not so high. Therefore, even if it is determined that the second performance is to be executed for a specific starting memory, execution of meaningless performance is omitted by making a change so that the second performance is not executed, It is designed to produce an effective performance.

It should be noted that "executing the first effect (second effect) for the starting memory" means executing the first effect (second effect) that changes the pending effect image itself indicating that the starting memory is stored. executing, executing a first effect (second effect) on a pending effect image indicating that the starting memory is stored, and executing a first effect (second effect) when a variable display about the starting memory is being performed 2nd effect) is included.

(2) In the gaming machine described in (1) above, a winning/losing result for a starting memory other than the specific starting memory with respect to the starting memory stored by the holding means prior to the specific starting memory. Further comprising a third effect confirmation means (for example, step S205 etc.) for confirming whether or not execution of a third effect having a predetermined degree of expectation is determined in response to the determination result, and executing the first effect. The determination means, when it is determined to execute the third effect for the previous start memory stored by the reserve means prior to the specific start memory, the specific start memory and the previous start. It is characterized by determining whether or not to execute the first effect for the starting memory between the memories.

According to the gaming machine (2) above, without determining whether or not to execute the first effect for the starting memory for which it is determined that the third effect is to be executed, the specific starting memory and the previous Since the first performance is executed for the starting memory between the starting memories, effective performance can be performed without increasing the control load uselessly.

According to the gaming machine of Supplementary Note 9, it is possible to provide a gaming machine capable of effectively performing an effect.

[Appendix 10]
Conventionally, in a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine, when a game ball is received in a starting hole, execution of a symbol variation game is suspended, and the suspended symbol variation game is executed to display a symbol combination indicating a big win. , gaming machines in which jackpot games are executed are known.

In this type of game machine, when the pattern variation game is being played, the first button effect as a big win notice suggesting the possibility of a big win and the possibility that the suspended pattern variation game will be a big win. (See, for example, paragraphs 0067 and 0075 of JP-A-2015-192817).

In recent years, there is a tendency to increase the types of effects to increase the effect of effects, as in the gaming machine described in Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2015-192817, for example.

However, although increasing the number of types of effects can enhance the effects of effects, the amount of data such as video data is large. I don't like it.

The present invention has been made in view of such a point, and an object thereof is to provide a gaming machine capable of effectively performing an effect.

(1) The gaming machine of Supplementary Note 10 includes lottery means (for example, main CPU 101) that performs win/lose determination (for example, big hit determination) based on the establishment of a predetermined condition, and identification symbol based on the result of the win/lose determination. Display means for performing variable display (for example, liquid crystal display device 16) and information on the variable display that has not yet been performed (for example, random numbers for judging big hits, random numbers for determining symbols, etc.) are stored as start memory. Reserving means (for example, step S54, step S55, etc.) capable of storing up to a number (for example, four), and winning/losing determination for a specific starting memory that was last reserved among the starting memories withheld by the above-mentioned reserving means. A first performance (for example, a countdown performance) that can suggest the result of is continuously executed from the variable display of the starting memory memorized prior to the specific starting memory to the variable display of the specific starting memory. a first effect execution determining means (for example, step S205, etc.) for determining whether or not to play, and at least when the variable display for the specific starting memory is performed, the result of the win-lose determination for the specific starting memory is determined. a second effect execution determining means (for example, step S205, etc.) that determines whether or not to execute a suggestible second effect (for example, a movable character object effect) separately from whether or not to execute the first effect; wherein the first effect executed from the variable display of the starting memory stored prior to the specific starting memory continues until the variable display of the specific starting memory. When it is executed, it is determined that the result of the win-lose determination for the specific starting memory is a win or there is a high possibility that it is a win, and the execution continues until the variable display for the specific starting memory is performed. If not, it is determined that the result of the win-lose judgment for the specific starting memory is a failure or there is a high possibility that it is a failure. When it is determined not to continue to execute the first effect, and when it is determined to execute the second effect in the variable display for the specific starting memory, in the variable display for the specific starting memory It is characterized by further comprising second effect non-execution determining means (for example, step S205, etc.) for changing not to execute the second effect.

According to the gaming machine of (1) above, it is determined that the first effect is not to be continuously executed until the variable display of the fixed start memory is performed, and the second effect is executed in the variable display of the specific start memory. When it is decided to perform, the variable display for the specific starting memory is changed so as not to execute the second performance, so that meaningless performance is not required, and not only is the decrease in interest suppressed, It is possible to perform effectively. That is, if the first effect is not continuously executed until the variable display for the specific starting memory is performed, it is confirmed that the result of the win/lose determination for the specific starting memory is a loss or there is a high possibility that the result is a loss. . Even in such a case, if the second effect is performed in the variable display for a specific starting memory, not only will the effect be meaningless, but there is a risk that interest will be reduced. Therefore, even if it is determined that the second performance is to be executed in the variable display for the specific starting memory, by changing the second performance so as not to be executed, the execution of the meaningless performance is omitted and the effect is achieved. It was designed to create a dramatic performance.

According to the gaming machine of Supplementary Note 10, it is possible to provide a gaming machine capable of effectively performing an effect.

[Appendix 11]
Conventionally, in a game machine such as a pachinko machine, when a game ball is received in a starting hole, execution of a symbol variation game is suspended, and the suspended symbol variation game is executed to display a symbol combination indicating a big win. , gaming machines in which jackpot games are executed are known.

In this type of game machine, when the pattern variation game is being played, the first button effect as a big win notice suggesting the possibility of a big win and the possibility that the suspended pattern variation game will be a big win. (See, for example, paragraphs 0067 and 0075 of JP-A-2015-192817).

In recent years, there is a tendency to increase the types of effects to increase the effect of effects, as in the gaming machine described in Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2015-192817, for example.

However, although increasing the number of types of effects enhances the effect of the effects, it is required that such effects be processed in a short period of time in terms of the progress of the game. In particular, it takes longer than a predetermined amount of time to process large amounts of data, such as video data. It is

SUMMARY OF THE INVENTION The present invention has been made in view of such a point, and an object thereof is to provide a gaming machine capable of smoothly performing processing while suppressing a decline in interest.

(1) The gaming machine of Supplementary Note 11 includes lottery means (for example, step S117) that performs win/loss determination based on the establishment of a predetermined condition, and display means (for example, liquid crystal display device 16) that displays a predetermined effect image. , a display control means (for example, a display control circuit 204) capable of executing control related to the variable performance of the identification pattern and capable of executing control related to the expected performance image based on the result of the hit/loss determination; and a predetermined performance sound. and a sound output control means (e.g., a voice control circuit 205) that controls such that a As a specific effect control means (for example, step S903) for controlling to display the expected effect image without displaying the variable effect of the identification symbol, and without displaying the variable effect of the identification symbol, the gaming machine information image display control means (for example, step S905) for controlling the display means to display an information image relating to the identification pattern, and Silence means (for example, step S904) that does not output a variation sound associated with the variation effect of the identification pattern when it is not displayed, and variation of the identification pattern when the variation effect of the identification pattern is not displayed by the information image display control means. It is characterized by having fluctuating sound control means (for example, step S906) for outputting fluctuating sounds for production.

According to the gaming machine of (1) above, it is possible to omit unnecessary processing without making the player feel uncomfortable, and to smoothly perform the processing while suppressing the decrease in interest. The information image related to the game machine corresponds to, for example, information to be transmitted to the player or the hall attendant regardless of the result of the win/lose determination. Specific examples thereof include an error message screen when an error occurs, a warning image when fraud is committed, a recovery screen after a power failure, and the like.

(2) In the gaming machine described in (1) above, the information image display control means cuts off power while the identification symbol variation effect is being displayed as the information image related to the gaming machine, and then restores power. 167(C)) is displayed.

According to the gaming machine of (2) above, in the recovery image after the power failure, even if the recovery image is displayed and the identification symbol variation effect cannot be visually recognized, it can be grasped that the identification symbol variation effect is being performed. .

According to the gaming machine of Supplementary Note 11, it is possible to smoothly perform processing while suppressing a decline in interest.

[Appendix 12]
Conventionally, in a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine, when a game ball is received in a starting hole, execution of a symbol variation game is suspended, and the suspended symbol variation game is executed to display a symbol combination indicating a big win. , gaming machines in which jackpot games are executed are known.

In this type of game machine, when the pattern variation game is being played, the first button effect as a big win notice suggesting the possibility of a big win and the possibility that the suspended pattern variation game will be a big win. (See, for example, paragraphs 0067 and 0075 of JP-A-2015-192817).

In recent years, there is a tendency to increase the types of effects to increase the effect of effects, as in the gaming machine described in Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2015-192817, for example.

However, although increasing the number of types of effects enhances the effect of the effects, it is required that such effects be processed in a short period of time in terms of the progress of the game. In particular, it takes longer than a predetermined amount of time to process large amounts of data, such as video data. It is

SUMMARY OF THE INVENTION The present invention has been made in view of such a point, and an object thereof is to provide a gaming machine capable of smoothly performing processing while suppressing a decline in interest.

(1) The game machine of Supplementary Note 12 performs a variable display of identification symbols when a predetermined start condition is satisfied, and display means (for example, a liquid crystal display device) that displays the result of hit/loss determination when the identification symbols stop 16), an operation means (effect button 62) that can be operated by the player, and based on the fact that the operation means is operated within a predetermined period, a lottery for executing a specific effect based on the result of the hit/loss determination is performed, A first effect execution means (FIG. 164 (B)) for executing the specific effect based on the execution lottery, and performing the execution lottery for the specific effect based on the elapse of a predetermined time, and based on the execution lottery A second effect executing means (FIG. 164(C)) for executing the specific effect is provided, and the first effect executing means executes the specific effect when the operation means is not operated within the predetermined period. First, the second effect execution means does not execute the specific effect when the specific effect is executed by the first effect execution means within the same variable display, while the operation means operates within the predetermined period. The specific effect is executed when the specific effect is not executed by the first effect executing means because the specific effect is not executed.

According to the gaming machine of (1) above, when the operation means is not operated, the specific notification mode is not executed, and when the specific notification mode is executed, the specific notification mode is further executed. It will never be executed. On the other hand, if the specific notification mode has not yet been performed, the specific notification mode may be performed. As a result, it is possible to omit unnecessary processing without discomfort, and to perform processing smoothly while suppressing a decrease in interest.

According to the gaming machine of Supplementary Note 12, it is possible to smoothly perform processing while suppressing a decline in interest.

[Appendix 13]
2. Description of the Related Art Conventionally, among gaming machines such as pachinko machines, there has been known a gaming machine in which symbols are displayed in a variable manner, and when the symbols are stopped and displayed, the result of the game is displayed. Then, when the result of the game is a specific result, a special game advantageous to the player is performed. For example, up to four variable display patterns are retained as start memory, and the variable display is performed one start memory at a time.

In some gaming machines of this type, before the result of the game is displayed, a display effect is performed to make people expect that there is a possibility that a special game will be played, so that the effect of the effect is enhanced (for example, See JP-A-2006-246964).

However, in the gaming machine described in Patent Document 1, since the display effect is performed only for the starting memory unit, if the display effect is not such that the special game can be expected to be performed, the changing display effect is displayed. There is a possibility that the user may lose his sense of expectation for the variable display of the pattern, and at that point, his interest may decrease.

The present invention has been made in view of such a point, and its object is to prevent the player from being conscious of the display effect in the starting memory unit, and preferably to suppress the decrease in interest.

(1) The game machine of Supplementary Note 13 includes display means (for example, the liquid crystal display device 16) that performs variable display of identification symbols based on the establishment of a predetermined condition, and information about the variable display that has not yet been performed. Reserving means (for example, step S54, step S55, etc.) capable of storing up to a predetermined number (for example, four) of (for example, a random number value for judging a big hit, a random number value for determining a symbol, etc.) as starting memory; When the variable display is performed for one starting memory stored by, the performance time until the variable display for the next starting memory of the one starting memory is performed is used to perform the variable performance and the stop performance of the identification symbol. and a display control means for controlling the execution of the number of pattern effects (for example, temporary fluctuation) in which the identification pattern variation effect and the stop effect are performed for the start memory stored by the holding means. Determinable symbol performance execution number determination means (for example, step S324) and specific start memory (for example, start memory in which reach fluctuation performance is recorded) in one or more start memories stored by the holding means ) is included, an effect mode determination means (for example, step S332, etc.) capable of determining the effect mode for the starting memory until the variable display of the specific starting memory is performed, When the plurality of starting memories stored by the holding means includes a plurality of the specific starting memories, the effect mode determining means performs variable display first among the plurality of specific starting memories. Determines the performance mode for the starting memory until the variable display of the earliest specific starting memory is performed, and determines the performance mode for the starting memory until the variable display of the earliest specific starting memory is performed. On the other hand, the symbol performance (for example, temporary fluctuation) of the number of executions determined by the symbol performance execution number determining means is divided into predetermined units, and the symbols divided into the predetermined units regardless of the unit of the start memory. It is characterized by having specific effect determination means (for example, step S372, etc.) for determining the effect mode (for example, character subtraction effect) to be performed during execution of the effect.

According to the gaming machine of (1) above, the execution number of symbol effects (for example, temporary fluctuation) in which the identification symbol variation effect and the stop effect are performed is determined for the starting memory stored by the holding means. . That is, originally, one pattern performance is performed for each start memory stored by the reserve means, but one or more times of pattern performance is performed for each start memory stored by the reserve means. Since the number is determined, even though the variable display is for one starting memory, it looks as if the variable display is being performed for a plurality of starting memories. Moreover, the symbol effects determined for each start memory are divided into predetermined units regardless of the unit of the start memory. Then, an effect mode to be performed during execution of the symbol effect divided into the predetermined units is determined. Therefore, a part of the plurality of symbol effects determined for one starting memory and a plurality of patterns determined for other starting memories whose variable display is performed next to the variable display for the one starting memory It is also possible that an effect mode that extends over part of the symbol effect is determined. As a result, it is possible to determine the mode of presentation regardless of the result of one game. In addition, it is possible to execute a display performance that does not make the player aware of the variable display in units of start memory, and it is possible to suppress the decrease in interest.

In addition, when the starting memory stored by the holding means includes a specific starting memory in which variable display is performed in a specific manner (for example, reach variation effect), variable display is performed in a specific manner. In spite of this, when the result of the win-lose determination is a failure, even if there is a production mode that gives the player a high sense of expectation (for example, a character subtraction process is carried out) after that, such a production is performed. The player's interest in the aspect is reduced. Therefore, according to the gaming machine of (1) above, when a plurality of specific starting memories are included in the plurality of starting memories stored by the holding means, the starting memory is the first among the plurality of specific starting memories. A performance mode is determined for the starting memory up to the earliest specified starting memory variably displayed, and the performance mode is not determined for the starting memory variably displayed after the earliest specific starting memory. As a result, it is possible to suppress the decline in interest.

In addition, the "variable display of the identification pattern" here means a series of displays from the start of the variable display of the identification pattern to the stop display for one starting memory, and in one starting memory. On the other hand, the number of times of variable display is one even if the identification pattern variation effect and the stop effect are repeatedly performed a plurality of times.

In addition, the "stop effect" of the identification pattern means the stop effect (for example, temporary stop) of the identification pattern that is performed in the middle of one variable display and the stop of the identification pattern that is performed when one variable display is completed. This is intended to include both effects (for example, main stop).

Further, "When the variable display is performed for one starting memory, the variable performance and the stop performance of the identification pattern are performed using the performance time until the variable display for the next starting memory of the one starting memory is performed. "is performed" means not only the time during which the variable display is performed for one starting memory, but also includes all or part of the time required for the interval until the variable display for the next starting memory is performed. Therefore, the ``symbol effect in which the identification symbol fluctuation effect and the stop effect are performed'' is until the identification symbol stop effect is performed if it is in the middle of the variable display, and if it is the end of the variable display, the above interval is also It is intended to include

(2) In the gaming machine described in (1) above, further comprising suspension effect control means (for example, step S205, etc.) for controlling so that an image relating to starting memory stored in the suspension means is displayed on the display means. The holding effect control means controls not to display the image related to the starting memory stored in the holding means at least when the effect mode determined by the specific effect determining means is displayed. and

According to the game machine of (2) above, since the image related to the starting memory stored in the holding means is not displayed on the display means, it is possible to further prevent the player from being conscious of the variable display in the starting memory unit. can be done.

(3) In the gaming machine described in (1) or (2) above, the performance mode determining means includes the specific starting memory in one or more starting memories stored by the holding means. When there is no starting memory, the performance mode is determined for all the starting memories stored by the holding means, and the performance mode for the starting memory last stored among the starting memories stored by the holding means is set to the starting memory. Although is not the specific starting memory, the production mode (for example, fake reach sign production) that suggests that the identification pattern variation production is performed in a specific mode (for example, reach fluctuation production) is determined. A suggestive effect determination means (for example, step S366, etc.) is provided, and the suggestive effect determine means performs the variable effect of the identification symbol in the specific mode when the start memory is not stored by the reserve means. It is characterized in that it is configured so as not to be determined to a production mode that suggests.

According to the gaming machine of (3) above, when the specific starting memory is not included in the one or more starting memories stored by the holding means, there is no need to re-determine the effect mode. Although it is unlikely that the above burden will increase, it is considered difficult to maintain the player's sense of expectation for the display effect. Therefore, it is suggested that the effect mode for the last stored start memory among the start memories stored by the holding means is not a specific start memory, but the identification pattern variation effect is performed in a specific mode. By determining the effect mode, it is possible to maintain the player's sense of expectation for the display effect. Moreover, when the starting memory is not stored by the holding means, since the performance mode suggesting that the identification pattern variation performance is performed in a specific mode is not decided, the increase of the control load is also suppressed. .

According to the gaming machine of Supplementary Note 13, it is possible to prevent the player from being conscious of the display effect in the starting memory unit, and preferably suppress the decrease in interest.

[Appendix 14]
2. Description of the Related Art Conventionally, among gaming machines such as pachinko machines, there has been known a gaming machine in which symbols are displayed in a variable manner, and when the symbols are stopped and displayed, the result of the game is displayed. Then, when the result of the game is a specific result, a special game advantageous to the player is performed. For example, up to four variable display patterns are retained as start memory, and the variable display is performed one start memory at a time.

In some gaming machines of this type, before the result of the game is displayed, a display effect is performed to make people expect that there is a possibility that a special game will be played, so that the effect of the effect is enhanced (for example, See JP-A-2006-246964).

However, in the gaming machine described in Patent Document 1, since the display effect is performed only for the starting memory unit, if the display effect is not such that the special game can be expected to be performed, the changing display effect is displayed. There is a possibility that the user may lose his sense of expectation for the variable display of the pattern, and at that point, his interest may decrease.

The present invention has been made in view of such a point, and its object is to prevent the player from being conscious of the display effect in the starting memory unit, and preferably to suppress the decrease in interest.

(1) The gaming machine of Supplementary Note 14 includes display means (for example, the liquid crystal display device 16) that performs variable display of identification patterns based on the establishment of a predetermined condition, and information about the variable display that has not yet been performed. Reserving means (for example, step S54, step S55, etc.) capable of storing up to a predetermined number (for example, four) of (for example, a random number value for judging a big hit, a random number value for determining a symbol, etc.) as starting memory; When the variable display is performed for one starting memory stored by, the performance time until the variable display for the next starting memory of the one starting memory is performed is used to perform the variable performance and the stop performance of the identification symbol. A display control means (for example, sub CPU 201) that controls to perform and a pattern effect (for example, temporary variation) execution number determination means (for example, step S324, etc.), and effect mode determination capable of determining the effect mode for one or more starting memories stored by the holding means means (for example, step S372, etc.), wherein the effect mode determining means performs the symbol effect of the number of executions determined by the symbol effect execution number determining means for the start memory stored by the holding means; Specific performance determination means for dividing into predetermined units and determining a performance mode to be performed during execution of the symbol performance divided into the predetermined units regardless of the units of the starting memory, and one stored by the holding means. Alternatively, when a specific starting memory (for example, a starting memory in which a reach variation effect is recorded) is not included in a plurality of starting memories, the effect mode is determined for all the starting memories stored by the holding means. In addition, the performance mode for the last stored starting memory among the starting memories stored by the holding means is changed to the specific mode of the identification pattern even though the starting memory is not the specific starting memory. It is characterized by having suggestive effect determination means (for example, step S356, etc.) for determining a effect mode (for example, fake ready-to-win portent effect) that suggests that a variable effect will be performed.

According to the gaming machine of (1) above, the execution number of symbol effects (for example, temporary fluctuation) in which the identification symbol variation effect and the stop effect are performed is determined for the starting memory stored by the holding means. . That is, originally, one pattern performance is performed for each start memory stored by the reserve means, but one or more times of pattern performance is performed for each start memory stored by the reserve means. Since the number is determined, even though the variable display is for one starting memory, it looks as if the variable display is being performed for a plurality of starting memories. Moreover, the symbol effects determined for each start memory are divided into predetermined units regardless of the unit of the start memory. Then, an effect mode to be performed during execution of the symbol effect divided into the predetermined units is determined. Therefore, a part of the plurality of symbol effects determined for one starting memory and a plurality of patterns determined for other starting memories whose variable display is performed next to the variable display for the one starting memory It is also possible that an effect mode that extends over part of the symbol effect is determined. As a result, it is possible to determine the mode of presentation regardless of the result of one game. In addition, it is possible to execute a display performance that does not make the player aware of the variable display in units of start memory, and it is possible to suppress the decrease in interest.

Further, when the start memory stored by the holding means does not include a specific start memory in which variable display is performed in a specific manner (for example, reach variation effect), the player's expectation for the display effect is maintained. It can be difficult to let go. Therefore, in this case, the presentation mode is determined for all the starting memories stored by the holding means, and the last one is stored (the variable display is performed at the end) among the starting memories stored by the holding means. By determining a performance mode for a starting memory to a performance mode suggesting that a variable performance of an identification pattern is performed in a specific mode even though the starting memory is not a specific starting memory, the player can respond to the display performance. to maintain the expectations of

In addition, the "variable display of the identification pattern" here means a series of displays from the start of the variable display of the identification pattern to the stop display for one starting memory, and in one starting memory. On the other hand, the number of times of variable display is one even if the identification pattern variation effect and the stop effect are repeatedly performed a plurality of times.

In addition, the "stop effect" of the identification pattern means the stop effect (for example, temporary stop) of the identification pattern that is performed in the middle of one variable display and the stop of the identification pattern that is performed when one variable display is completed. This is intended to include both effects (for example, main stop).

Further, "When the variable display is performed for one starting memory, the variable performance and the stop performance of the identification pattern are performed using the performance time until the variable display for the next starting memory of the one starting memory is performed. "is performed" means not only the time during which the variable display is performed for one starting memory, but also includes all or part of the time required for the interval until the variable display for the next starting memory is performed. Therefore, the ``symbol effect in which the identification symbol fluctuation effect and the stop effect are performed'' is until the identification symbol stop effect is performed if it is in the middle of the variable display, and if it is the end of the variable display, the above interval is also It is intended to include

(2) In the gaming machine described in (1) above, the starting port (for example, the second starting port 440) in which a game ball can win, and the identification pattern based on the winning of the game ball to the starting port. A variation pattern determining means (for example, the main CPU 101) for determining a variation pattern when the variable display is performed is further provided, and the holding means (for example, the main CPU 101) determines that the game ball has won the starting hole. The starting memory can be reserved based on the starting memory stored in the holding means, and the symbol effect execution number determining means (for example, sub CPU 201) stores the starting memory stored in the holding means when a game ball wins the starting hole. is determined based on the variation pattern determined by the variation pattern determining means.

According to the gaming machine of (2) above, the execution number of symbol effects determined for the starting memory stored in the holding means is determined based on the variation pattern. More specifically, if the variation pattern has a relatively long variation time, the number of symbol performances executed increases, and if the variation pattern has a relatively short variation time, the number of symbol performances performed decreases. Therefore, the variation in the time required for one symbol performance is reduced, and it becomes difficult for the player to grasp that one or a plurality of symbol performances are being executed for one starting memory.

(3) The gaming machine according to (1) or (2) above, further comprising holding effect control means for controlling so that the image related to the starting memory stored in the holding means is displayed on the display means, The holding effect control means controls not to display the image related to the starting memory stored in the holding means at least when the effect mode determined by the specific effect determining means is displayed. is.

According to the game machine of (3) above, since the image related to the starting memory stored in the holding means is not displayed on the display means, the player is further prevented from being aware of the variable display in units of starting memory. can be done.

According to the game machine of Supplementary Note 14, it is possible to suppress the decrease in interest by enhancing the presentation effect by the movable body presentation.

[Appendix 15]
2. Description of the Related Art Conventionally, there is known a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine or a pachislot machine that performs a hit/lose determination and executes a game advantageous to a player according to the result of the hit/lose determination.

In this type of game machine, before the result of hit/lose determination is displayed, a movable body presentation is performed to activate the movable body in order to make the player expect that the result of hit/lose determination is advantageous to the player. There are things that make it possible to raise

As such a movable body effect, for example, a technique is known in which the movable body is moved by the expansion/contraction motion of the pantograph, and the movable body is tilted at the same time when the expansion/contraction motion of the pantograph starts (for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2011-229582). reference).

However, in the game machine of Patent Document 1, for example, when the operation of the movable body is started, multiple operations of the movable body, such as movement and tilting of the movable body, can be grasped, and there is a limit to enhancing the performance effect. There was a fear that interest would decline.

SUMMARY OF THE INVENTION The present invention has been made in view of such a point, and its object is to enhance the presentation effect by the presentation of a movable body, thereby suppressing the deterioration of interest.

(1) The game machine of Supplementary Note 15 includes display means (for example, the liquid crystal display device 16) that performs variable display of identification patterns based on the establishment of a predetermined condition, and information about the variable display that has not yet been performed. Reserving means (for example, step S54, step S55, etc.) capable of storing up to a predetermined number (for example, four) of (for example, a random number value for judging a big hit, a random number value for determining a symbol, etc.) as starting memory; When the variable display is performed for one starting memory stored by, the performance time until the variable display for the next starting memory of the one starting memory is performed is used to perform the variable performance and the stop performance of the identification symbol. and a display control means for controlling the execution of the number of pattern effects (for example, temporary fluctuation) in which the identification pattern variation effect and the stop effect are performed for the start memory stored by the holding means. Determinable pattern effect execution number determining means (for example, step S324) and effect mode determining means (for example, step S372) capable of determining the effect mode for one or more start memories stored by the holding means etc.), and the performance mode determination means includes a specific start memory (for example, a start memory in which reach fluctuation performance is recorded) among one or more start memories stored by the reserve means. when not, the number of starting memories for which the effect mode is to be determined is determined to be a different number each time, and the effect mode is determined for the starting memory for which the effect mode is to be determined In doing so, the symbol effect (for example, temporary fluctuation) of the number of executions determined by the symbol effect execution number determining means is divided into predetermined units, and the unit is divided into the predetermined units regardless of the unit of the start memory. Specific effect determination means for determining the effect mode (for example, character subtraction effect) to be performed during execution of the symbol effect, and the effect mode for the last stored starting memory among the starting memories stored by the holding means, Determination of suggesting performance to determine a performance mode (for example, fake ready-to-win portent performance) suggesting that the variation performance of the identification symbol is to be performed in the specific mode even though the starting memory is not the specific starting memory. It is characterized by having means (for example, step S356).

According to the gaming machine of (1) above, the execution number of symbol effects (for example, temporary fluctuation) in which the identification symbol variation effect and the stop effect are performed is determined for the starting memory stored by the holding means. . That is, originally, one pattern performance is performed for each start memory stored by the reserve means, but one or more times of pattern performance is performed for each start memory stored by the reserve means. Since the number is determined, even though the variable display is for one starting memory, it looks as if the variable display is being performed for a plurality of starting memories. Moreover, the symbol effects determined for each start memory are divided into predetermined units regardless of the unit of the start memory. Then, an effect mode to be performed during execution of the symbol effect divided into the predetermined units is determined. Therefore, a part of the plurality of symbol effects determined for one starting memory and a plurality of patterns determined for other starting memories whose variable display is performed next to the variable display for the one starting memory It is also possible that an effect mode that extends over part of the symbol effect is determined. As a result, it is possible to determine the mode of presentation regardless of the result of one game. In addition, it is possible to execute a display performance that does not make the player aware of the variable display in units of start memory, and it is possible to suppress the decrease in interest.

Further, when the starting memory stored by the holding means does not include a specific starting memory in which variable display is performed in a specific manner (for example, reach fluctuation), the player's expectation for the display performance is maintained. can become difficult. Therefore, in this case, the number of starting memories for which the effect mode is to be determined is determined to be a different number each time, and of the starting memories stored by the holding means, the last stored (last variable display) is performed) is determined to be a presentation mode suggesting that the variation presentation of the identification pattern is performed in a specific mode even though the starting memory is not a specific starting memory. To maintain a player's sense of expectation for performance.

In addition, the number of starting memories for which the effect mode is to be determined is determined to be a different number each time. In order not to easily grasp that the variable display is not performed (even if the performance mode suggesting that the variable display of the identification pattern is performed in a specific mode is displayed, the suggestive performance mode is false) It is for

In addition, the "variable display of the identification pattern" here means a series of displays from the start of the variable display of the identification pattern to the stop display for one starting memory, and in one starting memory. On the other hand, the number of times of variable display is one even if the identification pattern variation effect and the stop effect are repeatedly performed a plurality of times.

In addition, the "stop effect" of the identification pattern means the stop effect (for example, temporary stop) of the identification pattern that is performed in the middle of one variable display and the stop of the identification pattern that is performed when one variable display is completed. This is intended to include both effects (for example, main stop).

Further, "When the variable display is performed for one starting memory, the variable performance and the stop performance of the identification pattern are performed using the performance time until the variable display for the next starting memory of the one starting memory is performed. "is performed" means not only the time during which the variable display is performed for one starting memory, but also includes all or part of the time required for the interval until the variable display for the next starting memory is performed. Therefore, the ``symbol effect in which the identification symbol fluctuation effect and the stop effect are performed'' is until the identification symbol stop effect is performed if it is in the middle of the variable display, and if it is the end of the variable display, the above interval is also It is intended to include

(2) In the gaming machine described in (1) above, the starting port (for example, the second starting port 440) in which a game ball can win, and the identification pattern based on the winning of the game ball to the starting port. A variation pattern determining means (for example, step S57, etc.) for determining a variation pattern when the variable display is performed, wherein the holding means stores the starting memory based on the winning of the game ball in the starting hole. is configured to be able to hold the symbol effect execution number determination means, when a game ball wins in the start port, the execution number of the symbol effect for the starting memory stored in the holding means, It is characterized by determining based on the variation pattern determined by the variation pattern determining means.

According to the gaming machine of (2) above, the execution number of symbol effects determined for the starting memory stored in the holding means is determined based on the variation pattern. More specifically, if the variation pattern has a relatively long variation time, the number of symbol performances executed increases, and if the variation pattern has a relatively short variation time, the number of symbol performances performed decreases. Therefore, the variation in the time required for one symbol performance is reduced, and it becomes difficult for the player to grasp that one or a plurality of symbol performances are being executed for one starting memory.

(3) The gaming machine according to (1) or (2) above, further comprising holding effect control means for controlling so that the image related to the starting memory stored in the holding means is displayed on the display means, The holding effect control means controls not to display the image related to the starting memory stored in the holding means at least when the effect mode determined by the specific effect determining means is displayed. is.

According to the game machine of (3) above, since the image related to the starting memory stored in the holding means is not displayed on the display means, the player is further prevented from being aware of the variable display in units of starting memory. can be done.

According to the game machine of Supplementary Note 15, it is possible to enhance the performance effect by the movable body performance and suppress the decline in interest.

[Appendix 16]
Conventionally, in a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine, when a game ball is received in a starting hole, execution of a symbol variation game is suspended, and the suspended symbol variation game is executed to display a symbol combination indicating a big win. , gaming machines in which jackpot games are executed are known.

In this type of game machine, when the pattern variation game is being played, the first button effect as a big win notice suggesting the possibility of a big win and the possibility that the suspended pattern variation game will be a big win. (See, for example, paragraphs 0067 and 0075 of JP-A-2015-192817).

In recent years, there is a tendency to increase the types of effects to increase the effect of effects, as in the gaming machine described in Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2015-192817, for example.

However, although increasing the number of types of effects enhances the effect of the effects, it is required that such effects be processed in a short period of time in terms of the progress of the game. In particular, it takes longer than a predetermined amount of time to process large amounts of data, such as video data. It is

SUMMARY OF THE INVENTION The present invention has been made in view of such a point, and an object thereof is to provide a gaming machine capable of smoothly performing processing while suppressing a decline in interest.

(1) The gaming machine of Supplementary Note 16 includes display means (for example, the liquid crystal display device 16) that performs variable display of identification symbols based on the establishment of a predetermined condition, and information about the variable display that has not yet been performed. Reserving means (for example, step S54, step S55, etc.) capable of storing up to a predetermined number (for example, four) of (for example, a random number for judging a big hit, a random number for determining a symbol, etc.) as a starting memory, and the display means a special game executing means (for example, step S96) capable of executing a special game (for example, a jackpot game state) advantageous to the player when a specific result is displayed, and a game after the special game is executed index effect timing determining means (for example, scenario presetting process (FIG. 138), etc.) for determining in advance the execution timing of an index effect (subtraction effect) having a predetermined degree of expectation for the game state as the effect to be executed in the state; , effect mode determination means (for example, step S374) capable of determining the effect mode for one or more starting memories stored by said retaining means; and one or more starting memories stored by said retaining means effect information determining means (for example, , step S346, etc.), wherein when the index start memory is included in one or more start memories stored by the reserve means, the effect mode determination means changes the index effect to the Effect re-determining means (for example, step S372, etc.) for determining execution in the variable display related to one of the one or more starting memories instead of the execution timing determined by the index effect timing determining means. ), wherein the effect re-determining means determines that the specific starting memory and the index starting memory are included in the one or more starting memories stored by the holding means. When judged by the means, regardless of the execution timing determined by the index performance timing determining means, it can be determined that the index performance for the index start memory is performed prior to the variable display for the specific start memory. characterized by

According to the gaming machine of (1) above, since the execution timing of the index performance is determined in advance, even if the data volume of the index performance is large, there is a margin of time before the index performance is performed. processing can be performed. Further, when the specific starting memory and the index starting memory are included in the one or more starting memories stored by the holding means, the specific starting memory and the index starting memory are included regardless of the execution timing determined by the index performance timing determining means. Since it is determined so that the index performance for the index start memory is performed prior to the variable display for the start memory, the performance effect can also be enhanced. That is, when an index effect is performed during the execution of a variable display performed in a specific manner, if the degree of expectation for such an index effect is relatively low, the player will not be able to display the variable display. It is difficult to have expectations. In particular, even if the variable display develops into a variable display with a higher degree of expectation, it is still difficult for the player to have a sense of anticipation. Therefore, when a specific starting memory and an index starting memory are included in one or a plurality of starting memories stored by the holding means, the index effect is performed prior to the variable display of the specific starting memory. By doing so, the performance effect can be enhanced.

(2) In the gaming machine described in (1) above, the performance mode determining means includes the specific starting memory (reach or jackpot) in one or more starting memories stored by the holding means. It is characterized in that it is configured to determine the mode of presentation for the starting memory until the variable display of the specific starting memory is performed when the specific starting memory is displayed.

According to the gaming machine of (2) above, even if the starting memory stored by the holding means includes a specific starting memory in which variable display is performed in a specific manner (for example, reach variation effect), A decrease in interest can be suppressed. That is, when the starting memory stored by the holding means includes a specific starting memory in which variable display is performed in a specific manner (for example, reach variation effect), variable display is performed in a specific manner. In spite of this, when the result of the win-lose determination is a failure, even if there is a production mode that gives the player a high sense of expectation (for example, a character subtraction process is carried out) after that, such a production is performed. The player's interest in the aspect is reduced. In this regard, according to the gaming machine of (2) above, when a specific starting memory (reach or jackpot) is included in one or a plurality of starting memories stored by the holding means, the specific starting memory Since the effect mode for the starting memory is determined until the variable display of is performed, it is possible to suppress the decrease in interest.

According to the gaming machine of Supplementary Note 16, it is possible to smoothly perform processing while suppressing a decline in interest.

[Appendix 17]
Conventionally, in a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine, when a game ball is received in a starting hole, execution of a symbol variation game is suspended, and the suspended symbol variation game is executed to display a symbol combination indicating a big win. , gaming machines in which jackpot games are executed are known.

In this type of game machine, when the pattern variation game is being played, the first button effect as a big win notice suggesting the possibility of a big win and the possibility that the suspended pattern variation game will be a big win. (See, for example, paragraphs 0067 and 0075 of JP-A-2015-192817).

In recent years, there is a tendency to increase the types of effects to increase the effect of effects, as in the gaming machine described in Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2015-192817, for example.

However, although increasing the number of types of effects enhances the effect of the effects, it is required that such effects be processed in a short period of time in terms of the progress of the game. In particular, it takes longer than a predetermined amount of time to process large amounts of data, such as video data. It is

SUMMARY OF THE INVENTION The present invention has been made in view of such a point, and an object thereof is to provide a gaming machine capable of smoothly performing processing while suppressing a decline in interest.

(1) The game machine of Supplementary Note 17 includes display means (for example, the liquid crystal display device 16) that performs variable display of identification patterns based on the establishment of a predetermined condition, and information about the variable display that has not yet been performed. Reserving means (for example, step S54, step S55, etc.) capable of storing up to a predetermined number (for example, four) of (for example, a random number for judging a big hit, a random number for determining a symbol, etc.) as a starting memory, and the display means special game executing means (for example, step S96, etc.) capable of executing a special game (for example, a jackpot game state) advantageous to the player when a specific result is displayed in the starting memory stored by the holding means; On the other hand, symbol effect execution number determination means (for example, step S324 etc.) capable of determining the number of executions of symbol effects (for example, temporary fluctuation) in which the variation effect and stop effect of the identification symbol are performed, and the special game As effects to be executed in the game state after being executed, a first index effect having a relatively high degree of expectation (for example, a subtraction effect for the enemy character) and a degree of expectation relatively lower than the first index effect. and index effect timing determining means (for example, , scenario presetting process (FIG. 138)), and when a specific effect (for example, a reach variation effect) is performed in which the identification symbol is changed in a specific manner, the first index effect and/or the second Duplicate judgment means (for example, step S346) for judging whether or not the two-index production is to be performed, and production mode determination means (for example, step S372, etc.) capable of determining the production mode for the starting memory stored by the holding means. ), wherein the performance mode determination means determines the performance mode for the one or more starting memories that are subject to determination of the performance mode, and the execution determined by the symbol performance execution number determination means a specific performance determining means for dividing the number of the symbol performance into predetermined units and determining a performance mode to be performed during execution of the symbol performance divided into the predetermined units regardless of the unit of the starting memory; When it is determined by the duplication determination means that the second index performance is performed when the performance is performed, it is determined that the second index performance is performed in the pattern performance before the specific performance is performed. Thus, the second index effect is not performed when the specific effect is performed. It is characterized by having an index effect timing re-determining means (for example, step S358, etc.).

According to the gaming machine of (1) above, the execution timing of each of the first index effect and the second index effect is determined in advance. Also, since there is enough time before the first index effect and/or the second index effect is performed, smooth processing can be performed. Further, when it is determined that the second index effect will be performed when the specific effect (for example, the reach variation effect) is performed, the second index effect is performed in the pattern effect before the specific effect is performed. Since the second index effect is not performed when the specific effect is performed by being determined, the effect of the effect can also be enhanced. That is, when the second index effect is performed during execution of the variable display performed in a specific manner, it is difficult for the player to have expectations for the variable display. In particular, even if the variable display develops into a variable display with a higher degree of expectation, it is still difficult for the player to have a sense of anticipation. Therefore, the performance effect can be enhanced by performing the second index performance in the symbol performance before the specific performance is performed.

If the first index effect is executed a predetermined number of times (for example, before the enemy characters are completely destroyed) before the second index effect is executed a predetermined number of times (for example, before the allied characters are completely destroyed), an advantageous state is reached. (For example, it has a function of notifying that it is in a high probability game state). Further, when the second index effect is executed a predetermined number of times (for example, before allied characters are annihilated) before the first index effect is executed a predetermined number of times (for example, before the enemy characters are annihilated), the It has a function of notifying that it is in a disadvantageous gaming state (for example, low probability gaming state).

(2) In the gaming machine described in (1) above, the index effect timing determination means determines execution timings of the first index effect and the second index effect during execution of the special game, The performance mode determination means determines the performance mode of the starting memory stored by the holding means when the variable display is performed in a game state after the special game is executed.

According to the gaming machine of (2) above, since the execution timing of each of the first index effect and the second index effect is determined during execution of the special game, it is possible to perform the processing more smoothly.

(3) The gaming machine according to (1) or (2) above, further comprising holding effect control means for controlling so that the image related to the starting memory stored in the holding means is displayed on the display means, The suspension performance control means is characterized in that, at least when the performance mode determined by the specific performance determination means is displayed, the image related to the starting memory stored in the suspension means is controlled so as not to be displayed.

According to the game machine of (3) above, since the image related to the starting memory stored in the holding means is not displayed on the display means, it is possible to make the player unaware of the variable display in units of starting memory. As a result, it becomes possible to determine the mode of presentation without being bound by the result of one game, and the presentation effect can be enhanced.

According to the gaming machine of Supplementary Note 17, it is possible to smoothly perform processing while suppressing a decline in interest.

[Appendix 18]
Conventionally, in a game machine such as a pachinko machine, when a game ball is received in a starting hole, execution of a symbol variation game is suspended, and the suspended symbol variation game is executed to display a symbol combination indicating a big win. , gaming machines in which jackpot games are executed are known.

In this type of game machine, when the pattern variation game is being played, the first button effect as a big win notice suggesting the possibility of a big win and the possibility that the suspended pattern variation game will be a big win. (See, for example, paragraphs 0067 and 0075 of JP-A-2015-192817).

In recent years, there is a tendency to increase the types of effects to increase the effect of effects, as in the gaming machine described in Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2015-192817, for example.

However, although increasing the number of types of effects enhances the effect of the effects, it is required that such effects be processed in a short period of time in terms of the progress of the game. In particular, it takes longer than a predetermined amount of time to process large amounts of data, such as video data. It is

SUMMARY OF THE INVENTION The present invention has been made in view of such a point, and an object thereof is to provide a gaming machine capable of smoothly performing processing while suppressing a decline in interest.

(1) The game machine of Supplementary Note 18 includes display means (for example, the liquid crystal display device 16) that performs variable display of identification symbols based on the establishment of a predetermined condition, and information about the variable display that has not yet been performed. Reserving means (for example, step S54, step S55, etc.) capable of storing up to a predetermined number (for example, four) of (for example, a random number for judging a big hit, a random number for determining a symbol, etc.) as a starting memory, and the display means a special game executing means capable of executing a special game advantageous to the player (for example, a jackpot game state) when a specific result is displayed on the display; Symbol effect execution number determination means (for example, step S324, etc.) capable of determining the number of executions of symbol effects (for example, temporary fluctuation) in which a variable effect and a stop effect are performed, and a game state after the special game is executed. As effects executed in (for example, time-saving game state), a first index effect having a relatively high degree of expectation (for example, a subtraction effect for the enemy character) and a degree of expectation relatively lower than the first index effect index effect timing determination means for determining in advance the execution timing of each of the first index effect and the second index effect; Determining whether or not the first index effect and/or the second index effect is performed when a specific effect (for example, a reach variation effect) is performed in which the identification pattern is varied in a specific manner. Duplicate determination means (for example, step S346, etc.), and production mode determination means (for example, step S372, etc.) capable of determining a performance mode for the start memory stored by the holding means, wherein the performance mode determination means divides the symbol effects of the number of executions determined by the symbol effect execution number determination means into predetermined units in determining the effect mode for the one or more starting memories that are subject to determination of the effect mode. a specific effect determination means (for example, step S372) for determining the effect mode to be performed during the execution of the pattern effect divided into the predetermined units regardless of the unit of the starting memory; and the specific effect is performed. When it is determined by the duplication determination means that the second index effect is to be performed, the second index effect is determined to be performed in the symbol effect before the specific effect is performed. An index effect that prevents the second index effect from being performed when a specific effect is performed Timing re-determining means (for example, step S358, etc.) is provided, and when the specific effect is performed when the duplication determination means determines that the first index effect is performed when the specific effect is performed. , the first index effect is performed at a time.

According to the gaming machine of (1) above, the execution timing of each of the first index effect and the second index effect is determined in advance. Also, since there is enough time before the first index effect and/or the second index effect is performed, smooth processing can be performed. Further, when it is determined that the second index effect will be performed when the specific effect (for example, the reach variation effect) is performed, the second index effect is performed in the pattern effect before the specific effect is performed. Since the second index effect is not performed when the specific effect is performed by being determined, the effect of the effect can also be enhanced. That is, when the second index effect is performed during execution of the variable display performed in a specific manner, it is difficult for the player to have expectations for the variable display. In particular, even if the variable display develops into a variable display with a higher degree of expectation, it is still difficult for the player to have a sense of anticipation. Therefore, the performance effect can be enhanced by performing the second index performance in the symbol performance before the specific performance is performed.

If the first index effect is executed a predetermined number of times (for example, before the enemy characters are completely destroyed) before the second index effect is executed a predetermined number of times (for example, before the allied characters are completely destroyed), an advantageous state is reached. (For example, it has a function of notifying that it is in a high probability game state). Further, when the second index effect is executed a predetermined number of times (for example, before allied characters are annihilated) before the first index effect is executed a predetermined number of times (for example, before the enemy characters are annihilated), the It has a function of notifying that it is in a disadvantageous gaming state (for example, low probability gaming state).

Further, when it is determined that the first index performance is performed when the specific performance is performed, the first index performance is performed when the specific performance is performed. This is because when the first index effect is performed during the execution of the variable display performed in a specific mode, the player is highly likely to have expectations for the variable display. This is because the presentation effect can be enhanced by any of the variable displays.

(2) In the gaming machine described in (1) above, the index effect timing determination means determines execution timings of the first index effect and the second index effect during execution of the special game, The performance mode determination means determines the performance mode of the starting memory stored by the holding means when the variable display is performed in a game state after the special game is executed.

According to the gaming machine of (2) above, since the execution timing of each of the first index effect and the second index effect is determined during execution of the special game, it is possible to perform the processing more smoothly.

(3) In the gaming machine described in (1) or (2) above, a holding effect control means (for example, step S205) that controls so that an image related to starting memory stored in the holding means is displayed on the display means. etc.), wherein at least when the performance mode determined by the specific performance determination means is being displayed, the suspension effect control means controls so that the image related to the start memory stored in the suspension means is not displayed. characterized by

According to the game machine of (3) above, since the image related to the starting memory stored in the holding means is not displayed on the display means, it is possible to make the player unaware of the variable display in units of starting memory. As a result, it becomes possible to determine the mode of presentation without being bound by the result of one game, and the presentation effect can be enhanced.

According to the gaming machine of Supplementary Note 18, it is possible to smoothly perform processing while suppressing a decline in interest.

[Appendix 19]
Conventionally, in a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine, when a game ball is received in a starting hole, execution of a symbol variation game is suspended, and the suspended symbol variation game is executed to display a symbol combination indicating a big win. , gaming machines in which jackpot games are executed are known.

In this type of game machine, when the pattern variation game is being played, the first button effect as a big win notice suggesting the possibility of a big win and the possibility that the suspended pattern variation game will be a big win. (See, for example, paragraphs 0067 and 0075 of JP-A-2015-192817).

In recent years, there is a tendency to increase the types of effects to increase the effect of effects, as in the gaming machine described in Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2015-192817, for example.

However, although increasing the number of types of effects enhances the effect of the effects, it is required that such effects be processed in a short period of time in terms of the progress of the game. In particular, it takes longer than a predetermined amount of time to process large amounts of data, such as video data. It is

SUMMARY OF THE INVENTION The present invention has been made in view of such a point, and an object thereof is to provide a gaming machine capable of smoothly performing processing while suppressing a decline in interest.

(1) The gaming machine of Supplementary Note 19 includes display means (for example, the liquid crystal display device 16) that performs variable display of identification patterns based on the establishment of a predetermined condition, and information about the variable display that has not yet been performed. Reserving means (for example, step S54, step S55, etc.) capable of storing up to a predetermined number (for example, four) of (for example, a random number for judging a big hit, a random number for determining a symbol, etc.) as a starting memory, and the display means special game executing means (for example, step S96, etc.) capable of executing a special game (for example, a jackpot game state) advantageous to the player when a specific result is displayed in the starting memory stored by the holding means; On the other hand, symbol effect execution number determination means (for example, step S324 etc.) capable of determining the number of executions of symbol effects (for example, temporary fluctuation) in which the variation effect and stop effect of the identification symbol are performed, and the special game index effect determination means (for example, scenario presetting process (FIG. 138)) for determining in advance the execution timing of an index effect having a predetermined degree of expectation for the game state as the effect to be executed in the game state after the execution; , duplicate determination means (for example, step S346, etc.) for determining whether or not the index effect is performed when a specific effect (for example, reach variation effect) is performed in which the identification pattern is variably displayed in a specific mode. ), and an effect mode determining means (for example, step S372, etc.) capable of determining the effect mode for the starting memory stored by the holding means, wherein the effect mode determining means determines the effect mode. In determining the effect mode for the one or more starting memories, the symbol effect of the number of executions determined by the symbol effect execution number determining means is divided into predetermined units, and regardless of the unit of the starting memory First, a specific effect determination means for determining a performance mode to be performed during execution of the symbol performance divided into the predetermined units, and the duplication determination means determines that the index performance is not performed when the specific effect is performed. When it is determined, the execution number of symbol effects obtained by subtracting the number of executions of the index effect from the total number of executions of the symbol effects determined for the one or more starting memories for which the effect mode is to be determined is obtained. It is characterized by having a suggestive effect execution determining means for determining execution of a suggestive effect suggesting that the specific effect will be performed, prior to the specific effect only when it exists.

According to the gaming machine of (1) above, since the execution timing of the index performance is determined in advance, even if the data volume of the index performance is large, there is a margin of time before the index performance is performed. processing can be performed. Also, when it is determined that the index effect will not be performed when the specific effect (for example, the reach variation effect) is performed, the pattern effect determined for one or a plurality of start memories to be determined for the effect mode Only when the number of executions of the symbol performance is obtained by subtracting the number of executions of the index performance from the total number of executions (that is, only when it is greater than 0), the suggestive performance suggesting that the specific performance will be performed. Since it is executed prior to the production, it is possible to carry out an effective production such that a specific production is expected by the suggestive production while performing smooth processing.

(2) In the gaming machine described in (1) above, the suggestive effect execution determining means determines whether the specific effect (for example, reach variation) is executed in one or more starting memories stored by the holding means. each of the one or more starting memories stored by the holding means when it is determined by the duplication determination means that the index performance will be performed when the specific performance is performed Subtract the number obtained by subtracting 1 from the number of executions of the symbol performance in which the index performance is performed from the total number of executions of the symbol performance (for example, temporary fluctuation) determined for the above, and performed prior to the specific performance. It is characterized by determining the number of symbol effects capable of executing the suggestive effect (prediction of ready-to-win).

According to the gaming machine of (2) above, when the duplication determination means determines that the index performance is to be performed when the specific performance is performed, the suggestive performance is performed at an appropriate timing prior to the specific performance. As a result, a more effective production can be performed.

(3) The gaming machine according to (1) or (2) above, further comprising holding effect control means for controlling so that the image related to the starting memory stored in the holding means is displayed on the display means, The suspension performance control means is characterized in that, at least when the performance mode determined by the specific performance determination means is displayed, the image related to the starting memory stored in the suspension means is controlled so as not to be displayed.

According to the game machine of (3) above, since the image related to the starting memory stored in the holding means is not displayed on the display means, it is possible to make the player unaware of the variable display in units of starting memory. As a result, it becomes possible to determine the mode of presentation without being bound by the result of one game, and the presentation effect can be enhanced.

According to the gaming machine of Supplementary Note 19, it is possible to smoothly perform processing while suppressing a decline in interest.

[Appendix 20]
Conventionally, in a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine, when a game ball is received in a starting hole, execution of a symbol variation game is suspended, and the suspended symbol variation game is executed to display a symbol combination indicating a big win. , gaming machines in which jackpot games are executed are known.

In this type of game machine, when the pattern variation game is being played, the first button effect as a big win notice suggesting the possibility of a big win and the possibility that the suspended pattern variation game will be a big win. (See, for example, paragraphs 0067 and 0075 of JP-A-2015-192817).

In recent years, there is a tendency to increase the types of effects to increase the effect of effects, as in the gaming machine described in Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2015-192817, for example.

However, although increasing the number of types of effects enhances the effect of the effects, it is required that such effects be processed in a short period of time in terms of the progress of the game. In particular, it takes longer than a predetermined amount of time to process large amounts of data, such as video data. It is

SUMMARY OF THE INVENTION The present invention has been made in view of such a point, and an object thereof is to provide a gaming machine capable of smoothly performing processing while suppressing a decline in interest.

(1) The gaming machine of Supplementary note 20 includes display means (for example, the liquid crystal display device 16) that displays a predetermined effect image, and display control means (for example, display a control circuit 204) and a sound output control means (for example, a sound control circuit 205) for controlling the output of a predetermined effect sound, and the sound output control means systematically outputs the effect tone color using a plurality of channels. In accordance with the change in the mode of the effect image displayed on the display means, the effect timbre output from the channel is changed, while the channel of the system of the identification pattern is fixed. and mute the output sound from the channel of the system of the identification pattern in accordance with the aspect of the variation performance of the identification pattern.

According to the gaming machine of (1) above, it is possible to omit unnecessary processing without making the player feel uncomfortable, and to smoothly perform the processing while suppressing the decrease in interest. The information image related to the game machine corresponds to, for example, information to be transmitted to the player or the hall attendant regardless of the result of the win/lose determination. Specific examples thereof include an error message screen when an error occurs, a warning image when fraud is committed, a recovery screen after a power failure, and the like.

It should be noted that the present invention can also employ the following configuration as an effect that can give the player a feeling of anticipation for the result of the win-lose determination, for example. That is, the gaming machine is configured to be capable of progressing a game by receiving power supply, and includes lottery means for performing win/loss determination based on the establishment of a predetermined condition, display means for displaying a predetermined effect image, A display control means capable of executing control related to the variable performance of the identification pattern as a main performance and executing control related to other performances as a secondary performance, a speaker for outputting a performance sound, and displayed by the display means and a sound output control means for controlling so that a production sound that matches the production image is output from the speaker, and the display control means provides a production having a predetermined degree of expectation for the result of the hit/loss determination, A specific effect control means for executing the control for the character effect as a main effect and the control for the variation effect of the identification pattern as a secondary effect, and the control for the variation effect of the identification symbol being executed as a main effect. As an effect when the supply of the power supply is stopped and the supply of the power is restored after that, the control of the variation effect of the identification pattern is executed as a secondary effect, but the power supply is restored. It has a return performance control means for controlling so that the performance image is mainly displayed, and the sound output control means starts the variable performance of the identification pattern when the variation performance of the identification pattern is not displayed by the specific performance control means. The game machine has a variable sound output control means which does not output a variable sound but outputs a variable sound for the variable performance of the identification pattern when the variable performance of the identification pattern is not displayed by the return performance control means. Even in such a gaming machine, it is possible to omit unnecessary processing without giving the player a sense of discomfort, and to smoothly perform processing while suppressing a decrease in interest. The main effect is the effect on the side that is the subject of the effect and is the side where the player's gaze is directed. It is a performance on the side that is difficult to face.

According to the gaming machine of Supplementary Note 20, it is possible to smoothly perform processing while suppressing a decline in interest.

[Appendix 21]
Conventionally, in a game machine such as a pachinko machine, when a game ball is received in a starting hole, execution of a symbol variation game is suspended, and the suspended symbol variation game is executed to display a symbol combination indicating a big win. , gaming machines in which jackpot games are executed are known.

In this type of game machine, when the pattern variation game is being played, the first button effect as a big win notice suggesting the possibility of a big win and the possibility that the suspended pattern variation game will be a big win. (See, for example, paragraphs 0067 and 0075 of JP-A-2015-192817).

In recent years, there is a tendency to increase the types of effects to enhance the effect of effects, as in the gaming machine described in JP-A-2015-192817 1, for example.

However, although increasing the number of types of effects enhances the effect of the effects, it is required that such effects be processed in a short period of time in terms of the progress of the game. In particular, it takes longer than a predetermined amount of time to process large amounts of data, such as video data. It is

SUMMARY OF THE INVENTION The present invention has been made in view of such a point, and an object thereof is to provide a gaming machine capable of smoothly performing processing while suppressing a decline in interest.

(1) The gaming machine of Supplementary Note 21 is a gaming machine that outputs a warning sound when a predetermined error occurs, and includes lottery means (for example, step S117) that performs win-lose determination based on the establishment of a predetermined condition. , a display means (for example, a liquid crystal display device 16) for displaying a predetermined effect image, and control of the variation effect of the identification pattern can be executed, and control of the expected effect image based on the result of the hit/loss determination is performed. Executable display control means (for example, display control circuit 204), a speaker (for example, speaker 24) that outputs a production sound, and a production image displayed by the display means, including the warning sound and a sound output control means (for example, a sound control circuit 205) for controlling output sound from the speaker, wherein the sound output control means sets a predetermined degree of expectation for the result of the win/lose determination. It has a specific output control means (for example, step S904) for muting the output for the variable performance of the identification symbol while maintaining the output for the warning sound when the specific performance is executed. It is characterized.

According to the gaming machine of (1) above, it is possible to omit unnecessary processing without making the player feel uncomfortable, and to smoothly perform the processing while suppressing the decrease in interest. The information image related to the game machine corresponds to, for example, information to be transmitted to the player or the hall attendant regardless of the result of the win/lose determination. Specific examples thereof include an error message screen when an error occurs, a warning image when fraud is committed, a recovery screen after a power failure, and the like.

(2) In the gaming machine described in (1) above, a plurality of channels are capable of outputting effect tones according to the system, and the effect tones output from the channels are output in accordance with the effect images displayed on the display means. A changeable shared channel, a warning system channel, and an identification pattern system channel are provided, and the specific output control means changes the effect tone color through the shared channel according to the effect image displayed on the display means. When the specific performance is executed, the state of the warning system channel is maintained, and the output from the identification pattern system channel is muted.

The gaming machine of (2) above is a more specific representation of (1) above, omitting unnecessary processing without giving the player a feeling of discomfort, and smoothly processing while suppressing a decrease in interest. It is possible to do

According to the gaming machine of Supplementary Note 21, it is possible to smoothly perform processing while suppressing a decline in interest.

[Appendix 22]
2. Description of the Related Art Conventionally, among gaming machines such as pachinko machines, there has been known a gaming machine in which winning/losing determination is performed and symbols are variably displayed, and when the variably displayed symbols are stopped and displayed, the result of the game is displayed. Then, when the result of the game is a specific result, a special game advantageous to the player is performed.

In this type of gaming machine, before the result of the win/lose determination is displayed, a display effect is performed to make the user expect that a special game may be played, thereby enhancing the effect of the effect (for example, See JP-A-2006-246964).

However, in the gaming machine described in Patent Document 1, since the display effect is performed only for the win-lose determination unit, if the display effect is not such that a special game can be expected to be performed, the changing display effect is displayed. There is a possibility that the player may lose his sense of anticipation for the variable display of patterns, and at that point, his interest may decrease.

The present invention has been made in view of such a point, and its object is to prevent the player from being conscious of the display performance in units of winning/losing determination, thereby suppressing the loss of interest.

(1) The game machine of Supplementary Note 22 includes display means (for example, a liquid crystal display device 16) that performs variable display of an identification pattern based on the establishment of a predetermined condition, and the following display after one variable display is performed. Display control means (for example, a display control circuit 204) for controlling the identification pattern to perform a variation effect and a stop effect before the variable display is performed; and variation of the identification pattern for each variable display. Design effect execution number determination means (for example, step S324) capable of determining the number of executions of symbol effects in which effects and stop effects are performed, and effect mode determination means capable of determining effect modes for a plurality of variable displays. (for example, step S372, etc.), wherein the effect mode determining means divides the symbol effect of the number of executions determined by the symbol effect execution number determining means into predetermined units, and divides into the predetermined units. It is characterized by having specific effect determination means (for example, step S372, etc.) for determining the effect mode to be performed during execution of the symbol effect.

According to the gaming machine of (1) above, the execution number of symbol effects (for example, temporary variation) in which the identification symbol variation effect and the stop effect are performed is determined for each variable display. That is, originally, one symbol effect is performed for each variable display, but since the execution number of one or more symbol effects is determined for each start memory, one variable display Although it is a single game), it looks as if a plurality of variable displays (a plurality of games) are being performed. Moreover, each symbol effect is divided into predetermined units regardless of the game unit. Then, an effect mode to be performed during execution of the symbol effect divided into the predetermined units is determined. As a result, it is possible to determine the mode of presentation regardless of the result of one game. In addition, it is possible to execute a display effect that does not make the player aware of the variable display for each game, and it is possible to suppress the decrease in interest.

The term "variable display of identification symbols" as used herein means a series of displays from the start of the variable display of identification symbols to the stop display for one game. On the other hand, the number of times of variable display is one even if the identification pattern variation effect and the stop effect are repeatedly performed a plurality of times.

In addition, the "stop effect" of the identification pattern means the stop effect (for example, temporary stop) of the identification pattern that is performed in the middle of one variable display and the stop of the identification pattern that is performed when one variable display is completed. This is intended to include both effects (for example, main stop).

(2) In the gaming machine described in (1) above, the effect mode determining means determines one or a plurality of variable displays as a effect section, and includes the effect mode as a section effect to be performed in the effect period. A performance mode for the variable display is determined, and the symbol performance of the execution number determined by the symbol performance execution number determining means is divided into predetermined units for the variable display included in the performance section. and section performance mode determination means for determining a performance mode to be performed during execution of the symbol performance divided into the predetermined units irrespective of the units of the variable display.

According to the gaming machine of (2) above, since the execution number of symbol effects is determined for a plurality of variable displays included in the effect section, it is possible to further prevent the player from being conscious of the variable display for each game. can be

(3) In the gaming machine described in (2) above, the effect mode determination means includes part of the symbol effect of the number of executions determined for one variable display included in the effect interval, and A part of the pattern effect of the number of executions determined for other variable displays included in the variable display can be divided as a predetermined unit across a plurality of variable displays. .

According to the gaming machine (3) above,
There is a production mode that spans part of the pattern production determined for one variable display included in the production section and part of a plurality of pattern productions determined for the other variable display included in the production section. may be determined. As a result, it is possible to determine the mode of presentation regardless of the result of one game. In addition, it is possible to execute a display effect that does not make the player aware of the variable display for each game, and it is possible to suppress the decrease in interest.

According to the gaming machine of Supplementary Note 22, it is possible to suppress a decline in interest by making the player unconscious of the display effects in units of win/lose determination.

[Appendix 23]
2. Description of the Related Art Conventionally, among gaming machines such as pachinko machines, there has been known a gaming machine in which winning/losing determination is performed and symbols are variably displayed, and when the variably displayed symbols are stopped and displayed, the result of the game is displayed. Then, when the result of the game is a specific result, a special game advantageous to the player is performed.

In this type of gaming machine, before the result of the win/lose determination is displayed, a display effect is performed to make the user expect that a special game may be played, thereby enhancing the effect of the effect (for example, See JP-A-2006-246964).

However, in the gaming machine described in Patent Document 1, since the display effect is performed only for the win-lose determination unit, if the display effect is not such that a special game can be expected to be performed, the changing display effect is displayed. There is a possibility that the player may lose his sense of anticipation for the variable display of patterns, and at that point, his interest may decrease.

The present invention has been made in view of such a point, and its object is to prevent the player from being conscious of the display performance in units of win-lose determination, and to preferably suppress the decrease in interest. .

(1) The game machine of Supplementary Note 23 includes display means (for example, the liquid crystal display device 16) that performs variable display of identification symbols based on the establishment of a predetermined condition, and information about the variable display that has not yet been performed. Reserving means (for example, step S54, step S55, etc.) capable of storing up to a predetermined number (for example, four) of (for example, a random number value for judging a big hit, a random number value for determining a symbol, etc.) as starting memory; (For example, step S54, step S55, etc.)). When the variable display is performed for one starting memory stored by (for example, step S54, step S55, etc.)), the performance time until the variable display for the next starting memory of the one starting memory is performed. Display control means (for example, step S205 etc.) for controlling so that the variation effect and the stop effect of the identification symbol are performed using, and the variation effect of the identification symbol for the start memory stored by the holding means Symbol effect execution number determination means (for example, step S324) capable of determining the number of executions of symbol effects (for example, temporary fluctuation) in which stop effects are performed, and one or more start memories stored by the holding means When a specific starting memory (reach or big hit) is included in the starting memory, an effect mode determining means (for example, , step S372, etc.), wherein the performance mode determination means determines the number of executions determined by the symbol performance execution number determination means for the starting memory until the variable display of the specific starting memory is performed. a specific performance determining means for dividing the pattern performance into predetermined units and determining a performance mode to be performed during execution of the pattern performance divided into the predetermined units regardless of the unit of the starting memory, and The effect determination means determines the effect mode to be performed during the execution of the pattern effect divided into the predetermined units by combining the start memory stored prior to the specific start memory and the specific start memory. It is characterized in that it is configured not to determine a performance mode straddling the specific start memory and a start memory stored later than the specific start memory although the straddling performance mode can be determined.

According to the gaming machine of (1) above, the execution number of symbol effects (for example, temporary fluctuation) in which the identification symbol variation effect and the stop effect are performed is determined for the starting memory stored by the holding means. . That is, originally, one pattern performance is performed for each start memory stored by the reserve means, but one or more times of pattern performance is performed for each start memory stored by the reserve means. Since the number is determined, even though the variable display is for one starting memory, it looks as if the variable display is being performed for a plurality of starting memories. Moreover, the symbol effects determined for each start memory are divided into predetermined units regardless of the unit of the start memory. Then, an effect mode to be performed during execution of the symbol effect divided into the predetermined units is determined. Therefore, a part of the plurality of symbol effects determined for one starting memory and a plurality of patterns determined for other starting memories whose variable display is performed next to the variable display for the one starting memory It is also possible that an effect mode that extends over part of the symbol effect is determined. As a result, it is possible to determine the mode of presentation regardless of the result of one game. In addition, it is possible to execute a display performance that does not make the player aware of the variable display in units of start memory, and it is possible to suppress the decrease in interest.

In addition, when the starting memory stored by the holding means includes a specific starting memory in which variable display is performed in a specific manner (for example, reach variation effect), variable display is performed in a specific manner. In spite of this, when the result of the hit-lose determination is a failure, even if there is a performance mode that can give the player a high sense of expectation (for example, a character subtraction process is performed) after that, The player's interest in the mode of presentation is reduced. Therefore, according to the gaming machine of (1) above, when a plurality of specific starting memories are included in the plurality of starting memories stored by the holding means, the starting memory is the first among the plurality of specific starting memories. A performance mode is determined for the starting memory up to the earliest specified starting memory variably displayed, and the performance mode is not determined for the starting memory variably displayed after the earliest specific starting memory. As a result, it is possible to suppress the decline in interest.

Also, in determining the performance mode to be performed during the execution of the pattern performance divided into predetermined units, the performance mode that straddles the start memory stored prior to the specific start memory and the specific start memory is determined. I can. As a result, it is possible to determine the mode of presentation regardless of the result of one game. In addition, it is possible to execute a display performance that does not make the player aware of the variable display in units of start memory, and it is possible to suppress the decrease in interest. On the other hand, it is arranged not to determine an effect mode extending over a specific starting memory and a starting memory stored later than the specific starting memory. As a result, the player's gaze can be directed to the variation performance of the identification pattern performed in a specific mode rather than the performance mode performed during the execution of the pattern performance, and the player can expect the variation performance. can be done.

In addition, the "variable display of the identification pattern" here means a series of displays from the start of the variable display of the identification pattern to the stop display for one starting memory, and in one starting memory. On the other hand, the number of times of variable display is one even if the identification pattern variation effect and the stop effect are repeatedly performed a plurality of times.

In addition, the "stop effect" of the identification pattern means the stop effect (for example, temporary stop) of the identification pattern that is performed in the middle of one variable display and the stop of the identification pattern that is performed when one variable display is completed. This is intended to include both effects (for example, main stop).

Further, "When the variable display is performed for one starting memory, the variable performance and the stop performance of the identification pattern are performed using the performance time until the variable display for the next starting memory of the one starting memory is performed. "is performed" means not only the time during which the variable display is performed for one starting memory, but also includes all or part of the time required for the interval until the variable display for the next starting memory is performed. Therefore, the ``symbol effect in which the identification symbol fluctuation effect and the stop effect are performed'' is until the identification symbol stop effect is performed if it is in the middle of the variable display, and if it is the end of the variable display, the above interval is also It is intended to include

(2) The gaming machine according to (1) above, further comprising a holding effect control means for controlling the image related to the start memory stored in the holding means to be displayed in a predetermined display area, wherein the holding effect control The means is characterized in that, at least when the performance mode determined by the specific performance determination means is displayed, the image related to the starting memory stored in the holding means is controlled so as not to be displayed.

According to the game machine of (2) above, since the image related to the starting memory stored in the holding means is not displayed on the display means, it is possible to further prevent the player from being conscious of the variable display in the starting memory unit. can be done.

(3) In the gaming machine described in (1) or (2) above, the performance mode determining means includes the specific starting memory in one or more starting memories stored by the holding means. When there is no starting memory, the performance mode is determined for all the starting memories stored by the holding means, and the performance mode for the starting memory last stored among the starting memories stored by the holding means is set to the starting memory. suggesting effect determination means (for example, step S358, etc.) for determining a effect mode suggesting that the identification symbol variation effect is to be performed in a specific mode even though the is not the specific starting memory. and

According to the gaming machine of (3) above, when the specific starting memory is not included in the one or more starting memories stored by the holding means, there is no need to re-determine the effect mode. Although it is unlikely that the above burden will increase, it is considered difficult to maintain the player's sense of expectation for the display effect. Therefore, it is suggested that the effect mode for the last stored start memory among the start memories stored by the holding means is not a specific start memory, but the identification pattern variation effect is performed in a specific mode. By determining the effect mode, it is possible to maintain the player's sense of expectation for the display effect.

According to the gaming machine of Supplementary Note 23, it is possible to suppress a decline in interest by not making the player aware of the display effects in units of win/lose determination.

[Appendix 24]
2. Description of the Related Art Conventionally, among gaming machines such as pachinko machines, there has been known a gaming machine in which winning/losing determination is performed and symbols are variably displayed, and when the variably displayed symbols are stopped and displayed, the result of the game is displayed. Then, when the result of the game is a specific result, a special game advantageous to the player is performed.

In this type of gaming machine, before the result of the win/lose determination is displayed, a display effect is performed to make the user expect that a special game may be played, thereby enhancing the effect of the effect (for example, See JP-A-2006-246964).

However, in the gaming machine described in Patent Document 1, since the display effect is performed only for the win-lose determination unit, if the display effect is not such that a special game can be expected to be performed, the changing display effect is displayed. There is a possibility that the player may lose his sense of anticipation for the variable display of patterns, and at that point, his interest may decrease.

The present invention has been made in view of such a point, and its object is to prevent the player from being conscious of the display effect in units of winning/losing determination, and preferably to suppress the decrease in interest.

(1) The game machine of Supplementary Note 24 includes display means (for example, the liquid crystal display device 16) that performs variable display of identification patterns based on the establishment of a predetermined condition, and information about the variable display that has not yet been performed. (For example, a random number for judging a big hit, a random number for determining a symbol, etc.) can be stored up to a predetermined number as starting memory (for example, step S54, step S55, etc.); When the variable display is performed for the starting memory, control is performed so that the variable performance and the stop performance of the identification pattern are performed using the performance time until the variable display for the next starting memory of the one starting memory is performed. and a display control means capable of determining the execution number of symbol effects (for example, temporary fluctuation) in which the identification symbol variation effect and stop effect are performed for the starting memory stored by the holding means. a number determining means stage (for example, step S324, etc.); an effect mode determining means stage (for example, step S372, etc.) capable of determining the effect mode for one or more starting memories stored by the holding means; when the specific starting memory is not included in one or a plurality of starting memories stored by the retaining means, the effect mode determining means includes all the starting memories stored by the retaining means. On the other hand, when determining the effect mode and determining the effect mode for all the starting memories stored by the holding means, the symbol effect of the number of executions determined by the symbol effect execution number determining means is set to a predetermined number. It is characterized by having a specific performance determining means for dividing into units and determining a performance mode to be performed during execution of the symbol performance divided into the predetermined units (irrespective of the units of the starting memory).

According to the gaming machine of (1) above, the execution number of symbol effects (for example, temporary fluctuation) in which the identification symbol variation effect and the stop effect are performed is determined for the starting memory stored by the holding means. . That is, originally, one pattern performance is performed for each start memory stored by the reserve means, but one or more times of pattern performance is performed for each start memory stored by the reserve means. Since the number is determined, even though the variable display is for one starting memory, it looks as if the variable display is being performed for a plurality of starting memories. Moreover, the symbol effects determined for each start memory are divided into predetermined units regardless of the unit of the start memory. Then, an effect mode to be performed during execution of the symbol effect divided into the predetermined units is determined. Therefore, a part of the plurality of symbol effects determined for one starting memory and a plurality of patterns determined for other starting memories whose variable display is performed next to the variable display for the one starting memory It is also possible that an effect mode that extends over part of the symbol effect is determined. As a result, it is possible to determine the mode of presentation regardless of the result of one game. In addition, it is possible to execute a display performance that does not make the player aware of the variable display in units of start memory, and it is possible to suppress the decrease in interest.

By the way, when the starting memory memorized by the holding means does not include a specific starting memory in which a variable display is performed in a specific manner (for example, reach variation effect), the starting memory stored by the holding means Since the burden on control is less than when a specific starting memory is included in the holding means, and it is possible to determine the performance mode for more starting memories as targets, all the starting memories stored by the holding means He is trying to determine the mode of presentation.

In addition, the "variable display of the identification pattern" here means a series of displays from the start of the variable display of the identification pattern to the stop display for one starting memory, and in one starting memory. On the other hand, the number of times of variable display is one even if the identification pattern variation effect and the stop effect are repeatedly performed a plurality of times.

In addition, the "stop effect" of the identification pattern means the stop effect (for example, temporary stop) of the identification pattern that is performed in the middle of one variable display and the stop of the identification pattern that is performed when one variable display is completed. This is intended to include both effects (for example, main stop).

Further, "When the variable display is performed for one starting memory, the variable performance and the stop performance of the identification pattern are performed using the performance time until the variable display for the next starting memory of the one starting memory is performed. "is performed" means not only the time during which the variable display is performed for one starting memory, but also includes all or part of the time required for the interval until the variable display for the next starting memory is performed. Therefore, the ``symbol effect in which the identification symbol fluctuation effect and the stop effect are performed'' is until the identification symbol stop effect is performed if it is in the middle of the variable display, and if it is the end of the variable display, the above interval is also It is intended to include

(2) In the gaming machine described in (1) above,
A variation pattern for determining a variation pattern when the variable display of the identification pattern is performed based on a starting port (for example, the second starting port 440) in which the game ball can win and the winning of the game ball to the starting port. determining means (for example, step S173, etc.); Determining means (for example, sub CPU 201) determines the number of executions of the symbol effect for the starting memory stored in the holding means when the game ball wins in the starting hole determined by the variation pattern determining means. It is characterized by determining based on a variation pattern.

According to the gaming machine of (2) above, the execution number of symbol effects determined for the starting memory stored in the holding means is determined based on the variation pattern. More specifically, if the variation pattern has a relatively long variation time, the number of symbol performances executed increases, and if the variation pattern has a relatively short variation time, the number of symbol performances performed decreases. Therefore, the variation in the time required for one symbol performance is reduced, and it becomes difficult for the player to grasp that one or a plurality of symbol performances are being executed for one starting memory.

(3) In the gaming machine described in (1) or (2) above, a holding effect control means (for example, step S205) that controls so that an image related to starting memory stored in the holding means is displayed on the display means. etc.), wherein at least when the performance mode determined by the specific performance determination means is being displayed, the suspension effect control means controls so that the image related to the start memory stored in the suspension means is not displayed. It is characterized by

According to the game machine of (3) above, since the image related to the starting memory stored in the holding means is not displayed on the display means, the player is further prevented from being aware of the variable display in units of starting memory. can be done.

According to the gaming machine of Supplementary Note 24, it is possible to suppress the decline in interest by not making the player aware of the display effect in units of hit/lose determination.

[Appendix 25]
2. Description of the Related Art Conventionally, among gaming machines such as pachinko machines, there has been known a gaming machine in which winning/losing determination is performed and symbols are variably displayed, and when the variably displayed symbols are stopped and displayed, the result of the game is displayed. Then, when the result of the game is a specific result, a special game advantageous to the player is performed.

In this type of gaming machine, before the result of the win/lose determination is displayed, a display effect is performed to make the user expect that a special game may be played, thereby enhancing the effect of the effect (for example, See JP-A-2006-246964).

However, in the gaming machine described in Patent Document 1, since the display effect is performed only for the win-lose determination unit, if the display effect is not such that a special game can be expected to be performed, the changing display effect is displayed. There is a possibility that the player may lose his sense of anticipation for the variable display of patterns, and at that point, his interest may decrease.

The present invention has been made in view of such a point, and its object is to prevent the player from being conscious of the display effect in units of winning/losing determination, and preferably to suppress the decrease in interest.

(1) The gaming machine of Supplementary Note 25 includes display means (for example, the liquid crystal display device 16) that performs variable display of an identification pattern based on the establishment of a predetermined condition, and information about the variable display that has not yet been performed. (For example, a random number for judging a big hit, a random number for determining a symbol, etc.) can be stored up to a predetermined number as starting memory (for example, step S54, step S55, etc.); When the variable display is performed for the starting memory, control is performed so that the variable performance and the stop performance of the identification pattern are performed using the performance time until the variable display for the next starting memory of the one starting memory is performed. display control means (for example, step S205, etc.), and the execution number of symbol effects (for example, temporary fluctuation) in which the identification symbol variation effect and stop effect are performed for the start memory stored by the holding means. (for example, step S324, etc.), and effect mode determination means (for example, step S372, etc.), and the effect mode determination means includes a specific start memory (for example, a start memory in which a reach variation effect is recorded) among one or more start memories stored by the reserve means. When not set, a performance mode (for example, character subtraction performance) is determined for all starting memories stored by the holding means, and a performance mode is determined for all starting memories stored by the holding means. is determined by dividing the symbol performance of the number of executions determined by the symbol performance execution number determining means into predetermined units, and determining the performance mode to be performed during execution of the symbol performance divided into the predetermined units. and the performance mode for the last-stored starting memory among the starting memories stored by the specific effect determining means and the holding means, even though the starting memory is not the specific starting memory, in the specific mode. It is characterized by having suggestive effect determination means (for example, step S358, etc.) for determining a effect mode (for example, fake ready-to-win portent effect) suggesting that the identification pattern variable effect is to be performed.

According to the gaming machine of (1) above, the execution number of symbol effects (for example, temporary fluctuation) in which the identification symbol variation effect and the stop effect are performed is determined for the starting memory stored by the holding means. . That is, originally, one pattern performance is performed for each start memory stored by the reserve means, but one or more times of pattern performance is performed for each start memory stored by the reserve means. Since the number is determined, even though the variable display is for one starting memory, it looks as if the variable display is being performed for a plurality of starting memories. Moreover, the symbol effects determined for each start memory are divided into predetermined units regardless of the unit of the start memory. Then, an effect mode to be performed during execution of the symbol effect divided into the predetermined units is determined. Therefore, a part of the plurality of symbol effects determined for one starting memory and a plurality of patterns determined for other starting memories whose variable display is performed next to the variable display for the one starting memory It is also possible that an effect mode that extends over part of the symbol effect is determined. As a result, it is possible to determine the mode of presentation regardless of the result of one game. In addition, it is possible to execute a display performance that does not make the player aware of the variable display in units of start memory, and it is possible to suppress the decrease in interest.

Further, when the starting memory stored by the holding means does not include a specific starting memory in which variable display is performed in a specific manner (for example, reach fluctuation), the player's expectation for the display performance is maintained. can become difficult. Therefore, in this case, the rendering mode is determined for all the starting memories stored by the holding means, and the rendering mode for the starting memory last stored among the starting memories stored by the holding means is set to the starting memory. The player's expectation for the display performance is maintained by determining the performance mode suggesting that the identification pattern variation performance is performed in a specific mode even though the memory is not a specific starting memory. ing.

In addition, if the starting memory stored by the holding means includes a specific starting memory in which variable display is performed in a specific manner (for example, reach fluctuation), even if variable display is performed in a specific manner In spite of this, when the result of the hit-lose determination is a failure, even if a production mode with a relatively high degree of expectation is performed (for example, character subtraction processing is performed) after that, the performance mode will not be performed. The player's interest is reduced. Therefore, according to the gaming machine of (1) above, when a plurality of specific starting memories are included in the plurality of starting memories stored by the holding means, the starting memory is the first among the plurality of specific starting memories. A performance mode is determined for the starting memory up to the earliest specified starting memory variably displayed, and the performance mode is not determined for the starting memory variably displayed after the earliest specific starting memory. As a result, it is possible to suppress the decline in interest.

In addition, the "variable display of the identification pattern" here means a series of displays from the start of the variable display of the identification pattern to the stop display for one starting memory, and in one starting memory. On the other hand, the number of times of variable display is one even if the identification pattern variation effect and the stop effect are repeatedly performed a plurality of times.

In addition, the "stop effect" of the identification pattern means the stop effect (for example, temporary stop) of the identification pattern that is performed in the middle of one variable display and the stop of the identification pattern that is performed when one variable display is completed. This is intended to include both effects (for example, main stop).

Further, "When the variable display is performed for one starting memory, the variable performance and the stop performance of the identification pattern are performed using the performance time until the variable display for the next starting memory of the one starting memory is performed. "is performed" means not only the time during which the variable display is performed for one starting memory, but also includes all or part of the time required for the interval until the variable display for the next starting memory is performed. Therefore, the ``symbol effect in which the identification symbol fluctuation effect and the stop effect are performed'' is until the identification symbol stop effect is performed if it is in the middle of the variable display, and if it is the end of the variable display, the above interval is also It is intended to include

(2) In the gaming machine described in (1) above, the starting port (for example, the second starting port 440) in which a game ball can win, and the identification pattern based on the winning of the game ball to the starting port. A variation pattern determining means (for example, the main CPU 101) for determining a variation pattern when the variable display is performed is further provided, and the holding means (for example, the main CPU 101) determines that the game ball has won the starting hole. The starting memory can be reserved based on the starting memory stored in the holding means, and the symbol effect execution number determining means (for example, sub CPU 201) stores the starting memory stored in the holding means when a game ball wins the starting hole. is determined based on the variation pattern determined by the variation pattern determining means.

According to the gaming machine of (2) above, the execution number of symbol effects determined for the starting memory stored in the holding means is determined based on the variation pattern. More specifically, if the variation pattern has a relatively long variation time, the number of symbol performances executed increases, and if the variation pattern has a relatively short variation time, the number of symbol performances performed decreases. Therefore, the variation in the time required for one symbol performance is reduced, and it becomes difficult for the player to grasp that one or a plurality of symbol performances are being executed for one starting memory.

(3) In the gaming machine described in (1) or (2) above, a holding effect control means (for example, step S205) that controls so that an image related to starting memory stored in the holding means is displayed on the display means. etc.), wherein at least when the performance mode determined by the specific performance determination means is being displayed, the suspension effect control means controls so that the image related to the start memory stored in the suspension means is not displayed. It is something to do.

According to the game machine of (3) above, since the image related to the starting memory stored in the holding means is not displayed on the display means, the player is further prevented from being aware of the variable display in units of starting memory. can be done.

According to the gaming machine of Supplementary Note 25, it is possible to suppress a decline in interest by making the player unaware of the display effect in units of win/lose determination.

[Appendix 26]
2. Description of the Related Art Conventionally, among gaming machines such as pachinko machines, there has been known a gaming machine in which winning/losing determination is performed and symbols are variably displayed, and when the variably displayed symbols are stopped and displayed, the result of the game is displayed. Then, when the result of the game is a specific result, a special game advantageous to the player is performed.

In this type of gaming machine, before the result of the win/lose determination is displayed, a display effect is performed to make the user expect that a special game may be played, thereby enhancing the effect of the effect (for example, See JP-A-2006-246964).

However, in the gaming machine described in Patent Document 1, since the display effect is performed only for the win-lose determination unit, if the display effect is not such that a special game can be expected to be performed, the changing display effect is displayed. There is a possibility that the player may lose his sense of anticipation for the variable display of patterns, and at that point, his interest may decrease.

The present invention has been made in view of such a point, and its object is to prevent the player from being conscious of the display effect in units of winning/losing determination, and preferably to suppress the decrease in interest.

(1) The game machine of Supplementary Note 26 includes display means (for example, the liquid crystal display device 16) that performs variable display of identification patterns based on the establishment of a predetermined condition, and information about the variable display that has not yet been performed. (For example, a random number for judging a big hit, a random number for determining a symbol, etc.) can be stored up to a predetermined number as starting memory (for example, step S54, step S55, etc.); When the variable display is performed for the starting memory, control is performed so that the variable performance and the stop performance of the identification pattern are performed using the performance time until the variable display for the next starting memory of the one starting memory is performed. and a display control means capable of determining the execution number of symbol effects (for example, temporary fluctuation) in which the identification symbol variation effect and stop effect are performed for the starting memory stored by the holding means. number determining means (for example, step S324, etc.); and effect mode determining means (for example, step S372, etc.) capable of determining the effect mode for one or more starting memories stored by the holding means. When the one or more starting memories stored by the holding means do not include the specific starting memory, the effect mode determining means determines the number of starting memories for which the effect mode is to be determined by: number-of-effects-determining means for determining a different number each time; Specific performance determination means for dividing the symbol performance into predetermined units and determining a performance mode to be performed during execution of the symbol performance divided into the predetermined units; A suggestion performance for determining a performance mode for a stored starting memory to a performance mode suggesting that the variation performance of the identification pattern is performed in the specific mode even though the starting memory is not the specific starting memory. It is characterized by having a determination means.

According to the gaming machine of (1) above, the execution number of symbol effects (for example, temporary fluctuation) in which the identification symbol variation effect and the stop effect are performed is determined for the starting memory stored by the holding means. . That is, originally, one pattern performance is performed for each start memory stored by the reserve means, but one or more times of pattern performance is performed for each start memory stored by the reserve means. Since the number is determined, even though the variable display is for one starting memory, it looks as if the variable display is being performed for a plurality of starting memories. Moreover, the symbol effects determined for each start memory are divided into predetermined units regardless of the unit of the start memory. Then, an effect mode to be performed during execution of the symbol effect divided into the predetermined units is determined. Therefore, a part of the plurality of symbol effects determined for one starting memory and a plurality of patterns determined for other starting memories whose variable display is performed next to the variable display for the one starting memory It is also possible that an effect mode that extends over part of the symbol effect is determined. As a result, it is possible to determine the mode of presentation regardless of the result of one game. In addition, it is possible to execute a display performance that does not make the player aware of the variable display in units of start memory, and it is possible to suppress the decrease in interest.

Further, when the starting memory stored by the holding means does not include a specific starting memory in which variable display is performed in a specific manner (for example, reach fluctuation), the player's expectation for the display performance is maintained. can become difficult. Therefore, in this case, the number of starting memories for which the effect mode is to be determined is determined to be a different number each time, and the effect mode for the starting memory last stored among the starting memories stored by the holding means. is determined to be an effect mode suggesting that the identification pattern variation effect is performed in a specific mode even though the starting memory is not a specific starting memory, thereby maintaining the player's expectation for the display effect. I'm trying to be

The reason why the number of starting memories for which the performance mode is to be determined is determined to be a different number each time is that the number of starting memories for which the performance mode is to be determined is varied and the identification pattern is displayed in a specific manner. (Even if a performance mode suggesting that the identification pattern is displayed in a specific mode is displayed, the suggesting performance mode is false) is not easily grasped. It's for.

In addition, if the starting memory stored by the holding means includes a specific starting memory in which variable display is performed in a specific manner (for example, reach fluctuation), even if variable display is performed in a specific manner In spite of this, when the result of the hit-lose determination is a failure, even if a production mode with a relatively high degree of expectation is performed (for example, character subtraction processing is performed) after that, the performance mode will not be performed. The player's interest is reduced. Therefore, according to the gaming machine of (1) above, when a plurality of specific starting memories are included in the plurality of starting memories stored by the holding means, the starting memory is the first among the plurality of specific starting memories. A performance mode is determined for the starting memory up to the earliest specified starting memory variably displayed, and the performance mode is not determined for the starting memory variably displayed after the earliest specific starting memory. As a result, it is possible to suppress the decline in interest.

In addition, the "variable display of the identification pattern" here means a series of displays from the start of the variable display of the identification pattern to the stop display for one starting memory, and in one starting memory. On the other hand, the number of times of variable display is one even if the identification pattern variation effect and the stop effect are repeatedly performed a plurality of times.

In addition, the "stop effect" of the identification pattern means the stop effect (for example, temporary stop) of the identification pattern that is performed in the middle of one variable display and the stop of the identification pattern that is performed when one variable display is completed. This is intended to include both effects (for example, main stop).

Further, "When the variable display is performed for one starting memory, the variable performance and the stop performance of the identification pattern are performed using the performance time until the variable display for the next starting memory of the one starting memory is performed. "is performed" means not only the time during which the variable display is performed for one starting memory, but also includes all or part of the time required for the interval until the variable display for the next starting memory is performed. Therefore, the ``symbol effect in which the identification symbol fluctuation effect and the stop effect are performed'' is until the identification symbol stop effect is performed if it is in the middle of the variable display, and if it is the end of the variable display, the above interval is also It is intended to include

(2) In the gaming machine described in (1) above, the effect target number determining means determines the number of starting memories for which the effect mode is to be determined by lottery.

According to the gaming machine of (2) above, since the number of starting memories for which the performance mode is to be determined is determined by lottery, the number of starting memories for which the performance mode is to be determined is easily and randomly determined. be able to.

(3) In the gaming machine described in (1) or (2) above, a holding effect control means (for example, the sub CPU 201) that controls so that the image related to the starting memory stored in the holding means is displayed on the display means. ), wherein at least when the performance mode determined by the specific performance determination means is being displayed, the suspension effect control means controls so that the image related to the starting memory stored in the suspension means is not displayed. It is a thing.

According to the game machine of (3) above, since the image related to the starting memory stored in the holding means is not displayed on the display means, the player is further prevented from being aware of the variable display in units of starting memory. can be done.

According to the gaming machine of Supplementary Note 26, it is possible to suppress a decline in interest by not making the player aware of the display effect in units of hit/lose determination.

[Appendix 27]
2. Description of the Related Art Conventionally, among gaming machines such as a pachinko machine or a pachislot machine, there has been known a gaming machine in which win/lose determination is performed, symbols are displayed in a variable manner, and the result of the game is displayed when the symbols that are displayed in a variable manner are stopped and displayed. Then, when the result of the game is a specific result, a special game advantageous to the player is performed.

In this type of gaming machine, there is known a gaming machine that controls the game state after the special game ends to a specific game state that is advantageous to the player, such as a time-saving game state (for example, JP-A-2006-2006). 122447).

However, in a gaming machine that is controlled to a specific game state that is advantageous to the player apart from the special game, if the period of control to the specific game state is lengthened, the probability of winning in the win-lose determination cannot help but be reduced. Interest may decline. On the other hand, if the period during which the specific game state is controlled is shortened, the player may feel disadvantageous, and in any case, there is a possibility that the interest in the game may decrease.

The present invention has been made in view of such a point, and its object is to suitably perform a specific game state which is performed separately from a special game, and to suppress the decline in interest.

(1) The gaming machine of Supplementary Note 27 includes a lottery means (for example, step S117, etc.) that performs a win/lose determination (for example, a big hit determination) based on the establishment of a predetermined condition, and a variable identification symbol based on the result of the hit/lose determination. A display means (for example, a liquid crystal display device 16) for performing display is provided, and a special game (for example, a jackpot game state) advantageous to the player can be executed based on the result of the hit/loss determination being a specific result. A game machine, wherein lottery promotion control means capable of executing control (for example, time-saving game state) that promotes the win-lose determination compared to a normal game state, A probability changing means that can set a high probability (e.g., high probability gaming state) compared to the Secret effect execution means (for example, step S205) capable of executing the secret A stage 2002), and a predetermined number (for example, four) of information about the variable display that has not yet been performed can be stored as start memory. When the holding means (for example, step S54, step S55, etc.) and the variable display of one starting memory stored by the holding means are performed, the variable display of the next starting memory of the one starting memory is performed. A display control means (for example, a display control circuit 204) that controls so that a variable effect and a stop effect of the identification symbol are performed using the effect time until the game is played, and at least a control that promotes the hit/lose determination is executed. In the game state, symbol effect execution number determination means (for example, step S324 etc.) for determining the number of symbol effects to be executed in which the identification symbol variation effect and the stop effect are performed with respect to the start memory stored by the holding means. ), and an effect mode determination means (for example, step S372, etc.) capable of determining the effect mode for one or more starting memories stored by the holding means, wherein the effect mode determination means includes the The pattern performance of the number of executions determined by a pattern performance execution number determination means is divided into predetermined units, and a performance mode performed during execution of the pattern performance divided into the predetermined units regardless of the unit of the start memory. and the specific effect determining means indicates the degree of expectation that the probability of winning in the winning/losing judgment is set to the high probability when the secret effect is being executed. As a thing, the production mode performed during the execution of the pattern production divided into the predetermined units (for example For example, it is characterized in that it determines the subtraction performance of the character.

According to the gaming machine of (1) above, at least in the game state in which the control for promoting the win-lose determination is being executed, the identification pattern variation effect and the stop effect are performed with respect to the start memory stored by the holding means. The execution number of symbol effects (for example, provisional variation) to be performed is determined. That is, originally, one pattern performance is performed for each start memory stored by the reserve means, but one or more times of pattern performance is performed for each start memory stored by the reserve means. Since the number is determined, even though the variable display is for one starting memory, it looks as if the variable display is being performed for a plurality of starting memories. Therefore, while suppressing the period in which the control for promoting the win-lose determination is executed, it becomes difficult for the player to grasp that the period is suppressed, and the winning probability in the win-lose determination can be moderate. Therefore, it is possible to reduce the sense of disadvantage that may be given to the player, and consequently to suppress the decline in interest.

Also, the symbol effects determined for each start memory are divided into predetermined units regardless of the unit of the start memory. Then, an effect mode to be performed during execution of the symbol effect divided into the predetermined units is determined. Therefore, a part of the plurality of symbol effects determined for one starting memory and a plurality of patterns determined for other starting memories whose variable display is performed next to the variable display for the one starting memory It is also possible that an effect mode that extends over part of the symbol effect is determined. As a result, it is possible to determine the mode of presentation regardless of the result of one game. In addition, since the display effect can be executed without making the player aware of the variable display in the starting memory unit, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to comprehend the period during which the control for promoting the winning/losing determination is executed. Moreover, when the secret performance is executed, the performance performed during the execution of the pattern performance divided into the predetermined units indicates the degree of expectation that the winning probability in the win-lose judgment is high. Since the mode is determined, even if the execution period of the control that promotes the win-lose determination is suppressed, the player's attention can be directed to the above-described presentation mode, and it is possible to further suppress the decline in interest. becomes.

In addition, the "variable display of the identification pattern" here means a series of displays from the start of the variable display of the identification pattern to the stop display for one starting memory, and in one starting memory. On the other hand, the number of times of variable display is one even if the identification pattern variation effect and the stop effect are repeatedly performed a plurality of times.

In addition, the "stop effect" of the identification pattern means the stop effect (for example, temporary stop) of the identification pattern that is performed in the middle of one variable display and the stop of the identification pattern that is performed when one variable display is completed. This is intended to include both effects (for example, main stop).

Further, "When the variable display is performed for one starting memory, the variable performance and the stop performance of the identification pattern are performed using the performance time until the variable display for the next starting memory of the one starting memory is performed. "is performed" means not only the time during which the variable display is performed for one starting memory, but also includes all or part of the time required for the interval until the variable display for the next starting memory is performed. Therefore, the "symbol effect in which the variable effect and the stop effect of the identification symbol are performed" is until the stop effect of the identification symbol is performed if it is in the middle of the variable display, and if it is the end of the variable display, the above interval is also It is intended to include

(2) In the gaming machine described in (1) above, further comprising suspension effect control means (for example, step S205, etc.) for controlling so that an image relating to starting memory stored in the suspension means is displayed on the display means. The holding effect control means controls not to display the image related to the starting memory stored in the holding means at least when the effect mode determined by the specific effect determining means is displayed. and

According to the gaming machine of (2) above, since the image related to the start memory stored in the reserve means is not displayed on the display means, the execution number of the symbol performance is determined for the start memory stored by the reserve means. Coupled with this, the degree of progress since the start of the control to promote the win-lose determination (that is, the number of times the starting memory was digested during the execution of the control to promote the win-lose determination (the game that was executed number)) becomes difficult to grasp. As a result, it is possible to make the player pay attention to the performance mode that is performed as an indication of the degree of expectation that the winning probability in the win-lose judgment is high, and the execution period of the control that promotes the win-lose judgment can be shortened. It is possible to make the player less conscious of it.

(3) In the gaming machine described in (1) or (2) above, the performance mode determining means stores the variable display in a specific mode in one or more starting memories stored by the holding means. When the specific starting memory to be performed is not included, the performance mode is determined for all the starting memories stored by the holding means, and the last stored starting memory is stored by the holding means. Suggestive effect determination means (for example, , step S358, etc.).

According to the gaming machine of (3) above, when the specific starting memory is not included in the one or more starting memories stored by the holding means, there is no need to re-determine the effect mode. Although it is unlikely that the above burden will increase, it is considered difficult to maintain the player's sense of expectation for the display effects. Therefore, it is suggested that the effect mode for the last stored start memory among the start memories stored by the holding means is not a specific start memory, but the identification pattern variation effect is performed in a specific mode. By determining the effect mode, it is possible to maintain the player's sense of expectation for the display effect.

According to the gaming machine of Supplementary Note 27, it is possible to suppress the decrease in interest by enhancing the presentation effect by the movable body presentation.

[Appendix 28]
2. Description of the Related Art Conventionally, among gaming machines such as a pachinko machine or a pachislot machine, there has been known a gaming machine in which win/lose determination is performed, symbols are displayed in a variable manner, and the result of the game is displayed when the symbols that are displayed in a variable manner are stopped and displayed. Then, when the result of the game is a specific result, a special game advantageous to the player is performed.

In this type of gaming machine, there is known a gaming machine that controls the game state after the special game ends to a specific game state that is advantageous to the player, such as a time-saving game state (for example, JP-A-2006-2006). 122447).

However, in a gaming machine that is controlled to a specific game state that is advantageous to the player apart from the special game, if the period of control to the specific game state is lengthened, the probability of winning in the win-lose determination cannot help but be reduced. Interest may decline. On the other hand, if the period during which the specific game state is controlled is shortened, the player may feel disadvantageous, and in any case, there is a possibility that the interest in the game may decrease.

The present invention has been made in view of such a point, and its object is to suitably perform a specific game state which is performed separately from a special game, and to suppress the decline in interest.

(1) The gaming machine of Supplementary Note 28 includes lottery means (for example, step S117, etc.) that performs win/lose determination (for example, big hit determination) based on the establishment of a predetermined condition, and variable identification symbols based on the result of the hit/lose determination. A display means (for example, a liquid crystal display device 16) for performing display is provided, and a special game (for example, a jackpot game state) advantageous to the player can be executed based on the result of the hit/loss determination being a specific result. A game machine, wherein lottery promotion control means capable of executing control (for example, time-saving game state) that promotes the win-lose determination compared to a normal game state, A probability changing means that can set a high probability (e.g., high probability gaming state) compared to the Secrecy effect execution means (for example, step S205) capable of executing the secrecy A stage 2002), and holding means (for example, step S54, step S55, etc.), and when the variable display is performed for one starting memory stored by the holding means, the performance time until the variable display for the next starting memory of the one starting memory is performed. Display control means (for example, step S205, etc.) that controls so that the identification pattern variation production and stop production are performed using, and a game state in which at least the control to promote the hit/loss determination is executed (for example, a time-saving game state), symbol effect execution number determination means for determining the execution number of symbol effect (for example, temporary variation) in which the variation effect and the stop effect of the identification symbol are performed for the starting memory stored by the holding means. (for example, step S324, etc.); A mode determination means divides the symbol performance of the execution number determined by the symbol performance execution number determination means into predetermined units, and executes the symbol performance divided into the predetermined units regardless of the unit of the start memory. specific effect determination means (for example, step S372, etc.) for determining the effect mode to be performed during the performance, and the specific effect determination means determines, when a specific start memory is stored by the holding means, the specific start A performance that straddles the starting memory stored before the memory and the specific starting memory Although it is possible to determine the state, it is configured not to determine a performance mode that straddles the specific start memory and the start memory stored after the specific start memory, and when the secret performance is being executed. , as the degree of expectation that the winning probability in the winning/losing judgment is set to the high probability, the performance mode to be performed during the execution of the symbol performance divided into the predetermined units is determined. . .

According to the gaming machine of (1) above, at least in the game state in which the control for promoting the win-lose determination is being executed, the identification pattern variation effect and the stop effect are performed with respect to the start memory stored by the holding means. The execution number of symbol effects (for example, provisional variation) to be performed is determined. That is, originally, one pattern performance is performed for each start memory stored by the reserve means, but one or more times of pattern performance is performed for each start memory stored by the reserve means. Since the number is determined, even though the variable display is for one starting memory, it looks as if the variable display is being performed for a plurality of starting memories. Therefore, while suppressing the period in which the control for promoting the win-lose determination is executed, it becomes difficult for the player to grasp that the period is suppressed, and the winning probability in the win-lose determination can be moderate. Therefore, it is possible to reduce the sense of disadvantage that may be given to the player, and consequently to suppress the decline in interest.

Also, the symbol effects determined for each start memory are divided into predetermined units regardless of the unit of the start memory. Then, an effect mode to be performed during execution of the symbol effect divided into the predetermined units is determined. Therefore, a part of the plurality of symbol effects determined for one starting memory and a plurality of patterns determined for other starting memories whose variable display is performed next to the variable display for the one starting memory It is also possible that an effect mode that extends over part of the symbol effect is determined. As a result, it is possible to determine the mode of presentation regardless of the result of one game. In addition, since the display effect can be executed without making the player aware of the variable display in the starting memory unit, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to comprehend the period during which the control for promoting the winning/losing determination is executed. Moreover, when the concealment performance is executed, the performance performed during execution of the symbol performance divided into predetermined units indicates the degree of expectation that the winning probability in the winning/losing judgment is high. Since the mode is determined, even if the execution period of the control that promotes the win-lose determination is suppressed, the player's attention can be directed to the above-described presentation mode, and it is possible to further suppress the decrease in interest. becomes.

Also, in determining the performance mode to be performed during execution of the pattern performance divided into predetermined units, it is stored (variably displayed earlier) than a specific start memory (for example, reach fluctuation performance). It is possible to determine an effect mode that straddles the starting memory and the specific starting memory. As a result, it is possible to determine the mode of presentation regardless of the result of one game. In addition, it is possible to execute a display performance that does not make the player aware of the variable display in units of start memory, and it is possible to suppress the decrease in interest. On the other hand, it is arranged not to determine an effect mode that straddles a specific starting memory and a starting memory that is stored (later variably displayed) after the specific starting memory. As a result, the player's gaze can be directed to the variation performance of the identification pattern performed in a specific mode rather than the performance mode performed during the execution of the pattern performance, and the player can expect the variation performance. can be done. Here, the ``specific starting memory'' corresponds to a starting memory that performs a variable display that gives the player a sense of expectation that the result of the win-lose determination is a specific result, such as reach fluctuation. do.

In addition, the "variable display of the identification pattern" here means a series of displays from the start of the variable display of the identification pattern to the stop display for one starting memory, and in one starting memory. On the other hand, the number of times of variable display is one even if the identification pattern variation effect and the stop effect are repeatedly performed a plurality of times.

In addition, the "stop effect" of the identification pattern means the stop effect (for example, temporary stop) of the identification pattern that is performed in the middle of one variable display and the stop of the identification pattern that is performed when one variable display is completed. This is intended to include both effects (for example, main stop).

Further, "When the variable display is performed for one starting memory, the variable performance and the stop performance of the identification pattern are performed using the performance time until the variable display for the next starting memory of the one starting memory is performed. "is performed" means not only the time during which the variable display is performed for one starting memory, but also includes all or part of the time required for the interval until the variable display for the next starting memory is performed. Therefore, the ``symbol effect in which the identification symbol fluctuation effect and the stop effect are performed'' is until the identification symbol stop effect is performed if it is in the middle of the variable display, and if it is the end of the variable display, the above interval is also It is intended to include

(2) The gaming machine described in (1) above further includes holding effect control means (for example, sub CPU 201) for controlling so that the image related to the starting memory stored in the holding means is displayed on the display means. The holding effect control means controls not to display the image related to the starting memory stored in the holding means at least when the effect mode determined by the specific effect determining means is displayed. It is something to do.

According to the gaming machine of (2) above, since the image related to the start memory stored in the reserve means is not displayed on the display means, the execution number of the symbol performance is determined for the start memory stored by the reserve means. Coupled with this, the degree of progress since the start of the control to promote the win-lose determination (that is, the number of times the starting memory was digested during the execution of the control to promote the win-lose determination (the game that was executed number)) becomes difficult to grasp. As a result, it is possible to make the player pay attention to the performance mode that is performed as an indication of the degree of expectation that the winning probability in the win-lose judgment is high, and the execution period of the control that promotes the win-lose judgment can be shortened. It is possible to make the player less conscious of it.

(3) In the gaming machine described in (1) or (2) above, the performance mode determining means includes the specific starting memory in one or more starting memories stored by the holding means. When there is no starting memory, the performance mode is determined for all the starting memories stored by the holding means, and the performance mode for the starting memory last stored among the starting memories stored by the holding means is set to the starting memory. suggestive effect determination means (for example, step S358, etc.) for determining the effect mode suggesting that the identification pattern variation effect is to be performed in a specific mode even though the is not the specific starting memory. It is.

According to the gaming machine of (3) above, when the specific starting memory is not included in the one or more starting memories stored by the holding means, there is no need to re-determine the effect mode. Although it is unlikely that the above burden will increase, it is considered difficult to maintain the player's sense of expectation for the display effects. Therefore, it is suggested that the effect mode for the last stored start memory among the start memories stored by the holding means is not a specific start memory, but the identification pattern variation effect is performed in a specific mode. By determining the effect mode, it is possible to maintain the player's sense of expectation for the display effect.

According to the gaming machine of Supplementary Note 28, since the specific game state performed separately from the special game can be preferably performed, it is possible to suppress the decline in interest.

[Appendix 29]
2. Description of the Related Art Conventionally, among gaming machines such as a pachinko machine or a pachislot machine, there has been known a gaming machine in which win/lose determination is performed, symbols are displayed in a variable manner, and the result of the game is displayed when the symbols that are displayed in a variable manner are stopped and displayed. Then, when the result of the game is a specific result, a special game advantageous to the player is performed.

In this type of gaming machine, there is known a gaming machine that controls the game state after the special game ends to a specific game state that is advantageous to the player, such as a time-saving game state (for example, JP-A-2006-2006). 122447).

However, in a gaming machine that is controlled to a specific game state that is advantageous to the player apart from the special game, if the period of control to the specific game state is lengthened, the probability of winning in the win-lose determination cannot help but be reduced. Interest may decline. On the other hand, if the period during which the specific game state is controlled is shortened, the player may feel disadvantageous, and in any case, there is a possibility that the interest in the game may decrease.

The present invention has been made in view of such a point, and its object is to suitably perform a specific game state which is performed separately from a special game, and to suppress the decline in interest.

(1) The gaming machine of Supplementary Note 29 includes lottery means (for example, step S117, etc.) that performs hit/lose determination (for example, big hit determination) based on the establishment of a predetermined condition, and variable identification symbols based on the result of the hit/lose determination. A display means (for example, a liquid crystal display device 16) for performing display is provided, and a special game (for example, a jackpot game state) advantageous to the player can be executed based on the result of the hit/loss determination being a specific result. A game machine, wherein lottery promotion control means capable of executing control (for example, time-saving game state) that promotes the win-lose determination compared to a normal game state, A probability changing means that can set a high probability (e.g., high probability gaming state) compared to the Secret effect execution means (for example, step S205) capable of executing the secret A stage 2002), and a predetermined number (for example, four) of information about the variable display that has not yet been performed can be stored as start memory. When the holding means (for example, step S54, step S55, etc.) and the variable display of one starting memory stored by the holding means are performed, the variable display of the next starting memory of the one starting memory is performed. Display control means (for example, step S205, etc.) for controlling to perform the variation performance and the stop performance of the identification symbol using the performance time until the game is executed, and at least the control for promoting the hit/loss determination is executed. In the state, symbol effect execution number determination means (for example, step S324, etc.) for determining the number of symbol effects to be executed in which the identification symbol variation effect and the stop effect are performed with respect to the starting memory stored by the holding means. and effect mode determination means (for example, step S372, etc.) capable of determining the effect mode for the one or more starting memories stored by the reserve means, wherein the effect mode determination means includes the reserve When the specific starting memory is not included in the starting memories stored by the means, the effect mode is determined for all the starting memories stored by the holding means, and all of the holding means are stored. In determining the performance mode for the start memory, the symbol performance of the number of executions determined by the symbol performance execution number determination means is divided into predetermined units, and the symbol performance divided into the predetermined units is executed. A specification that determines the effect mode (for example, character subtraction effect) performed during A game machine characterized by having effect determination means (for example, step S372, etc.).

According to the gaming machine of (1) above, at least in the game state in which the control for promoting the win-lose determination is being executed, the identification pattern variation effect and the stop effect are performed with respect to the start memory stored by the holding means. The execution number of symbol effects (for example, provisional variation) to be performed is determined. That is, originally, one pattern performance is performed for each start memory stored by the reserve means, but one or more times of pattern performance is performed for each start memory stored by the reserve means. Since the number is determined, even though the variable display is for one starting memory, it looks as if the variable display is being performed for a plurality of starting memories. Therefore, while suppressing the period in which the control for promoting the win-lose determination is executed, it becomes difficult for the player to grasp that the period is suppressed, and the winning probability in the win-lose determination can be moderate. Therefore, it is possible to reduce the sense of disadvantage that may be given to the player, and consequently to suppress the decline in interest.

Also, the symbol effects determined for each start memory are divided into predetermined units regardless of the unit of the start memory. Then, an effect mode to be performed during execution of the symbol effect divided into the predetermined units is determined. Therefore, a part of the plurality of symbol effects determined for one starting memory and a plurality of patterns determined for other starting memories whose variable display is performed next to the variable display for the one starting memory It is also possible that an effect mode that extends over part of the symbol effect is determined. As a result, it is possible to determine the mode of presentation regardless of the result of one game. In addition, since the display effect can be executed without making the player aware of the variable display in the starting memory unit, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to comprehend the period during which the control for promoting the winning/losing determination is executed. Moreover, when the concealment performance is executed, the performance performed during execution of the symbol performance divided into predetermined units indicates the degree of expectation that the winning probability in the winning/losing judgment is high. Since the mode is determined, even if the execution period of the control that promotes the win-lose determination is suppressed, the player's attention can be directed to the above-described presentation mode, and it is possible to further suppress the decrease in interest. becomes.

By the way, when the starting memory memorized by the holding means does not include a specific starting memory in which variable display is performed in a specific manner (for example, reach fluctuation), the starting memory stored by the holding means Since the burden on control is less than when a specific starting memory is included in the holding means, and it is possible to determine the performance mode for more starting memories as targets, all the starting memories stored by the holding means He is trying to determine the mode of presentation.

In addition, the "variable display of the identification pattern" here means a series of displays from the start of the variable display of the identification pattern to the stop display for one starting memory, and in one starting memory. On the other hand, the number of times of variable display is one even if the identification pattern variation effect and the stop effect are repeatedly performed a plurality of times.

In addition, the "stop effect" of the identification pattern means the stop effect (for example, temporary stop) of the identification pattern that is performed in the middle of one variable display and the stop of the identification pattern that is performed when one variable display is completed. This is intended to include both effects (for example, main stop).

Further, "When the variable display is performed for one starting memory, the variable performance and the stop performance of the identification pattern are performed using the performance time until the variable display for the next starting memory of the one starting memory is performed. "is performed" means not only the time during which the variable display is performed for one starting memory, but also includes all or part of the time required for the interval until the variable display for the next starting memory is performed. Therefore, the ``symbol effect in which the identification symbol fluctuation effect and the stop effect are performed'' is until the identification symbol stop effect is performed if it is in the middle of the variable display, and if it is the end of the variable display, the above interval is also It is intended to include

(2) In the gaming machine described in (1) above, the starting port (for example, the second starting port 440) in which a game ball can win, and the identification pattern based on the winning of the game ball to the starting port. A variation pattern determining means (for example, the main CPU 101) for determining a variation pattern when the variable display is performed is further provided, and the holding means (for example, the main CPU 101) determines that the game ball has won the starting hole. The starting memory can be reserved based on the starting memory stored in the holding means, and the symbol effect execution number determining means (for example, sub CPU 201) stores the starting memory stored in the holding means when a game ball wins the starting hole. is determined based on the variation pattern determined by the variation pattern determining means.

According to the gaming machine of (2) above, the execution number of symbol effects determined for the starting memory stored in the holding means is determined based on the variation pattern. More specifically, if the variation pattern has a relatively long variation time, the number of symbol performances executed increases, and if the variation pattern has a relatively short variation time, the number of symbol performances performed decreases. Therefore, the variation in the time required for one symbol performance is reduced, and it becomes difficult for the player to grasp that one or a plurality of symbol performances are being executed for one starting memory. As a result, it is possible to make it even more difficult for the player to grasp the period during which the control for promoting the win-lose determination is being executed.

(3) In the gaming machine described in (1) or (2) above, a holding effect control means (for example, step S205) that controls so that an image related to starting memory stored in the holding means is displayed on the display means. etc.), wherein at least when the performance mode determined by the specific performance determination means is being displayed, the suspension effect control means controls so that the image related to the start memory stored in the suspension means is not displayed. characterized by

According to the gaming machine of (3) above, since the image related to the start memory stored in the reserve means is not displayed on the display means, the execution number of the symbol presentation is determined for the start memory stored by the reserve means. Coupled with this, the degree of progress since the start of the control to promote the win-lose determination (that is, the number of times the starting memory was digested during the execution of the control to promote the win-lose determination (the game that was executed number)) becomes difficult to grasp. As a result, it is possible to make the player pay attention to the performance mode that is performed as an indication of the degree of expectation that the winning probability in the win-lose judgment is high, and the execution period of the control that promotes the win-lose judgment can be shortened. It is possible to make the player less conscious of it.

According to the gaming machine of Supplementary Note 29, the specific game state performed separately from the special game can be favorably performed, and it is possible to suppress the decline in interest.

[Appendix 30]
2. Description of the Related Art Conventionally, among gaming machines such as a pachinko machine or a pachislot machine, there has been known a gaming machine in which win/lose determination is performed, symbols are displayed in a variable manner, and the result of the game is displayed when the symbols that are displayed in a variable manner are stopped and displayed. Then, when the result of the game is a specific result, a special game advantageous to the player is performed.

In this type of gaming machine, there is known a gaming machine that controls the game state after the special game ends to a specific game state that is advantageous to the player, such as a time-saving game state (for example, JP-A-2006-2006). 122447).

However, in a gaming machine that is controlled to a specific game state that is advantageous to the player apart from the special game, if the period of control to the specific game state is lengthened, the probability of winning in the win-lose determination cannot help but be reduced. Interest may decline. On the other hand, if the period during which the specific game state is controlled is shortened, the player may feel disadvantageous, and in any case, there is a possibility that the interest in the game may decrease.

The present invention has been made in view of such a point, and its object is to suitably perform a specific game state which is performed separately from a special game, and to suppress the decline in interest.

(1) The gaming machine of Supplementary Note 30 includes a lottery means (for example, step S117, etc.) that performs a win/lose determination (for example, a big hit determination) based on the establishment of a predetermined condition, and a variable identification pattern based on the result of the hit/lose determination. A display means (for example, a liquid crystal display device 16) for performing display is provided, and a special game (for example, a jackpot game state) advantageous to the player can be executed based on the result of the hit/loss determination being a specific result. A game machine, wherein lottery promotion control means capable of executing control (for example, time-saving game state) that promotes the win-lose determination compared to a normal game state, A probability changing means that can set a high probability (e.g., high probability gaming state) compared to the Secret effect execution means (for example, step S205) capable of executing the secret A stage 2002), and a predetermined number (for example, four) of information about the variable display that has not yet been performed can be stored as start memory. When the holding means (for example, step S54, step S55, etc.) and the variable display of one starting memory stored by the holding means are performed, the variable display of the next starting memory of the one starting memory is performed. Display control means (for example, step S205, etc.) for controlling to perform the variation performance and the stop performance of the identification symbol using the performance time until the game is executed, and at least the control for promoting the hit/loss determination is executed. In the state, symbol effect execution number determination means (for example, step S324, etc.) for determining the number of symbol effects to be executed in which the identification symbol variation effect and the stop effect are performed with respect to the starting memory stored by the holding means. and effect mode determination means (for example, step S372, etc.) capable of determining the effect mode for the one or more starting memories stored by the reserve means, wherein the effect mode determination means includes the reserve When a specific starting memory is not included in one or a plurality of starting memories stored by the means, the effect mode is determined for all the starting memories stored by the holding means, and the holding means In determining the effect mode for all the starting memories stored, the symbol effects of the number of executions determined by the symbol effect execution number determining means are divided into predetermined units (regardless of the unit of the starting memories). Z) The performance state performed during the execution of the pattern performance divided into the predetermined unit A specific effect determination means for determining a performance (for example, a subtraction effect of a character), and the effect mode for the last stored starting memory among the starting memories stored by the holding means is determined by the specific starting memory. Suggestion effect determination means (for example, step S358, etc.) for determining the effect mode (for example, fake ready-to-win portent effect) suggesting that the identification symbol variation effect is to be performed in the specific mode even though it is not characterized by having

According to the gaming machine of (1) above, at least in the game state in which the control for promoting the win-lose determination is being executed, the identification pattern variation effect and the stop effect are performed with respect to the start memory stored by the holding means. The execution number of symbol effects (for example, provisional variation) to be performed is determined. That is, originally, one pattern performance is performed for each start memory stored by the reserve means, but one or more times of pattern performance is performed for each start memory stored by the reserve means. Since the number is determined, even though the variable display is for one starting memory, it looks as if the variable display is being performed for a plurality of starting memories. Therefore, while suppressing the period in which the control for promoting the win-lose determination is executed, it becomes difficult for the player to grasp that the period is suppressed, and the winning probability in the win-lose determination can be moderate. Therefore, it is possible to reduce the sense of disadvantage that may be given to the player, and consequently to suppress the decline in interest.

Also, the symbol effects determined for each start memory are divided into predetermined units regardless of the unit of the start memory. Then, an effect mode to be performed during execution of the symbol effect divided into the predetermined units is determined. Therefore, a part of the plurality of symbol effects determined for one starting memory and a plurality of patterns determined for other starting memories whose variable display is performed next to the variable display for the one starting memory It is also possible that an effect mode that extends over part of the symbol effect is determined. As a result, it is possible to determine the mode of presentation regardless of the result of one game. In addition, since it is possible to execute a display effect that does not make the player aware of the variable display in the starting memory unit, the degree of progress after the start of the control to promote the win-lose determination (that is, the control to promote the win-lose determination is It is possible to make it difficult for the player to grasp the remaining period of execution. Moreover, when the concealment performance is executed, the performance performed during execution of the symbol performance divided into predetermined units indicates the degree of expectation that the winning probability in the winning/losing judgment is high. Since the mode is determined, even if the execution period of the control that promotes the win-lose determination is suppressed, the player's attention can be directed to the above-described presentation mode, and it is possible to further suppress the decrease in interest. becomes.

Further, when the start memory stored by the holding means does not include a specific start memory in which variable display is performed in a specific manner (for example, reach variation effect), the player's expectation for the display effect is maintained. It can be difficult to let go. Therefore, in this case, the rendering mode is determined for all the starting memories stored by the holding means, and the rendering mode for the starting memory last stored among the starting memories stored by the holding means is set to the starting memory. The player's expectation for the display performance is maintained by determining the performance mode suggesting that the identification pattern variation performance is performed in a specific mode even though the memory is not a specific starting memory. ing.

In addition, the "variable display of the identification pattern" here means a series of displays from the start of the variable display of the identification pattern to the stop display for one starting memory, and in one starting memory. On the other hand, the number of times of variable display is one even if the identification pattern variation effect and the stop effect are repeatedly performed a plurality of times.

In addition, the "stop effect" of the identification pattern means the stop effect (for example, temporary stop) of the identification pattern that is performed in the middle of one variable display and the stop of the identification pattern that is performed when one variable display is completed. This is intended to include both effects (for example, main stop).

Further, "When the variable display is performed for one starting memory, the variable performance and the stop performance of the identification pattern are performed using the performance time until the variable display for the next starting memory of the one starting memory is performed. "is performed" means not only the time during which the variable display is performed for one starting memory, but also includes all or part of the time required for the interval until the variable display for the next starting memory is performed. Therefore, the ``symbol effect in which the identification symbol fluctuation effect and the stop effect are performed'' is until the identification symbol stop effect is performed if it is in the middle of the variable display, and if it is the end of the variable display, the above interval is also It is intended to include

(2) In the gaming machine described in (1) above, a variation pattern when the variable display of the identification pattern is performed based on a start opening in which a game ball can win and the winning of the game ball in the start opening. and a variation pattern determining means (for example, step S173, etc.) for determining the holding means is configured to be able to hold the starting memory based on the winning of the game ball in the starting hole, The symbol effect execution number determining means determines the execution number of the symbol effect for the starting memory stored in the holding means when the game ball wins in the starting hole, the variation determined by the variation pattern determining means. It is characterized by making decisions based on patterns.

According to the gaming machine of (2) above, the execution number of symbol effects determined for the starting memory stored in the holding means is determined based on the variation pattern. More specifically, if the variation pattern has a relatively long variation time, the number of symbol performances executed increases, and if the variation pattern has a relatively short variation time, the number of symbol performances performed decreases. Therefore, the variation in the time required for one symbol performance is reduced, and it becomes difficult for the player to grasp that one or a plurality of symbol performances are being executed for one starting memory. As a result, it is possible to make it even more difficult for the player to grasp the period during which the control for promoting the win-lose determination is being executed.

(3) In the gaming machine described in (1) or (2) above, a holding effect control means (for example, step S205) for controlling so that an image related to starting memory stored in the holding means is displayed on the display means. etc.), wherein at least when the performance mode determined by the specific performance determination means is being displayed, the suspension effect control means controls so that the image related to the start memory stored in the suspension means is not displayed. characterized by

According to the gaming machine of (3) above, since the image related to the start memory stored in the reserve means is not displayed on the display means, the execution number of the symbol presentation is determined for the start memory stored by the reserve means. Combined with this, it becomes difficult to grasp the degree of progress after the start of the control for promoting the win-lose determination (that is, the remaining period during which the control for promoting the win-lose determination is executed). As a result, it is possible to make the player pay attention to the performance mode that is performed as an indication of the degree of expectation that the winning probability in the win-lose judgment is high, and the execution period of the control that promotes the win-lose judgment can be shortened. It is possible to make the player less conscious of it.

According to the gaming machine of Supplementary Note 30, the specific game state performed separately from the special game can be favorably performed, and it is possible to suppress the decline in interest.

[Appendix 31]
2. Description of the Related Art Conventionally, among gaming machines such as a pachinko machine or a pachislot machine, there has been known a gaming machine in which win/lose determination is performed, symbols are displayed in a variable manner, and the result of the game is displayed when the symbols that are displayed in a variable manner are stopped and displayed. Then, when the result of the game is a specific result, a special game advantageous to the player is performed.

In this type of gaming machine, there is known a gaming machine that controls the game state after the special game ends to a specific game state that is advantageous to the player, such as a time-saving game state (for example, JP-A-2006-2006). 122447).

However, in a gaming machine that is controlled to a specific game state that is advantageous to the player apart from the special game, if the period of control to the specific game state is lengthened, the probability of winning in the win-lose determination cannot help but be reduced. Interest may decline. On the other hand, if the period during which the specific game state is controlled is shortened, the player may feel disadvantageous, and in any case, there is a possibility that the interest in the game may decrease.

The present invention has been made in view of such a point, and its object is to suitably perform a specific game state which is performed separately from a special game, and to suppress the decline in interest.

(1) The gaming machine of Supplementary Note 31 includes lottery means (for example, step S117, etc.) that performs hit/lose determination (for example, big hit determination) based on the establishment of a predetermined condition, and variable identification symbols based on the result of the hit/lose determination. A display means (for example, a liquid crystal display device 16) for performing display is provided, and a special game (for example, a jackpot game state) advantageous to the player can be executed based on the result of the hit/loss determination being a specific result. A game machine, wherein lottery promotion control means capable of executing control (for example, time-saving game state) that promotes the win-lose determination compared to a normal game state, A probability changing means that can set a high probability (e.g., high probability gaming state) compared to the Secret effect execution means (for example, step S205) capable of executing the secret A stage 2002), and a predetermined number (for example, four) of information about the variable display that has not yet been performed can be stored as start memory. When the holding means (for example, step S54, step S55, etc.) and the variable display of one starting memory stored by the holding means are performed, the variable display of the next starting memory of the one starting memory is performed. Display control means (for example, step S205, etc.) for controlling to perform the variation performance and the stop performance of the identification symbol using the performance time until the game is executed, and at least the control for promoting the hit/loss determination is executed. In the state, symbol effect execution number determination means (for example, step S324, etc.) for determining the number of symbol effects to be executed in which the identification symbol variation effect and the stop effect are performed with respect to the starting memory stored by the holding means. and effect mode determination means (for example, step S372, etc.) capable of determining the effect mode for the one or more starting memories stored by the reserve means, wherein the effect mode determination means includes the reserve When one or a plurality of starting memories stored by means do not include a specific starting memory (reach or jackpot) in which the identification pattern variation effect is performed in a specific mode, it is stored by the holding means. number-of-effects determining means for determining a performance mode for each different number of starting memories out of the starting memories; The symbol effect of the execution number determined by the execution number determination means is divided into predetermined units. , a specific effect determination means for determining the effect mode (for example, character subtraction effect) to be performed during execution of the symbol effect divided into the predetermined units (regardless of the unit of the start memory), and the number that varies each time The performance mode for the last stored starting memory among the starting memories is suggested that the identification pattern variation performance is performed in the specific mode even though the starting memory is not the specific starting memory. It is characterized by having suggestive effect determination means (for example, step S358, etc.) for determining the effect mode (for example, fake ready-to-win portent effect).

According to the gaming machine of (1) above, in a game state in which at least the control for promoting the win-lose determination is being executed, the identification pattern variation effect and the stop effect are performed with respect to the start memory stored by the holding means. The number of executions of the symbol effect (for example, temporary variation) to be performed is determined. That is, originally, one pattern performance is performed for each start memory stored by the reserve means, but one or more times of pattern performance is performed for each start memory stored by the reserve means. Since the number is determined, even though the variable display is for one starting memory, it looks as if the variable display is being performed for a plurality of starting memories. Therefore, while suppressing the period in which the control for promoting the win-lose determination is executed, it becomes difficult for the player to grasp that the period is suppressed, and the winning probability in the win-lose determination can be moderate. Therefore, it is possible to reduce the sense of disadvantage that may be given to the player, and consequently to suppress the decline in interest.

Also, the symbol effects determined for each start memory are divided into predetermined units regardless of the unit of the start memory. Then, an effect mode to be performed during execution of the symbol effect divided into the predetermined units is determined. Therefore, a part of the plurality of symbol effects determined for one starting memory and a plurality of patterns determined for other starting memories whose variable display is performed next to the variable display for the one starting memory It is also possible that an effect mode that extends over part of the symbol effect is determined. As a result, it is possible to determine the mode of presentation regardless of the result of one game. In addition, since it is possible to execute a display effect that does not make the player aware of the variable display in the starting memory unit, the degree of progress after the start of the control to promote the win-lose determination (that is, the control to promote the win-lose determination is It is possible to make it difficult for the player to grasp the remaining period of execution. Moreover, when the concealment performance is executed, the performance performed during execution of the symbol performance divided into predetermined units indicates the degree of expectation that the winning probability in the winning/losing judgment is high. Since the mode is determined, even if the execution period of the control that promotes the win-lose determination is suppressed, the player's attention can be directed to the above-described presentation mode, and it is possible to further suppress the decrease in interest. becomes.

Further, when the start memory stored by the holding means does not include a specific start memory in which variable display is performed in a specific manner (for example, reach variation effect), the player's expectation for the display effect is maintained. It can be difficult to let go. Therefore, in this case, the number of starting memories for which the effect mode is to be determined is determined to be a different number each time, and the effect mode for the starting memory last stored among the starting memories stored by the holding means. is determined to be an effect mode suggesting that the identification pattern variation effect is performed in a specific mode even though the starting memory is not a specific starting memory, thereby maintaining the player's expectation for the display effect. I'm trying to be

The reason why the number of starting memories for which the performance mode is to be determined is determined to be a different number each time is that the number of starting memories for which the performance mode is to be determined is varied and the identification pattern is displayed in a specific manner. (Even if a performance mode suggesting that the identification pattern is displayed in a specific mode is displayed, the suggesting performance mode is false) is not easily grasped. It's for.

In addition, the "variable display of the identification pattern" here means a series of displays from the start of the variable display of the identification pattern to the stop display for one starting memory, and in one starting memory. On the other hand, the number of times of variable display is one even if the identification pattern variation effect and the stop effect are repeatedly performed a plurality of times.

In addition, the "stop effect" of the identification pattern means the stop effect (for example, temporary stop) of the identification pattern that is performed in the middle of one variable display and the stop of the identification pattern that is performed when one variable display is completed. This is intended to include both effects (for example, main stop).

Further, "When the variable display is performed for one starting memory, the variable performance and the stop performance of the identification pattern are performed using the performance time until the variable display for the next starting memory of the one starting memory is performed. "is performed" means not only the time during which the variable display is performed for one starting memory, but also includes all or part of the time required for the interval until the variable display for the next starting memory is performed. Therefore, the ``symbol effect in which the identification symbol fluctuation effect and the stop effect are performed'' is until the identification symbol stop effect is performed if it is in the middle of the variable display, and if it is the end of the variable display, the above interval is also It is intended to include

(2) In the gaming machine described in (1) above, the effect target number determining means determines the number of starting memories for which the effect mode is to be determined by lottery.

According to the gaming machine of (2) above, since the number of starting memories for which the performance mode is to be determined is determined by lottery, the number of starting memories for which the performance mode is to be determined is easily and randomly determined. be able to.

(3) In the gaming machine described in (1) or (2) above, a holding effect control means (for example, step S205) that controls so that an image related to starting memory stored in the holding means is displayed on the display means. etc.), wherein at least when the performance mode determined by the specific performance determination means is being displayed, the suspension effect control means controls so that the image related to the start memory stored in the suspension means is not displayed. It is characterized by

According to the game machine of (3) above, since the image related to the starting memory stored in the holding means is not displayed on the display means, the player is further prevented from being aware of the variable display in units of starting memory. can be done.

According to the gaming machine of Supplementary Note 31, the specific game state performed separately from the special game can be favorably performed, and it is possible to suppress the decline in interest.

[Appendix 32]
2. Description of the Related Art Conventionally, among gaming machines such as a pachinko machine or a pachislot machine, there has been known a gaming machine in which win/lose determination is performed, symbols are displayed in a variable manner, and the result of the game is displayed when the symbols that are displayed in a variable manner are stopped and displayed. Then, when the result of the game is a specific result, a special game advantageous to the player is performed.

In this type of gaming machine, the game state after the special game is finished is set to a specific game state such as a time-saving game state, and whether the winning probability in the hit/loss determination is a high probability is kept secret, and is determined in advance. There is known a gaming machine that discloses whether or not the probability is high when the number of games played is completed (see, for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2009-240529).

As described above, some gaming machines that conceal whether or not the probability is high in the specific game state perform an effect that suggests the degree of expectation that the probability is high in the specific game state.

However, in a gaming machine in which the specific game state ends when a predetermined number of games are played, the player can easily know the end timing of the specific game state simply by grasping the number of games that have been played. put away. As the end timing of the specific game state approaches, even if an effect suggesting the degree of expectation of the high probability is performed, the expectation of the high probability fades, and there is a risk that interest will decline. .

The present invention has been made in view of such a point, and its object is to make it difficult to grasp the end timing of the specific game state and to suppress the decline in interest.

(1) The gaming machine of Supplementary Note 32 includes lottery means (for example, step S117, etc.) that performs hit/lose determination (for example, big hit determination) based on the establishment of a predetermined condition, and variable identification symbols based on the result of the hit/lose determination. A display means (for example, a liquid crystal display device 16) for performing display is provided, and a special game (for example, a jackpot game state) advantageous to the player can be executed based on the result of the hit/loss determination being a specific result. A gaming machine, comprising: lottery promotion control means capable of executing control (for example, time-saving game state) that promotes the win-lose determination compared to a normal game state until the win-lose determination is performed a predetermined number of times; a probability changing means capable of setting a winning probability in determination to a higher probability (e.g., high-probability gaming state) than in a normal gaming state at least while the control for promoting the winning-lost determination is being executed; a secret effect executing means (for example, step S205, etc.) capable of executing a secret effect (for example, a secret A stage 2002) in which whether or not the winning probability in the winning/losing determination is set to the high probability is not specified; holding means (e.g., step S54, step S55, etc.) capable of storing up to a predetermined number (e.g., four) of information about the variable display that is not displayed as a start memory; and one start memory stored by the hold means. When the variable display is performed for the first start memory, the display for controlling the variation performance and the stop performance of the identification symbol using the performance time until the variable display for the next start memory of the one start memory is performed In a gaming state in which control means (for example, sub CPU 201) and at least the control for promoting the win/loss determination are executed, a variation effect and a stop effect of the identification symbol are performed with respect to the starting memory stored by the holding means. A pattern effect execution number determination means (for example, step S324) that determines the number of executions of the symbol effect to be performed, and one or more start memories stored by the holding means. Mode determination means (for example, step S372, etc.), wherein the performance mode determination means divides the symbol effects of the number of executions determined by the symbol effect execution number determination means into predetermined units, and the start memory is provided. It is characterized by having specific effect determination means (for example, step S372, etc.) for determining the effect mode to be performed during execution of the symbol effect divided into the predetermined units regardless of the unit.

According to the gaming machine of (1) above, at least in the game state in which the control for promoting the win-lose determination is being executed, the identification pattern variation effect and the stop effect are performed with respect to the start memory stored by the holding means. The execution number of symbol effects (for example, provisional variation) to be performed is determined. That is, originally, one pattern performance is performed for each start memory stored by the reserve means, but one or more times of pattern performance is performed for each start memory stored by the reserve means. Since the number is determined, even though the variable display is for one starting memory, it looks as if the variable display is being performed for a plurality of starting memories. Therefore, even if the end timing of the period during which the control for promoting the win-lose determination is executed is predetermined, it is difficult for the player to grasp the end timing of the execution period.

Also, the symbol effects determined for each start memory are divided into predetermined units regardless of the unit of the start memory. Then, an effect mode to be performed during execution of the symbol effect divided into the predetermined units is determined. Therefore, a part of the plurality of symbol effects determined for one starting memory and a plurality of patterns determined for other starting memories whose variable display is performed next to the variable display for the one starting memory It is also possible that an effect mode that extends over part of the symbol effect is determined. As a result, it is possible to determine the mode of presentation regardless of the result of one game. In addition, since it is possible to execute a display effect that does not make the player aware of the variable display in the starting memory unit, the degree of progress after the start of the control to promote the win-lose determination (that is, the control to promote the win-lose determination is It is possible to make it difficult for the player to grasp the remaining period of execution. Moreover, when the concealment performance is executed, the performance performed during execution of the symbol performance divided into predetermined units indicates the degree of expectation that the winning probability in the winning/losing judgment is high. Since the mode is determined, it is possible to direct the player's consciousness toward the above-described presentation mode rather than the remaining period during which the control for promoting the win-lose determination is executed, thereby further suppressing the decline in interest. becomes.

In addition, the "variable display of the identification pattern" here means a series of displays from the start of the variable display of the identification pattern to the stop display for one starting memory, and in one starting memory. On the other hand, the number of times of variable display is one even if the identification pattern variation effect and the stop effect are repeatedly performed a plurality of times.

In addition, the "stop effect" of the identification pattern means the stop effect (for example, temporary stop) of the identification pattern that is performed in the middle of one variable display and the stop of the identification pattern that is performed when one variable display is completed. This is intended to include both effects (for example, main stop).

Further, "When the variable display is performed for one starting memory, the variable performance and the stop performance of the identification pattern are performed using the performance time until the variable display for the next starting memory of the one starting memory is performed. "is performed" means not only the time during which the variable display is performed for one starting memory, but also includes all or part of the time required for the interval until the variable display for the next starting memory is performed. Therefore, the ``symbol effect in which the identification symbol fluctuation effect and the stop effect are performed'' is until the identification symbol stop effect is performed if it is in the middle of the variable display, and if it is the end of the variable display, the above interval is also It is intended to include

(2) The gaming machine according to (1) above, further comprising holding effect control means for controlling an image related to start memory stored in the holding means to be displayed on the display means, the holding effect control means is characterized in that, at least when the performance mode determined by the specific performance determining means is displayed, the image related to the starting memory stored in the holding means is controlled so as not to be displayed.

According to the gaming machine of (2) above, since the image related to the start memory stored in the reserve means is not displayed on the display means, the execution number of the symbol performance is determined for the start memory stored by the reserve means. Combined with this, it becomes difficult to grasp the degree of progress after the start of the control for promoting the win-lose determination (that is, the remaining period during which the control for promoting the win-lose determination is executed). As a result, it is possible to make the player interested in the index performance that makes it possible to guess the degree of expectation that the probability of winning in the win-lose judgment is high, and the end timing of the control that promotes the win-lose judgment can be further improved. It is possible to make it even more difficult for the player to comprehend.

(3) In the gaming machine described in (1) or (2) above, when there are a plurality of starting memories stored by the holding means, the effect mode determining means selects one of the plurality of starting memories. A part of the pattern performance of the number of executions determined for the starting memory and a part of the pattern performance of the number of executions determined for the other starting memory are divided as a predetermined unit straddling a plurality of starting memories. and, regardless of the unit of the starting memory, it has a specific effect mode determination means (for example, step S372 etc.) capable of determining the effect mode to be performed during execution of the symbol performance divided into the predetermined units. do.

According to the gaming machine of (3) above, it is possible to determine an effect mode across a plurality of starting memories without being bound by the result of one game. In addition, it is possible to execute a display performance that does not make the player aware of the variable display in the unit of starting memory, thereby making it even more difficult for the player to comprehend the end timing of the control that promotes the winning/losing determination.

According to the gaming machine of Supplementary Note 32, by making it difficult to grasp the end timing of the specific game state, it is possible to suppress a decline in interest.

[Appendix 33]
2. Description of the Related Art Conventionally, among gaming machines such as a pachinko machine or a pachislot machine, there has been known a gaming machine in which win/lose determination is performed, symbols are displayed in a variable manner, and the result of the game is displayed when the symbols that are displayed in a variable manner are stopped and displayed. Then, when the result of the game is a specific result, a special game advantageous to the player is performed.

In this type of gaming machine, the game state after the special game is finished is set to a specific game state such as a time-saving game state, and whether the winning probability in the hit/loss determination is a high probability is kept secret, and is determined in advance. There is known a gaming machine that discloses whether or not the probability is high when the number of games played is completed (see, for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2009-240529).

As described above, some gaming machines that conceal whether or not the probability is high in the specific game state perform a high-probability suggestion effect that suggests the degree of expectation that the probability is high in the specific game state.

However, in a game machine that conceals whether or not the probability is high in a specific game state and that a high probability indication effect is performed that suggests the degree of expectation that the probability is high in the specific game state, the high probability When not, the performance with a low degree of expectation is likely to be selected.

On the other hand, if an effect with a high degree of expectation is performed even though the probability is not high, it only gives the player a sense of unnecessary expectation, and the disappointment given to the player at the end of the specific game state is immeasurable.

SUMMARY OF THE INVENTION The present invention has been made in view of such a point, and its object is to make the display effect performed in the specific game state more interesting, and to suppress the decrease in interest.

(1) The gaming machine of Supplementary Note 33 includes lottery means (for example, step S117, etc.) that performs hit/lose determination (for example, big hit determination) based on the establishment of a fixed condition, and variable identification symbols based on the result of the hit/lose determination. A display means (for example, a liquid crystal display device 16) for performing display is provided, and a special game (for example, a jackpot game state) advantageous to the player can be executed based on the result of the hit/loss determination being a specific result. A game machine, in which control for promoting the winning/losing determination compared to the normal game state (for example, time-saving game state) can be executed over a predetermined period of time Lottery promotion control means (for example, step S171); Probability changing means capable of making the probability of winning in win-lose determination higher than a normal game state (e.g., high-probability game state) at least while the control for promoting the win-lose determination is being executed; A concealment period (for example, concealment A stage 2002) is provided in which a display effect that does not indicate whether or not the winning probability in the win-lose determination is set to the high probability is provided, and during the concealment period, the winning probability in the win-lose determination is provided. index effect execution means (for example, step S370, etc.) capable of executing an index effect that gives a sense of expectation that is high probability; scenario determining means (for example, scenario presetting process (FIG. 138)) that is determined in advance before the control for promoting the win-lose determination is executed, and the scenario determining means determines that the control for promoting the win-lose determination It is characterized in that the scenario of the index presentation is determined so that when the game ends, it is clearly indicated whether or not the winning probability in the winning/losing determination is set to the high probability.

According to the gaming machine of (1) above, since the scenario of the index effect that is performed as the overall effect during the concealment period is determined in advance before the control for promoting the win/loss determination is executed, the indicator is displayed in accordance with the concealment period. It is possible to progress the production scenario. In other words, if it is determined whether the index performance is advantageous or disadvantageous to the player before the concealment period ends, the player may lose interest. In this regard, according to the present invention, it is possible to maintain the interest in the index performance until the concealment period ends, and to suppress the decrease in interest.

(2) In the gaming machine described in (1) above, holding means (for example, step S54, step S55, etc.) capable of storing up to a predetermined number of information about the variable display that has not yet been performed as start memory; Symbol effect execution number determining means (for example, step S324, etc.), and an effect mode determination means (for example, step S372, etc.) capable of determining a performance mode for one or more starting memories stored by the holding means, wherein the performance mode determination The means divides the symbol effect of the number of executions determined by the symbol effect execution number determination means into predetermined units with respect to the starting memory stored by the holding means, and divides the symbol effect into predetermined units regardless of the unit of the starting memory. It has specific effect determination means (for example, step S372, etc.) for determining the effect mode to be performed during execution of the symbol effect divided into units of .

According to the gaming machine of (2) above, the execution number of symbol effects (for example, provisional variation) in which the identification symbol variation effect and the stop effect are performed is determined for the starting memory stored by the retaining means. . That is, originally, one pattern performance is performed for each start memory stored by the reserve means, but one or more times of pattern performance is performed for each start memory stored by the reserve means. Since the number is determined, even though the variable display is for one starting memory, it looks as if the variable display is being performed for a plurality of starting memories. Moreover, the symbol effects determined for each start memory are divided into predetermined units regardless of the unit of the start memory. Then, an effect mode to be performed during execution of the symbol effect divided into the predetermined units is determined. Therefore, a part of the plurality of symbol effects determined for one starting memory and a plurality of patterns determined for other starting memories whose variable display is performed next to the variable display for the one starting memory It is also possible that an effect mode that extends over part of the symbol effect is determined. As a result, it is possible to determine the mode of presentation regardless of the result of one game. In addition, it is possible to execute a display performance that does not make the player aware of the variable display in units of start memory, and it is possible to suppress the decrease in interest.

In addition, "variable display" means a series of displays from the start of the variable display of the identification pattern for one starting memory to the stop display, and the variation of the identification pattern for one starting memory. Even if the effect and the stop effect are repeated multiple times, the number of times of variable display is one.

In addition, the "stop effect" of the identification pattern means the stop effect (for example, temporary stop) of the identification pattern that is performed in the middle of one variable display and the stop of the identification pattern that is performed when one variable display is completed. This is intended to include both effects (for example, main stop).

(3) In the gaming machine described in (1) or (2) above, a holding effect control means (for example, a sub CPU 201), and the holding effect control means controls not to display the image related to the starting memory stored in the holding means at least when the effect mode determined by the specific effect determining means is being displayed. It is something to do.

According to the gaming machine of (3) above, since the image related to the start memory stored in the reserve means is not displayed on the display means, the execution number of the symbol presentation is determined for the start memory stored by the reserve means. Combined with this, it becomes difficult to grasp the degree of progress after the start of the control for promoting the win-lose determination (that is, the remaining period during which the control for promoting the win-lose determination is executed). As a result, it is possible to arouse the player's interest in the index performance that can give a sense of anticipation that the winning probability in the winning/losing determination is high.

According to the gaming machine of Supplementary Note 33, it is possible to make the display effect performed in the specific game state more interesting, and to suppress the decline in interest.

[Appendix 34]
2. Description of the Related Art Conventionally, among gaming machines such as a pachinko machine or a pachislot machine, there has been known a gaming machine in which win/lose determination is performed, symbols are displayed in a variable manner, and the result of the game is displayed when the symbols that are displayed in a variable manner are stopped and displayed. Then, when the result of the game is a specific result, a special game advantageous to the player is performed.

In this type of gaming machine, the game state after the special game is finished is set to a specific game state such as a time-saving game state, and whether the winning probability in the hit/loss determination is a high probability is kept secret, and is determined in advance. There is known a gaming machine that discloses whether or not the probability is high when the number of games played is completed (see, for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2009-240529).

As described above, some gaming machines that conceal whether or not the probability is high in the specific game state perform a high-probability suggestion effect that suggests the degree of expectation that the probability is high in the specific game state.

However, in a game machine that conceals whether or not the probability is high in a specific game state and that a high probability indication effect is performed that suggests the degree of expectation that the probability is high in the specific game state, the high probability When not, the performance with a low degree of expectation is likely to be selected.

On the other hand, if an effect with a high degree of expectation is performed even though the probability is not high, it only gives the player a sense of unnecessary expectation, and the disappointment given to the player at the end of the specific game state is immeasurable.

SUMMARY OF THE INVENTION The present invention has been made in view of such a point, and its object is to make the display effect performed in the specific game state more interesting, and to suppress the decrease in interest.

(1) The gaming machine of Supplementary Note 34 includes lottery means (for example, step S117, etc.) that performs win/lose determination (for example, big hit determination) based on the establishment of a predetermined condition, and variable identification symbols based on the result of the hit/lose determination. A display means (for example, a liquid crystal display device 16) for performing display is provided, and a special game (for example, a jackpot game state) advantageous to the player can be executed based on the result of the hit/loss determination being a specific result. and a holding means (for example, step S54, step S55, etc.) capable of storing up to a predetermined number of information about the variable display that has not yet been performed as start memory, and the holding means stores the information. When the variable display is performed for one starting memory, the variable performance and the stop performance of the identification pattern are performed using the performance time until the variable display for the next starting memory of the one starting memory is performed. Display control means (e.g., step S205, etc.) that controls so, and control (e.g., time-saving game state) that promotes the winning/losing determination compared to the normal game state, can be executed over a predetermined period Lottery promotion control means, a probability changing means capable of making the winning probability in the win/lose determination higher than a normal game state (for example, a high probability game state) at least while the control for promoting the win/lose determination is being executed; providing a concealment period in which a display effect that does not indicate whether or not the winning probability in the win-lose determination is set to the high probability is provided, and during the concealment period, the winning probability in the win-lose determination is the high probability; index effect execution means (for example, step S370, etc.) capable of executing an index effect that can give a sense of anticipation, and a control that promotes the hit/loss determination for the scenario of the index effect that is performed as the overall effect during the concealment period. Before being executed, a scenario determining means (for example, scenario presetting process (FIG. 138)) that is determined in advance, and at least during the concealment period, variation of the identification pattern with respect to the starting memory stored by the holding means a symbol effect execution number determining means (for example, step S324) for determining the number of executions of symbol effects in which effects and stop effects are performed, wherein the index effect execution means is determined by the symbol effect execution number determining means; The pattern performance of the number of executions is divided into predetermined units, and regardless of the unit of the starting memory, it is decided to perform the index performance as a performance to be performed during the execution of the pattern performance divided into the predetermined units. and has a special effect determination means to and the scenario determination means determines the scenario of the index effect so that, when the control for promoting the win-lose determination ends, whether or not the winning probability in the win-lose determination is set to the high probability is specified. characterized by

According to the gaming machine of (1) above, at least during the concealment period, execution of a symbol effect (for example, provisional variation) in which a variation effect and a stop effect of the identification symbol are performed for the starting memory stored by the holding means. number is determined. That is, originally, the symbol performance is performed once for each starting memory stored by the holding means, but at least during the concealment period, one or more times for each starting memory stored by the holding means. Since the execution number of the pattern presentation is determined, even though the variable display is for one start memory, it looks as if the variable display is performed for a plurality of start memories. Therefore, it is difficult for the player to grasp the end timing of the concealment period. Furthermore, since the symbol effects determined for each start memory are divided into predetermined units regardless of the unit of the start memory, it is even more difficult to grasp the end timing of the concealment period.

Also, as a performance to be performed during execution of the symbol performance divided into predetermined units, an index performance capable of giving a sense of expectation that the probability of winning in the winning/losing determination is high is determined. This indicator effect is determined in advance before the control for promoting the win-lose judgment is executed for the scenario performed as the overall effect during the concealment period, and when the control for promoting the win-lose judgment ends, the win-lose judgment in the win-lose judgment Whether or not the probability is high probability is clearly indicated.

In this way, an index effect is performed that gives the player a sense of expectation that the probability of winning in the win/lose determination is high, while not making the player aware of the end timing of the concealment period and thus the end timing of the control that promotes the win/lose determination. At the same time, when the control for promoting the win/lose determination ends, whether or not the winning probability in the win/lose determination is high is indicated by an index effect. Therefore, unlike conventional gaming machines that disclose whether or not the probability of winning in the win-lose judgment is high when the concealment period has passed for a certain period of time, the timing of the end of the concealment period and the end of the control that promotes the win-lose judgment It is possible to execute an effect such that whether or not the probability of winning in winning/losing determination is high or not is clearly indicated by the outcome of the index performance without making the player aware of the timing. For example, if the index effect is a game effect between an ally and an enemy, it is possible to realize a high-probability definite effect when the ally wins.

In addition, the "variable display of the identification pattern" here means a series of displays from the start of the variable display of the identification pattern to the stop display for one starting memory, and in one starting memory. On the other hand, the number of times of variable display is one even if the identification pattern variation effect and the stop effect are repeatedly performed a plurality of times.

In addition, the "stop effect" of the identification pattern means the stop effect (for example, temporary stop) of the identification pattern that is performed in the middle of one variable display and the stop of the identification pattern that is performed when one variable display is completed. This is intended to include both effects (for example, main stop).

Further, "When the variable display is performed for one starting memory, the variable performance and the stop performance of the identification pattern are performed using the performance time until the variable display for the next starting memory of the one starting memory is performed. "is performed" means not only the time during which the variable display is performed for one starting memory, but also includes all or part of the time required for the interval until the variable display for the next starting memory is performed. Therefore, the ``symbol effect in which the identification symbol fluctuation effect and the stop effect are performed'' is until the identification symbol stop effect is performed if it is in the middle of the variable display, and if it is the end of the variable display, the above interval is also It is intended to include

(2) The gaming machine described in (1) above further includes holding effect control means (for example, sub CPU 201) for controlling so that the image related to the starting memory stored in the holding means is displayed on the display means. The holding effect control means controls not to display the image related to the starting memory stored in the holding means at least when the effect mode determined by the specific effect determining means is displayed. do.

According to the gaming machine of (2) above, since the image related to the start memory stored in the reserve means is not displayed on the display means, the execution number of the symbol performance is determined for the start memory stored by the reserve means. Combined with this, it becomes difficult to grasp the degree of progress after the start of the control for promoting the win-lose determination (that is, the remaining period during which the control for promoting the win-lose determination is executed). As a result, the player can be interested in the index performance that can give a sense of anticipation that the probability of winning in the win-lose judgment is high, and the probability of winning in the win-lose judgment increases according to the outcome of the index performance. It is possible to give the impression to the player that whether or not there is is disclosed.

(3) In the gaming machine described in (1) or (2) above, when a plurality of starting memories are stored by the holding means, the special effect determining means selects one of the plurality of starting memories. A part of the pattern performance of the number of executions determined for the starting memory and a part of the pattern performance of the number of executions determined for the other starting memory are divided as a predetermined unit straddling a plurality of starting memories. and, regardless of the unit of the starting memory, it has a specific effect mode determination means (for example, step S372 etc.) capable of determining the effect mode to be performed during execution of the symbol performance divided into the predetermined units. do.

According to the gaming machine of (3) above, it is possible to determine an effect mode across a plurality of starting memories without being bound by the result of one game. In addition, it is possible to execute a display effect that does not make the player aware of the variable display in the starting memory unit, and makes it even more difficult for the player to grasp the end timing of the concealment period and the end timing of the control that promotes the winning/losing determination. be able to.

According to the gaming machine of Supplementary Note 34, it is possible to make the display effect performed in the specific game state more interesting, and to suppress the decline in interest.

[Appendix 35]
2. Description of the Related Art Conventionally, among gaming machines such as a pachinko machine or a pachislot machine, there has been known a gaming machine in which winning/losing determination is performed and symbols are variably displayed, and when the variably displayed symbols are stopped and displayed, the result of the game is displayed. Then, when the result of the game is a specific result, a special game advantageous to the player is performed.

In this type of gaming machine, the game state after the special game is finished is set to a specific game state such as a time-saving game state, and whether the winning probability in the hit/loss determination is a high probability is kept secret, and is determined in advance. There is known a gaming machine that discloses whether or not the probability is high when the number of games played is completed (see, for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2009-240529).

As described above, some gaming machines that conceal whether or not the probability is high in the specific game state perform a high-probability suggestion effect that suggests the degree of expectation that the probability is high in the specific game state.

However, in a game machine that conceals whether or not the probability is high in a specific game state and that a high probability indication effect is performed that suggests the degree of expectation that the probability is high in the specific game state, the high probability When not, the performance with a low degree of expectation is likely to be selected.

On the other hand, if an effect with a high degree of expectation is performed even though the probability is not high, it only gives the player a sense of unnecessary expectation, and the disappointment given to the player at the end of the specific game state is immeasurable.

SUMMARY OF THE INVENTION The present invention has been made in view of such a point, and its object is to make the display effect performed in the specific game state more interesting, and to suppress the decrease in interest.

(1) The gaming machine of Supplementary Note 35 includes lottery means (for example, step S117, etc.) that performs hit/lose determination (for example, big hit determination) based on the establishment of a predetermined condition, and variable identification symbols based on the result of the hit/lose determination. A display means (for example, a liquid crystal display device 16) for performing display is provided, and a special game (for example, a jackpot game state) advantageous to the player can be executed based on the result of the hit/loss determination being a specific result. A game machine that is capable of executing control (for example, a time-saving game state) that promotes the win-lose determination compared to a normal game state for a predetermined period, and a winning probability in the win-lose determination, At least while the control for promoting the win-lose determination is being executed, a probability changing means capable of setting a higher probability (for example, a high-probability game state) compared to a normal game state, and a winning probability in the win-lose determination A concealment period (for example, concealment A stage 2002) is provided in which a display effect that does not indicate whether or not the high probability is set is provided, and whether the winning probability in the win/loss determination is the high probability during the concealment period. An index effect executing means capable of executing an index effect (for example, character subtraction effect) that makes it possible to guess whether or not scenario determination means for determining in advance before the is executed, the lottery promotion control means selects one of a plurality of periods so that the period for executing the control for promoting the winning/losing determination is different each time promotion period determination means (for example, step S172) for determining the period, and the scenario determination means terminates the control for promoting the win/loss determination according to the period determined by the promotion period determination means. In this case, the scenario of the index presentation is determined so as to clearly indicate whether or not the winning probability in the winning/losing determination is set to the high probability.

According to the gaming machine of (1) above, the scenario of the index performance performed as the overall performance during the concealment period is determined in advance before the control for promoting the win-lose determination is executed, and the win-lose determination is accelerated. When the control ends, it is clearly indicated whether or not the winning probability in the winning/losing determination is high. Here, the index effect is a effect that makes it possible to guess whether or not the winning probability in the winning/losing determination is the high probability. In addition, since the execution period of the control that promotes the win-lose determination is determined differently each time, it is difficult for the player to grasp the end timing of the concealment period.

In this way, an indicator effect is performed that makes the player guess whether the winning probability in the winning/losing determination is high or not, while not making the player aware of the ending timing of the concealment period and thus the ending timing of the control that promotes the winning/losing determination. At the same time, when the control for promoting the win/lose determination ends, whether or not the winning probability in the win/lose determination is high is indicated by an index effect. Therefore, unlike conventional gaming machines that disclose whether or not the probability of winning in the win-lose judgment is high when the concealment period has passed for a certain period of time, the timing of the end of the concealment period and the end of the control that promotes the win-lose judgment It is possible to execute an effect such that whether or not the probability of winning in winning/losing determination is high or not is clearly indicated by the outcome of the index performance without making the player aware of the timing. For example, if the index effect is a game effect between an ally and an enemy, it is possible to realize a high-probability definite effect when the ally wins.

(2) In the gaming machine described in (1) above, holding means (for example, step S54, step S55, etc.) capable of storing up to a predetermined number of information about the variable display that has not yet been performed as start memory; Symbol effect execution number determining means (for example, step S324, etc.), and an effect mode determining means (for example, step S372, etc.) capable of determining the effect mode for one or more starting memories stored by the holding means, and the effect mode determining means divides the symbol effect of the number of executions determined by the symbol effect execution number determining means into predetermined units with respect to the start memory stored by the holding means, and divides the symbol effect into predetermined units regardless of the unit of the start memory. It is characterized by having specific effect determination means (for example, step S370, etc.) for determining the effect mode to be performed during execution of the symbol effect divided into units.

According to the gaming machine of (2) above, the execution number of symbol effects (for example, temporary variation) in which the identification symbol variation effect and the stop effect are performed is determined for the starting memory stored by the holding means. . That is, originally, one pattern performance is performed for each start memory stored by the reserve means, but one or more times of pattern performance is performed for each start memory stored by the reserve means. Since the number is determined, even though the variable display is for one starting memory, it looks as if the variable display is being performed for a plurality of starting memories. Moreover, the symbol effects determined for each start memory are divided into predetermined units regardless of the unit of the start memory. Then, an effect mode to be performed during execution of the symbol effect divided into the predetermined units is determined. Therefore, a part of the plurality of symbol effects determined for one starting memory and a plurality of patterns determined for other starting memories whose variable display is performed next to the variable display for the one starting memory It is also possible that an effect mode that extends over part of the symbol effect is determined. As a result, it is possible to determine the mode of presentation regardless of the result of one game. In addition, it is possible to execute a display performance that does not make the player aware of the variable display in units of start memory, and it is possible to suppress the decrease in interest.

In addition, "variable display" means a series of displays from the start of the variable display of the identification pattern for one starting memory to the stop display, and the variation of the identification pattern for one starting memory. Even if the effect and the stop effect are repeated multiple times, the number of times of variable display is one.

In addition, the "stop effect" of the identification pattern means the stop effect (for example, temporary stop) of the identification pattern that is performed in the middle of one variable display and the stop of the identification pattern that is performed when one variable display is completed. This is intended to include both effects (for example, main stop).

(3) The gaming machine according to (2) above, further comprising a holding effect control means for controlling an image related to start memory stored in the holding means to be displayed in a predetermined display area, wherein the holding effect control The means controls not to display the image related to the starting memory stored in the holding means at least when the performance mode determined by the specific performance determining means is displayed.

According to the gaming machine of (3) above, since the image related to the start memory stored in the reserve means is not displayed on the display means, the execution number of the symbol presentation is determined for the start memory stored by the reserve means. Combined with this, it becomes difficult to grasp the degree of progress after the start of the control for promoting the win-lose determination (that is, the remaining period during which the control for promoting the win-lose determination is executed). As a result, it is possible to arouse the player's interest in the index presentation that makes the player guess the degree of expectation that the winning probability in the winning/losing determination is high.

According to the gaming machine of Supplementary Note 35, it is possible to make the display effect performed in the specific game state more interesting, and to suppress the decline in interest.

[Appendix 36]
2. Description of the Related Art Conventionally, among gaming machines such as a pachinko machine or a pachislot machine, there has been known a gaming machine in which winning/losing determination is performed and symbols are variably displayed, and when the variably displayed symbols are stopped and displayed, the result of the game is displayed. Then, when the result of the game is a specific result, a special game advantageous to the player is performed.

In this type of gaming machine, before the result of the win/lose determination is displayed, a display effect is performed to make the user expect that a special game may be played, thereby enhancing the effect of the effect (for example, See JP-A-2006-246964).

However, in the gaming machine described in Patent Document 1, since the display effect is performed only for the win-lose determination unit, if the display effect is not such that a special game can be expected to be performed, the changing display effect is displayed. There is a possibility that the player may lose his sense of anticipation for the variable display of patterns, and at that point, his interest may decrease.

The present invention has been made in view of such a point, and its object is to suitably make the player not aware of the display effect in units of winning/losing determination, thereby suppressing the deterioration of interest.

(1) The gaming machine of Supplementary Note 36 includes display means (for example, the liquid crystal display device 16) that performs variable display of identification symbols based on the establishment of a predetermined condition, and information about the variable display that has not yet been performed. Reserving means (for example, step S54, step S55, etc.) capable of storing up to a predetermined number (for example, four) of (for example, a random number value for judging a big hit, a random number value for determining a symbol, etc.) as starting memory; When the variable display is performed for one starting memory stored in (for example, step S54, step S55, etc.), the performance time until the variable display for the next starting memory of the one starting memory is performed is used. display control means for performing control so that a variation effect and a stop effect of the identification pattern are performed by the display control means; (For example, provisional variation) execution number determination means (for example, step S324) capable of determining the number of executions, and one or more starting memories stored by the holding means are determined as the effect section. and a performance mode determination means (for example, step S372) capable of determining a performance mode for the starting memory included in the performance section as the section performance to be performed in the performance section, wherein the performance mode determination is provided. The means determines whether or not the section production is being executed, and when it is determined that the section production is not being executed, the means determines the production section again and performs the production of the section production performed in the production section. By determining the mode, the section production is repeatedly performed without interruption.

According to the gaming machine of (1) above, one or a plurality of starting memories among the starting memories stored by the holding means are determined as the performance section. Since such section performance is repeatedly performed without interruption, the player is not made aware that it is the performance of the starting memory unit, and the expectation can be maintained for a long period of time.

It should be noted that the mode in which the above-mentioned section effect is "performed repeatedly without interruption" includes, of course, the mode in which it is performed without interruption as long as there is a withheld starting memory. Even if, for example, the demonstration effect is executed in the middle due to the lack of memory, if the section effect is executed when the starting memory is suspended after that, it is included in the above "repeatedly performed without interruption" . Also, when there are multiple starting ports (for example, when there are a first starting port 5442 and a second starting port 440), one of the starting ports (for example, the first starting port 5442) When a game ball enters Although the section effect is not performed in , when the game ball enters the other start port (for example, the second start port 440), the section effect is repeated without interruption.

(2) In the gaming machine described in (1) above, the performance mode determination means performs the symbol performance for the number of executions determined by the symbol performance execution number determination means for the starting memory included in the performance section. It is divided into predetermined units, and has section performance mode determination means (for example, sub CPU 201) that determines the performance mode performed during execution of the symbol performance divided into the predetermined units regardless of the unit of the start memory. is.

According to the game machine of (2) above, since the performance mode is determined regardless of the unit of the starting memory, it is possible to determine the performance mode across a plurality of starting memories. In addition, it is possible to execute a display effect that does not make the player aware of the variable display in units of starting memory, and to provide a novel game that makes it difficult for the player to be aware of the game result for each starting memory.

(3) In the gaming machine described in (2) above, the section effect mode determination means includes part of the symbol effects of the number of executions determined for one start memory included in the effect section, and the effect A portion of the symbol performance of the number of executions determined for other starting memories included in the section can be divided as a predetermined unit across a plurality of starting memories.

According to the gaming machine of (3) above, it is possible to determine the mode of presentation regardless of the result of one game. In addition, since the player can execute a display effect that does not make the player aware of the variable display in units of start memory, the range of effects can be expanded, and the decrease in interest can be suppressed.

According to the gaming machine of Supplementary Note 36, it is possible to prevent the player from being conscious of the display effect in units of win/lose determination, so that it is possible to suppress the decrease in interest.

Regarding the "expectation level" described in each appendix above, the expectation level (reliability) for a predetermined internal state (that is, an advantageous state) such as a jackpot or a high-probability gaming state for each notice effect The probability that the production is executed and becomes a "jackpot" or a "high probability game state" is the probability that each notice production is executed and the "big hit" or "high probability game state" is executed, and each notice production is executed and " It is a numerical value divided by the sum of the probability of being in a predetermined internal state (that is, a disadvantageous state) such as the probability of being "lost" or "low probability gaming state". However, since the "expectation level" can include a case where the expectation level is 100% and a case where the expectation level is 0%, strictly speaking, there are cases where the above division does not hold (for example, the production is executed Since it can include the case where the game state or winning or losing is definitely notified when it is done, it is not suitable to divide 1 by 0. that would be the case).

[Appendix 37-1 to Appendix 37-8]
2. Description of the Related Art Conventionally, in a game machine such as a pachinko machine, a lottery is held when a predetermined condition is satisfied, and an effect image is displayed on a liquid crystal display or the like based on the result of the lottery. When the result of the lottery is a big win, a big win game is started and the big prize opening is opened and closed in a predetermined opening/closing pattern. When the above-mentioned jackpot is a variable probability jackpot, after the jackpot game ends, the game is controlled to a high probability game state.

In this type of gaming machine, the state of game elements (structural elements and control elements) that influences the ball entry rate into the ball entrance and the ball output tendency is set to game setting values input in advance by a predetermined setting input means. A pachinko game machine that is set to a state corresponding to is disclosed (see, for example, Japanese Unexamined Patent Application Publication No. 2015-065977).

According to the gaming machine described in JP-A-2015-065977, it is possible to arbitrarily set the ball output tendency for each gaming machine, so it is not possible to adjust or maintain the game board configuration such as game nails and accessories. Even if this is the case, it is possible to prevent uniformity of ball payout tendencies for each game parlor or each game machine.

(First issue)
However, according to the gaming machine described in JP-A-2015-065977, although the ball-out tendency can be arbitrarily set for each game machine, there are structural elements that influence the ball-in rate and the ball-out tendency. Alternatively, it can only be said that the state of the control element can be changed according to the setting value, and the degree of contribution to the improvement of the game interest is not necessarily large.

SUMMARY OF THE INVENTION The present invention has been made in view of such a point, and its object is to provide a game machine capable of appropriately changing the state of game elements according to settings while improving interest. be.

In order to solve the above first problem, a game machine of attachment 37-1 having the following configuration is provided.

(1) The game machine of Supplementary Note 37-1 is
Based on a predetermined operation (for example, pressing the backup clear switch 330 and turning on the power switch 35 while the setting key 328 is turned on when the power is not turned on), data relating to the progress of the game is generated. A setting change control means (for example, the main CPU 101 capable of executing the processing of step S3024) that can be set to one of a plurality of different setting values (for example, setting values in six steps from setting 1 to setting 6);
a lottery means capable of executing a lottery based on the establishment of a predetermined condition (for example, the main CPU 101 capable of executing the processes of steps S3073, S3083, and S3118);
Display means (eg, first special symbol display section 73, second special symbol display section 74) for performing variable display of symbols (for example, special symbols) in a predetermined variation pattern over a predetermined variation time,
Variation pattern determination means (for example, main CPU 101 capable of executing the process of step S3078) that determines the variation pattern performed on the display means based on the result of the lottery;
Variation pattern table storage means (for example, main ROM 102) for storing a variation pattern table used for determining the variation pattern;
Symbol display control means (for example, variable display of special symbols) for a variation time corresponding to the variation pattern determined by the variation pattern determination means, and stop display in a manner showing the result of the lottery ( For example, the main CPU 101 capable of executing the processing of step S3093,
with
The fluctuation pattern table storage means is
A fluctuation pattern table (for example, figure It is characterized by storing a special symbol fluctuation time determination table shown in 170.

According to the game machine of (1) above, the higher the set value set by the setting change control means, the shorter the fluctuation time. It is possible to increase the degree of expectation and improve the amusement of the game.

(2) In the gaming machine described in (1) above,
Further comprising lottery number counting means (for example, main CPU 101) for counting the number of times the lottery is executed from a specific time,
The fluctuation pattern table storage means is
As the set value set by the setting change control means increases, the probability of being determined to the short variation pattern is defined to be higher than the variation pattern table. further stores a special symbol variation time determination table when the number of variations indicated is 1001 or more,
The fluctuation pattern determining means is
When the number of executions of the lottery counted by the number-of-lottery counting means satisfies a predetermined condition (for example, when a jackpot lottery with a special symbol is performed 1001 times or more after the jackpot game state ends), It is characterized in that the variation pattern can be determined using the other variation pattern table.

According to the gaming machine of (2) above, when the number of times the lottery is executed counted by the lottery number counting means satisfies a predetermined condition, the variation pattern can be determined using another variation pattern table. Therefore, the higher the set value is, the more the number of lotteries per unit time becomes. Incidentally, the "predetermined condition" corresponds to, for example, when a jackpot lottery with special symbols is performed a predetermined number of times or more (for example, 1001 times or more) after the jackpot game state ends, but is not limited to this.

(3) In the gaming machine described in (2) above,
Stores game information related to the progress of the game including the set values set by the setting change control means (for example, the number of pending memories stored in the pending memory means, the lottery results of the pending memories and variable display, and the set values) Possible game information storage means (for example, RWM (main RAM 103));
Appropriateness determining means (main CPU 101 for performing the processing of steps S3072 and S3082) for determining whether the game information stored in the game information storage means is appropriate or inappropriate at a predetermined timing;
When the game information stored in the game information storage means is determined to be inappropriate by the suitability determination means while the symbol variation display is being performed, a lottery for the symbol variation display is conducted. A game control means (for example, the main CPU 101 that executes the process of step S3722) that controls the game so that the game cannot proceed even if the symbols are not stopped and displayed in a manner indicating the result;
characterized by comprising

According to the gaming machine of (3) above, when the variable display of symbols (for example, the variable display of special symbols) is being performed, it is determined whether the game information stored in the game information storage means is appropriate or inappropriate. may be In this case, even if the symbols are not stop-displayed in a manner that indicates the result of the lottery for the variable display of the symbols, if it is determined that the game information is unsuitable or unsuitable, It is configured so that the game cannot proceed. This makes it possible to ensure security.

In order to solve the above first problem, a game machine of attachment 37-2 having the following configuration is provided.

(1) The game machine of Supplementary Note 37-2 is
Based on a predetermined operation (for example, pressing the backup clear switch 330 and turning on the power switch 35 while the setting key 328 is turned on when the power is not turned on), data relating to the progress of the game is generated. A setting change control means (for example, the main CPU 101 capable of executing the processing of step S3024) that can be set to one of a plurality of different setting values (for example, setting values in six steps from setting 1 to setting 6);
a lottery means capable of executing a lottery based on the establishment of a predetermined condition (for example, the main CPU 101 capable of executing the processes of steps S3073, S3083, and S3118);
a display means (e.g., a liquid crystal display device 16) capable of performing a pattern effect by a predetermined pattern (for example, a variable effect of a decorative pattern) and showing the result of the lottery by the stop mode of the pattern;
stop mode determination means (for example, a sub CPU 201 capable of executing the process of step S3205) for determining the stop mode of the symbols that can be displayed on the display means based on the result of the lottery;
stop mode table storage means (for example, program ROM 202) for storing a stop mode table (for example, the decorative symbol determination table in FIG. 171) used for determining the stop mode of the symbols by the stop mode determination means;
Symbol effect control means (for example, a sub CPU 201 capable of executing the processing of step S3207) that controls the symbols to be stopped in the stop mode determined by the stop mode determination means;
When the symbols are displayed in a mode (e.g., first mode, second mode, specific mode) indicating that the result of the lottery is a specific result (e.g., big win), a plurality of benefits advantageous to the player. (for example, 4R normal jackpot, 4R variable variable jackpot, 10R normal jackpot, 10R variable variable jackpot) profit giving means (for example, main CPU 101 that executes jackpot game control in FIG. 10);
with
The profit granting means is
When the symbols are displayed in a stop mode indicating that the result of the lottery is the specific result (for example, a big win), and the stop mode is a specific stop mode (for example, a specific mode), the plurality of profits are obtained. Among them, it is configured to be able to give a specific profit (for example, 10R fixed variable jackpot) with a relatively high degree of advantage,
The stop mode determining means is
When the result of the lottery is the specific result (for example, a big win), the higher the set value set by the setting change control means, the higher the probability that the pattern stop mode will be stopped in the specific stop mode. It is characterized in that it is configured to be able to determine the stop mode of the symbol so as to increase the height.

According to the gaming machine of (1) above, the higher the set value set by the setting change control means, the more the pattern stop mode is stopped in a specific stop mode with a relatively higher degree of advantage among a plurality of benefits. It is possible to increase the probability of winning, and it is possible to improve the amusement of the game.

(2) In the gaming machine described in (1) above,
The stop mode determining means is
When the result of the lottery is the specific result (for example, a big win), the setting value set by the setting change control means even though the probability of the specific profit being given is the same regardless of the setting value. The stop mode of the symbol can be determined so that the probability that the symbol is stopped in the specific stop mode increases as the number of symbols increases.

According to the gaming machine of (2) above, when the result of the lottery is the specific result (for example, a big win), the probability that the specific profit is given is the same regardless of the setting, but the setting is changed. As the setting value set by the control means increases, the probability that the game will be stopped in the specific stop mode increases, so that it is possible to improve the amusement of the game.

(3) In the gaming machine described in (1) or (2) above,
Stores game information related to the progress of the game including the set values set by the setting change control means (for example, the number of pending memories stored in the pending memory means, the lottery results of the pending memories and variable display, and the set values) Possible game information storage means (for example, RWM (main RAM 103));
Appropriateness determining means (main CPU 101 for performing the processing of steps S3072 and S3082) for determining whether the game information stored in the game information storage means is appropriate or inappropriate at a predetermined timing;
When the game information stored in the game information storage means is determined to be inappropriate by the appropriateness determination means while the symbol effect is being performed, the result of the lottery is the specific result. And even if it is determined by the stop mode determining means that the stop mode of the symbol is to be stopped in the specific stop mode, the game control means (for example, the process of step S3722 is executed) so that the game cannot proceed. the main CPU 101) to
characterized by comprising

According to the gaming machine of (3) above, when a symbol effect (for example, a variable effect of decorative symbols) is being performed, suitability or non-suitability of the game information stored in the game information storage means is determined. Sometimes. In this case, even if the result of the lottery is a specific result and it is determined that the pattern stop mode is to be stopped in the specific stop mode, it is inappropriate to determine whether the game information is suitable or unsuitable. The game is configured so that the game cannot proceed when it is determined that This makes it possible to ensure security.

In order to solve the above first problem, a game machine of attachment 37-3 having the following configuration is provided.

(1) The game machine of Supplementary Note 37-3 is
Based on a predetermined operation (for example, pressing the backup clear switch 330 and turning on the power switch 35 while the setting key 328 is turned on when the power is not turned on), data relating to the progress of the game is generated. A setting change control means (for example, the main CPU 101 capable of executing the processing of step S3024) that can be set to one of a plurality of different setting values (for example, setting values in six steps from setting 1 to setting 6);
A lottery means capable of executing a lottery based on the establishment of a predetermined condition (for example, the main CPU 101 capable of executing the processes of steps S3073, S3083, and S3118, including both a big win lottery and a main symbol determination lottery);
A lottery table storage means for storing a lottery table used in the lottery (for example, a table showing the selection rate of the main symbol when the result of the jackpot determination of the special symbol in FIG. 173 or 174 is a big win);
Display means (for example, the first special symbol display unit 73, the second special symbol display unit 74) for performing variable display of at least symbols;
Symbol display control means (for example, the main CPU 101 capable of executing the process of step S3093) that performs variable display of the symbols and stop-displays in a mode showing the result of the lottery;
The pattern is in a mode (for example, special figure 1-1 to special figure 1-8, special figure 2-1 to special figure 2-4) indicating that the result of the lottery is a specific result (for example, a big hit) When displayed, profit giving means (for example, the Main CPU 101) for executing jackpot game control;
with
The lottery table storage means
storing a plurality of lottery tables with different lottery probabilities for specific profits (e.g., 10R probability variable jackpot) having a relatively high degree of advantage among the plurality of profits, in accordance with set values;
The lottery means
It is characterized in that the lottery is performed using a lottery table corresponding to the setting value set by the setting change control means.

According to the gaming machine of (1) above, the lottery is performed using a plurality of lottery tables in which the lottery probability for the specific profit with a relatively high degree of advantage differs according to the set value. It is possible to vary the degree of profit given to the player in accordance with the set value, thereby improving the interest in the game.

(2) In the gaming machine described in (1) above,
The profit granting means is
As the specific profit, at least a special game state advantageous to the player and a high probability game state in which the profit is given with a relatively high probability in the game state after the special game state is completed. and
The lottery table storage means
A plurality of tables with different probabilities of being controlled to the high-probability gaming state according to set values are stored.

According to the gaming machine of (2) above, since the probability of being controlled to the high-probability gaming state varies according to the set value, it is possible to improve the amusement of the game.

(3) In the gaming machine described in (1) or (2) above,
The profit granting means is
As the specific benefit, a specific game state (for example, a time-saving game state) that promotes the lottery is further granted,
The lottery table storage means
A plurality of tables having different probabilities of being controlled to the specific game state according to set values are stored.

According to the game machine of (2) above, since the probability of being controlled to the specific game state varies according to the set value, it is possible to improve the game interest.

(4) In the gaming machine according to any one of (1) to (3) above,
Stores game information related to the progress of the game including the set values set by the setting change control means (for example, the number of pending memories stored in the pending memory means, the lottery results of the pending memories and variable display, and the set values) Possible game information storage means (for example, RWM (main RAM 103));
Appropriateness determining means (main CPU 101 for performing the processing of steps S3072 and S3082) for determining whether the game information stored in the game information storage means is appropriate or inappropriate at a predetermined timing;
When the game information stored in the game information storage means is determined to be inappropriate by the suitability determination means while the symbol variation display is being performed, a lottery for the symbol variation display is conducted. A game control means (for example, the main CPU 101 that executes the process of step S3722) that controls the game so that the game cannot proceed even if the result is that the specific profit is granted;
It is characterized by

According to the gaming machine of (4) above, when the variable display of symbols is being performed, it may be determined whether the game information stored in the game information storage means is appropriate or inappropriate. In this case, even if the result of the lottery related to the variable display of the symbols is the result of granting the specific profit, the game cannot proceed. This makes it possible to ensure security.

In order to solve the above first problem, a game machine of attachment 37-4 having the following configuration is provided.

(1) The game machine of Supplementary Note 37-4 is
Based on a predetermined operation (for example, pressing the backup clear switch 330 and turning on the power switch 35 while the setting key 328 is turned on when the power is not turned on), data relating to the progress of the game is generated. A setting change control means (for example, the main CPU 101 capable of executing the processing of step S3024) that can be set to one of a plurality of different setting values (for example, setting values in six steps from setting 1 to setting 6);
A plurality of starting ports including a first starting port and a second starting port provided in the game area;
Special lottery means for performing special lottery in different lottery modes based on entry (for example, acceptance) of game balls into each of the plurality of starting ports CPU 101);
Special game execution means (for example, main CPU 101 for executing big win game control in FIG. 10) capable of executing a special game that operates based on the result of the special lottery being a special result (for example, big win);
Specific game executing means (for example, main CPU 101) capable of executing a specific game having a lower degree of advantage than the special game based on the result of the special lottery being a specific result (for example, a small win);
with
The special lottery means
When performing the special lottery based on the entry (for example, acceptance) of the game ball into the starting port, the special lottery is performed according to the setting value set by the setting change control means. can be done in different ways, and
The specific game execution means is
Regardless of the setting value set by the setting change control means, the frequency is higher when the game ball enters the second start port than when the game ball enters the first start port. It is characterized by being configured to be able to execute the specific game.

According to the gaming machine of (1) above, the probability of obtaining a specific result can differ according to the setting value set by the setting change control means, and regardless of the setting value set by the setting change control means, the A specific game is executed at a higher frequency when a game ball enters a second start hole than when a game ball enters the first start hole. That is, when the game ball is made to win the second start port, it is possible to vary the execution frequency of the specific game according to the set value on the premise that the specific game is executed at a high frequency, and the game is played. It is possible to improve interest.

It should be noted that "the specific game can be executed at a higher frequency when the game ball enters the second start hole than when the game ball enters the first start hole" means that the first When the game ball enters the starting port, the hit-or-lose judgment (including probability 0) for a specific result is performed, but the probability of a specific result in the hit-or-lose judgment is the second start port. Not only a mode lower than when the game ball enters the first start port, but also a mode in which the hit-or-lose determination situation for a specific result is not performed.

(2) In the gaming machine described in (1) above,
A normal starting port (for example, passage gate 49) provided in the game area;
normal lottery means (e.g., the main CPU 101 for determining a normal hit in the normal game of FIG. 10) for performing a normal lottery based on the entry (e.g., passage) of the game ball into the normal starting port;
Starting variable control means (for example, , main CPU 101),
Based on the entry of the game ball into the first start port (first start port 420), the first special symbol is displayed in a variable manner, and the game ball enters the second start port (first start port 440). Special symbol variation display control means (for example, main CPU 101) for performing variation display of the second special symbol based on the entry;
A first game state long enough to affect the progress of the game (for example, the average time 1000 sec) of the variable display of the second special symbol (for example, a normal game in which both the probability variation flag and the time saving flag are set to OFF state), or a second game state in which the fluctuation display of the second special symbol (eg, average time 1 sec) is shorter than the fluctuation display time of the first special symbol (eg, average time 10 sec) (eg, A game state control means (for example, the main CPU 101) that can be controlled to an advantageous game state in which the variable probability flag is set to ON and the time saving flag is set to OFF;
is further provided.

According to the gaming machine (2) above, in the second game state, since the variable display of the second special symbol is shorter than the time of the variable display of the first special symbol, the specific game is executed at a high frequency. , it is possible to change the execution frequency of the specific game according to the set value without increasing the execution frequency of the ordinary lottery.

(3) In the gaming machine described in (1) or (2) above,
Stores game information related to the progress of the game including the setting values set by the setting change control means (for example, the number of pending memories stored in the pending memory means, the lottery results of the pending memories and the variable display, and the set values) Possible game information storage means (for example, RWM (main RAM 103));
Display means for displaying the result of the special lottery (for example, the first special symbol display unit 73, the second special symbol display unit 74),
Appropriateness determination means (main CPU 101 for performing the processing of steps S3072 and S3082) for determining whether the game information stored in the game information storage means is appropriate or inappropriate at a predetermined timing;
The game information stored in the game information storage means is determined to be inappropriate by the suitability determination means before the result of the special lottery is displayed even though the game ball has entered the start opening (for example, the second start opening). If it is determined as such, even if the result of the special lottery (for example, the second special lottery) is the specific result, the game cannot proceed without executing the specific game by the specific game executing means. A game control means (for example, the main CPU 101 that executes the process of step S3722) that controls
characterized by comprising

According to the gaming machine of (3) above, even if a game ball enters the starting hole (for example, the second starting hole), a special lottery (for example, Before the result of the second special lottery) is shown (for example, during variable display of special symbols), the suitability or suitability of the game information stored in the game information storage means may be determined. In this case, even if the result of the special lottery (for example, the second special lottery) performed based on the entry of the game ball into the starting hole (for example, the second starting hole) is a specific result (for example, a small win) Even if it is, when it is determined that the game information is unsuitable in determining whether the game information is suitable or unsuitable, the game cannot proceed before the specific game (for example, the small winning game) is executed. This makes it possible to ensure security.

In order to solve the above first problem, a game machine of attachment 37-5 having the following configuration is provided.

(1) The game machine of Supplementary Note 37-5 is
Based on a predetermined operation (for example, pressing the backup clear switch 330 and turning on the power switch 35 while the setting key 328 is turned on when the power is not turned on), data relating to the progress of the game is generated. A setting change control means (for example, the main CPU 101 capable of executing the processing of step S3024) that can be set to one of a plurality of different setting values (for example, setting values in six steps from setting 1 to setting 6);
A starting port provided in the game area;
A special lottery means for performing a special lottery based on the entry (for example, acceptance) of the game ball into the starting port;
a first special game executing means capable of executing a first special game that operates based on the result of the special lottery being a special result (for example, a big win);
A normal starting port (for example, passage gate 49) provided in the game area;
A normal lottery means (for example, the main CPU 101 for determining a normal hit in the normal game of FIG. 10) for performing a normal lottery based on the entry (for example, passage) of the game ball into the normal start opening;
Starting variable control means (for example, , main CPU 101),
Based on the fact that the result of the special lottery performed based on the entry (e.g. acceptance) of the game ball into the starting port is a specific result (e.g. Specific area variable control means (for example, main CPU 101) capable of operating a predetermined movable piece so as to facilitate entry (for example, acceptance) of game balls into
a second special game executing means capable of executing a second special game that operates based on the reception of a game ball into the specific opening provided in the specific area;
with
The specific area variable control means is
The predetermined movable piece can be operated so that the ease with which the game ball enters the specific area can vary according to the setting value set by the setting change control means. Characterized by

According to the game machine of (1) above, since the probability of obtaining a specific result varies depending on the setting value set by the setting change control means, a predetermined The operating frequencies of the movable pieces are different, and thus the chances of receiving the privilege can be changed according to the set value, thereby improving the amusement of the game.

(2) In the gaming machine described in (1) above,
Actuation of the predetermined movable piece by the specific area variable control means is
The easiness of entry (for example, acceptance) of the game ball into the starting port is varied according to the setting value set by the setting change control means (for example, the probability of normal hit is varied, normal symbol By making the execution frequency of the special lottery different according to the set value, the ease of entry of the game ball into the specific area is reduced to the set value It is characterized in that it is performed differently depending on the

According to the gaming machine of (2) above, the ease of entry of a game ball into the starting port (for example, the second starting port 440) can vary according to the set value set by the setting change control means. Since the lottery is performed, the amount of privilege given based on the entry of the game ball into the specific area is different according to the set value, and the interest in the game can be improved.

(3) In the gaming machine described in (1) or (2) above,
Actuation of the predetermined movable piece by the specific area variable control means is
Ease of entry of game balls into the specific area by varying the probability of obtaining the specific result (for example, a small win) in the special lottery according to the set value set by the setting change control means. is performed differently depending on the set value.

According to the gaming machine of (3) above, the ease of entry of a game ball into the starting port (for example, the second starting port 440) can vary according to the setting value set by the setting change control means. Since the lottery is performed, the amount of the privilege given based on the entry of the game ball into the specific area is different according to the set value, and the interest in the game can be improved.

(4) In the gaming machine according to any one of (1) to (3) above,
Stores game information related to the progress of the game including the set values set by the setting change control means (for example, the number of pending memories stored in the pending memory means, the lottery results of the pending memories and variable display, and the set values) Possible game information storage means (for example, RWM (main RAM 103));
Display means for displaying the result of the special lottery (for example, the first special symbol display unit 73, the second special symbol display unit 74),
Appropriateness determining means (main CPU 101 for performing the processing of steps S3072 and S3082) for determining whether the game information stored in the game information storage means is appropriate or inappropriate at a predetermined timing;
If the game information stored in the game information storage means is determined to be inappropriate by the suitability determination means before the result of the special lottery is displayed even though the game ball has entered the start opening, Even if the result of the special lottery is a specific result, the game control means (for example, the processing of step S3722) is controlled so that the game cannot proceed without operating the predetermined movable piece by the specific area variable control means. Main CPU 101) to execute,
characterized by comprising

According to the gaming machine of (4) above, even if a game ball enters the starting hole, before the result of the special lottery performed based on the entry of the game ball into the starting hole is shown (for example, a special symbol during the variable display), it may be determined whether the game information stored in the game information storage means is appropriate or inappropriate. In this case, even if the result of the special lottery conducted based on the entry of the game ball into the starting hole is a specific result, if the game information is judged to be unsuitable or unsuitable. is configured so that the game cannot progress before a predetermined movable piece is activated. This makes it possible to ensure security.

In order to solve the above first problem, a game machine of attachment 37-6 having the following configuration is provided.

(1) The game machine of Supplementary Note 37-6 is
Based on a predetermined operation (for example, pressing the backup clear switch 330 and turning on the power switch 35 while the setting key 328 is turned on when the power is not turned on), data relating to the progress of the game is generated. A setting change control means (for example, the main CPU 101 capable of executing the processing of step S3024) that can be set to one of a plurality of different setting values (for example, setting values in six steps from setting 1 to setting 6);
a lottery means capable of executing a lottery based on the establishment of a predetermined condition (for example, the main CPU 101 capable of executing the processes of steps S3073, S3083, and S3118);
A special game state control means (for example, a jackpot game control in FIG. 10) that can be controlled to a special game state (for example, a jackpot game state) based on the result of the lottery being a special result (for example, a jackpot) is executed. main CPU 101);
A game state control means (for example, a positive change in step S3169) that can control the game state after the special game state is ended to an advantageous game state (for example, high probability game state) that is more advantageous to the player than the normal game state a main CPU 101) that advances the game after setting a flag;
After being controlled to the special game state, counting means (for example, the main CPU 101);
with
The game state control means is
Even when the result of the lottery in the advantageous game state is the special result, it is configured to be controllable to the special game state,
when the number of times counted by the counting means reaches a specified number of times, the game state after the special game state is finished is controlled to the normal game state;
The specified number of times
It is characterized in that it is configured to vary according to the setting value set by the setting change control means.

According to the gaming machine of (1) above, the special game state and the advantageous game state can be repeated up to a prescribed number of times, and since the prescribed number of times differs according to the setting value set by the setting change control means, It is possible to improve amusement in the game.

(2) In the gaming machine described in (1) above,
It further comprises a prescribed number of times determination means (for example, the main CPU 101 that performs a limiter number of times lottery) that determines the prescribed number of times by lottery,
The prescribed number of times determining means is
A lottery for determining the specified number of times is performed so that an expected value for the specified number of times differs according to the setting value set by the setting change control means.

According to the gaming machine of (2) above, the specified number of times that the special game state and the advantageous game state can be repeated is determined by lottery, and the expected value for the specified number of times is the set value set by the setting change control means. Since it differs depending on the game, it is possible to improve the amusement of the game.

(3) In the gaming machine described in (1) or (2) above,
Stores game information related to the progress of the game including the setting values set by the setting change control means (for example, the number of pending memories stored in the pending memory means, the lottery results of the pending memories and the variable display, and the set values) Possible game information storage means (for example, RWM (main RAM 103));
Appropriateness determination means (main CPU 101 for performing the processing of steps S3072 and S3082) for determining whether the game information stored in the game information storage means is appropriate or inappropriate at a predetermined timing;
When the game information stored in the game information storage means is determined to be inappropriate by the suitability determination means, even if the number of times counted by the count means is less than the specified number of times, the count means a game control means (for example, the main CPU 101 that executes the process of step S3722) that controls so that the game cannot proceed without the number of times counted by reaching the specified number of times;
characterized by comprising

According to the game machine of (3) above, when the number of times the special game state and the advantageous game state are repeated without being controlled to the normal game state (that is, the number of loops) does not reach the specified number of times (that is, during the loop ), the suitability or non-suitability of the game information stored in the game information storage means may be determined. In this case, even if the loop is in progress, if the game information is determined to be unsuitable, the game cannot proceed without the number of loops reaching the specified number of times. there is This makes it possible to ensure security.

In order to solve the above first problem, a game machine of attachment 37-7 having the following configuration is provided.

(1) The game machine of Supplementary Note 37-7 is
Based on a predetermined operation (for example, pressing the backup clear switch 330 and turning on the power switch 35 while the setting key 328 is turned on when the power is not turned on), data relating to the progress of the game is generated. A setting change control means (for example, the main CPU 101 capable of executing the processing of step S3024) that can be set to one of a plurality of different setting values (for example, setting values in six steps from setting 1 to setting 6);
A lottery means (for example, the main CPU 101 capable of executing the processing of steps S3073, S3083, and S3118) capable of executing a lottery based on the establishment of a predetermined condition (for example, acceptance of a game ball into the first starting port 440); ,
A game control means (for example, a jackpot game control in FIG. 10) capable of controlling the progress of the game, including controlling to a special game state based on the fact that the result of the lottery is a special result (for example, a big win) Main CPU 101) to execute,
Effect control means (for example, sub CPU 201 (display control circuit 204)) capable of executing at least an opening effect performed at the start of the special game state and an ending effect performed at the end of the special game state;
with
The lottery means
The lottery is performed in a manner in which the higher the setting value set by the setting change control means, the higher the advantage,
The production control means is
The opening effect and the ending effect are executed so that at least one of the time required for the opening effect and the time required for the ending effect increases as the setting value set by the setting change control means increases. It is characterized by being configured to

According to the gaming machine of (1) above, while the lottery is performed in a mode in which the higher the set value is, the higher the advantage is, at least one of the time required for the opening effect and the time required for the ending effect. can be longer the higher the setting is set. Therefore, in the high setting, it is possible to suppress the prize balls paid out per unit time while improving the game interest.

(2) In the gaming machine described in (1) above,
Symbol variation display control means (for example, the main CPU 101 capable of executing the process of step S3093) for performing symbol variation display based on the result of the lottery;
Stores game information related to the progress of the game including the set values set by the setting change control means (for example, the number of pending memories stored in the pending memory means, the lottery results of the pending memories and variable display, and the set values) Possible game information storage means (for example, RWM (main RAM 103));
Appropriateness determining means (main CPU 101 for performing the processing of steps S3072 and S3082) for determining whether the game information stored in the game information storage means is appropriate or inappropriate at a predetermined timing;
further comprising
The lottery means
A random number can be extracted based on the winning of a game ball to the starting port regardless of whether or not the special game state is controlled,
The suitability determination means is
Even when it is controlled to the special game state, it is configured to be able to determine whether the game information is appropriate or inappropriate,
The game control means is
When the suitability determination means determines that the game information stored in the game information storage means is inappropriate, the game is prohibited from progressing even if the game is controlled to the special game state. means (for example, the main CPU 101 that executes the process of step S3722).

According to the gaming machine of (2) above, even when the game information is under control in the special game state, it may be determined whether the game information is appropriate or unsuitable. In such a case, if the game information stored in the game information storage means is determined to be inappropriate, the game cannot be progressed even if it is controlled to the special game state, so security is ensured. At the same time, it is possible to improve the amusement of the game.

In order to solve the above first problem, a game machine of attachment 37-8 having the following configuration is provided.

(1) The game machine of Supplementary Note 37-8 is
Based on a predetermined operation (for example, pressing the backup clear switch 330 and turning on the power switch 35 while the setting key 328 is turned on when the power is not turned on), data relating to the progress of the game is generated. A setting change control means (for example, the main CPU 101 capable of executing the processing of step S3024) that can be set to one of a plurality of different setting values (for example, setting values in six steps from setting 1 to setting 6);
a plurality of entrances having at least a first entrance (e.g., continuously operated left gate 3100) and a second entrance (e.g., continuously operated right gate 3110);
Entry permitting means (for example, sorting device 1120) configured to allow game balls to enter one of the plurality of entrances;
When the game ball enters the first entrance and when the game ball enters the second entrance, different profits profit giving means (for example, the main CPU 101 that executes the jackpot game control of FIG. 10) capable of giving the player a different whether or not it is executed, etc.;
with
The entry permitting means is
It is characterized in that the easiness of entry of the game ball into the first entrance and the second entrance can be different according to the setting value set by the setting change control means. do.

According to the gaming machine of (1) above, there is a possibility that the profit given to the player differs when the game ball enters the first entrance and when the game ball enters the second entrance. The ease with which a game ball can enter the first entrance and the second entrance can differ according to the set value set by the setting change control means. In addition, since the player can target which of the first entrance and the second entrance the game ball will enter, the state of the game element can be changed according to the setting while improving the game interest. can be suitably changed.

It should be noted that ``can give different benefits to the player when the game ball enters the first entrance and when the game ball enters the second entrance'' means, for example, In addition to the case where the number of rounds in the jackpot game state differs between when the ball enters and when the game ball enters the second entrance, one entrance is the starting entrance that triggers the lottery, and the other entrance is the lottery. This corresponds to the case of a general winning opening that does not trigger.

(2) In the gaming machine described in (1) above,
A starting port provided in the game area (for example, the first starting port 5442, the second starting port 440),
A lottery means (for example, the main CPU 101 capable of executing the processes of steps S3073, S3083, and S3118) for performing a lottery based on the acceptance of the game ball in the starting port;
Display means (for example, the first special symbol display unit 73, the second special symbol display unit 74) for performing variable display of symbols based on the result of the lottery,
Game information related to the progress of the game, including information on the set values set by the setting change control means (for example, the number of pending memories stored in the pending memory means, lottery results for pending memories and variable display, set values) game information storage means (for example, RWM (main RAM 103)) capable of storing
Appropriateness determining means (for example, the main CPU 101 that performs the processing of steps S3072 and S3082) for determining whether the game information stored in the game information storage means is appropriate or inappropriate at a predetermined timing;
When the game information stored in the game information storage means is determined to be inappropriate by the suitability determination means, even if the game ball enters the first entrance or the second entrance, the player cannot A game control means (for example, the main CPU 101 that executes the process of step S3722) that controls so that the game cannot proceed without giving a profit;
characterized by comprising

According to the gaming machine of (2) above, when the game ball enters the first entrance or the second entrance but the profit is not yet given during the variable display of the symbols, the game information is stored in the game information storage means. It may be determined whether the game information provided is appropriate or inappropriate. In this case, if the game information is determined to be unsuitable in the determination of whether the game information is suitable or unsuitable despite the possibility that the player may be awarded a profit, the game proceeds without awarding the profit to the player. configured so that it cannot. This makes it possible to ensure security.

(3) In the gaming machine described in (2) above,
Based on the fact that the result of the lottery is a special result, an entry validating means (for example, a main unit that activates a condition device) that validates the entry of game balls for at least the first entrance and the second entrance further comprising a CPU 101),
The profit granting means is
When a game ball enters the first entrance, a predetermined profit (for example, 8R jackpot game state) can be given to the player,
It is characterized in that when a game ball enters the second entrance, a specific profit (for example, 16R jackpot game state) having a degree of profit greater than the predetermined profit can be awarded to the player.

According to the gaming machine of (3) above, the player plays a game aiming at the second entrance where a higher specific profit may be awarded, and thus the game interest can be improved. becomes.

According to the game machine of the appendices 37-1 to 37-8 of the present invention configured as described above, it is possible to appropriately change the state of the game element according to the setting while improving the interest.

[Appendix 38]
2. Description of the Related Art Conventionally, in a game machine such as a pachinko machine, a lottery is conducted when a predetermined condition is established, and an effect image is displayed on, for example, a liquid crystal display based on the result of the lottery. When the result of the lottery is a big hit, a big win game is started and the big prize opening opens and closes in a predetermined opening/closing pattern. When the above-mentioned jackpot is a variable probability jackpot, after the jackpot game ends, the game is controlled to a high probability game state.

In this type of gaming machine, the state of game elements (structural elements and control elements) that influences the ball entry rate into the ball entrance and the ball output tendency is set to game setting values input in advance by a predetermined setting input means. A pachinko game machine that is set to a state corresponding to is disclosed (see, for example, Japanese Unexamined Patent Application Publication No. 2015-065977).

According to the gaming machine described in JP-A-2015-065977, it is possible to arbitrarily set the ball output tendency for each gaming machine, so it is not possible to adjust or maintain the game board configuration such as game nails and accessories. Even if this is the case, it is possible to prevent uniformity of ball payout tendencies for each game parlor or each game machine.

(Second issue)
However, according to the gaming machine disclosed in Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2015-065977, although it is possible to arbitrarily set the ball payout tendency for each gaming machine, for example, an abnormality may occur in the game setting value, etc., and security is not perfect. hard to say.

The present invention has been made in view of such a point, and its object is to provide a gaming machine capable of changing the state of game elements according to settings while improving security.

In order to solve the above second problem, a game machine of Supplementary Note 38 having the following configuration is provided.

(1) The game machine of Supplementary Note 38 is
Based on a predetermined operation (for example, pressing the backup clear switch 330 and turning on the power switch 35 while the setting key 328 is turned on when the power is not turned on), data relating to the progress of the game is generated. A setting change control means (for example, the main CPU 101 capable of executing the processing of step S3024) that can be set to one of a plurality of different setting values (for example, setting values in six steps from setting 1 to setting 6);
Stores game information related to the progress of the game including the set values set by the setting change control means (for example, the number of pending memories stored in the pending memory means, the lottery results of the pending memories and variable display, and the set values) game information storage means (for example, RWM (main RAM 103));
A lottery means (for example, the main CPU 101 capable of executing the processes of steps S3073, S3083, and S3118) for performing a lottery based on the establishment of a predetermined condition (for example, acceptance of a game ball into the first starting port 440);
Symbol variation display control means (for example, the main CPU 101 capable of executing the process of step S3093) for performing symbol variation display based on the result of the lottery;
Appropriateness determining means (for example, the main CPU 101 that performs the processing of steps S3072 and S3082) for determining whether the game information is appropriate or inappropriate at a predetermined timing (for example, the timing at which the game ball is received into the first starting port 440); ,
When the game information stored in the game information is determined to be inappropriate by the suitability determination means while the symbols are displayed in a variable manner, it is assumed that the symbols are displayed in a variable manner. A game control means (for example, the main CPU 101 that executes the process of step S3722) that controls the game so that the game cannot proceed,
characterized by comprising

According to the gaming machine of (1) above, it may be determined whether the game information is suitable or unsuitable while the symbols are displayed in a variable manner. In such a case, if the game information stored in the game information storage means is determined to be inappropriate, the progress of the game is not permitted even if the symbols are displayed in a variable manner. can be improved.

According to the game machine of the supplementary note 38 of the present invention having the above configuration, it is possible to change the state of the game element according to the setting while improving the security.

[Appendix 39]
2. Description of the Related Art Conventionally, in a game machine such as a pachinko machine, a lottery is conducted when a predetermined condition is established, and an effect image is displayed on, for example, a liquid crystal display based on the result of the lottery. When the result of the lottery is a big win, a big win game is started and the big prize opening is opened and closed in a predetermined opening/closing pattern. When the above-mentioned jackpot is a variable probability jackpot, after the jackpot game ends, the game is controlled to a high probability game state.

In this type of gaming machine, the state of game elements (structural elements and control elements) that influences the ball entry rate into the ball entrance and the ball output tendency is set to game setting values input in advance by a predetermined setting input means. A pachinko game machine that is set to a state corresponding to is disclosed (see, for example, Japanese Unexamined Patent Application Publication No. 2015-065977).

According to the gaming machine described in JP-A-2015-065977, it is possible to arbitrarily set the ball output tendency for each gaming machine, so it is not possible to adjust or maintain the game board configuration such as game nails and accessories. Even if this is the case, it is possible to prevent uniformity of ball payout tendencies for each game parlor or each game machine.

(Third issue)
However, according to the gaming machine described in JP-A-2015-065977, although the ball payout tendency can be arbitrarily set for each game machine, changing the ball payout tendency according to the set value does not necessarily require a light design load. Hard to say.

SUMMARY OF THE INVENTION The present invention has been made in view of such a point, and its object is to provide a game machine capable of appropriately changing the state of game elements according to settings while reducing the design load. It is in.

In order to solve the above third problem, a game machine of Supplementary Note 39 having the following configuration is provided.

(1) The game machine of Supplementary Note 39 is
Based on a predetermined operation (for example, pressing the backup clear switch 330 and turning on the power switch 35 while the setting key 328 is turned on when the power is not turned on), data relating to the progress of the game is generated. A setting change control means (for example, the main CPU 101 capable of executing the processing of step S3024) that can be set to one of a plurality of different setting values (for example, setting values in six steps from setting 1 to setting 6);
Random number generating means for generating random numbers with a predetermined width (for example, main CPU 101 for generating random numbers by executing a program);
random number extracting means (for example, the main CPU 101 that executes the process of step S3073) that extracts a random number based on the establishment of a predetermined condition;
Table storage means (for example, main RAM 103) for storing a lottery table (for example, a jackpot random number determination table) defining total random numbers (for example, range of random numbers for jackpot determination) and specific random numbers (for example, jackpot determination value data); ,
A lottery (for example, processing of step S3118) is performed using the random number extracted by the random number extraction means, and when the extracted random number is a specific random number (for example, big hit determination value data), control is performed in a special game state. possible special game state control means;
with
The table storage means
storing a lottery table in which at least the number of the total random numbers differs according to the setting value set by the setting change control means;
The random number generating means
It is characterized in that the number of total random numbers specified in the lottery table is generated according to the setting value set by the setting change control means.

According to the gaming machine (1) above, by changing the denominator (range of random numbers for judging a big hit), which has a larger number of digits than the numerator (the number of big hit judgment value data), the probability of being controlled to a special game state (i.e. Therefore, it is possible to finely set the jackpot probability for each setting value compared to the method of changing the number of jackpot judgment value data according to the set value by setting the range of the jackpot judgment random number to a fixed value. It becomes possible.

(2) In the gaming machine described in (1) above,
Symbol variation display control means (for example, the main CPU 101 capable of executing the process of step S3093) for performing symbol variation display based on the result of the lottery;
Stores game information related to the progress of the game including the setting values set by the setting change control means (for example, the number of pending memories stored in the pending memory means, the lottery results of the pending memories and the variable display, and the set values) Possible game information storage means (for example, RWM (main RAM 103));
When random numbers are extracted based on the establishment of the predetermined condition, adequacy determination means (step the main CPU 101) that performs the processing of S3072 and step S3082;
game control means (for example, the main CPU 101 that executes the process of step S3722) for controlling the game so that the game cannot proceed when the total random number generated by the random number generation means is determined to be inappropriate by the appropriateness determination means;
characterized by comprising

According to the gaming machine of (2) above, when it is determined that the total random number generated by the random number generating means is inappropriate, the game cannot proceed. It is possible to finely set the jackpot probability for each.

According to the game machine of Supplementary Note 39 of the present invention having the above configuration, it is possible to suitably change the state of the game element according to the setting while reducing the design load.

[Appendix 40, Appendix 41]
2. Description of the Related Art Conventionally, in a game machine such as a pachinko machine, a lottery is conducted when a predetermined condition is established, and an effect image is displayed on, for example, a liquid crystal display based on the result of the lottery. When the result of the lottery is a big hit, a big win game is started and the big prize opening opens and closes in a predetermined opening/closing pattern. When the above-mentioned jackpot is a variable probability jackpot, after the jackpot game ends, the game is controlled to a high probability game state.

In this type of gaming machine, the state of game elements (structural elements and control elements) that influences the ball entry rate into the ball entrance and the ball output tendency is set to game setting values input in advance by a predetermined setting input means. A pachinko game machine that is set to a state corresponding to is disclosed (see, for example, Japanese Unexamined Patent Application Publication No. 2015-065977).

According to the gaming machine described in JP-A-2015-065977, it is possible to arbitrarily set the ball output tendency for each gaming machine, so it is not possible to adjust or maintain the game board configuration such as game nails and accessories. Even if this is the case, it is possible to prevent uniformity of ball payout tendencies for each game parlor or each game machine.

(Fourth issue)
However, according to the gaming machine described in JP-A-2015-065977, while it is possible to arbitrarily set the ball payout tendency for each game machine, the ability to arbitrarily set the ball payout tendency makes players suspicious. , there is a risk of losing interest.

SUMMARY OF THE INVENTION The present invention has been made in view of such a point, and its object is to provide a game machine capable of suitably suppressing the decline in interest while changing the state of game elements according to settings. That's what it is.

In order to solve the above fourth problem, a game machine of Supplementary Note 40 having the following configuration is provided.

(1) The game machine of Supplementary Note 40 is
Based on a predetermined operation (for example, pressing the backup clear switch 330 and turning on the power switch 35 while the setting key 328 is turned on when the power is not turned on), data relating to the progress of the game is generated. A setting change control means (for example, the main CPU 101 capable of executing the processing of step S3024) that can be set to any one of a plurality of different setting values (for example, setting values in six steps from setting 1 to setting 6);
Provided in the game area, a plurality of winning openings including starting openings (eg, first starting opening 5442, second starting opening 440, general winning openings 53 to 56),
Privilege granting means (e.g., payout device 350) for granting a privilege (e.g., prize ball) based on the fact that a game ball is accepted in one of the plurality of winning holes;
A lottery means (for example, the main CPU 101 capable of executing the processes of steps S3073, S3083, and S3118) capable of executing a lottery based on the acceptance of the game ball in the starting port;
Display means (for example, a liquid crystal display device 16) for performing at least a symbol variation effect based on the result of the lottery;
A specific prize winning opening among the plurality of prize winning openings when the symbol variation effect is being performed in a specific mode (e.g., ready-to-win effect) indicating that the lottery result may be a specific result. setting suggestion means (for example, sub CPU 201) capable of suggesting setting value information about the setting value set by the setting change control means based on the fact that the game ball is accepted at
It is characterized by

According to the gaming machine of (1) above, the setting change control is performed based on the fact that the game ball is received in the specific winning hole while the symbol variation effect is being performed in the specific mode (for example, the ready-to-win effect). Since setting value information about the setting value set by the means may be suggested, it is possible to reduce suspicion of the player. Also, if the symbol variation effect is performed in a specific mode, there is a possibility that the player will stop shooting game balls, but it is possible to prevent such a problem.

(2) In the gaming machine described in (1) above,
It further comprises a prescribed number of times determination means (for example, the main CPU 101 that performs a limiter number of times lottery) that determines the prescribed number of times by lottery,
a specific mode determination means (for example, the main CPU 101 that executes the process of step S3078) for determining whether or not to perform the variation effect of the symbols in the specific mode (for example, ready-to-win effect);
Specific prize winning opening determining means for randomly determining one of the plurality of winning openings to be the specific winning opening when the specific mode determining means determines that the pattern variation effect is to be performed in the specific manner. (for example, the main CPU 101);
is further provided.

According to the gaming machine of (2) above, since the specific winning hole is not a fixed winning hole but is randomly determined from among a plurality of winning holes, it is possible to increase the interest in the game. In addition, it is preferable that the randomly determined specific winning slot be kept secret without being disclosed. As a result, the player finds interest in deciding which winning slot should be aimed at.

(3) In the gaming machine described in (1) or (2) above,
Stores game information related to the progress of the game including the setting values set by the setting change control means (for example, the number of pending memories stored in the pending memory means, the lottery results of the pending memories and the variable display, and the set values) Possible game information storage means (for example, RWM (main RAM 103));
Appropriateness determination means (main CPU 101 for performing the processing of steps S3072 and S3082) for determining whether the game information stored in the game information storage means is appropriate or inappropriate at a predetermined timing;
When the suitability determination means determines that the game information stored in the game information storage means is inappropriate, even if a game ball is received in the specific winning hole, the setting change control means sets the game ball. game control means (for example, the main CPU 101 that executes the process of step S3722) that controls so that the game cannot proceed without suggesting the set value information about the set value that has been set;
characterized by comprising

According to the gaming machine of (3) above, the game information is stored when the symbol variation effect is being performed, or when the game ball is accepted in the specific winning hole but the set value information is not yet suggested. Appropriateness/improperness of the game information stored in the means may be determined. In this case, even if there is a possibility that the setting value information may be suggested, if it is determined that the game information is inappropriate in determining whether the game information is appropriate or not, the setting value set by the setting change control means The game is configured so that the game cannot proceed without suggesting the set value information. This makes it possible to ensure security.

In order to solve the above-mentioned fourth problem, a game machine of Supplementary Note 41 having the following configuration is provided.

(1) The game machine of Supplementary Note 41 is
Based on a predetermined operation (for example, pressing the backup clear switch 330 and turning on the power switch 35 while the setting key 328 is turned on when the power is not turned on), data relating to the progress of the game is generated. A setting change control means (for example, the main CPU 101 capable of executing the processing of step S3024) that can be set to one of a plurality of different setting values (for example, setting values in six steps from setting 1 to setting 6);
A starting port provided in the game area (for example, the first starting port 5442, the second starting port 440),
A lottery means (for example, the main CPU 101 capable of executing the processes of steps S3073, S3083, and S3118) for performing a lottery based on the acceptance of the game ball in the starting port;
Display means (for example, the first special symbol display unit 73, the second special symbol display unit 74) for performing variable display of symbols based on the result of the lottery,
A game control means (for example, a jackpot game control in FIG. 10) capable of controlling the progress of the game, including controlling to a special game state based on the fact that the result of the lottery is a special result (for example, a big win) Main CPU 101) to execute,
Setting of the setting value set by the setting change control means based on the satisfaction of a predetermined condition related to the acceptance of the game ball into the starting port (for example, the overflow point reaching a predetermined point, etc.) setting suggesting means (for example, sub CPU 201) capable of suggesting value information;
characterized by comprising

According to the gaming machine of (1) above, based on the satisfaction of the predetermined conditions related to the acceptance of the game ball into the starting port, the current set value (the set value set by the setting change control means) Since the set value information can be suggested, it is possible to reduce the player's suspicion. Also, the execution of the game is prompted so that the game ball can be received in the starting port. It should be noted that "fulfilling the predetermined conditions related to the acceptance of the game ball into the starting port" means, for example, that although the game ball was accepted into the starting port, it was held because it was at the upper limit of the hold. It is conceivable that there may be cases where points are accumulated when the game ball is not held due to the upper limit of the hold even though the game ball was accepted at the starting port and the point reaches a predetermined point. but not limited to these.

(2) In the gaming machine described in (1) above,
Stores game information related to the progress of the game including the set values set by the setting change control means (for example, the number of pending memories stored in the pending memory means, the lottery results of the pending memories and variable display, and the set values) Possible game information storage means (for example, RWM (main RAM 103));
Appropriateness determining means (main CPU 101 for performing the processing of steps S3072 and S3082) for determining whether the game information stored in the game information storage means is appropriate or inappropriate at a predetermined timing;
further comprising
The game control means is
If the game information stored in the game information storage means is determined to be inappropriate by the suitability determination means, there is a possibility that the predetermined condition is satisfied when the game ball is received in the start opening ( For example, even if the overflow point reaches a predetermined point, etc.), the game progress prohibition means (for example, , and a main CPU 101 that executes the processing of step S3722.

According to the gaming machine of (2) above, when the variable display of symbols is being performed, it may be determined whether the game information stored in the game information storage means is appropriate or inappropriate. In this case, even if there is a possibility that the predetermined condition will be satisfied when the game ball is received in the starting hole, in determining whether the game information is suitable or unsuitable due to the game ball being received in the starting hole. When it is determined that the setting value is inappropriate, the game cannot proceed without suggesting the setting value information about the setting value set by the setting change control means. This makes it possible to ensure security.

According to the gaming machine of Supplementary Note 40 and the gaming machine of Supplementary Note 41 of the present invention configured as described above, it is possible to suitably suppress the decline in interest while changing the state of the game element according to the setting.

[Appendix 42]
2. Description of the Related Art Conventionally, in a game machine such as a pachinko machine, a lottery is held when a predetermined condition is satisfied, and an effect image is displayed on a liquid crystal display or the like based on the result of the lottery. When the result of the lottery is a big hit, a big win game is started and the big prize opening opens and closes in a predetermined opening/closing pattern. When the above-mentioned jackpot is a variable probability jackpot, after the jackpot game ends, the game is controlled to a high probability game state.

In this type of gaming machine, the state of game elements (structural elements and control elements) that influences the ball entry rate into the ball entrance and the ball output tendency is set to game setting values input in advance by a predetermined setting input means. A pachinko game machine that is set to a state corresponding to is disclosed (see, for example, Japanese Unexamined Patent Application Publication No. 2015-065977).

According to the gaming machine described in JP-A-2015-065977, it is possible to arbitrarily set the ball output tendency for each gaming machine, so it is not possible to adjust or maintain the game board configuration such as game nails and accessories. Even if this is the case, it is possible to prevent uniformity of ball payout tendencies for each game parlor or each game machine.

(Fifth issue)
However, according to the gaming machine disclosed in Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2015-065977, although it is possible to arbitrarily set the ball payout tendency for each game machine, there is a possibility that the ball payout management may not be easy.

SUMMARY OF THE INVENTION The present invention has been made in view of such a point, and an object thereof is to provide a gaming machine capable of easily performing ball output management.

In order to solve the above fifth problem, a game machine of Supplementary Note 42 having the following configuration is provided.

(1) The game machine of Supplementary Note 42 is
Based on a predetermined operation (for example, pressing the backup clear switch 330 and turning on the power switch 35 while the setting key 328 is turned on when the power is not turned on), data relating to the progress of the game is generated. A setting change control means (for example, the main CPU 101 capable of executing the processing of step S3024) that can be set to one of a plurality of different setting values (for example, setting values in six steps from setting 1 to setting 6);
game control means (for example, the main CPU 101) for controlling the progress of the game based on the set value set by the setting change control means;
a payout means (e.g., payout device 350) for paying out game media based on winning as a result of a game;
special game execution means (for example, The main CPU 101) that executes the jackpot game control in FIG. 10,
data aggregation means (e.g., payout/launch control circuit 300) capable of aggregating data related to game media paid out by the payout means;
data display control means (main CPU 101) for displaying data aggregated by the data aggregation means in a predetermined display area (performance display monitor 334);
with
The data aggregation means is
all-history aggregating means for aggregating the data based on all gaming histories;
setting value-by-setting value history totalizing means for totalizing the data based on the game history for each of the setting values;
The data display control means is
The game machine is configured to be able to display the data totaled by the all history totaling means and/or the data totaled by the set value history totaling means.
It is characterized by

According to the gaming machine of (1) above, it is possible to display either one or both of the data aggregated by the all history aggregation means and the data aggregated by the set value history aggregation means. Ball management can be easily performed.

According to the gaming machine of the supplementary note 42 of the present invention having the above configuration, it is an object of providing a gaming machine capable of easily performing management of ball output.

[Appendix 43]
2. Description of the Related Art Conventionally, in a game machine such as a pachinko machine, a lottery is held when a predetermined condition is satisfied, and an effect image is displayed on a liquid crystal display or the like based on the result of the lottery. When the result of the lottery is a big hit, a big win game is started and the big prize opening opens and closes in a predetermined opening/closing pattern. When the above-mentioned jackpot is a variable probability jackpot, after the jackpot game ends, the game is controlled to a high probability game state.

As this type of gaming machine, a gaming machine capable of changing specifications has been disclosed (see, for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2011-010833).

According to such a gaming machine described in JP-A-2011-010833, since the specifications of the gaming machine can be easily changed, the storage means storing the performance data necessary for executing the performance can be replaced. becomes unnecessary, and it is possible to eliminate waste.

(Sixth issue)
However, according to the gaming machine described in Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2011-010833, although it is possible to eliminate waste, simply changing the specs may lack interest.

The present invention has been made in view of such a point, and an object thereof is to provide a gaming machine capable of suppressing a decline in interest.

In order to solve the sixth problem, a game machine of Supplementary Note 43 having the following configuration is provided.
(1) The game machine of Supplementary Note 43 is
Based on a predetermined operation (for example, pressing the backup clear switch 330 and turning on the power switch 35 while the setting key 328 is turned on when the power is not turned on), the game characteristics are changed according to the set value. A setting change control means (for example, the main CPU 101 capable of executing the processing of step S3024) that can be set to one of a plurality of setting values (for example, setting values in six stages from setting 1 to setting 6) with different values,
A game control means (for example, the main CPU 101) that controls the progress of a game based on the setting value set by the setting change control means;
with
The game control means is
a lottery means capable of executing a lottery (for example, the processes of steps S3073, S3083, and S3118) based on the game properties corresponding to the set values set by the setting change control means;
Based on the result of the lottery, a special game execution means capable of executing a special game (for example, jackpot game control in FIG. 10) in which a privilege corresponding to the setting value set by the setting change control means is provided;
characterized by having at least

According to the gaming machine of (1) above, it is possible to execute games with different game characteristics based on the setting values set by the setting change control means in one gaming machine. It is possible to provide a wide range of ways to utilize the gaming machine.

(2) In the gaming machine described in (1) above,
The game control means is
When the first set value among the plurality of set values is set, in a high probability state in which the lottery is performed with a relatively high probability, if the lottery is not won within a predetermined period, the high probability state A first game control means (for example, main CPU 101) that executes a game under a game property (for example, ST specification) that ends the
When the second set value among the plurality of set values is set, in a high probability state in which the lottery is performed with a relatively high probability, the high probability state does not end until the lottery is won. A second game controller (for example, main CPU 101) that executes a game under continuous game characteristics (for example, variable probability loop specifications);
characterized by having at least

According to the gaming machine of (2) above, although both the game property by the first game control means and the game property by the second game control means are controlled to a high probability game state, the first game control means In the game property by the second game control means, the high probability game state may end in the middle without continuing until the next big win game state, and in the game property by the second game control means, the high probability game state is controlled to the next special game state. It is greatly different in that it continues to be executed until In this way, by making it possible to switch between and execute two seemingly similar but substantially different game features, the pachinko machine can be utilized by the person in charge of managing the game machine, etc., in a variety of ways. It is possible to provide a game machine capable of improving the interest.

According to the gaming machine of supplementary note 43 of the present invention having the above configuration, it is possible to provide a gaming machine capable of suppressing a decline in interest.

[Appendix 44 to Appendix 56]
2. Description of the Related Art Conventionally, there has been known a game machine that performs a lottery when a predetermined condition is satisfied and performs variable display of symbols based on the result of the lottery. When the result of the lottery is displayed as a specific display result indicating that the result is a specific result, the game state is controlled to be advantageous to the player.

In this type of gaming machine, any one of a plurality of set values indicating the probability of the player's advantage or disadvantage in the game, such as the probability that the result of the lottery will be a specific result, is set. A gaming machine is known in which the progress of a game is controlled based on a set value (see, for example, paragraph [0063] of JP-A-2011-206588). The above set values can be set by an authorized person such as a hall gaming machine manager.

(Seventh subject)
However, in a gaming machine in which the progress of a game is controlled based on set values, for example, an unauthorized person may illegally change or check the setting values, or the setting values may be disturbed by noise or the like. It is feared that various problems such as changes in

In addition, since the above set values are important factors for both the hall and the players, they should be strictly managed by an authorized person, and convenience is also required for the management.

SUMMARY OF THE INVENTION The present invention has been made in view of such a point, and its object is to provide a highly convenient gaming machine capable of dealing with problems related to set values.

In order to solve the above seventh problem, a game machine of Supplementary Note 44 having the following configuration is provided.

(1) The game machine of Supplementary Note 44 is
First control means (for example, main control circuit 100) capable of executing control related to the progress of a game based on one of a plurality of set values;
a predetermined display means (for example, a liquid crystal display device 16);
a second control means (for example, a sub-control circuit 200) capable of at least executing display control of an image displayed on the display means;
Setting operation means (for example, setting key 328) used for operations related to the one setting value;
a power supply means (for example, a power supply circuit 338) capable of supplying power to the first control means and the second control means when powered on;
with
The first control means is
setting state control means for controlling a setting state in which the one setting value can be changed or confirmed when power is turned on at least in a state in which the setting operation means is operated (for example, a setting key is in an ON state); (For example, the main CPU 101 capable of executing the processing of step S3024 or step S3026);
a first storage means (for example, main RAM 103) capable of storing setting value information about at least one setting value;
Transmission means (for example, , a command output port 106 and a main CPU 101 capable of executing the processing of step S3055,
The second control means is
Receiving means (for example, command input port 208) capable of receiving information transmitted from the transmitting means;
When the setting operation information is received by the receiving means, at least the setting operation information received by the receiving means and time information related to the setting operation information (for example, time information when an initialization command or a power failure recovery command is received) and second storage means (for example, work RAM 203) capable of storing history information,
and display control means (for example, display control circuit 204) capable of displaying an information screen (for example, setting change/confirmation history screen) showing the history information based on a predetermined operation.

According to the gaming machine of (1) above, by performing a predetermined operation, it is possible to browse the information screen showing the setting operation information and the time information related to the setting operation information as history information. It is possible to deal with various problems related to values. In particular, for example, when there is a possibility that setting values have been changed or confirmed for the purpose of fraud by an unauthorized third party, it is possible to determine whether the above fraud has been done by viewing the information screen. It is possible to track In addition, by browsing the past history information, convenience can be improved, for example, it can be used for sales of the hall.

The setting operation information is setting value change information indicating that the setting value has been changed when the setting value has been changed, and the setting value has been confirmed when the setting value has been confirmed. This is setting value confirmation information indicating that the setting has been made. Also, when the setting operation information is setting value change information, the setting value information is setting value information about one setting value after the change. When the setting operation information is the setting value confirmation information, the setting value information about the set value may be transmitted to the second control means, but the one setting value has not been changed. Therefore, it is not essential to transmit the set value information to the second control means.

Further, the "time information related to the setting operation information" may be time information when the setting operation information is transmitted from the first control means to the second control means, or may be time information when the setting operation information is received by the second control means. It can be time.

(2) In the gaming machine described in (1) above,
The display control means is
The information screen can be displayed when the power is turned on while the setting operation means is operated, and the information screen restricts the display of the information screen even if the predetermined operation is performed during execution of the game. It is characterized by having limiting means (for example, the sub CPU 201 that terminates the hall menu task when NO is determined in step S3301, and the sub CPU 201 executes the process of step S3315 when YES is determined in step S3314).

According to the gaming machine of (2) above, the information screen is a screen displayed when the power is turned on while the setting operation means is being operated, and it is assumed that a predetermined operation is performed during execution of the game. is also a screen whose display is restricted. That is, the information screen is not displayed unless the power is turned on while the setting operation means is being operated (for example, the setting key is ON). Therefore, it is difficult for an unauthorized third party to easily view the information screen for fraudulent purposes, and security can be ensured.

In order to solve the seventh problem, a gaming machine of Supplementary Note 45 having the following configuration is provided.

(1) The game machine of Supplementary Note 45 is
First control means (for example, main control circuit 100) capable of executing control related to the progress of a game based on one of a plurality of set values;
a predetermined display means (for example, a liquid crystal display device 16);
a second control means (for example, a sub-control circuit 200) capable of at least executing display control of an image displayed on the display means;
Setting operation means (for example, setting key 328) used for operations related to the one setting value;
a power supply means (for example, a power supply circuit 338) capable of supplying power to the first control means and the second control means when powered on;
with
The first control means is
setting state control means for controlling a setting state in which the one setting value can be changed or confirmed when power is turned on at least in a state in which the setting operation means is operated (for example, a setting key is in an ON state); (For example, the main CPU 101 capable of executing the processing of step S3024 or step S3026);
a first storage means (for example, main RAM 103) capable of storing setting value information about at least one setting value;
Various information can be transmitted to the second control means, and includes at least setting operation information (for example, setting operation command) indicating that the one set value has been changed or confirmed, and the one set value. setting value information and transmission means (for example, the command output port 106 and the main CPU 101 capable of executing the processing of step S3055),
The second control means is
Receiving means (for example, command input port 208) capable of receiving information transmitted from the transmitting means;
When the setting operation information is received by the receiving means, at least the setting operation information received by the receiving means and time information related to the setting operation information (for example, time information when an initialization command or a power failure recovery command is received) and a second storage means (for example, work RAM 203) capable of storing the set value information as history information;
display control means (for example, display control circuit 204) capable of displaying an information screen showing the history information based on a predetermined operation;
The display control means is
First screen display control means for displaying, based on the predetermined operation, a first screen (for example, the setting change/confirmation history screen of FIG. 223) showing history information that does not include the set value information among the history information. (For example, the sub CPU 201 that displays the setting change/confirmation history screen in FIG. 223);
Second screen display control means for displaying a second screen (for example, the setting change/confirmation history screen of FIG. 225) showing history information including at least the set value information on condition that the first screen is displayed (For example, the sub CPU 201 that displays the setting change/confirmation history screen of FIG. 225).

According to the gaming machine of (1) above, by performing a predetermined operation, it is possible to view an information screen showing setting operation information, time information related to the setting operation information, and setting value information as history information. Therefore, it is possible to deal with various problems related to setting values. In particular, for example, when there is a possibility that setting values have been changed or confirmed for the purpose of fraud by an unauthorized third party, it is possible to determine whether the above fraud has been done by viewing the information screen. It is possible to track In addition, by browsing the past history information, convenience can be improved, for example, it can be used for sales of the hall.

Moreover, when a predetermined operation is performed, first, the first screen (for example, the setting change/confirmation history screen in FIG. 223) showing the history information that does not include the set value information among the history information is displayed. On the condition that the screen is displayed, the second screen (for example, the setting change/confirmation history screen of FIG. 225) showing the history information including the setting value information is displayed.

Note that the transmission means capable of transmitting various types of information to the second control means may transmit the setting operation information and the setting value information together or separately. The setting operation information is setting value change information indicating that the setting value has been changed when the setting value has been changed, and the setting value has been confirmed when the setting value has been confirmed. This is set value confirmation information indicating that the Also, when the setting operation information is setting value change information, the setting value information is setting value information about one setting value after the change. When the setting operation information is the setting value confirmation information, the setting value information about the set value may be transmitted to the second control means, but the one setting value has not been changed. Therefore, it is not essential to transmit the set value information to the second control means.

Further, the "time information related to the setting operation information" may be time information when the setting operation information is transmitted from the first control means to the second control means, or may be time information when the setting operation information is received by the second control means. It can be time.

(2) In the gaming machine described in (1) above,
The second screen display control means is
The second screen is configured to be displayed only when a specific condition is satisfied.

According to the gaming machine of (2) above, the second screen showing the history information including the setting value information is displayed only when the specific condition is satisfied, so that the setting value information can be easily browsed. It is possible to prevent setting value information from being browsed for fraudulent purposes. Note that the specific condition is, for example, the case where a proper password is entered.

(3) In the gaming machine of (1) or (2) above,
The display control means is
Information that allows the information screen to be displayed when the power is turned on while the setting operation means is being operated, and restricts display of the information screen even if the predetermined operation is performed during execution of the game. It is characterized by having screen limiting means.

According to the gaming machine of (3) above, the information screen is a screen that is displayed when the power is turned on while the setting operation means is being operated. is also a screen whose display is restricted. That is, the information screen is not displayed unless the power is turned on while the setting operation means is being operated (for example, the setting key is ON). Therefore, it is difficult for an unauthorized third party to easily view the information screen for fraudulent purposes, and security can be ensured.

In order to solve the seventh problem, a game machine of appendix 46 having the following configuration is provided.

(1) The game machine of Supplementary Note 46 is
First control means (for example, main control circuit 100) capable of executing control related to the progress of a game based on one of a plurality of set values;
a predetermined display means (for example, a liquid crystal display device 16);
a second control means (for example, a sub-control circuit 200) capable of at least executing display control of an image displayed on the display means;
Setting operation means (for example, setting key 328) used for operations related to the one setting value;
a power supply means (for example, a power supply circuit 338) capable of supplying power to the first control means and the second control means when powered on;
with
The first control means is
setting state control means for controlling a setting state in which the one setting value can be changed or confirmed when power is turned on at least in a state in which the setting operation means is operated (for example, a setting key is in an ON state); (For example, the main CPU 101 capable of executing the processing of step S3024 or step S3026);
a first storage means (for example, main RAM 103) capable of storing setting value information about at least one setting value;
Transmission means (for example, , a command output port 106 and a main CPU 101 capable of executing the processing of step S3055,
The second control means is
Receiving means (for example, command input port 208) capable of receiving information transmitted from the transmitting means;
When the setting operation information is received by the receiving means, at least the setting operation information received by the receiving means and time information related to the setting operation information (for example, time information when an initialization command or a power failure recovery command is received) a second storage means (for example, work RAM 203) capable of storing as history information,
display control means capable of displaying an information screen showing the history information (for example, a setting change/confirmation history screen) based on a predetermined operation;
After the information screen is displayed, the information screen can be displayed until a predetermined condition is satisfied (for example, until a command to generate a production control object is received). and information screen display restriction means for restricting screen display (for example, the sub CPU 201 that executes the hall menu display prohibition process in step S3316).

According to the gaming machine of (1) above, by performing a predetermined operation, it is possible to browse the information screen showing the setting operation information and the time information related to the setting operation information as history information. It is possible to deal with various problems related to values. In particular, for example, when there is a possibility that setting values have been changed or confirmed for the purpose of fraud by an unauthorized third party, it is possible to determine whether the above fraud has been done by viewing the information screen. It is possible to track In addition, by browsing the past history information, convenience can be improved, for example, it can be used for sales of the hall.

Moreover, the displayed information screen can be displayed until a predetermined condition is satisfied, but is configured so that display is restricted when the predetermined condition is satisfied. Therefore, once a predetermined condition is satisfied, the information screen cannot be viewed, so even if an unauthorized person tries to view it illegally, it cannot be viewed easily, and security can be ensured. becomes.

The setting operation information is setting value change information indicating that the setting value has been changed when the setting value has been changed, and the setting value has been confirmed when the setting value has been confirmed. This is setting value confirmation information indicating that the setting has been made. Also, when the setting operation information is setting value change information, the setting value information is setting value information about one setting value after the change. When the setting operation information is the setting value confirmation information, the setting value information about the set value may be transmitted to the second control means, but the one setting value has not been changed. Therefore, it is not essential to transmit the set value information to the second control means.

Further, the "time information related to the setting operation information" may be time information when the setting operation information is transmitted from the first control means to the second control means, or may be time information when the setting operation information is received by the second control means. It can be time.

In order to solve the seventh problem, a game machine of Supplementary Note 47 having the following configuration is provided.

(1) The game machine of Supplementary Note 47 is
First control means (for example, main control circuit 100) capable of executing control related to the progress of a game based on one of a plurality of set values;
a predetermined display means (for example, a liquid crystal display device 16);
a second control means (for example, a sub-control circuit 200) capable of at least executing display control of an image displayed on the display means;
Setting operation means (for example, setting key 328) used for operations related to the one setting value;
a power supply means (for example, a power supply circuit 338) capable of supplying power to the first control means and the second control means when powered on;
with
The first control means is
setting state control means for controlling a setting state in which the one setting value can be changed or confirmed when power is turned on at least in a state in which the setting operation means is operated (for example, a setting key is in an ON state); (For example, the main CPU 101 capable of executing the processing of step S3024 or step S3026);
a first storage means (for example, main RAM 103) capable of storing setting value information about at least one setting value;
Transmission means (for example, , a command output port 106 and a main CPU 101 capable of executing the processing of step S3055,
The second control means is
Receiving means (for example, command input port 208) capable of receiving information transmitted from the transmitting means;
When the setting operation information is received by the receiving means, at least the setting operation information received by the receiving means and time information related to the setting operation information (for example, time information when an initialization command or a power failure recovery command is received) and second storage means (for example, work RAM 203) capable of storing history information,
A normal screen (eg, initial guide image) that can be viewed by an unspecified person (eg, a player), and a screen that can be viewed only by a specific person (eg, a gaming machine manager). display control means (e.g., display control circuit 204) capable of displaying any one of a plurality of screens including an information screen (e.g., setting change/confirmation history screen) showing history information on the display means; , and
The display control means is
While the normal screen can be displayed as long as the power is turned on, the information screen can be displayed only when the power is turned on while at least the setting operation means is being operated (for example, the setting key is in the ON state). characterized in that it is configured to be displayed in

According to the gaming machine of (1) above, the predetermined display means includes a normal screen that can be viewed by an unspecified person (eg, a player) and a screen that can be viewed by a specified person (eg, a gaming machine administrator). An information screen that can only be viewed by While the normal screen can be displayed as long as the power is turned on, the information screen is not displayed only when the power is turned on. It is configured so that it will not be displayed if there is no Therefore, the information screen cannot be easily viewed by an unspecified person who does not have the authority, and unauthorized viewing can be suppressed.

By the way, the above normal screen may not be interpreted as being viewable by an unspecified person if, for example, only a player who has registered as a member can view it. Since anyone can view it (that is, if there is an intention to view it), it can be said that it is a normal screen that can be viewed by an unspecified person. On the other hand, the information screen cannot be viewed even if there is an intention to view it, and is a screen that can be viewed only by an authorized person such as a gaming machine manager.

Furthermore, on the information screen that can be viewed only by a specific person, setting operation information and time information related to the setting operation information are displayed as history information, so various problems related to setting values can be dealt with. In particular, for example, when there is a possibility that setting values have been changed or confirmed for the purpose of fraud by an unauthorized third party, it is possible to determine whether the above fraud has been done by viewing the information screen. It is possible to track In addition, by browsing the past history information, convenience can be improved, for example, it can be used for sales of the hall.

The setting operation information is setting value change information indicating that the setting value has been changed when the setting value has been changed, and the setting value has been confirmed when the setting value has been confirmed. This is setting value confirmation information indicating that the setting has been made. Also, when the setting operation information is setting value change information, the setting value information is setting value information about one setting value after the change. When the setting operation information is the setting value confirmation information, the setting value information about the set value may be transmitted to the second control means, but the one setting value has not been changed. Therefore, it is not essential to transmit the set value information to the second control means.

Further, the "time information related to the setting operation information" may be time information when the setting operation information is transmitted from the first control means to the second control means, or may be time information when the setting operation information is received by the second control means. It can be time.

(2) In the gaming machine described in (1) above,
The display control means is
The information screen can be displayed when the power is turned on while the setting operation means is being operated, and the information screen restriction means (for example, NO in step S3301) restricts the display of the information screen during execution of the game. It is characterized by having a sub CPU 201 that terminates the hall menu task when determined, and a sub CPU 201 that executes the process of step S3315 when determined YES in step S3314.

According to the gaming machine of (2) above, the information screen is a screen displayed when the power is turned on while the setting operation means is being operated, and it is assumed that a predetermined operation is performed during execution of the game. is also a screen whose display is restricted. That is, the information screen is not displayed unless the power is turned on while the setting operation means is being operated (for example, the setting key is ON). Therefore, it is difficult for an unauthorized third party to easily view the information screen for fraudulent purposes, and security can be ensured.

In order to solve the above seventh problem, a gaming machine of Supplementary Note 48 having the following configuration is provided.

(1) The game machine of Supplementary Note 48 is
First control means (for example, main control circuit 100) capable of executing control related to the progress of a game based on one of a plurality of set values;
a predetermined display means (for example, a liquid crystal display device 16);
a second control means (for example, a sub-control circuit 200) capable of at least executing display control of an image displayed on the display means;
Setting operation means (for example, setting key 328) used for operations related to the one setting value;
a power supply means (for example, a power supply circuit 338) capable of supplying power to the first control means and the second control means when powered on;
with
The first control means is
setting state control means for controlling a setting state in which the one setting value can be changed or confirmed when power is turned on at least in a state in which the setting operation means is operated (for example, a setting key is in an ON state); (For example, the main CPU 101 capable of executing the processing of step S3024 or step S3026);
a first storage means (for example, main RAM 103) capable of storing setting value information about at least one setting value;
Transmission means (for example, , a command output port 106 and a main CPU 101 capable of executing the processing of step S3055,
The second control means is
Receiving means (for example, command input port 208) capable of receiving information transmitted from the transmitting means;
When the setting operation information is received by the receiving means, at least the setting operation information received by the receiving means and time information related to the setting operation information (for example, time information when an initialization command or a power failure recovery command is received) and second storage means (for example, work RAM 203) capable of storing history information,
display control means (e.g., display control circuit 204) capable of displaying an information screen (e.g., setting change/confirmation history screen) showing the history information based on a predetermined operation;
information erasing means for erasing the history information from the second storage means (for example, the sub CPU 201 for executing processes such as steps S3306 and S33160) when a specific operation is received;
The information erasing means is
It is characterized in that it is configured to accept the specific operation only when a specific condition is satisfied.

According to the gaming machine of (1) above, by performing a predetermined operation, it is possible to browse the information screen showing the setting operation information and the time information related to the setting operation information as history information. It is possible to deal with various problems related to values. In particular, for example, when there is a possibility that setting values have been changed or confirmed for the purpose of fraud by an unauthorized third party, it is possible to determine whether the above fraud has been done by viewing the information screen. It is possible to track In addition, by browsing the past history information, convenience can be improved, for example, it can be used for sales of the hall.

Moreover, when a specific operation (for example, an operation of pressing the main button 662 after selecting the "clear" item) is accepted, the history information is erased. It can be accepted only when the conditions are met (for example, when the entered password is correct). Therefore, for example, even if an unauthorized person attempts to delete the history of setting value changes, setting value confirmation, and viewing for fraudulent purposes, such deletion cannot be executed unless specific conditions are met. Therefore, it is possible to prevent intentional erasure of fraudulent history. In addition, since history information can be erased for those who have authority, convenience can be enhanced.

The setting operation information is setting value change information indicating that the setting value has been changed when the setting value has been changed, and the setting value has been confirmed when the setting value has been confirmed. This is setting value confirmation information indicating that the setting has been made. Also, when the setting operation information is setting value change information, the setting value information is setting value information about one setting value after the change. When the setting operation information is the setting value confirmation information, the setting value information about the set value may be transmitted to the second control means, but the one setting value has not been changed. Therefore, it is not essential to transmit the set value information to the second control means.

Further, the "time information related to the setting operation information" may be time information when the setting operation information is transmitted from the first control means to the second control means, or may be time information when the setting operation information is received by the second control means. It can be time.

(2) In the gaming machine described in (1) above,
The transmission means is
setting value information about the one setting value can be further transmitted;
The second storage means is
The set value information can also be stored as the history information,
The display control means is
capable of displaying an information screen (for example, the setting change/confirmation history screen of FIG. 225) in which the set value information is included in the history information;
The information erasing means is
The history information including the set value information is deleted from the second storage means.

According to the gaming machine of (2) above, when the information screen is displayed, it is possible to view more useful information such as set value information. Moreover, such useful information can also be deleted by an authorized person, so convenience can be improved.

The transmission means may transmit the setting operation information and the setting value information together or separately.

(3) In the gaming machine described in (1) or (2) above,
The information erasing means is
In erasing the history information from the second storage means, only part of the history information stored in the second storage means as the history information can be erased.

According to the game machine of (3) above, the history information to be deleted from the history information stored in the second storage means can be selected by the person having the authority, so the convenience is enhanced. For example, the history information is displayed by associating one piece of setting operation information, one piece of date and time information, and one piece of set value information (see FIG. 225, for example). The information erasing means may erase the associated history information (for example, each No shown in FIG. 225), or may erase each item of information of a plurality of items included in the history information ( For example, all of the date and time items, the operation type items, and the setting value items shown in FIG. 225 may be deleted).

In order to solve the above seventh problem, a gaming machine of Supplementary Note 49 having the following configuration is provided.

(1) The game machine of Supplementary Note 49 is
First control means (for example, main control circuit 100) capable of executing control related to the progress of a game based on one of a plurality of set values;
a predetermined display means (for example, a liquid crystal display device 16);
a second control means (for example, a sub-control circuit 200) capable of at least executing display control of an image displayed on the display means;
Setting operation means (for example, setting key 328) used for operations related to the one setting value;
a power supply means (for example, a power supply circuit 338) capable of supplying power to the first control means and the second control means when powered on;
with
The first control means is
setting state control means for controlling a setting state in which the one setting value can be changed or confirmed when power is turned on at least in a state in which the setting operation means is operated (for example, a setting key is in an ON state); (For example, the main CPU 101 capable of executing the processing of step S3024 or step S3026);
a first storage means (for example, main RAM 103) capable of storing setting value information about at least one setting value;
Transmission means (for example, , a command output port 106 and a main CPU 101 capable of executing the processing of step S3055,
The second control means is
Receiving means (for example, command input port 208) capable of receiving information transmitted from the transmitting means;
When the setting operation information is received by the receiving means, at least the setting operation information received by the receiving means and time information related to the setting operation information (for example, time information when an initialization command or a power failure recovery command is received) and second storage means (for example, work RAM 203) capable of storing history information,
display control means (for example, display control circuit 204) capable of displaying an information screen showing the history information based on a predetermined operation;
The setting operation information is
The information is information that can distinguish the type of operation, whether it is information indicating that the one setting value has been changed or information indicating that the one setting value has been confirmed. ,
The display control means is
an information screen (for example, a list screen) of a list showing all of the setting operation information, the time information, and the setting value information as history information regardless of the type of the setting operation information;
It is possible to selectively display a specific information screen (for example, a narrowing screen) showing the setting operation information, the time information, and the setting value information as history information corresponding to a specific type of the setting operation information. It is characterized by being composed of

According to the gaming machine of (1) above, by performing a predetermined operation, it is possible to browse the information screen showing the setting operation information and the time information related to the setting operation information as history information. It is possible to deal with various problems related to values. In particular, for example, when there is a possibility that setting values have been changed or confirmed for the purpose of fraud by an unauthorized third party, it is possible to determine whether the above fraud has been done by viewing the information screen. It is possible to track In addition, by browsing the past history information, convenience can be improved, for example, it can be used for sales of the hall.

Moreover, regardless of the type of the setting operation information, the list information screen showing all of the setting operation information, the time information, and the setting value information as history information; To enhance convenience for an operator (for example, a gaming machine manager) because a specific information screen showing the setting operation information, the time information and the setting value information as history information can be selectively displayed. can be done.

The setting operation information is setting value change information indicating that the setting value has been changed when the setting value has been changed, and the setting value has been confirmed when the setting value has been confirmed. This is setting value confirmation information indicating that the setting has been made. Also, when the setting operation information is setting value change information, the setting value information is setting value information about one setting value after the change. When the setting operation information is the setting value confirmation information, the setting value information about the set value may be transmitted to the second control means, but the one setting value has not been changed. Therefore, it is not essential to transmit the set value information to the second control means.

Further, the "time information related to the setting operation information" may be time information when the setting operation information is transmitted from the first control means to the second control means, or may be time information when the setting operation information is received by the second control means. It can be time.

(2) In the gaming machine described in (1) above,
The display control means is
Only when a specific condition is satisfied, the list information screen and the specific information screen can be selectively displayed.

According to the gaming machine of (2) above, it is possible to selectively display the list information screen and the specific information screen only when a specific condition is satisfied. can be suppressed. Note that the specific condition is, for example, the case where a proper password is entered.

(3) In the gaming machine of (1) or (2) above,
The transmission means is
setting value information about the one setting value can be further transmitted;
The second storage means is
The set value information can also be stored as the history information,
The display control means is
It is characterized in that an information screen in which the set value information is included in the history information can be displayed.

According to the gaming machine of (3) above, when the information screen is displayed, it is possible to view more useful information such as set value information. Moreover, such useful information can also be deleted by an authorized person, so convenience can be improved.

The transmission means may transmit the setting operation information and the setting value information together or separately.

In order to solve the above seventh problem, a game machine of Supplementary Note 50 having the following configuration is provided.

(1) The game machine of Supplementary Note 50 is
First control means (for example, main control circuit 100) capable of executing control related to the progress of a game based on one of a plurality of set values;
a predetermined display means (for example, a liquid crystal display device 16);
a second control means (for example, a sub-control circuit 200) capable of at least executing display control of an image displayed on the display means;
Setting operation means (for example, setting key 328) used for operations related to the one setting value;
a power supply means (for example, a power supply circuit 338) capable of supplying power to the first control means and the second control means when powered on;
with
The first control means is
setting state control means for controlling a setting state in which the one setting value can be changed or confirmed when power is turned on at least in a state in which the setting operation means is operated (for example, a setting key is in an ON state); (For example, the main CPU 101 capable of executing the processing of step S3024 or step S3026);
a first storage means (for example, main RAM 103) capable of storing setting value information about at least one setting value;
Transmission means (for example, , a command output port 106 and a main CPU 101 capable of executing the processing of step S3055,
The second control means is
Receiving means (for example, command input port 208) capable of receiving information transmitted from the transmitting means;
When the setting operation information is received by the receiving means, at least the setting operation information received by the receiving means and time information related to the setting operation information (for example, time information when an initialization command or a power failure recovery command is received) and second storage means (for example, work RAM 203) capable of storing history information,
Based on a predetermined operation, it is possible to display a normal screen (for example, a hall menu screen) that does not show the history information, and when a predetermined operation is performed on the normal screen, an information screen ( display control means (for example, display control circuit 204) capable of displaying a setting change/confirmation history screen);
Although the information screen can be displayed until a predetermined condition is satisfied (for example, until YES is determined in step S3312, step S3313, or step S3314), display of the information screen is restricted when the predetermined condition is satisfied. information screen display restriction means (for example, the sub CPU 201 that executes the process of step S3315 when YES is determined in step S3312, step S3313 or step S3314),
The second storage means is
When the information screen is displayed by performing the predetermined operation on the normal screen, a browsing history indicating that the information screen has been browsed can be stored as one of the history information,
Until the display of the information screen is restricted, even if the number of times the information screen is displayed due to the predetermined operation being performed on the normal screen is a plurality of times, it is counted as one viewing history. It is characterized in that it is configured to store.

According to the gaming machine of (1) above, by performing a predetermined operation, it is possible to browse the information screen showing the setting operation information and the time information related to the setting operation information as history information. It is possible to deal with various problems related to values. In particular, for example, when there is a possibility that setting values have been changed or confirmed for the purpose of fraud by an unauthorized third party, it is possible to determine whether the above fraud has been done by viewing the information screen. It is possible to track In addition, by browsing the past history information, convenience can be improved, for example, it can be used for sales of the hall.

In addition, although the information screen can be displayed until a predetermined condition is satisfied, the display is restricted when the predetermined condition is satisfied. Therefore, it is difficult for an unauthorized third party to easily view the information screen for fraudulent purposes, and security can be ensured.

Also, the information screen is displayed by performing a predetermined operation on the normal screen. At this time, the browsing history is stored in the second storage means. However, even if the number of times the information screen is displayed due to a predetermined operation performed on the normal screen before the display of the information screen is restricted, it will be recorded as one setting history information. be done. This makes it difficult for a person who has changed settings, checked settings, viewed information screens, etc., to intentionally create a large number of viewing histories for the purpose of fraud. In particular, in the case of browsing history, unlike changing or confirming setting values, the browsing history can be browsed multiple times without going through the process of turning on the power while the setting operation means is being operated (for example, the setting key is in the ON state). Therefore, it is easy to intentionally create many histories, so the effect is great.

The setting operation information is setting value change information indicating that the setting value has been changed when the setting value has been changed, and the setting value has been confirmed when the setting value has been confirmed. This is setting value confirmation information indicating that the setting has been made. Also, when the setting operation information is setting value change information, the setting value information is setting value information about one setting value after the change. When the setting operation information is the setting value confirmation information, the setting value information about the set value may be transmitted to the second control means, but the one setting value has not been changed. Therefore, it is not essential to transmit the set value information to the second control means.

Further, the "time information related to the setting operation information" may be time information when the setting operation information is transmitted from the first control means to the second control means, or may be time information when the setting operation information is received by the second control means. It can be time.

In order to solve the seventh problem, there is provided a game machine of Supplementary Note 51 having the following configuration.

(1) The game machine of Supplementary Note 51 is
First control means (for example, main control circuit 100) capable of executing control related to the progress of a game based on one of a plurality of set values;
a predetermined display means (for example, a liquid crystal display device 16);
a second control means (for example, a sub-control circuit 200) capable of at least executing display control of an image displayed on the display means;
Setting operation means (for example, setting key 328) used for operations related to the one setting value;
a power supply means (for example, a power supply circuit 338) capable of supplying power to the first control means and the second control means when powered on;
with
The first control means is
setting state control means for controlling a setting state in which the one setting value can be changed or confirmed when power is turned on at least in a state in which the setting operation means is operated (for example, a setting key is in an ON state); (For example, the main CPU 101 capable of executing the processing of step S3024 or step S3026);
a first storage means (for example, main RAM 103) capable of storing setting value information about at least one setting value;
Various information can be transmitted to the second control means, and at least setting operation information (for example, setting operation command) (for example, the command output port 106 and the main CPU 101 capable of executing the processing of step S3055);
The second control means is
Receiving means (for example, command input port 208) capable of receiving information transmitted from the transmitting means;
When the setting operation information is received by the receiving means, at least the setting operation information received by the receiving means and time information related to the setting operation information (for example, time information when an initialization command or a power failure recovery command is received) as history information including setting change history information or setting confirmation history information (for example, work RAM 203);
Based on a predetermined operation, it is possible to display a normal screen (for example, a hall menu screen) that does not show the history information, and when a predetermined operation is performed on the normal screen, an information screen ( For example, a display control means (for example, a display control circuit 204) capable of displaying a setting change/confirmation history screen),
The second storage means is
When the information screen is displayed by performing the predetermined operation on the normal screen, browsing history information indicating that the information screen has been browsed can be stored as one of the history information,
Furthermore, when the power is turned on while the setting operation means is being operated,
When the one setting value is confirmed and the information screen is viewed, both the setting confirmation history information and the viewing history information are displayed,
wherein only the browsing history information out of the setting change history information and the browsing history information is displayed when the one setting value is changed and the information screen is browsed. Characterized by

According to the gaming machine of (1) above, by performing a predetermined operation, it is possible to browse the information screen showing the setting operation information and the time information related to the setting operation information as history information. It is possible to deal with various problems related to values. In particular, for example, when there is a possibility that setting values have been changed or confirmed for the purpose of fraud by an unauthorized third party, it is possible to determine whether the above fraud has been done by viewing the information screen. It is possible to track In addition, by browsing the past history information, convenience can be improved, for example, it can be used for sales of the hall.

By the way, when fraud involving setting changes is carried out, it is possible to detect the possibility of fraud based on the setting change history that is not in the memory of the person in charge of gaming machine management. However, it is difficult to perceive the possibility of fraud only from the confirmation history of settings. In addition, it is considered that a person who commits fraud mainly browses after confirming the settings rather than browsing after changing the settings. Therefore, when the power is turned on while the setting operation means is operated, when one set value is confirmed and the information screen is viewed, both the setting confirmation history information and the viewing history information are displayed. is displayed, and when one set value is changed and the information screen is viewed, only the viewing history information is displayed out of the setting change history information and the viewing history information. As a result, it is possible to minimize the amount of history information displayed on the display means, thereby preventing the total number of history records from increasing unnecessarily and making it difficult to detect fraud.

Note that "when the one set value is changed and the information screen is viewed, only the viewing history information is displayed out of the setting change history information and the viewing history information" is " By storing only the browsing history information of the setting change history information and the browsing history information in the second storage means, only the browsing history information is displayed" and "Both the setting change history information and the browsing history information are displayed. Although it is stored in the second storage means, only the viewing history information among these information is displayed under the control of the display control means", but from the viewpoint of reducing the load on the second storage means Therefore, the former is preferable.

Further, the "time information related to the setting operation information" may be time information when the setting operation information is transmitted from the first control means to the second control means, or may be time information when the setting operation information is received by the second control means. It can be time.

In order to solve the above seventh problem, a game machine of Supplementary Note 52 having the following configuration is provided.

(1) The game machine of Supplementary Note 52 is
First control means (for example, main control circuit 100) capable of executing control related to the progress of a game based on one of a plurality of set values;
a predetermined display means (for example, a liquid crystal display device 16);
a second control means (for example, a sub-control circuit 200) capable of at least executing display control of an image displayed on the display means;
Setting operation means (for example, setting key 328) used for operations related to the one setting value;
a power supply means (e.g., a power supply circuit 338) capable of supplying power to the first control means and the second control means when powered on;
with
The first control means is
setting state control means for controlling a setting state in which the one setting value can be changed or confirmed when power is turned on at least in a state in which the setting operation means is operated (for example, a setting key is in an ON state); (For example, the main CPU 101 capable of executing the processing of step S3024 or step S3026);
a first storage means (for example, main RAM 103) capable of storing setting value information about at least one setting value;
Transmission means (for example, , a command output port 106 and a main CPU 101 capable of executing the processing of step S3055,
The second control means is
Receiving means (for example, command input port 208) capable of receiving information transmitted from the transmitting means;
When the setting operation information is received by the receiving means, at least the setting operation information received by the receiving means and time information related to the setting operation information (for example, time information when an initialization command or a power failure recovery command is received) and second storage means (for example, work RAM 203) capable of storing history information,
display control means (for example, display control circuit 204) capable of displaying an information screen (for example, setting change/confirmation history screen) showing the history information based on a predetermined operation;
When the amount of history information stored in the second storage means exceeds a predetermined amount, history erasure means (for example, , and a sub CPU 201 that executes the process of step S3306.

According to the gaming machine of (1) above, by performing a predetermined operation, it is possible to browse the information screen showing the setting operation information and the time information related to the setting operation information as history information. It is possible to deal with various problems related to values. In particular, for example, when there is a possibility that setting values have been changed or confirmed for the purpose of fraud by an unauthorized third party, it is possible to determine whether the above fraud has been done by viewing the information screen. It is possible to track In addition, by browsing the past history information, convenience can be improved, for example, it can be used for sales of the hall.

By the way, the history information described above is stored in the second storage means (for example, the work RAM 203). If the amount of history information increases, there is a risk that the history information cannot be recorded in the second storage means when desired. Therefore, when the history information stored in the second storage means exceeds a predetermined amount, at least part of the history information stored in the second storage means is erased to record new history information. This prevents situations where it is impossible to do so.

Note that "when the amount of history information stored in the second storage means exceeds a predetermined amount, at least part of the history information stored in the second storage means is deleted" means that the second storage means The history information may be erased as a result by overwriting the history information already stored in the storage means with the new history information, or the new history information may be stored in the second storage means. In this case, if there is a possibility that the predetermined amount will be exceeded, the history information may be stored after erasing at least part of the history information stored in the second storage means. Also, even when new history information is not stored in the second storage means, when storing more history information in the second storage means may exceed the upper limit, the second storage means may store more history information. At least part of the history information that is stored may be erased.

The setting operation information is setting value change information indicating that the setting value has been changed when the setting value has been changed, and the setting value has been confirmed when the setting value has been confirmed. This is setting value confirmation information indicating that the setting has been made. Also, when the setting operation information is setting value change information, the setting value information is setting value information about one setting value after the change. When the setting operation information is the setting value confirmation information, the setting value information about the set value may be transmitted to the second control means, but the one setting value has not been changed. Therefore, it is not essential to transmit the set value information to the second control means.

Further, the "time information related to the setting operation information" may be time information when the setting operation information is transmitted from the first control means to the second control means, or may be time information when the setting operation information is received by the second control means. It can be time.

(2) In the gaming machine described in (1) above,
The display control means is
Information that allows the information screen to be displayed when the power is turned on while the setting operation means is being operated, and restricts display of the information screen even if the predetermined operation is performed during execution of the game. Screen limiting means (for example, the sub CPU 201 that ends the hall menu task when NO is determined in step S3301, and the sub CPU 201 that executes the process of step S3315 when YES is determined in step S3314). .

According to the gaming machine of (2) above, the information screen is a screen displayed when the power is turned on while the setting operation means is being operated, and it is assumed that a predetermined operation is performed during execution of the game. is also a screen whose display is restricted. That is, the information screen is not displayed unless the power is turned on while the setting operation means is being operated (for example, the setting key is ON). Therefore, it is difficult for an unauthorized third party to easily view the information screen for fraudulent purposes, and security can be ensured.

In order to solve the seventh problem, there is provided a game machine of Supplementary Note 53 having the following configuration.

(1) The game machine of Supplementary Note 53 is
First control means (for example, main control circuit 100) capable of executing control related to the progress of a game based on one of a plurality of set values;
a predetermined display means (for example, a liquid crystal display device 16);
a second control means (for example, a sub-control circuit 200) capable of at least executing display control of an image displayed on the display means;
Setting operation means (for example, setting key 328) used for operations related to the one setting value;
a power supply means (for example, a power supply circuit 338) capable of supplying power to the first control means and the second control means when powered on;
with
The first control means is
When the power is turned on while at least the setting operation means is operated (for example, the setting key is ON), the setting change state in which the one setting value can be changed or the one setting value is confirmed. setting state control means (for example, the main CPU 101 capable of executing the processing of step S3024 or step S3026) for controlling a setting confirmation state in which the
a first storage means (for example, main RAM 103) capable of storing setting value information about at least one setting value;
Transmission means (for example, a command output port 106 and a main CPU 101 capable of executing the processing of step S3055;
The second control means is
Receiving means (for example, command input port 208) capable of receiving information transmitted from the transmitting means;
When the setting operation information is received by the receiving means, at least the setting operation information received by the receiving means and time information related to the setting operation information (for example, time information when an initialization command or a power failure recovery command is received) and second storage means (for example, work RAM 203) capable of storing history information,
An information screen (for example, a setting change/confirmation history screen) showing the history information in the setting change state and/or the setting confirmation state can be displayed on the display means, and the setting change state and/or the setting confirmation state can be displayed on the display means. display control means (for example, a display control circuit 204) capable of limiting display of the information screen so that the information screen is not displayed when the confirmation state ends;
The display control means is
At least when the setting change state ends, the information screen can be displayed without limiting the display of the information screen until a predetermined time elapses even if the setting change state ends (for example, steps S3310 and S311). can be executed), and
Even if the setting change state ends, as long as a predetermined operation related to the information screen is performed on the information screen displayed after the setting change state ends, control is possible so that the display of the information screen is not restricted ( The processing of steps S311 to S3314 can be repeated).

According to the gaming machine of (1) above, since it is possible to browse the information screen showing at least the setting operation information and the time information related to the setting operation information as history information, various problems related to the setting value can be solved. It becomes possible to correspond to In particular, for example, when there is a possibility that setting values have been changed or confirmed for the purpose of fraud by an unauthorized third party, it is possible to determine whether the above fraud has been done by viewing the information screen. It is possible to track In addition, by browsing the past history information, convenience can be improved, for example, it can be used for sales of the hall.

Further, since the information screen is displayed in the setting change state and/or the setting confirmation state, security is ensured such that an unauthorized third party cannot easily view the information screen. In addition, at least when the setting change state is set, the display of the information screen is not restricted as long as a predetermined operation on the information screen is performed until a predetermined time has passed after the setting change state ends. , it is also possible to enhance the convenience of the operator.

(2) In the gaming machine described in (1) above,
The transmitting means is
setting value information about the one setting value can also be transmitted when at least the one setting value is changed;
The display control means is
In the setting change state and/or the setting confirmation state, the display means can display an information screen in which set value information about the one set value is included in the history information.

According to the gaming machine of (2) above, when the history screen is displayed, setting value information about one setting value is also displayed, so that an authorized person can view more detailed history information. . In particular, the set value information about one set value is useful information for business, so that it can be used for hall management.

(3) In the gaming machine described in (1) or (2) above,
The display control means is
Even if a predetermined operation related to the information screen is performed on the information screen displayed after the setting change state is terminated, the information screen is displayed when specific information relating to the progress of the game is received by the receiving means. (for example, the sub CPU 201 that executes the process of step S3315 when YES is determined in step S3314) that terminates the display of .

According to the gaming machine of (3) above, even if a predetermined operation related to the information screen is performed on the information screen, the information screen is forced to be displayed when specific information related to the progress of the game is received by the receiving means. Execution of the game is not hindered because the game is terminated at random. Therefore, it is possible to ensure the convenience of operation by an authorized person, and to suppress fraud by an unauthorized third party while ensuring the state that the game can be executed.

(4) In the gaming machine according to any one of (1) to (3) above,
In the information screen displayed after the setting change state ends, it is configured so that it is possible to grasp that the game is executable without hindering the predetermined operation on the information screen (for example, , while the LED 25 is fully lit in white while the setting is being changed or confirmed, the LED 25 is fully lit in red when the setting is changed or confirmed.)
It is characterized by

According to the gaming machine of (4) above, in the information screen displayed after the setting change state ends, a game can be executed without hindering the execution of a predetermined operation on the information screen. Since it is possible to grasp that the game can be executed, it is possible to prevent the occurrence of a problem that the game is not executed because the game cannot be grasped.

In order to solve the seventh problem, a game machine of Supplementary Note 54 having the following configuration is provided.

(1) The game machine of Supplementary Note 54 is
First control means (for example, main control circuit 100) capable of executing control related to the progress of a game based on one of a plurality of set values;
a predetermined display means (for example, a liquid crystal display device 16);
a second control means (for example, a sub-control circuit 200) capable of at least executing display control of an image displayed on the display means;
Setting operation means (for example, setting key 328) used for operations related to the one setting value;
a power supply means (for example, a power supply circuit 338) capable of supplying power to the first control means and the second control means when powered on;
with
The first control means is
setting state control means for controlling a setting state in which the one setting value can be changed or confirmed when power is turned on at least in a state in which the setting operation means is operated (for example, a setting key is in an ON state); (For example, the main CPU 101 capable of executing the processing of step S3024 or step S3026);
a first storage means (for example, main RAM 103) capable of storing setting value information about at least one setting value;
Transmission means (for example, a command output port 106 and a main CPU 101 capable of executing the processing of step S3055;
The second control means is
Receiving means (for example, command input port 208) capable of receiving information transmitted from the transmitting means;
When the setting operation information is received by the receiving means, at least the setting operation information received by the receiving means and time information related to the setting operation information (for example, time information when an initialization command or a power failure recovery command is received) and second storage means (for example, work RAM 203) capable of storing history information,
display control means (for example, display control circuit 204) capable of displaying on the display means an information screen (for example, a hall menu screen, a hall menu item screen) on which various information can be displayed in the setting state; death,
The information screen is
A history screen (for example, a setting change/confirmation history screen) showing the history information, and a non-history screen (for example, a hall screen) that does not show the history information but shows the history information by performing a predetermined operation. menu screen) and a plurality of information screens,
The display control means is
Screen update means (for example, step a sub CPU 201 that executes the processes of S33051, step S33057, step S33073, etc.;
In the setting state, when the non-history screen is displayed, the non-history screen is continuously displayed even if the predetermined operation is not performed (for example, when the whole menu display process of step S302 is executed). (If none of the items is selected in the processing of step S3303, the hall menu screen is continuously displayed.) On the other hand, when the history screen is displayed, the predetermined operation must be performed for a predetermined time or more. specific display control means (for example, the sub CPU 201 that executes the processing of step S3315 when YES is determined in step S33072) for controlling display of the history screen to end.

According to the gaming machine of (1) above, since it is possible to browse the history screen showing at least the setting operation information and the time information related to the setting operation information as history information, various problems related to the setting value can be solved. It is possible to correspond to In particular, when there is a possibility that setting values have been changed or confirmed for the purpose of fraudulent use by an unauthorized third party, it is possible to check whether the above fraudulent activity has occurred by viewing the history screen. It is possible to track In addition, by browsing the past history information, convenience can be improved, for example, it can be used for sales of the hall.

Non-history screens showing no history information continue to be displayed even if a prescribed operation is not performed, but history screens showing history information are terminated if a prescribed operation is not performed for a prescribed period of time or more. do. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the history information from being continuously displayed and viewed by an unauthorized third party. It should be noted that the above-mentioned "continuous display" also includes stopping the display once and displaying it again. That is, it is important whether the display is displayed even if the predetermined operation is not performed for a predetermined time or longer, or whether the display is stopped.

(2) In the gaming machine described in (1) above,
The transmission means is
setting value information about the one setting value can also be transmitted when at least the one setting value is changed;
The display control means is
In displaying the history screen on the display means in the setting state, setting value information about the one setting value is also displayed.

According to the gaming machine of (2) above, when the history screen is displayed, setting value information about one setting value is also displayed, so that an authorized person can view more detailed history information. . In particular, the set value information about one set value is useful information for business, so that it can be used for hall management.

In order to solve the above seventh problem, a gaming machine of Supplementary Note 55 having the following configuration is provided.

(1) The game machine of Supplementary Note 55 is
A third control system capable of executing control related to the progress of a game based on one of a plurality of set values, and capable of storing information related to the progress of the game, including set value information about the one set value. 1 storage means (for example, main control circuit 100);
a predetermined display means (for example, a liquid crystal display device 16);
a second control means (for example, a sub-control circuit 200) capable of at least executing display control of an image displayed on the display means;
Setting operation means (for example, setting key 328) used for operations related to the one setting value;
a specific operation means (for example, a backup clear switch 330) used for an operation of erasing information stored in the first storage means;
a power supply means (for example, a power supply circuit 338) capable of supplying power to the first control means and the second control means when powered on;
with
The first control means is
When the specific operation means is operated and the power is turned on while the setting operation means is operated (for example, the setting key is in the ON state), a setting change state is entered in which the one set value can be changed. Setting change state control means for controlling (for example, the main CPU 101 capable of executing the processing of step S3024);
Various information can be transmitted to the second control means, and includes at least setting change information (for example, a setting change start command) indicating that the one set value is to be changed, and a set value for the one set value. When an erasing process for erasing information (for example, changed setting value information when the setting value is changed) and information stored in the first storage means is executed, the erasing process is executed. a transmitting means capable of transmitting information (eg, an initialization command) indicating that the
The second control means is
Receiving means (for example, command input port 208) capable of receiving information transmitted from the transmitting means;
When the setting change information is received by the receiving means, at least the setting change information received by the receiving means and time information related to the setting change information (for example, time information when an initialization command or a power failure recovery command is received) and second storage means (for example, work RAM 203) capable of storing history information,
information display control means (for example, a display control circuit 204) capable of displaying an information screen showing the history information at least in the setting change state on the display means;
Erasure execution information notification means capable of informing that the erasure processing has been executed (for example, display control circuit 104, audio control circuit 205 for controlling audio output of speaker 24, and LED control circuit 206 for controlling lighting mode of LED 25) and
The erasure execution information notifying means
When the erasing process (for example, backup clearing process) is executed without being controlled to the setting change state, the execution of the erasing process can be grasped in a first mode (for example, the display area of the liquid crystal display device 16 A first notification means (sub CPU 201) that notifies by text display such as "RAM has been cleared", voice output such as "RAM has been cleared", LED 25 all lit in red),
A second mode in which it is more difficult to grasp that the erasing process has been executed than in the first mode, so that when the erasing process is executed in accordance with the control to the setting change state, the erasing process is executed so as not to hinder the viewing of the information screen. Second notification means (for example, without displaying on the liquid crystal display device 16, only with voice output such as "The setting has been changed. The RAM has been initialized" and the LED 25 is fully lit in red) and a sub CPU 201).

According to the gaming machine of (1) above, since it is possible to browse the information screen showing at least the setting change information and the time information related to the setting change information as history information, various problems related to the setting values can be solved. It is possible to correspond to In particular, when there is a possibility that setting values have been changed for the purpose of fraud by an unauthorized third party, by viewing the information screen, it is possible to track whether or not the above fraud has occurred. can be done. In addition, by browsing the past history information, convenience can be improved, for example, it can be used for sales of the hall.

Further, the erasing process (for example, backup clearing process) for erasing the information stored in the first storage means may be executed without being controlled in the setting change state, or may be executed without being controlled in the setting change state. may be executed by When the erasing process is executed without being controlled by the setting change state, the fact that the erasing process has been executed is notified in the first mode. Therefore, for example, the erasing process is executed by an unauthorized third party. It is possible to suppress On the other hand, when the erasing process is executed as a result of being controlled to the setting change state, the main purpose is to change one set value, and the erasing process is only executed accordingly. Therefore, the notification is made in the second mode, which is more difficult to grasp than in the first mode. Furthermore, when the erasing process is executed as a result of being controlled to the setting change state, an information screen showing history information is displayed. Since the execution of the erasing process is notified, convenience can also be ensured.

(2) In the gaming machine described in (1) above,
further comprising an audio output means (for example, a speaker 24) capable of outputting a predetermined audio,
The second control means is
further comprising audio control means (for example, audio control circuit 206) capable of controlling audio output from the audio output means;
The first notification means is
Using both the display means and the voice output means to notify that the deletion process has been executed,
The second notification means is
It is characterized in that the execution of the erasing process is notified by using only the audio output means out of the display means and the audio output means.

According to the gaming machine of (2) above, when the deletion process (for example, the backup clear process) is executed without being controlled by the setting change state, it is notified by using both the display means and the voice output means. Therefore, it is possible to clearly grasp that the erasing process has been executed. On the other hand, when the erasing process is executed as a result of being controlled to the setting change state, only the voice output means of the display means and the voice output means is used for notification, which hinders visibility of the information screen. It is possible to grasp the execution of the erasing process while preventing the erasing process from being performed by an unauthorized third party, for example, while improving convenience.

According to the gaming machine of the supplementary notes 44 to 55 of the present invention configured as described above, it is possible to provide a highly convenient gaming machine capable of coping with the problems associated with the set values.

[Appendix 56]
2. Description of the Related Art Conventionally, there has been known a game machine that performs a lottery when a predetermined condition is satisfied and performs variable display of symbols based on the result of the lottery. When the result of the lottery is displayed as a specific display result indicating that the result is a specific result, the game state is controlled to be advantageous to the player.

In this type of gaming machine, any one of a plurality of set values indicating the probability of the player's advantage or disadvantage in the game, such as the probability that the result of the lottery will be a specific result, is set. A gaming machine is known in which the progress of a game is controlled based on a set value (see, for example, paragraph [0063] of JP-A-2011-206588). The above set values can be set by an authorized person such as a hall gaming machine manager.

(Eighth problem)
However, in a gaming machine in which the progress of a game is controlled based on set values, for example, an unauthorized person may illegally change or check the setting values, or the setting values may be disturbed by noise or the like. There is concern that various problems may occur, such as the modification of the control board or unauthorized replacement of the control board.

Also, the above set values are important factors for both the hole and the players, and should be strictly managed by an authorized person.

SUMMARY OF THE INVENTION The present invention has been made in view of such a point, and its object is to provide a gaming machine capable of coping with problems related to set values.

In order to solve the eighth problem, a gaming machine of appendix 56 having the following configuration is provided.

(1) The game machine of Supplementary Note 56 is
First control means (for example, main control circuit 100) capable of executing control related to the progress of a game based on one of a plurality of set values;
a predetermined display means (for example, a liquid crystal display device 16);
a second control means (for example, a sub-control circuit 200) capable of at least executing display control of an image displayed on the display means;
Setting operation means (for example, setting key 328) used for operations related to the one setting value;
with
The first control means is
When at least the setting operation means is operated, setting state control means (for example, the main CPU 101 capable of executing the processing of step S3024 or step S3026) controls a setting state in which the one setting value can be changed or confirmed. )When,
storage means (for example, main RAM 103) capable of storing setting value information for at least the one setting value;
Transmission means (for example, command output port 106 or main CPU 101 capable of executing the process of step S3055) capable of transmitting various kinds of information to the second control means and capable of transmitting setting value information about at least the one setting value. and
The second control means is
receiving means (for example, command input port 208) capable of receiving the setting value information transmitted from the transmitting means;
Based on the reception of the setting value information by the receiving means, the propriety of the one setting value is determined using the received setting value information and the setting value information received prior to the setting value information. a setting determination means (for example, a sub CPU 201 that determines whether or not the previous set value and the current set value match);
Abnormality processing execution means (for example, the sub CPU 201 that executes a set value abnormality processing) that executes an abnormality processing when the setting determination unit determines that the one set value is inappropriate. Characterized by

According to the gaming machine of (1) above, the second control means determines whether or not the one setting value is appropriate using the setting value information about the one setting value transmitted a plurality of times from the first control means. becomes possible. That is, even if it is possible to determine the propriety of one set value in the first control means, the one set value is normal if, for example, the first control means is illegally replaced. The first control means determines that one set value is normal regardless of whether the set value is normal or not. Therefore, by enabling the second control means to determine the propriety of one set value, even if the first control means is illegally replaced, for example, the one set value can be determined. It is possible to immediately discover compliance.

(2) In the gaming machine described in (1) above,
The transmitting means is
Setting operation information (for example, a setting operation command) indicating that the one set value has been changed or confirmed can also be transmitted,
The second control means is
A storage separate from the storage means capable of storing at least the setting operation information received by the receiving means and time information related to the setting operation information as history information when the setting operation information is received by the receiving means. means (for example, work RAM 203);
Display control means (for example, display control circuit 204) capable of displaying an information screen (for example, setting change/confirmation history screen) showing the history information on a predetermined display means based on a predetermined operation. characterized by

According to the gaming machine of (2) above, by performing a predetermined operation, it is possible to browse the information screen showing the setting operation information and the time information related to the setting operation information as history information. It is possible to deal with various problems related to values. In particular, for example, when there is a possibility that setting values have been changed or confirmed for the purpose of fraud by an unauthorized third party, it is possible to determine whether the above fraud has been done by viewing the information screen. It is possible to track In addition, by browsing the past history information, convenience can be improved, for example, it can be used for sales of the hall.

When transmitting both setting operation information and setting value information, the transmitting means capable of transmitting various types of information to the second control means may transmit these information together or separately. The setting operation information is setting value change information indicating that the setting value has been changed when the setting value has been changed, and the setting value has been confirmed when the setting value has been confirmed. This is set value confirmation information indicating that the Also, when the setting operation information is setting value change information, the setting value information is setting value information about one setting value after the change. When the setting operation information is the setting value confirmation information, the setting value information about the set value may be transmitted to the second control means, but the one setting value has not been changed. Therefore, it is not essential to transmit the set value information to the second control means.

Further, the "time information related to the setting operation information" may be time information when the setting operation information is transmitted from the first control means to the second control means, or may be time information when the setting operation information is received by the second control means. It can be time.

According to the gaming machine of the supplementary note 56 of the present invention having the above configuration, it is possible to provide a gaming machine capable of coping with the problems associated with the set values.

[Appendix 57]

2. Description of the Related Art Conventionally, there has been known a gaming machine in which a lottery is conducted based on the establishment of a predetermined condition, and a game advantageous to the player is executed based on the result of the lottery.

As this type of game machine, a game machine having a plurality of functions in one device has been proposed. For example, in Japanese Unexamined Patent Application Publication No. 2012-170505, when pressed by a player, in order to give an impact to the player, a game machine that jumps out to a position that protrudes greatly from the main body of the gaming machine regardless of the player's operation. A push button is disclosed.

(9th problem)

By the way, when checking the operation of accessories and various sensors, for example, one device that has multiple functions, such as the push button described in Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2012-170505, is difficult to maintain. There are fears.

The present invention has been made in view of such a point, and its object is to provide a game machine capable of improving the maintainability of a single device having multiple functions. be.

In order to solve the ninth problem, a gaming machine of Supplementary Note 57 having the following configuration is provided.

(1) The game machine of Supplementary Note 57 is
A gaming machine capable of conducting a lottery (for example, a special lottery) based on the establishment of a predetermined condition and executing a game advantageous to the player based on the result of the lottery,
an actionable role (for example, role 1000) based on the result of the lottery;
Composite means (for example, production button 62) having multiple functions in one,
Various sensors provided for the progress of the game (for example, the first start port switch 421 etc.),
a predetermined display means (for example, a liquid crystal display device 16);
Maintenance item determining means (for example, the processing of step S33084) determines the maintenance item to be executed among a plurality of maintenance items including at least the operation confirmation of the accessory, the function confirmation of the composite means, and the detection confirmation of the various sensors. Executable sub CPU 201),
In determining the maintenance item, a selection screen (for example, in FIG. a maintenance screen display control means (for example, a sub CPU 201 capable of executing the processing of step S33083) for displaying at least a maintenance screen;
with
The maintenance item determination means includes:
can be determined as the maintenance item selected on the selection screen displayed by the maintenance screen display control means;
The maintenance screen display control means includes:
The composite means having a single function but having a plurality of functions can be displayed on the selection screen so that an item can be selected for each function (for example, the item "effect button 1" in FIG. 231 and the It is displayed so that you can select one of the items of "Production button 2")
It is characterized by

According to the game machine of (1) above, for the complex means having a plurality of functions in spite of being one, it is possible to select an item for each function on a selection screen on which any one of a plurality of maintenance items can be selected. Since it is displayed, it is possible to improve maintainability.

(2) In the gaming machine described in (1) above,
The composite means is
At least, it has an operation function and a performance function that can be executed based on the result of the lottery,
The maintenance item determination means includes:
When the operation function item (for example, effect button 1) is selected on the selection screen, the maintenance item related to the operation function is determined, and the effect function item (for example, effect button 2) is selected. It is characterized in that it is configured so that it can be determined as a maintenance item related to the production function.

According to the game machine of (2) above, when an operation function item is selected, the maintenance item related to the operation function is determined, and when the effect function item is selected, the maintenance item related to the effect function is determined. Since it is configured to be determinable, it is possible to appropriately maintain both the operation function and the effect function.

According to the game machine of the supplementary note 57 of the present invention having the above configuration, it is possible to provide a game machine capable of improving the maintainability of a single device having a plurality of functions.

[Appendix 58]
2. Description of the Related Art Conventionally, there has been known a gaming machine having a movable accessory that operates based on the result of a lottery in a game machine that executes a game advantageous to a player based on the result of a lottery that is performed based on the establishment of a predetermined condition. there is

As a game machine of this type, a game machine has been disclosed that includes a first movable accessory and a second movable accessory that are operated based on the result of a lottery and that have different drive sources (for example, Japanese Unexamined Patent Application Publication No. 2018-15273).

(Tenth problem)
By the way, in a game machine including a plurality of movable accessories with different drive sources, for example, described in Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2018-15273, maintenance work may be complicated and troublesome. This is particularly noticeable when there is a possibility that a plurality of movable accessories with different drive sources will interfere with each other.

The present invention has been made in view of such a point, and its object is to reduce the troublesomeness of maintenance work even when a plurality of movable accessories with different drive sources are provided. To provide a game machine.

In order to solve the tenth problem, a gaming machine of Supplementary Note 58 having the following configuration is provided.

(1) The game machine of Supplementary Note 58 is
A gaming machine capable of conducting a lottery (for example, a special lottery) based on the establishment of a predetermined condition and executing a game advantageous to the player based on the result of the lottery,
a first role product and a second role product that are operable based on the result of the lottery and have different driving sources;
Various sensors provided for the progress of the game (for example, the first start port switch 421 etc.),
a predetermined display means (for example, a liquid crystal display device 16);
Maintenance item determining means (for example, step A sub CPU 201 capable of executing the processing of S33084;
When determining the maintenance item, a selection screen (for example, 231 maintenance screen) (for example, the sub CPU 201 capable of executing the processing of step S33083);
with
The maintenance item determination means includes:
can be determined as the maintenance item selected on the selection screen displayed by the maintenance screen display control means;
The maintenance screen display control means includes:
Not only the operation confirmation for each of the first role and the second role alone, but also the operation confirmation when both the first role and the second role are operated are selected on the selection screen. (For example, items such as "Direction Accessory 1+2" in Fig. 231 are displayed)
It is characterized by

According to the gaming machine of (1) above, not only the operation confirmation for each of the first and second accessories alone, but also the operation confirmation when both the first and second accessories are operated can also be selected on the selection screen, it is possible to reduce the troublesomeness of maintenance work.

(2) In the gaming machine described in (1) above,
The maintenance screen display control means includes:
The operation confirmation when the second role is operated after the first role is operated can be selected on the selection screen (for example, "Direction role 1 → 2" in Fig. 231). items, etc. are displayed)
It is characterized by

According to the gaming machine of (2) above, even if the operation start timing of the first role and the operation start timing of the second role may be different, the operation of the second role is performed after the first role is operated. Since it is possible to select on the selection screen how to confirm the operation when the is operated, it is possible to reduce the troublesomeness of maintenance work and further improve maintainability.

(3) In the gaming machine described in (1) or (2) above,
further comprising a third role that is operable based on the result of the lottery and has a drive source different from that of the first role and the second role;
The maintenance screen display control means includes:
When there is a possibility that said first role product or/and said second role product and said third role product interfere with each other when both of them operate, said first role product and/or said second role product and the third accessory can be displayed (for example, the item "directive accessory 1+3" in FIG. 231 is displayed so that it cannot be selected). It becomes)
It is characterized by

According to the gaming machine of (3) above, when there is a possibility of interference with each other when the first and/or the second role and the third role are both operated, the selection screen displays the Since it is not possible to select a mode of operating either one of the first role and/or the second role and the third role, it is possible to improve maintainability.

According to the gaming machine of the supplementary note 58 of the present invention having the above configuration, it is possible to provide a gaming machine capable of improving the maintainability of a single device having a plurality of functions.

[Appendix 59, Appendix 60]

2. Description of the Related Art Conventionally, there has been known a gaming machine that performs a lottery when a predetermined condition is satisfied and performs variable display of symbols based on the result of the lottery. When the result of the lottery is displayed as a specific display result indicating that the result is a specific result, the game state is controlled to be advantageous to the player.

In this type of gaming machine, any one of a plurality of set values indicating the probability of the player's advantage or disadvantage in the game, such as the probability that the result of the lottery will be a specific result, is set. A gaming machine is known in which the progress of a game is controlled based on a set value (see, for example, paragraph [0063] of JP-A-2011-206588). The above set values can be set by an authorized person such as a hall gaming machine manager.

(11th problem)

By the way, in a gaming machine in which the progress of a game is controlled based on a set set value, the set value is an important factor for both the hall and the player because it is related to the payout of balls. However, for example, there is a possibility that an abnormality may occur in the set value due to power failure or the like.

The present invention has been made in view of such a point, and an object thereof is to provide a gaming machine capable of appropriately maintaining set values.

In order to solve the eleventh problem, a game machine of Supplementary Note 59 having the following configuration is provided.

(1) The game machine of Supplementary Note 59 is
A memory capable of executing control related to the progress of a game based on one of a plurality of set values and capable of storing information related to the progress of the game including set value information about the one set value Control means (eg, main control circuit 100) having means (eg, main RAM 103);
Setting operation means (for example, setting key 328) used for operations related to the one setting value;
a specific operation means (for example, a backup clear switch 330) used for an operation to erase information stored in the storage means;
power supply means (e.g., power supply circuit 338) capable of supplying power to the control means when powered on;
with
The control means is
State control means (for example, , a main CPU 101 capable of executing the processing of step S3024,
The state control means is
When the power supply is stopped in the setting change state, even if the power is turned on without performing the ON operation of the setting operation means and/or the ON operation of the specific operation means, the setting change state is controlled. Possible or power can be restored in the setting change state when the power supply was stopped (for example, when NO is determined in step S3021, the process of step S3024 is executed)
It is characterized by

According to the gaming machine of (1) above, even if a power failure or the like occurs while being controlled in the setting change state, when the power is turned on after that, it is controlled to the setting change state or the power is turned off. Since the power is restored in the setting change state when the supply was stopped, the set value is always set and the set value is properly maintained. That is, for example, it is possible to prevent the occurrence of a situation in which the set value is not set due to unintended power failure or the like in the setting change state.

(2) In the gaming machine described in (1) above,
The control means is
After the one set value is changed in the setting change state, when the setting operation means is turned off, set value determination means (for example, , further includes a main CPU 101) that executes the processing of step S32480,
The setting value determination means is
When the setting operation means is controlled to the setting change state without being turned ON, or when the power is restored in the setting change state when the power supply was stopped, the setting operation means is turned ON. It is characterized in that the one set value is fixed to the set value after being changed when the switch is further turned OFF.

According to the game machine of (2) above, when the setting operation means is controlled to the setting change state without being turned ON, or when the power is restored in the setting change state when the power supply is stopped, the setting Although it is necessary to turn ON the operation means once, it is possible to fix one set value by performing an operation that is the same as usual, such as turning OFF the setting operation means. Thus, even when the setting operation means is controlled to the setting change state without being turned ON or when the power is restored in the setting change state when the power supply is stopped, complicated operations are performed. Therefore, it is possible to preferably prevent the occurrence of a situation in which the set value is not set.

In order to solve the eleventh problem, a gaming machine of appendix 60 having the following configuration is provided.

(1) The game machine of Supplementary Note 60 is
A memory capable of executing control related to the progress of a game based on one of a plurality of set values and capable of storing information related to the progress of the game including set value information about the one set value a control means (for example, main control circuit 100) having means;
Setting operation means (for example, setting key 328) used for operations related to the one setting value;
a specific operation means (for example, a backup clear switch 330) used for an operation to erase information stored in the storage means;
power supply means (e.g., power supply circuit 338) capable of supplying power to the control means when powered on;
with
The control means is
According to the operation state of the setting operation means and the operation state of the specific operation means, a setting change state in which the one set value can be changed and the one setting after the power is turned on. State control means (for example, the main CPU 101 capable of executing the processes of steps S3024, S3026, S3028, etc.) capable of controlling one of a plurality of states including a setting confirmation state in which values can be confirmed is provided. death,
The state control means is
When the supply of power is stopped in the setting confirmation state and then the power is turned on, one of the plurality of states is controlled according to the operation state of the setting operation means and the operation state of the specific operation means. (for example, the processing of steps S3022 to S3028 is executed),
The power supply is stopped in the setting change state, and when the power is turned on thereafter, the setting change state can be controlled or the power supply is stopped regardless of the operating states of the setting operation means and the specific operation means. Power can be restored in the setting change state at that time (for example, the process of step S3024 is executed when NO is determined in step S3021).
It is characterized by

According to the game machine of (1) above, it is possible to prevent the occurrence of a situation in which the set value is not set due to power failure or the like while ensuring convenience for the operator. That is, the setting confirmation state is a state in which one set value can only be confirmed and one set value cannot be changed. is unlikely to affect the On the other hand, in the setting change state, one set value can be changed, so if an unintended power failure or the like occurs, the one set value may be affected. Therefore, when the power supply is stopped in the setting confirmation state, when the power is turned on after that, it is in one of a plurality of states according to the operation state of the setting operation means and the operation state of the specific operation means. When the power supply is stopped in the setting change state, when the power is turned on after that, it is controlled to the setting change state or in the setting change state when the power supply is stopped By allowing the power to be restored, convenience for the operator is ensured, and the occurrence of a situation in which the set value is not set due to an unintended power failure or the like is prevented.

(2) In the gaming machine described in (1) above,
The state control means is
When the specific operation means is turned ON and the power is turned on while the setting operation means is turned ON, the setting change state is controlled,
The control means is
setting value fixing means for fixing the one setting value to the changed setting value when the setting operation means is turned off after the one setting value is changed in the setting change state; have
The setting value determination means is
When the setting operation means is controlled to the setting change state without being turned ON, or when the power is restored in the setting change state when the power supply was stopped, the setting operation means is turned ON. It is characterized in that the one set value is fixed to the set value after being changed when the switch is further turned OFF.

According to the game machine of (2) above, when the setting operation means is controlled to the setting change state without being turned ON, or when the power is restored in the setting change state when the power supply is stopped, the setting Although it is necessary to turn ON the operation means once, it is possible to fix one set value by performing an operation that is the same as usual, such as turning OFF the setting operation means. Thus, even when the setting operation means is controlled to the setting change state without being turned ON or when the power is restored in the setting change state when the power supply is stopped, complicated operations are performed. Therefore, it is possible to preferably prevent the occurrence of a situation in which the set value is not set.

According to the gaming machine of Supplementary Note 59 and the gaming machine of Supplementary Note 60 having the above configuration, it is possible to provide a gaming machine capable of appropriately maintaining the set value.

[Appendix 61]
2. Description of the Related Art Conventionally, there has been known a gaming machine that performs a lottery when a predetermined condition is satisfied and performs variable display of symbols based on the result of the lottery. When the result of the lottery is displayed as a specific display result indicating that the result is a specific result, the game state is controlled to be advantageous to the player.

In this type of gaming machine, any one of a plurality of set values indicating the probability of the player's advantage or disadvantage in the game, such as the probability that the result of the lottery will be a specific result, is set. A gaming machine is known in which the progress of a game is controlled based on a set value (see, for example, paragraph [0063] of JP-A-2011-206588). The above set values can be set by an authorized person such as a hall gaming machine manager.

(12th problem)
By the way, in a gaming machine in which the progress of a game is controlled based on a set set value, the set value is an important factor for both the hall and the player because it is related to the payout of balls. However, there is a possibility that the setting value may become abnormal due to noise generation, fraudulent activity, or the like.

The present invention has been made in view of such a point, and an object thereof is to provide a gaming machine capable of appropriately maintaining set values.

In order to solve the twelfth problem, a gaming machine of appendix 61 having the following configuration is provided.

(1) The game machine of Supplementary Note 61 is
A memory capable of executing control related to the progress of a game based on one of a plurality of set values and capable of storing information related to the progress of the game including set value information about the one set value Control means (eg, main control circuit 100) having means (eg, main RAM 103);
Setting operation means (for example, setting key 328) used for operations related to the one setting value;
a specific operation means (for example, a backup clear switch 330) used for an operation to erase information stored in the storage means;
power supply means (e.g., power supply circuit 338) capable of supplying power to the control means when powered on;
with
The control means is
Setting change state control means for controlling a setting change state in which the one setting value can be changed when the specific operation means is turned on and the power is turned on while the setting operation means is turned on. (For example, the main CPU 101 capable of executing the processing of step S3024);
Appropriateness determination means (for example, the main CPU 101 capable of executing the processing of step S3721) that determines whether the information stored in the storage means is appropriate or inappropriate;
If the information stored in the storage means is determined to be inappropriate, an abnormal state (for example, a state in which the processes of steps S3722 to S3727 are executed) is controlled to an abnormal control means (processes of steps S3722 to S3727). a main CPU 101) that executes
When the power supply is stopped in the abnormal state and the setting change state is not controlled after the power is turned on, the game is executed even if an operation to erase the information stored in the storage means is performed. (For example, the process of step S31790 is not executed when it is determined as NO in step S31770) On the other hand, control is performed so that the game can be executed when controlled to the setting change state after the power is turned on (for example, step game execution means (for example, the main CPU 101 that executes the process of step S17) that executes the process of step S31790 when it is determined YES in S31770 and YES in step S31780.

According to the game machine of (1) above, when an abnormal state occurs due to, for example, noise generation or fraudulent activity, and the power supply is stopped in such an abnormal state, the setting change state is not controlled after the power is turned on. In this case, even if an operation to erase the information stored in the storage means is performed, the game cannot be executed, and the game can be executed when the setting change state is set after the power is turned on. . When an abnormal state occurs, there is a high possibility that one set value information stored in the storage means is abnormal. A game can be executed and the set value is properly maintained.

According to the gaming machine of supplementary note 61 of the present invention having the above configuration, it is possible to provide a gaming machine capable of appropriately maintaining the set value.

[Appendix 62]
2. Description of the Related Art Conventionally, there has been known a gaming machine that performs a lottery when a predetermined condition is satisfied and performs variable display of symbols based on the result of the lottery. When the result of the lottery is displayed as a specific display result indicating that the result is a specific result, the game state is controlled to be advantageous to the player.

In this type of gaming machine, any one of a plurality of set values indicating the probability of the player's advantage or disadvantage in the game, such as the probability that the result of the lottery will be a specific result, is set. A gaming machine is known in which the progress of a game is controlled based on a set value (see, for example, paragraph [0063] of JP-A-2011-206588). The above set values can be set by an authorized person such as a hall gaming machine manager.

(13th problem)
However, in a gaming machine in which the progress of a game is controlled based on set values, for example, an unauthorized person may illegally change or check the setting values, or the setting values may be disturbed by noise or the like. It is feared that various problems such as changes in

Also, the above set values are important factors for both the hole and the players, and should be strictly managed by an authorized person.

SUMMARY OF THE INVENTION The present invention has been made in view of such a point, and its object is to provide a gaming machine capable of coping with problems related to set values.

In order to solve the thirteenth problem, a gaming machine of appendix 62 having the following configuration is provided.

(1) The game machine of Supplementary Note 62 is
First control means (for example, main control circuit 100) capable of executing control related to the progress of a game based on one of a plurality of set values;
a predetermined display means (for example, a liquid crystal display device 16);
a second control means (for example, a sub-control circuit 200) capable of at least executing display control of an image displayed on the display means;
Setting operation means (for example, setting key 328) used for operations related to the one setting value;
a power supply means (for example, a power supply circuit 338) capable of supplying power to the first control means and the second control means when powered on;
with
The first control means is
When the power is turned on with at least the setting operation means turned on (for example, the setting key is turned on), the state control means controls the setting state so that the one set value can be changed or confirmed. (For example, the main CPU 101 capable of executing processes such as steps S3024, S3026, and S3028);
A game executing means (for example, a game executing means in the setting process of step S3020 in which the game return process of step S3030 has not yet been executed is executed) so that the game cannot be executed in the setting state but can be executed when the setting state ends. When the setting process of step S3020 is completed even though it is not possible, the game return process of step S3030 is executed and the main CPU 101 executes the power-on process that enables the execution of the game;
Transmission means (for example, a command output port 106 and a main CPU 101 capable of executing the processing of step S3055;
The second control means is
Receiving means (for example, command input port 208) capable of receiving information transmitted from the transmitting means;
When the setting operation information is received by the receiving means, setting operation effect execution means (for example, , a sub CPU 201) that executes control to turn on the LED 25 in red through the LED control circuit 206,
The setting operation effect execution means is
Even if the setting state ends and the game becomes ready to be played, an effect indicating that the one setting value has been changed or confirmed can be executed until a predetermined period elapses. It is characterized by

According to the gaming machine of (1) above, when the setting operation information is received by the receiving means, an effect indicating that one setting value is to be changed or confirmed is executed in a setting state in which a game cannot be executed. Furthermore, even if the setting state ends and the game becomes ready to be played, an effect indicating that one set value has been changed or confirmed is executed until the predetermined period elapses. Therefore, when setting values are changed or checked illegally, it is possible to easily discover such fraud, and it is possible to suppress the fraud itself.

(2) In the gaming machine described in (1) above,
The setting operation effect execution means is
After the setting state is finished and the game is ready to be played, the effect indicating that the first set value has been changed or confirmed is a mode in which it is possible to visually recognize that the game is ready to be played. It is characterized by being configured to be executable by

According to the gaming machine of (2) above, since an effect indicating that one set value has been changed or confirmed is performed in a manner that allows the user to visually recognize that the game is ready for execution, one It is possible to prevent the progress of the game from being hindered while the effect indicating that the setting value has been changed or confirmed is being executed.

(3) In the gaming machine described in (1) or (2) above,
The state control means is
A setting change state control means (for example, the main CPU 101 capable of executing the processing of step S3024) that controls a setting change state in which the one setting value can be changed, and
The second control means is
When the setting operation information is received by the receiving means, at least the setting operation information received by the receiving means and time information related to the setting operation information (for example, time information when an initialization command or a power failure recovery command is received) and storage means (for example, work RAM 203) capable of storing history information,
An information screen showing the history information in the setting state (for example, a setting change/confirmation history screen) can be displayed on the display means, and the information screen is changed so that the information screen is not displayed when the setting state ends. further comprising display control means (for example, display control circuit 204) capable of limiting display;
The display control means is
When the setting operation information indicating that the setting change state has ended is received by the receiving means, the display of the information screen is not restricted until a predetermined time elapses even if the setting change state ends. The information screen can be displayed (for example, the processing of steps S3310 to S3314 can be executed).

According to the gaming machine of (3) above, the information screen showing the history information can be displayed on the display means in the set state, and display of the information screen is restricted when the set state ends. Therefore, in the setting state, by browsing the information screen showing the history information, it is possible to deal with various problems related to the setting values. In particular, for example, when there is a possibility that setting values have been changed or confirmed for the purpose of fraud by an unauthorized third party, it is possible to determine whether the above fraud has been done by viewing the information screen. It is possible to track In addition, by browsing the past history information, convenience can be improved, for example, it can be used for sales of the hall. Furthermore, while the display of the information screen is restricted when the setting state ends, when setting operation information indicating that the setting change state has ended is received, even if the setting change state ends, the display of the information screen is restricted until a predetermined time elapses even if the setting change state ends. can display an information screen. Therefore, even if fraud is committed, it is possible to easily discover such fraud, and it is possible to suppress the fraud itself.

According to the gaming machine of the supplementary note 62 of the present invention having the above configuration, it is possible to provide a gaming machine capable of coping with the problems associated with the set values.

[Appendix 63-1 to Appendix 63-26]
2. Description of the Related Art Conventionally, there has been known a gaming machine that variably displays a first special symbol when a game ball wins in a first starting port and variably displays a second special symbol when a game ball wins in a second starting port. Then, when it is displayed that the first special symbol or the second special symbol is a specific result, the special game state is controlled to be advantageous to the player.

As a game machine of this kind, a game machine using a function of simultaneously performing variable display of a first special symbol and variable display of a second special symbol has been disclosed. For example, the variable display of the specified number of times is performed in a high-accuracy short-time gaming state in which the probability of a small hit of the second special symbol is higher than that of the first special symbol, the probability of the lottery is high, and the winning of the first start port is facilitated. Disclosed is a gaming machine capable of ending the facilitation of winning a prize to the first starting port and shifting to a high-accuracy non-time-saving game state to make it easy to execute a small winning game and increasing the number of balls put out. (See, for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2016-174800).

The gaming machine described in JP-A-2016-174800 is equipped with a new playability using the function of simultaneously performing variable display of the first special symbol and variable display of the second special symbol. Furthermore, there is a demand for a game machine with new playability.

The inventions of appendices 63-1 to 63-26 have been made in view of such points, and their purpose is to provide a gaming machine with new playability.

(1) The game machine of Supplementary Note 63-1 is
A gaming machine capable of awarding prize balls or prize ball data as a result of a game performed by shooting game balls toward a game area,
A first start port (for example, the first start port 5442 in FIG. 254) capable of accepting a game ball fired in a normal manner (for example, left-handed) towards the game area;
A first lottery means (for example, main CPU 101) that performs a first lottery (for example, a first special lottery) based on the acceptance of the game ball into the first start port;
First special symbol variable control means (for example, main CPU 101) for performing variable display of the first special symbol and deriving the result of the first lottery;
A second start port (for example, the second start port 440 in FIG. 254) capable of accepting a game ball launched in a specific manner (for example, hitting to the right) toward the game area;
A second lottery means (for example, main CPU 101) that performs a second lottery (for example, a second special lottery) based on the acceptance of the game ball into the second starting port;
Second special symbol variable control means (for example, main CPU 101) for performing variable display of the second special symbol and deriving the result of the second lottery;
Special game execution means (for example, main CPU 101);
Even if the special result is not derived, when a specific condition is satisfied (for example, when the result of the special lottery is a small win), a predetermined movable member (for example, the small win shutter 6100 in FIG. 254 ) to execute a specific game (for example, a small winning game) that makes it easier to accept the game ball into the winning opening where the prize ball or prize ball data is given when the game ball is accepted (for example, main CPU 101);
game state control means (for example, main CPU 101) capable of controlling one of a plurality of game states;
Production control means capable of executing a predetermined production;
with
The second lottery means
The second lottery is performed so that the specific condition is satisfied with a higher probability than when the first lottery is performed,
The game state control means is
A normal game state (for example, a normal game state) in which the probability of deriving the special result is relatively low;
Although the derivation probability of the special result is relatively high, and the game ball is launched in the specific mode, the specific game is executed based on the acceptance of the game ball into the second start port, but the winning An advantageous gaming state in which the expected value of the number of prize balls or the number of prize ball data with respect to the number of shot balls per unit time is less than 1 (for example, a high-accuracy short-time gaming state) due to obstruction of acceptance of game balls into the mouth. When,
The derivation probability of the special result is relatively high, and the acceptance of the game ball into the winning hole is easier than the advantageous game state, so that when the game ball is shot in the specific mode, per unit time The expected value of the number of prize balls or the number of prize ball data for the number of shot balls is a specific game state (for example, a high-accuracy non-time-saving game state) that is greater than either the normal game state or the advantageous game state;
Controllable to any one of a plurality of game states including at least
State transition control means (for example, main CPU 101) capable of executing control to shift from the advantageous game state to the specific game state at a timing that can differ each time when the advantageous game state is controlled,
The production control means is
When the specific game is executed in the advantageous game state, using the time provided for the execution of the specific game, the timing of shifting to the specific game state (the number of time-saving games that have been digested, the specified number of times The remaining number of time-saving games minus the number of time-saving games) can be executed.

According to the gaming machine (1) above, in the advantageous gaming state, although the specific game is executed with high frequency based on the acceptance of the game ball into the second start hole, the number of game balls into the winning hole Since acceptance is hindered, the player may feel uncomfortable. Therefore, when the specific game is executed in the advantageous game state, by performing an effect that suggests the timing of transition to the specific game state using the time provided for the execution of the specific game, the inconvenience that may be given to the player. It is possible to provide a gaming machine with new game characteristics such as reducing pleasure.

Note that "performing the second lottery so that the specific condition is satisfied with a higher probability than when the first lottery is performed" means that when the first lottery is performed, the specific condition is Establishing (for example, winning a jackpot) is not essential. For example, in the first lottery, it is determined whether or not a specific condition has been established, but the probability of the specific condition being established is 0 (for example, a small lottery is held, but the probability of winning a small prize is 0). ), and a mode of not performing the determination itself as to whether or not a specific condition has been established (for example, a mode of not performing the small winning lottery itself).

In addition, the "production that suggests the timing of transition to a specific game state" is, for example, the number of remaining time-saving games minus the number of time-saving games that have been digested from the specified number of times (the number of time-saving games that have been determined). , The mode is not limited as long as it is a mode in which the timing of shifting from the advantageous gaming state to the specific gaming state can be grasped.

(1) The game machine of Supplementary Note 63-2 is
A gaming machine capable of awarding prize balls or prize ball data as a result of a game performed by shooting game balls toward a game area,
A first start port (for example, the first start port 5442 in FIG. 254) capable of accepting a game ball fired in a normal manner (for example, left-handed) towards the game area;
(A first holding means capable of storing up to a predetermined number (for example, four) of the first start memory based on the reception of the game ball in the first start port)
A first lottery means (for example, main CPU 101) that performs a first lottery (for example, a first special lottery) based on the acceptance of the game ball into the first start port;
First special symbol variable control means (for example, main CPU 101) for performing variable display of the first special symbol and deriving the result of the first lottery;
A second start port (for example, the second start port 440 in FIG. 254) capable of accepting a game ball launched in a specific manner (for example, hitting to the right) toward the game area;
A second lottery means (for example, main CPU 101) that performs a second lottery (for example, a second special lottery) based on the acceptance of the game ball into the second starting port;
Second special symbol variable control means (for example, main CPU 101) for performing variable display of the second special symbol and deriving the result of the second lottery;
Special game execution means (for example, main CPU 101);
Even if the special result is not derived, when a specific condition is satisfied (for example, when the result of the special lottery is a small win), a predetermined movable member (for example, the small win shutter 6100 in FIG. 254 ) to execute a specific game (for example, a small winning game) that makes it easier to accept the game ball into the winning opening where the prize ball or prize ball data is given when the game ball is accepted (for example, main CPU 101);
game state control means (for example, main CPU 101) capable of controlling one of a plurality of game states;
Production control means capable of executing a predetermined production;
with
The second lottery means
The second lottery is performed so that the specific condition is satisfied with a higher probability than when the first lottery is performed,
The game state control means is
A normal game state (for example, a normal game state) in which the probability of deriving the special result is relatively low;
Although the derivation probability of the special result is relatively high, and the game ball is launched in the specific mode, the specific game is executed based on the acceptance of the game ball into the second start port, but the winning An advantageous gaming state in which the expected value of the number of prize balls or the number of prize ball data with respect to the number of shot balls per unit time is less than 1 (for example, a high-accuracy short-time gaming state) due to obstruction of acceptance of game balls into the mouth. When,
The derivation probability of the special result is relatively high, and the acceptance of the game ball into the winning hole is easier than the advantageous game state, so that when the game ball is shot in the specific mode, per unit time The expected value of the number of prize balls or the number of prize ball data for the number of shot balls is a specific game state (for example, a high-accuracy non-time-saving game state) that is greater than either the normal game state or the advantageous game state;
Controllable to any one of a plurality of game states including at least
State transition control means (for example, main CPU 101) capable of executing control to shift from the advantageous game state to the specific game state at a timing that can differ each time when the advantageous game state is controlled,
The production control means is
Effect determination means (for example, a sub CPU 201) for determining whether or not to execute a timing suggestion effect suggesting the transition timing to the specific game state when the specific game is executed in the advantageous game state;
When it is determined by the performance determining means that the timing suggesting performance is to be executed, the timing suggesting performance for executing the performance suggesting the timing of shifting to the specific game state using the time provided for the execution of the specific game. Execution means (for example, sub CPU 201),
The production determining means is
Whether or not to execute the timing-suggesting effect is determined so that the execution frequency of the timing-suggesting effect can vary according to the transition timing (for example, the number of time reductions).

According to the gaming machine (1) above, in the advantageous gaming state, although the specific game is executed with high frequency based on the acceptance of the game ball into the second start hole, the number of game balls into the winning hole Since acceptance is hindered, the player may feel uncomfortable. Therefore, when the specific game is executed in the advantageous game state, by performing an effect that suggests the timing of transition to the specific game state using the time provided for the execution of the specific game, the inconvenience that may be given to the player. It is possible to provide a gaming machine with new game characteristics such as reducing pleasure.

By the way, in the specific game state, the specific game is executed with a high frequency based on the acceptance of the game ball into the second start port, so if the execution frequency of the timing suggestion effect is high, it may rather cause a decrease in interest. Therefore, the execution frequency of the execution lottery of the timing suggestion effect is the transition condition from the advantageous game state to the specific game state (for example, if the digestion of the time saving game is the transition condition, the specified number of times that can be different each time) By making it different according to the number of times of shortening of working hours)), it is possible to execute a well-balanced timing suggestion effect. Furthermore, the player can also guess the specified number of times from the execution frequency of the timing suggestion effect, and enjoy comparing the transition timing to the specific game state suggested by the timing suggestion effect with the specified number of times the player himself guesses. can also give.

Note that "performing the second lottery so that the specific condition is satisfied with a higher probability than when the first lottery is performed" means that when the first lottery is performed, the specific condition is Establishing (for example, winning a jackpot) is not essential. For example, in the first lottery, it is determined whether or not a specific condition has been established, but the probability of the specific condition being established is 0 (for example, a small lottery is held, but the probability of winning a small prize is 0). ), and a mode of not performing the determination itself as to whether or not a specific condition has been established (for example, a mode of not performing the small winning lottery itself).

In addition, the "production that suggests the timing of transition to a specific game state" is, for example, the number of remaining time-saving games minus the number of time-saving games that have been digested from the specified number of times (the number of time-saving games that have been determined). , The mode is not limited as long as it is a mode in which the timing of shifting from the advantageous gaming state to the specific gaming state can be grasped.

(1) The game machine of Supplementary Note 63-3 is
A gaming machine capable of awarding prize balls or data in place of prize balls as a result of a game performed by shooting game balls toward a game area,
A first start port (for example, the first start port 5442 in FIG. 254) capable of accepting a game ball fired in a normal manner (for example, left-handed) towards the game area;
A first lottery means (for example, main CPU 101) that performs a first lottery (for example, a first special lottery) based on the acceptance of the game ball into the first start port;
First special symbol variable control means (for example, main CPU 101) for performing variable display of the first special symbol and deriving the result of the first lottery;
A second start port (for example, the second start port 440 in FIG. 254) capable of accepting a game ball launched in a specific manner (for example, hitting to the right) toward the game area;
A second lottery means (for example, main CPU 101) that performs a second lottery (for example, a second special lottery) based on the acceptance of the game ball into the second starting port;
Second special symbol variable control means (for example, main CPU 101) for performing variable display of the second special symbol and deriving the result of the second lottery;
Special game execution means (for example, main CPU 101);
Even if the special result is not derived, when a specific condition is satisfied (for example, when the result of the special lottery is a small win), a predetermined movable member (for example, the small win shutter 6100 in FIG. 254 ) to execute a specific game (for example, a small winning game) that makes it easier to accept the game ball into the winning opening where the prize ball or prize ball data is given when the game ball is accepted (for example, main CPU 101);
game state control means (for example, main CPU 101) capable of controlling one of a plurality of game states;
Production control means capable of executing a predetermined production;
with
The second lottery means
The second lottery is performed so that the specific condition is satisfied with a higher probability than when the first lottery is performed,
The game state control means is
A normal game state (for example, a normal game state) in which the probability of deriving the special result is relatively low;
Although the derivation probability of the special result is relatively high, and the game ball is launched in the specific mode, the specific game is executed based on the acceptance of the game ball into the second start port, but the winning An advantageous gaming state (e.g., high-accuracy short-time gaming state) in which the expected value of the number of prize balls or prize ball data for the number of shot balls per unit time is less than 1 due to obstruction of acceptance of game balls into the mouth ,
The derivation probability of the special result is relatively high, and the acceptance of the game ball into the winning hole is easier than the advantageous game state, so that when the game ball is shot in the specific mode, per unit time The expected value of the number of prize balls or the number of prize ball data for the number of shot balls is a specific game state (for example, a high-accuracy non-time-saving game state) that is greater than either the normal game state or the advantageous game state;
Controllable to any one of a plurality of game states including at least
State transition control means (for example, main CPU 101) capable of executing control to shift from the advantageous game state to the specific game state at a timing that can differ each time when the advantageous game state is controlled,
The production control means is
When the advantageous game state is controlled, an index (for example, the determined number of time reductions) that can suggest the transition timing to the specific game state is displayed, and when the advantageous game state is shifted to the specific game state, the Index display means (for example, the sub CPU 201) that changes the index so as to approach the specific mode (for example, performs subtraction display) each time the variable display is performed so that the indicator becomes a specific mode (for example, 0). ).

According to the gaming machine of (1) above, when controlled to an advantageous game state, the player does not know at what timing the transition to the specific game state occurs, and the player may become suspicious and lose interest. Therefore, an index that can suggest the transition timing to the specific game state is displayed, and when the advantageous game state is shifted to the specific game state, the index is in a specific mode, and each time the variable display is performed, the specific mode is approached. By changing the indicator to , the player can grasp that the indicator will shift to the specific game state when the indicator becomes a specific mode, and the decline in interest can be suppressed.

(2) In the gaming machine of (1) above,
The index display means
When controlled to the advantageous gaming state, an indicator that can suggest a timing different from the transition timing to the specific gaming state is displayed as an initial indicator, and apart from the variable display, when a specific condition is established (for example, It is characterized by having specific index display means (for example, sub CPU 201) that changes the index so as to approach the specific mode even when the mission is accomplished.

According to the gaming machine of (2) above, not only is the variable display performed to wait for the indicator to approach the specific mode, but the indicator also changes when the specific condition is established, so that the advantageous game state is changed. It is possible to enhance the game interest until the transition to the specific game state.

It should be noted that the "timing different from the transition timing to the specific game state" is, for example, when the variable display of the special symbol is performed a specified number of times (for example, the determined time reduction number of times) when the transition to the specific game state is performed, the specified It means the false number of times different from the number of times.

Moreover, "changing the index" includes not only a change approaching a specific mode (for example, a change approaching 0) but also a change away from the specific mode (for example, a change away from 0). For example, when a specific condition is satisfied (for example, when a mission is accomplished), the index is changed to approach a specific mode, and when the specific condition is not satisfied (for example, when a mission fails), the specific mode is changed. You may make it change the index|index which moves away.

(3) In the gaming machine of (2) above,
In the advantageous game state, the variable display of the first special symbol or the second special symbol is performed before reaching the transition timing, the special result is derived, and the special result is derived. When the executed special game ends and is controlled to the advantageous game state,
The specific indicator display means is
Instead of the initial index, the index that was displayed when the special result was derived can be displayed continuously.

According to the gaming machine of (3) above, before reaching the transition timing in the advantageous game state (for example, before digesting the determined time-saving game), a special result is derived and a special game is executed, and this special game is finished and the game is controlled to the advantageous game state again, the indicator that was displayed when the special result was derived is continuously displayed. Therefore, it is possible to show to the player that the state of the index has changed since the previous continuation, and the loss that may occur due to the execution of the special game before the state of the index changes to a specific state in the previous advantageous game state. It is possible to reduce the feeling.

Note that "performing the second lottery so that the specific condition is satisfied with a higher probability than when the first lottery is performed" means that when the first lottery is performed, the specific condition is Establishing (for example, winning a jackpot) is not essential. For example, in the first lottery, it is determined whether or not a specific condition has been established, but the probability of the specific condition being established is 0 (for example, a small lottery is held, but the probability of winning a small prize is 0). ), and a mode of not performing the determination itself as to whether or not a specific condition has been established (for example, a mode of not performing the small winning lottery itself).

(1) The game machine of Supplementary Note 63-4 is
A gaming machine capable of awarding prize balls or prize ball data as a result of a game performed by shooting game balls toward a game area,
A first start port (for example, the first start port 5442 in FIG. 254) capable of accepting a game ball fired in a normal manner (for example, left-handed) towards the game area;
A first lottery means (for example, main CPU 101) that performs a first lottery (for example, a first special lottery) based on the acceptance of the game ball into the first start port;
First special symbol variable control means (for example, main CPU 101) for performing variable display of the first special symbol and deriving the result of the first lottery;
A second start port (for example, the second start port 440 in FIG. 254) capable of accepting a game ball launched in a specific manner (for example, hitting to the right) toward the game area;
A second lottery means (for example, main CPU 101) that performs a second lottery (for example, a second special lottery) based on the acceptance of the game ball into the second starting port;
Second special symbol variable control means (for example, main CPU 101) for performing variable display of the second special symbol and deriving the result of the second lottery;
Special game execution means (for example, main CPU 101);
Even if the special result is not derived, when a specific condition is established (for example, when the result of the lottery is a small hit), a predetermined movable member (for example, a small win shutter 6100 in FIG. 254) to execute a specific game (for example, a small winning game) that makes it easier to accept a winning ball or winning ball data when a game ball is accepted (for example, a main CPU 101);
game state control means (for example, main CPU 101) capable of controlling one of a plurality of game states;
When the variable display of the first special symbol or the second special symbol is performed and a special result (for example, a big hit) is derived, an effect control means (for example, a sub CPU 201) for controlling a specific effect to be performed. When,
with
The second lottery means
The second lottery is performed so that the specific condition is satisfied with a higher probability than when the first lottery is performed,
The game state control means is
A normal game state (for example, a normal game state) in which the probability of deriving the special result is relatively low;
The derivation probability of the special result is relatively high, and when the game ball is launched in the specific mode, the specific game is executed based on the acceptance of the game ball into the second start port, but the An advantageous gaming state in which the expected value of the number of prize balls or the number of prize ball data for the number of balls fired per unit time is less than 1 (for example, a high-accuracy short-time gaming state) )When,
The derivation probability of the special result is relatively high, and the acceptance of the game ball into the winning hole is easier than the advantageous game state, so that when the game ball is shot in the specific mode, the unit time A specific game state (for example, a high-accuracy non-time-saving game state) in which the expected value of the number of prize balls or the number of prize ball data for the number of shot balls per shot is greater than either of the normal game state and the advantageous game state;
Controllable to any one of a plurality of game states including at least
State transition control means (e.g., main CPU 101) capable of executing control to transition to the specific game state after the variable display is performed for a specified number of times, which may differ each time, when the advantageous game state is controlled. ,
The production control means is
When the variable display of the second special symbol is performed as the last variable display of the specified number of times, and when the special result (for example, a big hit) is derived during the variable display of the second special symbol. It is characterized by having a specific effect executing means for executing the same effect as the specific effect that can be performed or an effect that is difficult to distinguish (for example, ready-to-win effect).

According to the game machine of (1) above, when controlled to the advantageous game state, the variable display is performed a specified number of times, and then the game machine can be controlled to shift to the specific game state. Also, when the variable display of the second special symbol is performed as the last variable display of the specified number of times, a specific effect that can be performed when a special result is derived during the variable display of the second special symbol. It is possible to provide a game machine with new playability, such as execution of the same presentation or presentation that is difficult to distinguish from a specific presentation. In particular, the variable display at the end of the specified number of times suggests that there is a possibility of transition to a specific game state, and it is possible to arouse the player's desire to play. Also, usually, there is no guarantee that a specific effect will always be executed in an advantageous game state or a specific game state, but in the final variable display of the specified number of times, the same effect as the specific effect or an effect that is difficult to distinguish is executed. Therefore, it is possible to suppress the decrease in interest.

Note that "performing the second lottery so that the specific condition is satisfied with a higher probability than when the first lottery is performed" means that when the first lottery is performed, the specific condition is Establishing (for example, winning a jackpot) is not essential. For example, in the first lottery, it is determined whether or not a specific condition has been established, but the probability of the specific condition being established is 0 (for example, a small lottery is held, but the probability of winning a small prize is 0). ), and a mode of not performing the determination itself as to whether or not a specific condition has been established (for example, a mode of not performing the small winning lottery itself).

(2) In the gaming machine described in (1) above,
A specified number of times determination means (for example, the main CPU 101 that determines the number of times of time saving) for determining the specified number of times among a plurality of specified times,
The specific effect execution means is
Not limited to the specified number of times determined by the specified number of times determining means, the specific effect is performed during variable display of the first special symbol or the second special symbol in at least one specified number of times among the plurality of specified times. It is characterized by being configured to be executable.

According to the gaming machine of (2) above, the specified number of times is determined to be one of the plurality of specified numbers of times. In addition, the same effect as the specific effect or the effect that is difficult to distinguish is not limited to the determined specified number of times, but is executed during the variable display of the special symbol at least one specified number of times out of a plurality of specified times. , the player can be stimulated, and the prescribed number of games can be a very hot game for the player.

(3) In the gaming machine described in (1) or (2) above,
The special game includes
a first special game (e.g., 8R jackpot game) in which a large amount of prize balls or prize ball data is provided as a special game executed when the first special result is derived;
As a special game to be executed when the second special result is derived, a second special game (for example, a 2R big hit gaming) and
The production control means is
a first special effect executing means capable of executing a first special effect when there is a possibility that the first special result is derived;
a second special effect executing means capable of executing a second special effect when there is a possibility that the second special result is derived;
has
The specific effect execution means is
The specific effect is executed in the same manner as the second special effect or in a manner indistinguishable in appearance.

According to the gaming machine of (3) above, when shifting from the advantageous game state to the specific game state, the specific game is executed in the same manner as when there is a possibility that the second special game is executed, or in a manner indistinguishable from the appearance. Since the effect is executed, it is possible to reduce the disappointment that may be caused by not being a special game when the advantageous game state is shifted to the specific game state.

(1) The game machine of Supplementary Note 63-5 is
A gaming machine capable of awarding prize balls or prize ball data as a result of a game performed by shooting game balls toward a game area,
A first start port (for example, the first start port 5442 in FIG. 254) capable of accepting a game ball fired in a normal manner (for example, left-handed) towards the game area;
A first holding means (for example, main CPU 101) capable of storing up to a predetermined number (for example, 4) of first start memories based on the acceptance of the game ball in the first start port;
a first lottery means (e.g., main CPU 101) that performs a first lottery (e.g., first special lottery) for the first start memory based on the establishment of a first start condition;
First special symbol variable control means (for example, main CPU 101) for performing variable display of the first special symbol and deriving the result of the first lottery;
A second start port (for example, the second start port 440 in FIG. 254) capable of accepting a game ball launched in a specific manner (for example, hitting to the right) toward the game area;
Second holding means (for example, main CPU 101) capable of storing up to a predetermined number (for example, four) of second start memories based on the acceptance of the game ball in the second start port;
a second lottery means (for example, the main CPU 101) that performs a second lottery (for example, a second special lottery) for the second start memory based on the establishment of the second start condition;
Second special symbol variable control means (for example, main CPU 101) for performing variable display of the second special symbol and deriving the result of the second lottery;
Special game execution means (for example, main CPU 101);
Even if the special result is not derived, when a specific condition is established (for example, when the result of the lottery is a small hit), a predetermined movable member (for example, a small win shutter 6100 in FIG. 254) to execute a specific game (for example, a small winning game) that makes it easier to accept a winning ball or winning ball data when a game ball is accepted (for example, a main CPU 101);
a game state control means capable of controlling one of a plurality of game states;
Regarding the first starting memory stored in the first holding means and/or the second starting memory stored in the second holding means, prior to the first lottery and/or the second lottery, the advance determination means (for example, the main CPU 101) that determines whether a special result can be derived and whether the specific condition can be satisfied;
Effect control means (for example, sub CPU 201) capable of executing a predetermined effect,
with
The second lottery means
The second lottery is performed so that the specific condition is satisfied with a higher probability than when the first lottery is performed,
The game state control means is
A normal game state (for example, a normal game state) in which the probability of deriving the special result is relatively low;
The derivation probability of the special result is relatively high, and when the game ball is launched in the specific mode, the execution frequency of the specific game executed based on the acceptance of the game ball into the second start port is the A specific game state (for example, a high-accuracy non-time-saving game state) that is higher than the normal game state,
is configured to be controllable to one of a plurality of game states including at least
The production control means is
In the specific game state, for the one second start memory stored by the second holding means and the other second start memory stored next to the one second start memory, respectively, the specific To make it appear as if the specific game and the special game are one advantageous game when it is determined by the prior determination means that a condition can be established and that the special result can be derived. A series of effects execution means (for example, main CPU 101) capable of executing a series of effects (for example, premium effect) capable of

According to the gaming machine of (1) above, when it is determined by the preliminary determination means that the specific game and the special game are executed in the specific game state, the specific game and the special game are one advantageous game. It is possible to provide a gaming machine with new playability, such as performing a series of effects that can be seen as if. When this series of effects is performed, the number of prize balls or the number of prize ball data obtained by adding the number of prize balls or the number of prize ball data provided in the specific game and the number of prize balls or the number of prize ball data provided in the special game. can be given, so that a larger amount of prize balls or prize ball data can be paid out than the number of prize balls or prize ball data given in one special game, and it is possible to increase the interest in the game. becomes.

Note that "performing the second lottery so that the specific condition is satisfied with a higher probability than when the first lottery is performed" means that when the first lottery is performed, the specific condition is Establishing (for example, winning a jackpot) is not essential. For example, in the first lottery, it is determined whether or not a specific condition has been established, but the probability of the specific condition being established is 0 (for example, a small lottery is held, but the probability of winning a small prize is 0). ), and a mode of not performing the determination itself as to whether or not a specific condition has been established (for example, a mode of not performing the small winning lottery itself).

In addition, the descriptions of "specific conditions may be met" and "special results may be derived" include the possibility that the specified conditions may not be met and the special results may not be derived, respectively. However, this is because when either one of the first special symbol and the second special symbol has a special result (for example, a "jackpot"), the other lottery result is a "special result ”, it is taken into consideration that there may be cases where a failure is displayed.

(2) In the gaming machine described in (1) above,
The production control means is
When the variable display of the first special symbol or the second special symbol is performed and there is a possibility that the special result is derived, special during the variable display of the first special symbol or the second special symbol special effect executing means (for example, sub CPU 201) for executing a effect (for example, ready-to-win effect);
After the special game is started, an interval performance executing means (for example, a sub CPU 201) for executing an interval performance between the end of one round game and the start of the next round game;
has
The series of production execution means is
After the specific game is executed, during the variable display of the second special symbol for the second start memory determined by the preliminary determination means that the special result is derived, the special performance is performed. It is characterized in that it is configured to be able to execute a production in the same manner as the interval production or in a manner that is indistinguishable from the appearance without execution.

According to the gaming machine of (2) above, during the variable display of the second special symbol for the second start memory which is determined by the advance determination means to the effect that the special result will be derived, the special effect should be performed. When executed, the series of effect execution means, after the specific game is executed, during the variable display of the second special symbol for the second start memory determined by the advance determination means that the special result will be derived. Since the performance is executed in the same manner as the interval performance or in a manner indistinguishable in appearance without executing the special performance, it is possible to reduce the unnaturalness that can occur between the specific game and the special game. .

(1) The game machine of Supplementary Note 63-6 is
A gaming machine capable of awarding prize balls or prize ball data as a result of a game performed by shooting game balls toward a game area,
A first start port (for example, the first start port 5442 in FIG. 254) capable of accepting a game ball fired in a normal manner (for example, left-handed) towards the game area;
A first holding means (for example, main CPU 101) capable of storing up to a predetermined number (for example, 4) of first start memories based on the acceptance of the game ball in the first start port;
a first lottery means (e.g., main CPU 101) that performs a first lottery (e.g., first special lottery) for the first start memory based on the establishment of a first start condition;
First special symbol variable control means (for example, main CPU 101) for performing variable display of the first special symbol and deriving the result of the first lottery;
A second start port (for example, the second start port 440 in FIG. 254) capable of accepting a game ball launched in a specific manner (for example, hitting to the right) toward the game area;
Second holding means (for example, main CPU 101) capable of storing up to a predetermined number (for example, four) of second start memories based on the acceptance of the game ball in the second start port;
a second lottery means (for example, the main CPU 101) that performs a second lottery (for example, a second special lottery) for the second start memory based on the establishment of the second start condition;
Second special symbol variable control means (for example, main CPU 101) for performing variable display of the second special symbol and deriving the result of the second lottery;
Special game execution means (for example, main CPU 101);
Even if the special result is not derived, when a specific condition is established (for example, when the result of the lottery is a small hit), a predetermined movable member (for example, a small win shutter 6100 in FIG. 254) to execute a specific game (for example, a small winning game) that makes it easier to accept a winning ball or winning ball data when a game ball is accepted (for example, a main CPU 101);
a game state control means capable of controlling one of a plurality of game states;
Regarding the first starting memory stored in the first holding means and/or the second starting memory stored in the second holding means, prior to the first lottery and/or the second lottery, the advance determination means (for example, the main CPU 101) that determines whether a special result can be derived and whether the specific condition can be satisfied;
Effect control means (for example, sub CPU 201) capable of executing a predetermined effect,
with
The second lottery means
The second lottery is performed so that the specific condition is satisfied with a higher probability than when the first lottery is performed,
The game state control means is
A normal game state (for example, a normal game state) in which the probability of deriving the special result is relatively low;
The derivation probability of the special result is relatively high, and when the game ball is launched in the specific mode, the execution frequency of the specific game executed based on the acceptance of the game ball into the second start port is the A specific game state (for example, a high-accuracy non-time-saving game state) that is higher than the normal game state,
is configured to be controllable to one of a plurality of game states including at least
The production control means is
In the specific game state, a plurality of second starting memories are stored by the second holding means, and among the plurality of second starting memories, the second starting memory in which the specific condition can be satisfied and the special When it is determined by the preliminary determination means that both the second starting memory from which the result of (1) can be derived are included, the specific game and the special game are treated as if they were one advantageous game. It is characterized by having a series of effects executing means (for example, main CPU 101) capable of executing a series of effects (for example, premium effects) that can be shown.

According to the gaming machine of (1) above, when a plurality of second start memories are stored by the second holding means in the specific game state, a special result is derived for all of the plurality of second start memories. Prior to the second lottery, it is determined whether or not it can be done and whether or not a specific condition can be established. The plurality of second starting memories stored by the second holding means include both the starting memories in which a specific condition can be established and the starting memories from which the special result can be derived. It is possible to provide a gaming machine with new playability, such as performing a series of effects capable of making it appear as if the specific game and the special game are one advantageous game when it is determined that becomes. When this series of effects is performed, the number of prize balls or the number of prize ball data obtained by adding the number of prize balls or the number of prize ball data provided in the specific game and the number of prize balls or the number of prize ball data provided in the special game. can be given, so that a larger amount of prize balls or prize ball data can be paid out than the number of prize balls or prize ball data given in one special game, and it is possible to increase the interest in the game. becomes.

Further, "the second lottery is performed so that the specific condition is satisfied with a higher probability than when the first lottery is performed" means that when the first lottery is performed, the specific condition is satisfied. Establishing (for example, winning a jackpot) is not essential. For example, in the first lottery, it is determined whether or not a specific condition has been established, but the probability of the specific condition being established is 0 (for example, a small lottery is held, but the probability of winning a small prize is 0). ), and a mode of not performing the determination itself as to whether or not a specific condition has been established (for example, a mode of not performing the small winning lottery itself).

Further, the second starting memory in which a specific condition can be satisfied and the second starting memory in which a special result can be derived need not be stored in the second holding means continuously. Between the possible starting memories and the starting memories from which a special result can be derived, there may be included starting memories preliminarily determined to be lost.

In addition, the descriptions of "specific conditions may be met" and "special results may be derived" include the possibility that the specified conditions may not be met and the special results may not be derived, respectively. However, this is because when either one of the first special symbol and the second special symbol has a special result (for example, a "jackpot"), the other lottery result is a "special result ”, it is taken into consideration that there may be cases where a failure is displayed.

(2) In the gaming machine described in (1) above,
The production control means is
When the variable display of the first special symbol or the second special symbol is performed and there is a possibility that the special result is derived, special during the variable display of the first special symbol or the second special symbol special effect executing means (for example, sub CPU 201) for executing a effect (for example, ready-to-win effect);
After the special game is started, an interval production execution means (for example, a sub CPU 201) for executing an interval production between the end of one round game and the start of the next round game;
has
The series of production execution means is
After the specific game is executed, during the variable display of the second special symbol for the second start memory determined by the preliminary determination means that the special result is derived, the special performance is performed. It is characterized in that it is configured to be able to execute a performance in the same manner as the interval performance or in a manner that is indistinguishable from the appearance without execution.

According to the gaming machine of (2) above, during the variable display of the second special symbol for the second start memory which is determined by the advance determination means to the effect that the special result will be derived, the special effect should be performed. When executed, the series of effect execution means, after the specific game is executed, during the variable display of the second special symbol for the second start memory determined by the advance determination means that the special result will be derived. Since the performance is executed in the same manner as the interval performance or in a manner indistinguishable in appearance without executing the special performance, it is possible to reduce the unnaturalness that can occur between the specific game and the special game. .

(1) The game machine of Supplementary Note 63-7 is
A gaming machine capable of awarding prize balls or prize ball data as a result of a game performed by shooting game balls toward a game area,
A first start port (for example, the first start port 5442 in FIG. 254) capable of accepting a game ball fired in a normal manner (for example, left-handed) towards the game area;
A first holding means (for example, main CPU 101) capable of storing up to a predetermined number (for example, 4) of first start memories based on the acceptance of the game ball in the first start port;
a first lottery means (e.g., main CPU 101) that performs a first lottery (e.g., first special lottery) for the first start memory based on the establishment of a first start condition;
First special symbol variable control means (for example, main CPU 101) for performing variable display of the first special symbol and deriving the result of the first lottery;
A second start port (for example, the second start port 440 in FIG. 254) capable of accepting a game ball launched in a specific manner (for example, hitting to the right) toward the game area;
Second holding means (for example, main CPU 101) capable of storing up to a predetermined number (for example, four) of second start memories based on the acceptance of the game ball in the second start port;
a second lottery means (for example, the main CPU 101) that performs a second lottery (for example, a second special lottery) for the second start memory based on the establishment of the second start condition;
Second special symbol variable control means (for example, main CPU 101) for performing variable display of the second special symbol and deriving the result of the second lottery;
Special game execution means (for example, main CPU 101);
Even if the special result is not derived, when a specific condition is established (for example, when the result of the lottery is a small hit), a predetermined movable member (for example, a small win shutter 6100 in FIG. 254) to execute a specific game (for example, a small winning game) that makes it easier to accept a winning ball or winning ball data when a game ball is accepted (for example, a main CPU 101);
a game state control means capable of controlling one of a plurality of game states;
Regarding the first starting memory stored in the first holding means and/or the second starting memory stored in the second holding means, prior to the first lottery and/or the second lottery, the advance determination means (for example, the main CPU 101) that determines whether a special result can be derived and whether the specific condition can be satisfied;
Effect control means (for example, sub CPU 201) capable of executing a predetermined effect,
with
The second lottery means
The second lottery is performed so that the specific condition is satisfied with a higher probability than when the first lottery is performed,
The game state control means is
A normal game state (for example, a normal game state) in which the probability of deriving the special result is relatively low;
The derivation probability of the special result is relatively high, and when the game ball is launched in the specific mode, the execution frequency of the specific game executed based on the acceptance of the game ball into the second start port is the A specific game state (for example, a high-accuracy non-time-saving game state) that is higher than the normal game state,
is configured to be controllable to one of a plurality of game states including at least
The production control means is
In the specific game state, a plurality of second starting memories are stored by the second holding means, and among the plurality of second starting memories, the second starting memory that can satisfy the specific condition and the special When it is determined by the preliminary determination means that both the second starting memory from which the result of (1) can be derived are included, the specific game and the special game are treated as if they were one advantageous game. Having a series of performance execution means (for example, main CPU 101) capable of executing a series of performances (for example, premium performance) that can be shown,
The series of production execution means is
The series of performances when the preliminary determination means determines that the first starting memory stored by the first holding means does not include the starting memory from which the special result can be derived. characterized by being configured to execute

According to the gaming machine of (1) above, when a plurality of second start memories are stored by the second holding means in the specific game state, a special result is derived for all of the plurality of second start memories. Prior to the second lottery, it is determined whether or not it can be done and whether or not a specific condition can be established. The plurality of second starting memories stored by the second holding means include both the starting memories in which a specific condition can be established and the starting memories from which the special result can be derived. It is possible to provide a gaming machine with new playability, such as performing a series of effects capable of making it appear as if the specific game and the special game are one advantageous game when it is determined that becomes. When this series of effects is performed, the number of prize balls or the number of prize ball data obtained by adding the number of prize balls or the number of prize ball data provided in the specific game and the number of prize balls or the number of prize ball data provided in the special game. can be given, so that a larger amount of prize balls or prize ball data can be paid out than the number of prize balls or prize ball data given in one special game, and it is possible to increase the interest in the game. becomes.

By the way, when performing a series of effects that can make it appear that the specific game and the special game are one advantageous game, although the series of effects is started, the second starting memory that can derive a special result Before the "jackpot" is derived, there is a possibility that the variable display of the first special symbol is performed and a special result is derived. Therefore, by executing a series of performances when the preliminary determination means determines that the first start memory stored by the first reserve means does not include a start memory from which a special result can be derived. , to prevent such a situation from occurring.

It should be noted that it is not necessary for the second starting memory that can satisfy a specific condition and the second starting memory that can lead to a special result to be stored consecutively in the second holding means. Between the possible starting memories and the starting memories from which a special result can be derived, there may be included starting memories preliminarily determined to be lost.

In addition, the descriptions of "specific conditions may be met" and "special results may be derived" include the possibility that the specified conditions may not be met and the special results may not be derived, respectively. However, this is because when either one of the first special symbol and the second special symbol has a special result (for example, a "jackpot"), the other lottery result is a "special result ”, it is taken into consideration that there may be cases where a failure is displayed.

Further, "the second lottery is performed so that the specific condition is satisfied with a higher probability than when the first lottery is performed" means that when the first lottery is performed, the specific condition is satisfied. Establishing (for example, winning a jackpot) is not essential. For example, in the first lottery, it is determined whether or not a specific condition has been established, but the probability of the specific condition being established is 0 (for example, a small lottery is held, but the probability of winning a small prize is 0). ), and a mode of not performing the determination itself as to whether or not a specific condition has been established (for example, a mode of not performing the small winning lottery itself).

(2) In the gaming machine described in (1) above,
The production control means is
When the variable display of the first special symbol or the second special symbol is performed and there is a possibility that the special result is derived, special during the variable display of the first special symbol or the second special symbol special effect executing means (for example, sub CPU 201) for executing a effect (for example, ready-to-win effect);
After the special game is started, an interval performance executing means (for example, a sub CPU 201) for executing an interval performance between the end of one round game and the start of the next round game;
has
The series of production execution means is
After the specific game is executed, during the variable display of the second special symbol for the second start memory determined by the preliminary determination means that the special result is derived, the special performance is performed. It is characterized in that it is configured to be able to execute a production in the same manner as the interval production or in a manner that is indistinguishable from the appearance without execution.

According to the gaming machine of (2) above, during the variable display of the second special symbol for the second start memory which is determined by the advance determination means to the effect that the special result will be derived, the special effect should be performed. When executed, the series of effect execution means, after the specific game is executed, during the variable display of the second special symbol for the second start memory determined by the advance determination means that the special result will be derived. Since the performance is executed in the same manner as the interval performance or in a manner indistinguishable in appearance without executing the special performance, it is possible to reduce the unnaturalness that can occur between the specific game and the special game. .

(1) The game machine of Supplementary Note 63-8 is
A gaming machine capable of awarding prize balls or prize ball data as a result of a game performed by shooting game balls toward a game area,
A first start port (for example, the first start port 5442 in FIG. 254) capable of accepting a game ball fired in a normal manner (for example, left-handed) towards the game area;
A first holding means (for example, main CPU 101) capable of storing up to a predetermined number (for example, 4) of first start memories based on the acceptance of the game ball in the first start port;
a first lottery means (e.g., main CPU 101) that performs a first lottery (e.g., first special lottery) for the first start memory based on the establishment of a first start condition;
First special symbol variable control means (for example, main CPU 101) for performing variable display of the first special symbol and deriving the result of the first lottery;
A second start port (for example, the second start port 440 in FIG. 254) capable of accepting a game ball launched in a specific manner (for example, hitting to the right) toward the game area;
Second holding means (for example, main CPU 101) capable of storing up to a predetermined number (for example, four) of second start memories based on the acceptance of the game ball in the second start port;
a second lottery means (for example, the main CPU 101) that performs a second lottery (for example, a first special lottery) for the second start memory based on the establishment of the second start condition;
Second special symbol variable control means (for example, main CPU 101) for performing variable display of the second special symbol and deriving the result of the second lottery;
Special game execution means (for example, main CPU 101);
Even if the special result is not derived, when a specific condition is established (for example, when the result of the lottery is a small hit), a predetermined movable member (for example, a small win shutter 6100 in FIG. 254) to execute a specific game (for example, a small winning game) that makes it easier to accept a winning ball or winning ball data when a game ball is accepted (for example, a main CPU 101);
a game state control means capable of controlling one of a plurality of game states;
Regarding the first starting memory stored in the first holding means and/or the second starting memory stored in the second holding means, prior to the first lottery and/or the second lottery, the advance determination means (for example, the main CPU 101) that determines whether a special result can be derived and whether the specific condition can be satisfied;
Effect control means (for example, sub CPU 201) capable of executing a predetermined effect,
with
The second lottery means
The second lottery is performed so that the specific condition is satisfied with a higher probability than when the first lottery is performed,
The game state control means is
A normal game state (for example, a normal game state) in which the probability of deriving the special result is relatively low;
The derivation probability of the special result is relatively high, and when the game ball is launched in the specific mode, the execution frequency of the specific game executed based on the acceptance of the game ball into the second start port is the A specific game state (for example, a high-accuracy non-time-saving game state) that is higher than the normal game state,
is configured to be controllable to one of a plurality of game states including at least
Said particular results include:
A first special result controlled to a game state in which the derivation probability of the special result is relatively low after the special game is executed, and the special result after the special game is executed includes a second special result controlled to a game state with a relatively high derivation probability of
The prior determination means is
When it is determined that the special result is derived, it is also possible to determine whether the special result is the first special result or the second special result,
The production control means is
In the specific game state, a plurality of second starting memories are stored by the second holding means, and among the plurality of second starting memories, the specific second starting memory that can satisfy the specific condition and the When it is determined by the preliminary determination means that both the special second starting memory from which a special result can be derived are included, it is determined whether the specific game and the special game are one advantageous game. It has a series of effects execution means (for example, main CPU 101) capable of executing a series of effects (for example, premium effects) that can be seen as
The series of production execution means is
When the special second start memory is determined to be the second special result by the preliminary determination means, first, an effect indicating that the special second start memory is the first special result. and during the variable display of the second special symbol for the special second start memory, a promotion effect indicating that the result has been promoted from the first special result to the second special result can be executed. It is characterized by being

According to the gaming machine of (1) above, when a plurality of second start memories are stored by the second holding means in the specific game state, a special result is derived for all of the plurality of second start memories. Prior to the second lottery, it is determined whether or not it can be done and whether or not a specific condition can be established. The plurality of second starting memories stored by the second holding means include both the starting memories in which a specific condition can be established and the starting memories from which the special result can be derived. It is possible to provide a gaming machine with new playability, such as performing a series of effects capable of making it appear as if the specific game and the special game are one advantageous game when it is determined that becomes. When this series of effects is performed, the number of prize balls or the number of prize ball data obtained by adding the number of prize balls or the number of prize ball data provided in the specific game and the number of prize balls or the number of prize ball data provided in the special game. can be given, so that a larger amount of prize balls or prize ball data can be paid out than the number of prize balls or prize ball data given in one special game, and it is possible to increase the interest in the game. becomes.

By the way, when a series of effects is performed that makes it possible to show that the specific game and the special game are one advantageous game, especially the special game is derived between the specific game and the special game. Since the variable display of the second special symbol is sometimes performed, this variable display may cause an unnatural state in which time is generated between the specific game and the special game. Therefore, when the second starting memory determined to be the special result by the preliminary determination means is the second special result, the special second starting memory is the second special result. is the first special result, and the second special result is promoted from the first special result to the second special result during the variable display of the second special symbol for the second special start memory. He is trying to execute the promotion production which shows that. Thereby, it becomes possible to suppress the unnaturalness that may occur between the specific game and the special game.

It should be noted that it is not necessary for the specific second starting memory that can satisfy a specific condition and the special second starting memory that can lead to a special result to be stored consecutively in the second holding means. A starting memory preliminarily determined to be a failure may be included between the specific second starting memory from which the condition can be established and the special second starting memory from which a special result can be derived.

In addition, the descriptions of "specific conditions may be met" and "special results may be derived" include the possibility that the specified conditions may not be met and the special results may not be derived, respectively. However, this is because when either one of the first special symbol and the second special symbol has a special result (for example, a "jackpot"), the other lottery result is a "special result ”, it is taken into consideration that there may be cases where a failure is displayed.

Further, "the second lottery is performed so that the specific condition is satisfied with a higher probability than when the first lottery is performed" means that when the first lottery is performed, the specific condition is satisfied. Establishing (for example, winning a jackpot) is not essential. For example, in the first lottery, it is determined whether or not a specific condition has been established, but the probability of the specific condition being established is 0 (for example, a small lottery is held, but the probability of winning a small prize is 0). ), and a mode of not performing the determination itself as to whether or not a specific condition has been established (for example, a mode of not performing the small winning lottery itself).

(1) The game machine of Supplementary Note 63-9 is
A gaming machine capable of awarding prize balls or prize ball data as a result of a game performed by shooting game balls toward a game area,
A first start port (for example, the first start port 5442 in FIG. 254) capable of accepting a game ball fired in a normal manner (for example, left-handed) towards the game area;
A first holding means (for example, main CPU 101) capable of storing up to a predetermined number (for example, 4) of first start memories based on the acceptance of the game ball in the first start port;
a first lottery means (e.g., main CPU 101) that performs a first lottery (e.g., first special lottery) for the first start memory based on the establishment of a first start condition;
First special symbol variable control means (for example, main CPU 101) for performing variable display of the first special symbol and deriving the result of the first lottery;
A second start port (for example, the second start port 440 in FIG. 254) capable of accepting a game ball launched in a specific manner (for example, hitting to the right) toward the game area;
Second holding means (for example, main CPU 101) capable of storing up to a predetermined number (for example, four) of second start memories based on the acceptance of the game ball in the second start port;
a second lottery means (for example, the main CPU 101) that performs a second lottery (for example, a second special lottery) for the second start memory based on the establishment of the second start condition;
Second special symbol variable control means (for example, main CPU 101) for performing variable display of the second special symbol and deriving the result of the second lottery;
Special game execution means (for example, main CPU 101);
Even if the special result is not derived, when a specific condition is established (for example, when the result of the lottery is a small hit), a predetermined movable member (for example, a small win shutter 6100 in FIG. 254) to execute a specific game (for example, a small winning game) that makes it easier to accept a winning ball or winning ball data when a game ball is accepted (for example, a main CPU 101);
a game state control means capable of controlling one of a plurality of game states;
Regarding the first starting memory stored in the first holding means and/or the second starting memory stored in the second holding means, prior to the first lottery and/or the second lottery, the advance determination means (for example, the main CPU 101) that determines whether a special result is derived and whether the specific condition is satisfied;
Effect control means (for example, sub CPU 201) capable of executing a predetermined effect,
with
The second lottery means
The second lottery is performed so that the specific condition is satisfied with a higher probability than when the first lottery is performed,
The game state control means is
A normal game state (for example, a normal game state) in which the probability of deriving the special result is relatively low;
The derivation probability of the special result is relatively high, and when the game ball is launched in the specific mode, the execution frequency of the specific game executed based on the acceptance of the game ball into the second start port is the A specific game state (for example, a high-accuracy non-time-saving game state) that is higher than the normal game state,
is configured to be controllable to one of a plurality of game states including at least
The second special symbol variable control means is
A normal variable display (for example, normal reach for high start, super reach A for high start, super reach B for high start) in which the variable display of the second special symbol is variably displayed only for a predetermined time, and the predetermined time short-time variable display (e.g., super-fast fluctuation) that is variably displayed for a short time shorter than
The production control means is
In the specific game state, for the one second start memory stored by the second holding means and the other second start memory stored next to the one second start memory, respectively, the specific To make it appear as if the specific game and the special game are one advantageous game when it is determined by the prior determination means that a condition can be established and that the special result can be derived. has a series of effect execution means (for example, main CPU 101) capable of executing a series of effects (for example, premium effect),
The series of production execution means is
It is characterized in that the series of effects is executed when the variable display of the second special symbol performed for the other second start memory is performed in the short-time variable display.

According to the gaming machine of (1) above, when it is determined by the preliminary determination means that the specific game and the special game are executed in the specific game state, the specific game and the special game are one advantageous game. It is possible to provide a gaming machine with new playability, such as performing a series of effects that can be seen as if. When this series of effects is performed, the number of prize balls or the number of prize ball data obtained by adding the number of prize balls or the number of prize ball data provided in the specific game and the number of prize balls or the number of prize ball data provided in the special game. can be given, so that a larger amount of prize balls or prize ball data can be paid out than the number of prize balls or prize ball data given in one special game, and it is possible to increase the interest in the game. becomes.

By the way, when a series of effects is performed that makes it possible to show that the specific game and the special game are one advantageous game, especially the special game is derived between the specific game and the special game. Since the variable display of the second special symbol is sometimes performed, this variable display may cause an unnatural state in which time is generated between the specific game and the special game. Therefore, when the variable display of the second special symbol performed for the other second start memory (the second start memory determined that the special result is derived by the preliminary determination means) is performed in a short time variable display , to execute a series of performances. Thereby, it becomes possible to suppress the unnaturalness that may occur between the specific game and the special game.

Note that "performing the second lottery so that the specific condition is satisfied with a higher probability than when the first lottery is performed" means that when the first lottery is performed, the specific condition is Establishing (for example, winning a jackpot) is not essential. For example, in the first lottery, it is determined whether or not a specific condition has been established, but the probability of the specific condition being established is 0 (for example, a small lottery is held, but the probability of winning a small prize is 0). ), and a mode of not performing the determination itself as to whether or not a specific condition has been established (for example, a mode of not performing the small winning lottery itself).

In addition, the descriptions of "specific conditions may be met" and "special results may be derived" include the possibility that the specified conditions may not be met and the special results may not be derived, respectively. However, this is because when either one of the first special symbol and the second special symbol has a special result (for example, a "jackpot"), the other lottery result is a "special result ”, it is taken into consideration that there may be cases where a failure is displayed.

(2) In the gaming machine described in (1) above,
The production control means is
further comprising opening effect execution means (for example, main CPU 101) for executing an opening effect for a predetermined time when execution of the special game is started;
The second special symbol variable control means is
In the specific game state, when the variable display of the second special symbol is performed and the special result is derived, the variable display of the second special symbol is performed with a predetermined probability (for example, a probability of 50%). and can be executed only for a short time (for example, 1000 msec of ultra-fast fluctuation) shorter than the predetermined time,
The series of production execution means is
When the variable display of the second special symbol performed for the other second start memory is performed only for the short time, the series during the variable display of the second special symbol performed for the one second start memory It is characterized by being configured to execute a performance.

According to the gaming machine of (2) above, when the variable display of the second special symbol is performed and the special result is derived, the variable display of the second special symbol is only for a short time shorter than the predetermined time. When performed, a series of performances are performed during the variable display of the second special pattern performed for one second start memory, so that the unnaturalness that can occur between the specific game and the special game can be reduced. It becomes possible.

(3) In the gaming machine described in (1) or (2) above,
The production control means is
When the variable display of the first special symbol or the second special symbol is performed and there is a possibility that the special result is derived, special during the variable display of the first special symbol or the second special symbol special effect executing means (for example, sub CPU 201) for executing a effect (for example, ready-to-win effect);
After the special game is started, an interval performance executing means (for example, a sub CPU 201) for executing an interval performance between the end of one round game and the start of the next round game;
has
The series of production execution means is
After the specific game is executed, during the variable display of the second special symbol for the second start memory determined by the preliminary determination means that the special result is derived, the special performance is performed. It is characterized in that it is configured to be able to execute a production in the same manner as the interval production or in a manner that is indistinguishable from the appearance without execution.

According to the gaming machine of (3) above, during the variable display of the second special symbol for the second start memory determined by the advance determination means that the special result will be derived, the special effect should normally be performed. When executed, the series of effect execution means, after the specific game is executed, during the variable display of the second special symbol for the second start memory determined by the advance determination means that the special result will be derived. Since the performance is executed in the same manner as the interval performance or in a manner indistinguishable in appearance without executing the special performance, it is possible to reduce the unnaturalness that can occur between the specific game and the special game. .

(1) The game machine of Supplementary Note 63-10 is
A gaming machine capable of awarding prize balls or prize ball data as a result of a game performed by shooting game balls toward a game area,
A first start port (for example, the first start port 5442 in FIG. 254) capable of accepting a game ball fired in a normal manner (for example, left-handed) towards the game area;
A first holding means (for example, main CPU 101) capable of storing up to a predetermined number (for example, 4) of first start memories based on the acceptance of the game ball in the first start port;
a first lottery means (e.g., main CPU 101) that performs a first lottery (e.g., first special lottery) for the first start memory based on the establishment of a first start condition;
First special symbol variable control means (for example, main CPU 101) for performing variable display of the first special symbol and deriving the result of the first lottery;
A second start port (for example, the second start port 440 in FIG. 254) capable of accepting a game ball launched in a specific manner (for example, hitting to the right) toward the game area;
Second holding means (for example, main CPU 101) capable of storing up to a predetermined number (for example, four) of second start memories based on the acceptance of the game ball in the second start port;
a second lottery means (for example, the main CPU 101) that performs a second lottery (for example, a second special lottery) for the second start memory based on the establishment of the second start condition;
Second special symbol variable control means (for example, main CPU 101) for performing variable display of the second special symbol and deriving the result of the second lottery;
When the variable display of the first special symbol or the second special symbol is performed and a special result (for example, a big hit) is derived, a special round game of opening and closing a predetermined movable member is performed for a predetermined number of rounds. special game execution means (for example, main CPU 101) for executing a game;
Even if the special result is not derived, when a specific condition is established (for example, when the result of the lottery is a small hit), a predetermined movable member (for example, a small win shutter 6100 in FIG. 254) to execute a specific game (for example, a small winning game) that makes it easier to accept a winning ball or winning ball data when a game ball is accepted (for example, a main CPU 101);
a game state control means capable of controlling one of a plurality of game states;
Regarding the first starting memory stored in the first holding means and/or the second starting memory stored in the second holding means, prior to the first lottery and/or the second lottery, the advance determination means (for example, the main CPU 101) that determines whether a special result can be derived and whether the specific condition can be satisfied;
Effect control means (for example, sub CPU 201) capable of executing a predetermined effect,
with
The second lottery means
The second lottery is performed so that the specific condition is satisfied with a higher probability than when the first lottery is performed,
The game state control means is
A normal game state (for example, a normal game state) in which the probability of deriving the special result is relatively low;
The derivation probability of the special result is relatively high, and when the game ball is launched in the specific mode, the execution frequency of the specific game executed based on the acceptance of the game ball into the second start port is the A specific game state (for example, a high-accuracy non-time-saving game state) that is higher than the normal game state,
is configured to be controllable to one of a plurality of game states including at least
The prior determination means is
When the special game is being executed, at least for the second starting memory stored in the second holding means, prior to the second lottery, it is determined whether or not the specific condition can be established. and
The production control means is
When the special game is controlled to the specific game state after the end of the special game, the specific condition is established for the second start memory stored in the second holding means during execution of the special game. When it is determined by the prior determination means that it is possible, a specific effect execution means (for example, sub CPU 201) that performs a specific effect that suggests that the number of rounds of the round game executed in the special game has increased artificially. characterized by having

According to the gaming machine (1) above, when the special game is controlled to the specific game state after the end, during the execution of the special game before being controlled to the specific game state, the second holding means A specific effect suggesting that the number of rounds of the round game executed in the special game is pseudo-increased when the pre-discrimination means determines that a specific condition can be established for the stored second start memory. It is possible to provide a gaming machine with new game features such as being performed. When such a specific effect is performed, although the round game executed in the special game does not change, it becomes possible to make it appear as if the number of rounds has increased, resulting in a larger number of rounds than should have been originally executed. By making the player think that the round game will be played over the rounds, it is possible to increase the interest in the game.

Note that "performing the second lottery so that the specific condition is satisfied with a higher probability than when the first lottery is performed" means that when the first lottery is performed, the specific condition is Establishing (for example, winning a jackpot) is not essential. For example, in the first lottery, it is determined whether or not a specific condition has been established, but the probability of the specific condition being established is 0 (for example, a small lottery is held, but the probability of winning a small prize is 0). ), and a mode of not performing the determination itself as to whether or not a specific condition has been established (for example, a mode of not performing the small winning lottery itself).

In addition, the descriptions of "a special result may be derived" and "a specific condition may be met" include the possibility that no special result will be derived and the specific condition may not be met, respectively. However, this is because when either one of the first special symbol and the second special symbol has a special result (for example, a "jackpot"), the other lottery result is a "special result ”, it is taken into consideration that there may be cases where a failure is displayed.

(2) In the gaming machine described in (1) above,
The production control means is
When the special game ends, it has an end effect control means for performing an end effect (for example, ending effect) indicating the end of the special game,
The end effect control means is
When the specific performance is performed, the end performance is not performed when the special game is finished, but is performed when the specific game that can be performed after the special game is finished. characterized by

According to the gaming machine of (2) above, when the specific effect is performed, the end effect that is originally performed when the special game is finished is not performed when the specific effect is performed, but is executed after the special game is finished. Since it is performed when the play specific game ends, it is possible to increase the credibility of the increase in the number of rounds.

(1) The game machine of Supplementary Note 63-11 is
A gaming machine capable of awarding prize balls or prize ball data as a result of a game performed by shooting game balls toward a game area,
A first start port (for example, the first start port 5442 in FIG. 254) capable of accepting a game ball fired in a normal manner (for example, left-handed) towards the game area;
A first holding means (for example, main CPU 101) capable of storing up to a predetermined number (for example, 4) of first start memories based on the acceptance of the game ball in the first start port;
a first lottery means (e.g., main CPU 101) that performs a first lottery (e.g., first special lottery) for the first start memory based on the establishment of a first start condition;
First special symbol variable control means (for example, main CPU 101) for performing variable display of the first special symbol and deriving the result of the first lottery;
A second start port (for example, the second start port 440 in FIG. 254) capable of accepting a game ball launched in a specific manner (for example, hitting to the right) toward the game area;
Second holding means (for example, main CPU 101) capable of storing up to a predetermined number (for example, four) of second start memories based on the acceptance of the game ball in the second start port;
a second lottery means (for example, the main CPU 101) that performs a second lottery (for example, a second special lottery) for the second start memory based on the establishment of the second start condition;
Second special symbol variable control means (for example, main CPU 101) for performing variable display of the second special symbol and deriving the result of the second lottery;
Special game execution means (for example, main CPU 101);
When a specific condition is satisfied even if the special result is not derived (for example, when the result of the lottery is a small win), a predetermined movable member (for example, a small win shutter 6100) is operated. a specific game execution means (for example, main CPU 101) for executing a specific game (for example, a small winning game) in which, when a game ball is accepted, it is easy to accept it into a prize winning opening to which a prize ball or prize ball data is given; ,
game state control means (for example, main CPU 101) capable of controlling one of a plurality of game states;
advance determination means (e.g., main CPU 101) for determining whether or not the special result can be derived prior to the second lottery for at least the second starting memory stored in the second holding means;
Effect control means (for example, sub CPU 201) capable of executing a predetermined effect,
with
It is possible to perform in parallel the variable display of the first special symbol by the first special symbol variable control means and the variable display of the second special symbol by the second special symbol variable control means,
The second lottery means
The second lottery is performed so that the specific condition is satisfied with a higher probability than when the first lottery is performed,
The game state control means is
A first game state in which the expected value of the number of times of variable display of the first special symbol per unit time is larger than the expected value of the number of times of variable display of the second special symbol per unit time (for example, normal game state), and the expected value of the number of times of variable display of the second special symbol per unit time is larger than the expected value of the number of times of variable display of the first special symbol per unit time. Second gaming state (for example, high-probability short-time gaming state, high-probability non-shortening gaming state)
and can be controlled to any one of a plurality of game states including at least, and can be shifted from the second game state to the first game state,
The production control means is
In the first game state, when the second starting memory is stored by the second holding means, an effect suggesting the determination result of the second starting memory by the preliminary determination means is performed under a predetermined condition. It is characterized by being configured to be executable based on what has been established.

According to the gaming machine (1) above, in the first gaming state, the execution of variable display of the first special symbol per unit time is higher than the expected value of the number of times of variable display of the second special symbol per unit time. Since the expected value of the number of times is larger, the game is played by shooting the game balls in a normal manner. In addition, in the second game state, the expected value of the number of times the variable display of the second special symbol is executed per unit time is higher than the expected value of the number of times the variable display of the first special symbol is executed per unit time. Since it is large, the game is played by shooting game balls in a specific manner. Then, when the second game state is shifted to the first game state, the second start memory may be stored by the second holding means. In the first game state, the expected value of the number of times the variable display of the second special symbol is executed per unit time is low, so the derivation of the result of the second lottery may be delayed and the interest may decrease. Therefore, in the first game state, when the second starting memory is stored by the second holding means, an effect suggesting the determination result of the second starting memory by the preliminary determining means is performed when a predetermined condition is satisfied. It is possible to provide a gaming machine with new game features, such as execution based on the fact. As a result, even if the derivation of the result of the second lottery is delayed, the determination result by the preliminary determination means is suggested, so that it is possible to suppress the decrease in interest. In particular, even if a plurality of second start memories are stored in the second holding means when shifting from the second game state to the first game state, the second start condition for all of the plurality of second start memories. Since the judgment result by the preliminary judgment means is suggested without waiting for the establishment of the above, it is possible to suppress the decrease in interest. Above all, when the second start memory stored in the second holding means when the second game state is shifted to the first game state is the upper limit of the predetermined number, the effect is remarkable.

Note that "performing the second lottery so that the specific condition is satisfied with a higher probability than when the first lottery is performed" means that when the first lottery is performed, the specific condition is Establishing (for example, winning a jackpot) is not essential. For example, in the first lottery, it is determined whether or not a specific condition has been established, but the probability of the specific condition being established is 0 (for example, a small lottery is held, but the probability of winning a small prize is 0). ), and a mode of not performing the determination itself as to whether or not a specific condition has been established (for example, a mode of not performing the small winning lottery itself).

Also, the description of "a special result can be derived" is a description that includes the possibility that the special result is not derived, but this is either the first special symbol or the second special symbol When a special result (for example, "big hit") is derived on one side, even if the other lottery result is a "special result", it is considered that there is a case where a loss is displayed. .

(2) In the gaming machine described in (1) above,
The production control means is
As said predetermined condition, said pre-determining means for said second start memory based on said game ball launched in said normal mode being received in a predetermined receiving port different from said first start port It is characterized by being configured to be able to execute an effect suggesting the determination result by

According to the gaming machine of (2) above, the predetermined condition is established based on the reception of the game ball into the predetermined receiving port different from the first starting port for the game ball fired in the normal mode, and the second An effect suggesting the determination result by the preliminary determination means regarding the starting memory is executed. Therefore, even if the second game state in which the game ball is shot in a specific mode shifts to the first game state in which the game ball is shot in a normal mode, it is possible to promote the game.

It should be noted that the above predetermined condition may be established based on the fact that one game ball that has been shot in a normal manner is received in a predetermined receiving port, or that the game ball has been shot in a normal manner. It may be established based on the fact that a plurality of game balls are received in a predetermined receiving port. Furthermore, a predetermined condition may be established based on the establishment of a weighting condition in addition to the above conditions.

(1) The game machine of Supplementary Note 63-12 is
A gaming machine capable of awarding prize balls or prize ball data as a result of a game performed by shooting game balls toward a game area,
A first start port (for example, the first start port 5442 in FIG. 254) capable of accepting a game ball fired in a normal manner (for example, left-handed) towards the game area;
A first holding means (for example, main CPU 101) capable of storing up to a predetermined number (for example, 4) of first start memories based on the acceptance of the game ball in the first start port;
a first lottery means (e.g., main CPU 101) that performs a first lottery (e.g., first special lottery) for the first start memory based on the establishment of a first start condition;
First special symbol variable control means (for example, main CPU 101) for performing variable display of the first special symbol and deriving the result of the first lottery;
A second start port (for example, the second start port 440 in FIG. 254) capable of accepting a game ball launched in a specific manner (for example, hitting to the right) toward the game area;
Second holding means (for example, main CPU 101) capable of storing up to a predetermined number (for example, four) of second start memories based on the acceptance of the game ball in the second start port;
a second lottery means (for example, the main CPU 101) that performs a second lottery (for example, a second special lottery) for the second start memory based on the establishment of the second start condition;
Second special symbol variable control means (for example, main CPU 101) for performing variable display of the second special symbol and deriving the result of the second lottery;
Special game execution means (for example, main CPU 101);
When a specific condition is satisfied even if the special result is not derived (for example, when the result of the lottery is a small win), a predetermined movable member (for example, a small win shutter 6100) is operated. a specific game execution means (for example, main CPU 101) for executing a specific game (for example, a small winning game) in which, when a game ball is accepted, it is easy to accept it into a prize winning opening to which a prize ball or prize ball data is given; ,
game state control means (for example, main CPU 101) capable of controlling one of a plurality of game states;
advance determination means (e.g., main CPU 101) for determining whether or not the special result can be derived prior to the second lottery for at least the second starting memory stored in the second holding means;
Effect control means (for example, sub CPU 201) capable of executing a predetermined effect,
with
It is possible to perform in parallel the variable display of the first special symbol by the first special symbol variable control means and the variable display of the second special symbol by the second special symbol variable control means,
The second lottery means
The second lottery is performed so that the specific condition is satisfied with a higher probability than when the first lottery is performed,
The game state control means is
A first game state in which the expected value of the number of times of variable display of the first special symbol per unit time is larger than the expected value of the number of times of variable display of the second special symbol per unit time (for example, normal game state), and the expected value of the number of times of variable display of the second special symbol per unit time is larger than the expected value of the number of times of variable display of the first special symbol per unit time. Second gaming state (for example, high-probability short-time gaming state, high-probability non-shortening gaming state)
and can be controlled to any one of a plurality of game states including at least, and can be shifted from the second game state to the first game state,
The production control means is
In the first game state, when the second starting memory is stored by the second holding means, the pre-determining means for a specific second starting memory among the stored second starting memories Second starting result pre-rendering means (for example, sub CPU 201);
When the result of the first lottery is at least the special result, a first ready-to-win performance indicating that the special result may be derived after the variable display of the first special symbol is performed. A reach effect execution means (for example, sub CPU 201) that executes
has
The reach effect execution means is
The first ready-to-win effect is executed based on the fact that the result of the first lottery is the special result even though the special suggestion effect is executed by the second starting result preliminary effect means, and the first ready-to-win effect is executed. When the variable display of the second special symbol for the specific second start memory is started during execution of the one ready-to-win performance, the first ready-to-win performance indicates that the result of the first lottery is a loss. It is characterized by being configured to be able to execute a second ready-to-win effect different from the first ready-to-win effect after temporarily stopping in a losing mode.

According to the gaming machine (1) above, in the first gaming state, the execution of variable display of the first special symbol per unit time is higher than the expected value of the number of times of variable display of the second special symbol per unit time. Since the expected value of the number of times is larger, the game is played by shooting the game balls in a normal manner. In addition, in the second game state, the expected value of the number of times the variable display of the second special symbol is executed per unit time is higher than the expected value of the number of times the variable display of the first special symbol is executed per unit time. Since it is large, the game is played by shooting game balls in a specific manner. Then, when the second game state is shifted to the first game state, the second start memory may be stored by the second holding means. In the first game state, the expected value of the number of times the variable display of the second special symbol is executed per unit time is low, so the derivation of the result of the second lottery may be delayed and the interest may decrease. Therefore, in the first game state, when a specific second start memory from which a special result is derived is stored by the second holding means, the determination result of the specific second start memory by the preliminary determination means is It is possible to provide a gaming machine with new playability such as executing a suggested effect based on the establishment of a predetermined condition. As a result, even if the derivation of the result of the second lottery is delayed, the determination result by the preliminary determination means is suggested, so that it is possible to suppress the decrease in interest.

By the way, the special suggestion effect is performed at a stage where the variable display of the second special symbol for the specific second starting memory has not yet started. Therefore, the first ready-to-win effect is executed based on the fact that the result of the first lottery is a special result, and during the execution of this first ready-to-win effect, the variable display of the second special symbol for the specific second starting memory is performed. may be started. Therefore, the first ready-to-win effect is executed based on the fact that the result of the first lottery is a special result, and during the execution of this first ready-to-win effect, the variable display of the second special symbol for the specific second starting memory is performed. When started, the first ready-to-win effect is temporarily stopped in a fail mode, and then a second ready-to-win effect different from the first ready-to-reach effect is started. This second ready-to-reach production takes over from the first ready-to-reach production and is performed based on the fact that the result of the first lottery is a special result. Therefore, it is difficult for the player to perceive that the second ready-to-win effect is based on the fact that the result of the first lottery is a special result. As a result, it is possible to control the special game state based on the result of the first lottery instead of the result of the second lottery without giving the player a sense of discomfort.

Note that "performing the second lottery so that the specific condition is satisfied with a higher probability than when the first lottery is performed" means that when the first lottery is performed, the specific condition is Establishing (for example, winning a jackpot) is not essential. For example, in the first lottery, it is determined whether or not a specific condition has been established, but the probability of the specific condition being established is 0 (for example, a small lottery is held, but the probability of winning a small prize is 0). ), and a mode of not performing the determination itself as to whether or not a specific condition has been established (for example, a mode of not performing the small winning lottery itself).

Also, the description of "a special result can be derived" is a description that includes the possibility that the special result is not derived, but this is either the first special symbol or the second special symbol When a special result (for example, "big hit") is derived on one side, even if the other lottery result is a "special result", it is considered that there is a case where a loss is displayed. .

Moreover, it is preferable from the viewpoint of game promotion that "a predetermined condition is satisfied" is, for example, a condition that can be satisfied as a result of the player playing a game. For example, when a game ball wins, it may be established based on winning a prize ball or a general prize winning slot to which prize ball data is given, or based on the fact that a predetermined number or more of gaming balls have won a prize in the general winning slot It may be established based on the winning of the game ball to the first start port.

(2) In the gaming machine of (1) above,
The ready-to-reach effect execution means is
Although the second ready-to-win effect is performed based on the fact that the result of the first lottery is the special result, the second ready-to-win effect is performed based on the result of the second lottery being the special result. It is characterized by a production that makes it look as if it is performed based on the fact that

According to the gaming machine of (2) above, the second ready-to-win effect is a effect that appears to be performed based on the fact that the result of the second lottery is a special result. It is possible to control to a special game state based on the result of the first lottery without giving a sense of discomfort.

(3) In the gaming machine described in (1) or (2) above,
The second starting result pre-rendering means
The predetermined condition is that the game ball shot in the normal mode is received in a predetermined receiving port different from the first starting port, and the pre-determining means for the second starting memory. It is characterized by being configured to be able to execute an effect suggesting the determination result by

According to the gaming machine of (3) above, the predetermined condition is established based on the acceptance of the game ball into the predetermined receiving port different from the first starting port for the game ball fired in the normal mode, and the second An effect suggesting the determination result by the preliminary determination means regarding the starting memory is executed. Therefore, even if the second game state in which the game ball is shot in a specific mode shifts to the first game state in which the game ball is shot in a normal mode, it is possible to promote the game.

It should be noted that the above predetermined condition may be established based on the fact that one game ball that has been shot in a normal manner is received in a predetermined receiving port, or that the game ball has been shot in a normal manner. It may be established based on the fact that a plurality of game balls are received in a predetermined receiving port. Furthermore, a predetermined condition may be established based on the establishment of a weighting condition in addition to the above conditions.

(1) The game machine of Supplementary Note 63-13 is
A gaming machine capable of awarding prize balls or prize ball data as a result of a game performed by shooting game balls toward a game area,
A first start port (for example, the first start port 5442 in FIG. 254) capable of accepting a game ball fired in a normal manner (for example, left-handed) towards the game area;
A first holding means (for example, main CPU 101) capable of storing up to a predetermined number (for example, 4) of first start memories based on the acceptance of the game ball in the first start port;
a first lottery means (e.g., main CPU 101) that performs a first lottery (e.g., first special lottery) for the first start memory based on the establishment of a first start condition;
First special symbol variable control means (for example, main CPU 101) for performing variable display of the first special symbol and deriving the result of the first lottery;
A second start port (for example, the second start port 440 in FIG. 254) capable of accepting a game ball launched in a specific manner (for example, hitting to the right) toward the game area;
Second holding means (for example, main CPU 101) capable of storing up to a predetermined number (for example, four) of second start memories based on the acceptance of the game ball in the second start port;
a second lottery means (for example, the main CPU 101) that performs a second lottery (for example, a second special lottery) for the second start memory based on the establishment of the second start condition;
Second special symbol variable control means (for example, main CPU 101) for performing variable display of the second special symbol and deriving the result of the second lottery;
Special game execution means (for example, main CPU 101);
When a specific condition is satisfied even if the special result is not derived (for example, when the result of the lottery is a small win), a predetermined movable member (for example, a small win shutter 6100) is operated. a specific game execution means (for example, main CPU 101) for executing a specific game (for example, a small winning game) in which, when a game ball is accepted, it is easy to accept it into a prize winning opening to which a prize ball or prize ball data is given; ,
game state control means (for example, main CPU 101) capable of controlling one of a plurality of game states;
Effect control means (for example, sub CPU 201) capable of executing a predetermined effect,
with
It is possible to perform in parallel the variable display of the first special symbol by the first special symbol variable control means and the variable display of the second special symbol by the second special symbol variable control means,
The second lottery means
The second lottery is performed so that the specific condition is satisfied with a higher probability than when the first lottery is performed,
The game state control means is
A first game state in which the expected value of the number of times of variable display of the first special symbol per unit time is larger than the expected value of the number of times of variable display of the second special symbol per unit time (for example, normal game state), and the expected value of the number of times of variable display of the second special symbol per unit time is larger than the expected value of the number of times of variable display of the first special symbol per unit time. Second gaming state (for example, high-probability short-time gaming state, high-probability non-shortening gaming state)
and can be controlled to any one of a plurality of game states including at least, and can be shifted from the second game state to the first game state,
The production control means is
When being controlled to the first game state, an effect image based on the result of the first lottery is displayed in a predetermined display area,
In the first game state, when the result of the second lottery is the special result, in a manner that does not hinder the visual recognition of the effect image based on the result of the first lottery displayed in the predetermined display area, Suggestive effect means (for example, sub CPU 201) that performs a suggestive effect to suggest that the result of the second lottery is the special result in a manner that the player can grasp,
The suggestion directing means includes:
When the variable display of the first special symbol that is performed when the variable display of the second special symbol is started is based on the special result, non-execution processing is performed so that the suggestive performance is not always performed. Characterized by doing

According to the gaming machine (1) above, in the first game state, the effect image based on the result of the first lottery is displayed in the predetermined display area. However, it is extremely difficult for the player to perceive it. Therefore, in the first game state, when the result of the second lottery is a special result, the fact that the result of the second lottery is a special result is provided in a manner that does not hinder the visual recognition of the effect image based on the result of the first lottery. is performed in a manner that the player can comprehend. Thereby, the player can be informed that the result of the second lottery is a special result. However, when the variable display of the second special symbol is started, the variable display of the first special symbol is performed, and the variable display of the first special symbol may be the variable display based on the special result. In such a case, the sub CPU 201 performs a process of not executing the suggestive effect so that the suggestive effect is not always performed. Become. Thus, the result of the first lottery is based on the fact that the result of the first lottery is a special result without the player noticing that there is a possibility that the variable display of the second special symbol is performed and the special result is derived. It is possible to control to a special game state by pressing.

Note that "performing the second lottery so that the specific condition is satisfied with a higher probability than when the first lottery is performed" means that when the first lottery is performed, the specific condition is Establishing (for example, winning a jackpot) is not essential. For example, in the first lottery, it is determined whether or not a specific condition has been established, but the probability of the specific condition being established is 0 (for example, a small lottery is held, but the probability of winning a small prize is 0). ), and a mode of not performing the determination itself as to whether or not a specific condition has been established (for example, a mode of not performing the small winning lottery itself).

(1) The game machine of Supplementary Note 63-14 is
A gaming machine capable of awarding prize balls or prize ball data as a result of a game performed by shooting game balls toward a game area,
A first start port (for example, the first start port 5442 in FIG. 254) capable of accepting a game ball fired in a normal manner (for example, left-handed) towards the game area;
A first holding means (for example, main CPU 101) capable of storing up to a predetermined number (for example, 4) of first start memories based on the acceptance of the game ball in the first start port;
a first lottery means (e.g., main CPU 101) that performs a first lottery (e.g., first special lottery) for the first start memory based on the establishment of a first start condition;
First special symbol variable control means (for example, main CPU 101) for performing variable display of the first special symbol and deriving the result of the first lottery;
A second start port (for example, the second start port 440 in FIG. 254) capable of accepting a game ball launched in a specific manner (for example, hitting to the right) toward the game area;
Second holding means (for example, main CPU 101) capable of storing up to a predetermined number (for example, four) of second start memories based on the acceptance of the game ball in the second start port;
a second lottery means (for example, the main CPU 101) that performs a second lottery (for example, a second special lottery) for the second start memory based on the establishment of the second start condition;
Second special symbol variable control means (for example, main CPU 101) for performing variable display of the second special symbol and deriving the result of the second lottery;
Special game execution means (for example, main CPU 101);
When a specific condition is satisfied even if the special result is not derived (for example, when the result of the lottery is a small win), a predetermined movable member (for example, a small win shutter 6100) is operated. a specific game execution means (for example, main CPU 101) for executing a specific game (for example, a small winning game) in which, when a game ball is accepted, it is easy to accept it into a prize winning opening to which a prize ball or prize ball data is given; ,
game state control means (for example, main CPU 101) capable of controlling one of a plurality of game states;
Effect control means (for example, sub CPU 201) capable of executing a predetermined effect,
with
It is possible to perform in parallel the variable display of the first special symbol by the first special symbol variable control means and the variable display of the second special symbol by the second special symbol variable control means,
The second lottery means
The second lottery is performed so that the specific condition is satisfied with a higher probability than when the first lottery is performed,
The game state control means is
A first game state in which the expected value of the number of times of variable display of the first special symbol per unit time is larger than the expected value of the number of times of variable display of the second special symbol per unit time (for example, normal game state), and the expected value of the number of times of variable display of the second special symbol per unit time is larger than the expected value of the number of times of variable display of the first special symbol per unit time. Second gaming state (for example, high-probability short-time gaming state, high-probability non-shortening gaming state)
and can be controlled to any one of a plurality of game states including at least, and can be shifted from the second game state to the first game state,
The production control means is
In the first game state, when the second special symbol is variably displayed and the specific condition is established, an effect suggesting the execution timing of the specific game executed based on the establishment of the specific condition. is provided with timing suggestion effect execution means that is executed based on the establishment of a predetermined condition.

According to the gaming machine (1) above, in the first gaming state, the execution of variable display of the first special symbol per unit time is higher than the expected value of the number of times of variable display of the second special symbol per unit time. Since the expected value of the number of times is larger, the game is played by shooting the game balls in a normal manner. In addition, in the second game state, the expected value of the number of times the variable display of the second special symbol is executed per unit time is higher than the expected value of the number of times the variable display of the first special symbol is executed per unit time. Since it is large, the game is played by shooting game balls in a specific manner. Then, when the second game state is shifted to the first game state, it is possible that the variable display of the second special symbol is being executed. In the first game state, since the expected value of the number of execution times of the variable display of the second special symbol per unit time is low, the variable display of the second special symbol being executed does not end easily, resulting in the result of the second lottery. There is a risk that the derivation of the will be delayed and interest will decrease. In particular, if a result indicating that a specific condition has been established is derived after the derivation of the result of the second lottery is delayed, interest in the game is remarkably reduced. Therefore, in the first game state, when the variable display of the second special symbol is performed and a specific condition is established, an effect that suggests the execution timing of the specific game that is executed based on the establishment of the specific condition, It is possible to provide a gaming machine with new playability such as execution based on the establishment of a predetermined condition. As a result, even if the result indicating that the specific condition is satisfied is derived after the derivation of the result of the second lottery is delayed, the execution timing of the specific game is suggested, so that the decline in interest can be suppressed. It becomes possible.

Note that "performing the second lottery so that the specific condition is satisfied with a higher probability than when the first lottery is performed" means that when the first lottery is performed, the specific condition is Establishing (for example, winning a jackpot) is not essential. For example, in the first lottery, it is determined whether or not a specific condition has been established, but the probability of the specific condition being established is 0 (for example, a small lottery is held, but the probability of winning a small prize is 0). ), and a mode of not performing the determination itself as to whether or not a specific condition has been established (for example, a mode of not performing the small winning lottery itself).

Moreover, it is preferable from the viewpoint of game promotion that "a predetermined condition is satisfied" is, for example, a condition that can be satisfied as a result of the player playing a game. For example, when a game ball wins, it may be established based on winning a prize ball or a general prize winning slot to which prize ball data is given, or based on the fact that a predetermined number or more of gaming balls have won a prize in the general winning slot It may be established based on the winning of the game ball to the first start port.

(2) In the gaming machine described in (1) above,
Prior determination means (e.g., main CPU 101) for determining whether or not the specific condition can be satisfied prior to the second lottery for at least the second starting memory stored in the second holding means. ,
The timing suggestion effect executing means includes:
When the second start memory is stored by the second holding means and the prior determination means for the second start memory determines that the specific condition can be satisfied, the specific condition is determined. The execution timing of the specific game to be executed based on the establishment of is suggested.

According to the gaming machine of (2) above, when the game state is shifted from the first game state to the second game state, not only is the variable display of the second special symbol being executed, but also the second special symbol is displayed by the second holding means. It is possible that a starting memory is stored. In the first game state, the expected value of the number of times the variable display of the second special symbol is executed per unit time is low, so the derivation of the result of the second lottery may be delayed and the interest may decrease. In particular, if the result of the second lottery is delayed and the result indicating that a specific condition has been established is derived, the interest in the game is significantly reduced. Therefore, in the first game state, when the second starting memory is stored by the second holding means and the pre-determining means for the second starting memory determines that a specific condition can be established, this By suggesting the execution timing of the specific game to be executed based on the establishment of the specific condition, it is possible to suppress the decrease in interest caused by the delay in deriving the result of the second lottery.

In addition, the description of "a specific condition can be established" is a description that includes the possibility that a specific condition is not established, but this is either the first special symbol or the second special symbol. Considering that when a special result (for example, "big hit") is derived on one side, a loss may be displayed even if the other lottery result is a "specific result". be.

(3) In the gaming machine described in (1) or (2) above,
The timing suggestion effect executing means includes:
As the predetermined condition, the variable display of the second special symbol is performed based on that the game ball fired in the normal mode is received in a predetermined receiving port different from the first starting port. It is characterized in that an effect suggesting execution timing of the specific game to be executed when the specific condition is established can be executed.

According to the gaming machine of (3) above, the predetermined condition is established based on the acceptance of the game ball into the predetermined receiving port different from the first starting port for the game ball fired in the normal mode, and the second An effect is executed to suggest execution timing of a specific game to be executed when a special symbol is variably displayed and a specific condition is established. Therefore, even if the second game state in which the game ball is shot in a specific mode shifts to the first game state in which the game ball is shot in a normal mode, the game ball can be specified based on the acceptance of the game ball into the predetermined receiving port. Since the game execution timing is suggested, it is possible to prompt promotion of the game.

It should be noted that the above predetermined condition may be established based on the fact that one game ball that has been shot in a normal manner is received in a predetermined receiving port, or that the game ball has been shot in a normal manner. It may be established based on the fact that a plurality of game balls are received in a predetermined receiving port. Furthermore, a predetermined condition may be established based on the establishment of a weighting condition in addition to the above conditions.

(1) The game machine of Supplementary Note 63-15 is
A gaming machine capable of awarding prize balls or prize ball data as a result of a game performed by shooting game balls toward a game area,
A first start port (for example, the first start port 5442 in FIG. 254) and a second start port (for example, the second start port 440 in FIG. 254) that can accept the game ball fired toward the game area,
A first start memory is stored up to a predetermined number (for example, four) based on the game ball being received in the first start port, and a second start memory is stored based on the game ball being received in the second start port. 2 holding means (for example, main CPU 101) for storing up to a predetermined number (for example, 4) of starting memories;
A first lottery (e.g., a first special lottery) is conducted for the first starting memory based on the satisfaction of the first starting condition, and a selection for the second starting memory is performed based on the satisfaction of the second starting condition. A lottery means (for example, the main CPU 101) that performs a second lottery (for example, a second special lottery);
Special symbol variable control means (for example, main CPU 101) that variably displays the first special symbol based on the result of the first lottery and variably displays the second special symbol based on the result of the second lottery;
special game execution means (for example, main CPU 101) for executing a special game advantageous to the player when the variable display of the first special symbol or the second special symbol is performed and a special result is derived;
with
The lottery means
Even if the variable display of the first special symbol or the second special symbol is performed, as long as the first starting condition or the second starting condition is satisfied, the special symbol corresponding to the established starting condition normal lottery means (for example, the main CPU 101) that performs lottery;
specific lottery means (e.g., main CPU 101) that performs both the first lottery and the second lottery in a predetermined order when both the first start condition and the second start condition are satisfied;
has
The specific lottery means is
When both the first lottery and the second lottery are conducted in a predetermined order, but the result of either one of the first lottery or the second lottery that was conducted first is the special result. , a non-winning process is executed so that another lottery result does not result in the special result.

According to the gaming machine of (1) above, both the first special lottery and the second special lottery are performed in a predetermined order. It is possible to perform variable display of patterns in parallel. Moreover, in order to prevent the results of both the first lottery and the second lottery from becoming special results at the same time, when the result of one of the lotteries becomes a special result, the other lottery is executed as non-winning processing. By doing so, it is possible to provide a new playability such that it is possible to prevent both the first lottery and the second lottery from giving a special result at the same time.

(2) In the gaming machine described in (1) above,
A normal variable display pattern in which the expected value of the number of times of variable display of the first special symbol per unit time is relatively large is relative to the expected value of the number of times of variable display of the first special symbol per unit time. storage means (for example, main ROM 102) for storing at least a relatively small long-time variable display pattern;
variable display pattern determination means (for example, main CPU 101) for determining one of the plurality of variable display patterns as a variable display pattern to be used for variable display of the first special symbol;
game state control means (for example, main CPU 101) for controlling one of a plurality of game states;
further comprising
The game state control means is
The expected value of the number of times the variable display of the second special symbol is executed per unit time is smaller than the expected value of the number of times the variable display of the first special symbol is executed per unit time, and the ball is fired per unit time. a first game state (for example, a normal game state) in which the expected value of the number of prize balls or the number of prize ball data for the number is smaller than 1;
The expected value of the number of times the variable display of the second special symbol is executed per unit time is greater than the expected value of the number of times the variable display of the first special symbol is executed per unit time, and the ball is fired per unit time. A second game state (for example, a high probability non-time-saving game state) in which the expected value of the number of prize balls or the number of prize ball data for the number is larger than the first game state;
It is controllable to one of a plurality of game states including
The variable display pattern determining means is
The variable display pattern used for variable display of the first special symbol can be determined to be the normal variable display pattern at least in the first game state, and the result of the first lottery in the second game state is the The long-time variable display pattern can be determined based on the special result.

According to the gaming machine of (2) above, when the result of the first lottery in the second game state is a special result, the variable display of the first special symbol is performed in a long-time variable display pattern. Moreover, if the result of the first lottery is a special result, the result of the second lottery will not be a special result, so non-winning processing is executed, so the variable display of the first special symbol is performed in a variable display pattern for a long time. A new game feature can be provided such that the expected value of the number of prize balls or the number of prize ball data with respect to the number of shot balls per unit time is guaranteed while the game is being played in the first game state.

(3) In the gaming machine described in (2) above,
The storage means
As the long-time variable display pattern, a plurality of long-time variable display patterns having different expected values of the number of execution times of variable display of the first special symbol per unit time are stored,
The variable display pattern determining means
The plurality of long-time variable display patterns are variable display patterns provided for variable display of the first special symbols determined based on the result of the first lottery in the second gaming state being the special result. It is characterized in that it is configured to determine one of

According to the gaming machine of (3) above, when the result of the first lottery in the second game state is a special result, the variable display of the first special symbol is the expected value of the number of times variable display is performed per unit time. is determined to be one of a plurality of different long-time variable display patterns, the period during which the game in the first game state is guaranteed differs depending on which one of the plurality of long-time variable display patterns is determined. As a result, it is possible to increase the interest in the game.

(1) The game machine of Supplementary Note 63-16 is
A gaming machine capable of awarding prize balls or prize ball data as a result of a game performed by shooting game balls toward a game area,
A first start port (for example, the first start port 5442 in FIG. 254) and a second start port (for example, the second start port 440 in FIG. 254) that can accept the game ball fired toward the game area,
A first start memory is stored up to a predetermined number (for example, four) based on the game ball being received in the first start port, and a second start memory is stored based on the game ball being received in the second start port. holding means (for example, main CPU 101) for storing up to a predetermined number (for example, 4) of 2 start memories;
A first lottery (e.g., a first special lottery) is conducted for the first starting memory based on the satisfaction of the first starting condition, and a selection for the second starting memory is performed based on the satisfaction of the second starting condition. A lottery means (for example, the main CPU 101) that performs a second lottery (for example, a second special lottery);
Special symbol variable control means (for example, main CPU 101) that variably displays the first special symbol based on the result of the first lottery and variably displays the second special symbol based on the result of the second lottery;
special game execution means (for example, main CPU 101) for executing a special game advantageous to the player when the variable display of the first special symbol or the second special symbol is performed and a special result is derived;
When a specific condition is established (for example, winning a small prize) even if the special result is not derived, a specific game (for example, a small prize game) having a lower profit degree than when the special game is executed is performed. Specific game execution means to be executed (for example, main CPU 101);
with
The lottery means
Even if the variable display of the first special symbol or the second special symbol is performed, as long as the first starting condition or the second starting condition is satisfied, the special symbol corresponding to the established starting condition normal lottery means (for example, the main CPU 101) that performs lottery;
specific lottery means (e.g., main CPU 101) that performs both the first lottery and the second lottery in a predetermined order when both the first start condition and the second start condition are satisfied;
has
The specific lottery means is
When both the first lottery and the second lottery are conducted in a predetermined order, but the result of either one of the first lottery or the second lottery that was conducted first is the special result. , execute non-winning processing so that the result of another lottery does not become the special result,
When the specific condition is satisfied in any one of the first lottery and the second lottery that is performed earlier, the result of the other lottery is the above-mentioned special lottery without executing the non-winning process. It is characterized by drawing lots so that the results can be obtained.

According to the gaming machine of (1) above, both the first special lottery and the second special lottery are performed in a predetermined order. It is possible to perform variable display of patterns in parallel. Moreover, in order to prevent the results of both the first lottery and the second lottery from becoming special results at the same time, when the result of one of the lotteries becomes a special result, the other lottery is executed as non-winning processing. By doing so, it is possible to provide a new playability such that it is possible to prevent both the first lottery and the second lottery from giving a special result at the same time.

(2) In the gaming machine described in (1) above,
A normal variable display pattern in which the expected value of the number of times of variable display of the first special symbol per unit time is relatively large is relative to the expected value of the number of times of variable display of the first special symbol per unit time. storage means (for example, main ROM 102) for storing at least a relatively small long-time variable display pattern;
variable display pattern determination means (for example, main CPU 101) for determining one of the plurality of variable display patterns as a variable display pattern to be used for variable display of the first special symbol;
game state control means (for example, main CPU 101) for controlling one of a plurality of game states;
further comprising
The game state control means is
The expected value of the number of times the variable display of the second special symbol is executed per unit time is smaller than the expected value of the number of times the variable display of the first special symbol is executed per unit time, and the ball is fired per unit time. a first game state (for example, a normal game state) in which the expected value of the number of prize balls or the number of prize ball data for the number is smaller than 1;
The expected value of the number of times the variable display of the second special symbol is executed per unit time is greater than the expected value of the number of times the variable display of the first special symbol is executed per unit time, and the ball is fired per unit time. A second game state (for example, a high probability non-time-saving game state) in which the expected value of the number of prize balls or the number of prize ball data for the number is larger than the first game state;
It is controllable to one of a plurality of game states including
The variable display pattern determining means
The variable display pattern used for variable display of the first special symbol can be determined to be the normal variable display pattern at least in the first gaming state, and the result of the first lottery in the second gaming state is the The long-time variable display pattern can be determined based on the special result.

According to the gaming machine of (2) above, when the result of the first lottery in the second game state is a special result, the variable display of the first special symbol is performed in a long-time variable display pattern. Moreover, if the result of the first lottery is a special result, the result of the second lottery will not be a special result, so non-winning processing is executed, so the variable display of the first special symbol is performed in a variable display pattern for a long time. A new game feature can be provided such that the expected value of the number of prize balls or the number of prize ball data with respect to the number of shot balls per unit time is guaranteed while the game is being played in the first game state.

(3) In the gaming machine described in (2) above,
The storage means
As the long-time variable display pattern, a plurality of long-time variable display patterns having different expected values of the number of execution times of variable display of the first special symbol per unit time are stored,
The variable display pattern determining means is
The plurality of long-time variable display patterns are variable display patterns provided for variable display of the first special symbols determined based on the result of the first lottery in the second gaming state being the special result. It is characterized in that it is configured to determine one of

According to the gaming machine of (3) above, when the result of the first lottery in the second game state is a special result, the variable display of the first special symbol is the expected value of the number of times variable display is performed per unit time. is determined to be one of a plurality of different long-time variable display patterns, the period during which the game in the first game state is guaranteed differs depending on which one of the plurality of long-time variable display patterns is determined. As a result, it is possible to increase the interest in the game.

(1) The game machine of Supplementary Note 63-17 is
A first start port (for example, the first start port 5442 in FIG. 270) capable of accepting a game ball launched in a predetermined manner (for example, left-handed) toward the game area;
A first lottery means (for example, the main CPU 101) that performs a first lottery based on the acceptance of the game ball into the first starting port;
First special symbol variable control means (e.g., main CPU 101) for performing variable display of the first special symbol based on the result of the first lottery means and deriving the result of the first lottery (e.g., first special lottery). When,
A second start port (for example, the second start port 4401 in FIG. 270) capable of accepting the game ball launched in the predetermined manner (for example, left-handed hitting) toward the game area;
A second lottery means (for example, main CPU 101) that performs a second lottery (for example, a second special lottery) based on the acceptance of the game ball into the second starting port;
Second special symbol variable control means (for example, main CPU 101) for performing variable display of the second special symbol and deriving the result of the second lottery;
Storage means (for example, main ROM 102) for storing a plurality of tables prepared with variable display patterns used for variable display of the first special symbol or the second special symbol;
Variable display pattern determination means for determining the variable display pattern to be used for variable display of the first special symbol or the second special symbol using one of the plurality of tables (for example, variation in FIG. 271 a main CPU 101) that executes a time determination table setting process;
Special game executing means (for example, , main CPU 101),
Even if the special result is not derived, when a specific condition is satisfied (for example, when the result of the lottery is a small hit), a predetermined movable member (for example, a small win shutter 6100 in FIG. 270) to execute a specific game (for example, a small winning game) that facilitates acceptance into a winning opening (for example, a small winning winning opening 5400) to which a winning ball or winning ball data is given when a game ball is accepted. Specific game execution means (for example, main CPU 101) to
with
The second lottery means
The second lottery is performed so that the specific condition is satisfied with a higher probability than when the first lottery is performed,
The storage means
As a table used for determining the variable display pattern provided for variable display of the second special symbol,
A first table prepared with a plurality of variable display patterns with a relatively small expected value of the number of executions of the variable display of the second special symbol per unit time (for example, the variable time of the special symbol for low start in FIG. 258 determination table), and a second table prepared with a plurality of variable display patterns having a relatively large expected value for the number of executions of the variable display of the second special symbol per unit time (for example, a high start high start table in FIG. 259 Special pattern fluctuation time determination table)
remembers at least
The variable display pattern determining means
The variable display pattern used for variable display of the second special symbol is always determined using the first table, and the first special symbol is variable based on the acceptance of the game ball into the first starting port. It has a second special symbol variable display pattern determination means that can be determined using the second table instead of the first table based on the fact that the display is performed and the specific condition is established. .

According to the gaming machine of (1) above, the variable display pattern provided for the variable display of the second special symbol is based on the establishment of the specific condition based on the acceptance of the game ball into the first start port. It is possible to provide a gaming machine with new playability such as changing from the first table to the second table. Moreover, it is also possible to suppress a decrease in game interest that may occur when, for example, a specific game is executed but a game ball cannot be made to enter the winning hole.

Note that "performing the second lottery so that the specific condition is satisfied with a higher probability than when the first lottery is performed" means that when the first lottery is performed, the specific condition is Establishing (for example, winning a jackpot) is not essential. For example, in the first lottery, it is determined whether or not a specific condition has been established, but the probability of the specific condition being established is 0 (for example, a small lottery is held, but the probability of winning a small prize is 0). ), and a mode of not performing the determination itself as to whether or not a specific condition has been established (for example, a mode of not performing the small winning lottery itself).

(1) The game machine of Supplementary Note 63-18 is
A gaming machine capable of awarding prize balls or prize ball data as a result of a game performed by shooting game balls toward a game area,
A first starting port (for example, the first starting port 5442 in FIG. 268) capable of receiving a game ball launched toward the game area;
A first lottery means (for example, the main CPU 101) that performs a first lottery based on the acceptance of the game ball into the first starting port;
First special symbol variable control means (for example, main CPU 101) for performing variable display of the first special symbol and deriving the result of the first lottery;
A second starting port (for example, the second starting port 4401 in FIG. 268) capable of accepting the game ball launched toward the game area;
Second lottery means (for example, main CPU 101) that performs a second lottery based on acceptance of game balls into the second starting port;
Second special symbol variable control means (for example, main CPU 101) for performing variable display of the second special symbol and deriving the result of the second lottery;
special game execution means (for example, main CPU 101) for executing a special game advantageous to the player when the variable display of the first special symbol or the second special symbol is performed and a special result is derived;
Even if the special result is not derived, when a specific condition is established (for example, when the lottery result is a small hit), a predetermined movable member (for example, a small win shutter 6100 in FIG. 268) is operated to facilitate acceptance into a specific winning opening (for example, a small winning winning opening 5400 in FIG. 268) to which a winning ball or winning ball data is given when a game ball is accepted (for example, a specific game (for example, a small winning a specific game executing means (for example, the main CPU 101) that executes a game);
a game state control means capable of controlling one of a plurality of game states;
with
The game state control means is
A normal game state (for example, a "normal game state") in which the probability of deriving the special result is relatively low;
An advantageous gaming state in which the probability of deriving the special result is relatively high and the expected value of the number of prize balls or the number of prize ball data for the number of shot balls per unit time is less than 1 (for example, "high-probability short-time gaming state" )When,
The derivation probability of the special result is relatively high, and the execution of the specific game increases the frequency of acceptance of game balls into the specific winning hole, so that the number of prize balls or the number of prize balls for the number of shot balls per unit time The expected value of the number of data is a specific game state (for example, "high probability non-time-saving game state") larger than any of the normal game state and the advantageous game state,
Controllable to any one of a plurality of game states including at least
When the variable display of special symbols is performed a specified number of times (for example, the determined number of time reductions) in the advantageous game state, state transition control means (for example, It is characterized by having a main CPU 101).

According to the gaming machine of (1) above, when the variable display of the special symbols is performed a specified number of times in the advantageous game state, the expected value of the number of prize balls or the number of prize ball data with respect to the number of shot balls per unit time is in the normal game state. And it shifts to a specific game state that is greater than any of the advantageous game states. Therefore, it is possible to provide a game machine with new playability such that a decline in interest can be suppressed by shifting to a specific game state even if no special result is derived in the advantageous game state.

(2) In the gaming machine described in (1) above,
By determining the specified number of times to be one of a plurality of specified times (for example, 24 times, 30 times, 36 times, 42 times, 48 times and 100 times), the transition from the advantageous game state to the specific game state a transition timing determination means (for example, the main CPU 101) capable of changing the transition timing each time;
Effect control means (for example, sub CPU 201) that performs a predetermined effect without specifying the specified number of times determined by the transition timing determination means;
is further provided.

According to the gaming machine of (2) above, it is possible to make it difficult or impossible for the player to grasp the transition timing from the advantageous game state to the specific advantageous game state, thereby further increasing interest. becomes possible.

(3) In the gaming machine described in (1) or (2) above,
variable display pattern determination means (for example, main CPU 101) for determining a variable display pattern to be used for variable display of at least the second special symbol;
The expected value of the number of executions of the variable display of the second special symbol per unit time is a first table prepared with a plurality of relatively small variable display patterns (for example, the variation of the special symbol for low start in FIG. 258 time (variable display time) determination table) and a second table prepared with a plurality of relatively large variable display patterns (for example, a special pattern variable time (variable display time) determination table for high start in FIG. 259). a storage means (for example, main ROM 102) that stores at least
further comprising
The variable display pattern determining means
The variable display pattern used for variable display of the second special symbol is determined with reference to the first table at least in the advantageous game state, and the advantageous game state is shifted to the specific game state. Based on, it is configured to refer to the second table instead of the first table for determination,
The second lottery means
It is characterized in that the second lottery is performed so that the specific condition is met with a higher probability than when the first lottery is performed.

According to the gaming machine of (3) above, based on the transition from the advantageous gaming state to the specific gaming state, the variable display pattern provided for variable display of the second special symbol is changed to the second special symbol per unit time. A variable display pattern having a relatively large expected value of the execution frequency of variable display of patterns is determined, and a specific condition is established in the second lottery with a higher probability than when the first lottery is performed. Therefore, the specific game is executed with high frequency. In this way, it is possible to realize a specific game state in which the expected value of the number of prize balls or the number of prize ball data with respect to the number of shot balls per unit time is larger than both the normal game state and the advantageous game state.

(1) The game machine of Supplementary Note 63-19 is
a special starting port that facilitates or enables reception of game balls when a predetermined movable member is actuated;
A normal starting area (for example, the passing gate 49 in FIG. 274) that can accept the game ball;
A normal lottery means (for example, a main CPU 101) capable of performing a normal lottery in such a manner that all or most of the lottery is a normal win based on the game ball passing through the normal starting area;
Movable control means (for example, main CPU 101) for activating the predetermined movable member to facilitate or enable reception of the game ball into the special starting port based on the fact that the result of the ordinary lottery is the ordinary winning. )When,
a holding means (for example, main CPU 101) capable of storing up to a predetermined number (for example, 4) of start memories based on the acceptance of a game ball in the special start port;
special lottery means (for example, the main CPU 101) that performs a special lottery for the start memory based on the establishment of the start condition;
When the variable display of special symbols is performed and a special result (for example, a big win) is derived, a special game (for example, a special game ( For example, a special game executing means (for example, the main CPU 101) that executes a jackpot game,
Based on the fact that the result of the special lottery is a specific result (for example, a small win) that is all or a general result when the result of the special lottery is not the special result, a specific movable member (for example, a shutter for a small win 6100) specific game execution means (for example, main CPU 101 )When,
The game state after the special game is finished is an advantageous game state ( For example, a game state control means (for example, the main CPU 101) that can be controlled in a time saving state);
At least, when a game ball is received in the special winning opening and when a game ball is received in the specific winning opening, a prize giving means capable of giving a prize ball or prize ball data (for example, from the main CPU 101 A payout / launch control circuit that pays out prize balls according to the command of
with
At least during execution of the special game, although the start memory is stored by the holding means based on the acceptance of the game ball into the special start port, the start condition is not satisfied,
The normal starting region is
During the execution of the special game, the passage of the game ball to the normal start area becomes difficult or impossible by receiving the game ball in the special winning hole, and during the execution of the special game Even if there is not, when the specific movable member is in the operating state, the game ball is received in the specific winning hole, thereby making it difficult or impossible for the game ball to pass through the normal starting area. It is characterized by

According to the gaming machine of (1) above, it is difficult or impossible for the game ball to pass through the normal starting area during execution of the special game, and even if the special game is not being executed, the specific movable member is in an operating state, it is difficult or impossible for the game ball to pass through the normal starting area. Therefore, until the special lottery for the starting memory stored in the holding means is executed when the special game is finished, the specific movable member is in an approximately operating state, and the normal starting region is entered during execution of the specific game. When the special game is executed by making it difficult or impossible for the game balls to pass through, the prize balls or prize ball data given during the execution of the special game and the start memory number stored in the holding means It is possible to give both the prize balls or the prize ball data given by the execution of the specified game for the number of prize balls or the prize ball data given when the special game is executed once. You can increase the expected value of the number. As a result, it is possible to provide a gaming machine with new playability.

(2) In the gaming machine described in (1) above,
Further comprising interval control means (for example, main CPU 101) for controlling to an interval state after the special game is finished and before being controlled to the advantageous game state,
The starting condition is
Even if the starting memory is stored in the holding means when the special game ends, it is configured so as not to be established as long as the interval state is controlled,
The specific winning opening is provided downstream of the special winning opening,
The ball path of the game ball between the special winning hole and the specific winning hole is
A game ball that has not been accepted into the special winning hole is longer than the total time of the time controlled to the interval state and the time until the specific movable member is activated by the establishment of the starting condition. It is characterized in that it is configured so that it takes longer to reach the mouth.

According to the game machine of (2) above, the special prize winning opening is not received longer than the total time of the interval control time and the time until the specific movable member is activated due to the establishment of the starting condition. The time required for the game ball to reach the specific winning hole is longer. Therefore, when the game ball that did not enter the special winning hole because it reaches the special winning hole immediately after the special game ends, the specific movable member is activated when the game ball reaches the specific winning hole. While the game ball is accepted, it becomes difficult or impossible for the game ball to pass through the normal starting area. As a result, when the special game is finished, the game ball is surely received in the specific winning opening and the game ball wins in the specific winning opening during the execution of the specific game corresponding to the starting memory number stored in the holding means. It is possible to guarantee the opportunity of awarding prize balls or prize ball data based on.

(1) The game machine of Supplementary Note 63-20 is
A gaming machine capable of awarding prize balls or prize ball data as a result of a game performed by shooting game balls toward a game area,
A first start port (for example, the first start port 5443 in FIG. 275) that makes it easy or possible to receive a game ball launched in a predetermined manner (for example, hitting to the right) toward the game area;
A first special lottery means (for example, the main CPU 101) capable of performing a first special lottery based on the acceptance of the game ball into the first start port;
First special symbol variable control means (for example, main CPU 101) capable of performing variable display of the first special symbol and deriving the result of the first special lottery;
A second starting port (for example, the second starting port 440 in FIG. 275) capable of receiving a game ball that is launched in the predetermined manner toward the game area and is not received by the first starting port;
Second special lottery means (for example, main CPU 101) capable of performing a second special lottery based on acceptance of game balls into the second starting port;
Second special symbol variable control means (for example, main CPU 101) capable of performing variable display of the second special symbol and deriving the result of the second special lottery;
special game state control means (for example, main CPU 101) for controlling a special game state advantageous to the player when the variable display of the first special symbol or the second special symbol is performed and a special result is derived; ,
Even if the special result is not derived, when a specific condition is established (for example, when the result of the lottery is a small hit), a predetermined movable member (for example, a small win shutter 6100 in FIG. 275) is operated to facilitate acceptance into a specific winning opening (for example, a small winning winning opening 5400 in FIG. 275) to which a winning ball or winning ball data is given when a game ball is accepted (for example, a specific game (for example, a small winning a specific game executing means (for example, the main CPU 101) that executes a game);
game state control means (for example, main CPU 101) capable of controlling one of a plurality of game states;
with
The game state control means is
A first game state in which the expected value of the number of times of variable display of the first special symbol per unit time is larger than the expected value of the number of times of variable display of the second special symbol per unit time (for example, normal gaming state),
A second game state (for example, a high-accuracy short-time gaming state) in which acceptance of game balls to the first start port is easier than the first game state, and acceptance of game balls to the first start port is described above. It becomes more difficult than the second game state, and a large amount of game balls can flow down toward the specific winning port compared to the second game state, and the number of executions of variable display of the second special symbol per unit time. The expected value of is greater than the expected value of the number of executions of the variable display of the first special symbol per unit time in the first gaming state (for example, high probability non-time-saving gaming state),
Controllable to any one of a plurality of game states including at least
State transition control means capable of executing control to shift from the second game state to the third game state when the variable display of special symbols is performed a specified number of times (for example, the determined number of times of reduced time) in the second game state. (for example, main CPU 101),
The second special symbol variable control means is
It is possible to variably display the second special symbol even while the first special symbol is being variably displayed, and when the special result is derived by performing the variable display of the first special symbol. , During variable display of the first special symbol, it is configured to perform variable display of the second special symbol so as not to derive the special result,
The first special symbol variable control means is
When the result of the first special lottery in at least the second gaming state is the special result, the variation of the first special symbol with a long variation pattern over a certain period of time (for example, long variation D to F in FIG. 276) By making it possible to derive the special result after displaying, in the third game state shifted from the second game state, the variable display of the first special symbol is performed in the long variation pattern. During this period, the specific game can be executed based on the acceptance of game balls into the second starting port, thereby increasing the chances of awarding prize balls or prize ball data, thereby increasing the number of shot balls per unit time. The expected value of the number of prize balls or the number of prize ball data for the game is set to be higher than either of the first game state and the second game state.

According to the gaming machine (1) above, when the result of the first special lottery performed in the second game state is a special result, the variable display of the first special symbol can be performed for a long period of time. When the result of the first special lottery is a special result, the variable display of the second special symbol is performed so as not to derive the special result until the special result is derived. When the variable display of special symbols is performed a specified number of times in the second game state, the game state is shifted from the second game state to the third game state. In this third game state, a large amount of game balls flow down toward the specific winning opening as compared with the second game state. Therefore, when the result of the first special lottery is a special result and the variable display of the first special symbol is performed for a long time, the second start port is used during the variable display of the first special symbol performed for a long time. When a specific game is executed based on the acceptance of game balls into the game balls flowing toward the specific winning opening can be accepted in the specific winning opening, so you can get prize balls or prize ball data as much as you want It is possible to provide a gaming machine with new playability, such as giving opportunities.

(2) In the gaming machine described in (1) above,
Symbol variation performance by a plurality of identification symbols is performed in synchronization with the variable display of the first special symbol or the second special symbol, and the symbol is controlled so that the result of the first special lottery or the second special symbol is displayed. Effect control means (for example, sub CPU 201) is further provided,
The symbol effect control means is
When the result of the first special lottery or the second special lottery is a special result, a plurality of reach production patterns (for example, normal reach for low start, super reach A for low start, super reach B for low start in FIG. 277 ) has a reach effect control means (for example, a sub CPU 201) that performs the symbol variation effect in one of the reach effect patterns,
The long fluctuation pattern over a certain period of time is
It is a pattern in which the variable display of the first special symbol is performed for a longer period of time than any of the plurality of ready-to-win effect patterns.

According to the gaming machine of (2) above, when the result of the first special lottery or the second special lottery is a special result, the symbol variation performance is performed in one of the plurality of ready-to-win performance patterns. However, when the result of the first special lottery performed in the second game state is a special result, the variable display of the first special symbol is performed for a longer period of time than any of these plurality of ready-to-win effect patterns. Therefore, it is possible to secure an opportunity to receive a prize ball or prize ball data by executing a specific game that facilitates acceptance into a specific prize winning slot, thereby further enhancing interest.

(3) In the gaming machine described in (1) or (2) above,
By determining the prescribed number of times to be one of a plurality of prescribed number of times (24 times, 30 times, 36 times, 42 times, 48 times, 100 times), the transition from the second game state to the third game state a transition timing determination means (for example, the main CPU 101) capable of changing the transition timing each time;
Effect control means (for example, sub CPU 201) that performs a predetermined effect without specifying the specified number of times determined by the transition timing determination means (for example, the determined number of time reductions);
is further provided.

According to the gaming machine of (3) above, it is possible to make the relationship between the timing when the result of the first special lottery becomes a special result and the transition timing from the third game state to the second game state interesting. becomes. That is, it is not the case that the timing at which the result of the first special lottery becomes the special result in the third game state should be earlier. For example, if the transition timing from the third game state to the second game state is delayed and the result of the first special symbol becomes a special result at an early timing, the period of the second game state may be shortened. Further, if the transition timing from the third game state to the second game state is earlier, the benefit of the second game state can be received longer if the result of the first special symbol becomes a special result at an early timing. can. In this way, by varying the predetermined number of times the variable display of the first special symbol or the second special symbol is performed in the third game state, it is possible to increase the interest in the game.

(4) In the gaming machine according to any one of (1) to (3) above,
The production control means is
When the second game state is shifted to the third game state while the variable display of the first special symbol is being performed in the long fluctuation pattern, a series of advantageous games are performed together with the special game state. It is characterized by further comprising specific effect control means (for example, sub CPU 201) capable of executing a specific effect indicating that it will be executed.

According to the gaming machine of (3) above, when the specific state is reached, a game advantageous to the player exceeding the prize balls paid out in one special game state is executed before the special game state has been controlled yet. Since this is shown, it is possible to further enhance the amusement of the game.

(1) The game machine of Supplementary Note 63-21 is
A gaming machine capable of awarding prize balls or prize ball data as a result of a game performed by shooting game balls toward a game area,
When a predetermined movable member (for example, the movable member 4653 in FIG. 280) operates, the first starting opening (for example, the a first start port 5443);
Movable control means (for example, main CPU 101) that operates the predetermined movable member to facilitate or enable reception of the game ball into the first starting port;
A first special lottery means (for example, the main CPU 101) capable of performing a first special lottery based on the acceptance of the game ball into the first start port;
First special symbol variable control means (for example, main CPU 101) capable of performing variable display of the first special symbol and deriving the result of the first special lottery;
A second starting port (for example, the second starting port 440 in FIG. 280) capable of receiving a game ball that is launched in the predetermined manner toward the game area and is not received by the first starting port;
Second special lottery means (for example, main CPU 101) capable of performing a second special lottery based on acceptance of game balls into the second starting port;
Second special symbol variable control means (for example, main CPU 101) capable of performing variable display of the second special symbol and deriving the result of the second special lottery;
Special game executing means (for example, , main CPU 101),
When a specific condition is established even if the special result is not derived (for example, when the result of the lottery is a small win), a specific movable member (for example, a small win shutter 6100 in FIG. 280) is activated. Specific game execution for executing a specific game that is activated to make it easier to accept a game ball into a specific winning opening (for example, a small winning winning opening 5400 in FIG. 280) to which a prize ball or prize ball data is awarded when the game ball is accepted means (for example, main CPU 101);
with
The second special lottery means
The second special lottery is performed so that the specific condition is satisfied with a higher probability than when the first special lottery is performed,
The second special symbol variable control means is
It is possible to variably display the second special symbol even while the first special symbol is being variably displayed, and when the special result is derived by performing the variable display of the first special symbol. , During variable display of the first special symbol, it is configured to perform variable display of the second special symbol so as not to derive the special result,
The first special symbol variable control means is
When the result of the first special lottery is the special result, after performing the variable display of the first special symbol in a long fluctuation pattern over a certain period of time (for example, long fluctuation D to F in FIG. 276) By making it possible to derive a special result, the specific game was executed based on the acceptance of the game ball into the second starting port while the first special symbol was displayed in a variable manner in the long variation pattern. It is characterized in that it is possible to increase the chances of awarding prize balls or prize ball data by allowing game balls to be accepted into the specific winning hole.

According to the gaming machine (1) above, when the result of the first special lottery is a special result, the variable display of the first special symbol can be performed for a long period of time. When the result of the first special lottery is a special result, the variable display of the second special symbol is performed so as not to derive the special result until the special result is derived. Therefore, when the result of the first special lottery is a special result and the variable display of the first special symbol is performed for a long time, the second start port is used during the variable display of the first special symbol performed for a long time. When a specific game is executed based on the acceptance of game balls into a specific winning slot, the chances of giving prize balls or prize ball data are increased, and prize balls or prize balls are given. It is possible to provide a gaming machine with new playability, such as the opportunity to acquire data and to provide unlimited opportunities.

It should be noted that "performing the second special lottery so that the specific condition is satisfied with a higher probability than when the first special lottery is conducted" means that when the first special lottery is conducted, the specified It is not essential that the conditions of (for example, winning a small hit) be met. For example, in the first special lottery, although it is determined whether or not a specific condition has been established, the probability that the specific condition mode), and a mode in which it is not determined whether or not a specific condition has been established (for example, a mode in which the small winning lottery itself is not performed).

(2) In the gaming machine described in (1) above,
Further comprising game state control means capable of controlling one of a plurality of game states,
The predetermined movable member is
always operating in a definite and regular manner,
The specific winning opening is
It is configured to be able to receive a game ball that has been shot toward the game area in the predetermined manner and has not been received by either the first start port or the second start port,
The game state control means is
A first game state in which the expected value of the number of times of variable display of the first special symbol per unit time is larger than the expected value of the number of times of variable display of the second special symbol per unit time (for example, normal gaming state),
To the second start port so that all or most of the game balls that are shot toward the game area in the predetermined manner and are not accepted by the first start port can be received by the second start port A second game state (for example, a high-accuracy short-time game state) in which the acceptance of game balls is easier than the first game state, and an expected value of the number of executions of the variable display of the second special symbol per unit time It is larger than the first game state and more difficult than the second game state to accept game balls into the second start port, so that a larger amount of game balls than the second game state is directed to the specific winning port. A third gaming state (for example, a high-quality non-time-saving gaming state) that can flow down,
Controllable to any one of a plurality of game states including at least
Having state transition control means (for example, main CPU 101) capable of executing control to shift from the second game state to the third game state when variable display of special symbols is performed a specified number of times in the second game state. characterized by

According to the gaming machine of (2) above, when the variable display of the special symbols is performed a specified number of times in the second game state, the game state is shifted from the second game state to the third game state. In this third game state, it is more difficult to accept the game balls into the second starting port than in the second game state, so that a larger amount of game balls flow down toward the specific winning port than in the second game state. do. Since the specific winning opening is configured to be able to accept game balls that are shot in a predetermined manner toward the game area and are not received by either the first starting opening or the second starting opening, the third game In this state, prize balls or prize ball data can be obtained as much as possible during the variable display of the first special symbol which is performed for a long period of time, making it possible to further increase the interest in the game.

(1) The game machine of Supplementary Note 63-22 is
A gaming machine capable of awarding prize balls or prize ball data as a result of a game performed by shooting game balls toward a game area,
game information storage means (for example, RWM (main RAM 103)) capable of storing game information relating to the progress of the game;
data clearing means (for example, the main CPU 101 that executes the process of step S23) capable of clearing the game information stored in the game information storage means (for example, the main RAM 103) when a predetermined operation is performed;
A first start port (for example, the first start port 5442 in FIG. 270) capable of accepting a game ball launched in a predetermined manner (for example, left-handed) toward the game area;
First lottery means (e.g., main CPU 101) that performs a first lottery (e.g., first special lottery) based on acceptance of game balls into the first starting port;
A first special symbol variable control means (for example, main CPU 101) that variably displays a first special symbol based on the result of the first lottery means and derives the result of the first lottery;
A second starting port (for example, the second starting port 4401 in FIG. 270) that easily receives the game ball fired in the predetermined manner (for example, left-handed hitting) toward the game area;
A second lottery means (for example, main CPU 101) that performs a second lottery (for example, a second special lottery) based on the acceptance of the game ball into the second starting port;
Second special symbol variable control means (for example, main CPU 101) for performing variable display of the second special symbol and deriving the result of the second lottery;
Storage means (for example, main ROM 102) for storing a plurality of tables prepared with variable display patterns used for variable display of the first special symbol or the second special symbol;
variable display pattern determination means (for example, main CPU 101) for determining a variable display pattern to be used for variable display of the first special symbol or the second special symbol, using one of the plurality of tables; ,
Special game executing means (for example, , main CPU 101),
Even if the special result is not derived, when a specific condition is satisfied (for example, when the result of the lottery is a small hit), a predetermined movable member (for example, a small win shutter 6100 in FIG. 270) to execute a specific game (for example, a small winning game) that makes it easier to accept a winning ball or winning ball data when a game ball is accepted (for example, a main CPU 101);
with
The second lottery means
The second lottery is performed so that the specific condition is satisfied with a higher probability than when the first lottery is performed,
The storage means
As a table used for determining the variable display pattern provided for variable display of the second special symbol,
A first table prepared with a plurality of variable display patterns with a relatively small expected value of the number of executions of the variable display of the second special symbol per unit time (for example, the variable time of the special symbol for low start in FIG. 258 decision table), and a second table prepared with a plurality of variable display patterns having a relatively large expected value for the number of executions of the variable display of the second special symbol per unit time (for example, a second table for starting in FIG. 272 Special pattern fluctuation time determination table)
remembers at least
The variable display pattern determining means
Although the variable display pattern used for variable display of the second special symbol is always determined using the first table, the game information stored in the game information storage means is cleared by the data clear means. It is characterized by having a second special symbol variable display pattern determining means that can be determined using the second table only in some cases.

According to the gaming machine (1) above, the variable display pattern provided for the variable display of the second special symbol is changed from the first table based on the game information stored in the game information storage means being cleared. It is possible to provide a gaming machine with new playability such as changing to the second table. In particular, for example, when the game machine manager clears the game information stored in the game information storage means before opening the hall, the number of second special symbols per unit time when shot toward the game area in a predetermined manner is increased. Since the expected value of the number of execution times of the variable display can be increased, ball output adjustment is also possible.

Note that "performing the second lottery so that the specific condition is satisfied with a higher probability than when the first lottery is performed" means that when the first lottery is performed, the specific condition is Establishing (for example, winning a jackpot) is not essential. For example, in the first lottery, it is determined whether or not a specific condition has been established, but the probability of the specific condition being established is 0 (for example, a small lottery is held, but the probability of winning a small prize is 0). ), and a mode of not performing the determination itself as to whether or not a specific condition has been established (for example, a mode of not performing the small winning lottery itself).

(2) In the gaming machine described in (1) above,
game control means (for example, the main CPU 101) capable of executing control related to the progress of the game based on any one of a plurality of set values with different degrees of advantage for the player;
Effect control means (for example, sub CPU 201) capable of executing a predetermined effect,
further comprising
The production control means is
When the variable display pattern used for variable display of the second special symbol is determined using the second table and the one setting value is a specific setting value, a specific effect can be specified. It is characterized by having a production executing means.

According to the gaming machine of (2) above, the player can guess one set value from the variable display pattern provided for the variable display of the second special symbol, thereby further enhancing the interest in the game. be able to.

(1) The game machine of Supplementary Note 63-23 is
A gaming machine capable of awarding prize balls or prize ball data as a result of a game performed by shooting game balls toward a game area,
A first starting port (for example, the first starting port 5443 in FIG. 275) capable of receiving a game ball launched toward the game area;
First lottery means (e.g., main CPU 101) that performs a first lottery (e.g., first special lottery) based on acceptance of game balls into the first starting port;
A first special symbol variable control means (for example, main CPU 101) that variably displays a first special symbol based on the result of the first lottery means and derives the result of the first lottery;
A second starting port (for example, the second starting port 440 in FIG. 275) capable of receiving the game ball launched toward the game area;
A second lottery means (for example, main CPU 101) that performs a second lottery (for example, a second special lottery) based on the acceptance of the game ball into the second starting port;
Second special symbol variable control means (for example, main CPU 101) for performing variable display of the second special symbol and deriving the result of the second lottery;
Storage means (for example, main ROM 102) for storing a plurality of tables prepared with variable display patterns used for variable display of the first special symbol or the second special symbol;
variable display pattern determination means (for example, main CPU 101) for determining a variable display pattern to be used for variable display of the first special symbol or the second special symbol, using one of the plurality of tables; ,
Special game execution means ( For example, the main CPU 101),
When a specific condition is satisfied even if the special result is not derived (for example, when the result of the lottery is a small win), a predetermined movable member (for example, a small win shutter 6100) is operated. Then, when the game ball is accepted, the prize ball or the prize ball data is given. Execution means (for example, main CPU 101);
with
The second lottery means
The second lottery is performed so that the specific condition is satisfied with a higher probability than when the first lottery is performed,
The second special symbol variable control means is
It is possible to variably display the second special symbol even while the first special symbol is being variably displayed, and when the special result is derived by the variable display of the first special symbol, the second In the variable display of the 2 special symbols, the second special symbol is configured to be variably displayed so that the special result is not derived,
The storage means
As a table used for determining the variable display pattern provided for variable display of the second special symbol,
A first table prepared with a plurality of variable display patterns having a relatively small expected value for the number of executions of variable display of the second special symbol per unit time (a special symbol variable time determination table for low start in FIG. 277 ), and a second table prepared with a plurality of variable display patterns having a relatively large expected value for the number of executions of variable display of the second special symbol per unit time (fluctuation of special symbols for high start in FIG. 278 time determination table)
remembers at least
The variable display pattern determining means
The variable display pattern used for the variable display of the first special symbol from which the special result is derived is determined as a specific variable display pattern (for example, long variation G in FIG. 277) longer than a specified time. A possible first special symbol display pattern determination means (for example, the main CPU 101 that executes the process of step S1832),
The variable display pattern used for variable display of the second special symbol is always determined using the first table, and the variable display of the first special symbol is started with the specific variable display pattern. Based on, it has a second special symbol variable display pattern determination means (for example, the main CPU 101 that executes the process of step S1834) that can be determined using the second table instead of the first table. .

According to the gaming machine of (1) above, the variation time of the second special symbol is usually determined by referring to the first table, but the variation pattern of the first special symbol is determined to be longer than the specified time. By changing the table from the first table to the second table based on what has been done, the specific game is guaranteed while the variation time of the first special symbol continues, and the interest in the game can be enhanced.

Note that "performing the second lottery so that the specific condition is satisfied with a higher probability than when the first lottery is performed" means that when the first lottery is performed, the specific condition is Establishing (for example, winning a jackpot) is not essential. For example, in the first lottery, it is determined whether or not a specific condition has been established, but the probability of the specific condition being established is 0 (for example, a small lottery is held, but the probability of winning a small prize is 0). ), and a mode of not performing the determination itself as to whether or not a specific condition has been established (for example, a mode of not performing the small winning lottery itself).

(2) In the gaming machine described in (1) above,
When the variable display of the first special symbol is performed in the specific variable display pattern, a series of advantageous games are executed in the specific game and the special game at a stage where the special game is not yet executed. It is characterized by further comprising an effect control means (for example, a sub CPU 201) capable of executing a specific effect indicating that.

According to the gaming machine of (2) above, when the variable display pattern provided for the variable display of the first special symbol is determined to be the specific variable display pattern and the specific game is executed, the special game is still being executed. Since it is indicated that a game more advantageous to the player than the special game being executed once is executed at the stage where there is no special game, it is possible to further increase the interest in the game.

(1) The game machine of Supplementary Note 63-24 is
A first start port (for example, the first start port 5442 in FIG. 254) capable of accepting a game ball fired in a normal manner (for example, left-handed) towards the game area;
A first lottery means (e.g., main CPU 101) capable of performing a first lottery (e.g., first special lottery) based on the acceptance of the game ball into the first starting port;
First special symbol variable control means (for example, main CPU 101) capable of performing variable display of the first special symbol and deriving the result of the first lottery;
When a predetermined movable member (for example, the movable shutter 4650 in FIG. 254) operates, a second starting port (for example, the 254 second starting port 440);
A second lottery means (for example, main CPU 101) capable of performing a second lottery (for example, a second special lottery) based on the acceptance of the game ball into the second starting port;
Second special symbol variable control means (for example, main CPU 101) capable of performing variable display of the second special symbol and deriving the result of the second lottery;
Special game execution means (for example, main CPU 101);
When a specific condition is established even if the special result is not derived (for example, when the result of the lottery is a small win), a specific movable member (for example, a small win shutter 6100) is operated. , When the game ball is accepted, a specific game (for example, a small winning game) that facilitates acceptance into a specific winning opening (for example, a small winning winning opening 5400) in which prize balls or prize ball data is given Specific games that execute Execution means (for example, main CPU 101);
game state control means (for example, main CPU 101) for controlling the game state after the special game is executed to one of a plurality of game states;
with
The second lottery means
The second lottery is performed so that the specific condition is satisfied with a higher probability than when the first lottery is performed,
The game state control means is
A normal game state (for example, a normal game state) in which the probability that the special result is derived is relatively low and the expected value of the number of prize balls or the number of prize ball data for the number of shot balls per unit time is less than 1 ,
The probability that the special result is derived is relatively high, the reception of game balls to the second start port is relatively easy, and the number of prize balls or the number of prize ball data for the number of shot balls per unit time An advantageous gaming state (for example, a high-probability short-time gaming state) in which the expected value of is less than 1,
The probability that the special result is derived is relatively high, it is relatively difficult to accept the game ball into the second start port, and the number of prize balls or the number of prize ball data with respect to the number of shot balls per unit time A specific game state (for example, a high probability non-time-saving game state) whose expected value is greater than any of the normal game state and the advantageous game state,
Controllable to any one of a plurality of game states including at least
In a gaming state (for example, a high certainty short working hours game state, a low certainty short working hours gaming state) in which the reception of the game ball to the second start port is relatively easy,
When the game ball is shot in the normal mode and received in the first starting port, the first special symbol is variably displayed, and the special result is derived, the special game is executed. The game state is controlled to the normal game state or the specific game state,
When the game ball is shot in the specific mode and received in the second starting port, the second special symbol is variably displayed, and the special result is derived, the special game is executed. The present game state is controlled to the advantageous game state.

According to the gaming machine of (1) above, the game ball is launched in a normal manner in spite of the game state in which it is relatively easy to accept the game ball into the second starting port, and the first special symbol is displayed. When the variable display is performed and a special result is derived, after the special game is executed, the degree of profit for the player is relatively high (the number of prize balls or the prize ball data for the number of shot balls per unit time) The expected value of the number is larger than either of the normal game state and the advantageous game state) is controlled to the specific game state. Also, in a game state in which it is relatively easy to accept the game ball into the second starting port, the game ball is shot in a specific mode, the second special symbol is variably displayed, and a special result is derived. , and after the special game is executed, the degree of profit for the player is relatively low (the expected value of the number of prize balls or the number of prize ball data for the number of shot balls per unit time is less than 1) advantageous game state controlled by That is, when the game ball is launched in the normal mode in a game state in which the reception of the game ball to the second start port is relatively easy, the benefit of easy reception of the game ball to the second start port is obtained. Although there is a disadvantage that it can not be done, there is a possibility that it will be controlled to a specific game state. On the other hand, if a game ball is launched in a specific manner in a game state in which it is relatively easy to receive a game ball into the second start port, the user can receive the benefit of facilitating the reception of the game ball into the second start port. Although you can enjoy the advantage of being able to play, it can be controlled to an advantageous game state instead of a specific game state. In this way, it is possible to determine which game is to be executed between the relatively high-risk, high-return thrilling game and the relatively low-risk, low-return stable game. It is possible to provide a gaming machine with new playability, such as the ability to give the player the right to choose by hitting left-handed.

Note that "performing the second lottery so that the specific condition is satisfied with a higher probability than when the first lottery is performed" means that when the first lottery is performed, the specific condition is Establishing (for example, winning a jackpot) is not essential. For example, in the first lottery, it is determined whether or not a specific condition has been established, but the probability of the specific condition being established is 0 (for example, a small lottery is held, but the probability of winning a small prize is 0). ), and a mode of not performing the determination itself as to whether or not a specific condition has been established (for example, a mode of not performing the small winning lottery itself).

(2) In the gaming machine described in (1) above,
In a game state in which it is relatively easy to accept a game ball into the second starting port, when the game ball is shot in the normal mode and when the game ball is shot in the specific mode, the unit It is characterized in that the ratio of the number of prize balls or the number of prize ball data to the number of shot balls per time is substantially the same.

According to the gaming machine of (2) above, the ratio of the number of prize balls to the number of shot balls per unit time when the game ball is shot in a normal mode and when the game ball is shot in a specific mode are substantially the same, the player can determine the mode of shooting the game ball according to his/her own desire without considering advantages or disadvantages.

(1) The game machine of Supplementary Note 63-25 is
A gaming machine capable of awarding prize balls or prize ball data as a result of a game performed by shooting game balls toward a game area,
A first start port (for example, the first start port 5443 in FIG. 282) capable of accepting a game ball launched in a specific manner toward the game area;
First lottery means (e.g., main CPU 101) that performs a first lottery (e.g., first special lottery) based on acceptance of game balls into the first starting port;
A first special symbol variable control means (for example, main CPU 101) that variably displays a first special symbol based on the result of the first lottery means and derives the result of the first lottery;
It is possible to accept game balls that have not been accepted by the first starting hole, and when the game balls are accepted, a specific winning hole (for example, a small winning winning hole in FIG. 282) to which a predetermined number of prize balls or prize ball data is given 5400) and
A second starting port (for example, the second starting port 440 in FIG. 282) capable of accepting the game ball fired in the specific manner (for example, hitting right) toward the game area;
Second lottery means (for example, main CPU 101) that performs a second lottery based on acceptance of game balls into the second starting port;
Second special symbol variable control means (for example, main CPU 101) for performing variable display of the second special symbol and deriving the result of the second lottery;
When at least the variable display of the first special symbol is performed and a special result (eg, "jackpot") is derived, a first condition (eg, a condition device) which is a special game execution condition advantageous to the player operation) and a second condition (e.g., operation of the accessory continuous operation device), a first condition establishment means (e.g., main CPU 101) that establishes only the first condition;
Temporary retention means (for example, accessory device 3500 in FIG. 282) that enables the entry of the game ball based on the establishment of the first condition, and allows the entered game ball to be temporarily retained. )When,
a specific opening (for example, a specific opening 3540 in FIG. 282) capable of receiving game balls staying in the temporary staying means;
a second condition establishment means (for example, main CPU 101) for establishing the second condition when the game ball is received in the specific hole;
special game executing means (for example, the main CPU 101) for executing a special game advantageous to the player based on the establishment of the first condition and the establishment of the second condition;
When the variable display of the second special symbol is performed and a specific condition is established (for example, when the result of "small hit" is derived), a specific movable member (for example, the small a specific game executing means (for example, the main CPU 101) that operates a winning shutter 6100) to execute a specific game that facilitates acceptance into the specific winning opening;
A first state (e.g., "high-precision short-time gaming state") in which it is easy to accept game balls into the first start port, and acceptance of game balls into the first start port is more difficult than in the first state or a state control means (for example, the main CPU 101) that can be controlled to either a second state (for example, a “high-quality non-time-saving gaming state”), and
with
The state control means, when a predetermined condition is established in the first state (for example, when the time-saving game of the determined number of times of time-saving is digested), the state can be shifted from the first state to the second state. configured to allow
During the period from the establishment of the first condition to the establishment of the second condition based on the acceptance of the game ball to the first start opening and in the second state, the second start opening When the specific game is executed based on the acceptance of the game ball into the game ball, the game ball fired in the specific mode can be easily received in the specific winning hole, so that the number of balls fired per unit time. It is characterized in that it is configured to increase the expected value of the number of prize balls or the number of prize ball data.

According to the game machine of (1) above, in the first state in which the reception of the game ball into the first start port is facilitated, even if the specific movable member is operating, the game ball is fired in a specific manner. is unlikely or unlikely to be accepted into a specific prize pool. On the other hand, in the second state in which it is difficult or impossible to accept the game ball into the first starting hole, if the specific movable member is operating, the game ball fired in a specific manner is accepted in the specific winning hole. can be In addition, in the state where the first condition is established by the variable display of the first special symbol and the special result being derived, even if the game ball is received in the second start port, the special result is obtained. A variable display of the second special symbol is performed so that a specific condition can be established without deriving a result. Therefore, when the first condition is satisfied based on the reception of the game ball to the first start port, the second condition to the second start port on the condition that it is in the second state until the second condition is satisfied. When a specific game is executed based on the acceptance of game balls, prize balls or prize ball data can be obtained as much as you want, and it is possible to increase the expected value of the number of prize balls or the number of prize ball data for the number of shot balls per unit time. It is possible to provide a gaming machine with new game features such as becoming.

In addition, in the gaming machine of (1) above, the specific game is executed when the second special symbol is variably displayed and a specific condition is established, but the first special symbol is variably displayed. When performed, the specific game is executed with a probability (for example, 1/320) that is much lower than the probability (for example, 1/5) that the second special symbol is displayed in a variable manner and the specific game is executed. It is not the intention to exclude the aspect to be done.

(2) In the gaming machine described in (1) above,
Storage means (for example, main ROM 102) for storing a plurality of tables prepared with variable display patterns provided for variable display of at least the second special symbol;
variable display pattern determination means (for example, main CPU 101) for determining a variable display pattern to be used for variable display of at least the second special symbol by referring to one of the plurality of tables;
further comprising
The storage means
As a table used for determining the variable display pattern provided for variable display of the second special symbol,
A first table prepared with a plurality of variable display patterns with a relatively small expected value of the number of executions of the variable display of the second special symbol per unit time (for example, the variable time of the special symbol for low start in FIG. 258 determination table), and a second table prepared with a plurality of variable display patterns having a relatively large expected value for the number of executions of the variable display of the second special symbol per unit time (for example, a high start high start table in FIG. 259 Variable time determination table for special symbols),
remembers at least
The variable display pattern determining means
In a normal game state (for example, "normal game state"), the first table is referred to determine a variable display pattern to be used for variable display of the second special symbol, and the special game is executed. In the game state (for example, "high-accuracy short-time gaming state", "high-accuracy non-short-time gaming state"), it is possible to determine the variable display pattern that is provided for variable display of the second special symbol with reference to the second table. It is characterized by being composed of

According to the gaming machine (2) above, in the normal game state, the variable display pattern to be used for variable display of the second special symbol is determined by referring to the first table. The variation time of the second special symbol is performed. On the other hand, in the gaming state after the special game is executed, the variable display pattern to be used for variable display of the second special symbol is determined by referring to the second table, so the second special symbol is displayed for a relatively short time. Variation display of the pattern is performed. Therefore, in the game state after the special game is executed, the execution frequency of the small winning game can be increased compared to the normal game state, and the execution frequency of the small winning game can be suppressed in the normal game state. becomes. Then, when the first condition is satisfied in the game state after the special game is executed, the specific game is executed based on the acceptance of the game ball into the second start port until the second condition is satisfied. By doing so, it is possible to acquire prize balls or prize ball data in an unlimited state, and it is possible to enhance interest.

(3) In the gaming machine described in (1) or (2) above,
The temporary retention means is
It is characterized in that it is constructed such that the time for which the entering game ball is temporarily retained can be different each time.

According to the gaming machine of (3) above, the time for which the game ball is retained in the retention means may vary each time. In other words, since the time from when the first condition is satisfied until when the second condition is satisfied is different each time, how long is the expected value of the number of prize balls or the number of prize ball data for the number of shot balls per unit time? It becomes difficult for the player to predict whether the game will continue, and it is possible to further enhance the interest in the game.

(1) The game machine of Supplementary Note 63-26 is
A gaming machine capable of awarding prize balls or prize ball data as a result of a game performed by shooting game balls toward a game area,
A first starting port (for example, the first starting port 5442 in FIG. 281) capable of receiving the game ball launched toward the game area;
First lottery means (e.g., main CPU 101) that performs a first lottery (e.g., first special lottery) based on acceptance of game balls into the first starting port;
A first special symbol variable control means (for example, main CPU 101) that variably displays a first special symbol based on the result of the first lottery means and derives the result of the first lottery;
A second starting port (for example, the second starting port 440 in FIG. 281) that can accept the game ball fired toward the game area;
A second lottery means (for example, main CPU 101) that performs a second lottery (for example, a second special lottery) based on the acceptance of the game ball into the second starting port;
Second special symbol variable control means (for example, main CPU 101) for performing variable display of the second special symbol and deriving the result of the second lottery;
Storage means (for example, main ROM 102) for storing a plurality of tables prepared with variable display patterns provided for variable display of at least the second special symbol;
variable display pattern determination means (for example, main CPU 101) for determining a variable display pattern to be used for variable display of at least the second special symbol by referring to one of the plurality of tables;
When the variable display of the first special symbol or the second special symbol is performed and a special result (for example, "jackpot") is derived, the first condition is a condition for executing a special game advantageous to the player. a first condition establishing means (for example, the main CPU 101) that establishes only the first condition among (for example, the operation of the condition device) and the second condition (for example, the operation of the accessory continuous operation device);
Temporary retention means (for example, accessory device 3500 in FIG. 281) that enables the entry of the game ball based on the establishment of the first condition, and allows the entered game ball to be temporarily retained. )When,
a specific opening (for example, a specific opening 3540 in FIG. 281) capable of receiving game balls staying in the temporary staying means;
a second condition establishment means (for example, main CPU 101) for establishing the second condition when the game ball is received in the specific hole;
special game executing means (for example, the main CPU 101) for executing a special game advantageous to the player based on the establishment of the first condition and the establishment of the second condition;
When the variable display of the second special symbol is performed and a specific condition is established (for example, when the result of "small hit" is derived), a specific movable member (for example, the small Winning shutter 6100) is operated, and when a game ball is accepted, a predetermined number of prize balls or prize ball data is given. a specific game executing means (for example, the main CPU 101) for executing a specific game of
with
The storage means
As a table used for determining the variable display pattern provided for variable display of the second special symbol,
A first table prepared with a plurality of variable display patterns with a relatively small expected value of the number of executions of the variable display of the second special symbol per unit time (for example, the variable time of the special symbol for low start in FIG. 258 determination table), and a second table prepared with a plurality of variable display patterns having a relatively large expected value for the number of executions of the variable display of the second special symbol per unit time (for example, a high start high start table in FIG. 259 Variable time determination table for special symbols),
remembers at least
The variable display pattern determining means
In a normal game state, first pattern determining means (for example, main CPU 101) capable of determining a variable display pattern to be used for variable display of the second special symbol by referring to the first table, and at least the first After the condition is established until the second condition is established, the second table is referred to, and the second pattern determination capable of determining the variable display pattern used for the variable display of the second special symbol is determined. means (for example, main CPU 101),
has
During the period from the establishment of the first condition based on the acceptance of the game ball to the first start opening until the second condition is established, the above based on the acceptance of the game ball to the second start opening It is characterized in that the expected value of the number of prize balls or the number of prize ball data with respect to the number of shot balls per unit time is increased by increasing the execution frequency of the specific game.

According to the gaming machine (1) above, in the normal gaming state, the variable display pattern to be used for variable display of the second special symbol is determined by referring to the first table. The variation time of the second special symbol is performed. On the other hand, after the first condition is satisfied until the second condition is satisfied, the second table is referred to and the variable display pattern used for the variable display of the second special symbol is determined. A variable display of the second special symbol is performed for a relatively short time. Therefore, when the first condition is satisfied based on the reception of the game ball to the first starting port, the second special symbol is displayed in a relatively short period of time, so that the second condition is satisfied. During this period, the execution frequency of the specific game based on the acceptance of game balls into the second start port is increased, and prize balls or prize ball data can be obtained as much as you want, and the number of prize balls or prize ball data for the number of shot balls per unit time It is possible to provide a gaming machine with new playability such as increasing the expected value of the number.

In addition, in the gaming machine of (1) above, the specific game is executed when the second special symbol is variably displayed and a specific condition is established, but the first special symbol is variably displayed. When performed, the specific game is executed with a probability (for example, 1/320) that is much lower than the probability (for example, 1/5) that the second special symbol is displayed in a variable manner and the specific game is executed. It is not the intention to exclude the aspect to be done.

(2) In the gaming machine described in (1) above,
The temporary retention means is
It is characterized in that it is constructed such that the time for which the entering game ball is temporarily retained can be different each time.

According to the gaming machine of (2) above, the time for which the game ball is retained in the retention means may vary each time. In other words, since the time from when the first condition is satisfied until when the second condition is satisfied is different each time, how long is the expected value of the number of prize balls or the number of prize ball data for the number of shot balls per unit time? It becomes difficult for the player to predict whether the game will continue, and it is possible to further enhance the interest in the game.

According to the inventions of appendices 63-1 to 63-26, it is possible to provide a gaming machine with new playability.

[Appendix 64-1 to Appendix 64-4]
2. Description of the Related Art Conventionally, a gaming machine is known in which various prize winning devices such as a general winning gate and a starting gate are provided in a game area. When game balls shot toward the game balls win prizes in various prize winning devices, prize balls corresponding to the winning prize devices are paid out.

As a game machine of this kind, among the game balls launched to a specific area, the game balls that have entered a predetermined ball entrance are sorted and released toward a first place or a second place. Disclosed is a gaming machine provided with a device, and different profits are obtained when released toward a first location and when released toward a second location (for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2015-047336 Gazette).

According to the gaming machine disclosed in Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2015-047336, the amount of profit obtained when released toward the first location and when released toward the second location are different. In addition to distributing the game balls released by the distributing device to the flowing route, it is possible to distribute profits.

However, in recent years, there has been a demand for gaming machines with even newer game features.

The inventions of appendices 64-1 to 64-4 have been made in view of such a point, and their purpose is to provide a gaming machine with new playability.

(1) The game machine of Supplementary Note 64-1 is
a game board on which a game area is formed (for example, a transparent panel 172);
It has a rolling surface on which game balls can roll (for example, the upper surface of the shutter 6020 in FIG. 283), and a normal position where the rolling surface is located behind the game board (for example, a large winning opening in FIG. 283) 5401 is a closed mode) and a special movable member configured to be operable between an advanced position where the rolling surface is located forward of the game board (for example, a large winning opening 5401 in FIG. 283 is an open mode) (eg, shutter 6020 in FIG. 282);
When the special movable member operates toward the advanced position, a special winning opening (for example, a large winning opening 5401 in FIG. 283) in which game balls rolling on the rolling surface can be received;
The first flow-down route (for example, the first flow-down route 5901 in FIG. 283) and the second flow-down route (for example, the second flow-down route 5902 in FIG. 283 )When,
a discharge port (for example, the out port 57 in FIG. 283) capable of receiving game balls flowing down the first flow path;
A normal winning port (for example, a general winning port 560 in FIG. 283) capable of receiving game balls flowing down the second flow path;
No prize balls or prize ball data are provided when the game balls are received in the discharge port, and when the game balls are received in at least the special winning port or the normal winning port, the special winning port and the normal winning port a prize granting means (for example, a payout/launch control circuit 300 that dispenses prize balls according to a command from the main CPU 101) capable of awarding a predetermined amount of prize balls or prize ball data;
When a special result is derived as a result of the game, a round game is performed in which the special movable member is operated between the normal position and the advanced position, thereby facilitating acceptance of the game ball into the special winning hole. A special game executing means (for example, the main CPU 101) that executes a special game that is
with
When the special movable member is in the normal position, the game ball flowing down the game area flows down the first flow path,
When the special movable member operates from the advanced position toward the normal position while the game ball is rolling on the rolling surface, the game ball rolling on the rolling surface moves to the second position. It is characterized by being configured to be able to flow down a flow path.

According to the game machine of (1) above, when the special movable member operates from the advanced position toward the normal position while rolling on the rolling surface of the special movable member, it rolls on the rolling surface. A game ball is configured to be able to flow down the second flow path. In addition, all or most of the game balls flowing down the second flow-down path are configured to enter the normal winning opening. In this way, just by devising the arrangement positions of various structural members, it is possible to provide a new game feature such that prize balls or prize ball data can be awarded based on winnings in the normal winning opening each time a round game is played. It becomes possible to provide gaming machines. In addition, when a special game is executed, in addition to prize balls or prize ball data provided based on winning in the special prize opening, prize balls or prize ball data are provided based on winning in the normal winning opening. Therefore, it is possible to increase the interest in the game.

(2) In the gaming machine described in (1) above,
The special game execution means is
A round game in which the special movable member is operated between the normal position and the advanced position is executed over a plurality of round games,
In at least one round game among the plurality of round games, the normal position and the It is characterized in that it is constructed so as to operate between the advanced positions a plurality of times.

According to the gaming machine of (2) above, in the one round game, the game ball rolling on the rolling surface is given a plurality of opportunities to flow down the second flow path, so that the normal winning opening The number of prize balls or the number of prize ball data given based on the winning can be increased, and it is possible to further enhance the interest in the game.

(1) The game machine of Supplementary Note 64-2 is
a game board on which a game area is formed (for example, a transparent panel 172);
It has a rolling surface on which game balls can roll (for example, the upper surface of the shutter 6020 in FIG. 284), and a normal position where the rolling surface is located behind the game board (for example, a large winning opening in FIG. 284) 5401 is a closed mode) and an advanced position where the rolling surface is located forward of the game board (for example, a special movable member in which the large winning opening 5401 in FIG. 284 is an open mode). (eg, shutter 6020 in FIG. 284);
When the special movable member operates toward the advanced position, a special winning opening (for example, a large winning opening 5401 in FIG. 284) in which a game ball rolling on the rolling surface can be received;
A first flow-down route (for example, the first flow-down route 5903 in FIG. 284) and a second flow-down route (for example, the second flow-down route 5904 in FIG. 284 )When,
When a predetermined movable member (for example, movable member 5602) operates, a general winning opening (for example, general winning opening 560) that can accept game balls flowing down the first flow-down path;
When game balls are accepted at least in the special winning opening or the general winning opening, prize giving means (for example, a payout/launch control circuit 300 that pays out prize balls according to a command from the main CPU 101;
When a special result is derived as a result of the game, a round game in which the special movable member is operated between the normal position and the advanced position is performed over a plurality of rounds, thereby allowing the game ball to enter the special winning hole. Special game execution means (for example, main CPU 101) that executes a special game that facilitates acceptance of
a normal area (for example, the passage gate 49 in FIG. 284) through which game balls flowing down the second flow path can pass;
It is possible to operate the predetermined movable member based on the passage of the game ball into the normal area, and by activating the predetermined movable member, it is possible to accept the game ball into the general winning opening. movable control means (for example, main CPU 101);
with
When the special movable member is in the normal position, the game balls flowing down the game area are configured not to reach the normal area by flowing down the first flow path,
When the special movable member operates from the advanced position toward the normal position while the game ball is rolling on the rolling surface, the game ball rolling on the rolling surface moves to the second position. It is characterized in that it is constructed so as to be able to reach the normal area by flowing down the flow path.

According to the game machine of (1) above, when the special movable member operates from the advanced position toward the normal position, the game ball rolling on the rolling surface flows down the second flow path and passes through the normal area. Therefore, the movable member operates so that the general winning opening is in an open state between round games. That is, at least while the general winning opening is in the open mode due to the operation of the movable member, the special winning opening is in the closed mode, so that the game ball hit to the right flows down the first flow-down path, all or most of it. wins the general prize. In this way, by simply devising the arrangement positions of various structural members, in addition to prize balls or prize ball data that are paid out based on winnings in special prize openings, prize balls or prize balls based on winnings in general prize openings It is possible to provide a gaming machine with new playability, such as imparting ball data. In addition, when a special game is executed, in addition to prize balls or prize ball data given based on winning in the special prize opening, prize balls or prize ball data are given based on winning in the general winning opening. Therefore, it is possible to increase the interest in the game.

(1) The game machine of Supplementary Note 64-3 is
A normal starting area (for example, the passage gate 49 in FIG. 285) through which a game ball fired toward the game area can pass;
normal holding means (for example, main CPU 101) for holding the normal start memory up to a predetermined number based on the passage of the game ball into the normal start area;
normal lottery means (for example, a main CPU 101) for performing a normal lottery for the normal start memory so that a predetermined result is always or generally obtained based on the establishment of the normal start condition;
Normal symbol variable control means (for example, main CPU 101) for performing variable display of normal symbols and deriving the result of the normal lottery;
By operating a predetermined movable member (for example, the movable member 5602 in FIG. 285), a general winning opening (for example, , General winning gate 560 in FIG. 285),
storage means (for example, main ROM 102) for storing a plurality of operation patterns as operation patterns of the predetermined movable member;
When the variable display of the normal pattern is performed and a predetermined result (for example, winning) is derived, the predetermined movable member is operated in one of the plurality of operation patterns, and the closing mode a movable control means (for example, the main CPU 101) that can be changed to the possible open mode from
When the general prize winning port is in the open mode, almost no game balls are accepted, and the general prize winning port is in the closed mode and can only accept game balls that have not been received in the general prize winning port. (For example, the second start port 440),
A special lottery means for performing a special lottery so that a general result (for example, a small win) is obtained based on the acceptance of the game ball into the special start port;
Special symbol variable control means for performing variable display of special symbols and deriving the result of the special lottery;
When the variable display of the special symbols is performed and a specific result is derived, a specific movable member (for example, the opening and closing member 5603 in FIG. 285) is operated, and a specific winning opening ( For example, a specific port 777),
special game execution means (for example, main CPU 101) for executing a special game advantageous to the player based on the acceptance of the game ball in the specific winning hole;
with
The normal start condition is
As long as the normal starting memory is retained in the normal retaining means, it is established on the condition that the general winning opening is in the closed mode,
The storage means
An opening time from when the predetermined result is derived until the general prize winning port is in the open state, and an ending time from when the general prize winning port is in the closed state to the establishment of the normal start condition. A normal operation pattern (e.g., first pattern) both of which are relatively short, and a special operation pattern (e.g., second pattern) of which at least one of the opening time and the ending time is relatively long
remembers at least
The movable control means is
Usually, by operating the predetermined movable member in the normal operation pattern, the reception of the game ball to the special start port is inhibited, and when a special condition is established (for example, the fluctuation pattern of the normal symbol is the second Only when the pattern is determined), by operating the predetermined movable member in the special operation pattern, the game ball is received in the special start opening so that the game ball is received in the specific winning opening. It is characterized by making it possible.

According to the gaming machine of (1) above, since the ordinary lottery always or generally yields a predetermined result, the general prize winning opening is almost fully open except for the opening time and the ending time. When the general winning opening is in the open mode, almost all of the game balls are received in the general winning opening, which prevents the reception of the game balls in the special starting opening. However, when a specific condition is established, the predetermined movable member operates in a special operation pattern in which at least one of the opening time and the ending time is relatively long, during which the general winning opening is closed, Acceptance of game balls to the special starting port becomes possible. And, based on the reception of the game ball to the special start opening, a specific movable member is activated, the reception of the game ball to the specific winning opening becomes possible, and a special game is executed, which is a new game that has never existed before. It is possible to play games with sex.

(1) The game machine of Supplementary Note 64-4 is
When a predetermined movable member (for example, the shutter 6310 in FIG. 286) operates, a first special start opening (for example, in the figure 286 first start port 5443),
Based on the establishment of a predetermined condition (for example, the result of the normal symbol determination is a hit), the predetermined movable member is operated to facilitate the reception of the game ball into the first special start port. Control means (for example, main CPU 101);
A first lottery means (for example, the main CPU 101) capable of performing a first lottery (for example, a first special lottery) based on the acceptance of the game ball into the first special start port;
First special symbol variable control means (for example, main CPU 101) capable of performing variable display of the first special symbol and deriving the result of the first lottery;
A second special starting port (for example, the second starting port 440 in FIG. 286) configured to accept only game balls that were not accepted by the first special starting port;
A second lottery means (for example, main CPU 101) capable of performing a second lottery (for example, a first special lottery) based on the acceptance of the game ball into the second special starting port;
Second special symbol variable control means (for example, main CPU 101) capable of performing variable display of the second special symbol and deriving the result of the second lottery;
When the variable display of the first special symbol or the second special symbol is performed and a special result (for example, a big hit) is derived, special game execution means (for example, the main CPU 101) for executing a special game advantageous to the player )When,
When a specific condition is established during the execution of the special game (entering the variable probability attacker), the game state after the special game is completed is changed to a specific game state (for example, high probability time saving a specific game state control means (for example, the main CPU 101) that controls the game state);
A first state (for example, electric sapo state) in which it is relatively easy to accept game balls into the first special start port, and a second state in which it is relatively difficult to accept game balls into the first special start port A state control means (for example, main CPU 101) that can control either state (for example, non-electric support state),
with
Expected value (e.g., ease of entry into probability variable attacker) that the specific condition is established during the execution of the special game is when the first lottery is performed and when the second lottery is performed configured differently,
When it is controlled by the state control means to the first state (for example, high-precision time-saving game state), it is relatively easy to accept the game ball into the first special start port, so that the first Acceptance of game balls to the 2 special start opening is more difficult than the first special start opening,
When the state control means is controlled to the second state (for example, high certainty non-time-saving gaming state), it is relatively difficult to accept the game ball into the first special start port, It is characterized in that it is constructed so that receiving a game ball into the second special starting port is easier than in the first state.

According to the gaming machine of (1) above, it is possible to change the probability of being controlled to a specific game state that increases the probability of deriving a special result without changing the shooting mode of the game ball toward the game area. It is possible to provide a variety of game characteristics.

(2) In the gaming machine described in (1) above,
The expected value for satisfying the specific condition during execution of the special game is higher when the second lottery is performed than when the first lottery is performed,
The state control means is
When the variable display of the special pattern is performed a specified number of times (for example, 24 times, 30 times, 36 times, 42 times, 48 times and 100 times) in the first state, the first state is shifted to the second state. It is characterized by having state transition control means capable of executing control.

According to the gaming machine of (2) above, when the variable display of the special symbol is performed a specified number of times in the first state in which the reception of the game ball to the second special starting port is more difficult than the first special starting port, the second A transition is made to a second state in which acceptance of game balls into the special starting port is easier than in the first state. That is, when the state is shifted from the first state to the second state, the second lottery is performed more frequently than in the first state. Since the expected value for establishing the specific condition during the execution of the special game is higher when the second lottery is performed than when the first lottery is performed, it is difficult to derive the special result in the first state. Even so, it does not discourage the player and rather enhances the player's interest.

According to the inventions of appendices 64-1 to 64-4, it is possible to provide a gaming machine with new playability.

[Other expansion examples, etc.]

All the inventions described in this embodiment and other embodiments can be applied to pachinko machines, game machines, slot machines, and all other gaming machines without departing from the gist of the invention. can.

In addition, each of the above-described embodiments, examples, and modifications, including the above appendices, are examples. It goes without saying that each configuration shown in each embodiment, each example, and each modification can be partially replaced or combined in other embodiments, other examples, and other modifications. stomach. That is, each component described in each embodiment, each example, and each modification can be arbitrarily combined with each other.

16 liquid crystal display 24 speaker 35 power switch 49 passage gate 101 main CPU
103 RWM (main RAM)
104 Sub-SPU
203 Work RAM
328 setting key 330 backup clear switch 440 second start opening 540 big winning opening 560 general winning opening 610 shutter 662 main button 664 select button 5400 small winning opening 6100 shutter for small winning

Claims (1)

a control means capable of executing control related to the progress of a game based on a set value related to the degree of advantage for a player, and having a storage means capable of storing information;
setting operation means used for operations related to the setting value;
a specific operation means used for an operation of erasing information stored in the storage means;
power supply means capable of supplying power to the control means when power is turned on;
an effect control means capable of controlling an image displayed in a predetermined effect area;
with
The control means is
When the specific operation means is turned on and the power is turned on while the setting operation means is turned on, the setting operation means can be controlled to a setting change state in which the set value can be changed. a state control means capable of controlling a setting confirmation state in which the setting value can be confirmed when the power is turned on while the specific operation means is turned off in a state in which is operated;
setting value determination means for determining the setting value to the changed setting value when the setting operation means is turned off after the setting value is changed in the setting change state;
When the power supply is stopped and then the power is turned on, the storage area of the storage means is checked, and if the storage area is normal, the initial value is set in the storage area that requires the initial value, and the effect is performed. Send a power failure recovery command to the control means,
When the power supply is stopped and then the power is turned on, the storage area of the storage means is checked, and if the storage area is not normal, the storage area is cleared and an initial value is required. Set an initial value in the storage area, send an initialization command to the effect control means,
When the power supply is stopped and then the power is turned on, if the specific operation means has been operated, clear processing of the storage area of the storage means is executed, and the initial value is stored in the storage area that requires the initial value. and send an initialization command to the effect control means,
The state control means is
When the power supply is stopped in the setting change state, even if the power is turned on without performing the ON operation of the setting operation means and/or the ON operation of the specific operation means, the setting change state is controlled. power can be restored in the setting change state when the power supply is stopped,
The production control means is
setting information storage means capable of storing setting change information related to the setting change state and setting confirmation information related to the setting confirmation state;
setting change information related to the setting change state and setting confirmation information related to the setting confirmation state can be simultaneously displayed in the rendering area as history information;
The set value determination means is
The power supply is stopped in the setting change state, and the setting operation means is controlled to the setting change state without ON operation, or the power is restored in the setting change state when the power supply is stopped. when the setting operation means is turned ON and then turned OFF, the set value can be fixed to the changed set value;
With respect to a specific display that can be displayed in the setting change state, a display that is at least partially common to the specific display can be displayed even in the game permitted state after the setting change state is terminated, and the display is A gaming machine characterized in that the display is terminated when a predetermined condition including a case where the performance control means receives a command relating to performance control from the control means is established in the game permission state.

Images